JP6718808B2 - Game table - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a ball game machine (pachinko machine), a spinning drum game machine (slot machine), an enclosed game machine, or a medal-less slot machine.

The conventional game table is provided with a production means (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP, 2008-200302, A

However, in the conventional gaming machine, there is room for improvement in the rendering means.
It is an object of the present invention to provide a game table having a characteristic as a production means.

The present invention is a game machine provided with a production means and a movable means, wherein the movable means is a means that may perform a first operation, and the first operation is an operation related to the production. (Hereinafter, referred to as “effect operation”), the movable means may perform the effect operation during the occurrence of the first error, and the effect means may perform the selected effect. The means is configured to be selected when a selection operation is performed during execution of the selection effect, and even if the first error occurs during execution of the selection effect, A production is selected when a selection operation is performed, and the movable means is a means provided on a game board, which is a gaming table.
Further, the present invention is a game machine provided with a rendering means and a movable means, wherein the movable means is a means that may perform a first action, and the first action is a rendering. (Hereinafter, referred to as "effect operation"), the movable means may perform the effect operation during the occurrence of the first error, and the effect means performs the selected effect. There is a certain means, during the execution of the selection effect, the effect is configured to be selected when a selection operation is performed, even if the first error occurs during the execution of the selection effect , The effect is configured to be selected when the selection operation is performed, if a second error occurs during the execution of the selection effect, the effect cannot be selected even if the selection operation is performed, The second error is a game machine characterized in that it is an error different from the first error.
Further, the present invention is a game machine provided with a rendering means and a movable means, wherein the movable means is a means that may perform a first action, and the first action is a rendering. (Hereinafter, referred to as "effect operation"), the movable means may perform the effect operation during the occurrence of the first error, and the effect means performs the selected effect. Is a means,
While the selection effect is being executed, the effect is configured to be selected when the selection operation is performed, and even if the first error occurs during the execution of the selection effect, the selection operation is performed. Is configured to be selected when the effect, when the second error occurs during the execution of the selection effect, the effect can not be selected even if the selection operation is performed, the second error, It is an error different from the first error, and when the second error occurs during the execution of the selection effect, the selection effect is interrupted, which is a gaming machine.
Further, the present invention is a game machine provided with a rendering means and a movable means, wherein the movable means is a means that may perform a first action, and the first action is a rendering. (Hereinafter, referred to as "effect operation"), the movable means may perform the effect operation during the occurrence of the first error, and the effect means performs the selected effect. There is a certain means, during the execution of the selection effect, the effect is configured to be selected when a selection operation is performed, even if the first error occurs during the execution of the selection effect , The production is selected when the selection operation is performed, the operation device is provided, and the movable unit is operated when the operation device is operated during a period in which the operation of the operation device is valid. The production operation may be performed by means, and even if the first error is occurring, the movement is possible when the operation means is operated during a period during which the operation of the operation means is valid. There is a case where the effect operation by means is performed, which is a gaming table.
Further, the present invention is a game machine provided with a rendering means and a movable means, wherein the movable means is a means that may perform a first action, and the first action is a rendering. (Hereinafter, referred to as "effect operation"), the movable means may perform the effect operation during the occurrence of the first error, and the effect means performs the selected effect. There is a certain means, during the execution of the selection effect, the effect is configured to be selected when a selection operation is performed, even if the first error occurs during the execution of the selection effect , The effect is configured to be selected when the selection operation is performed, the movable means is a means that may perform a second operation, and the second operation is that the power is turned on. In the gaming machine, the second operation is continued even if the first error occurs when the second operation is performed. is there.
Further, the present invention is a game machine provided with a rendering means and a movable means, wherein the movable means is a means that may perform a first action, and the first action is a rendering. (Hereinafter, referred to as "effect operation"), the movable means may perform the effect operation during the occurrence of the first error, and the effect means performs the selected effect. Is a means,
While the selection effect is being executed, the effect is configured to be selected when the selection operation is performed, and even if the first error occurs during the execution of the selection effect, the selection operation is performed. The movable means is a means that may perform a third motion, and the third motion is determined that the movable means is not in the initial position. And the third operation is continued even if the first error occurs when the third operation is being performed. It is a game table.
Further, the present invention is a game machine provided with a rendering means and a movable means, wherein the movable means is a means that may perform a first action, and the first action is a rendering. (Hereinafter, referred to as "effect operation"), the movable means may perform the effect operation during the occurrence of the first error, and the effect means performs the selected effect. There is a certain means, during the execution of the selection effect, the effect is configured to be selected when a selection operation is performed, even if the first error occurs during the execution of the selection effect , The effect is selected when the selection operation is performed, and the effect is selected when the selection operation is performed even if a third error occurs during execution of the selection effect. And the third error is an error indicating that there is an abnormality in the movable means, and is a gaming machine characterized by the above.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming table having a characteristic of rendering means.

It is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment as seen from the front side (player side). It is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the back side. It is a schematic front view of the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 as seen from the front. 3 is a circuit block diagram of a control unit of the pachinko machine 100. FIG. It is an example of a display pattern of the pachinko machine 100, (a) shows an example of a stop display pattern of special figure 1, (b) shows an example of a stop display pattern of special figure 2, (c) is a decorative pattern An example is shown, (d) is a figure which shows an example of the stop display design of a general figure. It is a flow chart which shows a flow of main control part main processing. It is a flow chart which shows the flow of main control part timer interruption processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a special figure prefetching process. It is a figure which shows an example of the pre-reading result storage part for special figures 1 and special figures 2. It is a figure explaining the content of the hit/miss determination table. It is a figure explaining the content of the special figure determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 1st sub-control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100, (a) is a flowchart of a 1st sub-control part main process, (b) is a 1st sub-control part command reception interruption. It is a flowchart of a process and (c) is a flowchart of a 1st sub-control part timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 2nd sub control part 500 of the pachinko machine 100, (a) is a flowchart of a 2nd sub control part main process, (b) is a 2nd sub control part command reception interruption. It is a flowchart of a process, (c) is a flowchart of a 2nd sub control part timer interruption process, (d) is a flowchart of a 2nd sub control part image control process. (A) is a figure explaining the 1st example of composition of production device 206, and (b) is a figure explaining the 2nd example of composition of production device 206. It is a figure explaining an example of production which can be applied in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect centering on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine of this embodiment in stages. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 16 in steps. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 17 in steps. It is a figure which shows in steps about another example of the production shown in FIG. It is a figure showing an example of a timer notice production in steps. It is a figure which shows other examples of timer notice production in steps. It is a figure which shows other examples of timer notice production in steps. It is a figure which shows other examples of timer notice production in steps. It is a figure which shows other examples of timer notice production in steps. It is a figure which shows other examples of timer notice production in steps. It is a figure which shows other examples of timer notice production in steps. It is a figure which shows other examples of timer notice production in steps. It is a figure which shows other examples of timer notice production in steps. It is a figure showing an example of the production using a chance up meter in steps. It is a figure showing another example of the production using a chance up meter in steps. It is a figure showing another example of the production using a chance up meter in steps. It is a figure showing another example of the production using a chance up meter in steps. It is a figure showing another example of the production using a chance up meter in steps. It is a figure showing another example of the production using a chance up meter in steps. It is a figure showing another example of the production using a chance up meter in steps. It is a figure showing another example of the production using a chance up meter in steps. It is a figure showing another example of the production using a chance up meter in steps. It is a figure explaining the aspect of the change of the remaining time display meter in button production. It is a figure showing other examples of button production in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the production step by step centering on the decorative pattern display device of the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is the figure which shows step by step concerning the other production example of timer announcement production. It is the figure which shows step by step concerning the other production example of timer announcement production. It is the figure which shows step by step concerning the other production example of timer announcement production. It is the figure which shows step by step concerning the other production example of timer announcement production. It is the figure which shows step by step concerning the other production example of timer announcement production. It is the figure which shows step by step concerning the other production example of timer announcement production. It is the figure which shows step by step concerning the other production example of timer announcement production. It is the figure which shows step by step concerning the other production example of timer announcement production. (A) is a flowchart of the main controller power-on process, (b) is a flowchart of the return activation process, and (c) is a flowchart of the initial activation process. It is a flowchart of a main control unit main loop process. 7 is a flowchart of main controller timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of a special figure state update process. (A) is a flow chart of special figure related lottery processing, and (b) is a flow chart of special figure per lottery processing. It is a flowchart of the process during symbol fluctuation. It is a flowchart of a special figure display confirmation weight process. (A) is a flowchart of the hit start weight process, and (b) is a flowchart of the special electric power combination releasing process. It is a flowchart of a special electric wire operation process. It is a flowchart of special electric power combination control processing. (A) is a figure explaining the content of a special electricity combination operation pattern data table, (b) is a figure explaining the content of a special electricity combination operation data table. It is a flowchart of a special electric vehicle remaining ball detection processing. It is a flowchart of a special electric power operation end processing. It is a flowchart of a hit end display weight process. It is a figure which shows the content of the customization which can be performed with the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment. It is a transition diagram of an option menu screen in a state where the member service is not used. It is a figure which shows an example which calls an option menu screen, a volume adjustment window, and a brightness adjustment window from a demo screen. FIG. 66 is a view illustrating a sequel to the example illustrated in FIG. 65. FIG. 67 is a view illustrating a sequel to the example illustrated in FIG. 66. FIG. 68 is a view illustrating a sequel to the example illustrated in FIG. 67. It is a figure which shows the modification of the example demonstrated using FIG. It is a figure which shows the other modification. (1) is a transition diagram of the top menu screen, and (2) is a transition diagram of the model customization screen. It is a transition diagram of a Daitomo screen. It is a figure which shows a top menu screen and a Daitomo screen. It is a figure which shows a model customization screen. It is the figure which shows one example of the production which uses the fluctuation icon. It is a figure which shows the modification of the example shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the other modification of the example shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of the combination of the change production of the hold icon and the change production of the variable icon by the navigation character YM. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 78, a modification, etc. It is the figure which shows the production example where the reservation framework becomes temporarily invisible. It is a diagram showing an example of an effect in which a plurality of navigation characters YM appear in the effect icon display area DIS. It is a figure which shows the modification etc. which are shown in FIG. An example of an effect in which an effect of a button holding icon is entwined with the navigation character YM is shown. It is a figure which shows the example which has the period when the navigation character YM is not displayed. It is a figure which shows the example which has the period when the navigation character YM is not displayed. It is an example in which a maximum of eight hold icons are displayed. An example of an effect in which a navigation character YM is entwined with a decorative pattern of a general figure is shown. It is a figure which shows the example which a change notice display is standby-displayed. It is the figure which shows the production example which uses the reservation frame which differs from the reservation frame which is explained so far. It is a figure which shows the example which the icon I1 of the treasure box which has been used as an icon of notification of change until now appears as a hold icon. An example of an effect in which a navigation effect YM is entwined with a meter effect is shown. It is a figure which shows the modification of the example demonstrated using FIG. It is a figure which shows another modification of the example demonstrated using FIG. An example of effect in which a telop effect is entwined with the navigation character YM is shown. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect|action which entwined the navigation character YM by the effect|production apparatus 206 shown in FIG.14(b). It is a figure which shows an example of the other effect|action which entwined the navigation character YM by the effect|action apparatus 206 shown in FIG.14(b). It is a figure which shows an example of further another effect|action which entwined the navigation character YM by the effect|action apparatus 206 shown in FIG.14(b). It is a figure which shows an example of the production|operation which entwined the navigation character YM by the production|generation apparatus 206 in which the 2nd display device was provided under the decorative symbol display device 208 (1st display device). It is a figure showing an example when other productions are performed during execution of the productions selected by the player. It is a figure which shows the modification of the example shown in FIG. 6 is a table summarizing music that can be output from the speaker 120. FIG. 103 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the music selection described with reference to FIG. 101 is performed. FIG. 103 is a view illustrating a sequel to the example illustrated in FIG. 102. It is the figure which shows one example of the production due to production device 206 which is shown in figure 14(b). FIG. 105 is a view illustrating a sequel to the example illustrated in FIG. 104. It is a figure which shows the example in which the reservation frame which the player selected is changed. It is a figure which shows the modification etc. of the example shown in FIG. It is the figure which shows the production example in the pachinko machine which is set to automatic button mode. It is a figure which shows the continuation etc. of the example shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the modification of the example shown in FIG. FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating an overlapping relationship between a display of a ball removal notification that is notified when a plate full tank error occurs and each of the other displays of the brightness adjustment window BW. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the ball-out notification. It is a figure which shows the example in which several types of error displays are displayed. 6 is a diagram showing an example of an error that can be detected by the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100. FIG. It is a figure showing an example of an error which can be detected by payout control section 600 of pachinko machine 100. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of a notification mode of error notification by the pachinko machine 100. It is a figure. It is a figure showing various notice icons and various notice displays. It is a figure which shows the icon for mini games. It is a figure which shows a hold icon and a change icon. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing, step by step, an example in which the notice icon is stocked by winning in the mini game B, and the notice display is displayed by using the stocked notice icon to change the display mode of the variable icon. It is the figure which shows the continuation of the production example which is shown in Figure 120 step by step, and the figure which shows the deformation example of that production example. It is a figure showing the 3rd modification-the 6th modification of the example of production of Drawing 120 (a1)-Drawing 121 (a40). It is a figure showing the 7th modification-10th modification of the example of production of Drawing 120 (a1)-Drawing 121 (a40). It is a figure which shows the other modification of the production example of FIG. 120 (a1)-FIG. 121 (a40). A plurality of notice icons are stocked by winning in the mini game B, and a notice display is displayed by using the plurality of notice icons that are stocked, and the display mode of the variable icons is changed step by step. It is a figure. It is a figure which shows the modification of the example of an effect shown in FIG. 125, and the example of an effect of the mini game A of Yoshimune treasure acquisition notice. It is a figure showing the continuation of the example of production of mini-game A of the announcement of Yoshimune treasure step by step. It is a figure which shows the middle of the 1st modification of the production example of FIG. 126 (1)-127 (38)-the 3rd modification. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the 3rd modification of the production example of FIGS. 126 (1) to 127 (38), and the middle of the 4th to 5th modifications. It is a figure showing the continuation of the 5th modification of the example of production of Drawing 126 (u1)-Figure 127 (e 38), and the example of production in which stocked notice icon YI is promoted. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of effect|action which the stocked notice icon YI is promoted, and the modification of the example of effect. It is a figure showing in stages an example of an effect in which a notice display YH of a button appears from a notice icon YI. It is the figure which shows the production example where the execution frequency of button production is stocked gradually. It is the figure which shows the continuation of the production example where the execution frequency of button production is stocked, and other production examples. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect|action which the notice display YH emitted from the notice icon YI can be known before the release. It is a figure which shows in stages an example of production in which one stocked notice icon is used multiple times. It is a figure showing a continuation of an example in which a plurality of the same type of notice display YH are released from the same stocked notice icon YI, and other effect examples. It is a figure which shows an example in which a plurality of notice icons YI were stocked step by step. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example in which the notice icon YI released from the notice icon YI is used a plurality of times in a state where the notice icon YI is known before the release. It is the figure which shows the production example and the like which continues from Figure 139. It is a figure showing the continuation of the example in which a plurality of notice icons YI are stocked. It is a figure showing an example of a roulette effect for a notice icon stock in steps. It is a diagram showing another effect using the roulette RLT for advance notice icon stock, and an example of effect accompanied by button operation. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example in which the display mode of the “button” notice icon YI changes in accordance with a button operation, and another example. It is a figure showing the example of production which continues from Drawing 144, and the example which displays the same notice icon in a plurality of modes. It is a figure which shows the example of production etc. by the structure which the display means is arrange|positioned under the 1st decorative symbol display device 208L. It is the figure which shows the production example which uses the 2nd decorative design display 208M and the 3rd decorative design display 208N. It is a figure showing in stages an example of an effect using the display of the icon change notice shown in Drawing 119 (b). It is a figure showing a modification of the example of an effect shown in Drawing 148. It is a diagram showing a modified example such as the effect example shown in FIG. It is a diagram showing a modified example such as the effect example shown in FIG. It is a figure showing the continuation of the example in which the silhouette notice of the hold icon is being executed, and other effect examples. FIG. 9 is a diagram showing an example in which the icon change notice display itself is promoted while failing to be promoted in the middle of a plurality of fluctuations. It is a figure showing the continuation of the example in which the display itself of the icon change notice is promoted via the meter effect, and other effect examples. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example using the display of the icon change notice not shown in FIG. 119(b), and other effect examples. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect which combined the display of a certain type of hold icon and an icon change notice. It is a figure which shows the other production example using the icon of a bomber system as a display of an icon change notice. It is a figure which shows the example etc. of various notices regarding the display of an icon change notice. It is a figure which shows the example of a combination of the 1st decorative symbol display device 208L and another display means. It is the figure which shows the production example which uses the 2nd decorative design display 208M and the 3rd decorative design display 208N. It is a figure which roughly shows seven example productions in which various icons and displays are used. It is the figure which showed an example of the production using a chance up meter in steps. It is the figure which showed an example of the production using a chance up meter in steps. It is the figure which showed an example of the display starting mode of the chance up meter preparation display MTY in steps. It is the figure which showed an example of the display starting mode of the chance up meter preparation display MTY in steps. It is a figure which shows the modification of the display mode of the chance up meter preparation display MTY. It is a figure which shows the modification of the display mode of a chance up meter preparation display. It is a figure which shows the modification of the display mode of a chance up meter preparation display. It is a figure which shows the modification of the display mode of a chance up meter preparation display. It is a figure which shows a mode that the chance up meter production is performed during super reach production. It is a diagram showing a state in which another pattern of the chance up meter effect is performed during the super reach effect. It is a figure explaining an example of the change production of the display mode of a chance up meter preparation display. It is a figure explaining another pattern of the change production of the display mode of a chance up meter preparation display. It is a figure explaining another pattern of the change production of the display mode of a chance up meter preparation display. It is a figure which shows a mode that a chance up meter ranks up during production by a chance up meter. It is a figure explaining the display mode of the chance up meter which raised rank. It is a figure explaining another pattern of rank up of a chance up meter. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a state in which the upgraded opportunity-up meter preparation display MTY is continuously displayed in a ranked-up display mode even when switched to the opportunity-up meter CMT. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect which alerts that a chance up meter preparation display is displayed. It is a figure which shows the other example of an effect which alerts that a chance up meter preparation display is displayed. It is a figure showing an example of an effect that a chance up notice is given at a check point not shown in the chance up meter. It is a figure showing in stages about another example of production using a chance up meter. It is a figure showing about another pattern of the production using a chance up meter. It is a figure shown about the modification of the production using the chance up meter shown in Drawing 183. It is a figure shown about another production pattern of production using the chance up meter shown in Drawing 183. It is the figure which showed an example of the pre-reading announcement using a chance up meter preparation display in stages. It is a figure explaining another display pattern of a chance up meter. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect of a chance up meter performed in another super reach. It is a figure explaining the modification of the production by a chance up meter. It is a figure explaining another production pattern of production by a chance up meter. It is a figure explaining an example of the production by the chance up meter performed in a probability change state. It is a figure explaining the example which gives a notice of the effect by a chance up meter on a display device other than a decorative symbol display device. It is the figure which shows the production example which uses the 2nd decorative design display 208M and the 3rd decorative design display 208N. It is the outline front view which saw the game board from the front. 6 is a circuit block diagram of a control unit. (A) It shows an example of a stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1. (B) It shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 2. (C) shows an example of a stop symbol aspect of a decorative symbol. (D) It is an example of a stop display symbol of a universal figure. It is the figure which showed an example of the display in the decorative symbol display device during one game in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the display in the decorative symbol display device during one game in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the display in the decorative symbol display device during one game in time series. It is the outline front view which saw the game board from the front. (A) It shows an example of a stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1. (B) It shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 2. (C) shows an example of a stop symbol aspect of a decorative symbol. (D) It is an example of a stop display symbol of a universal figure. (E) It shows an example of a display mode of the fourth symbol. It is a figure showing an example of a production display in a time series in a Pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows a flow of main control part main processing. It is a flow chart which shows the flow of subcommand transmission processing. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a subcommand transmission process. (B) is a timing chart of subcommand transmission. It is a flow chart which shows the flow of main control part timer interruption processing. It is a figure which illustrates the state in which the pre-reading result was memorize|stored in the pre-reading result storage part of the pachinko machine concerning one embodiment of this invention. (A) illustrates a state in which the prefetch result is stored in the special figure 1 preread result storage unit, and (b) illustrates a state in which the prefetch result storage unit is stored in the special figure 2 preread result storage unit. And (c) illustrates the state of the prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 in the power support. It is a figure which illustrates the state in which the pre-reading result was memorize|stored in the pre-reading result storage part of the pachinko machine concerning other embodiment of this invention. (A) illustrates a state in which the prefetch result is stored in the special figure 1 preread result storage unit, and (b) illustrates a state in which the prefetch result storage unit is stored in the special figure 2 preread result storage unit. And (c) illustrates the state of the prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 in the power support. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a probability variation area|region related setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a probability variation area|region related setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a special figure state update process. It is a flow chart which shows a flow of probability variation field control processing. It is a flow chart which shows the flow of special drawing relation lottery processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the table for determination of hit/miss for a special figure. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol determination table of a special figure. (A) illustrates the special figure 1 symbol determination table, (b) illustrates the special figure 2 symbol determination table. It is the flowchart which shows the flow of processing during the design fluctuation. It is a flow chart which shows the flow of special figure display fixed weight processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a hit start display weight process. It is a flow chart which shows the flow of special electric power combination opening processing. It is a flow chart which shows a flow of special electric power combination operation processing. It is a flow chart which shows a flow of special electric power combination control processing. It is an example of (a-1) to (a-3) special electricity combination operation pattern data. It is an example of (b-1)-(b-3) special electricity combination operation data. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a special electric power remaining ball detection process. It is a flow chart which shows the flow of special electricity combination operation end processing. It is a flow chart which shows the flow of hit end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a device monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of an external output signal management process. It is a figure showing the signal number of an external terminal board signal, a signal name, and output conditions. 6 is a timing chart related to a first error (magnetic field (radio wave) detection error) related to the main control unit 300 and the like. It is the figure which showed one example of the effect display which notifies the magnetic field detection error in the decorative design display device 208 in time series. (A) is an example of a timing chart in the case where the error is canceled in the middle of the transmission cycle T, and FIG. 231(b) shows that the magnetic detection error and the error relating to the other main control unit 300 and the like overlap. It is an example of a timing chart in the case of. It is an example of a timing chart in the case where a magnetic detection error and an error relating to other payouts occur in duplicate. It is the figure which showed an example of the effect display which notifies a magnetic field detection error and a door opening error in decorative design display device 208 in a time series. (A) is an example of a timing chart related to the second error relating to the main control unit 300 and the like, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the effect display corresponding to (a) in the same time series. .. (A) is an example of a timing chart related to the first error and the second error related to the main control unit 300, etc., (b) is an example of the effect display corresponding to the same figure (a) It is a figure shown in a time series. (A) is an example of a timing chart related to the first error and the second error relating to the main control unit 300, etc., (b) is an example of the effect display corresponding to the same figure (a) It is a figure shown in a time series. It is an example of a timing chart when a special winning opening winning excess error occurs during the big hit game. It is the figure which shows one example of the production display which notifies the special winning opening winning excess error in decorative design display device 208 in time series. It is a figure which shows the modification of the effect display shown in FIG. 238. It is a figure which shows the modification of the effect display during the notification period of the special winning opening winning excess error shown in FIG. 238 and FIG. 239. It is a figure which shows the modification of the production|presentation display during the notification of the special winning opening winning excess error corresponding to FIG. 238(10)-FIG. It is the figure which shows the other production example during the information period of the special winning a prize excess error. It is the figure which shows the other production example during the information period of the special winning a prize excess error. It is a figure showing an example of the effect display in decoration design display device 208 in time series, when a special winning opening winning excess error occurs. It is a figure showing an example of the effect display in decoration design display device 208 in time series, when a special winning opening winning excess error occurs. It is a figure showing an example of the effect display in decoration design display device 208 in time series, when a special winning opening winning excess error occurs. It is an example of a timing chart when a special winning opening winning error occurs. It is an example of a timing chart when a special winning opening winning error occurs. It is the description of the notation common to the effect display of the embodiment. It is a figure which shows the display mode (color) of the production|presentation display in the production|presentation apparatus 206, and the correspondence of a description. It is an example of a timing chart when a special winning opening winning excess error occurs in the present embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the flow of special electric power remaining ball detection processing of this embodiment. It is the figure which shows one example of the production in production device 206 of this execution form in time series. It is the figure which shows one example of the production in production device 206 of this execution form in time series. It is the figure which shows one example of the production in production device 206 of this execution form in time series. It is the figure which shows one example of the production in production device 206 of this execution form in time series. It is the figure which shows one example of the production in production device 206 of this execution form in time series. It is the figure which shows one example of the production in production device 206 of this execution form in time series. It is the figure which shows one example of the production in production device 206 of this execution form in time series. It is the figure which shows one example of the production in production device 206 of this execution form in time series. It is the figure which shows one example of the production in production device 206 of this execution form in time series. It is the figure which shows one example of the production in production device 206 of this execution form in time series. It is the figure which shows one example of the production in production device 206 of this execution form in time series. It is the figure which shows one example of the production in production device 206 of this execution form in time series. It is the figure which shows one example of the production in production device 206 of this execution form in time series. It is the figure which shows one example of the production in production device 206 of this execution form in time series. It is the figure which shows one example of the production in production device 206 of this execution form in time series. 1 is a front view of an enclosed pachinko machine to which the present invention can be applied. It is an external perspective view of the slot machine applicable to the present invention as seen from the front side (player side). It is a figure which shows the game table by the modification of this invention, (a) shows the supporting machine 2000, (b) shows the mobile telephone 3000 provided with the memory|storage part which memorize|stores the electronic data which implement|achieves this invention. , (C) shows a portable game machine 4000 provided with a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention, and (d) shows a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention. A home video game machine 5000 is shown, and (e) shows a data server 6000 that stores electronic data that realizes the present invention.

Hereinafter, a game table according to the present invention (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine 100 or a spinning machine such as a slot machine) will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.
<Overall structure>

First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. The figure is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side).

The pachinko machine 100 is a game table that allows a player to obtain a profit when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a ball storage tray door 108, and a launch. The device 110 and the game board 200 are provided on the front surface (player side) thereof.

The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (island equipment or the like) provided in a game machine installation business store. A speaker 120 (a bass speaker that outputs bass) is attached to the outer frame 102, and when the main body 104 is housed in the outer frame 102, the speaker is electrically connected (the main body 104 and the outer frame 102). Is provided with a pair of floating connectors, and when the main body 104 is housed in the outer frame 102, the connector of the main body 104 and the connector of the outer frame 102 are connected to each other), and the speaker 120 can output sound. Become.

The main body 104 is a door member that is provided inside the outer frame 102, has a locking function, and is a vertically rectangular gaming machine basic body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge 112. .. Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space portion 114 inside. A clerk of a store (gaming store) in which the pachinko machine 100 is installed can open and close the main body 104, and a main body open sensor (inner frame open sensor) that detects that the main body 104 is opened is provided. ing.

The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 100, via a hinge 112 so as to have a locking function and to be opened and closed. Is a door member having an opening 116. A clerk of the game shop can also open and close the front frame door 106, and a front frame door sensor 109 that detects that the front frame door 106 has been opened is also provided. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin in the opening 116, and a speaker 120 (high-pitched speaker that outputs high sound) and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. Has been. The rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200 define a space in which the game area 124 is provided. In addition, in the present embodiment, a device using a light source as an LED is also referred to as a lamp, and a light emitting device such as a fluorescent lamp or a cold cathode tube may be referred to as a lamp, and a device emitting light is an example of a light emitting unit. Equivalent to.

The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member that is attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a locking function and be openable and closable. The door 108 with a ball storage dish is opened by pressing an opening lever (not shown) that can be operated with the front frame door 106 opened. In addition, you may provide the door sensor with a ball storage dish which detects that the door 108 with a ball storage dish opened. The door 108 with a ball storage plate is provided with a door-side ball passage unit capable of storing a plurality of game balls (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “ball”) and guiding the game balls to the launch device 110. An upper plate 126, a lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, and a ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by a player's operation. , A ball discharge lever 132 for discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 into a game ball collection container (commonly known as a dollar box) by the operation of the player, and a game guided to the launching device 110 by the operation of the player. A ball firing handle 134 that shoots the ball to the game area 124 of the game board, an effect button 136 (chance button 136) that changes the effect mode of various effect devices 206 (see FIG. 3) by the operation of the player, and an effect button. Chance button lamp 138 which is built in 136 (chance button 136) and makes the effect button 136 (chance button 136) emit light, and a ball lending for giving a ball lending instruction to a card unit (CR unit) installed in a game shop. An operation button 140, a return operation button 142 for instructing the card unit to return the player's balance, and a ball lending display unit (not shown) for displaying the player's balance and the state of the card unit. Further, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is provided with a lower plate full tank detection sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower plate 128 has been filled with a game ball. Further, an operation key unit 137 is also provided. The operation key unit 137 is provided with up and down keys of an up key and a down key, and left and right keys of a left key and a right key as a cross key, and an enter key at the center of the cross key. There is. A cancel key is also arranged below the cross key on the right side. Note that the pachinko machine 100 does not include the door 108 with a ball storage tray, and the front frame door 106 has an upper tray 126, a lower tray 128, a ball removal button 130, a ball ejection lever 132, a ball firing handle 134, a chance button 136, a chance button. All or a part of the lamp 138, the ball lending operation button 140, the return operation button 142, the ball lending display section, the lower plate full tank detection sensor, and the operation key unit 137 may be provided.

The front frame door 106 and the main body 104 are connected by a harness (not shown), and the front frame door 106 (which may include the ball storage tray door 108) is open to the main body 104. Also, if the various control circuits of the front frame door 106 and the various control circuits of the main body 104 are connected by the harness, the rendering means (in this example, the speaker 120, the frame lamp 122, and the chance) provided on the front frame door 106. Button lamp 138. Production by the production movable body if the front frame door 106 is provided), display on the ball lending display section, chance button 136, ball lending operation button 140, return operation button 142 and The operation key unit 137 is operated, and the lower tray full tank detection sensor can be detected.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the power supply board case 184 accommodating the power supply board 182 configuring the power supply control unit 660 described later is attached to the main body 104, the outer frame 102, the front frame door 106 (with a ball storage tray). The door 108 may be included) and the game board 200 are configured such that a power supply voltage is supplied from the main body 104.

The launching device 110 is attached to the lower part of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. , Is provided. This launching device 110 sends a game ball to the game area 124 of the game board at every elapse of a predetermined firing period (for example, 0.6 seconds) while the player continuously operates the ball firing handle 134. It is fired toward and corresponds to an example of a firing means. It should be noted that a right hit button capable of maximizing the firing intensity by pressing the ball firing handle 134 in the operated state may be provided. The ball firing handle 134 is a firing stop switch (not shown) that invalidates the firing (emission) of the game ball accompanying the operation of the ball firing handle 134, and that the player touches the ball firing handle 134. And a touch sensor capable of detecting. It should be noted that a right hit button capable of maximizing the firing intensity by pressing the ball firing handle 134 in the operated state may be provided. Further, when the touch sensor detects that the ball firing handle 134 is in the operated state from the non-operated state during the display of the demo screen, a dedicated effect may be performed. .. For example, the effect display by the display unit, the effect sound by the sound output unit, the light emission effect by various decorative LEDs and the light guide plate, and the effect movable body (provided on the game board or the frame) can be mentioned. Rendering may be performed by four types of rendering means, or may be performed by one or more types of rendering means. Further, even if the same type of effect means, there may be an effect means for performing the exclusive effect and an effect means for not performing the exclusive effect. (For example, the production movable body of the frame performs a dedicated production, but the production movable body of the game board does not perform a dedicated production, or the production movable body A of the game board performs a dedicated production, but the production movable body B of the game board. There is no special effect, etc. This example can be applied to other effect means.)

The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104. In FIG. 1, the specific structure of the game area 124 is not shown, and the specific structure is shown in FIG.
FIG. 2 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 1 viewed from the back side.

At the top of the back of the pachinko machine 100, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls having an opening opening upward, and a ball tank 150 located below the ball tank 150 and at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a ball falling through the formed communication hole to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side in rear view.

The payout device 152 is made of a tubular member, and has a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside thereof. The dispensing device 152 is provided in the main body 104, is detachable from the main body 104, and is connected to the downstream end of the tank rail 154 when mounted at a predetermined position.

The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor, and temporarily retains the game ball that has passed through the tank rail 154 and flowed into the payout device 152, and drives the payout motor to rotate a predetermined angle. Thus, the game balls that have temporarily stayed are delivered one by one below the payout device 152. That is, the payout device 152 is a kind of ball feeding device that gives a driving force to the game ball and conveys the game ball.

The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either one of a high signal and a low signal, when the game ball is not passing, Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the payout control unit 600. The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) to reach the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 is provided with a predetermined amount. Based on the satisfaction of the condition, a game value (gaming ball) of an amount according to the grant condition is granted (paid out) to the player.

On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 for accommodating a main board 156 which constitutes the main control section 300 (see FIG. 4) for performing control processing of the whole game, and processing information generated by the main control section 300 are displayed. Based on the processing information generated by the first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-board 400 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing related to the effect based on the processing information generated by the first sub-board 400. The second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the second sub-control section 500 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing relating to the effect, and the payout control section 600 that performs control processing related to the payout of gaming balls ( (See FIG. 4) and a payout board case 172 that houses a payout board 170 having an error canceling switch 168 that cancels an error by an operation of a game shop staff, a launch control unit 630 that performs control processing related to launching a game ball (FIG. 4). (Refer to FIG. 4) and a power supply control unit 660 (see FIG. 4) that supplies power to various electric amusement machines, and a power switch that turns the power on and off by the operation of a game shop clerk. 178 and a power supply board case 184 that houses a power supply board 182 including a RAM clear switch 180 that outputs a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300 by being operated when the power is turned on, and signals of the payout control unit 600 and the card unit. A CR interface unit 186 for transmitting and receiving is provided. The main board case 158 containing the main board 156, the first sub-board case 162 containing the first sub-board 160, and the second sub-board case 166 containing the second sub-board 164 are the game board 200. A power supply provided on the back surface of the power supply including a payout board case 172 containing a payout board 170 equipped with an error release switch 168, a launch board case 176 containing a launch board 174, a power switch 178 and a RAM clear switch 180. A power supply board case 184 for housing the board 182 and a CR interface section 186 are provided in the main body 104.
FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front.

An outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged on the game board 200, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined and formed.

A rendering device 206 is arranged in the approximate center of the game area 124. In this production device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 is arranged in the approximate center, and around it, a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, and ordinary The symbol reserve lamp 216, the first special symbol reserve lamp 218, the second special symbol reserve lamp 220, and the high-precision middle lamp 222 are arranged. In addition, hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as a "universal symbol", and one or more of the special symbol, the first special symbol, and the second special symbol may be referred to as a "special symbol".

The rendering device 206 operates the rendering movable body 224 to perform rendering, which will be described in detail later.

The decorative pattern display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative patterns and effects, and is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display) in the present embodiment. This decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display regions of a left symbol display region 208a, a middle symbol display region 208b, a right symbol display region 208c and an effect display region 208d, and a left symbol display region 208a and a middle symbol display region 208b. And the right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for effect. Further, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative symbol display device 208, it is not limited to the liquid crystal display device as long as it is configured to be able to display various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display device. Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display device, a reel (drum) type display device, a leaf type display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

The general figure display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general figure, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in the present embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special figure, and are configured by 7-segment LEDs in this embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are predetermined symbol display means. The decorative design displayed on the decorative design display device 208 is a design representing the design displayed on the first special design display device 212 or the second special design display device 214 in an enhanced form. The display device 208 may also be a predetermined symbol display means.

The universal figure holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of predetermined first variable games (detailed variable games which will be described later in detail) that are on hold, and in the present embodiment, a predetermined number of variable figure games are held. It is possible to hold up to (for example, four).

The 1st special figure reservation lamp 218 and the 2nd special figure reservation lamp 220 are the lamps for showing the number of the predetermined 2nd fluctuation game which has been reserved (the special figure fluctuation game which details are mentioned later), this execution In the form, it is possible to suspend the special figure variation game up to a predetermined number (for example, four, eight for the first special figure and the second special figure combined). The term "hold" here means to hold the start of various determination processes (lottery process, etc.) based on start information described later.

The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp (notifying means) for making a notification indicating the current symbol control state. This high-accuracy middle lamp 222 is configured to give a notification indicating the current symbol control state from the time the power is turned on to the start of the big hit game, and thereafter, not to notify the current symbol control state. There is. In the symbol control state, when the power is turned on again, the symbol control state immediately before the power is cut off is restored. This symbol control state will be described later, but as the symbol control state here, it may be any state of a normal state, a time saving state (electric support state), and a probability variation state, and a state with a special symbol probability variation and It may be one of the states in which there is no change in the special figure.

In the present specification, the term "control state" is used to describe the state inside the gaming table (pachinko machine 100), but the term "control state" includes the concept of a so-called game state.

In addition, a general winning opening 226, a universal drawing starting opening 228, a first special drawing starting opening 230, a second special drawing starting opening 232, and a variable winning opening 234 are arranged around the rendering device 206. ing.

In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning openings 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects the winning of the general winning openings 226 (in the general winning openings 226). When the prize is won), the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 2 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 shown in FIG. 1 as prize balls. The ball discharged to the upper plate 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and with these configurations, the prize ball is paid out to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side. In the present embodiment, the balls to be paid out to the player may be referred to as "prize balls" and the balls to be lent to the player may be referred to as "ball rentals" in consideration of the prize. And call it "ball (gaming ball)".

The universal figure starting port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through-chucker for determining whether or not the ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124, and in the present embodiment, the left side of the game board 200. One is installed in each. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the universal starting port 228 is not discharged to the game island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the universal figure starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts the universal figure variation game by the universal figure display device 210.

In the present embodiment, only one first special figure starting port 230 is provided in the center of the game board 200. The first special figure starting port 230 is a first starting region in which the size of the entrance into which the game ball enters does not change. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects the ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 2 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 3) of balls are used as prize balls to serve as the prize plate. Along with discharging to 126, the special figure variation game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball entering the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. The first special figure starting port 230 is one of starting regions, and corresponds to an example of a fixed starting region in which the size of itself does not change.

In the present embodiment, only one second special figure starting port 232 is arranged below the first special figure starting port 230. A pair of blade members 2321 that can be opened and closed by a solenoid are provided in the vicinity of the second special figure starting port 232, and a combination of the pair of blade members 2321 and the second special figure starting port 232. It corresponds to a variable starting means, and is generally called an electric tulip (den Chu). The pair of blade members 2321 are members that change the difficulty level of winning the prize in the second special figure starting port 232. That is, it is impossible to enter the second special figure starting port 232 with the pair of blade members 2321 closed, and the closed state of the pair of blade members 2321 is an opening/closing mode in which winning is difficult. On the other hand, when the universal figure variation game is won and the universal figure display device 210 hits and displays the symbol as a stop, the pair of blade members 2321 are opened and closed at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times to the second special figure starting port 232. The ball can be entered (the prize winning state is easy), and the open state in which the pair of blade members 2321 is open is the state where the winning is easy. That is, the second special figure starting port 232 has either a small size (corresponding to the first size) or a large size (corresponding to the second size) of the size of the entrance (the entrance of the game ball). It is a variable starting area in which the easiness of entering a game ball is variable and changes from one size to the other size, and corresponds to an example of a second starting area. The size of this large size is larger than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230. With the pair of blade members 2321 open, of the game balls that enter the game area 124, the second ball that is a variable starting area is more than the game ball that enters the first special figure starting port 230 that is a fixed starting area. There are more game balls entering the starting port 232. On the other hand, the size of the small size is smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230 or less than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, four) balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball entering the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. In addition, although two of the first special figure starting port 230 and the second special figure starting port 232 are provided in the present embodiment, three starting ports may be provided. Here, when there are three starting ports, two first special figure starting ports may be provided and one second special figure starting port may be provided, and conversely, there is one first special figure starting port. It may be provided and two second special figure starting ports may be provided. Further, when there is only one special figure display device, three starting ports may be configured to correspond to the same special figure display device. Further, four or more starting ports may be provided.

In the present embodiment, only one variable winning port 234 is arranged below the center of the game board 200. The variable winning port 234 includes a variable winning opening and a door member 2341 that can open and close the variable winning opening with a solenoid. The variable winning opening is sometimes called a big winning opening, and the variable winning opening 234 is sometimes called an attacker. The door member 2341 changes the state from any one of a predetermined closed state and an open state in which the game ball can enter the variable winning opening more easily than the closed state to the other state. Both the closed state and the open state are stationary states, the closed state is a predetermined first stationary state, and the closed state in the variable winning port 234 of the present embodiment is such that the door member 2341 is on the player side of the game board 200. It is in a stationary state that matches the surface. On the other hand, the open state is a predetermined second stationary state, and the open state in the variable winning port 234 of the present embodiment is rotated toward the player side until the door member 2341 becomes substantially vertical to the game board 200. It is stationary. The variable winning a prize port 234 maintains a closed state until the big hit game described later is started, and when the big hit game is started, the state change is repeated between the open state and the closed state. Note that the closed state may be a state in which the game ball is slightly closed to the extent that it is substantially impossible to enter, in addition to a state in which the game ball is completely closed. Further, the variable winning opening is not limited to the one shown in FIG. 3, as long as the winning of the gaming ball is achieved by passing or entering the gaming ball. When the special figure variation game is won and the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the big hit symbol, the door member 2341 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning port 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls to the upper plate 126 as a prize ball. The ball that has entered the variable winning port 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side. Although only one variable winning port is provided in this embodiment, two variable winning ports may be provided. Here, when two variable winning openings are provided, while one of the first variable winning opening and the second variable winning opening is open, the other variable winning opening is always closed. However, both variable winning openings may be opened in some cases. Also, three or more variable winning openings may be provided.

Further, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting ball direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged near these winning openings and starting openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won any winning opening or starting opening to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

The balls contained in the upper plate 126 are supplied to the firing position of the firing rail. In this pachinko machine 100, the launch motor is driven with a strength according to the operation amount of the player's ball launch handle 134, and the launch rod 146 and launch mallet 148 pass the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 to the game area 124. Launch. Then, the ball that has reached the upper portion of the game area 124 drops downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting ball direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and a winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) or a starting opening. Outgoing outlet 240 by winning in (first special figure starting port 230, second special figure starting port 232), without winning any winning port or starting port, or simply passing through universal figure starting port 228. To reach. An out sensor may be provided on the game board. The out sensor is a game ball that has passed the sensor of the winning opening (general winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234), a game that has passed the sensor of the starting opening (first special drawing starting opening 230, second special opening 232). It is a sensor configured to be able to detect a ball and a game ball that has entered the outlet. The sensor may be configured to be able to detect only a part of the winning opening, the starting opening, and the out opening.
<Direction device 206>
Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

On the front side of the effect device 206, the warp device 242 and the stage 244 are arranged in the area where the game ball can roll, and the effect movable body 224 is arranged in the area where the game ball cannot roll. .. Further, a decorative pattern display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter may be referred to as a door) are arranged on the back side of the rendering device 206. That is, in the rendering device 206, the decorative pattern display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are located behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the rendering movable body 224.

The warp device 242 discharges the game ball, which has entered the warp entrance 242a provided on the upper left side of the rendering device 206, to the stage 244 below the front surface of the rendering device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

The stage 244 is capable of rolling a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b or a ball ridden by a game nail 238 or the like, and the passed ball enters the first special figure starting port 230 at the center of the stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate the ball.

In the present embodiment, the production movable body 224 is composed of an upper arm portion 224a and a forearm portion 224b that imitate the upper arm and the forearm of the human right arm. An unillustrated forearm motor for rotating the forearm 224b is provided at the position. The production movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-shaped left door 246a and a right door 246b, and is arranged between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b respectively move to the left and right according to the operation of the belt driven by the motor via the pulley. The shielding device 246 shields the decorative symbol display device 208 so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative pattern display device 208, when the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the respective inner ends overlap. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, the inner ends of the left door 246a and the right door 246b are slightly overlapped with the outer ends of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can see all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. Is. Further, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, for example, only a part of the decorative pattern to the extent that the player can identify which decorative pattern the displayed decorative pattern is. Can be shielded. The left door 246a and the right door 246b may allow a part of the rear decorative pattern display device 208 to be visible through the holes in the lattice, or the shoji portion of the holes in the lattice may be covered with a semitransparent lens body, and the rear The display by the decorative pattern display device 208 may be vaguely made visible to the player, or the shoji part of the holes of the lattice is completely closed (shielded), and the rear decorative pattern display device 208 is completely invisible. Good.

The decorative lamps such as the speaker 120 and the frame lamp 122 shown in FIG. 1, the decorative pattern display device 208, the effect movable member 224, and the shielding device 246 shown in FIG. Corresponds to an example of the decorative pattern display means.

Further, on the game board 200, a specification sticker 290 showing the specifications of the game table is attached at a position visible to the player.

Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 is roughly classified into a main control unit 300 that controls a central portion of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. A first sub-control unit 400 that performs control, a second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and a main sub-control unit that responds to a command transmitted by the main control unit 300. In addition, a payout control unit 600 that controls the payout of the game balls, a launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of the game balls, and a power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100 are configured. There is.

First, the main controller 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing a control program and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a time. A counter timer 312 for measuring the number of times, the number of times, etc., a WDT 314 for monitoring an abnormality in program processing, a random number generation circuit (counter circuit) 318 (two counters are built in this circuit). It is equipped with. Other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and the same applies to the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock. Further, the random number generation circuit 318 is used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value within a range of 0 to 65535 each time the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received. Although the random number generation circuit 318 is built in the basic circuit 302, it may be connected to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the basic circuit 302 receives signals output from various sensors 320 including a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor that detects a game ball that passes through each starting opening, a winning opening, and a variable winning opening, and a lower plate full tank sensor. However, the sensor circuit 322 for outputting the amplification result and the comparison result with the reference voltage to the CPU 304, the random number value generation circuit 318, and the like in the basic circuit 302, and a predetermined symbol display device, such as the first special figure display device 212 or the first special symbol display device 212. The drive circuit 324 for performing the display control of the 2 special figure display device 214, the drive circuit 326 for performing the display control of the predetermined symbol display device, for example, the universal figure display device 210, and the various status display portions 328 (for example, A driving circuit 330 for performing display control of the universal figure holding lamp 216, the special figure 1 holding lamp 218, the special figure 2 holding lamp 220, the high accuracy middle lamp 222, etc., and a predetermined movable member, for example, an ordinary electric accessory. For controlling various solenoids 332 including a driving means for driving the tongue member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232, a driving means for driving the door member 2341 of the variable winning port 234 as a special electric accessory, and the like. The driving circuit 334 is connected to the driving circuit 334. In this example, the crystal oscillator 316a and the random value generation circuit 318 are provided separately, but the crystal oscillator 316a may be included in the random value generation circuit 318.

When the sphere detection sensor 320 detects that a sphere has won the first special figure starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 sends a signal indicating that the sphere has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318 in the basic circuit 302. Output. Upon receiving this signal, the random value generation circuit 318 latches the value of the counter corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230 at that timing, and the latched value is the built-in counter corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230. Store in the value storage register. Similarly, when the random number generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that a ball has won the second special figure starting port 232, the value of the counter corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232 at that timing is similarly set. The latched value is stored in the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232.

Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 passes an external hall computer (not shown) via the information output circuit 336 and an external terminal board (not shown). The game information (for example, the game state) of the pachinko machine 100 is output to the information input circuit 350 included in the above.

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 is provided with the voltage value of the power supply. Is less than a predetermined value (9 V in this example), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on, and the CPU 304 outputs the start signal output circuit 340 from the start signal output circuit 340. When the activation signal is input, the game control is started (the main control unit main processing described later is started).

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600, respectively. It is possible to communicate with the first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and information communication between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 is two-way communication. The main control unit 300 is configured to be able to send signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400, but is configured to be unable to send signals such as commands to the main control unit 300 from the first sub-control unit 400. doing. However, the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 may be performed by bidirectional communication. Further, the payout control unit 600 is configured to be able to send a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300, but is configured not to be able to send a signal such as a command from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300. Good.

Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that mainly controls the entire first sub control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, a counter timer 412 for measuring time and the number of times, and the like. The serial communication control circuit 424 is mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. Further, the basic circuit 402 is connected to a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in different ROMs. The ROM 406 may be included in the basic circuit 402. The serial communication control circuit 424 connects the game board lamp drive circuit 440 for controlling the game board lamp 442 and the game underframe lamp drive circuit 450 for controlling the game underframe lamp 452. Then, lighting control by serial communication is performed between the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game underframe lamp drive circuit 450.

Further, the basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier), and a drive circuit 422 for controlling the drive of the effect movable body 224, the shielding device 246, and the like. The sensor circuit 428 is connected to the volume switch 163 for adjusting the volume output from the speaker 120. The sensor circuit 428 detects pressing of various movable body sensors 430 that detect the current positions of the shielding device 246, the production movable body 224, etc., and various buttons that form the production button 136 (chance button 136) and the operation key unit 137. The detection signal from the button sensor 426 is output to the basic circuit 402.

Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted by the first sub control unit 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub control unit 500 based on the control command. ing. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices, a counter timer 512 for measuring time and the number of times, and a CPU 504. VDP (video display processor) 516 which reads out the image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on the signal from the ROM 506, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518, and displays the image on the decorative pattern display device 208. And are equipped with. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. Further, the basic circuit 502 is connected to a ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub control unit 500, data for image display, and the like are stored.

Next, the payout control unit 600, the firing control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and based on the control signal output from the payout sensor 604, a prize ball or a ball rental. It is detected whether or not the payout of is completed. Further, the payout control unit 600 communicates with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606. Further, the payout control unit 600 has paid out award ball information indicating that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls have been paid out, and paid out a predetermined number (for example, 25) of rental balls. Ball rental information indicating that is output to the information input circuit 350 via an external terminal board (not shown). A frame sensor 605 is connected to the payout controller 600. The frame sensor 605 includes a main body opening sensor that detects that the main body 104 has opened, a front frame door sensor that detects that the front frame door 106 has opened, and the like. When they are open, these sensors detect and output an open signal. When the payout control unit 600 outputs the opening signal from the frame sensor 605, the payout control unit 600 outputs door opening information to the main control unit 300.

The firing control unit 630 is a control signal output by the payout control unit 600 for instructing to permit or stop firing, and a firing intensity output circuit provided in the ball firing handle 134 outputs the operation of the ball firing handle 134 by the player. Control of the firing solenoid 632 that drives the firing rod 146 and the firing mallet 148, and control of the ball feeding device 634 that supplies the balls from the upper plate 126 to the firing device 110, based on the control signal that indicates the firing intensity according to the amount. I do.

The power supply control unit 660 converts the alternating current power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout device 152. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, 10 days) for supplying power to predetermined components (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the power supply from the outside is cut off. , Condenser). In the present embodiment, the power supply controller 660 supplies power of a predetermined voltage to the payout controller 600 and the second sub controller 500, and the payout controller 600 fires the main controller 300 and the second sub controller 500. Although the power supply of the predetermined voltage is supplied to the control unit 630, the power supply of the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device through another power supply path.

Next, using FIGS. 5A to 5D, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the decorative pattern display device 208, and the general figure display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of special drawings and general drawings to be performed will be described.

The special figure 1 variation game is started on condition that the first starting mouth sensor which is the ball detection sensor detects that the ball entered the special opening 1 starting opening 230, and the ball enters the special opening 2 starting opening 232. The special figure 2 variation game is started on condition that the second starting port sensor which is a ball detection sensor has detected that the ball has been hit. When the special figure 1 fluctuation game is started, the first special figure display device 212 repeats the lighting of all seven segments and the lighting of one central segment "variation display of special figure 1" (special figure Fluctuating game). Also, when the special figure 2 variation game is started, the second special figure display device 214 repeats the lighting of all seven segments and the lighting of one central segment "variable display of special figure 2" ( Special figure fluctuation game). Then, when the fluctuation time determined before the fluctuation start of the special figure 1 has elapsed, the first special figure display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the fluctuation start of the special figure 2 When is passed, the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of special figure 2. Hereinafter, the variable display from the start of this "variable display of special figure 1 or 2" to the stop display of the stopped symbol aspect of special figure 1 or 2 may be referred to as the variable display of special figure. The variable display of this special map may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

FIG. 5(a) shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1. In FIG. 5A, nine types of special maps, “Special map A” to “Special map I”, are shown. In FIG. 5A, the white parts in the figure show the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black parts show the locations of the segments that are turned on.

In the present embodiment, seven types of jackpot symbols (“Special symbol A” to “Special symbol G”) are prepared as stop symbol modes of the special symbol. "Special map A" is a 15-round (R) jackpot design, 15R probable big hit pattern that can be expected to win balls in all rounds of 15 rounds, and "Special map B" is a 15R jackpot pattern. So, while 5 out of 15 rounds can be expected to win coins in the remaining rounds, it cannot be expected to win out balls in the remaining rounds. There is a 15R-rank up bonus (RUB) design that can be expected to win balls in all rounds of 15 rounds, and "Special drawing D" is a 15R jackpot design, 8 out of 15 rounds. You can expect to win balls in one round, but you cannot expect to win balls in the remaining rounds. It is a real 8R-RUB. You can expect to win balls in the rounds, but you can't expect to win balls in the remaining rounds. It is a real 4R-RUB. It is a symbol, which is a 2R certainty variation big hit symbol which is called latent probability variation or hidden probability variation, in which it is not possible to expect winning of a ball in any round. Here, the rank-up bonus is, for example, a big hit that is produced by the player in such a manner as to make it difficult for the player to specify how long a round in which a win can be expected at the start of a big hit continues. It is a big hit that creates a form that encourages the player to continue whether or not the round in which the winning of balls can be expected to continue will be continued when it becomes the eye or the ninth round).

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, whether or not to be a big hit in the special figure variation game is determined by lottery of hardware random numbers, and whether or not to be a special jackpot is determined by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the regular jackpot and the probability jackpot is the difference in the probability of winning the jackpot in the next special figure variation game (probability jackpot) or low (normal jackpot). Hereinafter, the state in which the probability of winning the jackpot is high is referred to as a special figure high probability state (hereinafter, may be referred to as "special figure probability change" or simply "probability change"), and the state in which the probability is low is a special figure. This is called a low probability state. In addition, there is a case where the game is transferred to a time saving state (electric support state) after the big hit game is over. Here, the electric support state is a predetermined advantage that the player is higher than the non-electric support state by shortening the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variation game to the start of the next big hit. The state. Although the time saving will be described in detail later, the time saving state is referred to as a high probability state of universal figure (hereinafter, may be referred to as "probability change of normal figure"), and the state not in the short period of time is referred to as low probability state of universal figure. In this way, the electric power support state (time saving state) is started on condition that the big hit game ends. Strictly speaking, the "electric power support state" is a state where the general map is concerned, and the "time saving state" is a state where the special map is concerned or a state where the general map and the special figure are concerned. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a time saving flag, and when the time saving flag is set to ON, it is in the electric power support state and the universal figure high probability state. It is easier to win the universal figure variation game in the universal figure high probability state than in the universal figure low probability state (normal figure probability variation). For example, the winning probability of the universal figure fluctuation game is 1/100 in the universal figure low probability state (non-electric support state), while it increases to 99/100 in the universal figure high probability state (electric support state). Also, in the electric support state, the fluctuation time of the universal figure fluctuation game becomes shorter than in the non-electric power support state (general figure variation short). For example, in the non-electric power support state, the fluctuation time of the universal figure fluctuation game of 10 seconds is shortened to 2 seconds in the electric power support state. Further, in the electric power support state, the opening time in one time opening of the blade member 2321 of the special figure 2 starting port 232 tends to be longer than in the non-electric power support state (electrical chewing open period extension). For example, in the non-electrically-supported state, the 0.5-second power-chew open period is extended to 2 seconds in the electrically-powered support state. Further, the blade member 2321 is more likely to open in the electrically supported state than in the non-electrically supported state (the number of times of opening the electrically-powered chew increases). For example, the blade member 2321 that opens only once in the non-electrically supported state for each winning of the universal figure starting port 228 opens twice in the electrically supported state (2 seconds open and 1 second closed and 2 seconds again). Open). Due to the extension of the electric-chew opening period and the increase in the number of electric-chew opening, the probability of entering the special figure 2 starting port 232 increases. The time saving flag is set to OFF during the big hit game. Therefore, the non-electric power support state is maintained during the big hit game. This is because, particularly in a big hit game, if a game ball is picked up by an electric chu with a small number of prize balls, and if the number of game balls to the variable winning port (attacker) 234 is reduced, a disadvantage may occur to the player. Because there is. In the present embodiment, in the electric power support state (time saving state), all of the normal figure probabilistic change, the general figure short cut, the extension of the electric chew open period, and the increase of the number of the electric chew open are performed. If any one of them is performed, the player's advantage is high, and the player may be in the power support state (time saving state). Alternatively, if either one of the extension of the electric chew opening period and the increase in the number of electric chew opening is performed to increase the probability of entering the special figure 2 starting port 232, the electric support state (time saving state) may be set. In the non-electrically-supported state, it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the special figure 2 starting port 232 than in the electrically-supported state. As described above, the special figure 2 starting port 232 changes between the difficult winning state in which the game ball is difficult to enter and the easy winning state in which the game ball is easy to enter. The entrance of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is in the easy winning state in the electric support state for a longer period than in the non-electric support state. In the present embodiment, when “special map A” to “special map E” are stopped and displayed, after the big hit game that is performed thereafter is stopped, the electric power support state (universal figure high probability state) is started until the next big hit game is started. ) Is maintained and "Special map F" is stopped and displayed, after the big hit game that is performed after that, the special support variable game is maintained for 100 times while the electric support state is maintained, and the 101st non-powered game is performed. It shifts to the support state (universal figure low probability state). On the other hand, when the big hit without the electric support (“special figure G”) is won, the electric support state does not shift after the big hit game ends.

In this way, in this embodiment, when "special map A" to "special map E" are stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special map high probability general figure high probability state after the jackpot game is over. Further, when the "special map F" is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special map low probability general figure high probability state after the jackpot game is over. Further, when the "special map G" is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special map high probability general figure low probability state after the jackpot game is over.

Further, in the present embodiment, one kind of stop symbol is prepared as a small hit symbol in addition to the big hit symbol. In the small hit game, the door member 2341 of the variable winning port 234 is operated a predetermined number of times (for example, twice), and the door member 2341 maintains the open state for a maximum of 0.1 seconds per operation. In the opening of the door member 2341 in the small hit, for example, when the game balls enter a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) in the first opening, or a predetermined amount of game value (a predetermined number of balls) is acquired. If you do, the second and subsequent releases will not be performed. During the small hitting game, the special figure low probability general figure low probability state shifts. The small hit is a hit in which the control state does not change before and after the small hit game, and returns to the control state before the start of the small hit game after the end of the small hit game. "Special drawing H" shown in FIG. 5(a) is a small hit symbol. In the present embodiment, the opening/closing mode (the number of times of opening and closing and the opening time) of the variable winning a prize mouth 234 in the small hit game and the opening/closing manner of the variable winning a prize hole 234 in the big hit game that is displayed after the "special figure G" is stopped (open). The number of times of opening and the time of opening are substantially the same, but they may be different. For example, at least one of the number of times of opening and the time of opening may be different.

Further, in the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as the lost symbol. "Special drawing I" is a lost design.

FIG. 5B shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 2. In FIG. 5(b), six types of special maps, “special map a” to “special map f”, are shown. Of these, five types of special maps are jackpot patterns (“special map a” to “special map”). Fig. e"). "Special map a" is a 15R big hit pattern, is a 15R probability variation big hit pattern that can be expected to win balls in all rounds of 15 rounds, and "special map b" is a 15R big hit pattern, 15 It is a 15R-RUB design that can be expected to win balls in all of the rounds, and "Special Drawing c" is a 15R jackpot pattern, and is expected to win balls in 8 out of 15 rounds. On the other hand, it is a real 8R-RUB that you can't expect to win out in the remaining rounds, and the "special map d" is a 15R jackpot design, and you can expect to win out in four out of 15 rounds. On the other hand, in the remaining rounds, it is a substantial 4R-RUB that cannot be expected to win a ball, and the "special figure e" is a 2R normal jackpot design.

Further, in the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as the lost symbol. “Special drawing f” is a lost design.

FIG. 5(c) shows an example of a decorative design. The decorative pattern of the present embodiment includes 10 types of “decoration 1” to “decoration 10”. The first start opening sensor detects that a ball has won the special opening 1 starting opening 230 or the special opening 2 starting opening 232, that is, the ball has entered the special opening 1 starting opening 230, or the special opening 2 Each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided on condition that the second starting orifice sensor detects that the ball has entered the starting orifice 232. In the pattern display area, "decoration 1"→"decoration 2"→"decoration 3"→... "decoration 9"→"decoration 10"→"decoration 1"→... "Variable display of symbols" is performed. That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the decorative symbol in a variable manner separately from the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214. Then, the stop symbol mode, which is a combination of decorative symbols, is stopped and displayed.

When notifying substantially 5R probability variation big hit ("special drawing B"), 5R normal big hit ("special drawing F"), 2R normal big hit ("special drawing e"), in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration" 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" and "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" A combination of ornamental patterns in which three ornamental patterns with the same numbers are arranged (for example, "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" or "decoration 1-decoration 1" Decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4") is stopped and displayed. In addition, when notifying the 15R probability variation big hit (“special drawing A” and “special drawing a”), “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3” or “decoration 7-decoration 7” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. -Stop decoration "7". Furthermore, when notifying 15R-RUB, substance 8R-RUB, and substance 4R-RUB, the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c are decorative symbols of the same number, and the middle symbol display area 208b is like a lord. A combination of decorative patterns that are decorative patterns (for example, "decoration 1-donor-decoration 1" or "decoration 4-donor-decoration 4") is stopped and displayed. In addition, when notifying a hidden probability change (“special map G”) that is a big hit of 2R or a small hit (“special map H”), “decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. A combination of decorative patterns such as "3" is stopped and displayed. A combination of decorative patterns such as "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3" may be referred to as a chance. In addition, when notifying a lost symbol such as "special symbol I" or "special symbol f", a combination of decorative symbols other than the combination of decorative symbols described above is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, disperse). Stop the display).

Hereinafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display from the start of the “variable display of the decorative symbol” to the stop display of the stopped symbol aspect of the decorative symbol may be referred to as the variable symbol display of the decorative symbol. The variable display of the decorative pattern is performed under the control of the first sub control unit 400.

FIG. 5(d) shows an example of a stop symbol aspect of a universal figure. There are two types of stop display modes of the universal figure of the present embodiment, that is, a "general figure A" which is a winning symbol and a "universal figure B" which is a deviating symbol. On the basis of the fact that the gate sensor, which is a sphere detection sensor, detects that the sphere has passed through the universal figure starting port 228, the universal figure display device 210 causes all seven segments to light up and one segment in the center to light up. Repeated lighting "Public variation display" (Public variation game) is performed. Then, after the change time elapses, either one of the symbols "Public symbol A" which is a hit symbol and "Public symbol B" is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 5D, the white parts in the figure show the positions of the segments to be turned off, and the black parts are the positions of the segments to be turned on.

Hereinafter, the display from the start of the "variable display of the universal figure" to the stop display of the stop symbol aspect of the universal figure may be referred to as the variable display of the universal figure.
<Main control unit main processing>

Next, with reference to FIG. 6, main processing main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 will be described. It should be noted that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main processing of the main control unit.

The special figure random number value, the special figure round decision random number value, the special figure electric support decision random number value, and the special figure decision random number are stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. Further, the RAM 308 is provided with a random number counter for generating these various random number values. Further, the RAM 308 stores the number of reserved special figures, the random number for winning special figures, various determination (lottery) results, and the like. Hereinafter, the area in the RAM 308 that stores the number of reserved special figures is sometimes referred to as a special figure reserved number storage area. Furthermore, the RAM 308 is provided with a starting information storage unit for special figures which is divided into a maximum number (four in this example) of areas in which the start of the win/no determination (lottery) can be suspended. There is also a random number storage area for general drawings. As will be described later, the starting information storage unit for special figures stores a plurality of types of starting information as one set, and the starting information is stored for each area one by one in the winning order (holding order).

As described above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 is provided with the activation signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the activation signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302, which has received the activation signal, performs a reset start by a reset interrupt and executes the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 6 according to a control program stored in the ROM 306 in advance.

In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, the stack initial value is set to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304 (temporary setting), the interrupt mask is set, the I/O 310 is initialized, the various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, and the WDT 314 is set. Allows the operation of and sets the initial value. In this embodiment, the WDT 314 is set to a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms as an initial value.

In step S103, the value of the counter of WDT314 is cleared and the time measurement by WDT314 is restarted.

In step S105, it is determined whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage monitoring circuit 338 determines that the voltage value of the power supply that the power supply control unit 660 supplies to the main control unit 300 via the second sub control unit 500. Is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects the power cutoff), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the power cutoff), the step is performed. It proceeds to S107. Even when the power does not reach the predetermined value (9V) immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In the initial setting 2, a process of setting a numerical value for determining a period for executing the main control unit timer interrupt process described below at regular intervals in the timer circuit 312, a predetermined port of the I/O 310 (for example, a test output port, The process of outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub-control unit 400), the setting to permit writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

In step S109, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before the power is cut off (before the power is cut off), and if the state is not returned to the state before the power is cut off (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is set to the initial state). ), the process proceeds to the initialization process (step S113).

Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when a clerk at a game store operates the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board 182 shown in FIG. 2 (indicating that there is an operation). If the RAM clear signal is ON (when RAM clear is required), the basic circuit 302 is initialized to step S113. move on. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is off (when RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and this power status information is information indicating suspend. Or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to initialize the basic circuit 302. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is determined. A checksum is calculated by adding all 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte configuration register having an initial value of 0, and the calculated checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) or not (whether or not the result of the checksum is normal) is determined. Then, when the checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to restore the state before the power failure, and the checksum result is the specific value. When the value is other than the value (for example, 0) (when the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to initialize the pachinko machine 100. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than "suspend", the process proceeds to step S113.

In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read and reset to the stack pointer (main setting). Further, when the power is cut off, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 is read and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. After that, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer or register, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power was cut off. That is, the process is restarted from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt processing (described later) immediately before the power interruption. Further, the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 2 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power-off state has been restored, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, which will be described later.

In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, setting of interrupt prohibition, setting of a stack initial value to the stack pointer (main setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, at this point, the normal recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and like the power recovery command, in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 is transmitted to the sub control unit 400.

In step S115, after setting interrupt prohibition, basic random number initial value update processing is performed. In this basic random number initial value updating process, two initial value generating random number counters for respectively generating initial values of the universal figure winning random number counter and the special figure random number counter are updated. For example, if the range of possible numbers for the universal figure winning random number is 0 to 20, the value is obtained from the random number counter storage area provided in the RAM 308 for generating the universal figure winning random number value, and 1 is added to the obtained value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is 21, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The other initial value generating random number counters and random number counters are also updated in the same manner. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during the time of performing the timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period.
<Main controller timer interrupt processing>

Next, the main controller timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main controller 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 7. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main controller timer interrupt process.

The main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 includes a timer circuit 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once in this embodiment about once every 4 ms), and the main control is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The partial timer interrupt processing is started at a predetermined cycle.

In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In the timer interrupt start process, the value of each register of the CPU 304 is temporarily saved in the stack area.

In step S203, the WDT 314 is periodically (so that the count value of the WDT 314 exceeds the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) so that a WDT interrupt does not occur (not to detect an abnormal process). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the period of the main controller timer interrupt.

In step S205, an input port status update process is performed. In this input port state update processing, the detection signals of the various sensors 320 shown in FIG. 4 including various sphere detection sensors are input via the input port of the I/O 310 to monitor the presence/absence of the detection signals, and the RAM 308 performs various operations. The data is stored in the signal state storage area provided separately for each sensor 320. Explaining the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor as an example, information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interrupt process (about 4 ms before) two times before is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. Is read from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and provided, and this information is stored in the RAM 308 in the two-preceding detection signal storage area partitioned and provided for each ball detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) is performed. ), the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor is read from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area. Remember. Further, the detection signals of the respective sphere detection sensors detected this time are stored in the above-mentioned current detection signal storage area.

Further, in step S205, the presence/absence information of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the previously-previous detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared, It is determined whether or not the information on the presence/absence of the detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor of No. 1 matches the winning determination pattern information. While one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor, this main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly activated at a very short interval of about 2 ms is activated several times. Therefore, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in the above-described step S205, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the two-preceding detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts passing through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before two times, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, if the detection signal is stored twice consecutively after the detection signal is absent, it is determined that a prize has been won. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 stores winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous-previous detection signal, previous detection signal, and current detection signal). In this step S205, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals of the past three times in each ball detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, there is no previous detection signal, there is a previous detection signal, there is a present detection signal). If it matches with the information indicating that the general winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, the first special figure starting opening 230, and the second special drawing starting opening 232, or the universal figure starting opening 228. It is determined that there has been a passage. That is, it is determined that the winning openings 234 and 226 and the starting openings 230, 232 and 228 have been won. For example, when the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times in the first starting opening sensor that detects the ball entering the first special drawing starting opening 230 matches the above-described winning determination pattern information, the first special drawing It is determined that there is a prize in the starting opening 230, that is, a game medium that passes through a predetermined area is detected, and the processing following the winning in the first special figure starting opening 230 is performed. If the presence/absence information does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the processing is branched to the subsequent processing without performing the processing associated with the winning of the first special figure starting port 230. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal two times before, no detection signal last time, and no detection signal this time). After it is determined that there has been a single winning, it is not determined that there is a winning until the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the winning determination clear pattern information, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

In steps S207 and S209, basic random number initial value updating processing and basic random number updating processing are performed. In the basic random number initial value updating process and the basic random number updating process, the value of the random number counter for initial value generation performed in step S115 is updated, and the universal figure winning random number value and The random number counter for generating each special figure random value is updated. For example, if the range of possible numbers for the universal figure winning random number is 0 to 100, the value is obtained from the random number counter storage area provided in the RAM 308 for generating the universal figure winning random number value, and 1 is added to the obtained value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. In addition, as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, when it is determined that the random number counter makes one round, the value of the random number counter for initial value generation corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, the result obtained by obtaining a value from a random number counter for generating a universal figure winning random number value that varies in a numerical range of 0 to 100 and adding 1 to the obtained value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as the initial value from the initial value generation random number counter that corresponds to the random number counter The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to set it in the random number counter for generating the winning random number value and to judge that the random number counter for generating the universal random number I'll do it. In addition to the above-described initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for general-purpose winning random number value generation has completed one round, it is determined that the random number counter for special figure random number generation has completed one cycle. The RAM 308 is provided with an initial value storage area for

In step S211, an effect random number update process is performed. In this effect random number updating process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number used in the main control unit 300 is updated.

In step S213, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the symbol is displayed on the universal symbol display symbol update timer, the first special symbol display device 212, and the second special symbol display device 214 for measuring the time for changing/stopping displaying the symbol on the normal symbol display device 210. Various including a special figure display symbol update timer for timing the time of fluctuating/stopping display, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time, a predetermined closing time, a timer for measuring a predetermined ending effect period, etc. Update the timer.

In step S215, a winning opening counter updating process is performed. In this prize hole counter updating process, when the prize holes 234 and 226 and the starting holes 230 and 232 are won, the value of the prize ball number storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each winning hole or each starting hole is set. The value is read, 1 is added, and the original prize ball number storage area is set.

In addition, in step S217, prize winning acceptance processing is performed. In the prize receiving process, a plurality of types of starting information are acquired if a predetermined condition is satisfied. The plurality of types of starting information acquired here are stored as a set of starting information in an empty area corresponding to the winning order (holding order) of the starting information storage unit provided in the RAM 308.

In step S219, which is executed subsequent to step S217, a payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. 4 are configured by 1 byte, and the strobe information (when ON, indicates that the data is set) and the bit 6 are set in bit 7. Power-on information (when it is on, it indicates the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 are the current processing type (0 to 3) for encryption, and bits 0 to 3 are encryption. The number of payout requests after chemical processing is indicated.

In step S221, general-university-state update processing is performed. The universal figure state updating process is one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the state of the universal figure. For example, in the public figure state updating process in the middle of the general figure fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned general figure display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Lighting off control is performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs the variable display of the universal figure (general figure variation game).

Further, in the public figure state update processing at the timing when the public figure fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the public figure display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), when the hit flag is on, the hit symbol is displayed. Ordinary symbol display device 210 is configured to be in a mode The 7-segment LED is turned on and off, and when the hit flag is off, the regular symbol display device 210 is configured to be a lost symbol display mode. ON/OFF control of 7-segment LED is performed. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the general-picture state update process. Here, the above-mentioned lighting/extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting indicating that the normal stop display is being performed is performed in the setting area. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines either one of the winning symbol (general symbol A shown in FIG. 5C) and the lost symbol (general symbol B shown in FIG. 5C). Display. After that, during a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the universal figure stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display. By this setting, the symbol that is confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is informed of the result of the universal figure variation game.

Further, if the result of the universal figure fluctuation game is a hit, the universal figure hit flag is turned on as described later. When the universal figure hit flag is on, the universal figure state update processing at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the universal figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0) is stored in the RAM 308. While the normal figure operation is set in the setting area, the blade member 2321 is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). In addition to outputting the signal held in, the blade opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308 is set with information indicating the opening period.

In addition, in the normal state updating process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the blade member is closed for a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 msec). A signal for holding the blade member 2321 in a closed state is output to the solenoid (332) for driving the opening/closing of 2321 and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

Further, in the universal figure state updating process which starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the regular area inactive state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Furthermore, if the result of the universal figure variation game is a loss, the universal figure loss flag is turned on as described later. When the universal figure loss flag is on, even in the universal figure state update process at the timing when the above-described predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the universal figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the normal non-operation is set. In the universal figure state updating process when the ordinary figure is not in operation, nothing is performed and the process proceeds to the next step S223.

In step S223, a universal figure related lottery process is performed. In this public figure-related lottery process, opening/closing control of the general figure fluctuation game and the second special figure starting port 232 is not performed (the state of the general figure is not operating), and the pending general figure fluctuation game When the number is 1 or more, it is determined whether the result of the universal figure variation game is won or unselected by a random number lottery based on the universal figure winning random number value stored in the above random number storage area. The winning judgment is made, and when the winning is determined, the hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In the case of no win, the hit flag is set to off. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, the value of the predetermined random number counter is acquired as the universal figure timer random number value, and the universal figure display device 210 receives the universal figure display device 210 from among the plurality of fluctuation times based on the obtained universal figure timer random number value. One time during which the figure is variably displayed is selected, and this variably displayed time is stored in the ordinary figure variation time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as the ordinary figure variation display time. It should be noted that the number of pending universal figure fluctuation games is stored in the universal figure holding number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending universal figure fluctuation games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in this general-use figure hold number storage area. Moreover, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

Then, the special figure prefetching process (step S224) is performed. Details of the special figure prefetching process will be described later. Next, the special figure state update processing for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed, but first, the special figure state update processing for the special figure 2 (special figure 2 state update processing) is performed (step S225). In this special figure 2 state update process, one of the following processes is performed according to the state of special figure 2.

For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 variable display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED that constitutes the special figure 2 display device 214 is turned on and off. Repeats lighting and extinguishing drive control. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variation game). Further, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating execution of the rotation start setting transmission process is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and then the process ends.

Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as a 15R big hit flag, a 5R big hit flag, a 2R big hit flag, a small hit flag, a loss flag, a special figure probability variation flag, and a general figure probability variation flag. .. These flags are set to ON or OFF based on the determined stop symbol in the special figure 2 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 2 state update processing that starts at the timing when the special figure 2 variable display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), for example, the 15R jackpot flag is on, the special figure When the probability variation flag is also on and the universal figure probability variation flag is also on, any one of special figure a, special figure b, special figure c, and special figure d shown in FIG. The special figure 2 display device 214 is configured to have the special figure e when the figure probability variation flag is off and the general figure probability variation flag is on, and the special figure f when the loss flag is on. The 7 segment LED is controlled to be turned on and off, and the setting indicating that the special figure 2 stop display is being performed is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214, 15R special big hit pattern (special figure a, special figure b, special figure c, special figure d), 2R normal big hit pattern (special figure e), lost symbol ( The fixed display of any one of the special symbols f) is performed.

Further, thereafter, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. By this setting, the special display 2 that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is informed of the result of the special FIG. 2 variable game. Further, if the number of shortening times stored in the saving time storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of shortening times, and if the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0, the special figure probability is changing. If not, the time saving flag is turned off. Further, even during the big hit game (during the special game state), the time saving flag is turned off.

In addition, the predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission processing is executed in the command setting transmission processing (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area described above, and the pattern for stopping the variable display is the special figure 2. The special figure 2 identification information indicating that it is present is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data described later, and then the process ends.

If the result of the special figure 2 variation game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on. When the big hit flag is ON, the RAM 308 is set in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). In addition to setting the special figure 2 in operation in the area, in order to stand by for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image is displayed to notify the player that a big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started First, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 waiting time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

In addition, in the special figure 2 state update processing which starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect production period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined open period (for example, 29 seconds) Or, until the winning of a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) in the variable winning port 234 is detected) The solenoid for opening and closing the door member of the variable winning port 234 (a part of various solenoids 332), the door member Is output in the open state and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the door open time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening opening setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state updating process which starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member in a closed state is output to a solenoid (a part of various solenoids 332) for opening and closing the door member of the variable winning port 234, and a storage area of a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Set the information that indicates the closing period. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process which is repeated at a predetermined number of times (15 rounds, 5 rounds or 2 rounds in the illustrated embodiment) of opening/closing control of the door member, and when it is finished, a predetermined end effect period (for example, (3 seconds), that is, a storage area of a production standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to set to stand by for a period during which an image is displayed to notify the player that the jackpot by the decorative pattern display device 208 is finished. The information indicating the production standby period is set in. Further, if the universal figure probability variation flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of this big hit game, the time saving frequency (for example, 100 times) is set in the time saving frequency storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and is also provided in the RAM 308. Turn on the time saving flag. If the universal figure probability variation flag is set to OFF, neither the time saving number is set in the time saving number storage unit nor the time saving flag is turned ON.

The time saving here means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player because the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variation game to the start of the next big hit is shortened. When the time saving flag is set to ON, it is in the high probability state of universal figure (universal figure probable variation). In the high probability state of the universal figure, the probability of being hit in the universal variation game is higher than in the low probability state of the universal figure. In addition, the general figure high probability state is shorter than the general figure low probability state in the variation time of the universal figure fluctuation game (general figure variation short). Further, in the universal figure high probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 2321 of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is likely to be longer than in the universal figure low probability state (power extension). In addition, in the universal figure high probability state, the pair of blade members 2321 are more likely to open than in the universal figure low probability state. The state in which any one of these Phenomenon Probability Change, Phenomenon Change Short, and Den Chu Extension is set is called Densa Support (Starting prize winning support by electric tulip) state.

Further, as described above, the time saving flag is set to OFF during the big hit game (during the special game state). Therefore, during the big hit game, the general figure low probability state is maintained. This is a high probability probability state during the big hit game, a large number of game balls in the special figure 2 start port 232 until a predetermined number of variable winning holes 234 and game balls enter during the big hit game. There is a problem that the number of game balls that can be acquired during a big hit increases and the gambling performance increases, which is to solve this problem.

Further, predetermined transmission information indicating execution of the end effect setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

In addition, in the special figure 2 state update processing which starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (the timing when the value of the production standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 non-operation is performed in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set inside.

Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variation game is out, the out flag is turned on. When the deviation flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state updating process at the timing when the above-described predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), The special region 2 inactive is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. In the special figure 2 state updating process in the case where the special figure 2 is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S227.

Then, the special figure state update process (special figure 1 state update process) about special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In this special figure 1 state update processing, each processing described in the above-mentioned special figure 2 state update processing is performed according to the state of special figure 1. Since each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” of the content described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”, description thereof will be omitted. Omit it. The order of the special figure 2 state update processing and the special figure 1 state update processing may be reversed.

When the special figure state update processing in step S225 and step S227 is completed, the special figure related lottery processing for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed this time. Here, too, the special map-related lottery process (special map 2 related lottery process) for the special map 2 is performed first (step S229), and then the special map-related lottery process for the special map 1 (special map 1-related lottery process). ) Is performed (step S231). Special figure 2 related lottery processing, the variation game of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is not done, the state of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is in the non-operating state, and special figure 2 which is on hold Assuming that the number of variable games is 1 or more, it is executed using the first special figure 2 winning random number value and special figure 2 random number value in the special figure 2 random number storage area. Special figure 1 related lottery processing, the variation game of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is not done, the state of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is inactive, and special figure 1 which is suspended Assuming that the number of variable games is 1 or more, it is executed using the first special figure 1 winning random number value and special figure 1 random number value in the special figure 1 random value storage area.

Regarding these special figure related lottery processing, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the start condition of the special figure 2 variation game and the special figure 1 variation Even if the game start conditions are met at the same time, the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, so the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. If the number of pending special game 2 variable games is 1 or more, the lottery process and the variable games related to the pending special game 1 variable games are not performed. The decorative symbol display device 208 notifies the result of the determination result of the special figure variation game by the first sub-control unit 400, and notifies the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the special figure 2 starting port 232. The priority is given to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning in the special figure 1 starting port 230. In the present exemplary embodiment, the special figure variation game having a high advantage (special figure 2 variation game in this example) is prioritized over the special figure variation game having a low advantage (special figure 1 variation game in this example). Therefore, it may be easy to give a difference in the degree of advantage of the game state.

In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery processing in step S229, the main control unit 300 starts the special figure 2 start information (special piece) from the earliest (oldest stored) holding position in the special figure 2 random value storage area. FIG. 2 winning random number value and special figure 2 random number value) is acquired, and based on the special figure 2 winning random value in the acquired special figure 2 start information and the value of the special figure probability variation flag in the RAM 308, the ROM 306 It is determined whether to make a big hit, a small hit, or a non-win by using the hit/miss determination table stored in (a hit/miss judgment). Next, the main control unit 300 uses the special figure determination table stored in the ROM 306 based on the special figure 2 random number value in the obtained special figure 2 start information and the determined hit/miss judgment result. After the variable display, the symbols (stop symbols) to be stopped and displayed are determined. Next, the main control unit 300 is stored in the ROM 306 based on, for example, the determined hit/miss determination result, the stop symbol, the special figure 2 holding number at the time of the hit/miss determination, the obtained random number for determining the special figure variation time, and the like. The variable display time (timer number) of Toku-zu 2 is determined using various tables.

After extracting the earliest special figure 2 starting information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, the main control unit 300 deletes the earliest special figure 2 starting information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, and Figure 2 The special figure 2 reservation number in the reservation number storage area is decremented by one. At this time, the special figure 2 starting information extracted from the special figure 2 random value storage area is stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above-mentioned determination is performed based on the special figure 2 starting information stored in this temporary area. You may do it.

After the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) as described above, the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) is similarly performed. The order of the special figure 1 related lottery process and the special figure 2 related lottery process may be reversed.

In the above description, the special figure 2 variation game with a high advantage is started prior to the special figure 1 variation game with a low degree of advantage, and the hold of the special figure 2 is digested prior to the hold of the special figure 1. The special figure 2 priority variation is taken as an example, but the special figure 1 variation game with a low advantage is started with priority over the special advantage 2 variation game with a high advantage, and the special figure 1 is held pending It may be the special figure 1 priority variation that is preferentially digested over the hold. Also, without prioritizing either the special figure 2 variation game with a high advantage or the special figure 1 variation game with a low degree of advantage, the special figure variation game related to the suspension of each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is started. It may be a change in the winning opening winning order that starts in order. In the starting mouth winning order variation, the maximum number of reservations is 8 regardless of Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2, so in each of Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2, it is compared with the priority fluctuation in which the maximum number of reservations is 4. It may be possible to raise the upper limit of the number of reservations.

Further, in the above description, the lottery process and the variable game regarding the holding of the other special map are not performed depending on the state of one special map, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the special map state update described above is not performed. By performing the processing and the special figure-related lottery process independently in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, a plurality of special figures may be simultaneously changed. In addition, when a plurality of special maps are simultaneously changed in this way, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a plurality of areas for displaying the lottery results of the respective special maps, or the lottery results of the respective special maps are displayed. A plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided to separately display the respective lottery results, or one display may be configured to display the lottery results of a plurality of special symbols. In addition, when fluctuations relating to a plurality of special maps are performed simultaneously, the lottery result of the special map whose fluctuation is stopped first may influence the lottery result of the special map whose fluctuation is stopped later.

In step S233 following step S231, command setting transmission processing is performed. In this command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub control unit 400. The output schedule information transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of, for example, 16 bits, bit 15 is strobe information (when ON, indicates that data is set), and bits 11 to 14 are. Command type (in this example, basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, prefetch result information command, etc. The information that can specify the command type), and bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off in the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a pattern variation start (rotation start) command, the command data includes various big hit flags, small hit flags, outlier flags, special figure probability variation flag values, and the timer selected in the special figure related lottery process. In the case of a symbol fluctuation stop (rotation stop) command, including information such as a number, it includes various big hit flags, small hit flags, outlier flags, special figure probability fluctuation flag values, etc. In the case of the production start command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag is included, and in the case of the big hit round number designation command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the big hit round number, etc. are included. If the command type indicates a basic command, the command data includes device information, whether or not there is a winning at the special figure 1 starting opening 230, whether or not there is a winning at the special drawing 2 starting opening 232, and whether or not there is a winning at the variable winning openings 234, 235. Including presence or absence. In the case of the prefetch result information command, information such as the types of special figure 1 and special figure 2, the number of prefetches stored in the prefetch number storage area, which will be described later, and the stop symbol stored in the prefetch result storage unit are included in the command data. Including.

In the rotation start setting transmission process described above, the values of various big hit flags, small hit flags, out-of-match flags, special figure probability variation flags, special figure probability related lottery processing, and special figure stored in the RAM 308 are included in the command data. 2 Set the information indicating the timer number selected in the related lottery process, the number of pending special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games, and the like. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating the values of various big hit flags, small hit flags, outlier flags, special figure probability variation flags, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data.

In the above-described winning award effect setting transmission process, the command data stores the effect control information stored in the RAM 308, which is output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the award effect period, and the special figure probability variation flag. Information indicating a value, the number of special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games that are held, etc. is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission processing, the command data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information to be output to the decorative symbol display device 208, the various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, and the special figure probability variation flag. Information indicating the value, the number of special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games that are held, etc. is set. In the above-mentioned special winning opening release setting transmission processing, the command data, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of pending special figure 1 variation games or special figure 2 variation games Set the information indicating such as. In the above-mentioned special winning opening closing setting transmission processing, the command data, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of pending special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games Set the information indicating such as.

Further, in this step S233, general command special figure pending increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase processing, special figure identification information (information indicating special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308 for command data, advance notice information (advance notice information, false) (Advance notice information or no advance notice information) is set.

In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information makes it possible to determine the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. The effect control content can be determined based on the information of the command data.

In step S235 following step S233, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read to monitor the presence/absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence/absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence of a lower plate full tank error. .. When the front frame door opening error or the lower tray full tank error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the lower tray full tank error. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control opening and closing of the special figure 2 starting port 232 and the variable winning a prize port 234, and the general figure display device 210 and the special figure 1 display device 212 are controlled through the drive circuits 324, 326 and 330. The display data to be output to the special figure 2 display device 214, various status display sections 328, etc. is set to the output port of the I/O 310. The output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of the I/O 310.

In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (power cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, a timer interrupt end process is performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, setting of interrupt permission is performed, and then the main control unit main processing shown in FIG. Return to. On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or a stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved as restore data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and power-off processing such as initialization of the input/output port is performed. After that, the state becomes HALT.

FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the special figure prefetch process (step S224) of the main controller timer interrupt process. In addition, in the main controller timer interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. 51 and FIG. 206, the special figure prefetching process is performed in the winning opening winning process. In the special figure pre-reading process, the main control unit 300 pre-reads the increased start information in each of the special diagrams 1 and 2, and pre-determines the stop symbol before the winning/disagreement determination process, and the pre-determination result (special The prefetch result) is stored in the prefetch result storage unit (see FIGS. 9A to 9C and 207 to 208) in the RAM 308.

Here, in the RAM 308, the special figure 1 pre-reading result storage section for storing the pre-reading result of the special figure 1 and the number of special figure 1 pre-reading results stored in the special figure 1 pre-reading result storage section are specified. A special figure 1 prefetch number storage area for storing one prefetch number is provided. In this example, the prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 can store up to four prefetch results. In the special figure 1 pre-reading result storage unit, the data of the special figure 1 pre-reading result of the highest rank (first) is deleted and the remaining special figure 1 pre-reading result is deleted every time the number of special figure 1 pre-reading is decreased by one. Are processed so that the rank of the data of 1 is advanced by one. In addition, each time the number of special figure 1 prefetches is increased by one, new data of the special figure 1 prefetch results is written in the next rank to the data of the special figure 1 prefetch results having the lowest rank (last).

Further, in the RAM 308, the special figure 2 pre-reading result storage section for storing the special figure 2 pre-reading result and the number of special figure 2 pre-reading results stored in the special figure 2 pre-reading result storage section are stored. A special figure 2 prefetch number storage area for storing the number is provided. The special figure 2 pre-reading result storage section can store up to four pre-reading results in this example. In the special figure 2 pre-reading result storage unit, the data of the special figure 2 pre-reading result having the highest rank is erased every time the number of special figure 2 pre-reading decreases by 1, and the remaining order of the special figure 2 pre-reading result data is deleted. Are processed so that they are incremented by one. Further, each time the number of special figure 2 prefetches is increased by one, new data of the special figure 2 prefetch results is written in the next rank to the data of the special figure 2 preread results having the lowest rank.

In the special figure prefetching process, the main control unit 300 first determines whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 is increased (step S301). Whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 is increasing is stored in, for example, the special figure 2 reserved number stored in the special figure 2 reserved number storage area and the special figure 2 prefetch number storage area. The special figure 2 is compared with the number of prefetches. The main control unit 300 determines that the start information of the special figure 2 is increasing when the special figure 2 reservation number is larger than the special figure 2 prefetch number, and the special figure 2 reservation number is the special figure 2 preread number. If they are the same, it is determined that the start information of special figure 2 has not increased. If it is determined that the start information of special figure 2 has increased, the process proceeds to step S303, and if it is determined that the start information of special figure 2 has not increased, the process proceeds to step S307.

In step S303, the increased special figure 2 starting information (a set of the special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random number value) is specified before the win/fail judgment processing in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229). Figure 2 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Further, the process of step S303 is performed before the special figure-related lottery process shown in FIG. 53 described later. Then, by using the pre-read special figure 2 starting information, the table for determining whether or not the special symbol 2 shown in FIG. 10 and the table for determining special symbols shown in FIG. 11, the special symbols 2 variable game stop symbol relating to the starting information is specified. Preliminary determination is performed before the win/loss determination process in the FIG. 2 related lottery process (step S229). In the special figure-related lottery process shown in FIG. 53, which will be described later, pre-determination of the stop symbol of the special diagram 2 variable game related to the start information is performed before the display symbol lottery process S708. In addition, this pre-determination processing may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used in the determination of success or failure.

In step S305 subsequent to step S303, the stop symbol information as the special figure 2 prefetch result obtained by the preliminary determination is stored in the earliest empty area of the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. Then, it transfers to step S307.

In step S307, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the start information of special figure 1 has increased. Whether or not the start information of the special figure 1 has increased is determined by, for example, as in the case of the special figure 2, the special figure 1 reserved number stored in the special figure 1 reserved number storage area and the special figure 1 prefetch number storage. This is performed by comparing with the number of pre-readings of special figure 1 stored in the area. When it is determined that the start information of the special figure 1 is increased, the process proceeds to step S309, and when it is determined that the start information of the special figure 1 is not increased, the special figure prefetching process is ended and the main control unit is executed. Return to timer interrupt processing.

In step S309, it is determined based on various flags in the RAM 308 whether or not the non-electricity support is being performed. If it is determined that the non-electric power support is being performed, the process proceeds to step S311. If it is determined that the non-electric power support is not being performed (the power is being supported (universal figure high probability state)), the process proceeds to step S315. In this example, it is determined whether or not the non-electricity support is being performed, but it may be determined whether or not the execution condition of the special figure 1 pre-reading notice is satisfied. For example, the execution conditions of the special figure 1 pre-reading advance notice include conditions such as not being in a big hit game other than being in non-electric support.

In step S311, the increased special figure 1 start information (set of special figure 1 winning random number value and special figure 1 random number value) is specified before the winning/judgment processing in the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231). Figure 1 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Further, the process of step S311 is performed before the special figure-related lottery process shown in FIG. 53 described later. Then, by using the pre-reading special figure 1 start information and the hit determination table and the special figure determination table used at the time of hit determination, for example, the stop symbol of the special figure 1 variable game related to the start information is set to the special figure 1 related lottery. Preliminary determination is made prior to the hit/miss determination processing in the processing (step S231). In the special figure-related lottery process shown in FIG. 53, which will be described later, pre-determination of the stop symbol of the special figure 1 variable game related to the start information is performed before the display symbol lottery process S708. In addition, this pre-determination processing may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used in the determination of success or failure.

In step S313 subsequent to step S311, the stop symbol information as the special figure 1 prefetch result obtained by the preliminary determination is stored in the first free area of the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. After that, the special figure prefetching process is terminated and the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt process.

In step S315, the pre-reading result storage for special figure 1 in RAM 308 is replaced with the "undetermined" information indicating that the start information is not pre-read without pre-reading the increased special figure 1 start information. Store in the first empty area of the set. After that, the special figure prefetching process is terminated and the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt process.

In the present embodiment, only the increased start information is pre-read and pre-determined, but all the start information may be pre-read and pre-determined. In the command setting transmission process (step S233) described above, only the pre-reading result of the increased start information may be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400, or the pre-reading result storage for special figure 1 and special figure 2 may be stored. All pre-reading results in the set may be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400.

In addition, in the flowchart shown in FIG. 8, pre-reading is always executed for the increased start information of special figure 2 and pre-reading is always executed for the increased start information of special figure 1 except during power support. However, it may be determined by lottery whether or not to pre-read the increased start information of the special maps 1 and 2. Alternatively, the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the pre-reading result from the main control unit 300 may determine by lottery whether or not to execute the pre-reading notification for each hold, for example. In addition, regardless of the game state (for example, whether or not in non-electric support), when the start information increases, the prefetch is always executed and the prefetch result is stored in the prefetch result storage unit and the prefetch is performed. The result may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 may be configured to determine whether to execute the lottery and the effect using the pre-reading result.

FIG. 9 exemplifies a state in which the prefetch result information and the like are stored in the prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. FIG. 9A shows an example of a state in which the special figure 1 prefetch result information is stored in the special figure 1 preread result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 9A, the special-reading 1 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number of storage areas (four in the present embodiment) as the number of reserveable special-playing 1 variable games. .. Each storage area is associated with the holding order (holding 1 to holding 4) of the special figure 1 random value storage area. The stop symbol information of special figure 1 is stored in each of the storage areas. In the example shown in FIG. 9A, the storage area "holding 1" stores "special drawing I" (disappearance) as stop symbol information, and the storage area "holding 2" stores stop symbol information "special drawing I". "(Departure) is stored, "special drawing A" (15R probability variation big hit) is stored in the storage area "holding 3" as stop symbol information, and "special drawing I" is stored in the storage area "holding 4" as stop symbol information. "(Disappearance) is stored.

FIG. 9B shows an example of a state in which the special figure 2 preread result information is stored in the special figure 2 preread result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 9B, the pre-reading result storage unit for special figure 2 has, for example, the same number of storage areas (four in this embodiment) as the holdable number of the special figure 2 variable game. .. Each storage area is associated with the holding order (holding 1 to holding 4) of the special figure 2 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, the stop symbol information of special figure 2 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 9B, the storage area "holding 1" stores "special figure f" (off) as stop symbol information, and the storage areas "holding 2" to "holding 4" have stop symbols. No information is stored. In addition, in FIG. 9B, a state in which the stop symbol information is not stored in the storage area is described as “none”.

FIG. 9C shows an example of the pre-reading result storage unit for special figure 1 during electronic support. As shown in FIG. 9C, in the storage area “holding 1”, “undetermined” information is stored instead of the stop symbol information. Neither stop symbol information nor “undetermined” information is stored in the storage areas “holding 2” to “holding 4”.

In the present embodiment, in addition to the stop symbol information described above, the judgment result and the special symbol variation time are pre-determined, and the information is stored in the pre-read result storage unit and is also stored in the first sub-control unit 400 as pre-read result information. Can be sent.

Next, FIG. 10 is referred to for the win/fail judgment table used in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) and the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. While explaining. Here, FIG. 10A is a diagram showing an example of a high probability table for win/loss determination, and FIG. 10B is a diagram showing an example of a low probability table for win/loss determination. In the case of the special figure high probability state in the case of performing the special figure determination, if the special figure high probability state is referred to, the high probability table for winning/decision determination shown in FIG. , And refer to the low probability table for success/failure determination shown in FIG. Then, based on the numerical range indicated by the referred win/loss determination table and the acquired random number value, the win/loss determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is selected. In the present embodiment, in the case of the special figure 1 variation game, a big hit, a small hit, or an outlier is selected as the result of the hit/miss judgment. It should be noted that the present invention can also be applied to a win/loss determination table used in the per-special-drawing lottery process in step S801 of FIG.

Similarly, in the case of the special drawing high probability state, when the special figure high probability state is obtained, the special figure low probability state is referred to by referring to the high probability table for winning/defective determination shown in FIG. In this case, the low probability table for win/fail judgment shown in FIG. Then, based on the numerical range indicated by the referred win/loss determination table and the acquired random number value, the win/loss determination result of the special figure 2 variable game is selected. In the present embodiment, in the case of the special figure 2 variation game, a big hit or a loss is selected as the hit/miss determination result.

FIG. 10C is a diagram showing an example of the small hit determination table. When the result of the jackpot judgment is out of range, the table for small hit determination shown in FIG. 10C is referred to, and based on the numerical range shown by the referred small hit judgment table and the acquired random number value. , Select the result of the special drawing small hit lottery. In the present embodiment, when the win/no-judgment result (lottery result) of the special drawing per special drawing is the special drawing 1, the small hit is selected with the probability of 2000/65536 as the win/no judgment result, and the loss is generated with the probability of 63536/65536. However, if the winning/disapproval determination result (lottery result) of the special drawing per special drawing is the special drawing 2, the small hit is not selected. Note that the present invention is also applicable to the small hitting determination table used in the special figure small hitting lottery process of step S803 of FIG.

Next, the stop is performed based on the result of winning/decision determination determined in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) and the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. The special figure determination table used for determining symbols will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 11(a) is a diagram showing an example of a special figure 1 symbol determination table, and FIG. 11(b) is a diagram showing an example of a special figure 2 symbol determination table. When determining the stop symbol of the special figure 1, the table for special figure 1 symbol determination shown in FIG. Select the stop pattern of 1. In the present embodiment, when the hit/no hit result of Toku-zu 1 is a big hit, any one is selected from special drawings A to G, and when the hit/no hit determination result of Toku-zu 1 is a small hit, Toku-zu H is selected, and when the hit/no-go result of Toku-zu 1 is lost, toku-zu I is selected.

Further, when determining the stop symbol of the special figure 2, referring to the special figure 2 symbol determination table shown in FIG. 11 (b), based on the hit result of the special figure 2 and the numerical range of the random number value, The special design 2 stop design is drawn by lot. In the present embodiment, when the hit/fail result of Toku-zu 2 is a big hit, any one is selected from Toku-zu a to Toku-e. f is selected. After the symbols to be stopped and displayed are determined, the symbol data to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device is set.

Note that the symbols in the special symbol state updating process of FIG. 53(a) may also be determined by using the special symbol determination table of this example, and the display symbol data of the special symbol 1 is displayed in the display symbol lottery process of step S708. When determining, referring to the special figure 1 symbol determination table shown in FIG. 11 (a), based on the hit result of special figure 1 by the special figure per lottery process of step S707, and the numerical range of the random number value, Select the display pattern data of special figure 1.

Next, the processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described. FIG. 12A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. First, in step S401 of FIG. 12A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S401. In this initialization processing, the input/output ports are initialized and the storage area in the RAM 408 is initialized.

In step S403 following step S401, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405. .. In step S405, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

In step S407 following step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

In step S409 following step S407, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S407, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, effect data update processing is performed.

In step S411 following step S409, chance button control processing is performed. In the chance button control processing, the operation of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) or the operation key unit 137 is detected, and the effect data updated in step S409 is changed to the effect button 136 (chance button 136) or operation according to the detection result. Processing for changing to effect data according to the operation of the key unit 137 is performed.

In step S413 subsequent to step S411, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control process, if the effect data read in step S409 includes a command to the sound source IC 416, the command is output to the sound source IC 416.

In step S415 subsequent to step S413, lamp control processing is performed. In the lamp control process, if there is a command to the various lamps 442, 452 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game underframe lamp drive circuit 450. To do.

In step S417 subsequent to step S415, movable body control processing is performed. For example, if the effect data read in step S409 includes an instruction to the effect movable body 224 and the shielding device 246, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 422.

In step S419 following step S417, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission process, if the effect data read in step S409 includes a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500, the control command is set to be output. Then, it returns to step S403.

FIG. 12B is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit command reception interrupt process (strobe interrupt process) executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub control unit 400 detects the strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S431 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

FIG. 12C is a flowchart of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once in this embodiment, once every 2 ms), and the timer interrupt process is set to a predetermined value when triggered by this timer interrupt. To be executed in the cycle. In step S441 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S403 of the first sub-control unit main processing and stored in the original timer variable storage area. To do. Therefore, in step S403, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S443 subsequent to step S441, the control command is transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 set in the information transmission process (step S419) of the first sub control unit main process, and the other effect random number updating process is performed. And so on.

Next, the processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described. FIG. 13A is a flowchart of a main process executed by a CPU (not shown) of the second sub control unit 500. First, in step S501 of FIG. 13A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, first, an initialization process is executed in step S501. In this initialization processing, the initialization of the input/output port and the initialization processing of the storage area in the RAM (not shown) are performed.

In step S503 following step S501, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this processing is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the processing proceeds to step S505. .. In step S505, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S507 following step S505, command processing is performed. The CPU of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the first sub control unit 400.

In step S509 following step S507, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S507, processing such as reading the effect data (effect data by the decorative pattern display device 208) corresponding to this command from the ROM (not shown) is performed, and the effect data is updated. If necessary, the effect data is updated.

In step S511 following step S509, image control processing is performed. In the image control processing, if the effect data read in step S509 includes an instruction to the VDP 516, this instruction is output to the VDP 516 (details will be described later). Then, it returns to step S503.

FIG. 13B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process executed by the CPU of the second sub control unit 500. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 500 detects the strobe signal from the first sub control unit 400. In step S531 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the first sub control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM.

FIG. 13C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process executed by the CPU of the second sub control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms), and the timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt. To be executed in the cycle. In step S541 of the timer interrupt processing, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM described in step S503 of the second sub-control unit main processing and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S503, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10). In step S543 subsequent to step S541, the other effect random number updating process and the like are performed.

FIG. 13D is a flowchart of the image control process in step S511 of the second sub-control unit main process. In step S551, a transfer instruction of image data (movie data or texture data described later) is issued. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the designation of the drawing areas of the frame buffer 1 and the frame buffer 2 of the VRAM 518. As a result, the one-frame image stored in the frame buffer not designated in the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, the CPU 504 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 506), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 518) and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 516 based on the position information table, etc., and then the image from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 516 transfers the image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on the instruction set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

In step S553 following step S551, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 516 is input. If the transfer end interrupt signal is input (step S553: Yes), the process proceeds to step S555. If not (step S553: NO), it waits until the transfer end interrupt signal is input.

In step S555, parameters are set based on the effect scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, the CPU 504 forms the display image in the frame buffer 1 or 2 of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S551, so that the information of the image data forming the display image (coordinate axis of VRAM 518, image size , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) to the VDP 516. The VDP 516 sets parameters according to the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

In step S557 following step S555, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts image drawing in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU 504.

In step S559 following step S557, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 516 based on the image drawing end is input, and if the generation end interrupt signal is input (step S559: Yes), If not (step S559: No), the process waits until the generation end interrupt signal is input.

In step S561, the scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated, is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

Next, an example of the configuration of the rendering device 206 applicable to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 14A is a diagram illustrating a first configuration example of the rendering device 206, and FIG. 14B is a diagram illustrating a second configuration example of the rendering device 206.

In the rendering device 206 shown in FIG. 14A, the decorative symbol display device 208 is configured such that the front side of the outer peripheral portion thereof is covered with a decorative member that constitutes the rendering device 206, and a part thereof is not visible. .. The decorative member may be transparent, and the outer peripheral portion of the decorative pattern display device 208 may be visible. Further, the outer peripheral portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 may not be covered. Further, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the public figure display device 210, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, and the general figure holding lamp 216 are not shown. Omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208, the first user interface (UI) unit 280 is arranged on the lower right side of the display screen, and the second UI unit 281 is arranged on the left side thereof. Hereinafter, the combination of the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 may be referred to as a holding frame. This holding frame can also be viewed as an area icon displayed in the icon display area. A variable icon display area is provided on the left side of the first UI unit 280, and a pedestal h0s is arranged in the variable icon display area. The variable icon h0 can be displayed in a state of being placed on the pedestal h0s, and when the variable icon h0 is displayed, it notifies that the symbol variable is being displayed. When the symbol is fixedly displayed (while the symbol is stopped), the variable icon h0 is not displayed. Further, on the right side of the variable icon h0, a navigation character YM composed of a lord's character is displayed. The navigation character YM is a character that is always displayed at normal times, and by changing the display mode according to the progress of the game, for example, a notice display or a prefetch notice display is performed. The second UI unit 281 has a hold icon display area in which four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. The stage may indicate the pedestal of the hold icon. Further, the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon h0 is higher than the stages hs1 to hs4 of the hold icon. Further, the navigation character YM does not have to be always displayed, and a specific notice or effect using the navigation character YM (for example, a look-ahead notice, a notice in the symbol variation display, or a symbol variation display held N times is accumulated. When the navigation character YM is set to be displayed by the user setting, the display may be displayed. In FIG. 14A, since four variable displays of Toku-zu 1 are suspended, four suspension icons h11, h12, h13, h14 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the four hold icons h11 to h14 are all displayed in a default display mode (for example, a round unpatterned and white display mode), but they are displayed in accordance with the progress of the game. May change. As a result, the notice display and the prefetch notice display can be performed. Here, the variable icon may indicate an icon corresponding to the symbol variable display. Further, the variable icon h0 may indicate a hold (the hold) corresponding to the symbol change display. The variable icon h0 may not be displayed.

The variation icon is an icon corresponding to the special figure variation game, which is displayed after the suspension of the special figure variation game is started, in other words, an icon relating to the symbol variation display being executed. That is, the hold icon becomes a change icon at the same time when the special figure change game corresponding to the hold icon is started. To be more precise, when the first hold icon with the oldest winning prize moves from the hold icon display area to the variable icon display area, the moving icon is referred to as the variable icon, or even if the variable icon moves. Good. Alternatively, the icon after the movement to the variable icon display area is completed may be referred to as a variable icon. This variable icon is displayed with a display size different from the hold icon (a display size larger or smaller than the hold icon). This may facilitate the identification of the variable icon and the hold icon, but they may have the same size. The variable icon may have a display mode related to the display mode of the hold icon. The change icon can give a notice about whether or not the change is appropriate (a notice of the change) depending on its display mode, and is basically erased at the timing when the result of the change is notified. Therefore, the variable icon can be regarded as an icon related to the hold, and can be considered as a kind of the hold icon in the sense that the notification of the hit/miss result of the special figure change game is held. The erasing timing may be before, at the same timing, or after the timing at which the result of the variation is notified. The variable icon h0 may not be displayed.

In the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is stopped and displayed as a combination of decorative symbols of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7". Then, in the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, a second decorative pattern (fifth pattern) smaller than the first decorative pattern is a combination of decorative patterns of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7". It is stopped. The second decorative pattern may not be displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208, and only the first decorative pattern may be displayed. Further, the second decorative design may not be displayed on the decorative design display device 208, but may be displayed on another effect display device (for example, 7-segment, LED, dot matrix display device, etc.). In the present embodiment, the combination of the decorative patterns in the second decorative pattern matches the combination of the decorative patterns in the first decorative pattern, but the combination of the decorative patterns in the first decorative pattern and the decoration in the second decorative pattern A part of the combination of symbols (1 or 2 decorative symbols are matched) or all may be mismatched. Further, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the second hold number display (here, “4” and “0”) of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed. In addition, the second hold number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 may not be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the second hold number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, but is displayed by another effect display device (for example, 7-segment, LED, dot matrix display device, etc.). Good. It should be noted that the second hold number display may display the hold number of only one of the special maps 1 and 2, or may display the hold numbers of both of the special maps 1 and 2. Good.

In addition, a background display is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a background display corresponding to the effect and the game state (normal game state, probability variation state, hidden probability variation state, time saving state, etc.) is displayed. The background display corresponding to the effect indicates a background display corresponding to a mode that can be set by the user, a background display performed as a notice or a look-ahead notice in the symbol variation display, and a background display irrelevant to the result of judgment. In addition, a plurality of types of background display may be displayed in a certain game state (any one or more of a normal game state, a probability variation state, a hidden probability variation state, a time saving state). In this case, it may change with a law (for example, it changes in order such as background display A→background display B→background display C→background display A→... If it collapses, it may be announced as a big hit confirmation (premier announcement). The order may change randomly regardless of the order.

In addition, below the decorative pattern display device 208, a family crest monument 224E, which is one of the effect movable bodies, is arranged so that it can be moved vertically or rotated according to the effect contents. It is configured. In the example shown in FIG. 14A, the family crest monument 224E is located at the initial position. The initial position of the family crest part 224E is below the decorative pattern display device 208, but it can be set to an appropriate position. Further, the family crest monument 224E has a light emitting means such as a full-color LED built therein, and can emit light in various light emitting modes according to the effect contents.

In addition, on the left and right sides of the decorative pattern display device 208, one of the effect movable bodies, the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga with the character "Large", and the second with the character "Board" are provided. The large-scale behavior auditors 224Gb, the third large-scale behavioral auditors 224Gc on which the characters "swing" are applied, and the fourth large-scale behavioral auditors 224Gd on which the characters "dance" are applied are arranged. Each of the first large-board behavior auditors 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior auditors 224Gd can rotate around the center and can move toward the center of the decorative pattern display device 208. ing. At this time, the 1st large board behavior part 224Ga-the 4th large board behavior part 224Gd are located in the front side of the decorative pattern display device 208, and can be overlapped with the front side of the decorative pattern display device 208. .. In addition, the first large board behavioral object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral object 224Gd internally have a light emitting means such as a full-color LED or the like, and can emit light in various light emitting modes according to the contents of the effect.

In addition, above the decorative symbol display device 208, a thousand box box accessory 224H, which is one of the effect movable bodies, is arranged so that it can be moved in the vertical direction according to the effect contents. .. The thousand-box box accessory 224H is arranged on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 and can overlap the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the Senryo box accessory 224H has a built-in light emitting means such as a full-color LED, and can emit light in various light emitting modes according to the contents of the effect.

A transparent light guide plate IL is arranged on the front surface side of the decorative pattern display device 208, the family crest actor 224E, the first large board behavioral part 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral part 224Gd, and the thousand-box box part 224H. The player can visually recognize the display state of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the operation of each effect movable body through the light guide plate. The light guide plate IL has a predetermined lens cut in the transmissive region. A light-emitting body such as an LED is provided at an appropriate position near the side end of the light guide plate IL, and the light from the light-emitting body is reflected forward by the lens cut portion, so that the transmissive region emits light in a predetermined pattern. It is configured so that it can look like. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 14A, the light guide plate IL is provided with a lens cut having a pattern simulating a predetermined effect image. In addition, the light guide plate IL is configured such that the thickness of the region where the light is refracted toward the player side is smaller than the thickness of the light irradiation. Therefore, the display state of the decorative symbol display device 208 may be easily visible. Further, the light guide plate IL may be movable.

Further, in the present embodiment, a fourth symbol display device 284 is provided on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The fourth symbol display device 284 can display the display result of the fourth symbol, for example, by the light emitting mode of the LED. The fourth symbol display device 284 may be configured by an image display device such as an LCD or EL. The fourth symbol display device 284 is drive-controlled by the first sub-control unit 400. While the symbol of the special figure is stopped, the LED is lit and displayed, but during the change of the symbol of the special figure, it is blinked or turned off. The look-ahead notice may be given by changing the display mode, lighting mode, or blinking mode of the fourth symbol. Note that the fourth symbol may be displayed in a lighted state while the symbol is changing, and may be displayed in a lighted state while the symbol is stopped.

In the production device 206 shown in FIG. 14B, three decorative symbol display devices are arranged in a row. That is, the first decorative pattern display device 208L arranged in the center of the three decorative pattern display devices, the second decorative pattern display device 208M arranged on the left side of the first decorative pattern display device 208L, and the first decoration The display is performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N arranged on the right side of the symbol display device 208L. The first decorative symbol display device 208L may be a main display device, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be a sub display device, and a second decorative symbol display device. 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are shorter than the half length of the first decorative symbol display device 208L in the width direction, and the display area is slightly shorter in height. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the right edge portion thereof overlaps the front side of the left edge portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N has its left edge portion the first. 1 The decorative pattern display device 208N overlaps with the front surface side of the right end portion. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are configured to be slidable along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L in the directions close to each other. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N can rotate integrally along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L when they are closest to each other. It is configured to be able to. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are each configured to be slidable in the vertical direction along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The effect operations of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N described above do not have to be configured to be able to perform all, and any one operation or two or more operations are performed. It may be configured to be able to. Further, one or both of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may not perform the rendering operation (that is, may be fixed). Further, the effect operation that can be performed by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the effect operation that can be performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be different, for example, the number of effect operations that can be performed are different. Alternatively, the performance operation itself that can be performed may be different. Specifically, for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208M can be moved and rotated in the right direction, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N can be moved in the vertical direction. Good. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208L may also be configured to be able to perform an effect operation. Specifically, while the first decorative symbol display device 208L performs a performance operation, one or both of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may operate, or Only one decorative symbol display device 208L may operate. Further, the names of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are not necessarily variable display of the decorative symbol for each display device, and are named for convenience. However, it is added here to make sure that the interpretation of the display device is not narrowed. Further, these decorative symbol display devices (the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N) are summarized as effect display means, and the effect display means is the decorative pattern. It is also possible to perform variable display of, and perform multiple types of effect display. The first decorative symbol display device 208L is configured such that the front surface side of the outer peripheral portion thereof is covered with a decorative member that constitutes the rendering device 206, and a part thereof is not visible. The decoration member may be transparent, and the outer peripheral portion of the first decorative pattern display device 208L may be visible. Further, the outer peripheral portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L may not be covered. Further, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the public figure display device 210, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, and the general figure holding lamp 216 are not shown. Omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first user interface (UI) unit 280 is arranged on the lower right side of the display screen, and the second UI unit 281 is arranged on the left side thereof. Hereinafter, the combination of the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 may be referred to as a holding frame. This holding frame can also be viewed as an area icon displayed in the icon display area. On the left side of the first UI unit 280, a variation icon h0 is displayed in a state of being placed on the pedestal, which notifies that the symbol variation display is being performed. Further, on the right side of the variable icon h0, a navigation character YM composed of a lord's character is displayed. The second UI unit 281 has a hold icon display area in which four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. The pedestal hs0 of the variable icon h0 is higher than the stages hs1 to hs4 of the hold icon. In FIG. 14B, since four variable displays of Toku-zu 1 are reserved, four reservation icons h11, h12, h13, h14 are displayed in the reservation icon display area. In FIG. 14B, the variable icon h0 and the four hold icons h11 to h14 are all displayed in a default display mode (for example, a round unpatterned and white display mode). The display mode may change according to the progress. As a result, the notice display and the prefetch notice display can be performed.

In the center of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is stopped and displayed in a combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7". Then, in the upper left corner of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol (fifth symbol) smaller than the first decorative symbol is the decorative symbol of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7". The combination is stopped and displayed. In the present embodiment, the second decorative symbol is displayed on the same decorative symbol display device as the first decorative symbol, but may be displayed on a different decorative symbol display device. Further, the second decorative design may not be displayed on the first decorative design display device 208L, and only the first decorative design may be displayed. Further, the second decorative symbol may not be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, but may be displayed by another effect display device (for example, 7-segment, LED, dot matrix display device, etc.). In the present embodiment, the combination of the decorative patterns in the second decorative pattern matches the combination of the decorative patterns in the first decorative pattern, but the combination of the decorative patterns in the first decorative pattern and the decoration in the second decorative pattern A part of the combination of symbols (1 or 2 decorative symbols are matched) or all may be mismatched. Further, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second reserved number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed. In the present embodiment, the second hold number display is displayed on the same decorative symbol display device as the hold icon display region, but it may be displayed on a different decorative symbol display device. Moreover, you may divide and display the 2nd hold|holding number display on the decoration design display device which is different in special figure 1 and special figure 2. In addition, the second hold number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 does not need to be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, the second hold number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is not displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, but is displayed by another effect display device (for example, 7-segment, LED, dot matrix display device, etc.). May be done. It should be noted that the second hold number display may display the hold number of only one of the special maps 1 and 2, or may display the hold numbers of both of the special maps 1 and 2. Good.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the background display is displayed so as to be connected to the background display displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. As the background display, for example, a background display corresponding to an effect or a game state (normal game state, probability variation state, hidden probability variation state, time saving state, etc.) is displayed. The background display corresponding to the effect indicates a background display corresponding to a mode that can be set by the user, a background display performed as a notice or a look-ahead notice in the symbol variation display, and a background display irrelevant to the result of judgment. In addition, a plurality of types of background display may be displayed in a certain game state (any one or more of a normal game state, a probability variation state, a hidden probability variation state, a time saving state). In this case, it may change with a law (for example, it changes in order such as background display A→background display B→background display C→background display A→... If it collapses, it may be announced as a big hit confirmation (premier announcement). The order may change randomly regardless of the order. In the present embodiment, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are each provided with a frame (bezel) on the outer circumference, but a frameless form may be used. Moreover, a decorative member or an LED may be provided on the frame.

Further, the family crest accessory 224E described above is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is configured to be able to move or rotate in the vertical direction according to the contents of the effect. .. Note that, in the example illustrated in FIG. 14B, the family crest monument 224E is located at the initial position, but the initial position of the family crest monument 224E illustrated in FIG. 14B is the upper end of the family crest monument 224E. Although the portion is a position slightly overlapping the lower end portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it can be set to an appropriate position.

In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the above-mentioned thousand box accessory 224H is arranged, and is configured to be movable in the vertical direction according to the contents of the effect. Senryo box accessory 224H is arranged in front of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and overlaps the front side of these decorative symbol display devices. It is possible.

The above-mentioned light guide plate IL is arranged on the front side of the decorative symbol display device, the family crest actor 224E, and the thousand box actor 224H, and the player displays the display state of each decorative symbol display device through the light guide plate. The motion of each effect movable body can be visually confirmed.

Further, in FIG. 14B, a fourth symbol display device 284 is provided below the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

Next, an example of an effect using the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14A or FIG. 14B will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 15 is a diagram illustrating an example of effects applicable in the present embodiment.

FIG. 15(A1) to FIG. 15(A2) show an operation mode of the production movable body in the production device 206 shown in FIG. 14(a). That is, from the state shown in FIG. 15(A1), when the first large-board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior accessory 224Gd and the Senryo box accessory 224H operate, the state shown in FIG. 15(A2) is obtained. Specifically, the first large board action character 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior object 224Gd are first positioned until the characters “large”, “board”, “behavior”, and “mai” are at the positions facing the front. Each of them rotates, and then moves horizontally toward the center of the decorative pattern display device 208. In addition, the thousand-box box accessory 224H moves from the initial position to a position where it overlaps at approximately the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Here, the thousand-box action product 224H is arranged on the front side of the first large-board action product 224Ga to the fourth large-board action product 224Gd, and the first large-board action product 224Ga to the fourth large-board action product 224Gd are the thousand-box action product. It is considered difficult to visually recognize as compared with the case where it is not overlapped with 224H. In addition, you may comprise so that the 1000-box box role object 224H may not overlap with the front surface side of the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga-the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd. In addition, the first large-board behavior auditors 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior auditors 224Gd may be arranged on the front side of the thousand-axle box auditors 224H and configured to overlap the thousand-robot box auditors 224H.

In FIG. 15(B1), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14(a), the light guide plate IL emits light, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image is displayed on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. Is shown. Here, while the light guide plate IL is emitting light, the brightness of the backlight of the decorative pattern display device 208 and various lamps may be reduced to make the pattern appearing on the light guide plate IL more visible. ..

FIGS. 15C1 to 15C4 show an operation mode of the production movable body in the production device 206 shown in FIG. 14A. Here, in the example shown in FIGS. 15C1 to 15C4, a POV (Persistence Of Vision) display 224I as a production movable body is provided in place of the family crest 224E. The POV display 224I is also called a versa writer, is vertically movable, and is configured to be able to overlap the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The initial position of the POV display 224I is below the decorative pattern display device 208, but it can be set at any position. The POV display 280 has a lifting arm and an LED array rotatably attached to the tip of the lifting arm. The elevating arm can be moved up and down by a known mechanism such as a rack and pinion. A plurality of LEDs are arranged in a line in the LED array, and the attitude extending in the horizontal direction is the initial attitude of the LED array. The LEDs provided in the LED array may be full-color LEDs or single-color LEDs. A motor is built in the tip of the elevating arm, and the LED array is connected to the rotating shaft of the motor at the center in the extending direction. The first sub-control unit 400 (or the second sub-control unit 500) performs one lighting control for each of the plurality of LEDs arranged in the rotating LED array based on Versa data, which is a kind of effect data. To do. By doing so, the light emission mode of the plurality of LEDs changes during the rotation of the LED array, and the afterimage is visually recognized by the player. That is, an afterimage of light is generated on the rotation locus of each LED, and a pattern is represented. Further, the POV display 224I is arranged on the front side of the first large board action product 224Ga to the fourth large board action product 224Gd and the thousand-box action product 224H. Can be set.

FIG. 15C1 shows a state in which the POV display 224I is in the initial position and the LED array is in the initial posture.

FIG. 15C2 shows that the POV display 224I raises the LED array by the elevating arm, and the LED array overlaps with the front surface side of the decorative symbol display device 208 substantially at the center. Therefore, in the decorative symbol display device 208, it is difficult to visually recognize the display screen as compared with the case where the POV display 224I does not overlap.

FIG. 15C3 shows that the LED array of the POV display 224I has started to rotate. The LED array accelerates its rotation from low speed to high speed. It should be noted that the plurality of LEDs provided in the LED array may start lighting or blinking when the LED array starts rotating, or may start lighting or blinking after reaching a certain rotation speed. Good. Further, the rotating area of the LED array overlaps the variable icon h0, the hold icons h11 to h14, and the first decorative pattern, and it is difficult to visually recognize them while the LED array is rotating.

In FIG. 15(C4), the LED array of the POV display 224I is rotated at a constant speed, the characters "heat" are displayed, and the advance notice display or the prefetch advance notice display is shown. The image displayed by the POV display 224I is not limited to the one described above, and may be, for example, a character image, a decorative pattern, a background image, or the like. Further, while the image is displayed on the POV display 224I, the emission brightness of the backlight and various lamps of the decorative symbol display device 208 is reduced to improve the visibility of the image displayed on the POV display 224I. Good. Further, while the image is displayed on the POV display 224I, the decorative pattern display device 208 may be displayed in the dark mode.

In FIG. 15(D1), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14(b), the light guide plate IL emits light, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image is displayed on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. Is shown. Here, while the light guide plate IL is emitting light, the backlight of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N and the brightness of various lamps are reduced, and the like. The pattern appearing on the light plate IL may be made more visible.

FIGS. 15E1 to 15E2 show a state in which the family crest actor 224E is operating in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14B. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15(E1), the family crest monument 224E moves from the initial position to a raised position and overlaps the variable icon h0, the hold icons h11 to h14, and the navigation character YM, The change icon h0, the hold icons h11 to h14, and the navigation character YM are more difficult to visually recognize than when they do not overlap at least partially. After that, as illustrated in FIG. 15(E2), the family crest monument 224E rotates in the clockwise direction (CW direction). The family crest monument 224E may rotate at the initial position. Further, the family coat emblem 224E may vibrate along with or instead of rotating. Alternatively, only the ascending may be performed, and the rotation and the vibration may not be performed. In addition, it is also applicable to the rendering device 206 shown in FIG.

In FIG. 15(F1), a state in which the 1000-box box accessory 224H is operating in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14(b) is shown. Specifically, it is shown that the thousand-box box accessory 224H is moving from the initial position to a position where it overlaps with the front surface side of substantially the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At the timing shown in FIG. 15 (F1), the first decorative symbol is made more difficult to visually recognize than the case where it is in the non-overlapping state because the thousand-box box accessory 224H is overlapped. In this example of performance, when the Senryo box accessory 224H operates, the Senmon box accessory 224E does not operate so that the Senryo box accessory 224H and the family crest accessory 224E do not interfere with each other. It should be noted that there may be a case where both the thousand-box box accessory 224H and the family crest accessory 224E are in operation. In addition, when the Thousand Box Actor 224H operates, a retracting operation of further moving the family crest 224E may be performed.

In FIG. 15(G1), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14(b), the second decorative symbol display device 208M slides downward, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N slides upward. It is shown. At this time, the background image displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is slid so as to be continuous with the background image displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. A scroll display is also made. That is, with respect to the background image, an area that is not displayed before the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N slides is configured to be visually recognized by sliding. In other words, it can be said that there is an image that can be seen by moving the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. As a result, even if the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N move, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are integrated. It is possible to display the display. The second decorative symbol display device 208M may slide upward, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may slide downward, or the second decorative symbol display tail device 208M slides upward, The three decorative symbol display device 208N may slide upward, the second decorative symbol display device 208M may slide downward, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may slide downward.

In FIG. 15(H1), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14(b), the first decorative symbol is enlarged to display the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display. It is shown as being displayed across the devices 208N. That is, the left pattern of the enlarged first decorative symbol is displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the right symbol of the expanded first decorative symbol is the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Is displayed across the third decorative symbol display device 208N. At this time, the second decorative symbol is displayed only on the first decorative symbol display device 208L and is not displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Further, the variable icons h0 and the hold icons h11 to h14 are also displayed only on the first decorative symbol display device 208L and do not extend across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Note that the enlarged first decorative symbol does not have to be displayed across two display devices, for example, the enlarged left symbol is displayed only on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The enlarged middle symbol may be displayed, and the enlarged right symbol may be displayed only on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Moreover, the variable icon h0, the hold icons h11 to h14, and the second decorative symbol may be displayed across a plurality of display devices.

FIG. 15(I1) to FIG. 15(I2) show an operation mode of the production movable body in the production device 206 shown in FIG. 14(b). Here, in the example shown in FIG. 15(I1) to FIG. 15(I2), the POV display 224I described above is provided in place of the family crest cast 224E. At the timing shown in FIG. 15(I1), the POV display 224I is in the initial position and the LED array is in the initial posture.

In FIG. 15 (I2), after the POV display 224I moves from the initial position to the position where the LED array overlaps with the front surface side of the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the LED array rotates, and then the fixed rotation. It is shown that the speed is reached, the rotation speed is constant, and the word "heat" is displayed.

In FIG. 15(J1), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14(b), the background display displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M is changed to the display on the first UI unit 280, and the third decorative symbol display is performed. It is shown that the background display displayed on the device 208N is changed to the display on the second UI unit 281. That is, the navigation character YM and the variable icon h0 are displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. That is, it is shown that the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are performing different display from the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

FIGS. 15(K1) to 15(K4) show an operation mode of the production movable body in the production device 206 shown in FIG. 14(b). In the example shown in FIGS. 15(K1) to 15(K4), the outer periphery of the first decorative symbol display device 208L does not overlap the decorative member, and the image displayed in the area is also visible. ing. At this time, the left and right sides of the first decorative symbol display device 208L are partially overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

In FIG. 15 (K1), a state in which the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are in the initial position is shown.

In FIG. 15 (K2), a state in which the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208M are slidingly moved to positions close to each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is shown. Has been done. At this time, the displays of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N scroll along with the slide movement so as to be continuous with the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Display is made. As a result, the first decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. That is, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are images displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the images of the overlapping portions are adjusted according to the slide movement. By scrolling the display, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N can perform a display with a sense of unity. In addition, as shown in FIG. 15 (K2), the family crest monument 224E is moved downward from the initial position so as not to interfere with the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the retract position Has become. Here, as shown in FIG. 15 (K2′), the display on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be slid without scrolling. Further, the family crest monument 224E may rotate at the initial position or may vibrate while the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are operating, You may vibrate while rotating.

In FIGS. 15(K3) to 15(K4), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are close to each other, and the counterclockwise along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It is shown that they are integrally rotating in the direction (CCW direction). In FIG. 15(K4), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are shown rotated 90 degrees. At this time, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative pattern so that the images displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N respectively match the first decorative symbol display device 208L. A display is displayed that rotates in a direction opposite to the rotation direction of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N about the rotation axis of the symbol display device 208N. Thereby, the player may rotate the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, but the displayed image may not appear to rotate.

FIG. 15(L1) shows a modification of the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14(a). That is, in the example shown in FIG. 15 (L1), the sub-display device 208S is arranged below the decorative pattern display device 208 in place of the family crest accessory 224E, and the upper end portion of the sub-display device 208S is the decorative pattern display device 208. It overlaps at least part of the lower end. On the sub display device 208S, the respective displays on the above-mentioned first UI unit 280 and second UI unit 281 are displayed. That is, on the sub display device 208S, the variable icon h0 and the hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed, and the navigation character YM is also displayed. The display on the sub display device 208S is different from the display on the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208, a state in which the character SBH of Sabohani walks from the right side to the left side is shown, but a part of the character SBH overlaps with the sub display device 208S. It is made more difficult to visually recognize than when the display device 208S is not overlapped. Note that, as shown in FIG. 15 (L1′), a display image (background image, character SBH of the sabotani, etc.) may be displayed across the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 208S.

In FIG. 15 (M1), the operation modes of the sub-display device 208S and the first large-board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior accessory 224Gd are shown. That is, the sub-display device 208S moves from the initial position to a position that is on the front side in the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and overlaps at least a part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The 1 large-board behavior auditors 224Ga to the 4th large-board behavior auditors 224Gd rotate to the positions where the characters “large”, “board”, “behavior”, and “mai” are in front, and then the decorative symbol display device 208. Of the sub display device 208S that has moved to the position on the front side of the center of the sub display device 208S. At this time, a cut-in display is performed on the sub display device 208S, and a predetermined effect image is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208, which shows that a predetermined notice effect or a look-ahead notice effect is being performed. ing.

Next, a specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 to 19. Here, FIG. 16 is a diagram showing stepwise an example of an effect centered on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, and FIG. 17 shows a step after the example of the effect shown in FIG. 18 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner, and FIG. 18 is a diagram showing step by step the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 17, and FIG. 19 is a figure showing stepwise about another example of the effect shown in FIG. ..

In FIG. 16, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol display device 210, a special symbol 1 hold lamp 218, a special symbol 2 hold lamp 220, a general symbol hold. The lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284 are shown. In the following, description will be made by applying the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14A, but it is also possible to apply the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14B. Further, in the following, illustrations of the family crest actor 224E, the first large-board behavior auditors 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior auditors 224Gd, the thousand-box box auditors 224H, and the light guide plate IL are omitted.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 16A, the combination of decorative symbols “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed. Although the background here is not displayed, for example, a default background image (coast background image) as shown in FIG. 14A is displayed. Also in the following description, when the background is not displayed, the default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. It should be noted that various background images different from the default background image (for example, background images according to modes) may be displayed. Further, the second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the second decorative symbol is displayed in the upper left corner. The second decorative design is also stopped and displayed in combination with the decorative design of the first decorative design in combination with the decorative design of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7". The navigation character YM is displayed on the first UI portion 280 formed on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the timing shown in FIG. 16(1), since the symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable icon h0 is not displayed.

Furthermore, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 16 is a special figure low probability general figure low probability state. In the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric power support state, the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed on the second UI unit 281. In addition, the reserved icon display area of the special figure 2 may be provided in a predetermined area (for example, the right end of the display screen) of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric power support state.

On the second UI unit 281, a hold icon representing the hold of Toku-zu 1 is displayed. The number of holdings of the special figure 1 is represented by the number of holding icons of the special figure 1 holding lamp 218, the number of holding icons of the special figure 1 and the second holding number display, and the number of holdings of the special figure 2 is In addition to the number of holding lamps 220 turned on, the number of holding icons and the second holding number display in FIG. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon,.... In the second UI unit 281, the hold icons are displayed side by side, and the hold icons on the right side have the older winning icons.

In FIG. 16(1), two hold icons h11 and h12 of special figure 1 are displayed on the second UI unit 281, and both of these two hold icons h11 and h12 of special figure 1 are in the default display mode. It is displayed in a (circular, non-patterned and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon in Tokushu 1 is a round hold icon. Note that in FIG. 16A, in order to make it easy to understand that the four UI icons are displayed on the second UI unit 281, the ID icons that are not actually displayed are indicated by broken lines. Further, in FIG. 16A, the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 are sectioned by broken lines to facilitate the description, but the broken lines are not actually displayed.

On the other hand, none of the holding icons in special figure 2 are displayed. As described above, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 16 is the non-electric power support state (non-time saving state), it is difficult to open the electric chu and it is difficult to win the special figure 2 starting port 232. This is because.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, depending on the control state (game state), the special icon holding icon of the special drawing which is easier to win in special maps 1 and 2 is displayed, and the holding icon of the other special map is displayed. I try not to display it. That is, when the control state is the non-electric power support state, as shown in FIG. 16(1), the hold icon of special figure 1 is displayed on the second UI unit 281, and the hold icon of special figure 2 is not displayed. On the other hand, when the control state is the power support state, on the contrary, the hold icon of Toku-zu 2 is displayed and the hold icon of Toku-zu 1 is not displayed. Note that the hold icon of Toku-zu 2 may be displayed in the non-electric support state, or the hold icon of Toku-zu 1 may be displayed in the electric support state.

In the present embodiment, the start of the symbol variation display of the special symbol is the variation start in the special symbol display device→the start or the extinction of the fourth symbol blinking→the start of the variation of the second decorative symbol→the start or deletion of the hold icon moving animation→decoration Although it is performed in the order of starting the variation of the symbols, this order may be changed.

In FIG. 16(2), the symbol variation display of the special symbol 1 is started, the symbol variation on the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and the fourth symbol is turned off, but the hold icon or decoration The pattern has not changed yet. In addition, the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 and the variation display of the fourth symbol may start at the same time, or the variation display of the fourth symbol after the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 starts. May be started, or the symbol fluctuation in the first special symbol display device 212 may be started after the variable display of the fourth symbol is started.

In FIG. 16(3), the second hold number display is updated from 2 to 1, and a state in which the variable display of the second decorative symbol is started is shown. In addition, the update display of the second hold number display and the start of the variable display of the second decorative symbol may be performed at the same time, or the change of the second decorative symbol after the update display of the second hold number indicator is performed. The display may be started, or the update display of the second hold number display may be performed after the variable display of the second decorative symbol is started.

In FIG. 16(4), the moving animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 has started. In the movement (decrease) animation here, the hold icon (the target hold icon of the current pattern change) that was at the display position of the first hold icon h11 starts moving toward the base of the change icon in the first UI unit 280. At the same time, the hold icon located at the display position of the second hold icon h12 starts moving toward the display position of the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 (see the first stage hs1 shown in FIG. 14). At this stage, the variable display of the decorative pattern is not started.

In FIG. 16(5), the movement animation continues, and in FIG. 16(6), the hold icon, which was the first hold icon h11 before the start of the change, reaches the base hs0 of the change icon and is displayed as the change icon h0. In addition, the hold icon, which was the second hold icon h12 before the start of the change, reaches the display position of the first hold icon h11, is displayed as the first hold icon h11, and then changes the first decorative symbol. The display starts. In addition, when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, the hold icon which was the first hold icon h11 until then may be viewed as the change icon h0, or the second hold icon until then. The hold icon that was h12 may be viewed as the first hold icon h11. The end of the moving animation and the start of the variable display of the first decorative symbol may be the same timing, or the variable display of the first decorative symbol may be started after the end of the moving animation, or The movement animation may end after the variable display of one decorative pattern starts.
FIG. 16(7) shows a state in which the variable display of the first decorative symbol is being performed.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 16(8), a state where the navigation character advance notice by the navigation character YM is shown. That is, in the decorative pattern display device 208, when the navigation character advance notice is started, a balloon with the letters "opportunity" displayed near the navigation character YM is displayed to inform that the expectation for a big hit is high.

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 16(9) shows that the conversation announcement is started while the navigation character announcement is being given. When the conversation announcement is started, the lord's conversation image CI1 in which the character display of "chance" is displayed together with the lord's character is displayed. The display of the conversation image CI1 of the lord is the first stage of the conversation notice. Moreover, the conversation image CI1 of this lord is overlapped with the first decorative design, and the first decorative design is more difficult to visually recognize than in the case where the first decorative design is not overlapped. Further, in the navigation character notice, the balloon display is changed from the character display of "opportunity" to the character display of "no", and it is informed that the expectation for the jackpot is further increased. It should be noted that the timing at which the lord's conversation image CI1 is displayed may be the same as the timing at which the display in the balloon is updated to “No”, or the display in the balloon after the lord's conversation image CI1 is displayed. May be updated to “No”, or the conversation image CI1 of the lord may be displayed after the display in the balloon is updated to “No”. Note that there may be a case where an effect (for example, “No”) that promotes from a previously displayed notice (for example, “opportunity”) to a later displayed notice (for example, “Extreme heat”) may not be performed. .. Further, the navigation character notice is not limited to the notice in the symbol variation display, but also the notice in advance, the notice indicating that a certain notice will be given, and the explanation display (various notices, game states, characters that appear in the effects of the pachinko machine 100). Or explanation of the stage of production, etc., also referred to as a tutorial display), etc. may be performed.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 16(10), the conversation notice is updated and the navigation character notice is also updated. In the conversation notice, the pal's conversation image CI1 is reduced and displayed below the display position of the second decorative design, and the grandpa's conversation image CI2 is displayed along with the grandfather character's operation promotion notification image. The operation promotion notification image is an image that prompts the player to press the effect button 136 (chance button 136) within the operation valid period, and includes a button image 136a simulating the effect button 136 (chance button 136) and the operation valid period. It is configured by a remaining time display meter MT that indicates the remaining time. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 16(10), the operation valid period has not started, and even if the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, display corresponding to this is not performed. Although the first decorative symbol is hidden by the old conversation image CI2, the player may recognize that the special symbol is changing due to the fourth symbol display device 284, the second decorative symbol, or the like. Sometimes you can. Note that the display position of the decorative pattern may be moved to a position that does not overlap the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather or the conversation image CI1 of the lord so that the decorative pattern is not hidden. In addition, as shown in FIG. 16(10), the palace's conversation image CI1 is at least partially overlapped by the grandpa's conversation image CI2, and the lord's conversation is more than that in the non-overlapping state. It is difficult to visually recognize the display mode of the image CI1. Further, in the navigation character notice, the balloon display is changed from the character display of "No" to the character display of "Extreme heat", and it is informed that the expectation for the big hit is considerably high. Further, the display of this balloon overlaps a part of the old conversation image CI2. Note that the timing at which the grandpa conversation image CI2 is displayed may be the same as the timing at which the display in the balloon is updated to "intense heat", or the timing at which the grandpa conversation image CI2 is displayed is displayed after the grandpa conversation image CI2 is displayed. The display may be updated to "intense heat", or the old conversation image CI2 may be displayed after the display in the balloon is updated to "intense heat". As described above, in this example of performance, the case where the conversation notice is given is more likely to be a big hit than the case where the conversation notice is not given. In addition, when the conversation notice is updated, the lord's conversation image CI1 does not have to be reduced and displayed (for example, the display having the same size as that in FIG. 16(9) is displayed), and the lord's conversation image CI1 is displayed. It may be erased. In addition, the conversation image displayed later may have a size (large or small) different from that of the conversation image displayed first, and the conversation notice A, which has a high degree of expectation for a big hit when displayed, is the conversation image. It may have a size (large or small) different from that of the conversation notice B, which has a lower expectation for a big hit than the notice A.

After that, the operation valid period starts at the timing shown in FIG. The player may be able to see the effect according to the operation by operating the effect button 136 (chance button 136) after the timing shown in FIG. 16(11).

The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 16(12) is shown in a display mode when a predetermined time has elapsed after the operation valid period starts, and then, at the timing shown in FIG. 16(13), the game is played. It is shown that the person is depressing the effect button 136 (chance button 136). At the timing shown in FIG. 16 (12), the navigation character advance notice has ended and the balloon display has been erased. When the production button 136 (chance button 136) is pressed within the operation valid period, as shown in FIG. 16(14), in the grandpa conversation image CI2, the operation promotion notification image is replaced with "a fever." May be displayed. This informs that the reliability of the big hit is considerably high. The notice character display such as "It's intense heat" may be displayed on condition that the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, or the effect button 136 (chance button 136). It may be displayed even when the operation valid period has elapsed without being operated.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 16(15), the conversation image CI1 of the lord and the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather are erased, the conversation notice is ended, and the first decorative pattern is easily visible. It is shown.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 16(16), after “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol of the first decorative symbol, as shown in FIG. 16(17), “decoration” is displayed on the right symbol. 7” is stopped and displayed, and the reach state is formed. Here, when each symbol of the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, a symbol stop display animation may be performed to produce the effect that the symbol is stopped and displayed.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 16(17) to 16(19), when the reach state is formed, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the reach start animation is performed. In the reach start animation in this production example, when the reach state is formed, an animation display for enlarging/reducing the left symbol and the right symbol is performed. It should be noted that an appropriate display mode can be adopted as the display mode of the animation at the start of reach. The player may be able to recognize that the reach effect is started by seeing this reach start animation.

When the reach effect is started, as shown in FIGS. 16(20) to (21), the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are moved and displayed in the upper left and right directions, respectively, and the first UI unit 280 changes. The icon h0 is left behind and the frame is displayed below the display area, and the hold icons h11 to h14 (the hold icon h11 in the effect example shown in FIG. 16(20)) displayed on the second UI unit 281 are also framed out. .. The start of the moving display of the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol and the start of the frame-out display of each image in the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 may be the same timing, or The frame-out display of each image in the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 may be started after the moving display of the left symbol and the right symbol of the decorative symbol is started, or the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281. After the frame-out display of each image in is started, the moving display of the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol may be started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 16(22), the first large-scale behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior accessory 224Gd operate, and overlap on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, respectively. The left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are overlapped by the first large-sized board action product 224Ga and the second large-sized board action product 224Gb, respectively, and are difficult to visually recognize. In addition, the second decorative symbol and the second number-of-holds display are also at least partially overlapped by the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga and the second large board behavior accessory 224Gb, respectively, and are difficult to visually recognize. It should be noted that only a part or all of the first large-board behavior auditors 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior auditors 224Gd may operate, and for example, the first large-board behavior auditors 224Ga to the second large-board behavior auditors 224Ga to 224Ga. The reliability may be different depending on the number of the 4 large-board behavior auditors 224Gd operating. In addition, there may be cases where the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd do not operate.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 16(23), the light guide plate IL emits light, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image is displayed on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. The light guide plate IL may not emit light. For example, there may be a case where both the operations of the first large-scale behavior auditor 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior auditor 224Gd and the light emission of the light guide plate IL are performed, or the first large-scale behavior auditor 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior. There may be a case where only the accessory 224Gd is operated and the light guide plate IL does not emit light, or only the light guide plate IL emits light, and the first large-scale behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior There is a case where the operation of the object 224Gd is not performed, and there is a case where both the operation of the first large board action member 224Ga to the fourth large board action object 224Gd and the light emission of the light guide plate Il are not performed. Good.

After that, as shown in FIG. 16(24), after the light emission of the light guide plate IL ends, as shown in FIG. 17(25), the first large-board behavior auditor product 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior auditor product 224Gd are respectively initialized. Return to position. In addition, the light emission of the light guide plate IL may be terminated after the first large-scale behavior member 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior member 224Gd return to their initial positions, or the first large-scale behavior member 224Ga to the second large-scale behavior member 224Ga to The start of the movement of the four-large-board behavior accessory 224Gd to the initial position and the end of the light emission of the light guide plate IL may be performed at the same time. Here, in FIG. 16 (22) to FIG. 24 (24 ), a series of effects performed by the first large board behavioral member 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral object 224Gd and the light guide plate IL is performed in a series. It may be configured so that a big hit is more likely to occur than in the case where no effect is performed.

In FIG. 17 (26), the state of development into super reach (swordsman reach) is shown. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 17(26), the image of the enemy swordsman is displayed in a large size, and in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 17(27), a duel scene between the main character and the enemy swordsman Animation is displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 17(28), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed, showing that the button effect is started. After that, when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) starts at the timing shown in FIG. 17 (29), the player can receive the operation of the effect button 136 (chance button 136).

The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 17(30) shows that the operation valid period has started and the gauge has decreased, and thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 17(31), the player It is shown that the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is being pressed. When the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is pressed within the operation valid period, as shown in FIG. 17 (32), the cut-in image CI3 of the lord is displayed to notify that the jackpot is highly reliable. Notice production is performed. The lord's cut-in image CI3 overlaps the animation display of the duel scene, and is difficult to visually recognize as compared with the case where the lord's cut-in image CI3 is not displayed. The cut-in image C13 of the lord may be displayed on condition that the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, or the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated. Alternatively, it may be displayed even when the operation valid period has elapsed.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 17(33), the cut-in image CI3 of the lord is erased, and the animation display of the duel scene continues.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 17 (34), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed, and it is shown that the second button effect has started after developing to super reach. ing. After that, when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) starts at the timing shown in FIG. 17 (35), the player can receive the operation of the effect button 136 (chance button 136).

In the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 17(36), it is shown that the operation valid period has started and the gauge has decreased, and thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 17(37), the player It is shown that the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is being pressed. It should be noted that the operation effective period in the second button effect after developing to super reach may be shorter than the operation effective period in the first button effect after developing to super reach. In this case, the operation reaches the super reach. The speed at which the gauge in the remaining time display meter MT decreases in the second button effect after the start may be faster than the speed in which the gauge decreases in the remaining time display meter MT in the first button effect after developing to super reach. Also, the operation valid period in the first button performance after developing to super reach may be shorter than the operation valid period in the second button performance after developing to super reach, or after developing to super reach. The operation valid period in the first button effect and the operation valid period in the second button effect after the development to the super reach may have the same length.

When the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is pressed within the operation valid period, as shown in FIG. 17 (38), the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the animation display of the duel scene to the display of the effect image. Along with this, the first large-board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior accessory 224Gd operate, and overlap on the front surface side of the decorative symbol display device 208, respectively. The left pattern and the right pattern of the effect image and the first decorative pattern are respectively overlapped by the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral object 224Gd, and the first large board behavioral object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral object. It is considered to be difficult to visually recognize as compared with the case where it is not overlapped by 224 Gd. In addition, the second decorative symbol and the second number-of-holds display are also at least partially overlapped by the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga and the second large board behavior accessory 224Gb, respectively, and are difficult to visually recognize. It should be noted that only a part or all of the first large-board behavior auditors 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior auditors 224Gd may operate, and for example, the first large-board behavior auditors 224Ga to the second large-board behavior auditors 224Ga to 224Ga. The reliability may be different depending on the number of the 4 large-board behavior auditors 224Gd operating. The effect shown in FIG. 17 (38) may be displayed on condition that the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, or the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated. It may be displayed even when the operation valid period has elapsed without being performed. In addition, there may be a case where only one of the display of the effect image and the operation of the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior object 224Gd is performed. In addition, when both the display of the effect image and the operation of the first large-scale behavioral goods 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavioral goods 224Gd are performed, the first large-scale behavioral goods 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavioral goods 224Ga to the fourth after the effect images are displayed. The operation of the large-scale behavior accessory 224Gd may be started, the effect image may be displayed after the operations of the first large-scale behavior auditor 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior auditor 224Gd are started, or the effect image may be displayed. And the operation of the first large-scale behavioral accessory 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavioral accessory 224Gd may be started at the same time. When the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is pressed within the operation valid period, the effect shown in FIG. 17 (38) may not be performed, and an effect display that causes a loss may be performed. It is also possible to display the revival effect and perform the effect display that is a big hit after the effect display is displayed. It should be noted that when the effect shown in FIG. 17 (38) is started, the displayed variable icon h0 is hidden, but it may be continuously displayed.

Then, in FIG. 17 (39), the thousand-box box accessory 224H moves and moves downward, and overlaps with the decorative symbol display device 208 and the first large-board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior accessory 224Gd. Is shown. Further, thereafter, in FIG. 17 (40 ), it is shown that the light guide plate IL emits light. Note that the display of the effect image, the operations of the first large-board behavior auditors 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior auditors 224Gd, the operation of the thousand box cabinet auditors 224H, and the order of starting the light emission of the light guide plate IL are not limited to those described above. Instead, it can be set appropriately. In addition, all of the display of the effect image, the operation of the first large board action product 224Ga to the fourth large board action product 224Gd, the operation of the thousand-box action product 224H, and the light emission of the light guide plate IL may be performed. There may be cases where the division is not conducted.

FIG. 17 (41) shows a state where the light emission of the light guide plate IL is completed. After that, as shown in FIG. 17 (42), the thousand-axle box accessory 224H starts to rise toward the initial position. After that, in FIG. 17(43), the effect image fades out, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 17(44), the first large-board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior accessory 224Gd respectively move toward the initial positions. Has started. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the animation display of the duel scene whose display has been interrupted is restarting while fading in. At this time, the display of the variable icon h0 is also restarted.

Thereafter, the animation display of the duel scene continues until FIG. 17 (46). In FIG. 17(46), the main character wins over the enemy swordsman, and in FIG. 17(47), "decoration 7" is displayed on the middle pattern to notify that it is a big hit. Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 17 (48), the animation display of the duel scene fades out, and as shown in FIG. 18 (49), the first decorative pattern is “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”. The swing fluctuation starts with the combination of decorative patterns. It should be noted that the second decorative design is still displayed in a variable manner for all of the left design, the middle design, and the right design. The background here may be a non-displayed background image, a background image different from that before the super reach is performed, or the same background image as before the super reach is performed. .. In addition, at this time, the variable icon h0 and the special icon 1 hold icon are not displayed, but the variable icon h0 and the special icon 1 hold icon may be displayed. Although the navigation character YM is not displayed, the navigation character YM may be displayed.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 18 (50), the first special figure display device 212 is displayed in the display mode of special figure A. At the timing shown in FIG. 18(50), the first special figure display device 212 is stopped and displayed, but the first sub-control unit 400 has not received the symbol variation stop command from the main control unit 300. Therefore, since it is not determined that the symbol is confirmed to stop, the swing fluctuation continues in the first decorative symbol, and the second decorative symbol and the fourth symbol display device 284 are still displaying the fluctuation.

After that, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol fluctuation stop command, as shown in FIG. 18 (51), the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are decorations of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7", respectively. Along with the stop display in the combination of symbols, the fourth symbol display device 284 displays the symbols in a manner that the symbols have stopped.

After that, when the big hit game starts and the winning effect start command is transmitted from the main control part 300 to the first sub control part 400, as shown in FIG. 18 (52), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the big hit start effect. The display starts. This time, since it is a big hit game started as a big hit with a combination of decorative patterns of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7", a "special bonus" is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208, and the game is played. It has been informed to the person that it is a 15R probability variation big hit. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 18 (52), a mini right hit display for instructing a right hit is performed in the upper left corner of the display area. Note that the mini right-handed display may not be performed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 18 (53), after the right hitting instruction screen for instructing the player to right hit is displayed, as shown in FIG. 18 (54), the first round is started. When the first round is started, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a round effect and displays "decoration 7" indicating a combination of decorative symbols when a big hit occurs in the lower right corner of the display screen. Has been done. In addition, a mini right hit display is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen, and "1R" which is the current round is displayed in the upper right corner. It should be noted that the number of prize balls obtained in the jackpot game or the total number of prize balls obtained during the continuous vacation may be displayed.

After that, when the big hit game is digested and the 15th round is started, as shown in FIG. 18 (55), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs the round effect display, and at the upper right corner of the display area, The current round "15R" is displayed.

FIG. 18 (56) shows that the big hit game is finished, and the big hit end effect display is being performed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Since the big hit game this time is a big hit game started as a 15R probability variable big hit, after the big hit game ends, the game state becomes a special figure high probability general figure high probability state (probably changed state with electric support). Therefore, in the big hit end effect display, "Yoshimune RUSH rush" indicating that is displayed, and it is informed that the state shifts to the probability changing state with electric support.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 18 (57), a display for calling attention to forgetting to take out the prepaid card inserted in the card unit 608 (see FIG. 4) (attention display) is displayed. In addition, this warning display may be displayed only when the big hit game in the first big hit that became a big hit in the game state not being electric support is over, or regardless of the situation where the big hit is a big hit It may be displayed without fail when the game is over.

FIG. 18 (58) shows the state before the jackpot game is over, the state changes to the positive variation state with electric support, and the first symbol variation display is started. In the probability variation state with electric support, the background image is the background image for the probability variation state with electric support, and the decorative design is also a display mode different from the normal game state (special figure low probability general figure low probability state) .. Further, a hold icon display area 282 of special figure 2 is formed in the lower center of the display screen, and the number of hold of special figure 2 is notified by the number of displayed icons. Here, the default display mode of the hold icon of the special figure 2 is a rectangular unpatterned and white display mode, and the display mode (shape here) is different from that of the hold icon of the special figure 1, and the player Can be discriminated from at a glance. The default display mode of the hold icon of special figure 1 and the default display mode of the hold icon of special figure 2 may be the same. 18(58) to (63), in order to make it easier to understand that the four hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, the hold that is not actually displayed is displayed. The icon is indicated by a broken line. Further, in FIG. 18 (58) to (63), the hold icon display area 282 of FIG. 2 is divided by a broken line to facilitate the description, but the broken line is actually displayed. Not done. Further, in the probability change state with power support, the holding icon of Toku-zu 1 is not displayed, but it may be displayed. In addition, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 18 (58), a mini right hit display is performed in the upper left corner of the display screen, and a character of "bonus ×○" indicating the number of consecutive holidays is displayed below it. ing. At the timing shown in FIG. 18 (58), since the first big hit game is over, "bonus x 1" indicating that is displayed.

Then, after the variable display of the symbols on the first special symbol display device 212 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 18(59), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 18(60) instructs the player to right-stroke. Right hit notification is displayed. This right-handed notification is displayed in a mode in which the characters "please right-hand" are displayed on the semitransparent strip image. The right-hand hit notification overlaps the decorative design, and the decorative design is more difficult to visually recognize than in the case where the decorative design does not overlap. The right-handed notification is displayed only in the electric sapo state that has transitioned after the first big hit game, but may also be displayed in the electric sapo state that has transitioned after the big hit game other than the first big hit game has finished. For example, it may be displayed every time the big hit game ends and the electric power support state is entered. Further, after shifting to the electric support state, the right-handed notification may be displayed even when it is detected that the player is left-handed. For example, it is detected that the player has won the first special figure starting port 230. In this case, it may be determined that the left-handed stroke has been performed and the right-handed stroke notification may be displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 18(60), the second hold number display is displayed at the lower right corner of the display area.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 18 (61), a state in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is started is shown. After that, when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses after the right-handing notification is displayed, the right-handing notification is hidden as shown in FIG. 18 (62). Note that the mini right-handed display continues to be performed.

FIG. 18 (63) shows a state in which the symbol variation display of special figure 2 is suspended. That is, in the special figure 2 hold lamp 220, all four lamps are turned on to indicate that there are four special figure 2 holds, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icons h21 to h24 of the special figure 2 are held. Is displayed four times. Also, in the second hold number display, “4” is displayed, which indicates that the number of hold numbers in the special figure 2 is four.

FIG. 19 (49a) shows another effect example following that of FIG. 17 (48). 16 to 17, the case where "decoration 7" is in the reach state and the middle pattern is "decoration 7" is described, but here, "decoration 6" is in the reach state. A case where "decoration 6" is displayed on the design will be described. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 19 (49a), a state in which the first decorative pattern is shaken and changed by a combination of decorative patterns "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6" is shown. It should be noted that the second decorative design is still displayed in a variable manner for all of the left design, the middle design, and the right design. The background here may be a non-displayed background image, a background image different from that before the super reach is performed, or the same background image as before the super reach is performed. In addition, at this time, the variable icon h0 and the special icon 1 hold icon are not displayed, but the variable icon h0 and the special icon 1 hold icon may be displayed. Although the navigation character YM is not displayed, the navigation character YM may be displayed.

After that, the first special figure display device 212 is displayed in the display mode of special figure B at the timing shown in FIG. 19 (50a). At the timing shown in FIG. 19 (50a), the first sub-control unit 400 is in a state of not receiving the symbol variation stop command from the main control unit 300, so it is not judged as the symbol fixed stop, The first decorative symbol continues to shake and fluctuate, and the second decorative symbol and the fourth symbol display device 284 are still in the variable display.

After that, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol fluctuation stop command, as shown in FIG. 19 (51a), the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are decorations of "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6", respectively. Along with the stop display in the combination of symbols, the fourth symbol display device 284 displays the symbols in a manner that the symbols have stopped. By seeing this, the player may be able to recognize that the actual 5R probability variation big hit, the 5R normal big hit, or any of the 2R normal big hits.

After that, when the big hit game starts and the winning effect start command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400, as shown in FIG. 19 (52a), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the big hit start effect is produced. The display will start. This time, since it is a big hit game started as a big hit with a combination of decoration patterns of "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6", a "bonus" is displayed on the decoration pattern display device 208, and the player In fact, it is reported that either the 5R probability variation big hit, the 5R normal big hit, or the 2R normal big hit. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 19 (52a), a mini right hit display is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen.

FIG. 19 (38b) shows another effect example following that of FIG. 17 (37). FIG. 19 (38b) shows that the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is pressed within the operation valid period, but the result of the loss is displayed. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 6" is displayed on the middle symbol, and it is informed that there will be a loss. At this time, the display of the variable icon h0 is resumed. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 19 (39b), the first decorative symbol fades out, and the animation display of the duel scene is restarted. Here, the main character loses to the enemy swordsman, and then the animation display of the duel scene fades out. It remains and is hidden.

Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 19(41b) to (42b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 (holding frame) are scrolled in from below the display area, and the holding icon is displayed. The navigation character YM is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 19 (42b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the fluctuation fluctuation is started in the combination of the decorative symbols of the first decorative symbol "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7". It should be noted that the second decorative design is still displayed in a variable manner for all of the left design, the middle design, and the right design.

After that, the first special figure display device 212 is displayed in the display mode of the special figure I at the timing shown in FIG. 19 (43b). At the timing shown in FIG. 19 (43b), the first sub-control unit 400 has not received the symbol variation stop command from the main control unit 300, so it is not determined to be the symbol fixed stop, The fluctuation of the first decorative symbol is continuously changed, and the second decorative symbol and the fourth symbol display device 284 are still in the variable display.

After that, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol variation stop command, as shown in FIG. 19 (44b), the first decorative design and the second decorative design are decorations of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7", respectively. Along with the stop display in the combination of symbols, the fourth symbol display device 284 displays the symbols in a manner that the symbols have stopped.

Subsequently, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 19 (45b), the variable icon erasing animation is displayed. In the variable icon deletion animation display, the variable icon h0 gradually becomes smaller, and finally, the animation display in which the variable icon h0 disappears is performed as shown in FIG. 19 (46b). The variable icon deletion animation may be started before the special figure is stopped.

Next, a specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.
FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an example of the timer advance notice effect step by step.

In FIG. 20, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the general figure display device 210, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the general figure holding lamp 216 and the fourth figure. Illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 20(1), the variable display of the decorative symbol is shown. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 20(1), the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is 1, the first holding icon h11 is displayed, and in the second holding number display, the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is displayed. “1” indicating that is 1 is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 20(2) shows that the timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, the timer notice effect is started by the timer notice display TM1 being framed in from the right side of the display screen. "10:00" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, which suggests that a certain notice effect will be started 10 seconds after the countdown is started. In this effect example, the countdown is started when the frame advance of the timer advance notice display TM1 is started, but after the frame advance of the timer advance notice display TM1 is completed (that is, the display shown in FIG. The countdown may be started (after that).

After that, as shown in FIGS. 20(3) to 20(7), the countdown on the timer advance notice display TM1 is continuously performed until it becomes “00:00”. Here, at the timing shown in FIG. 20(5), "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol, and at the timing shown in FIG. 20(6), "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol.

When the display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00" and the countdown is completed, as shown in FIG. 20(8), the timer notice display TM1 replaces the timer display and calls attention to the notice. Character is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 20(9), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the pseudo symbol pattern in which the character of the lord is displayed in the middle symbol starts to move at a low speed from the upper side to the lower side. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 20(10), the timer notice display TM1 is erased, and as shown in FIG. 20(11), the pseudo continuous symbol is stopped and displayed, and then shown in FIG. 20(12). As described above, the cut-in display including the lord's character and the character display of "continuation" is performed. In this embodiment, in this manner, the pseudo-relational symbols are stopped and displayed, thereby informing that the pseudo-relational is being executed. Here, the pseudo-relation is a variable display mode of the decorative symbol in which the variation start and the temporary stop display of the decorative symbol are executed plural times in the variable display of one special symbol. In the present embodiment, the larger the number of times the pseudo-repeating is executed, the larger the chance of being hit. The pseudo-relational pattern may be framed out downward without being stopped and displayed. When the pseudo-relational pattern is framed out downward, the pseudo-relational pattern is not started, and the decorative pattern with the missing pattern is not displayed. The combination may be stopped and displayed, or the reach state may be set and the reach effect may be started. In this way, in this example of performance, the timer is notified so that the pseudo-relation is started after the countdown is completed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 20(13), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is restarted. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, “×2” indicating that the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-link is started is displayed in a large size so as to overlap the first decorative symbol.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 20(14), the display of “×2” is reduced and moved to the lower side of the second decorative symbol.

FIG. 20(3a) shows another effect example following FIG. 20(2). In this example of performance, "20:00" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, which suggests that a certain notice effect will be started 20 seconds after the countdown is started.

After that, when a predetermined time (e.g., 8 seconds) elapses, as shown in FIGS. 20(10a) to (11a), the first pseudo-coupling is performed in the above-described manner. Then, as shown in FIG. 12 (14a), the second variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed. Note that FIG. 20(10a), FIG. 20(11a), and FIG. 20(14a) are effects corresponding to FIG. 20(10), FIG. 20(11), and FIG. 14(14), respectively.

Then, after “decoration 7” and “decoration 6” are stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, as shown in FIG. 20 (15a), 20 seconds have elapsed since the timer advance notice effect was started, and the timer When the timer display of the advance notice display TM1 becomes “00:00”, as shown in FIG. 20(16a), in the timer advance notice display TM1, the word “attention” indicating that the notice is to be noticed instead of the timer display is displayed. Is displayed. Further, at this time, the right design changes from "decoration 6" to "decoration 7". The right symbol may remain unchanged as "decoration 6". Then, as shown in FIGS. 20(16a) to (17a), the second pseudo run is performed in the same manner as the first pseudo run. As described above, the timer advance notice effects shown in FIGS. 20(3a) to (17a) give advance notice that the second pseudo-relation will be started. Further, the fact that the second pseudo-relation is being announced in advance can mean that the first pseudo-relation is also being started. It can be said that the start of the first and second simulated runs has been announced. Note that the timer advance notice in this example of performance is a notice of the start of the second pseudo-relation, but it may be a notice of another type of notice or the occurrence of an effect.

FIG. 20(7b) shows another effect example following FIG. 20(6). 20(7b) to (11b) correspond to FIG. 20(7) to (11), respectively. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 20(7b), the display in the timer notice display TM1 is "00:00", indicating that the countdown has been completed. Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 20 (8b-1), the face image of the lord's character to which the balloon line "Ikuze" is added instead of the "attention" character display in the timer notice display TM1. YMF is displayed. Then, after that, as shown in FIG. 20 (8b-2), the timer advance notice display TM1 is erased. In this way, the notice other than the timer notice display TM1 may be used to call attention to the notice. It should be noted that the means for urging the attention to the notice after the countdown in the timer notice production is completed is not limited to the display, and may be performed by a voice or a lamp, or a combination of two or more of the display, the voice, and the lamp. You may do it.

Then, as shown in FIG. 20 (9b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a display in which the pseudo continuous symbol in which the lord's character is represented in the middle symbol moves at a low speed from the upper side to the lower side is started. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 20(10b), the moving display of the pseudo continuous symbol is continuously performed, and the face image YMF of the lord's character is erased, as shown in FIG. 20(11b). After the pseudo continuous symbol is stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 20(12), a cut-in display including the character of the lord and the character display of "continuation" is performed.

In this example of effect, when the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 becomes “00:00”, the corresponding effect (pseudo run) is started, but the timer display becomes “00:00”. However, there may be a case where an effect corresponding to this is not performed.

Further, another notice may be given while the timer notice countdown is being performed on the timer notice display TM1. In this case, this notice may be a notice related to the timer notice effect or a notice not related to the timer notice effect.
FIG. 21 is a diagram showing another example of the timer announcement effect step by step.

FIG. 21(a1) shows another effect example following FIG. 20(7). When the display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00" and the countdown is completed, as shown in FIG. 21(a1), the timer notice display TM1 replaces the timer display and calls attention to the notice. Character is displayed.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 21(a2), the navigation character YM is displayed with the sword facing toward the variable icon h0. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 21(a3), the timer notice display TM1 is erased. Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 21(a4), a state in which a beam is emitted from the sword held by the navigation character YM toward the variable icon h0 is displayed, and then shown in FIG. 21(a5). As described above, the advance notice display in which the character "heat" is added to the variable icon h0 is displayed. The look-ahead notice display may be performed by changing the display mode of the hold icon instead of the variable icon h0. After that, as shown in FIG. 21(a6), after the navigation character YM returns to the default display mode, as shown in FIG. 21(a7), the reach state by "decoration 7" occurs. In this way, it can be said that the timer advance notice effect in this example effect is an effect that gives advance notice that the advance notice is given.

FIG. 21B1 shows a state after the timer advance notice effect has started. In the timer advance notice effect in this effect example, the timer display displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1 is started as "30:00", that is, the advance notice effect that 30 seconds have elapsed after the countdown was started. Is to be started. At the timing shown in FIG. 21(b1), the display on the timer notice display TM1 is "29:69". As described above, a plurality of types of countdown time may be prepared for the timer announcement effect. For example, the longer the countdown time, the higher the reliability of the jackpot may be. The shorter the length, the higher the reliability of the big hit may be configured, or the reliability of the big hit may be configured to remain unchanged regardless of the countdown time.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 21(b2), about 8 seconds have elapsed from the start of the countdown, and in the first decorative pattern, the reach effect by "decoration 7" has started. It is shown.

When the reach effect is started, as shown in FIG. 21(b3), the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are moved to the upper left and right respectively, and displayed, and in the first UI unit 280, the variable icon h0 is displayed. The frame icon is framed out below the screen, and the hold icon displayed on the second UI unit 281 is also framed out.

After that, in FIG. 21(b4), the state of development into super reach (swordsman reach) is shown. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 21(b4), the image of the enemy swordsman is displayed in a large size, and subsequently, as shown in FIG. 21(b5), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the main character and the enemy character Animation of the duel scene with the swordsman begins. During this time, the countdown on the timer advance notice display TM1 is continued. Then, as shown in FIG. 21(b5), when the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 becomes “00:00”, as shown in FIG. 21(b6), the timer advance notice display TM1 is changed to the timer display and the advance notice is displayed. "Attention" is displayed to encourage attention to. Then, as shown in FIG. 21(b7), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the advance notice in which the character "heat" is added to the variable icon h0. As described above, in this effect example, the timer advance notice effect is started during the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the timer advance notice effect is continuously performed even after the transition to the reach state.

FIG. 21(b4′-2) shows another effect example following FIG. 21(b4). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 21(b4′-2), it is shown that the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is “02:37” after the animation display of the duel scene is started. There is. In other words, the state is shown when approximately 27 seconds have elapsed since the countdown by the timer advance notice effect was started. In addition, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 21(b4′-2), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed, and the appearance that the button effect is started is shown. It should be noted that this button effect is different from the effect announced by the timer notification effect. After that, as shown in FIG. 21(b5′), when the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 becomes “00:00”, as shown in FIG. 21(b6′), the timer notice display TM1 is changed to the timer display. The word “Attention” is displayed to encourage attention to the notice. Then, as shown in FIG. 21( b 7 ′), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the advance notice in which the character “heat” is added to the variable icon h 0. As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that the notice display (or effect) that is performed as a result of the countdown in the timer notice effect is being performed during the execution of the button effect.

In the above-described production example, the example in which the change display of the variation icon h0 is displayed as the production performed as a result of the countdown in the timer notice production is described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and other productions may be performed. For example, as shown in FIG. 21(b7″), the color of the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT may change to give a notice.

FIG. 21(b6″″) shows another example of effect following FIG. 21(b5). When the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 becomes “00:00”, as shown in FIG. 21(b6″″), the timer notice advance display TM1 replaces the timer display and calls attention to the advance notice. Is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 21(b6″″-2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display mode of the variable icon h0 changes to perform the advance notice display, and the animation display of the duel scene is a big hit reliability. It is shown that the display is switched to the cut-in display showing that the degree is extremely high. In the cut-in display, the princess character is displayed large on the right side of the display screen, and the character "Jitsuatsu" indicating that the reliability of the big hit is extremely high is displayed. It should be noted that this cut-in display may be a notice display that confirms a big hit. As described above, in this effect example, as a result of the countdown in the timer notice effect, two or more notice displays are displayed. The display mode of the variable icon h0 may not change and only the cut-in display may be performed.

The example productions shown in FIGS. 21(c1) to 21(c2) show how the lever production starts as a result of the countdown in the timer notice production. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 21(c1), the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00" during the execution of the animation display of the duel scene, and instead of the timer display, the notice is urged to be noticed. The "attention" character is displayed. In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 in this production example, a production lever 136V is provided in addition to the production button 136 (chance button 136) as the operation means for production.

Then, as shown in FIG. 21(c2), a lever image 136Va simulating the effect lever 136V and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed, showing that the lever effect is started. After that, as shown in FIG. 21(c3), the timer advance notice display TM1 is erased. As described above, in this effect example, the lever effect is started as a result of the countdown in the timer notice effect, but the button effect described above may be performed instead of the lever effect.

There may be a plurality of types of button effects depending on the degree of expectation for a big hit (for example, a button image 136a in a default mode, or a button image 136a having a different color from the default mode (for example, red or gold). , A button image 136a in which a character notation (for example, “excited heat” or “expectation large”, etc.) or a character is added to the default mode, a button image 136a different in size from the default mode (for example, a large button effect or a mini button) Production), button images 136a that are displayed in a larger number than the default mode (for example, when three button images 136a are displayed, the same number of operations as the number of button images 136a (for example, three times) are performed. Alternatively, the operation may be performed a number of times different from the number of button images 136a (for example, once, twice, four times, etc.) In addition, the effect buttons 136 (chance buttons 136) may be operated. As the response display according to the operation, a number corresponding to the number of button images 136a may be displayed, or a number different from the number of button images 136a may be displayed.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 21D1 to 21D4 show that the effect movable body operates as a result of the countdown in the timer notice effect. As shown in FIG. 21(d1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the reach is achieved by "decoration 7" in the first decorative symbol, and the reach effect is shown. In the first UI unit 280, the variable icon h0 remains and is framed out downward, and the hold icon displayed in the second UI unit 281 is also framed out downward. Further, a timer advance notice effect is also performed, and at the timing shown in FIG. 21(d1), the timer advance notice display TM1 shows that the timer display is "00:00". After that, as shown in FIG. 21(d2), the timer notice display TM1 is replaced with the timer display, and the word "attention" to urge attention to the notice is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 21(d3), the first large-board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior accessory 224Gd operate and overlap on the front surface side of the decorative symbol display device 208, respectively. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 21(d4), the timer advance notice display TM1 is erased. As described above, in this production example, as a result of the countdown in the timer notice production, the first large-board behavior auditors Ga to the fourth large-board behavior auditors Gd as the movable bodies are shown to operate. The object 224E or the Senryo box role product 224H may operate, and two or more of the first large board behavior product Ga to the fourth large board behavior product Gd, the family crest role product 224E, and the Senryo box role product 224H operate. May be.
FIG. 22 is a diagram showing another example of the timer advance notice effect step by step.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22(1), the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 22(1), the number of holdings in the special figure 1 is 1, the first holding icon h11 is displayed, and in the second holding number display, the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is displayed. “1” indicating that is 1 is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in FIG. 22(1), the above-mentioned timer advance notice effect is started, and the timer advance notice display TM1 is displayed on the right side of the center of the display screen. At the timing shown in FIG. 22(1), the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is "09:69".

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22(2) shows that the navigation character YM is performing the timer addition effect. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, when the timer addition effect starts, a balloon with the characters "addition" displayed near the navigation character YM is displayed, and the time is added to the timer display in the timer notice display TM1. Is notified. That is, it is notified that the time of the countdown performed in the timer announcement effect is extended. It should be noted that, for example, a button effect, a pseudo continuous effect, an opportunity advance notification, a pre-reading announcement, or the like may be given from the time when the timer announcement effect is started until the timer addition effect is started. ..

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 22(3), in the balloon of the navigation character YM, “+10 seconds” indicating the time to be added is displayed, and the time to be added is informed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 22(4), the effect of adding time is performed by the display of the count-up animation in which the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is variably displayed at high speed. Note that the count-up animation display may not be performed. Further, instead of displaying the count-up animation, as shown in FIG. 22(4a), the effect images may be overlapped in such a manner that the display state of the timer display in the timer notice display TM is difficult to visually recognize. After the effect image shown in FIG. 22(4a) is displayed, the count-up animation shown in FIG. 22(4) may be displayed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22(5), the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is updated to "15:00", and 10 seconds are added to the time in the timer display. .. That is, it can be said that the display mode in the timer advance notice display TM1 is changed by the effect of adding the timer. Note that the countdown display may be stopped or the countdown display may be advanced while the timer addition effect is being performed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 22(6), the balloon of the navigation character YM is erased, and after a predetermined time (for example, about 3 seconds after the completion of the timer addition effect) has elapsed, the first pseudo continuous effect. Is started, and the pseudo-relational symbols are stopped and displayed at the timing shown in FIG.

In this effect example, when the timer addition effect is performed and the time is added to the timer display, the jackpot is more likely to be a big hit than when the time is not added. There may be no change or it may be difficult to make a big hit.

The example productions shown in FIGS. 22(1b) to 22(6b) show a state in which the timer addition effect by the conversation announcement is performed instead of the timer addition effect by the navigation character YM described above. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22(1b), the variable display of the decorative symbol is shown. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 22(1b), the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is 1, and the first holding icon h11 is displayed, and in the second holding number display, the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is displayed. “1” indicating that is 1 is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in FIG. 22(1b), the above-mentioned timer advance notice effect is started, and the timer advance notice display TM1 is displayed on the center right side of the display screen. At the timing shown in FIG. 22(1b), the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is “09:69”. Further, in FIG. 22(1b), the conversation announcement is started, and the lord's conversation image CI1 in which the character display of “chance” is displayed together with the lord's character is displayed. The timing at which the timer notice effect is started and the timing at which the conversation notice is started may be the same, the conversation notice may be started after the timer notice effect is started, or the conversation notice may be given. The timer advance notice effect may be started after it is started. In addition, the sir's conversation image CI1 is partially overlapped with the timer notice display TM1, and the display of the sir's conversation image CI1 is more difficult to visually recognize than in the case where it is not overlapped. Further, the timer notice display TM1 may be overlapped with the conversation image CI1 of the lord.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 22(2b), the conversation notice is updated, and the conversation image CI1 of the lord is displayed in a reduced size and moved below the display position of the second decorative pattern, and the old character is displayed. At the same time, the grandpa's conversation image CI2 is displayed in which the character display "10 seconds extra!" indicating the additional time is displayed. As a result, it is notified that the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM will add 10 seconds to the time. It should be noted that the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice production is continuously performed. In addition, the grand conversation image CI2 is partially overlapped with the timer notice display TM1, and it is more difficult to visually recognize the display of the grand conversation image CI2 than in the case where the timer announcement display TM1 is not overlapped. Further, the timer notice display TM1 may be overlapped with the old conversation image CI2.

Then, as shown in FIG. 22(4b), the effect of adding time is performed by the display of the count-up animation described above.

After that, after the conversation image CI1 of the lord and the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather are erased and the conversation notice ends, as shown in FIG. 22(6b), the count-up animation display ends and the timer display in the timer notice display TM is displayed. The time is updated to "15:00", and 10 seconds is added to the time displayed on the timer. In addition, in this effect example, the count-up animation display ends after the conversation notice ends, but, for example, as shown in FIG. 22(4b′-1) to FIG. 22(4b′-2), The conversation announcement may be continued until the count-up animation display ends. Further, the timing of ending the conversation notice and the timing of ending the count-up animation display may be the same.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 22(1c) to 22(6c) show another example of the timer-added effect according to the conversation notice. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22(1c), the variable display of the decorative symbol is shown. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 22(1c), the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is 1, the first holding icon h11 is displayed, and in the second holding number display, the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is displayed. “1” indicating that is 1 is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in FIG. 22(1c), the above-mentioned timer advance notice effect is started, and the timer advance notice display TM1 is displayed on the center right side of the display screen. At the timing shown in FIG. 22(1c), the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is "09:69". In addition, in FIG. 22(1c), the conversation announcement is started, and the lord's conversation image CI1 in which the character display of "chance" is displayed together with the lord's character is displayed. It should be noted that the lord's conversation image CI1 is partially overlapped with the timer notice display TM1, and the display of the lord's conversation image CI1 is more difficult to visually recognize than in the case where the timer notice display TM1 is not overlapped. Further, the timer notice display TM1 may be overlapped with the conversation image CI1 of the lord.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (2c-1), the conversation notice is updated, and the conversation image CI1 of the lord is displayed in a reduced size and moved below the display position of the second decorative pattern. The old conversation image CI2 on which the operation promotion notification image described above is displayed is displayed together with the character. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 22(2c-1), the operation valid period has not started, and even if the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, the corresponding display is not performed. Further, even during the execution of the conversation notice, the countdown by the timer notice effect is continuously performed.

Then, the operation valid period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 22 (2c-2). FIG. 22 (2c-3) shows a state in which about 1.5 seconds have elapsed since the operation valid period was started, and the length of the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is a length corresponding to the elapsed time. It is decreasing. After that, when the operation valid period elapses without operating the effect button 136 (chance button 136), as shown in FIG. 22 (2c-4), the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT disappears and the player is informed. The fact is notified. Then, as shown in FIG. 22(3c), the display of the old conversation image CI2 is changed to the character display of "10 seconds additional time" indicating the time added from the operation prompting notification image, and in the timer notice display TM. It is notified that 10 seconds will be added to the timer display. It should be noted that when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is not operated during the operation valid period, the time addition on the timer display may not be performed. In addition, when the production button 136 (chance button 136) is operated during the operation valid period, the gauge in the remaining time display meter MT is once disappeared, and then the display is changed to "add 10 seconds." Alternatively, the display may be changed to a character display of "additional 10 seconds" without displaying the gauge on the remaining time display meter MT. In addition, on condition that the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated during the operation valid period, the character display of "It is an additional 10 seconds" may be displayed after the operation valid period has elapsed. When the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated during the operation valid period, 10 seconds is added to the time indicated by the timer display at the timing when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated. May be. That is, a display may be performed in which 10 seconds are added to the remaining time when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is pressed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 22(4c), the effect of adding time is performed by the display of the count-up animation described above. In this case, the count-up animation display may be terminated after the conversation advance notice is ended, or the conversation advance notice may be continued until the count-up animation display is ended. May end at the same time as the end of the count-up animation display.

Then, after the conversation image CI1 of the lord and the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather are erased and the conversation notice ends, as shown in FIG. 22 (6c), the count-up animation display ends and the timer display in the timer notice display TM is displayed. It is updated and 10 seconds is added to the time in the timer display. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 22(6c), after 10 seconds is added to the time in the timer display, the timer display counts down to "09:85".

In addition, in this effect example, as shown in FIGS. 22(2c-2) to (2c-4), the countdown display in the timer notice effect is continuously displayed even during the operation valid period. After the operation valid period starts at the timing shown in FIG. 22(2c-2), as shown in FIG. 22(2c-3'), the countdown update display in the timer notice effect is not displayed during the operation valid period. 22 (2c-4') at the timing when the operation valid period has elapsed since the timer was displayed internally (leaving the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 as "06:00"). The timing result (for example, 2.00 seconds remaining at the timing shown in FIG. 22(2c-4')) may be reflected on the timer display of the timer advance notice display TM1 to restart the countdown update display.

Further, for example, after the operation valid period starts at the timing shown in FIG. 22(2c-2), as shown in FIG. 22(2c-3″), the countdown is updated in the timer notice effect during the operation valid period. Without displaying (while keeping the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 at “06:00”), the internal clock is performed, and as shown in FIG. 22 (2c-4″), the operation valid period elapses. However, it does not reflect the internal time measurement result, and as shown in FIG. 22 (3c″), the display of the grandpa's conversation image CI2 is “additional 10 seconds” indicating the time added from the operation promotion notification image. At the timing when the character display is changed, the internal timing result (for example, 1.23 seconds remaining at the timing shown in FIG. 22 (3c″)) is reflected in the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 and the countdown update display is displayed. May be restarted.
FIG. 23 is a diagram showing another example of the timer announcement effect step by step.

FIG. 23(1d) to FIG. 23(2d) show another effect example of FIG. 22(1b) to FIG. 22(2b). In FIG. 23(1d), the character display displayed in the conversation image CI1 of the lord is “Attention to timer notice”. As a result, it may be possible to pay attention to the effect (notice) performed as a result of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 being "00:00". That is, it can be said that the advance notice is given by displaying the conversation image CI1 of the lord in FIG. 23(1d).

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 23(2d), the conversation notice is updated, and the conversation image CI1 of the lord is displayed in a reduced size and moved below the display position of the second decorative pattern, as shown in FIG. In 2b), the above-mentioned old conversation image CI2 is displayed. In this way, after paying attention to the timer notice effect, the fact that the timer display changes may be notified.

FIG. 23(1e) shows another effect example of FIG. 23(1d). In FIG. 23(1e), the timer display is "00" by performing a scroll display SC1 that scrolls from the right end to the left end of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 above the timer notice display TM1 instead of the conversation image CI1 of the lord. You may make it pay attention to the effect produced as a result of becoming ":00". That is, in the scroll display SC1 shown in FIG. 23(1e), the characters "watch timer notice" scroll in a loop from the right end to the left end of the display screen.

The example productions shown in FIGS. 23(1f) to 23(6f) are another example of the timer addition effect, in which the countdown of the added time is performed by a display different from the timer notice display TM1. Showing. FIG. 23(1f) is an example of effect following FIG. 22(3). After notification of the additional time by the balloon of the navigation character YM, the additional timer display TM2 is displayed below the timer notice display TM1. It is shown that the frame is in from the right end. In the additional timer display TM2, "10:00" indicating the additional time is displayed. Here, the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is performed during the animation of the frame-in of the additional timer display TM2, but the countdown may be interrupted. Note that the additional timer display TM2 overlaps the balloon of the navigation character YM and is more difficult to visually recognize than when it is in a non-overlapping state. Further, the additional timer display TM2 may be overlapped with the balloon of the navigation character YM.

FIG. 23(2f) shows a state in which the frame-in animation of the additional timer display TM2 is completed. At this time, the balloon of the navigation character YM is erased. Here, the balloon of the navigation character YM may be erased after the animation of the frame-in of the overlay timer display TM2 is completed, or the frame of the overlay timer display TM2 may be erased after the balloon of the navigation character YM is erased. The animation may be completed, or the timing of the frame-in animation of the additional timer display TM2 being completed and the timing of erasing the balloon of the navigation character YM may be the same. Although the additional timer display TM2 is arranged below the timer notification display TM1 in FIG. 23(2f), the timer notification display TM1 and the additional timer display TM2 may be arranged so as to overlap each other. 23(2f″), the additional timer display TM2 may be overlapped with the timer advance notification display TM1, or the timer advance notification display TM1 may be displayed as shown in FIG. 23(2f″). You may make it overlap with the addition timer display TM2.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 23(2f) to 23(4f), the process continues until the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 becomes “00:00”. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23(5f), the countdown of the timer display in the additional timer display TM2 is started, and the state of the timer notice display TM1 being framed out to the right end of the display screen is shown. .. Here, after the countdown of the timer display in the additional timer display TM2 is started, the frame-out animation of the timer advance notice display TM1 may be started, or at the timing when the countdown of the timer display in the additional timer display TM2 is started. The timing at which the frame-out animation of the timer notice display TM1 starts may be the same. Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 23(5f), the timer notice display TM1 is framed out when the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is completed, but the timer notice display TM1 is not framed out. At that time, for example, as shown in FIG. 23(5f'), the word "attention" may be displayed on the timer notice display TM1 to urge attention to the notice.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (6f), in response to the completion of the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1, the pseudo symbol may appear in the middle symbol, and the pseudo symbol may be performed. The additional timer display TM2 counts down the time until another effect is performed. It should be noted that the pseudo continuous symbol does not appear at the completion of the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1, and the pseudo continuous symbol may appear when the countdown of the timer display in the additional timer display TM2 is completed. As described above, in this effect example, the added time is not added to the timer display in the timer notification display TM1 and is displayed on the added timer display TM2 different from the timer notification display TM1 and the countdown is performed. ing. It should be noted that the notification of the added time may be a notification of a total value of a plurality of timer advance notice displays. For example, a value obtained by adding 3 seconds to the timer advance notice display TM1 may be displayed, and the remaining timer indication TM2 may be displayed. A value obtained by adding 7 seconds may be displayed. The addition timer display TM2 here may be a timer notice newly displayed as the timer is added, or a timer notice originally displayed before the timer is added.

FIGS. 23(3fa) to 23(8fa) are still another example of the timer addition effect, in which the timer display countdown in the timer advance notice display TM1 and the timer display countdown in the addition timer display TM2 are simultaneously performed. It shows the situation. FIG. 23(3fa) is an example of production following FIG. 23(2f), and after the animation of the frame-in of the additional timer display TM2 is completed, the timer display in the additional timer display TM2 counts down together with the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1. Is shown to be starting. That is, in this example of performance, the additional time is reported as 10 seconds, but the additional time is practically 5 seconds. It should be noted that the timer display in the additional timer display TM2 may be a time obtained by adding the time indicated by the timer display of the timer advance notice display TM1 to 10 seconds which is the additional time so that the additional time is substantially added by 10 seconds. For example, in the case shown in FIG. 23 (3fa), "15:00" may be displayed on the additional timer display TM2.

After that, the countdown is continued in the manner shown in FIGS. 23(3f) to (6f), and in FIG. 23(7fa), the pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol to notify that the pseudo symbol is to be performed. There is.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (8fa), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is restarted and the first pseudo-repeating is performed. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, “×2” indicating that the second variable display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-link is started is displayed below the second decorative symbol. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (8fa), the countdown of the timer display in the additional timer display TM2 is completed, and the word "attention" is displayed instead of the timer display to call attention to the notice. ing.

Then, as shown in FIG. 23 (9fa), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the replay symbol RP as the pseudo continuous symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and the second pseudo symbol is started. .. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 23 (9fa′), the pine symbol CC as a chance symbol may be stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, and a notice may be given. Further, the pseudo continuous effect may be performed after the pine symbol CC is stopped and displayed. In this way, it is also possible to suggest that, as an effect to be performed as a result of the countdown by the timer notice effect, a notice effect or a big hit other than the pseudo-relation. Here, the replay symbol RP and the pine symbol CC are overlapped with the additional timer display TM2, but may be overlapped with the additional timer display TM2. As described above, in this effect example, the timer display is increased as one mode of the change of the display mode of the timer display. The timer display may be divided.
FIG. 24 is a diagram showing another example of the timer announcement effect step by step.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 24(1), the variable display of the decorative symbol is shown. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 24(1), the number of holdings in special figure 1 is 2, and the first holding icon h11 and the second holding icon h12 are displayed, and in the second holding number display. , "2" indicating that the number of reservations in Toku-zu 1 is 2 is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed.

Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 24(2), "decoration 4" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol, and the notice icon MI1 of the clock is displayed overlapping with the left symbol. The display of the notice icon MI1 of the clock is a notice display that may function as a look-ahead notice, and indicates that time is added in the timer notice effect. In addition, you may announce that a timer announcement production will be performed. Here, the timing at which the left symbol stops and the timing at which the clock notice icon MI1 is displayed may be the same, or the clock notice icon MI1 may be displayed after the left symbol stops, The left symbol may stop after the notice icon MI1 of the clock is displayed. In addition, the display timing of the notice icon to be stocked is not limited to the case where the notice icon MI1 of the clock is displayed in association with the decorative pattern, and various types of notice such as the notice icon temporary stop, navigation character notice, conversation notice, etc. There may be a case where it is performed at any timing such as a notice or a hold in the design variable display by the effect, a look-ahead notice by various effects such as the navigation character YM, or the like.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 24(3), in the first UI unit 280, the platform on which the navigation character YM stands is raised and the notice icon display area 285 is formed. The notice icon display area 285 is divided into, for example, five areas, and areas in which the notice icon is displayed are arranged side by side in the row direction. Note that the number of areas configured in the notice icon display area 285 can be set arbitrarily.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 24(4), the notice icon MI1 of the clock moves to the notice icon display area 285 and is stocked. In addition, in the first decorative symbol, a state in which "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol is shown. Here, the timing when the right symbol stops and the timing when the notice icon MI1 of the clock starts moving may be the same, or the notice icon MI1 may start moving after the right symbol stops. The right symbol may stop after the notice icon MI1 starts moving.

Then, as shown in FIG. 24(5), the notice icon MI1 of the clock is reduced and displayed, stored in the leftmost area of the notice icon display area 285, and the notice icon MI1 of the clock is stocked. ing. In addition, in the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 24(5), the middle design is stopped and displayed, and the first decorative design and the second decorative design are a combination of the missing decorative design of "Decorative 4-Decorative 1-Decorative 7". It is shown that it is confirmed and displayed. The timing when the notice icon MI1 of the clock is stored in the notice icon display area 285 may be the same as the timing when the decorative pattern is confirmed and displayed, or the notice icon MI1 of the clock is displayed in the notice icon display area 285. The decorative pattern may be confirmed and displayed after being stored, or the notice icon MI1 of the clock may be stored in the notice icon display area 285 after the decorative pattern is confirmed and displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 24(6), one holding of the special figure 1 is exhausted and the variable display of the symbol is displayed. In addition, the timer advance notice effect has also started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 24(6), the timer display displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1 is "09:69", and the countdown is being performed. Note that there may be an effect display (for example, the navigation character YM) that overlaps the timer notification display only while a certain effect is being executed (for example, the stock effect of the notice icon). On the contrary, there may be an effect display in which the timer notice is overlapped only while a certain effect is being executed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 24(7), an effect is displayed around the notice icon MI1 of the clock stored in the notice icon display area 285 to announce that the notice icon MI1 of the clock will be used. .. Note that "07:31" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1.

Then, as shown in FIG. 24(8), the notice icon MI1 of the clock pops out from the notice icon display area 285 and is enlarged and displayed substantially at the center of the display screen. Although the effect is still displayed in the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon MI1 of the clock may be erased at the timing of popping out of the notice icon display area 285.

Then, as shown in FIG. 24(9), the notice icon MI1 of the clock is erased, and the display of the count-up animation is started. It should be noted that the timing at which the clock notice icon MI1 is deleted may be the same as the timing at which the count-up animation display is started, or the count-up animation may be displayed after the clock notice icon MI1 is deleted. The notification may be started, or the notice icon MI1 of the clock may be deleted after the display of the count-up animation is started.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 24(10), the notice icon display area 285 is framed out downward.
FIG. 25 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the timer advance notice effect.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 25(A1) to 25(A4) show another example of the timer addition effect. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25(A1), a state in which the decorative symbols are variably displayed is shown. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 25(A1), the number of holdings of special figure 1 is 1, the first holding icon h11 is displayed, and in the second holding number display, the number of holdings of special figure 1 is displayed. “1” indicating that is 1 is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25(A1), the timer notice effect is started, and "09:69" is displayed in the timer notice display TM1, and the countdown is performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25(A2), it is shown that "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on each of the left symbol and the right symbol. Further, the countdown on the timer notice display TM1 is completed, and the timer display is "00:00".

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 25(A3), a balloon in which the characters "add on" are displayed is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the time is added to the timer display in the timer notice display TM1. Is notified. In addition, even if the characters "add on" are displayed, the time displayed by the timer may not be added, or another effect may be performed. Here, for example, as shown in FIG. 25 (A3a-1), after displaying a character of "attention" to call attention to the notice instead of the timer display, as shown in FIG. 25 (A3a-2). Alternatively, a balloon of the navigation character YM may be displayed, and "+10 seconds" indicating the additional time may be displayed on the balloon to notify the additional time. In this example of the effect, the effect to be displayed as "attention" is not a notice display but an addition of 10 seconds. In addition, for example, as shown in FIG. 25 (A3b-1), instead of the timer display, after displaying the characters "not yet" to the effect that the timer advance notice effect continues, the timer advance notice display TM1 is added. The time to be added may be notified by switching to the display of “+10 seconds” indicating the time to be added. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 25(A3b-1), after displaying the character "Still" on the timer notice display TM1, a balloon of the navigation character YM is displayed, and "+10" indicating the time to be added to the balloon is displayed. The display of “second” may be performed. Further, after the display shown in FIG. 25(A3), the display as shown in FIG. 25(A3b-2) may be performed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 25(A4), 10 seconds are added to the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1, the timer display is updated to “10:00”, and the countdown in the timer advance notice display TM1 is restarted. .. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25(A4), in response to the countdown in the timer notice display TM1 being “00:00”, the pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol. Is shown. The timing at which the timer display is updated and the timing at which the pseudo continuous symbol is stopped and displayed may be the same, or the pseudo continuous symbol may be stopped and displayed after the timer display is updated, The timer display may be updated after the pseudo continuous symbols are stopped and displayed.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 25(B1) to 25(B5) show effect examples in which the timer is shortened in the timer notice effect. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25(B1), the variable display of the decorative symbol is shown. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 25(B1), the number of holdings of special figure 1 is 1, the first holding icon h11 is displayed, and in the second holding number display, the number of holdings of special figure 1 is displayed. “1” indicating that is 1 is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25(B1), the timer notice effect is performed, the timer notice display TM1 displays "06:99", and the countdown is performed. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 25(B1), a balloon in which the word "subtract" is displayed is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the time is subtracted from the timer display in the timer notice display TM1. Is notified. That is, it is notified that the time for which the timer advance notice effect is performed is shortened by a predetermined time.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25(B2), the countdown in the timer notice display TM1 continues, and the timer display shows "05:89". Further, the display of the balloon of the navigation character YM is replaced with the character display of "subtraction" and "-3 seconds" indicating the shortened time. That is, it may be recognized that the timer advance notice effect is shortened by 3 seconds and the period until the countdown is completed is shorter than the initially displayed time.

Then, as shown in FIG. 25(B3), an effect of shortening the time (timer shortening effect) is performed by displaying a shortened animation in which the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is displayed in a variable manner at high speed. Note that the shortened animation display may not be performed. Further, the effect images may be overlapped in such a manner that the display state of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is difficult to visually recognize.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25(B4), the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is updated to “02:00”, and the time in the timer display is shortened (subtracted) by 3 seconds. ing. That is, it can be said that the display mode on the timer notice display TM1 is changed by the effect of shortening the timer. The countdown display may be stopped or the countdown display may be advanced while the timer shortening effect is being performed.

After that, when the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is completed, as shown in FIG. 25(B5), the word "attention" is displayed instead of the timer display to warn the notice. An advance notice is displayed by stopping and displaying the pine symbol CC as a chance symbol on the symbol. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 25 (B5′), the replay symbol RP as the pseudo-relational symbol may be stopped and displayed in the middle symbol to notify that the pseudo-repetition is started. The timing at which the "attention" character in the timer notice display TM1 starts to be displayed may be the same as the timing at which the pine pattern CC (or the replay symbol RP) is stopped and displayed, or the "attention" character. After the start of the display, the pine symbol CC (or the replay symbol RP) may be stopped and displayed, or after the pine symbol CC (or the replay symbol RP) is stopped and displayed, the "attention" character May start displaying. The appearance rate of the contents of the effect performed when the countdown is completed may change depending on whether the timer display does not change in the timer notification effect, for example, while the timer notification effect is being executed. If there is no change in the display, the pseudo-relational pattern is stopped and the pseudo-relational notification is likely to be made. You may make it easy to give a highly reliable notice of the jackpot. Further, when the timer shortening effect is performed, the pseudo-relation may be notified earlier than when the timer shortening effect is not performed.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 25(C1) to 25(C2) show another effect example in which the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 changes in the timer notice effect. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25(C1), the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 25(C1), the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is 1, the first holding icon h11 is displayed, and in the second holding number display, the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is displayed. “1” indicating that is 1 is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25(C1), the timer notice effect is being performed, and "06:99" is displayed in the timer notice display TM1, and the countdown is being performed. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 25(C1), a balloon displaying the characters "timer notice level UP" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the jackpot reliability of the timer notice display TM1 is shown. It is suggested that it may improve.

Then, as shown in FIG. 25(C2), the color of the frame of the timer notice display TM1 is changed from white to red, for example, and it is notified that the reliability of the big hit for the timer notice display TM1 is improved. ing. That is, as a result of the countdown of the timer display, it is notified that a highly reliable notification may be given as the notification to be executed.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 25(D1) to 25(D5) show effect examples in which the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is interrupted and restarted. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25(D1), a state in which the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner is shown. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 25(D1), the number of holdings of special figure 1 is 1, the first holding icon h11 is displayed, and in the second holding number display, the number of holdings of special figure 1 is displayed. “1” indicating that is 1 is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25(D1), the timer notice effect is performed, and "06:99" is displayed in the timer notice display TM1. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 25(D1), a balloon in which the character "Stop" is displayed is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that the countdown of the timer display is interrupted. It should be noted that the timing at which the balloon with the word "Stop" is displayed and the timing at which the countdown of the timer display is interrupted may be the same, or the balloon with the word "Stop" is displayed. After that, the countdown of the timer display may be interrupted, or after the countdown of the timer display is interrupted, the display of the balloon to which the character “Stop” is added may be started.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (D2), the pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and it is shown that the pseudo symbol is informed. At the timing shown in FIG. 25(D2), the countdown of the timer display is suspended, and the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 remains "06:99".

Then, as shown in FIG. 25 (D3), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is restarted, and the pseudo variable is displayed for the second variable symbol display. Has been done. In addition, below the second decorative pattern, “×2” is displayed, which indicates that the second variation display of the decorative pattern is performed by the pseudo link. Then, as shown in FIG. 25(D3), a balloon in which the word "restart" is displayed is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that the countdown of the timer display is restarted.

Then, as shown in FIG. 25(D4), the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is restarted, and thereafter, the balloon of the navigation character YM is erased as shown in FIG. 25(D5). As described above, in this effect example, the countdown of the timer display is interrupted while a predetermined effect such as pseudo-relation is being performed, and it is possible to restart the countdown after the effect is finished. Has been done.

As an example of the change in the display mode of the timer notice display TM1, the number of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed (increased or decreased) more than before the change. For example, if one timer notice display TM1 is displayed before the change, and the timer notice display TM1 is notified to change, the timer notice display TM1 may be increased to 2 or more, and conversely. When three notifications TM1 are displayed and the notification of the timer notification TM1 is notified, the timer notification TM1 may be decreased to 2 or less. Here, when the number of the timer notice display TM1 increases, the time notified by the timer notice display TM1 may be displayed separately from the time previously notified by the timer notice display TM1. The displayed timer notice display TM1 may be increased as it is (for example, if there is one timer timer notice display TM1 indicating 10 seconds, if two timer notice displays TM1 are increased, 10 There are two timer notice displays TM1 that notify the seconds). Further, when the number of the timer notice display TM1 is decreased, the total value of the times previously notified by the timer notice display TM1 may be displayed, or the timer notice display TM1 may be decreased as it is. (For example, assuming that there are two timer notice displays TM1 that notify 10 seconds, if the number is reduced to one, the timer notice display TM1 that notifies 10 seconds becomes one). When there are a plurality of timer notice displays TM1 that have changed due to increase or decrease, the timer notice display TM1 may start counting down at the same timing or at different timings.

FIG. 26 is a diagram showing another example of the timer announcement effect step by step. In the effect example shown in FIG. 26, in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14A, the sub display device 208S is arranged below the decorative symbol display device 208 in place of the family crest cast 224E. The upper end portion of the sub display device 208S overlaps at least a part of the lower end portion of the decorative pattern display device 208. Further, the first large-board behavior auditors 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior auditors 224Gd and the thousand-box box auditors hall 224H are not shown for the sake of easy description.

26A1 to 26A6 show another example of the timer addition effect. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 26(A1), the variable display of the decorative pattern is shown. Further, on the sub display device 208S, the navigation character YM, the change icon h0, and the hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 26(A1), the number of reservations in special figure 1 is 1, and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed. On the other hand, the second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in this second hold number display, it is indicated that the hold number of Toku-zu 1 is 1. 1” is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 26(A1), the timer notice effect is started, and "05:89" is displayed in the timer notice display TM1, and the countdown is performed. Further, as shown in FIG. 26(A1), a balloon in which the character “+10 seconds” is displayed is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM displayed on the sub display device 208S, and the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is displayed. The time to be added is announced.

Then, as shown in FIG. 26(A2), the sub display device 208S moves upward, and the upper right corner portion thereof overlaps the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208.

Then, as shown in FIG. 26(A3), on the timer notice display TM1, the count-up animation display is performed and the effect of adding time is started.

Then, as shown in FIG. 26(A4), the sub display device 208S descends and returns to the initial position.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 26(A5), in the timer notice display TM1, the count-up animation display is completed, the timer display is updated to “15:00”, and 10 seconds is added to the time in the timer display. It is shown. Note that the countdown display may be stopped or the countdown display may be advanced while the timer addition effect is being performed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 26(A6), the balloon of the navigation character YM is erased on the sub display device 208S. In this example of effect, when the timer addition effect is performed, the operation of raising the sub display device 208S is performed, but the operation of raising the sub display device 208S may not be performed.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 26B1 to 26B7 show another example of the timer addition effect using the sub display device 208S. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 26(B1), the variable display of the decorative symbol is shown. Further, on the sub display device 208S, the navigation character YM, the change icon h0, and the hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 26(B1), the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is 1, and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed. On the other hand, the second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in this second hold number display, it is indicated that the hold number of Toku-zu 1 is 1. 1” is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 26(B1), the timer notice effect is started, and "06:54" is displayed in the timer notice display TM1, and the countdown is performed.

After that, in the sub-display device 208S shown in FIG. 26(B2), the display of the navigation character YM, the variable icon h0 and the hold icon is switched to the display of the character “+10 seconds”, and the timer display is added to the timer display in the advance notice display TM1. The time to be notified is notified.

After that, as shown in FIG. 26(B3), when the sub display device 208S moves upward and overlaps with the front side of the decorative pattern display device 208 substantially in the center, a count-up animation display is started on the timer notice display TM1. The production will be done by adding time. Note that at least a part of the timer notice display TM1 overlaps the sub display device 208S, and it is more difficult to visually recognize the timer notice display TM1 than in the case where the sub display device 208S does not overlap. Further, the timing when the sub display device 208S is located on the front side substantially in the center of the decorative pattern display device 208 and the timing when the count-up animation display starts may be the same, or the sub display device 208S displays the decorative pattern. The count-up animation display may be started after being positioned on the front side of the center of the device 208, or the count-up may be performed before the sub-display device 208S is positioned on the front side of the center of the decorative pattern display device 208. Animation display may start.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 26B4 to 26B5, the sub display device 208S displays a countdown of the additional time. More specifically, the addition time displayed on the sub display device 208S is decreased by 1 second, while the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 is added by 1 second. .. In this example of performance, while the countdown display of the additional time is being displayed, the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is interrupted, but the countdown may be continued without being interrupted.

Then, as shown in FIG. 26(B5), when the additional time displayed on the sub display device 208S becomes “0 second”, the time of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. It is updated and displayed. At this time, at least a part of the timer notice display TM1 is overlapped with the sub display device 208S, and it is difficult to specify the time of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1. Good.

Then, as shown in FIG. 26(B6), in the sub display device 208S, the display of the additional time is switched to the display of “Restart” indicating that the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is restarted, and thereafter, The sub display device 208S starts descending toward the initial position.

FIG. 26B7 shows a state in which the sub display device 208S descends and returns to the initial position. In the timer notice display TM1 on the decorative symbol display device 208, the countdown of the timer display is restarted, and the timer display is "14:23" at the timing shown in FIG. 26(B7). After that, the display of "Restart" displayed on the sub display device 208S is switched to the original display (display of the navigation character YM, the variation icon h0, and the notice icon) as shown in FIG. 26(B1). Here, the timing at which the countdown of the timer display is restarted and the timing at which the sub-display device 208S starts to descend may be the same, or the sub-display device 208S starts to descend after the countdown of the timer display is restarted. Alternatively, the countdown of the timer display may be restarted after the sub display device 208S starts to descend. Further, the timing when "Restart" is started to be displayed on the sub display device 208S may be the same as the timing when the countdown of the timer display is restarted, or after the display of "Restart" is started on the sub display device 208S. Then, the countdown of the timer display may be restarted, or “Restart” may be started to be displayed on the sub display device 208S after the countdown of the timer display is restarted. Further, the timing when the sub display device 208S returns to the initial position and the timing when the countdown of the timer display restarts may be the same, or the countdown of the timer display restarts after the sub display device 208S returns to the initial position. Alternatively, the sub display device 208S may return to the initial position after the countdown of the timer display is restarted.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 26C1 to 26C6 show another example of the timer addition effect using the sub display device 208S. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 26(C1), the variable display of the decorative symbol is shown. Further, on the sub display device 208S, the navigation character YM, the change icon h0, and the hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 26(C1), the number of reservations in Toku-zu 1 is 1, and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed. On the other hand, the second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in this second hold number display, it is indicated that the hold number of Toku-zu 1 is 1. 1” is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 26(C1), the timer notice effect is started, and "05:89" is displayed in the timer notice display TM1, and the countdown is performed. Further, as shown in FIG. 26(C1), a balloon in which the character “+10 seconds” is displayed is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM displayed on the sub display device 208S, and the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is displayed. The time to be added is announced. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 26(C1), the timer advance notice display TM1 starts displaying a sucking animation for sucking the balloon displayed on the sub display device 208S, and the timer advance notice display TM1 sucks out the balloon. An effect image showing that the action is being performed is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 26(C2), the sub display device 208S moves upward, and a part of the display area of the sub display device 208S overlaps with a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The display mode of the character "+10 seconds" displayed in the balloon of the navigation character YM extends toward the timer notice display TM1 and is displayed across the sub display device 208S and the decorative symbol display device 208. The navigation character YM has a facial expression that surprises the user.

In FIG. 26(C3), a state where the sucking animation is continuously displayed is shown. Specifically, the display of "+10 seconds" sucked by the timer notice display TM1 by the sucking animation is further moved toward the timer notice display TM1, and the display of "+10 seconds" continues to be displayed on the sub display device 208S. Is displayed across the decorative pattern display device 208. Further, the timer advance notice display TM1 has started the display of the count-up animation described above.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 26(C4), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display of "+10 seconds" absorbed by the timer notice display TM1 is completely moved from the sub display device 208S to the decorative symbol display device 208. , The state of moving toward the timer notice display TM1 while being reduced. It should be noted that while the sucking animation is being displayed, the navigation character YM is performing a surprising animation (an animation that accompanies the sucking animation) by seeing the sucking animation, but there is no particular need to perform the animation. ..

Then, as shown in FIG. 26(C5), when the display of “+10 seconds” is completely absorbed by the timer notice display TM1, the absorption animation display is completed, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 26(C6), the timer is displayed. The notice display TM1 shows that the count-up animation display is completed, the timer display is updated to "15:00", and 10 seconds is added to the time in the timer display. Note that the countdown display may be stopped or the countdown display may be advanced while the timer addition effect is being performed. In the case where a plurality of decorative symbol display devices are provided, the timer notice effect may be performed by only one decorative symbol display device.
FIG. 27 is a diagram showing another example of the timer announcement effect step by step.

27A1 to 27A4 show another example of the timer addition effect. 27A1 to FIG. 27A4, the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14A will be used to describe the example, but in order to simplify the description, the family crest actor 224E, A part of the 1 large-board behavior auditors 224Ga to the 4th large-board behavior auditors 224Gd and the 1000-box box auditors office 224H will be described by omitting illustration.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 27(A1), a state in which the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner is shown. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 27(A1), the number of holdings of special figure 1 is 1, the first holding icon h11 is displayed, and in the second holding number display, the number of holdings of special figure 1 is displayed. “1” indicating that is 1 is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 27(A1), the timer notice effect is started, and "06:99" is displayed in the timer notice display TM1, and the countdown is performed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 27(A2), the second large-scale behavior accessory 224Gb and the fourth large-scale behavior accessory 224Gd operate and overlap the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. As a result, it is notified that time is added to the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1.

Then, as shown in FIG. 27(A3), on the timer notice display TM1, a count-up animation display is performed and an effect of adding time is started.

After that, the count-up animation display is completed, the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is updated to "15:00", and 10 seconds are added to the time in the timer display. In addition, in this example of performance, the second large-board behavior auditors 224Gb and the fourth large-board behavior auditors 224Gd among the first large-board behavior auditors 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior auditors 224Gd operate to display 10 on the timer display. Although it is informed that the addition of seconds is performed, the time to be added may be different depending on the number of the activated actors among the first large board behavior auditors 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior auditors 224Gd, for example, When all of the first large-board behavior auditors 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior auditors 224Gd are activated, 20 seconds may be added to the timer display. Further, in this example of performance, it is informed that the second large-board behavior auditors 224Gb and the fourth large-board behavior auditors 224Gd operate only once to add 10 seconds to the timer display. The time to be added may be different depending on the number of times. For example, when the second large-board behavior auditor 224Gb and the fourth large-board behavior auditor 224Gd operate three times, the timer display is set to add 30 seconds. May be.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 27B1 to 27B4 show examples of the timer addition effect using the family coat emblem 224E. In addition, in the example productions shown in FIGS. 27(B1) to 27(B4), description will be made using the production device 206 shown in FIG. 14(a). A description will be given by omitting the illustration of the 224 Ga to the fourth large-scale behavioral accessory 224Gd and the thousand-axle box accessory 224H.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 27(B1), the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 27(B1), the number of holdings of special figure 1 is 1, and the first holding icon h11 is displayed, and in the second holding number display, the number of holdings of special figure 1 is displayed. “1” indicating that is 1 is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 27(B1), the timer notice effect is started, and "06:99" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, and the countdown is performed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 27(B2), the family crest accessory 224E operates, rises to the front side slightly below the center of the decorative pattern display device 208, overlaps with the decorative pattern display device 208, and moves up and down at that position. Works in the direction. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208, a state in which the time to be added to the timer display is divided into a plurality of times is displayed around the overlapping family crest part 224E. Specifically, one "+5 second" display, two "+2 second" display, and one "+1 second" display are displayed so as to surround the family crest actor 224E, whereby the timer notice display TM1 is displayed. It is informed that 10 seconds will be added to the timer display.

Then, as shown in FIG. 27(B3), on the timer notice display TM1, a count-up animation display is performed and the effect of adding time is started.

After that, the count-up animation display is completed, the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is updated to "15:00", and 10 seconds are added to the time in the timer display. In addition, in this example of performance, it is informed that the family coat character product 224E operates only once to add 10 seconds to the timer display. Of course, for example, when the family crest part 224E operates three times, 30 seconds may be added to the timer display.

27(C1) to FIG. 27(C6) show another example of the timer addition effect using a plurality of decorative symbol display devices. Here, in the effect example shown in FIGS. 27(C1) to 27(C6), the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14(b) is applied, and the outer periphery of the first decorative symbol display device 208L overlaps the decorative member. However, the image displayed in the area is also visible. At this time, the left and right sides of the first decorative symbol display device 208L are partially overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. It should be noted that the family crest accessory 224E and the Senryo box accessory 224H are omitted from the drawing for ease of explanation.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 27(C1), it is shown that the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 27(C1), the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is 1, and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed in the reservation display area of the second UI unit 281 formed on the lower left side of the display area. Is displayed, and in the second hold number display arranged in the upper right corner of the display area, “1” indicating that the hold number in Toku-zu 1 is 1 is displayed. In addition, a first UI unit 280 is formed on the lower right side of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and on the first UI unit 280, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are displayed.

Further, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the timer notice effect is being performed, and the timer display countdown is being performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 27(C1), "05:00" is displayed as the timer display. In this example of performance, when the timer display becomes "05:00", the countdown is interrupted and "05:00" is displayed. The display is maintained. The countdown may be continuously performed without interruption.

In addition, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the character "additional 10 seconds" is displayed, and the time to be added is notified to the timer display in the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

After that, as shown in FIG. 27(C2), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N move in the directions close to each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, As shown in FIG. 27(C3), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N stop at the position closest to each other. At this time, the third decorative symbol display device 208N overlaps with a part of the navigation character YM, and the navigation character YM is more difficult to visually recognize than in the case where the third decorative symbol display device 208N is not overlapped. Is becoming

Then, as shown in FIG. 27(C4), the display of “15:00” indicating the time when 10 seconds is added to the time indicated by the timer display displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is the second display. It is displayed across the decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 27(C5), the display of "15:00" is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M is not displaying the timer display. The two decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N start moving to the initial position along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The display start timing of “15:00” on the third decorative symbol display device 208N and the movement start timing of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be the same, After the display of “15:00” on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is started, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may start moving, or the second decorative symbol. After the symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N start moving, the display of “15:00” on the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be started.

Then, as shown in FIG. 27(C6), after the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N have returned to their initial positions, the countdown of the timer display in the third decorative symbol display device 208N is restarted. It It should be noted that the countdown of the timer display in the state where the display of "15:00" is displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N (for example, the state shown in FIG. 27(C4)). May be restarted. The case where the timer display is displayed over a plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be configured to be a big hit more easily than when the timer display is displayed on one decorative symbol display device, The jackpots may be the same in ease, or may be configured so as not to be a jackpot.
FIG. 28 is a diagram showing another example of the timer announcement effect step by step.

The example productions shown in FIGS. 28(A1) to (A4) show another example of the timer addition production using a plurality of decorative symbol display devices. Here, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 28(A1) to (A4), the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14(b) is applied, and the outer periphery of the first decorative symbol display device 208L overlaps the decorative member. However, the image displayed in the area is also visible. At this time, the left and right sides of the first decorative symbol display device 208L are partially overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. It should be noted that the family crest accessory 224E and the Senryo box accessory 224H are omitted from the drawing for ease of explanation.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 28(A1), the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 28(A1), the number of holdings of special figure 1 is 1, and the first holding icon h11 is displayed. “1” indicating that is 1 is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed.

Further, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the timer notice effect is started, and the timer display countdown is performed. That is, in this effect example, two timer notice effects are performed. In this effect example, the timer notice effect performed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M is the first timer notice effect, and the timer notice effect performed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is the second timer notice effect. explain. At the timing shown in FIG. 28(A1), "05:89" is displayed as the timer display on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and "15:89" is displayed as the timer display on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Has been done.

After that, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N move in the directions close to each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In this effect example, the countdown of the timer display is continued even when the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are moving, but may be interrupted. Then, when the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N stop at the closest position, as shown in FIG. 28(A2), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device. The times indicated by the timer displays respectively displayed in 208N are summed up, and the display of "20:00" showing the result is displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. It At this time, the countdown of the timer display is interrupted, but it does not have to be interrupted. Further, the timer display of "20:00" is also displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L at a position corresponding to the display of "20:00" displayed by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. However, since it is overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is difficult to visually recognize. After that, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N start moving to the initial position along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

FIG. 28(A3) shows that the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N have returned to their initial positions. Here, the timer display of "20:00" displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device. In response to the movement of 208N, scroll display is performed while maintaining the displayed coordinates. That is, the second decorative symbol display device 208M scrolls the display of "20:00" to the right in response to the movement to the initial position, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N responds to the movement to the initial position. The display of "20:00" is scrolled to the left. In the process of moving the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the timer display of "20:00" is the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the third decorative symbol. When "20:00" displayed across the symbol display device 208N and displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is completely scrolled out, FIG. 28(A3) is displayed. As shown, the display of "20:00" is displayed only on the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

Then, as shown in FIG. 28(A4), the timer display of "20:00" displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is erased and displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. After that, the countdown of the timer display in the third decorative symbol display device 208N is restarted. The countdown may be started while the display of “20:00” is displayed only on the first decorative symbol display device 208L (for example, the state shown in FIG. 28(A3)). Here, the easiness of a big hit may be different depending on the decorative pattern display device on which the timer display is displayed (in this example of performance, when the timer display is displayed on the first decorative pattern display device 208L, It is more likely to be a big hit than the two decorative symbol display devices 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are displayed separately, but the jackpots may be the same or less likely to be a big hit).

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 28B1 to 28B3 show an example of the timer addition effect using a plurality of display devices. Here, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 28(B1) to (B3), the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14(a) is applied, but in this effect example, instead of the family crest cast 224E, FIG. The POV display 224I described above with reference to FIG. 28(B1) to FIG. 28(B3), in order to facilitate the description, a part of the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd and the Senryo box accessory 224H will be described. The illustration is omitted here.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 28(B1), the variable display of the decorative symbol is shown. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 28(B1), the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is 1, the first holding icon h11 is displayed, and in the second holding number display, the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is displayed. “1” indicating that is 1 is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 28(B1), the timer advance notice effect is started, and "05:71" is displayed in the timer advance notice display TM1, and the countdown is performed. Further, in FIG. 28(B1), the POV display 224I has reached a constant rotation speed and is rotating at a constant speed. Then, by the lighting control of the plurality of LEDs provided in the LED array, the character "+10" is displayed by the simple display, and the time added to the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is notified. As shown in FIG. 28(B1), by rotating the LED array of the POV display 224I, all of the first decorative symbol and the variable icon h0, the navigation character YM, the hold icon h11, and a part of the timer notice display TM1 are removed. It overlaps with the rotating area and is difficult to see.

After that, as shown in FIG. 28B2, the character "+10" displayed on the POV display 224I moves to the lower right, and the display "+10" displayed only on the POV display 224I so far. Is also displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. That is, the character “+10” is displayed across the POV display 224I and the decorative pattern display device 208. At this time, the character "+10" may have a decorated display mode. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays the character "+10" so as to match the display of the character "+10" on the POV display 224I. As a result, it may be possible to perform a display with a sense of unity with the display of "+10" on the POV display 224I and the display of the character "+10" displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. In addition, in this production example, the number font displayed on the POV display 224I is different from the number font displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208, but may be the same.

After that, after the rotation speed of the LED array of the POV display 224I is reduced, the POV display 224I is stopped in the initial posture as shown in FIG. 28(B3). At this time, the display of the character “+10” displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208 is easier to visually recognize than the state where the LED array is rotating. In this example of performance, thereafter, 10 seconds is added to the timer display in the timer notice display TM1.

The example of the effects shown in FIGS. 28C1 to 28C5 show another example of the timer addition effect using a plurality of display devices (decorative pattern display device 208 and POV display 224I). Here, the configuration in the effect example shown in FIGS. 28(C1) to (C5) is the same as that shown in FIG. 28(B1).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 28(C1), the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 28(C1), the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is 1, the first holding icon h11 is displayed, and in the second holding number display, the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is displayed. “1” indicating that is 1 is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 28(C1), the timer notice effect is started, and "06:87" is displayed in the timer notice display TM1, and the countdown is performed. In addition, in FIG. 28(C1), the POV display 224I has risen from the initial position to the position on the front side in the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the initial posture and is not rotating. It should be noted that the entire variable icon h0 and the first decorative symbol and a part of the timer notice display TM1 are overlapped with the POV display 224I, which is more difficult to visually recognize than in the case where the POV display 224I is not overlapped.

After that, when the LED array of the POV display 224I starts to rotate and reaches a constant rotation speed to be rotated at a constant speed, as shown in FIG. 28(C2), the timer notice display TM1 of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. Is displayed on the POV display 224I, and the timer advance notice display TM1 is erased. The timer display displayed on the POV display 224I is "05:17", and the countdown is continuing. Further, at this time, it is shown that the time to be added to the timer display is divided into a plurality of parts and displayed around the rotation area of the LED array. Specifically, one "+5 second" display, two "+2 second" display, and one "+1 second" display are displayed so as to surround the family crest actor 224E, whereby 10 seconds are displayed on the timer display. It is informed that the addition will be made.

After that, on the POV display 224I shown in FIG. 28(C3), an effect of bursting the timer display is displayed, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 28(C4), the timer display after adding is "15:00". Is displayed. In this example of performance, when "15:00" is displayed, the countdown is interrupted, but it may be continued.

After that, the rotation speed of the LED array of the POV display 224I is started to decrease, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the timer notice display TM1 again. Then, as shown in FIG. 28(C5), it stops in the initial posture. At this time, the timer display of the displayed timer advance notice display TM1 is "15:00", and then the countdown is restarted. The countdown may be restarted while the timer display is being displayed on the POV display 224I. Here, the case where the timer display is displayed by the POV display 224I may be made to be a big hit more easily than the case where the timer display is displayed by the decorative pattern display device 208, but the big hit is easily made. May be the same or may not be a big hit.

In addition, in the timer announcement effect described so far, when adding, shortening, or interrupting the timer in the timer display, internally from the beginning of the countdown before the change to the end of the countdown after the change. The total time may be counted down. Also, internally, the time before the change may be counted down, and the time after the change may be counted down (for example, if the time is changed 10 seconds after the countdown is started, If 10 seconds is counted down and "Attention" is displayed 5 seconds after the change, then another 5 seconds is counted down). Further, the display of the countdown and the internally counted time may be the same.
FIG. 29 is a diagram showing, step by step, an example of the effect using the chance up meter.

In FIG. 29, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the public figure display device 210, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the public figure holding lamp 216 and the fourth. Illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted. Further, in this example of effect, the above-described effect lever 136V is further provided.

FIG. 29(1) shows another effect example following FIG. 17(25). In FIG. 29(1), the state of development into super reach (swordsman reach) is shown. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 29(1), an enemy swordsman is displayed in a large size, and in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 29(2), an animation of a duel scene between the hero of the protagonist and the enemy swordsman. Is displayed. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 29(2), the chance up meter CMT is displayed at the lower left corner of the display screen. The chance up meter CMT is, for example, a meter showing the progress status of the reach effect, and the character SBH of Sabohani moves between the start point SP and the final point GP, and the progress status of the current reach effect is roughly indicated by the position. Information. Here, the traveling speed of the character SBH of Sabohani is not constant but may vary depending on the progress situation of the effect, but may be constant. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 29(2), the first checkpoint CP1, the second checkpoint CP2, and the third checkpoint CP3 are arranged. The first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 indicate that a specific notice may occur, so that the player can be expected. That is, when the Sabohani character SBH reaches each of the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 on the way, a specific advance notice may occur. Further, at the final point GP, the placard is displayed in rotation, which suggests that when the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the final point GP, either the result of the big hit or the loss is derived. In this example of production, the display of the chance up meter CMT is started when the animation display of the duel scene is started, but the display of the state that has evolved into the super reach shown in FIG. 29(1) is started. The display may be started at the same timing, the display may be started when the reach state is reached, the display may be started before the reach state occurs, or the variation of the decorative design The display may be started when the display is started.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29(3) shows that the character SBH of Sabohani is starting to move from the starting point SP.

Thereafter, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 29(4), at the timing when the character SBH of Sabohan reaches the first checkpoint CP1, the character Boy of Boy appears from the left side of the display screen and moves toward the right. Is shown. That is, it is shown that the advance notice is given by the appearance of the boy character BOY. It can be said that the boy character BOY functions as a chance-up character.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 29(5), a balloon with the letters "Chance Up Boy Passed" is displayed near the character SBH of Sabohani, and a notice is given by the character display of the chance up. I'm informing you. The timing at which the boy character BOY starts to display and the timing at which the balloon of the sabotani character SBH starts to display may be the same, or the balloon of the sabotani character SBH may be displayed after the balloon character BOY starts to display. It may be displayed, or the boy character BOY may be displayed after the display of the balloon of the sabotani character SBH is started. The Sabohani character SBH stops at the first checkpoint CP1 during the advance notice by the display of the Boy character BOY, but may not stop.

After that, as shown in FIG. 29(6), the first check point CP1 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red and "UP" indicating that the reliability of the jackpot is improved due to the appearance of the notice. A letter is displayed above it to show the history of the advance notice. It should be noted that the display of “UP” is overlapped by the character SBH of Sabohani, and it is more difficult to visually recognize it than in the case where it is not overlapped. Further, the content of the notice that has occurred may be displayed. In addition, in this example of performance, when the character SBH of Savohani approaches the checkpoint, the chance up meter CMT may be enlarged and displayed. In this case, the entire chance up meter CMT may be enlarged and displayed, or only the relevant checkpoint portion may be enlarged and displayed. This is also applicable in the following description.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29(7) shows that the character SBH of Sabohani has started to move. At this time, since the overlap of part of the display of “UP” has been eliminated, part of the display is visible.

Then, when the character SBH of the sabotani reaches the second check point CP2 at the timing shown in FIG. 29(8), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 29(9). It is displayed and the button effect is started. Then, when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) starts at the timing shown in FIG. 29(10), the player can receive the operation of the effect button 136 (chance button 136). Here, the character SBH of Sabohani stops at the second checkpoint CP2 until a button operation is performed by the player or the operation valid period elapses, but may not be stopped.

In the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 29(11), it is shown that the operation valid period is started and the gauge is reduced, and thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 29(12), the player It is shown that the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is being pressed. When the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is pressed within the operation valid period, as shown in FIG. 29(13), the cut-in image CI3 of the lord is displayed to notify that the reliability of the big hit is high. Notice production is performed. In this example of performance, the cut-in image CI3 of Tonosama is a special cut-in image that is surrounded by a golden frame and shows a state of riding a large motorcycle while wearing sunglasses and smoking a cigar. It is reported that the reliability of the big hit is dramatically high. Instead of the cut-in image CI3 of the lord shown in FIG. 29(13), a cut-in image CI3 of the lord (see FIG. 17(32)) having a lower reliability than the cut-in image CI3 of the lord is displayed. May be. The cut-in image CI1 of this hall shown in FIG. 29(13) may be displayed on condition that the effect button 136 (chance button 136) has been operated within the operation valid period, or may be displayed. The button 136 (chance button 136) may be displayed without fail when it is operated within the effective operation period. In addition, the cut-in image CI1 of this hall shown in FIG. 29(13) may be displayed even when the operation valid period has elapsed without operating the effect button 136 (chance button 136). Good, it may be always displayed when the operation valid period has elapsed without operating the effect button 136 (chance button 136), or the operation valid period without operating the effect button 136 (chance button 136). It may not be displayed when is passed.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 29(14), a balloon with the characters “Chance Up Gold Cut-in” is displayed near the character SBH of Sabohani, and the cut-in surrounded by a gold frame is displayed. It informs that a notice has been given by displaying an image. Note that the display start timing of the cut-in image CI3 of the lord may be the same as the display start timing of the balloon of the character SBH of the sabotani, or the character of the sabotani character may be displayed after the display of the cut-in image CI3 of the lord. The balloon of SBH may be displayed, and the cut-in image CI3 of the lord may be displayed after the display of the balloon of the character SBH of Savohani is started. Note that the character SBH of Sabohani stops at the second checkpoint CP2 even while the character image CI3 of the lord is displayed, but may not stop. Further, in this effect example, the timing when the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the second check point CP2 and the timing when the button effect is started may be the same, or the character SBH of Sabohani becomes the second check point CP2. The button effect may be started after reaching, or the character SBH of Savohani may reach the second check point CP2 after the button effect is started. In the case where the cut-in image CI3 of the lord is configured not to be displayed when the operation valid period has elapsed without operating the effect button 136 (chance button 136), the effect button 136 (chance button 136) Even if is not operated, the fact that the advance notice of the chance is generated may be notified as in the case where the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, or the advance notice of the chance is generated. It may not be informed, or only a part of the occurrence of the advance notice of the chance may be informed (for example, the balloon is not displayed and only the character "UP" is displayed).

Then, as shown in FIG. 29(15), the second check point CP2 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and "UP" indicating that the reliability of the big hit has increased due to the appearance of the notice. A letter is displayed above it to show the history of the advance notice. It should be noted that the display of “UP” is overlapped by the character SBH of Sabohani, and it is more difficult to visually recognize it than in the case where it is not overlapped.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29(16) shows that the character SBH of Sabohani has started to move. At this time, since the overlap of part of the display of “UP” has been eliminated, part of the display is visible.

After that, when the character SBH of the sabotani reaches the third check point CP3 at the timing shown in FIG. 29(17), the lever image 136Va is displayed and the sabotani is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 29(18). A balloon with the letters "Chance Up Lever" is displayed near the character SBH to inform that the notice by the lever effect has started. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (19), the remaining time display meter MT is displayed in addition to the lever image 136Va, and the lever effect is started. Further, the third checkpoint CP3 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and the word "UP" indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has been improved due to the appearance of the notice is displayed above the notice. A history of what has occurred is shown. It should be noted that the display of “UP” is overlapped by the character SBH of Sabohani, and it is more difficult to visually recognize it than in the case where it is not overlapped. Note that the operation valid period of the effect lever 136V may be started during the display of the balloon with the letters “chance up lever” added. Although the remaining time display meter MT may overlap a part (placard) of the chance up meter CMT, the remaining time display meter MT may overlap all of them, and the chance up meter CMT may be displayed while the remaining time display meter MT is being displayed. Part or all of the chance up meter CMT may be displayed so as not to overlap while the remaining time display meter MT is being displayed. The up meter CMT may overlap a part or the whole m part of the remaining time display meter MT, and while the opportunity up meter CMT is being displayed, a part or all of the remaining time display meter MT may be overlapped. Good.

After that, when the operation valid period of the effect lever 136V starts at the timing shown in FIG. 29(20), the player can receive the operation of the effect lever 136V. The chance up meter CMT shows that the character SBH of Sabohani has started to move. Note that the sabotani character SBH may be stopped at the third check point CP3 until the lever operation is performed by the player or the operation valid period elapses.

The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 29 (21) shows that the operation valid period has started and the gauge has decreased. On the other hand, in the chance up meter CMT, the sabotani character SBH is located before the final point GP.

After that, when the player operates the effect lever 136V at the timing shown in FIG. 29(22) within the operation valid period, as shown in FIG. 29(23), the first large-board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth board. The large-board behavior accessory 224Gd and the Senryo box accessory 224H are activated, the light guide plate IL is caused to emit light, and the effect image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. That is, it is notified that the jackpot will be a big hit. At this time, the chance up meter CMT is not displayed, but may be displayed. In addition, the effect (the first large board action product 224Ga to the fourth large board action product 224Gd and the thousand-box work product 224H is activated when the production lever 126V shown in FIG. 29 (23) is operated, and the light emission of the light guide plate IL is performed. 17), and the effect performed when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) shown in FIG. 17 (40) is operated is the same, but different. It may be. Then, as shown in FIG. 29 (24), the light emission of the light guide plate IL is finished, and the first large board behavior product 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior product 224Gd and the thousand-box work product 224H respectively return to the initial positions, and the decorative pattern. The effect image fades out on the display device 208. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the animation display of the duel scene whose display has been interrupted is restarted while fading in. Although the chance up meter CMT also fades in along with the animation display fade-in of the duel scene, the chance up meter CMT may be re-displayed after the fade-in of the duel scene animation display is completed. .. The operation of FIGS. 29(23) to (24) is performed, for example, in the manner described above with reference to FIGS. 17(38) to (44).

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (25) shows that the fade-in of the animation display of the duel scene has been completed and restarted. Specifically, the animation display of the duel scene shows that the enemy swordsman is in agony, and he is about to lose. Further, in the chance up meter CMT, the character SBH of the sabotani reaches the final point GP, and the placard shows a character of "V" which means a big hit.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (26), the main character's lord wins the enemy swordsman, "decoration 7" is displayed on the middle pattern, and it is notified that it is a big hit. Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (27), the animation display of the duel scene fades out, and as shown in FIG. 28 (28), the first decorative pattern is “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”. The swing fluctuation starts with the combination of decorative patterns. Although the chance up meter CMT is not displayed, it may be displayed even after the reach effect is finished. Further, only a part of the chance up meter CMT (for example, the character SBH of Sabohan and the placard) may be displayed.

In the effect using the chance up meter CMT, the chance up meter CMT may or may not be displayed. In this case, when the chance up meter CMT is displayed, it may be more likely to be a big hit than when it is not displayed. The reliability of the big hit may be the same when the chance up meter CMT is displayed and when it is not displayed.

Further, there may be a notice of a chance up that appears only when the chance up meter CMT is displayed.

Further, there may be a notice of a chance up that appears regardless of whether or not the chance up meter CMT is displayed.

Further, the position of the check point may be moved or the check point may be erased during the performance of the chance up meter CMT.

Further, during execution of the effect on the chance up meter CMT, the character SBH of the sabotani indicating the current position returns to a position (position indicating the past) before the current position, or a previous position (indicating the future). Position).

Further, the effect itself in the chance up meter CMT may be a mini game, and for example, when the effect is performed at the position indicated by the check point, the effect of increasing the chance may be performed. In addition, for example, an enemy character may be arranged at the check point, and an effect may be performed in which the chance is increased when the teammate character fights and wins.

Further, as an effect of increasing a chance during the execution of the jackpot game (for example, rank-up bonus, probability variation promotion, promotion to a jackpot game with more balls, etc.), an effect using a chance up meter CMT may be performed.

Further, the chance up meter CMT itself may be made non-display by power failure recovery. Further, the display of the chance up meter CMT itself may be restored, but the history of the timing of the checkpoint and the occurrence of the chance up effect before the power failure may be hidden.

Moreover, the effect displayed after the countdown of the count display in the timer advance notice effect becomes 0 may or may not be notified by the chance up meter CMT.
FIG. 30 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the effect using the chance up meter.

FIG. 30(3a) is another example of effect following FIG. 29(2), and the same effect as in FIG. 29(3) is performed.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 30(4a), the character SBH of Sabohan reaches the first checkpoint CP1, but no notice is given. That is, it is shown that even if the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the first checkpoint CP1, the advance notice of the chance is not given. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 30(5a), the balloon of the character SBH of Sabohani is not displayed, and as shown in FIGS. 30(5a) to (7a), the character SBH of Sabohani has the first checkpoint. Passing through CP1 as it is, neither marking at the first checkpoint CP1 nor display of the character “UP” is performed. As a result, at the first check point CP1, it may be possible to recognize that the announcement has not been issued. In addition, when the advance notice of the chance up is not given at the first check point CP1, the display of the first check point CP1 may be erased, for example, as shown in FIG. 30(7a′). Also, as shown in FIG. 30(7a″), instead of the letters “UP” displayed at the first check point CP1, the display of “X” indicating that the advance notice of the chance up has not been given. May be performed. Even if the advance notice of the chance increase is not actually given, it is assumed that the advance notice of the chance increase is given after the character SBH of Sabohani has passed the check point, and the marking or “UP” at the check point is given. May be displayed, for example, the marking or the character “UP” may be temporarily hidden and then the marking or the character “UP” may be displayed. The character SBH of Sabohani may return to the checkpoint to give an advance notice of the chance and display the marking or the character “UP”. Also, for example, when the reach effect is rewound to the beginning or halfway, and when the character SBH of Sabohani passes the checkpoint, the chance-up effect is performed and the marking or the characters “UP” are given. May be displayed.

FIG. 30(17b) is another example of effect following FIG. 29(16), and the same effect as in FIG. 29(17) is performed. At the final point GP in the chance up meter CMT, the placard is displayed as a question mark, and when the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the final point GP, some event may occur. Is suggested.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (18b), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed instead of the lever image 136Va, and the state that the lever effect as the advance notice of the chance is not started is displayed. It is shown. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 30(19b), the balloon of the character SBH of Sabohani is not displayed, and as shown in FIG. 30(17b) to FIG. 30(20b), the character SBH of Sabohani has the third checkpoint. Passing through CP3 as it is, neither marking at the third check point CP3 nor display of the character "UP" is performed. Note that FIG. 30 (19b) shows a state in which the operation valid period of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) has started and the player is ready to accept the operation of the effect button 136 (chance button 136). ing.

After that, the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 30 (20b) shows that the operation valid period is decreasing. On the other hand, in the chance up meter CMT, the sabotani character SBH is located before the final point GP.

Then, when the player operates the effect button 136 (chance button 136) at the timing shown in FIG. 30 (21b) within the operation valid period, the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. A message saying that the character and the enemy swordsman has lost the battle is displayed along with a line saying "Did you remove it?". Further, in the chance up meter CMT, the character display "development" is displayed on the placard at the final point GP to notify that the reach production will be developed.

Then, after the cut-in image CI4 by the lord's character shown in FIG. 30(23b) is displayed, as shown in FIG. 30(24b), the effect that the panda character appears as an assistant in the swordsman reach. Is started. Further, the chance up meter CMT shows that the character SBH of Sabohani rides on a flying carpet and moves toward the starting point SP.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 30(25b) to (29b), while the character SBH of Sabohani is heading to the start point SP, a display for changing the chance up meter CMT while overlapping with the character SBH of Sabohani is displayed. To do. Therefore, due to the movement of the character SBH of Sabohani, for example, as shown in FIGS. 30(26b) to (27b), a part of the changed chance up meter CMT appears and the fifth check point CP5 appears. As shown in FIG. 30 (28b) to FIG. 30 (29b), the fourth check point CP4 appears.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (29b) shows that the character SBH of Savohani is again positioned at the start point SP. At this time, in the chance up meter CMT, the display state before the change of the fourth check point CP4 and the fifth check point CP5 (the state without the red marking and the character "UP" is not displayed) Has become. Then, on the chance up meter CMT, the movement of the character SBH of the sabotani is started.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (30b), a state in which the SP swordsman reach is developed is shown. The SP swordsman reach is a reach that develops and transitions to a swordsman reach, and is a reach production that is more likely to be a big hit than when the swordsman reach does not develop into an SP swordsman reach. In the SP swordsman reach, as shown in Fig. 30 (30b), the protagonist's lord and the enemy swordsman confront each other, which is the same as the pre-development swordsman reach, but pandas are used as assistants to the hero's lord. It differs from the point in that the full moon appears in the background. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (30b), at the timing when the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the fourth checkpoint CP4, the Kopanda supporter KPD composed of three characters of Copanda supports. There is a notice display to show that the SP swordsman's reach has become extremely reliable. It can be said that this Kopanda cheering party KPD is functioning as a character for increasing chances. The Kopanda cheering party KPD may or may not always appear in the SP swordsman reach.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (31b), a balloon with the characters "Chance Up Copanda Cheerleaders" is displayed in the vicinity of the character SBH of Savohani, and a notice is displayed by the character display of chance up. I am informed that I was broken. Note that the timing at which the display of the Kopanda cheering party KPD starts may be the same as the timing at which the display of the balloon of the character SBH of Sabohani is started, or the balloon of the character SBH of the Savohani may be displayed after the display of the group of Kopanda cheering party KPD is started. It may be displayed, or the Kopanda cheering party KPD may be displayed after the display of the balloon of the character SBH of Sabohani is started. Note that the character SBH of Sabohani stops at the first checkpoint CP1 while the advance notice by the display of the Kopanda cheering party KPD is being performed, but may not be stopped.

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (32b) shows that the character SBH of Sabohan has reached the fifth check point CP5. Then, the display of "collaboration deadly" that the chance-up effect is performed is displayed, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 30 (33b), the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the lever image 136Va together with the display of "one shot". To be done. Further, in the chance up meter CMT, a balloon with the characters “chance up lever” is displayed near the character SBH of Sabohani to inform that the notice by the lever effect has started. Here, there may be a case where the lever effect that is the chance-up effect is not performed but the button effect that is the effect of operating the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is performed. Also, the lever effect may be always performed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (34b), the remaining time display meter MT is displayed in addition to the lever image 136Va, and the lever effect is started. Further, the fifth checkpoint CP5 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and the word "UP" indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has been improved due to the appearance of the notice is displayed above the notice. A history of what has occurred is shown. It should be noted that the display of “UP” is overlapped by the character SBH of Sabohani, and it is more difficult to visually recognize it than in the case where it is not overlapped. After that, for example, when the effect lever 136V is operated, the effect is performed in the manner described above with reference to FIGS.

FIG. 30(23c) is another example of effect following FIG. 29(22). In the lever effect shown in FIG. 29(18) to FIG. 29(22), the player operates the effect lever 136V, It shows that the production failed. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 6" is displayed on the middle symbol, and the combination of the loss of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" is notified and it is notified. Further, in the chance up meter CMT, the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the final point GP, but the placard shows the character “x” indicating that it is missing, and the character SBH of Sabohani has a disappointed expression. ing.

FIG. 30(5d) is a modification of the effect shown in FIG. 29(5). Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30(5d), a large number of boy characters BOY (boy group) appear from the left side of the display screen and move toward the right side. .. That is, it is shown that a notice is given by the appearance of the Boys group. When the boyy characters appear in groups, the jackpot characters BOY are more likely to be a big hit than when they appear alone. Further, in the chance up meter CMT, a balloon with the characters "Chance up BOY group" is displayed in the vicinity of the character SBH of Sabohani, which notifies that the advance notice has been given by the character display of the chance up. In this way, different chance-up effects may be performed at the same chance-up point, or the same effect may be performed at the same chance-up point.
FIG. 31 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the effect using the chance up meter.

FIG. 31(7e) is another example of effect that follows FIG. 29(6), and the same effect as in FIG. 29(7) is performed.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 31(8e) to (9e), in the chance up meter CMT, the character SBH of Sabohani jumps over the second check point CP2 and reaches the position before the third check point CP3, and the third check point CP3 is reached. It waits at that place until a chance-up notice corresponding to checkpoint CP3 is given. Note that while the effect of the character SBH of Sabohani jumping over the second check point CP2 and reaching the third check point CP3 is being performed, the effect corresponding to the second check point CP2 (for example, FIG. 29(9)- The button effect and the like shown in FIG. 15 (15) and the like may be performed, or the effect itself may not be performed. Alternatively, although the effect is not performed, the second check point CP2 may be marked in red and the character “UP” may be displayed as the effect.

FIG. 31(2f) is another effect example following FIG. 29(1). In the effect example shown in FIG. 31(2f), the display mode of the chance up meter CMT is different from the effect example shown in FIG. Specifically, the gauge portion of the chance up meter CMT is configured in the shape of a green rod, and instead of the character SBH of Savohani, the position of the marker MRK roughly informs the current progress of the reach effect. At this time, the color of the advanced portion of the marker MRK in the gauge portion changes from green to white. Further, the moving speed of the marker MRK is not constant but may change depending on the progress status of the effect, but may be constant. In addition, the display form of the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 is represented by a question mark, so as to give a sense of expectation that the advance notice of the chance is given. The start point and the end point are indicated by the start and end of the gauge portion of the chance up meter CMT.

FIG. 31(3f) following FIG. 31(2f) shows that the marker MRK has started to move from the start point.

Thereafter, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 31(4f), at the timing when the marker MRK reaches the first check point CP1, the boy character BOY appears from the right side of the display screen and moves toward the left side. It is shown.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 31(5f), a balloon with the letters "Chance Up Boy Passed" is displayed near the marker MRK, and the advance notice by the character display of the chance up has been given. Is informed. The marker MRK stands by at the first check point CP1 while the balloon is displayed, as shown in FIGS. 31(5f) to 31(6f).

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIGS. 31(7f-1) to (7f-2), the state in which the marker MRK has started to move is shown. At this time, instead of displaying the question mark at the first check point CP1, the character "UP" indicating that the reliability of the big hit has increased due to the appearance of the notice is displayed over the gauge portion. The boy character BOY is framed out from the right side of the display screen at the timing shown in FIG. 31 (7f-2).

FIG. 31(4g') shows an example of an effect when the boy character BOY does not appear even after the marker MRK reaches the first check point CP1 after the effect shown in FIG. 31(3f) is performed. Has been done. Specifically, when the Boy character BOY does not appear at the timing shown in FIG. 31(4f), as shown in FIG. 31(4g'), the chance up meter CMT is at the first check point CP1. Instead of displaying the question mark, “X” is displayed to indicate that the notice has not appeared. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 31 (4g″), the display of the question mark at the first checkpoint CP1 may be erased and no display may be performed. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 31 (4 g ″″), the display mode may not be changed while the question mark at the first check point CP 1 is displayed.

FIG. 31(2h) is still another effect example following FIG. 29(1). The production example shown in FIG. 31(2h) is similar to the display mode of the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 31(2f), but the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 are hidden. They differ in points. Therefore, it is difficult to recognize the start timing of the advance notice of the chance increase, and it may be possible to give the player an expectation as to when the advance notice of the chance increase is started.

At the timing shown in FIG. 31(5h), a balloon with the characters "Chance Up Boy Passed" is displayed near the marker MRK to notify that the advance notice has been given by the character display of the chance up. At this time, a part of the characters "UP" indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has been improved due to the appearance of the notice has appeared.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 31(6h) to 31(7h), as the marker MRK progresses and the display color in the gauge portion of the chance up meter CMT is changed, the hidden “UP” character is changed. Appear.
FIG. 32 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the effect using the chance up meter.

32A1 to FIG. 32A11 show a state where the chance up meter CMT notifies the timing of occurrence of pseudo rendition and the number of occurrences of pseudo rendition during execution of pseudo rendition. ..

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 32(A1), a state in which the decorative symbols are variably displayed is shown. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 32(A1), the number of holdings of special figure 1 is 1, the first holding icon h11 is displayed, and in the second holding number display, the number of holdings of special figure 1 is displayed. “1” indicating that is 1 is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 32(A2), the characters "Secure Echigoya" are displayed to show that the chase effect is started as an example of the pseudo continuous effect.

After that, in FIG. 32(A3), a state in which the chase effect is started is shown. Specifically, on the decorative pattern display device 208, the effect display in which the main character, the lord, chases the evil merchant is started. Further, below the second decorative symbol, the chance up meter CMT in the above-described mode shown in FIG. 31(2f) is displayed. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 32(A3), the first check point CP1, the second check point CP2, and the third check point CP3 are arranged. These first check point CP1 to third check point CP3 indicate that a pseudo-relation may occur, and are intended to give the player a sense of expectation. That is, when the marker MRK reaches each of the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 on the way, a pseudo run may occur. In addition, it has been suggested that reaching the final point makes it easier for the unscrupulous merchants to be captured and to shift to a highly reliable reach production. In this example of performance, the more the pseudo-relation occurs, the more easily it becomes a big hit. It should be noted that, when the pseudo-ream occurs four times (that is, when the pseudo-ream occurs when the final point is reached), the big hit is determined. It should be noted that the big hits may be settled when the number of pseudo runs is a number other than 4, and for example, when the number of pseudo runs is 1 and 4, the big hits may be settled. The number of pseudo-repetitions that are confirmed as a big hit is less likely to occur than other pseudo-repetition times.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 32(A4) shows that the marker MRK is starting to move from the starting point.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 32(A5), the first decorative pattern is shown to fluctuate in a combination of decorative patterns of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 6". The chance up meter CMT shows that the marker MRK has reached the first check point CP1.

Then, as shown in FIG. 32(A6), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the character "continuation" is displayed in the display in which the main character's lord is chasing the evil merchant, and it is informed that the first pseudo-link will be performed. Is shown. At this time, in the chance up meter CMT, the display of the first checkpoint CP1 is switched from the question mark to the display of the character "CONTINUE". Further, at this time, the first decorative pattern is not displayed, but the variable display may be performed in a translucent display mode, for example. Even if the display of the main character chasing after the evil merchant is the same as the timing when the character "Continue" is displayed and the timing at which the display of the first checkpoint CP1 is switched from the question mark to the character "Continued" is displayed. Okay, after the word "Continue" is displayed on the display that the main character chases after the evil merchant, the display of the first checkpoint CP1 may switch from the question mark to the display of the character "Continue." After the display of the first checkpoint CP1 is switched from the question mark to the display of the character "continuation", the character "continuation" may be displayed in the display in which the hero of the protagonist chases the evil merchant.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 32(A7), it is shown that the first decorative pattern fluctuates in a combination of decorative patterns “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 6”. The chance up meter CMT shows that the marker MRK has reached the second check point CP2. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 32(A7) shows that the distance between the main character's hall and the evil merchant is shortened.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 32(A8), the character "continuation" is displayed along with the display that the main character chases after the evil merchant, and it is informed that the second pseudo-link will be performed. It is shown. At this time, in the chance up meter CMT, the display of the second checkpoint CP2 is switched from the question mark to the display of the character "CONTINUE". Further, at this time, the first decorative pattern is not displayed, but the variable display may be performed in a translucent display mode, for example.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 32(A9), a state in which the first decorative pattern fluctuates in a combination of decorative patterns “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 6” is shown. The chance up meter CMT shows that the marker MRK has reached the third check point CP3. In addition, the angle that shows the hero's chasing after the evil merchant has been changed, and the expression of the evil merchant who had been able to afford until now has become a frustrated expression.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 32(A10), the character "continuation" is displayed along with the display that the main character chasing after the evil merchant, and the state that the third pseudo-repeation is informed is displayed. It is shown. At this time, in the chance up meter CMT, the display of the third checkpoint CP3 is switched from the question mark to the display of the character "CONTINUE". Further, at this time, the first decorative pattern is not displayed, but the variable display may be performed in a translucent display mode, for example.

After that, as shown in FIG. 32(A11), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the character "Secure" and the appearance that the main character's lord has captured the evil merchant. At this time, in the chance up meter CMT, the marker MRK has reached the final point, which indicates that the pseudo variable has been performed three times in total in the present symbol variation display. Further, at this time, in the first decorative pattern, the reach state is reached by "decoration 7", and the reach effect is started.

32(B1) to FIG. 32(B14), the example of effect shown in FIG. 32(B14) shows that the chance up meter CMT is displayed during the normal variable display of the decorative pattern, and the timing of the advance notice of the chance up is notified. There is.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 32(B1), the variable display of the decorative symbol is shown. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 32(B1), the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is 1, the first holding icon h11 is displayed, and in the second holding number display, the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is displayed. “1” indicating that is 1 is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 32(B2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the chance up meter CMT in the above-described mode shown in FIG. 31(2f) is displayed below the second decorative symbol. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 32(B2), the first check point CP1 and the second check point CP2 are arranged. The first check point CP1 and the second check point CP2 indicate that a chance-up notice may occur, and the player is expected to have a sense of expectation.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 32(B3), the marker MRK is starting to move from the starting point. In addition, a balloon in which the characters "opportunity" are displayed is displayed near the navigation character YM, and the navigation character advance notice is given by the navigation character YM. It should be noted that, in this example of performance, the notice of the navigator character YM with the balloon of the "opportunity" is a notice not directly related to the chance up meter CMT, but an opportunity directly related to the chance up meter CMT. It may be a notice of up.

After that, as shown in FIG. 32(B4), the chance up meter CMT shows that the marker MRK has reached the first check point CP1. Then, the character displayed in the balloon of the navigation character YM is changed from "opportunity" to "no". In response to this, a balloon with the word "chance up" is added near the marker MRK to inform that the navigation character YM has given a notice of a chance up. Note that the marker MRK waits at the first checkpoint CP1 while the balloon is displayed, but the marker MRK may proceed without waiting. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that conversation advance notice has started. When the conversation announcement is started, the lord's conversation image CI1 in which the character display of "chance" is displayed together with the lord's character is displayed. This lord's conversation image CI1 is the first stage of the conversation announcement. Further, the conversation image CI1 of this lord is overlapped with the first decorative design, and the first decorative design is less visible than in the case where the first decorative design is not overlapped. Further, the lord's conversation image CI1 is overlapped with the chance up meter CMT, and it is more difficult to visually recognize the lord's conversation image CI1 than in the case where the chance up meter CMT is not overlapped. It should be noted that the conversation image CI1 of the lord is a notice that is not directly related to the chance up meter CMT, but may be a chance up notice that is directly related to the chance up meter CMT.

Then, as shown in FIG. 32(B5), in the chance up meter CMT, as the marker MRK progresses and the display color in the gauge portion of the chance up meter CMT is changed, the hidden “UP” character is displayed. The appearance is shown. As a result, the history of the occurrence of the advance notice of the chance is shown. In addition, the character displayed in the balloon of the navigation character YM is changed from "No" to "Intense heat". In this example of performance, the notice of the navigator character YM with the balloon of “intense heat” is a notice that is not directly related to the chance up meter CMT, but an opportunity increase that is directly related to the chance up meter CMT. May be a notice of. The conversation image CI1 of the lord is reduced and displayed below the second decorative pattern. It should be noted that the sir's conversation image CI1 is also overlapped with the chance up meter CMT here, and is more difficult to visually recognize than in the case where it is not overlapped.

After that, as shown in FIG. 32(B6), the chance up meter CMT shows that the marker MRK has reached the second check point CP2. Then, as a continuation of the conversation announcement, the grandfather's conversation image CI2 on which the operation promotion notification image shown in FIG. 16(10) is displayed is displayed together with the grandfather's character. The old conversation image CI2 is a notice that is not directly related to the chance up meter CMT, but may be a chance up notice that is directly related to the chance up meter CMT. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 32(B6), the operation valid period is not started, and even if the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, the corresponding display is not performed. The first decorative pattern is overlapped by the old conversation image CI2. Further, as shown in FIG. 32(B6), the palace's conversation image CI1 is at least partially overlapped by the grandpa's conversation image CI2, and the lord's conversation is more than that in the non-overlapping state. It is difficult to visually recognize the display mode of the image CI1. In addition, the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather is partially overlapped by the balloon of the navigation character YM and the chance up meter CMT, and it is more difficult to visually recognize the conversation image CI2 than in the non-overlapping state. The marker MRK that has reached the second check point CP2 is in a standby state.

Then, the operation valid period starts at the timing shown in FIG. 32(B7). The player may be able to see the effect according to the operation by operating the effect button 136 (chance button 136) after the timing shown in FIG. 32(B7).

The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 32(B8) is shown in a display mode when a predetermined time has elapsed after the operation valid period started. At the timing shown in FIG. 32(B8), the navigation character advance notice has ended and the balloon of the navigation character YM has been erased. Then, when the player presses the effect button 136 (chance button 136) at the timing shown in FIG. 32(B9), as shown in FIG. 32(B10), in the grand conversation image CI2, the operation promotion notification image is displayed. Instead, the words "It's intense heat" may be displayed. This informs that the reliability of the big hit is considerably high. Further, in this effect example, the display mode of the outer frame of the old conversation image CI2 is the display mode highlighted by the thick gold line, which is more likely to be a big hit than in the case of the normal outer frame display mode. Is informed. In addition, in the chance up meter CMT, in response to the change in the display form of the outer frame of the old conversation image CI2 to a gold color, a balloon with the word “Chance up gold frame” is displayed near the marker MRK. , Has announced that the announcement of a chance up in the conversation announcement has been made. Note that the marker MRK waits at the first checkpoint CP1 while the balloon is displayed, but the marker MRK may proceed without waiting. Note that when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is not operated within the operation valid period, the old conversation image CI2 may or may not be displayed. When the old conversation image CI2 is not displayed, it is not necessary to notify that the advance notice of the chance up has occurred in the chance up meter CMT, it may be informed, or only a part may be informed. (For example, only the characters "UP" are displayed).

The chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 32(B11) shows that the position of the balloon has changed. At this time, the balloon overlaps the old conversation image CI2, and it is more difficult to visually recognize the old conversation image CI2 than in the case where the balloon does not overlap. Note that the position of the balloon may not change from the position shown in FIG. 32(B10), or the display position of the balloon may be the position shown in FIG. 32(B11) from the beginning.

Then, as shown in FIG. 32(B12), in the chance up meter CMT, as the marker MRK progresses and the display color in the gauge portion of the chance up meter CMT changes, the hidden “UP” character is displayed. It is shown as it appears. As a result, the history of the occurrence of the advance notice of the chance is shown. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display of the balloon displayed on the chance up meter CMT is erased, and the conversation notice is also ended. The balloon display may be erased at the timing when the conversation announcement ends, or may be erased after the conversation announcement ends. Further, the conversation announcement may be ended after the display of the balloon is erased.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 32(B13), the first decorative symbol is "decoration 7" and is in the reach state. At this time, the marker MRK of the chance up meter CMT has reached the final point, and it is shown that the effect by the chance up meter CMT is completed. Then, as shown in FIG. 32(B14), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the reach effect is started and the chance up meter CMT is erased. The timing at which the reach effect is started and the timing at which the chance up meter CMT is deleted may be the same, the chance up meter CMT may be deleted after the reach effect is started, or the chance. The reach effect may be started after the upmeter CMT is erased.

In addition, although the production by the chance up meter CMT in this production example is ended when the reach state is reached, the production may be continued even in the reach state, or may be continued even after shifting to the super reach. You may do it. Further, when the production by the chance up meter CMT is started, it may be continuously performed until the symbol variable display is finished. At this time, for example, when the super reach is started, the effect by the chance up meter CMT different from the effect by the continuously executed chance up meter CMT may be started. Further, the effect by the chance up meter CMT may or may not always start during the normal symbol variation display. Further, in the normal symbol variation display, the effect by the chance up meter CMT may or may not start, but in the reach effect, the effect by the chance up meter CMT may be always started. In addition, when the production with the chance up meter CMT is enabled, the production with the chance up meter CMT may be started when the production button 136 (chance button 136) is operated. In this case, for example, a message to that effect may be displayed so that the player can recognize it.
FIG. 33 is a diagram showing, in steps, another example of the effect using the chance up meter.

In FIG. 33, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the public figure display device 210, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the general figure holding lamp 216 and the fourth figure. Illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 33(A1) to 33(A5), the effect is started by the chance up meter CMT, but is erased halfway.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 33(A1), it has been developed to super reach (swordsman reach), and an animation of a duel scene between the protagonist's lord and the enemy swordsman is shown. Further, in the lower part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variation icon h0 and the chance up meter CMT are displayed side by side, and it is shown that the effect is produced by the chance up meter CMT. The chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 33(A1) is, for example, a meter showing the progress status of the reach effect, and the character SBH of Sabohani moves between the start point SP and the final point GM, depending on the position. The progress status of the reach production is roughly reported. In addition, in the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 33(A1), the first check point CP1, the second check point CP2, and the third check point CP3 are arranged, and the character SBH of Sabohani moves from the start point SP to the final point GP. When the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 are respectively reached on the road, a specific notice may be generated, but at the timing shown in FIG. 33(A1), the character SBH of Savohani becomes the first. The first check point CP1 and the second check point CP2 have been reached, respectively, but since there is no advance notice of a chance up corresponding to them, the display of the first check point CP1 and the second check point CP2 is erased. The chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 33(A1) shows that the character SBH of Sabohani starts moving from the second check point CP2.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 33(A2), a cut-in display showing a state in which a grandfather character having an energy drink speaks “Fight” is displayed. The display of this cut-in is, for example, an effect of promoting the super reach being executed, and when this cut-in is displayed, it is more likely to be a big hit than when it is not displayed. Further, the display of this cut-in may be a premier notice, and when it is displayed, the big hit may be confirmed. When the cut-in is displayed, the chance up meter CMT is erased. That is, in this example of performance, it is shown that the performance by the chance up meter CMT is completed because the notification that the chance to hit the chance related to the chance up meter CMT is more likely to be a big hit. There is. The display of this cut-in is a notice not directly related to the chance up meter CMT, but may be a notice of a chance increase directly related to the chance up meter CMT. As described above, in this effect example, the appearance by the chance up meter CMT is finished before the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the final point GP. It can also be said that the appearance by the chance up meter CMT is finished before the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the checkpoint. In this example of performance, the chance up meter CMT may be necessarily ended midway, or the chance up meter CMT may or may not be ended midway. At this time, for example, the content of the effect to be performed thereafter may be different depending on whether the chance up meter CMT ends midway or not, or the same effect may be performed. .. Further, when the chance up meter CMT ends midway, the big hit may be more likely to occur than when the chance up meter CMT does not end midway. The reliability of the big hit when the chance up meter CMT ends midway is the same as when the chance up meter CMT does not end midway when the advance notice of the chance up occurs at all check points. May be Alternatively, when the chance up meter CMT does not end halfway, the big hit may be more likely to occur than when the chance up meter CMT ends halfway.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33(A3), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed along with the character display of “one shot”, and the state where the button effect is started is shown. This button effect is also a notice not related to the chance up meter CMT, but may be a notice of a chance increase related to the chance up meter CMT.

After that, the operation valid period is started, and the player operates the effect button 136 (chance button 136) or when the operation valid period has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 33(A4), "decoration 7" is displayed on the middle symbol. Is displayed to notify that the combination of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is a big hit. In addition, in the case of a loss, as shown in FIG. 33(A4′), “decoration 6” is displayed on the middle pattern, and it is notified that the combination of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7” is lost. To be done.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 33(A5), the animation display of the duel scene fades in, and the appearance that the main character's lord has defeated the enemy swordsman is shown, and it is notified that it will be a big hit. ..

FIG. 33(A2a) shows another example of the effect following FIG. 33(A1). Specifically, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 33(A2a), a cut-in display showing a state in which the princess character speaks "I will rewrite the reach" is displayed. The display of this cut-in is, for example, a notice for improving the reliability of the big hit by assuming that the reach effect performed in the symbol variable display has been effected with other contents. When this cut-in is displayed, the chance up meter CMT is erased. The display of the cut-in is also a notice not directly related to the chance up meter CMT, but may be a notice of a chance increase directly related to the chance up meter CMT. As described above, also in this effect example, it is shown that the chance up meter CMT is erased before the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the final point GP. It can also be said that the appearance of the chance up meter CMT before the Sabohani character SBH reaches the checkpoint is also shown. In addition, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 33(A2a), the variable icon h0 is also erased, but it may not be erased.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (A3a), the state after the reach effect is rewritten is shown. Specifically, in FIG. 33(A3a), the erased chance up meter CMT is displayed again, but in this chance up meter CMT, the first check point CP1 and the second check point CP2 appear, and each is red. It is marked with and the letters "UP" are displayed. That is, although the advance notice of the chance increase corresponding to the first check point CP1 and the advance notice of the chance increase corresponding to the second check point CP2 were not actually given, both are shown as being performed and the big hit. It shows that the reliability of is improving.

FIG. 33(A3a′-1) shows another example of effect that follows FIG. 33(A2a). In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 33(A3a′-1), it is shown that the swordsman reach is changed to the SP swordsman reach described above with reference to FIG. 30(30b). SP swordsman reach is a reach production that is more likely to be a big hit than swordsman reach. Furthermore, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (A3a′-1), a chance up showing that the child panda cheering party KPD is cheering at the timing when the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the third check point CP3. A notice is displayed to notify that the reliability of SP swordsman reach for jackpots has increased dramatically. Note that the child panda cheering party KPD may or may not always appear. Further, in FIG. 33 (A3a′-1), the erased chance up meter CMT is displayed again, but the display mode is the same as the display mode before the chance up meter CMT is erased.

FIG. 33(A3a′-2) is an effect example following FIG. 33(A2a), and shows an effect example different from that of FIG. 33(A3a′-1). The example of production shown in FIG. 33(A3a′-2) is different from that of FIG. 33(A3a′-1) in the display mode of the chance up meter CMT. That is, the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 33 (A3a′-2) is a chance up meter different from the chance up meter CMT before the cut-in of the princess character is displayed, and specifically, the figure As described above with reference to 30 (30b), the chance up meter CMT is displayed when the swordsman reach is changed to the SP swordsman reach. That is, according to the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 33 (A3a′-2), it is indicated that the co-panda cheering party KPD appeared at the fourth checkpoint CP4, which passed through after moving to the SP swordsman reach. Therefore, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the Kopanda cheering party KPD, which indicates that a chance-up notice is given. When the display of the chance up meter CMT is restarted, the character SBH of Sabohani may be located at the starting point SP and the SP swordsman reach may start from the beginning, or the character SBH of Sabohani may be at the final point GP. You may start at the end of SP Swordsman Reach.

FIG. 33(A3a″) shows another example of the effect following FIG. 33(A2a). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (A3a″), the state where the full rotation reach is started is shown. The full-rotation reach is a reach in which a big hit is determined, and since it is not necessary to give the player more expectation, the chance up meter CMT is not displayed again, but FIG. 33 (A3a''') ), the chance up meter CMT may be displayed again. In this case, it can be said that it has been notified that the big hit will be settled at the time when the full rotation reach is started, so the position of the character SBH of Sabohani is changed to the final point GP without passing through the fifth check point CP5. The placard may display "V" indicating that it is a big hit. It should be noted that the timing at which the all-rotation reach starts and the timing at which the character SBH at Sabohani reaches the final point GP may be the same, or the character SBH at the Savohani reaches the final point GP after the all-rotation reach starts. Alternatively, the full rotation reach may be started after the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP. Further, the timing at which the full rotation reach is started and the timing at which the chance up meter CMT is displayed again may be the same, or the chance up meter CMT may be displayed again after the full rotation reach is started. However, the full rotation reach may be started after the chance up meter CMT is displayed again.

FIG. 33(A2b) to FIG. 33(A3b) show another effect example following FIG. 33(A1).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33(A2b), a state in which the animation display of the duel scene is switched to the display of the effect image is shown. At this time, the chance up meter CMT is also erased. After that, the first large board behavioral object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral object 224Gd operate, and overlap on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, respectively. The chance up meter CMT may be displayed again after the first large-board behavior auditors 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior auditors 224Gd operate and the overlapping effect ends on the front surface side of the decorative symbol display device 208, respectively. However, the chance up meter CMT may not be displayed again.

In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 33(B1) to 33(B4), the effect by the chance up meter CMT is started, but the result by the chance up meter CMT is displayed on the way and the effect by the chance up meter CMT is finished. It is shown.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 33(B1), it has been developed into super reach (swordsman reach), and an animation of a duel scene between the protagonist's lord and the enemy swordsman is shown. Further, in the lower part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variation icon h0 and the chance up meter CMT are displayed side by side, and it is shown that the effect is produced by the chance up meter CMT. The chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 33(B1) is, for example, a meter showing the progress status of the reach effect, and the character SBH of Sabohani moves between the start point SP and the final point GM, depending on the position. The progress status of the reach production is roughly reported. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 33(B1), the first checkpoint CP1, the second checkpoint CP2, and the third checkpoint CP3 are arranged, and the character SBH of Sabohani moves from the start point SP to the final point GP. When the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 are reached on the road, a specific notice may be generated. However, at the timing shown in FIG. 33(B1), the character SBH of Savohani becomes the first. Although the first check point CP1 has been reached, no corresponding advance notice of a chance increase has been issued, so the red check mark and "UP" are not displayed at the first check point CP1. The chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 33(B1) shows that the character SBH of Sabohani starts moving from the first check point CP1.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33(B2), the cut-in image CI5 of the swordsman is displayed, showing that it is informed that there is a high possibility of loss. After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 33(B3), the main character's lord is defeated by an enemy swordsman, "decoration 6" is displayed on the middle pattern, and it is informed that it will be lost. Further, in the chance up meter CMT, the character SBH of the sabotani is displayed as a missed expression with a disappointing expression. Here, as shown in FIG. 33(B3′), “decoration 6” is displayed on the middle pattern, and although it is informed that it will be lost, in the chance up meter CMT, the character SBH of the sabotani is the last. It may be displayed that the car is proceeding toward the point GP. After that, as shown in FIG. 33(B4), the first decorative pattern is shake-changed by a combination of decorative patterns of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7", and then stopped and displayed.
FIG. 34 is a diagram showing, in steps, another example of the effect using the chance up meter.

In FIG. 34, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the public figure display device 210, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the public figure holding lamp 216 and the fourth. Illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

34(A1) to FIG. 34(A5) show that the chance up meter CMT is once erased during the production by the chance up meter CMT and then displayed again.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 34(A1), an animation of a duel scene between the main character, the lord, and the enemy, the swordsman, is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 34(A1), the chance up meter CMT is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 34(A1), a first checkpoint CP1, a second checkpoint CP2, and a third checkpoint CP3 are arranged. The first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 indicate that a specific notice may occur, so that the player can be expected. Further, at the final point GP, the placard is displayed in rotation, which suggests that when the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the final point GP, either the result of the big hit or the loss is derived. The character SBH of Sabohani is shown to start moving from the start point SP.

After that, in FIG. 34(A2), the state where the light guide plate IL emits light and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image is shown on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. The emission of light from the light guide plate IL serves as a notice of an increase in chance corresponding to the first check point CP1. At this time, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the display is darkened so that the pattern on the light guide plate IL can be seen more easily. At this time, the chance up meter CMT is also erased.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 34(A3), it is shown that the animation display of the duel scene whose display is interrupted by the dark display is restarting while fading in. At this time, the display of the chance up meter CMT is also restarted. Further, in the chance up meter CMT, a balloon with the letters “chance up illumination light emission” is displayed near the character SBH of the sabotani to inform that the advancement of the chance has been given. Note that the light guide plate IL continues to emit light.

In FIG. 34(A4), it is shown that the light emission of the light guide plate IL is finished and the fade-in of the animation display of the duel scene continues. In addition, the first checkpoint CP1 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and the word “UP” indicating that the reliability of the big hit has increased due to the appearance of the notice is displayed above the notice. A history of what has occurred is shown.

FIG. 34(A5) shows a state in which the fade-in of the duel scene animation display is completed. The chance up meter CMT shows that the character SBH of Sabohani has started to move.

In this example, the light-guide plate IL emits light as a notice of a chance increase in the reach effect. However, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned effect. You may apply in the production which arrives and stirs up whether it is a big hit or a loss. Also, in addition to the effect of inspiring whether it is a big hit or loss, it is applied in the effect of inspiring whether it is a big hit or something other than that (for example, the development develops, a loss is displayed, etc.) You may. Even in such a case, the chance up meter CMT may be temporarily erased during the production by the light emission of the light guide plate IL.

The example productions shown in FIGS. 34(B1) to 34(B6) show that the chance up meter CMT is displayed or erased by the operation of the player.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 34(B1), an animation of a duel scene between the protagonist Tonosama and the enemy swordsman is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 34(B1), the chance up meter CMT is displayed at the lower left corner of the display screen. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 34(B1), the first check point CP1, the second check point CP2, and the third check point CP3 are arranged. The first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 indicate that a specific notice may occur, so that the player can be expected. Further, at the final point GP, the placard is displayed in rotation, which suggests that when the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the final point GP, either the result of the big hit or the loss is derived. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 34(B1), the character SBH of sabotani reaches the first checkpoint CP1, and the character Boy of Boy appears from the left side of the display screen and moves toward the right side. Is displayed, and it is shown that the advance notice of the chance is being given. Furthermore, in this example of performance, guidance display is performed at the lower right corner of the display screen. Specifically, in this guidance display, an icon indicating the upper key and the lower key of the operation key unit 137 and the characters “Meter non-display by arrow key operation” are displayed, and the player can operate the operation key unit 137. It is displayed that the chance up meter CMT can be hidden by operating the up key or the down key. In this example of performance, the chance up meter CMT is displayed when the swordsman reach is started, but it may be displayed by a display operation by the player after the swordsman reach is started.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 34(B2), a balloon with the characters "Chance Up Boy Passed" is displayed near the character SBH of Savohani, and the advance notice by the character display of the chance up has been given. Is informed.

Then, when the lower key of the operation key unit 137 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 34(B3), the chance up meter CMT is erased in the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 34(B4). .. Then, when the lower key of the operation key unit 137 is operated again at the timing shown in FIG. 34(B5), the chance up meter CMT is displayed again as shown in FIG. 34(B6). At this time, the character SBH of Sabohani is in the position which should be located when the display of the chance up meter CMT is restarted. In this case, for example, the balloon shown in FIG. 34(B2) may not be displayed, and the effect on the chance up meter CMT may be restarted from a point where it is sharp. Further, as shown in FIG. 34(B6′), when the effect between the first check point CP1 and the second check point CP2 is omitted and the display of the chance up meter CMT is restarted, the character SBH of the sabotani is displayed. May be located in front of the second check point CP2, and may wait at that position until the timing of giving a notice corresponding to the second check point CP2. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 34(B6) and FIG. 34(B6′), the first checkpoint CP1 is marked in red and “UP” is indicated by the appearance of the boy character BOY. The letters are displayed above it. At the timing shown in FIG. 34(B6), the character “UP” overlaps with the character SBH of Sabohani, and it is difficult to visually recognize it.

In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 34(B1) to 34(B6), the display/non-display of the chance up meter CMT can be switched as many times as necessary according to the operation of the player. After being displayed, after being hidden by the player's operation, the chance up meter CMT may not be displayed until the next effect is produced by the chance up meter CMT.

Further, in this effect example, the chance up meter CMT is initially displayed, but, for example, as shown in FIG. 34(B4), the chance up meter CMT is initially hidden. It may be configured to be in a closed state.

FIG. 35 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the effect using the chance up meter. In FIG. 35, an example of effect in which a plurality of chance up meters are displayed is shown.

In FIG. 35, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the public figure display device 210, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the general figure holding lamp 216 and the fourth figure. Illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

The effect examples shown in FIG. 35(A1) to FIG. 35(A2) show how the two chance up meters CMTa and CMTb each display the same content.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 35(A1), an animation of a duel scene between the main character's lord and the enemy swordsman is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35(A1), two chance up meters CMTa and CMTb are displayed side by side on the left and right sides of the variable icon h0 at the bottom of the display screen. In this effect example, the chance up meter arranged on the left side is referred to as a first chance up meter CMTa, and the chance up meter arranged on the right side is referred to as a second chance up meter CMTb. The chance up meters CMTa and CMTb have the same display mode as that shown in FIG. 31(2f) and described above. In the two chance up meters CMTa and CMTb shown in FIG. 35(A1), first check points CP1a and CP1b, second check points CP2a and CP2b, and third check points CP3a and CP3b are arranged, respectively. The first check point CP1a (CP1b) to the third check point CP3a (CP3b) are represented by question marks to give an expectation that the advance notice of the chance is given. Here, the check points indicated by the first chance up meter CMTa and the check points indicated by the second chance up meter CMTb are targeted for the same advance notice of opportunity. In this example of performance, two chance up meters are displayed, but only one chance up meter may be displayed. For example, two chance up meters are displayed rather than one chance up meter. The big hits may be more likely to be displayed when they are displayed, or the big hits may be the same (reliability). Further, when the effect is produced by the chance up meter, two chance up meters may be displayed without fail. Further, three or more chance up meters may be displayed. In addition, in this example of performance, the advance rates of the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb are the same, but they may be different, for example, the advance rate of the second chance up meter CMTb. However, it may be faster than the traveling speed of the first chance up meter CMTa.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 35(A2), the markers MRKa, MRKb have reached the first check points CP1a, CP1b and the boy character BOY has appeared. A balloon added with the letters "Chance Up Boy Passed" is displayed on each of the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb, and it is informed that a chance up notice is given by the character display.

Here, for example, as shown in FIG. 35(A2′), in the first chance up meter CMTa, the word “Chance up BOY passed” is displayed in the balloon, and the reliability is displayed in the balloon of the second chance up meter CMTb. May be displayed, and the reliability of the jackpot due to the appearance of the boy character BOY may be notified.

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 35(A2″), when the appearance of the boy character BOY and the appearance that the boy character BOY is humming as a rare notice are displayed with the appearance of the boy character BOY, the first chance The word "Chance Up Boy Pass" is displayed in the balloon of the up meter CMTa, and the character "Chance Up Nose" indicating that the rare notice has occurred is displayed in the balloon of the second chance up meter CMTb. Good.

In this example of performance, the markers MRKa and MRKb have the same traveling speed in the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb, but may travel at different speeds. Further, in this example of the presentation, the balloons are displayed by both the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb, but they may be displayed by only one of them.

FIG. 35(A2a-1) to FIG. 35(A2a-2) show another effect example following FIG. 35(A1). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35(A2a-1) following FIG. 35(A1), the markers MRKa, MRKb have reached the first chance upmeters CMTa, CMTb, and the Boy character BOY has appeared. Then, a balloon with the words "Chance Up Boy Passed" is displayed near the markers MRKa and MRKb on each of the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb, and a chance up notice is displayed by the character display. It has been announced that it was done.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (A2a-2), only the first chance up meter CMTa is erased from the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb, and the second chance up meter. Only CMTb is displayed. In this way, after displaying the two chance up meters, one of them may be erased. For example, when one of the two chance up meters is erased, it is not erased. It may be more likely to be a big hit, or may be more likely to be a big hit if not erased. Further, the reliability may be different depending on the deleted chance up meter. Further, both of the two chance up meters may be deleted.

FIG. 35(A2b-1) to FIG. 35(A2b-2) show still another effect example following FIG. 35(A1). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35(A2b-1) following FIG. 35(A1), the markers MRKa, MRKb have reached the first chance up meters CMTa, CMTb, and the Boy character BOY has appeared. Then, a balloon with the words "Chance Up Boy Passed" is displayed near the markers MRKa and MRKb on each of the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb, and a chance up notice is displayed by the character display. It has been announced that it was done. At this time, the display form of the balloon of the second chance up meter CMTb is changed to a red thick line, and it is informed that the reliability of the big hit is further improved. That is, in the display form of the balloons of the first chance up meter CMTa and the display form of the balloons of the second chance up meter CMTb, the display form of the balloons of the second chance up meter CMTb is a display of a highly reliable notice of a big hit. It can be called an aspect. Note that the display mode of the balloon may be changed by only one of the two chance up meters or both of them may be changed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (A2b-2), the first chance up meter CMTa in which the balloon of low reliability is displayed from the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb. Only the second chance up meter CMTb, in which only the second chance up meter is displayed and a highly reliable balloon is displayed, is displayed. In this way, after displaying two chance up meters, the display of the chance up meter in which the highly reliable balloon is displayed may be continued and the display of the other chance up meter may be erased. Alternatively, after displaying the two chance up meters, the chance up meter in which the balloon with low reliability is displayed may be continued and the display of the other chance up meter may be erased. Alternatively, both of the two chance up meters may be deleted.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 35(B1) to 35(B2) show how the two chance up meters CMTa and CMTb display different chance advance notices.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 35(B1), an animation of a duel scene between the main character's lord and the enemy swordsman is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35(B1), the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb are displayed side by side with the variation icon h0 in between at the bottom of the display screen. Of the two chance up meters CMTa and CMTb shown in FIG. 35(B1), the first chance up meter CMTa has three check points (first check point CP1a, second check point CP2a, third check point CP3a). It is arranged. On the other hand, in the second chance up meter CMTb, two check points (fourth check point CP4b and fifth check point CP5b) are arranged, and the fourth check point CP4b and the fifth check point CP5b are the first check point. The advance notice and the start timing of the chance increase corresponding to any of CP1a to the third check point CP3a are different. In this production example, when the arrival timing of the markers MRKa and MRKb of the first check point CP1a, the second check point CP2a, the third check point CP3a, the fourth check point CP4b, and the fifth check point CP5b are arranged in time series. , The first check point CP1a, the fourth check point CP4b, the second check point CP2a, the fifth check point CP5b, and the third check point CP3a.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35(B2), after the marker MRKa of the first chance up meter CMTa reaches the first check point CP1a and the boy character BOY appears, the marker of the second chance up meter CMTb. It is shown that MRKb has reached the fourth check point CP4b and the boy character BOY has started humming. In response to this, in the second chance up meter CMTb, a balloon with the letters "Chance up humming" added is displayed near the marker MRKb to inform that the advance notice of the chance up has been given.

In addition, in this example of performance, both the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb are displayed, but only one of them may be displayed. In this case, for example, if one of the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb is not displayed, a chance up notice corresponding to the check point in the chance up meter that is not displayed is announced. It may be set not to be performed, or a chance up notice corresponding to a check point in the chance up meter not displayed may be given. Further, there may be a check point that is not notified when one of the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb is not displayed, or the check point that is notified. Good.

The example productions shown in FIGS. 35(C1) to 35(C4) show how the two chance up meters CMTa and CMTb display different chance advance notices.

On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 35(C1), an animation of a duel scene between the protagonist Tonosama and the enemy swordsman is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35(C1), the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb are displayed side by side with the variation icon h0 in between at the bottom of the display screen. Of the two chance up meters CMTa and CMTb shown in FIG. 35(C1), the second chance up meter CMTa is a meter showing the progress of the entire reach production, and one check point (development point CPA) is arranged. Has been done. This development point CPA indicates a point where the reach performance may develop. On the other hand, the first chance up meter CMTa indicates the period from the starting point to the check point, the period from the check point to the check point, or the period from the check point to the final point in the second chance up meter CMTa. When the period of the second chance up meter CMTb is changed, the first chance up meter CMTa is also changed to the display mode corresponding to the changed period. In this example of performance, the period from the start point SP to the development point CPA in the second chance up meter CMTb is referred to as a first period, and the period from the development point CPA to the final point GP is referred to as a second period. Further, in this effect example, the display modes of the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb are different, and the first chance up meter CMTa is the same as that described above with reference to FIG. 31(2f). The second chance up meter CMTb has the same display mode as that shown in FIG. 29B and described above. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 35(C1), the first chance up meter CMTa is in the display mode corresponding to the first period, and the three check points (first check point CP1, second check point CP2, The third check point CP3) is arranged, and it is shown that there is a possibility that a notice of a chance up may occur when the marker MRK reaches each check point. Further, the marker MRK on the first chance up meter CMTa and the character SBH of Sabohani on the second chance up meter CMTb are also starting points.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35(C2), a state in which a button effect is performed is shown. At the timing shown in FIG. 35(C2), the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is decreasing, and a state is shown in which a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the operation valid period. Further, the first chance up meter CMTa displays the character "UP" indicating that the advance notice of the chance up has occurred at the first check point CP1, and the marker MRK has reached the second check point CP2. It is shown. The second check point CP2 corresponds to, for example, a notice of a certain chance up that appears as a result of the button effect. In addition, the second chance up meter CMTb shows that the character SBH of Sabohan is proceeding toward the development point CPA.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35(C3), the marker MRK reaches the final point at the first check point CP1 and the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the development point CPA at the second chance up meter CMTb. , A state in which a cut-in display showing that the princess character is saying "I'll rewrite the reach" is displayed. At this time, the first chance up meter CMTa has been erased. Note that when the marker MRK in the first chance up meter CMTa reaches the final point, the first chance up meter CMTa may not be erased and only the second chance up meter CMTb may be erased. Both the meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb may be deleted.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 35(C4), the cut-in image of the panda is displayed, and the state of shifting to the SP swordsman reach is shown. At this time, the first chance up meter CMTa is displayed in the display mode corresponding to the second period, two check points (fourth check point CP4, fifth check point CP5) are arranged, and each check is performed. It is shown that when the marker MRK reaches the point, there is a possibility that a notice of a chance up may occur. Further, the second chance up meter CMTb shows that the character SBH of Sabohani is advancing from the development point CPA toward the final point GP.
FIG. 36 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the effect using the chance up meter.

In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 36(A1) to (A7), it is shown that the chance up meter CMT notifies the timing of occurrence of pseudo-relation and the number of occurrences of pseudo-repetition during execution of the pseudo-relational effect. ..

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 36(A1), a state in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed is shown. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 32(A1), the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is 1, the first holding icon h11 is displayed, and in the second holding number display, the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is displayed. “1” indicating that is 1 is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. In addition, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 36(A1), the character "Secure Echigoya" is displayed to show that a chase effect is started as an example of a pseudo continuous effect.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 36(A2) shows that the first decorative symbol is swinging and fluctuating in a combination of decorative symbols “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 6”. A chance up meter CMT is displayed below the second decorative pattern, and the first check point CP1, the second check point CP2, and the third check point CP3 are arranged in this chance up meter CMT. , It has been announced that pseudo checkups may occur at each checkpoint. The chance up meter CMT shows that the marker MRK has reached the first check point CP1.

Then, as shown in FIG. 36(A3), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the character "continuation" is displayed in the display in which the main character's lord chases after the evil merchant, and it is informed that the first pseudo-repeating will be performed. Is shown. At this time, in the chance up meter CMT, the display of the first checkpoint CP1 is switched from the question mark to the display of the character "CONTINUE". Further, at this time, the first decorative pattern is not displayed, but the variable display may be performed in a translucent display mode, for example.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 36(A4), a state in which the first decorative symbol variable display (that is, the second decorative symbol variable display) by the pseudo sequence of the first time is shown. ..

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 36(A5), the unscrupulous merchant has escaped, but by recovering the 1,000-box, it is shown that it has reached reach. Further, in the chance up meter CMT, the marker MRK has reached the second check point CP2, and the display of the second check point CP2 is changed from the question mark to the reach state by a letter “R”. The display has been switched. As a result, the pseudo continuous effect is terminated midway, and as shown in FIG. 36(A6), the display of the pseudo continuous effect fades out together with the chance up meter CMT.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 36(A7), when the reach effect is started, the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are moved and displayed in the upper left and right directions, respectively, and the variable icon h0 is left in the first UI unit 280. And the hold icon h11 displayed in the second UI unit 281 is also framed out. At this time, the chance up meter CMT is erased when the fade-out of the display of the pseudo continuous effect is completed. In this way, the chance up meter CMT may reach the end more easily than the case where the chance up meter CMT ends at a checkpoint in the middle. Also, the likelihood of a big hit may be different depending on which checkpoint is reached.

In addition, as an example of the effect of hiding the chance up meter CMT, the procedure may be performed as shown in (A6a-1) to (A6a-2) of FIG. 36. Specifically, in FIG. 36(A5), when the pseudo continuous effect is ended midway, as shown in FIG. 36(A6a-1) to FIG. 36(A6a-2), the chance up meter CMT is displayed. The chance up meter CMT may be hidden by frame-out to the outside of the display screen.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 36(B1) to (B7) show that the chance up meter CMT is performing the effect from the start of the reach effect to the development of the super reach. ..

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 36(B1), a state is shown in which the reach effect transitioning to reach "decoration 7" is performed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 36(B1), the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is 1, the first holding icon h11 is displayed, and in the second holding number display, the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is displayed. “1” indicating that is 1 is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Then, in this effect example, when the reach effect is started, the chance up meter CMT is displayed below the second decorative symbol, and the effect using the chance up meter CMT is performed. The effect using the chance up meter CMT is performed until the super reach is displayed or until the loss is displayed without shifting to the super reach. Further, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 36(B1), in the reach effect, when the marker MRK reaches the first check point CP1 and the second check point CP2, a notice of a chance increase corresponding to each check point is given. Is being performed, and the character “UP” to that effect is displayed. Further, the chance up meter CMT overlaps a part of the first decorative pattern.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 36(B2), the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are moved and displayed in the upper left and right directions, respectively, and in the first UI unit 280, the variable icon h0 is left and is displayed below the display area. It is shown that the hold icon h11 displayed on the second UI unit 281 is framed out as well as being framed out. The chance up meter CMT shows that the marker MRK has reached the third check point CP3. The chance up meter CMT overlaps the left symbol of the first decorative symbol after the movement, and the left symbol is more difficult to visually recognize than in the case where the first decorative symbol does not overlap.

Then, as shown in FIG. 36(B3), the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd operate, and overlap on the front surface side of the decorative symbol display device 208, respectively. The left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are overlapped by the first large-sized board action product 224Ga and the second large-sized board action product 224Gb, respectively, and are difficult to visually recognize. In addition, the second decorative symbol and the second number-of-holds display are also at least partially overlapped by the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga and the second large board behavior accessory 224Gb, respectively, and are difficult to visually recognize. Further, in this example of performance, the chance up meter CMT is also at least partially overlapped by the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga, and the chance up meter CMT is more difficult to visually recognize than in the case where it is not overlapped. ing. In addition, in this example of performance, the marker MRK continues to progress while the first large-scale behavior auditor 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior auditor 224Gd are operating, but the first large-scale behavior auditor 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior auditor 224Ga. The progress of the marker MRK may be stopped while the behavior accessory 224Gd is operating. Further, the chance up meter CMT may be hidden while the first large board behavioral object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral object 224Gd are operating. Further, in the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 36(B3), a balloon with the letters “Chance up large board behavior” is displayed near the marker MRK, and the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior part are displayed. It informs that the advance notice of the chance up by the thing 224Gd was given.

After that, as shown in FIG. 36(B4), the light guide plate IL emits light, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image appears on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. At this time, the chance up meter CMT is overlapped with the light emitting portion of the light guide plate IL.

After that, as shown in FIG. 36(B5), after the light emission of the light guide plate IL ends, as shown in FIG. 36(B6), the first large-board behavior auditor product 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior auditor product 224Gd are initialized. Return to position. At the timing when the light emission of the light guide plate IL ends, the marker MRK reaches the final point in the chance up meter CMT, but the emission of the light guide plate IL ends after the marker MRK reaches the final point. Alternatively, the marker MRK may reach the final point after the light emission of the light guide plate IL ends. In addition, in this production example, after the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd are operated, the first decorative symbol is arranged on the front side of the chance up meter CMT, and the first decorative symbol is left. Although the design overlaps the chance up meter CMT, the first decorative design is arranged on the front side of the chance up meter CMT before the first large board behavioral object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral object 224Gd operate. After the first large-scale behavior auditor 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior auditor 224Gd operate, the first decorative symbol is arranged on the back side of the chance up meter CMT, and the first decorative symbol is overlapped with the chance up meter CMT. You may do it. Further, the front-rear relationship between the first decorative symbol and the chance up meter CMT does not have to be changed before and after the operation of the first large-board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior accessory 224Gd. The chance up meter CMT is erased after the first large-board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior accessory 224Gd return to their initial positions. After that, as shown in FIG. 36(B7), the super reach is developed.
FIG. 37 is a diagram showing, step by step, another example of the effect using the chance up meter.

In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 37(A1) to (A5), another effect unrelated to the chance up meter CMT overlaps with the chance up meter CMT during execution of the effect using the chance up meter CMT. Is shown. Here, other effects may overlap only part of the chance up meter CMT, or other effects may overlap all of the chance up meter CMT.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 37(A1), it is shown that the animation of the duel scene between the protagonist's lord and the enemy swordsman is being developed, which has evolved into a super reach (swordsman reach). Further, in the lower part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variation icon h0 and the chance up meter CMT are displayed side by side, and it is shown that the effect is produced by the chance up meter CMT. The chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 37(A1) is, for example, a meter showing the progress of the reach effect, and the marker MRK moves between the start point and the end point, and the current reach effect progresses depending on the position. It informs the situation roughly. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 37(A1), the first check point CP1, the second check point CP2, and the third check point CP3 are arranged, and the marker MRK is on the way from the starting point SP to the final point GP. When each of the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 is reached, a specific notice may be generated, and at the timing shown in FIG. 37(A1), the marker MRK becomes the first check point CP1. When it arrives, a corresponding advance notice of a chance increase is generated, and at the first check point CP1, the character "UP" is displayed to notify that fact. The chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 37(A1) shows that the marker MRK is proceeding from the first check point CP1 toward the second check point CP2.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 37(A2), the treasure box BX is displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the chance up meter CMT. Therefore, it is more difficult to visually recognize the chance up meter CMT than when the treasure box BX does not overlap the chance up meter CMT. The treasure box BX is a notice production that is not related to the notice of the chance up corresponding to the check point in the chance up meter CMT. Further, the marker MRK does not stop during the display of the treasure box BX and continues to proceed.

In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 37(A3), when the marker MRK reaches the second check point CP2, a corresponding advance notice of an opportunity increase occurs, and at the second check point CP2, a notification to that effect is issued. Is displayed. The treasure box BX still overlaps the chance up meter CMT.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 37(A4), the treasure box BX is opened, and the state of the character "intense heat" appears from the inside. The display of the character "intense heat" is also a notice effect that is not related to the notice of the chance increase corresponding to the check point in the chance up meter CMT. It may be a notice of a chance increase corresponding to the check point in the chance up meter CMT.

After that, as shown in FIG. 37(A5), the treasure box BX which is overlapped and displayed on the chance up meter CMT is erased, and the chance up meter CMT is in a state where it is easily visible.

FIG. 37(B1) shows a state in which other effects unrelated to the chance up meter CMT are overlapped with the chance up meter CMT during execution of the effect using the chance up meter CMT. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 37(B1), during execution of the chance up meter effect using the chance up meter CMT, the wipe is performed so as to overlap at least a part of the chance up meter CMT. A screen WP is arranged, and a state in which simultaneous production is performed on the wipe screen WP is shown. Here, the simultaneous production is, for example, an RTC (Real Time Clock) or a built-in timer as a time measuring means, and is the same model of a pachinko machine 100 attached to the same game island, and the same effect content is the same. It is a performance performed at the timing. The wipe screen WP is displayed, for example, when the simultaneous production starts and is erased when the simultaneous production ends. Further, the wipe screen WP may be displayed even when an effect other than the simultaneous effect is performed.

FIG. 37(C1) to FIG. 37(C2) show a state in which an error display is displayed during execution of the effect using the chance up meter CMT.

In the decorative pattern display device shown in FIG. 37(C1), it is shown that an animation of a duel scene between the protagonist, the lord, and the enemy, the swordsman, is being developed, which has evolved into a super reach (swordsman reach). Further, in the lower part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variation icon h0 and the chance up meter CMT are displayed side by side, and it is shown that the effect is produced by the chance up meter CMT. The chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 37(C1) is, for example, a meter showing the progress of the reach effect, and the marker MRK moves from the start point to the end point, and the current reach effect progresses depending on the position. It informs the situation roughly. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 37(C1), the first check point CP1, the second check point CP2, and the third check point CP3 are arranged, and the marker MRK is on the way from the start point SP to the final point GP. When each of the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 is reached, a specific notice may be generated, and at the timing shown in FIG. 37(C1), the marker MRK reaches the first check point CP1. When it arrives, a corresponding advance notice of a chance increase is generated, and at the first check point CP1, the character "UP" is displayed to notify that fact. The chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 37(C1) shows that the marker MRK progresses from the first check point CP1 toward the second check point CP2.

After that, for example, a radio device such as a transceiver detects that a strong electric wave that causes fluctuations in the signal voltage of the pachinko machine 100 is output. When it is detected by the means, as shown in FIG. 37(C2), an error display is displayed by the character display of "radio wave detected" to that effect. In the effect example shown in FIG. 37(C2), this error display does not overlap the chance up meter CMT and does not affect the visibility of the chance up meter CMT. This error display may be applied to other errors. For example, a ball drop error that occurs when it is detected that the lower plate 128 (see FIG. 1) is full, or the front frame door 106 (see FIG. It is also applicable to a door opening error or the like that occurs when it is detected that the door member is opened, such as (1). Depending on the type of error, the error may not be displayed, or the error may be notified by voice or a lamp.

FIG. 37(C2a), FIG. 37(C2b), and FIG. 37(C2c) show other display examples of the error display. For example, as shown in FIG. 37(C2a), the error display indicates the chance up meter CMT. May be displayed so as to overlap at least a part of. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 37(C2b), a plurality of error displays are configured to be able to be performed at the same time, and when an error occurs, the display is arranged vertically from the upper left side of the display screen. There is. In this case, for example, when the fourth error (error D) occurs, the fourth error display is displayed so as to overlap the chance up meter CMT. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 37 (C2c), it is shown that an error is displayed on the entire display screen. Specifically, the fact that strong magnetism is emitted to the game board 200 (see FIG. 1) of the pachinko machine 100 is detected by, for example, magnetic force detection means provided in the main controller 300 of the pachinko machine 100. In this case, as shown in FIG. 37(C2c), an error display is displayed on the entire display screen by the character display of "Magnetism is detected" to that effect. As a result, the chance up meter CMT is hidden and other effects are also hidden. When such an error is detected, for example, a big hit determination may not be performed, and a part of the processing in the main control unit 300 may not be performed until the power is cut off to prevent the game from proceeding. .. If the power is shut off while the error is being displayed, and then the power supply is restored, the variation time of the symbol variation display that was being executed when the power was turned off has elapsed and the symbol variation stop command has been issued. Until it is output to the first sub-control unit 400, for example, “in preparation” may be displayed on the entire display screen.

FIGS. 37(D1) to 37(D2) show how the chance up meter CMT is overlapped with another display device. In addition, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 37D1 to 37D2, in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. It is located below. The upper end portion of the sub display device 208S overlaps at least a part of the lower end portion of the decorative pattern display device 208.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 37(D1), it is shown that a super-reach (swordsman reach) has been developed and an animation of a duel scene between the protagonist's lord and the enemy swordsman is being performed. Further, a chance up meter CMT is displayed on the lower left side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, showing that an effect is being produced by the chance up meter CMT. The chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 37(D1) is, for example, a meter showing the progress of the reach effect, and the marker MRK moves between the start point and the end point, and the current reach effect progresses depending on the position. It informs the situation roughly. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 37(D1), the first check point CP1, the second check point CP2, and the third check point CP3 are arranged, and the marker MRK is on the way from the starting point SP to the final point GP. When each of the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 is reached, a specific notice may be generated, and at the timing shown in FIG. 37(D1), the marker MRK reaches the first check point CP1. When it arrives, a corresponding advance notice of a chance increase occurs, and the character "UP" is displayed at the first check point CP1 to notify that fact. The chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 37(D1) shows that the marker MRK is progressing from the first check point CP1 toward the second check point CP2. Further, on the sub display device 208S, the character "vs swordsman" indicating that the swordsman reach has been developed is displayed, and the variation icon h0 is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen.

In FIG. 37(D2), the sub display device 208S moves upward along the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the sub display device 208S overlaps the front side of the decorative pattern display device 208. Has been done. At this time, at least a part of the chance up meter CMT overlaps the sub display device 208S, and the chance up meter CMT is more difficult to visually recognize than in the case where the sub up display device 208S is not overlapped. Further, on the sub display device 208S, a cut-in image of the protagonist's lord with a balloon with the characters "Game" is displayed.

In this example of effect, the sub-display device 208S, which is an example of a display unit, overlaps the chance up meter CMT, but another display unit may overlap the chance up meter CMT. For example, a display unit composed of a light guide plate IL, a POV display 224I, 7 segments, a dot matrix, a lamp and the like can be applied.

Further, in this effect example, the chance up meter CMT is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208, but, for example, as shown in FIG. 37(E1), the chance up meter CMT is displayed on the sub display device 208S. You may Further, the chance up meter CMT may be displayed across the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 208S.

It should be noted that in this production example, an example in which the chance up meter CMT is overlapped with another display has been described, but the present invention is also applied to the case where the timer notice display TM1 is overlapped with another display instead of the chance up meter CMT. can do.

FIG. 38 is a diagram illustrating a change mode of the remaining time display meter in the button effect.

In FIG. 38, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the public figure display device 210, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the general figure holding lamp 216 and the fourth. Illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

38(A1) to FIG. 38(A9), the effect examples of the remaining time display meter in the button effect performed by the navigation character YM and the changing speed of the remaining time display meter in the button effect performed in the conversation announcement are shown. Are shown to be different.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38(A1), a state in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed is shown. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 38(A1), the number of holdings of special figure 1 is 1, the first holding icon h11 is displayed, and in the second holding number display, the number of holdings of special figure 1 is displayed. “1” indicating that is 1 is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 38(A1), the button effect by the navigation character YM is started, and a balloon including the button image 136a1 and the remaining time display meter MT1 is displayed near the navigation character YM. After that, when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) starts at the timing shown in FIG. 38(A2), the player can accept the operation of the effect button 136 (chance button 136). The operation valid period in the button effect by the navigation character YM is, for example, 10 seconds.

After that, in the remaining time display meter MT1 shown in FIG. 38(A3), it is shown that the operation valid period is started and the gauge is reduced. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38(A3), it is shown that the conversation announcement is started while the button effect by the navigation character YM is being performed. When the conversation announcement is started, the lord's conversation image CI1 in which the character display of "chance" is displayed together with the lord's character is displayed. The display of the conversation image CI1 of the lord is the first stage of the notice of conversation. Moreover, the conversation image CI1 of this lord is overlapped with the first decorative design, and the first decorative design is more difficult to visually recognize than in the case where the first decorative design is not overlapped.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38(A4), the conversation notice is updated. In the conversation notice, the pal's conversation image CI1 is reduced and displayed below the display position of the second decorative design, and the grandpa's conversation image CI2 is displayed along with the grandfather character's operation promotion notification image. The operation promotion notification image includes a button image 136a2 imitating the effect button 136 (chance button 136)a and a remaining time display meter MT2 indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 38(A4), the operation valid period in the conversation announcement has not started, and even if the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, the display corresponding thereto is not performed. On the other hand, in the button effect by the navigation character YM, since the operation valid period is started, when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, the effect corresponding to this may be performed. Although the first decorative symbol is hidden by the old conversation image CI2, the player may recognize that the special symbol is changing due to the fourth symbol display device 284, the second decorative symbol, or the like. Sometimes you can. Note that the display position of the decorative pattern may be moved to a position that does not overlap the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather or the conversation image CI1 of the lord so that the decorative pattern is not hidden. Further, as shown in FIG. 38(A4), the palace's conversation image CI1 is at least partially overlapped by the grandpa's conversation image CI2, and the lord's conversation is more than that in the case where the conversation image CI2 is not overlapped. The display mode of the image CI1 is difficult to visually recognize. Further, the old conversation image CI2 is partially overlapped with the display of the balloon of the navigation character YM.

After that, the operation valid period in the conversation announcement starts at the timing shown in FIG. 38(A5). The player may sometimes be able to see the effect according to the operation by operating the effect button 136 (chance button 136) after the timing shown in FIG. 38(A5). The operation effective period of the button effect based on the conversation notice is, for example, 5 seconds, which is shorter than the operation effective period of the button effect performed by the navigation character YM. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 38(A5) to FIG. 38(A7), the remaining time display meter MT2 in the button effect by the conversation notice is displayed more than the speed at which the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT1 in the button effect by the navigation character YM decreases. The speed at which the gauge decreases is greater. In other words, the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT2 in the button effect by the conversation notice is reduced faster than the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT1 in the button effect by the navigation character YM.

After that, when the player operates the effect button 136 (chance button 136) at the timing shown in FIG. 38(A8), as shown in FIG. 38(A9), the old conversation image CI2 is replaced with the operation promotion notification image. In some cases, the words "It is intense heat" may be displayed. This informs that the reliability of the big hit is considerably high. On the other hand, on the other hand, the balloon image of the navigation character YM, on which the button image 136a1 and the remaining time display meter MT1 were displayed, is changed to the display of the character “intense heat”, and it is notified that the reliability of the big hit is considerably high. ing. That is, in this effect example, one operation of the effect button shows that the effect corresponding to the operation result of the button is performed for both the button effect in the conversation notice and the button effect by the navigation character YM. ing. It should be noted that the character display of "It's intense heat" displayed in the old conversation image CI2 and the character display of "Glamor heat" displayed in the balloon of the navigation character YM are also displayed when the operation valid period has elapsed. However, it does not have to be displayed.

When the player operates the effect button 136 (chance button 136) at the timing shown in FIG. 38(A8), for example, as shown in FIG. 38(A9a-1), the button started earlier. An effect may be performed according to the operation result corresponding to the effect. That is, in this example of effect, since the button effect by the navigation character YM is started before the button effect in the conversation notice, as shown in FIG. 38 (A9a-1), the effect button 136 in the button effect by the navigation character YM. Only the effect (character display of "hot heat" in the balloon of the navigation character YM) corresponding to the operation of the (chance button 136) is performed, and the operation of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) in the button effect based on the conversation notice is performed. The production (the character display of "Intense heat" displayed on the old conversation image CI2) is not performed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 38(A9a-2), when the player operates the effect button 136 (chance button 136) for the second time, it is started later as shown in FIG. 28(A9a-3). The effect corresponding to the operation result corresponding to the button effect is performed. That is, an effect (character display of "exciting heat" in the old conversation image CI2) is performed according to the operation of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) in the button effect based on the conversation notice.

In this example of effect, when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated when the operation valid period is started in each of the two button effects, the button effect in which the gauge in the remaining time display meter decreases at a high speed. The effect may be performed in accordance with the operation of the effect button 136 (chance button 136), or the effect button 136 (chance may be given priority to the button effect in which the gauge in the remaining time display meter decreases at a low speed. An effect may be performed according to the operation of the button 136).

Further, in this production example, the change speeds of the display modes of the two remaining time display meters MT1 and MT2 are different, but, for example, until a certain time, the change of the display mode of the remaining time display meter MT2 in the grand notice image CI2. The speed may be the same as the change speed of the display mode of the remaining time display meter MT1 in the balloon of the navigation character YM, and the change speed of the display mode of the remaining time display meter MT2 may be changed at a certain time. ..

Further, in this effect example, the operation valid period related to the grandfather's notice image CI2 is set to 5 seconds. However, for example, it is prepared for 5 seconds and 10 seconds, and the remaining time display meter is provided at a speed corresponding to each. The display mode of MT2 may be changed. That is, when the operation valid period is 10 seconds, the change speed of the display mode of the remaining time display meter MT1 in the balloon of the navigation character YM is the same. In this case, the case where the operation valid period of the grand notice image CI2 is selected to be 5 seconds may be more likely to be a big hit than the case where it is selected to be 10 seconds.

Further, in this effect example, in the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather whose extension is started later than in the case where "exciting heat" is displayed in the balloon of the navigation character YM in which the effect is previously displayed, "exciting heat! ”Is displayed, the reliability of the big hit is set to be higher, so that the notice displayed later is more likely to be displayed when the big hit is given, and the notice displayed later is more likely to be displayed. It may be possible to surprise the player by displaying it while the attention level is relatively lowered. In addition, compared with the case where "intense heat" is displayed in the balloon of the navigation character YM in which the effect is displayed earlier, "intense heat" is displayed in the grandpa's conversation image CI2, which has started to be extended later. In this case, the reliability of the big hit may be lower or the reliability of the big hit may be the same.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 38(B1) to (B11) show that both the timer advance notice effect and the effect using the chance up meter are performed at the same time.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 38(B1), it is shown that an animation of a duel scene between the protagonist's lord and the enemy swordsman is being performed, which has developed into super reach (swordsman reach). Further, in the lower part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variation icon h0 and the chance up meter CMT are displayed side by side, and it is shown that the effect is produced by the chance up meter CMT. The chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 38(B1) is, for example, a meter showing the progress status of the reach effect, and the character SBH of Sabohani moves between the start point SP and the final point GP, and the current position depends on the position. The progress status of the reach production is roughly notified. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 38(B1), the first check point CP1, the second check point CP2, and the third check point CP3 are arranged, and the character SBH of Sabohani moves from the start point SP to the final point GP. It is shown that a specific notice may be issued when each of the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 is reached on the way, so that the player can be expected. Further, at the final point GP, the placard is displayed in rotation, which suggests that when the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the final point GP, either the result of the big hit or the loss is derived.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38(B2) shows that the character SBH of Sabohani is starting to move from the start point SP.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38(B3), the timer notice display TM1 is displayed and the timer notice effect is started at the timing when the character SBH of Sabohan reaches the first checkpoint CP1. It is shown. That is, in this example of performance, it can be said that the start of the timer advance notice function functions as a notice of an increased chance. Further, "10:00" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, which suggests that a certain notice production is started when 10 seconds have elapsed after the countdown was started.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 38(B4), a balloon with the letters "Chance Up Timer Notice" is displayed near the character SBH of Sabohani, indicating that the chance up notice has been given. I am informing you. On the other hand, the timer notice display TM1 is counting down the timer display, and "09:17" is shown at the timing shown in FIG. 38(B4).

After that, as shown in FIG. 38(B5), the first check point CP1 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and "UP" indicating that the reliability of the big hit has increased due to the appearance of the notice. A letter is displayed above it to show the history of the advance notice. It should be noted that the display of “UP” is overlapped by the character SBH of Sabohani, and it is more difficult to visually recognize it than in the case where it is not overlapped. On the other hand, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and "08:81" is shown at the timing shown in FIG. 38(B5).

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38(B6) shows a state in which the character SBH of Sabohani has started to move. At this time, since the overlap of part of the display of “UP” has been eliminated, part of the display is visible. On the other hand, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and "08:31" is shown at the timing shown in FIG. 38(B6).

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38(B7) shows that the character SBH of Sabohani has started moving from the second check point CP2. In this example of performance, the advancement of the chance (for example, occurrence of cut-in) is performed by the character SBH of Sabohan reaching the second check point CP2, and the second check point CP2 is marked in red. At the same time, the letter "UP" indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has been improved due to the appearance of the notice is displayed above it, and the history of the notice being issued is shown. On the other hand, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and "04:14" is shown at the timing shown in FIG. 38(B7).

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38(B8) shows that the character SBH of Sabohani has reached the third checkpoint CP3. On the other hand, the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", showing that the countdown is completed. Then, as shown in FIG. 38(B9), the timer notice display TM1 displays the word "attention" to call attention to the notice instead of the timer display. According to this effect example, the countdown speed of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 started later is faster than the ratio (speed) of the change of the display mode by the chance up meter CMT started earlier to the whole. It can be said that it is early. That is, the time taken from the start to the end of the countdown on the timer notice display TM1 started later than the time taken from the start point SP to the final point GP of the character SBH of the sabotani by the chance up meter CMT started earlier. Can be said to be faster.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 38(B10), the lever image 136Va is displayed, and a balloon with the characters “Chance Up Lever” is displayed near the character SBH of Sabohani, and the lever is displayed. It notifies that the notice by the production has started. The display of the lever image 136Va in the lever effect is a notice of a chance increase displayed corresponding to the arrival at the third check point CP3, and at the same time, a notice given as a result of completion of the countdown of the timer notice effect. .. That is, it can be said that the target of the advance notice of the chance shown in the effect by the chance up meter CMT is the same as the target of the advance notice given as a result of the timer advance effect. Alternatively, it can also be said that the advance notice of the chance that the Sabohani character SBH has reached the third check point CP3 and the advance notice indicated by the "attention" character on the timer advance notice display TM1 are the same. Note that the target of the advance notice of the chance up shown in the effect by the chance up meter CMT may be different from the target of the advance notice given as the result of the timer advance effect, for example, in the effect by the chance up meter CMT, the third check The lever image 136Va gives a notice of a chance up when the character SBH of Sabohani arrives at the point CP3, and the notice made as a result of the timer notice effect makes the display form of the appearing lever image 136Va a more reliable display form. May change (for example, change from red to gold).

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38(B11), the remaining time display meter MT is displayed in addition to the lever image 136Va, and the lever effect is started. In addition, the third checkpoint CP3 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and the word “UP” indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has been increased due to the appearance of the notice is displayed above the notice. A history of what has occurred is shown. It should be noted that the display of “UP” is overlapped by the character SBH of Sabohani, and it is more difficult to visually recognize it than in the case where it is not overlapped.
FIG. 39 is a diagram showing another example of the button effect step by step.

In FIG. 39, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the public figure display device 210, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the general figure holding lamp 216 and the fourth. Illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 39(1), the variable display of the decorative symbol is shown. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 39(1), the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is 1, the first holding icon h11 is displayed, and in the second holding number display, the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is displayed. “1” indicating that is 1 is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed.

Then, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 39(2) shows that the button effect has started. In this example of performance, 6 sets of operation promotion notification images, which are combinations of button images and remaining time display meters, are displayed. Specifically, the first operation promotion notification image including the first button image 136a1 and the first remaining time display meter MT1 is arranged at the upper left of the display screen, and the second button image 136a2 and the second remaining time are displayed. The second operation prompting notification image composed of the display meter MT2 is arranged at the center of the upper part of the display screen, and the third operation prompting notification image composed of the third button image 136a3 and the third remaining time display meter MT3 is displayed on the display screen. The fourth operation prompting notification image, which is arranged in the upper right and is composed of the fourth button image 136a4 and the fourth remaining time display meter MT4, is arranged in the lower right of the display screen, and the fifth button image 136a5 and the fifth remaining image are displayed. A fifth operation promotion notification image including the time display meter MT5 is arranged in the lower center of the display screen, and a sixth operation promotion notification image including the sixth button image 136a6 and the sixth remaining time display meter MT6 is displayed on the display screen. It is located at the bottom right of. After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 39(3), the operation valid period of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) starts for any of the first operation promotion notification image to the sixth operation promotion notification image.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 39(4), it is shown that the operation valid period is started and the gauge is reduced in all of the first remaining time display meter MT1 to the sixth remaining time display meter MT6. Has been done. In this effect example, among the first operation promotion notification image to the sixth operation promotion notification image, the operation valid period for the first operation promotion notification image is the operation valid period for the other operation promotion notification image. It is designed to be shorter and allow the operation valid period to pass earlier. In this example of performance, the second operation promotion notification image to the sixth operation promotion notification image all have the same operation valid period. Therefore, the gauge of the first remaining time display meter MT1 decreases faster than the gauges of the other remaining time display meters MT2 to MT6.

After that, when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated once at the timing shown in FIG. 39(5), as shown in FIG. 39(6), the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the first operation promotion notification. It is shown that the image is changed to the Kopanda character KP and a notice is given. The second operation promotion notification image to the sixth operation promotion notification image have not changed. That is, in this effect example, one operation of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) changes only one operation promotion notification image of the plurality of operation promotion notification images. When the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, the first operation promotion notification image, the second operation promotion notification image, the third operation promotion notification image, the fourth operation promotion notification image, The fifth operation promotion notification image and the sixth operation promotion notification image are preferentially changed in the display mode one by one. The order of the operation prompting notification images for changing the display mode is not limited to that described above, and can be set appropriately. Further, the display mode of two or more operation promotion notification images may be changed by operating the effect button 136 (chance button 136) once.

In addition, in this example of production, when the first remaining time display meter MT1 (the production button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, the remaining display corresponding to the first operation promotion notification image in which the display mode is given the highest priority. Although the gauge of the time display meter decreases faster than the remaining time display meters MT2 to MT6, for example, as shown in FIG. 39(4a), a third remaining time display meter MT3 (production button 136) is displayed. When the (chance button 136) is operated, the gauge of the remaining time display meter corresponding to the third operation prompting notification image in which the display mode changes in the third priority is changed to the first remaining time display meter MT1. It may be faster or slower than the other remaining time display meters MT1, MT2, MT4, MT5, MT6 including. Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 39(4b), when the sixth remaining time display meter MT6 (the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, the priority order of changing the display mode is the lowest. The gauge of the remaining time display meter corresponding to the operation prompting notification image 6) may be faster or slower than the remaining time display meters MT1 to MT5. Further, the remaining time display meter that accelerates the reduction of the gauge is not limited to the above-mentioned one, and can be set to an appropriate one.

In addition, in this example of performance, the button images 136a1 to 136a6 are configured in all of the first operation promotion notification image to the sixth operation promotion notification image, but the first operation promotion notification image to the sixth operation promotion notification image. For any one or more of the operation promotion notification images, another image may be displayed instead of the button image. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 39(4c), as the image forming the sixth operation promotion notification image, the sixth button image 136a6 is replaced with a sixth operation image promoting the operation of the production lever 136V. The lever image 136Va6 may be displayed. In this case, the remaining time display meters of the first operation prompting notification image to the sixth operation prompting notification image may have the same gauge reduction speed, or as shown in FIG. So that the speed at which the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT6 corresponding to the sixth operation promotion notification image forming the lever image 136Va6 of is reduced is faster than the remaining time display meters MT1 to MT5 corresponding to the other operation promotion notification images. It may be done or it may be delayed. With such a configuration, for example, when the button effect is started and the display as shown in FIG. 39(4c) is performed, the effect lever 136V is operated once after the operation of the effect button 136 (chance button 136). It may be possible to facilitate manipulation.

Further, in this effect example, the speed at which the gauge of the remaining time display meter in any one of the first operation promotion notification image to the sixth operation promotion notification image is reduced is displayed in the remaining operation promotion notification image. Although it is different from the meter, for example, as shown in FIG. 39(4d), there may be two or more different gauges in which the remaining time display meter decreases at different speeds. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 39(4d), the speeds at which the gauges of the remaining time display meters MT3, MT5 of the third operation promotion notification image and the fifth operation promotion notification image decrease are the other operation promotion notification images. The image remaining time meters MT1, MT2, MT4, MT6 are different from each other, and the fifth remaining time indicating meter MT3 corresponding to the third remaining operation time indicating meter MT5 corresponding to the third remaining portion remaining time display meter MT3 The remaining time display meter MT5 may increase the speed at which the gauge decreases.

FIG. 40 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example of an effect centered on the decorative pattern display device of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment.

In FIG. 40, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the general figure display device 210, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the general figure holding lamp 216 and the fourth figure. Illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

The effect examples shown in FIG. 40(A1) to FIG. 40(A6) show a plurality of timer advance notice effects being performed at the same time.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40(A1), a state in which the decorative symbols are variably displayed is shown. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 40(A1), the number of holdings in special figure 1 is 1, the first holding icon h11 is displayed, and in the second holding number display, the number of holdings in special figure 1 is displayed. “1” indicating that is 1 is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. In addition, FIG. 40(A1) shows that two timer advance notice effects are started at the same time. Specifically, the timer advance notices TM1 and TM2 are framed in from the right side of the display area to start the timer advance notice effects. Both timer notice displays TM1 and TM2 display "10:00", which suggests that a certain notice effect is started 10 seconds after the countdown is started. In this effect example, as will be described later, since the countdown speed of the timer display in one timer advance notice display is faster than the countdown speed of the timer display in the other timer advance notice display, it takes time to complete the countdown. Different. In this production example, of the two timer notice displays TM1 and TM2, the one displayed above may be referred to as the first timer notice display TM1 and the one displayed below may be referred to as the second timer notice display TM2. is there.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40(A2) shows a state in which the frame-in of the two timer notice displays TM1 and TM2 is completed. After that, the timer notice displays TM1 and TM2 respectively start counting down the timer display.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40(A3), the timer display countdown is shown in each of the two timer advance notice displays TM1 and TM2. In this effect example, the countdown speed of the second timer notice display TM2 is faster than that of the first timer notice display TM1. The first timer notice display TM1 counts down according to the actual time elapsed, but the second timer notice display TM2 is faster than that. At the timing shown in FIG. 40(A3), the timer display of the first timer advance notice display TM1 is "09:73", and the timer display of the second timer advance notice display TM2 is "06:73". Is becoming The countdown speed is not limited to the one described above and may be set as appropriate. For example, the countdown speed of the second timer advance notice display TM2 may be set to a speed that matches the passage of actual time, and The countdown speed of the first timer notification display TM2 may be slower than the countdown speed of the second timer notification display TM2.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 40(A4), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the timer display of the second timer advance notice display TM2 is "00:00" and the countdown is completed. On the other hand, the timer display of the first timer advance notice display TM1 is "06:00", that is, the state is shown when 4 seconds have elapsed since the countdown of the timer advance notice display started. You can

Then, as shown in FIG. 40(A5), in the second timer notice display TM2, the word "attention" is displayed in place of the timer display to urge attention to the notice. On the other hand, the countdown of the first timer advance notice display TM1 continues, and the timer display is "05:87" at the timing shown in FIG. 40(A5). After that, a notice corresponding to the completion of the countdown of the timer display of the second timer notice display TM2 may be given. The second timer advance notice display TM2 is erased by, for example, frame-out after the countdown is completed.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40(A6) shows that the timer display of the first timer advance notice display TM1 is "00:00" and the countdown is completed. After that, a notice corresponding to the completion of the countdown of the timer display of the first timer notice display TM1 may be given. After that, the first timer advance notice display TM1 is erased by, for example, frame out after the countdown is completed.

In the example of the effect, the case where the two timer notice effects are simultaneously started has been described, but the two timer notice effects may be started at different timings. The countdown speed of the timer display in the timer preview display may be faster or slower than the countdown speed of the timer display in the timer preview display related to the timer preview effect started later.

In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 40(B1) to 40(B4), a plurality of timer notice effects are performed at the same time, and the time until the countdown is completed for one of the timer notice effects is added. Showing.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40(B1), a state in which the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner is shown. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 40(B1), the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is 1, the first holding icon h11 is displayed, and in the second holding number display, the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is displayed. “1” indicating that is 1 is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. In addition, FIG. 40(B1) shows that two timer advance notice effects are started at the same time. Specifically, when the timer notice display (the first timer notice display TM1 and the second timer notice display TM2) is framed in from the right side of the display area, each timer notice effect is started. Both timer notice displays TM1 and TM2 display "10:00", which suggests that a certain notice effect is started 10 seconds after the countdown is started. In this production example, the countdown speed of the timer display in the timer notice display is the same.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40(B2) shows that the frame-in of the two timer notice displays TM1 and TM2 is completed. After that, the timer notice displays TM1 and TM2 respectively start counting down the timer display.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40(B3), it is shown that the timer display countdown is performed in each of the two timer advance notice displays TM1 and TM2. It should be noted that both the first timer advance notice display TM1 and the second timer advance notice display TM2 count down in accordance with the passage of actual time. At the timing shown in FIG. 40(B3), both the timer display of the first timer advance notice display TM1 and the second timer advance notice display TM2 are "09:73". Note that the countdown speed is not limited to the one described above, and may be set appropriately, and may be slower or faster than the actual elapsed time, for example. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40(B3), it is shown that the navigation character YM is performing the timer addition effect. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, "+10 seconds" indicating the time to be added is displayed near the navigation character YM, and the time to be added is informed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 40(B4), the timer display in the first timer notice display TM1 is updated to “19:00”, and 10 seconds is added to the time in the timer display of the first timer notice display TM1. The situation is shown. At this time, since no addition is made to the timer display of the second timer notice display TM2, there is a difference of 10 seconds between the timer display of the first timer notice display TM1 and the timer display of the second timer notice display TM2. Is occurring. Therefore, although the two timer advance notice effects have started, the timing for ending the countdown is different because time is added to one timer display in the middle.

In this example, the time is added to one of the two timer notice displays, but the time may be shortened (subtracted) or the timer notice may be displayed during execution. The countdown of one of the timer displays may be temporarily stopped so that the time until the countdown is completed may be different.

In addition, in this example, the case where the two timer notice effects are started at the same time has been described. However, the two timer notice effects may be started at different timings. In this case, for example, the timer notice previously started may be started. Time is added to the timer display in the timer notice display related to the effect, and after the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display related to the timer notification effect started later is completed, the timer notification effect started earlier is added. The countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display may be completed. In addition, the time is shortened with respect to the timer display in the timer notice display related to the timer notice effect that was started later, before the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display related to the timer notice effect started earlier is completed. In addition, the countdown of the timer display in the timer notification display related to the timer notification effect started later may be completed.

Further, in this effect example, when the timer addition effect is performed while the two timer notice effects are being performed, the time addition is performed with respect to the timer display in the timer notice display related to one of the timer notice effects. However, even if the timer display in any of the timer notice displays related to any of the timer notice effects is time-added (or the time is shortened or the countdown is temporarily stopped, etc.), the display mode of any timer notice display is also changed. It may be changed.

In addition, after the two timer notice effects are started, two timer addition effects and the like (timer shortening, countdown pause, etc.) corresponding to the respective timer notice effects are performed. It is also possible to add the time to the timer display in the display or the like for each.

In addition, after the two timer notice effects are started, three timer addition effects and the like (timer shortening, countdown temporary stop, etc.) are performed, and for example, for one of the two timer notice effects, The timer display may be changed by two timer addition effects or the like, and the timer display may be changed by the remaining one timer addition effect or the like with respect to the other timer announcement effect. Further, three timer addition effects and the like may be performed, and for example, the timer display may be changed only by two timer addition effects of three, or only one of the three timer addition effects and the like. The timer display may be changed, or the timer display may not be changed by any of the three timer addition effects.

In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 40(C1) to (C4), the remaining time display timer indicating the operation effective period for each of the plurality of operating means is used in the effect of prompting to operate any of the plurality of operating means. It is shown as being displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40(C1), the variable display of the decorative symbol is shown. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 40(C1), the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is 1, the first holding icon h11 is displayed, and in the second holding number display, the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is displayed. “1” indicating that is 1 is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40(C1), button effect is started. Specifically, on the decorative symbol display device 208, the left door image DRL and the right door image DRR are displayed side by side. Corresponding to the left door image DRL, a left key image 137aL imitating the left key forming the operation key unit 137 is displayed overlapping the left door image DRL, and below the left key image 137aL. The remaining time display meter MT1 is displayed. In addition, a right key image 137aR that imitates the right key that constitutes the operation key unit 137 is displayed in an overlapping manner with the right door image DRR, and is displayed below the right key image 137aR. The remaining time display meter MT2 is displayed on. After that, the operation valid period of the operation key unit 137 is started, and the operation of the operation key unit 137 by the player can be accepted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40(C2), both the remaining time display meters MT1 and MT2 corresponding to the left door image DRL and the right door image DRR have their operation valid periods started and the gauges have decreased. The situation is shown. In this effect example, the operation valid period of the right key corresponding to the right door image DRR is shorter than the operation valid period of the left key corresponding to the left door image DRL, and the operation valid period passes earlier. Is becoming Therefore, the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT2 corresponding to the right door image DRR decreases faster than the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT1 corresponding to the left door image DRL.

FIG. 40(C3) shows a state where the player operates the left key to select the left door image DRL. Specifically, the left door image DRL is moved to the center of the display screen and enlarged, and the left key image 137aL and the remaining time display meter MT1 are erased. Further, the right door image DRR is deleted together with the right key image 137aR and the remaining time display meter MT2. This informs that the left door image DRL has been selected.

Then, as shown in FIG. 40(C4), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the door of the left door image DRL is opened, and the appearance of the replay symbol RP is shown. As a result, for example, it is foretold that the pseudo-link will be performed.

On the other hand, in the case shown in FIG. 40(C2), when the right key is operated and the right door image DRR is selected, as shown in FIG. 40(C4a), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the right door image is displayed. The door of the DRR may open and the pine pattern CC may appear. The character "Gekiatsu" is added to the pine pattern CC, which suggests that the reliability of the jackpot has been dramatically increased.

As described above, in this example of performance, when one of the two remaining time display meters, which has a faster gauge reduction, is selected, a higher-reliability notice is displayed. Alternatively, the same display may be displayed. Further, when one of the two remaining time display meters, which has a slower gauge reduction, is selected, a highly reliable warning display may be displayed.

Further, in this effect example, the operation valid period of the left door image DRL is set to be shorter than the operation valid period of the right door image DRR, but the operation valid period may be the same. For example, even when the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT2 of the right door image DRR becomes 0, it waits until the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT1 of the left door image DRL becomes 0, and the operation of the right key is performed. The operation may be enabled or the operation of the right key may be disabled during standby.
FIG. 41 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the timer notice effect.

In FIG. 41, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the general figure display device 210, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the general figure holding lamp 216 and the fourth figure. Illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

41(A1) to (A12) show the manner in which the timer notice display is enlarged and displayed in the timer notice effect. At the timing shown in FIG. 41(A1), the to-be-held number in the toku-zu 1 is 1, and the first to-be-held icon h11 is displayed. "1" indicating that is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 41(A1), the timer notice effect is started, "09:69" is displayed in the timer notice display TM1, and the timer display is counted down. In this example of performance, the timer notice display TM1 is displayed in a small size (default display size), and when the timer notice display is started and the timer notice display TM1 is displayed, it is displayed in a small size. .. Here, when the countdown display in the timer display of the timer advance notice display TM1 is started, it may be at least a small size. In this case, the timer advance notice display TM1 becomes large before the countdown display is started. The size may be displayed, the size may be displayed in another size, or the display mode itself may be different.

In the timer advance notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 41(A2), the countdown of the timer display continues, and "03:01" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 41(A2).

Then, as shown in FIG. 41(A3), when the timer display is "03:00" indicating that the remaining time is 3 seconds, the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, and the display position is also decorated. It is changed to substantially the center of the symbol display device 208. At this time, the first decorative pattern is overlapped with the timer notice display TM1 that is enlarged and displayed, and the first decorative pattern is more difficult to visually recognize than in the case where the first decorative pattern is not overlapped. In addition, you may make it overlap with the timer notice display TM1 in which the first decorative symbol is enlarged and displayed. Further, when the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, an enlarged display by animation may be performed. In this case, the countdown continues while the enlarged display animation is being performed, but the countdown may be interrupted while the enlarged display animation is being performed. Further, when the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, the size of the timer display portion may not be changed and only the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 may be enlarged. Further, in this example of performance, when the timer display is "03:00", the timer notice display TM1 is always displayed in an enlarged manner, but it may not be enlarged. When the display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, it may be more likely to be a big hit than when it is not enlarged. Further, in this effect example, the display position is changed when the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, but the display position may not be changed.

Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 41(A4) to 41(A7), the countdown in the enlarged timer advance notice display TM1 is continuously performed until the timer display becomes “00:00”. Here, at the timing shown in FIG. 41(A5), "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol, and at the timing shown in FIG. 41(A6), "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. Is difficult to visually recognize by the enlarged timer display TM1. When the stop display of the decorative symbol is performed, the stop symbol may be arranged on the front side of the timer notice display TM1.

When the display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes “00:00” and the countdown is completed, as shown in FIG. 41(A8), the timer notice display TM1 replaces the timer display and calls attention to the notice. Character is displayed. The character "attention" is enlarged and displayed in accordance with the enlarged timer advance notice display TM1. It should be noted that after the timer display becomes "00:00", the character display of "attention" may not be displayed, and no presentation may be performed.

Thereafter, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 41(A9), the timer notice display TM1 is reduced and displayed in the original size, and the display position is also changed to the original position (the center on the right side of the display screen). The timer advance notice display TM1 may be deleted as it is without being displayed in a reduced size.

Then, as shown in FIG. 41(A10), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a display in which the pseudo continuous symbol in which the character of the lord is displayed in the middle symbol moves slowly from the upper side to the lower side is started. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 41(A11), the timer notice display TM1 is erased, and the pseudo continuous symbol is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 41(A12). As a result, it is notified that the pseudo-link will be executed.

In this example of performance, when the timer display is "03:00" indicating the remaining 3 seconds in the timer notification display, the timer notification display TM1 is enlarged, but the timer notification display TM1 is reduced. It may be displayed, the color of the frame may be changed, the color of the timer display (number part) may be changed, the shape of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed, or the timer notice may be changed. The direction of the display TM1 may be changed (for example, changed from landscape to portrait), the timer notice display TM1 may be rotated, the display position of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed, and the timer may be changed. Other elements such as characters and symbols may be added to the notice display TM1, time may be added to the timer display, time may be shortened with respect to the timer display, or timer display may be performed. Of the timer display may be stopped, the countdown speed of the timer display may be increased, the timer display may be counted up (rewound), or the timer notice display TM1 is divided and newly added. Different timer notice displays may be displayed, or when a plurality of timer notice displays are displayed, these timer notice displays may be integrated and changed to one timer notice display.

Further, in this example of performance, the size of the timer notice display TM1 is changed to two sizes, that is, a small size and a large size, but it may be changed to three or more sizes. When displaying the "attention" character display in red, the timer notice display TM1 is displayed in a medium size, and when displaying the timer display or the "attention" character display in gold, the timer notice display TM1 is large. The size may be displayed. Thereby, for example, it may be possible to change the display mode depending on the reliability of the big hit.

Further, in this example of effect, the size of the timer notice display TM1 is changed from the small size to the large size, but it may be changed from the small size to the medium size to the large size. For example, when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is "05:00", the size of the timer notice display TM1 is changed from the small size to the medium size, and when it is "03:00", the medium size is changed to the large size. The size may be changed. In addition, the size may change from the small size to the medium size, but may not change to the large size.

Further, in this effect example, the size of the timer notice display TM1 is changed to a large size when the remaining time in the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 reaches a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds). The size of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed to a large size when the remaining time in the timer display becomes “00:00”, or the size of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed when the character display of “attention” is displayed. The size may be changed to a large size.

Further, in this example of performance, the reliability of the big hit may be different depending on the color of the frame or the background of the timer notice display TM1 (for example, the reliability is high in the order of gold>red>green>blue). Further, the reliability of the big hit may be changed depending on the size of the timer notice display TM1 (for example, the reliability is high in the order of large size>medium size>small size). Further, the reliability of the big hit may be different depending on the shape of the timer notice display TM1.

Further, for example, the reliability of the big hit may be changed depending on the color of the timer display or the character display of "attention" in the timer notice display TM1 (for example, the reliability is high in the order of gold> red> green> blue). ). Further, the reliability of the big hit may be changed depending on the size of the timer display or the character display of "attention" in the timer notice display TM1 (for example, the reliability is high in the order of large size>medium size>small size). ). Further, the jackpot reliability may be changed depending on the shape of the timer display or the character display of "attention" in the timer notice display TM1.

Further, when the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is changed, a certain effect may be made to appear easily. For example, when the timer notice display TM1 is changed to a large size, the pseudo-relational pattern is easily stopped. You may do it.

Further, in this example of effect, when the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is completed, a certain effect is performed, but no effect may be performed even if the countdown is completed. May be. Here, when the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is changed, a certain effect may be easily performed when the countdown is completed, and a big hit may be easily caused.

Further, in this effect example, when the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is started, the timer notice display TM1 is displayed in a small size, but at the start of the countdown or the display start of the timer notice display TM1. It may be a large-sized display mode.

Further, in this example of performance, when the timer notice display TM1 is changed to a large size, the timer display is also changed to a large size. However, only the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 is changed to a large size and the timer display is changed. The size of may not be changed. Further, the size of the timer display may not be changed, and only the frame portion of the timer advance notice display TM1 may be changed to a small size. Further, although the size of the timer display is changed to a large size, the size of the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 may not be changed. Further, although the size of the timer display is changed to a small size, the size of the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 may not be changed.

Further, the display mode may be changed by changing the color of the frame portion and the background of the timer notice display TM1. In this case, for example, when the color of the frame portion (and/or the background portion) of the timer notice display TM1 changes, the color of the timer display may also change. Further, although the color of the frame portion (and/or the background portion) of the timer notice display TM1 changes, the color of the timer display may not change. Although the color of the timer display changes, the color of the frame portion (and/or the background portion) of the timer notice display TM1 may not change.

Further, the display mode may be changed by changing the shape of the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1. In this case, for example, when the shape of the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 changes, the shape (font) of the timer display may also change. Further, although the shape of the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 changes, the shape (font) of the timer display may not change. Further, although the shape (font) of the timer display changes, the shape of the frame portion of the timer advance notice display TM1 may not change.

Further, the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 may change its form by animation. In this case, for example, when the frame part of the timer advance notice display TM1 is changed in shape by animation, the timer display may also be changed in shape by animation. Further, although the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 changes its form by animation, the timer display may not change. Although the timer display changes its form by animation, the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 may not change.

41B1 to 41B4 show another example in which the timer notice display is enlarged and displayed in the timer notice effect. At the timing shown in FIG. 41(B1), the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is 1, the first holding icon h11 is displayed, and the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is 1 in the second holding number display. “1” indicating that is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 41(B1), the timer notice effect is performed, the timer notice display TM1 displays "00:31", and the timer display counts down. Further, in the first decorative symbol, "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol, and the middle symbol and the right symbol are being variably displayed.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 41(B2) to (B3), the countdown in the timer notice display TM1 is continuously performed until the timer display becomes “00:00”. Here, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 41(B2), "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, but it is overlapped by the timer notice display TM1.

When the display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes “00:00” and the countdown is completed, as shown in FIG. 41(B4), the timer notice display TM1 replaces the timer display and calls attention to the notice. Character is displayed. At this time, the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, and the display position is also changed to substantially the center of the decorative symbol display device 208.

The character "attention" is enlarged and displayed in accordance with the enlarged timer advance notice display TM1. It should be noted that after the timer display becomes "00:00", the character display of "attention" may not be displayed, or no presentation may be performed. At this time, the first decorative pattern is overlapped with the timer notice display TM1 that is enlarged and displayed, and the first decorative pattern is more difficult to visually recognize than in the case where it is not overlapped. In this way, the timer notice display TM1 may be enlarged and displayed not only during the countdown of the timer display but also when the "attention" character display is performed. Further, when the timer display becomes "00:00", the timer advance notice display TM1 may be enlarged and displayed.
FIG. 42 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the timer notice effect.

42(A1) to (A3), the example of displaying the timer advance notice display TM1 after the change of the display form on another display means when the display form of the timer advance notice display TM1 changes. Showing. 42(A1) to FIG. 42(A3), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14(a), the sub-display device 208S is a decorative symbol display device 208 instead of the family crest 224E. It is located below. The upper end portion of the sub display device 208S overlaps at least a part of the lower end portion of the decorative pattern display device 208.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 42(A1), the variable display of the decorative pattern is shown. The sub display device 208S can display the navigation character YM, the variable icon h0, and the hold icons h11 to h14. At the timing shown in FIG. 42(A1), the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is 1, and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed. On the other hand, the second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in this second hold number display, it is indicated that the hold number of Toku-zu 1 is 1. 1” is displayed. Further, in the sub display device 208S shown in FIG. 42(A1), the timer notice effect is performed, and the timer notice display TM1 is arranged in the upper center part of the sub display device 208. In the timer notice display TM1, "09:69" is displayed as the timer display and the countdown is performed. That is, in this effect example, when the effect of the countdown by the timer advance notice display TM1 is started, the timer advance notice display TM1 is displayed in a small size on the sub display device 208S. In addition, when the effect of the countdown by the timer notice display TM1 is started, the timer notice display TM1 may be displayed in a small size on the decorative pattern display device 208.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 42(A2), the variable display of the decorative symbol is still performed. Further, in the sub display device 208S, the countdown of the timer display continues in the timer advance notice display TM1, and "03:01" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 42(A2).

Then, as shown in FIG. 42(A3), when the timer display is 3 seconds remaining, the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the sub display device 208S moves to the decorative symbol display device 208, and further, The timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed. At this time, the first decorative pattern is overlapped with the timer notice display TM1 that is enlarged and displayed, and the first decorative pattern is more difficult to visually recognize than in the case where the first decorative pattern is not overlapped. In addition, when the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, it may be moved and enlarged by animation. In this case, the timer notice display TM1 may be displayed across the sub display device 208S and the decorative symbol display device 208. Here, the timer notice display TM1 may be moved from the sub display device 208S to the decorative symbol display device 208 completely, and then the timer notice display TM1 may be enlarged and displayed, or the timer notice display TM1 may be displayed from the sub display device 208S. The display may be enlarged while moving across the display device 208, or may be displayed before the timer notice display TM1 extends between the sub display device 208S and the decorative symbol display device 208. Note that the countdown is continuously performed while the enlarged display animation is being performed, but the countdown may be interrupted while the movement and the enlarged display animation are being performed.

42(B1) to FIG. 42(B3), when the display mode of the timer notification display TM1 changes, another effect example in which the timer notification display TM1 after the display mode is changed is displayed on another display means. An example is shown.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 42(B1), the variable display of the decorative symbol is shown. The sub display device 208S can display the navigation character YM, the variable icon h0, and the hold icons h11 to h14. At the timing shown in FIG. 42(B1), the number of reservations in Toku-zu 1 is 1, and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed. On the other hand, the second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in this second hold number display, it is indicated that the hold number of Toku-zu 1 is 1. 1” is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 42(B1), the timer notice effect is performed, and the timer notice display TM1 displays "09:69" as the timer display, and the countdown is performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 42(B2), the variable display of the decorative symbol is still performed. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and "03:01" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 42(B2). Further, at this time, the sub display device 208S is operating, rises along the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, is located in the front of the decorative pattern display device 208 substantially in the center, and is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. The displayed decorative pattern and the timer notice display TM1 are overlapped with each other and are more difficult to visually recognize than in the case where they are not overlapped. Further, while the sub display device 208S is rising, the change icon h0, the hold icon h11, and the navigation character YM displayed on the sub display device 208S are erased. The variable icon h0, the hold icon h11, and the navigation character YM displayed on the sub display device 208S may be deleted before the sub display device 208S starts moving, or the sub display device 208S completes moving. After that, it may be erased, may be erased at the timing when the sub display device 208S starts moving, or may be erased at the timing when the sub display device 208S completes the movement. Further, only one of the change icon h0 and the hold icon h11 may be deleted. Further, the display positions of the variable icon h0, the hold icon h11, and the navigation character YM displayed on the sub display device 208S may be changed to the decorative symbol display device 208.

Then, as shown in FIG. 42(B3), when the timer display is 3 seconds remaining, the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 moves to the sub display device 208S, and further, The timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed. In addition, when the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, it may be moved and enlarged by animation. In this case, the timer notice display TM1 may be displayed across the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 208S. Here, the timer notice display TM1 may be moved from the decorative pattern display device 208 to the sub display device 208S completely, and then the timer notice display TM1 may be displayed in an enlarged manner. The display may be enlarged while moving across the display device 208S, or may be displayed before the timer notice display TM1 extends between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 208S. Note that the countdown is continuously performed while the enlarged display animation is being performed, but the countdown may be interrupted while the movement and the enlarged display animation are being performed. In addition, in this effect example, when the timer notice display TM1 is displayed in an enlarged manner, the timer notice display TM1 is erased from the decorative symbol display device 208 and displayed on the sub display device 208S. Also, the timer notice display TM1 may be displayed continuously. In this case, for example, the timer notice display TM1 may be displayed in a reduced size. Further, when the timer notice display TM1 is displayed on both the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 208S, the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 may be synchronized or may not be synchronized. ..

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 42(C1) to (C9) show another example of the display mode after the change of the timer notice display TM1. At the timing shown in FIG. 42(C1), the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is 1, the first holding icon h11 is displayed, and the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is 1 in the second holding number display. “1” indicating that is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 41(A1), the timer notice effect is started, "09:69" is displayed in the timer notice display TM1, and the timer display is counted down.

In the timer advance notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 42(C2), the countdown of the timer display continues, and “03:01” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 42(C2).

Then, as shown in FIG. 42(C3), when the timer display is “03:00” indicating that the remaining time is 3 seconds, the display mode of the timer advance notice display TM1 is changed. The timer advance notice display TM1a after the change has a mode in which the timer display is arranged inside the circular meter. As shown in FIG. 42(C3) to FIG. 42(C6), the display state of the circular meter portion changes in the clockwise direction from the 12 o'clock position as time passes. Although the timer notice display TM1a after the change of the display mode is partially overlapped with the change icon h0, the change icon h0 may be overlapped with the timer notice display TM1a. Further, the timer notice display TM1a has the same size until the countdown is completed, but the size may be changed depending on, for example, the remaining time. For example, when the remaining time is 1 second, the circular meter unit is enlarged. It may be displayed. Further, the timer advance notice display TM1a after the change of the display mode may be configured only by the circular meter portion and the timer display may not be performed. Further, the first decorative pattern is overlapped with the timer notice display TM1a after the display mode is changed, and the first decorative pattern is more difficult to visually recognize than in the case where it is not overlapped. The first decorative pattern may be overlapped with the timer notice display TM1a whose display mode has changed. Further, when the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 changes, a change display by animation may be performed. In this case, the countdown is continuously performed while the change display animation is being performed, but the countdown may be interrupted while the change display animation is being performed. Further, when the display form of the timer notice display TM1 is changed and displayed, the timer display portion may not be changed, and only the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 42(C4) to 42(C6), the countdown and the gauge reduction display in the timer advance notice display TM1a are continuously performed until the timer display becomes “00:00”. In this production example, the production of the countdown is performed by both the countdown by the timer display and the reduction display of the gauge of the circular meter portion. Here, at the timing shown in FIG. 42 (C5), "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol, and at the timing shown in FIG. 42 (C6), "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. Is difficult to visually recognize due to the timer notice display TM1a. When the stop display of the decorative symbol is performed, the stop symbol may be arranged on the front side of the timer notice display TM1a.

When the display in the timer notice display TM1a becomes “00:00” and the countdown is completed, as shown in FIG. 42(C7), in the timer notice display TM1a, in place of the timer display, the pseudo continuation effect is displayed. Character is displayed. As a result, it is notified that the pseudo continuous effect will be performed. It should be noted that characters other than "Continue" may be displayed. For example, when the timer reaches the SP reach as a result of the completion of the countdown of the timer display, "SP reach" is displayed and the SP reach is displayed. You may notify that it shifts. Further, as in the above-described embodiment, “Attention” may be displayed to pay attention to the occurrence of the advance notice.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 42(C8), the timer notice display TM1a is erased, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 42(A9), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the character of the lord is displayed in the middle pattern. The display in which the pseudo-successive symbols are moved at a low speed from the top to the bottom is started. After that, the pseudo-relational symbols are stopped and displayed, and the pseudo-repetition is executed.

In this example of performance, the character "CONTINUE" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1a to notify that the pseudo continuous effect will be performed. However, for example, a question mark is added to the character "CONTINUE" to make the pseudo continuous effect. The display may be performed so that the presentation may not be performed. Further, in such a case, for example, when the pseudo-relational effect is performed, the big hit may be settled.

Further, in this effect example, when the timer displays for the same effect are respectively displayed by a plurality of timer notice displays, one timer notice display may be displayed in a large size, or both timer notice displays may be displayed. The timer notice display may be displayed in a large size. In addition, the timer display of "03:00" is displayed on one timer notice display, and the other timer notice display is roughly displayed, for example, "3 seconds left". A countdown display may be displayed.
FIG. 43 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the timer notice effect.

In FIG. 43, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the public figure display device 210, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the general figure holding lamp 216 and the fourth. Illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

The example productions shown in FIGS. 43(A1) to 43(A8) show that the timer advance notice display is enlarged and displayed in the timer advance notice effect. At the timing shown in FIG. 43(A1), the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is 1, the first holding icon h11 is displayed, and the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is 1 in the second holding number display. “1” indicating that is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 43(A1), the timer notice effect is started, "09:69" is displayed in the timer notice display TM1, and the timer display is counted down.

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 43(A2) shows that the navigation character YM is performing the timer addition effect. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, when the timer addition effect is started, a balloon displaying the characters "addition" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the time is added to the timer display in the timer notice display TM1. It is informed that it will be done. That is, it is notified that the time of the countdown performed in the timer announcement effect is extended.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 43(A3), in the balloon of the navigation character YM, “+10 seconds” indicating the additional time is displayed, and the additional time is notified.

Then, as shown in FIG. 43(A4), the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed at the timing of "05:00" indicating that the timer display is 5 seconds remaining, and the display position is also a decorative symbol display. It is changed to approximately the center of the device 208. In this example of performance, the countdown is temporarily interrupted at "05:00", but the countdown may be continued. Here, in this effect example, the timer notice display TM1 is not enlarged and displayed due to the remaining time of the timer display being the predetermined time, but the timer notice display TM1 is added by adding time to the timer display. Is an enlarged display. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 43(A4), the enlarged timer advance notice display TM1 is overlapped with the balloon of the navigation character YM, but the extended advance notice display of the navigation character YM is displayed. You may make it overlap with TM1. Further, the condition that the timer advance notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed is not limited to the addition of the time in the timer display. For example, when the timer display changes, such as a reduction in the time in the timer display or a stop of the countdown. The timer notice display TM1 may be enlarged.

As shown in FIG. 43(A5), a timer advance notice display TM1 that is displayed in an enlarged manner displays a count-up animation and an effect of adding time to the timer display.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 43(A6), the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is updated to "15:00", and 10 seconds are added to the time in the timer display. .. Note that the countdown display may be stopped or the countdown display may be advanced while the timer addition effect is being performed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 43(A7), the balloon of the navigation character YM is erased, and then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 43(A8), the timer notice display TM1 is reduced and displayed in the original size. The display position is also changed to the original position. After that, the countdown of the timer display is restarted.

In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 43(B1) to 43(B7), in the timer announcement effect, the timer announcement display is enlarged and displayed when the time of the timer display is added. At the timing shown in FIG. 43(B1), the to-be-held number in the toku-zu 1 is 1, and the first to-be-held icon h11 is displayed. “1” indicating that is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the first decorative pattern, "decoration 7" is stopped on the left symbol and "decoration 7" is stopped on the right symbol. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 43(B1), the timer notice effect is being performed, and the timer notice countdown display of the timer notice display TM1 has been completed, and "00:00" is displayed. There is.

Then, as shown in FIG. 43(B2), the timer notice display TM1 moves to substantially the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and “attention” to call attention to the notice instead of the timer display. Is displayed. When changing the display position, an animation in which the timer notice display TM1 moves may be displayed, or the display position may be switched and displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 43(B3), when the timer advance notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, the timer display is performed again, and “00:00” is displayed as the timer display. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a pseudo symbol symbol representing the lord's character in the middle symbol moves at a low speed from the upper side to the lower side. The pseudo continuous effect by the pseudo continuous symbols is continuously performed from FIG. 43(B3) to FIG. 43(B7).

After that, as shown in FIG. 43(B4), in the enlarged timer preview display TM1, a count-up animation is displayed and an effect of adding the time in the timer display is performed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 43(B5), the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is updated to "15:00", and it is shown that 15 seconds is added to the time in the timer display. ..

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 43(B6), the timer notice display TM1 is reduced and displayed in the original size, and the display position is also changed to the original position (the center on the right side of the display screen). In the timer notice display TM1, thereafter, the countdown of the timer display is restarted. The timer notice display TM1 may be displayed in its original size without being reduced. On the other hand, in the first decorative symbol, the pseudo continuous symbol is stopped in the middle symbol, and it is notified that the pseudo continuous symbol is performed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 43(B7), a cut-in display including the character of the lord and the character display of "continuation" is performed, and thereafter, the second variable display of the decorative pattern is started. The timer notice display TM1 is counting down the timer display, and the timer display is "14:92" at the timing shown in FIG. 43(B7).
FIG. 44 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the timer notice effect.

In FIG. 44, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the public figure display device 210, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the public figure holding lamp 216 and the fourth figure. Illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

44A1 to FIG. 44A8 show the manner in which the timer notice display is enlarged and displayed when the display mode of the timer notice display changes and the notice rank is increased. ing. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 44(A1), the enemy swordsman is displayed in a large size, and it is shown that it has developed into a super reach (swordsman reach). Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44(A1), the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is 1, and the second number of reservations display indicates that the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is 1. 1” is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 is also displayed. The hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are out of frame and are not displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44(A1), the timer notice effect is performed, the timer notice display TM1 displays "20:35", and the timer display counts down.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 44(A2), the animation of the duel scene with the swordsman, the enemy of the main character, has begun to be displayed. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and "18:19" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 44(A2).

FIG. 44(A3) shows that animation display of the duel scene continues. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and “15:47” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 44(A3).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 44(A4), the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed at the timing of "15:00" indicating that the timer display has 15 seconds remaining, and the timer notice display TM1 is displayed. The color of the frame of is changed from white to red, and “LvUP” indicating that the reliability of the big hit is higher is added. The display position of the timer notice display TM1 is also changed to substantially the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. That is, it is shown that the timer notice display TM1 has been upgraded. Although the countdown of the timer display is continuously performed, the countdown may be temporarily interrupted while the enlarged display is being performed. Here, in this effect example, the timer notice display TM1 is not enlarged and displayed due to the remaining time of the timer display being the predetermined time, and the display form of the timer notice display TM1 is a highly reliable display of the big hit. By changing the mode, the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 44(A5), the timer notice display TM1 is reduced and displayed in the original size, and the display position is also changed to the original position (the center on the right side of the display screen). At this time, the color of the frame of the timer notice display TM1 remains red, but the display of "LvUP" is erased. The timer notice display TM1 may be displayed in its original size without being reduced.

As shown in FIG. 44(A6), when the display in the timer notice display TM1 becomes “00:00” and the countdown is completed, the timer notice display TM1 is replaced with the timer display as shown in FIG. 44(A7). "Attention" is displayed to call attention to the notice.

Then, as shown in FIG. 44(A7), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the animation display of the duel scene is switched to the cut-in display indicating that the reliability of the big hit is high. In this cut-in display, the characters "Jitsuatsu" indicating that the jackpot is highly reliable are displayed together with the princess character. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44(A7), in response to the rank up of the timer notice display TM1, the character display of "Expectation Large" is added. As a result, the jackpot is likely to be a big hit compared to the case where the cut-in display in which the character display of “expected large” is not added is displayed. It should be noted that the character display of "high expectations" may be displayed or may not be displayed when the timer advance notice display TM1 is ranked up. Further, the character display of "high expectations" may be displayed on condition that the timer notice display TM1 is ramped up, or may be displayed even if the timer notice display TM1 is not ranked up. May be. In this example of performance, the character display of "high expectation" is more easily displayed when the timer notice display TM1 is ranked up than when it is not ranked up. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44(A7), the display of the variable icon h0 also changes and the advance notice is displayed. This change in the display of the variable icon h0 may be performed as a result of the countdown being completed in the timer announcement effect, or may be performed regardless of the timer announcement effect. That is, when the timer notice display TM1 is ranked up, a notice different from the notice given by the timer notice effect may be given.

As described above, in this example of performance, the rank advancement of the timer notice display TM1 may be a notification indicating that the notice given as a result of the completion of the countdown in the timer notice production has been promoted, or the timer notice. The rank up of the display TM1 itself may function as an advance notice of the chance up. Further, the timer notice display TM1 may be ranked up to notify that the expectation of displaying a highly reliable notice of a big hit is high in advance.

In addition, in this effect example, the rank up of the timer notice display TM1 suggests that the notice given as a result of the completion of the countdown in the timer notice effect may be promoted. For example, the first decorative pattern It may indicate that the reach pattern in may be promoted. Specifically, for example, when the reach is performed with "decoration 2" in which the probability variation big hit is not confirmed and the reach effect is being performed, the timer notice display TM1 is ranked up, and when the big hit is the probability variation big hit. May be determined, and the reach may change to “decoration 7” which is likely to be a big hit.

The effect examples shown in FIG. 44(B1) to FIG. 44(B7) show how the effect using the chance up meter is started when the timer notice effect is being performed. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 44(B1), the enemy swordsman is displayed in a large size, and it is shown that it has developed into a super reach (swordsman reach). Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44(B1), the number of reservations in special figure 1 is 1, and the second number of reservations display indicates that the number of reservations in special figure 1 is 1. 1” is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 is also displayed. The hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are out of frame and are not displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44(B1), the timer notice production is performed, the timer notice display TM1 displays "20:35", and the timer display countdown is performed.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 44(B2), animation of a duel scene between the protagonist's lord and the enemy swordsman has started to be displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44(B2), the chance up meter CMT is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 44(B2), the first check point CP1, the second check point CP2, and the third check point CP3 are arranged in addition to the start point SP and the end point GP. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and "18:19" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 44(B2).

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44(B3) shows that the character SBH of Sabohani is starting to move from the starting point SP. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and "15:47" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 44(B3).

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44(B4), at the timing when the character SBH of Savohani reaches the first checkpoint CP1, the boy character BOY appears from the right side of the display screen and moves toward the left side. Is shown. That is, it is shown that a chance to advance due to the appearance of the boy character BOY is being announced. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 44(B4), when the boy character BOY appears, the timer notice display TM1 is reduced and displayed so that the boy character BOY is conspicuous. That is, it may be possible to prevent the display of the boy character BOY from being hindered by displaying the timer notice display TM1 in a reduced size, and it is also possible that the boy character BOY gives a notice of a chance up. It may be easily recognizable. Note that the timer advance notice display TM1 continues to count down the timer display even if the timer advance notice display TM1 is reduced, and "15:35" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 44(B4). The countdown of the timer display may be interrupted while the reduced display is being performed. Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 44(B4) to 44(B6), the reduced display of the timer notice display TM1 is maintained until the notice of the chance up by the boy character BOY is finished.

Then, as shown in FIG. 44(B7), when the advance notice of the chance up by the boy character BOY ends, the timer advance notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed in the original size.

In this example of performance, while the timer advance notice TM1 is displayed, the timer advance notice display TM1 is displayed in a reduced size to notify that the opportunity advance notice is being issued. In some cases, the purpose can be achieved by changing the display mode. For example, in addition to the reduced display of the timer notice display TM1, an enlarged display of the timer notice display TM1, a change in the color of the frame of the timer notice display TM1 or the timer display itself, a change in the display position of the timer notice display TM1, and a timer notice The display mode of the timer advance notice display TM1 may be changed by changing the shape of the display TM1.
FIG. 45 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the timer notice effect.

In FIG. 45, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the general figure display device 210, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, the second special figure reservation lamp 220, the general figure reservation lamp 216 and the fourth. Illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

45(A1) to FIG. 45(A3), the example of the effect shows that the display position of the timer notice display that was displayed when shifting to the super reach is changed. At the timing shown in FIG. 45(A1), the number of reservations in special figure 1 is 1, and in the second number of reservations display, "1" indicating that the number of reservations in special figure 1 is 1 is displayed. There is. Further, the variable icon h0 is also displayed. The hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are out of frame and are not displayed. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 45(A1), a state of shifting to super reach is shown. Specifically, it has been suggested that the left symbol and the right symbol move to the upper left corner and the upper right corner, respectively, and then shift to super reach. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45(A1), the timer notice effect is performed, the timer notice display TM1 displays "21:37", and the timer display countdown is performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45(A2), the title of Super Reach in which the enemy swordsman is displayed in a large size is displayed, and it is shown that it has developed into Super Reach (Swordsman Reach). Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and “20:35” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 45(A2).

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 45(A3), an animation of a duel scene between the main character, the lord, and the enemy, the swordsman, is displayed. When the animation display of the duel scene is started, the timer notice display TM1 changes its display position. Specifically, the timer advance notice display TM1 displayed at the center of the right end of the display screen is changed to the lower right corner of the display screen. When changing the display position, an animation in which the timer notice display TM1 moves may be displayed, or the display position may be switched and displayed. Further, when the display position of the timer notice display TM1 is changed, for example, as shown in FIG. 45(A3′), the timer notice display TM1 may be reduced and displayed so that the effect of the super reach is conspicuous.

In this example of effect, the display position of the timer notice display TM1 is moved at the timing when the animation display of the duel scene starts, but when the effect of shifting to the super reach shown in FIG. 45(A1) is performed. The display position of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed, or the display position of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed when the title of the super reach shown in FIG. 45(A2) is displayed. Good. Further, the timer notice display TM1 may be configured to move to the original position again at a specific timing (for example, a timing of 3 seconds before or 0, a chance increase of the timer notice display TM1, etc.). It may be displayed as it is. Even when the timer notice display TM1 is displayed in a reduced size, it is displayed in an enlarged manner (for example, first displayed at a specific timing (for example, 3 seconds before or 0, timing of the timer notice display TM1). Display of a different size or a display larger than the size initially displayed).

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 45(B1) to 45(B7) show a state in which the display position of the timer notice display that is displayed when the effect movable body operates is changed. At the timing shown in FIG. 45(B1), the number of reservations in special figure 1 is 1, and in the second number of reservations display, "1" indicating that the number of reservations in special figure 1 is 1 is displayed. There is. Further, the variable icon h0 is also displayed. The hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are out of frame and are not displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45(B1), a state of shifting to super reach is shown. Specifically, it has been suggested that the left symbol and the right symbol move to the upper left corner and the upper right corner, respectively, and then shift to super reach. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45(B1), the timer notice effect is performed, the timer notice display TM1 displays "27:37", and the timer display countdown is performed.

In FIG. 45(B2), it is shown that the first large-board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior accessory 224Gd operate and overlap each other on the front surface side of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and “25:34” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 45(B2). Here, at least a part of the timer advance notice display TM1 is overlapped by the second large-board behavior auditor 224Gb and the fourth large-board behavior auditor 224Gd, and the timer announcement display is more than in the case where they are not overlapped. TM1 is difficult to see.

Then, as shown in FIG. 45(B3), the timer advance notice display TM1 changes the display position to a position where it does not overlap with the first large-board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior accessory 224Gd. Specifically, the timer advance notice display TM1 displayed at the center of the right end of the display screen is changed to the upper end of the center of the display screen. When changing the display position, an animation in which the timer notice display TM1 moves may be displayed, or the display position may be switched and displayed. Further, when the display position of the timer notice display TM1 is changed, the timer notice display TM1 may be reduced and displayed. In addition, when the first large-board behavior auditors 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior auditors 224Gd do not operate, the display position may not be changed, but the display positions may be changed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 45(B4), the light guide plate IL emits light, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image appears on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. At this time, the effect image that appears when the light guide plate IL emits light is overlapped with the timer notice display TM1, but the display position of the timer notice display TM1 is not changed. The display position of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed when the light guide plate IL emits light.

After that, as shown in FIG. 45(B5), after the light emission of the light guide plate IL ends, as shown in FIG. 45(B6), the first large-board behavior auditor product 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior auditor product 224Gd are respectively initialized. Return to position.

Then, as shown in FIG. 45(B7), the display position of the timer advance notice display TM1 is changed to the original position (the central portion of the right end of the display screen). On the timer notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and "21:37" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 45(B7). Note that the timing at which the timer notice display TM1 moves to the original position may be the same as the timing at which the first large board behavioral object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral object 224Gd start the operation of returning to the initial position. The timer notice display TM1 may be moved to the original position after the first large board behavioral object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral object 224Gd start the operation of returning to the initial position. After starting to move to the original position, the operations of the first large-scale behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior accessory 224Gd may be started to return to the initial position.

45(C1) to FIG. 45(C5), the example of the effect shows that the positional relationship between the timer notice display and the decorative pattern is changed. At the timing shown in FIG. 45(C1), the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is 1, the first holding icon h11 is displayed, and the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is 1 in the second holding number display. “1” indicating that is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45(C1), the timer notice effect is started, "29:69" is displayed in the timer notice display TM1, and the timer display is counted down. Further, the timer notice display TM1 overlaps with the first decorative design, and the first decorative design is more difficult to visually recognize than in the case where the first decorative design does not overlap.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45(C2), the "decoration 7" is stopped on each of the left symbol and the right symbol, and the state of reaching is shown. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and "22:04" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 45(C2). Also at this time, the timer notice display TM1 overlaps the first decorative pattern.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45(C3), the reach effect is started, the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are moved and displayed in the upper and left directions, respectively, and the variable icon h0 is displayed. , The navigation character YM and the hold icon h11 are framed out and not displayed. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and “21:37” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 45(C3). At this time, the timer notice display TM1 is arranged on the back side of the first decorative symbol, and the timer notice display TM1 is overlapped with the right symbol of the first decorative symbol. The timer notice display TM1 may overlap the first decorative symbol.

The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 45(C4) shows a state in which the device has developed into a super reach (swordsman reach). In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 45(C4), the title of Super Reach in which the image of the enemy swordsman is displayed large is displayed. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and “20:35” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 45(C4). Also at this time, the timer notice display TM1 is overlapped with the first decorative pattern.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (C5), an animation of a duel scene between the hero of the protagonist and the enemy swordsman is displayed. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and “18:19” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 45(C5). Also at this time, the timer notice display TM1 is overlapped with the first decorative pattern. In addition, in the lower left corner of the display screen, the above-described chance up meter CMT is displayed, and an effect using the chance up meter is performed.
FIG. 46 is a diagram showing, in stages, another effect example of the timer notice effect.

In FIG. 46, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the general figure display device 210, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, the second special figure reservation lamp 220, the general figure reservation lamp 216 and the fourth. Illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

46A1 to FIG. 46A10 show the manner in which the display position of the timer notice display is changed by the player's operation. At the timing shown in FIG. 46(A1), the number of reservations in Toku-zu 1 is 1, and in the second display of number of reservations, "1" indicating that the number of reservations in Toku-zu 1 is 1 is displayed. There is. Further, the variable icon h0 is also displayed. The hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are out of frame and are not displayed. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 46(A1), a state of shifting to super reach is shown. Specifically, it has been suggested that the left symbol and the right symbol move to the upper left corner and the upper right corner, respectively, and then shift to super reach. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 46(A1), the timer notice effect is performed, the timer notice display TM1 displays "21:37", and the timer display counts down.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 46(A2), the title of Super Reach in which the enemy swordsman is displayed in a large size is displayed, and it is shown that it has developed into Super Reach (Swordsman Reach). Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and "20:35" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 46(A2).

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 46(A3), the animation of the duel scene with the swordsman, the enemy of the main character, has begun to be displayed. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and “18:19” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 46(A3). Further, in the lower right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a guide display in which the character of "reduce timer" is displayed together with the icon of the lower key of the operation key unit 137, is displayed by the player. It is informed that the timer advance notice display TM1 can be reduced and displayed by operating the key. In this example of performance, the guide display is displayed when the animation display of the duel scene is started, but it may be displayed from the time when the timer notice production is started, or when the reach state is reached. May be displayed in.

Then, when the lower key of the operation key unit 137 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 46(A4), as shown in FIG. 46(A5), the timer notice display TM1 is displayed in a reduced size and its display position is changed. change. Specifically, the timer advance notice display TM1 displayed at the center of the right end of the display screen is changed to above the guide display. At this time, the timer notice display TM1 is reduced and displayed. When changing the display position, an animation in which the timer notice display TM1 moves while shrinking may be displayed, or the display position may be switched and displayed. Further, the display position of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed and then reduced, or the display position may be changed after the reduced display. Further, when the lower key of the operation key unit 137 is operated, the timer notice display TM1 may be hidden. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and “18:00” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 46(A5). Further, in the guide display shown in FIG. 46(A5), the characters of "enlarge timer" are displayed together with the icon of the upper key of the operation key unit 137, and the timer advance notice display TM1 is enlarged by the player operating the upper key. Then, it is informed that the original size is displayed, and that the display position is also returned to the original position.

Thereafter, when the upper key of the operation key unit 137 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 46(A6), the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and returned to its original size as shown in FIG. 46(A7). , The display position also returns to the original position. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and "17:81" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 46(A7). Further, in the guide display shown in FIG. 46(A7), a guide display in which the character of "reduce timer" is displayed together with the icon of the lower key of the operation key unit 137, and the player operates the lower key. This informs that the timer notice display TM1 can be reduced and displayed. In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 46(A3), when the timer advance notice display TM1 has the default display size and the default display position, when the upper key of the operation key unit 137 is operated, The timer notice display TM1 may be further enlarged and displayed.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 46(A8) shows a state in which the animation display of the duel scene continues. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and "03:01" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 46(A8).

Then, as shown in FIG. 46(A9), when the timer display is "03:00" indicating that there are 3 seconds remaining, the guide display displayed at the lower right of the display screen is deleted. The display position (display size) of the timer notice display TM1 cannot be changed. The display position and the display size of the timer notice display TM1 may be continuously changed. Further, when the display position of the timer notice display TM1 is changed when the timer display becomes "03:00" and the display is reduced, the display position is returned to the default display position with the default display size at this timing. Alternatively, the reduced display may be performed at the changed display position.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 46(A10), the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 becomes “00:00”, and the state where the countdown is completed is shown.

The example productions shown in FIGS. 46(B1) to (B9) show that the timer notice display is divided and displayed during execution of the timer notice effect. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 46(B1), the title of Super Reach in which the enemy swordsman is displayed in a large size is displayed, and the appearance of development into Super Reach (Swordsman Reach) is shown. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 46(B1), the number of reservations in special figure 1 is 1, and the second number of reservations display indicates that the number of reservations in special figure 1 is 1. 1” is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 is also displayed. The hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are out of frame and are not displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 46(B1), the timer notice effect is performed, the timer notice display TM1 displays "20:35", and the timer display counts down.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 46(B2), an animation of a duel scene with the swordsman, the enemy of the main character, has begun to be displayed. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and "18:19" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 46(B2).

FIG. 46(B3) shows that animation display of the duel scene continues. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and “15:47” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 46(B3).

After that, as shown in FIG. 46(B4), an effect image is displayed around the timer notice display TM1 at the timing of “15:00” indicating that the timer display has 15 seconds remaining, and then, FIG. As shown in (B5), the timer advance notice display is divided into two. Here, the timer notice display displayed on the left side of the two timer notice displays may be referred to as a left timer notice display TM1L, and the timer notice display displayed on the right side may be referred to as a right timer notice display TM2R. The timer indications in these timer advance notice indications TM1L and TM1R show the same time, and at the timing shown in FIG. 46(B5), they show "13:56". In this example of performance, it is suggested that the reliability of the big hit is increased by dividing the timer notice display into two. Note that the number of times the timer notice display is divided is not limited to two, and may be three or more. The greater the number of divisions, the higher the reliability of the big hit. Further, in these timer advance notice displays TM1L and TM1R, the color of the frame changes to red, but the color of the frame does not have to change, and when the color of the frame changes to red, the frame changes. You may make it a big hit more easily than when the color does not change. Further, the color of the frame of either one of the timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R may be changed to red.

After that, as shown in FIG. 46(B6), when the timer display in the timer advance notice displays TM1L, TM1R becomes “00:00”, as shown in FIG. 46(B7), the timer advance notice displays TM1L, TM1R show the timer display. Instead of this, the word "attention" is displayed to the effect that the notice is called. Then, as shown in FIG. 46(B8), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a cut-in display indicating that the princess character is saying "I will rewrite the reach". There is. This cut-in display is an effect produced by the completion of the countdown of the timer display in one of the two timer notification displays TM1L and TM1R (for example, the left timer notification display TM1L). This is a notification that the promotion will be made to a reach production with higher sexuality. It should be noted that the effect may be produced by the completion of the countdown of the timer display in both of the timer advance notice displays TM1L and TM1R.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 46(B9), a state where the SP swordsman reach is developed is shown. The SP swordsman reach is a reach that develops and transitions to a swordsman reach, and is a reach production that is more likely to be a big hit than when the swordsman reach does not develop into an SP swordsman reach. In the SP swordsman reach, as shown in Figure 46 (B9), it is the same as the pre-development swordsman reach in that the protagonist's lord and the enemy's swordsman face each other, but they follow the panda as an assistant to the hero's lord. The difference is that the full moon appears in the background. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 46(B9), a notice display showing that the Kopanda cheering party KPD composed of three Kopanda characters is cheering is displayed, and SP swordsman reach It informs us that the reliability of the big hits has dramatically increased. The Kopanda cheering party KPD is a notice character displayed when the countdown of the timer display in the other timer notice display of the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R (for example, the right timer notice display TM1R) is completed.

In this example of performance, the advancement of chance and advancement of reach production are performed corresponding to the two timer notice displays, but one production (development of reach production) is performed corresponding to the two timer notice displays. It can be said that there is a chance up production among the developed reach production.
FIG. 47 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the timer notice effect.

In FIG. 47, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the general figure display device 210, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the general figure holding lamp 216 and the fourth figure. Illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

The example productions shown in FIGS. 47(A1) to (A5) show the timer notice production using a plurality of decorative symbol display devices. Here, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 47(A1) to (A5), the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14(b) is applied, and the outer periphery of the first decorative symbol display device 208L overlaps the decorative member. However, the image displayed in the area is also visible. At this time, the left and right sides of the first decorative symbol display device 208L are partially overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. It should be noted that the family crest accessory 224E and the Senryo box accessory 224H are omitted in the drawing for ease of explanation.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 47(A1), it has been developed into a super reach (swordsman reach), and an animation of a duel scene between the main character's lord and the enemy swordsman is shown. .. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 47(A1), the number of reservations of special figure 1 is 1, and in the second number of reservations display, the number of reservations of special figure 1 is 1. "1" shown is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 is also displayed. The hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are out of frame and are not displayed. Further, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the timer notice effect is being performed, "15:47" is displayed as the timer display, and the timer display is being counted down.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 47(A2), the animation of the duel scene is continuously performed. Further, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the countdown of the timer display continues, and "15:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 47(A2).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 47(A3), a predetermined effect is applied to a display area near the second decorative symbol display device 208M in the first decorative symbol display device 208L and a display area near the third decorative symbol display device 208N. An image is displayed, suggesting that the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N operate. Further, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the countdown of the timer display continues, and "14:50" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 47(A3).

Then, as shown in FIG. 47(A4), a state in which the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N reciprocate left and right along the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is shown. ing. At this time, the timer display displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is also displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. That is, it is shown that the timer advance notice display is divided into two. The timer display may be displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M after the operations of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are completed. The timer display displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the timer display displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N respectively indicate the same time, and at the timing shown in FIG. 47(A4), "13: 56” is shown. Although the countdown of the timer display continues during the operation of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are in operation. May interrupt the countdown of the timer display. In this example of performance, it is suggested that the reliability of the big hit is increased by dividing the timer notice display into two. Note that the number of times the timer notice display is divided is not limited to two, and may be three or more. The greater the number of divisions, the higher the reliability of the big hit. For example, in addition to the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the timer display may be performed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

After that, as shown in FIG. 47(A5), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N respectively return to the initial positions. Further, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the countdown of the timer display continues, and "12:19" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 47(A5).

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 47(B1) to 47(B5) show the timer notice effect using a plurality of decorative symbol display devices. Here, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 47(B1) to (B5), a mini display device 208P is provided in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208. The mini display device 208P is provided at an appropriate position, such as the game board 200 or the front frame door 106 (see FIG. 1). In this example of performance, for example, a dot matrix type display device in which full-color LEDs are arranged in a matrix is adopted, but other display devices such as an LCD, EL, 7-segment, lamp, and drum may be used. The mini display device 208P is provided with a shutter member, and by driving the shutter member, the mini display device 208P can be switched between the easily visible state and the visually difficult state.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 47(B1) shows a state in which a super-reach (swordsman reach) has been developed, and an animation of a duel scene between the protagonist's lord and the enemy swordsman is being performed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 47(B1), the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is 1, and the second number of reservations display indicates that the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is 1. 1” is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 is also displayed. The hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are out of frame and are not displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 47(B1), the timer notice production is performed, the timer notice display TM1 displays "18:19", and the timer display counts down. Further, the timer advance notice effect is also performed on the mini display device 208P, "6:19" is displayed as the timer display, and the timer display is counted down. That is, in this effect example, two timer notice effects are shown to be performed in parallel, and the timer indication is "0" in the timer notice effect TM1 of the decorative symbol display device 208. In such a case, an effect such as an advance notice of a chance increase may be given. Further, when the timer display on the mini display device 208P is "0", an effect such as an advance notice of a chance increase is given. There are cases.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 47(B2), the timer notice display is displayed at the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 at "15:00" indicating that the remaining time is 15 seconds. The effect image is displayed around TM1 and the countdown is interrupted. On the other hand, also in the mini display device 208P, the countdown is interrupted at the timing of "3:00" indicating that the timer display is 3 seconds remaining.

Then, as shown in FIG. 47(B3), in the mini display device 208P, instead of the timer display, the time of the timer display shown in the mini display device 208P is the timer advance notice display displayed in the decorative pattern display device 208. The character "UP" indicating that the time is added to the timer display of TM1 is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 47(B4), the time of 3 seconds is added to the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the time is updated to "18:00".

Then, as shown in FIG. 47(B5), in the timer notice display TM1 in the decorative symbol display device 208, the countdown of the timer display is restarted. At the timing shown in FIG. 47(B5), the timer display is "17:99". On the other hand, in the mini display device 208P, the display screen is difficult to view due to the shutter member. In addition, in this effect example, when the time is added to the timer display of the timer notice display TM on the decorative symbol display device 208, the timer effect on the mini display device 208P is ended, but the decorative symbol display is performed. Even if time is added to the timer display of the timer advance notice display TM in the device 208, the timer effect may not be finished in the mini display device 208P, and then the timer display may be counted down.
FIG. 48 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the timer advance notice effect.

In FIG. 48, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the public figure display device 210, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the public figure holding lamp 216 and the fourth figure. Illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

48(A1) to FIG. 48(A10) show a state in which the notification that the timer advance notice effect is started is displayed by displaying that the timer advance notice effect is being started before the timer advance notice effect is started. Showing. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 48(A1), the variable display of the decorative pattern is shown. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 48(A1), the number of holdings in the special figure 1 is 3, and the first holding icon h11 to the third holding icon h13 are displayed, and in the second holding number display. , "3" indicating that the number of reservations in Toku-zu 1 is 3 is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48(A2) shows that the timer advance notice preparation effect has started. Specifically, when the timer notice display TM1 is framed in from the right side of the display screen, the timer notice preparation effect is started. In the timer advance notice preparation effect, a message indicating that the timer advance notice effect is being prepared is displayed to give the player a sense of expectation. At the timing shown in FIG. 48(A2), nothing is displayed on the timer notice display TM1. Note that, for example, the display of "STANDBY" described later may be displayed.

Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48(A3) shows that the frame advance of the timer notice display TM1 is completed. When the frame advance of the timer notice display TM1 is completed, "STANDBY" indicating that the timer notice effect is being prepared is displayed on the timer notice display TM1 to notify that fact. That is, in this effect example, it is an effect that is performed as one mode of the pre-reading announcement for announcing that the timer announcement effect will be performed in the hold. It should be noted that it may be a change notice for notifying that the timer notice effect will be performed in the changing symbol display.

Then, as shown in FIG. 48(A4), the timer advance notice display TM1 in which the characters "STANDBY" are displayed changes its display position to a position below the second hold display section. At this time, the timer notice display TM1 is reduced and displayed in a mini size display size. When changing the display position, an animation in which the timer notice display TM1 moves while shrinking may be displayed, or the display position may be switched and displayed. Further, the display position of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed and then reduced, or the display position may be changed after the reduced display. Further, the timer notice display TM1 may not be displayed in a reduced size, and the display position may not be changed.

Thereafter, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 48(A5), a state is displayed in which the combination of the missing decorative patterns of "decoration 3-decoration 9-decoration 1" is stopped and displayed. At this time, the timer advance notice display TM1 in which the characters "STANDBY" are displayed is continuously displayed.

Subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48(A6), the variable display of the decorative symbol is started based on the earliest hold of the special diagram 1. The timer notice display TM1 is still maintained below the second hold display section. In this way, it can be said that the timer announcement preparation effect is an effect that may be performed across a plurality of symbol variable displays.

Thereafter, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 48(A7), a state is displayed in which the combination of the missing decorative patterns of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. At this time as well, the timer notice display TM1 in which the characters "STANDBY" are displayed is continuously displayed.

Subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48(A8), the variable display of the decorative symbol is started based on the earliest hold of the special diagram 1. The timer notice display TM1 is still maintained below the second hold display section. The symbol variable display this time corresponds to the hold that has been the target of prefetching.

Thereafter, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 48(A9), the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and returned to the original size, and the display position also returns to the original position, and the timer display is started from the display of “STANDBY”. Shows that the display is switched to "10:00". As a result, it is notified that the timer advance notice effect has started. When the display position of the timer notice display TM1 is changed, an animation in which the timer notice display TM1 moves while enlarging may be displayed, or the display position may be switched and displayed. Further, the display position of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed and then enlarged and displayed, or the display position may be changed after enlarged and displayed. Further, the display position of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed after the display of the timer notice display TM1 is switched to the timer display, or the timer notice display TM1 may be changed after the display position of the timer notice display TM1 is changed. The display of may be switched to the timer display. Further, the timing at which the display of the timer notice display TM1 is switched to the timer display may be the same as the timing of changing the display position of the timer notice display TM1.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48(A10), it is shown that the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is started.

After that, for example, when the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 becomes a display of a specific time (for example, “03:00”) or when the display mode changes, the display size of the timer advance notice display TM1 is changed. The size may be changed from a small size to a large size.

48B1 to FIG. 48B8 is a state in which a plurality of notice icons MI1 of a clock functioning as a look-ahead notice are stocked and a timer notice effect is performed by the number of the notice icons MI1 of the stocked clocks. Is shown. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48(B1), a state in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed is shown. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 48(A1), the number of holdings in the special figure 1 is 3, and the first holding icon h11 to the third holding icon h13 are displayed, and in the second holding number display. , "3" indicating that the number of reservations in Toku-zu 1 is 3 is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48(B2), a state where "decoration 3" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol is shown. This "decoration 3" has a notice icon MI1 of the clock added thereto, indicating that one notice icon MI1 of the clock is stocked. Note that the notice icons MI1 of two or more watches may be stocked at one time.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 48(B3), a state is displayed in which the combination of the missing decorative patterns of "decoration 3-decoration 9-decoration 1" is stopped and displayed. Further, below the second decorative pattern, a timer notice stock display area TMst showing the number of stocked notice icons MI1 of the clock is displayed. In the timer notice stock display area TMst, “timer notice stock×1” indicating that the notice icon MI1 of one clock is stocked is displayed. As a result, it is notified that the timer advance notice effect will be performed at least once in the hold. It should be noted that time may be added to the timer display in the timer notice effect by the number of stocks of the notice icon MI1 of the clock. Further, the remaining time displayed on the timer display when the timer notice effect is started may be determined according to the number of stocks of the notice icon MI1 of the clock. In the timer notice stock display area TMst, the stock number is added every time the notice icon MI1 of the clock appears.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48(B4), a state in which the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner is shown. Also, it is shown that the navigation character YM is giving a notice of navigation characters. This navigator character advance notice is made by displaying a balloon near the navigator character YM with the clock icon and the characters "get". The navi-character advance notice in this production example functions as a pre-read advance notice that the timer advance notice production will be performed while the call is held. As described above, the number of the notice icon MI1 of the clock stocked in one symbol variable display is not limited to one, and may be two or more. Further, there may be a plurality of types of effects that are performed when the notice icon MI1 of the clock is stocked. Further, in the effect performed when the clock notice icon MI1 is stocked, the number of stocked clock notice icons MI1 is not limited to one, and may be two or more.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 48(B5), a state is displayed in which the combination of the defective decorative patterns “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed. Further, in the timer notice stock display area TMst, "timer notice stock×3" indicating that the notice icons MI1 of the three clocks are stocked is displayed. As a result, it is informed that the timer advance notice effect will be performed at least three times within the hold.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48(B6), a state in which the decorative symbols are variably displayed is shown. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48(B7), one of the three notice icons MI1 of the stocked clocks is consumed, and the timer notice effect is started. At this time, the timer notice display TM1 is displayed in the approximate center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the timer notice display TM1, "10:00" is displayed as the timer display, which suggests that the chance advance notice may be given 10 seconds after the countdown is started. In addition, in this example of performance, one timer notice icon MI1 is consumed to start one timer notice effect, but two timer notice icons MI1 are consumed to perform two timer notice effects in parallel. It may be performed as follows. Further, in this effect example, one timer notice icon MI1 is consumed to start one timer notice effect. However, for example, as shown in FIG. 48(B7′), the clock notice icon MI1 is changed to the timer notice icon MI1. There may be a case where the timer advance notice production is started without being exhausted.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48(B8), the timer notice display TM1 changes the display position to the approximate right center of the display screen, and the countdown of the timer display is started. At this time, the display position of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed by a moving animation. When the timer notice icon MI1 is consumed and the timer notice display TM1 is displayed, the decorative symbol display device 208 may not be displayed substantially at the center, but may be displayed at the substantially right end center of the display screen from the beginning. ..
In the above description,

"Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, a sub display device 208S, a first decorative pattern display device 208L, a second decorative pattern display device 208M, a third decorative pattern display device 208N, mini Display device 208P, POV display 224I, etc.],

One of the plurality of types of display is a first display [for example, timer advance notice effect in timer advance notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 22(1)],

The first display is a certain effect [for example, a pseudo continuous effect shown in FIGS. 20(11) to 12(12) or a notice display due to a change in the display mode of the variable icon h0 shown in FIG. 21(a5). A lever effect shown in FIG. 21(c2), a notice by a stop display of a pine symbol CC as a chance symbol shown in FIG. 23(9fa′), a decorative symbol display device 208, a sub display device 208S, a first decorative symbol display device. 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the effect display using the mini display device 208P] is a display for notifying the timing,

One of the plurality of types of display is a second display [for example, timer addition effect shown in FIGS. 22(2) to 22(5)],

The second display is a display that gives advance notice that the timing at which the certain effect starts is changed [for example, in the timer addition effect shown in FIG. 22(2) to FIG. "Additional information" and "+10 seconds" displayed in the balloon of the character YM],

The second display may be displayed during the display of the first display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 22(2) to 22(5), the timer notification effect in the timer notification display TM1 is displayed. When a timer is added, a timer addition effect is being performed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide the game table having the characteristic display means.

Further, according to this gaming machine, even if the time until the certain effect is started is informed by the first display, it is foretold that the time informed by the second display will change. There is a possibility that it may happen, so not only waiting for the time until a certain performance starts, but also expecting that the time may change, and enjoy the first display You may be able to.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the first display and the second display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the first display and the second display. .. Further, the display means may always display the first display and the second display, or may not display the first display and the second display.

Further, the first display may notify only the timing at which a certain effect is performed, or may notify other than the timing at which a certain effect is performed. In addition, the first display may be a notification that always notifies the timing at which a certain effect is performed, or may not notify the timing at which a certain effect is performed.

In addition, the second display may give a notice only when the timing at which a certain effect is started changes, or gives a notice other than that the timing at which a certain effect starts is changed. It may be one. Further, the second display may always give a notice that the timing at which a certain production is started changes, or may not give a notice that the timing at which a certain production starts changes. It may be one.

Further, only the second display may be displayed during the display of the first display, or even a display other than the second display may be displayed during the first display. Good. Further, the second display may be displayed during the display of the first display, or the second display may not be displayed during the display of the first display.

Note that the start of the timer notice display may be that the display of the first display is started, or that the display of the countdown display is started (for example, if a number is displayed, It may be that the countdown of the countdown display is started. Further, the end of the timer notice display may be that the first display is not displayed, or that the countdown display is not displayed (for example, the number is erased and “attention” is displayed). The displayed state may be included), or the countdown by the countdown display may be completed (for example, 0 is displayed), and the display displayed on the first display after the countdown is completed. It may be that (for example, the character display of “attention”) is hidden.

In addition, “the display mode of the first display is changed after the second display is displayed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 22(2) to 22(5), After the timer addition effect is performed, the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is updated, and the time is added on the timer display, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to pay attention to the change in the display mode of the first display.

Here, it may be configured such that only the display mode of the first display changes after the second display is displayed, or the display mode of the first display after the second display is displayed. The display mode of the display other than the above may be changed. Further, the display mode of the first display may be configured to always change after the second display is displayed, or the display mode of the first display may be changed after the second display is displayed. It may be configured so as not to change.

Even if the second display is not displayed, the display mode of the first display may change, and the display mode of the first display may be changed only when the second display is displayed. May change. In addition, "the display means is a means composed of a plurality of display means,

One of the plurality of display means is a first display means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like],

One of the plurality of display means is a second display means [for example, a sub display device 208S or the like],
The first display is a display displayed on the first display means,
The second display is a display displayed on the second display means,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, the player's line of sight may be concentrated on the first display means until the first display is completed, but by displaying the second display on the second display means as well. In some cases, it is possible to focus attention on both of the two display units without concentrating the line of sight on only the first display unit.

Here, the display means may include only the first display means and the second display means, or may include the display means other than the first display means and the second display means. .. Further, the display means may be configured to always include the first display means and the second display means, or may be configured to not include the first display means and the second display means. Good.

In addition, the first display may be displayed only on the first display means, or may be displayed on other than the first display means. Further, the first display may be always displayed on the first display means, or may not be displayed on the first display means.

Further, the second display may be displayed only on the second display means, or may be displayed on other than the second display means. Further, the second display may be always displayed on the second display means, or may not be displayed on the second display means.

In addition, “the second display means is arranged on the front side of the first display means [for example, as shown in FIG. 26(A1), the sub display device 208S is in front of the decorative pattern display device 208. Etc.],

The first display means may be overlapped by the second display means on which the second display is displayed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 26(A2) to (A3). , The decorative pattern display device 208 is overlapped with the sub display device 208S on which the timer addition effect is being performed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, the second display means may overlap the first display means while displaying the second display, so that the second display is focused and a certain effect is started. In some cases, it may be possible to make it easier to recognize that the time to change may change.

Here, the second display means in which the second display is displayed may only overlap the first display means, or the second display in which the second display is displayed. There may be a case where display means other than the first display means are overlapped by the display means. Further, the second display means that the second display is displayed, the first display means may be overlapped by all means, or the second display means that the second display is displayed, There may be cases where one display means does not overlap.

Further, the first display means may be overlapped only by the second display means displaying the second display, or the second display displaying the second display. The first display means may be overlapped by the display means other than the means.

In addition, “the first position [for example, the initial position of the sub display device 208S shown in FIG. 26(B1)] and the second position [for example, the sub display device 208S shown in FIG. The second display means is configured to be movable between positions such as a position where it overlaps with the front surface side of substantially the center of 208.

The second display means is a display means that overlaps the first display means at the second position [for example, as shown in FIG. 26(B3), the sub display device 208S is a decorative symbol display device]. At a position where the sub display device 208S overlaps the front surface side in the approximate center of 208, the sub display device 208S overlaps the decorative pattern display device 208, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, only the second display means may be configured to be movable between the first position and the second position, or other than the second display means between the first position and the second position. The display means may also be movable. Further, the second display means may be configured to always move between the first position and the second position, and the second display means may be arranged between the first position and the second position. It may be configured so that it may not move.

Further, the second display means may be configured to be movable only between the first position and the second position, and the second display means other than between the first position and the second position. May be configured to be movable.

The second display means may be capable of overlapping the first display means only at the second position, or may be overlapped with the first display means at a position other than the second position. It can be anything. Further, the second display means may always overlap the first display means at the second position, or may not overlap the first display means at the second position. Good.

Further, "the first display is a display including a countdown display [for example, a countdown display in the timer display of the timer advance notice display TM1 shown in FIGS. 20(2) to 20(7)],"

The countdown display is a display in which the timing until the certain effect is performed is counted down [for example, as shown in FIGS. 20(2) to 20(7), the timer of the timer advance notice display TM1 is displayed. The countdown in the display informs the timing of the pseudo-relationship, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the first display may include only the countdown display, or may include a display other than the countdown display. Further, the first display may necessarily include the countdown display or may not include the countdown display.

In the countdown display, only the timing until a certain effect is performed may be performed by the countdown, or the timing other than the timing until the certain effect is performed may be performed by the countdown. .. Further, the countdown display may be such that the timing until a certain effect is performed is always performed by the countdown, or the timing until the certain effect is performed may not be performed by the countdown. Good.

In addition, even in the state where the second display is displayed, the countdown by the countdown display is continued,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, even when the second display is displayed, only the countdown by the countdown display may be continued, or even when the second display is displayed, it is continued in addition to the countdown by the countdown display. There may be things. Also, the countdown by the countdown display may always be continued even when the second display is being displayed, and the countdown by the countdown display may not be continued even when the second display is being displayed. Good.

Also, the countdown by the countdown display may be continued even when only the second display is displayed, or the countdown by the countdown display is continued even when the second display is not being displayed. Good.

In addition, “While displaying the second display, the countdown by the countdown display is interrupted,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, only the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted during the display of the second display, or anything other than the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted during the display of the second display. Further, the countdown by the countdown display may be necessarily interrupted during the display of the second display, or the countdown by the countdown display may not be interrupted during the display of the second display.

Further, the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted only while the second display is being displayed, and the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted even when the second display is not being displayed.

Further, “one of the plurality of types of displays is a third display [for example, display of “attention” character in timer advance notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 20(8)]”,
The third display is a display different from the first display,
The third display is a display different from the second display,
The third display is a display not included in the certain effect,

The third display is displayed when the first display indicates 0 (for example, as shown in FIGS. 20(7) to 20(8), the timer in the timer notice display TM1). When the display becomes 0, the character "Attention" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to further enhance the sense of expectation for the third display by the countdown of the first display.

Here, when the first display is a display showing 0, only the third display may be displayed, or when the first display is a display showing 0, the third display is displayed. Other displays may also be displayed. Further, when the first display is a display showing 0, the third display may be always displayed, and when the first display is a display showing 0, the third display is It may not be displayed.

Further, the third display may be displayed only when the first display is a display showing 0, and also when the first display is a display showing 0, A third display may be displayed.

In addition, “when the second display is displayed, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed than when the second display is not displayed,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to give a sense of expectation by displaying the second display.

In addition, when the second display is displayed, the jackpot symbol may be finally confirmed and displayed. When the second display is displayed, the jackpot symbol may not be finally confirmed and displayed. It may be.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of displays is a fourth display [for example, pseudo continuous production shown in (9) to (12) of FIG. 20],
The certain effect is an effect including the fourth display,
The fourth display is a performance display,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the certain effect may include only the fourth display, or may include a display other than the fourth display. In addition, a certain presentation may necessarily include the fourth display, or may not include the fourth display.

In addition, "a production movable means capable of executing a plurality of types of operations [for example, family crest actor 224E, Senryo box actor 224H, first large board behavioral part 224Ga to fourth large board behavioral part 224Gd, second decorative symbol display device 208M , Third decorative symbol display device 208N, sub display device 208S, POV display 224I, etc.],

One of the plurality of types of motions is a first motion [for example, a motion of the first large-board behavior auditor product 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior auditor product 224Gd shown in FIG. 21(d3)],
The certain effect is an effect including the first action,
The first motion is a performance motion,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it is possible to perform a dynamic effect using the effect moving means, and it may be possible to further improve the effect.

Here, the effect movable means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of motions, or may be capable of performing a plurality of types of motions. Further, the production-enabling means may necessarily execute a plurality of types of operations, or may not execute a plurality of types of operations.

Moreover, the production movable means may be capable of executing only the first operation, or may be capable of performing an operation other than the first operation. Further, the effect moving means may be one that always executes the first operation, or may not execute the first operation.

Further, the certain effect may include only the first action, or may include an action other than the first action. Moreover, a certain effect may necessarily include the first action, or may not include the first action.

In addition, “when the certain effect is performed, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed than when the certain effect is not performed [for example, FIG. 20(11) to FIG. The case where the pseudo-relation shown in 12) is started is more likely to be a big hit than the case where the pseudo-reconnection is not started, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to give a sense of expectation that a certain effect is performed.

It should be noted that, when a certain effect is performed, the big hit symbol may always be finally fixedly displayed, and even when a certain effect is performed, the big hit symbol may not be finally fixedly displayed. Good.

In addition, “One of the plurality of types of displays is the fifth display [for example, the conversation notice shown in FIGS. 16(9) to 14(14) or FIGS. 20(9) to 20(12)]. 29. (4) and the notice display of the chance up shown in (13) of FIG. 29, etc.].

In the period from the display start of the first display until the display start of the second display, the display of the fifth display may be started,
The fifth display is a notice display,

When the fifth display is displayed, the jackpot pattern is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed than when the fifth display is not displayed [for example, FIGS. 16(9) to 14(14)). It is more likely to be a big hit when the conversation notice shown in is given than in the case where the conversation notice is not given.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to give a sense of expectation that the fifth display will be displayed during the period from the start of the display of the first display to the start of the display of the second display. is there.

Here, in the period from the start of display of the first display to the start of display of the second display, there may be a case where only the fifth display is started, and the first display is In the period from the start of display to the start of display of the second display, the display other than the fifth display may be started in some cases. Further, in the period from the start of the display of the first display to the start of the display of the second display, the display of the fifth display may be always started, or the display of the first display may be started. The display of the fifth display may not be started in the period until the display of the second display is started.

In addition, the display of the fifth display may be started only during the period from the start of the display of the first display to the start of the display of the second display. The display of the fifth display may be started in a period other than the period from the start to the display of the second display.

In addition, when the fifth display is displayed, the jackpot design may be finally confirmed and displayed, or even when the fifth display is displayed, the jackpot design is not finally confirmed and displayed. There may be
In addition, “the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the gaming table is a slot machine [for example, a slot machine 1000 or the like],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
Also, in the above description,

"Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, a sub display device 208S, a first decorative pattern display device 208L, a second decorative pattern display device 208M, a third decorative pattern display device 208N, mini Display device 208P, POV display 224I, etc.],

One of the plurality of types of display is a period display [for example, display of the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 33(A1)],

The period display is a display that may be displayed during a certain period of the period during which the reach effect display is being performed [for example, as shown in FIG. 29, the chance up meter CMT is operated by a swordsman reach. It may be displayed during the specified period],

One of the plurality of types of display is a first effect display [for example, a notice by lever effect shown in FIG. 29 (18), etc.],

The period display is a display for notifying the first timing [for example, the timing indicated by the check point CP3 at which the notice by the lever effect is started as shown in FIG. 29(18)].

The first timing is a timing at which the display of the first effect display may be started,

The period display may be deleted after the display of the period display is started and before the first timing [for example, as shown in FIG. 33(A1) to FIG. If the cut-in display shown in FIG. 33(A2) is performed before the timing indicated by the point CP3 is reached, the chance up meter CMT is erased, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide the game table having the characteristic display means.

Further, according to this gaming machine, since the first timing of the period display is known during the display of the period display, there is a possibility that the display means will not be seen until the first timing comes close. Here, the period display may be hidden before the first timing is reached. Even at the timing before the first timing comes, it is possible to direct the line of sight to the display means to see the period display. There are cases.

Further, according to this gaming machine, it may be possible to draw in the game from the time the period display is displayed until the first timing.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the plurality of types of display. Further, a plurality of types of display may be displayed without fail, or a plurality of types of display may not be displayed.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the period display and the first effect display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the period display and the first effect display. Further, the display means may always display the period display and the first effect display, or may display the period display and the first display in some cases.

Further, the period display may be displayed only in a certain period of the period in which the reach effect display is performed, or may be displayed in the period in which the reach effect display is performed. It may also be displayed during a period other than the above period. Further, the period display may be always displayed during a certain period of the reach effect display, or during a certain period of the reach effect display. It may not be displayed in some cases.

Further, the period display may notify only the first timing, or may notify other than the first timing. Further, the period display may necessarily notify the first timing, or may not notify the first timing.

Further, only the period display may be erased before the first timing comes after the display of the period display starts, or the first timing comes after the display of the period display starts. Before that, the display other than the period display may be erased. In addition, the period display may be erased before the first timing from the display of the period display is started, or the period display may be deleted before the first timing. The display may not be erased in some cases.

Further, the period display may be deleted only after the display of the period display is started and before the first timing is reached, or it is the first timing after the display of the period display is started. Other than before, the period display may be deleted.

It should be noted that the period in which the period display is displayed may be during variable display, during big hit game, during demo display, during symbol stop display, etc., regardless of during reach.

Further, the period display may be displayed during execution of all reach, or may be displayed only during execution of a specific reach and not displayed during execution of other reach effects. Good. For example, the period display may not be displayed during long reach, but may be displayed during SP reach. Further, it may not be displayed in the first half of SP reach, but may be displayed in the second half of SP reach. Further, it may be displayed in the first half of SP reach and not displayed in the second half of SP reach.

Further, the start of the period display is, for example, the timing when the display of the chance up meter is started, and the end of the period display is, for example, the timing when the display of the chance up meter is ended. Good. Further, the start of the period display is, for example, a timing at which an effect such as a reach effect for which the period display is performed is started, and the end of the period display is a timing at which the effect is ended. However, it does not matter whether or not the chance up meter is actually displayed. Further, the start of the period display means the time when the progress of the character or the marker on the chance up meter starts, and the end of the period display means the time when the progress of the character or the marker on the chance up meter ends. It may be. Further, when the chance up meter is configured to be displayed/hidden by the operation means, the start of the period display means the timing at which the opportunity up meter is started to be displayed by the operation means. The end may be the timing when the display of the chance up meter is ended by the operating means.

Further, the start of the period display means, for example, from the start of the period display effect (for example, a display indicating that the chance up meter can be displayed) to the end of the period display effect (for example, the chance up meter. Until the display suggesting that can be displayed is hidden or until the chance up meter is hidden).

Further, the term display includes not only what is displayed until the first timing is reached, but also what is erased before the first timing is reached.

Further, the certain period may be two or more during the period in which the reach effect display is being performed. At this time, the period display may be started and ended for each certain period, or the period display may be continuously displayed over two certain periods. In this case, in the first certain period, after the first period display is started and ended, the period display itself is continuously displayed, and when the second certain period is started, a new period is displayed. The second period display as a display may start and end.

In addition, “One of the plurality of types of display is a second effect display [for example, display of cut-in grandfather shown in FIG. 33(A2), display of effect image shown in FIG. 33(A2b), etc.] And
The second effect display is a display different from the first effect display,

The second effect display may be displayed before the first timing [for example, as shown in FIG. 33(A1) to FIG. 33(A2) and FIG. 33(A2b), the chance up meter is displayed. In the production by CMT, before the sabotani character SBH reaches the third checkpoint CP3, the display of the cut-in of the grandfather shown in FIG. 33(A2) and the effect image shown in FIG. 33(A2b) may be displayed. Etc.],

The period display is a display that does not notify the timing at which the display of the second effect display is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 33(A1) to (A2) and FIG. In the effect produced by the upmeter CMT, the display timing of the cut-in of the grandfather shown in FIG. 33(A2) or the display of the effect image shown in FIG. 33(A2b) is not notified, etc.],

The period display is erased during the display of the second effect display [for example, as shown in FIG. 33(A1) to FIG. 33(A2) and FIG. 33(A2b), shown in FIG. 33(A2). When the grandfather's cut-in is displayed or the effect image shown in FIG. 33(A2b) is displayed, the chance up meter CMT is erased, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, since the display not notified by the period display may be displayed, the second effect display may be displayed even before the first timing, so before the first timing comes. May also have expectations.

Here, there may be a case where only the second effect display is displayed before the first timing, or an effect display other than the second effect display is also displayed before the first timing. There may be cases. Further, the second effect display may be displayed without fail before the first timing, or the second effect display may not be displayed before the first timing.

In addition, the second effect display may be displayed only before the first timing, or when the second effect display is displayed before the first timing. There may be

Further, the period display may not notify only the timing at which the display of the second effect display is started, or may not notify other than the timing at which the display of the second effect display is started. May be. Further, the period display may not necessarily notify the timing when the display of the second effect display is started, or may notify the timing when the display of the second effect display is started. Good.

Further, during the display of the second effect display, only the period display may be deleted, or during the display of the second effect display, displays other than the period display may be deleted. Further, the period display may be necessarily deleted during the display of the second effect display, or the period display may not be deleted during the second effect display.

Further, the period display may be deleted only while the second effect display is being displayed, or the period display may be deleted when the second effect display is not being displayed.

Instead of the effect display, an error notification such as a ball pulling error, a notification indicating a firing position, a notification for preventing forgetting to remove the prepaid card, or the like may be used. Further, as a form of the effect display, a display that appears by light emission by an LED, operation by the effect movable means, or light emission by the light guide plate may be used.

Moreover, you may notify by the period display the timing when the second effect display is displayed. Further, the timing at which the second effect display is displayed may not be notified by the period display.

In addition, “the second effect display is a second notice display [for example, a notice display by displaying the cut-in of the grandfather shown in FIG. 33(A2) or the effect image shown in FIG. 33(A2b)] is there,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, by displaying the second effect display before the first timing, it is possible to suggest that there may be a big hit without waiting for the first timing, It may be possible for the player to have expectations even during the period until the first timing comes.

Further, "when the second effect display is displayed, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed than when the second effect display is not displayed,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, when the second effect display is displayed, the jackpot pattern may be finally confirmed and displayed. Even when the second effect display is displayed, the jackpot pattern is finally confirmed and displayed. It may not be done.

In addition, “a production movable means capable of executing a plurality of types of operations [for example, family crest actor 224E, thousand ryo box actor 224H, first large board behavioral part 224Ga to fourth large board behavioral part 224Gd, second decorative symbol display device 208M. , Third decorative symbol display device 208N, sub display device 208S, POV display 224I, etc.],

One of the plurality of types of motions is a second motion [for example, a motion of the first large-board behavior auditor product 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior auditor product 224Gd shown in FIG. 33(A3b)].
The second operation is a performance operation,

The second operation may be performed during the display of the second effect display [for example, the display of the effect image shown in FIG. 33(A2b)].
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it is possible to perform a dynamic effect using the effect moving means, and it may be possible to further improve the effect.

Here, the effect movable means may be capable of performing only a plurality of types of actions, or may be capable of performing a plurality of types of actions. Further, the effect moving means may be one that always executes a plurality of types of operations, or may not execute a plurality of types of operations.

Also, only the second operation may be performed during the display of the second effect display, or an operation other than the second operation may be performed during the display of the second effect display. May be. Further, the second operation may be always performed during the display of the second effect display, or the second operation may not be performed during the display of the second effect display.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of actions is the first action [for example, the action of the family crest monument 224E shown in FIGS. 15(E1) to (E2) and FIG. 15(F1). Senryo box accessory 224H operation],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the period display is configured to be displayed again after the period display is erased [for example, as shown in FIGS. 33(A2a) to 33(A3a), After the chance up meter CMT is erased by the cut-in display, when the animation display of the duel scene is displayed, the chance up meter CMT is displayed again, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to make an expectation for redisplay of the period display.

Here, after the period display is erased, only the period display may be configured to be displayed again, or after the period display is erased, a display other than the period display may be displayed again. It may be configured. Further, the period display may be configured to be displayed again after the period display is erased, or the period display may not be displayed again after the period display is erased. May be.

Further, the period display may be configured to be displayed again only after the period display is erased, or the period display may be configured to be displayed again even after the period display is not erased. Good.

In addition, “the period display is not displayed until the certain period elapses after the period display is erased [for example, as shown in FIGS. 33(A2) to 33(A5). In addition, after the chance up meter CMT is erased by the display of the cut-in of the old character, the chance up meter CMT is not displayed in the symbol variation display, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, after the period display is erased, only the period display may be configured not to be displayed until a certain period elapses, or after the period display is erased, a certain period elapses. The display other than the period display may not be displayed. Further, after the period display is erased, the period display may not necessarily be displayed until a certain period of time elapses. The display may be configured to be displayed in some cases.

Further, the period display may be configured not to be displayed only after the period display is erased until a certain period elapses, or the certain period elapses even after the period display is not erased. The period display may not be displayed until.

In addition, when there are a plurality of certain periods in the period in which the reach effect display is being performed, after the period display is erased in the first certain period, the period display is not performed in the first certain period. Although not displayed, the period display may be displayable when a second certain period is started after the first certain period. Further, after the period display is erased in the first certain period, the period display may not be displayed in the second certain period after the first certain period, or the symbol. The period display may not be displayed until the variable display ends.
In addition, “the certain period is a period during execution of super reach,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "One of the plurality of types of display is a third effect display [for example, a notice of a champ up by the display of the character BOY of the boy shown in FIG. 29(4), a lord shown in FIG. 29(13). Of the opportunity to increase by displaying the cut-in image CI3]
The third effect display is a display different from the first effect display,

The period display is performed at the second timing [for example, the timing indicated by checkpoint CP1 at which the advance notice of the champ up is displayed by the display of the boy character BOY shown in FIG. 29(4), the master shown in FIG. 29(13). Of the check point CP2 at which the advance notice of the chance up by the display of the cut-in image CI3 is started] is displayed.

The second timing is a timing at which the display of the third effect display may be started,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the period display may be such that only the second timing may be notified, or timing other than the second timing may be notified. Further, the period display may be one that always notifies the second timing, or one that may not notify the second timing.

Further, the second timing may be one in which only the display of the third effect display may be started, or there is a possibility that something other than the display of the third effect display may be started. It may be one. Further, the second timing may be one in which the display of the third effect display is always started, or may be one in which the display of the third effect display may not be started.
Note that the timing displayed by the period display may be three or more.

Further, when a certain reach occurs, the effect display is always performed three times, and when another reach occurs, the effect display is always performed twice, so that the place where the effect display is performed may be fixed. Even if the reach is the same, the effect display may be performed three times when the effect is reached, and the effect display may be performed only once when the effect is reached. In that case, the case of "notifying a lot of timings" may be more likely to be a big hit than the case of "notifying very often", or may be more likely to be shifted. Also, the likelihood of a big hit does not have to change depending on the number of timing notifications. Further, the larger the number of times the effect display is performed, the more likely it is to be a big hit.

Further, the second timing may be a timing after the first timing, the second timing may be a timing before the first timing, or the first timing and the second timing. The two timings may be the same timing.

In addition, "the first effect display is a first notice display [for example, notice by lever effect shown in FIG. 29 (18)],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
In addition, “the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
Also, "One of the multiple types of display is the third display,

"When at least a portion of the first display becomes difficult to see" is "when at least a portion of the first display is overlapped by the third display",
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
In addition, "display means is a means composed of a plurality of display means,
The display means is a first display means,
The first display means is a means for displaying the period display,
The second display means is a means for performing a performance operation,

At least a part of the period display may be overlapped by the second display means,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the display means may be configured by only a plurality of display means, or may be configured by other than the plurality of display means. Further, the display means may be always composed of a plurality of display means, or may not be composed of a plurality of display means.

The first display means may display only the period display, or may display a display other than the period display. Further, the first display means may always display the period display, or may not display the period display.

In addition, the second display means may perform only the effect operation, or may perform an operation other than the effect operation. In addition, the second display means may be one that always performs the effect operation, or may be one that does not perform the effect operation.

Further, there may be a case where at least a part of the period display is overlapped by the second display means, or when at least a part of the period display is overlapped by the second display means. There may be Further, there may be a case where at least a part of the period display is always overlapped by the second display means, and there is a case where at least a part of the period display is not overlapped by the second display means. Good.
Also, in the above description,

"Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, a sub display device 208S, a first decorative pattern display device 208L, a second decorative pattern display device 208M, a third decorative pattern display device 208N, mini Display device 208P, POV display 224I, etc.],

One of the plurality of types of display is a first display [for example, an effect by the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 38(A1) to FIG. 38(A9)],

One of the plurality of types of display is a second display [for example, the display of the grandpa's conversation image CI2 in the conversation notice shown in FIGS. 38(A4) to (A9)],
The first display and the second display are different displays,

At least part of the display mode of the first display [for example, the display mode of the remaining time display meter MT1 displayed in the balloon of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 38(A1)] is the first speed [for example, 10 The speed at which the gauge disappears in seconds, etc.]

At least a part of the display mode of the second display [for example, the display mode of the remaining time display meter MT2 in the grandpa's conversation image CI2 shown in FIG. 38(A4)] is the second speed [for example, a gauge at 5 seconds]. The speed may disappear, etc.]
The first speed and the second speed are different speeds,
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide the game table having the characteristic display means.

In recent years, a lot of displays are displayed on the display means, and there is a problem that a player unfamiliar with the game or a player playing the model for the first time does not know where to pay attention. In this gaming table, by making the first speed and the second speed different, it is possible to naturally guide the player's line of sight to a display in which the display mode changes rapidly (slow), and the player having the above problem May be able to entertain the production.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the plurality of types of display. Further, the display means may display a plurality of types of displays without fail, or may display a plurality of types of displays in some cases.

Further, the period display may be displayed only in a certain period of the period in which the reach effect display is performed, or may be displayed in the period in which the reach effect display is performed. It may also be displayed during a period other than the above period. Further, the period display may be always displayed during a certain period of the reach effect display, or during a certain period of the reach effect display. It may not be displayed.

Further, the period display may notify only the first timing, or may notify other than the first timing. Further, the period display may be one that always notifies the first timing, or one that may not notify the first timing.

Further, only the period display may be erased before the first timing comes after the display of the period display starts, or the first timing comes after the display of the period display starts. Before that, the display other than the period display may be erased. Further, the period display may be surely erased before the first timing after the display of the period display is started, or it may be the first timing after the display of the period display is started. Before, the period display may not be erased.

Further, the period display may be deleted only after the display of the period display is started and before the first timing is reached, or it is the first timing after the display of the period display is started. Other than before, the period display may be deleted.

In addition, the “first display is a display including a time display [for example, a gauge display in the remaining time display meter MT1 shown in FIG. 38(A1)],

The second display is a display including the time display [for example, a gauge display in the remaining time display meter MT2 shown in FIG. 38(A4)].

The time display is a display in which the display mode changes according to the passage of time in a certain period [for example, the operation valid period] [for example, the remaining time display meter MT1 shown in FIG. 38(A1) or FIG. 38( The remaining time meter MT2 shown in A4) has its gauge reduced according to the time from the start of the operation valid period, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to easily recognize the speed of change in the display mode.

Here, the first display may include only the time display, or may include a display other than the time display. In addition, the first display may necessarily include the time display, or may not include the time display.

Further, the second display may include only the time display, or may include a display other than the time display. Further, the second display may necessarily include the time display, or may not include the time display.

Further, the time display may be such that the display mode changes only according to the passage of time in a certain period, or the display mode changes according to other than the passage of time in a certain period. May be. Further, the time display may be such that the display mode always changes according to the passage of time in a certain period, or the display mode may not change according to the passage of time in a certain period. It may be.

In addition, there is a case where both of the first display and the second display are displayed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 38(A4) to 38(A7), a button is displayed on the balloon of the navigation character YM. Both the effect display in which the image 136a1 and the remaining time display meter MT1 are displayed and the operation promotion notification image displayed in the grand conversation image CI2 in the conversation notice are displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it is possible to make the production lively by displaying both the first display and the second display.

Here, there may be a case where only the first display and the second display are both displayed, and there is a case where both the first display and the second display are displayed. Good. Further, both the first display and the second display may be displayed without fail, or both the first display and the second display may not be displayed.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of displays is a third display [for example, a character display of “hot heat” in a balloon of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 38(A9)],

One of the plurality of types of display is a fourth display [for example, a character display such as "Intense heat" in the old conversation image CI2 shown in FIG. 38(A9)],
The third display and the fourth display are different displays,

The first display is a display in which at least a part of the display modes can be changed until the first time [for example, 10 seconds] has elapsed,

The second display is a display in which at least a part of the display modes can be changed until the second time [for example, 5 seconds] has elapsed,

When the first time has elapsed from the start of display of the first display, the third display may be displayed,

When the second time elapses after the second display starts displaying, the fourth display may be displayed,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the first display may be such that at least a part of the display modes can be changed until the first time elapses, or at least a part of the display modes can be changed until the first time elapses. Display modes other than the above may be changeable. Further, the first display may be one in which at least a part of the display modes always changes until the first time elapses, or at least a part of the display modes change until the first time elapses. It may not be possible.

Further, the second display may be one in which only at least a part of the display modes can be changed until the second time elapses, or other than at least a part of the display modes until the second time elapses. The display mode of may be changeable. Further, the second display may be one in which at least a part of the display modes always changes until the second time elapses, or at least a part of the display modes change until the second time elapses. It may not be possible.

In addition, when the first time has elapsed from the start of the display of the first display, only the third display may be displayed, or the first display may start displaying the first display. When time passes, a display other than the third display may be displayed. Further, when the first time has elapsed since the first display started to be displayed, the third display may be displayed without fail, or when the first time has elapsed since the first display started to be displayed. The third display may not be displayed.

Further, when the second time has elapsed from the start of the display of the second display, only the fourth display may be displayed, or the second display may start to display the second display. When time passes, a display other than the fourth display may be displayed. Also, when the second time has elapsed since the second display started to be displayed, the fourth display may be displayed without fail, or when the second time has elapsed since the second display started to be displayed. In some cases, the fourth display may not be displayed.

The third display and the fourth display may have the same display mode or different display modes.

Further, in the third display and the fourth display, the reliability of the big hit may be higher or lower in the fourth display. The third display and the fourth display may have the same jackpot reliability.

In addition, “the first display is a countdown display [for example, a countdown display in the timer display of the first timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 40(A1)],

The second display is the countdown display [for example, a countdown display in the timer display of the second timer notice display TM2 shown in FIG. 40(A1)],

The countdown display is a display for notifying the timing until a certain effect [for example, display of pseudo continuous effect] is performed [for example, first timer advance notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 40(A1). And the second timer notice display TM2 informs the time until the pseudo-relation occurs by a countdown display, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the countdown display may notify only the timing until a certain effect is performed, or may notify other than the timing until a certain effect is performed. Further, the timing until a certain effect is performed may be notified without fail, or the timing until a certain effect is performed may not be notified.

In addition, “operating means that can be operated by the player [for example, effect button 136 (chance button 136), etc.] is provided,
The first display is an operation valid period display,
The second display is the operation valid period display,

The operation valid period display is a display showing a period during which the operation of the operation means is valid.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the operating means may be operable only by the player, or may be operable by anyone other than the player. Further, the operating means may be one that is always operated by the player, or may be one that is not operated by the player.

Further, the operation valid period display may indicate only a period during which the operation of the operation means is valid, or may indicate something other than the period during which the operation of the operation means is valid. The operation valid period display may necessarily indicate the period during which the operation of the operation unit is valid, or may not indicate the period during which the operation of the operation unit is valid.

In addition, “the first display is a period display [for example, the first chance up meter CMTa shown in FIG. 35(A1)],

The second display is the period display [for example, the second chance up meter CMTb shown in FIG. 35(A1)],

The period display is a display for informing a first timing [for example, the timing at which the advance notice of the chance up by the boy character BOY shown in FIG. 35(A2) is started].

The first timing means a certain effect in a first period [for example, a period during which an animation of a duel scene in the swordsman reach shown in (A1) to (A2) of FIG. 35 is performed] [for example, FIG. There is a possibility that the display of the advance notice of the chance by the boy character BOY shown in (A2)] is performed.

From the start to the end of the first period, the first timing is notified,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the period display may notify only the first timing, or may notify other than the first timing. Further, the period display may be one that always notifies the first timing, or one that may not notify the first timing.

Further, the first timing may be such that only the sixth display may be started in the first period, or the display other than the sixth display may be started in the first period. There is a possibility that it may be done. Further, the first timing may be such that the sixth display is always started during the first period, or the sixth display may not be started during the first period. May be.

Also, only the first timing may be notified during the period from the start to the end of the first period, or during the period from the start to the end of the first period, the first Other than the timing may be notified. Further, the first timing may be notified without fail during the period from the start to the end of the first period, or the first timing may be notified from the start to the end of the first period. The timing may not be reported.

Further, the first timing may be notified only from the start to the end of the first period, or other than from the start to the end of the first period. One timing may be notified.

In addition, “the display mode of at least a part of the second display may change at the first speed depending on the passage of time,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, depending on the passage of time, there may be a case where at least a part of the display manners of the second display changes only at the first speed, and according to the passage of time, the second display There may be a case where at least a part of the display modes change at a speed other than the first speed. Also, depending on the passage of time, at least a part of the display manner of the second display may change at the first speed without fail, and according to the passage of time, at least a part of the second display. The display mode may not change at the first speed.

Further, depending on the passage of time, there may be a case where only at least a part of the display manners of the second display changes at the first speed, and depending on the passage of time, at least the second display. There may be a case where something other than some display modes changes at the first speed.

In addition, “when at least a part of the display mode of the second display changes at the second speed than when at least a part of the display mode of the second display changes at the first speed” In the end, the jackpot pattern is more likely to be confirmed and displayed,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, when at least a part of the display form of the second display changes at the second speed, the jackpot symbol may be finally definitely displayed, or at least a part of the second display may be displayed. Even when the mode changes at the second speed, there may be a case where the big hit symbol is not finally confirmed and displayed.

In addition, “the first display is an effect display [for example, an effect display by the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 38(A1) to FIG. 38(A9)].
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "the second display is an effect display [for example, a display of the grandpa's conversation image CI2 in the conversation notice shown in FIGS. 38(A4) to (A9)].
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
In addition, “the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the gaming table is a slot machine [for example, a slot machine 1000 or the like],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
Also, in the above description,

"Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, a sub display device 208S, a first decorative pattern display device 208L, a second decorative pattern display device 208M, a third decorative pattern display device 208N, mini Display device 208P, POV display 224I, etc.],

One of the plurality of types of display is a first display [for example, timer advance notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 41(A1)],

The first display is a display including a countdown display [for example, a countdown display of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 41(A1)],

The countdown display is a display for notifying the timing until a certain effect is performed by counting down [for example, as shown in FIGS. 41(A1) to 41(A7), a timer advance notice display is displayed. The countdown in the timer display of TM1 informs the timing of pseudo-linking, etc.],

During the display of the countdown display, the display mode of the first display changes from the first display mode [for example, a small size display mode of the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 41(A1)] to the second display mode. There is a case where the mode is changed to, for example, a large-sized display mode of the timer advance notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 41(A3),
The first display mode and the second display mode are different display modes,
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide the game table having the characteristic display means.

Further, according to this gaming machine, since the variation of the effect is increased by changing the display mode of the countdown display, it may be possible to entertain the player until a certain effect is performed.

Further, according to this gaming machine, it may be possible to draw attention to the countdown display itself by changing the display mode of the countdown display.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

The first display may include only the countdown display, or may include a display other than the countdown display. Further, the first display may necessarily include the countdown display or may not include the countdown display. The first display may be the countdown display, or the first display may not be the countdown display.

In addition, the countdown display may notify the timing until a certain effect is performed only by performing the countdown, or the timing until the certain effect is performed by not performing the countdown. It may be one that does. In addition, the countdown display may be a notification that always notifies the timing until a certain effect is performed, or if the timing until a certain effect is not notified by performing the countdown. There may be

Further, during the display of the countdown display, the display mode of the first display may change from the first display mode only to the second display mode. The display mode of the display may change from the first display mode to a display mode other than the second display mode. Further, the display mode of the first display may be changed from the first display mode to the second display mode without fail during the display of the countdown display, or the display of the first display may be displayed during the display of the countdown display. The mode may not change from the first display mode to the second display mode.

Further, the display mode of the first display may change from the first display mode to the second display mode only while the countdown display is being displayed. The display mode of one display may change from the first display mode to the second display mode.
The countdown display may be a timer display.

The start of the countdown display is, for example, the timing at which the first display is started, and the end of the countdown display is, for example, the timing at which the display of the first display is ended. May be. Further, the start of the countdown display is, for example, the timing when the countdown is started after the first display is started, and the end of the countdown display is, for example, the timing when the countdown is ended. Good.

In addition, "the countdown display is started during the execution of the symbol variation display, and the countdown display is terminated by the time the symbol variation display is terminated [for example, as shown in FIGS. 20(1) to 20(7). , The display of the countdown in the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 is started during the execution of the symbol variation display, and is terminated during the symbol variation display, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, the countdown display for notifying the timing until a certain effect is completed is completed during one execution of the symbol variation display, so the effect may not be redundant.

Here, the countdown display is started during execution of the symbol variation display, and only the countdown display may be ended before the symbol variation display is ended, or the countdown display is started during execution of the symbol variation display, The display other than the countdown display may be terminated before the symbol variation display is terminated. In addition, the countdown display is started during the execution of the symbol variation display, and the countdown display may be surely ended before the symbol variation display ends, or the countdown display is started during the execution of the symbol variation display, and the symbol concerned is displayed. The countdown display may not end before the variable display ends.

Further, the countdown display is started during the execution of the symbol variation display, and the countdown display may be ended only until the symbol variation display is ended, or the countdown display is started during the execution of the symbol variation display, and the symbol concerned is displayed. The countdown display may be ended besides the time until the variable display is ended.

In addition, "the first display mode is a display mode in which the first display is displayed in a first display size [for example, a small size],

The second display mode is a display mode in which the first display is displayed in a second display size [for example, large size, etc.],

In the first display size and the second display size, the second display size is larger.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, the expectation for the countdown display can be changed (the countdown display with the increased display size can be focused) by increasing the display size of the countdown display.

Here, the first display mode may be a display mode in which the first display is displayed only in the first display size, or the first display may be a display size other than the first display size. The display mode may be displayed. The first display mode may be a display mode in which the first display is always displayed in the first display size, or when the first display is not displayed in the first display size. There may be a certain display mode.

The second display mode may be a display mode in which the first display is displayed only in the second display size, or the first display is displayed in a display size other than the second display size. The display mode may be displayed. The second display mode may be a display mode in which the first display is always displayed in the second display size, or when the first display is not displayed in the second display size. There may be a certain display mode.

The display sizes may be the same, for example, the display sizes may be the same, but the colors and shapes of the frames and characters may be different.
Also, the first display size may be larger than the second display size.

In addition, “when the display of the countdown display is started [for example, when the countdown display is started in the timer display of the timer advance notice display TM1 as shown in FIG. 20(3)], the first The display is displayed in the first display mode,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, when the display of the countdown display is started, the first display may be displayed only in the first display mode, or when the display of the countdown display is started, the first display is changed to the first display. It may be displayed in a display mode other than the one display mode. In addition, when the display of the countdown display is started, the first display may be always displayed in the first display mode, or when the display of the countdown display is started, the first display may be the first display. There may be a case where it is not displayed in the display mode.

Further, the first display may be displayed in the first display mode only when the display of the countdown display is started, or the first display is displayed other than when the display of the countdown display is started. It may be displayed in the first display mode.

When the display of the first display is started [for example, when the frame advance of the timer advance notice display TM1 is started as shown in FIG. 20(2)], the first display is displayed. Displayed in the first display mode,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, when the display of the first display is started, the first display may be displayed only in the first display mode, or when the display of the first display is started, May be displayed in a display mode other than the first display mode. Further, when the display of the first display is started, the first display may be always displayed in the first display mode, or when the display of the first display is started, The display may not be displayed in the first display mode.

Further, only when the display of the first display is started, the first display may be displayed in the first display mode, or other than when the display of the first display is started, One display may be displayed in the first display mode.

In addition, "during the display of the countdown display, the first display always changes from the first display mode to the second display mode [for example, shown in FIGS. 41(A2) to (A3). As described above, when the timer display of the timer notification display TM1 is "03:00" indicating that the timer display of the timer display of the timer display of the timer display of TM3 is 3 seconds, the timer notification display TM1 is displayed. Has changed from small size to large size, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to expect the display mode to change during the countdown display.

Here, while the countdown display is being displayed, the first display may be changed from the first display mode to the second display mode without fail, or the first display may be changed to the first display mode during the countdown display. The display mode may be changed to a display mode other than the second display mode. Further, the first display may not change from the first display mode to the second display mode during the countdown display.

Further, the first display may change from the first display mode to the second display mode without fail while the countdown display is being displayed. The first display mode may be changed to the second display mode.

In addition, “the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode than in the case where the first display does not change from the first display mode to the second display mode. If you do it, it is easier to finally confirm and display the jackpot pattern,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to give an expectation that the first display is changed to the second display mode.

In addition, when the first display is changed from the first display mode to the second display mode, the jackpot symbol may be finally definitely displayed, or the first display may be the first display mode. Even when the display mode is changed to the second display mode, the jackpot pattern may not be finally displayed in a finalized manner.

Further, “The first display is a display in which the display position may change [for example, as shown in FIGS. 41(A2) to (A3), the timer notice display TM1 is a decorative symbol display device. The display position is changed from the substantially right center to the substantially center of the display screen of 208],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, the display position of the first display is changed, which may give a visual change and improve the effect of the effect.

Here, the first display may be one in which only the display position may change, or one other than the display position may change. Further, the first display may be one in which the display position always changes, or one in which the display position may not change.

Further, “When the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, the display position of the first display changes [for example, FIG. 41(A2) to FIG. ), when the display size of the timer notice display TM1 changes from the small size to the large size, the display position changes from the substantially right center to the substantially center of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, etc.], A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, since the display mode of the first display changes and the display position also changes, it may be possible to draw attention to the first display.

Here, when the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, only the display position of the first display may change, or the first display changes from the first display mode. When changing to the second display mode, the display position other than the display position of the first display may also change. Further, when the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, the display position of the first display may change without fail, and the first display changes from the first display mode to the first display mode. When changing to the second display mode, the display position of the first display may not change.

Further, only when the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, the display position of the first display may change, or the first display may change to the first display mode. The display position of the first display may be changed in a case other than the case of changing from the second display mode.

In addition, "the first display is a display that may be a moving display [for example, an animation display of an enlarged display of the timer notice display TM1],"

The display position of the first display changes by performing the moving display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 41(A2) to (A3), the timer advance notice display TM1 is displayed by an enlarged display animation. Enlarged display, display position changes, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, a visual change can be given by the moving display of the first display, so that the effect of the production may be improved.

Here, the first display may be a display in which only the moving display may be performed, or a display in which a display other than the moving display may be performed. In addition, the first display may be the one in which the moving display is always performed, or the moving display may not be performed in some cases.

Further, by performing the moving display, only the display position of the first display may be changed, and by performing the moving display, the display positions of other than the display position of the first display may be changed. Good. Further, the display position of the first display may be changed without fail by performing the moving display, or the display position of the first display may not be changed by performing the moving display. ..

Further, the display position of the first display may change only when the moving display is performed, or even when the display position of the first display changes even when the moving display is performed. Good.

In addition, while the display of the movement display, the countdown by the countdown display progresses,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, only the countdown by the countdown display may be continued during the display of the moving display, or something other than the countdown by the countdown display may be continued during the display of the moving display. Further, the countdown by the countdown display may be always continued during the display of the movement display, or the countdown by the countdown display may not be continued during the display of the movement display.

Further, the countdown by the countdown display may be continued only while the moving display is being displayed, or the countdown by the countdown display may be continued when the moving display is not being displayed.

In addition, “While displaying the movement display, the countdown by the countdown display is interrupted,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, only the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted during the display of the moving display, or other than the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted during the display of the moving display. Further, the countdown by the countdown display may be always interrupted during the display of the movement display, or the countdown by the countdown display may not be interrupted during the display of the movement display.

Further, the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted only while the moving display is being displayed, or the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted even when the moving display is not being displayed.

Further, “The countdown display is a display for counting down the time until the certain effect is performed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 41(A2) to (A7), the timer of the timer notice display TM1 is displayed. The countdown in the display informs the timing of the pseudo-relationship, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the countdown display may be a countdown of only the time until a certain effect is performed, or may be something other than a countdown of the time until a certain effect is performed. Further, the countdown display may be one that always counts down the time until a certain effect is performed, or may not be counted down before the certain effect is performed.

In addition, by displaying "0" in the countdown display, it is notified that the timing for performing the certain effect has come [for example, shown in FIG. 41 (A7) to FIG. (A8). As described above, when the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 becomes 0, the character "attention" is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1 to notify that the pseudo link is performed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, by displaying the display showing 0 in the countdown display, it may be notified that only the timing at which a certain effect is performed is reached, or by displaying the display showing 0 in the countdown display. It is also possible to notify other than the timing at which a certain performance is performed. Further, by displaying the display showing 0 in the countdown display, it may be informed that the timing when a certain effect has been performed, or by displaying the display showing 0 in the countdown display, There may be a case where it is not notified that it is the time when a certain effect is performed.

Further, it may be notified that the timing for performing a certain effect is reached only by displaying the display showing 0 in the countdown display, or other than the display showing 0 in the countdown display. By doing so, it may be notified that it is time to perform a certain effect.

In addition, “the countdown display is configured to be erased after the display showing 0 is displayed in the countdown display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 41(A7) to (A11), After the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 becomes 0, the timer notice display TM1 is erased, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, the effect may not be redundant by deleting the countdown display after the countdown is completed.

Here, only the countdown display may be erased after the display showing 0 in the countdown display, or other than the countdown display after the display showing 0 in the countdown display is displayed. May also be configured to be erased. Further, the countdown display may be configured to be always deleted after the display showing 0 in the countdown display is displayed, or the countdown display may be deleted after the display showing 0 is displayed in the countdown display. It may be configured so as not to be performed.

Further, the countdown display may be configured to be erased only after the display showing 0 is displayed in the countdown display, and the countdown display may be displayed other than after the display showing 0 is displayed in the countdown display. May be erased.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a second display [for example, display of “attention” character in timer advance notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 41(A8), etc.],”
The second display is a display not included in the certain effect,

When a display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, the countdown display is erased after the second display is displayed [for example, FIG. 41(A7) to As shown in the figure (A11), after the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 becomes 0, the word "attention" is displayed in place of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1, and then the timer notice display TM1 is erased. Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, when the countdown display is erased, the second display is displayed, so that it may be possible to improve the effect of erasing the countdown display.

Here, the second display may not be included only in a certain effect, or may not be included in an effect other than the certain effect. In addition, the second display may not necessarily be included in a certain effect, or may be included in a certain effect. Further, the second display may be included in a certain effect.

Further, when a display showing 0 is displayed in the countdown display, only the countdown display may be erased after the second display is displayed, or a display showing 0 in the countdown display. When is displayed, the display other than the countdown display may be erased after the second display is displayed. Further, when the display showing 0 is displayed in the countdown display, the countdown display may be surely deleted after the second display is displayed, or the display showing 0 in the countdown display. When is displayed, the countdown display may not be erased after the second display is displayed.

The countdown display may be erased after the second display is displayed only when the display showing 0 is displayed in the countdown display, or the display showing 0 is displayed in the countdown display. In addition to the case where is displayed, the countdown display may be erased after the second display is displayed. Further, when a display showing 0 is displayed in the countdown display, the countdown display may be erased only after the second display is displayed, or a display showing 0 in the countdown display. When is displayed, the countdown display may be erased even after the second display is displayed.
In addition, "the display means is a means composed of a plurality of display means,

One of the plurality of display means is a first display means [for example, a sub display device 208S or the like],

One of the plurality of display means is a second display means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like],

When the first display of the first display mode is displayed, the first display is displayed on the first display means [for example, as shown in FIG. 42(A1), The timer advance notice display TM1 of the size is displayed on the sub display device 208S, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, when the first display of the first display mode is displayed, the first display may be displayed only on the first display means, or the first display of the first display mode. When is displayed, the first display may be displayed on display means other than the first display means. Further, when the first display of the first display mode is displayed, the first display may be always displayed on the first display means, and the first display of the first display mode is When displayed, the first display may not be displayed on the first display means.

Further, only when the first display of the first display mode is displayed, the first display may be displayed on the first display means, or the first display of the first display mode is displayed. The first display may be displayed on the first display unit in a case other than the case.

Also, "when the first display of the first display mode displayed on the first display means changes to the second display mode, the first display is the second display. It may be displayed on the means [for example, as shown in FIG. 42 (A2) to FIG. 42 (A3), when the timer notice display TM1 changes from a small size to a large size, the timer notice display TM1 is a decorative pattern. Displayed on the display device 208, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, since the display means to be displayed when the display mode of the first display changes is changed, it may be possible to visually improve the effect.

Here, when the first display of the first display mode displayed on the first display means changes to the second display mode, the first display is displayed only on the second display means. In some cases, when the first display of the first display mode displayed on the first display means changes to the second display mode, the first display changes to the second display means. It may be displayed on other display means. Further, when the first display of the first display mode displayed on the first display means changes to the second display mode, the first display is always displayed on the second display means. There may be, when the first display of the first display mode displayed on the first display means changes to the second display mode, the first display on the second display means It may not be displayed.

Further, only when the first display of the first display mode displayed on the first display means changes to the second display mode, the first display is displayed on the second display means. The first display of the first display mode displayed on the first display means may be changed to the second display mode also when the first display is the second It may be displayed on the display means.
In addition, “the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the gaming table is a slot machine [for example, a slot machine 1000 or the like],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

The countdown display described so far may be displayed only during execution of the symbol variation display, or may be displayed as a prefetching notice. That is, it can be said that the countdown display functions as a notice of the symbol variation display and may also function as a prefetch notice. Here, it may be performed only as a pre-reading notice.

Further, in the case where the countdown display is performed as a look-ahead notice, the countdown display may be displayed during the period between the symbol variation display and the symbol variation display performed next. In that case, during the symbol stop display, the notification of the time by the countdown display may be stopped/interrupted/stopped (for example, the time of the fixed stop timing of the symbol is also displayed during the symbol stop display (however, the countdown It may be possible to stop notating the time, etc. The time notification may be continued by the countdown display even during the symbol stop display. Also, the countdown is internally performed during the symbol stop display. However, the countdown may be internally stopped during the symbol stop display.

Also, when displaying a countdown display as a prefetch notice, if there is a hold whose variable time changes depending on the number of holds (for example, a hold whose variable time is indefinite), the countdown display should not be displayed. Good. This is because if the symbol variation display time is indefinite, it may be difficult to know at what timing the countdown becomes 0, so for example, it is necessary to match the generation timing (pseudo rendition, reach, etc.). In the case of (development, etc.), it is preferable to perform only in the symbol variable display.

On the other hand, the countdown display may be performed also when the hold of which the variable time is indefinite is in the hold. In this case, for example, an effect that does not cause a problem even if it suddenly occurs (for example, a change in the display mode of the hold icon, an effect such as promotion to a round during a big hit, a telop display such as "intense hot approach", etc. It suffices that the countdown of the timer be completed before the end of the hold of the target is completed). In addition, even when an effect that requires timing adjustment occurs, a certain timing (for example, start of a pending pattern variation display that is a pre-reading target) n An effect that forces time to be adjusted is performed Good.

Further, the countdown display may be displayed during the big hit. In this case, the display may be continued over the intervals between rounds. Here, during the big hit game, the period of one round is indefinite, so it is preferable to appropriately set the countdown time. For example, the countdown display may not be generated in the final round, or during the big hit end interval (final When the jackpot end display period ends after the round ends and the timer is set to 0 at the next timer interrupt (for example, 4 ms), or when a certain round is reached, the book edge is forced. You may make it display the combined time (For example, even if it is not 0 in countdown display, "00:00" is forcibly displayed and an effect is generated).

Further, the time until the simultaneous production, the production by RTC, etc., may be notified by a countdown display.

Further, the display device may be configured by a transmissive liquid crystal, and on the back side of the transmissive liquid crystal, a directing means such as an effect moving means and a decorative member, and another display device such as a drum or an LCD are arranged. They may be configured to be visible through. At this time, the transmissive liquid crystal may be configured to be switchable by the liquid crystal shutter between a state in which the back side is visible and a state in which the rear side is difficult to visually recognize.

In addition, the operation mode of the production movable means such as the accessory may change or the light emission mode of the lamp may change according to the notification of the time by the countdown display.

In addition, a display that gives notice that production that may affect the countdown display itself (for example, addition/subtraction of timer, interruption, fast forward/rewind, enlargement/reduction of countdown display, change of color or shape, etc.) (For example, an effect of agitating that something may occur due to the mini character) may be performed. For example, when a mini character appears, something may happen in the countdown display (when nothing is actually done or when something is done), and when another character comes out, something is always done. May be performed, or an effect may be performed such that something is always performed when another character comes out. At this time, for example, the larger the number of appearances of the character, the more likely it is to be a big hit.

Further, when the number of countdown displays is large, the final big hit may be likely to occur, or when the chance up notice is given, the final big hit may be likely to occur.

Further, with respect to the chance up meter, even if a part or all of the meter is enlarged or reduced, or promotion effect (for example, a color or shape is changed, a character or a marker indicating the current position is changed, etc.) is performed. Good.
Also, in the above description,

[A game table provided with image display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like],

One of the plurality of types of display is a first effect display [for example, a notice or the like due to the appearance of the boy character BOY shown in FIG. 29(4)],

One of the plurality of types of display is a period display [for example, a display of the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 29(2)],

The period display is a display that may be displayed during a certain period of the period during which the reach effect display is being performed [for example, as shown in FIG. 29, the chance up meter CMT is operated by a swordsman reach. It may be displayed during the specified period],

The period display is a display including a cursor display [for example, the character SBH of the sabotani shown in FIG. 29(2)],

At the first checkpoint CP1 shown in FIG. 29(2) from the start position [for example, the position shown in FIG. 29(2), the position shown at the start point SP, etc.] to the first position. By moving to the end position [for example, the position shown in the final point GP shown in FIG. 29(2)] via the position shown in FIG. Consists of

When the cursor display reaches the first position, the first timing [for example, the first check point CP1 shown in FIG. 29(4), at which the advance notice by the appearance of the Boy character BOY is started, is shown. Timing etc.”,

The first timing is a timing at which the display of the first effect display may be started in the reach effect display,

The period display is a display that may display a first chance up display [for example, a display of “UP” above the first check point CP1 shown in FIG. 29(6)],

When the display of the first effect display is started at the first timing, a display position corresponding to the first position (hereinafter, “first display position [eg, shown in FIG. 29(6), The display position of "UP" above the first check point CP1]"), the first chance-up display is displayed,

When the first chance-up display is displayed, the first chance-up display is configured to be continuously displayed until the cursor display reaches at least the end position [for example, As shown in FIG. 29(25), the display of “UP” above the first check point CP1 is continuously displayed until the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the final point GP, etc.],

One of the plurality of types of display is a third effect display [for example, the display of the cut-in of the grandfather shown in FIG. 33(A2) or the display of the effect image shown in FIG. 33(A2b)],
The third effect display is an effect display different from the first effect display,

The display of the third effect display may be started before the first timing comes after the display of the period display is started [for example, FIG. 33(A1) to FIG. 33(A2) and As shown in FIG. 33(A2b), in the production by the chance up meter CMT, before the sabotani character SBH reaches the third check point CP3, the display of the grandfather's cut-in shown in FIG. 33(A2) or FIG. The effect image shown in A2b) may be displayed, etc.],

During the display of the third effect display, the period display is hidden [for example, as shown in FIG. 33(A1) to FIG. 33(A2) and FIG. 33(A2b), FIG. The opportunity up meter CMT is deleted when the cut-in display of the grandfather shown or the effect image shown in FIG. 33(A2b) is displayed],
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

Further, “the period display is a display including a first checkpoint display [for example, a display of the first checkpoint CP1 shown in FIG. 29(4)],
The first checkpoint display is a display showing the first position,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the first checkpoint display is a display that is displayed until the cursor display reaches the end position [for example, as shown in FIG. 29(2) to FIG. The checkpoint CP1 is displayed until the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the final point GP, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Further, "when the third effect display is displayed, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed than when the third effect display is not displayed,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a second effect display [for example, display of lever image 136Va shown in FIG. 29(18)],

The cursor display is moved to the end position through both the first position and the second position [for example, the position indicated by the third check point CP3 shown in FIG. 29(2)]. Has been done,

When the cursor display reaches the second position, the second timing [for example, the timing indicated by the third check point CP3 at which the display of the lever image 136Va shown in FIG. 29(18) is started] Is notified,

The second timing is a timing at which the display of the second effect display may be started in the reach effect display,

The period display is a display in which a second chance-up display [for example, a display of “UP” above the third check point CP3 shown in FIG. 29(19), etc.] may be displayed,

When the display of the second effect display is started at the second timing, a display position corresponding to the second position (hereinafter, "second display position [e.g., shown in FIG. 29 (19), The display position of "UP" above the third check point CP3]"), the second chance-up display is displayed,

When the second chance up display is displayed, the second chance up display is continuously displayed until the cursor display reaches at least the end position [for example, As shown in FIG. 29(25), the display of “UP” above the third check point CP3 is continuously displayed until the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the final point GP, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Further, “The first chance-up display is displayed only when the display of the first effect display is started [for example, as shown in FIG. 29(4) to FIG. When the advance notice by the appearance of BOY is started, “UP” is displayed above the first check point CP1, but as shown in FIGS. 30(4a) to 30(7a), the first check point CP1 is displayed. If the advance notice of the chance is not started even if the character SBH of Sabohani arrives at CP1, "UP" is not displayed above the first checkpoint CP1, etc.],

The second chance-up display is displayed only when the display of the second effect display is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 29(18) to (19), the lever image 136Va is displayed. Is started, “UP” is displayed above the third check point CP3, but as shown in FIG. 30 (17b) to FIG. 30 (20b), the character of the sabotani at the third check point CP3. If the display of the lever image 136Va is not started even when the SBH arrives, "UP" is not displayed above the third check point CP3, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "the period display is a display that may display a first non-chance up display [for example, a display of "x" indicating that the advance notice of the chance up has not been given, etc.],"

The period display is a display that may display a second non-chance up display (for example, a display of “×” indicating that the advance notice of the chance up has not been given, etc.),

When the display of the first effect display is not started at the first timing, the first non-chance up display is displayed at the first display position [for example, in FIG. 30 (7a″). As shown in the figure, when the chance up notice is not given at the first check point CP1, the display of "UP" is replaced by the display of "X" indicating that the chance up notice has not been given. Etc.],

When the display of the second effect display is not started at the second timing, the second non-chance up display is displayed at the second display position [for example, at the third check point CP3. When the notice of up is not given, the display of "UP" is replaced with the display of "x" indicating that the notice of up of chance is not given, etc.], .. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the period display is a display including a second checkpoint display [for example, a display of the third checkpoint CP3 shown in FIG. 29(4)],
The second checkpoint display is a display showing the second position,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the period display is a display including a display that suggests that the hit/miss determination result is derived when the cursor display reaches the end position [for example, as shown in FIG. 3 Checkpoint CP3 display, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "when the display of the third effect display is finished in the certain period after the third effect display is displayed and the period display is hidden, the period display is displayed again. [For example, as shown in FIG. 33(A2a) to FIG. 33(A3a), after the chance up meter CMT is erased by the display of the cut-in of the princess character, the cut-in of the princess character is displayed. When the display ends and the animation display of the duel scene is displayed, the chance up meter CMT is displayed again, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Further, “the period display is not displayed during the certain period after the period display is hidden [for example, as shown in FIGS. 33(A2) to (A5), After the chance up meter CMT is deleted by the display of the cut-in of the old character, the chance up meter CMT is not displayed in the symbol variation display, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
In addition, “the certain period is a period during execution of super reach,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 49 to 116, an example of effects applicable to the gaming table such as the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 described above will be described in detail. Here, as the technical idea, it is possible to apply the technical idea shown in FIGS. 49 to 116 to the technical idea shown in FIGS. 1 to 48 and 117 to 193, and vice versa. The technical ideas shown in FIGS. 1 to 48 and 117 to 193 can be applied to the technical ideas shown in FIGS. 49 to 116. At that time, components having the same reference numeral may be treated as the same component and may be replaced with each other.

The main controller power-on process executed by the CPU 304 of the main controller 300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49(a) is a flowchart of the main controller power-on process, FIG. 49(b) is a flowchart of the return activation process, and FIG. 49(c) is a flowchart of the initial activation process. As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the activation signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the activation signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302, which has received the activation signal, performs a reset start by a reset interrupt and executes a main control unit main process according to a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

First, in step S101, the stack pointer is initialized. In this stack pointer initial setting, the stack initial value is set (temporary setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304.

Succeedingly, in a step S102, it is determined whether or not the low voltage signal is turned on, that is, the voltage monitoring circuit 338 determines that the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value (main value). In the example, it is determined whether the voltage is 9 V or higher. When the voltage value of the power source is less than the predetermined value (step S102: No), the wait is performed until the voltage value of the power source becomes the predetermined value or more, and when it becomes the predetermined value or more (step S102: Yes), It proceeds to step S103.

In step S103, the internal register is initialized. In the initial setting of the internal register, the WDT 314 is activated, the RAM 308 is permitted to be accessed, a process of setting a numerical value that determines an execution cycle of a main control unit timer interrupt process described later to each register of the timer circuit 312, and the main control unit 300. After performing the initial setting of serial communication between the payout control unit 600 and the payout control unit 600, setting the maximum value of the hardware random number, and the like, the process proceeds to step S104.

In step S104, it is determined whether the RAM clear signal transmitted when the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board is operated by a clerk of the game store or the like is ON (indicating that there is an operation). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear is necessary, and when the RAM clear signal is ON (when the RAM clear is necessary) (step S104: Yes), the basic circuit 302 is initialized to the step S108. Then, the initial activation process described later is executed. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is off (when RAM clear is not necessary) (step S104: No), the process proceeds to step S105.

In step S105, the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and it is determined whether the power status information is information indicating suspend. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend (step S105: No), the process proceeds to step S108 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state, and the initial startup process described later is executed. On the other hand, when the power status information is information indicating suspend (step S105: Yes), the process proceeds to step S106.

In step S106, a checksum is calculated by adding all 1-byte data stored in a predetermined area (for example, all areas) of the RAM 308 to a 1-byte configuration register whose initial value is 0, and the calculated check It is determined whether or not the result of the sum is a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the result of the checksum is normal). Then, when the checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) (when the checksum result is normal) (step S106: Yes), the process proceeds to step S107 to restore the state before the power failure. Execute the startup process. On the other hand, when the result of the checksum is other than a specific value (for example, 0) (when the result of the checksum is abnormal) (step S106: No), the process proceeds to step S108 to initialize the pachinko machine 100. Then, the initial activation process described later is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 49(b), the return activation process will be described. When the recovery activation process is started, in step S201, initialization for recovery activation is performed. Specifically, the process of setting the information indicating "return start" in the power status information, the process of setting the magnetic detection abnormality flag to OFF, and the device error (the flag of the error due to the magnetic detection, the prize abnormality, etc.) The process of clearing, the process of clearing the previous device error status, the process of clearing the device error status for the security signal, etc. are performed.

Succeedingly, in a step S202, an address after the storage area initialized in the step S201 is set as an address for starting the RAM clear, and thereafter, the return activation processing is ended.

In addition, in the return activation process, for example, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read and reset (main setting) to the stack pointer. Further, when the power is cut off, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 is read and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. After that, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer or register, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power was cut off. A transmission information storage area is provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, and a power recovery command is set in this transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command that indicates that the power-off state has been restored, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in the sub-command transmission process in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, which will be described later. ..

Next, the initial startup processing will be described with reference to FIG. When the initial start-up process is started, in step S301, a soft random number is initialized. Specifically, the initial settings of the soft random numbers used in the lottery for special maps and general maps.

Succeedingly, in a step S302, an address after the storage area initialized in the step S301 is set as an address for starting the RAM clear, and then the initial starting process is ended.

In addition, in the initial start-up process, for example, the setting of interrupt prohibition, the setting of the stack initial value to the stack pointer (this setting), and the like are performed. Further, at this point, the normal recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initial activation process of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and like the power recovery command, in the command setting transmission process (step S405) in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300. , To the first sub-control unit 400.

As shown in FIG. 49A, after the return activation process or the initial activation process is executed, a RAM clear process is performed in step S109. In this RAM clear processing, the storage area of the RAM 308 after the RAM clear start address set as described above is cleared (initialized).

Succeedingly, in a step S110, sub-control related activation setting is performed. In this sub-control-related activation setting, the activation waiting counter of the first sub-control unit 400 is set, and in the present embodiment, a sub-command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400 three times. Therefore, the processing for setting the initial value of the sub control command continuous transmission counter stored in the RAM 308 is also performed.

In step S111, output port setting is performed. In this output port setting, symbol data, launch position designation signal, error status signal, prize ball signal, ordinary figure hit signal, ordinary electric accessory (2nd special figure starting port 232, electric chu) operating signal, ordinary figure operation Medium signal, easy-to-win state signal, special figure hit signal, special figure small hit signal (only for models with small hits), special figure changing middle signal, special figure changing time shortening status signal, special electric winning (variable winning Port 234, attacker) operating signal, condition device operating signal, role product continuous operation device operating signal, special winning opening solenoid signal, ordinary electric role product solenoid signal, pattern LED data, external terminal board signal etc. are set Set output ports. After finishing the process of step S111, the process proceeds to the main control unit main loop process. Here, the easy winning state may indicate a power support state.

Next, the main control unit main loop processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. It is a flowchart of a main control unit main loop process.

When the main control unit 300 finishes executing the above-described main control power-on process, next, in step S401 of the main control unit main loop process for starting execution of this main control unit main loop process, interruption prohibition is performed. After setting, in step S402, the counter value of the WDT 314 is cleared, and the time measurement by the WDT 314 is restarted. In step S403, basic random number initial value update processing is performed (step S403). In the basic random number initial value updating process, a process of updating the initial value generating random number counter for generating the initial value of the special figure determining random number counter and the general figure determining random number counter is performed. For updating the random number counter for initial value generation, for example, assuming that the range of numerical values that can be taken as the basic random number value is 0 to 20, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. To the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is 21, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area.

After setting interrupt permission in step S404, subcommand transmission processing is performed in step S405). In this sub-command transmission process, it is confirmed whether or not there is a command to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and if there is a command to be transmitted, the process of transmitting the command is performed. In step S406, after performing the other determination random number update process, the process proceeds to step S407. In the other determination random number update processing, processing such as updating of the special figure variation time determination random number and the general figure variation time determination random number is performed.

In step S407, it is determined whether the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is equal to or higher than a predetermined value (for example, 9V), and if the voltage value is equal to or higher than the predetermined value (step S407). : Yes), the process returns to step S401 to continue the main control unit main loop processing, and when the value is less than the predetermined value (step S407: No), the process proceeds to step S408. In step S408, the power interruption process is performed. In this power interruption process, the power supply status information is set to "suspend" after setting the interrupt prohibition. Also, a checksum is calculated by adding all 1-byte data stored in a predetermined area (for example, all areas) of the RAM 308 to a register having a 1-byte configuration having an initial value of 0, and a predetermined storage of the RAM 308 is calculated. Store in the area. After that, after setting the access to the RAM 308 is prohibited, the HALT state is set.

Next, with reference to FIG. 51, the main controller timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main controller 300 will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart of the main controller timer interrupt process.

The main control unit 300 includes a timer circuit 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once in this embodiment, about once every 2 ms), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process is started at a predetermined cycle. In step S501, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt process, the value of each register of the CPU 304 is temporarily saved in the stack area.

In steps S502 and S503, basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing are performed. In the basic random number initial value updating process and the basic random number updating process, the value of the random number counter for initial value generation performed in step S403 is updated, and then the random number counter for determining special figures to be used in the main control unit 300 is used. , Update the random number counter for determining the special figure variation time and the random number counter for determining the universal figure variation period. For example, if the range of numerical values that can be taken as a certain random value is 0 to 100, the value is acquired from the random number counter storage area provided in the RAM 308 for generating the random value, and 1 is added to the acquired value before the original Stored in the random number counter storage area of. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. In addition, as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, when it is determined that the random number counter makes one round, the value of the random number counter for initial value generation corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value obtained from a random number counter that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and the result obtained by adding 1 to the obtained value is a previously set initial value stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. When the value is equal to (for example, 7), the value is obtained as an initial value from the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to the random number counter, set in the random number counter, and the random number counter makes one round next time. In order to determine that, the initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area. In the present embodiment, a counter for obtaining the random number value of Toku-zu 1 and a counter for obtaining the random number value of Toku-zu 2 may be separately provided.

In step S504, it is determined whether or not the interrupt function is being limited (whether or not the first sub-control unit 400 is activated), and if the interrupt function is being limited (the first sub-control unit 400 is not activated). If (step S504: Yes), the process proceeds to step S519. If the interrupt function is not being limited (when the first sub control unit 400 is activated) (step S504: No), the process proceeds to step S505. move on. Here, that the interrupt function is being limited means that the activation waiting counter of the first sub-control unit 400 set in step S110 of the power-on process is not 0, that is, in step S504, the first When it is determined that the activation waiting counter of the sub control unit 400 is 0, it is determined that the first sub control unit 400 has been activated, and the process proceeds to step S505. When the bidirectional communication with the first sub-control unit 400 is possible, a command for confirming whether the first sub-control unit 400 is activated is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. If the confirmation command is returned from 400, it may be determined that the first sub-control unit 400 has started. In step S505, it is determined whether or not a specific error (in this embodiment, a magnetic detection error) is occurring. If a specific error is occurring (step S505: Yes), the process proceeds to step S520. If the specific error is not occurring (step S505: No), the process proceeds to step S506.

In step S506, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the universal symbol display symbol update timer for timing the time for varying/stopping the symbol on the universal symbol display device 210, the time for varying/stopping the symbol on the first special symbol display device 212. Special symbol 1 display symbol update timer for, the special symbol 2 display symbol update timer, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening period for measuring the time to change/stop display the symbol on the second special symbol display device 214 , And updates various timers including a timer for measuring a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like.

In step S507, processing such as updating the input port status is performed. In this input port status update processing, etc., the special figure starting port (the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232), the universal figure starting port 228, the out port 240 are input through the input port of the I/O 310. The presence/absence of a signal relating to a switch such as a variable winning port (attacker) 234 and a winning port (general winning port 226) is monitored and stored in a signal state storage area provided in the RAM 308.

Explaining the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor as an example, information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interrupt process (about 4 ms before) two times before is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. Is read from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and provided, and this information is stored in the RAM 308 in the two-preceding detection signal storage area partitioned and provided for each ball detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) is performed. ), the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor is read from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area. Remember. Further, the detection signals of the respective sphere detection sensors detected this time are stored in the above-mentioned current detection signal storage area. In addition, when it is determined that the winning in the starting opening and the winning opening is abnormal, the information stored in the signal state storage area is erased because the winning is invalid.

Further, in step S508, a winning opening winning process is performed. In this winning a prize winning process, the above-mentioned two-preceding detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the information of the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the current detection signal recording area is compared, It is determined whether or not the information on the presence/absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information.

While one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor, this main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly activated at a very short interval of about 2 ms is activated several times. Therefore, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in the above-described step S507, the detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the two-preceding detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts passing through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before two times, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, if the detection signal is continuously detected for a predetermined time (for example, 100 μs) after the signal is input, it is determined that a prize has been won. If the detection signal is stored twice consecutively after the absence of the detection signal, it may be determined that a prize has been won.

The ROM 306 of the main controller 300 stores winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous-previous detection signal, previous detection signal, and current detection signal). In this step S507, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, there is no previous detection signal, there is a previous detection signal, there is a present detection signal). (The information indicating that), the general winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, the first special figure starting port 230, and the second special figure starting port 232, or the universal figure starting port 228. It is determined that there has been a passage. That is, it is determined that the winning openings 226, 234 and the starting openings 230, 232, 228 have been won.

For example, when the information on the presence/absence of detection signals for the past three times in the general winning opening sensor that detects a ball entering the general winning opening 226 matches the above-described winning determination pattern information, there is a winning in the general winning opening 226. However, if the information about the presence or absence of the detection signal for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winning is performed. The process is branched to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with the winning in the mouth 226.

The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal two times before, no detection signal last time, and no detection signal this time). After it is determined that there has been a single winning, it is not determined that there is a winning until the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the winning determination clear pattern information, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

Further, in the winning a prize winning process of step S508, a winning a prize counter updating process is also performed. In this winning hole counter updating process, when there is a winning in the winning hole 226, the variable winning hole 234, the special figure 1 starting hole 230, and the special figure 2 starting hole 232, each winning hole in the RAM 308 or each starting hole. The value of the prize ball number storage area provided for each is read, and 1 is added to set the original prize ball number storage area.

In addition, in the winning opening winning process of step S508, a winning acceptance process is also performed. In the prize receiving process, whether or not the first special figure starting opening 230, the second special drawing starting opening 232, the universal figure starting opening 228, and the variable winning opening 234 are matched with the winning determination pattern information is determined. Judgment is made using the judgment result. If there is a winning in the first special figure starting port 230 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value from the winning counter value storage register of the counter circuit 318 is changed to the special figure 1 random number value. And a value from the random number counter for generating the special figure 1 random number value as the special figure 1 random number value and stored in the corresponding random number value storage area.

In addition, when there is a winning in the second special figure starting port 232 and the corresponding holding number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value from the winning counter value storage register of the counter circuit 318 is selected as the special figure 2 win. The value is acquired as a random number value and the value is acquired from the random number counter for generating the special figure 2 random value as the special figure 2 random value and stored in the corresponding random value storage area. If there is a prize in the universal figure starting port 228 and if the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, a value is acquired from the random number counter for generating the universal figure winning random number value as the universal figure winning random number value. Store in the corresponding random value storage area. When the variable winning port 234 is won, information indicating that a ball has entered the variable winning port 234 is stored in the winning storage area for the variable winning port 234. In addition, when the random number of the special figure is acquired, the special figure pre-reading process (whether the winning or failing judgment, the symbol, and the pre-reading lottery of the variable time) are also performed. The special figure prefetching process will be described later in detail.

In step S509, winning-related error check processing is performed. In the prize-related error check process, a process for confirming and monitoring a prize-related abnormality and setting an abnormality according to the result of the process is performed. Some switches may not detect an abnormality. In step S510, an out switch input update process is performed. In this out switch input update process, the number of gaming balls that have passed through the sensor provided in the out port 240 is detected and updated. The input result of this out switch is mainly used for presentation.

In step S511, serial command management processing is performed. In the serial command management process, a process of receiving a command from the payout control unit 600, a process of transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600, and the like are performed. The command transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the payout control unit 600 is a communication confirmation command (communication state with the payout control unit 600, which is transmitted after the activation waiting time of the first sub control unit 400 after the power is turned on. Confirmation, a command for notifying the activation method (initial activation, return activation) of the main control unit 300) and a prize ball number command for instructing the payout of the designated prize balls.

In addition, as the command that the main control unit 300 receives from the payout control unit 600, a communication confirmation return command (a response command indicating that the command from the main control unit 300 has been received by the payout control unit 600) or a test firing test signal is used. Command (award ball signal output request), a command including information on the occurrence status of a payout system error (including no error), and a prize ball payout operation status command (whether a prizeball payout is in operation/not in operation). There is a command to display or a display to indicate that the payout is in progress (LED is turned on/off) to the first sub-control unit 400).

Next, in step S512, a special figure state update process for special figures 1 and 2 is performed. The special figure state update process executes one of the following eight processes according to the process state of the special figure. The special figure status update processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 52.

In step S513, general-university-state update processing is performed. The universal figure state updating process is one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the state of the universal figure. For example, in the public figure state updating process in the middle of the general figure fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned general figure display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Lighting off control is performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs the variable display of the universal figure (general figure variation game).

Further, in the public figure state update processing at the timing when the public figure fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the public figure display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), when the hit flag is on, the hit symbol is displayed. The 7-segment LED that constitutes the normal symbol display device 210 is controlled so that the mode is turned on and off, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to be the display mode of the off symbol. ON/OFF control of 7-segment LED is performed.

Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the general-picture state update process. Here, the above-mentioned lighting/extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting indicating that the normal stop display is being performed is performed in the setting area. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs the fixed display of one of the winning symbol and the deviating symbol. After that, during a predetermined stop display period (for example, for 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the universal figure stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display. By this setting, the symbol that is confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is informed of the result of the universal figure variation game.

Further, if the result of the universal figure fluctuation game is a hit, the universal figure hit flag is turned on as described later. When the universal figure hit flag is on, the universal figure state update processing at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the universal figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0) is stored in the RAM 308. While the normal figure operation is set in the setting area, the blade member 2321 is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). In addition to outputting the signal held in, the blade opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308 is set with information indicating the opening period.

In addition, in the normal state updating process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the blade member is closed for a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 msec). A signal for holding the blade member 2321 in the closed state is output to the solenoid 332 for opening/closing the 2232, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

Further, in the universal figure state updating process which starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the regular area inactive state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Furthermore, if the result of the universal figure fluctuation game is out, the universal figure out flag is turned on as described later. If the unillustrated flag is on, even in the unillustrated state updating process at the timing when the above-described predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the unusual figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the normal figure non-operation is set. In the universal figure state updating process when the ordinary figure is not in operation, the process proceeds to the next step S514 without doing anything.

Further, in step S513, a universal figure related lottery process is also performed. In this public figure-related lottery process, opening/closing control of the general figure fluctuation game and the second special figure starting port 232 is not performed (the state of the general figure is not operating), and the pending general figure fluctuation game When the number is 1 or more, it is determined whether the result of the universal figure variation game is won or unselected by a random number lottery based on the universal figure winning random number value stored in the above random number storage area. The winning judgment is made, and when the winning is determined, the hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In the case of no win, the hit flag is set to off. Also, regardless of the result of the hit judgment, the value of the random number counter for generating the universal figure timer random number value described above is acquired as the universal figure timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are obtained based on the acquired universal figure timer random number value. One of the times is selected to change the display of the public figure on the public figure display device 210, and this variable display time is stored in the general figure change time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as the general figure change display time. It should be noted that the number of pending universal figure fluctuation games is stored in the universal figure holding number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending universal figure fluctuation games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in this general-use figure hold number storage area. Moreover, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

In step S514, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S507 are read to monitor the presence or absence of a predetermined error, and when the predetermined error is detected, the first sub-control unit 400 is notified. Device information indicating the presence or absence of an error is set in the transmission information to be transmitted. Further, by driving various solenoids 332, controlling the opening and closing of the second special figure starting port 232 and the variable winning port 234, the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display via the display circuit 324, 326, 330. The display data to be output to the device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, various status display units 328, etc. is set to the output port of the I/O 310.

In step S515, external output signal management processing is performed. In this external output signal management processing, processing for preparing to transmit an external terminal board signal is performed. In step S516, subcommand management processing is performed. In this sub-command management process, preparations are made for transmitting various commands to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information (subcommand) transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of, for example, 16 bits, and the bit 15 is strobe information (when ON, indicates that data is set), Bits 11 to 14 are command types (in this embodiment, a basic command, a symbol variation start command, a symbol variation stop command, a winning effect start command, an end effect start command, a big hit start command, a big hit round number designation command, a power recovery command, Bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type) such as a RAM clear command that can specify the type of command.

Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start command, the command data includes information indicating the value of the 15R jackpot flag, the value of the special symbol probability variation flag, the timer number selected in the special symbol related lottery process, etc. In the case of the fluctuation stop command, the value of the 15R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, etc. are included, and in the case of the winning effect command and the end effect start command, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag is included. In the case of the big hit round number designation command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the big hit round number, and the like are included. If the command type indicates a basic command, the command data includes device information, whether or not there is a winning at the first special figure starting port 230, whether or not there is a winning at the second special figure starting port 232, and whether or not there is a winning at the variable winning port 234. Including presence or absence. In the present embodiment, when there is a winning in the variable winning a prize mouth 234, a special winning a prize winning command is set.

In the rotation start setting transmission process described above, the value of the 15R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the special figure 1 related lottery processing, and the special figure 2 related lottery processing stored in the RAM 308 in the command data are selected. It sets the information indicating the timer number, the number of the first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game that is held, and the like. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating the value of the 15R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data. In the above-mentioned winning effect setting transmission processing, the command data stored in the RAM 308, output to the decorative pattern display device 208, the game board lamp 442, the game underframe lamp 452, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period. The control information, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the information indicating the number of the first special figure variation games or the second special figure variation games that are held, etc. are set.

In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, the command data stored in the RAM 308 is output to the decorative symbol display device 208, the game board lamp 442, the game underframe lamp 452, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period. The effect control information to be performed, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the information indicating the number of the first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game that are held, etc. are set. In the above-described special winning opening opening setting transmission processing, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the pending first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game Set information indicating the number. In the above-described special winning opening closing setting transmission process, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the pending first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game Set information indicating the number. Further, in this step S516, general command special figure reservation increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase processing, special figure identification information (information indicating special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308 for command data, advance notice information (advance notice information, false) (Advance notice information or no advance notice information) is set.

In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information makes it possible to determine the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. The effect control content can be determined based on the information of the command data.

In step S517, a display display setting process is performed. In this indicator display setting process, the display (LED lighting pattern) such as "holding ball number, symbol combination", state (in electric support or non-electric support), right-handed state, etc. Performs processing such as setting the output data. In step S518, output management processing is performed. In this output management process, a process of outputting the control signal set in each process to the solenoid or the LED, a process of transmitting the prepared command to the first sub-control unit 400 or the payout control unit 600, and the like are performed.

In step S519, wait processing for waiting for sub-control activation is performed. In this sub-control activation wait wait process, the activation wait counter of the sub-control is decremented by 1 and the activation wait counter becomes 0 in order to wait until the first sub-control unit 400 is activated and becomes ready for communication. If so, prepare to send a predetermined command. As the predetermined command, any one or more of a power-on command and a command related to the payout control unit 600 (for example, a command indicating that all errors are released, a lower plate full tank error occurrence condition) A command indicating that there is an error, an error indicating that a payout number insufficient error has occurred, a main control communication error command (command indicating that communication with the payout control unit 600 is in an abnormal state), a CR unit unconnection error Is a generation state command, a firing position command (a command for informing the firing position according to the state), and the like.

In step S520, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S501 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, etc., and then the processing returns to the main control unit main loop processing. ..

Next, the special figure state updating process (step S512) in the main controller timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52 is a flowchart of the special figure state update processing.

In step S601, the special figure processing state address is acquired/saved, and in the next step S602, processing corresponding to the value indicated by the special figure processing state stored in the RAM 308 is executed. Specifically, here, based on the value indicated by the special figure processing state, the special figure-related lottery process shown in FIG. 53A, the symbol variation process shown in FIG. 54, and the special diagram shown in FIG. 55, which will be described later. Display confirmation weight processing, hit start weight processing shown in FIG. 56(a), special electric power combination operation processing shown in FIG. 57, special electric power remaining ball detection processing shown in FIG. 60, special electric power operation end processing shown in FIG. 61, and FIG. Either one of the hit end display weight processing shown is executed.

In step S603, the prize winning status is set to ON. In step S604, the state change of the special figure processing state is determined, and in the next step S605, it is determined whether or not there is a state change of the special figure processing state (change in the value indicated by the special figure processing state), and the special figure processing is performed. If there is no state change of the state (when the value indicated by the special figure processing state has not changed) (step S605: No), the special figure state update processing is terminated and there is a state change of the special figure processing state. If (the value indicated by the special figure processing state has changed) (step S605: Yes), the process proceeds to step S606.

In step S606, it is determined whether or not the special figure processing state is set to the "variation waiting state". If it is (step S606: Yes), the process proceeds to step S608, and if it is not (step S606). : No), and proceeds to step S607. In step S607, it is determined whether or not the special drawing processing state is set to the "hit start display wait state". If the result is true (step S607: Yes), the process proceeds to step S608, and if not, ( Step S607: No), and the special figure state update process is terminated.

In step S608, a subcommand transmission request is set (in the present embodiment, after setting a game state command transmission request including a special figure and a general figure game state, a launch position including information on whether the player is right-handed or not. After setting the command transmission request), the special figure status update processing is terminated. Note that the order of subcommand transmission requests is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission requests may be reversed, or a plurality of command transmission requests may be collectively performed in one process.

Next, the special figure state update processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53A is a flowchart of the special figure related lottery process executed in the special figure state updating process.

This special figure related lottery process is a process that is called and executed when the information set in the special figure process state indicates the "variation waiting state" in step S602 of the special figure state update process.

In step S701 of the special figure related lottery process, the special figure 2 reserved sphere number stored in the RAM 308 is acquired, and in the next step S702, it is determined whether or not the acquired special figure 2 reserved sphere number is 0, In the case of (when there is no suspension of special figure 2 variable game) (step S702: Yes), the process proceeds to step S703, and when it is other than 0 (when there is suspension of special figure 2 variable game) (step S702: No), the process proceeds to step S705 to execute the process related to Toku-zu 2.

In step S703, the special figure 1 reserved sphere number stored in the RAM 308 is acquired, and in the next step S704, it is determined whether or not the acquired special figure 1 reserved sphere number is 0. If there is no suspension of the variation game (step S704: Yes), the special figure related lottery processing is terminated, and if it is other than 0 (if there is a suspension of the variation game of the special figure 1) (step S704: No). , To proceed to step S705 in order to execute the processing relating to Toku-zu 1.

In step S705, when the process related to Toku-zu 2 is executed, the value of the special-drawing 2 reserved sphere number stored in the RAM 308 is decremented by 1. The value of the stored special figure 1 number of reserved balls is subtracted by one. In step S706, special figure random number transfer processing is executed. In this special figure random number transfer process, when the process related to special figure 2 is executed, the random number values stored in the random number storage areas corresponding to the pending figures 2 to 4 of special figure 2 are changed from the pending figures 1 to 1 of special figure 2. When shifting to the random number storage area corresponding to No. 3 and clearing the random number storage area corresponding to hold 4 of special figure 2 and executing the process related to special figure 1, it corresponds to hold 2 to 4 of special figure 1. The random number values stored in the random number storage area are shifted to the random number storage areas corresponding to the reservations 1 to 3 in the special figure 1, and the random number storage area corresponding to the reservation 4 in the special figure 1 is cleared. As described above, the gaming table (pachinko machine) in this embodiment is a special figure 2 priority variation machine. Further, each of the special maps 2 and 1 can store up to four reservations.

In step S707, a special drawing per lottery process is performed. As will be described later in detail, in the special drawing-based lottery process, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variable game (or the special figure 1 variable game) is hit. In step S708, a display symbol lottery process is performed. In this display symbol lottery process, the special symbol 2 symbol determination table (or the special symbol 1 symbol determination table) is referred to, and the second special symbol based on the random number value and the result of the special symbol lottery process in step S707. The special figure display symbol data to be stopped and displayed on the display device 214 (or the first special figure display device 212) is selected by lottery.
The pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment can perform various customizations.

FIG. 63 is a diagram showing the contents of customization that can be performed by the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the symbol variation display is not started even after a fixed time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after the symbol variation display is stopped, the display shifts to the demonstration mode and the decorative symbol display device 208 The demo screen will appear. It should be noted that the combination of the stop symbols of the decorative symbols is continuously displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 until the transition to the demonstration mode after the symbol variable display of the special symbols is stopped, and the operation means such as the chance button 136 is operated. When operated, a special animation may be displayed. On the demo screen, a dedicated animation is displayed, or a combination of stop symbols of decorative patterns (when the decorative pattern is composed of images of characters and the like and character images (including numbers), images of characters and the like are displayed on the demo screen. Is displayed and the character image may not be displayed, or both the character image and the character image may be displayed), or the movie including the model title (note that the degree of expectation is High-quality notices and production introduction movies that introduce high-reachability may be included), and there are periods during which the menu icon, volume adjustment icon, and brightness adjustment icon are displayed. .. The demonstration mode may include a state in which a combination of stop display of decorative symbols is displayed.

When the chance button 136 is operated in the state where the menu icon, the volume adjustment icon, and the brightness adjustment icon are displayed, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an option menu. Further, by operating the left and right keys of the operation key unit 137, a volume adjustment window is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the volume of the speaker 120 can be increased or decreased. Further, by operating the up and down keys of the operation key unit 137, a brightness adjustment window is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208, and the light amount of the LED such as the game board lamp 442 and/or the game underframe lamp 452 is increased or decreased. Can be made. Here, the game board lamp 442 includes the light guide plate IL shown in FIG. 14 and the like, but need not include it. If the up and down keys of the operation key unit 137 are operated while the volume adjustment window is displayed, the brightness adjustment window is displayed, and conversely, the operation key unit 137 is displayed when the brightness adjustment window is displayed. By operating the left and right keys of, the volume adjustment window is displayed.

As will be described later in detail, an icon for "returning to the demo screen" is prepared in the option menu, and if the chance button 136 is operated with the cursor placed on this icon, the icon returns to the demo screen. be able to. Further, when the variable display of special symbols is started, the option menu is automatically ended, and the variable display of decorative symbols is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Furthermore, if there is no operation for a certain period (for example, 1 minute) with the option menu displayed, the screen automatically returns to the demo screen.

When the chance button 136 is pressed after operating the left and right keys of the operation key unit 137, the volume is determined, the demo screen is returned from the volume adjustment window, and the chance button 136 is pressed after operating the up and down keys of the operation key unit 137. When the button is pressed, the amount of light is determined, and the demo screen is returned from the brightness adjustment window. Further, even if the chance button 136 is not pressed, the demo screen is automatically returned after a lapse of a certain period (for example, 10 seconds) after operating the left and right keys or the up and down keys. Further, when the variable display of special symbols is started, the volume adjustment window and the brightness adjustment window are also automatically disappeared here, and the variable display of decorative symbols is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.
FIG. 63B is a diagram showing the structure of the option menu.

In the option menu, it is possible to roughly perform "effect customization", "character selection", "holding frame selection", "holding display selection", and "background display selection".

The “auto button mode” in the “production customization” may be the same response production as when operating the operation means such as the chance button 136 without operating the operation means such as the chance button 136. It is a mode. Note that ON/OFF described in “Option” in FIG. 63B means setting/non-setting and valid/invalid. “Long-press automatic continuous hit” means that the operation means such as the chance button 136 is simply long-pressed, and high-speed pressing is repeated during the long-press operation (continuous hits are performed). ) It is a function to perform the same response effect as the time, and the speed of repeated hits can be selected. The “group notice” is a type of normal notice (preliminary notice of the fluctuation), and in this option menu, the player can select the reliability (expectation) of the big notice of the group notice. For example, there is a 100% confidence that the fluctuation that the group notice is displayed may be a big hit! ? However, if you want to increase the frequency that the group notice appears as a notice of the fluctuation, set the reliability to 50%, and set the frequency that the group notice appears as a notice of the fluctuation to 50% than when you set it. Although it is also low, if you want to be displayed in the fluctuation as a big hit rich (big hit confirmed) reliability 100%! ? Set to. The "winning sound notice" is a type of pre-reading notice when the number of holdings increases due to winning at the special map starting port. The winning sound notice may be a notice of the change. The back button means that the operation valid period of the operating means such as the chance button 136 has started and/or does not inform that the operation valid period of the operating means is in progress. When "Navi" is turned on (set), for example, the chance button lamp 138 lights up during the operation effective period of the operating means, or a character display such as "it may be good to operate the operating means" is displayed. Will be done. "No pre-reading notice" is not performed for all pre-reading notices other than the pre-reading notice by the display mode of the hold icon (for example, pre-reading notice by the movable means (effect movable body) or the pre-read notice display other than the hold icon by the display means) ( (Corresponding to "ON"). The “premier up” is a setting for increasing the appearance frequency of a big hit rich or big hit confirmed effect (corresponding to “ON”). “No change to hold” is a setting that does not give advance notice of advance due to the display mode of the hold icon (corresponding to “ON”). The "one-shot notification" is a specific notice about a big hit concentration or a big hit confirmation (for example, a production operation by a production movable body, a big hit rich (big hit confirmation) sound by a sound output means, a frame or a game board. Some or all of the decorative LED lights will be used to give notice.)

In addition, in the present specification, "big hit confirmation" means a symbol variation in which a big jackpot confirmation notice is displayed or a symbol variation of a lookahead target reservation when the relevant notice of big jackpot confirmation and/or prefetch notice notice is displayed. When the pre-reading notice for confirming the big hit is displayed, it indicates that the fluctuation or the hold of the pre-reading target is always the big hit (the same applies to the following description).

Further, in the present specification, "big hit concentration" means a state where the expectation for a big hit is high, and even if the notice of the big hit concentration and/or the notice of look-ahead notice is displayed, the notice of the big hit concentration is displayed. It is shown that even if a big hit rich pre-reading notice is displayed toward the design change or the design change of the pre-reading object held, it may be lost (same in the following description). Further, the jackpot concentration may indicate that the jackpot is confirmed (the same applies in the following description).

Furthermore, the description "hot" in the present specification is also a state where the expectation for a big hit is high, but even if the notice of hot and/or the notice of look-ahead notice is displayed, a design with a notice of hot is displayed. It indicates that even if a hot-reading advance notice is displayed for the fluctuation or the symbol fluctuation of the pre-reading target suspension (this also applies to the following description). In addition, "hot" may indicate that the expectation of the big hit is lower than that of the big hit, and "intense heat" may indicate that the big hit is concentrated or the big hit is confirmed (explained below. The same in.)

Further, the "Daitomo" described in FIG. 63(b) is a membership service in which membership registration is performed and access is made to the Web server through the Internet line, and the level (lv) can be obtained by accumulating experience values. Is a service that allows you to get various benefits according to your level. When the member service of "Daitomo" is executed, the pachinko machine 100 is set to the user mode. Some pachinko machines 100 have specifications that do not support the "Daitomo" member service. For models with specifications compatible with the "Ditemo" member service, if the user mode is set and the level of the Daitomo reaches the 15th level, the setting of the back button navigation is released as a kind of production customization. Further, in FIG. 63(b), the item described as "Daitomo setting" is opened only by membership registration and setting to the user mode. Therefore, even if the level is 0 at the time of joining Daitomo, the holding frame B can be used only by setting the user mode and selecting the holding frame. Here, the holding frame corresponds to a combination of the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 shown in FIG. The “initial setting” means that the item is automatically selected when the user mode is not set. In addition, "Daitomo" can have an experience of membership before being officially registered as a member, and as a trial play, an experienced character can use the grandfather character in character selection.

Further, one of the above benefits of Daitomo is an item that cannot be selected unless the level of Daitomo is raised. That is, among the "character selection", "holding frame selection", "holding display selection", and "background display selection", the item for which the Daitomo level (lv) is displayed in the "opening condition" is the displayed level. It is an item that can be selected only after reaching (lv).

FIG. 64 is a transition diagram of the option menu screen when the member service is not used.

By operating the up key or down key of the operation key unit 137, the cursor moves up and down on the option menu screen displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. "Direction customization", "Character selection", "Holding frame selection", "Holding display selection", "Background display selection", "Initialization", "Return to demo screen" items are connected by an arrow Between the two, the cursor is moved by operating the up key or the down key of the operation key unit 137, and when the chance button 136 is pressed, a screen corresponding to the item displayed by the cursor is displayed. That is, if the chance button 136 is pressed while the cursor is placed on the item “production customization”, the decorative pattern display device 208 switches from the option menu screen to the production customization screen. If the cursor is moved to the item "return to demo screen" and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative pattern display device 208 switches from the option menu screen to the demo screen.

On the other hand, the "return" icon is displayed on each of the "production customization screen", "character selection screen", "holding frame selection screen", "holding display selection screen", "background display selection screen", and "initialization confirmation screen". Is displayed, and by moving the cursor to the "return" icon and pressing the chance button 136, it is possible to return to the option menu screen. Alternatively, it is possible to return to the option menu screen by pressing the cancel key of the operation key unit 137 without moving the cursor to the "return" icon.

Although not shown in this transition diagram, if there is a prize at the special figure starting ports 212 and 214 and the variable display of the special figure is started, even if the option menu screen is displayed, the "production customization screen" is displayed. , "Character selection screen", "Holding frame selection screen", "Holding display selection screen", "Background display selection screen", "Initialization confirmation screen", it also shifts to the screen of variable display of decorative symbols.

Subsequently, the matters described with reference to FIGS. 63 and 64 will be specifically described using display examples on the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 65 is a diagram showing an example of calling the option menu screen, the volume adjustment window, and the brightness adjustment window from the demo screen. The example described here is an example of a pachinko machine 100 having specifications that do not support the "DAITOMO" member service, and the open condition of FIG. 63(b) is ignored, and any item is selected from the beginning. It is possible. In the following embodiments, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an icon showing the appearance of the cross key (up key, down key, left key, right key) of the operation key unit or an icon showing the appearance of the chance button. In this case, a colorless and non-patterned icon indicates an inoperable operating means, and an icon displayed in another mode (colored and/or patterned) indicates an operable operating means.

On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 65(1), the hold frame UI is displayed on the background display of the sea, and the navigation character YM is also displayed. In addition, the combination of the decorative patterns (“decoration 4”-“decoration 1”-“decoration 7”) is displayed on both the first decorative pattern (third pattern) and the second decorative pattern (fifth pattern). The special variable symbol display is stopped. Furthermore, in the second hold number display displayed in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold number of special figure 1 and the hold number of special figure 2 are both zero. In other words, there is no hold, and the symbol variation display is not started after the stop symbol of the special symbol is confirmed and displayed. In this state, when a fixed time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed, the display of the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI shown in FIG. 65(1) is started. Even before the elapse of a certain period of time, the final display period of the special symbol stop symbol is ended, and the next symbol variable display is not started (for example, the special symbol stop symbol is fixed in the state where there is no hold. Immediately after the display period elapses, these icons MI, VI, BI may be displayed by operating the operation means (for example, the chance button 136 or the cross key of the operation unit). In addition to the condition that a certain fixed period (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed since the fixed display period of the stop symbol of the special figure has ended, these icons MI, VI, BI may be displayed. Good. Alternatively, even if the display of these icons MI, VI, BI is started, even if the chance button 136 and the cross key of the operation key unit 137 are operated for a certain period (for example, 3 seconds), the option menu screen and the volume adjustment are performed. The window or the brightness adjustment window may not be displayed.

Further, the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI may include a display (character display or image display) of the customized content. For example, in the case of the menu icon MI, character display or icon display for production customization, in the case of the volume adjustment icon VI, the gauge display showing the volume level, and in the brightness adjustment icon BI, the gauge display showing the light level. May be included. Further, the menu icon MI may include a large item display (for example, "character selection") shown in FIG. 63(b), or may not be included as shown in FIG. 65(1). Good.

In FIG. 65(2), the lower key 137d of the operation key unit is operated. The same applies even if the upper key 137u is operated. Although the cross key is lit in white in a non-operated state, the pressed key changes to red lighting, but the cross key may not be provided with a decorative lamp.

By operating the down key 137d, the brightness adjustment window BW is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 65(3). The brightness adjustment window BW is a display larger than the brightness adjustment icon BI, and in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 65(3), the menu icon MI disappears and the volume adjustment icon VI shifts to the position of the menu icon MI. The brightness adjustment window BW having a size about four times as large as the brightness adjustment icon BI is displayed. In this example, the light amount of the LED for the game board lamp 442 and/or the game underframe lamp 452 can be adjusted in five stages, and the initial value is the brightest five levels.

In FIG. 65(4), the down key 137d is operated again, and the brightness adjustment window BW shown in FIG.

In FIG. 65(6), the upper key 137u of the operation key unit 137 is operated, and the brightness adjustment window BW shown in FIG. 65(7) has moved up one level and returned to the 5th level. Even if the up key 137u is operated in the 5-level state, the light amount does not increase any more. Even if the down key 137d is operated in the 1-level state, the light amount does not decrease further. Further, if no operation is performed for a fixed period (for example, 10 seconds), the screen returns to the demo screen in which the three icons MI, VI, BI are displayed, but if the up key 137d or the down key 137u is operated, the fixed period The start count can be updated. That is, the period until returning to the demo screen can be extended. It should be noted that 0 level below 1 level may be settable. At this 0 level, the LED will remain off.

In FIG. 65(8), the right key 137r of the operation key unit 137 is operated. The same applies even when the left key 137l is operated.

By operating the right key, the volume control window VW is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 65(9). The volume adjustment window VW is displayed larger than the volume adjustment icon VI, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 65(9), the volume adjustment window VW is on the menu icon MI side and is about four times the volume adjustment icon VI. Is enlarged and displayed, the menu icon MI disappears, and the brightness adjustment icon BI is displayed. In this example, the volume from the speaker 120 can be adjusted in five stages, and the initial value is three levels of the intermediate volume.

In FIG. 65(10), the right key of the operation key unit 137 is operated again, and the volume adjustment window VW shown in (11) of FIG. Even if the right key is operated in the 5 loudest level, the volume does not increase further. In addition, even if the left key is operated in the 1-level state, the volume does not decrease further. If no operation is performed for a certain period (for example, 10 seconds), the screen returns to the demo screen on which the three icons MI, VI, BI are displayed, but if the left key or the right key is operated, the screen returns to the demo screen. The period can be extended. It should be noted that 0 level below 1 level may be settable. At the 0 level, the speaker 120 keeps muted.

Since a certain period (for example, 10 seconds) has passed since the last operation, the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 65(13) displays a demo screen on which three icons MI, VI, BI are displayed. I'm back.

In FIG. 65(14), the chance button 136 is operated and the chance button 136 is operated, so that the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 65(15) displays the option menu screen. Note that the chance button 136 emits red light when the built-in chance button lamp 138 is pressed, but it may be lit in red before it is pressed. In this option menu screen, all of the background display, the holding frame UI, the navigation character YM, the first decorative design (third design), and the second decorative design (fifth design) disappear, and under the character display of "menu". , 7 kinds of icons such as a performance customization icon, a character selection icon, a holding frame selection icon, a holding display selection icon, a background display selection icon, an initialization icon, and a return icon for returning to the demo screen in order from the top in a vertical line. It is displayed. A cursor icon cs which can be moved up and down by the up and down keys of the operation key unit 137 is displayed on the left side of any one of these seven types of icons. In FIG. 65(14), the cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the top production customization icon, and the other production icons are displayed in white, whereas the production customization icon is lit in red. Further, on the option menu screen, the pattern of the operation means that can be used for the selection operation and the determination operation is displayed at the lower right. That is, in the operation key unit 137, the pattern of the cross key used for the selection operation and the pattern of the chance button 136 used for the determination operation are displayed. Furthermore, the chance button 136 and the symbols of the cursor icon cs and the up/down keys 137u and 137d used for moving the cursor display among the cross keys are displayed in red. In addition, the determination key of the operation key unit 137 may be used together with the chance button 136 in the determination operation, or the determination key may be used instead of the chance button 136.

Here, although the option menu screen is not displayed even if the chance button 136 is operated during brightness adjustment or volume adjustment in FIGS. 65(2) to (12), it may be displayed. .. The initial position of the cursor icon cs at the start of displaying the option menu screen may be the top production customization icon, the return icon, or any other icon. Alternatively, it may be an icon of an item currently being customized.

In FIG. 65(16), the chance button 136 is pressed while the cursor icon cs is displayed on the production customization icon, and as shown in FIG. 65(17), the decorative pattern display device 208 has a production customization screen. Is displayed. A five-line list is displayed on the production customizing screen, and in the list, five small items (“01 auto button mode” to “05 reverse side” from the display of small items in the production customizing shown in FIG. 63(b) are displayed. Button navigation”) and respective options (for example, “OFF ON”) are displayed. That is, one item is displayed for each line of the list of 5 lines. Furthermore, below that, a confirmation icon for saving the setting changes, a return icon for returning to the option menu screen, and an initialization icon for collectively returning the settings to the initial values are arranged horizontally in a row from the left side. ing. Further, in the production customization screen, a cursor display is used instead of the cursor icon. The initial position of the cursor display at the time of starting the production customization screen display is a return icon for returning to the option menu screen. The return icon for which the cursor display is displayed has a frame highlighted, and is further illuminated and displayed in red. Further, the currently set option among the displayed options is also displayed in red. For example, in the effect customizing screen shown in FIG. 65(17), the auto button mode is not set (OFF). Further, the design of the cross key used for the selection operation and the design of the chance button 136 used for the determination operation are also displayed at the lower right of the effect customization screen. In the effect customizing screen, all the keys 137u, d, l, r of the cross keys are displayed in red.

In FIG. 65(18), the down key 137d is operated, and the cursor display moves to the item of the auto button mode. That is, in the production customization screen shown in FIG. 65 (19), the frame of the item in the auto button mode is highlighted, a balloon display is added, and an explanation of the auto button mode is displayed.

In FIG. 65(20), the right key 137r is operated while the cursor display is displayed in the item of the auto button mode. As a result, as shown in FIG. 65(21), the currently set option in the auto button mode changes to ON. That is, it was switched from OFF to ON. If the left key 137l is operated while the currently set option is OFF, the key operation is invalid, but the same result as when the right key 137r is operated may be obtained.

In FIG. 65(22), the down key 137d is operated, and the cursor display moves to the item immediately below in the auto button mode (long press auto continuous hit). That is, in the effect customizing screen shown in FIG. 65(23), the frame of the item of long press auto continuous hit is highlighted, a balloon display is added, and a description of this item is displayed. When the up key 137u is operated instead of the down key 137d, the cursor display moves to the confirm icon when the setting is changed, and moves to the return icon when the setting is not changed. However, the icon may be moved to the confirmation icon or may be moved to the return icon regardless of whether the setting is changed.

After that, the down key 137d is operated three times, and the cursor display moves to the back button navigation item at the bottom. That is, in the production customizing screen shown in FIG. 65(25), the frame of the item of the back button navigation is highlighted, a balloon display is added, and a description of this item is displayed.

In FIG. 65(26), the down key 137d is operated once again, and the list of five lines is updated as shown in FIG. 65(27). The button mode item disappears, and the cursor display is moved to the newly added item, which is 06 in FIG. 63( b ), without prior notice.
In FIG. 65(28), the lower key 137d is further operated.
FIG. 66 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 65.

The list is updated in accordance with the operation of the down key 137d, and in the effect customizing screen shown in FIG. 66(29) following FIG. 65(28), the last small item of effect customizing in FIG. 63(b) is 09. The cursor is moved to the one-time notification item.

When the down key 137d is operated again as shown in FIG. 66(30), the cursor display moves to the confirm icon and the confirm icon has a frame highlighted as shown in FIG. 66(31). , It is displayed in red.

In FIG. 66 (32a), the chance button 136 is operated as a determination operation, and in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 66 (33a), the notification screen for notifying the completion of setting of effect customization is overlaid on the effect customization screen from the front side. Is displayed. Note that a confirmation screen (for example, a screen on which a cancel icon and an update icon are displayed) for confirming that the effect customization settings are updated may be displayed. A return icon for returning to the option menu screen is displayed on the notification screen shown in FIG. 66 (33a), and the cursor display is displayed on the icon.

In FIG. 66(34), the chance button 136 is operated, and as shown in FIG. 66(35), the screen returns to the option menu screen.

The return icon on the notification screen shown in FIG. 66 (33a) may be an icon for returning to the production customization screen, and by operating the return icon arranged on the production customization screen, the option menu screen is displayed. You may be able to return.

After returning to the option menu screen, when the down key 137d is operated again while the option menu screen is being displayed as shown in FIG. 66(36) (see FIG. 66(38)), FIG. ), the cursor icon cs that has been displayed in the production customization icon is moved down by one, and this time, the cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the character selection icon, and the character selection icon is red. Lights up.

In FIG. 66(39), the chance button 136 is pressed while the cursor icon cs is displayed on the character selection icon, and as shown in FIG. 66(40), the decorative symbol display device 208 has a character selection screen. Is displayed. A list of 5 lines is also displayed on the character selection screen, and in the list, 5 items (“01 Yoshimune” to “05 Hani”) from the top of the options displayed in the character selection shown in FIG. 63(b) are displayed. It is displayed. That is, one item is displayed for each line of the list of 5 lines. In FIG. 66 (40 ), the cursor display is displayed in the item of Yoshimune, and on the left side of the character selection screen, the pattern of the character of the item for which the cursor display is displayed (here, the pattern of Yoshimune) is preview-displayed. Has been done. Note that, as shown in 73(b), the initial setting for character selection is Yoshimune, but this initial setting itself may be omitted. Further, in the lower right of the character selection screen, a return icon for returning to the option menu screen, a cross-shaped key (up/down keys 137u, d only for red) used for selection operation, and a red chance used for determination operation. The design of the button 136 is also displayed.

The character set by the character selection here is always displayed, always appears at the time of production, and the appearance frequency becomes higher than other characters.

When the down key 137d is operated once as shown in FIG. 66(41), the cursor display moves to the grandfather of the item one below Yoshimune, as shown in FIG. 66(42). The design is previewed.

In FIG. 66(43), the down key 137d is operated five more times, and the list is updated in accordance with the operation of the down key 137d. In the character selection screen shown in FIG. 66(44), the list shown in FIG. 63(b) is displayed. The cursor display is moved to the item of 07, which is the last option for character selection.

When the down key 137d is operated again as shown in FIG. 66(45), the cursor display moves to the return icon and the frame of the return icon is highlighted as shown in FIG. 66(46). , It is displayed in red.

Here, when the down key 137d, not the chance button 136, is operated only once (FIG. 66 (47)), the list is updated, and as shown in FIG. 66 (48), Yoshimune 01 Returning to the first list at the top, the cursor display is moved to that Yoshimune item. Then, in FIG. 66 (49 ), the chance button 136 is operated. In the character selection screen shown in FIG. 66(50), an animation display indicating that the character is determined is displayed in the area where the preview display has been performed. A confirmation screen (for example, a screen displaying a cancel icon and an update icon) to confirm that the character settings are updated may be displayed, but in this example, an animation display indicating that the character is determined is displayed. When finished, the setting of the selected character is automatically updated, and the screen returns to the option menu screen as shown in FIG. 66(51).

Even if the animation showing the determination of the character ends, the character selection screen is still displayed, and it is possible to return to the option menu screen by operating the back icon arranged on the character selection screen. Good.

After returning to the option menu screen, when the down key 137d is operated again while the option menu screen is being displayed (see FIG. 66 (52)), as shown in FIG. The cursor icon cs displayed on the selection icon moves down one position, and this time, the cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the holding frame selection icon, and the holding frame selection icon lights up in red.

In FIG. 66 (54 ), the chance button 136 is pressed while the cursor icon cs is displayed on the holding frame selection icon, and as shown in FIG. 66 (55 ), the decorative symbol display device 208 holds the holding frame. A selection screen is displayed. A list of five lines is also displayed on the reservation frame selection screen, and in the list, five items (“01 reservation frame A” to “05” from the top of the options displayed in the reservation frame selection shown in FIG. 63(b) are displayed. The hold frame E”) is displayed. That is, one item is displayed for each line of the list of 5 lines. In FIG. 66 (55), the cursor display is displayed in the item of the holding frame A, and the holding frame of the item for which the cursor display is displayed is the holding icon and the variable icon in the window on the left side of the holding frame selection screen. It is displayed with a preview. Note that, as shown in 73(b), the default setting of the holding frame selection is the holding frame A, but this initial setting itself may be deleted, or a dedicated holding that cannot be selected here. A frame may be prepared. Further, in the lower right of the hold frame selection screen, a back icon for returning to the option menu screen, a pattern of the cross key used for the selection operation (up and down keys 137u, d only in red), and a red icon used for the determination operation are displayed. The pattern of the chance button 136 is also displayed.

The holding frame set by the holding frame selection here is displayed as the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 in the lower portion of the decorative pattern display device 208.
In FIG. 66 (56), the down key 137d is operated once.
67 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 66.

In response to the single operation of the down key 137d shown in FIG. 66(56) continued from FIG. 66(55), the cursor display is 1 in the holding frame A in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 67(57). The reserved frame B of the item below is moved, and the reserved frame B is preview-displayed in the left window.

In FIG. 67 (58), the decision operation by the chance button 136 is performed. In the hold frame selection screen shown in FIG. 67 (59), when the effect display Ed1 surrounding the left window in which the preview display is performed is generated and the effect display Ed1 disappears, the setting of the selected hold frame is updated. Is automatically performed, and the screen returns to the option menu screen as shown in FIG. 67 (60). A confirmation screen (for example, a screen on which a cancel icon and an update icon are displayed) for confirming that the setting of the hold frame is updated may be displayed. Further, even if the effect display Ed1 disappears, the hold frame selection screen remains as it is, and it may be possible to return to the option menu screen by operating the return icon arranged on the hold frame selection screen.

After returning to the option menu screen, when the down menu key 137d is operated again while the option menu screen is displayed (see FIG. 67 (61)), as shown in FIG. 67 (62), it is suspended until then. The cursor icon cs displayed on the frame selection icon moves down one position, and this time, the cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the hold display selection icon, and the hold display selection icon lights up in red. In this state, the chance button 136 is pressed, and as shown in FIG. 67 (63 ), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a hold display selection screen. A list of five lines is also displayed on the hold display selection screen. In the list, five items (“01 icon A” to “05 icon” from the top of the options displayed in the hold display selection shown in FIG. 63(b) are displayed. E”) is displayed. That is, one item is displayed for each line of the list of 5 lines. In FIG. 67 (63), the cursor display is displayed in the item of icon A, and the icon of the item for which the cursor display is displayed is preview-displayed together with the hold frame in the window on the left side of the hold display selection screen. There is. Note that, as shown in 73(b), the initial setting of the hold display selection is the icon A, but this initial setting itself may be deleted, or a dedicated icon that cannot be selected here is displayed. You may prepare. Further, in the lower right of the hold display selection screen, a return icon for returning to the option menu screen, a pattern of the cross key used for selection operation (up and down keys 137u, d only red), and a red icon used for determination operation. The pattern of the chance button 136 is also displayed.

The icon set by the hold display selection here is displayed as the hold icons h1 to h4 or the variable icon h0 on the hold frame UI.

After that, the down key 137d is operated twice, the cursor display moves to the icon C, and the icon C is preview-displayed in the left window. In this state, the decision operation by the chance button 136 is performed, and the effect display Ed1 surrounding the left window in which the preview display is being performed again occurs on the hold display selection screen shown in FIG. 67(65), When the effect display Ed1 disappears, the setting of the selected icon is automatically updated, and the screen returns to the option menu screen as shown in FIG. 67 (66). A confirmation screen (for example, a screen displaying a cancel icon and an update icon) for confirming that the icon setting is updated may be displayed. Further, even if the effect display Ed1 disappears, the hold display selection screen may remain as it is, and it may be possible to return to the option menu screen by operating the return icon arranged on the hold display selection screen.

After returning to the option menu screen, when the down key 137d is operated again while the option menu screen is displayed (see FIG. 67 (67)), as shown in FIG. 67 (68), it is held until then. The cursor icon cs displayed on the display selection icon moves down one position, and this time, the cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the background display selection icon, and the background display selection icon lights up in red.

In FIG. 67 (69), the chance button 136 is pressed while the cursor icon cs is displayed in the background display selection icon, and as shown in FIG. 67 (70), the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the background. A selection screen is displayed. A list of 5 lines is also displayed on the background display selection screen, and all five options (“01 background A” to “05 background E”) in the background display selection shown in FIG. 63B are displayed on the list. Has been done. That is, one item is displayed for each line of the list of 5 lines. In FIG. 67 (70), the cursor display is displayed in the item of the background A, and the background of the item for which the cursor display is displayed is preview-displayed in the window on the left side of the background display selection screen. As shown in 73(b), the background display selection is initially set to the background A, but the initial setting itself may be eliminated, or a dedicated background that cannot be selected here may be set. You may prepare. Further, in the lower right of the background display selection screen, a return icon for returning to the option menu screen, a cross-shaped key (up and down keys 137u, d only in red) used for selection operation, and a red color used for determination operation are displayed. The pattern of the chance button 136 is also displayed.

The background set by the background display selection here is displayed as the background display in the normal state in the decorative pattern display device 208. The background display in the normal state mentioned here does not include the background display in the prefetch mode, the background display as a notice of the big hit of the fluctuation, and the background display in the power support state. However, it may be included only in the background display in the electric power support state.

After that, the down key 137d is operated four times, the cursor display moves to the background E, and the background E (empty background) is preview-displayed in the left window. In this state, the decision operation is performed by the chance button 136, and on the hold display selection screen shown in FIG. 67 (72), the effect display Ed1 that surrounds the left window in which the preview display is being performed is generated again. When the effect display Ed1 disappears, the setting of the selected background is automatically updated, and the screen returns to the option menu screen as shown in FIG. 67 (73). A confirmation screen (for example, a screen on which a cancel icon and an update icon are displayed) for confirming that the background setting is updated may be displayed. Further, even if the effect display Ed1 disappears, the background display selection screen remains as it is, and it may be possible to return to the option menu screen by operating the return icon arranged on the background display selection screen.

When the down key 137d is operated twice while the option menu screen is displayed after returning to the option menu screen (see FIG. 67 (74a)), as shown in FIG. 67 (75), The cursor icon cs displayed on the hold display selection icon moves to the bottom, the cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the return icon for returning to the demo screen, and the return icon lights in red.

In FIG. 67 (76), the chance button 136 is pressed while the cursor icon cs is displayed on the return icon, and as shown in FIG. 67 (77), the decorative pattern display device 208 displays a demo screen. To be done. The demo screen here reflects the customized results. That is, the background is changed to an empty background, the holding frame UI is different from the holding frame UI shown in FIG. 65(1), and in the frame RW at the upper right of the screen, it is set to ON by effect customization. The mode name (here, auto button mode) is displayed. When the two modes are set to ON, the customization numbers are displayed alternately in ascending order. For example, if the 01 auto button mode and the 05 back button navigation are turned on, the auto button mode and the back button navigation are displayed alternately in the frame RW in the upper right of the screen. It should be noted that when it is the same as the default setting, it may not be displayed in the frame RW, but may be the same or may be displayed. Further, when no setting is made, OFF may be displayed in the frame RW, or nothing may be displayed. In addition, the group notice of setting the reliability and the long-press automatic continuous hit for setting the speed of repeated hits may be set but not displayed in the frame RW. Further, the set mode may not be displayed in detail, but may be displayed only, for example, “during production customization”.

In FIG. 67 (79), a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp. 220 and the fourth symbol display device 284 are also shown. All of the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display device 212, and the second special symbol display device 214 shown in FIG. 67 (79) are being stopped and displayed. Further, the first decorative symbol (third symbol) and the second decorative symbol (fifth symbol) in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 67 (79) are also stopped and displayed, and the fourth symbol shown in FIG. 67 (79). The symbol display device 284 also represents the stop display. Further, all of the normal symbol holding lamp 216, the first special figure holding lamp 218, and the second special figure holding lamp 220 shown in FIG. 67 (79) are all turned off, and in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. Even in the displayed second hold number display, the hold number of special figure 1 and the hold number of special figure 2 are both zero. Therefore, there is no hold, and the symbol variable display is not started after the stop symbol is confirmed and displayed.

At the timing shown in FIG. 67(80), there is one ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, and the first special figure display device 212 shown in FIG. 67(80) has started the symbol variable display. However, the first decorative symbol (third symbol) and the second decorative symbol (fifth symbol) in the decorative symbol display device 208 controlled by the sub control units 400 and 500 shown in FIG. 67 (80) are also decorative symbols. The variable display is not started, and the fourth symbol display device 284, which is also controlled by the sub-control units 400 and 500, still displays the stop display. Incidentally, in the fourth design display device 284 shown in FIG. 67 (80), the black square represents that the first decorative design (third design) is stopped and displayed, and the gray circle represents the second decorative design (fifth design). Represents the stop display, the white square represents the variable display of the first decorative symbol (third symbol), and the white circle represents the variable display of the second decorative symbol (the fifth symbol).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 67 (81), the first decorative symbol is still stopped and displayed, but the second decorative symbol starts variable display, and the second number of holdings displayed in the upper right corner portion. In the display, the reserved number of Toku-zu 1 is momentarily displayed as "1".

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 67 (82), the number of holdings of the special figure 1 which is displayed as "1" for a moment in the second holding number display is "0". It should be noted that the second reserved number display may not be displayed as "1" even for a moment since it is immediately consumed after the first special figure starting port 230 is won, and may be left as "0".

In FIG. 67 (83), the increase animation of the first hold icon h11 has started.
68 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 67.

In FIG. 68 (84) continued from FIG. 67 (83), the increase animation ends and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The first hold icon h11 shown in FIG. 68 (84) is an icon newly set in hold display selection for production customization, and is displayed in a default display mode (diamond-shaped unpatterned and white display mode). There is.

In FIG. 68 (85), although the variable display of the first decorative symbol is not yet started, the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the delay from the start of the symbol variable display on the first special symbol display device 212. The deletion of three icons such as the brightness adjustment icon BI is started, and the display is transparent. The erasing here may be an animation, but the erasing is not necessarily an erasing animation, and in FIG. 68 (86), the erasing of these three icons MI, VI, BI is completed.

In FIG. 68 (87), the first hold icon h11 has started moving toward the pedestal hs0 in the variable icon display area, and in FIG. 68 (88) the movement of the first hold icon h11 has been completed. In the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area, the variable icon h0 having a default display mode (diamond-shaped unpatterned and white display mode) is displayed. Then, in FIG. 68 (89), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is finally started, and the first decorative symbol is changing slowly. In addition, in detail at the start of the variable display of the first decorative symbol, the left symbol starts the variable symbol display first, then the middle symbol starts the variable symbol display and the right symbol finally starts the variable symbol display. However, the order of the variable display start of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol is not limited to this order, and these three left symbols, the middle symbol, and the right symbol may simultaneously start the variable display. Further, before the variable display of the first decorative pattern is started, an animation by the decorative pattern (for example, an animation in which the decorative pattern is once displayed large and then returns to the original size, an image and characters of the decorative pattern such as characters) are displayed. In the case of being composed of images (including numbers), an image of a character or the like may be animated before the first decorative symbol starts to change).

In FIG. 68 (91), the first decorative pattern is changing at high speed. 68(93), if the left key 137l or the right key 137r of the operation key unit 137 is operated even after the symbol variation display on the special figure display devices 212, 214 is started (see FIG. 68(92)). As shown in, a bar display VB for volume adjustment is displayed on the hold frame UI. The volume display bar display VB is displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the first decorative symbol (third symbol), at least a part of the variable icon h0, and at least a part of the navigation character YM from the front side. .. When the left key 137l is operated while the volume adjusting bar display VB is displayed, the bar display is decreased by one level and the sound is reduced, and when the right key 137r is operated, the bar display is increased by one level and the sound is increased. , The volume can be adjusted.

In the present embodiment, only after the symbol variable display on the special figure display devices 212 and 214 is started, only the volume adjustment can be performed. Even if the volume can be adjusted at all times, the bar display VB for adjusting the volume may not be displayed. Moreover, even during the big hit game, only the volume adjustment can be performed at any time. However, it may be restricted for a certain period. For example, during a big hit game start effect, during an interval between rounds, during a big hit game end effect, during execution of super reach effect, during confirmation display of a symbol on the special symbol display devices 212 and 214, or for a decorative symbol. Result screen during confirmation display, during confirmation display of lost symbols, during confirmation display of big hit symbols, and at the end of electric support (time saving) state (for example, at the end of ST) (for example, the number of balls or/and The display may be restricted during the display of the screen for displaying the number of consecutive holidays or the like, or the period in which the left and right keys 137l and 137r are used for the effect. In addition, when the super reach effect is a game effect, it is regulated until the result of winning or losing is notified, and it may be adjustable thereafter, or it is adjusted after the three decorative symbols are aligned and the shaking display is started. This may be possible, or the entire period from the super reach effect to the stop display may be restricted.

In the present embodiment, the volume adjustment after the symbol variation display on the special figure display devices 212 and 214 is started may be possible only in the special figure low accuracy normal figure low accuracy state. Also, after the symbol variation display on the special figure display devices 212 and 214 is started, even if the upper key 137u or the lower key 137d of the operation key unit 137 is operated, the light amount adjustment is impossible, but the light amount adjustment bar is used. The display may be displayed in the same manner as the bar display VB for volume adjustment so that the light amount can be adjusted, or the light amount can be adjusted without the bar display. Furthermore, even after the symbol variable display on the special figure display devices 212 and 214 is started, effect customization, character selection, etc. may be settable.

Moreover, when the left key 137l or the right key 137r is operated in a state where the volume adjustment icon VI and the like are disappeared, that is, while the symbol is changing, without displaying the volume display bar display VB as in the present embodiment, It may be possible to adjust the volume. The bar display VB for volume adjustment is configured to be erased if not operated for a certain period (for example, 10 seconds), but when the left key 137l or the right key 137r is operated again before the certain period elapses. May be configured to be able to update the count start for the certain period (that is, to extend the period until returning to the demo screen). If the left key 137l or the right key 137r is operated during the execution of the animation in which the volume adjustment icon VI or the like is erased by the start of the variation of the symbol, the erase animation is canceled midway and immediately. Alternatively, the volume adjustment icon VI or the like may be erased, and a bar display VB for volume adjustment may be displayed instead. Alternatively, the volume adjustment icon VI or the like may be displayed again without canceling the deletion animation, or the bar display VB for volume adjustment may be displayed after the deletion animation has been completed.

Further, even after the variable display of the symbols on the special figure display devices 212, 214 is started, the presence or absence of the display of the three icons MI, VI, BI is kept until the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started. Regardless, it may be possible to adjust the light amount, and it is also possible to set performance customization, character selection, and the like.

Further, even when the volume adjustment and/or the brightness adjustment can be performed during the pattern change, the adjustment bar display may not be displayed.
69 is a diagram showing a modification of the example described with reference to FIG. 66.

When the right key 137r is operated as shown in FIG. 69(32b) instead of the operation of the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 66(32a), the cursor display is a return icon as shown in FIG. 69(33b1). The return icon is displayed with the frame highlighted and further illuminated in red. When the chance button 136 is operated in this state (FIG. 69 (33b2)), a confirmation screen asking whether to return to the option menu screen is displayed over the effect customization screen from the front side (FIG. 69 (33b3)). ). On this confirmation screen, a return icon that acknowledges returning to the option menu screen and a cancel icon that cancels returning to the option menu screen are displayed. In FIG. 69 (33b2), the cursor display is changed to the cancel icon. It is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 69 (33b4-1), the right key 137r is operated to move the cursor display to the return icon (FIG. 69 (33b5-1), or when the cursor display is displayed in the cancel icon. Then, as shown in FIG. 69 (33b4-2), the chance button 136 can be operated to return to the effect customizing screen (FIG. 69 (33b5-2)).

When the right key 137r is operated as shown in FIG. 69(32c) instead of the operation of the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 66(32a), the cursor display is a return icon as shown in FIG. 69(33c1). Then, when the right key 137r is operated once more (FIG. 69 (33c2)), the cursor display moves to the initialization icon as shown in FIG. 69 (33c3). In this state, when the chance button 136 is operated ((33c4) in FIG. 69), a confirmation screen as to whether or not to initialize the production customization is displayed over the production customization screen from the front side (FIG. 69 (33c5)). )). In this confirmation screen, a "Yes icon" for accepting the initialization and a "No icon" for canceling the initialization are displayed. In FIG. 69 (33c5), the cursor display is "No icon". "Is displayed. Then, when the right key 137r is operated as shown in FIG. 69 (33c6-1), the cursor display moves to the “yes icon” (FIG. 69 (33c7-1), and in this state, FIG. 69 (33c8-1) When the chance button 136 is operated as shown in, initialization of effect customization is executed.In this initialization, all the settings made by the player in effect customization are returned to the initial values. It is possible to perform initialization even when it is not set, but it is also possible to disable it.When the initialization is completed, the initialization completion screen is overlaid on the production customization screen from the front side. (FIG. 69 (33c9-1)) Next, when the chance button 136 is operated (FIG. 69 (33c6-2)), the effect customizing screen in which the initialization is reflected is displayed. Although nothing was set, all the items are set to OFF, which is the initial value.
FIG. 70 is a diagram showing another modification.

When the lower key 137d is operated only once as shown in FIG. 70 (74b1) instead of the two times operation of the lower key 137d shown in FIG. 67 (74a), as shown in FIG. 70 (74b2). The cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the initialization icon, and the initialization icon lights up in red.

In FIG. 70 (74b3), the chance button 136 is pressed while the cursor icon cs is displayed on the initialization icon, and as shown in FIG. 70 (74b4), all the settings are set in the decorative symbol display device 208. A confirmation screen as to whether or not to initialize is displayed over the option menu screen from the front side. In this confirmation screen, a "Yes icon" for accepting the initialization and a "No icon" for canceling the initialization are displayed. In FIG. 70 (74b4), the cursor display is "No icon". "Is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 70 (74b5-1), the right key 137r is operated to move the cursor display to the "yes icon" (FIG. 70 (74b6-1), or the cursor display is displayed to the "no icon". 70 (74b5-2), the chance button 136 can be operated to return to the option menu screen (FIG. 70 (74b6-2)).

As shown in FIG. 70 (74b6-1), when the chance button 136 is operated while the cursor display is displayed on the "Yes icon" (FIG. 70 (74b7-1)), initialization of all settings is executed. It In the initialization here, everything set by the player is returned to the initial value. It should be noted that it is possible to perform initialization even when nothing is specifically set, but it may not be possible. When the initialization is completed, the initialization completion screen is displayed on the option menu screen in an overlapping manner from the front side (FIG. 70 (74b8-1)). Then, when the chance button 136 is operated ((b) (74b9-1) in FIG. 70), the screen returns to the option menu screen as shown in (74b10-1) in FIG.

In addition, after the player has performed various customizations, if the chance button 136 or the operation key unit 137 or the ball firing handle 134 is not operated for a certain period (for example, 5 minutes) without returning to the option menu screen. May initialize various settings. Also, instead of the confirmation screen of FIG. 70 (74b6-1), the confirmation screen of FIG. 69 (33c5) may be displayed. Alternatively, the "yes icon" may be removed from the confirmation screen, and the initialization may be performed after a certain period of time has elapsed since the confirmation screen was displayed. Further, even if there is a “yes icon”, it may be configured to be initialized when a certain period of time has elapsed after the confirmation screen is displayed when no operation is performed. Alternatively, it may be initialized only when “Initialize” is selected on the confirmation screen (here, when the chance button 136 is operated while the cursor is displayed on the “Yes icon”). ..

In addition, the volume adjustment and the brightness adjustment may be the same as the initialization, and further, the initialization setting of various settings and the initialization of the volume and/or the brightness may be performed at the same timing, One may be initialized before the other. Also, when initializing the volume and initializing the brightness at the same timing as the initializing settings for various settings, do not display the initialization confirmation screen for initializing the volume and initializing the brightness. Alternatively, a confirmation screen for initializing all settings, volume, and brightness may be displayed.

Further, a display for confirming whether to initialize the setting of effect customization may be automatically displayed during the symbol change. For example, if it is displayed once per 100 fluctuations, if it has been fluctuated a fixed number of times since it was last displayed, or if it has been fluctuated a fixed number of times since the fluctuation that was started first, it is always displayed. Alternatively, it may be displayed at random (for example, when the player wins in the display lottery).

FIG. 70(I) to FIG. 70(V′) are diagrams showing an example in which customization can be performed during the jackpot round.

In this example, for example, the player can select a song in the first round or the second round, reach a certain round after the second round, and customize from the next round. The certain round here is a round in which the V attacker can win the prize, and specifically, it is 5 rounds. In FIG. 70(I), the decorative design display device 208 of the fifth round is shown, and the letter V that fuels the winning of the V attacker is displayed. Further, the title of the music selected by the music selection is displayed at the lower left of the screen.

FIG. 70(II) is a period corresponding to the inter-round interval when the V attacker is closed. It should be noted that the decorative pattern display device 208 still displays 5 rounds even if the interval between rounds is between 5 rounds and 6 rounds. In addition, the attacker is closed, but the right-handed notification continues.

In FIG. 70(III), the attacker has started opening and the sixth round has started. On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 70(III), a character display for notifying that the effect customization can be executed and a pattern of the chance button 136 are displayed. That is, in this example, the effect customization can be executed in the sixth round, which is the next round after the fifth round in which the V attacker can win. It should be noted that it may be executable only in the sixth round, or may be executable in multiple rounds after the sixth round.

In FIG. 70(IV), the chance button 136 is pressed, the effect design screen shown in FIG. 65 etc. is reduced and displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 70(V), and a list of 5 lines is displayed. There is.

Also, in FIG. 70(V) shown as a modification of FIG. 70(V), a display regarding only one line (only one item) of the list of five lines (here, a display regarding the auto button mode) is displayed. There is. In this modification, all the production customizations can be changed by scrolling the items with the up/down keys 137u, 137d of the operation key unit 137 and switching ON/OFF the items displayed with the left/right keys 137l, 137r. ..

Note that, in the example of FIG. 70(V) or the example of FIG. 70(V'), only some of the effect customization may be changeable.

In the example described above, customization can be performed from the next round of a certain round (for example, a round in which a V winning is performed with a so-called V confirmation machine). The customization is not limited to the V confirmation machine and may be performed from a certain round.

Further, the period during which the music can be selected during the big hit game cannot be customized, and the customization may be performed from the round in which the selected music is output. The music selection may be completed in the middle of the round, and the music selected in the middle of the round may be output. In this case, if the selected music is output even in the round in which the music is selected. , Customization can be done within the round.

In addition, the music may be determined at the end of the specific round, and in this case, customization can be performed after the end of the specific round. In detail, you may be able to customize at the same time as the end of a particular round, you may be able to customize from the start of the next round of a particular round, and between the particular round and the next round. It may be possible to customize from an inter-round interval.

Further, customization may be feasible at any time during the jackpot round. Also, the customization may be executable at any time during the jackpot game. The big hit game here is a period from the start of the big hit to the end of the big hit, which includes a round.

It should be noted that, from the viewpoint of the main control unit 300, the period from the time when the big hit symbol is fixedly displayed until the first round is started means that the special electric accessory ( It is a period from when the attacker is turned on to when it is turned on, and includes a period in which the big hit game start effect is being executed. In addition, the display (for example, the display of the special bonus) that was displayed in the big hit game start effect may be continuously displayed even after the first round is started, but it is 1 round until the attacker starts the first opening. It is a period until the eyes start. Further, the confirmation display of the jackpot symbols is based on the confirmation display of the symbols on the special symbol display devices 212 and 214, not the confirmation display of the decorative symbols. Also, if the game machine is a right-handed notification before the attacker is released (for example, in the case of the first hit or special hit of special figure 1), the timing at which the right-handed notification is started is also a big hit symbol. It is included in the period from the time the final confirmation is displayed to the start of the first round.

During the period from the time when the big hit symbol is fixedly displayed until the start of the first round, the customization may not be performed, or the opposite may be performed.

In addition, customization may not be performed during the period from the end of the final round to the start of the symbol variation at the shortest. For example, customization may not be performed during the big hit end production.

Further, during the warning of forgetting to remove the prepaid card, customization may not be performed, or the opposite may be performed.

In addition, customization may not be performed during a specific effect (for example, V winning effect, song selection, probability change suggestion effect, etc.). Further, it may be configured such that customization cannot be performed during a period in which performance selection (for example, music selection, performance mode selection, etc.) can be performed. Further, the customization may be configured not to be performed even during the execution period of the effect using the operation means used for the customization, or the customization may be restricted before the effect is started. By doing so, the regulation of customization functions as a notice of the performance.

Further, contrary to the example shown in FIGS. 70(I) to 70(V′), customization may not be performed when a certain round is reached. For example, 1R to 14R can be customized, but 15R may not be customized. Alternatively, the customization can be performed up to 5R to 12R, but may not be possible after 13R.

Further, it may be configured such that customization cannot be performed while the two-dimensional code is displayed. For example, when a two-dimensional code is displayed for a certain period of time during a big hit game, or when the two-dimensional code is displayed by the player's operation (for example, "press button to display two-dimensional code") When a two-dimensional code is issued by a button operation while being performed), customization may not be performed. Alternatively, conversely, the two-dimensional code may be configured to be customizable even while being displayed. All or a part of the two-dimensional code and the display regarding customization may be displayed at a position where they overlap, or may be displayed at a position where they do not overlap. That is, part or all of the two-dimensional code may be displayed so as to overlap with part or all of the display related to customization from the front side, and conversely, part or all of the display related to customization may be displayed in two-dimensional form. It may be displayed so as to overlap a part or all of the code from the front side.

70(I) to 70(V'), the big hit performance of the pachinko machine having the variable winning opening having the probability variation area has been described, but the big hit of the pachinko machine having the variable winning opening having no probability variation area has been described. The present invention is also applicable to the big hits of so-called 1st and 2nd models in which big hits start when a V prize is won.

70(VI) to 70(VIII) are diagrams showing an example in which customization can be performed during symbol variation display.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 70(VI), both the first decorative symbol (third symbol) and the second decorative symbol (fifth symbol) are not in the reach state, and three decorative symbols are rapidly changing. is there. Also, in the frame RW at the upper right of the screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 70(VI), it is displayed that the auto button mode is currently customized, and below that, effect customization is executed. Character display notifying that it is possible and a picture of the chance button 136 are displayed.

In FIG. 70(VII), the chance button 136 is pressed, and in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 70(VII), the frame RW at the upper right of the screen disappears, and instead, one line shown in FIG. 70(V′). The display related to only (only one item) (here, the display related to the auto button mode) is displayed. Also in this example, by scrolling the items with the up/down keys 137u, 137d of the operation key unit 137 and switching ON/OFF of the items displayed with the left/right keys 137l, 137r, all the effect customization can be changed.

FIGS. 70(IX) to 70(XI) are diagrams showing another example in which customization can be performed during symbol variation display.

Also in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 70 (IX), both the first decorative symbol (third symbol) and the second decorative symbol (fifth symbol) are not in the reach state, and three decorative symbols are rapidly changing. is there. Further, in FIG. 70(IX), the second display device 208P is arranged on the decorative symbol display device 208 (corresponding to the first display device). The second display device 208P has a smaller display screen than the decorative pattern display device 208. The second display device 208P is arranged on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the second display device 208P shown in FIG. 70(IX) is in the initial position and can move up and down. The second display device 208P partially overlaps with the decorative symbol display device 208 even at the initial position, and when descending from the initial position, the degree of overlap with the decorative symbol display device 208 increases.

A model title is displayed on the second display device 208P, and a display RW' indicating that the auto button mode is currently customized is displayed so as to overlap the model title from the front side. .. Further, below the display RW′, a character display for notifying that the effect customization can be executed and a pattern of the chance button 136 are displayed.

In FIG. 70(X), the chance button 136 is pressed, and the entire screen of the second display device 208P shown in FIG. 70(XI) has been changed to the same screen as the effect customizing screen shown in FIG. 65 and the like. In addition, a part of the contents of the effect customizing screen shown in FIG. 65 or the like (for example, the customization display being executed) may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the remaining contents may be displayed on the second display device 208P. Further, the same screen as the effect customization screen shown in FIG. 65 and the like may be displayed across the decorative symbol display device 208 and the second display device 208P. Further, the display using the second display device 208P is also applicable to the display regarding customization during the big hit game.

Note that the customization may be executed at any time during the variable display of symbols. For example, it may be configured so that customization can be performed even while the super reach effect is being displayed. Alternatively, on the contrary, it may be configured such that customization cannot be performed while the super reach effect is displayed. The super-reach effect described here also includes the effect of the fanned part and the sign effect from the time when the player reaches the reach state until the judge effect such as the duel effect starts. For example, the effect of changing the display position of the left design and the right design of the decorative design which is assumed to enter the reach state and the production before the character display suggesting the development to the super reach are also included. Further, when switching from a judge effect such as a duel effect to a display screen of a decorative pattern, it is included in the super reach effect until it is switched to a display screen of a decorative pattern.

It should be noted that the effect of the fanned part and the omen effect may be customized or may not be customized. Further, customization may be performed after switching from the judge effect result display screen or the display of the decorative effect to the display screen of the decorative design, or vice versa.

Further, customization may be performed even during the simultaneous production executed on a plurality of gaming machines, or conversely, it may not be possible during the simultaneous production. Further, during the temporary stop of the decorative pattern, customization may be performed, or conversely, the customization may not be performed. Furthermore, during the temporary stop of the decorative pattern, customization may be allowed only when the jackpot is finally won, or the customization may not be performed, and eventually the game is lost. Only in this case, customization may be allowed or, on the contrary, not allowed. Further, in the state of being held, the customization may be allowed or may not be allowed to be performed until the symbol variation display ends and the next symbol variation display starts. Further, during execution of a specific effect during symbol variation display (for example, in the prefetch mode), customization may be performed, or conversely, it may not be performed.

Furthermore, when customization is performed during the symbol variation display, the setting change may be applied from the symbol variation display, or the setting change may be applied from the next symbol variation display. Good.

In addition, while the user mode (Daitomo) is being set, the player's operations (for example, display with the chance button, switch with the arrow keys, etc.), the list of missions that have been achieved and the game history (rotation speed, number of balls, mission clear number) , The number of jackpots played this time, the maximum number of consecutive villas played this time, etc.), or the user can change the character, background, hold frame, hold display, etc. It may have been done. Furthermore, while the user mode (Daitomo) is being set, a list of missions and game history that have been achieved by player operations (eg, display with the chance button, switch with the arrow keys, etc.) while setting the user mode (Daitomo) It is configured to be able to display (number of revolutions, number of balls, number of missions cleared, number of jackpots played this time, maximum number of consecutive games played this time, etc.), character set by the user, background, hold frame Alternatively, the hold display may be changed.

Further, when the mission is completed during the setting of the user mode, an icon notifying that the mission is completed may be displayed.

Next, an example of the pachinko machine 100 having a specification compatible with the "DAITOMO" member service will be described. In the pachinko machine 100 of this specification, the opening condition of FIG. 63(b) is adopted. A top menu is prepared for the pachinko machine 100 of this specification. This top menu can be called by operating the chance button 136 while the demo screen is displayed. It should be noted that the top menu may be able to be called only by operating the chance button 136 without going through the demo screen. Alternatively, the demo screen may be automatically switched and displayed without operating the chance button 136. Furthermore, the demo screen may be replaced with this top menu.

On the top menu, there are Daitomo icon, model customization icon, initialization icon, and return icon.
FIG. 71(1) is a transition diagram of the top menu screen.

Also on the top menu screen displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208, the cursor is moved up and down by operating the up key 137u or the down key 137d of the operation key unit 137. Among the items of “DAITOMO”, “Model customization”, “Initialization”, and “Return to demo screen”, you can operate the up and down keys of the operation key unit 137 to connect between the items connected by arrows. When the cursor moves and the chance button 136 is pressed, a screen corresponding to the item displayed by the cursor is displayed. That is, when the cursor is moved to the item “DAITOMO” and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative pattern display device 208 switches from the top menu screen to the Daitomo screen. If the cursor is moved to the item “Return to demo screen” and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative pattern display device 208 switches from the top menu screen to the demo screen.

On the other hand, a "return" icon is displayed on each of the "Daitomo screen", "model customization screen", and "initialization confirmation screen". Move the cursor to the "return" icon and press the chance button 136. Then you can go back to the top menu screen. Alternatively, the user may be able to return to the top menu screen by pressing the cancel key of the operation key unit 137 without moving the cursor to the "return" icon.

Although not shown in this transition diagram, if there is a prize at the special figure starting ports 212, 214 and the variable display of the special figure is started, even if the top menu screen is displayed, the "Daitomo screen", " Even on the "model customization screen" and the "initialization confirmation screen", the screen changes to the decorative pattern variable display screen.
FIG. 71(2) is a transition diagram of the model customization screen.

The transition diagram of the model customizing screen shown in FIG. 71(2) is the same as the transition diagram of the option menu screen shown in FIG. 64 except for the "return to top menu" at the bottom and the "top menu screen" to the right of it. Therefore, redundant description will be omitted. When the cursor is moved to the item “return to top menu” and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative pattern display device 208 switches from the model customization screen to the top menu screen.
FIG. 72 is a transition diagram of the Daitomo screen.

Also on the Daitomo screen, the cursor is moved up and down by operating the up key 137u or the down key 137d of the operation key unit 137. Among the items of “Trial play”, “Password input”, “Data save”, “Data clear”, “Quick start”, and “Return to top menu screen”, the operation key unit is connected between the items connected by the arrow. The cursor is moved by operating the up key or the down key of 137, and a screen corresponding to the item displayed by the cursor when the chance button 136 is pressed is displayed. That is, if the chance button 136 is pressed with the cursor on the item of “trial play”, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the Daitomo screen to the trial play screen. From the trial play screen, the cursor is moved by selecting the cross keys 137u, d, l, and r and the chance button 136 is selected to move to a new registration screen or to start the trial play. You can go back to. Further, from the new registration screen, by moving the cursor by selecting the cross keys 137u, d, l, and r and determining the chance button 136, it is possible to shift to the password input screen or return to the Daitomo screen. ..

When the cursor is moved to the item of “password input” and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the Daitomo screen to the password input screen. On the password input screen, the display is repeated until the correct password is entered, and if the entered password is correct, the demo screen set to the Daitomo mode is switched after a certain period of time.

If the cursor is moved to the item of "data storage" and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the Daitomo screen to the data storage confirmation screen. On the data storage confirmation screen, if “Yes” is determined by moving the cursor by selecting the cross keys 137u, d, l, and r and determining the chance button 136, the two-dimensional code issuance screen is displayed. However, if “Yes” is determined in the same manner, a two-dimensional code is issued, and it is possible to shift to the demo screen in which the Daitomo mode is not set. On the other hand, whether the data storage confirmation screen or the two-dimensional code issuance screen is displayed, "No" is determined by the cursor movement by the selection operation of the cross keys 137u, d, l, r and the determination operation of the chance button 136. In this case, each display is repeated.

If the cursor is moved to the item of "data clear" and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the Daitomo screen to the data clear confirmation screen.

When the cursor is moved to the item “quick start” and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the Daitomo screen to the quick start start screen. The quick start start screen switches to the demo screen set to Daitomo mode after a certain period of time.

On the other hand, "Trial play screen", "Password input screen", "Data save confirmation screen", "Data clear confirmation screen", and "Quick start start screen" each have a "Back" icon displayed, By moving the cursor to the "return" icon and pressing the chance button 136, it is possible to return to the Daitomo screen. Further, it may be possible to return to the Daitomo screen by pressing the cancel key of the operation key unit 137 without moving the cursor to the "return" icon.

Although not shown in this transition diagram, if there is a prize at the special figure starting ports 212, 214 and the variable display of the special figure is started, even if it is the Daitomo screen, the "trial pre-screen" is displayed. Even if it is, etc., the screen shifts to a screen for variable display of decorative patterns.

The parenthesized reference numerals shown in FIG. 72 are associated with the parenthesized drawing numbers in FIG. 73.
FIG. 73 is a diagram showing a top menu screen and a Daitomo screen.

A top menu screen is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 73(a). On this top menu screen, all of the background display, the holding frame UI, the navigation character YM, the first decorative design (third design), and the second decorative design (fifth design) disappear, and under the character display of "menu", Four types of icons, such as a Daitomo icon, a model customization icon, an initialization icon, and a return icon for returning to the demo screen, are displayed in order from the top in a vertical column. Also, in FIG. 72A, the cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the bottom return icon, and the other icons are displayed in white, whereas the return icon is lit in red. The initial position of the cursor icon cs when the display of the top menu screen is started is the return icon. Also on the top menu screen, the pattern of the cross key (only the up and down keys 137u and 137u are red) used for the selection operation and the pattern of the red chance button 136 used for the determination operation are displayed at the lower right.

The screen displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 73(b1) is the chance menu 136 when the cursor icon cs is displayed on the Daitomo icon on the top menu screen shown in FIG. 73(a). It is the Daitomo screen displayed by being pressed. In this Daitomo screen, in order to return to the trial play icon, password input icon, data save icon, data clear icon, quick start icon, and top menu screen in the vertical line from top to bottom under the display of “Daitomo” Six types of icons such as the back icon of are displayed. Further, in FIG. 72(b1), the cursor display is displayed on the trial play icon at the top, and the trial play icon is highlighted in a frame and further lit in red. Moreover, the character of Yoshimune appears on the right side of the six types of icons arranged in a vertical line, and an explanation about the trial play is displayed. Further, below the display of the explanation, the design of the cross key used for the selection operation (only the up and down keys 137u, d are red) and the design of the red chance button 136 used for the determination operation are displayed. When the chance button 136 is pressed in this state, the trial play screen shown in FIG. 73(b1-1) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

On the trial play screen shown in FIG. 73(b1-1), options that can be selected by various customizations are displayed as benefits of the membership experience of Daitomo. Below that display, below that is a confirmation icon to save the setting changes, a back icon to return to the Daitomo screen, a "start icon" to start trial play, a new member registration The icons are arranged horizontally in a row from the left side. The cursor display is displayed in "Start icon", and this position is the initial position. In this state, when the right key 137r is operated once, the cursor display moves to the "new registration icon", and when the decision operation is performed by pressing the sodoko chance button 136, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays The new registration screen shown in FIG. 73(b1-2) is displayed.

In the new registration screen shown in FIG. 73(b1-2), a large two-dimensional code QR1 is displayed on the left side, and on the right side, the two-dimensional code QR1 is read by a communication terminal with a photographing function and the two-dimensional code QR1 is displayed. A sentence recommending that the website of the embedded URL (Daitomo site) be accessed and the password be obtained from the website is displayed. Below the display of the text, a password input icon and a return icon for returning to the Daitomo screen are displayed. In this example, the new registration screen is displayed via the trial play screen, but may be displayed without passing through the trial play screen. For example, when a new registration icon is provided on the Daitomo screen shown in FIG. 73(b1) in addition to the trial play icon and the new registration icon is selected and the chance button 136 is operated, FIG. The new registration screen shown in 2) may be displayed.

In the Daitomo screen shown in FIG. 73(b2), the cursor display is displayed on the password input icon, and the explanation about the password input is displayed on the right side. When the chance button 136 is pressed in this state, the password input screen shown in FIG. 73(b2-1) is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208.

In the password input screen shown in FIG. 73(b2-1), an 8-digit password input area pw and, under the password input area pw, alphabets, symbols, and numerical dials kw are displayed. The person who inputs the password moves the cursor (displayed in gray and T is specified in FIG. 73(b2-1-1)) using the four-way controller 137u, d, l, r to move the character specified by the cursor. Is performed character by character in accordance with the password acquired from the Daitomo site by the operation of inputting in the password input area pw by the determination operation using the chance button 136 (see FIG. 73 (b2-1-1)). Under the dial kw, a return icon for returning to the Daitomo screen, an erase icon for erasing the input characters in the password input area pw, and a completion icon indicating completion of password input are arranged in a horizontal row in order from the left side. Has been done.

When the password input operation is completed, the chance button 136 is operated with the cursor displayed on the completion icon. If the input of the password is incorrect, the input error window shown in FIG. 73(b2-1-2) is displayed. When this window disappears, the password input operation can be performed again. The previously input password may be cleared from the password input area pw or may remain as it is. If the password input is correct, the decorative pattern display device 208 switches to the demo screen set in the Daitomo mode after the window for input completion shown in FIG. 73(b2-1-3) is displayed for a certain period of time. ..

In the Daitomo screen shown in FIG. 73(b3), a cursor display is displayed on the data save icon, and an explanation about data save is displayed on the right side. When the chance button 136 is operated in this state, the data saving confirmation screen shown in FIG. 73(b3-1) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, if trial play or quick start is being performed, or if the password has not been entered, disable the data save icon from being selected or prevent this data save confirmation screen from being displayed. However, it may be selectable or displayable.

In the data saving confirmation screen shown in FIG. 73(b3-1), a "Yes" icon for confirming that the data is to be saved and a "No" icon for not saving the data are displayed. When the "Yes" icon is selected and the chance button 136 is operated, the two-dimensional code QR2 is generated and issued by the pachinko machine 100 (FIG. 73 (b3-2)). This two-dimensional code QR2 includes the URL of the Daitomo site, the player's ID, the current game history information (for example, the number of games, the number of balls played, the number of big hits, the number of consecutive games, the level of Daitomo mode, and experience). (Including values, mission achievement information, etc.) are embedded. The two-dimensional code QR2 is read by a communication terminal with a shooting function, and the website (Daitomosite) of the URL embedded in the two-dimensional code QR2 is read. ), the data will be saved on the Daitomo site server. An end icon is displayed at the lower right of the data storage confirmation screen. When the reading of the two-dimensional code QR2 is completed, the end icon is selected and the chance button 136 is operated. Is displayed.

In FIG. 73 (b3-2-1), the end confirmation screen is displayed, and a “Yes” icon that acknowledges the end and a “No” icon that does not end are displayed. When the "YES" icon is selected and the chance button 136 is operated, the decorative pattern display device 208 switches to the demo screen in which the Daitomo mode is not set.

The data embedded in the two-dimensional code QR2, such as the game history information of this time, may be deleted from the pachinko machine after the generation of the two-dimensional code QR2 is completed, and FIG. 73 (b3-2-1). May be deleted from the pachinko machine 100 at the stage when the “Yes” icon is selected and the chance button 136 is operated, or may not be deleted until the data clear described later is performed.

In the Daitomo screen shown in FIG. 73(b4), the cursor display is displayed on the data clear icon, and an explanation about data clear is displayed on the right side. When the chance button 136 is operated in this state, the data clear confirmation screen shown in FIG. 73(b4-1) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. If you are performing trial play or quick start, or if you have not entered the password, disable the data clear icon and prevent the data clear confirmation screen from being displayed. However, it may be selectable or displayable.

In the data clear confirmation screen shown in FIG. 73(b4-1), a "Yes" icon for confirming that the data such as the game history information of this time is erased and a "No" icon for not erasing the data are displayed. There is. When the "Yes" icon is selected and the chance button 136 is operated, the data is erased from the pachinko machine and the erase completion screen is displayed.

The erasure completion screen is displayed in FIG. 73 (b4-1-1). The erasure completion screen disappears after being displayed for a certain period of time, and the screen returns to the Daitomo screen.

In the Daitomo screen shown in FIG. 73(b5), the cursor display is displayed on the quick start icon, and an explanation about the quick start is displayed on the right side. When the chance button 136 is operated in this state, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the quick start start screen shown in FIG. 73(b5-1). This quick start start screen disappears after being displayed for a certain period of time, and the decorative pattern display device 208 switches to the demo screen set to the Daitomo mode.

In the Daitomo screen shown in FIG. 73(b6), the cursor display is displayed on the return icon, and on the right side, returning to the top menu screen is displayed. When the chance button 136 is operated in this state, the decorative pattern display device 208 switches to the top menu screen.
FIG. 74 is a diagram showing a model customization screen.

When the second model customizing icon is selected from the top menu screen shown in FIG. 73(a) and the chance button 136 is operated, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the model customizing screen shown in FIG. 74(c). Is displayed. In this model customization screen, under the character display of "Model customization", a production customization icon, a character selection icon, a hold frame selection icon, a hold display selection icon, a background display selection icon, and an initialization are displayed in order from the top in a vertical line. Seven types of icons such as an icon and a return icon for returning to the top menu screen are displayed. A cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of any one of these seven types of icons. In FIG. 74(c), the cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the top production customization icon, and the other production icons are displayed in white, whereas the production customization icon is lit in red. Further, in the model customization screen, the design of the cross key used for the selection operation and the design of the chance button 136 used for the determination operation are displayed at the lower right. Furthermore, the chance button 136 and the symbols of the cursor icon cs and the up/down keys 137u and 137d used for moving the cursor display among the cross keys are displayed in red. In addition, the determination key of the operation key unit 137 may be used together with the chance button 136 in the determination operation, or the determination key may be used instead of the chance button 136.

The effect customizing screen is displayed in FIG. 74(c1), but in the effect customizing screen shown in FIG. 65(17), the options of the input sound notice and the back button navigation are not yet released. Be different. If the Daitomo password has not been entered or the level that satisfies the opening condition has not been reached, the screen shown in FIG. 74(c1) appears.

The character selection screen is displayed in FIG. 74(c2), but the character selection screen shown in FIG. 66(40) has all other options unreleased except for Yoshimune's option. The difference is that the choices are not even displayed as to what character they are. It should be noted that a part or all of the character image may be displayed even if it is an unreleased option, a silhouette image in the shape of a character may be displayed, and a display mode in which a selectable character is recognizable ( For example, a display including “Daitomo Lv.20: Princess is open” and the like may be displayed. Here, the display regarding the unreleased options is also applicable to other customized displays (in this example, the hold frame, the hold display, and the background display). If the Daitomo password has not been entered, the screen shown in FIG. 74(c2) appears. Only Yoshimune can be selected on this screen.

On the other hand, in the character selection screen shown in FIG. 74(c2′), since the password is input or the trial play is selected, the grandfather character can be selected. However, after 03, it cannot be selected because it does not reach the level that satisfies the opening condition.

The reservation frame selection screen is displayed in FIG. 74(c3). However, the reservation frame selection screen shown in FIG. Yes, the other option is that it does not even show what the name of the holding frame is. If the Daitomo password has not been entered, the screen shown in FIG. 74(c3) appears. On this screen, only the hold frame A can be selected.

On the other hand, in the holding frame selection screen shown in FIG. 74(c3'), since the password is input, the holding frame B can also be selected. However, after 03, it cannot be selected because it does not reach the level that satisfies the opening condition.

Although the hold display selection screen is displayed in FIG. 74(c4), the hold display selection screen shown in FIG. 67(63) has all other options unreleased except the option of the icon A. , The other options are different in that they do not even show what the name of the pending display is. If the Daitomo password is not entered, the screen shown in FIG. 74(c4) appears. On this screen, only icon A can be selected.

On the other hand, in the hold display selection screen shown in FIG. 74(c4′), since the password is input, the icon B can also be selected. However, here as well, after 03, it cannot be selected because it does not reach the level that satisfies the opening condition.

The background display selection screen is displayed in FIG. 74(c5), but the background display selection screen shown in FIG. 67(70) is that all the other options have not been released except the background A option. The difference is that the other options don't even show what the background name is. If the Daitomo password has not been input, the screen shown in FIG. 74(c5) appears. On this screen, only the background A can be selected.

On the other hand, in the background display selection screen shown in FIG. 74(c5'), since the password is input, the background B can be selected. However, here as well, after 03, it cannot be selected because it does not reach the level that satisfies the opening condition.

In FIG. 74(d1), a confirmation screen as to whether or not to initialize all the settings is displayed. However, since it is the same as the confirmation screen shown in FIG. 70 (74b6-1), description thereof will be omitted. Further, although the initialization completion screen is displayed in FIG. 74(d2), the description is omitted because it is the same as the initialization completion screen shown in FIG. 70(74b8-1).
FIG. 74(e1) is a diagram showing an example of the demo screen set in the Daitomo mode.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 74(e1), the hold frame UI is displayed on the background display of the sea, and the navigation character YM is also displayed. In addition, the combination of the decorative patterns (“decoration 4”-“decoration 1”-“decoration 7”) is displayed on both the first decorative pattern (third pattern) and the second decorative pattern (fifth pattern). The special variable symbol display is stopped. Furthermore, in the second hold number display displayed in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold number of special figure 1 and the hold number of special figure 2 are both zero. In other words, there is no hold, and the symbol variation display is not started after the stop symbol of the special symbol is confirmed and displayed. Further, below the second hold number display, the current level of the Daitomo mode (here, level 1) and the experience value (EXP) (here, 0) are displayed. That is, the demo screen set in the Daitomo mode shown in FIG. 74(e1) corresponds to, for example, a screen immediately after newly registered and transferred to the demo screen.

The corresponding sound effect is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 74(e1). For example, when Quick Start is set and this demo screen is displayed, the voice "Start Daitomo" is output, and when this trial screen is displayed with the trial play set, "Trial" is displayed. When the voice "Start play" is output and the password input is completed and this demo screen is displayed, the voice "Start Daitomo. Let's do our best today" is output. Note that different sound effects are output when the corresponding sound effect is started by trial play, when the die-tomo is started by quick start, and when the die-tomo is started by password input. , The same sound effect may be output, and the same sound effect may be output in two cases. Further, the sound effect may change depending on the level of the Daitomo, the previous game situation, and the like. When returning to the demo screen set to the Daitomo mode shown in FIG. 74(e1) through model customization, the sound effect may not be output, and a dedicated sound effect may be output. Further, an animation may be displayed together with the corresponding sound effect or in place of the corresponding sound effect. When the symbol variation start is started while the sound effect or animation is being performed, the corresponding sound effect or animation may be interrupted (cancelled) in the middle, or may be output to the end as it is.

In addition, if the quick start is set and this demo screen is displayed, the trial play is set and this demo screen is displayed, or if the password input is completed and this demo screen is displayed. In the case of at least one of them, the top menu screen shown in FIG. 73A or the model customization screen shown in FIG. The top menu screen shown in FIG. 73(a) and the model customization screen shown in FIG. 74(c) may be called up without waiting. Alternatively, in all of the above cases, the top menu screen shown in FIG. 73(a) and the model customization screen shown in FIG. 74(c) may not be called for a certain period.

FIG. 74(e1-1) shows a state in which the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI are additionally displayed after a certain period has elapsed since the demo screen shown in FIG. 74(e1) was displayed. FIG.

Note that the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI are restricted from being additionally displayed for a certain period (for example, one minute) after the top menu screen shown in FIG. 73A is displayed. Good. Further, if the chance button 136 or the cross keys 137u, d, l, r is operated during this fixed period of time, the operation is invalidated. However, it may be valid in some cases.

In addition, even when the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI are not displayed (for example, immediately after or shortly after the symbol variation display is stopped without a hold), the figure The volume adjustment window VW and the brightness adjustment window BW shown at 65 can be called. When the volume adjustment window VW and the brightness adjustment window BW are called and there is no operation for a certain period of time, the screen may return to the screen shown in FIG. 74(e1-1).

Further, when the stop symbol is displayed in the state where there is no hold, the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI are not displayed for a certain period, and the certain period is as shown in FIG. The model customization screen shown in) may not be called.

Further, even during a period in which the top menu screen shown in FIG. 73(a) and the model customization screen shown in FIG. 74(c) cannot be called, the volume adjustment window VW and the brightness adjustment window BW shown in FIG. 65 should be called. May be possible.

Furthermore, when switching between the volume adjustment window VW and the brightness adjustment window BW shown in FIG. 65 and the screen shown in FIG. 74(e1-1), these windows VW and BW are also displayed on the screen shown in FIG. 74(e1-1). There is a state in which neither is displayed, and even in this state, the volume and brightness adjustment operations may or may not be executable.

FIG. 74(e2) is a diagram showing an example of a demo screen displayed via FIG. 73(b3-2-1) after the two-dimensional code is issued in FIG. 73(b3-2). As the output sound from the speaker 120, a voice saying "Thank you for your hard work" is output. Further, the output sound effect may be changed depending on the state before this demo screen is displayed.
FIG. 75 is a diagram showing an example of an effect using the variable icon.

Here, the variation icon h0 will be summarized once again. The variation icon h0 is an icon corresponding to the special figure variation game, which is displayed after the suspension of the special figure variation game is started, in other words, an icon relating to the symbol variation display being executed. That is, the hold icon becomes the change icon h0 at the same time when the special figure change game corresponding to the hold icon is started. More precisely, when the first hold icon h11 having the oldest start prize moves from the hold icon display area HIS to the variable icon display area CIS, the moving icon is referred to as a variable icon or expressed as a moving icon. You may. Alternatively, the icon after the movement to the variable icon display area CIS is completed may be referred to as a variable icon. The variable icon h0 is displayed with a display size (display size larger or smaller than the hold icon) different from that of the hold icon h11. This may facilitate discrimination between the variable icon h0 and the hold icon h11, but they may have the same size. The variable icon h0 may have a display mode related to the display mode of the hold icon h11. The change icon h0 can give a notice about whether or not the change is valid (a notice of the change) depending on its display mode, and is basically erased at the timing when the result of the change is notified. Therefore, the variable icon h0 can be regarded as an icon related to the hold, and can be considered as a kind of hold icon in the sense that the notification of the winning/failing result of the special figure changing game is held. The erasing timing may be before, at the same timing, or after the timing at which the result of the variation is notified. Further, in addition to the default display mode (for example, a round unpatterned and white display mode), a plurality of types of display modes of the variation icon h0 are prepared as normal advance notice display modes, and depending on the display mode, The jackpot reliability (expectation) is different. The higher the reliability of the jackpot, the easier it is to finally confirm and display the jackpot pattern. In the following description, the degree of expectation of a big hit is represented by color. The default white color is when “no change” is selected in the effect lottery for the display mode of the variable icon h0. The default white variation icon does not announce the expectation of the big hit, but the expectation of the big hit may be announced (in that case, the color of the icon with the lowest expectation of the big hit). White blinking has the lowest expectation of a big hit (0% or 0% or more and less than 1%). As a color of the normal notice display mode, a so-called rainbow color (rainbow color) that changes from white blinking to blue, green, red, gold, and seven colors in ascending order of jackpot expectation. The gold color is a big jackpot, and the iridescent one has a higher expectation of a jackpot than that. For example, it may be said that the jackpot is confirmed. Note that this color relationship is the same for the color of the display mode of the pre-reading notice by the hold icon. Hereinafter, when the color is red or more, it means red, gold, or rainbow.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 75(1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is changing at high speed in the central area. In the upper left, the second decorative design (fifth design) is variably displayed. Further, a holding frame UI is displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 75(A1). This hold frame UI has a hold icon display area HIS, a variable icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS. The variable icon display area CIS is provided in the center, and the pedestal hs0 is arranged in the variable icon display area CIS. The hold icon display area HIS is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area CIS, and four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged on the left base icon bIl. The effect icon display area DIS is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area CIS, and the navigator character YM of the lord's character is displayed on the right base icon bIr in FIG. 75(A1). Various effects such as icons and mini-items are displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 75(A1) is a display that may be displayed across a plurality of continuous symbol variable displays. For example, the display is started at the same time as the start of a certain symbol variable display, and may be continuously displayed during the display of the symbol variable display, or may be temporarily disappeared or disappeared. Further, the variable display of the symbol may be terminated and may be continuously displayed during the display of the stop display, or may be temporarily disappeared or may not be seen. Then, during the display of the next symbol variation display which is started continuously, it may be continuously displayed, or may be temporarily disappeared or disappeared. Alternatively, the display may end during the display of the next symbol variable display. Further, there may be a case where it is displayed only in part or all of the entire period during which one symbol variable display is displayed, and may not be displayed during the next symbol variable display. The navigation character YM can be said to be a so-called constantly displayed character, but it does not have to be continuously displayed in any case. Furthermore, the display mode of the navigation character YM may change while the display continues. Details of this point will be described later.

Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 75(A1), the hold icon (first hold icon h11) of special figure 1 is displayed on the first stage hs1. The display mode of the first hold icon h11 is a default display mode (a circular unpatterned and white display mode). Further, the variation icon h0 is displayed on the pedestal hs0 in the variation icon display area CIS. The display mode of the variable icon h0 is also the default display mode (the circular unpatterned and white display mode).

In FIG. 75 (A2-1), a treasure box icon I1 of change notice display is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. The change notice display corresponds to a notice indicating that another icon or the like may change when the change notice is displayed. Other icons include the navigation character YM, the hold icon h11, the variable icon h0, and a decorative pattern. That is, the icon or the like that has been displayed before the display of the change notice display is to be changed. However, even if the display of the change notice display is started at the same time as the display of the change notice display or the display is started later, it may be changed. The player may or may not know what will be changed at the time when the display of the change notice display is started. There may also be suggestions on what to change. Furthermore, even if the change notice display is displayed, nothing may change depending on the change notice display, which may be a false notice. Further, the change notice display may be determined to have only one target object, or may be necessarily changed.

The treasure box icon I1 shown in FIG. 75(a2-1) appears on the carpet icon I2. The icon I2 of the carpet is displayed only at the time of appearance, and when the icon I1 of the treasure box reaches the display position of the effect icon display area DIS, the icon I2 disappears or jumps out of the screen. As the appearance timing of the icon of this change notice display, when the first decorative pattern changes rapidly, at the start of the pattern change, when the moving of the change icon h0 is completed, and when the special figure start opening is won (when the hold is increased) At the start of the pre-reading notice at the time of winning, at the time of certain success, at the first stop of the first decorative symbol, at the time of temporary stop or continuation (at the time of re-variation start) in the pseudo continuous production, at the start of the reach state, super reach At the start, you can enumerate the super reach etc. That is, the appearance timings of the change notice display icons may be all of the above-listed ones. On the other hand, some of the items listed above may not be applied. There may be a plurality of display modes of the treasure box icon I1. For example, the ease of change of the navigation character YM or the like may change depending on the display mode (size, color, animation difference) of the treasure box or the carpet. Good. Further, as for the effect display that is displayed only at the time of appearance or exit, like the icon I2 of the carpet, if the display mode is different from the normal display mode, the probability of changing is high, or a state advantageous for the player. The probability of changing the display mode to the display mode may increase. For example, the probability of changing to a display mode with a high expectation of a big hit may be high. Further, the change notice display may be a display that changes only the navigation character, but in some cases, the effect display other than the navigation character (holding icon, change icon, notice display of the change, prefetch notice display, etc.) may be changed. It may be. In addition, among presentation displays other than the navigation character (holding icon, change icon, notice display of the change (timer notice, conversation notice, chance up meter, etc.), pre-read notice display (timer notice, pre-read mode background display, etc.) It is possible that the navigation character is not changed by one effect display, a plurality of effect displays, or a notice display that changes all effect displays, but the navigation character may be changed in some cases. Good. Further, the change notice display may be configured such that the navigation character is changed more frequently than the effect display other than the navigation character is changed, but conversely, the change frequency of the navigation character is changed other than the navigation character. The frequency may be less than the frequency of changing the display, and the two frequencies may be performed at the same frequency. Here, the effect display (the effect display other than the navigation character and the navigation character) is displayed by the "notice of changing the effect display (change notice display, notification display that changes effect display other than the navigation character. Hereinafter, referred to as notice A)". When the effect display that is changed less frequently by the notice A is changed by the notice A, the effect display that is changed more frequently by the notice A is changed by the notice A than when the effect display is changed by the notice A. May or may not be configured so that a big hit can be easily made.

In FIG. 75 (A3-1), the carpet icon I2 disappears and the treasure chest icon I1 remains. This treasure box icon I1 is displayed on the right side of the navigation character YM. In FIG. 75 (A4-1), the display mode of the treasure box icon I1 changes. That is, the change animation is displayed, the treasure box is opened, and the smoke image of the effect appears from the inside, and the smoke image hides part or all of the navigation character YM, which is clearer than before the smoke image appeared. It becomes difficult to see. When an icon other than the navigation character YM or the like is displayed, the smoke image may cover part or all of the display of the icon or the like other than the navigation character YM from the front side. Also, the treasure chest may not be opened. Furthermore, another notice may be given even if the treasure box is opened. In FIG. 75 (A 5-1), the smoke image disappears and the display mode of the navigation character YM changes. That is, the dark blue (default color) kimono worn by the navi character YM has changed to a red kimono. The change of the kimono of the navi character YM into a red kimono may suggest that the change icon h0 is likely to change to red due to the change. It may be determined that the display mode of the navigation character YM changes at the time when the treasure box icon I1 is displayed. In addition to the red kimono, it may be changed to a gold kimono or a rainbow kimono. It may also blink white, change to blue or green. Further, the display mode of the navigation character YM may change corresponding to the color of the hold icon and/or the variable icon (for example, when green hold is displayed in hold 2, the navigation character YM is displayed in green). Change into a kimono). Here, in the case where the color of the navigation character corresponds to the color of the variable icon and/or the hold icon, and the display mode of the hold icon and/or the variable icon is changed in multiple ways, it is first consumed. May be configured so that the color of the hold icon or the variable icon that corresponds to the color of the navi character may correspond to the color of the hold icon that will be consumed later, and the color of the navi character, The color with high jackpot expectation may be displayed preferentially, and the color with low jackpot expectation may be displayed preferentially, regardless of the color of the hold icon or the fluctuation icon itself. May be displayed with a high pending or floating icon color, or with a low pending or floating icon color with a low jackpot expectation regardless of the color of the pending or floating icon itself. The colors of the pending icon and/or the variable icon that are being displayed may all be reflected in the color of the navigation character, and the color of the navigation character is displayed randomly from the colors of the pending icon and/or the varying icon that are changing. May be done. Further, next to the navigation character YM whose display mode has been changed, the icon I1 of the treasure box with the lid open is still displayed. The icon I1 of the treasure box may disappear at the same time as the smoke image appears, or may disappear together with the smoke image. The icon I1 of the treasure box disappears at the timing of FIG. 75 (a6-1), and only the navi character YM of the lord wearing a red kimono is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. Up to this point, the first decorative pattern continues to be displayed at high speed.

In FIG. 75 (7), the first decorative symbol is in the reach state, and “decoration 7” is displayed in swing (temporary stop) for both the left symbol and the right symbol. In addition, in the second decorative pattern, the temporary stop is not performed, and the three decorative patterns continue to be variably displayed. In FIG. 75 (8), the background screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 has been developed into a super reach effect (swordsman reach effect), the background screen of the wilderness has changed to the background screen of the wilderness, and the temporarily stopped left symbol is the decorative pattern display device. Moving to the upper left of 208, the right pattern which is also temporarily stopped moves to the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208. On the background screen h of the wilderness, a duel scene in which the hero's lord and the enemy swordsman face each other is displayed. Further, in the hold frame UI, the left base icon bI1 of the hold icon display area HIS and the four stages hs1 to hs4 disappear, and the first hold icon h11 also disappears. Although the height of the pedestal in the variable icon display area CIS is low, the lowered pedestal hs0′ is displayed and the variable icon h0 is still displayed on it. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, a navi character YM of a lord wearing a red kimono is displayed on the right base icon bIr. During the super reach effect, the entire hold frame UI may be hidden. That is, the pedestal hs0′ in the variable icon display area CIS and the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS may also be hidden. Further, during the super reach effect, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM may also be hidden. Further, during the super reach effect, any one or two of the navigation character YM, the hold icon, and the change icon h0 may be hidden. Further, during the super reach effect, all of the navigation character YM, the hold icon, and the change icon h0 are hidden, and the hold frame UI (left base icon bIl, four stages hs1 to hs4, and pedestal hs0 (hs0')) is displayed. , Right base icon bIr) may be displayed, or conversely, the navigation character YM, the hold icon, and the change icon h0 may all be displayed and the hold frame UI may be hidden.

In FIG. 75(A9), the navi character YM of the lord who has been standing facing the front until then turns to the variation icon h0 and changes into a pose in which the sword is pulled out and is standing. In FIG. 75 (A10), a wave is oscillated from the sword of the navi character YM of the lord, and in FIG. 75 (A11), the change icon h0 that was white until then changes to red. As described above, the variable icon in the red display mode has a considerably high expectation of the big hit in the currently displayed symbol variable display. In FIG. 75 (A12), the lord's navigation character YM has returned to the posture of standing in front. The lord's navigation character YM shown in FIG. 75 (A12) is still in the display mode of the red kimono, but may return to the default display mode (display mode of the dark blue kimono).

In FIG. 75 (A13), although not shown, the button effect is started. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the button image and the remaining time display meter are displayed, and when the operation valid period of the chance button 136 starts, the player can accept the operation of the chance button 136. In the remaining time display meter, the gauge decreases as the operation valid period starts. After that, when the chance button 136 is pressed within the operation valid period, a cut-in image of the lord is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208, and a notice effect is given to inform that the reliability of the big hit is high. The lord's cut-in image overlaps the animation display of the duel scene, and it is considered difficult to visually recognize it compared to the case where the lord's cut-in image is not displayed. The cut-in image of the lord may be displayed on condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or may be displayed even when the operation valid period has elapsed without operating the chance button 136. It may be one that is done.

After that, in the decorative design display device 208, the cut-in image of the lord is erased, the animation display of the duel scene continues, the button image and the remaining time display meter are displayed, and the button production for the second time after developing to super reach. Is started. After that, when the operation valid period of the chance button 136 starts, it becomes possible to accept the operation of the chance button 136 by the player.

In the remaining time display meter, the gauge decreases as the operation valid period starts. It should be noted that the operation valid period for the second button effect after developing to super reach may be shorter than the operation valid period for the first button effect after developing to super reach. In this case, the operation reaches super reach. After that, the speed at which the gauge in the remaining time display meter in the second button effect decreases may be faster than the speed in which the gauge in the remaining time display meter in the first button effect decreases after developing to super reach. Also, the operation valid period in the first button performance after developing to super reach may be shorter than the operation valid period in the second button performance after developing to super reach, or after developing to super reach. The operation valid period in the first button effect and the operation valid period in the second button effect after the development to the super reach may have the same length.

When the chance button 136 is pressed within the operation valid period, the decorative pattern display device 208 switches the animation display of the duel scene to the display of the effect image, and at the same time, the first large-scale behavior accessory shown in FIG. 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior accessory 224Gd operate, and each overlaps on the front surface side of the decorative pattern display device 208. The left pattern and the right pattern of the effect image and the first decorative pattern are respectively overlapped by the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral object 224Gd, and the first large board behavioral object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral object. It is considered to be difficult to visually recognize as compared with the case where it is not overlapped by 224 Gd. In addition, the second decorative symbol and the second number-of-holds display are also at least partially overlapped by the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga and the second large board behavior accessory 224Gb, respectively, and are difficult to visually recognize. It should be noted that only a part or all of the first large-board behavior auditors 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior auditors 224Gd may operate, and for example, the first large-board behavior auditors 224Ga to the second large-board behavior auditors 224Ga to 224Ga. The reliability may be different depending on the number of the 4 large-board behavior auditors 224Gd operating. The effect in which the first large board behavioral object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral object 224Gd operate may be displayed on condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or the chance button 136 is operated. It may be displayed even when the operation valid period elapses without any action. In addition, there may be a case where only one of the display of the effect image and the operation of the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior object 224Gd is performed. In addition, when both the display of the effect image and the operation of the first large-scale behavioral goods 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavioral goods 224Gd are performed, the first large-scale behavioral goods 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavioral goods 224Ga to the fourth after the effect images are displayed. The operation of the large-scale behavior accessory 224Gd may be started, the effect image may be displayed after the operations of the first large-scale behavior auditor 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior auditor 224Gd are started, or the effect image may be displayed. And the operation of the first large-scale behavioral accessory 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavioral accessory 224Gd may be started at the same time. Further, when the chance button 136 is pressed within the operation valid period, even if the effect display that causes the first large-board behavior auditor product 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior auditor product 224Gd to operate is not performed and is lost. It is also possible to display the revival effect and perform the effect display that is a big hit after the effect display that causes a loss is performed. It should be noted that, when the effect in which the first large board behavioral object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral object 224Gd operate is started, the displayed variation icon h0 is hidden, but may be continuously displayed.

After that, the thousand-box box accessory 224H shown in FIG. 14(a) moves and moves downward, and overlaps with the decorative symbol display device 208 and the first large-board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior accessory 224Gd. .. Further, thereafter, the light guide plate IL emits light. Note that the display of the effect image, the operations of the first large-board behavior auditors 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior auditors 224Gd, the operation of the thousand box cabinet auditors 224H, and the order of starting the light emission of the light guide plate IL are not limited to those described above. Instead, it can be set appropriately. In addition, all of the display of the effect image, the operation of the first large board action product 224Ga to the fourth large board action product 224Gd, the operation of the thousand-box action product 224H, and the light emission of the light guide plate IL may be performed. There may be cases where the division is not conducted.

After the light emission of the light guide plate IL is finished, the thousand box accessory 224H starts to rise toward the initial position. After that, the effect image fades out, and subsequently, the first large-scale behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior accessory 224Gd start moving toward the respective initial positions. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the animation display of the duel scene whose display has been interrupted is restarted while fading in. At this time, the display of the variable icon h0 is also restarted.

Thereafter, the animation display of the duel scene continues until FIG. 75 (A14-1). In FIG. 75 (A14-1), the scene after the swordsman and the swordsman slash each other is displayed.

The animation of the navigation character YM in FIGS. 75(a9) to (a12) corresponds to an effect (hereinafter, referred to as “change effect”) that changes the display mode of the variable icon h0. This change effect can be viewed as a part of the super reach effect, but can also be viewed as an effect different from the super reach effect that is started when the super reach effect is started. As the start timing of the change effect, in addition to the super reach effect, when the first decorative symbol changes at high speed, at the start of the symbol change, when the movement of the change icon h0 is completed, and when the prize is given to the special figure starting port (pending) When increasing), at the start of pre-reading notice at the time of winning, when a certain production is successful, at the first stop of the first decorative symbol, at the time of temporary stop or continuation (at the start of re-fluctuation) in the pseudo continuous production, at the start of the reach state. , The start of super reach, etc. can be listed. That is, the start timing of the change effect may be all of the above-listed timings. On the other hand, some of the items listed above may not be applied.

In addition, the timing of the change icon h0 also changes during super reach production, when the first decorative symbol changes at high speed, at the start of symbol change, when the change icon h0 has completed moving, and winning at the special figure start opening. At the time of increase (holding increase), at the start of pre-reading notice at the time of winning, at the time of certain production success, at the first stop of the first decorative pattern, at the time of temporary stop or continuation in the pseudo continuous production (at the time of re-variation start), reach The state start time, super reach start time, etc. can be listed. That is, the timing at which the variable icon h0 changes may be all of the above-listed timings. On the other hand, some of the items listed above may not be applied. Furthermore, the timing at which the variable icon h0 changes may overlap with the button effective period in the above-described button effect. It should be noted that the display mode of the variable icon may not be changed after a certain period of time during the super reach effect. The super reach effect described here is also a game effect, including a button effect, and is a kind of so-called final judge effect in which either the hero or the enemy wins. The display mode of the variable icon may not be changed after the result of the final judge effect is displayed. In addition, when an animation for changing the display mode of the variable icon is performed by the navigation character YM, the display mode of the variable icon h0 may be changed without fail, or there may be a failure. May be. That is, the change effect may be an effect that always changes the display mode of the variable icon h0, and a case where the display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed (successful) and a case where it is not changed (failed). There may be.

In addition, the change animation of the variable icon by the navigation character YM may not be performed in some cases. In that case, at the end of the super reach effect, the display mode of the variable icon h0 may change after the end screen of the super reach effect and the screen on which the decorative pattern is displayed are switched by the wipe. Further, the display mode of the navigation character YM may be returned to the default display mode (display mode of a dark blue kimono) after being switched by the wipe, and the navigation character YM may be used as a look-ahead notice of the next symbol variable display. The display mode as it is (the display mode of the red kimono) may be maintained.

In FIG. 75 (A15-1), a scene in which the enemy swordsman has fallen down and the main character, the lord, has won is displayed, and the lord's navigation character YM is also in a victory pose. However, the middle pattern is not displayed yet, and the middle pattern of "decoration 7" is displayed in the same figure (A16-1), but the red variable icon h0 is still displayed, and the second decoration The symbols are also displayed in a variable manner. Moreover, at the stage of the same figure (A16-1), each of the first decorative symbols (left middle right symbol) is temporarily stopped (swing fluctuation). In addition, in FIG. 75 (A15-1), an animation for a big hit by the hero of the protagonist may be executed.

Here, up to FIG. 75 (A15-1) before the middle pattern is displayed can be seen as a super reach effect, but the middle pattern is displayed and it seems that the victory has been finalized (A16-1). ) Can be seen as a super reach production, or can be further advanced and seen as a super reach production until just before the stop display is performed. Further, as described above, the super reach effect here corresponds to an example of the final judge effect, and until the result of the final judge effect is confirmed (for example, immediately before the stop display is performed), it is determined that the super reach effect is being executed. Good. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the animation display of the duel scene fades out, and the swing fluctuation is started with the combination of the decorative symbols of the first decorative symbol "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7". It should be noted that the second decorative design is still displayed in a variable manner for all of the left design, the middle design, and the right design. The background here may be a non-displayed background image, a background image different from that before the super reach is performed, or the same background image as before the super reach is performed. In addition, at this time, the variable icon h0 and the special icon 1 hold icon are not displayed, but the variable icon h0 and the special icon 1 hold icon may be displayed. Although the navigation character YM is not displayed, the navigation character YM may be displayed.

After that, the first special figure display device 212 (not shown) is displayed in the display mode of special figure A. Although the first special symbol display device 212 is stopped and displayed, the first sub-control unit 400 is in a state where it has not received the symbol variation stop command from the main control unit 300, so it is determined that the symbol is confirmed to be stopped. Because it is not, the swing fluctuation continues in the first decorative design, and the second decorative design and the fourth design display device 284 are still displaying the fluctuation.

After that, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol variation stop command, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7", respectively, and In the 4-symbol display device, the display is performed in a mode that the symbol has stopped.

After that, when the big hit game starts and the winning effect start command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400, the big hit start effect display is started on the decorative symbol display device 208.

During the super reach, both the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are displayed. Here, when the button effect, which is the final judge effect, is started, a part or all of the hold frame UI may be hidden or disappeared. For example, the right base icon bIr has been displayed until then, but the right base icon bIr may be hidden or disappeared when the final judge effect is started. Further, when the final judge effect is started, the variable icon h0 may be hidden or disappeared, or the navigation character YM may be hidden or disappeared. Both of the characters YM may be hidden or disappear. Further, when the hold icon is displayed until then, the hold icon may be configured to be hidden or disappear when the final judge effect is started. Further, other icons and mini-characters displayed in the effect icon display area DIS may also be configured to be hidden or disappear when the final judge effect is started, if they have been displayed until then.

As shown in FIG. 75(a2-1) instead of FIG. 75(a2-1), a balloon display such as "change!?" may be added to the lord's navigation character YM, or in the same figure(a-2). As shown in 2-3), a balloon display such as "preparing for change" may be added. Thereafter, returning to FIG. 75 (A3-1), the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display is displayed. The balloon display of the navigation character YM corresponds to the notice effect (precursor effect) of the start of the change notice display. That is, it is a notice such as "change!?" that indicates that the navigation character itself may change, or the navigation character is about to change ("preparing for change" is displayed, such as "preparing for change". It may be a notice indicating that the change will always occur within the fluctuation or after the fluctuation in which "Preparing for change" is displayed.

Further, as shown in (a 3-2-1) of FIG. 75 (a 3-1), the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display is once displayed in the effect icon display area DIS, and again. In some cases, the carpet icon I2 may appear and the treasure chest icon I1 may fly on the carpet icon I2. In this case, the display mode of the navigation character YM does not change and corresponds to a so-called failure pattern.

Further, as shown in (a4-2) of FIG. 75 instead of (a-4-1) of FIG. 75, the smoke image may be red. Depending on the type of change animation in the change notice display, the manner and easiness of change of the navigation character YM may be announced in advance. In the case of FIG. 75 (A4-2), it is previously announced that the navigation character YM may change to a display mode wearing a kimono of the same color as smoke. In addition, depending on the type of change animation in the change notice display, the degree of expectation of the change or the big hit in the hold may be announced.

Further, as shown in FIG. 75 (A 5-1) instead of FIG. 75 (A 5-2), the color of the kimono of the navigation character YM may not change but the navigation character YM itself may become large. .. As described above, the change in the display mode of the navigation character YM may be a change in size or a change in shape (for example, a pose) in addition to the change in color. The color of the kimono of the enlarged navigation character YM shown in FIG. 75 (A 5-2) may be dark blue (default color) or may be changed to red. A part of the enlarged navigation character YM shown in FIG. 75 (A 5-2) overlaps a part of the treasure box icon I1 from the front side. In addition, a part of the navigation character YM may overlap the entire treasure box icon I1 from the front side. Alternatively, at least part of the treasure box icon I1 may overlap with at least part of the enlarged navigation character YM from the front side.

Further, as a probability of changing the variation icon h0, that is, a degree of expectation of a big hit, a larger display mode with a default color is higher than a smaller display mode with a default color, and a smaller display mode with a red color, The larger display in red may be higher. In addition, as long as the size and the color, the color may be prioritized, and for example, the display mode in which the color is small may be higher than the display mode in which the default color is large. Alternatively, on the contrary, the size may be prioritized, and for example, the display mode in which the default color is large may be higher than the display mode in which the red color is small. Further, the size (display size) of the navigation character YM may be large or small, and may be a plurality of sizes such as an intermediate size.

When the navigation character YM is in the display mode wearing a red kimono, the change icon h0 changes to red, and when the navigation character YM is in the display mode wearing a gold kimono, the change icon h0 changes to gold and the rainbow. In the case of a display mode in which a colored kimono is worn, the change icon h0 may change to a rainbow color. Further, when the navigation character YM is in a display mode wearing a red kimono, the variation icon h0 may easily change to a color (red, gold, rainbow) whose expectation of a big hit is red or more. That is, if the change of the change icon h0 is successful, it may be determined that the color changes to red or more, or that the color itself changes to red or more. However, even when the navigation character YM is in a display mode wearing a red kimono, the expectation of a big hit may change to a color below red (green, blue, white blinking, white). Further, when the navigation character YM is in a display mode wearing a rainbow-colored kimono, which is a premier color, the color of the variable icon h0 may also be changed to rainbow. That is, when the navigation character YM is in a display mode wearing a rainbow-colored kimono, it means that the direct display of the navigation character YM is a direct big hit, and the navigation character YM is in another color. When the display mode of wearing a kimono (for example, red) is changed, if the display mode of the variable icon changes, it is easy for the player to hit the big jackpot. It can be reported indirectly.

Further, the navigation character YM may change the variable icon h0 even when the display mode has not changed. Alternatively, the change icon h0 may be changed only when the display mode changes. Furthermore, the character of the main character is a so-called constantly displayed character, but the navigation character YM that changes the variable icon h0 may be a character that is displayed only when the variable icon h0 is changed. It may also be a character that is displayed only when giving a notice. Further, the character set by the player in the character selection in the customization described above may be used as the character that changes the variable icon h0, or only the character set by the player in the character selection in the customization is the variable icon. You may make it usable as a character which changes h0.
FIG. 76 is a diagram showing a modification of the example shown in FIG. 75.

75 (A6-1), 76 (A6-2-1) to (A6-2-3) of FIG. 76, and a change notice display to return to FIG. 75 (A7). The navigation character YM may change a plurality of times until the icon I1 of the treasure box, which is, is hidden. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 76 (A 6-2-1) is a red kimono, whereas the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 76 (A 6-2-2) is a gold kimono. Note that the treasure box icon I1 may disappear once and may be newly displayed. Further, the change notice display may be displayed over a plurality of changes. In this case, the treasure chest icon I1 repeats opening and closing.

Further, following FIG. 75 (A 6-1), a change animation as shown in FIG. 76 (A 6-3-1) to FIG. 76 (A 6-3-2) may be displayed. That is, the navigation character YM may be further promoted by a notice (here, the UFO icon UFI) different from the change notice display. In FIG. 76 (A6-3-2) and subsequent FIG. (A6-3-3a), a gold beam is emitted from the flying UFO icon UFI toward the navigation character YM wearing a red kimono. As shown in FIG. 76 (A 6-3-4a), the navigation character YM has changed to a display mode wearing a gold kimono. Alternatively, in FIG. 76 (A 6-3-2) and subsequent FIG. (A 6-3-3b), a gray beam from the flying UFO icon UFI is directed toward the navigation character YM wearing a red kimono. The navigation character YM is illuminated and is enlarged while wearing a red kimono as shown in FIG. 76 (A 6-3-4b).

Although the promotion has been described here, there may be a case where the navigation character YM does not change even when the beam is emitted (a so-called failure pattern), or when the beam is emitted, the default display mode, There may be a display mode in which a blue kimono is worn, or a case in which the size is reduced (when demoted).

Further, FIG. 76 (A14-2-1) may be displayed following FIG. 75 (A14-1) which is a scene after the swordsman and the swordsman slash each other in the super reach production. That is, as the middle symbol, "decoration 6" different from the left and right symbols ("decoration 7") is displayed large (swing display), and in the same figure (14-2-2), the left symbol, the middle symbol, the right symbol. All the decorative symbols of the design are once displayed lighter than the normal darkness. Also, in the figure, a scene in which the lord has fallen is displayed. In FIG. 76 (A 14-2-3), all the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are displayed again in the normal darkness, and in the same figure (A 14-2-4), the wipe effect is displayed. Then, the effect scene (effect display) of the super reach is switched to the normal background (the background before the start of the super reach effect shown in FIG. 75 (A1) and the like). In the wipe effect, as shown in FIG. 76 (A 14-2-5), the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 temporarily becomes a wipe display of the same color without a pattern. In this wipe display, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM disappear, and the second decorative symbol and the second hold number display are displayed. The model title is displayed in the left corner. The variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM may also be displayed. In FIG. 76 (A14-2-6), the wipeout is performed, the background is returned to the normal background, and the display mode of the navigation character YM is also returned to the default display mode. The display mode of the navigation character YM may be returned to the default display mode at the start of the wipe effect (timing of FIG. 76 (14-2-4)). In FIG. 76 (A 14-2-7), the wipe effect is finished, and the decoration pattern display device 208 swayingly displays “decoration 7”-“decoration 6”-“decoration 7”, which is a combination of losses. There is. Further, the hold frame UI is also displayed, and the variable icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 are also displayed. The variable icon h0 shown in FIG. 76 (a 14-2-7) remains in the red display mode, but may be returned to the default display mode, or the variable icon h0 itself may be deleted. Good. On the other hand, the display mode of the navigation character YM may be the same as the display mode wearing a red kimono. In this example, the display that returns from the state where the display state of the navigation character changes to the default state cannot be visually recognized because the navigation character is hidden, but the display that returns from the state where the display state of the navigation character changes to the default state May be visible. (For example, a display in which the state in which the display mode of the navigation character is changed is switched to a default state, an animation display in which the state in which the display mode of the navigation character is changed is returned to the default state, and the like are included.)

At the time of wipeout (FIG. 76 (A 14-2-6) to FIG. 76 (A 14-2-7)), the variable icon h0 and/or the navigation character YM are displayed, but not displayed. There may be a case, and when it is displayed, the revival effect may be performed more easily than when it is not displayed. Alternatively, when it is displayed, the revival effect may be performed without fail, and when it is not displayed, the revival effect may or may not be performed.

Furthermore, in FIG. 76 (A 14-2-1) to FIG. 76 (A 14-2-3), although a part of the holding frame UI (the pedestal hs0′ and the right base icon bIr) is displayed, the holding frame is displayed. The entire UI may be hidden, or only a part of the UI may be hidden. Further, the variable icon h0 may be hidden or the navigation character YM may be hidden. Alternatively, both the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM may be hidden. Further, when the hold icon has been displayed until then, the hold icon may also be hidden. Further, other icons and mini characters displayed in the effect icon display area DIS may be hidden if they have been displayed so far.
77 is a diagram showing another modification of the example shown in FIG.

77 (A16-2-1) to FIG. 77 (A16-2-2) may be displayed subsequent to FIG. 75 (A16-1). That is, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 77 (A 16-2-2), the entire screen is beginning to become thin. After that, the screen may disappear once in the re-lottery effect and the screen shown in FIG. 77 (A 16-2-1) (screen to win the lord's victory) may be displayed again, or the screen in FIG. 75 (A 14-2-3). ) Screen (screen of defeat) is displayed, or, as shown in the same figure (A16-2-3), in the normal background, a combination of decorative patterns (in the case of a combination of big hits or a loss of A screen may be displayed in which (there may be a combination) is shaken.

Further, even on the screen that is re-displayed, the navigation character YM and the variable icon h0 are displayed, and if the display mode of the navigation character YM or/and the variable icon h0 is a red display mode, an advantageous jackpot determination (for example, the probability change A big hit or a big hit with a long number of rounds) may be confirmed. Alternatively, if the display mode has not changed, the advantageous jackpot is not confirmed, but if the display mode is promoted, the advantageous jackpot may be confirmed, or the display mode is a golden or iridescent premium. , The advantageous jackpot may be definite.

77(I1) to FIG. 77(I12) are diagrams showing an example in which the navigation character YM is displayed across a plurality of fluctuations and also functions as a prefetching notice.

In FIG. 77 (I1), a navigation character YM in a display mode wearing a red kimono is displayed. Further, the first decorative pattern is changing at high speed, and the changing icon h0 in the default display mode is displayed. Further, two special reservations 1 are reserved, and the first reservation icon h11 and the second reservation icon h12 are displayed. Both the two hold icons h11 and h12 are default display modes.

In FIG. 77 (B2), the variable display of symbols is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols that have been lost. The navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono remains displayed. In FIG. 77 (I3), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is exhausted and the variable display of symbols is started. Even when the next symbol variable display is started, the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono remains displayed.

In FIG. 77 (I4-1), the change animation of the change icon h0 using the navigation character YM is started. In other words, the lord's navigation character YM, which had been standing upright to the front (initial posture), changes to the pose in which the sword is pulled out while facing the variable icon h0. In FIG. 77(15), the sword of the lord's navigation character YM oscillates, but in FIG. 77(B6), the change icon h0 is displayed in the default mode, and the change effect ends in failure. There is. In FIG. 77 (B7), the variable display of symbols is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed with the combination of decorative symbols that are lost. The navigation character YM in a display mode wearing a red kimono is displayed again in the initial posture.

In FIG. 77 (B8), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is exhausted, and the variable display of symbols is started again. Even when the third symbol variable display is started, the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono remains displayed. In FIG. 77(B9), the change animation of the change icon h0 using the navigation character YM is restarted. In FIG. 77 (11), the change icon h0 that was white until then has changed to red, and the normal notice has started. In FIG. 12B, the navigation character YM has returned to the initial posture with the display mode wearing a red kimono. After that, although not shown in the drawing, the big hit symbol is fixedly displayed in the symbol variation display currently performed.

Further, instead of FIG. 77 (YES 4-1), in FIG. 77 (YES 4-2-1), the navigation character YM moves from the effect icon display area DIS to the hold icon display area HIS during the symbol variable display. In the same figure (I 4-2-2), the change animation for the hold icon has started. The movement of the navigation character YM may be an animation, or the display position may be switched instantaneously. Further, when the navigation character YM goes out of the effect icon display area DIS, another display (for example, a “business trip on a signboard” is displayed at the position (initial position) where the navigation character YM was displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. The icon display described as “medium”) may be displayed.

There may be a case where the change effect on the hold icon by the navigation character YM fails (when the display mode of the hold icon does not change), or conversely, even if it always succeeds (the display mode of the hold icon changes). Good. Also, the change effect may be performed only on the hold icon to be read ahead. For example, only when the number of holdings is 1, the first holding icon h11 may be targeted, or a plurality of holding icons (which may include a variable icon) may be targeted. Furthermore, the change effect for the hold icon by the navigation character YM may be performed any number of times until the display mode changes (until it succeeds) with respect to the prefetch target hold, or may not be performed again after one failure. ..

Further, the change effect may be performed again for the hold icon whose display mode has once changed due to the change effect. This is not limited to the hold icon, and the same applies to the variable icon h0.

Furthermore, in the change effect for the variable icon h0, the navigation character YM may be moved from the effect icon display area DIS. Further, the navigation character YM may move within the effect icon display area DIS even if it does not come out of the effect icon display area DIS. Further, the navigation character YM may be movable only within the holding frame UI, or may be movable outside the holding frame UI.

In this example, the change animation of the change icon h0 using the navigation character YM is performed every time from the next change after the change in which the color of the navigation character YM is red to the change of the prefetch target suspension. There may be a change in which no change animation is performed between the change following the change in which the color of the navigation character YM is red and the change in the prefetch target. Also, a change animation may be performed for a change in which the navigation character YM becomes red.

FIG. 78 is a diagram illustrating an example of a combination of the change effect of the hold icon and the change effect of the variable icon by the navigation character YM.

In FIG. 78 (1), the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed in the initial posture. Further, the first decorative pattern is changing at high speed, and the changing icon h0 in the default display mode is displayed. Further, two special reservations 1 are reserved, and the first reservation icon h11 and the second reservation icon h12 are displayed. Both the two hold icons h11 and h12 are default display modes.

In FIG. 78 (2), the effect icon (here, the UFO icon UFI) appears outside the holding frame UI and approaches the holding frame UI. The effect icon may appear in the hold frame UI. As shown in FIG. 78 (v3), a white beam is emitted from the UFO icon UFI toward the second hold icon h12, and the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is changed as shown in FIG. 78 (v4). , The default display mode is changed to a white flashing display mode. That is, promotion production has succeeded. There are multiple types of effect icons, and the success probability of promotion effect may change depending on the effect icon that appears. For example, when the first effect icon appears, the promotion effect may be surely successful, and when the second effect icon appears, the promotion effect may be 80% or more successful. When the third effect icon appears, the promotion effect may be less than 50% successful. In FIG. 78 (v 4), the UFO icon UFI has disappeared. In FIG. 78 (v 5), the three decorative symbols are in a temporary stop state. In FIG. 78 (6), the variable display of symbols is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed with the combination of decorative symbols that are lost. The navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed in the initial posture. In FIG. 78 (e7), the suspension of the first suspension icon h11 is exhausted, and the variable display of symbols is started. In the same figure (e8), the first decorative symbol is changing rapidly. Even when the next symbol variation display is started, the navigation character YM in the default display mode is still displayed in the initial posture.

In FIG. 78 (v 9), the navigation character YM in the default display mode changes to a bow-drawing pose, and promotion of the hold icon by the navigation character YM is started. The promotion effect here is also an animation display. In FIG. 78 (u10), an arrow is fired, the arrow flies over the variation icon h0, and in FIG. 78 (u11), it hits the first hold icon h11 which is a white blinking display mode, In FIG. 12C, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from white blinking to blue display mode, and the promotion effect is successful. Note that the promotion effect here may also fail (when the display mode of the hold icon does not change) or, conversely, may always succeed (change the display mode of the hold icon). Further, only when the number of holdings is one, the first holding icon h11 may be targeted, or a plurality of holding icons (which may include variable icons) may be targeted. Furthermore, the promotion effect may be performed any number of times until the display mode changes (until it succeeds) with respect to the prefetch target suspension, or may not be performed again after one failure. Further, the promotion effect may be performed again for the hold icon whose display mode has once changed due to the promotion effect. The promotion effect by the navigation character may be an effect that is displayed only for one of the hold icons even if a plurality of hold icons are displayed (that is, the position of the hold icon A moves as the number of hold decreases. However, the promotion effect is performed by the navigation character only for the hold icon A.), and the effect may be performed for a plurality of hold icons and/or variable icons displayed in the hold icon display area. .. In FIG. 78 (13), the navigation character YM returns to the initial posture, and in FIG. 78 (14), the variable display of symbols is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the combination of lost decorative symbols as stopped. Has been done. The navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed in the initial posture. In FIG. 78 (15), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is exhausted, and the variable display of symbols is started. In the same FIG. (U16), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed. Even when the next symbol variation display is started, the navigation character YM in the default display mode is still displayed in the initial posture. The change icon h0 is an icon that has changed from the first hold icon h11 that has changed to the blue display mode in the promotion effect, and is also displayed on the pedestal hs0 in the blue display mode.

In FIG. 78 (u17), the change box display treasure box icon I1 appears on the carpet icon I2 in the effect icon display area DIS, and in FIG. 78 (u17), the carpet icon I2 disappears and the treasure box is displayed. Icon I1 of remains. In FIG. 78 (e 19), the change animation is started, the treasure box is opened, and the smoke image of the effect appears from the inside, and the smoke image hides part or all of the navigation character YM, and the navigation character YM. Is clearly harder to see than before the smoke image appeared. In FIG. 78 (e 20-1), the smoke image disappears, and the navigation character YM changes from the default display mode to the display mode wearing a red kimono. The treasure box icon I1 disappears at the timing of FIG. 78 (e21), and only the navi character YM of the lord wearing a red kimono is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. The color of the display mode of the navigation character YM represents the reliability (expectation) of the big hit in the currently displayed symbol variation display. Alternatively, it may represent the ease of change (promotion) of the display mode of the variable icon. Further, although the hold icon is not displayed here, when the hold icon is displayed, it may indicate the ease of changing the display mode of the hold icon (promotion).

In FIG. 78 (C23), a reach state is entered, and in FIG. 78 (C24), a super reach effect is developed. When developing to the super reach effect, in the hold frame UI, the left base icon bIl and the four stages hs1 to hs4 in the hold icon display area HIS disappear, and when the hold icon remains, the hold icon also disappears. Also, in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 78 (e), the right base icon bIr disappears, and the foot portion of the navi character YM of the lord wearing a red kimono disappears. Further, although the pedestal in the variable icon display area CIS is sinking, the variable icon h0 in the blue display mode is displayed. In FIG. 78 (25) during super reach, the navigation character YM disappears completely, and the variable icon h0 in a blue display mode is displayed on the lowered pedestal hs0′. Although the navigation character YM has disappeared here, it may be displayed as in the example shown in FIG. 75. Further, both the pedestal hs0′ and the variation icon h0 may disappear, or only one of them may disappear.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Fig. 78 (27-1), as a continuation of the super reach effect, a duel scene in which the main character and the enemy swordsman face each other is displayed on the background screen h of the wilderness. .. Again, both the pedestal hs0' and the variation icon h0 are displayed.
79 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 78 and a modified example.

In FIG. 79 (e 29), all of the decorative symbols of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are displayed lighter than the normal darkness, and the scene in which the lord has fallen is displayed. Again, both the pedestal hs0' and the variation icon h0 are displayed. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 79 (v30), the super reach effect ends, the display returns to the normal background, the second decorative pattern and the second hold number display, and the pedestal hs0′ and the variable icon h0 are displayed. There is. In FIG. 79 (u 31), the display of the left symbol and the right symbol is restored, and the pedestal that has been sunk until now begins to rise with the fluctuation icon h0. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 79 (C32), the combination of decorative symbols is displayed in a shaking manner, and the holding frame UI is also re-displayed. The navigation character YM is displayed in the default display mode.

In addition, in place of FIG. 78 (v 20-1), in FIG. 79 (v 20-2), the navigation character YM is changed to a display mode wearing a premier iridescent kimono. In this case, since the display mode of the navigation character YM is iridescent regardless of the display mode (color) of the variable icon h0, the big hit is confirmed. The display mode of the variable icon may be changed to a display mode of red or more, or may be changed to a premier rainbow color. When the navigation character YM functions as a pre-reading notice, the display mode of the pre-reading target hold icon may be changed to a display mode of red or more, or may be changed to a premier rainbow color.

In addition, instead of FIG. 78 (v 27-1), in FIG. 79 (v 27-2), the right base icon bIr is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS, and further, the navigation mode of the display mode wearing a red kimono. The character YM is displayed. The navigation character YM displayed here is displayed and does not have to do anything. Alternatively, the navigation character YM itself may promote its own display mode or change the display mode of the variable icon. Alternatively, the navigation character YM may be changed by another notice display.

Here, the notice by the effect icon (here, the UFO icon UFI) and/or the change notice display (here, the treasure box icon I1) is displayed before one decorative symbol (for example, the left symbol) is temporarily stopped. It is configured such that, after one decorative design is temporarily stopped, the effect icon and/or the change notice display is not used to give a notice, but one decorative design is temporarily stopped. The effect icon and/or the change notice display may be displayed after that. Although it is described as one decorative design, it may be a plurality of decorative designs or all decorative designs. Further, while the design (variable display by the special symbol display device) is completely stopped, the effect icon and/or the change notice display does not give a notice, but it may be done.

79(e1) to FIG. 79(e4-1) are examples in which the navigation character YM itself changes its own display mode.

In FIG. 79(e1), the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed in the initial posture. Further, the first decorative pattern is changing at high speed, and the changing icon h0 in the default display mode is displayed. Furthermore, the default first hold icon h11 is displayed.

In FIG. 79 (e2), the pose of the navigation character YM is changed and the hand holding the fan is raised. In FIG. 79 (e3-1), the navigation character YM itself is wrapped in a gray smoke image, which makes it difficult to see. ing.

Also, instead of FIG. 79 (e 3-1), in the same figure (e 3-2), the navigation character YM itself is wrapped in a red smoke image, and thereafter, the navigation character YM is in a red kimono. Changes to the display mode wearing. In this way, the change animation itself may give advance notice of the display mode (color) in which the navigation character YM changes. Further, the red smoke image may be a notice display for announcing that the display mode will be changed to red or more if the change of the navigation character is successful, and it is determined that the display mode is changed to red or more. It may be a notice display.

Also, instead of FIG. 79 (e 3-1), in the same figure (e 3-3), the navigation character YM itself is wrapped in a rainbow-colored smoke image, and the variable display of the pattern currently being performed, or After that, the big hit is confirmed (may be rich big hit) in the pattern variation display started. In this way, the change animation itself may give the advance notice or the advance notice. It should be noted that the rainbow-colored smoke image may be a notification that the change to the rainbow-colored display mode will be made if the change of the navigation character is successful. In this case, even if the rainbow-colored smoke image is displayed, It is not necessary that the pattern variation in which the smoke image of the color is displayed and/or the pending state is a big hit determination (may be a big hit concentration).

Further, in FIG. 79 (e 4-2) instead of FIG. 79 (e 4-1), the navigation character is changed to another navi character. Here, it has been changed to a princess navigation character. The type of changing character may be a character set by the player in the character selection in the customization described above, or may be only a character set by the player in the character selection in the customization.

Further, in FIG. 79 (e 4-2) instead of FIG. 79 (e 4-2), the navi character is changed to a navi character (for example, a bancho character) that cannot be selected by the player. It should be noted that the bancho navi character may be configured such that the promotion effect of the hold icon and/or the change icon is easier to perform than the nav character YM, or the change and/or hold of the symbol in which the navi character has changed. It may be configured to have a high expectation of a big hit.

It should be noted that the navigation character of Hime (bancho) may be configured so that the promotion effect of the hold icon and/or the variation icon may be performed more easily than the navigation character YM, and the variation of the symbol in which the navigation character has changed and It may be configured to have a high expectation of a big hit in the hold, or configured to easily (or inevitably) generate a notice and/or super reach effect that a princess (bancho) appears. It may be.

When the navigation character YM is changed to another navigation character, the navigation character YM may be changed to only a navigation character that the player can select, and the player is changed to a non-selectable navigation character. It may be configured, and there may be both a case where the player is changed to a selectable navigation character and a case where the player is changed to a non-selectable navigation character. In both cases where the player is changed to a selectable navigation character and when the player is changed to a non-selectable navigation character, the player selects the navigation character that is selectable by the player. The non-navi character may be configured such that the promotion effect of the hold icon and/or the change icon is more likely to be performed, and the expectation of a change in the pattern in which the navigation character changes and/or a big hit in the hold is higher. It may be configured as follows. On the other hand, in both cases where the player is changed to a selectable navigation character and when the player is changed to a non-selectable navigation character, the player plays more than the non-selectable navigation character. The navigation character that can be selected by the person may be configured so that the promotion effect of the hold icon and/or the change icon can be performed more easily, and the change of the navigation character and/or the expectation of a big hit in the hold state It may be configured to be highly flexible.

Further, instead of FIG. 79 (e 4-1), in FIG. 79 (e 4-4), the character does not change, and the change effect of the character itself has failed.

In this example, the navigation character YM itself changes the display mode of the navigation character YM by itself, and the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display is not entangled, but depending on the color of the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display. The display mode (color) in which the navigation character YM changes may be announced. For example, when the red treasure box icon I1 appears, it may be decided that the navigation character YM changes to red or a display mode of red or more.

Further, depending on the color of the treasure box icon I1, the degree of expectation of a big hit in the currently displayed symbol variation display or in the symbol variation display started thereafter may be announced. That is, the normal notice or the prefetch notice may be given depending on the color of the icon I1 of the treasure box.
FIG. 80 is a diagram showing an example of an effect in which the holding frame is temporarily invisible.

The background of the sea is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 80 (1). The navigation character YM in the initial posture shown in FIG. 80 (1) is the default display mode. Further, the first decorative pattern is changing at high speed, and the changing icon h0 in the default display mode is displayed. Further, two special reservations 1 are reserved, and the first reservation icon h11 and the second reservation icon h12 are displayed. Both the two hold icons h11 and h12 are default display modes.

In FIG. 80 (2), the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is increased, and the third holding icon h13 is additionally displayed. This third hold icon h13 is also a default display mode.

In FIG. 80 (4), the variable display of the symbols is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed the combination of the decorative symbols that are lost. The navigation character YM in the default display mode remains displayed in the initial posture. The background of the sea is still displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 80 (4).

In FIG. 80 (5), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is exhausted and the variable display of symbols is started. On the decorative design display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative design has started, and the background of the sea is still displayed.

In FIG. 80 (6), a background change notice, which is a type of prefetch notice, is started. The target of the background change notice here (pre-reading target suspension) is the suspension increased at the timing of FIG. 80 (2) (second suspension at this timing). In the background change notice, a sliding door image appears from the left and right, and the entire sliding screen becomes a sliding door image due to the animation in which the sliding door is closed (see FIG. 80 (7)). Therefore, the holding frame UI, the holding icons h11 and h12, the variation icon h0, and the navigation character YM are overlapped from the front side by the image of the sliding doors and are invisible. Instead of the fusuma image, an image that overlaps the holding frame UI, the holding icons h11 and h12, the variation icon h0, and a part of the navigation character YM from the front side may appear. Alternatively, the hold frame UI, the hold icons h11 and h12, the change icon h0, and the navigation character YM may be rendered such that no images overlap.

The background change notice may be started at the time of winning the prefetch target suspension (timing of FIG. 80 (2)). In this example, it is started during the next change of the winning change, but it is not limited to the next change, and it may be started before the change of the prefetch target suspension ends. For example, the same background as the background change notice may be displayed at the start of the change of the prefetch target suspension.

In the background change notice, the appearance image (here, the image of the sliding door) may indicate the expectation of the jackpot of the prefetch target, or if the navigation character YM of the same color as the sliding door appears. , Functions as an advance notice that the navigation character YM changes, and corresponds to a change advance notice display. It may also function as a notice of the background itself, such as the case where the color of the fusuma is green, which changes to the background of the mountains. Further, a plurality of types of background change notices may be prepared.

In FIG. 80(8), the sliding doors are opened, and the holding frame UI, the holding icons h11 and h12, the variable icon h0, and the navigation character YM start to be seen. In FIG. 80(8), the sliding doors are completely opened and the sliding door images are Disappeared. Due to the background change notice, the background of the decorative pattern display device 208 has changed to the night background. In addition, the navigation character YM after the background change has changed to a character that depends on the changed background. Here, the lord's character has changed to a robot character. In this example, one type of character corresponds to one type of background, but a plurality of types of characters may correspond to one type of background.

In FIG. 80 (11), the reach state is entered. In addition, the display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed from the default display mode to the red display mode between FIG. 80 (9-1) and FIG. 80 (11). Note that the display mode of the variable icon h0 may change from the default display mode to a red display mode when the reach state is entered. Although the hold frame UI is displayed, all hold icons h11 and h12 have disappeared. After that, it developed into super reach production, and changed to the background of the super reach production (here, the background of the wilderness). On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 80 (13), the scene where the lord is defeated is displayed in the background of the wilderness. In addition, the navigation character YM of the robot overlaps with the fallen lord, making it difficult to see.

In FIG. 80 (14), the wipe effect is started, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is in the wipe display by the wipe-in. As shown in FIG. 80 (15), in the wipe display here, neither the variable icon h0 nor the navigation character YM disappears, and further, the second decorative symbol and the second hold number display disappear, and the model title is displayed in the left corner. Is only displayed. In FIG. 80 (16), the wipeout is performed and the background returns to the background of the night, and the navigation character YM is also beginning to be seen.

In FIG. 80 (17), the wipe effect is finished, and the decorative pattern display device 208 sways and displays the combination of “decoration 7”-“decoration 6”-“decoration 7”. Further, the hold frame UI is also displayed, and the variable icon h0 in the red display mode and the hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed again.

In FIG. 80 (eighteen), the variable display of symbols is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displays "decoration 7"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 7", which is a combination of lost characters.

After that, the first hold is exhausted, and after the lost symbol is stopped and displayed, the next symbol variable display is started as shown in FIG. 80 (20-1). In the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative symbol has been started, and the symbol variation of the prefetch target suspension has ended, but the background remains the night background.

In FIG. 80 (21), the background change notice is started again, the sliding door image appears from the left and right, and the sliding window is closed again by the animation of closing the sliding door (FIG. 80 (22)). reference). In FIG. 80 (23), the sliding doors are opened, and the hold frame UI, the holding icons h11 and h12, the variable icon h0, and the navigation character YM start to be seen. In the same drawing (24), the sliding doors are completely opened and the sliding door images are Disappeared. As shown in FIG. 80 (24), the background of the decorative symbol display device 208 has returned to the background of the sea, and the navigation character YM has also returned to the lord's character.

In addition, instead of FIG. 80 (9-1), in FIG. 80 (9-2), the display mode of the navigation character YM of the robot is changed to a display mode different from the default. The display mode (for example, color, shape, size, etc.) of the background-dependent character may also change according to the reliability of the big hit. Alternatively, it may have changed originally.

It should be noted that the navigation character YM may change depending on the effect background regardless of the background of the prefetching notice. For example, when a coastal background, a castle town background, and a castle background appear in order, the navigation character YM may be changed depending on each background. Note that the appearance order of the plurality of types of backgrounds may be random. Also, when the player changes the effect mode, the navigation character YM may change depending on the background change. Also, a navigation character different from the navigation character depending on the effect background may be displayed. For example, when the navigation character A is displayed on the effect background A and the navigation character B is displayed on the effect background B, the navigation character B may be displayed on the effect background A. Here, when the navigation character that does not match the effect background is displayed, the promotion effect of the hold icon and/or the variable icon is more easily performed than when the navigation character that matches the effect background is displayed. It may be configured such that the navigation character has a changed symbol variation and/or the expectation of a big hit in the hold is high (or a big hit is confirmed (may be a big hit rich)). It may be configured such that a notice that a navigation character that does not match the background appears and/or a super-reach effect occurs frequently (or always occurs).

On the contrary, the type of the navigation character YM may not change even if the background is changed, or may not change absolutely.

FIG. 81 is a diagram showing an example of an effect in which a plurality of navigation characters YM appear in the effect icon display area DIS.

In FIG. 81 (or 1), the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed in the initial posture. Further, the first decorative pattern is changing at high speed, and the changing icon h0 in the default display mode is displayed. Furthermore, the default first hold icon h11 is displayed.

In FIG. 81 (or 2-1), a speech balloon of a line for calling a friend is additionally displayed on the navigation character YM. The display of the balloon corresponds to a notice made by the currently displayed navigator character YM that another character (grandpa or princess) will be displayed. In the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 81 (or 3-1), in addition to the lord's navigation character YM, the display of the princess navigation character YM1 is added, and the princess is successfully called. The appearance of the princess character may be an animation display or may be a mode in which the character appears momentarily. In the case of an animation display, the smoke image may be an animation in which the character is not initially visible, or may be an animation that appears by walking from the right end of the screen. This princess navigation character YM1 is also a default display mode.

In FIG. 81 (or 4), the variable display of the symbols is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed the combination of the decorative symbols that are lost. Both the default navigator character YM and the princess navigator character YM1, which are default display modes, are displayed in the initial posture. In FIG. 81 (or 5), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is exhausted, and the variable display of symbols is started. Even when the next symbol variation display is started, the two navigation characters YM and YM1 are still displayed. In this way, the display of the plurality of navigation characters may span multiple variations. However, in the symbol variable display in which the navigation character YM1 has appeared, the navigation character YM1 that has appeared may disappear. Even in this case, the previously displayed navigation character (here, the lord's navigation character YM) is displayed over a plurality of variations.

In FIG. 81 (or 5), this time, a balloon of a line that calls a grandfather is additionally displayed on the two navigation characters YM and YM1, and in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 81 (or 6-1), In addition to the two navigation characters YM and YM1, the display of the grandpa navigation character YM2 is added, and the grandpa is successfully called. In other words, this means that all three have been completed. In this effect, the more the number of navigation characters gathered, the higher the probability that the change icon h0 would change, the higher the probability of changing the color to a premier or a color close to the premier, and the higher the expectation of a big hit in the change. It may become higher or the expectation of a big hit after the next change may be higher. In addition, when all three people are gathered, the iridescent color of the premiere or the big hit may be decided. In FIG. 81 (or 7-1), the first decorative symbol is in a reach state in a state where all three persons are gathered, and “decoration 7” is shaken and displayed (temporarily stopped) for both the left symbol and the right symbol.

Further, instead of FIG. 81 (or 2-1), in FIG. 81 (or 2-2-1), a notice other than the navigation character YM itself is given. That is, in FIG. 81 (or 2-1), the dialogue of the navigation character YM is a notice, but in this example, the roulette display icon RI is additionally displayed in the effect icon display area DIS, and the roulette notice is started. .. The roulette notice here may be dedicated to the notice of the appearance of another navigation character, or may be another notice (such as a notice of a pending change). In FIG. 81 (or 2-2), the princess character is displayed on the roulette display icon RI. After that, the navigator character YM1 of the princess may appear, but there may be a case where no navigator character appears (a so-called failure), or a different navigator character (for example, the grandpa navigator character YM2). It may appear in some cases. The roulette display icon RI is configured so that the characters of the characters that have already appeared are not displayed, but the characters of the characters that have already appeared may appear. In that case, a plurality of the same characters may be displayed according to the number of characters displayed on the roulette display icon RI (for example, when the princess character is stopped and displayed three times on the roulette display icon RI, the navigation character of the princess is displayed. Depending on the number of characters displayed on the roulette display icon RI, three characters may be promoted to the characters that have already appeared (for example, the princess character is 3 on the roulette display icon RI). When the stop is displayed, the princess appears at the first time, the princess's kimono changes to red at the second time, the princess's kimono changes to gold at the third time, etc.).

Further, instead of FIG. 81 (or 3-1), as shown in FIG. 81 (or 3-2), no navigation character may appear and the operation may fail.

Also, instead of FIG. 81 (or 3-1), in FIG. 81 (or 3-3), the old navigation character YM2 appears instead of the princess navigation character YM1. In this way, the order of appearance is not fixed, and different animations may be performed depending on the navigation characters displayed next to each other. For example, in FIG. 81 (or 3-1), the navigator character YM of the lord thought that the navigator character YM1 of the princess came, but the navigator character YM2 of the grandpa came and an astonished animation is displayed. The grandfather may come before the princess in the premiere production. Depending on the order in which the characters appear, the changing probability of the change icon h0 changes, the probability of changing the color to a premier or a color close to the premier changes, the expectation of a big hit in the change, or a big hit after the next change. The expectations may change, or they may not be affected at all.

Further, instead of FIG. 81 (or 3-1), the display position may be previously determined by the character, as shown in FIG. 81 (or 3-4-1). That is, in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 81 (or 3-4-1), the lord's navigation character YM is displayed at the left end, and the princess navigation character YM1 is displayed with one person left. Then, in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 81 (or 3-4-3), a grand navigation character YM2 is displayed at a position separated by one person. Thus, even if the order of display positions (lord, grandfather, princess) is fixed, the order may be broken (lord, princess, grandfather). In this case, the premiere effect It may be (a big hit confirmation effect) or a big hit.

Further, instead of FIG. 81 (or 3-1), as shown in the same figure (or 3-5-1), when the number of navigation characters increases, the increase is displayed in a character display (here, “Hime Stock” )), or by voice from a speaker, or by blinking a lamp or the like. In addition, in FIG. 81 (or 3-5-3), the fact that all members have gathered is notified by a character display. In addition, when all the members succeed, the character display is always "All members", but a different character display (for example, "Gekiatsu" or "All members reach") is displayed. In this case, it may be a premiere effect (big hit confirmation effect), a big hit rich, or a specific reach mode may be started without fail. Also here, in addition to the notification of the character display, or instead of the notification of the character display, the notification may be made by voice from a speaker, or the notification may be made by blinking a lamp or the like.

Further, instead of FIG. 81 (or 6-1), as shown in FIG. 81 (or 6-2), characters other than the lord, princess, and grandpa (here, a haniwa character YM3 simulating a cactus) are increased. In the case of winning, it may be a premiere effect (a big hit confirmation effect) or a big hit.

In addition, when "Grandpa" is displayed even though "Hime" is specified and called, it may be a premiere effect (big hit confirmation effect) or a big hit, and "Hime" is called. If the frequency of displaying the "grandpa" is higher than that of the old character, when the called character ("hime") appears, the jackpot may be concentrated (or the jackpot is confirmed). Further, depending on the display mode of the navigation character (lord in this example) that calls another navigation character, the other navigation character may easily appear (stock) or may be difficult to appear (stock). In addition, depending on the type of the navigation character that calls another navigation character, the other navigation character may easily appear (stock) or may be difficult to appear (stock). For example, it may be easier for another navi character to appear (stock) when the navi character of the princess calls it than the navi character of the lord. The characters that appear (stock) are not limited to different types of characters, and may be navigation characters of the same type. For example, a plurality of navigator characters YM of the lord may be displayed, or may be described as lord*3. In addition, even the same type of navigation characters may have different display modes (color, shape, pose, size). Furthermore, the effect performed after being displayed may differ depending on the character. For example, when an effect in which the character is emitted from the effect icon display area DIS is performed, the pseudo-relation effect starts when the lord is released, the hold is promoted when the princess is released, and the timer advance notice starts when the grandpa is released. .. Also, a plurality of characters may be released. Furthermore, when a plurality of characters are released at the same time, an effect different from the release of a single character may be performed. For example, when the lord and the princess are released at the same time, a pseudo continuous production that is hotter than the lord alone may be started.
FIG. 82 is a diagram showing a modification or the like shown in FIG. 81.

In FIG. 82 (Ki), the lord's navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed in the initial posture, and to the right of that, the princess navigation character YM1 in the default display mode is displayed in the initial posture. ing. Further, on the right side of the princess navigation character YM1, a treasure box icon I1 of change notice display is displayed. Further, the first decorative pattern is changing at high speed, and the changing icon h0 in the default display mode is displayed. Furthermore, the default first hold icon h11 is displayed.

In FIG. 82 (ki 2-1), the treasure box icon I1 opens, and a smoke image appears from the inside, and only the navigator character YM1 of the princess among the navi character YM of the lord and the navi character YM1 of the princess has smoke. It is wrapped in an image. That is, the smoke image does not reach the lord's navigation character YM. In FIG. 82 (ki 4), the smoke image disappears, and the princess navigation character YM1 changes to a display mode wearing a red kimono. In FIG. 82 (Ki 5), the treasure chest icon I1 has disappeared.

In FIG. 82 (ki 2-1) instead of FIG. 82 (ki 2-1), the pose of the lord's navigation character YM is changed and the hand holding the fan is raised. In FIG. 82 (KI 2-2-2), the lord's navigation character YM makes a smoke image appear, and only the princess' navigation character YM1 is wrapped in the smoke image. In FIG. 82 (KI 2-2-3), the smoke image disappears, and the princess navigation character YM1 changes to a display mode wearing a red kimono. Moreover, the lord's navigation character YM has returned to the initial posture.

In FIG. 82 (KI 3-1) instead of FIG. 82 (KI 3-1), the smoke image appearing from the treasure chest icon I1 is displayed for both the lord's navigation character YM and the princess navigation character YM1. It wraps the navigation character. Then, in FIG. 82 (KI 3-2-2), the smoke image disappears, and both the navi character YM of the lord and the navigation character YM1 of the princess are changed to a display mode wearing a red kimono. That is, the display mode of both of them has changed. Here, both of them change to the same color, but they may change to different colors. For example, one may be red and the other may be gold. Alternatively, both of the smoke images may be wrapped, but only one may change and the other may remain the default.

When a plurality of navigation characters are displayed, one navigation character (for example, princess) may be promoted and the other navigation character (for example, Yoshimune) may not be promoted. Also, both navigation characters may be promoted. In that case, one of the characters (for example, princess) may be hotter than the other character (for example, Yoshimune) may be changed, and the expectation of the big hit may be the same. Also, it may be hotter when both characters change than when one character changes. Also, it may be hotter that one character changes than both characters change depending on the change mode. For example, the combination of the lord's navigation character YM in the default display mode and the princess' navigation character YM1 in the display mode wearing a rainbow-colored kimono, and the lord's navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono and also the red mode With the combination of the princess navi character YM1 in the display mode wearing a kimono, the former combination may be easier to hit than the latter combination. Further, both characters may be changed without fail. In that case, the color may be changed to the same color or may be changed to a different color. Further, the meaning of the changed character may change depending on the changing character. For example, in the case of a navi character YM in a display mode wearing a red kimono, the fluctuation is hot, and in the case of a navi character YM1 in a display mode wearing a red kimono, it is easy to develop into super reach. Good. Also, if it is the navi character YM of the lord in the display mode wearing a rainbow-colored kimono, the big hit is confirmed, and if the navigation character YM of the princess in the display mode wearing a rainbow-colored kimono is the big hit with a certainty confirmation ( It may be an advantageous jackpot confirmation).

In this example, the navigation character YM is displayed when one navigation character is always displayed and another navigation character is newly called by the navigation character, or when a plurality of navigation characters are constantly displayed. The present embodiment can be applied to a case where one or a plurality of navigation characters are displayed at a specific timing because there is a period in which the navigation characters are not displayed.

FIG. 82 (KU1-1) to FIG. 82 (KU7) show an example of effect in which button effects are entwined with the navigation character YM.

In FIG. 82(K1-1), the navigator character YM of the lord in the default display mode is displayed in the initial posture. Further, the first decorative pattern is changing at high speed, and the changing icon h0 in the default display mode is displayed. Furthermore, the default first hold icon h11 is displayed.

A button display icon 136D is added to the navigation character YM shown in FIG. The button display icon 136D is a display form of a balloon and corresponds to a notice given by the navigation character YM itself. The button display icon 136D also displays a remaining period meter MT indicating the remaining period of the operation valid period of the chance button 136. In FIG. 82(3), the operation valid period is started, and in FIG. 82(4), the remaining period meter is slightly decreased. 82(5), the chance button 136 is operated, and in FIG. 82(6), the change animation of the navigation character YM is started in response to the operation of the chance button 136, and the lord's character is visually recognized by the effect image. It's getting harder. In FIG. 82 (ku7), the navi character is changed to a lord like a display in a red kimono.

Also in FIG. 82 (1-2-1), the navigator character YM in the default display mode is displayed in the initial posture, but the button display icon 136D is not displayed here. That is, the back button effect is being performed, and when the chance button 136 is operated in FIG. 82 (K 1-2-2), the chance button 136 is operated in the same figure (K 1-2-3). In response, the change animation of the navigation character YM has started. In this way, the display mode of the navigation character may change depending on the back button effect.

It should be noted that both the back button effect and the other button effect (with button display) may both change, the back button effect may be prioritized, and the other button effect may be prioritized. The same applies when the back buttons overlap.

Further, when the look-ahead button notice and the change button notice (normal notice) overlap, the look-ahead button notice may be prioritized, or the change button notice may be prioritized.

In addition, in place of FIG. 82(2-1), in FIG. 82(2-2), a button display icon 136D is not added to the navigation character YM, but a position away from the navigation character YM. The button image 136a and the remaining period meter MT are displayed at positions outside the effect icon display area DIS and outside the holding frame UI. The display of the button image 136a and the remaining period meter MT here is a notice different from the notice given by the navigation character YM itself, and the display mode of the navigation character YM may also be changed by this different notice. The display of the button image 136a and the remaining period meter MT may be always displayed or may be displayed before the start of the effective period.

FIG. 83 shows an example of effect in which the effect of the button holding icon is entwined with the navigation character YM.

In FIG. 83 (KU-3-1), the lord's navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed in the initial posture. Further, the first decorative pattern is changing at high speed, and the changing icon h0 in the default display mode is displayed. Further, the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The first hold icon h11 illustrated in FIG. 83 (K-3-1) is a button hold icon, and the button image 136a is displayed on a white circle display. Although the remaining period meter MT is not displayed, it may be displayed. The operation valid period of the chance button 136 here is within the period of the fluctuation. When the chance button 136 is operated in FIG. 83 (1-3-2a), the smoke image of the effect appears, as shown in (1-3-3a) of FIG. Part or all of the character YM is hidden, which makes it more difficult to visually recognize it than before the smoke image appears. Here, the button image 136a displayed on the first hold icon h11 has been deleted, and the first hold icon h11 does not change (for example, change in display mode). That is, when the chance button 136 is displayed while the button holding icon is being displayed, the display mode of the first holding icon h11 is not changed, and the navigation character YM is changed. is there. It should be noted that the navigation character and/or the button holding icon itself does not change when the chance button 136 is operated outside the operation valid period. However, there is a possibility that the state may shift to the later-described diagram (1-3-4) via the state shown in FIG. 83 (1-3-3a).

In addition, when the chance button 136 is operated in FIG. 83 (1-3-2a), as shown in (1-3-3b1) of FIG. The effect image may be applied to the first hold icon h11, and the change animation may be started. In this case, as shown in FIG. 83 (1-3-3b2), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change from a white circle display mode to a blue circle display mode. It should be noted that there may be a case where the display mode of the white circle display remains (eventually, a pattern that failed). In addition, when the chance button 136 is operated in FIG. 83 (KU 1-3-2a), it is displayed in FIG. 83 (KU 1-3-3b2) without passing through the same figure (KU 1-3-3b1). As shown in the figure, the icon that was the button holding icon may change to a display mode of a blue circle display without a change animation.

Alternatively, as shown in (1-3-3b1) of FIG. 83, (1-3-4) of FIG. 83, although the display mode of the first hold icon h11 does not change and remains as a white circle, the navigation character The YM may change to a display mode in which a red kimono is worn. The change of the display mode of the navigation character YM here is not a change animation when it goes through FIG. 83 (1-3-3b1), but the display mode is switched instantaneously. In the case of passing through 3a), it is displayed after the change animation by the effect of the smoke image is executed. However, a change animation accompanied by an effect image such as a smoke image may be executed when the process goes through FIG. 83 (1-3-3b1). It should be noted that the change may occur immediately after the chance button 136 is operated, or the change may occur slightly later. In addition, when the chance button 136 is operated in FIG. 83 (1-3-2a), it is shown in FIG. 83 (1-3-4) without passing through the same figure (1-3-3b1). As described above, the display mode of the navigation character YM may change.

Further, even if the button hold icon is displayed, the chance button is not operated (Fig. 83 (1-3-2b1)), and the next variation is started (the variation of the first decorative symbol is still started). In the case where the variation of the second decorative symbol has not been started yet), the variation icon h0 may become the button holding icon, as shown in (1-3-2b2) in the figure. In this case, the button effect is carried over to the next change, and if the chance button 136 is operated within the operation valid period, the button image 136a disappears as shown in FIG. 83 (K 1-3-2b3′). The white circle display on which the button image 136a was displayed may change to the display mode of the blue circle display (success pattern). When changing, a change animation accompanied by an effect image such as a smoke image may be executed. Although the display mode of the navigation character YM has not changed, it may change. On the other hand, even if the chance button 136 is operated, with respect to the variable icon h0, the button image 136a disappears, but there is no change (for example, change in display mode) in the white circle display where the button image 136a was displayed. It may not occur. That is, it is a pattern in which the change effect from the button holding icon has failed. Although the display mode of the navigation character YM has not changed, the display mode of the navigation character YM may change. Even if the button hold icon is displayed, if the chance button is not operated and the next change is started, the button hold icon may not be changed. It may be configured to be automatically changed after the next change is started without operating the button.

Even if the button holding icon is displayed, if the chance button is not operated (Fig. 83 (1-3-2b1)) and the next change is started, the same figure (1-3) is displayed. -2b2'), an effect image may be applied to the variable icon h0 and a change animation may be started. In this case, the process may shift to the previous FIG. 83 (K 1-3-2b3′) or the process may shift to FIG. 83 (K 1-3-2b3).

The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 83 (-3-1) has the default display mode, but the navigation character YM has the same display mode. That is, in FIG. 83 (1-3-4), the second promotion is performed. When there are a plurality of hold icons, icons other than the button hold icon may be changed. Further, the holding icon that has already changed may be changed by operating the button when the button holding icon is displayed.

Further, when eight hold icons are displayed, for example, when N pieces are accumulated, the hold icons are changed to part or all of the button hold icons, and the hold icon, the variable icon, and the navigation character YM are changed according to the button operation. It may be configured to change. This is applicable even when only four hold icons are displayed.
FIG. 84 is a diagram showing an example in which there is a period in which the navigation character YM is not displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 84 (K1), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the variable icon h0 in the default display mode is displayed. Further, two special reservations 1 are reserved, and the first reservation icon h11 and the second reservation icon h12 are displayed. Both the two hold icons h11 and h12 are default display modes. The navigation character YM is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG.

In FIG. 84 (key 2), the number of holdings of special figure 1 is increased, and the third holding icon h13 is additionally displayed. This third hold icon h13 is also a default display mode.

In FIG. 84 (key 3), the variable display of symbols is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed with the combination of decorative symbols that are lost. Even during this stop display, the navigation character YM is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

In FIG. 84 (K4), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is exhausted and the variable display of symbols is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started. In addition, the display mode of the second hold icon h11 is changed to a blue display mode in response to the start of the symbol variable display. Even if the symbol variable display is started, the navigation character YM is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

A smoke image is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 84 (key 5-1), and in FIG. 84 (key 6-1) the smoke image disappears, and the lord's navigation character is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. YM is displayed. The lord's navigation character YM shown in FIG. 84 (key 6-1) is the default display mode. Here, the navigation character YM is a notice corresponding to the prefetch target suspension (prefetch notice and/or notice of the change).

The appearance of the navigation character YM may be started at the time of winning the prefetch target suspension (timing of FIG. 84 (2)). In this example, it is started during the next change of the winning change, but it is not limited to the next change, and it may be started before the change of the prefetch target suspension ends. Further, the navigation character YM may be displayed without fail if there is a prefetch target suspension, or may be displayed only when the production lottery is won.

In FIG. 84 (K7), the variable display of symbols is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed with the combination of decorative symbols that are lost. The navigation character YM in the default display mode whose display is started during the symbol variable display stopped and displayed here is still displayed in the initial posture.

Next, the next symbol variation display is started, and in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 84 (key 9-1), the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display is displayed next to the navigation character YM in the default display mode. It is displayed. The navigation character YM is changed to the display mode wearing a red kimono in the display mode by the same change animation as the change animation shown in FIG. 75 (a 4-1) (FIG. 84 (key 11)). In addition, even if the change animation is executed, the display mode of the navigation character YM may remain the default display mode. Further, the display mode of the navigation character YM may change without the treasure box icon I1 appearing. That is, the change notice display may not be displayed.

In FIG. 84 (key 13), the variation of the prefetch target suspension is started, and the variation icon h0 in the blue display mode is displayed. The navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono is also displayed during this change. Therefore, the navigation character YM was not initially displayed, but after being displayed, it is always displayed over a plurality of variations.

Note that the navigation character YM may disappear when the change of the prefetch target suspension that is currently being performed ends. In this case, the navigation character YM may disappear between the three symbols or the temporary stop (swing display) to the stop of the symbols in the change of the decorative symbols of the prefetch target suspension, or one or two decorative symbols. May disappear after a temporary stop (first stop or second stop).

The navigation character YM may disappear at the timing of the stop display in FIG. 84 (key 7) and may not be displayed across the fluctuation.

Further, as shown in FIG. 84 (Ke 5-1) instead of FIG. 84 (Ke 5-2), the place where the navigation character YM is displayed is not limited to the effect icon display area DIS, but the hold icon. It may be displayed in the display area HIS. The navigation character YM may be displayed in a plurality of places, and may be displayed in the variable icon display area CIS. Furthermore, the navigation character YM may execute different effects depending on the displayed position. For example, the hold icon may be changed when displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, and the change icon may be changed when displayed in the change icon display area CIS. Further, the probability of changing the variable icon may be different depending on the display position, and thus the reliability of the big hit may be different. Note that the location where the navigation character YM is displayed may be only one display area (for example, the effect icon display area DIS, the hold icon display area HIS, the variable icon display area CIS, etc.).

Further, as shown in (5-3) in FIG. 84 instead of (5-1) in FIG. 84, the navigation character YM can move in the hold icon display area HIS (in the left base icon bIl). Then, when the hold icon is displayed, the front side of the hold icon may be moved. That is, it is displayed so as to overlap the hold icon from the front side.

On the other hand, in place of FIG. 84 (KE 5-1), as shown in FIG. 84 (KE 5-4), the navigation character YM may move behind the hold icon. That is, this time, the hold icon is displayed so as to overlap the navigation character YM from the front side.

The navigation character may perform animation to move a plurality of display areas (for example, effect icon display area DIS, hold icon display area HIS, variable icon display area CIS, etc.).
FIG. 85 is a diagram showing an example in which there is another period in which the navigation character YM is not displayed.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 85 (K 6-2-1), the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed. Further, the first decorative pattern is changing at high speed, and the changing icon h0 in the default display mode is displayed. Further, two special reservations 1 are reserved, and the first reservation icon h11 and the second reservation icon h12 are displayed. Both the two hold icons h11 and h12 are default display modes.

After that, the hold digestion continues, and in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 85 (key 6-2-3a), the combination of the lost decorative patterns is displayed in a shaking state without the hold. The navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 85 (K 6-2-4), the combination of lost decorative symbols is stopped and displayed in a state where there is no hold. The navigation character YM in the default display mode is still displayed.

In FIG. 85 (K 6-2-6), in the state where there is no hold, there is a winning in the first special symbol starting opening 230, the symbol variable display is started, and the first decorative symbol has not yet started to vary. , The second decorative pattern has begun to change. At this point, the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 85 (K 6-2-7), an increase animation of the hold icon representing the already-held hold (holding of the changed pattern display started) is displayed. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 85 (key 6-2-7) is displayed lightly, and the erasing animation of the navigation character YM has started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 85 (K 6-2-8), the first decorative symbol has not yet started to change, and the hold icon h11 increased by the hold increase animation is displayed on the first stage hs1. There is. At this stage, the navigation character YM has completely disappeared. Note that, in reality, FIGS. 85 (ke 6-2-6) to FIG. 85 (ke 6-2-8) are the events for a moment, but the deletion animation of the navigation character YM may be performed.

Although there is a time lag in the display of the decorative symbol display device 208, the navigation character YM disappears at the start of symbol variable display from the state where there is no hold. The disappearance timing here may be before the start of the variable display of the first decorative symbol, at the same time as the start of the variable display of the first decorative symbol, or the variable display of the first decorative symbol. May be after the start of. When the hold increase animation is performed, it may be before the start of the hold increase animation, at the same time as the start of the hold increase animation, or after the start of the hold increase animation. Good.

Further, instead of FIG. 85 (ke 6-2-3a), as shown in FIG. 85 (ke 6-2-3b1), a reach state may be entered, and the display mode of the navigation character YM is the reach state. It may be configured such that it does not change in some cases, or conversely, it may change during the reach state. Also, the display mode of the variable icon may be configured not to change during the reach state by the navigation character YM, or conversely, may change during the reach state.

In FIG. 85 (Ke 6-2-3b2), the super reach production is developed, and in the same figure (Ke 6-2-3b3), a duel scene in which the lord and the enemy swordsman face each other is displayed. In this FIG. 85 (key 6-2-3b3) also, the navigation character YM is displayed in the default display mode.

Note that the navigation character YM may be configured such that the display mode may be promoted when the reach reaches the super reach, and conversely, the display mode may not be promoted when the reach reaches the normal reach. May be. On the contrary, even in the normal reach, the display mode of the navigation character YM may be promoted. For example, it may be promoted as a pre-reading notice after the next change. Further, when the "navi character promotion" symbol is stopped in the middle symbol during normal reach, the display mode is promoted. Further, the display mode may be promoted as a notice (normal notice) of the change.

Then, in FIG. 85 (K 6-2-3b4), the wipe effect and the like described with reference to FIG. 76 (A 14-2-4) to FIG. On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 6-2-3b5), "decoration 7"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 7", which is a combination of loses, is shaken and displayed. The display mode of the navigation character YM remains the default display mode. Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 85 (K 6-2-3b 6 ), the combination of the defects “decoration 7”-“decoration 6”-“decoration 7” is stopped and displayed, and the navigation character YM also defaults. Is displayed as it is.

FIG. 85 (Ke 6-2-1) to (Ke 6-2-8), (Ke 6-2-3b1) to (Ke 6-2-3b6) are summarized, and the symbol variation of the prefetch target suspension ends. , The navigation character displayed as a notice (prefetch notice and/or notice of the change) corresponding to the read ahead target hold is not hidden even when the hold becomes 0, and the next change is started. It has been erased. It should be noted that the navigation character is a pre-reading target pending before the fluctuation of the symbol ends (for example, before the decorative symbol becomes one or more temporary stop displays, at the same time as the temporary stop, or after the temporary stop, or the decorative symbol. All (three in this example: left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol) are temporarily stopped before being temporarily stopped, and at the same time when temporarily stopped, then the symbols (special symbols) are stopped. It may be erased before), or after the symbol variation of the prefetch target suspension is completed (at the same time when the symbol (special figure) is stopped or after it is stopped).
FIG. 86 shows an example in which a maximum of eight hold icons are displayed.

In the holding frame UI of the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 86, the variable icon display area CIS is provided at the left end, and the pedestal hs0 is arranged. Further, a production icon display area DIS is provided at the right end. The hold icon display area HIS is located between the variable icon display area CIS and the effect icon display area DIS, and the base icon bIm extends. Eight stages are arranged on this base icon bIm, and a hold icon is displayed on each stage. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 86 (ko a1), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the variable icon h0 in the default display mode is displayed. Further, the second hold number display shows that the hold number of special figure 1 is “3” and the hold number of special figure 2 is “2”, and five hold icons are displayed in total. There is. All of these five hold icons are default display modes.

In the hold frame UI shown in FIG. 86, when there are five holds, the stage corresponding to the sixth hold is displayed in the same display mode (for example, white) as the first to fifth stages, and the seventh hold , The eighth stage hs7, hs8 are displayed in different display modes (for example, gray). Also, until the 3rd hold is accumulated, the 4th stage is white, the 5th and subsequent stages are gray, and when the 4th hold is accumulated, the 5th stage is white, and the 6th and later stages. Will turn gray. In this way, the display mode of the stage changes depending on the number of holdings, but the stage may always have the same display mode regardless of the number of holdings.

In addition, the navigation character YM is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 86 (ko a1).

In FIG. 86 (ko a2), the hold of the special figure 2 is increased by 1, and the hold increase animation is performed in the same figure (ko a3), and in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 86 (ko a4), the hold icon is displayed. Is displayed. The added sixth hold icon h6 is also a default display mode. Further, the seventh stage hs7 changes to white, and the gray stage is the eighth stage hs8 only.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 86 (a5), the navigation character YM in the default display mode appears, and a balloon saying "2 more tanks are full" is added. The navigation character YM appears when the number of holdings is N or more (6 or more in this example).

In FIG. 86 (ko a6), the number of holdings of special figure 1 is increased by 1, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 86 (ko a7), seven holding icons are displayed, and the navigation character YM of the default display mode is displayed. Is added a balloon saying "1 more is full". The added 7th hold icon h7 is also a default display mode. Further, the final eighth stage hs8 has also changed to white, and the gray stage has disappeared.

In FIG. 86 (ko a8), the number of holdings of the special figure 2 is increased by 1, and in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 86 (ko a9), eight holding icons are displayed, and the navigation character YM of the default display mode is displayed. Has been added to the balloon "Full tank". The added 8th hold icon h8 is also a default display mode. In addition, in this example, the navigation character YM uses the balloon to give the notification about the number of holdings, but the notification may be omitted.

In this example, the navigation character YM may change when eight reservations are accumulated (when full). In FIG. 86 (a10), the navigation character YM is wrapped in a smoke image. This smoke image corresponds to a notice that the navigation character YM changes. However, even if the navigation character YM is wrapped in a smoke image, it does not always change and may not change. Further, the smoke image itself may not appear, and the smoke image may always appear. Alternatively, when the hold is full, the navigation character YM may change without fail. Further, the navigation character YM may be configured to change without fail when wrapped in a smoke image.

In FIG. 86 (a11), the navigation character YM changes to a display mode wearing a red kimono, and a balloon saying "The holding is hot" is added to the navigation character YM and the prefetching notice is executed. .. The notice displayed in the balloon may be a notice of the change. Further, the degree of expectation of a big hit in the hold may be given in advance by a notice displayed in a balloon. Further, in the present example, the navigation character changes due to the symbol variation in which the holding is full, but the navigation character may be configured to change in the next variation of the symbol variation in which the holding is fully filled. Further, the navigation character may change for each symbol variation, and the variation of the navigation character may give a notice of the symbol variation.

The change of the navigation character YM is not limited to the color, but may be the display size, the pose, or the shape. Also, there may be a plurality of types of characters that appear, and the heat may differ depending on the character. For example, even if the navi character of Princess in the display mode wearing a red kimono is hotter than the navi character of the lord in the display mode wearing a red kimono, or the navigator character who is the leader is hotter than the navi character of the lord mode. Good.
FIG. 87 shows an example of effect in which the navigation character YM is entwined with a decorative design of a general figure.

In FIG. 87 (this b1), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the changing icon h0 in the default display mode is displayed. Further, a circled special figure 1 first hold icon h11, which represents the hold of special figure 1, is displayed. In addition, the special figure 1 1st hold icon h11 is a default display mode. Moreover, in FIG. 87 (this b1), although the navigation character YM is not displayed, the roulette display icon RI is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. The roulette display icon RI here displays a variable display of a decorative pattern of a general figure, and as a result, in addition to “○” and “×”, “geki” as a big hit notice of the special map of the variation is displayed. "Atsu" is also included. In FIG. 87 (b2), “◯” is displayed on the roulette display icon RI, and it is notified that the general figure lottery has been won.

In FIG. 87 (this b3), the navigation character YM appears in the effect icon display area DIS. The navigation character YM is in the default display mode, and appears when the general figure lottery is won. In the succeeding FIG. 87 (step b4), since the general drawing lottery is won, Den Chu is opened and the navigation character YM notifies that Den Chu is being opened. In FIG. 87 (step b5-1), since the electric Chu is open, there is a prize following the special figure 2 starting port 232, and the number of reserved special figure 2 is increased to four, which is full. In FIG. 87 (this b6-1), it is displayed in the second hold number display that the hold number of special figure 1 is "1" and the hold number of special figure 2 is "4". Four diamond-shaped hold icons representing the 2 hold are displayed (special figure 2 first hold icon h21 to special figure 2 fourth hold icon h24). Note that all of the four special figure 2 hold icons h21 to h24 are default display modes. This pachinko machine 100 is a special figure 2 priority variation machine, and the hold icon of the special figure 2 is displayed with priority over the hold icon of the special figure 1, and the hold icon of the special figure 2 is changed to the special figure 1 It is displayed so as to overlap part of the hold icon of from the front side.

In FIG. 87 (Fig. b7), the notification by the navigation character YM that the electric power chute is open ends, and in the subsequent diagram (Fig. b8), the electric chuo open time has ended, so the roulette display icon RI itself disappears downward. Is going on. Note that the roulette display icon RI may be displayed until all of the pending symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is completed. In FIG. 87 (this b9), the roulette display icon RI has completely disappeared.

After that, in FIG. 87 (this b11), the variable display of symbols is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed the combination of decorative symbols that are lost. The navigation character YM, which is the default display mode, is displayed in the initial posture. In FIG. 87 (b12), the suspension of the special figure 2 first hold icon h21 is exhausted, and the variable display of symbols is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in the same figure (b13), the variation icon of special figure 2 is changed. A diamond-shaped variation icon is displayed on the pedestal hs0.

In FIG. 87 (this b14), the navigation character YM is wrapped in a smoke image. This smoke image corresponds to a notice that the navigation character YM changes. However, even if the navigation character YM is wrapped in a smoke image, it does not always change and may not change. Further, the smoke image itself may not appear, and the smoke image may always appear. Alternatively, when the hold is full, the navigation character YM may change without fail. The navigation character YM may be configured to always change when wrapped in a smoke image, or may not change even if wrapped in a smoke image.

In FIG. 87 (this b15-1), the navigation character YM changes to a display mode wearing a red kimono, and a balloon "This fluctuation is hot" is added to the navigation character YM, and a normal notice is given. There is. In addition, the advance notice is usually issued depending on the display mode of the navigation character YM.

Also, in place of FIG. 87 (this b15-1), in FIG. 87 (this b15-2-1), the navigation character YM is still in the default display mode, and the change effect has failed. The navigator character YM is provided with a balloon saying "This is a fluctuation."

After that, the holding of the special figure 2 progresses, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 87 (this b15-2-3), the symbol variable display of the last special figure 2 is performed. Also here, a balloon saying "This variation is" is added to the navigation character YM, and the effect by the navigation character YM is continued from the previous FIG. 87 (step b15-2-1). In FIG. 87 (this b15-2-4), a balloon saying “Farewell” is added to the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the effect by the navigation character YM is completed. The navigation character YM disappears from the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 87 (b15-2-5). When it is hot, the navigation character YM does not disappear, and the effect by the navigation character YM may continue, but on the contrary, the navigation character YM may always disappear. Even when the super reach effect is started between FIG. 87 (FIG. b15-2-1) to FIG. 87 (FIG. b15-2-4), the effect by the navigation character YM continues and the navigation character YM is displayed. Alternatively, the effect by the navigation character YM may be ended and the navigation character YM may disappear.

It should be noted that the navigation character YM described with reference to FIG. 87 (FIG. b1) to FIG. 87 (FIG. b15-1), FIG. 87 (FIG. b152-1) to FIG. Although only the advance notice is given and the advance notice is not given, the advance notice may be given in some cases.
FIG. 88 is a diagram showing an example in which the change notice display is displayed on standby.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 88 (Sa), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the variable icon h0 in the default display mode is displayed. Further, two special reservations 1 are reserved, and the first reservation icon h11 and the second reservation icon h12 are displayed. Both the two hold icons h11 and h12 are default display modes. The navigation character YM is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 88 (Sa).

In FIG. 88 (Sa2), the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is increased, and the third holding icon h13 and the fourth holding icon h14 are additionally displayed. The third hold icon h13 and the fourth hold icon h14 are also default display modes. Here, in this example, the hold 4 represented by the fourth hold icon h14 is the prefetch target hold.

In FIG. 88 (S3), the variable display of symbols is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed the combination of decorative symbols that are lost. Even during this stop display, the navigation character YM is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

In FIG. 88 (Sa4), the suspension of the first suspension icon h11 is exhausted, and the variable display of symbols is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started. Even if the symbol variable display is started, the navigation character YM is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

In the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 88 (S5), the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display appears on the carpet icon I2. The treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display is a notice display for changing the display mode of the navigation character YM, but in this example, the navigation character YM itself is not displayed. However, with the appearance of the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display, it is informed (preliminary notice) that the navigation character YM may eventually appear. The treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display becomes a standby display until the navigation character YM appears. The standby display of the icon I1 of the treasure box is a display with the icon I2 of the carpet remaining on.

In FIG. 88 (Sa 7), the variable display of symbols is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed with the combination of decorative symbols that are lost. The navigation character YM has not yet appeared, and the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display remains on standby display.

In FIG. 88 (Sa8), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is exhausted, and the variable display of symbols is started. Even when the symbol variable display is started, the navigation character YM does not appear, and the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display remains on standby display.

In FIG. 88 (Sa 9-1), the variable display of the symbols is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed the combination of the decorative symbols that are lost. The navigation character YM has not yet appeared, and the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display remains on standby display.

In FIG. 88 (Sa 10-1), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is exhausted, and the variable display of symbols is started. Even when the symbol variable display is started, the navigation character YM does not appear, and the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display remains on standby display. In this way, the standby display of the treasure box icon I1 may be performed over a plurality of variations.

A smoke image is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 88 (Sa 11-1), and in FIG. 88 (Sa 12), the smoke image disappears and the lord's navigation character YM is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. It is displayed. The lord's navigation character YM shown in FIG. 88 (Sa 12) is the default display mode. The smoke image here corresponds to a notice that the navigation character YM appears. However, even if the smoke image is displayed, the navigation character YM does not always appear and may not appear. Further, the smoke image itself may not be displayed in some cases, or the smoke image may be always displayed. Further, the navigation character YM may be configured to always appear when the smoke image is displayed.

The appearance of the navigation character YM may be started at the time of winning the prefetch target suspension (timing of FIG. 88 (S2)). In this example, it is started during the next change of the winning change, but it is not limited to the next change, and it may be started before the change of the prefetch target suspension ends. Further, the navigation character YM may be displayed without fail if there is a prefetch target suspension, or may be displayed only when the production lottery is won. In this example, the treasure box icon of the change notice display and the navigation character YM are the pre-reading notice made for the same pre-reading object suspension (in this example, the suspension 4 represented by the fourth suspension icon h14 shown in FIG. 88 (Sa2)). However, the icon of the treasure box of the change notice display and the prefetch target suspension of the navigation character YM may be different.

In FIG. 88 (Sa12), when the lord's navigation character YM appears, thereafter, only the carpet icon I2 disappears, and the treasure box icon I1 remains in the effect icon display area DIS. That is, the standby display of the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display ends.

In FIG. 88 (Sa 14), the change of the prefetch target suspension is started. The change animation using the treasure box icon I1 is performed while the prefetch target is being changed. In FIG. 88 (Sa15-1), the treasure box is opened, and a smoke image comes out from the inside to wrap around the navigator character YM of the lord. In FIG. 88 (Sa 16), the smoke image disappears, and the display mode of the lord's navigation character YM is changed from the default display mode to the display mode wearing a red kimono. The navigation character YM that has changed to the display mode wearing a red kimono functions as a notice (normal notice) of the change.

The change effect of the navigation character YM using the icon I1 of the treasure box may be started at the time of winning the prefetch target suspension (timing of FIG. 88 (Sa2)). Further, the navigation character YM may be displayed without fail if there is a prefetch target suspension, or may be displayed only when the production lottery is won.

Further, in place of FIG. 88 (Sa 10-1), in FIG. 88 (Sa 10-2-1), the lord's navigation character YM does not appear, but the carpet icon I2 disappears, and a treasure box for change notice display is displayed. The standby display of the icon I1 of has been completed. A smoke image is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 88 (Sa 10-2-2). The smoke image here extends beyond the display position of the navigation character YM to the variable icon h0, and the navigation character YM is displayed. The display position of YM and the variation icon h0 are covered from the front side by the smoke image. In FIG. 88 (Sa 10-2-3), the smoke image disappears and the navigation character YM does not appear, but the display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed to the red display mode. Here, the navigation character YM may appear and the display mode of the variable icon h0 may not change, or the navigation character YM may appear and the display mode of the variable icon h0 may change. Alternatively, or conversely, the navigation character YM may not appear and the display mode of the variable icon h0 may not change.

Also, instead of FIG. 88 (Sa 11-1), in FIG. 88 (Sa 11-2), although the smoke image is displayed, and the navigation character YM is not visible, the carpet icon I2 disappears. The standby display of the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display has ended. Thus, the timing of ending the standby display may be before the navigation character YM appears. Further, the timing of ending the standby display may be the same as the appearance of the navigation character YM. Further, it may be a timing of temporary stop of the decorative design, a timing of stop display of the decorative design, or a timing of starting change of the decorative design. Note that after the standby display of the change notice display is completed, the navigation character is not displayed for the same prefetch target hold, but even after the standby display of the change notice display is completed, the navigation character is displayed for the same prefetch target hold. There may be cases where there is a change (for example, a change following the change after the standby display has ended, or a change within the standby display has ended). Although the change notice display is not displayed for the same prefetch target hold even after the standby display of the change notice display is completed, the change notice display may be displayed again for the same prefetch target hold (for example, the standby display There is a change after the next change after the end of the change, and the change within the end of the waiting display is included).

Further, instead of FIG. 88 (Sa13), in FIG. 88 (Sa13-2-1), the carpet icon I2 disappears and the treasure box icon I1 and the navigation character YM are displayed. 13-2-2), the treasure box does not open, the navigation character YM does not change, the display mode of the variable icon h0 does not change, and both the treasure box icon I1 and the navigation character YM are displayed. Is gone. In this way, although the navigation character YM has appeared, nothing happens and both icons may disappear. In this case, the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display is a false notice. Of the icons of the treasure box I1 and the navigation character YM, only the treasure box icon I1 may disappear, or only the navigation character YM may disappear. When both icons disappear, both icons may disappear at the same time, the treasure box icon I1 may disappear first, or the navigation character YM may disappear first.

FIG. 89 is a diagram showing an example of effect using a holding frame different from the holding frame described so far.

The hold frame UI shown in FIG. 89 (1) is a closed type that is spread over the entire effect display area 208d. That is, although the holding frame UI described so far has the same components (pedestal hs0, etc.), in the state of FIG. 89 (1), the area of the holding frame UI in the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 , The other areas are firmly distinguished by the left frame UIf1, the upper frame UIf2, and the right frame UIf3, and the background of the sea is displayed in the other areas. Is not displayed. The holding frame UI shown in FIG. 89 (1) is a left frame UIf1, an upper frame UIf2, a right frame UIf3, and further, the left base icon bIl and the right base icon bIr are all displayed in white, and the holding frame UI is shown. Are promoted by changing these colors.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 89 (1), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the variable icon h0 in the default display mode is displayed. Here, the holding frame UI is displayed in front of the first decorative pattern, and the lowermost end of the decorative pattern that changes at high speed is overlapped from the front side by the upper frame UIf2 of the holding frame UI. However, on the contrary, the decorative pattern may overlap the holding frame UI from the front side. Further, the first hold icon h11 in the default display mode is displayed. Further, a navigation character YM is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS.

In FIG. 89 (See 2-1), the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display appears on the carpet icon I2, and in FIG. 89 (See 3), only the carpet icon I2 disappears and the treasure box icon I1 becomes , Remains in the effect icon display area DIS. In FIG. 89 (4), the icon I1 of the treasure box is opened, and an icon in which the character display "frame promotion" is displayed appears from inside to notify (notify) promotion of the hold frame UI. In FIG. 89 (5), the holding frame UI is promoted, and the left frame UIf1, the upper frame UIf2, the right frame UIf3, the left base icon bIl, and the right base icon bIr are all displayed in red. Note that the hold frame UI may not be promoted even if the "frame promotion" icon appears. In addition, when the "frame promotion" icon appears, the hold frame UI may be always promoted.

In addition, instead of FIG. 89 (FIG. 2-1), in FIG. 89 (FIG. 2-2-1), the lower half of the huge panda is displayed in the area where the background of the sea is displayed. By the lower half of this huge panda, the variable display of the first decorative pattern is overlapped from the front side. However, the second decorative design and the second number-of-holds display are displayed in front of the lower body of the panda. 89. The huge panda is passing from top to bottom, and eventually enters the area of the holding frame UI, and part or all of the holding frame UI is overlapped from the front side by the huge panda. In the state shown in (2-2-2), only a part of each of the upper left and the upper right of the holding frame UI is not yet overlapped with the image of the panda, but the state shown in (2-2-3) in the figure. Then, the entire holding frame UI overlaps the image of the panda. The appearance of a huge panda that covers almost the entire screen is a kind of notice of change. Although the holding frame UI is entirely overlapped by the huge panda, the huge panda may be displayed in a size that does not overlap the entire holding frame UI.

FIG. 89 (2-2-4) shows one mode of the decorative pattern display device 208 after the huge panda has finished passing, and the first hold icon h11 changes to a blue display mode ( The navigation character YM has also changed (promoted) to a display mode wearing a red kimono, and the holding frame UI has also been promoted to red display. The display status of the variable icon may also be changed (promoted). Further, all or some of the left frame UIf1 and the like, the hold icon, the variable icon h0, and the navigation character YM may change. For example, only the left frame UIf1 and the like may be changed to red and the holding frame UI may be promoted. Alternatively, as will be described later, a change may occur outside the holding frame UI.

FIG. 89 (2-2-4') shows another aspect of the decorative symbol display device 208 after the huge panda has passed, and in addition to the change in the holding frame UI, Changes have occurred outside the holding frame UI. That is, the level of the level display Lv attached to each of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol is increased. When this level rises, the reach production becomes easier to start, the pseudo continuous production becomes easier to start, and the design mode is switched to a design that appears when the jackpot with a probability variation occurs. Further, when the reach effect is started in a state where this level is high, the expectation of a big hit becomes high. The background may change.

If the appearance of a huge panda is a big hit announcement, it may be displayed in front of the image of the panda so that the first decorative pattern may overlap the image of the passing panda from the front side or the big hit. Even with a notice, the first decorative pattern may be overlapped with the image of the passing panda.

Further, in place of FIG. 89 (shown 2-1), in FIG. 89 (shown 2-3-1), a sliding effect fusuma image is added to the holding frame UI, and the same figure (shown 2-3). The state shown in 1) is a state in which the sliding door image is fully closed (wipe-in state). On the other hand, the state shown in the figure (2-3-2) is a state in which the sliding door image is fully opened (wipe-out state).

FIG. 90 is a diagram showing an example in which a treasure box icon I1 that has been used as a change notice notification icon so far appears as a hold icon.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 90 (s 1-1), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the variable icon h0 in the default display mode is displayed. Further, a navigation character YM is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. Furthermore, a treasure box icon is displayed as the first hold icon h11.

In FIG. 90 (SU 2-1), the variable display of symbols is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed as a combination of the decorative symbols that are missing. In FIG. 90 (SU 3), the treasure box icon is displayed. The hold of the first hold icon h11 has been exhausted, and the variable display of symbols is started. The first holding icon h11 of the treasure box icon is displayed on the pedestal hs0 as the variation icon h0, but the treasure box icon is also displayed as the variation icon h0 here.

In FIG. 90(s4), the treasure box of the treasure box icon which is the variable icon h0 opens, and a smoke image appears from the inside, and the smoke image is the navigation character YM displayed in the effect icon display area DIS from the front side. Cover and change animation is running. In FIG. 90 (S5), the smoke image disappears and the navigation character YM changes to a display mode wearing a red kimono. In this example, the navigation character YM is changed by the change icon h0. Although the smoke image corresponds to a change notice, the smoke image may not overlap the change icon h0 that is a change candidate, or the smoke image may not appear.

Further, in FIG. 90 (Su 1-1), instead of FIG. 90 (Su 1-1), the second hold icon h12 in the default display mode is also displayed. The second hold icon h12 is overlapped with the first hold icon h11 which is a treasure box icon. That is, at least a part of the holding icons having a relatively high jackpot expectation overlaps at least a part of the relatively low holding icons from the front side. At least a part of the hold icon in the prefetching notice mode may overlap with at least a part of the hold icon in the default display mode from the front side. Alternatively, irrespective of the expectation of the big hit, at least a part of the hold icon that is consumed first may overlap with at least a part of the hold icon that is consumed later from the front side. In FIG. 90 (S 1-2-2), the treasure box of the treasure box icon that is the first hold icon h11 is opened, and the change animation is executed. That is, a smoke image appears and the smoke image overlaps the second hold icon h12. In FIG. 90 (S 1-2-3), the smoke image disappears, and the display mode of the second hold icon h12 in which the smoke images overlap is changed.

In addition, in FIG. 90 (Su 2-1) instead of FIG. 90 (Su 2-1), the treasure box of the treasure box icon that is the first hold icon h11 is opened, and the change animation is executed. In the change animation here, the smoke image overlaps the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM, and in FIG. 2 (2-2-2), the smoke image disappears and both the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are displayed. Aspects are changing. Here, both are changed to the same red color, but they may be changed to different colors. For example, one may be red and the other may be gold. Alternatively, both of the smoke images may be wrapped, but only one may change and the other may remain the default.

In addition, in FIG. 90 (Su 2-1) instead of FIG. 90 (Su 2-1), the treasure box of the treasure box icon that is the first hold icon h11 is opened, and the change animation is also executed here. However, in the change animation here, the smoke image overlaps only the change icon h0 of the change icon h0 and the navigation character YM. In FIG. 90 (2-3-2), the smoke image disappears, and only the display mode of the variable icon h0 in which the smoke images overlap is changed.

It should be noted that the icons (holding icon, variable icon) and/or navigation characters that are not overlapped by the smoke image also include the icons (holding icon, variable icon) and/or navigation that are overlapped by the smoke image after the smoke image disappears. The display mode may change with the change of the display mode of the character (may be at the same time as the change of the display mode or after the change of the display mode).
FIG. 91 shows an example of effect in which the navi character YM is entwined with a meter effect.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 91 (step 1-1), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the variable icon h0 in the default display mode is displayed. In addition, two special reservations 1 are reserved, and a first reservation icon h11 and a second reservation icon h12 are displayed. Both the two hold icons h11 and h12 are default display modes. Further, a navigation character YM is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS, and a white meter display MW having a white meter frame mf is displayed beside it. The white meter display MW shown in FIG. 91 (step 1-1) is in an empty state. When the meter display is full, the navigation character YM is promoted. Note that, by changing the display mode of the meter frame mf (for example, the color, the shape of the frame, etc.), it is possible to give an advance notice of the ease with which the meter is accumulated, or give a pre-reading notice and/or a notice of the change.

In FIG. 91 (Set 2), a temporary stop (first stop) of the left symbol in the first decorative symbol is performed, and “decoration 4” is displayed in a swinging manner. A white meter rising item UpI is added to the pattern of "decoration 4", and in FIG. 91 (step 3), the meter rising item UpI moves to the white meter display MW and becomes the white meter display MW. It is displayed overlapping. As shown in FIG. 91 (step 4), the meter-up item UpI that has moved to the white meter display MW is captured (stocked) in the white meter display MW, and the white meter display MW is raised by one level. It should be noted that the meter rising item has a different meter rising degree depending on the color. The white meter increase item UpI raises the level of the white meter display MW by one level.

In FIG. 91 (step 4), the variable display of symbols is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed, and in the same figure (step 5-1), the first hold icon h11 is displayed. Has been released, and the variable display of symbols has started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started.

In FIG. 91 (Set 7-1), the roulette display icon RI appears on the white meter display MW, and the roulette effect is started. The roulette effect here is always when something happens (when there is no loss) and when it does not happen (when there is no loss). Examples of something include a change in the hold icon, a normal notice (a notice of the change), and the like. Also, for example, if there is a character-based super-reach that includes Tono Super Reach, Hime Super Reach, and Grandpa Super Reach as one type of super reach, as an example of something above, the type of developing super reach (for example, There are also notices for character-based super reach, notices for specific super reach (for example, Tono super reach), and the like.

In FIG. 91 (SE8), the blue meter-raising item UpIb is stopped and displayed on the roulette display icon RI, and in FIG. 91 (SE9), the blue meter-raising item UpIb is moved to the white meter display MW and displayed in white. It is displayed overlapping the meter display MW. As shown in FIG. 91 (step 10), the blue meter-up item UpIb that has moved to the white meter display MW is captured (stocked) in the white meter display MW, and the white meter display MW is raised by two levels. The blue meter up item UpIb raises the white meter display MW by two levels. As a result, the white meter display MW shown in FIG. 91 (step 10) has three levels.

In FIG. 91 (SE11), the variable display of symbols is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed, and in FIG. 91 (SE12), the first hold icon h11 is held. Has been digested and the variable display of patterns has started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started.

In FIG. 91 (SE11), the variable display of symbols is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed, and in FIG. 91 (SE12), the first hold icon h11 is held. Has been digested and the variable display of patterns has started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started.

A button display icon 136D is added to the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 91 (step 13). The button display icon 136D is a display form of a balloon and corresponds to a notice given by the navigation character YM itself. The button display icon 136D also displays a remaining period meter MT indicating the remaining period of the operation valid period of the chance button 136. A part of the button display icon 136D overlaps a part of the white meter display MW (a part of the meter frame mf). The button display icon 136D may overlap the entire meter display, or may be displayed at a position that does not overlap the meter display.

In FIG. 91 (step 14), the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started, and in FIG. 91 (step 15), the remaining period meter is decreasing. In FIG. 91 (step 16), the chance button 136 is operated, and in FIG. 91 (step 17), in response to the operation of the chance button 136, a meter rise icon MUI as a response display is added to the navigation character YM. The meter rise icon MUI is in the form of a balloon, and a green meter rise item UpIm is displayed in the meter rise icon MUI shown in FIG. 91 (step 17). The meter rise icon MUI also overlaps a part of the white meter display MW (a part of the meter frame mf), like the button display icon 136D. The meter rise icon MUI may overlap the entire meter display or may be displayed at a position that does not overlap the meter display.

Even if the chance button 136 is not operated within the valid operation period, the response display may be displayed or may not be displayed. In addition, the response display includes displays other than the meter rise icon MUI. If the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation valid period, the response display is not displayed, but a specific effect (for example, display of the meter rise icon MUI). ) May be displayed as a response display only. Even if the response display is not displayed, the meter may be configured to increase, and the meter increases only when the response display is displayed, and the meter does not increase when the response display is not displayed. It may be configured as follows.

In FIG. 91 (step 18), the green meter-up item UpIm in the meter-up icon MUI has moved to the white meter display MW and is displayed overlapping with the white meter display MW. As shown in FIG. 91 (step 19 ), the green meter-up item UpIm that has moved to the white meter display MW is taken in (stocked) in the white meter display MW, and the white meter display MW rises by 3 levels. The white meter display MW shown in (step 19) is full. In FIG. 91 (SE 20-1 ), the white meter display MW changes to the character display “promotion”, and a change animation (not shown) is started. In FIG. 91 (SE 21 ), the display mode of the navigation character YM is red. It has been changed (promoted) to the display mode wearing the kimono. The color of the kimono of the navigation character YM changed here coincides with the background color of the character display "promotion" shown in FIG. 91 (SE 20-1), and at the stage of FIG. 91 (SE 20-1). A display mode in which the navigation character YM changes is announced in advance. The change animation may be omitted. In addition, the white meter display shown in (21) in the figure has returned to an empty state, but it may remain full. Further, when the meter display is full, the display mode of the navigation character YM may change (promote) without fail, or may not change (promote) (failure).

As shown in (1-2-1) of FIG. 91, instead of FIG. 91 (step 1-1), the meter display may not always be displayed. As shown in FIG. 91 (step 1-2-2), the meter-up item UpI may appear even when the meter display is not displayed. Also in this case, the meter increase item UpI moves to a fixed position in the effect icon display area DIS as shown in FIG. 91 (step 1-2-3). Then, as shown in FIG. 91 (step 1-2-4), the meter display (here, the white meter display MW) appears after the movement of the meter rising item UpI is completed. In this case, the appearance of the meter increase item UpI serves as a notice that the meter display is displayed. Further, the meter display may be displayed according to the appearance of the meter increase item UpI. For example, the meter-up item UpI may be displayed at the same time, or may be displayed at a timing between FIG. 91 (SE 1-2-2) and FIG. 91 (SE 1-2-3 ).

In FIG. 91 (Set 1-2-5), the white meter display MW is increased by 1 level by the meter increase item UpI. In the example shown in FIG. 91, when the meter display is displayed, the meter always rises after that. However, even if the meter display is displayed, the meter may not rise (corresponding to false). Or, there may be a case where the meter rising item does not appear. Furthermore, the meter may not rise even if the meter rise item appears.

In addition, the meter display may be displayed from the symbol variation display before the symbol variation display in which the meter rising item appears. In this case, the meter display is a pre-reading notice that the meter may accumulate. become. Alternatively, the meter display may be displayed at the same time as the start of the symbol fluctuation display in which the meter rising item appears or during the symbol fluctuation, and in this case, the meter display may accumulate the meter within the fluctuation. It will be a notice that there is.
92 is a diagram showing a modified example of the example described with reference to FIG. 91.

In place of FIG. 91 (SE1-1), in FIG. 92 (SE1-3-1), the first decorative symbol is changing at a high speed with no hold, and the white meter display MW in an empty state is It is displayed. While the white meter display MW displayed in FIG. 91 (SE1-1) was full at 6 levels, the white meter display MW displayed in FIG. 92 (SE1-3-1) was displayed. The MW is full at level 5.

In FIG. 92 (step 1-3-3a), the meter rise icon MUI is added to the navigation character YM. In the meter rise icon MUI shown in FIG. 92 (step 1-3-3a), a gold meter rise item UpIg is displayed. The white meter display MW shown in FIG. 92 (step 1-3-4a) is filled up at once due to the gold meter-up item UpIg. After that, the animation in which the navigation character YM changes is started. At that time, the meter may be in an empty state or may remain stored. In the meter display, the color of the meter itself (gauge mg) that increases in the meter frame mf is blue, but if it is in the accumulated state, even if the blue gauge is full. It is also possible that the gold gauge up item UpIg fills the tank at once, so that the gold gauge may be full.

On the other hand, also in FIG. 92 (step 1-3-3b), the meter increase icon MUI is added to the navigation character YM, and a rainbow-colored meter increase item UpIn is displayed here. The white meter display MW shown in FIG. 92 (step 1-3-4b) is also filled up at once due to the iridescent meter-up item UpIn. After that, the animation in which the navigation character YM changes is started. At that time, the meter may be in an empty state or may remain stored. In addition, when it is in a state of being accumulated, it may be full with a blue gauge, or when it is full with a rainbow meter up item UpIn at once, it is full with a rainbow gauge. It may be in a tongue state.

White, blue, green, red, gold, and rainbow items are available as meter-up items. Of these items, only the rainbow-colored meter-raising item UpIn and the gold-colored meter-raising item UpIg are items that can increase the meter by 5 levels at once. The white meter-raising item UpI is increased by 1 level, the blue meter-increasing item UpIb is increased by 2 levels, the green meter-increasing item UpIm is increased by 3 levels, and the red meter-increasing item UpIr is increased by 4 levels.

In addition, the rainbow-colored meter-up item UpIn also functions as a big hit confirmation notice. On the other hand, the gold meter up item UpIg does not have such a function. Therefore, when the meter is filled with one rainbow-colored meter-up item UpIn, when the meter is filled with one gold-colored meter-up item UpIn, or with other colors (white, blue, green, red) The meaning is different when the meter is filled up with a combination of items for increasing meters.

In the meter display, the colors of the meter itself (gauge) that increase in the meter frame mf are white, blue, green, and red meter increasing items, and when the meter rises or becomes full, It may be a blue gauge.

It should be noted that the color of the meter rising item may also have a function as a normal notice or a look-ahead notice. In addition, the degree of expectation of a big hit may be represented by a color.

In addition, the color of the meter rising item may be linked to the color of the display mode of the navigation character YM, or may be necessarily linked. For example, when a gold meter-up item UpIg appears, the navigation character YM is also likely to change to a display mode wearing a gold kimono, or it always changes, and vice versa, a display in which the navigation character YM wears a gold kimono. According to the aspect, the gold meter-up item UpIg may easily appear or may always appear.

Furthermore, the order of appearance of the meter-raising items and the combination of colors may function as a pre-reading notice or as a normal notice. Also, the order of appearance of the meter-raising items and the combination of colors may represent the degree of expectation of a big hit. On the contrary, the order of appearance of the meter-raising items and the combination of colors may be completely unrelated to the expectation of the big hit.

In addition, in this example, the meter is stored until it reaches 15 (the meter is full three times). Note that in the meter display in which the tank is full at the 6th level in FIG. 91, the meter is accumulated until it reaches 18 (again, the meter is full 3 times). Here, when the meter overflows by displaying the meter increase item (for example, when the red Up icon is displayed when three meters are accumulated), the meter is set to 0 while promoting the navigation character. It is also possible to collect the amount that has not been accumulated. For example, when the red meter-up item UpIt is displayed when three meters are accumulated, the meter is filled up once, and the meter is further accumulated in two levels.

In addition, when the meter overflows in the state where the meter is full twice, the meter may be filled up and the portion which cannot be stored may be displayed on the meter. For example, the meter may be reset to 0 when the prefetch target variation or the variation has ended, or may remain displayed regardless of the prefetch target variation or the variation. In addition, you may cut off the portion that you have not accumulated. For example, when a meter is stored, the meter at that time may be in a state of 0, a full state, a special display, or a non-display of the meter. Good. Furthermore, it may be configured not to overflow. For example, when three have already been accumulated, only two white meter-up items UpI or one blue meter-up item UpIb is displayed.

In an example starting from FIG. 92 (SE1-4-1) instead of FIG. 91 (SE1-1), in FIG. 91 (SE1-4-2), a red beam is emitted from the flying UFO icon UFI. , Is illuminated toward the navigation character YM in the default display mode, and the navigation character YM changes to a display mode wearing a red kimono as shown in FIG. The balloon is attached. This “Up high accuracy medium” informs that the meter rising item is in a state where it is easy to accumulate.

Note that, depending on the display mode of the notice for changing the navigation character YM, the notification of “Up High Probability Medium” may occur or may necessarily occur. Further, when the navigation character YM changes, the notification of “Up High Probability Medium” may be issued without fail, or a plurality of types of effect display (preliminary display) including the notification of “Up High Probability Medium” may be performed. , The effect display including the notification of “Up High Probability Medium” may not be performed.

Further, the effect performed by the navigation character YM may be different depending on the display mode (color) of the navigation character YM. For example, in the case of the red navigation character YM, "Up high accuracy" is notified, in the case of the gold navigation character YM, the intense heat display is displayed, and in the case of the rainbow-colored navigation character YM, the iron plate display is displayed. May be done. The navigation characters YM having different display modes may give the same notice (the same type of notice).

In place of FIG. 91 (SE 5-1), in FIG. 92 (SE 5-2-1), the gauge of the white meter display MW is 1 level with blinking white, and the kimono of the navigation character YM also blinks white. There is. Then, once the meter is full and returns to an empty state, in FIG. 92 (step 5-2-3), the display mode of the navigation character YM changes to the display mode wearing a green kimono, The gauge of the white meter display MW also changes to green and has risen to 3 levels. Then, after the meter is full again and the state returns to the empty state, in FIG. 92 (step 5-2-5), the display mode of the navigation character YM is changed to the display mode wearing a rainbow-colored kimono. The gauge of the white meter display MW has also changed to rainbow color and is full. In this way, the meter storage condition and the display mode of the navigation character YM may be configured to match. Further, the color of the gauge and the color of the navigation character YM may correspond to each other.

It should be noted that, when all the meters are accumulated, a pattern in which a big hit is confirmed or a high expectation of a big hit and a pattern in which the meters are accumulated and released to perform an effect may be separately prepared. As an example of the latter, for example, when the meter is discharged when the level is accumulated up to 2 levels, a blue equivalent effect is performed, and when the meter is accumulated up to 4 levels, the red equivalent effect is generated. Is done.
FIG. 93 is a diagram showing another modification of the example described with reference to FIG. 91.

In place of FIG. 91 (SE6-1), in FIG. 93 (SE6-2), the roulette display icon RI and the meter rise icon MUI are displayed on the white blinking meter display MW′ in which the meter frame mf blinks in white. Is displayed, but a part of the meter rise icon MUI overlaps a part of the roulette display icon RI from the front side, and the roulette display icon RI shown in FIG. It is more difficult to visually recognize as compared with the roulette display icon RI shown in 7-1). On the other hand, in the meter rise icon MUI shown in FIG. 91 (step 7-1), a green meter rise item UpIm is displayed. The meter rising icon MUI may overlap the entire roulette display icon RI from the front side. On the contrary, at least a part of the meter rising icon MUI at least partially overlaps the roulette display icon RI from the front side. You can wrap it. As a priority order displayed on the front side, the icon added to the navigation character YM may be higher than the other icons. In this example, when there is a notice that the meter rising icon may be displayed, such as when the roulette display icon is being displayed, the meter rising icon is displayed by displaying the white blinking meter that blinks the meter frame in white. Although it is informed that there is a possibility that it will be displayed, even if there is a notice that the meter rising icon may be displayed, it may not be notified by the meter frame, It may be configured not to notify that the meter rising icon may be displayed. In addition, the advance notice notifying that the meter rising icon may be displayed may be given not only by the meter frame but also by another display or rendering means.

In place of FIG. 91 (step 7-1), in FIG. 93 (step 7-2), the blue meter-up item UpIb is stopped and displayed on the roulette display icon RI. However, it is difficult to visually recognize because the meter rise icon MUI still overlaps. In this way, the meter rise icons may overlap each other. When the meter rise icons overlap each other, the priority displayed on the front side may be the display order of the meter rise icons, the higher meter rise may be prioritized, or the meter rise may be higher. The lower one may be prioritized. Further, the navigator character YM does not overlap the meter rising icon from the front side, but may overlap.

Further, in place of FIG. 91 (SE 7-1), in FIG. 93 (SE 7-3-1), an image up for notifying (notifying) that the meter rise icon is displayed in the roulette display icon RI is displayed. 'Is displayed. However, at this stage, it is unclear how many colors of the meter-raising icon will be displayed, and thereafter, the colors of the meter-raising icon will be displayed in the roulette display icon RI. In this way, when it is informed in the roulette effect that the meter rise icon is displayed although it is unknown what color it is, as shown in FIG. 93 (step 7-3-2), the roulette display icon RI is displayed. The effect display Ed1 to which the aura has been added is displayed so as to overlap from the front side. In the following FIG. 93 (step 7-3-3), the effect display Ed1 changes, and the display is as if the blue meter rise icon is enlarged. At this stage, it is not known how many colors of the meter rise icon are displayed in the roulette display icon RI. At this stage, a blue meter-raising icon may also be displayed in the roulette display icon RI.

In FIG. 93 (step 7-3-4), the blue meter rising icon UpIb is displayed as an enlarged blue meter rising icon that overlaps the roulette display icon RI, and the white blinking meter display MW is displayed. Moved to'and blinking white meter display MW' is displayed overlapping. Further, the roulette display icon RI fades out, the display becomes fainter, and gradually disappears. The color of the meter-raising item displayed in the roulette display icon RI may remain unknown. Thereafter, the blue meter-up item UpIb is taken in (stocked) in the white blinking meter display MW′, and the white blinking meter display MW′ is leveled up.

The blue meter-up item UpIb may appear in the roulette display icon RI and be taken into the white blinking meter display MW′. In this case, the blue meter-up item UpIb may be displayed in the roulette display icon RI before the effect display Ed1 is displayed, may be displayed at the same time as the effect display Ed1, or may be displayed. It may be displayed after being displayed. Alternatively, in the roulette display icon RI, the blue meter-raising item UpIb may be displayed before the display of an enlarged blue meter-raising icon, or may be displayed at the same time. It may be displayed, or may be displayed after being displayed.

In FIG. 93 (SE-20-2-1) instead of FIG. 91 (SE-20-1), the white meter display MW in the full state is temporarily changed to the character display of “stock”, and the empty state is displayed. When returning to the white meter display MW, the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display appears on the carpet icon I2. In this example, although the meter is full, the display mode of the navigation character YM does not change until the treasure box is opened, and the display mode of the navigation character YM is delayed. In addition, you may change the icon (holding icon, change icon) other than the navigation character or other effect display that changes only the display mode of the navigation character YM by opening the icon I1 of the treasure box.
FIG. 94 shows an example of effect in which a telop effect is entwined with the navigation character YM.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 94 (part 1), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the variable icon h0 in the default display mode is displayed. In addition, two special reservations 1 are reserved, and a first reservation icon h11 and a second reservation icon h12 are displayed. Both the two hold icons h11 and h12 are default display modes. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed.

In FIG. 94 (part 2-1), the telop display trp is displayed above the first decorative symbol. In this telop display trp, the possibility that the navigation character YM may change is displayed in characters, which corresponds to an example of a change notice display. For example, a display such as "Navi character change highly accurate" or a character display such as "Navi character change highly accurate preparation" is flown from right to left on the screen. In addition to this, the telop display trp is plain and no characters are displayed, and the telop display indicates "○○ high accuracy medium", "XX&○○ high accuracy medium", "○○ high accuracy medium". There may be a case where the user is informed in advance that there is a possibility that "Preparing", "XX or XX high-precision preparing", "High-precision preparing", etc. may be displayed. Even if a plain telop display trp is displayed here, "○○ high-accuracy in progress", "XX & ○○ high-accuracy in progress", "○○ high-accuracy in preparation", "XX or ○○ high-accuracy in preparation" In some cases, "," "high-precision preparation in progress", etc. are not displayed. In addition, "○○ high-precision preparation in progress", "XX or XX high-precision preparation in progress", "high-precision preparation in progress", etc. are displayed, and there is a possibility that a high probability state will occur for the production displayed as a telop from now on. This may be notified in advance. "XX" and "XX" described here are various effects (for example, hold (hold icon and/or change icon) change, pseudo-repeated, advance notice with high-expected color, high expectation for big hit. The name of a notice (so-called gekiatsu notice) is shown.

Note that the high-probability state for the effect described here means that the notice that the high-probability state is notified by the telop display is the high-probability state that is notified by the telop rather than when the high-probability state is not notified by the telop display. This shows a state in which the frequency of the operation is high. That is, in FIG. 94 (Sol. 1) to (Sol. 14), (Soh 2-2), (Sw 2-3), and (Sw. 8-2) in FIG. The symbol “” indicates a state in which the display mode of the navigation character is more likely to change than when the notification of “navigation character highly accurate” is not displayed on the telop display. Also, the "high-precision preparation" included in the above-mentioned "○○ high-precision preparation", "XX or XX high-precision preparation", "high-precision preparation", etc. will be notified by the telop display. The production being performed is in a high-probability state from now on (variation after the change that started displaying the telop containing "high-precision preparation" or the change that started displaying the telop containing "high-precision preparation" (Inside) (or a high probability state may occur).

In FIG. 94 (3), the variable display of symbols is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed the combination of decorative symbols that are lost. The telop display trp is displayed in front of the second decorative symbol, and the lower end of the second decorative symbol is overlapped from the front side by the telop display trp. However, conversely, the second decorative pattern may overlap the telop display trp from the front side.

In FIG. 94 (S4), the suspension of the first suspension icon h11 is exhausted and the variable display of symbols is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started. After that, the lost symbols are stopped and displayed, and in FIG. 94 (6), the variable display of symbols is also started. The telop display trp is continuing.

In FIG. 94 (S7), the change animation of the navigation character YM is started, and the navigation character YM is wrapped in a smoke image. In FIG. 94 (S8-1), the smoke image disappears, and the navigation character YM changes to a display mode wearing a red kimono. Even if the change effect of the navigation character YM is successful, the telop display trp continues. After that, the lost symbol is stopped and displayed, and also in FIG. 94 (10), the variable display of symbols is started, and in the same figure (11), the telop display trp is still continuing.

The navigation character YM may change when the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display appears, the change animation is started, the treasure box of the treasure box icon I1 opens. In this case, it can be said that the display such as “Navi character change highly accurate” in the telop display trp indicates the appearance of the treasure box icon I1 or the start of the change animation.

In FIG. 94 (12), the change animation of the navigation character YM is restarted, and the navigation character YM is wrapped in a smoke image. In FIG. 94 (13), the smoke image disappears and the navigation character YM changes to a display mode wearing a gold kimono. Even if the second change effect of the navigation character YM is successful, the telop display trp is continuing.

While the telop display trp is displayed, the change effect of the navigation character YM may be performed any number of times. However, if the navigation character YM changes once while the telop display trp is displayed, the navigation character YM changes thereafter. It may be configured not to.

In FIG. 94 (14), the reach state is entered, but the telop display trp is still continuing. As the timing at which the display of the telop display trp disappears, at the time of starting the super reach (for example, FIG. 78 (e.g. 24)), during the temporary stop of the decorative symbol (for example, during the first stop, the second stop, and the third stop) , Symbol stop character, start of next change, etc.

In this example, the change effect is performed by the navigation character itself, but the navigation character may be changed by the change notice display, and the navigation character is changed only by the change notice display. Alternatively, the navigation character may be configured to perform only the change effect.

Further, instead of FIG. 94 (s 2-1), the telop display trp may be displayed in two steps, upper and lower, as shown in the same figure (s 2-2 ). Then, different contents may be displayed in the upper telop display trp and the lower telop display trp.

In addition, in the telop display, the high-precision middle display may be displayed for other notices. As long as the same prefetch target is held, the display timing may be the same or one may be later than the other. In addition, when one telop display of “High accuracy middle” is displayed, the telop display may not be displayed or may be displayed for another prefetch target hold. In that case, a telop display regarding the same notice (for example, “Navi character high probability middle”) may be separately displayed, and the display period of the same telop display may be extended. Further, the display position of the telop display may be determined in the display start order, or the display position of each telop may be fixed.

Further, instead of FIG. 94 (s 2-1), the same content may be displayed in the upper telop display trp and the lower telop display trp as shown in the same FIG. (s 2-3). That is, the same telop display may be displayed multiple times. In some cases, it may be possible to appeal that the expectation of a big hit is higher when displaying a plurality of ones than when displaying only one. However, even if a plurality of images are displayed, the expectation level of the big hit may be the same as the case where only one is displayed. Further, displaying a plurality of the same telop displays may be repeated. That is, a plurality of telop displays having the same content may be displayed each time the display of the telop display is started.

Further, instead of FIG. 94 (S8-1), as shown in the same drawing (S8-2), when the navigation character YM is changed (one or more times), no further change is made. May be notified by a telop display trp. In this example, the character display of "completion" is displayed. However, even if this notification is made, the navigation character YM may further change.

FIG. 95 is a diagram showing an example of an effect involving the navigation character YM by the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14(b).

FIG. 95 (1a-1) shows a first decorative symbol display device 208L, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, and a third decorative symbol display device 208N. It should be noted that the second decorative symbol and the second reserved number display are displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N on the right side.

In the central first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 95 (1a-1), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the variable icon h0 in the default display mode is displayed. In addition, four reservations of special figure 1 are accumulated, and four reservation icons h11 to h14 are displayed. All of these four hold icons h11 to h14 are default display modes. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed.

In FIG. 95 (ta 2a-1), the first decorative symbol is in the reach state, and “decoration 7” is displayed in shaking (temporary stop) for both the left symbol and the right symbol. All the displays have disappeared from the first decorative symbol display device 208L after shifting to the reach effect. That is, the first decorative symbol, the hold frame UI, the hold icons h11 to h14, the variable icon h0, and the navigation character YM are disappeared.

In FIG. 95 (4a), the design of the enemy swordsman is displayed on the entire screen on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. On the other hand, the second decorative symbol display device 208M displays the reduced first decorative symbol, the variable icon h0, and the navigation character YM. The variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM may be displayed on different decorative symbol display devices.

In FIG. 95 (5a), the background of the wilderness that is the background display of the super reach effect is displayed across the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays a duel scene in which the main character, the lord, and the enemy swordsman face each other.

Here, in place of FIG. 95 (ta 1a-1), in FIG. 95 (ta 1a-2), a part of the holding frame UI is enlarged and displayed, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the first decorative symbol display are displayed. It is displayed across the device 208L. That is, the hold icon display area HIS is displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the variable icon display area CIS is displayed at the right end of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. ing. Further, the first hold icon h11, the second hold icon h12 is enlarged and displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the fourth hold icon h14 is enlarged and displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third hold icon. h13 is enlarged and displayed across the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Further, the navigation character YM is enlarged and displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Since the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N have a frame surrounding the display screen, this frame interferes and divides the image displayed across.

Although the right base icon bIr is not displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N in which the navigation character YM is displayed in an enlarged manner, the right base icon bIr may also be displayed in an enlarged manner together with the navigation character YM.

Note that the display may not be enlarged as shown in FIG. 95 (1a-2), but may be across a plurality of display devices. For example, a pattern that is straddling from the beginning of display, a pattern that is moved from the original position and is straddled, a pattern that is displayed when the image changes, or an image that is enlarged and straddled is displayed. Pattern, and on the contrary, a pattern in which the image is reduced and displayed across the area. Further, when the image is enlarged and displayed as shown in FIG. 95 (1a-2), the expectation of the jackpot is high, the hold icon is easily changed, the change icon is easily changed, or the navigation character YM is displayed. May be easier to change. The navigation character YM may be displayed across a plurality of display devices. Here, in the case where the effect display is displayed across a plurality of display devices and the display device A in the front overlaps a part of the display area of the display device B, the display device B A part of the image displayed in the display area of the display apparatus B may be displayed in the display area overlapped by the display apparatus A in FIG.

As described above, the matters described with reference to FIG. 95 (1a-2) can be applied to the effect examples described so far and can also be applied to the effect examples described later.

Further, in place of FIG. 95 (ta 1a-1), a part of the holding frame UI is moved and displayed in the same figure (ta 1a-3). That is, the effect icon display area DIS is moved to the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the right base icon bIr is also displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The navigation character YM is also displayed on the right base icon bIr.

In this way, when the navigation character YM moves to another display device, the navigation character YM may be more likely to change, the expectation of a big hit may be higher, or another effect change (for example, hold). Change of icon or variable icon) may be facilitated. Also, depending on the destination of the navigation character YM, the ease of change of the navigation character YM, the high degree of expectation of a big hit, and the change of other effects (for example, change of a hold icon or a change icon) are possible. They may be different or may be the same with no effect. For example, the probability that the navigation character YM changes may be higher in the case of moving to the third decorative symbol display device 208N than in the case of moving to the second decorative symbol display device 208L. Although the movement of the navigation character YM has been described above, the same applies to the case where the hold icon moves to another display device or the variable icon moves to another display device.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 95 (1a-3), it can be seen that the holding frame Ui is divided (broken). That is, although the effect icon display area DIS is broken and moved to the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it may be moved to another place of the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

As described above, the matters described with reference to FIG. 95 (1a-3) can be applied to the effect examples described so far, and can also be applied to the effect examples described later.

Further, instead of FIG. 95 (ta 1a-1), in FIG. 95 (ta 1a-4), the navigation character YM is split when it moves. That is, when moving from the first decorative symbol display device 208L to another display device, it is divided into two and is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. This can be seen as an increase in the navigation character YM.

In this way, when the navigation character YM is divided (increased), the navigation character YM may be more likely to change, the expectation of a big hit may be higher, or other production changes (for example, a hold icon or It may be easier for the change icon to change).

Further, since the right base icon bIr is also displayed at the location where the navigation character YM is displayed, it can be said that the effect icon display area DIS is also divided (increase).

As described above, the items described with reference to FIG. 95 (1a-4) can be applied to the effect examples described so far and can also be applied to the effect examples described later. That is, also in the other effect examples, the navigation character YM may be divided (increase) in some cases, and may be necessarily divided (increase).

FIG. 96 is a diagram showing an example of another effect involving the navigation character YM by the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14B.

In FIG. 96 (1b), the background of the sea is displayed over the three decorative pattern display devices 208L to 208N. Further, in the central first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 95 (1a-1), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the variable icon h0 in the default display mode is displayed. In addition, four reservations of special figure 1 are accumulated, and four reservation icons h11 to h14 are displayed. All of these four hold icons h11 to h14 are default display modes. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed.

In FIG. 96 (2b), the change animation of the navigation character YM is started, and the navigation character YM is overlapped by the smoke image. Also, in the left and right second decorative symbol display devices 208M and third decorative symbol display devices 208N shown in FIG. 96 (2b), the background display of the sea disappears.

In FIG. 96 (3b), the smoke image disappears, the navigation character YM disappears from the effect icon display area DIS, and a signboard icon "searching" is displayed instead. Further, on the right side third decorative symbol display device 208N where the background display of the sea disappears, the same character (lord) YM' as the navigation character YM is displayed and running. Moreover, the character display "searching" is displayed on it. Similarly, a silhouette display slt is displayed together with the image of the question mark on the second decorative pattern display device 208M on the left side where the background display of the sea disappears.

The icon of the sign “Searching” may be a notification indicating that the change effect (promotion effect) of the navigation character YM is likely to succeed. Further, the probability of success is higher when the signboard color is blue than white, and the success probability is higher when the signboard color is red than blue. It should be noted that promotion may be confirmed as long as it is red. Further, this signboard may change in color, display characters, or the like, but may not change. In addition, a display mode in which the navigation character YM may change may be suggested depending on the display mode of the signboard. For example, if the signboard is blue, the navigation character YM may change to a display mode wearing a blue kimono.

In FIG. 96 (4b), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, which have been in the fully open state (initial state) so far, are in front of the first decorative symbol display device 208L so as to approach each other. Coming in. It should be noted that this period corresponds to the period of the fan production.

In FIG. 96 (5b-1), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N move to a certain position and stop. Here, it moves to the position of the fully closed state (maximum movement position) in contact with each other and stops, but it may be the position before contact.

FIG. 96 (6b-1) is a diagram showing an example of the promotion success pattern, and in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the running character (lord) YM' poses with a thumb up, and above that. Is displayed with a character display indicating the level up. On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the silhouette display slt is changed to the actual display, and a thousand box is displayed. The display mode of the thousand boxes may indicate a display mode in which the navigation character YM may change. For example, if the thousand boxes are blue, the navigation character YM may change to a display mode wearing a blue kimono. The color, the open/closed state, and the like of this thousand-box box may change, but may not change. In FIG. 96 (7b), the character (lord) YM' displayed on the third decorative pattern display device 208N is changed to a display mode wearing a red kimono.

Then, in FIG. 96 (8b), each of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N moves in front of the first decorative symbol display device 208L so as to separate from each other, and returns to the initial state. .. When each of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N returns to the initial state, a wipe effect is performed on each of the decorative symbol display devices 208M and N. The second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 96 (9b) are in the middle of wipe-in, and in FIG. 96 (10b), the wipe-in is completed and the second decorative symbol display device 208M. In addition, the wipe display in which only the model title is displayed is also displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 96 (10b), the smoke image is displayed at the position where the signboard icon was displayed until then.

In the effect icon display area DIS of the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 96 (11b), the smoke image disappears, and the navigation character YM changed to the display mode wearing a red kimono is displayed. Further, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, wipeout is started. In this example, the wipe-in animation (an animation that closes from the left and right) and the wipe-out animation (an animation that opens from the inside to the outside) are different, but the same animation may be used. In FIG. 96 (12b), the wipeout is completed, and the background of the sea is displayed over the three decorative pattern display devices 208L to 208N. In addition, in one decorative symbol display device, the effect display displayed on the three decorative symbol display devices of this example may be performed. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and/or the third decorative symbol display device 208N can be replaced with one or a plurality of effect movable bodies that do not include a liquid crystal display device (for example, the effect movable body performs effect operation). And, there is a production that the navigation character is promoted.)

The change effect (promotion effect) of the navigation character YM described with reference to FIG. 96 can be applied to the effect examples described so far and can also be applied to the effect examples described later.

FIG. 97 is a diagram showing an example of still another effect involving the navigation character YM by the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14B.

In the central first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 97 (1a-3-1), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the variable icon h0 in the default display mode is displayed. In addition, four reservations of special figure 1 are accumulated, and four reservation icons h11 to h14 are displayed. All of these four hold icons h11 to h14 are default display modes. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed.

In FIG. 97 (1a-3-2), a moving animation in which the navigation character YM displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L moves to the third decorative symbol display device 208N is displayed. In this FIG. 97 (1a-3-2), the navigation character YM is located just between the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. And is displayed across the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Here, also, since there is a frame surrounding the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, this frame interferes and divides the navigation character YM displayed across the frame. In the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 97 (1a-3-3), the navigation character YM having the same display size as that displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed.

On the other hand, in FIG. 97 (1a-3-2′), the navigation character YM displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L moves to the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the third decorative symbol display device. In 208N, an example of enlarged display is shown. Although only the right hand and the toes of the right foot of the navigation character YM are displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 97 (1a-3-2′), the toes of the right hand and the right foot are enlarged and displayed. Therefore, the navigation character YM is immediately enlarged and displayed from the portion that has entered the third decorative symbol display device 208N. On the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 97 (1a-3-3'), a navigation character YM having a display size larger than that displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed. .. In this way, when the navigation character YM is enlarged and displayed, the navigation character YM may be more likely to change, the expectation of a big hit may be higher, and the like, than when it is not enlarged and displayed. The change of the effect (for example, change of the hold icon or the change icon) may be facilitated, or may be the same without any influence. Further, when the navigation character YM is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it may or may not always be enlarged and displayed.

The moving animation of the navigation character YM described with reference to FIG. 97 can be applied to the effect examples described so far, and can also be applied to the effect examples described later.

Further, instead of FIG. 96 (8b), FIG. 97 (5b-2) shows a pattern in which the change effect (promotion effect) of the navigation character YM has failed. In FIG. 96 (4b), when the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N start moving toward each other and both 208M and 208N stop before reaching a certain position. Is a failure. The second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N which are stopped on the way also return to the initial state, but the notification of change effect (elevation effect) failure is performed after returning to the initial state. In the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 97 ((5b-2)), the character (lord) YM' is in a pose in which it is facing backward and depressed. It should be noted that the notification of failure may be started in the middle of returning to the initial state. Alternatively, the notification of failure may be started at a stage where the vehicle has stopped before reaching a certain position.

Further, if both 208M and 208N stop before reaching a certain position, it may be a failure, but the navigation character YM may be promoted. Further, even if this change effect (promotion effect) fails, the navigation character YM may be promoted by another effect. This also applies to the effects described above, which are divided into success and failure.

Further, if the change effect (elevation effect) here fails, the navigation character YM will continue for the time being (for example, until the background display changes, or until the promotion failure to the end of N variations, The change may be restricted until the fluctuation of the prefetch target suspension related to the promotion failure ends).

Further, in place of FIG. 96 (ta 6b-1), FIG. 97 (ta 6b-2) includes a second decorative symbol display device 208M and a third decorative symbol up to a certain position (for example, a position in a fully closed state). Although the display device 208N has moved, a pattern in which the change effect (elevation effect) has failed is shown. Also in the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 97 (6b-2), the character (lord) YM' in the pose that looks backward and is depressed is displayed as in the previous case. Further, on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the silhouette display slt is changed to an actual display, and a mandarin orange box is displayed there.

In this way, even if the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N move to a certain position, the promotion effect may fail. On the contrary, when the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N move to a certain position, the navigation character YM may be promoted without fail. Also, the navigation character YM may be promoted even in the state shown in FIG. 97 (6b-2), or conversely, in this state, the failure may be confirmed.

FIG. 98 is a diagram showing an example of an effect involving the navigation character YM by the effect device 206 in which the second display device is provided below the decorative symbol display device 208 (first display device).

The background of the sea is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 98 (1c). On the other hand, the background of the sea is not displayed on the second display device 208S provided below the decorative pattern display device 208 (first display device), and the hold frame UI is displayed on this second display device 208S. ing. That is, the hold icon display area HIS, the variable icon display area CIS, and the effect icon display area DIS are provided, and the pedestal hs0 is arranged in the variable icon display area CIS. In the hold icon display area HIS, four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged on the base icon bIn. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed. The second display device 208S may be fixed or may be capable of moving up and down.

Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 98 (1c), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the variable icon h0 in the default display mode is displayed on the second display device 208S. Further, the default first hold icon h11 is also displayed on the second display device 208S.

On the second display device 208S shown in FIG. 98 (2c), a sliding effect fusuma image is displayed. In the state shown in FIG. 98 (3c), the fusuma image is fully closed (wiping-in state). Is. In the second display device 208S shown in FIG. 98(4), the wipeout starts, and in the second display device 208S shown in FIG. 98(5c), the sliding door image is in a fully opened state (wipeout state). On the second display device 208S shown in FIG. 98 (5c) where the wipe effect is finished, neither the hold frame UI, the hold icon h11, the change icon h0, nor the navigation character YM is displayed. The mini-game animation by is displayed. That is, due to the wipe effect, the hold frame UI, the hold icon h11, the change icon h0, and the navigation character YM are also hidden, and a change (promotion) in the display mode of the navigation character YM is bet (dividing) mini of golf. The game has started. In addition, even in the same mini game, there may be a mini game in which a successful super reach production is started. At the stage of FIG. 98 (ta 4c), it can be seen that the mini game is started on the second display device 208S, but it is not known what the bet (dividing) mini game is, and therefore, of the FIG. 98 (ta 5c). I don't know until the stage. Therefore, in some cases, at least the second display device 208S can be focused on until the description of the mini game (here, “If you enter the cup, you are promoted to Yoshimune”) is performed.

In the second display device 208S shown in FIG. 98 (6c-1), the cup-in is successful. When the cup-in is successful, the wipe effect is started again, and the sliding door image starts to close again in FIG. 98 (7c), and the state shown in FIG. 98 (8c) is that the sliding door image is fully closed (wiping-in state). is there. In the second display device 208S shown in FIG. 98 (9c), wipeout starts, and in the second display device 208S shown in FIG. 98 (10c), the fusuma image is fully opened (wipeout state). On the second display device 208S shown in FIG. 98 (10c) that has been wiped out again, the hold frame UI, the hold icon h11, the change icon h0, and the navigation character YM are displayed. After the wipeout is completed in this way, the change animation of the navigation character YM is displayed on the second display device 208S (FIG. 98 (11c)). In the change animation here, the navigation character YM is overlapped by the smoke image, and in FIG. 98 (12c), the smoke image disappears and the navigation character YM changes to the display mode of the red kimono.

Further, in FIG. 98 (ta 6c-1) instead of FIG. 98 (ta 6c-1), the cup-in fails. In this way, when the mini game in which the change (promotion) of the display mode of the navigation character YM is bet fails, the navigation character YM does not have to be promoted, but may be promoted. .. Further, as shown in FIG. 98 (6c-1), when the mini game is successful, the navigation character YM may be absolutely promoted, but may not be promoted.

It should be noted that when wiping out from FIG. 98 (8c), a wipe effect that may suggest to the player the possibility that the navigation character YM is promoted may be used, or a display mode in which the navigation character YM changes It may be a wipe effect that can be suggested.

Further, the navigation character YM may have already changed (promoted) at the time of wiping out in FIG. 98 (10c).

Further, the second display device 208S may perform the production operation during execution of the mini game. In addition, at the time of success (Fig. 98 (Fig. 6c-1) in this example), at the time of failure (Fig. 98 (Fig. 6c-2) in this example) and agitation (Fig. 98 (Fig. 98c) in this example). Different staging operations may be performed. In addition, instead of the second display device 208S, an effect operation by an effect movable body may be performed.

The mini game described with reference to FIG. 98 can be applied to the effect examples described so far, and can also be applied to the effect examples described later.

FIG. 99 is a diagram showing an example of a case where another effect is executed during execution of the effect selected by the player.

In the pachinko machine 100 in this description, the above-described customization setting is performed. That is, in the "character selection" shown in FIG. 63(b), "Copanda" of 07 is set, in the "holding frame selection", the "holding frame B" of 02 is set, and in the "holding display selection". The “icon C” of 03 is set, and the “background E” of 05 is set in the background display selection.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 99 (a1), the holding frame UI of the holding frame B is displayed, and in the effect icon display area DIS, a copanda is displayed as the navigation character YM. In addition, one hold of the special figure 1 has been accumulated, and the first hold icon h11, which is the default display mode of the icon C, is displayed. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 99 (Aa1), the background of the background E (empty background) is displayed.

In FIG. 99 (a a2), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is exhausted, the first decorative pattern is changing at high speed, and the change icon h0 that is the default display mode of the icon C is displayed. The navigation character YM of Copanda is also displayed.

In FIG. 99 (a a3-1), the icon I1 of the treasure box of the change notice display appears on the carpet icon I2 in the effect icon display area DIS, and in the same figure (a a4-1), the icon I2 of the carpet is displayed. Disappears and the treasure chest icon I1 remains. In FIG. 99 (a5), the change animation is started, the treasure box is opened, and the smoke image of the effect appears from the inside. The smoke image hides part or all of the navigation character YM, and the navigation character YM. Is clearly harder to see than before the smoke image appeared. The change animation may be started by operating the chance button 136. In this case, the back button may be used or the operation promotion notification may be performed. In FIG. 99 (a6), the smoke image disappears and the navigation character YM changes from co-panda to bancho. The longest character in the navigation character YM is a character that cannot be selected by the player, as shown in FIG. 63(b). The player may change to a character that can be selected (for example, a grandfather, a princess, etc.), or the character may be changed to a character that cannot be selected by the player.

In FIG. 99 (A7), the treasure box icon I1 disappears, and in FIG. 99 (A8), the reach state is entered. The navigator character YM having the longest length shown in FIG. 99 (a8) is provided with a balloon icon of "NEXT" that suggests a pseudo continuous effect.

In FIG. 99 (Aa9), the pseudo continuous pattern (the pattern of the lord's character) is temporarily stopped in the middle pattern of the first decorative pattern, and in the same figure (A10), the lord's character and the character display of "continuation". A cut-in display consisting of and is displayed. In this embodiment, in this manner, the pseudo-relational symbols are stopped and displayed, thereby informing that the pseudo-relational is being executed. Here, the pseudo-relation is a variable display mode of the decorative symbol in which the variation start and the temporary stop display of the decorative symbol are executed plural times in the variable display of one special symbol. In the present embodiment, the larger the number of times the pseudo-repeating is executed, the larger the chance of being hit.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 99 (a11), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is restarted. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, “×2” indicating that the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-link is started is displayed in a large size so as to overlap the first decorative symbol. Next, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 99 (a12), the display of “×2” is reduced and moved to the lower side of the second decorative symbol.

The navigator character YM having the longest length shown in FIG. 99 (aa13) is again provided with the balloon icon of "NEXT" that suggests the pseudo-relation effect, and there is still hope for the continuation of the pseudo-replication. After that, after the temporary stop display is performed 0 times, or once or a plurality of times, the player enters the reach state and further develops into a super reach effect (swordsman reach effect). The background screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 99 (Aa15) changes to the background of the wilderness which is the background display of the swordsman reach production, and the decorative pattern display device 208 shows the main character and the enemy swordsman. The duel scenes facing each other are displayed. Further, in the hold frame UI, the left base icon bI1 in the hold icon display area HIS and the four stages hs1 to hs4 are disappeared. Further, the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS is displayed, and the variable icon h0 is still displayed on it. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, the longest navigation character YM is displayed on the right base icon bIr.

The navigator character YM of the bancho shown in FIG. 99 (Aa16) is provided with a balloon icon of "chance" that fuels a big hit, and the navigator character YM of the bancho is performing a stirrup effect.

On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 99 (Aa18), the scene after the swordsman and the swordsman slashed each other is displayed in the super reach production. Here, the swordsman is lying down, and as a middle pattern, the The "decoration 6" different from the design ("decoration 7") is displayed in a large size (swing display). Although the height of the pedestal in the variable icon display area CIS is low, the lowered pedestal hs0' is displayed and the variable icon h0 is still displayed on it. In addition, the longest navigation character YM is still displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. After that, the wipe effect is started, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 99 (Aa19), it is in the middle of the wipe-in. In the same figure (Aa20), the wipe-in is completed, and then the wipe-out is started. In the figure (a a21), while returning to the background of the background E (the sky background), the navigation character YM of the copanda is also beginning to be seen. In FIG. 99 (Aa22), the wipe effect has ended, and the decorative pattern display device 208 swayingly displays "decoration 7"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 7", which is a combination of losses. The hold frame UI of the hold frame B is also displayed, and the variable icon h0, which is the default display mode of the icon C, is also displayed again. Further, a blue hold icon (prefetch hold icon) is displayed as the first hold icon h11.

Note that, as shown in FIGS. 79(e2) to (e4-1), the navigation character YM itself may change the display mode of itself. In this example, the change animation using the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display is running out, but the display mode of the navigation character YM is changed by the effect using the treasure box icon I1. It may be easier for the player to finally shift to a state advantageous to the player, as compared with the case where the player changes without using the treasure box icon I1 (for example, the player himself changes). Here, the advantageous state includes a transition to a big hit game state, a transition to a big hit game state in which the number of balls is large, and a transition to a definite change state or an electric support state.

In this example, even if the hold icon increases while the hold icon is hidden, the hold icon corresponding to the hold increased while the hold icon is hidden when the hold icon changes from hidden to visible. Look-ahead notice may be given. Note that if the number of holds increases while the hold icon is not displayed, the hold is consumed (until it is displayed in the variable icon display area, or until it is deleted from the variable icon display area. It may be configured to regulate the read-ahead notice and/or the notice of the change by the hold icon corresponding to the increased hold while the hold icon is not displayed, or the target of the change with the increased hold. It may be configured such that the pre-reading notice by the hold icon is regulated, and the pre-reading notice and/or the notice of the change may be given after the next change of the change in which the hold is increased.

In this example, while the pre-reading notice by the one hold icon is being executed, the pre-reading notice by the other hold icon may be given, but the pre-reading notice by the other hold icon may be made while the pre-reading notice is made by the one hold icon. , Until the hold corresponding to the one hold icon is exhausted (may be displayed in the variable icon display area or may be deleted from the variable icon display area) Good.

In this example, the navigation character selected by the player may give advance notice and/or look-ahead notice of the change, but the navigation character selected by the player gives notice of the change and/or look-ahead notice. You may not be discouraged. The tutorial display may be performed by the navigation character selected by the player (for example, the tutorial display is performed by a balloon icon), but the tutorial display is performed by the navigation character selected by the player. You may not be discouraged. Further, in this example, the navigation character and/or the look-ahead notice may be given by the navigation character that cannot be selected by the player, but the notice and/or the look-ahead notice may not be given. Further, the navigation character that cannot be selected by the player may be configured so that the promotion effect of the hold icon and/or the variable icon is easier to perform than the navigation character that can be selected by the player, or the navigation character changes. It may be configured to have a high expectation of a jackpot variation in the design and/or a pending big jackpot (or a jackpot confirmed (may be a jackpot rich)), a notice that the navigation character appears, and/or It may be configured so that the frequency of occurrence of the super reach effect is high (or always occurs).
FIG. 100 is a diagram showing a modification of the example shown in FIG. 99.

In place of FIG. 99 (Aa3-1), in FIG. 100 (Aa3-2), a change notice display is performed by light emission of the light guide plate IL instead of the treasure box icon I1. That is, the change of the navigation character YM may be announced by a different production means from the production means (here, the decorative symbol display device 208) in which the navigation character YM is displayed.

In addition, instead of FIG. 99 (Aa3-1), in FIG. 100 (Aa3-3), instead of the icon I1 of the treasure box, change notice display by the effecting operation of the movable means (here, the crest member 224E). It is carried out. That is, the family crest monument 224E moves from the initial position to a position where it has risen, and overlaps the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM. Note that there is no hold icon here, but if there is a hold icon, it also overlaps the hold icon. After that, the family crest monument 224E rotates clockwise (see the arrow in the figure). The family crest monument 224E may rotate at the initial position. Further, the family coat emblem 224E may vibrate along with or instead of rotating. Alternatively, only the ascending may be performed, and the rotation and the vibration may not be performed. Further, the navigation character YM may be changed during the overlap, or may be changed after the effect operation of the family crest product 224E is completed, that is, after the family crest product 224E returns to the initial position. Further, the easiness of change to the navigation character YM and the color of the display mode after the change may be notified by a light emission effect by the LED provided on the family crest monument 224E.

In addition, instead of FIG. 99 (Aa3-1), in FIG. 100 (Aa3-4), a change notice display is performed by sound output from the speaker 120 instead of the treasure box icon I1. The change notice display may be performed by the game board lamp 442 and the game underframe lamp 452.

Further, instead of FIG. 99 (a-a4-1), as shown in FIG. 100 (a-a-4-2), while the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display is once displayed in the effect icon display area DIS, The icon I1 may fly on the carpet icon I2 and fly away. In this case, the display mode of the navigation character YM does not change and corresponds to a so-called failure pattern.

Further, instead of FIG. 99 (Aa6-1), in FIG. 100 (Aa6-2), although the treasure box of the treasure box icon I1 is opened, the display mode of the navigation character YM does not change. Also corresponds to the so-called failure pattern.

Further, in place of FIG. 99 (Aa6-1), in FIG. 100 (Aa6-3), the navigation character YM of the Copanda is the same Copanda, but a different color of the clothes (here, the red clothes are red clothes). Of the navigation character YM and succeeded in the change effect (promotion effect) of the navigation character YM.

Further, instead of FIG. 99 (Aa3-1), in FIG. 100 (Ab1), as in the example shown in FIG. 98, the second display device 208S is provided below the decorative symbol display device 208 (first display device). Are arranged, and the second display device 208S is provided with a hold icon display area HIS, a variable icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS, and a pedestal hs0 is arranged in the variable icon display area CIS. .. In the hold icon display area HIS, four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged on the base icon bIn. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM of Copanda is displayed. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 100 (Abl), a conversation notice is given by the notice of the grandfather's character and the character display "Change in navigation character", and the change notice is displayed by this notice of conversation. It is being appreciated. That is, the fact that the navigation character YM changes is announced by an effect means (here, the decorative symbol display device 208) different from the effect means (here, the second display device 208S) on which the navigation character YM is displayed. There is. In the second display device 208S shown in FIG. 100 (Ab2), the navigation character YM is changed from the copanda to the bancho, which is a character that cannot be selected by the player.

Further, instead of FIG. 99 (a2), the speaker 120 is shown in FIG. 100 (a1). Further, the volume level set by the player in the volume adjustment window VW shown in FIG. 65(9) and the brightness (light amount) level set in the brightness adjustment window BW shown in FIG. 65(3) are set as “user set values”. It is written on the lower left of the decorative pattern display device 208. In this example, both are 3 levels. Further, in the pachinko machine 100 in this example, the volume and the brightness set by the player are forcibly changed at the time of execution to the effect and output from the speaker 120, or the game board lamp 442 or/and the game underframe. Since the LED such as the lamp 452 may emit light, it is written in the lower right of the decorative symbol display device 208 as “actual setting value”. This also applies to the following examples. In FIG. 100 (ac2), the speaker 120, which is a production means different from the production means in which the "hot heat" is likely to be announced, is notified that the "hot heat" is likely to be given. ing. The volume of the speaker 120 (actual setting value) at this time matches the user setting value. After that, in FIG. 100 (ac3), a notice of “intense heat” is executed, the characters “intense heat” are displayed in large size on the decorative pattern display device 208, and sound is output from the speaker 120 and the game board is used. The lamp 442 and the game underframe lamp 452 are emitting light. The volume (actual setting value) at the time of execution of the "heat" notice exceeds the user setting value and is level 5, and the luminance (actual setting value) also exceeds the user setting value and is level 5. That is, the output is made at a volume higher than the volume level set by the player, and light is emitted at a higher brightness than the brightness level set by the player. It should be noted that, when the performance is executed, the volume and brightness may exceed the user-set value or may be forcedly below the user-set value (the same applies hereinafter). Further, the timing at which the volume and the brightness are forcibly changed is not limited to this example. For example, the brightness may change at the timing when the sound during the intense heat approach is output, or the sound during the intense heat approach may be changed. The volume and brightness may change while is output. In addition, when a certain effect is executed, only the volume out of the volume and the brightness may be output exceeding the user set value, or only the brightness may be emitted above the user set value. There are also cases where both exceed.

It should be noted that the user settings of the volume and the brightness may be possible even on a game console that does not have the convenient volume adjustment window VW and the brightness adjustment window BW as described with reference to FIG. Any gaming machine that can set the volume and brightness may be used. Further, the technical idea here can be applied (hereinafter the same) even when the player can set (adjust) the resolution of the image, the hue of the image, and the like.

As described above, the various technical ideas described with reference to FIG. 100 can be applied to the effect examples described so far and can also be applied to the effect examples described later.
FIG. 101 is a table summarizing songs that can be output from the speaker 120.

In the game console in the example here, the user may be able to select the music output from the speaker 120. The serial numbers 1 to 11 in the table of FIG. 101 are songs that can be selected by the user according to the number of consecutive big villas. For example, if the jackpot is not run for 15 consecutive nights, the song "Ohaku- Behavior" cannot be selected. Also, a plurality of songs may be selectable. For example, if 15 big jackpots are selected, all the songs with serial numbers 1 to 11 can be selected.

Also, the song with the serial number 12 is a song that can be selected by operating the chance button 136 five times during the jackpot start interval (during the jackpot start effect execution). When the back button navigation mode is set, the jackpot is hit. Guidance about operating the chance button 136 is notified during the start interval, but is not notified when the back button navigation mode is not set. The guidance may not be notified even when the back button navigation mode is set, or conversely, the guidance may be notified even when the back button navigation mode is not set.

The songs with serial numbers 13 and 14 are songs that can be selected on condition that a big hit is made in a specific reach. "Collaboration SP" here refers to a super-reach production in which multiple characters co-star (for example, a super-reach production in which Yoshimune and Panda co-star in a swordsman reach). The "big hit" is a big hit when the premier character "Kaede" appeared in the cut-in image during super reach.
102 is a diagram showing an example in which the music selection described with reference to FIG. 101 is performed.

In FIG. 102(a1), it is a probable variation state (special figure high probability general figure high probability state), and the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed. The second hold number display is displayed at the lower right of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 102(1), and the hold number of special figure 1 is 3 and the hold number of special figure 2 is also. It is 3. Further, this pachinko machine 100 is a special figure 2 priority variation machine, and in FIG. 102, only the holding icons h21 to h23 of the special figure 2 are shown. All of these three hold icons h21 to h23 are default display modes. It is also the third consecutive big hit. Further, in the song name display portion MN at the upper right of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 102(A1), the song name of the song currently being output (here, the default “may be there”) is displayed. Is displayed, and the music piece of the music title is output from the speaker 120. That is, the music output here is the music output in the probability changing state. Further, icons of up/down keys 137u, d of the operation key unit 137 are displayed on the left side of the song name display portion MN, and it is informed that the songs can be selected by operating the up/down keys 137u, 137d. A background screen of the universe is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208, and the background screen of the universe is the background screen for the probability change state.

In FIG. 102(a2), the lower key 137d of the operation key unit 137 is operated, and in FIG. 102(a3), the music title of the music title display portion MN is changed to "mega giga summer". Since the music is output from the speaker 120 a little after the music selection operation (for example, 500 msec), there is a period in which the music name of the music name display portion MN and the music actually output from the speaker 120 are different. Note that the song title of the song title display portion MN and the song actually output from the speaker 120 may be configured to match. In FIG. 102 (a4), the song “Mega Giga Summer” is also output from the speaker 120. When the music is changed, the music is output from the beginning, but, for example, when the timing or time when the music flows is determined by turning on the power or RTC (Real Time Clock) production, or from the continuation of the previous output. If so, it may be output from the middle.

In FIG. 102 (a5), the number of special maps 2 is increased and the special 2 is full (the number of reservations displayed at the lower right of the decorative symbol event device 208 is updated to 4). , The display start of the fourth hold icon is a little later than the display of the hold number display being updated to 4, and in the same figure (B6), the fourth hold icon 24 of the prefetch advance notice display mode (white blinking) is displayed. Has been done. After that, the three special maps 2 are reserved, and in FIG. 102(a8), the symbols of the special maps 2 are stopped, and the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the combination of the decorative patterns that are missing. There is. In addition, the number of remaining reservations of special figure 2 is 1, and the 1st reservation icon h21 changes to the display mode of red.

In FIG. 102 (a9), the last hold of special figure 2 is exhausted, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is started on the decorative symbol display device 208. Even in the state of FIG. 102 (B10), the selected song is still “Mega Giga Summer”, and in FIG. 102 (B11), the bancho character C11 appears and a song change notice is given. The song change notice is a big hit notice that includes the effect of forcibly changing the song selected by the player to another song, and may be a normal notice or may be applied to a look-ahead notice. .. In this example, since the song change notice is displayed, the jackpot confirmation (or the jackpot richness) is announced for the symbol variation for which the song change notice is displayed, but the symbol variation for which the song change notice is displayed is lost. There may be cases. For example, if "Todoroke DREAM", which is the theme song of the character that appeared, is successful (the expectation of the jackpot is high, or the jackpot is confirmed (the jackpot may be rich)). If "" is not output, it may be a failure, and the symbol variation in which the music change notice is displayed may be out of order. In addition, even when "Todoroke DREAM" is not output and the music change notice fails, it may be notified that the big hit has been confirmed by another effect (for example, revival effect). In addition, when the song change notice is displayed, the big hit is confirmed (or big hit rich) about the next change of the pattern change for which the song change notice is displayed / or the expectation of the big hit is larger than when a notice other than the song change notice is given A look-ahead notice may be made to announce that the degree is high. Further, even if the music change notice fails, it may be configured such that another effect (for example, revival effect) is always notified that the big hit is confirmed. However, the music change notice may be annoying to the player in some cases, for example, the music selected by the player is forcibly replaced, so in return, a big hit if the music change notice is started. It may be confirmed.

A music change effect sound effect is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 102 (A12). Further, although the music of “Mega Giga Summer” output from the speaker 120 is not output, the music of “Mega Giga Summer” may be output. Note that the bancho character C11 that appeared in the song change notice raises one hand, and the hand overlaps a part of the song name display portion MN.

In FIG. 102 (a13), the song title of the song title display section MN is changed to “Distance”, but no song is output from the speaker 120. Even if the output of the song “Mega Giga Summer” is continuously output as it is in FIG. 102 (A11) during all or part of the period in FIG. 102 (A12) to (A15-1). Alternatively, the output of “Distance” changed by the music change notice may be started from the speaker 120. Here, as shown in FIG. 101, “Distance” is not a song released next to “Mega Giga Summer” but a song different from “Todoroke DREAM”. However, “Distance” is the song immediately before “Todoroke DREAM” in the release order. The music change notice here has the effect of finally outputting "Roar DREAM" with the music of "Distance" sandwiched in between. In addition, at the stage of FIG. 102 (B13), “Tokeke DREAM” may be displayed in the song title display portion MN.

In FIG. 102 (A14), the music change effect sound effect is output again from the speaker 120, and the length character C11 is raising one hand. Although the song "Distance" is not output from the speaker 120 even after a certain period of time has elapsed since the song name in the song name display portion MN was changed to "Distance", it may be output.

In FIG. 102 (a15), the song title in the song title display section MN is changed to “Todoroke DREAM”, and the speaker 120 outputs the song change effect sound effect again. The song change notice may be successful at the stage when "Todoruke DREAM" is displayed on the song title display portion MN, and the speaker 120 outputs the song "Todoroke DREAM" in FIG. That is, when "Todoruke DREAM" is displayed on the song title display portion MN, the song "Todoroke DREAM" is always output from the speaker 120. It should be noted that it may be possible to provide a case where even if "Todoroke DREAM" is displayed, the music of "Todoroke DREAM" is not output from the speaker 120 and the operation fails.

Also, in this example, when the song change notice is displayed, “Roar DREAM” is always output, but the original “Mega Giga Summer” is displayed in the song name display area MN in FIG. 102 (B15). If it fails, it is a failure (disappearance), and then the speaker 120 may output "mega giga summer". Alternatively, when “Distance” is still displayed in the song title display portion MN at the timing of FIG. 102 (B15), it is also a failure (disconnection), and then “Distance” may be output from the speaker 120. The original “Mega Giga Summer” may be displayed on the song name display portion MN selected by the player, and the output of the song “Mega Giga Summer” may be started.

Depending on whether "Distance" is displayed or "Kimi no Kakera" to be released next to "Mega Giga Summer" is displayed in the song title display area MN at the timing of FIG. It may represent the degree of expectation of a jackpot for fluctuations and/or symbol fluctuations within a hold. That is, the expectation of a big hit may be higher when "Distance" is displayed than when "Kimi no Kakera" is displayed.

In addition, you may express the expectation degree of the big hit about the said fluctuation|variation and/or the fluctuation|variation of symbols in pending|holding by the frequency|count of the change of the music by music change notice. For example, when the music is changed twice due to the music change notice, the change and/or the pending pattern change may be more easily hit when the music is changed twice. .. Further, when the music changes a certain number of times (for example, 7 times) due to the music change notice, the fluctuation and/or the symbol fluctuation in the hold may be a big hit confirmation (or a big hit rich). On the contrary, if the music has changed a certain number of times (for example, once) due to the music change notice, the loss may be confirmed.

Further, on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 102 (B16), the animation of “Todoroke DREAM” is also displayed. Then, on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 102 (B19), "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7", which is a combination of the jackpot with probability variation, is swayingly displayed. In 20), the combination is confirmed and displayed. In this example, when the song change notice is displayed, the song is always changed to “Todoroke DREAM”, and then the song “Todoroke DREAM” is output from the speaker 120, and “Todoroke DREAM” is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. An animation (including lyrics display) is displayed, which is a big hit. Even if the music change notice is displayed and the music becomes "Roar DREAM", the music of "Roar DREAM" is output from the speaker 120 and/or "Roar DREAM" is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. The animation may not be displayed in some cases. In other words, even if the music change notice is displayed and the music is changed to a specific music, it may be lost unless the effect display corresponding to the music is performed next time.
FIG. 103 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG.

On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 103 (a21), the start screen of the big hit game is displayed, and the big hit start BGM is output from the speaker 120, during the big hit start interval (while the big hit start performance is being executed). Is.

The timing of FIG. 103 (a22) is the timing immediately after the start of the first round. In the jackpot game production in this example, the first round and the second round are music selection periods. When the first round is started, the decorative pattern display device 208 automatically displays the music selection screen. Note that the music selection may be started by the player's will, and in this case, the music selection screen may be called by operating the chance button 136 or the like. Even during the music selection period, when the selection of the music ends, the music selection screen disappears and the round effect is started. The decorative symbol display device 208 also displays a display indicating that it is the first round (“1R”) and a display of the number of balls (prize number) (0 pt).

A music release list GR is displayed on the music selection screen. Since we have achieved 4 consecutive villas in this big hit, "Space of Kiseki" is newly added to the music release list GR and it is selectable. The mark "New" is attached to the display of "the universe of miracle". In this example, since the newly added music is displayed in the second row of the music release list GR, “may be there” and “mega giga summer” which have already been released. Is hidden. Here, the newly opened "space of miracle" is selected, and the speaker 120 outputs the chorus portion of "space of miracle". In the music release list GR, the above-mentioned "Todoroke DREAM" is not displayed, and "Todoroke DREAM" cannot be selected. However, when the production of "Roar DREAM" is executed, the "Roar DREAM" may be released. In this case, the display position of “Todoroke DREAM” in the music release list GR may be a position directly below the previously released song (“Kimi no Kakera”) or the “Kiseki no Ie” that was released this time. It may be a position directly under the "universe". Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 103, since it is the sixth song in the release order, it may be at the position of the sixth song counting from the beginning song, but in this case, three question marks are displayed side by side. You will be pinched. In addition, when the production of "Todoroke DREAM" is executed, "Todoroke DREAM" among the songs released according to the number of consecutive holidays ("Kiseki no Universe") and "Todoroke DREAM" Only one may be open, or both songs may be open.

In FIG. 103 (a24), the down key 137d is operated, and the cursor csd is aligned with the display of three question marks below the display of "space of miracle" in the music release list GR. The display with three question marks in a row is an unreleased display and the song title is unknown. That is, in the music release list GR, it is unknown what music will be released in the future. It should be noted that at the timing of FIG. 103 (B24), the game ball has begun to win the attacker.

When the cursor csd is aligned with the display where three question marks are lined up, scrolling downward is automatically started (Fig. 103 (a25)), and the cursor csd goes to the end and "there is there" Maybe". Note that instead of automatically scrolling downward, scrolling may be performed by the player's own operation. Further, instead of displaying three question marks side by side, the titles of songs scheduled to be released in the future may be displayed lightly. Alternatively, on the contrary, it is not necessary to notify that there is a song that has not been released. That is, in the music release list GR, the display itself in which three question marks are arranged side by side may not be displayed, and only the released music title may be displayed.

Also in FIG. 103 (B27), the automatic scrolling is not completed, and the chorus part of "the universe of miracle" is repeatedly output from the speaker 120. Note that during music selection, a part of each music (chorus in this example) is output so as to loop, but it is not necessary to loop, for example, after outputting for a certain period of time, the next music is output. May be automatically transferred to, or the music may not be output until the next is selected. Further, all of the music pieces may be output from the beginning, or all of the music pieces from the middle (for example, the chorus portion) to the back may be output.

Also in FIG. 103 (B28), the automatic scrolling has not ended, and the cursor csd has not returned to the head "May be there", but from the speaker 120, instead of "the miracle universe," It may be there." The chorus portion of the output has started. Note that it may be configured so that the music "may be there" is not output until the cursor csd is placed at "may be there". FIG. 103 (B30) shows that the cursor csd has reached the end of the music release list GR by automatic scrolling. In FIG. 103 (B31), the cursor csd may be at the top "May be there". I don't know," and the automatic scrolling has ended. Normally, the cursor csd corresponds to the display of the music from the speaker 120 after the cursor is placed on the display of the target music (may be at the same time as the alignment or before the alignment). The music is started to be output, but "May be there" is being output during the automatic scrolling, so the music that was being output at the time of (a30) in FIG. 103 (B31) is output. The continuation of is output as it is. It should be noted that after the cursor csd is aligned with "may be there" (may be at the same time as alignment, or may be before alignment), "may be there" newly. May be newly started from the beginning of the chorus part of "may be there" (that is, the beginning of the song output by the song selection).

After that, the down key 137d is operated once, and the cursor csd is brought into alignment with the display of "mega giga summer" as shown in FIG. In this state, the chance button 136 is operated as shown in FIG. 103 (A34), and "mega giga summer" is determined. In the music release list GR shown in FIG. 103 (a35), the display of the determined "mega giga summer" is displayed in red, and the speaker 120 outputs the music determination sound.

When the music is decided in this way, the music selection screen is switched to the round effect screen. The decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 102 (a36) displays the round effect screen of the second round, and the title "Mega Giga Summer" of the selected song is displayed at the lower left of the decorative design display device 208. Has been done. Moreover, the music of "Mega Giga Summer" is output from the speaker 120. The selected song is output from the beginning when the round effect is started. If all the music is output from the beginning of the music as well as the chorus when selecting the music, the music may be output from the continuation at the start of the round effect.

Further, in place of FIG. 102 (B15-1), in FIG. 103 (B15-2-1), the song name of “CREA” is displayed in the song name display portion MN of the decorative pattern display device 208. The song with this song name is a song not included in the table shown in FIG. That is, the music cannot be selected by the player. The music "CREA" is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 102 (A15-2-2), and the animation of the character "CREA" is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208, and " The lyrics of the song "CREA" are also displayed. As described above, when a music piece that cannot be selected by the player is output, the expectation of a big hit may be high or the big hit may be confirmed. However, it may include a case of losing. Further, in the subsequent music selection by the player, the music of "CREA" may be added as one of the selectable music in the music release list GR since it has been output once, or vice versa. , Adding may be prohibited. In addition, it may be selectable in the song selection during the big hit game, and may not be selectable in the song selection during the symbol change. On the contrary, it may not be selected in the song selection during the jackpot game, and may be selected in the song selection during the symbol change. It may be possible.

FIG. 104 is a diagram showing an example of effects by the effect device 206 shown in FIG.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 104 (a1), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the variable icon h0 in the default display mode is displayed. In addition, one hold of special figure 1 is accumulated, and the first hold icon h11 in the default display mode is displayed. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed.

Further, in FIG. 104, similar to FIG. 100 (ac1), “volume” and “user setting value” of “luminance” are written in the lower left of the decorative symbol display device 208 of each figure, and “volume” is in the lower right. And "actual setting value" of "brightness". Further, the types of “BGM”, “SE (sound effect)”, and “light emission” of the effects that are actually executed are also described.

In FIG. 104 (a1), the symbol variation BGM is output from the speaker 120 at the same three levels as the user setting value, and the game board lamp 442 and the game underframe lamp 452 are in accordance with the symbol variation lamp pattern. Light is emitted at the same three levels of brightness as the user set value.

In order to forcibly set the volume and the brightness to the actual set values, the effect control data itself may instruct to ignore the user set values and execute the values set by the effect data. The sub-control units 400 and 500 may perform self-management based on a table in which effects for which values are ignored are summarized, or may be managed based on a command from the main control unit 300.

In FIG. 104 (a3), a super reach effect (swordsman reach effect) is developed, and the left symbol temporarily stopped on the decorative symbol display device 208 moves to the upper left of the decorative symbol display device 208, and also temporarily stopped. The right symbol that is present moves to the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208. In FIG. 104 (a3), the super-reach development BGM is output from the speaker 120 at the same three levels as the user set value, and the game board lamp 442 and the game underframe lamp 452 are displayed according to the super-reach development lamp pattern. Emits light with the same three levels of brightness as the user set value.

In FIG. 104 (a4), the first large-scale behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior accessory 224Gd operate, and each of them advances from the initial position toward the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. It overlaps from the front side. In this state, the light guide plate IL emits light, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image is shown on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. In FIG. 104 (a4), the BGM disappears, and the sound effect during super reach development time role moving object is output from the speaker 120 at the same three levels as the user set value. According to the pattern, the game board lamp 442 and the game underframe lamp 452 emit light with the same three levels of brightness as the user set value. As described above, the first large-board behavior auditors 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior auditors 224Gd and the auditors such as the light guide plate IL perform the production operation, but the volume and the brightness remain at the user-set values.

It should be noted that the first large-board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior accessory 224Gd temporarily return to the initial positions at appropriate timings.

The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 104 (a6) displays the scene after the main character and the enemy swordsman duel in the wilderness background screen and the swordsman and swordsman slash each other. In FIG. 104 (wa6), the BGM for super reach is output from the speaker 120 at the same three levels as the user set value, and the lamp 442 for the game board and the lamp 452 for the game underframe according to the lamp pattern for the super reach, Light is emitted at the same three levels of brightness as the user set value.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 104 (a7-1), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed, and the button effect is started. In FIG. 104 (c8a), the operation valid period of the chance button 136 has started, and in FIG. 104 (c9a), the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT has decreased, and thereafter, as shown in (c10a). The chance button 136 is operated at a timing within the operation valid period. During this period (FIG. 104 (Wa7-1) to FIG. 104 (Wa11-1)), the super reach BGM is output from the speaker 120 at the same three levels as the user set value, and the super reach result inciting sound effect is generated. Is also output from the speaker 120 at the same three levels as the user set value, and the gaming board lamp 442 and the game underframe lamp 452 emit light at the same three levels of brightness as the user set value in accordance with the pattern variation lamp pattern. Note that the button effect may correspond to a suggestion that an effect in which the volume and brightness settings are changed may start.

In response to the chance button 136 being operated in FIG. 104 (Ua10), in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 104 (Ua11-1), the effect image is displayed from the scene after the lord and the swordsman slash each other. The display is switched to Ed2. In FIG. 104 (wa11-1) in response to the operation of the chance button 136, BGM disappears, and the jackpot confirmation sound effect is output from the speaker 120 at 5 levels exceeding the user setting value. In accordance with the lamp pattern, the game board lamp 442 and the game underframe lamp 452 also emit light with five levels of brightness exceeding the user set value. That is, both the volume and the brightness are forcibly increased.

Even if the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation valid period, the effect described in FIG. 104 (wa11-1) is executed. However, when the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation valid period, the lost design may be temporarily stopped and the revival effect may be performed.

In FIG. 104 (a a12), again, the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd operate, and respectively advance from the initial position toward the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the decorative symbol display device. 208 overlaps from the front side. Then, in FIG. 104 (wa13), the thousand-box box accessory 224H operates and moves downward from the initial position, and the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front side of the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd. In (a14) of the same drawing, the light guide plate IL emits light again, and a pattern simulating a predetermined effect image is shown on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. In the meantime (FIG. 104 (wa12) to FIG. 104 (wa14)), similarly to FIG. 104 (wa11-1), the big hit confirmation sound effect is output from the speaker 120 at five levels exceeding the user set value. Then, the game board lamp 442 and the game underframe lamp 452 also emit light with 5 levels of brightness in accordance with the big hit confirmation lamp pattern, which also exceeds the user set value.

In addition, even if the accessory does not perform the rendering operation due to a failure or the like, the volume/luminance may change from the user set value, or in this case, the user set value may remain unchanged.

Further, the volume and the brightness may be forcibly changed when the button image 136 is displayed, such as in FIG. 104 (a-7-1). That is, the volume and the brightness may be forcibly changed before the effect of operating the accessory is performed. The change here becomes a notice (resultingly, a big hit notice) as a result of the button effect, and such a previous change may be treated as one of the big hit confirmation effects.

Further, here, the volume and the brightness are forcibly changed according to the operation of the chance button 136 in the button effect, but the operation of the accessory such as the thousand-box box accessory 224H is started or the movement of the accessory to the effect position is completed. The volume and brightness may be forcibly changed according to the above, or the volume and brightness may be forcibly changed at a timing other than the operation timing of the accessory. Further, the volume and brightness may be forcibly changed a plurality of times by one symbol change, or the volume and brightness may be forcibly changed only once at a maximum by one symbol change. Further, although the volume and the brightness are changed together here, only the volume may be changed, or only the brightness may be changed (the same applies hereafter).

In time, in FIG. 104 (a15), the light emission of the light guide plate IL ends, and the sub-control units 400 and 500 receive the command to return the thousand-carton box accessory 224H to the initial position. It starts moving toward and returns to the initial position. Here, the big hit confirmation sound effect from the speaker 120 is lowered to the user set value, and the brightness of the game board lamp 442 and the game underframe lamp 452 which emit light in accordance with the big hit confirmation lamp pattern also reaches the user set value. It has been lowered. This is returned to the user set value when the sub-control units 400 and 500 receive the command to return the thousand-box box accessory 224H to the initial position.

Next, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 104 (wa16), the effect image Ed2 fades out and becomes faint and gradually disappears. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 104 (wa17), The display of the scene after the swordsmen cut off each other fades in. Further, at this timing, the first large-board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior accessory 224Gd start to return to the initial positions. During this period (FIG. 104 (wa16) to FIG. 104 (wa17)) as well as in FIG. 104 (wa15), the jackpot 120 is outputting the jackpot confirmation sound effect at the volume set by the user. The game board lamp 442 and the game underframe lamp 452, which emit light according to the confirmation lamp pattern, also emit light at the brightness set by the user.

It should be noted that during the period in which the sound data and/or the light emission data are the same as in FIGS. 104 (a11-1) to (a17), the volume and/or the brightness changes from the user set value, and another sound data is generated. The volume and/or the brightness may be returned to the user-set value when the light emission data is switched to and/or the light emission data. Conversely, the volume and/or the brightness may change from the user-set value over a period in which the sound data and/or the light emission data is switched one or more times.
FIG. 105 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 104.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 105 (a18), the display of the scene after the lord and the swordsman slash each other is completely restored. Further, at this timing, the first large-board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior accessory 224Gd are stopped at the initial positions. In FIG. 105 (a18), the super reach win use BGM is output from the speaker 120 at the same three levels as the user set value, and the game board lamp 442 and the game underframe lamp 452 are used according to the super reach win use lamp pattern. Emits light with the same three levels of brightness as the user set value. Note that the timing at which the volume and the brightness return to their original positions is not limited to the timing in FIG. 104 (wa15) (the timing at which the accessory (thousand box accessory 224H) begins to return from the effect position toward the initial position), but this timing (background (Display switching timing), a timing at which the victory of the duel scene is confirmed (timing in FIG. 105 (wa a19-1)), or a timing at which the combination of decorative symbols for the big hit is stopped and displayed. May be

In FIG. 105 (a19-1), a scene in which the enemy swordsman has fallen down and the main character, the lord, has won is displayed, and the lord's navigation character YM is also in a winning pose. In FIG. 105 (a 19-1 ), the super reach win use BGM is output from the speaker 120 at the same three levels as the user set value, and the voice of the main character, “Yatteze,” is the same as the user set value. The level is output from the speaker 120, and the game board lamp 442 and the game underframe lamp 452 emit light at the same three levels of brightness as the user set value in accordance with the super reach winning use lamp pattern.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the large-decorative decorative symbols is stopped and displayed, and the confirmation display is performed.

Also, instead of FIG. 104 (Ua11-1), in FIG. 105 (Ua11-2), after the chance button 136 is operated in FIG. The display of the scene is switched to a display in which a symbol (“decoration 6”) different from the left and right symbols (“decoration 7”) is displayed large (shaking) as the middle symbol. This is a display suggesting that the button effect has failed. At this time, the BGM for defeating the super reach is output from the speaker 120 at the same three levels as the user set value, and the lamp 442 for the game board according to the ramp pattern for defeating the super reach. The gaming underframe lamp 452 emits light at the same three levels of brightness as the user set value. In this way, the volume and/or the brightness do not have to be changed from the user set value when the rendering fails, or when the loss richness or the loss is confirmed, the volume and/or the brightness can be changed from the user set value. Good.

Further, instead of FIG. 104 (wa11-1), the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 105 (wa11-2') is the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. However, in this example, the volume is lower than the user set value and the brightness is also lower than the user set value. In this way, the volume and/or the brightness may be reduced when the rendering fails, or when the loss richness or the loss is confirmed. Further, the volume and/or the brightness may be lowered when the effect is successful or when the big hit is concentrated or the big hit is confirmed.

In place of FIG. 104 (Wa7-1), button effect is not started in FIG. 105 (Wa7-2-1), and in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in the same (Wa7-2-2), A magnified display of the main character's lord's character is displayed to inform that he or she has won. In this way, even when the effect using the operation means such as the chance button 136 and the accessory (movable means) such as the thousand box accessory 224H is not involved, when the specific effect display is displayed, The volume and/or the brightness may be forcibly changed. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 105 (a7-2-3), the display returns to the display of the scene after the lord and the swordsman slashed each other, and the volume and brightness also returned to the same level as the user set value. ing.

It should be noted that the volume or/and the brightness may be forcibly changed not only according to the accessory or the display but also according to the effect by another effect means. Examples of other effect means here include a light guide plate IL, a versatile light (POV display), a light emitting means (for example, various lamps), a second display means (for example, a sub liquid crystal display device), and the like. The volume or/and the brightness may be forcibly changed depending on the winning of a winning opening (for example, a general winning opening, a starting opening, an attacker) or the passage of a specific gate. Further, the volume or/and the brightness may be forcibly changed even in the effect performed when the game ball enters the effect sensor.

Further, instead of FIG. 105 (wa a19-1), in the example continuing from the same drawing (wa a19-2-1), it is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the same drawing (wa a19-2-1), The display of the scene where the protagonist's lord wins fades out as shown in the same figure (wa a19-2-3), and then, as shown in the same figure (wa a19-2-4), the first decorative pattern is The combination of decorative patterns of "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7" is displayed in a swinging manner. In this example, after the volume and brightness are forcibly changed in FIG. 104 (w a11-1), the state is continued to FIG. 105 (w a19-2-3), and then the user setting value is returned. That is, the state in which the volume and the brightness are forcibly changed is continued until the super reach effect is finished or until the same decorative pattern is lined up and the shaking display is started. Further, it may be continued until the shaking display is completed. Further, the state in which the volume and the brightness are forcibly changed may be continued until the final judgment effect is finished.

The volume and/or the brightness is forcibly increased when the accessory is operated, but may be decreased. Further, when the user setting value is the maximum value or the minimum value, the volume or/and the brightness may not change. Alternatively, the player prepares a volume and brightness that cannot be set, and in this case, even if the value is changed to a value larger than the maximum value which is the user set value or a value smaller than the minimum value which is the user set value. Good.

Further, the brightness may increase and the volume may decrease, and conversely, the volume may increase and the brightness may decrease. Further, the brightness may change and the volume may not change, and conversely, the volume may change and the brightness may not change. Also, when the volume or brightness adjustment (setting) screen is displayed when the volume or brightness changes, the value set by the player may remain the same, or the value forcibly changed is displayed. May be. Also, the volume or brightness may be adjustable by the player when the volume or brightness changes, or may not be adjustable when the volume or brightness changes.

FIG. 104 (c) is an example in which the volume or/and the brightness may be forcibly changed when the display mode of the hold icon changes. In this example, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 has changed. Note that the display mode of the variable icon may change. It should be noted that there may be a change in the display mode of the hold icon or the variable icon in which the volume or/and the brightness is not forcibly changed. For example, in the case of changing to a display mode in which the expectation of a big hit is not so high, the volume or/and the brightness may not be forcedly changed. For example, if the expectation of a big hit increases in the order of white flashing, blue, green, red, gold, and iridescent, the volume or/and the brightness must be forcibly changed unless the change is greater than red. Good. On the contrary, when the display mode of the hold icon or the variable icon changes, the volume or/and the brightness may be forcibly changed.

FIG. 104 (c) is an example in which the volume or/and the brightness may be forcibly changed when an effect (hot effect) with a high expectation of a big hit appears. On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 104(c), the conversation notice enclosed by the red frame appears. The hot effect is an effect using red, gold, or rainbow color, and in this case, the volume or/and the brightness may be forcibly changed. Further, the amount of change may be different for red (for example, 1 level up), for gold (for example, 2 level up), and for rainbow color (for example, up to the maximum level), or the same. It may be.

FIG. 104 (d) is an example in which the volume or/and the brightness may be forcibly changed when the revival effect is started after the decorative decorative pattern for the loss is temporarily stopped. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 104 (d-2), thereafter, the revival effect accompanied by the wipe effect is executed. In this case, the volume and/or the brightness may be changed before the result display. That is, the volume or/and the brightness may be forcibly changed at the same time when the revival effect is started.
FIG. 106 is a diagram showing an example in which the holding frame selected by the player is changed.

In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIGS. 106 and 107, the above-described customization setting is performed. That is, in “Character selection” shown in FIG. 63(b), “Copanda” of 07 is set, and in “Holding frame selection”, 04 “Holding frame D” to which the fusible image for wipe effect is added is displayed. The “holding display selection” is set to 03 “icon C”, and the background display selection is set to 05 “background E”.

In the description here, the color used in the presentation represents the high expectation of the big hit, and the expectation of the big hit increases in the order of blinking white, blue, green, red, gold, and rainbow. For example, a color or the like as a display mode of the hold icon or the variable icon may be used. Hereinafter, a change in color in the direction of increasing the expectation of a big hit may be referred to as promotion. This also applies to the following description. Note that this can be applied to the above description.

On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 106 (d), the holding frame UI of the holding frame D is displayed, and in the effect icon display area DIS, a copanda is displayed as the navigation character YM. In addition, one hold of the special figure 1 has been accumulated, and the first hold icon h11, which is the default display mode of the icon C, is displayed. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 106D, the background of the background E (empty background) is displayed.

After that, the number of holdings of special figure 1 is increased by two, and three holding icons h11 to h13 are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in the stop display shown in FIG. 106 (3). Here, the hold of the prefetching notice target is the hold of the second hold icon h12.

In FIG. 106 (D4), one hold is exhausted and the variable display of symbols is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 106 (4), the first decorative symbol has not yet started to change, but the second decorative symbol has started to change. Further, the movement of the first hold icon h11 toward the pedestal hs0 and the shift movement of the hold icons h12 and h13 have not been started yet.

In the holding frame UI shown in FIG. 106 (d), the movement animation of the first holding icon h11 toward the pedestal hs0 and the shift movement animation of the holding icons h12 and h13 are started, but the sliding effect sliding window is used. The image appears from the left and right. It should be noted that the animation for moving the first hold icon h11 toward the pedestal hs0 and the shift movement animation for the hold icons h12 and h13 may not be performed during the appearance of the fusuma image for the wipe effect. In FIG. 106(D6), the sliding door image is in a fully closed state (wipe-in state), and the holding frame UI is invisible. In FIG. 106(D7), the variable display of the first decorative pattern is also started, and in FIG. 106(D8), the first decorative pattern is changing rapidly. In FIG. 106 (D8) also, the hold frame UI is in the wipe-in state).

In FIG. 106 (D9-1), the wipeout is started, and the sliding effect sliding door image is beginning to open. In FIG. 106 (D10), the sliding door image is in a fully opened state (wipeout state). In the wipe effect here, the holding frame is changed. That is, the holding frame UI shown in FIG. 106D is a "holding frame R" different from the "holding frame D" selected by the player in the customization setting, and the holding is surrounded by a red frame. It becomes a frame. The "holding frame R" is a holding frame that cannot be selected by the customization setting, but may be made selectable. It should be noted that the legs of the navigation character YM are invisible due to the red frame. The "holding frame R" is a holding frame having a function of notifying that the display mode of the holding icon is likely to change, and "Holding change!? Time" is beside the co-panda of the navigation character YM. Character display is displayed. It should be noted that the pre-reading notice target is a hold of the first hold icon h11 because one hold is exhausted in FIG. 106 (4). Here, the "hold change!? time" corresponds to the above-mentioned "high-probability state for effect".

The bomber icon I3 appears from the right end of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 106 (D12) and passes over the holding frame UI. The bomber icon I3 launches a missile toward the hold icon, and the missile hits the first hold icon h11 of the look-ahead notice target hold. The display mode of the first hold icon h11 hit by the missile changes, and the first hold icon h11 shown in FIG. 106 (d13) changes to the blue display mode, and the promotion effect is successful. Even if the bomber icon I3 appears, the missile is not fired, the missile does not hit any of the holding icons or the fluctuation icons, or the display mode does not change even if the missile hits. There may be All of these correspond to the failure of promotion production.

In FIG. 106 (D15), the reach state is reached, and in FIG. 106 (D16), the pending change symbol is temporarily stopped in the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol. The pending change pattern has a red pattern and a blue pattern, and when the red pending change pattern is temporarily stopped, the display mode of the pending icon is promoted to two stages, and when the blue pending change pattern is temporarily stopped, the pending icon The display mode is promoted by one level. In FIG. 106 (D16), the red pending change pattern is temporarily stopped, and in FIG. 106 (D17), the pending change animation is started. That is, the first hold icon h11 shown in FIG. 106 (D17) is overlapped from the front side by the effect image Ed3, and in FIG. (D18), the effect image Ed3 disappears and the first hold icon h11 becomes The display mode has changed to red. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 106 (D19), the middle pattern, which was a red pending change pattern until now, changes to "decoration 2", and "decoration 1"-"decoration 2"-"decoration 1". The combination of is variably displayed (temporarily stopped). In FIG. 106 (D20), the combination of the decorative symbols is stopped and displayed, and the loss is confirmed.

In FIG. 106 (D22), the red hold icon that has been the first hold icon 11 so far is moved to the pedestal hs0 and is displayed as the variable icon h0 in the red display mode. Even if the hold of the prefetching notice target is exhausted, the display of the characters “Hold change!? Time” continues to be displayed on the hold frame UI. In FIG. 106 (D23), a gold ray is radiated from the navigation character YM toward the variable icon h0, and in FIG. 106 (D24), the variable icon that has been red until now has changed to gold.

In FIG. 106 (D26), the reach state is reached, and in FIG. 106 (D28), the super reach effect is developed. In the super reach production, the sky background is switched to the wilderness background and the duel scene is displayed. In the super reach state, the hold frame UI is left on the pedestal hs0 and the rest is all gone, and the hold icon is also gone. However, the variation icon h0 has not disappeared, and the variation icon h0 is displayed on the pedestal hs0. The pedestal hs0 shown in FIG. 106 (d) is the pedestal of the "holding frame D" before being changed by the wipe effect. That is, the original pedestal. However, it may be the pedestal of the "holding frame R" after being changed by the wipe effect. Further, the pedestal hs0 and the variation icon h0 may not be displayed during the super reach or the normal reach state (FIG. 106 (D26)). Further, the entire hold frame UI and the hold icon may not be displayed. Further, when the super reach effect ends, the hidden frame UI, the hold icon, and the like that have been hidden may be displayed, and after the super reach effect ends, the hold frame R is displayed and the next symbol variation. The holding frame D may be displayed from the start of the display.

In this example, the color of the frame of the hold frame UI remains red even when the reach state is reached. However, if the color of the frame of the hold frame UI also changes, the expectation of the big hit is increased. Good.

It should be noted that the holding frame (for example, "holding frame R") that is not selected by the player is more than that when the prefetch holding icon is displayed in the holding frame (for example, "holding frame D") selected by the player. When the look-ahead hold icon is displayed, it may be configured so that the jackpot pattern mode is finally displayed more easily in the symbol variation corresponding to the look-ahead hold icon, or the hold frame selected by the player. A case where the look-ahead hold icon is displayed in a hold frame (eg, "hold frame R") not selected by the player, as compared to the case where the read-ahead hold icon is displayed in (eg, "hold frame D") However, even if the same look-ahead hold icon is displayed, the jackpot pattern may be finally displayed easily in the symbol variation corresponding to the look-ahead hold icon.
FIG. 107 is a diagram showing a modified example of the example shown in FIG. 106.

In place of FIG. 106 (D9-1), in FIG. 107 (D9-2-1), both the hold icon and the variable icon have once changed to a special mode (character). Further, the navigation character YM has also changed to panda. In this example, after that, the display mode of each color is changed to reflect the expectation of the big hit. Here, the easiness of changing to a color with a high expectation of a big hit is determined by the mode of the character once displayed.

In FIG. 107 (D9-2-2), a mini game with the panda of the navigation character YM is played. The character who has won the mini game changes to a color icon (holding icon or variable icon) with a high expectation of a big hit. The grandpa character has a 50% chance of winning, the princess character has a 75% chance of winning, and the lord's character has a 100% chance of winning. A premium character may be provided in addition to the lord's character. The premier character changes to an icon of a color that confirms the big hit (rainbow color here).

In FIG. 107 (D9-2-3), a rock-paper-scissors game is played as a mini game, and all rock-paper-scissors games are played. As a result, both of the old characters lost, and the lord's character won. In addition, a plurality of characters may win.

In FIG. 107 (D9-2-4), the wipe effect is started again, and after the fusuma image shown in (D9-2-5) is completely closed (the wipe-in state), the wipe-out is performed (the same figure). (D9-2-6)), in the holding frame UI shown in (D9-2-7) of the same figure, the second holding icon h12 is changed to a blue holding icon. Note that the hold frame UI remains “holding frame D”.

107(e1) to FIG. 107(e12) are diagrams showing an example in which the navigation character YM and the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display are displayed across a plurality of fluctuations.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 107 (e1), the holding frame UI of the holding frame D is displayed, and in the effect icon display area DIS, a copanda is displayed as the navigation character YM. In addition, two special reservations 1 are reserved, and the first reservation icon h11 and the second reservation icon h12, which are the default display modes of the icon C, are displayed. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 107 (e1), the background of the background E (empty background) is displayed.

In FIG. 107 (e2), the number of the hold of special figure 1 is increased by one and the number of the third hold icons h13 is increased. Here, the hold of the prefetching notice target is the hold of the third hold icon h13. In FIG. 107 (e3), the combination of lost decorative symbols is stopped and displayed, and in FIG. (e4), one hold is consumed, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in (e4). The variable display of the decorative pattern has started. In FIG. 107 (e5), the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display appears in the effect icon display area DIS on the carpet icon I2. In this example, the icon I1 of the treasure box of the change notice display is displayed on standby. After that, one hold is exhausted, and the hold of the prefetching notice target is the hold of the first hold icon h11. In FIG. 107 (e7), the combination of lost decorative patterns is stopped and displayed, and the icon I1 of the treasure box continues to be displayed in the effect icon display area DIS while remaining on the icon I2 of the carpet.

In FIG. 107 (e9), the hold of the first hold icon h11, which is the hold of the prefetching notice subject, is exhausted, and the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 107 (e9) starts the variable display of the decorative pattern. ing. In the effect icon display area DIS, the treasure box icon I1 is still displayed while remaining on the carpet icon I2, and this treasure box icon I1 is displayed across a plurality of fluctuations. In FIG. 107 (e10), the carpet icon I2 disappears, the standby display of the treasure box icon I1 ends, and the change animation starts. That is, in FIG. 107 (e11), the treasure box of the treasure box icon I1 is wide, a smoke image appears from the inside, and the navigation character YM is covered with the smoke image from the front side. In FIG. 107 (e12), the smoke image disappears, and the navigation character YM of the copanda selected by the player in the above-described customization setting has changed to the navigation character YM of the length. The bancho navi character YM is a character that cannot be selected by the customization setting, but may be selectable.

In addition, in this example, the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display is displayed in addition to the navigation character YM across the true symbol variation display such as the symbol variation display of the special figure. The navigation character YM and the change notice display may be displayed across the change. For example, the change notice display (the treasure box icon I1 and the carpet icon I2) is displayed due to the change, and the navigation character YM which is constantly displayed is changed by the change notice display at the third pseudo-repeating time, or the change is displayed before the change. The change notice display (the treasure box icon I1 and the carpet icon I2) is displayed due to the change, the change notice display continues to be displayed until the second pseudo run, and the navigation character YM that is constantly displayed by the change notice display is displayed at the third pseudo run. May change.

FIG. 108 is a diagram showing an example of effects in the pachinko machine set to the automatic button mode.

The pachinko machine 100 in this example is set to the automatic button mode, and the upper right of the decorative pattern display device 208 displays that the automatic button mode is set.

In FIG. 108(A1), the variable display of symbols is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols that are lost on the background of the sea. In addition, one hold of the special figure 1 is accumulated, and the first hold icon h11, which is the default display mode, is displayed. The navigation character YM is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS of the holding frame UI. A chance button 136 is shown at the lower left of the decorative pattern display device 208. The chance button shown in FIG. 108(A1) is normally lit in white. In this example, the chance button lamp 138 is always turned on even outside the chance button operation valid period, but the chance button lamp is always off outside the chance button operation valid period. May be

In FIG. 108(A2), the suspension of the first suspension icon h11 is exhausted, the variable display of symbols is started, and thereafter, the notice of conversation is started. When the conversation announcement is started, the lord's conversation image CI1 in which the character display of "chance" is displayed together with the lord's character is displayed. The display of the conversation image CI1 of the lord is the first stage of the conversation notice. Thereafter, on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 108 (A5-1), the conversation notice is updated, the conversation image CI1 of the lord is displayed in a reduced size and displayed below the display position of the second decorative symbol, and the grandfather character is displayed. At the same time, the old conversation image CI2 on which the button effect image is displayed is displayed. The button effect image is an image for urging the chance button 136 to be pressed within the operation valid period, and includes a button image 136a simulating the chance button 136 and a remaining time display meter MT representing the remaining time of the operation valid period. It is configured. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 108(A5-1), the operation valid period has not started, and even if the chance button 136 is operated, the display corresponding thereto is not performed. Although the first decorative symbol is hidden by the old conversation image CI2, the player may recognize that the special symbol is changing due to the fourth symbol display device 284, the second decorative symbol, or the like. Sometimes you can. Note that the display position of the decorative pattern may be moved to a position that does not overlap the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather or the conversation image CI1 of the lord so that the decorative pattern is not hidden. In addition, as shown in FIG. 108 (A5-1), the palace's conversation image CI1 is at least partially overlapped by the grandpa's conversation image CI2, and the lord's conversation image CI1 is more overlapped than in the case where the conversation image CI2 is not overlapped. The display mode of the conversation image CI1 is difficult to visually recognize. In this example, the case where the conversation notice is given is more likely to be a big hit than the case where the conversation notice is not given. Further, when the conversation notice is updated, the palace's conversation image CI1 may not be displayed in a reduced size, and the palace's conversation image CI1 may be deleted. In addition, the conversation image displayed later may have a size (large or small) different from that of the conversation image displayed first, and the conversation notice A, which has a high degree of expectation for a big hit when displayed, is the conversation image. It may have a size (large or small) different from that of the conversation notice B, which has a lower expectation for a big hit than the notice A.

After that, the operation valid period starts at the timing shown in FIG. 108 (A6). The player may be able to see the effect according to the operation by operating the chance button 136 after the timing of FIG. 108(A6). The chance button 136 shown in FIG. 108(A6) starts blinking in white.

At the timing of FIG. 108(A7), the suspension of Toku-zu 1 increases. However, the hold icon has not yet begun to be displayed at this timing. In addition, the remaining time display meter MT is slightly reduced due to the lapse of time after the start of the operation valid period. In FIG. 108 (A8-1), the first hold icon is displayed. The first hold icon shown in FIG. 108(A8-1) is a button hold icon, and a red button image 136a is displayed on a white circle display. Although the remaining period meter MT is not displayed, it may be displayed. The chance button 136 shown in FIG. 108 (A8-1) changes to lighting in blue and starts vibrating in response to the appearance of the button holding icon.

In FIG. 108(A10), a certain period of time has passed since the operation effective period of the button effect in the conversation announcement was started. Then, the auto button mode functions in response to the button effect in the conversation notice, the old conversation image CI2 is updated as shown in FIG. 108(A11), and the message "Summer vacation still or not" is displayed as a response display to the auto button. The text display is displayed. Note that the button hold icon does not function in the automatic button mode, and the response display is not displayed unless the player actually operates the chance button 136. As shown in FIGS. 108(A12) to (A13), as an operation promoting mode for the button holding icon, the chance button 136 continues to vibrate while lighting blue.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 108 (A15), a combination of lost decorative patterns is stopped and displayed. The chance button 136 shown in FIG. 108(A15) has finished vibrating, and has returned from blue lighting to normal white lighting. More specifically, at a certain timing in FIG. 108(A14), the chance button 136 has finished vibrating and has returned to white lighting. This is because the operation valid period of the button hold icon has expired. The operation valid period of the button holding icon may be terminated, for example, when a predetermined valid period has elapsed, or the decorative design may be terminated by performing the first stop, or the decorative design The process may be ended when the confirmation display is performed. However, the first hold icon h11 is still in the display mode of the button hold icon. Then, in FIG. 108 (A16), the hold of the first hold icon h11 which is the button hold icon is exhausted, and the variable display of symbols is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 108(A16), the second decorative symbol has started variable display, but the first decorative symbol has not yet started variable display, and the display mode of the button holding icon is changed. The first hold icon h11 is still displayed.

In FIG. 108(A17), the hold decrease animation is started, and the first hold icon h11 in the display mode of the button hold icon starts moving toward the pedestal hs0 in the variable icon display area CIS, and in FIG. , A button suspension icon is displayed on the pedestal hs0 in the display mode, and a change animation is started on the pedestal hs0 in the same figure (A19). In the same figure (A20), a change icon h0 in a blue display mode is displayed. It's changing.
109 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 108 and the like.

Then, in FIG. 109 (A22), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, and in FIG. 109 (A23), the first decorative symbol is fluctuating at high speed.

In this example, the automatic button mode is set all the time, but the chance button 136 was not operated by the time the fixed pattern variable display changed to the button holding icon is confirmed regardless of the setting of the automatic button mode. In this case, the display mode automatically changes after the hold decrease animation. That is, while the hold icon in the display mode of the button hold icon is changed to the hold icon in the blue display mode in accordance with the operation of the chance button 136, when the hold decrease animation is started (the variation icon h0 It can be seen that the change icon h0 is displayed, and the display mode does not change according to the operation of the chance button 136.

Further, the automatic button mode may be terminated by operating the chance button 136 during the automatic button mode. In that case, the automatic button mode may not be terminated even if the chance button 136 is operated while the remaining period meter MT is displayed, or the chance button is displayed even when the remaining period meter MT is displayed. Manipulating 136 may exit the auto button mode.

If the chance button 136 has not been operated, the variable icon h0 may be displayed in the same manner as the button hold icon, or may not be changed to the blue variable icon h0. You may change to the change icon h0 of the display mode of. Further, even if the chance button 136 ends the vibration and returns to white lighting, the operation valid period may not end. Furthermore, the fact that the change icon h0 in the blue display mode does not change when the chance button 136 is not operated is the same whether in the automatic button mode or in the non-auto button mode. However, it may be changed, and further, it may be changed during the auto button mode but not during the non-auto button mode, or vice versa.

Further, when the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation valid period in the state where the auto button mode is not set, the character display of "Summer vacation still?" is displayed as shown in FIG. 108 (A11). The old conversation image CI2 is not updated. However, it may be updated.

Also, in place of FIG. 108 (A5-1), in FIG. 109 (Aa5-2-1), a button display icon 136D is added to the navigation character YM. The button display icon 136D also displays a remaining period meter MT indicating the remaining period of the operation valid period of the chance button 136. A meter display MW′ is also displayed in FIG. 109 (Aa5-2-1). The button display icon 136D is a notice that does not change unless the chance button 136 is operated, and may be a notice of the change. In FIG. 109 (Aa5-2-2), a button display icon 136D is displayed together with the grand conversation image CI2 on which the button effect image is displayed. As described above, since the auto button mode functions for the button effect in the conversation notice, the button display icon 136D shown in FIG. 109 (Aa5-2-2) overlaps with the notice that changes without button operation. There is.

Also, instead of FIG. 108 (A5-1), in FIG. 109 (Aa5-3), a plurality of button effect images (button image 136a, remaining time display meter MT) are displayed. In this case, the chance button 136 needs to be operated a plurality of times, and the automatic button function does not have to work even in the case of an effect in which the chance button 136 needs to be operated a plurality of times. It should be noted that, if the operation is performed a specific number of times (for example, once), the auto button function may be activated for the remaining button effect images.

Also, instead of FIG. 108 (A5-1), in FIG. 109 (Aa5-4), a button effect image (button) is displayed on the second display device 208S arranged below the decorative pattern display device 208 (first display device). The image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT) are displayed. In the example of FIG. 109 (Aa5-4), the number of the button effect image displayed on the second display device 208S is one, but the one or more button effect images displayed on the second display device 208S include the auto effect. The button function may not work.

In addition, instead of FIG. 108 (A5-1), in FIG. 109 (Aa5-5-1), the decorative pattern display device 208 is informed to prompt continuous hitting of the chance button 136. In FIG. 109 (Aa5-5-2), the button repeated hit effect is started, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the button effect image (button image 136a, remaining time display meter MT) and continuous hit meter RHM. .. The automatic button function does not work for the button repeated hit effect, and the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 109 (Aa5-5-2) starts to vibrate and changes to blue lighting to prompt the operation. Then, in FIG. 109 (Aa5-5-5), the consecutive hits of the chance button 136 are started, the consecutive hit meter RHM shown in (Aa5-5-6) of the same figure rises, and the response display is performed. In FIG. 109 (Aa5-5-5), continuous hitting of the chance button 136 is started, and a response display such as an increase in the continuous hit meter RHM is also displayed. However, the chance button 136 shown in (Aa5-5-6) of FIG. It continues to vibrate and continues to illuminate in blue. In the examples so far, it was sufficient to operate the chance button 136 once, but in this example, since continuous hits are required, the vibration and blue lighting of the chance button 136 are continued. Note that, even in the case of long-pressing, since the operation of the chance button 136 becomes long as in the continuous hitting, the technical idea here can be applied. The timing of FIG. 109 (Aa5-5-7) is the moment when the operation valid period elapses and the remaining time display meter MT becomes zero. The vibration and blue lighting of the chance button 136 continue until the remaining time display meter MT becomes zero. The chance button 136 then immediately stops vibrating and returns to white lighting. The auto button function may be activated when the button is operated once or more. In addition, in this example, the auto button function does not work, but the long press auto continuous hitting function is configured to work, so that the same response display as when performing the continuous hitting operation is displayed by holding down for a certain period of time. However, if the auto button function does not work, the long press auto continuous hitting function may not work.
FIG. 110 is a diagram showing a modification of the example shown in FIG. 108.

Instead of FIG. 108 (A8-1), in the example continuing from FIG. 110 (A8-2-1), after the operation valid period of the button holding icon has started, with respect to the button effect in the conversation notice. In this example, the chance button 136 is operated once before the automatic button function of 1. In this case, both the response effect of the button holding icon and the response effect of the button effect in the conversation notice are displayed. That is, the button hold icon changes as the response effect of the button hold icon, and the old conversation image CI2 is updated as the response effect of the button effect in the conversation announcement. The change in the button holding icon corresponds to a pre-reading notice, and the update of the old conversation image CI2 in the conversation notice also corresponds to the pre-reading notice. The conversation notice may be a normal notice. The change in the button change icon in FIG. 108(A20) corresponds to a normal notice.

In addition, you may make it display only the response production of the person whose auto button function does not work. That is, only the change animation of the button holding icon may be displayed and the old conversation image CI2 may not be updated. Alternatively, on the contrary, only the response effect of the person who operates the auto button function may be displayed.

Further, one operation of the chance button 136 may display only the response effect of the person who does not operate the auto button function, and the second operation may display the response effect of the person who operates the automatic button function. On the contrary, in one operation of the chance button 136, only the response effect of the person who operates the automatic button function is displayed, and in the second operation, the response effect of the person who does not operate the automatic button function is displayed. You may

Further, although the above description using FIG. 110 (A-8-2-1) to FIG. 110 (A-8-2-4) was made during the setting of the automatic button mode, the automatic button mode is not set yet. The same is true for.

110 (Aa8-3) instead of FIG. 108 (A8-1), the chance button 136 vibrates and emits a special color (blue here) even when the automatic button mode is not set. Indicates. It should be noted that different notifications may be given when the auto button is not set and when the auto button is set.

In place of FIG. 108 (A8-1), in FIG. 110 (Aa8-3′), when the automatic button mode is not set, the chance button 136 does not vibrate and emits a normal color (blinks white here). Here is an example.

Further, as another example, in FIG. 110 (Ab1), during the big hit game, the decorative symbol display device 208 is informed that the chance button 136 should be repeatedly struck. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 110 (Ab2), the button effect image (button image 136a, remaining time display meter MT) is displayed together with the display of the third round, but during the big hit game, the auto button function is used. May not be activated, or conversely, the auto button function may be activated.

FIG. 110 (Ba1-1) to FIG. 110 (Ba5) are diagrams showing an example of effect regarding the back button. When the chance button 136 is operated at the timing of FIG. 110 (Ba1-1), the effect by the navigation character YM is started. However, the chance button 136 is normally lit in white, does not vibrate, and the back button is not notified. In FIG. 110 (Ba2), the appearance of a button holding icon (first holding icon h11) in which the auto button function does not work causes the chance button 136 to start vibrating and change to blue lighting to prompt an operation. In FIG. 110 (Ba3), the chance button 136 is operated, and the display mode of the first hold icon h11, which was the button hold icon, has changed (see FIG. 110 (Ba1-5)).

110(Ba1-2) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 110(Ba1-1), the only difference is that in FIG. 110(Ba1-2), the chance button 136 starts to vibrate. It changes to blue lighting, which means that the back button has been notified.

The remaining period meter MT, which represents the remaining period of the operation valid period described above, will be described in more detail. The description here can be applied to any of the effect examples in which the remaining period meter MT described above is displayed. The display mode of the remaining period meter MT is changed according to the passage of time (in this example, the reduced display is performed), and the display state is located behind the remaining time display region MT1 according to the passage of time. Is changed (in this example, an increase display is performed). Here, the display mode (for example, color or shape) of the remaining time display area MT1 and/or the elapsed time display area MT2 may be displayed in a special display mode different from the default display mode. For example, when the display mode of the remaining time display area MT1 is displayed in red instead of the default color (blue in this example), or the display mode of the elapsed time display area MT2 is red instead of the default color (white in this example). When it is displayed in. When the remaining time display area MT1 is displayed in a special display mode, and when the remaining time display area MT1 is reduced and displayed as time passes, it is displayed in a special display mode as time passes. Since the area to be displayed is reduced, it may be possible to focus attention on the display means (the decorative pattern display device 208 in this example). On the contrary, when the display mode of the elapsed time display area MT2 is displayed in a special display mode and the display area of the elapsed time display area MT2 is increased with the passage of time, Along with this, the area displayed in the special display mode increases, so that the player who wants to see the special display mode in the elapsed time display area MT2 does not immediately operate the operation means (such as the chance button 136 in this example). In some cases, it is possible to increase the variation of the way of enjoying and improve the player's willingness to participate in the game. The remaining time display area MT1 and/or the elapsed time display area MT2 is displayed at the time when the remaining time meter is first displayed (in the remaining time display area MT1, the remaining time meter is first displayed. In the case of the elapsed time display area MT2, it may be the time when the remaining time display area MT1 decreases and the elapsed time display area MT2 becomes visible for the first time.) The display mode may be displayed, or may be configured to change from the default display mode to a special display mode when a certain period of time elapses after the operation valid period elapses.

Further, the navigation character YM described so far will be further supplemented. The description here can be applied to any of the effect examples in which the navigation character YM described so far is displayed. First, the navigation character may be configured not to give various notices. Further, another navigation character (hereinafter, “navi character B”) may be displayed while the navigation character (hereinafter, “navi character A”) is being displayed. In that case, the navigation character A displayed earlier may be overlapped with the navigation character B displayed later, and conversely the navigation character B displayed later may be displayed first. The displayed navigation character A may be overlapped, or the navigation character A and the navigation character B may be displayed at positions where they do not overlap each other. For example, there may be a case where the navigation character YM that is constantly displayed overlaps with one or more variations by the navigation character that gives advance notice and/or prefetch notice. Further, the change notice display may be performed by performing an effect display indicating that the change notice display may be displayed by the navigation character.

FIG. 111 is a diagram for explaining the overlap relationship between the display of the ball-out notification that is notified by the occurrence of the plate full error and the other displays of the brightness adjustment windows BW.

On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 111(α1), the hold frame UI is displayed on the background display of the sea, and the navigation character YM is also displayed. In addition, the combination of the decorative patterns (“decoration 4”-“decoration 1”-“decoration 7”) is displayed on both the first decorative pattern (third pattern) and the second decorative pattern (fifth pattern). The special variable symbol display is stopped. Furthermore, in the second hold number display displayed in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold number of special figure 1 and the hold number of special figure 2 are both zero. That is, there is no hold, and the symbol variable display is not started after the fixed display of the special symbol is confirmed, and the menu icon MI, so that the lower portion of the first decorative symbol overlaps from the front side. A volume adjustment icon VI and a brightness adjustment icon BI are displayed. In addition, a ball-out notification such as "please remove the ball" is displayed at the bottom of the first decorative pattern so as to overlap from the front side. The display of the ball-out notification is a slightly transparent display, and when the display of the ball-out notification is displayed so as to overlap from the front side, the display on the back side becomes slightly visible. Hereinafter, the fact that they are displayed so as to overlap from the front side or that they are displayed in the layer on the front side may be simply referred to as “overlapping”. It should be noted that the display of the ball-out notification may be a display in which the display on the back side is completely invisible. Further, the speaker 120 also outputs a voice such as "Please pull out the ball".

The display of the ball-out notification is displaced from the upper left second decorative design and the upper right second hold number display, and does not overlap these displays. The display of the ball-out notification may be displayed so as to never overlap with the second decorative symbol or/and the second held number display, or may overlap. Further, the display of the ball-out notification is displaced from the display position of the frame RW at the upper right of the screen for notifying the current setting state, and the display does not overlap with this frame RW either. The display of the ball-out notification may be displayed so as not to overlap the frame RW, or may overlap. Further, the display of the notification of the ball removal is displaced from the display position of the holding frame UI and does not overlap the holding UI. The display of the ball-out notification may be displayed so as not to overlap the holding frame UI, or may overlap.

In FIG. 111(α2), the lower key of the operation key unit is operated and the brightness adjustment window BW is displayed. Although the brightness adjustment window BW is displayed after the display of the notification of the ball removal, the display of the notification of the ball removal is prioritized, and the brightness adjustment window BW is on a layer behind the display of the notification of the ball removal. It is displayed. That is, the display of the notification of removal of the ball overlaps the brightness adjustment window BW.

Eventually, the symbol variation display is started, the brightness adjustment window BW, the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI are also hidden, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 111(α3), 1 The variable display of the decorative pattern is displayed. However, the ball removal operation has not been performed yet, and the display of the ball removal notification continues. Note that the same operation is performed in the case where the bowl full operation is once performed and the dish full tank error is once solved, but the dish full tank error occurs again, and the ball removal notification display is newly displayed. The display of the ball-out notification overlaps the variable display of the first decorative symbol. Further, in FIG. 111 (α3), the left and right keys of the operation key unit are operated, and the bar display VB for volume adjustment is displayed on the holding frame UI. The bar display VB for volume adjustment is displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the first decorative symbol, at least a part of the variable icon h0, and at least a part of the navigation character YM from the front side. In the following description, when the volume display bar display VB is displayed, it is assumed that the left and right keys are operated each time the bar display VB is displayed. Further, by operating the up and down keys of the operation key unit, it is possible to display the bar display for brightness adjustment, and this bar display for brightness adjustment is displayed at the same position as the bar display VB for volume adjustment. The following description of the volume display bar display VB can be applied to the brightness adjustment bar display. However, the bar display for brightness adjustment and the bar display VB for volume adjustment may be displayed at the same time. Further, the volume display bar display VB or the brightness adjustment bar display may be always displayable, or may be displayed only for a certain period. Further, it may be displayable only while operating the left and right keys or the up and down keys.

Further, the bar display VB for volume adjustment and the display of the ball-out notification are displayed at positions where they do not overlap. The display of the ball-out notification may be displayed so as not to overlap the bar display VB for volume adjustment, or may overlap.

Further, the display of the ball-out notification is displaced from the display position of both the hold icon and the variable icon, and these icons do not overlap. The display of the ball-out notification may be displayed so as not to overlap the hold icon and/or the variable icon, or may overlap. Further, the display of the ball-out notification is displaced from the display of the navigation character YM, and does not overlap the display of the navigation character YM. The display of the ball-out notification may be displayed so as not to overlap with the display of the navigation character YM, or may overlap.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 111 (α4), super reach effect is performed, and a duel scene in the background of the wilderness is displayed. Here too, the display of the ball notification is displayed, the left pattern of "decoration 7" moved to the upper left, the right pattern of "decoration 7" moved to the upper right, and the display of the ball notification is overlapped. ing. Further, the display of the ball-out notification is also overlapped with the display of the duel scene in the background of the wilderness. The volume can be adjusted even during the super reach, and the volume display bar display VB is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 111 (α4). This bar display VB for volume adjustment also overlaps the display of the duel scene in the background of the wilderness.

The start screen of the big hit game is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 111 (α5), but the big hit start effect display here also overlaps the ball-out notification display. In addition, even during the big hit game, the volume can be adjusted, and a bar display VB for volume adjustment is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 111 (α5). The bar display VB for volume adjustment also overlaps the big hit start effect display. On the other hand, the display of the ball-out notification is displaced from the right-hit suggestion display (display different from the right-hit warning. This is equivalent to the mini right-hit display of FIG. 18 (52) described above) at the upper left of the screen. It does not overlap the right-handed hint display. The display of the ball-out notification may be displayed so as to never overlap with the right-handing suggestion display, or may overlap. The right-handed suggestion display may not be displayed on the big hit game start screen.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 111 (α6), a right-hit instruction screen for instructing the player to right-hit is displayed. In this example, the right-hand hitting instruction screen is the first big hit (the first big jackpot from the normal big hit state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state) to the first big jackpot, but there is a latent latent change state. The 1st (1st consecutive villa) big hit from (special figure high-accuracy ordinary figure low probability) and the first (1st consecutive villa) big hit from sudden probability change (special figure high-accuracy general figure high-accuracy) Note that the latent probability variation state and/or sudden probability variation state described above refer only to the state that has transitioned from the normal state, excluding those that occurred in the probability variation state or the time saving state). However, a right hitting instruction screen may be displayed for each big hit. The right hitting instruction screen here is overlapped with the notification of the ball removal notification, while the right hitting suggestion display is not overlapped by the notification of the ball removal notification. In this example, while the right-handing instruction screen is being displayed, a right-handing warning display (corresponding to the right-handing notification of FIG. 17 (60) described above and the liquid crystal display of right-handing of the hitting warning of FIG. 116 described later) is displayed. Although not performed, the right-handed warning display may be performed while the right-handed instruction screen is being displayed. Although the left-handed warning display (corresponding to the liquid crystal display at the time of left-handed hitting warning in FIG. 116 described later) is not displayed while the right-handed instruction screen is displayed, it may be displayed. Further, although the right-handing suggestion display is performed while the right-handing instruction screen is being displayed, the right-handing suggestion display may not be performed while the right-handing instruction screen is being displayed.

In FIG. 111 (α7), the first round is started and the round effect is displayed. The display of the notification of removal of the ball and the bar display VB for volume adjustment overlap with the display of the round effect. It should be noted that the display of the ball-out notification is displaced from the display of the number of rounds at the upper right of the screen, and does not overlap with the display of the number of rounds. The display of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap the number of rounds display, or may be displayed in some cases. Further, the display of the ball-out notification is displaced from the display of the number of discharged balls (0 pt) at the lower right of the screen, and does not overlap with the displayed number of discharged balls. The display of the notification of ball removal may be displayed so as not to overlap the display of the number of discharged balls, or may be displayed in some cases.

In FIG. 111 (α8) of the fourth round, promotion production is performed in the fifth round, which suggests whether or not there is a big chance that the second variable winning a prize opening will be open for a long time and it will be easy to pass V. As a result, a success effect indicating that the promotion effect has succeeded is being executed. That is, it is informed that it is a big hit game in which the probability variation transition condition is easily established. The display of the ball-out notification and the bar display VB for volume adjustment overlaps the display of this successful effect. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 111 (α8), the display of the star “V chance GET” is also started. The display of the ball-out notification is different from the display of the "V chance GET" of this star mark, and does not overlap with this display. The display of the ball-out notification may be displayed so as not to overlap with the display of the star "V chance GET", or may be overlapped.

In FIG. 111 (α9), the fifth round is started, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays that it is the fifth round of the big hit game, and also urges you to perform V passage in this round. The display "Aim for V" is displayed. As a result, it may be possible for the player to surely perform the V passage. The display of the ball-out notification overlaps with the display "Aim for V".

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 111 (α10), there is a passage (V passage) of the game ball to the probability variation operation area in the second variable winning opening, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is informed that the probability variation acquisition has been confirmed. The display of "V" is large. That is, the display of "V", which is the notification that the probability variation acquisition has been confirmed, is displayed based on the fact that there is V passage. The display of the ball-out notification and the bar display VB for volume adjustment overlaps the display of "V". It should be noted that at the timing shown in FIG. 111 (α10), the display of the star mark “V chance GET” may be hidden.

When the fifth round ends, a big hit game end effect is performed in a manner as shown in FIG. 111 (α11). In the above-mentioned big hit game, since the probability change transition condition is satisfied by passing V in the fifth round, while the symbol fluctuation display is displayed for a certain number of times after the end of the big hit game, the probability change state (special figure high probability general figure High probability state). Therefore, in the big hit game end effect, a display of "Yoshimune RUSH rush" indicating that the state changes to the probability changing state (probability changing effect) is performed. The display of the notification of removal of the ball and the bar display VB for volume adjustment overlap with the display of "Yoshimune RUSH rush". It should be noted that the right hit suggestion display is also displayed in the end effect of the big hit game, but it may not be displayed.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 111 (α12), a prepaid card forgetting warning display (corresponding to the caution display of FIG. 18 (57) described above) is displayed. The display of the notification of the removal of the ball and the bar display VB for adjusting the volume overlap the warning display for forgetting to remove the prepaid card. In the end effect of the prepaid card forgetting warning display, the right-handing suggestion display is displayed, but it may not be displayed.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 111 (α13), a display of the number of big hits (BONUS×3) is displayed just below the right-handing suggestion notification on the upper left of the screen. Further, a music title display portion MN is displayed on the upper right of the screen, and up and down key icons of the operation key unit are displayed on the left side thereof. Further, the second hold number display is displayed at the lower right of the screen.

The display of the ball-out notification is different from the display of the number of big hits, and does not overlap with this display. The display of the ball-out notification may be displayed so as not to overlap with the display of the number of big hits, or may overlap. In addition, the display of the ball-out notification is also displaced from the song title display portion MN, and does not overlap the song title display portion MN. The display of the ball-out notification may be displayed on the song title display portion MN so as not to overlap, or may overlap. Further, the display of the ball-out notification is displaced from the icon of the up/down key and does not overlap with the icon of the up/down key. The display of the ball-out notification may be displayed so as not to overlap the icons of the up and down keys, or may overlap. Further, the display of the ball-out notification is displaced from the second hold number display at the lower right of the screen, and does not overlap with the second hold number display. The display of the ball-out notification may be displayed so as not to overlap the second hold number display, or may overlap.

Further, the volume display bar display VB shown in FIG. 111 (α13) overlaps a part of the hold icon, but may be displayed at a position where it does not overlap.

Further, in FIG. 111 (α14), a big hit game start screen is displayed, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 111 (α15), the music selection screen shown in FIG. 103 is displayed. The display of the ball-out notification and the bar display VB for volume adjustment overlap with the music release list GR.

Further, in FIG. 111 (α16), the music selection is finished and the round effect is started. At the lower left of the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 111 (α16), the title of the currently selected song is displayed. The display of the ball-out notification is different from the display of the song title display and does not overlap with the song title display. The display of the ball-out notification may be displayed so as not to overlap the music title display, or may overlap.

In addition, in FIG. 111 (α17) of the fourth round, a display “Aim for V with the next R” is displayed on the right side of the screen, and in FIG. 111 (α18) of the fifth round, “ The display "Aim for V" is displayed, and the display of the ball-out notification overlaps these displays displayed on the right side of the screen. Here, FIG. 111 (α17) may correspond to the end of the remaining ball detection period of the main control unit 300 at the end of the fourth round. In addition, FIG. 111 (α18) indicates the start of the fifth round, and may correspond to the case where the special electric power combination operating signal of the main control unit 300 changes from OFF to ON. In this case, the period between FIG. 111 (α17) and FIG. 111 (α18) corresponds to the period of the inter-round interval from the end of 4 rounds to the start of 5 rounds, and the signal indicating that the special electric wheel is operating of the main control unit 300 is It will be the period from on to off.

Further, in FIG. 111 (α19), “V” is displayed on the right side of the screen due to V passing, and the display of the ball-out notification overlaps with the display of “V”. ing. However, the bar display VB for volume adjustment does not overlap with the display of "V".

Note that FIG. 111 (α20) may be a state in which 5R is being executed and a certain period of time has passed after V passage, or at the end of 5 rounds (for example, the remaining ball detection period of the main control unit). (A period corresponding to the end).

After that, the jackpot game progresses up to 15 rounds (Fig. 111 (α21) to (23) in Fig. 111), and in Fig. 111 (α24), the display of "Yoshimune RUSH rush" is displayed as in the same diagram (α11). ) Is displayed, and the bar display VB for displaying the notification of the removal of the ball and the bar display VB for volume adjustment overlap with the display of “Yoshimune RUSH rush”. In FIG. 111 (α24), the jackpot end display period is started and displayed after the end of the inter-round interval.

Note that there is a time lag between the timing in the main control unit 300 and the actual timing because the command is transmitted from the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400 receives it, and various controls are performed.

Further, in FIG. 111, the previous round display is displayed as it is during the inter-round interval. For example, "5R" is displayed during the inter-round interval between the fifth round and the sixth round, but all or part of the round display may be hidden during the inter-round interval. For example, only R may be displayed and the number part may be hidden.

The same is true at the end of 15 rounds, and round display may be performed or non-display may be performed during the inter-round interval.

In this example, the right-handed warning display may be displayed during the big hit, but the left-handed warning display may not be displayed, but the left-handed warning display may be displayed. It may be configured so that the warning is not given.

The display of the ball-out notification is described above as an example, but the description here is not limited to the display of the ball-out notification, and other errors (for example, various errors listed in FIGS. 114 and 115). It can be applied to the display of the notification regarding.
FIG. 112 is a diagram showing a display example of the ball-out notification.

The display of the ball-out notification shown in FIG. 112(β) is such that the display behind the ball-out notification is completely invisible.

The display of the ball-out notification shown in FIG. 112 (γ1) overlaps with the volume adjustment icon VI in addition to the brightness adjustment window BW. That is, the display of the ball-out notification shown in FIG. 112 (γ1) overlaps a part of the brightness adjustment window BW and a part of the volume adjustment icon VI. It should be noted that the display of the notification of removal of the ball may overlap the entire brightness adjustment window BW or the entire volume adjustment icon VI. Further, the display of the ball-out notification shown in FIG. 112 (γ1) is a slightly transparent display like the display of the ball-out notification shown in FIG. 111, and the display on the back side is slightly visible. However, it may be a display in which the display on the rear side is completely invisible, such as the display of the notification of the ball removal shown in FIG. 112(β).

The display of the ball-out notification shown in FIG. 112 (γ2) overlaps the bar display VB for volume adjustment displayed during the symbol variation display. The display of this ball-out notification does not overlap with the navigation character YM, but the bar display VB for volume adjustment overlaps with the navigation character YM. Further, the display of the ball-out notification shown in FIG. 112 (γ1) may be a display in which the display on the back side is completely invisible, like the display of the ball-out notification shown in FIG. 112 (β). ,the same.). Note that the display is not limited to the volume adjusting bar, but can be set by the player while the symbol is changing, or the display regarding the above-mentioned Daitomo (the production customization screen shown in the above-mentioned FIG. 65(V) and (V′), etc. A list of the missions achieved by the player's operation regardless of the variation status of the symbols while the song title display area MN shown in FIG. 102(1), the bar for brightness adjustment, and the user mode (Daitomo) are being set. Display of game history (number of revolutions, number of balls, number of missions cleared, number of jackpots played this time, maximum number of consecutive games played this time, etc.), character or background set by user, hold frame, hold display, etc. It can also be applied to displays that can be set and changed.

The display of the ball-out notification shown in FIG. 112 (γ3-1) overlaps the variable icon h0, the hold icon h11, and the navigation character YM. When the left and right keys of the operation key unit are operated in the state shown in FIG. 112 (γ3-1), the volume display bar display VB is displayed. In the display of the ball-out notification and the bar display VB for volume adjustment, the display of the ball-out notification is prioritized and displayed on the front side. Note that the bar display VB for volume adjustment may be prioritized and displayed on the front side. In any case, the volume display bar display VB also overlaps the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM, and may also overlap the hold icon h11.

In FIG. 112 (γ4), contrary to FIG. 112 (γ3-2), the display of the ball-out notification is overlapped with the volume display bar display VB.

In FIG. 112 (δ3-1), the navigation character YM is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. Is overlapped with the display. Here, the display of the notification of ball removal overlaps the navigation character YM, but the navigation character YM may overlap a part of the display of notification of ball removal. In addition, the navigation character YM may not perform animation such that it overlaps the whole or part of the display of the notification of ball removal. This technical idea can be applied to the display regarding other errors described later.

In FIG. 112(ε), the display of the ball-out notification does not have a frame display but is displayed only in characters.

FIG. 112 (ζ1) shows an example in which the display of the ball removal notification is composed of a character display and a peripheral image display 132G around the ball ejection lever 132. By the peripheral image display 132G, a part of each of the first decorative symbol, the menu icon MI, the volume adjusting icon VI, and the brightness adjusting icon BI is overlapped.

In FIG. 112 (ζ2), the peripheral image display 132G overlaps the same character display as the character display of “Aim for V” shown in FIG. 111 (α9) to hide the character display.

In FIG. 112 (ζ3), the peripheral image display 132G overlaps a part of the same display as the display of “Aim V at next R” on the right side shown in FIG. 111 (α17).

In FIG. 112 (η1), the peripheral image display 132G overlaps the character display of “Aim for V” and the display of the star “V chance GET”.

In FIG. 112 (η2), the peripheral image display 132G does not overlap the display of “Aim for V at the next R” displayed on the right side.

In FIG. 112 (θ1), the peripheral image display 132G overlaps a part of the volume display bar display VB and hides a part of the volume adjustment bar display VB. That is, in this example, only the entire gauge portion is hidden. However, the peripheral image display 132G may overlap all of the volume display bar display VB. In this example, the peripheral image display 132G does not overlap the character display of "Aim for V" and the display of "V chance GET" of the star mark.

In FIG. 112 (θ2), the peripheral image display 132G overlaps the entire gauge portion of the volume display bar display VB and a part of “Aim for V with the next R” on the right side.
FIG. 113 is a diagram showing an example in which a plurality of types of error displays are displayed.

An example of errors A to E shown in FIG. 113 will be described later. The ball-out notification may or may not be included in these errors A to E.

In FIG. 113(ι1), the transparency display of the error A notification is displayed, and the warning sound of the error A notification is output from the speaker 120.
In FIG. 113(ι1′), an opaque display for reporting the error A is displayed.

In FIG. 113(ι2), the transparency display of the error A notification overlaps with the variable icon h0, the hold icon h11, and the navigation character YM, as in FIG. 112(γ3-1), and other points. Is the same as the description in FIG. 112 (γ3-1).

In FIG. 113(ι3-1), a plurality of types of error display (transparency display of error A notification to error E notification) are displayed in the order of error occurrence. That is, a newly generated error is displayed below, and in this example, the first generated error is the error A. From the speaker 120, the latest warning sound of the error E is output. Note that the warning sounds may be output in the order of occurrence of all displayed errors.

In FIG. 113(ι3-2), since the error E is eliminated, the transparency display of the error E notification disappears, and the warning sound of the error D is output from the speaker 120. That is, when the error that occurred last is canceled, the warning sound of the error that occurred before that is output.

In FIG. 113 (ι3-2′), the volume display bar display VB overlaps a part of a plurality of types of error displays (transparency display of error A notification to error E notification). Here, the bar display VB for volume adjustment overlaps the transparent display of the error E notification at the bottom, and the character display of the error E is hidden. It should be noted that a plurality of types of error displays may overlap the volume display bar display VB.

In FIG. 113(ι4-1), when an error occurs in the order of error ABCDE, the error with the highest priority to be notified is displayed above, and the speaker 120 outputs the warning sound of the error with the highest priority. To be done. An error with a high priority is an error with a high degree of importance (for example, a serious error for a game shop), and specifically, it may be the order of the list shown in FIG. 114. In FIG. 113(ι4-1), the error B has the highest priority.

In FIG. 113(ι4-2), since the error B is eliminated, the transparency display of the error B notification disappears, and the speaker 120 outputs the warning sound of the error E, which is the second error so far.

In FIG. 113(ι5-1), an error A occurs, a transparency display of the error A notification is displayed, and a warning sound of the error A notification is output from the speaker 120. In this state, the error Z occurs. Error Z is an error to stop the game, the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 113 (ι5-2) is a blue screen, and all the displays except the display related to the error Z are not displayed. ing. The error to stop the game here is an error (for example, a magnetic (magnet) detection error) in which the main control unit 300 does not perform various lottery. That is, it is an error that the main control unit 300 cannot perform various lottery, or does not perform various lottery even if it is possible. The error displayed in the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 like the error Z is not limited to the error for stopping the game, but is, for example, an effect moving means error described later or an error for stopping the payout operation. Good. Although some or all of the various errors described in the list of FIG. 116 described later may be the error Z, conversely, some or all of the various errors described in the list of FIG. May not be displayed in the display mode of the error Z. Further, when the main control unit 300 does not perform various kinds of lottery, commands are not transmitted to the sub control units 400 and 500, so that various kinds of lottery are not eventually performed on the sub control units 400 and 500.

In FIG. 113 (κ1), the position of the error display is changed. That is, at the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208, a plurality of types of error displays (error A notification to error E notification opaque display) are displayed in the order of error occurrence. The error display in FIG. 113(κ1) is a display in which the display behind the error display is completely invisible, but it is a slightly transparent display, and the display of the ball-out notification overlaps from the front side. When displayed on, the display on the back side may be slightly visible.

In FIG. 113 (κ2), the display of the ball-out notification is added in the state shown in FIG. 113 (κ1). Here, the ball-out notification error (plate full tank error) is not included in the plurality of types of errors (error A to error E), but is included in the plurality of types of error (error A to error E). Good. It should be noted that, instead of the error of the ball-out notification, an error that frequently occurs may be displayed separately from a plurality of types of errors (error A to error E).

Part of the error of the ball-out notification shown in FIG. 113 (κ2) is overlapped by a plurality of types of error displays displayed at the left end. It should be noted that all the ball-out notification errors may be overlapped by a plurality of types of error displays displayed at the left end.

On the other hand, the error of the ball-out notification shown in FIG. 113(κ2) overlaps the error display of a plurality of types displayed at the left end.

The error notification display regarding the control on the side of the sub-control units 400 and 500 may be overlapped with the error notification display regarding the control of the main control unit 300, or vice versa. For example, the hitting warning display may be overlapped by the ball-out notification, or conversely, the ball warning notification may be overlapped by the hitting warning display. Further, both of the error notification displays regarding the control on the side of the sub-control units 400 and 500 and the error notification display regarding the control of the main control unit 300 do not overlap with each other. May be.

FIG. 113 (λ1-1) is in the symbol variation display, and simultaneous production executed by a plurality of gaming machines is started in the middle of the symbol variation display. FIG. 113 (λ1-2) shows an example of the display screen of the simultaneous effect at the normal time (error has not occurred and before the first stop). As shown in FIG. 113 (λ1-2), in normal time, the background display of the decorative symbol display device 208 replaces the background display of the simultaneous production. The volume display bar display VB may be displayed so as to overlap the background display of the simultaneous production. However, the reverse is also possible. Further, regarding the error display, there is an example shown in FIG. 113 (λ2′) described later, but it may be displayed so as to overlap with the background display of the simultaneous production. However, the reverse is also possible.

FIG. 113(λ2) shows an example in which simultaneous productions occur during the super reach production. During the super reach effect, the display of the simultaneous effect is displayed in the separate frame display section OFD in the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the player can enjoy the effect of the super reach and also see the simultaneous effect. be able to. If the gaming machine is equipped with the second display device 208S, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, or the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the display of simultaneous production is displayed on these display devices 208S, 208M, 208N. May be.

FIG. 113(λ2′) shows an example of a case where simultaneous effects are generated during the error notification display. Here, the situation in which the super reach production is being performed also overlaps, but it may be before the first stop of the decorative pattern, or in the normal reach state or the same. The display of the simultaneous production is displayed in the separate frame display portion OFD, and a plurality of types of error displays (transparency display of the error A notification to the error E notification) are displayed without changing before the simultaneous production occurs, and the separate frame display portion is displayed. The display of the simultaneous production in the OFD is overlapped with a plurality of types of error display.

The volume display bar display VB may be overlapped with the simultaneous effect display on the separate frame display section OFD. Alternatively, conversely, the volume adjustment bar display VB may be overlapped with the simultaneous effect display on the separate frame display section OFD.

Further, in the gaming table provided with the second display device 208S, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, or the third decorative symbol display device 208N, those display devices 208S, 208M, 208N (hereinafter referred to as "second display means"). .) overlaps with the decorative symbol display device 208 or the first decorative symbol display device 208L (hereinafter, referred to as “first display device”), the first display according to the movement of the second display device. A part of the display on the means may be displayed on the second display means. In this case, the error display may be displayed on the second display means, or only the error display may not be displayed.

As described above, in the description using FIGS. 111 to 113, the words “error” and “warning” are used, but it is not necessary to distinguish between the two, and it is possible to notify that an error has occurred. Alternatively, it may be a notification that an instruction has been issued to eliminate the error that has occurred. Further, the one described as an error may be set to have a higher priority than the one described as a warning.
<Error notification/Error detectable by main controller>

Next, an error that can be detected by the main controller 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. 114. FIG. 114 is a diagram showing an example of an error that can be detected by the main controller 300 of the pachinko machine 100.

The errors that can be detected by the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 of this example are a magnetic (magnet) detection error, a switch (sensor) non-connection error, a magnetic field (radio wave) detection error, a switch (sensor) level abnormality error, and a prize. Rate (general winning opening, starting opening 2 (electric Chu), special winning opening (attacker)) abnormal error, special winning opening discharge excess error, big winning opening excess prize error, shock abnormal error, solenoid abnormal error and the like.

The magnetic (magnet) detection error occurs when the magnetic detection signal changes from off to on in the power-on state (PW_WATCH signal is on) and this state continues for a predetermined period (for example, 10 ms), and then the power is turned on again. It is an error that returns when you do. For switch (sensor) disconnection error, when the power is turned on (PW_WATCH signal is on), one of special Fig. 1, 2 start port, universal start port (gate), and attacker is not connected (harness is broken or connector is disconnected). This occurs when the state of (1) continues for a predetermined period (for example, 4 ms), and the unconnected device (Special Fig. 1 and 2 starting port, general figure starting port, attacker) is connected in the power-on state (PW_WATCH signal is on). This error is returned when it is detected that The magnetic field (radio wave) detection error is an error that occurs when the magnetic field (radio wave) is detected by the magnetic field (radio wave) detection sensor.

The switch (sensor) level abnormality error is an error that occurs when a large jade is suspected. Among the winning rate abnormality errors, the general winning opening error is an error that occurs when the number of winnings to the general winning opening (for example, the general winning opening 226) is an abnormal value, and the error of the starting opening 2 is usually This is an error that occurs when a predetermined number of game balls are detected when the electric accessory (for example, the second special figure starting port 232) is not activated, and the error of the special winning opening is the special winning opening (for example, This is an error that occurs when the number of winnings to the variable winning port 234, the first variable winning port 234 and the second variable winning port 235) shown in FIGS. 194 and 200 is an abnormal value.

The special winning opening discharge excess error occurs when the number of discharges> the number of balls entered during the probability variation area valid period and outside the probability variation area validity period, and the next main control unit timer when the special winning opening discharge excess error occurs This error returns when interrupt processing occurs.

The prize winning excess error occurs when the number of balls entered is greater than the number of balls discharged after the remaining ball detection time has elapsed (when the special train combination operation interval timer is 0), and the number of balls received = number of balls discharged. It is an error that recovers when the power is turned on or when the power is turned on again. In the process of returning from the special winning opening winning excess error, the probability variation area related passage number is set to zero.

The impact abnormality error is a state in which the impact sensor level changes from OFF to ON while the switch power supply confirmation signal is OFF (=power supply is ON) and during the period of validity of the probability variation area (specific area), and the state is ON. This error occurs when it continues for a time (for example, 12 ms), and is returned when the level of the impact sensor changes from ON to OFF, or when it changes from the probability variation region valid period to outside the probability variation region valid period.

The solenoid abnormality error occurs when the photo sensor has not performed an operation of changing from OFF to ON or an operation of changing from ON to OFF even once during the probability variation period valid period. This error returns when timer interrupt processing occurs.

In this example, the uppermost stage (magnetic (magnet) detection error) of FIG. 114 is the highest priority error because the main control unit 300 is prohibited from operating (the game cannot be played). Although the error becomes lower, the other error may be the highest priority error, and the high priority may not be the order of the list shown in FIG. 114. Details of the error occurrence condition, the recovery condition, the detection operation in the main control unit 300, and the recovery operation in the main control unit 300 are as shown in FIG. In addition, "when the winning end display period ends" of the return condition of the winning rate abnormality error of the big winning opening (attacker) is when the end display period of the big hit or the small hit ends.
<Error that can be detected by the error notification/payout control unit>

Next, an error that can be detected by the payout control unit 600 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. 115. FIG. 115 is a diagram showing an example of an error that can be detected by the payout controller 600 of the pachinko machine 100.

As the errors that can be detected by the payout control unit 600 of the pachinko machine 100 of this example, the lower tray full tank error (lower plate full tank error, pan full tank error), the number of payouts insufficient error, the number of payouts switch error, the illegal payout error, the excess of payouts Error, CR unit communication error, main control communication error (error when communication confirmation command from main control unit 300 cannot be received for a predetermined time (1000 ms in this example), CR unit not connected error, glass frame opening error In addition to the inner frame opening error and the door opening error, there are magnetic error error, external clock error error, magnetic field error error, switch level error error, switch disconnection error, shock sensor error, etc., which are not shown.

The error occurrence condition, the return condition, the payout operation in the payout device 152, and the launch operation in the launch device 110 are as shown in FIG. 115(a). It should be noted that "stop." described in the item "stop firing" in the figure is synonymous with turning off the firing permission signal.

FIG. 115( b) is a diagram showing a combination of a glass frame opening error and an inner frame opening error, which are conditions for generating a door opening error. The door open error occurs when at least one of the glass frame open error and the inner frame open error has occurred, and becomes the released state when both the glass frame open error and the inner frame open error have released. It is an error.
<Error notification/other examples>

Note that the above-mentioned magnetic (magnet) detection error is other error (for example, magnetic field (radio wave) detection error, switch non-connection error (error relating to disconnection or disconnection of connector of device controlled by main control unit), impact abnormality error, The payout control communication error, the switch level error, the winning rate error, the door opening error, and the upper plate full error) may have higher priority, but may have the same priority.

Further, for example, when a magnetic (magnet) detection error and an error with a low priority (for example, magnetic field detection error) occur at the same time, if the output condition is met first by the magnetic field (radio wave) detection error, the magnetic field (radio wave) ) The operation for the magnetic (magnet) detection error may be executed after the operation for the detection error is executed. In that case, the notification by the decorative symbol display device 208, the lamps 418, 532, 542, and the speaker 120 is all the devices (decorative symbol display device) that notify from the magnetic field (radio wave) detection error to the magnetic (magnet) detection error. 208, lamps 418, 532, 542, and speaker 120, etc.) may be switched (overwriting data) such that only one or more devices (eg, speaker 120) are overwritten and others One or more of the devices may continue to notify the user of the magnetic field (radio wave) detection error.
<Specific example of error notification/notification mode>

Next, a specific example of a notification mode of error notification will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 116 is a diagram showing an example of a notification mode of error notification by the pachinko machine 100.

The liquid crystal display shown in FIG. 116 means an error display by the display means (the decorative pattern display device 208 in this example), and the character display described in “” is displayed. Here, the error display by the display means is configured to be displayed until the error is canceled and to be hidden when the error is canceled. However, even after the error is canceled, the error is displayed for a certain period (for example, 10 seconds). ) It may be configured to be displayed, or may be configured to be hidden after a certain period (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed from the occurrence of the error even if the error is not released. The display by the display means is not limited to the display by the decorative symbol display device 208, and may be an error display by lighting of a segment or various lamps, a light emission display by a light guide plate, or a POV display.

The sound effect described in FIG. 116 may be a notification by a sound output unit (speaker 120 in this example), and “” is repeatedly output as a sound. Here, the audio notification is configured to be repeatedly output until the error is released, but even if the error is not released, a certain period (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the error occurred. Then, the voice may be configured not to be output, or the voice may be configured to be output for a certain period (for example, 15 seconds) after the error is released.

The error illumination LED described in FIG. 116 is an LED provided on the front side of the front frame door 106 (a position visible to the player), and is configured to light up only when an error related to payout occurs. However, it may be configured to turn on some or all of various errors related to the power supply, main control, and sub control (sub control), or may be configured to not turn on some or all of them. Good. Further, although the error illumination LED is not turned on in the warning regarding the sub-control (in this example, the impact warning and the hitting warning), it may be turned on. The error illumination LED may be in a constantly lit state, or may be turned off to notify that an error has occurred when an error occurs. The payout illumination LED described in FIG. 116 is an LED provided on the front side of the front frame door 106 (a position visible to the player), and is turned on while payout by the payout device 152 is being performed. The light is turned off while the payout device 152 is not paying out. Further, although the payout illumination LED is turned on when a part of the payout error (in this example, the payout amount shortage error) occurs, the payout lighting LED may be turned on only during the period when the payout by the payout device 152 is being performed. It may be configured to turn on when an error relating to payout occurs. The decorative LED shown in FIG. 116 is the game board 200 or a frame (in this example, the frame lamp 122 of the front frame door 106. The main body 104 (inner frame) and/or the outer frame 102 is provided with the decorative LED. Lamp may be provided, or may be configured not to be provided), and emits light according to various effects. Further, the decorative LED illustrated in FIG. 116 may stop the light emitting effect and light up in a light emitting pattern for an error even if the light emitting effect is performed when an error occurs. (As an example at the time of recovery, the light emission effect may be configured to proceed in another layer even during an error, and the light emission effect at the time of error recovery may be configured to be recovered when the error is recovered. May be configured not to perform the light emission effect until a timing at which it is easy to recover (for example, when a new light emission effect is started), or may be configured to recover from the effect data at the time when the error occurs. (Good) Here, the error notification by turning on the various LEDs is configured to turn on or blink until the error is cleared, and turn off when the error is cleared, but even after the error is cleared, It may be configured to turn on or blink for a certain period of time (for example, 10 seconds), or to be turned off after a certain period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed from the occurrence of the error even if the error has not been cleared. May be.

The errors that can be detected by the pachinko machine 100 of this example are (1) an error related to payout (payout control unit 600), (2) an error related to a power supply (power supply control unit 660), and (3) main control (main control unit 300). And the like, and (4) warning regarding sub-control (first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500). Each will be described below.
<Error notification/specific example of notification mode/error regarding payout>

First, the error related to payout will be described. Examples of the “error relating to payout (payout control unit 600)” in this example include a lower tray full tank error (hereinafter, also referred to as a plate full tank error), a glass frame opening error, an insufficient number of payout errors, an excessive payout error, an illegal payout error, The payout quantity switch error, the main control communication error, the CR unit non-connection error, the CR unit communication error, and the door opening error are listed. Here, the payout error display 7-segment LED is provided on the payout control board (payout board 170) and is visible only when the main body 104 is opened to the outer frame 102 (transparent or highly transparent). It is visible through the payout substrate case 172 made of resin).

In this example, when a lower tray full tank error occurs, the number “2” is displayed on the light emitting means (in this example, the payout error display 7-segment LED provided on the payout control board (payout board 170)). Notifying by the light emitting means by displaying, notification by the display means (decoration pattern display device 208 in this example) (display of characters indicating that lower tray full tank error has occurred in this example), and sound output means (In this example, the speaker 120) makes a notification (in this example, a sound effect is output indicating that a lower tray full tank error has occurred). In this example, in the pachinko machine 100 having the upper plate 126 and the lower plate 128, the case where the lower tray full tank error occurs when the lower plate 128 is full will be described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the case of a pachinko machine 100 having only the upper plate 126 (one storage plate), this error (plate full tank error) may occur when the upper plate 126 is full. ..

When a glass frame opening error occurs, the number “1” is displayed on the first light emitting means (in this example, the payout error display 7-segment LED provided on the payout control board (payout board 170)). Is displayed by the first light emitting means, and the second light emitting means (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp or board lamp)) notifies (in this example, a decorative LED ( Blinking of frame lamps and board lamps), notification by display means (decorative pattern display device 208 in this example) (in this example, display indicating that a glass frame opening error has occurred), and sound output means (this example) Then, the speaker 120) gives a notification (in this example, a sound effect indicating that a glass frame opening error has occurred).

When a door opening error occurs, the numeral "1" is displayed on the first light emitting means (in this example, the payout error display 7-segment LED provided on the payout control board (payout board 170)). While displaying, the first light emitting means gives notification, and the second light emitting means (in this example, decorative LED (frame lamp or board lamp)) gives notification (in this example, decorative LED (frame). (Blinking of a lamp or a panel lamp), a notification by a display unit (in this example, the decorative pattern display device 208) (in this example, a display indicating that a door opening error has occurred), and a sound output unit (in this example, The speaker 120) makes a notification (in this example, a sound effect indicating that a door opening error has occurred).

Further, the notification of the door opening error may be a notification of the glass frame opening error, and a part of the notification mode of the glass frame opening error and the inner frame opening error (for example, the notification by the display means) is made different. The other notifications may be the same, or all the notification modes may be different. Further, when the front frame door 106 is opened, the payout of the game balls may be interrupted, and the payout of the game balls may be continued when the inner frame is opened.

Further, when a payout amount shortage error occurs, the number “3” is displayed on the first light emitting means (in this example, the payout error display 7-segment LED provided on the payout control board (payout board 170)). Is displayed, the third light emitting means (LED for payout illumination in the present example) notifies (lighting LED for payout illumination in this example is turned on) by the third light emitting means. Note that the notification mode of other error notifications related to payout, the cause of each error, the state of the gaming machine (pachinko machine 100) in error, and the measures are as shown in FIG. 116.
<Error notification/specific example of notification mode/error regarding power supply>

Next, an error regarding the power supply will be described. The “error relating to the power supply (power supply control unit 660)” in this example includes blown fuse 1, blown fuse 2, and blown fuse 3. In this example, the error notification is not performed when an error related to the power supply occurs. The cause of each error, the state of the gaming machine (pachinko machine 100) in error, and the measures are as shown in FIG. It should be noted that although an error relating to the power supply is not reported in this example, it may be reported by a display unit, a sound output unit, or various LEDs. Further, a power supply status confirmation LED may be provided on the power supply board. Here, the power supply status confirmation LED may be configured to be constantly turned on after the power is turned on and may be turned off when an error occurs. Conversely, the power supply status confirmation LED may be turned off after the power is turned on and an error has occurred. It may be configured to be turned on.
<Error notification/specific example of notification mode/error relating to main control, etc.>

Next, an error relating to the main control and the like will be described. The “error relating to the main control (main control unit 300), etc.” in this example is a magnetic (magnet) detection error, an external clock abnormality error, a magnetic field (radio wave) detection error, a switch level abnormality error, a switch disconnection error, a shock abnormality. Examples of the error include an error, a winning rate abnormality error, a special winning opening winning excess error, a large winning opening discharging excess error, and a solenoid abnormality error (special winning opening error).

In this example, when a magnetic (magnet) detection error occurs, a notification is given by a light emitting means (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp or panel lamp)) (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp). Blinking), a display means (in this example, the decorative pattern display device 208) informs (displays a character indicating that a magnetic (magnet) detection error has occurred in this example), and a sound output means ( In this example, the speaker 120) gives a notification (in this example, a sound effect indicating that a magnetic (magnet) detection error has occurred).

Further, when a magnetic field (radio wave) detection error occurs, a notification is given by a light emitting means (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp or panel lamp)) (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp or panel lamp). Blinking of the lamp), notification by the display means (decorative pattern display device 208 in this example) (display of characters indicating that a magnetic field (radio wave) detection error has occurred in this example), and sound output means (this example) Then, the speaker 120) gives a notification (in this example, a sound effect indicating that a magnetic field (radio wave) detection error has occurred). When the abnormality is resolved, the error is automatically canceled after 30 seconds have passed.

In addition, when an impact abnormality error occurs, a notification by a light emitting means (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp or board lamp)) (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp or board lamp) Blinking), notification by display means (decorative pattern display device 208 in this example) (display of characters indicating that an abnormal impact error has occurred in this example), and sound output means (speaker 120 in this example) A notification (in this example, the output of a sound effect indicating that an abnormal impact error has occurred) is performed. When the abnormality is resolved, the error is automatically canceled after 30 seconds have passed.

Further, when a special winning opening winning excess error occurs, a notification by a light emitting means (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp or board lamp)) (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp or board lamp) (Flashing of the lamp), notification by the display means (decorative pattern display device 208 in this example) (in this example, display of characters indicating that a special winning opening winning excess error has occurred), and sound output means (this example) Then, the speaker 120) makes a notification (in this example, a sound effect is output indicating that a special winning opening winning excess error has occurred).

Further, when the special winning opening discharge excess error occurs, the error notification is not performed. It should be noted that error notification (light emitting means (in this example, decoration LED (frame lamp or board lamp)) blinks (in this example, decoration LED (frame lamp or board lamp) blinks) and display means ( In this example, a notification by the decorative pattern display device 208) (in this example, display of a character indicating that a special winning opening discharge excess error has occurred) and a notification by sound output means (speaker 120 in this example) (this example) Then, a sound effect indicating that the special winning opening discharge excess error has occurred)) may be performed.

Further, when a solenoid abnormality error (special winning opening abnormality error) occurs, a notification is given by a light emitting means (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp or board lamp)) (in this example, a decorative LED ( Blinking of frame lamps and board lamps), notification by display means (decorative pattern display device 208 in this example) (display of characters indicating that solenoid abnormal error has occurred in this example), and sound output means (book) In the example, the speaker 120) makes a notification (in this example, a sound effect indicating that a solenoid abnormality error has occurred). When the abnormality is resolved, the error is automatically canceled after 30 seconds have passed.

It should be noted that the winning rate abnormality error is a general winning opening (general winning opening 226 in this example), starting opening 2 (second special figure starting opening 232 in this example) and large winning opening (variable winning opening in this example). 234) is configured to perform the same error notification, but different error notification may be performed depending on the winning opening where the error occurs. Further, as another error corresponding to the winning rate error, there is an abnormal winning error. An abnormal winning a prize error is a certain winning condition (for example, a general winning hole 226, a second special figure starting hole 232, a variable winning hole 234, etc.) under a certain specific condition (for example, when an N ball is fired, during a big hit). It is an error that occurs when a certain number or more of winnings are detected in other than (except during electric support (universal figure high accuracy state)). When an abnormal winning error occurs, the same gaming machine status, notification, and action as in the winning rate abnormal error may be used.

The error regarding the main control and the like may include a door opening error. In that case, when a door opening error occurs, notification by a light emitting means (in this example, decorative LED (frame lamp or panel lamp)) (in this example, decorative LED (frame lamp or panel lamp)) Blinking), notification by display means (decorative pattern display device 208 in this example) (display indicating that a door opening error has occurred in this example), and notification by sound output means (speaker 120 in this example). (In this example, a sound effect indicating that a door opening error has occurred is output). Note that other error notification modes regarding the main control and the like, the cause of each error, the state of the gaming machine (pachinko machine 100) in error, and the measures are as shown in FIG. 116.
<Error notification/specific example of notification mode/warning/error regarding sub-control>

Next, a warning/error related to sub-control will be described. Examples of the "warning/error relating to the sub-control (first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500)" in this example include a shock warning, a hitting warning, and an effect moving means error. In this example, when a shock warning is issued, the display means (in this example, the decorative pattern display device 208) gives a notification (in this example, a character indicating that the shock warning has been issued) is issued. Will not be notified.

In addition, when the hitting warning is generated, a notification (display of characters indicating that the hitting warning is generated in this example) by the display unit (decorative pattern display device 208 in this example) and a sound output unit ( In this example, the speaker 120) gives a notification (in this example, a sound effect is output indicating that a hitting warning has occurred), but the light emitting means does not give a notification.

The production moving means error means various production moving means when the power is turned on (in the present example, the production moving body 224, the shielding means 246, the family crest part 224E, the first large board behavior part 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior part 224Gd, and a thousand box. Effect moving means provided on the game board such as the accessory 224H (in this example, the front frame door 106. It may be provided on the main body 104 or the outer frame 102) Incidentally, the effect moving means is provided on the frame. If it is, the effect moving means of the frame is included, but it is not necessary to include it, and it is determined that there is an abnormality when the initial operation of (the effect moving means does not have to be provided in the frame) is performed. This is the error that occurs in some cases. The abnormality referred to here indicates a case where the initial operation is not normally performed, but, for example, a sensor (ON in the initial position) at the initial position of each effect movable means is in an OFF state. It may also indicate the case where it is not turned on even after performing the retry operation once or a plurality of times, or the case where it is determined that the sensor is kept in the ON state. Further, the initial operation may include all or any one or two of the home-return operation, the sensor check operation, and the full-stroke operation. Here, the return-to-origin operation is an operation of checking the state of the sensor at the initial position and returning only the production movable means in which the sensor at the initial position is OFF (not at the initial position) to the initial position. Further, the sensor check operation is an operation for confirming a failure of the sensor, and is an operation for performing the minimum operation of switching the sensor from ON to OFF. Further, the full stroke operation is an operation of moving to the maximum position at which the production movable means can operate and returning to the initial position. The origin return operation and the full stroke operation may be performed in one operation. (For example, the effect movable means that is not at the origin position is returned to the initial position and the full stroke operation is performed as it is.) Further, the sensor check operation and the full stroke operation may be performed in one operation. Further, the sensor check operation and/or the full stroke operation may be performed in a predetermined order after the origin return operation is performed for all the effect movable means. (For example, when the initial operation is performed in the order of the production movable body A→the production movable body B→the production movable body C, and the production movable body B is not at the initial position, the origins of the production movable bodies A to C are set. After the return operation is performed (apparently, the effect movable body B is operated), the sensor check operation and/or the full stroke operation are performed in the order of the effect movable body A, the effect movable body B, and the effect movable body C. Further, it may be configured such that after the initial operation is performed for the effect moving means that is not at the origin position, the initial operation is performed for the other effect movable means. (For example, in the case where the initial operation is performed in the order of the production movable body A, the production movable body B, and the production movable body C, and the sensor of the initial position of the production movable body B is OFF, the production movable body B is initially set. The operation is performed, and thereafter, the initial operation of the effect movable body A→the effect movable body C is performed.) When it is determined that the plurality of effect movable means are not in the initial positions, the effect movable means having a higher priority is first activated. It may be configured to perform an operation (origin return operation or initial operation including the origin return operation).

In addition, as for the production movable means error, the production movable means has various circuits (for example, the drive circuit 422) when the connection of the production movable means is not properly connected, the harness of the production movable means is broken, or the connector is damaged. It is an error that occurs even when not normally connected to. It should be noted that "error related to connection failure (wiring failure) of production moving means" and "error that occurs when it is determined that there is an abnormality when performing initial operation of various production moving means when power is turned on" are separate errors. You may divide and notify.

Further, the effect movable means error is an error that may be displayed during the display of the returning display, which will be described later, but may not be displayed during the displaying of the returning display.

Note that the error relating to the sub-control may be displayed in the same display mode (display area, font size, color, image shape, display position, etc.) as the error relating to the main control or the payout, and a different display mode. An error display may be displayed with. Further, the warning regarding the sub-control may be displayed in a display mode different from the error display regarding the sub-control, or may be displayed in the same display mode. Further, the warning regarding the sub-control may be displayed in a display mode different from the error display regarding the main control, or may be displayed in the same display mode. Further, the warning regarding the sub-control may be displayed in a display mode different from the error display regarding the payout control, but may be displayed in the same display mode.

Further, in the case of an error relating to sub-control (in this example, an effect moving means error), in addition to the error display by the display means, the decorative LED provided on the frame or the game board 200 may be turned on or blinking. The sound output means may be configured to notify the error, or both may be performed.

Further, the error notification regarding the sub liquid crystal may be configured such that a part or all of the error notification is ended by the operation of the operation means (for example, the effect button 136 (chance button 136) (chance button)) by the player. Good. (For example, when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated during the occurrence of the effect moving means error, the error display is displayed as it is, but the error notification by the sound output means is given. Is finished, the blinking display by the decorative LED on the game board is finished, part of the decorative LED on the frame is turned off, and the blinking by the other part is continued, etc. By operating the operation means in this way, It is conceivable that the error notification of the rendering means A continues, the error notification of the rendering means B ends, the part of the rendering means C ends, and the other part continues as it is. Means, display means, decorative LED, etc.)

Note that when the liquid crystal loading display is displayed when the power is turned on, the error display may not be displayed during the liquid crystal loading display, or may be displayed. Here, the liquid crystal loading display is a display showing a state in which the data stored in the ROM 506 of the second sub control unit 500 is being read. When the reading of the data stored in the RON 506 of the second sub-control unit 500 is completed, the symbol stop display (the symbol stop display displayed between the demo screen or the symbol fluctuation display) or the returning display (preparing display) is displayed. It The display during recovery is a display that is displayed when the game control is restored during a symbol variation or a big hit, and if the symbol is varying, until the symbol stops (until the special symbol display confirmation timer becomes 0). If it is a big hit, it is displayed until the big hit ends (until the hit end display timer becomes 0). In addition, it may be configured to return from the returning display to the symbol changing display at a specific timing during the symbol changing (for example, start of super reach effect, temporary stop display of three decorative symbols, etc.). Further, various jackpot displays may be displayed from the returning display at a specific timing (for example, start or end of a specific round, start or end of jackpot start effect, start or end of jackpot end display) during jackpot. Here, while the returning display may be displayed, all or part of the above-mentioned error displays may be displayed, but it is configured not to display all or part of other error displays. May be. Further, although it is configured such that all the above-mentioned error displays are not displayed during the display of the liquid crystal loading display, some or all of the error displays may be displayed during the display of the liquid crystal loading display. ..
The change effect display may be a change notice display.

When the display mode of the hold icon is selected as the icon A by the player, when the hold prefetching notice is started, the icon A is forcibly changed from the icon B to the icon G selectable by the player. Alternatively, the icon A may change to a form of an icon that cannot be selected by the player when the hold prefetching notice is started.

It should be noted that there may be provided a plurality of operating means relating to performance. Here, when the operation means A (for example, the chance button 136) and the operation means B (lever) are provided, an image prompting the operation of the operation means A (or an image showing the appearance of the operation means A or “operation means”). A character display such as "press A". Hereinafter, when "operation means image A" is displayed, an image prompting the operation of the operation means B (or an image showing the appearance of the operation means B or " A character display such as "press operation means B." Hereinafter, referred to as "operation means image B") may be configured so that the jackpot pattern mode is finally confirmed and displayed more easily than the case where it is displayed. The image regarding the operation means in which the jackpot pattern mode is likely to be confirmed and displayed may be reversed, and the ease with which the jackpot pattern mode is definitely displayed may not change. Here, the auto button function works for the operation means A, but the auto button function does not have to work for the operation means B, the operation means for which the auto button function works may be reversed, and the auto button for both operation means may be the same. The function may work, or the auto button function may not work for both operating means. Further, the display mode of the navigation character may be changed more easily when the operation means image B is displayed than when the operation means image A is displayed, but it may be the reverse. The success degree of the change in the display mode of the navigation character may not be different depending on the displayed operation means image. (That is, they may be the same.) Further, the display mode of the navigation character when the operation means image B is displayed is changed to a display mode in which the jackpot expectation is higher than when the operation means image A is displayed. It may be configured to be easy, but it may be reversed, and the display mode in which the navigation character is likely to change may not be different depending on the displayed operation means image. (That is, they may be the same.) Further, although the operation means image A is displayed more frequently than the operation means image B is displayed, it may be reversed or the same. .. In addition, an effect (promotion effect or demotion effect) in which the operation means image A changes to the operation means image B may be performed. Here, the period during which the operation means image A is promoted to the operation means image B may be outside the effective period of the operation effective period of the operation means A and before the operation effective period of the operation means B is started. It may be outside the valid operation period of A and during the valid period of operation of the operating means B, and is outside the valid period of the valid operating period of the operating means A and outside the valid valid period of the operating means B. Alternatively, it may be during the operation valid period of the operating means A and during the operation valid period of the operating means B. The same applies when the operation means image B is changed to the operation means image A. In the above description, the two operating means, the operating means A and the operating means B, have been described as an example, but the same applies to the case where there are three or more operating means.

It should be noted that the effects that can be selected by the player are the special figure starting port, the general figure starting port, the general winning opening and/or the effect gate (the prize ball is not performed even if the player enters the gate and is detected by the sensor, only the effect is produced. It may increase according to the points obtained by passing through the gate (which is performed). Here, the number of points obtained by passing and the effect to be acquired may have a one-to-one relationship, and when the point obtained by passing becomes a specific point, for example, in the decorative pattern display device 208. It may be configured such that “display for performing an effect for lottery of an effect to be acquired from now on (gacha effect)” is performed and an effect won by the effect lottery by the first sub-control unit 400 is acquired.

It should be noted that the player may be configured to be able to switch between displaying and hiding the navigation character by operating the operation means (for example, the chance button 136). The display/non-display of the navigator character may be always possible, or may be possible only while the navigator character is displayed, until a certain period elapses from the start of the variation of the symbol (for example, one or more, or All decorative designs may be temporarily stopped, etc.), and the display/non-display of the navigation character may not be switched during execution of the super reach effect. The navigation character may be configured to be displayed/hidden switched, or may be configured to be displayed/hidden only while the symbol is stopped (while the special map is stopped).

Although the example in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko machine (ball game machine) has been described in detail above, the gaming table of the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a medal or a game ball (pachinko ball) can be used. It can also be applied to a rotating-game machine (slot machine) used. That is, the pachinko machine 100 described above is a pachinko machine (1 type+1 type), but other pachinko machines (for example, 1, 2, 3, 3 types, 1+2 types, etc.) may be used. Parrot or ball) More specifically, when a medal (game medium) is inserted and the reel is rotated by operating the start lever, the winning combination is internally determined by internal lottery, and the reel is stopped by operating the stop button. In addition, when a predetermined combination of symbols is displayed on the symbol display window according to an internal decision, a winning combination is achieved, and when a winning combination is achieved, a prescribed number of medals are paid out, etc. It may be a spinning machine (slot machine) in which a player is given a privilege. Alternatively, a predetermined number of game balls are enclosed as enclosed balls, the enclosed balls are launched into the game area to play a game, and a predetermined game value is given to the player based on the fact that the enclosed balls are won in a predetermined entry area. It may be an enclosed ball type gaming table that can be circulated by launching the enclosed ball that has been awarded to the predetermined entry area or the enclosed ball that has not won a prize to the game area again.

As described above, the present invention can be applied to various types of gaming machines, and will be described more specifically below with reference to the drawings.
In the above description,

"Display means [for example, a decorative design display device 208, a first decorative design display device 208L only, or a plurality of combinations (including all) of the first to third decorative design display devices 208L to 208N, a second display device 208S etc.],
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,

One type of display of the plurality of types of display is a first icon [for example, a variation icon h0],

The first icon is an icon (hereinafter, referred to as a “fluctuation icon”) related to a symbol variable display [for example, the symbol variable display] being executed,

The variable icon is an icon that may be displayed in a first display mode [for example, a default (white) display mode],

The variable icon is an icon which may be displayed in a second display mode [for example, white flashing, blue, green, red, gold, iridescent display mode, etc.],

When the fluctuation icon of the second display mode is displayed, the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed than when the fluctuation icon of the first display mode is displayed [for example, , High expectations for big hits],

One type of display of the plurality of types of display is a second icon [for example, an icon of the navigation character YM, etc.],

The second icon is an icon that may be displayed across successive symbol variable displays [for example, FIG. 77 (I1) to FIG. 77 (I12)],

The second icon is an effect of changing the variable icon from the first display mode to the second display mode [for example, the effects shown in FIG. 77 (B-9) to (B11) and the like]. Is an icon that may be used for

The second icon is an icon that may be displayed in a third display mode [for example, a display mode of a lord wearing a kimono of a default color, a display mode of a lord, a display mode of a copanda],

The second icon is a fourth display mode [for example, white flashing, blue, green, red, gold, rainbow-colored kimono wearing display mode, princess display mode, bancho display mode, robot display mode] Display mode] is an icon that may be displayed in
The third display mode and the fourth display mode are different,
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

Here, the variable icon may be an icon that may be displayed in the icon display area of the display unit, and the second icon may be an icon that may be displayed in the icon display area. .. Further, the variable icon and the second icon may be icons that may be simultaneously displayed in the icon display area. That is, the second icon may be an icon displayed simultaneously with the variable icon in the icon display area during the first period. Furthermore, the second icon may be an icon that may be displayed outside the icon display area. Alternatively, the icon display area may be a movable display area, or may be a display area that may be divided and moved to different positions.

Further, "to straddle" means to interpose a period of stop display of symbols (variable stop period). Further, the second icon may be an icon that is continuously displayed while the variable display of symbols is being displayed, or may be an icon that disappears once in the middle. Also, the icon may be continuously displayed during the stop display of the symbol, may be an icon that disappears once in the middle, or an icon that continues to disappear during the display of the stop display. May be

Further, "the icon that may be displayed across the continuous variable display of symbols" is the "icon that is always displayed and that may be erased and then redisplayed". ..

Further, the second icon may change from the third display mode to the fourth display mode.
The display means may be a means that always displays a plurality of types of displays.
Also,

"The second icon is an icon that may be displayed only once in the symbol variable display,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the second icon may be an icon displayed when a certain condition is satisfied. As an example of a certain condition mentioned here, there are n or more holdings, there is a holding for which pre-reading notice has been made, customization by the player has been made, a certain notice (for example, timer notice, (Conversation notice, etc.) is displayed, the second icon is a notice display for pre-reading notice, the second icon is stocked, and the degree of expectation of a big hit in the pattern change display being executed is It is possible to enumerate that it is high, that you have won the preliminary drawing, etc. That is, the certain condition may be all of the above-listed conditions. On the other hand, some of the items listed above may not be applied.
Also,
"The second icon is an icon different from the variable icon,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
Also,

"One of the plurality of types of display is a change effect display [for example, a treasure box icon I1, a UFO icon UFI, a button hold icon, meter display MW and MG icons, a giant panda, a grandpa character. Conversation notice including the text display "Navi characters have changed", images of fusuma, fusuma images for wipe production, etc.]

The change effect display is an effect of changing the second icon from the third display mode to the fourth display mode [for example, FIG. 75 (A3-1) to FIG. 75 (A6), FIG. (A6-3-2) to the same figure (A6-3-4a), FIG. 83 (C 1-3-1) to (C 1-3-3), the meter effect shown in FIG. 91, diagram 89 (shi 2-2-1) to the same figure (shi 2-2-3), FIG. 100 (a b 1) to (a b 2 ), FIG. 80 (6) to the same figure (8), FIG. 107 ( 9-2-1) etc.], the display may be used.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

That is, the change effect display is a display that may be displayed in a state where the second icon is displayed in the third display mode, and the change effect display is a display of the second icon. It is a notice display that the mode is changed from the third display mode to the fourth display mode.

Further, the change effect display may be an icon that may be used for an effect that changes the display mode of the variable icon. Alternatively, on the contrary, the change effect display may be an icon that is not used for the effect of changing the display mode of the variable icon, and in this case, the change effect display is the display of the second icon. The icon may be used only for the effect of changing the mode.

Further, the second icon may be an icon that always changes from the third display mode to the fourth display mode when the change effect display is displayed.

Further, the change effect display may be a display that may be displayed even when the second icon is not displayed.
Also,

“When the display mode of the second icon does not change even when the change effect display is displayed [for example, FIG. 75 (3-2-1) to FIG. 75 (3-2-2), FIG. 1-3-1) to the same figure (1-3-3b2), FIG. 100 (A4-2), and FIG. 100 (A6-2)].
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
Also,

"The case where the second icon of the fourth display mode is displayed is finally larger than the case where the second icon of the third display mode is displayed. Is likely to be confirmed and displayed [for example, the expectation of a big hit is high],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, "when the second icon of the third display mode is displayed" means "the second icon of the third display mode is displayed and the second icon is “When the display mode does not change to the fourth display mode”.

Further, the state in which the second icon is displayed in the third display mode is, finally, a jackpot pattern mode than the state in which the second icon is displayed in the fourth display mode. It may be difficult to confirm and display.
Also,

"The second icon is an icon that may be a notice display about a big hit in the symbol variation display being executed [for example, Fig. 78 (C 20-1), Fig. 87 (C b 15-1)],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, "the second icon may be a notice display about the big hit in the symbol variation display being executed," means "the notice of the big hit in the symbol variation display being executed is the second icon. “Done by”.

Here, the third display mode may be a default display mode, and the fourth display mode may be a notice mode of a big hit in the symbol variation display being executed.
Also,

“The second icon is an icon that may be a notice display of a prefetching notice [for example, FIG. 83 (key 5-1) to FIG. 83 (key 13), FIG. 86 (core a11)],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the phrase “the second icon may be a notice display of a read-ahead notice” may mean “a read-ahead notice is made by the second icon”.

Here, the third display mode may be a default display mode, and the fourth display mode may be a look-ahead notice display mode.

Further, the second icon may be an icon that also functions as the variable icon. That is, in this case, two types of variable icons are displayed by the first icon and the second icon.

Further, the variable icon of the second display mode, and when both icons of the second icon of the fourth display mode is displayed, than when both icons are not displayed, Finally, the jackpot pattern mode may be easily confirmed and displayed.

Further, when the variable icon of the second display mode and both icons of the second icon of the fourth display mode are displayed, one of the both icons is displayed. The jackpot pattern mode may be finally determined and displayed more easily than when only the icon is displayed.

Further, when either one of the variable icon in the second display mode and the second icon in the fourth display mode is displayed, no icon is displayed. In the end, the jackpot pattern mode may be finalized and displayed more easily than in the case.

Further, the variable icon of the second display mode, and when both icons of the second icon of the fourth display mode is displayed, than when both icons are not displayed, Finally, the jackpot pattern mode may be easily confirmed and displayed.

Further, the variable icon in a display mode different from the default display mode (for example, the second display mode) and the second icon in the default display mode (for example, the third display mode) are displayed. The state in which the change icon is in a default display mode (for example, the first display mode) and the second icon in a display mode (for example, the fourth display mode) different from the default display mode The jackpot pattern mode may be finally settled and displayed more easily than the state in which both icons are displayed.

Alternatively, on the contrary, the variable icon in a display mode different from the default display mode (for example, the second display mode) and the second icon in the default display mode (for example, the third display mode) The displayed state is the change icon in the default display mode (for example, the first display mode) and the display mode different from the default display mode (for example, the fourth display mode). The jackpot pattern mode may be finalized and displayed more easily than the state in which both the second icons are displayed.

Further, the variable icon is an icon that may be displayed in a fifth display mode, and when the variable icon is displayed in the fifth display mode, the jackpot symbol mode is always definitely displayed. May be. Further, the second icon is an icon that may be displayed in a sixth display mode, and when the second icon is displayed in the sixth display mode, the jackpot symbol mode is finally obtained. It may be definitely displayed. Even if the variable icon is displayed in the fifth display mode, the second icon may be displayed in the third display mode or the fourth display mode. Good. Further, while the second icon is displayed in the sixth display mode, the variable icon may be displayed in the one display mode or the second display mode. Good.

Further, the variable icon may be displayed in the fifth display mode and the second icon may be displayed in the sixth display mode. In this case, for example, an advantageous jackpot is confirmed (eg, jackpot confirmation with probability variation, jackpot confirmation for long rounds), rare reach (eg, full-rotation reach, etc.) is likely to appear, or other premier effects are available. It may be easy to do, or it may be easy to hit the revival. On the contrary, it may be difficult for the revival big hit to occur. In addition, the mode of the operating means may change (for example, the button pops out, rotates, is recessed, or the built-in lamp emits light in a rare light emission mode (for example, rainbow light emission mode that changes to seven colors)). .. In addition, you can get the privilege of production customization, increase the number of productions that can be selected during the big hit game, start special super reach, special big hit round (for example, the second attacker opens Round) may be started.

Further, the combination of the display mode of the variable icon and the display mode of the second icon may suggest the type of effect (for example, the type of super reach). For example, when the display mode of the variable icon is lord and the display mode of the second icon is swordsman, it may be suggested to develop into a swordsman reach in which the lord and swordsman duel. Alternatively, when the display mode of the fluctuation icon is a helmet and the display mode of the second icon is a lord, it is possible to function as a notice (normal notice) of the change only after two icons are displayed. May be configured.

Moreover, the jackpot reliability (expectation) may be different depending on the combination of the display mode of the variable icon and the display mode of the second icon. For example, the variation icon of the first display aspect, a combination of the second icon of the fourth display aspect, the variation icon of the second display aspect, the combination of the third display aspect of the The reliability of the jackpot (expectation) may be different from that of the second icon combination.
Also,

In the case where the second icon of the fourth display mode is displayed, the change icon is the first icon when the second icon of the third display mode is displayed. It is easy to change from one display mode to the second display mode,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the probability that the variable icon of the first display mode changes to the second display mode is determined by the variable icon of the first display mode by the second icon of the fourth display mode. The case of changing to the second display mode is more than the case of changing the variable icon of the first display mode to the second display mode by the second icon of the third display mode. It may be high.

Here, "more than when the second icon in the third display mode is displayed" means that the variable icon is changed from the first display mode to the second icon in the third display mode. Than in the case where the effect of changing to the second display mode is performed.”

Further, when the second icon of the fourth display mode is displayed, the variable icon may be changed from the first display mode to the second display mode without fail. Further, when the second icon of the third display mode is displayed, the variable icon does not necessarily change from the first display mode to the second display mode, It may change.

Further, when the second icon of the sixth display mode is displayed, the variable icon is the fifth icon when the second icon of the fourth display mode is displayed. The display mode may be changed easily.

As described above, when the display mode of the second icon is changed, the display mode of the variable icon may be easily changed, and the display mode of the variable icon is always changed. Good.

Furthermore, the variable icon in a display mode that is likely to change may differ depending on the display mode of the second icon. Further, the notice that is likely to appear (pseudo consecutive notice, timer notice, prefetch notice) may change depending on the display mode of the second icon.
Also,

There is a case where a plurality of the second icons are displayed [for example, the example shown in FIG. 81, the example shown in FIG. 82 (ki 1) to FIG. 5 (ki 5), etc.].
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, by displaying a plurality of the second icons, a big hit may be easily made, or the display mode of the hold icon or the variable icon may be easily changed.

In addition, a combination of a plurality of the second icons (a combination of the second icon of the same display mode, a combination of the second icon of a different display mode), it is easy to hit the jackpot, the hold icon or the variable icon The display mode of may change easily, or the notice that is likely to appear (pseudo consecutive notice, timer notice, prefetch notice) may change.
Also,

“Providing an operation means [for example, a chance button 136 or the like] provided at a position where the player can operate,

The second icon is an icon in which the display mode changes when the operation unit is operated [for example, an example shown in FIGS. 82(K1-1) to 82(K7)].
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, for example, there may be a case where the third display mode is changed to the fourth display mode in response to an operation of the operation unit.

Further, the second icon is a display mode relating to the operating means, and the display mode may change according to the operation of the operating means. The display mode relating to the operating means may be a display mode imitating the operating means, or a display mode prompting to operate the operating means (operation promotion display mode), It may be a display mode relating to the operation valid period of the operating means (more specifically, a display mode of the remaining period of the operation valid period (remaining period display mode)), or a display mode reminiscent of the operating means. It may be present, a combination of these display modes may be used, or a display mode including at least one of these display modes may be used.

Further, the display means is a means capable of displaying a meter display, and the operation of the operation means is accepted according to the state of the meter display, and when the operation of the operation means is accepted, the second icon is displayed. The display mode of may change.

Further, when the operation means is operated in a so-called back button state in which a notification for operating the operation means is not issued even during the operation valid period of the operation means, the display mode of the second icon May change.
Further, the display mode of the second icon may change according to the change of the effect mode.

Further, the second icon may be an icon whose display mode can be changed by a customization operation by the player.
Also,

“The third display mode is a display mode selected by the player [for example, character selection of 73(b)],

The fourth display mode is a display mode which is not selected by the player [for example, a display mode of the length shown in FIG. 79 (e 4-3)].
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the third display mode may be a display mode that the player can select, and the fourth display mode may be a display mode that the player cannot select. It may be a display mode that can be selected by a person.
Also,

“When the display mode of the second icon changes without being accompanied by other display effects [for example, FIG. 79 (e 1) to FIG. 79 (e 3-1 ), FIG. 82 (e 2-1) ) ~ (Fig. 7)] is an icon.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, "the display mode of the second icon may change without being accompanied by another display effect" means that "the display mode of the second icon is changed by the effect of the second icon". May change.”
Also,

"The change icon is an icon that has a case where the display mode is changed without being accompanied by another display effect [for example, FIG. 90 (s 3) to (s 4)].
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, "the variable icon may change the display mode without being accompanied by another display effect" means that the variable icon display mode may change depending on the variable icon effect. It may be.
Also,

"One type of display of the plurality of types of display is a third icon [for example, hold icons h11 to h14, etc.],

The third icon is an icon corresponding to the number of holding balls (hereinafter referred to as "holding icon"),

The hold icon includes a plurality of types of display modes [for example, hold display selection icons A to G in FIG. 63( b ), FIG. 78 (v 2 ), the same figure (v 3 ), the same figure (v 12 ), Default display mode, white flashing, blue, green, red, gold, rainbow, etc.]
The second icon is an icon different from the hold icon,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the hold icon may be an icon that may be displayed in the first display mode, or the hold icon may be an icon that may be displayed in the fourth display mode. May be.
Also,
“The gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
In the above description,

"Display means [for example, a decorative design display device 208, a first decorative design display device 208L only, or a plurality of combinations (including all) of the first to third decorative design display devices 208L to 208N, a second display device 208S etc.],
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
One type of display of the plurality of types of display is a first icon,

The first icon is an icon related to the hold display [for example, hold icons h11 to h14, h21 to h24, variable icon h0, etc.],

The first icon is an icon that may be displayed in a first display mode [for example, a default (white) display mode],

The first icon is an icon which may be displayed in a second display mode [for example, white flashing, blue, green, red, gold, iridescent display mode, etc.],

One type of display of the plurality of types of display is a second icon [for example, an icon of the navigation character YM, etc.],

The second icon is an icon that may be displayed across successive symbol variable displays [for example, FIG. 77 (I1) to FIG. 77 (I12)],

The second icon is an effect of changing the first icon from the first display mode to the second display mode [for example, the effects shown in FIG. 77 (B-9) to (B11)). Etc.] may be used for
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.
Also,

"The second icon is an icon that may be displayed in a third display mode [for example, a display mode of a lord wearing a kimono of a default color, a display mode of a lord, a display mode of a copanda],

The second icon is a fourth display mode [for example, white flashing, blue, green, red, gold, rainbow-colored kimono wearing display mode, princess display mode, bancho display mode, robot display mode] Display mode] is an icon that may be displayed in

The second icon is an icon that may change from the third display mode to the fourth display mode,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
Also,

“When the display mode of the second icon changes without being accompanied by other display effects [for example, FIG. 79 (e 1) to FIG. 79 (e 3-1 ), FIG. 82 (e 2-1) ) ~ (Fig. 7)] is an icon.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained. Also,

"The second icon is an icon that may be displayed only once in the symbol variable display,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
Also,
"The second icon is an icon different from the first icon,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
Also,

"One of the plurality of types of display is a change effect display [for example, a treasure box icon I1, a UFO icon UFI, a button hold icon, meter display MW and MG icons, a giant panda, a grandpa character. Conversation notice including the text display "Navi characters have changed", images of fusuma, fusuma images for wipe production, etc.]

The change effect display is an effect of changing the second icon from the third display mode to the fourth display mode [for example, FIG. 75 (A3-1) to FIG. 75 (A6), FIG. (A6-3-2) to the same figure (A6-3-4a), FIG. 83 (C 1-3-1) to (C 1-3-3), the meter effect shown in FIG. 91, diagram 89 (shi 2-2-1) to the same figure (shi 2-2-3), FIG. 100 (a b 1) to (a b 2 ), FIG. 80 (6) to the same figure (8), FIG. 107 ( 9-2-1) etc.], the display may be used.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
Also,

“When the display mode of the second icon does not change even when the change effect display is displayed [for example, FIG. 75 (3-2-1) to FIG. 75 (3-2-2), FIG. 1-3-1) to the same figure (1-3-3b2, FIG. 100 (A4-2), FIG. 100 (A6-2))] are also icons.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
Also,

"The second icon is an icon that may be a notice display about a big hit in the symbol variation display being executed [for example, Fig. 78 (C 20-1), Fig. 87 (C b 15-1)],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
Also,

“The second icon is an icon that may be a preview display of a prefetching notice [for example, FIG. 83 (key 5-1) to FIG. 83 (key 3-1)].
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
Also,

There is a case where a plurality of the second icons are displayed [for example, the example shown in FIG. 81, the example shown in FIG. 82 (ki 1) to FIG. 5 (ki 5), etc.].
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
Also,

“Providing an operation means [for example, a chance button 136 or the like] provided at a position where the player can operate,

The second icon is an icon in which the display mode changes when the operation unit is operated [for example, an example shown in FIGS. 82(K1-1) to 82(K7)].
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
Also,

“The first icon is an icon that has a case where the display mode changes without being accompanied by another display effect [for example, FIG. 90 (s 3) to (s 4)].
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, "the display mode of the first icon may change without being accompanied by other display effects" means that "the display mode of the first icon is notified by the first icon. May change.”
Also,

"The "icon related to the hold display" described above is the "conceptual icon that includes both the hold icon and the floating icon",

The hold icon is an icon representing an undigested hold [for example, hold icons h11 to h14, h21 to h24],

The variable icon is an icon [eg, the variable icon h0] that represents a completed hold,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
Also,

"The icon for "hold display" above is the "hold icon,"

The hold icon is an icon that represents an undigested hold [for example, hold icons h11 to h14, h21 to h24],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, the above-mentioned "icon regarding the hold display" is a "fluctuation icon", and the variation icon may be an icon [for example, a variation icon h0] representing the already-held digest. Good.
Also,
“The gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
In the above description,

"Direction means [for example, the decorative design display device 208, the first decorative design display device 208L only, or a plurality of combinations (including all) of the first to third decorative design display devices 208L to 208N, the second display device 208S, speaker 120, game board lamp 442, game underframe lamp 452, thousand box box accessory 224H, etc.],

Operation means [for example, chance button 136, operation key unit 137, second chance button, lever type operation means, etc.],
Equipped with
The production means is a means capable of executing a plurality of types of production,
One type of production of the plurality of types of production is the first production,
One type of production of the plurality of types of production is a second production,

When the operation means is operated during the first period [for example, the operation valid period] in the non-auto button mode, the first effect [for example, “Summer vacation is still in effect in FIG. 108(A11)” is performed. "Response display of ~" may be executed.

In the auto button mode, when the first time [eg, the auto button function activation time (time from FIG. 108 (A6) to immediately before (A11) in FIG. 108)] has elapsed from the start of the first period, The first production may be executed,

When the operation unit is operated during the second period [for example, the operation valid period (the period of FIG. 108 (A8-1) to (A14) in FIG. 108] in the non-auto button mode], the second operation is performed. [For example, an effect in which the hold icon changes to a blue display mode, a response display in which the continuous hit meter RHM in FIGS. 109(Aa5-5-6) to (Aa5-5-7) rises] is executed. Sometimes,

In the auto button mode, even if a second time [for example, the auto button function activation time] has elapsed after the second period was started, the second effect is not executed [for example, FIG. Of the continuous hammer meter RHM in FIG. 109 (Aa5-5-2) and FIG. 109 (Aa5-5-4)],

In the automatic button mode, when the operation of the operation means is performed before the second time elapses after the second period is started, the second effect is executed. And

It is configured such that the state of the operating means can be changed from one of the first state and the second state [for example, white lighting] to the other state [for example, special color (blue) lighting],

When the state of the operating means is changed from the one state to the other state during the second period in the automatic button mode [for example, FIG. 108 (A8-1) to FIG. A14) etc.],
A game table characterized by that. "
I explained.

According to the invention of this description, it is possible to realize a game table having a feature in the operation means. More specifically, since the state of the operating means may change during the second period in the auto button mode, the sight line is guided to the operating means to prompt the operation of the operating means. May be possible.

Here, the auto button mode is a mode in which an effect corresponding to the operation of the operation means may be performed even if the operation means is not operated. The non-auto button mode is a state in which the auto button mode is not set.

The operation of the operation means may be accepted (not invalidated) during the auto button mode, may be accepted or may not be accepted, or may not be accepted at all. The case of accepting and the case of not accepting may be accepted in the effect of A and not accepted in the effect of B, or may be accepted in the period of A and not accepted in the period of B. Further, the operation of A operating means (for example, chance button 136) is accepted, but the operation of B operating means (for example, operation key unit 137, second chance button, lever type operating means, etc.) is not accepted. Good.

Further, during the period of the second period, effect means other than the operation means (for example, display by the display means, movable means, light emitting means, etc.) may be configured to change.
Also,

“When the state of the operation means is changed from the one state to the other state during the second period in the non-auto button mode [for example, in the case of FIG. 110 (Aa8-3)] ],
A game table characterized by that. "
Was also explained.

By doing so, the state of the operating means may change during the period of the second period in the non-auto button mode, so that it is possible to induce the operating means to direct the line of sight and prompt the operation of the operating means. Sometimes you can. Further, regardless of whether or not the automatic button mode is set, the second effect is not executed unless the operation means is operated during the period of the second period, and the motivation to operate the operation means is improved. May be possible.
Also,

"There is a case where at least a part of the first period overlaps with at least a part of the second period [eg, immediately before FIGS. 108(A8-1) to (A11), and FIG. (Aa5-2-2), FIG. 110 (Aa8-2-1)],
A game table characterized by that. "
Was also explained.
Also,

“A period in which at least a part of the first period and at least a part of the second period in the auto button mode overlap [for example, in FIG. 108 (A8-1) to FIG. In the period until immediately before, in FIG. 109 (Aa5-2-2) and FIG. 110 (Aa8-2-1)], in the case where the operation means is operated, the first effect and the second effect At least one of the effects is executed [for example, FIG. 110 (Aa8-2-3) to FIG. 110 (Aa8-2-4)],
A game table characterized by that. "
Was also explained.

Here, both the first effect and the second effect may be executed, only the first effect may be executed, or only the second effect may be executed. Good.

In addition, when the operation unit is operated before the first time elapses after the first period starts, both the first effect and the second effect may be executed. However, only the first effect may be executed, or only the second effect may be executed.

For example, when two button displays are displayed in the auto button mode, one of the button displays has the function of the auto button mode, a response display is displayed according to the button operation, and the other button display is auto. The function of the button mode does not work, and there is a sense of discomfort that the user has to operate the button by himself, which may improve the interest of the game.
Also,

“In the non-auto button mode, when at least a part of the first period and at least a part of the second period overlap with each other, when the operation unit is operated, And at least one of the second effect is executed,
A game table characterized by that. "
Was also explained.

Here, both the first effect and the second effect may be executed, only the first effect may be executed, or only the second effect may be executed. Good.
Also,

“If the operation means is not operated during the first period [for example, the operation valid period] in the non-auto button mode, the first effect is not executed,
A game table characterized by that. "
Was also explained.

The first effect may be executed even if there is no operation before the first period ends.
Also,

"If the operation means is not operated during the second period [for example, the operation valid period] in the non-auto button mode, the second effect is not executed,
A game table characterized by that. "
Was also explained.

In addition, even if there is no operation until the second period ends, the second effect may be executed,

"The rendering means is an image display means [for example, only the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or a plurality of combinations of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N (all Included), second display device 208S, etc.],
The plurality of types of presentation is a plurality of types of display,
One type of display of the plurality of types of display is a response display,

The response display is a display that may be displayed when the operation means is operated,

The first effect is a first response display of the response effects [for example, a response display of "Summer vacation is still ~" of FIG. 108(A11)),

The second effect is a second response display of the response effects [for example, an effect in which the hold icon changes to a blue display mode].
A game table characterized by that. "
Was also explained.
Also,
“One of the plurality of types of display is an operation display,
The operation display is a display related to the operation of the operation means,

When the first operation display [for example, the button effect image (button image 136a and remaining time display meter MT) shown in FIG. 108(A5-1) or the like] is displayed as the operation display, When the operation means is operated, the first response display may be displayed,

When a second operation display [for example, a button image 136a shown in FIG. 108(A8-1)] is displayed as the operation display, when the operation unit is operated, The second response may be displayed,
A game table characterized by that. "
Was also explained.

The operation display may be a display including an image [for example, a button image 136a] showing the appearance of the operation means, or a display for prompting the operation of the operation means [for example, the remaining time display meters MT, PUSH]. Character display, “press” character display, display of arrow indicating operation direction, and the like].
Also,

“At least one of the first effect and the second effect is an effect for a symbol variation display being executed [eg, a notice effect for a big hit in the symbol variation display (normal notice)],
A game table characterized by that. "
Was also explained.

Note that both of the first effect and the second effect may be the same, only the first effect may be the same, and only the second effect may be the same. May be.
Also,

"At least one of the first effect and the second effect, the effect of the symbol variation display that is being executed is ended, and then the effect of the symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation that is started next It is a display, a symbol fluctuation display that is started next, or a notice effect (prefetching notice) about a big hit in the symbol fluctuation display that is started next next].
A game table characterized by that. "
Was also explained.

Note that both of the first effect and the second effect may be the same, only the first effect may be the same, and only the second effect may be the same. May be.
Also,

“The first period is a period during which the operation of the operating means is valid (hereinafter, referred to as “first operation valid period”),

The second period is a period during which the operation of the operating means is valid (hereinafter, referred to as “second operation valid period”).
A game table characterized by that. "
Was also explained.

A meter display showing the operation valid period of at least one of the first operation valid period and the second operation valid period [for example, the display of the remaining period meter MT shown in FIG. 108(A5-1)] ] May be displayed even during the auto button mode. The remaining period meter MT may be added to the button holding icon shown in FIG. 108 (A8-1).

Further, the meter display may be a gauge display (increase/decrease bar display) or may be a display in which the shade of the display color changes with the passage of time, for example, graying out when there is no remaining period. Good.

On the contrary, the meter indicating the operation valid period may be displayed only in the non-auto button mode and may not be displayed in the auto button mode. For example, the remaining period meter MT is omitted from the old conversation image CI2 shown in FIG. 108(A5-1) during the auto button mode, and conversely, the button shown in FIG. 110(Aa8-3) during the non-auto button mode is displayed. The remaining period meter MT may be added to the hold icon.

Further, regardless of whether the meter is in the auto button mode or not, when the meter indicating the operation valid period is displayed [for example, the conversation notice shown in FIGS. 108 to 110] is not displayed [for example, FIG. 108 to FIG. 110, a button change icon or a button hold icon].
Also,

"The operating means is a means that may perform a production operation [e.g., light emission, vibration, etc.].
Was also explained.

In addition, the first state is a state in which the effect operation is not performed [for example, a light-off state, a white lighting state, a vibration stop state], and the second state is a state in which the effect operation is performed [for example, Lighting state, blue lighting state, vibration state].

Further, the first state may be a state in which the operating means is stopped.

Further, even if the production means is provided with production movable means [for example, a vibrator] inside, the production operation is an operation [for example, vibration] performed by the production movable means. Good.

In addition, the second state is a state of being deformed (for example, protruding or dented), or a state in which the effect movable means is operating [for example, an advancing state, a retreating state, a vibrating state, a rotating state, a curing state. Etc.].
The operating means may be a means provided with a light emitting means.

The light emitting means is a means capable of executing a driving operation such as lighting, blinking, or turning off,

The first state is a state in which the light emitting means is performing the drive operation in a first mode,

The second state is a state in which the light emitting means is performing the drive operation in a second mode,
The first aspect and the second aspect may be different aspects.

The first aspect may be an off state, and the second aspect may be an on state.

The first mode may be a mode of lighting in a first color, and the second mode may be a mode of lighting in a second color.
The second aspect may be a blinking aspect.
Also,
"The gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100],
A game table characterized by that. "
Was also explained.
Also,
"The gaming table is a slot machine [eg, slot machine 1000],
A game table characterized by that. "
Was also explained.
In the above description,

[Direction means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, first decorative symbol display device 208L only, or a plurality of combinations (including all) of first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N, second display device] 208S, a speaker 120, a game board lamp 442, a game stand frame lamp 452, a thousand box box 224H, etc.],
The production means is a means capable of at least executing a plurality of types of production,
One type of production of the plurality of types of production is the first production,

The first effect is an effect selected by the player [for example, an effect by each option of (b) character selection in FIG. 63(b), an effect by each option of (c) reservation frame selection, ( e) effect by each option of hold display selection, (f) effect by each option of background display selection, music output effect of music title shown in FIG. 101]

One kind of effect of the plurality of kinds of effects is a second effect [for example, effect by the navigation character YM, music output effect, hold frame UI effect, hold effect, background effect,].

During execution of the first effect, when a third effect [for example, a change notice by the treasure box icon I1, a music change notice, a wipe effect, a background change notice, etc.] is executed, When changing to the second effect [For example, FIG. 99 (a a3-1) to the same figure (a a6-1), FIG. 102 (a11) to the same figure (a15-1), and shown in FIG. 106. For example, when background A is selected by the player in FIG. 80 (1), the background change notices of (6) to (7) in the same figure (wipe-in and wipe-out of fusuma images for wipe production) ), changes to the background of the look-ahead notice displayed in (8) to (21) in FIG.
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

Here, the third effect may be one kind of effect of the plurality of kinds of effects and may be an effect executed by the effecting means. Alternatively, the third effect may be an effect which is not executed by the effecting means (for example, display means) but is executed by another effecting means (for example, sound output means) different from the effecting means. ..

Further, the first effect may be a customizable effect that can be selected in a demonstration mode in which the symbol variation display is shifted until it starts for a certain time, or an effect that can be selected even while the symbol variation display is being executed. Good. Further, the first effect may be a super reach effect or a round effect during a big hit game that can be selected by the player.

Further, the third effect may be, for example, an effect of notifying the remaining time until the simultaneous effect such as the island simultaneous effect is started.

Display means (for example, liquid crystal display device, dot matrix display device, 7-segment display device, organic EL display device, reel (drum) type display device, leaf type display device, plasma display, projector, etc.) , Light emitting means, sound output means, movable means and the like can be listed. In addition, a light guide plate that receives light from the side and emits light toward the front, and a POV display that can display a pattern by an afterimage effect can be listed as examples. As the rendering means, all of those listed above may be used. On the other hand, some of the items listed above may not be applied.

Further, the production means may be a device that produces a light emission production, and in this case, the light emission mode (color, lighting pattern, light emission display displayed by the light emission color, etc.) may be different depending on the mode. ..
Also,

"The rendering means is an image display means (for example, only the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or a plurality of combinations of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N (including all). ), the second display device 208S, etc.],

The first effect is a first effect display [for example, (b) effect display by character selection of FIG. 63(b) or (c) effect display by option of reserve frame selection, (e). Effect display by each option of the hold display selection, (f) effect display by each option of the background display selection, the song name shown in FIG. 101 displayed in the song name display portion MN of FIG. 102].

The second effect is a second effect display [for example, effect display by the navigation character YM, effect display by the hold frame UI, song title display portion MN “Distance” in FIGS. 102(a13) to (a14). 102 (B15-1), the song name display portion MN “Tokeke DREAM”].
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
Here, the rendering means may be a plurality of image display means.
Also,

"The third effect refers to a third effect display [for example, a treasure box icon I1, a UFO icon UFI, a button holding icon, a meter display MW or MG icon, a huge panda, or a "navigation character" by a grandpa character. 102. (a11) to (b15-1) of FIG. 102 (a11) to FIG. 102 (a15-1), etc.].
The third effect display may be performed by the image display means,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, there may be a case where at least a part of the third effect display overlaps with at least a part of the first effect display. That is, there may be a case where only a part of the third effect display overlaps only a part of the first effect display, or only a part of the third effect display and the first effect display. May be overlapped with each other, all of the third effect display may be overlapped with only a part of the first effect display, or with all of the third effect display. There may be a case where all of the first effect displays overlap. Further, at least a part of the third effect display may overlap with at least a part of the first effect display from the front side (player side), or conversely, the first effect display. There may be a case where at least a part of the above is overlapped with at least a part of the third effect display from the front side (player side).

Further, the image display device displays a variable display of the decorative design, a stop display of the decorative design, an icon corresponding to the number of reserved balls (holding icon), and an icon related to the variable display of the running pattern (fluctuation icon). There are cases where The third effect display may be displayed closer to the first effect display than the variable display of the decorative design, or closer to the first effect display than the stop display of the decorative design. May be displayed on the screen, may be displayed closer to the first effect display than the hold icon, or may be displayed closer to the first effect display than the variable icon. It may be done.
Also,

"Even if the third effect is not executed, the first effect may be changed to the second effect [for example, FIG. 79(e1) to FIG. 79(e3-1), FIG. 82 (KU2-1) to FIG. 82 (KU7)],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the player may be provided with an operation unit provided at a position where the operation can be performed, and the first effect may be changed to the second effect when the operation unit is operated. ..

Further, the change from the first effect to the second effect may be a change in the effect mode, the first effect corresponds to the effect mode set by the player, and the effect mode is changed. Even if the change is made in response to the operation of the operation means, for example, the change is made in response to the start of execution of the prefetching notice (rush into the prefetching mode (corresponding to the second effect display)). Good.
Also,

“When the first effect is changed to the second effect by the execution of the third effect [for example, in the case of FIG. 99 (Aa4-1) to FIG. 99 (Aa6-1)] ], the third effect is not executed and the first effect is changed to the second effect [for example, in FIG. 79 (e-2) to the same figure (e4-1)). In the end, it is easier to shift to a state advantageous to the player [for example, a big hit game state, a big hit game state with a large number of balls, a probability change state, a power support state],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, when the third effect is executed, it may be configured to always shift to a state advantageous to the player. Alternatively, on the contrary, even if the third effect is executed, it may not be possible to shift to a state advantageous to the player.

Further, as the advantageous state, if the symbol variable display is being displayed, a big hit game state can be cited. Further, it may be in a super reach state or a pseudo continuous production state. On the other hand, as the advantageous state, if the big hit game is being executed, the probability change state or the electric support state after the end of the big hit game can be mentioned. Further, it may be in a round promotion state in which the number of rounds apparently increases.
Also,

“Providing an operation means [for example, a chance button 136 or the like] provided at a position where the player can operate,

There is a case where the first effect is selected when the operation means is operated [for example, a case of FIG. 66 (37) to FIG. (50)],
When the operation means is operated, the third effect may be executed,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
Also,

"While the third effect is executed during execution of the first effect, the first effect is not changed to the second effect [for example, FIG. 75 (3-2-1)- The same figure (3-2-2), FIG. 83 (ku 1-3-1) to the same figure (ku 1-3-3b2), FIG. 100 (a4-2), and FIG. 100 (aa6-2). Case]
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

For example, when the effect production means is a display means, the first effect display may not be changed to the second effect display even if the third effect is executed. When the means is a light emitting means, there is a case where the first light emitting effect is not changed to the second light emitting effect even when the third effect is executed, and the effect means outputs the sound. In the case of a means, even if the third effect is executed, it may not be changed from the first sound output effect to the second sound output effect, and the effect means is a movable means. In some cases, even if the third effect is executed, the first operation effect may not be changed to the second operation effect.

On the contrary, when the third effect is executed during the execution of the first effect, the first effect may be changed to the second effect without fail.
Also,
"The second effect is one of the effects selectable by the player,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

On the contrary, the second effect may be an effect that cannot be selected by the player.
Also,
“Providing a sound output means [for example, a speaker 120] capable of outputting music,

The rendering means is a display means (for example, only the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or a plurality of combinations (including all) of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N, Second display device 208S, etc.],

The display means is a means capable of displaying a music display [for example, the music title display portion MN of FIG. 102 (a15-1), the same figure (a16) to the same figure (a18)],

The music display is a display [for example, display of music titles and lyrics] regarding music output by the sound output means,

The first effect is a first music display [for example, "Mega Giga Summer"],

The game machine characterized in that the second effect is a second music display [for example, "Todoroke DREAM"]. ]
Was also explained.
Also,

“The first effect is an effect in which a second icon [for example, an icon of the navigation character YM] is displayed in a third display mode [for example, a default display mode],

The second effect is an effect in which the second icon is displayed in a fourth display mode [for example, a display mode of a lord wearing a kimono of blinking white, blue, green, red, gold, iridescent]. Is

The second icon is an icon when there is a case where it is displayed across the continuous symbol variable display [for example, in the case of FIG. 99 (a1) to (a2)].
The third display mode and the fourth display mode are different,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, "crossing over" is to interpose the period (variation stop period) of stop display of symbols. Further, the second icon may be an icon that is continuously displayed while the variable display of symbols is being displayed, or may be an icon that disappears once in the middle. Also, the icon may be continuously displayed during the stop display of the symbol, may be an icon that disappears once in the middle, or an icon that continues to disappear during the display of the stop display. May be
Also,

"The rendering means is a display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first decorative symbol display device 208L only, or a plurality of combinations (including all) of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L-N. , Second display device 208S, etc.],
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of icons,
One type of icon of the plurality of types of icons is a first icon,
One type of icon of the plurality of types of icons is a second icon,
One type of icon among the plurality of types of icons is a third icon,

The first icon is an icon related to the symbol variation display being executed (hereinafter, referred to as “variation icon”) [for example, variation icon h0],

The second icon is an icon [for example, an icon of the navigation character YM] that may be displayed across successive symbol variable displays,

The third icon is an icon (hereinafter, referred to as “holding icon”) corresponding to the number of holding balls [for example, holding icon h11],
The second icon is an icon different from the variable icon,
The second icon is an icon different from the hold icon,

The variable icon is displayed in an icon display area [for example, a variable icon display area CIS in a hold frame UI having a hold icon display area HIS, a change icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS] in the display means. Sometimes it is an icon,

The second icon is an icon that may be displayed in the icon display area [for example, the effect icon display area DIS of the holding frame UI],

The hold icon is an icon that may be displayed in the icon display area [for example, the hold icon display area HIS of the hold frame UI],

The first effect is an effect in which the icon display area is displayed in a first mode [for example, “holding frame D”],

The second effect is an effect in which the icon display area is displayed in a second mode [for example, “holding frame R”],
The first aspect and the second aspect are different,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the icon display area may be an area in which an area icon is displayed, an area in which a holding frame is displayed, or an area in which a user interface (UI) is displayed. May be The area icon may be a base icon, a stage icon, a frame icon, or the like. Further, the area icon may be composed of a plurality of icons. The icon display area may be an area including a hold icon display area, a variable icon display area, and a second icon (for example, a navigation character icon) display area.

Further, the third effect may be an effect that switches the mode of the icon display area. Further, the third effect may be an effect in which a display overlapping the front side is displayed in the icon display area.
Also,
"One type of production of the plurality of types of production is a fourth production,

The fourth effect is a notice effect [for example, a telop display trp shown in FIG. 94] that the third effect is executed before the third effect is executed.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
Also,

[The third effect is a notice effect about a big hit in a pattern variation display being executed [eg, a notice of a normal notice by the color of the treasure box icon, a big hit confirmation (or a big hit rich) notice by the bancho character C11]. ,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
Also,

"The third effect is an effect of a pre-reading notice [for example, an effect of a pre-reading notice in the color of the treasure box icon],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
Also,
“The gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
Also,
“The gaming table is a slot machine [eg, slot machine 1000],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

It should be noted that what is described as a variable display of the decorative pattern above may be a variable display of the design (more specifically, a special drawing), and what is described as a stop display of the decorative pattern means that the design (more Specifically, it may be a special display) stop display.

Further, in the above, "may be" may be replaced with "must be", "must be", or "must be", etc. It may be replaced with "always do ○○".

Further, even if the constituent requirements included only in the description of each of the embodiments, examples, modified examples, various examples, and supplementary notes described above, other constituents, embodiments, examples, and It may be applied to modified examples, various examples, supplementary notes, and the like. That is, as long as there is no factor that prevents application, constituent elements included only in the description of the embodiment, the example, the modification, the various examples, the supplementary notes, etc. Even if it is applied to examples, various examples, and supplementary notes, it is established as one cohesive technical idea.

Next, an example of effects applicable to the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 117 to 193. As the technical idea, it is possible to apply the technical idea shown in FIGS. 117 to 193 to the technical idea shown in FIGS. 1 to 48 and 49 to 116, and vice versa. The technical ideas shown in FIGS. 48 and 49 to 116 can be applied to the technical ideas shown in FIGS. 117 to 193. At that time, components having the same reference numeral may be treated as the same component and may be replaced with each other.

In the example of the effect described below, the display means (for example, any one or two or all of the first decorative symbol display device 208L to the third decorative symbol display device 208M decorative symbol display device), the notice icon, A notice display, a mini game A icon, a mini game B icon, a hold icon, a change icon, and an icon change notice display are displayed. First, these will be described in order.
FIG. 117 is a diagram showing various notice icons and various notice displays.

In FIG. 117(a), five types of notice icons are shown. Of these five types of notice icons, four types are box-shaped icons and the remaining one type is an operation means type (button type) icon.

There are four types of box-shaped icons, namely, a box icon, a red box icon, a gold box icon, and a rainbow box icon, which have different colors, and two types of modes (mode a and mode d) are prepared for each. Mode a is a display mode in which the box is closed, and mode d is a display mode in which the box is open.

In the above description and the following description, the type and the display mode may be different depending on the color difference and the display method. For example, the color of the first type and the first display mode is white, and the color of the second type and the second display mode is also white, but the display method of the second type and the second display mode is blinking (white and Alternate display with another color (for example, background color or black). The first type and the first display mode correspond to the default type and display mode. The color of the third type and the third display mode is blue, the color of the fourth type and the fourth display mode is green, the color of the fifth type and the fifth display mode is red, and the sixth type and the fifth display mode. The color of the six display modes is gold, and the color of the seventh type and the seventh display mode is rainbow. When various icons and various displays may be prepared in the first to seventh types and display modes, and the light emitting means such as various LEDs can emit light in the first to seventh display modes. There is. Of the first to seventh types and display modes, the type and display mode having a larger number (the seventh number is the largest) may or may not be the display mode advantageous to the player. For example, the larger the number or the display mode, the higher the expectation level (reliability) of the big hit may be, or the more certain effect may be started. In the following description, the change from the nth display mode to the (n+1)th display mode may be referred to as one step up or one step up. Further, changing from the nth display mode to the (n+m)th display mode may be referred to as increasing or promoting the display mode by m steps. Further, a display mode in which the number of n is relatively large may be referred to as an upper display mode, and a display mode in which the number of n is relatively small may be referred to as a lower display mode. Note that both n and m are natural numbers of 1 or more (the same applies in the following description).

Although there is only one type of button type icon (button icon), four types of modes (mode a, mode b, mode c, and mode d) are prepared. The mode a is a display mode including only a button image imitating the chance button 136. Modes b and c are display modes in which a remaining time display meter indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is added below the button image. The mode a is a mode in which the remaining time display meter is not provided in the modes b and c, and therefore it is invalid even if the chance button 136 is operated. In mode b, the remaining time display meter is full display (display in which the operation valid period remains for the entire period), and in mode c, remaining time display meter is 0 display (display in which no operation valid period remains at all). ). That is, the mode b is a mode before starting the time counting (countdown) of the operation valid period or immediately after starting the time counting. The mode c is a mode at the time when the operation valid period has passed without operating the chance button 136 or after the time has passed. When the clocking of the operation valid period is started, the meter of the third display mode starts to decrease with the passage of time. Aspect d is a display aspect of an effect image (here, a smoke image) that hides the button image and the operation valid period display. Note that the button icon may have a plurality of types of icons of different types, like the box-shaped icon. For example, there may be default button icons, red button icons, gold button icons, and rainbow button icons in different colors.

Further, the types of the notice icon and the button icon are not limited to colors, and there may be icons having different sizes and shapes, and any two or more of a plurality of elements such as the size, shape, and color of the icon. May be combined. For example, No. In addition to the one box icon, there may be different types of icons such as a treasure box icon and a thousand box icon imitating the thousand box accessory 224H shown in FIG. Moreover, the icon size may be increased as the reliability increases (for example, the gold box icon is larger than the red box icon). Further, the shape of the box may differ between the red box icon and the gold box icon box.

The notice icon may be displayed by changing the display position from the display position where the display is first started. That is, there is a case where the display moves from the first position to the second position and is continuously displayed (stock) at the second position. The second position is the stock display position. The display may be continued (stock) without changing the display position. Aspect a is the aspect at the start of stock, but also the aspect at the start of display. Mode d is a mode in which the notice icon is used. That is, when the notice icon shown in FIG. 117(a) is used in the presentation, the display mode changes to mode d. The box-shaped icon is used at a predetermined timing and changes to the mode d. The button icon is used when the chance button 136 is operated within the operation valid period, and changes to the mode d. However, even if the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation valid period, the button icon always changes from the form c to the form d after the operation valid period elapses. Good. Further, when the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation valid period, the button icon does not have to change to the mode d. In that case, the button icon may be erased, may continue to be displayed as the mode a, or the display in which only the remaining time display meter of the mode b or the mode c is hidden (the peripheral edge portion is the mode a. (A display different from that) may be displayed, and it may be configured such that a notice display described later is not displayed although the display changes to mode d. When the chance button 136 is operated within the operation valid period, the mode c may be displayed once and then the mode d may be displayed.

The appearance rate and the reliability are different for each type of notice icon. The appearance rate is easily displayed in the order of A, B, C, and D. That is, it means that A is most likely to be displayed (displayed frequently). Although not shown in FIG. 117(a), E indicates that it is most difficult to be displayed (display frequency is low). The reliability represents the reliability of the big hit, and is the reliability of the big hit in the symbol variation display where the icon is used (reliability of the normal notice), or the reliability of the big hit in the symbol variation display of the prefetch target (prefetch notice Reliability). This reliability is likely to be a big hit in the order of accuracy, A, B, C, D, E, F. That is, the winning probability is the one that is most likely to be a big hit (the big hit is always = reliability is 100%), and the F is the most difficult to hit. The reliability represented by the first type and the first display mode described above is F, the reliability represented by the second type and the second display mode is E, and the reliability represented by the third type and the third display mode is D. The reliability represented by the fourth type and the fourth display mode is C, the reliability represented by the fifth type and the fifth display mode is B, and the reliability represented by the sixth type and the sixth display mode is It becomes A, and the reliability represented by the seventh type and the seventh display mode is accurate. The reliability F may be 0% or higher than 0%. If the reliability F is 0%, it cannot be said that a big hit is announced, but in this specification, a case where the reliability F is 0% may be referred to as a notice.

In FIG. 117(b), 31 types of notice icons are shown. The explanation of these 31 types of notice icons is as described in the outline of the effect contents in the figure. However, in this description, "always performed" means that in the modified example, "not always performed". It may be." In addition, descriptions such as “may be” and “may be” can be replaced with “always” in the modified example.

Also, the "VS swordsman reach" described in "Outline of production contents" is the swordsman reach shown in FIG. 17, FIG. 75, etc., and the "all group reach" is shown in FIG. 81 (or 3-5-3). It is a super reach that is not shown in the figure. In addition, it may be configured such that the symbol variation display in which the super reach is performed is more likely to be a big hit in the case where the “all group reach” is performed than in the case where the “VS swordsman reach” is performed. The "thousand box (feature)" becomes a thousand box effect 224H shown in FIG. 14 and the like, and the "family crest (feature)" becomes a family crest effect 224E shown in FIG.

Further, the 31 types of notice icons shown in FIG. 117(b) may also function as notice display. The notice display is a display that is started when the notice icon is used. For example, there is a case where the box-shaped icon shown in FIG. 117(a) changes to the mode d and a notice display appears from the inside. In this case, it is impossible to know what kind of notice display will appear until the box-shaped icon changes to the mode d. In other words, the relationship between the notice icon and the notice display is not set in advance to a one-to-one relationship or a many-to-one relationship, but is a one-to-many or many-to-many relationship. However, the relation between the notice icon and the notice display may be previously set to a one-to-one relation or a many-to-one relation. For example, if the red box advance notice icon and the red change advance notice display (No. 7) are set in advance in a one-to-one relationship, and the red box advance notice icon is displayed, then the red box advance notice must be displayed. It may be decided that the icon changes to the form d and the notice display of red change appears from the inside, or the notice icon of the red box changes to the form d, and the icon of the form a does not change. It may disappear as it is, and when the mode d is changed, the red notice display may always appear. Also, as a box-shaped icon that is a notice icon, a transparent box-shaped icon that allows you to see the contents is prepared, and you can see that this transparent box-shaped icon contains one or more types of notice displays. May be. If there is only one type of notice display, the player can know in advance the type of notice display that appears when the mode d changes, but if there are multiple types of notice display, know I can't. If a plurality of types of notices are displayed, the roulette may be displayed in a transparent box. In addition, there is a possibility that "a notice icon is used when the notice icon is used" due to "a notice icon in a form in which it is not known what kind of notice display will appear" such as a box-shaped icon shown in FIG. 117(a). You may give notice of the "notice display". For example, if "super hot" is displayed (previously announced) in a balloon or the like by the advance notice icon on the box, when the advance notice icon on the box is used, the advance notice for "super hot" may be displayed without fail, It may or may not be displayed. In addition, when the box's notice icon displays "Geki Atsu" and "?" in the balloon or roulette, etc. (previous notice), if the box's notice icon is used, "Geki Atsu" and "?" Either one of the notices may be always displayed, or both may not be displayed, and a notice different from the displayed one may be displayed. As described above, the plurality of options may be announced in advance by the notice icon (and/or a notice different from the notice icon), and one or a plurality of notice displays may be displayed from the notice.

When the icon shown in FIG. 117(b) is a notice icon, the relation between the notice icon and the notice display is set to a one-to-one relationship in advance, and if the notice icon changes to the mode d, The notice icon functions as a notice display. The difference between the notice icon and the notice display is that the notice icon corresponds to the notice of a certain notice, and the notice display corresponds to the notice. That is, the notice icon corresponds to the notice of the notice display.

In the description of the effect contents in FIG. 117(b), "in the displayed variation" means that the icon is functioning as a notice display, and the icon functions as a notice icon. If it is, read it as "In the fluctuation that the notice icon was used." That is, the notice display is used in the displayed symbol variation display, while the notice icon may be carried over to the symbol variation display started after the displayed symbol variation display.

In FIG. 117(b), mode A and mode B are shown. However, when functioning as a notice display, only mode A is used, and when functioning as a notice icon, mode A is stocked. The state B is a state in which the notice icon is used, and the mode B is a mode in which a circle mark is added to the mode A. Even if the notice icon is used once, it may not disappear and can be used again. In this case, after changing from the mode A to the mode B, the mode A is returned to the mode A again. However, during the period displayed in the mode B, the notice icon cannot be used, and after returning to the mode A, it can be used. Become. Further, there are notice icons (No. 1, 27 to 31) for which aspect B is not prepared, but these notice icons are icons that disappear when used.

The 31 types of advance notice icons or advance notices shown in FIG. 117(b) include different color icons and different color displays, and the reliability of the jackpot is different depending on the displayed color as described in the above display mode. That is, the reliability of the big hit is higher in the “red change” (No. 8) of the red color (fifth display mode) than in the “change” (No. 7) of the default color represented by “de”. ..

Although the appearance rate is also shown in FIG. 117(b), this appearance rate is the same as the appearance rate described in FIG. 117(a). In addition, No. The appearance rate of 16 "High-precision notice in XX" varies depending on the contents of XX. For example, the appearance rate of “preliminary notice of pending icon change high accuracy” or “preliminary icon stock high accuracy notice” is B. Note that the "previous notice icon stock high-probability notice" may be displayed only during execution of the notice icon stock effect, or may be displayed before the notice icon stock effect is started. In addition, the appearance rate of the “super hot production high-precision middle notice”, “timer notice high-precision middle notice”, and “accessory action high-precision middle notice” becomes C. However, the appearance rate may be the same or different in the contents of ○○. This "XX high-probability notice" is more likely to be executed when it is displayed than when it is not displayed. However, if it is displayed, then XX may be executed without fail.

In addition, No. 2 “Chance” icon or No. If the "red chance" icon of 3 is functioning as a notice display, the reach effect may not occur even if another "notice" is announced as a "chance". However, the "chance" icon or "red chance" When the "chance" is announced by the icon, the normal reach effect may be generated without fail. In addition, other notice effects (for example, notice effects that frequently appear such as conversation notices), notice effects that appear more frequently than the notice by the notice display, and notice effects that are displayed when the symbol variation display is a shortened variation. "Chance" or "Red Chance" icon rather than "Chance" (including cases of inconclusive notice such as "Chance?" or "Chance!?") When the notice is given, the reach effect (which may be the normal reach effect or the super reach effect may be generated) is more likely to occur, or in both cases. There is no difference and the occurrence probabilities may be the same.

The notice icon described with reference to FIG. 117 is an icon that may be displayed as a result of the effect of the mini game. A mini game is a type of presentation display, and two types of mini games are prepared. Two types of mini-games are available: a mini-game (Mini-game A) to announce Yoshimune's treasure and a mini-game (Mini-game B) to announce Janken battle. A dedicated icon is used in each mini game. The mini game is automatically started if the starting conditions are set, and the result of the mini game is determined according to the result of the judgment or the result of the look-ahead.
FIG. 118 is a diagram showing a mini game icon.

In FIG. 118(a), four types of icons for mini game A are shown. Each of these four types of mini game A icons includes an image of a box-shaped icon (box image) shown in FIG. 117(a). The “box” icon includes a white box image in the first display mode, that is, a white box notice icon. The "red box" icon includes a red box image in the fifth display mode, that is, a red box notice icon. The “gold box” icon includes a gold box image in the sixth display mode, that is, a notice icon of the gold box. The “rainbow box” icon includes a rainbow-colored box image in the seventh display mode, that is, a rainbow box notice icon. Of these four types of icons, the remaining three types of icons except the “rainbow box” icon have four modes (modes a to d), and the “rainbow box” icon has these four modes. Only two of the two aspects (aspect c, aspect d) are prepared. Modes a to c are modes in which the respective notice icons are placed on the carpet and the hit point (HP) meter display is displayed thereon. In the mini game A, a character of Yoshimune attacks the carpet, and if the attack is effective, the hit points (HP) decrease, and when the HP becomes 0, a treasure (preliminary icon) can be acquired. In the meter display of mode a, the gauge of the third display mode (blue) is in a full state, and HP is 100 points. In the meter display of mode b, the gauge of the fourth display mode (green) is in a half state, and HP is 50 points. In the meter display of mode c, the gauge of the fifth display mode (red) is displayed in a small amount, and HP is 10 points. The mode d is a mode that is displayed after the HP becomes 0, and the carpet display disappears, the meter display also disappears, each notice icon is displayed, and below that, the notice icon is acquired. This is a mode in which the characters “Get!!” are displayed.

In the mini game A, four types of icons for the mini game A are started to be displayed in any mode. That is, when the display is started in the mode a, the remaining HP at the display start (at the time of appearance) is 100/100, and when the display is started in the mode b, the remaining HP at the display start is 50. Thus, when the display is started in the mode c, the remaining HP at the start of display is 10/100. 118(a) shows the appearance rate for each aspect, the alphabet representing the appearance rate here is also the same as the alphabet representing the appearance rate described in FIG. 117(a). The icon for the mini game A of the rainbow box has a few HP left from the start of display, and you can always get the treasure (notice icon), but the other icons must get the treasure (notice icon). In some cases, you can do it, in other cases you can't. In addition, the icon for the mini game A of the rainbow box may be able to obtain the notice icon during the variable display of the display being started, or in the variable display which is started next to the variable display. In some cases, the notice icon may be acquired. However, the notice icon may be surely acquired during the symbol variation display that is started to be displayed, or may not be acquired unless the symbol variation display is started next.

FIG. 118(b) shows the relationship between the number of remaining HP points at the start of the variable display of symbols and the probability of acquisition of the notice icon. The icon for the mini game A may be displayed across the continuous symbol variable display. That is, there is a case where the symbol variation display started after the symbol variation display which has been started is carried over and displayed. The meter display in the mode when the display of the icon for the mini game A is started decreases by 10 points each time an effective attack on the carpet is determined. Therefore, the icon for the mini game A in the rainbow box can acquire the notice icon once a valid attack is determined.

If the number of remaining HP points is 60 points or more at the time of disclosure of the symbol variation display started after the symbol variation display in which the display of the icon for the mini game A is started, the meter display is in the third display mode (blue). ), there is a 10% probability that the notice icon can be obtained during the started symbol fluctuation display. If the number of remaining HP points is 30 points or more and 50 points or less at the start of the symbol variation display, the meter display is displayed in the fourth display mode (green), and the notice icon is acquired during the started symbol variation display. The probability of being able to do is 50%. If the number of remaining HP points is 10 points or 20 points at the start of the symbol variation display, the meter display is displayed in the fifth display mode (red), and the notice icon is acquired during the started symbol variation display. The probability of being able to do is 100%.

In FIG. 118(c), two types of opponent icons for the mini game B are shown. One of the two types of opponent icons for the mini game B is a swordsman character icon, and the other type of icon is a panda character icon. The appearance rate of the swordsman character icon is A, and the appearance rate of the panda character icon is B. The alphabet representing the appearance rate here is also the same as the alphabet representing the appearance rate described in FIG. 117A. Therefore, the swordsman character icon is more likely to appear than the panda character icon. In the Janken showdown mini-game B, the icon of a certain character and the icons of these opponents make a rock-paper-scissors showdown, and when a certain character wins (when the opponent loses), a notice icon is displayed. If a certain character is defeated (when the opponent wins), the notice icon cannot be obtained.

In addition, modes a to f are prepared for each character icon of the opponent. Mode a is a mode before the start of the mini game, or a standby mode after the start of the mini game. Aspect b is an aspect when a goo is put out in a rock-paper-scissors confrontation, an aspect c is an aspect when a choki is put out, and an aspect d is an aspect when a par is put out. The mode e is a mode when the opponent character is defeated in the rock-paper-scissors confrontation (when a certain character wins), and the mode f is, on the contrary, when the opponent character wins the rock-paper-scissors confrontation ( When a certain character is defeated).

FIG. 118(d) shows the degree of expectation of the advance notice icon in the mini game B. Although a certain character is used in the above, in the mini game B, a character of the opponent, a character of a villager, a character of a grandfather, and a character of Yoshimune are used as a character (a character corresponding to the above-mentioned certain character) to compete with rock-paper-scissors. A character is prepared. Therefore, there are six battle cards as shown in FIG. 118(d), and the degree of expectation of each is determined. A indicates that the degree of expectation of acquisition is 100%, B indicates that it is 80%, C indicates that it is 60%, D indicates that it is 40%, and E indicates 20%. F represents 10%, and G represents greater than 0% and less than 1%. The panda character icon is less likely to appear as an opponent character than the swordsman character icon, but the notice icon is more likely to be acquired than the swordsman character icon. Further, in the case of a match between Yoshimune and Panda, regardless of the type of the notice icon, the notice icon can be acquired with a 100% probability. The notice icon of the rainbow box is selected only in the case of a big hit. The "-" display in FIG. 118(d) indicates that the notice icon of the rainbow box does not appear (acquisition expectation level 0%).
FIG. 119 is a diagram showing a hold icon and a change icon.

The hold icon is an icon relating to undigested symbol variation display, the variation icon is an icon relating to digested symbol variation display, and both icons are icons relating to symbol variation display. Here, "variation of XX reservation" means "symbol variation display corresponding to XX reservation".

FIG. 119(a) shows each mode for each type of the hold icon and the variable icon. The description of each type of icon is as described in the remarks in the figure. No. 1 is the default mode and No. 2 to No. 7 is a notice mode. That is, if it is the hold icon, it is in the form of advance notice, and if it is the variable icon, it is in the form of normal notice. The pre-reading notice hold icon may be displayed from the start of display (at the time of starting winning), may be displayed by changing at the start of symbol variation, or by changing depending on the effect during symbol variation display. It may be displayed. The change icon in the normal notice mode may be displayed from the start of the display (timing corresponding to the start of the change of the symbol), or may be displayed by changing according to the effect during the change of the symbol.

The hold icon and the variable icon are configured to be able to change (rank up) step by step in the order of default mode>blink white>blue>green>red>gold>rainbow. For example, when the rank is increased during the blue hold, the green hold is changed. Note that the hold icon and the variable icon do not necessarily have to change step by step. For example, in the icon change notice display described later, when the change of the icon form is successful, there is a predetermined change form regardless of the form of the icon to be changed (for example, FIG. 119(b). No. 2 to No. 3, No. 5 to No. 6, No. 8 to No. 10). When a change notice is given by the default mode icon itself, it usually ranks up to white blinking, but when the default mode icon is changed by the icon change notice, it does not change to white blinking and is put on blue hold. Rank up. Also, the icon of the default mode is No. 2 to No. 7, No. 14-No. The icon of FIG. 19 and the VS display mode of FIG. 129 described later and the icon display mode with the character “SP” of FIG. 180 described later may change. 2 to No. The icon of No. 7 is NO. 14-No. The icon of 19 or the VS display mode shown in FIG. 129 or the icon display mode with the character “SP” shown in FIG. 180 described later does not change, but may change. In addition, No. 8 to No. The display mode of 13 is supposed to be displayed in that mode from the time of winning, but icons of other display modes (for example, No. 1 to No. 7 and/or No. 14 to No. 19). It may be changed from the icon). Also, only the default mode may be changeable.

The display mode of the variable icon is determined according to the result of the judgment, but even if the result of the judgment is a loss, the display is changed to a mode other than the default display. Performance may be executed. In addition, among the plurality of displayed hold icons, which display mode of which hold icon is to be displayed is determined according to the result of prefetching, but when the result of prefetching is lost. Even if there is, an effect that changes the display mode to a mode other than the default display mode may be executed. Also, the display mode may change for a plurality of hold icons.

No. 8 and No. Reference numeral 9 denotes an icon that may be displayed at or before the start of the button effect (for example, the button notice effect) or during the button effect. Here, No. The function (1) and the function (2) described in the remarks of “Button A” in 8 will be supplemented. When the button A icon has the function (1), the display mode of the button A icon until the pattern variable display corresponding to the button A icon is started even when the chance button 136 is operated. Is configured so as not to change from blue to rainbow, and the operation valid period is started after (or immediately after or at the same time) the symbol variable display corresponding to the button A icon is started, and the operation valid period ends. When the chance button 136 is operated before the operation, or when the operation valid period ends, the display mode of the button A icon is changed from blue to rainbow. Note that the display mode of the button A icon may not change when the chance button 136 is not operated during the operation valid period. When the button A icon has the function (2), before the variation display of the symbol corresponding to the button A icon is started after the button A icon is displayed (that is, before the variation display of the symbol corresponding to the button A icon is displayed. When the chance button 136 is operated by the time of (variable display of symbols), the display mode of the button A icon is configured to change from blue to rainbow. Here, in the case where the button A icon has the function of (2), the display mode of the button A icon is not changed even if the chance button 136 is operated while the symbol is stopped. It may not change, and may be configured to change. Further, when the button A icon has the function (2), the operation valid period may be set even during the variable display of the symbols corresponding to the button A icon. That is, it may include the same function as the function (1). , No. Regarding the function (1) and the function (2) described in the remarks of “Button B” of No. 9, No. It is the same as the function (1) and the function (2) described in the remarks of “Button A” of 8.

No. Reference numeral 10 denotes an icon that may be displayed at or before the start of the timer effect (for example, the timer notice effect) or during the timer notice effect.

No. Numeral 11 indicates the time before or before the start of the promotion effect of the target hold in FIGS. 156 (Ec1) to (Ec8) and FIG. 156 (Ec5-2-1) to (Ec5-2-5) described later, or It is an icon that may be displayed during the promotion production.

No. When 12 is displayed at or before the start of the roulette hold (N selection hold) effect in FIGS. 151 (A1-2-1) to (A1-2-12) described later, or during the effect. There is an icon. In the roulette icon of this example, the roulette icon itself changes to the mode stopped by the roulette, but it may be configured so that an icon different from the roulette icon always changes to the mode stopped by the roulette. The icon may change and the icon different from the roulette icon may change.

No. 13 is an icon that may be displayed at or before the start of the meter effect, or during the meter effect, and the meter decreases until the hold icon is consumed and the variable icon disappears until it disappears. If the production is performed and the meter display becomes 0, it is successful and some change or something occurs. That is, the meter display is of a decreasing type. If the meter display does not finally reach 0, both the image of Echigoya and the HP meter image are displayed as they are, and the HP meter image shows the final remaining HP. ing. Further, in the case of a hold icon, an effect of reducing the meter display may be performed even in the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon, and the meter display may be 0. Further, in the case of the hold icon, an effect that the meter is reduced may be performed in one or a plurality of symbol variation display, and a variation in which the meter is reduced is performed and a variation in which it is not performed may be performed. Further, even when displayed as a hold icon, the effect of actually reducing the meter may be performed only in the symbol variable display corresponding to the hold icon. Also, in the above description, the meter display is of the decreasing type, but may be of the increasing type. If the type is increasing, it is successful if the meter display is full within the valid period.

No. 14-No. Reference numeral 16 denotes an icon displayed in the Yoshimune treasure acquisition notice of the mini game A described with reference to FIGS. 118(a) and 118(b). That is, it is an icon that may be displayed at or before the start of the mini game A, or during the mini game A. Use this icon to attack the carpet with the notice icon. Aspect a is a standby pose, aspect b is a ready pose, and aspect c is a pose in which an arrow is fired. No. 17-No. Reference numeral 19 denotes a certain icon displayed in the rock-paper-scissors competition announcement of the mini game B described with reference to FIGS. 118(c) and (d) (a character confronting the character icon of the opponent shown in FIG. 118(c)). Icon). That is, it is an icon that may be displayed at or before the start of the mini game B, or during the mini game B. Mode a is a mode before the start of the mini game, or a standby mode after the start of the mini game. Aspect b is an aspect when a goo is put out in a rock-paper-scissors confrontation, an aspect c is an aspect when a choki is put out, and an aspect d is an aspect when a par is put out. The mode e is a mode when the player loses in the rock-paper-scissors confrontation (when the opponent character wins), and the mode f, on the contrary, when the player loses the rock-paper-scissors confrontation (when the opponent character loses) It is a mode of. In addition, No. 14-No. The icon 19 corresponds to a white blinking icon.

No. 1 shown in FIG. Nos. 14 to 16 are icons dedicated to the mini game A. Since 17 to No. 19 are the icons dedicated to the mini game B, if these dedicated icons appear, the player knows that the mini game will be started, and these dedicated icons are the notices of the mini game. Also works as.

Although the appearance rate and the reliability are also shown in FIG. 119(a), the alphabet representing the appearance rate here is the same as the alphabet representing the appearance rate described in FIG. 117(a), The symbol representing the reliability here is also the same as the symbol representing the reliability described in FIG. 117(a).

In addition to the types shown in FIG. 119(a), there are types of hold icons and variable icons.

FIG. 119(b) shows an icon change notice display. The icon change notice display is a display used for an effect of changing the mode of the hold icon or the variable icon. That is, it is a display that appears in a change animation that changes the form of the icon. In addition, the display is also used for an effect in which an attempt to change the mode of the hold icon or the variable icon fails. That is, it is a display that appears in a non-changing animation in which the change of the icon form fails and the icon form does not change. The description of each type of icon change notice display is as described in the remarks in the figure.

No. 1-No. The mode a in each display of 16 is a mode at the time of starting the change animation (a mode at the time of starting the display of the icon change notice display and the default mode), and a mode b is a mode at the time of changing the icon. In addition, No. 11-No. The mode c in each display of 15 is a mode when the mode change of the icon is successful, and is a mode that may be displayed by a change animation. On the other hand, No. 11-No. The mode d in each display of 15 is a mode when the mode change of the icon has failed, and is a mode that may be displayed in a non-changing animation. No. The display of 17 is the display of the huge panda displayed in FIGS. 89 (2-2-1) to (2-2-3) in FIG. 89, and there is no change in the aspect from the appearance to the change.

FIG. 119(b) shows the appearance rate of each type of display, but the alphabet representing the appearance rate here is also the same as the alphabet representing the appearance rate described in FIG. 117(a). Further, FIG. 119(b) also shows the types of icons that change the mode. That is, No. 1-No. Each display of 10 may change the mode of the variable icon or may change the mode of the hold icon. On the other hand, No. 11-No. Each display of No. 16 changes only the mode of the variable icon, and No. The display of 17 pandas changes only the mode of the hold icon. In addition, No. 11-No. Each display of 16 may be changed so that only the mode of the hold icon is changed, or the mode of the variable icon may be changed or the mode of the hold icon may be changed. Good. In addition, No. The display of panda 17 may be changed so that only the mode of the variable icon is changed, or the mode of the hold icon may be changed or the mode of the variable icon may be changed. May be.

In addition, No. 1-No. Each display of the balloon system of No. 3 and No. 3 4 to No. 6 bomber system displays and No. 6 7-No. Each display of 10 flying boats, and No. 10 12-No. Each of the 15 Yoshimune system displays has a different color. The color difference here is the same in some cases, depending on the displayed color, the success probability of the icon aspect change, that is, the probability when there is no icon aspect change and the probability when there is (icon change rate) are the same. In some cases. Further, even when the mode of the icon is changed, the number of icons whose mode is changed may be different depending on the displayed color. In FIG. 119(b), the "icon change ratio" is shown as the success probability of the change of the aspect of the icon, and the "probability of the number of changing icons" is also shown as the probability of the number of icons whose aspect is changed. For example, No. 4 to No. In each of the 6 bomber system displays, the default color display (No. 4) represented by “de” is more likely than the other color displays (No. 5, 6) to have a higher probability of success in changing the aspect of the icon. Is high. However, in the default color bomber display (No. 4), the icon display mode can be increased only by one level. That is, the nth display mode is changed to the (n+1)th display mode. For example, when changing the mode of the hold icon in the white blinking mode (second display mode), it is changed to the blue mode (third display mode), and the hold icon in the blue mode (third display mode) is changed. When changing the mode, the mode is changed to the green mode (fourth display mode). However, only when changing the mode of the hold icon in the default mode (first display mode), the mode is changed to the blue mode (third display mode). On the other hand, the red (fifth display mode) bomber display (“red bomber” of No. 5) is displayed when the mode is changed regardless of the mode of the hold icon when the bomber display is started. , And is always changed to the same display mode (fifth display mode) as itself. That is, the n-th display mode is always changed to the fifth display mode. For example, when the default icon (first display mode) or the blue icon (third display mode) is used, the red mode (fifth display) is used to change the mode. Be sure to change the mode). In addition, when the bomber display in gold (the sixth display mode) (“gold bomber” of No. 6) is changed regardless of the mode of the hold icon when the bomber display is started, , And is always changed to the same display mode (sixth display mode) as itself. That is, the n-th display mode is always changed to the sixth display mode. For example, if the default icon (first display mode) or the green mode (fourth display mode) is used for changing the mode, a gold mode (sixth mode) Be sure to change the mode). Further, the “red bomber” display (No. 5) has a higher probability of success in changing the aspect of the icon than the “gold bomber” display (No. 6). That is, No. 4 to No. In the display of the bomber system of 6, the higher the display mode, the lower the success probability of changing the mode of the icon, but it is easier to make a big hit with the variable display of symbols corresponding to the changed icon. In addition, No. 1-No. The same applies to the display of the balloon system of 3. However, in the display of the bomber system, in the display of the default color (No. 4), the success rate of the change of the icon form is 100%, and if the bomber of the default color is displayed, the form of the icon will always change. To do. Moreover, the default color bomber changes the mode of the two icons with a probability of 5% if two or more icons are displayed at the start of the pattern variation display in which the default color bomber is displayed. For example, the mode of the variable icon and the mode of one hold icon may change, or the modes of the two hold icons may change. In addition, when the number of icons becomes two after the variation display of the default color bomber is started, the default color bomber does not change the two icons, but the default color bomber If the second icon is displayed between the start of the variable display and the time when the bomber in the default color is displayed, the two icons displayed may change. It may be. About this note, No. 7-No. Display and/or No. 10 of the flying boat system. It is also applicable to the display of "panda" of 17. On the other hand, in the balloon-based display, in the default color display (No. 1), the success probability of the icon mode change is 30%, and when the icon mode changes, the mode is limited to one icon. Change.

In addition, No. 7-No. In each display of 10 flying boats, regardless of the display mode (display color), the success probability of changing the mode of the icon is 100%, and if the flying boat is displayed regardless of the color, the mode of the icon is Be sure to change. Moreover, the default-colored flying boat (No. 7) has a 50% probability that two or more icons are displayed at the start of the pattern variation display in which the default-colored flying boat is displayed. Change the form of the icon. However, even here, the flying boat of the default color can raise the display mode of the icon by only one level. On the other hand, the flying boats (No. 8 to No. 10) other than the default color always change the display mode of one certain icon to the same display mode as itself. Therefore, No. 7-No. In the display of 10 flying boats, the higher the display mode, the easier it is to hit big with the variable display of symbols corresponding to the changed icon. Note that the timing at which two or more icons are displayed is not limited to the start time of the variable display in which the flying boat of the default color is displayed, but may be the time when the flying boat of the default color is displayed. (The same applies below).

Furthermore, No. 12-No. In the display of Yoshimune of No. 15, both the default color display (No. 12) and the display of red (No. 13 “Akayoshimune”) represented by “de” have a success probability of 50 of the variation of the variation icon. %. It should be noted that the target of change in the display of Yoshimune is limited to the variable icon, and since only one variable icon is displayed, the mode of two or more icons is not changed. Further, in the gold display (No. 14 “Kanayoshimune”), the success probability of the change of the mode of the variation icon is 25%, which is lower than the display of “Akayoshimune”. However, in the rainbow display (No. 15 “Nijiyoshimune”), the success probability of the change of the mode of the variation icon is 100%, which is higher than the display of “Kinyoshimune”. Even in the display of Yoshimune, Yoshimune (No. 13 to No. 15) other than the default color changes the display mode of the variable icon to the same display mode as itself.

In the display of the length (No. 16), the success probability of the change of the form of the variable icon is 100%, and when the display of the length is displayed, the form of the variable icon is surely raised by one step.

In the panda display (No. 17), the success probability of the mode change of the hold icon is 100%, and when the panda display is displayed, the mode of the hold icon is necessarily raised by one step. Moreover, if two or more hold icons are displayed at the start of the variable display in which the panda is displayed, the mode of the two hold icons is changed with a probability of 50%. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 119(b), only a maximum of two icons are changed, but three or more icons may be changed, and regardless of the number, all the displayed icons are displayed. There may be a case where the hold icon of, or all the displayed icons are changed.

Next, the effects of using the various icons and displays described with reference to FIGS. 117 to 119 will be described using a specific example.

FIG. 120 is a diagram showing, step by step, an example in which the advance notice icon is stocked by winning the mini game B, and the advance notice icon is displayed by using the stocked advance notice icon to change the display mode of the variable icon. Is.

In FIG. 120, it is a normal state (non-probably changed state and non-electric power saving state (non-time saving state)), and in the subsequent production examples as well, unless otherwise specified, it is a production example in the normal state. 120 shows only the first decorative symbol display device 208L among the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N, the first decorative symbol display device 208L may be the decorative symbol display device 208. (The same applies to the following figures.).

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 120 (a1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is changing at high speed in the central area. In the upper left, the second decorative design (fifth design) is variably displayed. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 120(A1), a holding frame UI is displayed in the effect display area 208d. This hold frame UI has a hold icon display area HIS, a variable icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS. The variable icon display area CIS is provided in the center, and the pedestal hs0 is arranged in the variable icon display area CIS. The hold icon display area HIS is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area CIS, and four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged on the left base icon bIl. The effect icon display area DIS is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area CIS, and the right base icon bIr is arranged in the effect icon display area DIS. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 120(A1), the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed on each of the first stage hs1 and the second stage hs2. That is, the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are displayed. The display modes of the hold icons h11 and h12 of these special diagrams 1 are all No. 1 in FIG. 119(a). This is the default display mode described in 1. At the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second reserved number display (here, "2" and "0") of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed. Further, the variation icon h0 is displayed on the pedestal hs0 in the variation icon display area CIS. The display mode of the change icon h0 is also No. 1 in FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1. The background screen of the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 120(A1) is solid white, but this solid white color indicates that the background screen is omitted in the drawing. In the following figures, the background screen may be shown, but in the case of solid white, it means that the background screen is omitted as in the case of FIG. 120(A1).

In FIG. 120 (A2), there is a ball in the special-figure 1 starting port 230, and the number of holdings of special-figure 1 is increased by one, and there are three in total. In the second hold number display of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 120 (2), the hold number of the special figure 1 is displayed as "3".

In FIG. 120 (A3-1), the third hold icon h13 is displayed on the third stage hs3. Although the third hold icon h13 is additionally displayed in the default display mode by the increasing animation, the third hold represented by the third hold icon h13 is the target hold for the prefetching notice. In FIG. 120(a3-1), both the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12, which have been the default display modes so far, are the same as those of No. 119 of FIG. 119(a). The icon has changed to the icon a of the type of villager described in 17. In addition, here, the icon of the default display mode is changed to the icon of the mode a of the type of villager, but the display mode of the prefetch notice (for example, the blue display mode described in No. 3 of FIG. 119(a) or The green display mode icon described in No. 4) may be changed to a villager type icon. In this case, the upper display mode (for example, the green display mode of the fourth display mode) is lower than the lower display mode (for example, the blue display mode of the third display mode) than the icon of the villager type. Also, the icon of the old type is likely to be displayed, and the display mode above (for example, the red display mode of the fifth display mode) is more likely to be the icon of the Yoshimune type. Further, the third hold icon h13 indicating the target hold of the prefetching notice is the default display mode, but the third hold icon h13 may also be changed to a villager type icon. Further, only the first hold icon h11 may be changed to the villager type icon, or only the second hold icon h12 may be changed to the villager type icon. That is, the number of icons that change into villager type icons may be one or more. By changing the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 to villager type icons, the mini game (specific mini-game) is displayed in the symbol variable display corresponding to the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12, respectively. It may be announced that a game (mini game B in this example) or an unspecified mini game (mini game A, mini game B, or another mini game in this example) is played. In addition, the mini game is started at the same time as or after the start of the symbol variation display (in this example, the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold icon h11) for starting the mini game B (may be immediately after). The icon to be performed may be configured to change.

In FIG. 120 (A4), the variable display of the symbols ends, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol in the central area is a combination of missing decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 1”- The "decoration 7") is stopped and displayed, and the second upper left decorative pattern also shows the combination of the missing decorative patterns ("decoration 4"-"decoration 1"-"decoration 7").

In FIG. 120 (A5), the hold that has been the first hold until now is exhausted, and the variable display of symbols is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 120 (A5), the first decorative symbol in the central area is still displayed, but in the second decorative symbol on the upper left, the variable display is started, and the first upper decorative symbol is displayed on the upper right. In the 2-holding number display, the holding number in Toku-zu 1 is decreased by 1 to “2”. Further, in the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS, which has not been displayed until now, the appearance animation of the opponent icon for the mini game B is started and the effect image EF1 is displayed. Further, in FIG. 120 (A5), the moving animation of the hold icon is also started. That is, the first hold icon h11 of the villager character that has been displayed on the first stage hs1 so far starts moving toward the pedestal hs0 in the variable icon display area CIS, and is displayed on the second stage hs2 so far. The second hold icon h12 of the character of the villager has started moving toward the first stage hs1 and has been displayed on the third stage hs3 until now. The hold icon h13 has started moving toward the second stage hs2. The animation of the appearance of the opponent icon and the movement animation of the hold icon may be started at the same time, the animation of the appearance of the opponent icon may be started first, or conversely, the movement of the hold icon may be started. The animation may be started first.

Even in FIG. 120 (A6), the first decorative pattern in the central area is still stopped and displayed, but the moving animation of the hold icon ends, and the variation icon h0 is used as the villager type mode a (standby mode). Icon is displayed. The villager character with the variable icon h0 is executing the standby animation (default animation). In addition, the appearance animation of the opponent icon also ends, the effect image EF1 disappears in the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS, and the opponent icon TI has a mode a ( The (standby mode) icon is displayed, and the panda character of this opponent icon TI is also executing the standby animation (default animation). On the right side of the opponent icon TI, an appearance area AS that is a first area is displayed in a frame. In the appearance area AS, a character display of "prize" is displayed, and a notice icon YI that can be obtained when winning the rock-paper-scissors confrontation of the mini game B is displayed. That is, the display start position of the advance notice icon YI is a position within the appearance area AS. From a different point of view, it can be said that the first area is a notice area for giving notice of icons that can be acquired in the mini game B. In the appearance area AS shown in FIG. 120(a6), No. 1 shown in FIG. 117(a) is displayed. The notice icon YI of “box” 1 is displayed. Further, a stock region SS, which is a second region, is provided on the appearance region AS, which is a region surrounded by a dotted line in FIG. 120 (6). In this example, the appearance area AS and the stock area SS overlap. The appearance area AS and the stock area SS may not be overlapped with each other. Also, the appearance animation of the opponent icon TI and the movement animation of the hold icon may end at the same time, the appearance animation of the opponent icon TI may end earlier, or conversely, the hold icon. The moving animation of may end first. Further, the appearance of the opponent icon TI and the appearance of the notice icon YI may be simultaneous, the opponent icon TI may appear first, or, conversely, the notice icon YI may appear. It may appear first.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 120 (7), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started in the central area. When the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, the rock-paper-scissors competition of the mini game B is then started. In the mini game B, if the villager character with the variable icon h0 and the panda character with the opponent icon TI have a rock-paper-scissors battle, and the villager character with the variable icon h0 wins, the notice icon displayed in the appearance area AS. You can get YI. The rock-paper-scissors battle of the mini game B may be started at the same time as the start of the variable display of the first decorative symbol, or may be started when the variable display of the second decorative symbol is started. The rock-paper-scissors confrontation here is villagers vs. pandas, and since the prize is the “box” notice icon YI, according to the expectation of acquisition shown in FIG. 118(d), there is a probability of C (60%). Can be earned. That is, there is a 60% chance that the villager will win.

In FIG. 120 (A8-1), a rock-paper-scissors showdown animation is performed by the villager character of the variable icon h0 and the panda character of the opponent icon TI, and the variable icon h0 shows the mode b (goo of the villager type). It has been changed to an icon). On the other hand, the opponent icon TI has been changed to an icon of a mode c of the panda type (a mode when the player sneaks out). As a result, the villager character with the variable icon h0 wins. The first hold icon h11 is an icon of the villager type mode a (standby mode), and the standby animation is executed.

In FIG. 120 (A9-1), the change icon h0 is changed to an icon of a mode f of the type of villager (mode when winning), and an opponent icon TI is a mode e of the type of panda e (when defeated). (A mode), and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 120 (A9-1), an animation is performed to celebrate that the villager character of the variable icon h0 has won. Although the standby animation is continued in the first hold icon h11, when a mini game result is obtained, an animation corresponding to the result may be executed. That is, even if the hold icon is changed to the icon of the same character as the variable icon h0, it is executed only for the animation celebrating the victory of the mini game, the animation mourning the defeat, or the animation celebrating the victory of the mini game. May be. In addition, an animation corresponding to the result of the mini game may be similarly executed with the hold icon that is changed to an icon of a different character than the variable icon h0.

In FIG. 120 (10), the stock animation of the notice icon YI displayed in the appearance area AS is started by the victory of the villager character of the variable icon h0. That is, the No. shown in FIG. 117(a) that was displayed in the appearance area AS. The "box" notice icon 1 of 1 goes out of the appearance area AS, is once displayed in a large size, moves to a certain position (stock position) in the stock area SS, and is displayed at that certain position (stock display). (See FIG. 120 (A11)). In FIG. 120 (12), the animation of celebrating that the villager character of the variable icon h0 has won has continued, but the opponent icon TI that has lost is the icon of the mode a (standby mode) of the panda type. And the panda character is performing a stand-by animation (the default animation).

In FIG. 120 (a13), the variable display of the symbols ends, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol in the central area is a combination of missing decorative symbols (“decoration 6”-“decoration 4”- The "decoration 1") is stopped and displayed, and the second decorative design on the upper left also shows the same combination of the missing decorative designs.

In FIG. 120 (A14), the display is stopped (confirmed display), and in the variable icon h0, the erasing animation is started while the animation celebrating that the villager character has won is continued, and the variable icon h0 is displayed. The villager character disappears into the pedestal hs0. In FIG. 120 (A15) also, the stop icon is being displayed (the final display is being made), and the change icon h0 has completely disappeared.

The mini game B may end at the same time as the end of the variable display of the symbols, the end of the variable display of the first decorative symbols, or the end of the final display of the first decorative symbols. May be.

In FIG. 120 (A16), the hold that has been the first hold until now is exhausted, and the variable display of symbols is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 120 (A16), the first decorative symbol in the central region is still stopped and displayed, but in the second decorative symbol on the upper left, the variable display is started and the upper right is displayed. In the 2-holding number display, the holding number in Toku-zu 1 is decreased by 1 and becomes “1”. Further, in FIG. 120 (A16), the moving animation of the hold icon is also started. That is, the first hold icon h11 of the villager character that has been displayed on the first stage hs1 so far starts moving toward the pedestal hs0 in the variable icon display area CIS, and is displayed on the second stage hs2 so far. Further, the second hold icon h12, which is the default display mode but is held in advance of the advance notice subject, has started moving toward the first stage hs1.

In FIG. 120 (A17) as well, the first decorative pattern in the central area is still stopped and displayed, but the moving animation of the hold icon ends, and as the variable icon h0, the mode a of the type of villager (a mode of standby) Icon is displayed. Further, in this example, the opponent who has previously competed is displayed as it is, and the opponent icon TI becomes the icon of the panda character. Therefore, it becomes a villager vs. a panda. However, the character of the opponent may change for each confrontation (every symbol variation display). Further, in this example, the battle is performed with the character (the villager's character) whose hold icon first changed, but the character may change each time the hold is exhausted (every shift movement). For example, there may be a case where the villager changes to the old man, the old man changes to Yoshimune, the villager changes to Yoshimune, or the old man changes to the villager. As described with reference to FIG. 118(d), if the Yoshimune vs. panda confrontation is reached, the notice icon can be acquired with a 100% probability regardless of the type of the notice icon. In addition, in the appearance area AS shown in FIG. 120(A17), No. shown in FIG. 117(A) is displayed. The "red box" notice icon YI of 2 appears.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 120 (A18), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started in the central area, and the rock-paper-scissors competition of the second mini game B is also started. Since the second rock-paper-scissors confrontation is a villager vs. panda, and the prize is the notice icon YI of “red box”, according to the expectation of acquisition shown in FIG. 118(d), there is a probability of D (40%). Can be obtained at. That is, the probability is lower than that of the first time and the villagers win with a 40% probability.

In FIG. 120 (A19-1), a rock-paper-scissors competition animation is performed by the villager character with the variable icon h0 and the panda character with the opponent icon TI, and the variable icon h0 shows the mode b (goo of the villager type). It has been changed to an icon). On the other hand, the opponent icon TI has changed to an icon of the mode d of the panda type (mode when the par is played). As a result, the panda character with the opponent icon TI wins.

In FIG. 120 (A20), the change icon h0 changes to an icon of a mode e of villager type (mode when defeated), and an opponent icon TI is a mode f of type of panda f (mode when winning). ) Icon, and on the pedestal hs0 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 120 (A21), the display mode of the villager character and the replacement animation of the default display mode are started. .. That is, the villager character, which has been the display mode of the variable icon h0, gradually disappears, and at the same time, the icon of the default display mode gradually appears. In other words, the replacement animation is a change animation of the display mode of the variable icon h0. Also, the opponent icon TI gradually disappears from the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS. Furthermore, since the player has lost the Janken confrontation, it is not possible to acquire the "red box" notice icon YI displayed in the appearance area AS, and in FIG. 120 (A21), the notification icon YI appears together with the frame surrounding the appearance area AS. The area AS itself is gradually faded out to the right end of the screen, and the notice icon YI of “red box” is gradually disappeared from the screen. In FIG. 120 (a22), the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS displays the variable icon h0 in the default display mode, and nothing is displayed on the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS. Absent.

In FIG. 120 (23), the variable display of the symbols ends, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol in the central area is a combination of missing decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 4”- The "decoration 7") is stopped and displayed, and the second upper left decorative design is also stopped and displayed with the same combination of lost decorative designs.

In FIG. 120 (A24), the pre-reading notice target hold, which has been the first hold so far, is exhausted, and the symbol variation display that is the pre-reading subject change is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 120 (A24), both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol have started variable display, and the pedestal hs0 in the variable icon display area CIS has a default display mode. The variable icon h0 of is displayed. It should be noted that there is no single hold icon, and “0” is displayed for both the second hold number displays of special figure 1 and special figure 2.

In FIG. 120 (A25), a conversation notice as a normal notice is started on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It should be noted that, while other effects are not being performed during the period during which the mini game B is being performed, even during the period during which the mini game B is being performed, other effects such as a conversation notice may also be performed. Good. The conversation notice here is the same as the conversation notice shown in FIGS. 16(10) to 16(12). That is, when the conversation announcement is started, the lord's conversation image CI1 in which the character display of "chance" is displayed together with the lord's character is displayed in the central area. The display of the conversation image CI1 of the lord is the first stage of the conversation notice. Moreover, the conversation image CI1 of this lord is overlapped with the first decorative design, and the first decorative design is more difficult to visually recognize than in the case where the first decorative design is not overlapped. On the other hand, the conversation image CI1 of the lord does not overlap the notice icon YI displayed in stock, and the notice icon YI is displayed in the foreground. That is, the notice icon YI continuously displayed in the stock area overlaps the front side of a part of the palace's conversation image CI1 even though it is displayed before the lord's conversation image CI1.

Even in the display of the notice effect performed using the entire screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L (for example, the effect display of super reach, etc.), the notice icon YI does not overlap the notice display and is in stock. It may continue to be displayed. On the contrary, the display of the notice effect performed using the entire screen may be overlapped and may be temporarily hidden. For example, if the notice icon YI is a notice effect display to be used, the notice icon YI is continuously displayed in stock without being overlapped. Further, also in the screen for user customization during pattern change shown in FIG. 68 (93) or the like, the notice icon YI may be overlapped by the bar display VB for volume adjustment, or conversely, volume adjustment. You may overlap with the bar display VB for. Further, the notice icon YI may be overlapped by the display relating to various errors and the display relating to the warning described with reference to FIGS. 114 to 116, or conversely, the notice icon YI may be overlapped with the display relating to the error and the display relating to the warning. You can wrap it. For example, when the importance of the error or the warning is low or the relation with the wrongdoing is low, the display of the notice icon YI has priority, and the notice icon YI is not overlapped but is continuously displayed in stock. Good.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 120 (A26), the conversation notice is updated. In the conversation notice, the pal's conversation image CI1 is reduced and displayed below the display position of the second decorative design, and the grandpa's conversation image CI2 is displayed along with the grandfather character's operation promotion notification image. The operation promotion notification image is an image that prompts the user to operate the chance button 136 within the operation valid period, a button image 136a simulating the chance button 136, and a remaining time display meter MT indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period. It is composed by. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 120 (A26), the operation valid period has not started, and even if the chance button 136 is operated, the corresponding display is not performed. The first decorative pattern is hidden by the grandpa's conversation image CI2, but the notice icon YI displayed in stock is displayed in front of the grandpa's conversation image CI2 and hidden by the grandpa's conversation image CI2. It has not been.

Eventually, the operation valid period is started, and the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 120 (A27) is shown in a display mode when a certain amount of time has elapsed after the operation valid period was started.

The timing of FIG. 120 (A28) is within the operation valid period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing.

121 is a diagram showing a continuation of the effect example shown in FIG. 120 step by step and a diagram showing a modified example of the effect example.

In FIG. 121 (A29) continued from FIG. 120 (A28), in response to the chance button 136 being operated within the operation valid period, the old conversation image CI2 is changed from the operation promotion notification image to the reach effect. It has been changed to the display of "Reach!" to announce that it will be started. The notice character display such as "Let's reach!" may be displayed on condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or the operation valid period has elapsed without operating the chance button 136. It may be displayed even in the case of doing.

In the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 121 (A30-1), the conversation image CI1 of the lord and the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather are erased, the conversation notice ends, and the first decorative pattern becomes easy to see. There is.

In FIG. 121 (A31-1), the reach effect is started, and the “decoration 6” fluctuates in each of the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. Eventually, the notice icon YI displayed in stock in the reach state is used. That is, as shown in FIG. 121 (A32), the notice icon YI of the mode a in which the box is closed is changed to the mode d in which the box is open when used, and the box icon An animation in which the notice YH pops out from the inside is displayed. The notice display YH appearing here is No. 1 shown in FIG. 117(b). 7 is a red notice display of "red change", and the "red change" notice display indicates that the display mode of the hold icon, the variable icon, etc. is changed in two steps. It should be noted that before the notice icon YI is used, that is, before the box is opened, an effect of giving advance notice of the box opening (for example, an animation effect in which the box vibrates rattling) may be performed. In addition, when such an effect is performed, the box may or may not be actually opened.

In FIG. 121 (A33), the used notice icon YI disappears, and the red “red change” notice display YH is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In FIG. 121 (A34), the variable icon change animation using the advance notice display YH is started. In FIG. 121 (A34), the notice display YH of “red change” is changed to the light ball YHb in the right symbol display area 208c. In FIG. 121 (A35), the light ball YHb flies toward the variable icon h0 and hits the variable icon h0. In FIG. 121 (A36), the display mode of the variable icon h0, which is the default display mode before the animation starts after the variable icon change animation ends, is displayed as No. 119 of FIG. It has changed to the blue display mode described in 3. That is, the display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed to the normal notification display mode.

On the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 121 (37), the display of the normal reach effect is displayed. The variable icon h0 that has changed to the blue display mode continues to be displayed. In FIG. 121 (A38), the normal reach effect ends, and "decoration 5" that is not "decoration 6" swings in the middle symbol display area 208b. That is, the combination of the decorative symbols and the lost symbols is fluctuating and fluctuating.

In FIG. 121 (A39), the combination of “decoration 6”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 6” is stopped and displayed, and in FIG. 121 (A40), it is fixedly displayed. The variable icon h0 changed to the blue display mode continues to be displayed until the fixed display is started, and disappears when the fixed display is started. The change icon h0 may disappear before the confirmation display.

Next, a modified example of the effect examples shown in FIGS. 120(a1) to 121(a40) described above will be described. Hereinafter, the description will be centered on the differences from the effect examples described so far, and the description of the overlapping points may be omitted.

The first modified example is the same until FIG. 120 (A7), and as shown in FIG. 121 (A8-2-1) instead of FIG. 120 (A8-1), in the first modified example, , The character of the villager with the change icon h0 is the mode b when the goo is put out, whereas the character of Panda with the opponent icon TI is the mode d when the par is put out, and the villager with the change icon h0 is Will lose the character. In FIG. 121 (A8-2-2), the change icon h0 changes to an icon of a villager type mode e (mode when defeated), and an opponent icon TI is a panda type mode f (win). The state is changed to the icon of (the mode when it is done), and a defeat production (an animation that makes you sad about losing) is being performed.

In FIG. 121 (A8-2-3) in which the first decorative pattern is being displayed in variation, the notice icon YI displayed in the appearance area AS is the appearance area because the villager character of the variation icon h0 lost. After disappearing from the AS, both the villager character with the variable icon h0 and the panda character with the opponent icon TI are performing the standby animation (default animation). As a result, the notice icon YI is not displayed in the stock area SS.

In FIG. 121 (A8-2-4), the variable display of the symbols is finished, and the combination of the decorative patterns of the lost is stopped and displayed. In FIG. 120 (A8-2-5), the combination of the decorative patterns of the lost is stopped. The villager character, which is being displayed (confirmed display) and has the variable icon h0, gradually disappears into the pedestal hs0 by the erasing animation. In FIG. 121 (A8-2-6) also, the stop icon is being displayed (during confirmation display), and the variation icon h0 has completely disappeared.

Then, similarly to FIGS. 119 (A16) to FIG. 120 (A19-1), the second rock-paper-scissors confrontation is performed, and the character of the villager with the variable icon h0 loses even in the second rock-paper-scissors confrontation. In FIG. 121 (A8-2-7), as in the case of FIG. 121 (A8-2-2), the defeat effect of the character of the villager of the change icon h0 is performed. In FIG. 121 (A8-2-8), as in the case of FIG. 120 (A21), the replacement animation of the display mode of the villager character and the default display mode is started, and the opponent icon TI gradually disappears. Go Further, the notice icon YI of "red box" is gradually disappearing from the screen together with the appearance area AS. Eventually, as shown in FIG. 121 (A8-2-9), after the variable display of the patterns is finished and the combination of the decorative symbols that are lost is stopped and displayed, in FIG. 121 (A8-2-10), the prefetching is performed. The symbol variation display, which is the subject variation, has been started.
The first modified example described above is an example in which the mini game B is a so-called gasse.

Next, the second modification will be described. In FIG. 121 (A22), if the stocked notice icon YI is used, the notice icon YI is changed to the mode d (the box is opened). However, in the second modification, the operation of the chance button 136 is performed. Will be involved.

The second modification is the same up to FIG. 121 (A 31-1), and FIG. 121 (A 31-2-1) is the state in which the reach effect is started, as in FIG. 121 (A 31-1). Is. When the reach effect is started, in this second modified example, as shown in FIG. 121 (A 31-2-2), an operation promotion notification image is displayed on the left side of the stocked notice icon YI. The operation promotion notification image here is also an image for prompting the user to operate the chance button 136 within the operation valid period, and a button image 136a imitating the chance button 136 and a remaining time display indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period. It is composed of a meter MT and. The timing shown in FIG. 121 (A31-2-2) is before the start of the operation valid period, and the remaining time display meter MT may not be displayed before the start of the operation valid period. It may be displayed at the same time as the start of.

The operation valid period is started at the timing of FIG. 121 (A 31-2-3), and the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 121 (A 31-2-4) shows a certain amount after the operation valid period starts. It is shown in a display mode when time has elapsed.

The timing of FIG. 121 (A31-2-5) is within the operation valid period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. In response to the chance button 136 being operated within the operation valid period, in FIG. 121 (A 31-2-6), the notice icon YI, which is the mode a in which the box is closed, is An animation (box opening animation) in which the advance notice display YH pops out of the box is displayed by changing to the open display mode d. Subsequent examples are the same as the examples in FIG.

Here, the operation promotion notification image composed of the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT may be hidden after the remaining time display meter MT becomes 0, or may not be displayed at the time of operating the chance button 136. It may be displayed. Also, the deletion animation of the operation promotion notification image may be started or executed at the same time as the box opening animation, the deletion animation may be started or executed first, or the box opening animation may be started first. It may be executed.

Note that the change of the notice icon YI to the mode d, which is the display mode in which the box is opened, may be executed on the condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or may be operated without operating the chance button 136. It may also be executed when the valid period has elapsed. Further, in the configuration that is executed even when the operation valid period has elapsed without operating the chance button 136, the box opening animation may be changed depending on whether the chance button 136 is operated within the operation valid period. Good. Alternatively, the box opening animation may be the same animation regardless of whether or not the chance button 136 is operated during the operation valid period. Furthermore, the change of the notice icon YI to the mode d may be executed only when the chance button 136 is operated within the operation valid period.

FIG. 122 is a diagram showing a third modified example to a sixth modified example of the effect examples of FIGS. 120(a1) to 121(a40).

In the third modification, the notice icon YI is not the “box” icon but the No. shown in FIG. 117(a). It is the icon of the "button" of No. 5. This "button" icon may be displayed in the appearance area AS from the beginning, may be an icon changed from another icon in the appearance area AS, or may be an icon changed from another icon in the stock area. It may be a changed icon.

The advance notice icon YI of “button” shown in FIG. 122 (A31-3-1) is an icon of the mode a indicating that even if the chance button 136 is operated, there is no remaining time display meter. .. That is, it is the mode of only the button 136a.

In FIG. 122 (A 31-3-2), the form of the “button” notice icon YI is changed to the form b in which the remaining time display meter MT is added. However, the remaining time display meter MT is in full display, which is before the start of the operation valid period. The remaining time display meter MT may not be displayed.

The operation valid period is started in FIG. 122 (A 31-3-3), and the remaining time display meter MT is slightly reduced in FIG. 122 (A 31-3-4).

The timing of FIG. 122 (A31-3-5) is within the operation valid period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. In response to the chance button 136 being operated within the operation valid period, in FIG. 122 (A31-3-6), the form of the “button” notice icon YI is the display form of the effect image (smoke image). The effect image (smoke image) disappears and the red “red change” notice display appears in FIG. The change in the form of the notice icon YI after the chance button 136 is operated is the display of an animation (animation after operation). Subsequent examples are the same as the examples in FIG.

The change of the "button" notice icon YI to the display mode of the effect image (smoke image) may be performed on condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or the chance button 136 is operated. Alternatively, it may be executed even when the operation valid period has elapsed. Further, in the configuration that is executed even when the operation valid period has elapsed without operating the chance button 136, the post-operation animation may be changed depending on whether the chance button 136 has been operated within the operation valid period. Good. Alternatively, the post-operation animation may be the same animation regardless of whether the chance button 136 is operated during the operation valid period. Furthermore, the change of the notice icon YI to the mode d may be executed only when the chance button 136 is operated within the operation valid period.

In the fourth modified example, the notice display changes the display mode of the hold icon instead of the variable icon in parallel with the progress of the mini game.

The fourth modification is the same until FIG. 120 (A 18), and FIG. 122 (A 19-2-1) is the same as FIG. 120 (A 19-1) in the rock-paper-scissors battle of the mini game B. The panda character with the opponent icon TI has won. In FIG. 122 (A 19-2-2), the notice icon YI displayed in stock is used while the mini game B is still continuing. That is, the notice icon YI of the form a in which the box is closed is changed to the form d in which the box is open, and an animation in which the notice YH pops out of the box is displayed. The notice display YH appearing here is No. 1 shown in FIG. 117(b). 6 is a notice display of "change" in the default color of 6, and is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, and the hold icon change animation using the notice display YH is started.

In FIG. 122 (A 19-2-3), as in the case of FIG. 120 (A 20), the defeat effect of the character of the villager of the change icon h0 is performed. Further, in FIG. 122 (A 19-2-3), the notice icon YI used in the middle of the mini game B disappears in the middle of the mini game B, and the default icon “change” is displayed by the hold icon change animation. The notice display YH of No. changes to a light ball YHb in the right symbol display area 208c as shown in FIG. It flies toward the eye and hits the first hold icon h11.

In FIG. 122 (A 19-2-4), in the mini game B, while the losing character of the villager character continues, the hold icon change animation ends, and the first hold icon in the default display mode before the animation starts. The display mode of h11 is No. 1 in FIG. The display mode is changed to the white blinking display mode described in 2. That is, the display mode of the hold icon h11 representing the hold of the pre-reading notice target is changed to the display form of the pre-reading notice. After that, as in FIG. 120 (A21), the replacement animation of the display mode of the villager character and the default display mode is started, and the opponent icon TI gradually disappears. Further, the notice icon YI of “red box” is gradually disappearing from the screen together with the appearance area AS. Eventually, the symbol variation display is ended, and after the combination of the missing decorative symbols is stopped and displayed, the symbol variation display which is the prefetch target variation is started.

In the fifth modified example, the notice display changes the combination mode of the stop symbols of the first decorative symbol.

The fifth modification is the same up to FIG. 120 (A18), and FIG. 122 (A19-3-1) is the same as FIG. 120 (A19-1) in the rock-paper-scissors battle of the mini game B. The panda character with the opponent icon TI has won. In FIG. 122 (A 19-3-2), while the mini game B is still continuing, the notice icon YI which is displayed in stock is used. That is, the notice icon YI of the form a in which the box is closed is changed to the form d in which the box is open, and an animation in which the notice YH pops out of the box is displayed. The notice display YH appearing here is No. 1 shown in FIG. 117(b). This is a look-ahead notice display of "12th chance" and is once displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. The "look-ahead" look-ahead notice display here is a display for giving notice of the occurrence of a look-ahead notice in which the combination of chance eyes is definitely displayed when the first decorative symbol is finally confirmed.

In FIG. 122 (A 19-3-3), the used notice icon YI disappears, and the notice display YH of the “chance eye” is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. As shown in FIG. 122 (A 19-3-4), the notice display YH of the “chance eye” is displayed on the right symbol display area 208c for a while after the box of the notice icon YI is opened (after it appears). Is displayed in. On the other hand, since the player has lost the rock-paper-scissors showdown, the replacement animation of the display mode of the villager character and the default display mode is started, and the opponent icon TI gradually disappears. Further, the notice icon YI of “red box” is gradually disappearing from the screen together with the appearance area AS. In FIG. 122 (A 19-3-5), the variable display of the first decorative symbol changes from high speed change to low speed change. In this example, the variation display of the first decorative pattern is changed at a low speed, and then the chance eye digestion effect is started, but the chance eye digestion effect is started immediately after the notice display YH of the “chance eye” appears. May be done. As shown in FIG. 122 (A 19-3-6), since the variable display of the first decorative symbol becomes a low-speed variation, the notice display YH of the “chance eye” is the light ball YHb in the right symbol display area 208c. Has changed to. In FIG. 122 (A 19-3-7), the ball of light YHb flies toward the first decorative symbol that is changing at a low speed, and hits the decorative symbol in the middle symbol display area 208b. In FIG. 122 (A 19-3-8), the effect image EF2 is displayed on all the three decorative patterns that are changing slowly, and in the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 122 (A 19-3-9). , The first decorative pattern is shaking and fluctuating in "decoration 1"-"decoration 3"-"decoration 5" which is the chance. The chances of "decoration 1"-"decoration 3"-"decoration 5" are "decoration 2"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 6" and "decoration 3"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 7". Similar to the chance item, the pre-reading target variation (next symbol variation display) is a weak chance item that is relatively hard to hit big, and a strong chance item that is relatively easy to hit is “decoration 7”-“decoration 1”. -"Decoration 1", "decoration 3"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 8", "decoration 4"-"decoration 2"-"decoration 8". In FIG. 122 (A 19-3-10), an effect image EF3 for notifying that the chance eyes of “decoration 1”, “decoration 3”, and “decoration 5” are stopped and displayed is displayed. In 3-11), the chances of "decoration 1"-"decoration 3"-"decoration 5" are stopped and displayed.

In the sixth modified example, No. 1 in FIG. In the notice display YH of "Chance" of 2, an example in which the look-ahead notice that the pending change symbol is temporarily stopped is combined with the medium symbol of the first decorative symbol described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 122 (A 19-4-1) shows a state in which the panda character of the opponent icon TI has won in the rock-paper-scissors battle of the mini game B. In FIG. 122 (A 19-4-2), the reach effect is started with the first decorative symbol, and the “decoration 6” fluctuates in each of the left symbol display region 208a and the right symbol display region 208c. It should be noted that the display mode of the villager character has changed to the default display mode since the player has lost the rock-paper-scissors confrontation, and the opponent icon TI has disappeared. Further, the notice icon YI of “red box” disappears along with the appearance area AS. Eventually, as shown in FIG. 122 (A 19-4-3), the notice icon YI is used in the reach state, and the notice display YH of “chance” appears. That is, the "chance" notice display YH has appeared after the start of the reach, and the "chance" notice display YH here is a normal notice that increases the reliability of the jackpot in the currently displayed symbol variation display. Equivalent to a kind of. The currently displayed symbol variation display is a symbol variation display one time before the symbol variation display of the look-ahead notice subject variation, and the "chance" notice display YH is different from the symbol variation display of the look-ahead notice subject variation. It corresponds to a normal notice about the variable display of symbols. After the notice display YH of “chance” is displayed, the used notice icon YI disappears as shown in FIG. 122 (A 19-4-4). The notice icon YI may disappear with an erasing animation, or may disappear in an instant without using the erasing animation. Further, in FIG. 122 (A 19-4-5), the notice display YH of “chance” disappears in the reach state.

Then, in FIG. 122 (A 19-4-6), the pending change symbol HHZ is temporarily stopped in the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol. The hold change symbol HHZ has a red symbol and a blue symbol, and when the red hold variable symbol is temporarily stopped, the display mode of any of the displayed hold icons (here, the first hold icon h11) is displayed. When the blue hold pending change pattern is temporarily stopped by two steps, the display mode of the hold icon is promoted by one step. In FIG. 122 (A 19-4-6), the blue pending change pattern HHZ is temporarily stopped, and after that, the pending change animation as shown in FIG. 106 (D17) is started, and in the default display mode. The certain first hold icon h11 changes to the second display mode (white flashing display mode). In addition, the pending change symbol HHZ is a look-ahead notice regarding the first pending icon h11.

FIG. 123 is a diagram showing seventh to tenth modified examples of the effect examples of FIGS. 120(a1) to 121(a40).

The seventh modified example is the same up to FIG. 121 (A30-1), and FIG. 123 (A31-4-1) is the prefetching announcement target variation, as in FIG. 121 (A31-1). The reach effect has been started with the variable display of symbols. In FIG. 123 (A 31-4-2), the advance notice icon YI is used after the start of the reach, and the notice icon YI of FIG. The notice display YH of "Chance" of 2 appears. The notice display YH of the “chance” that appears here is a normal notice that increases the reliability of the big hit in the symbol variation display that was the variation of the prefetching announcement. It should be noted that after the notice display YH of "chance" is displayed, the used notice icon YI disappears as shown in FIG. 123 (A 31-4-3).

The eighth modification is an example in which one of the hold icons changes to the opponent icon TI. That is, as shown in FIG. 123 (a 3-2-1), when a hold (third hold) that is a target for prefetching notice is won, a hold icon indicating a hold prior to the prefetching notice pending is displayed as an opponent. It changes to the icon TI. In addition, the hold icon representing the hold prior to the look-ahead notice target hold also changes for the character (here, a villager character) who fights the character of the opponent icon TI. In the eighth modified example, the first hold icon h11 is changed to the opponent icon TI. That is, the icon has changed to the type of panda character. Also, the second hold icon h12 has changed to an icon of the type of villager character. In FIG. 123 (A3-2-2), the variable display of the symbols is finished, and in FIG. 123 (A3-2-3), the movement animation of the hold icon is started and the right base of the effect icon display area DIS is displayed. The effect image EF1 is displayed on the icon bIr. As a result, as shown in FIG. 123 (A 3-2-4), the variable icon h0 becomes the opponent icon TI, and the first hold icon h11 causes the character (here, the villager) who fights the character of the opponent icon TI. Character) is an icon. An appearance area AS surrounded by a frame appears in the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS, and a notice icon YI that can be acquired when winning the rock-paper-scissors competition of the mini game B is displayed therein. Has been done.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 123 (a 3-2-5), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, and the rock-paper-scissors confrontation of the mini game B is also started. In FIG. 123 (A3-2-6), a rock-paper-scissors confrontation animation is performed by the panda character of the opponent icon TI which is the variable icon h0 and the villager character of the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11. Villager character wins. In the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 123 (A3-2-7), an animation to celebrate that the character of the villager of the first hold icon h11 has won has started, and the subsequent FIG. In 2-8), the stock animation of the notice icon YI displayed in the appearance area AS is started. In FIG. 123 (A3-2-9), the notice icon YI is displayed at the stock position.

In FIG. 123 (A3-2-10), the mini game B ends, and at the first stage hs1 of the hold icon display area HIS, the display mode of the villager character and the replacement animation of the default display mode are started. There is. Further, on the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS, the replacement animation of the panda character icon and the variable icon in the default display mode is started. Each of the replacement animations here may be an animation that returns to the display mode before changing to a villager character or a panda character, or a different display mode from the display mode before the change. It may be a replacement animation. For example, the display mode before the change may be the default display mode, or the display mode may be replaced with the display mode of the prefetch notice or the normal notice. In FIG. 123 (A3-2-11), both the variable icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 are in the default display mode. Further, the notice icon YI remains displayed in stock. This notice icon YI is a notice icon in which the hold to be the second hold in FIG. 123 (A3-2-11) is a prefetch notice target, and is used during execution of the symbol variation display corresponding to the second hold. .. However, it may be used in the currently displayed symbol variation display, or may be used during execution of the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold, which was the icon of the villager character.

The ninth modification is the same as the eighth modification halfway. That is, FIG. 123 (A 3-2-7) is the same, and FIG. 123 (A 3-2-8b1) is also the same as FIG. 123 (A 3-2-8). In this ninth modified example, the notice icon YI that has come out of the appearance area AS is once displayed in a large size, and then moves to the hold icon display area HIS without moving to the stock area SS, and the default display mode until then is displayed. That is, the second hold icon h12 representing the target hold of the prefetch notice is replaced and the stock display is performed in the hold icon display area HIS (FIG. 123 (A 3-2-8b2) to FIG. 123 (A 3 -2-8b3)). It should be noted that the display mode of the second hold icon h12 can be considered to have changed to the display mode of the advance notice icon YI. Further, the notice icon YI that has emerged from the appearance area AS may be moved into the stock area SS and then to the hold icon display area HIS. The hold icon display area HIS may also serve as the stock area SS.

In FIG. 123 (a 3-2-8b4), the notice is released and the notice icon YI replaced with the second hold icon h12 is changed to the change icon h0 and displayed on the pedestal hs0 in the change icon display area CIS. ing. In FIG. 123 (A 3-2-8b5), the notice icon YI, which is the variation icon h0, is used on the pedestal hs0 and changes to the mode d in which the box is opened. The notice display YH of "Chance" of 2 appears. Since FIG. 123 (A3-2-8b5) is before the start of the reach, the notice display YH of the “chance” here is that the reach effect more than the normal reach is performed in the currently displayed symbol variation display. The notice will be displayed.

It should be noted that the notice icon YI is moved to the pedestal hs0 and is replaced with the change icon h0 while being displayed in the appearance area AS, or once displayed in the stock area SS, while the pattern change display of the pre-reading notice reserved is being displayed. Alternatively, it may be moved to the hold icon display area HIS and replaced with the hold icon of the read-ahead notice subject hold during the symbol variation display or the stop display prior to the symbol change display of the read-ahead notice subject hold.

Further, the notice icon YI may be used in the state of the hold icon, and the notice display YH of the prefetch notice may appear. In this case as well, the notice icon YI remains displayed in the appearance area AS, or once is displayed in the stock area SS, and then is displayed in the symbol variation display or the stop display before the symbol variation display of the prefetching notice object pending. During this, the hold icon may be moved to the hold icon display area HIS and replaced with the hold icon of the prefetching notice target hold.

The tenth modified example is partially the same as the eighth modified example. That is, FIG. 123 (A 3-2-7) is the same, and FIG. 123 (A 3-2-8c1) is also the same as FIG. 123 (A 3-2-8). In this tenth modification as well, the notice icon YI that has emerged from the appearance area AS is once displayed in a large size, and then moves to the hold icon display area HIS without moving to the stock area SS. Then, in the tenth modification, the notice icon YI is replaced with the first hold icon h11 that is the icon of the villager who played the mini game B. That is, a hold icon different from the hold icon representing the prefetching notice target hold is replaced. In some cases, a plurality of notice icons may be acquired, and in that case, the reserved icons may be replaced by the number of acquired icons. That is, one notice icon YI may be replaced with one hold icon. Alternatively, a plurality of notice icons Yi are collectively replaced with one hold icon, and a plurality of notice icons replaced with the hold icons are shown with numbers representing the plurality of numbers, or the hold icons are The plurality of notice icons replaced with may be displayed in a color representing the number of the plurality of notice icons. Furthermore, the notice icon YI may be replaced with the change icon h0.

In FIG. 123 (A3-2-8c3), the character "I did it" in the animation celebrating the victory of the mini game remains, but the first hold icon h11 of the villager's icon is replaced with the notice icon YI. ing. The panda character of the opponent icon TI, which is the variable icon h0, is still in the mode e, and the character “I did it” disappears at the timing of changing to the mode a. In addition, the character "Yatane" may disappear at the same time when the first hold icon h11 of the villager's icon is replaced with the notice icon YI, or before the first hold icon h11 of the villager's icon is replaced with the notice icon YI. It may disappear. For example, it may disappear at the timing of FIG. 123 (a 3-2-8c2).

In FIG. 123 (A3-2-8c4), the notice icon YI replaced with the first hold icon h11 is changed to the change icon h0 and is displayed on the pedestal hs0 in the change icon display area CIS. The symbol variation display performed in FIG. 123 (3-2-8c4) is a symbol variation display before the target variation of the prefetching notice. During execution of this variable display of symbols, the animation of stocking the notice icon is started. The variation icon h0 illustrated in FIG. 123 (A3-2-8c4) is the notice icon YI, but is not the notice icon used for the variation subject to the prefetch notice. The animation that starts here is an animation that stocks the notice icon used in the target change of the prefetch notice. The variation icon h0 shown in FIG. 123 (A3-2-8c4) functions as a stock confirmation icon of the notice icon used in the subject change of the prefetch notice.

In FIG. 123 (A3-2-8c5), the display mode of the variable icon h0 changes, and the effect image EF4 is displayed to notify that the notice icon used in the subject change of the prefetch notice is stocked. It should be noted that some icon is beginning to appear faintly behind the effect image EF4. In FIG. 123 (A3-2-8c6), the effect image EF4 jumps out of the variation icon h0 and moves to the stock area SS. On the other hand, the variable icon h0 has changed to the default display mode. This default display mode is a display mode when the variable icon h0 is started to be displayed as a hold icon (third hold icon h13). That is, although the display mode has changed variously after the start of display, the display mode before the change is restored. The display may be displayed in a display mode other than the display mode before the change.

In FIG. 123 (A3-2-8c5), the effect image EF4 is displayed in the stock area SS as the notice icon YI used in the target change of the prefetch notice.

Note that the notice icon YI displayed as the first hold icon h11 shown in FIG. 123 (3-2-8c3) may be used before it becomes the variable icon. Also, the notice icon YI displayed as the first hold icon h11 is moved in the hold icon display area HIS to the second hold icon h12 indicating the prefetching notice target hold, and the notice change of the notice icon YI is performed. The display may be announced in advance. After FIG. 123 (A3-2-8c7), it continues to FIG. 120 (A22).

FIG. 124 is a diagram showing another modified example of the effect examples of FIGS. 120(a1) to 121(a40).

In the eleventh modification, the variable icon display area CIS and the effect icon display area DIS are areas dedicated to the mini game. This eleventh modification is the same until FIG. 120 (A2), and in FIG. 124 (A3-3-1), the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS disappears, and the variable icon display area CIS and the effect icon. The display area DIS is connected. Hereinafter, the area in which the variable icon display area CIS and the effect icon display area DIS are connected is collectively referred to as a mini game dedicated area MGS. In the mini-game exclusive area MGS shown in FIG. 124 (A 3-3-1), the appearance area AS that is the first area is displayed surrounded by a frame. In the variable icon display area CIS of the mini game dedicated area MGS, the panda character of the opponent icon TI is displayed in the mode a. Here, the variation icon h0 corresponding to the currently displayed symbol variation display is changed to the panda character of this opponent icon TI. In addition, at the back of the appearance area AS, there is provided an entrance/exit for allowing characters to enter and exit.

In FIG. 124 (A3-3-2), the variable display of the symbols is finished, but the panda character with the opponent icon TI continues to be displayed by the standby animation. That is, in this example, when the variation icon h0 changes to the opponent icon TI, the variation icon h0 is continuously displayed as the opponent icon TI even when the corresponding symbol variation display ends. In other words, the icon of the panda character plays the roles of both the changing icon h0 and the opponent icon TI during the variable display of symbols, but when the variable display of the symbol ends, it plays the role of only the opponent icon TI. It will be. The panda character icon only plays the role of the opponent icon TI, and the variable icon h0 may be erased.

In FIG. 124 (A3-3-3), the variable display of symbols is started, and the first hold icon h11, which is the villager's character icon displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, is directed toward the mini game exclusive area MGS. Start moving. In FIG. 124 (A3-3-4), the character icon of the villager, which has been the first hold icon h11 until now, is displayed as the change icon h0 in the change icon display area CIS of the mini game dedicated area MGS. .. On the other hand, the icon of the panda character, which was the variable icon in the previous symbol variable display, continues to be displayed as the opponent icon TI, and the rock-paper-scissors battle between the villager and the panda is started (Fig. 124 (3-3-5-5). )). When the rock-paper-scissors confrontation is started, the notice icon YI appears in the appearance area AS. The notice icon YI may appear at the same time as the start of the rock-paper-scissors confrontation, or the warning icon YI may appear before the start of the rock-paper-scissors confrontation.

In FIG. 124 (A3-3-6), the villager character of the variable icon h0 wins, and in FIG. 124 (A3-3-7), the stock animation of the notice icon YI displayed in the appearance area AS is displayed. Has been started. Also, an animation has been launched to celebrate the victory in the rock-paper-scissors showdown. In FIG. 124 (A3-3-8), the notice icon YI is displayed in the stock area SS, and in FIG. 124 (A3-3-9), the animation celebrating the victory in the rock-paper-scissors confrontation ends. When this animation ends, as shown in FIG. 124 (A3-3-10), the icon of the character of the villager, which is the variation icon h0, exits from the entrance provided at the back of the appearance area AS, and then the pattern. The variable display ends (FIG. 124 (A3-3-11)). The icon of the villager character, which is the variation icon h0, may exit from the doorway provided at the back of the appearance area AS after the symbol variation display ends. On the other hand, the icon of the panda character, which is the opponent icon TI, continues to be displayed until all the rock-paper-scissors battles are completed. However, there may be a case where the icon of the swordsman character is replaced on the way. The exit timing of the icon of the villager character may be the same as the symbol variable display. If the rock-paper-scissors showdown continues after this, the icon of the villager's character may be displayed in stock in the mini-game exclusive area MGS until all the rock-paper-scissors battles are completed without leaving. The opponent icon TI and/or the exiting variable icon h0 of the character may enter from the entrance/exit. Also, an animation may be performed in which the opponent icon TI exits when the mini game ends.

In the modified example shown in FIG. 124 (A 9-2-1) and FIG. 124 (A 9-2-2), the variation icon h0 is the No. 1 in FIG. It is an icon of the character of Yoshimune shown in FIG. 19, and the opponent icon TI is an icon of the character of panda. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 118(d), a 100% chance of winning the rock-paper-scissors confrontation, and in this example, the notice icon of "rainbow box" that confirms the big hit is displayed in the appearance area AS. In FIG. 124 (A 9-2-2), the symbol variation display is finished with the notice icon of “rainbow box” being displayed in stock. The notice icon of "rainbow box" has a high reliability of the jackpot and functions as a prefetch notice. Note that the "rainbow box" notice icon may function as a notice of the change.

In addition, in the box-shaped notice icon, it is advantageous for the player that the notice display (item) inside the box is "red box" rather than "box" (for example, a notice that easily develops into super reach) It is a display or a notice display with high reliability of a big hit), and the "gold box" is more advantageous to the player than the "red box". Therefore, if only the box-shaped notice icon is displayed, and whether the notice display actually appears or not depending on the color of the box-shaped notice icon, how advantageous the notice is if the notice display appears. Whether it is a display can be estimated in advance. Further, as described with reference to FIG. 117(a), since the reliability of the jackpot is determined by the color of the box-shaped notice icon, the color of the box-shaped notice icon is easy to hit the jackpot and game. This shows both the ease of obtaining a notice display that is advantageous to the user. It should be noted that depending on the display mode of the notice icon, only the ease with which an advantageous notice display is obtained may be shown, or only the ease with which a jackpot is hit may be shown.

The modified example shown in FIG. 124 (A3-4) is an example in which the hold icon of the prefetching notice target hold may also be used in the mini game. That is, in FIG. 124 (A3-4), the third hold icon h13 representing the look-ahead notice target hold has also changed to a villager character icon, and participates in the rock-paper-scissors confrontation. As a result, if you win the rock-paper-scissors confrontation, you may get the notice display used during the execution of the symbol variation display of the look-ahead notice object pending. Further, the hold icon representing the hold behind the prefetching notice target hold may be changed to an icon that allows participation in the mini game. In this case, if the hold icon of the prefetching notice pending is changed to a fluctuation animation and a mini game is played, until the mini game ends, or until the variable display of the prefetching notice pending is finished, the mini It may be in the form of an icon that allows participation in the game, and thereafter, the original display form may be restored. In addition, after the mini game (for example, mini game B) ends, the icon does not change to a dedicated icon that allows participation in the mini game (for example, mini game B), but a new mini game (of the same type) Even if it changes to a dedicated icon that can participate in a mini game (for example, mini game B) or a different type of mini game (for example, mini game A) Good.

The modification shown in FIG. 124 (3-5) is an example in which the hold icon displayed as an icon that can participate in the mini game is not limited to one type of icon. That is, in FIG. 124 (A3-4), the first hold icon h11 is displayed as an icon of the type of the grandfather, and the second hold icon h12 is No. shown in FIG. 119(a). It is displayed with icons of 18 kinds of villager characters.

In the modification example shown in FIG. 124 (A3-6), the hold icon that is displayed first as an icon capable of participating in the mini game is displayed as an icon also capable of participating in the mini game. In addition, it is an example in which at least a part of the hold icon to be digested later may overlap. That is, in FIG. 124 (A3-6), the first hold icon h11 is No. 1 shown in FIG. 19 Yoshimune character type icons are displayed, and the second hold icon h12 is also displayed as the same Yoshimune character type icon. 21 The hold icon h12 overlaps the front leg of the Yoshimune character icon.

Further, the relationship of this overlap may be reversed, or a hold icon having a high reliability of a big hit may be displayed in front. Further, the displayed hold icon may indicate the degree of expectation of the prefetch target variation. For example, when two holding icons of the Yoshimune character are displayed, it may be easier to make a big hit due to the change in the prefetch target when two holding icons are displayed.

In the modified examples shown in FIG. 124 (A 31-5-1) to FIG. 124 (A 31-5-3), the cursor CS is used for the notice icon YI displayed in stock. FIG. 124 (A31-5-1) shows the same state as FIG. 121 (A31-1), and in FIG. 124 (A31-5-2), the notice of the mode a which is the display mode in which the box is closed. The display of the cursor CS points to the icon YI. The display of the cursor CS is a display for notifying that the notice icon YI will be used. After FIG. 124 (A31-5-3), it continues to FIG. 121 (A33). When the cursor CS indicates, the notice icon YI may be always used or may not be used. In addition, an effect that gives advance notice that the box will open (for example, an animation effect in which the box vibrates rattlingly) may be used in combination with the display of the cursor CS. Furthermore, a second modification will be shown. As shown in FIG. 121 (A 31-2-2), the display of the operation promotion notification image may be used in combination.

In FIG. 124 (A 31-5-3), the display of the cursor CS disappears, the box opening animation is displayed instead, the mode changes to the mode d which is the display mode in which the box is opened, and the notice display YH is displayed in the box. It's popping out.

In the modified examples shown in FIG. 124 (A 30-2-1) to FIG. 124 (A 30-2-4), an effect of giving advance notice of the box opening is executed. FIG. 124 (A30-2-1) shows the same state as FIG. 121 (A30-1), and in FIG. 124 (A30-2-2), the box icon displayed as the notice icon YI is An animation production that vibrates rattlingly is being executed. This animation effect fuels the possibility that the notice icon YI may be used. It should be noted that this animation effect is started before the first temporary stop is performed in the variable display of the first decorative symbol. Note that it may be started at the same time as the first temporary stop, or may be started after the first temporary stop. Further, this animation effect may be started before the reach effect is started, may be started at the same time as the reach effect, or may be started after the reach effect is started. Furthermore, this animation effect may be an animation that is always executed when the box-shaped notice icon is used, or may be an animation that may not be executed. In addition, this animation effect may be executed across the continuous symbol variable display. That is, it may be executed during the symbol fluctuation stop, or may be temporarily stopped during the symbol fluctuation stop, and this animation effect may be started when the symbol fluctuation display is restarted. Alternatively, this animation effect may be started and ended within the period of one symbol variable display and not executed across consecutive symbol variable displays.

In Fig. 124 (A30-2-3), the reach state is reached, but the animation effect in which the box icon vibrates rattlingly continues, and during this reach state, this animation effect is switched to the box open animation effect. The notice icon YI shown in FIG. 124 (A30-2-4) has changed to the mode d, which is the display mode in which the box is opened, and the notice display YH is popping out of the box. Then, it continues to FIG. 121 (A33).

The effect that gives advance notice of the box opening may be executed across the reach effects as in this example, or may not be executed across the reach effects. Also, if an effect that gives advance notice of the opening of the box is executed, the box of the notice icon YI may or may not always be opened.

In the modified examples shown in FIG. 124 (A30-3-1) to FIG. 124 (A30-3-4), a modified example of an effect of giving advance notice of the box opening is executed. In this example, the animation effect in which the box icon vibrates rattly indicates whether the timing at which the notice icon YI is used is near or far depending on the magnitude of the vibration. That is, as shown in FIG. 124 (A 30-3-2), if the vibration is weak, the timing of using the advance notice icon YI is far, and if the timing of using the advance notice icon YI is close, -3-3) It changes to strong vibration. In other words, the vibration increases as the use timing approaches. In FIG. 124 (30-30-4), the box of the notice icon YI is opened when the vibration becomes maximum, and the notice display YH pops out from the inside. Then, it continues to FIG. 121 (A33).

The degree of vibration may indicate the reliability of the advance notice icon YI being used or the advantage of the advance notice display contained therein. That is, the vibration may be increased as the reliability and the advantage are higher.

FIG. 124 (A30-3-4') shows an example in which the box of the notice icon YI has not opened even though the vibration is maximized. As described above, in the animation effect in which the icon of the box vibrates rattlingly, there is a case in which the effect of gambling is performed. The notice icon YI disappears when the lost decorative pattern is stopped and displayed.
Next, an example in which a plurality of notice icons are stocked will be described.

FIG. 125 is a stage example in which a plurality of notice icons are stocked by winning in the mini game B, and a notice display is displayed and the display form of the variable icons is changed by using the plurality of notice icons in stock. FIG.

The explanation here will be focused on the difference from the effect examples of FIG. 120 (A1) to FIG. 121 (A40) in which only one notice icon was stocked.

In FIG. 125 (I 1-1), as in the case of FIG. 120 (A 4 ), the variable display of symbols ends, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol in the central area is a combination of missing decorative symbols. (“Decoration 4”-“decoration 1”-“decoration 7”) is stopped and displayed, and the second upper left decorative pattern is also stopped and displayed with the same combination of lost decorative patterns. Both the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 shown in FIG. 125 (I 1-1) are the same as No. 1 in FIG. The icon has changed to the icon a of the type of villager described in 17. Further, the third hold icon h13 representing the target hold of the prefetching notice is the default display mode.

In FIG. 125 (I2) after the symbol variable display is started, as in FIG. 120 (A7), the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS is displayed in the right base icon bIr as the opponent icon TI, which is the type a of the panto type a. Icon is displayed, and a notice icon YI of “box” is displayed in the appearance area AS which is the first area. Further, a stock area SS that is a second area is provided on the appearance area AS, and is an area surrounded by a dotted line in FIG. The stock area SS in this example is provided with a first stock position SS1, a second stock position SS2, and a third stock position SS3, and a part of the third stock position SS3 overlaps with a part of the appearance area AS. ing.

In FIG. 125 (I3), the rock-paper-scissors showdown animation of the mini game B is performed, and the villager character of the variable icon h0 has won, as in FIG. 120 (A8-1). In FIG. 125(I4), an animation is performed to celebrate the victory of the villager character of the variable icon h0. In FIG. 125(I5), the animation is displayed in the appearance area AS. No. shown in. The first notice icon YI of “box” is displayed at the first stock position SS1 (see FIG. 125 (2)) in the stock area SS.

In FIG. 125 (A6), as in the case of FIG. 120 (A15), the variable display of the symbols is finished, the combination of the decorative symbols that are lost is being stopped (is being displayed for confirmation), and the variable icon h0 is also disappeared.

In FIG. 125 (7) after the symbol variable display is started, the second rock-paper-scissors confrontation of the mini game B is started. In addition, in the appearance area AS shown in FIG. The notice icon YI of “box” 1 is displayed. In FIG. 125 (I8), the rock-paper-scissors-faced animation of the mini game B is performed, and the villager character with the variable icon h0 has won his second win. In FIG. 125(I9), an animation is performed to celebrate the victory of the villager character with the variable icon h0. In FIG. 125(I10), the animation is displayed in the appearance area AS. No. shown in. The "box" notice icon YI of 1 is displayed in a large size once out of the appearance area AS. In the subsequent FIG. 125 (I11), the second “box” notice icon YI is displayed at the second stock position SS2 (see FIG. 125 (I2)) in the stock area SS. That is, the newly stocked notice icon YI is displayed below the previously stocked notice icon YI. The distance between the first stock position SS1 and the second stock position SS2 is less than the height of one notice icon. Note that the first stock position SS1 and the second stock position SS2 may not be provided, and stock may be carried out randomly in an empty area. Further, if the first notice icon YI (the notice icon YI stocked at the first stock position SS1) is used before the third notice icon YI is stocked (released from the stock area SS). In the case of), the third notice icon YI may be stocked at the first stock position SS1.

In FIG. 125 (I12), as in the case of FIG. 120 (A23), the variable display of symbols is finished, and the combination of the decorative symbols that are lost is stopped and displayed. In FIG. 125 (I13), as in the case of FIG. 120 (A24), the symbol variation display that is the prefetch target variation is started, and in FIG. 125 (I14-1), as in FIG. The conversation notice as is started. On the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 125 (I14-1), the palace's conversation image CI1 is displayed in the central area. The two notice icons YI in the stock area SS overlap with a part of the conversation image CI1 of the lord from the front side. After the lord's conversation image CI1 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 125 (I15), the first stocked notice icon YI (the notice icon YI stocked at the first stock position SS1) is displayed. The first notice icon YI used is changed to the mode d which is the display mode in which the box is opened, and the notice display YH of “reach” is popping out from the box. The notice display YH of this "reach" also overlaps a part of the conversation image CI1 of the lord from the front side. The notice display YH of "reach" at this timing is a display that gives a notice that the reach effect more than the normal reach is performed in the currently displayed symbol variation display.

In FIG. 125 (16), the conversation announcement is updated, as in FIG. 120 (26). In the conversation notice, the pal's conversation image CI1 is reduced and displayed below the display position of the second decorative symbol, and the grandpa's conversation image CI2 on which the operation promotion notification image is displayed together with the grandfather's character is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 120 (A26), the operation valid period has not started, and even if the chance button 136 is operated, the display corresponding thereto is not performed. The first notice icon YI, which is the display mode in which the box is opened, has not been deleted in FIG. 125 (yes 16), but has been deleted in FIG. 125 (yes 17). The notice display YH of "reach" is still displayed. Even in the same figure (17), the operation valid period has not started. As described above, the first notice icon YI may be deleted before the start of the operation valid period, but may be deleted at the same time as the start of the operation valid period, or may be deleted after the operation valid period is started. May be.

Eventually, the operation valid period is started, and the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 125 (18) is shown in a display mode when a certain amount of time has elapsed after the operation valid period was started.

The timing of FIG. 125 (B19) is within the operation valid period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing.

In FIG. 125(I20), as in FIG. 120(I20), in response to the chance button 136 being pressed within the operation valid period, the old conversation image CI2 is changed from the operation promotion notification image to the current line. It is changing to the character display of "Reach!" which announces that the reach production will start with the displayed pattern variation display. Therefore, the same thing (that the reach production is started by the currently displayed symbol variation display) is also announced by a notice (here, the grandpa's conversation image CI2) different from the notice display YH of "reach". Will be there. Further, when two types of notices are given in this way, one notice may be a notice with higher reliability than the other notice. Alternatively, the advance display YH of the “reach” displayed first may be used to notify the normal reach occurrence, and the conversation notification displayed subsequently may be used to notify the super reach occurrence. By giving such a time-series notice, it may appear that the production (reach type) is promoted. On the other hand, on the contrary, it is possible to give notice of the occurrence of super reach by the notice display YH of the “reach” displayed first, and give notice of the occurrence of normal reach in the conversation notice displayed later. ) May appear to be demoted. However, since it is a notice about reach production within the same fluctuation, whichever comes first may be better. In addition, for example, when the notice YH announces "reach" and the conversation notice displays "continue" for announcing the pseudo continuous production, the pseudo continuous notice after the reach occurs (for example, the pseudo continuous symbol stops. ) Occurs, and it is possible to give a notice until the pseudo continuous production is started.

In addition, even if a pseudo-announcement is made twice by the notice display YH and another notice within one break in the symbol variation display (the period from the start of the symbol variation to the temporary suspension of the pseudo-association), the pseudo-association is 1 It may be configured to be performed only once (that is, the temporary stop is performed once), or may be configured to generate the pseudo-repetition (temporary stop is generated) by the number of times the notice is given.

In this way, by combining the notice display YH and the notice by another effect, promotion effect and demotion effect can be performed within one symbol variation display. For example, in the pseudo continuous production, the promotion production can be performed as the number of pseudo continuous productions increases. For example, the third display mode may be announced in the first variation of the pseudo consecutive number, and the fifth display mode may be announced in the second variation of the pseudo consecutive number. It should be noted that the third display mode may be announced in the second pseudo mode change, and further, the second display mode may be announced in the second pseudo mode change as a demotion effect. Good. If it is not a pseudo-representation, in the one-time symbol variable display, a notice of the third display mode may be given first, and then a notice of the fifth display mode may be given, or conversely, first. Alternatively, the fifth display mode may be announced first, and then the third display mode may be announced.

Note that the notice character display such as "Reach!" in the old conversation image CI2 is displayed only when the chance button 136 is operated within the operation valid period. However, it may be displayed even when the operation valid period has elapsed without operating the chance button 136.

In FIG. 125 (I22), as in FIG. 121 (A30-1), the conversation image CI1 of the lord and the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather are erased, the conversation notice is ended, and the first decorative pattern is easily visible. There is. In addition, the conversation image CI1 of the lord and the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather may disappear at the same time, the conversation image CI1 of the lord displayed on the back side may disappear first, or the conversation image CI1 displayed on the front side. The conversation image CI2 of 1 may disappear first.

In FIG. 125 (I23), the reach effect is started as previously announced, and the “decoration 6” is fluctuatingly changed in each of the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. Eventually, in the reach state, the second stocked notice icon YI is used. That is, as shown in FIG. 125 (I 24), the box of the notice icon YI opens, and the notice display YH of “change” pops out from the inside. In this example, the notice icons YI are used in the order in which the notice icons YI are stocked, but the notice icons YI may be used regardless of the stock order. For example, the notice icon YI in which the notice display YH having a high advantage appears may be used earlier or may be used later. Further, the higher the reliability depending on the type of the notice icon YI, the higher the reliability may be used, or the higher the reliability may be. In addition, here, the notice display YH of the "change" that has appeared appears on the right pattern that is temporarily stopped (here, it is overlapped with "decoration 6", and it is more difficult to see than when it does not overlap. The notice display YH of “change” overlaps the right pattern from the front side. This is not the notice display YH released from the notice icon YI stocked at the first stock position SS1 but at the second stock position SS2. It is related to the notice display YH released from the notice icon Y2 that has been stocked.

In FIG. 125 (i25), the used notice icon YI disappears, and the “change” notice display YH is still displayed. In the succeeding FIG. 125 (B26), the variable icon change animation using the advance notice display YH is started. In FIG. 125 (26), the advance notice YH of “change” is changed to the light ball YHb while the state of overlapping with the temporarily stopped right symbol is maintained. In FIG. 125(I27), the light ball YHb flies toward the variable icon h0 and hits the variable icon h0. Also here, the position of the notice icon YI from which the notice display YH has been emitted affects, and the light ball YHb is changed at a position different from the example shown in FIG. 121 (A34) to FIG. 121 (A35). It flies toward the change icon h0 along the trajectory. However, even if the position of the notice icon YI from which the notice display YH is released is different, the notice display YH is released to the same position (for example, the position of the “change” notice display YH shown in FIG. 121 (A32)), It may be changed to the light ball YHb at the position and fly toward the variable icon h0 on the same trajectory.

In FIG. 125 (I 28), the display mode of the variable icon h0, which was the default display mode before the animation started after the fluctuation icon change animation ended, is No. 119 of FIG. The display mode is changed to the white blinking display mode described in 2. That is, the display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed to the normal notification display mode. After that, it continues to FIG.

In the example shown in FIG. 125, the notice display YH of “reach” is displayed to notify that the reach effect is to be performed, and the reach effect is actually started, but from the symbol variation display in which the reach effect is not started. Also, in the symbol variation display in which the reach effect is started, the jackpot symbol aspect is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed, which results in that, as a result, the symbol variation display in which the notice display YH of "reach" is not displayed, In the symbol variable display in which the notice display YH of "reach" is displayed, the jackpot pattern mode is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed.

FIG. 126 is a diagram showing a modification of the effect example shown in FIG. 125 and an effect example of the mini game A of Yoshimune treasure acquisition notice.

In the modified example shown in FIG. 126 (i 14-2-1) to FIG. 126 (i 14-2-1), the state shown in FIG. 126 (i 14-2-1) is as shown in FIG. 125 (i 14-1). 126 (I 14-2-2), the display of the cursor CS points to the notice icon YI to be used. Here, the display of the cursor CS points to the notice icon YI which is stocked at the first stock position SS1 (see FIG. 125 (2)). The display of the cursor CS also overlaps with the conversation image CI1 of the lord from the front side.

In FIG. 126 (I 14-2-3), the display of the cursor CS disappears, and the box of the notice icon YI stocked at the first stock position SS1 that the display of the cursor CS had pointed until then opens, and The notice display YH of "reach" is popping out from the inside.

The box of the notice icon YI may be opened by operating the chance button 136. In this case, the operation promotion notification image that prompts the user to operate the chance button 136 may be displayed, or may be the back button that is not displayed. Further, the display position of the cursor CS is operated by the up and down keys of the cross key 181a so that the player can select the notice icon YI, and the notice icon YI selected by the cursor CS is opened by operating the chance button 136. You may Alternatively, the notice icon YI that is not used may be indicated by the cursor CS. Further, the cursor CS may be displayed or not displayed. In this case, when the cursor CS is displayed, it may be easier to finally confirm and display the big hit symbol, or conversely, it is more difficult to finally confirm and display the big hit symbol. Yes, there is no difference between the two. After that, it continues to FIG.

In the modified example shown in FIG. 126 (i 14-3-1) to FIG. 126 (i 14-3-1), the state shown in FIG. 126 (i 14-3-1) is as shown in FIG. 125 (i 14-1). 126 (I 14-3-2), two displays of the cursor CS are displayed, and both of the notice icons YI are pointed to. As a result, it is not known which of the notice icons YI is used first.

In FIG. 126 (I 14-3-3), both of the displays of the two cursors CS disappear, the box of the notice icon YI that has been stocked at the first stock position SS1 opens, and the notice of “reach” is displayed from the box. The display YH is popping out.

In the modified example shown in FIG. 126 (i 14-4-1) to FIG. 126 (i 14-4-1), the state shown in FIG. 126 (i 14-4-1) is shown in FIG. 125 (i 14-1). In the same state as that shown in FIG. 126, two displays of the cursor CS are also displayed in FIG. 126 (I 14-4-2), and both of the notice icons YI are pointed to. In this example, as shown in FIG. 126 (I 14-4-3), after both the displays of the two cursors CS disappear, the notice icons YI of both the cursors pointed to by the display of the two cursors CS until then are displayed. The box opens, and the notice display YH of “reach” pops out from the box of the notice icon YI that was stocked at the first stock position SS1 and is stocked at the second stock position SS2 (see FIG. 125 (2)). The notice display YH of "change" is popping out from the box of the notice icon YI that was displayed. The boxes of both the notice icons YI may be opened at the same time, may be opened in the stock order, and the notice display YH having a high advantage may be opened first or later. Further, a higher reliability depending on the type of the notice icon YI may be opened earlier or may be opened later. After that, the notice display YH of “reach” is erased as shown in FIG. 125 (yes 20), while the notice display YH of “change” as shown in FIG. 125 (yes 26) is displayed on the temporarily stopped right symbol. It changes to a light ball YHb in the overlapping state. After that, the variable icon change animation ends, and the display mode of the variable icon h0, which was the default display mode before the animation starts, is No. 119 of FIG. The display mode is changed to the white blinking display mode described in 2. It should be noted that the end of the variable icon change animation may precede the deletion of the "reach" notice display YH, may be deleted at the same time, or may be deleted later.

The modification shown in FIG. 126 (I 1-2-1) to FIG. 126 (I 1-2-4) is an example for explaining the maximum stock number of the notice icon YI.

In FIG. 126 (1-2-1), the number of reservations in Toku-zu 1 is four, which is the upper limit, and four reservation icons h11 to h14 are displayed. Of these holding icons, for example, the third holding is the look-ahead notice target holding, and the first holding icon h11 to the third holding icon h13 are all icons that can participate in the mini game (village character icon). Has changed to. The maximum stock number of the notice icon YI is “3” (maximum reserved number −1), which is less than the maximum reserved number of 4 in special figure 1 or special figure 2. However, the number may be the same as the maximum reserved number of special figure 1 or special figure 2, or may be the same as the total number of the maximum reserved number of special figure 1 and the maximum reserved number of special figure 2. Alternatively, the number may be one less than the total number (for example, 8). Further, it may be larger than the maximum holding number or may be larger than the total number.

In FIG. 126 (I 1-2-2), the mini game B is further won while the two notice icons YI have already been acquired. As a result, as shown in FIG. 126 (B 1-2-3), the third notice icon YI has left the appearance area AS and is once displayed in a large size. In this state, the third enlarged and displayed notice icon YI overlaps the notice icon YI stocked at the second stock position SS2 from the front side. As a result, the notice icon YI stocked at the second stock position SS2 becomes difficult to be seen for a moment. However, by setting the position of the notice icon YI coming out of the appearance area AS to a position separated from the second stock position SS2, the notice icon YI stocked at the second stock position SS2 is prevented from overlapping. You can also

In the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 126 (B 1-2-4), the first stock position SS1, the second stock position SS2, and the third stock position SS3 (FIG. 125) provided in the stock area SS are provided. (See (ii)) A notice icon YI is displayed for each. A part of the notice icon YI displayed at the third stock position SS3 shown in FIG. 126 (I 1-2-4) overlaps a part of the appearance area AS from the front side.

On the other hand, a part of the appearance area AS shown in FIG. 126 (I 1-2-4') overlaps with a part of the notice icon YI displayed at the third stock position SS3 from the front side, and the third stock The lower half of the notice icon YI displayed at the position SS3 is difficult to see.

Note that the stock area SS may be provided at a position that does not overlap the appearance area AS so that the stock area SS does not overlap the appearance area AS or overlap with the appearance area AS. For example, the stock area SS may be provided in the second decorative symbol display device 208M or the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

The production examples shown in FIG. 126 (U1) and subsequent figures are diagrams showing, in stages, the production examples of the mini game A of Yoshimune treasure acquisition notice.

In FIG. 126 (1), the first decorative design (third design) is changing at high speed, as in FIG. 120 (1). Further, the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are displayed. The display modes of the hold icons h11 and h12 of these special diagrams 1 are all No. 1 in FIG. 119(a). This is the default display mode described in 1. In addition, the display mode of the variation icon h0 is also No. 1 in FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1.

In FIG. 126 (U2), as in FIG. 120 (A2), there is a ball in the special-figure 1 starting opening 230, and the number of reservations in special-figure 1 is increased by one, and the total is three. In the second hold number display of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 126 (U2), the hold number of the special figure 1 is displayed as "3".

In FIG. 126C, the third hold icon h13 is displayed on the third stage hs3. Although the third hold icon h13 is additionally displayed in the default display mode by the increasing animation, the third hold represented by the third hold icon h13 is the target hold for the prefetching notice. In FIG. 121 (3), both the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12, which have been the default display modes up to now, are the same as No. 119 of FIG. The icon has changed to the mode a of the kind of Yoshimune (bow) described in 14. The change in the display mode of the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 may be performed before the third hold icon h13 of the target hold of the prefetching notice is displayed in an increased manner or simultaneously with the increased display. Alternatively, it may be performed after the increase display. More specifically, the change of the display mode of the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 (change of the hold icon) may be completed before the increase animation of the third hold icon h13 is started. The change of the hold icon may be completed at the same time when the increase animation is started, or the change of the hold icon may be completed after the increase animation is started. Further, when the change of the hold icon is performed by the change animation, the change animation may be started before the increase animation is started, or the change animation may be started at the same time as the increase animation. However, the change animation may be started after the increase animation is started. In addition, by changing the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 to the icon of the Yoshimune (bow) type mode a, in the variable display of symbols corresponding to the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12, respectively. A mini game (a specific mini game (mini game A in this example) or an unspecified mini game (mini game A, mini game B, or other mini game in this example) is to be played. You may give a notice. In addition, the mini game is started at the same time as or after the start of the symbol variation display (in this example, the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold icon h11) for starting the mini game A (may be immediately after). The icon to be performed may be configured to change.

In FIG. 126 (4), the variable display of symbols is finished, and the combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 1”-“decoration 7”) is stopped and displayed.

In FIG. 126 (v 5), the hold that has been the first hold until now is exhausted, and the variable display of symbols is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 126 (e5), the first decorative symbol in the central region is still stopped and displayed, but in the second decorative symbol on the upper left, the variable display is started and the first upper decorative symbol is displayed. In the 2-holding number display, the holding number in Toku-zu 1 is decreased by 1 to “2”. Further, in the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS, which has not been displayed until now, the appearance animation of the mini game A icon shown in FIG. 118(a) is started, and the icon AI is slightly displayed at the right end of the screen. 'Begins to be displayed. Also, in FIG. 126 (v 5), the movement animation of the hold icon has also started. That is, the first hold icon h11 of the character of Yoshimune (yumi), which has been displayed on the first stage hs1 so far, starts moving toward the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS, and is on the second stage hs2 so far. The second hold icon h12 of the displayed Yoshimune (bow) character starts moving toward the first stage hs1 and is displayed in the third stage hs3 until now, but it is a default display mode, but it is prefetched. The third reservation icon h13 of the notice target reservation has started moving toward the second stage hs2. Here, when the first hold icon h11 of the character of Yoshimune (bow) starts moving toward the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS, the pedestal hs0 is lowered a little. It should be noted that the appearance animation of the mini game A icon and the movement animation of the hold icon may be started at the same time, or the appearance animation of the mini game A icon may be started first, or vice versa. The animation of moving the hold icon may be started first.

Also in FIG. 126 (6), the first decorative symbol in the central area is still stopped and displayed, but the movement animation of the hold icon ends, and the variation icon h0 is changed to the mode a (waiting) of the Yoshimune (bow) type. Icon) is displayed. The character of Yoshimune (bow) of the change icon h0 is executing the standby animation (default animation). On the other hand, the appearance animation of the icon for the mini game A continues, and the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS is on the carpet and in the white box image in the first display mode (see FIG. 117(a)). The icon AI′ displaying the notice icon YI) of the mode “a” of No. 1 shown is displayed. This icon AI' is different from the icon AI for the mini game A shown in FIG. 118(a).

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 126 (7), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started. In addition, in FIG. 126 (7), the appearance animation of the icon for the mini game A is continued, and in this appearance animation, the meter display MTh of the hit point (HP) is additionally displayed in the icon AI′. It However, the meter display MTh additionally displayed here is an empty state (state of 0).

In FIG. 126 (8), the appearance animation of the icon for the mini game A is continued, and here, as a part of the appearance animation, hit points (HP) are displayed in the empty meter display MTh added earlier. The displayed animation is executed. In FIG. 126 (e 8), the blue gauge gag is beginning to be seen, though slightly. As described with reference to FIG. 118(b), the color of the gauge changes according to the number of HP points. Since the animation here is a blue gauge from the beginning, it can be seen at the stage of looking at the gauge color that the number of HP points is 60 or more. In addition, as shown in FIG. 118(a), the mini game A icon AI has a mode a in which the gauge is full, a mode b in which the gauge is half, and a mode c in which the gauge is only slightly. Since there is only mode d, it can be expected that the gauge will increase to the full state when the blue gauge gag is seen. Here, after the display of the HP is completed (after the increase of the gauge stops), the color of the gauge may be changed to a color according to the number of points of the HP, or as the gauge increases, The color of the gauge may be represented by a color corresponding to the number of points at that time. In FIG. 126 (v 9), the blue gauge gag has increased to half, and in FIG. 126 (v 10) the blue gauge gag has increased to full. That is, the number of remaining HP points is 100, and this completes the appearance animation of the mini game A icon. After all, in this example, the “box” icon of the mode a has appeared as the icon AI for the mini game A.

In FIG. 126 (u11), the form of the Yoshimune (bow) character of the variable icon h0 is changed to the form b holding a bow, and the form of the Yoshimune (bow) character of the first hold icon h11 is also changed to It changes to a mode b with a bow, which is slightly different from the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the variable icon h0. In FIG. 126 (u 12), both the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the variable icon h0 and the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the first hold icon h11 have fired arrows and changed to the mode c.

In FIG. 126 (13), the arrow fired by the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the variable icon h0, which is close to the icon AI for the mini game A, is stuck in the carpet, and Yoshimune (bow) of the first hold icon h11. The arrow fired by the character flies toward the carpet. In FIG. 126 (v 14-1 ), the arrow fired by the Yoshimune (bow) character of the 1-hold icon h11 is also stuck in the carpet, and both arrows hit the carpet brilliantly.

FIG. 127 is a diagram showing, in stages, the continuation of the example of the effect of the mini game A of the announcement of the treasure of Yoshimune.

In FIG. 127 (U 15-1) following FIG. 126 (U 14-1), damage calculation is performed, and the damage is 60 points due to the two arrows sticking. In FIG. 127 (15-1), the damage point notification (the number “60”) is displayed, and in FIG. 127 (16), the blue gauge gag that has been full (100 points) is reduced. Have begun. When the gauge gag starts to decrease, the damage point notification display begins to fade and gradually disappears. In the meter display MTh shown in FIG. 127 (C17), the gauge gag has decreased to the remaining 40 points. The color of the gauge gag changes from blue until then, to green, when it reaches 50 points or less. The damage calculation may be started at the stage when the arrow pierces the carpet. That is, the damage calculation may be started and the gauge gag may be decreased at the timing of FIG. 126 (13) when the first arrow hits the carpet.

Both the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the variable icon h0 that fired the arrow and the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the first hold icon h11 continue to be displayed in the mode c, but are changed to the standby mode a. May be.

In FIG. 127 (e 18), the variable display of the symbols ends, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol in the central area is a combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 6”-“decoration 4”- The "decoration 1") is stopped and displayed, and the second decorative design on the upper left also shows the same combination of the missing decorative designs.

In FIG. 127 (v 19), the variable icon h0 is being displayed in a stopped state (confirmed), and the animation of erasing the variable icon h0 has started. Disappears. Also in FIG. 127 (e 20), the stop icon is being displayed (the final display is being made), and the change icon h0 has completely disappeared.

In FIG. 127 (21), the hold that has been the first hold until now is exhausted, and the variable display of symbols is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 127 (U21), the first decorative symbol remains stopped and displayed, but in the second upper decorative symbol on the upper left, the variable display is started. The character of Yoshimune (bow) of the first hold icon h11 that has fired the arrow changes from the mode c to the mode a of standby (default) when the symbol variable display is started. Then, in FIG. 127 (v 22), the moving animation of the hold icon is started, and the first hold icon h11 of the character of Yoshimune (Yumi), which has been displayed on the first stage hs1 so far, is displayed in the variable icon display area. The CIS pedestal hs0 starts to move, and the second holding icon h12 of the pre-reading notice target holding, which has been displayed on the second stage hs2 until now, in the default display mode, is headed to the first stage hs1. The movement has started. Further, in the second hold number display on the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 127 (v22), the hold number of the special figure 1 is decreased by 1 to "1".

Also in FIG. 127 (v23), the first decorative symbol is still stopped and displayed, but the moving animation of the hold icon ends, and the icon of the Yoshimune (bow) character is displayed as the variable icon h0. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 127 (e24), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, and in the same figure (e25), the mode of the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the variable icon h0. Has changed to the state b with a bow. In FIG. 127 (e26), the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the variation icon h0 shoots an arrow and changes to the mode c. In FIG. 127 (u 27), the arrow fired by the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the variable icon h0 is stuck in the carpet, and damage calculation is performed. In the same figure (u 28), damage point notification (“40 In the same figure (29), the green gauge gag, which had 40 points remaining, started to decrease, and when the number of points was 20 points or less, it changed from green to red until then. ing. Also, when the gauge gag starts to decrease, the damage point notification begins to fade and gradually disappears. In the meter display MTh shown in FIG. 127 (v30), the gauge gag has disappeared to 0 points. In this way, the number of hit points (HP), which was 100 points at the beginning of the mini game A, has been successfully reduced to 0 points, and a treasure (notice icon) can be obtained. The number of damages given may exceed the number of remaining HP points.

In FIG. 127 (C31), the mini game A icon AI for which the meter display MTh has become 0 is covered by the effect image EF5, and in FIG. 127 (C32), the effect image EF5 disappears and the mini game A of aspect d is displayed. For use icon AI is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 127 (v 33), when the icon AI for the mini game A of aspect d starts moving toward the stock area SS (see (v) of FIG. 32), the icon for mini game A of aspect d is displayed. Icon AI is No. shown in FIG. 117(a). The notice icon YI of the mode “a” of box 1 is changed to the notice icon YI of the mode a in which the box is closed is displayed in the stock area SS, as shown in FIG.

Eventually, in FIG. 127 (35), the variable display of the pattern ends, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol in the central area is a combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 4”). "-"Decoration 7") is stopped and displayed, and the second decorative design on the upper left also shows the same combination of the lost decorative designs.

127 (u 36) to FIG. 127 (u 37) are in the stop display (during confirmation display), the erasing animation of the change icon h0 has started, and the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the change icon h0 is It gradually disappears into the pedestal hs0. Further, here, the pedestal hs0, which has been slightly lowered until then, is rising toward the original height. Also in FIG. 127 (v), the stop icon is being displayed (confirmed), the change icon h0 has completely disappeared, and the pedestal hs0 has returned to its original height. The notice icon YI stocked in the stock area SS is displayed without being used. Thereafter, it continues to FIG. 120 (A24). In this example, the hit points are not recovered (for example, the remaining hit points are 40 in FIG. 127 (U17), and the remaining hit points are 40 in (U21) to (U24)). , Hit points may be recovered. For example, the hit points may be recovered when the next symbol variable display is started.

FIG. 128 is a diagram showing the first modification to the third modification of the effect example of FIGS. 126 (1) to 127 (38).

The first modified example is an example of one-time acquisition of the notice icon, and is the same up to FIG. 126 (14-1). In FIG. 128 (U 15-2-1), the damage point notification is normally displayed, but it is not displayed here, and in FIG. 128 (U 15-2-2), the meter display MTh is full. The mini-game A icon AI of the state a is covered with the effect image EF5, and in FIG. 15C, the effect image EF5 disappears and the mini-game A icon AI of the state d is displayed. There is. That is, the display of the damage point notification and the animation display in which the gauge gag is decreasing are omitted, and the icon AI for the mini game A of the mode d is displayed all at once. Of the damage point notification display and the animation display in which the gauge gag decreases, only the damage point notification display may be omitted, or only the animation display in which the gauge gag decreases may be omitted. ..

As shown in FIG. 128 (v 15-2-4), when the mini game A icon AI of the mode d starts moving toward the stock area SS (see (v) 15-2-3 in the same figure), the mode The icon AI for the mini game A of d is the No. 1 shown in FIG. The notice icon YI of the mode a of “Box” 1 is changed to the notice icon YI of the mode a in which the box is closed is displayed in the stock area SS, as shown in FIG. 128 (15-2-5).

Eventually, in FIG. 128 (U 15-2-6), the variable display of the symbols ends, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol in the central area is a combination of the decorative symbols with a loss (“decoration 6”). -"Decoration 4"-"decoration 1") is stopped and displayed, and the second decorative design on the upper left also shows the same combination of the missing decorative designs.

In FIG. 128 (15-2-7), the hold that has been the first hold until now is exhausted, and the variable display of symbols is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 128 (15-2-7), the first decorative symbol remains stopped and displayed, but in the second decorative symbol on the upper left, the variable display is started. The character of Yoshimune (bow) of the first hold icon h11 that has fired the arrow changes from the mode c to the mode a of standby (default) when the symbol variable display is started. Then, in FIG. 128 (U 15-2-8), the movement animation of the hold icon is started, and the first hold icon h11 of the character of Yoshimune (bow), which has been displayed on the first stage hs1 until now, is The second hold icon h12, which has started to move toward the pedestal hs0 in the variable icon display area CIS and has been displayed on the second stage hs2 until now, which is the default display mode, but which is the read-ahead notice target hold, is the first stage. The movement has started toward hs1. In the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS, the appearance animation of the mini game A icon is started again, and the icon AI′ is starting to be slightly displayed at the right end of the screen.

Also in FIG. 128 (15-2-9), the first decorative pattern in the central area is still stopped and displayed, but the moving animation of the hold icon ends, and the variable icon h0 is of the Yoshimune (bow) type. The icon of the mode a (standby mode) is displayed. Further, in the second hold number display at the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 128 (15-2-9), the hold number of the special figure 1 is decreased by 1 to become "1". Furthermore, the appearance animation of the icon for the mini game A continues, and the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS is on the carpet and is a white box image in the first display mode (see FIG. 117(a)). The icon AI′ displaying the notice icon YI) of the mode “a” of No. 1 shown is displayed. In FIG. 128 (15-2-10), the appearance animation of the icon for the mini game A is continued, and in this appearance animation, the meter display MTh of the hit point (HP) is additionally displayed on the icon AI′. To be done. However, the meter display MTh additionally displayed here is an empty state (state of 0). In FIG. 128 (U 15-2-11), the appearance animation of the icon for the mini game A is continued, and here, as a part of the appearance animation, hit points are added to the empty meter display MTh added earlier. The animation in which (HP) is displayed is executed, and the blue gauge gag increases to full. That is, the number of remaining HP points is 100, and this completes the appearance animation of the mini game A icon. After all, here too, the "box" icon of the mode a has appeared as the icon AI for the mini game A.

In FIG. 128 (U 15-2-12), the character mode of Yoshimune (bow) of the first hold icon h11 is changed to a bow-holding mode b, and then the first hold icon h11 of Yoshimune (bow). Bow) is fired from the character. In FIG. 128 (U 15-2-13), the arrow fired by the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the first hold icon h11 is stuck in the carpet, and again, the damage point notification display and the gauge gag are reduced. In FIG. 128 (U 15-2-14), the icon AI for mini-game A in the mode a in which the meter display MTh is full is covered by the effect image EF5 in FIG. 128 (U 15-2-14). In 15-2-15), the effect image EF5 disappears, and the icon AI for the mini game A of aspect d is displayed all at once.

As shown in FIG. 128 (U 15-2-16), when the mini game A icon AI of the mode d starts moving toward the stock area SS (see FIG. 15 U 2-3), the mode The icon AI for the mini game A of d is the No. 1 shown in FIG. The notice icon YI of the mode a of the "box" of No. 1 is changed to the notice icon YI of the mode a in which the box is closed as shown in FIG. 128 (U 15-2-17). It is displayed under the notice icon YI previously stocked in 5). In this way, the one notice icon is successfully acquired in succession, and two notice icons YI are stocked.

In the second modification shown in FIG. 128 (U 15-2-2b1) to FIG. 128 (U 15-2-2b5), the process is the same up to FIG. 126 (U 14-1). The modification here is also an example of one-time acquisition of the notice icon, but in this example, the display of the damage point notification and the animation display in which the gauge gag decreases are executed without omission. In FIG. 128 (15-2-2b1), damage point notification (red number “100”) is displayed. Also, in FIG. 128 (15-2-2b2), the blue gauge gag that was in a full state (100 points) started to decrease, the gauge gag decreased to the remaining 50 points, and the color of the gauge gag was changed to that point. Changes from blue to green, and the green gauge gag continues to decrease. When the gauge gag starts to decrease, the damage point notification display begins to fade and gradually disappears.

The notice may be given by displaying the damage point notification or the color of the carpet. For example, if the display color of the damage point notification is rainbow, even if the notice icon on the carpet is not the "rainbow box" notice icon, you can get the "rainbow box" notice icon. From the characteristics of the notice icon of "rainbow box", the big hit of the pre-reading target fluctuation is decided. Alternatively, when the display color of the damage point notification is iridescent, the symbol variation display may be a big hit confirmation. Alternatively, when the display color of the damage point is a specific color (for example, red), the probability of acquiring the notice icon may be higher than when the display color is the default color. Alternatively, the symbol variation display when the display color of the damage point is a specific color (for example, red) may be more likely to be a big hit than the symbol variation display when the display color is the default color. The same may be applied to the case of carpet color.

In FIG. 128 (15-2-2b3), the green gauge gag continues to decrease, the gauge gag decreases to the remaining 20 points, and the color of the gauge gag changes from the previous green to red, the red gauge. gag continues to decrease further. Moreover, the display of the damage point notification is almost disappearing.

In FIG. 128 (15-2-2b3), the green gauge gag continues to decrease, the gauge gag decreases to the remaining 20 points, and the color of the gauge gag changes from the previous green to red, the red gauge. gag continues to decrease further. Moreover, the display of the damage point notification is almost disappearing. In the meter display MTh shown in FIG. 128 (15-2-2b4), the gauge gag has disappeared to 0 points.

When the meter display MTh becomes 0, the icon AI for the mini game A is covered with the effect image EF5 as shown in FIG. 128 (15-2-2b5), and thereafter, FIG. 128 (15-2-3) and the like. It becomes the same as, and the notice icon YI can be obtained.

FIG. 128 (U 15-3-1) to FIG. 128 (U 15-3-3) in the third modified example, FIG. 128 (U 15-2-1) to FIG. 128 (U 15) in the first modified example. -2-3). In the third modified example, the next mini game A icon AI appears earlier than in the first modified example, and the appearance animation of the mini game A icon is restarted without waiting for the start of the next change. That is, as shown in FIG. 128 (step 15-3-4), when the mini-game A icon AI of aspect d starts moving toward the stock area SS, the mini-game icon A of the next variation is displayed. The appearance animation is started again, and the icon AI' is starting to be displayed slightly at the right end of the screen. In addition, in FIG. 128 (15-3-5), the notice icon YI is displayed in the stock area SS, and the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS is white on the carpet in the first display mode. An icon AI′ displaying a box image (the notice icon YI of the mode “a” of “box” of No. 1 shown in FIG. 117(a)) is displayed. The stock display of the notice icon YI and the whole display of the icon AI′ may be the same, the stock display may be earlier, or conversely, the whole display may be earlier. Note that the meter display MTh is added to the icon AI' after the next change is started.

Eventually, in FIG. 128 (U 15-3-6), the variable display of symbols ends, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol in the central area is a combination of the missing decorative symbols (“decoration 6”). -"Decoration 4"-"decoration 1") is stopped and displayed, and the second decorative design on the upper left also shows the same combination of the missing decorative designs.

FIG. 129 is a diagram showing a continuation of the third modified example of the effect examples of FIGS.

In FIG. 129 (U 15-3-7), which is a continuation of the third modification, the variable icon h0, which was the icon of the Yoshimune (bow) character, is completely displayed (stopped display) (completely displayed). There is.

In FIG. 129 (U 15-3-8) in which the next symbol variation display is started, the HP meter display MTh of the HP in the empty state is additionally displayed in the icon AI′, and the subsequent FIG. 129 (U 15-3-9). In (), the animation in which HP is displayed on the empty meter display MTh is executed, and the blue gauge gag increases to the full tank. After that, the flow is the same as that shown in FIG.

FIG. 129 (C 15-4-1) to FIG. 128 (C 15-4-5) in the fourth modified example, and FIG. 128 (C 15-3-1) to C (15) in the third modified example. -3-5). In the fourth modified example, the appearance animation of the mini game A icon is executed a plurality of times within one symbol variable display, and a plurality of mini game A icons AI appear. The number of appearances of the mini-game A icon AI may be the maximum stock number of the advance notice icon YI, may be less than the maximum stock number, or may exceed the maximum stock number. However, if the maximum number of stocks is exceeded, the previously announced notice icon YI is used or a mini game A of Gase is performed before the new notice icon YI is acquired, and the new notice icon YI is added. Cannot be earned.

In FIG. 128 (15-4-6), within the symbol variation display that has already acquired one notice icon YI, a new icon AI′ is additionally displayed with the HP meter display MTh of the empty state, and continues. In FIG. 128 (15-4-7), the animation in which HP is displayed on the empty meter display MTh is executed, and the blue gauge gag increases to full. The symbol variation display is still continuing, and in FIG. 128 (U 15-4-8), the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the variation icon h0, which was the mode c until now, is also the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the first hold icon h11. The characters of () also change to the form b with a bow and aim at the carpet of the new icon AI for mini-game A. In the fourth modified example, it is possible to make a plurality of attacks in one symbol variation display. For example, the same mini-game A icon AI can be attacked multiple times. However, even if the attack can be performed a plurality of times, the same mini-game A icon AI may be allowed to attack only once.

Eventually, an arrow is fired from each of the two characters, and in FIG. 128 (15-4-9), the arrow fired from the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the variable icon h0 is also Yoshimune of the first hold icon h11 ( The arrow fired from the character (bow) was also stuck in the carpet, the damage was calculated, the damage point notification (the number "40") was displayed, and the tank was full (100 points). The blue gauge gag is beginning to decrease in the same figure (15-4-10). In the meter display MTh shown in FIG. 128 (15-4-11), the color of the gauge gag remains blue and decreases to 60 points. Here, before the meter display MTh decreases to 0 points, as shown in FIG. 128 (U 15-4-12), the symbol variation display ends, but the meter display MTh becomes 0 points, It is also possible to acquire the second notice icon YI. Further, in the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold icon h11 subsequent to FIG. 128 (U 15-4-12), the mini game A is continuing and it is possible to obtain the second notice icon. .. It should be noted that, similarly to the description of the number of appearances of the mini-game A icon AI, the number of advance notice icons YI acquired can be variously set based on the maximum stock number. That is, the number of advance notice icons YI to be acquired may be the maximum stock number, may be less than the maximum stock number, or may exceed the maximum stock number.
The fifth modified example is an example in which a dedicated area for the mini game A is prepared.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 129 (1-2-1), the background screen, which has been omitted in the drawings so far, is displayed. This background screen is a sea background screen. In FIG. 129 (U 1-2-1), the first decorative design (third design) is changing at high speed, as in FIG. 126 (U 1). Further, the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are displayed. The display modes of the hold icons h11 and h12 of these special diagrams 1 are all No. 1 in FIG. 119(a). This is the default display mode described in 1. In addition, the display mode of the variation icon h0 is also No. 1 in FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1.

In FIG. 129 (U 1-2-1), as in FIG. 126 (U 2 ), there is a ball in the special-figure 1 starting opening 230, and the number of the special special 1 hold is increased by one, resulting in a total of three. .. In the second reservation number display of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 129 (1-2-1), the reservation number of the special figure 1 is displayed as “3”.

In FIG. 129 (1-2-3), the third hold icon h13 is displayed on the third stage hs3. The third hold icon h13 is a hold icon in a display mode not shown in FIG. 119(a). That is, it is a display mode in which VS is displayed as a character (VS display mode), and is a display mode that gives advance notice that the mini game A is to be performed, in a symbol variable display corresponding to the hold before the hold of the hold icon in this display mode. Is. That is, if the third hold icon h13 is displayed in the VS display mode, the mini game A is executed in the variable display of symbols corresponding to the first hold and/or the second hold. It should be noted that when the VS display mode of the hold icon is displayed, the mini game A may or may not always be executed. Note that the hold of the hold icon in the VS display mode is the target hold of the prefetching notice, and the VS display mode is also a kind of the display mode of the prefetching notice.

In FIG. 129 (1-2-2), the symbol variable display is terminated, and the combination of missing decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 1”-“decoration 7”) is stopped and displayed.

In FIG. 129 (1-2-5), the hold that has been the first hold until now is exhausted, and the variable display of symbols is started. In the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 129 (1-2-5), the first decorative pattern in the central region is still stopped and displayed, but in the second decorative pattern on the upper left, the variable display is started. In the second hold number display on the upper right, the hold number in Toku-zu 1 is decreased by 1 to “2”.

Also in FIG. 129 (U 1-2-6), the first decorative pattern in the central area is still stopped and displayed, but in this FIG. 129 (U 1-2-6), the dedicated area appearance animation of the mini game A is displayed. Has started. That is, when the dedicated area appearance animation of the mini game A is started, the flame effect image EF6 is displayed in the effect display area 208d where the hold frame UI was displayed, and the hold icon is also covered by this effect image EF6. Has been done. In FIG. 129 (1-2-7), the effect image EF6 of flame becomes thin, and the icons and the like in the back of the effect image EF6 are beginning to appear faintly.

In FIG. 129 (U 1-2-8), the dedicated area appearance animation of the mini game A ends, the flame effect image EF6 disappears completely, and the effect display area 208d replaces the hold frame UI with the mini game. The dedicated area MSS of A appears. In the dedicated area MSS of the mini game A shown in FIG. 129 (1-2-8), two Yoshimune (bow) icons YMI1 and YMI2 are displayed. Both of these two icons YMI1 and YMI2 are displayed in mode a (standby mode). Further, at the right end of the dedicated area MSS of the mini game A, an icon AI′ having a notice icon on the carpet is displayed, and further, a dedicated area for the meter display MTh of hit points (HP) is provided and dedicated to that area. A meter display MTh is displayed in the area. In the meter display MTh shown in FIG. 129 (1-2-8), the blue gauge gag is full. That is, the number of remaining HP points is 100.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 129 (1-2-9), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started. When the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, the mini game A is started in the dedicated area MSS of the mini game A. It should be noted that the mini game A may be started at the same time when the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, or the mini game A may be started after the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, or the first decorative symbol. The mini game A may be started before the variable display of the symbols is started. When the mini game A is started, the dedicated area MSS of the mini game A is once covered with the mini game opening image. The mini game opening image is a translucent image, and the match card of the mini game is displayed in characters (here, “Yoshimune” VS “carpet”).

In FIG. 129 (U 1-2-10), the mini game opening image disappears. The characters change into a mode b in which they both hold a bow, and aim at the carpet of the icon AI for the mini game A. Here, the greater the number of Yoshimune (bow) icons, the higher the possibility that the mini game A will be played even in the next variation. In this example, since two Yoshimune (bow) icons are displayed, it is more likely that the mini game A will be executed even in the next change, as compared with the case where only one Yoshimune (bow) icon is displayed. .. The number of Yoshimune (bow) icons may represent the degree of expectation that the notice icon Yi can be acquired. That is, the greater the number of Yoshimune (bow) icons, the higher the degree of expectation that the notice icon Yi can be acquired.

Alternatively, the number of Yoshimune (bow) icons may correspond to the number of hold icons before the hold icon in the VS display mode. That is, if the number of the hold icons before the hold icon in the VS display mode is three, the number of Yoshimune (bow) icons also becomes three, and as in this example, before the hold icon in the VS display mode. If the number of the hold icons is 2, the number of Yoshimune (bow) icons is also 2. Further, the number of confrontations that can be confronted is determined according to the number of holding icons before the holding icon in the VS display mode, such as one carpet or one attack against one Yoshimune (bow) icon. The number of times may be displayed in the dedicated area MSS of the mini game A.

Eventually, an arrow is fired from each of the two icons YMI1 and YMI2, and in FIG. 129 (U 1-2-12), two arrows are stuck in the carpet, damage calculation is performed, and damage point notification (“ The number “40”) is displayed, and the blue gauge gag that was in a full state (100 points) is beginning to decrease in FIG.

FIG. 130 is a diagram showing the continuation of the fifth modified example of the effect examples of FIGS.

In FIG. 130 (U 1-2-14), which is a continuation of the fifth modified example, a semi-transparent notice image such as “following the next variation” is displayed because one attack has ended during one symbol variation display. Is displayed. The dedicated area MSS of the mini game A is once covered with this preview image. Note that this advance notice image may not be displayed.

In FIG. 130 (U 1-2-15 ), the notice image disappears, and in FIG. 130 (U 1-2-16 ), the variable display of the symbols ends, and the combination of the decorative symbols with a loss (“decoration 6”-“decoration”) 4”-“decoration 1”) is stopped and displayed.

Fig. 130 (U 1-2-17) is in the stop display (confirming display), the sticked arrow disappears from the carpet, and in Fig. 130 (U 1-2-18), the first decoration in the central region Although the symbols are still stopped and displayed, the hold, which was the first hold until now, is exhausted, and the variable display of the symbols is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 130 (1-2-2), the variable display is started in the upper left second decorative symbol.

After that, an arrow is fired from each of the two icons YMI1 and YMI2, and in FIG. 130 (U 1-2-19), two arrows are stuck in the carpet, and in the subsequent FIG. 130 (U 1-2-20). In the meter display MTh shown, the point has decreased to 0 points and the gauge gag has disappeared. When the meter display MTh becomes 0, the mini game A icon AI is covered with the effect image EF5 as shown in FIG. In FIG. 130 (1-2-2), the effect image EF5 disappears, and the mini-game A icon AI of the mode d is displayed. When the mini-game A icon AI of the mode d starts moving toward the stock area SS (see (1-2-2) in FIG. 130) as shown in FIG. 130 (1-2-2). , The icon AI for the mini game A of the mode d is No. 1 shown in FIG. The notice icon YI of the mode “a” of box 1 of FIG. 1 is changed to the notice icon YI of the mode a with the box closed in the stock area SS, as shown in FIG. When the stock of the notice icon YI is completed, the exclusive area disappearing animation of the mini game A is started. That is, when the dedicated area disappearing animation of the mini game A is started, the flame effect image EF6 gradually appears in the dedicated area MSS of the mini game A. In FIG. 130 (U 1-2-24), the exclusive area MSS of the mini game A is covered with the semi-transparent flame effect image EF6, and in FIG. 130 (U 1-2-25), the flame effect. It is covered by the image EF6. Note that the dedicated area disappearing animation of the mini game A may be started before the stocking of the notice icon YI is completed. For example, the dedicated area disappearing animation of the mini game A may be started immediately after the icon AI for mini game A of the aspect d starts moving toward the stock area SS. Further, the exclusive area disappearing animation of the mini game A may be started at the same time when the stock of the notice icon YI is completed.

In FIG. 130 (1-2-26), the dedicated area disappearance animation of the mini game A ends, the flame effect image EF6 completely disappears, and the effect display area 208d appears the dedicated area MSS of the mini game A. Reverts to the previous configuration. That is, the hold frame UI is displayed, and the pedestal hs0 in the variation icon display area CIS displays the variation icon h0 in the default display mode. The variable icon h0 in the default display mode corresponds to the second hold icon h12 shown in FIG. 129 (U 1-2-3) to FIG. 129 (U 1-2-5). Further, on the first stage hs1 of the variable icon display area CIS, the first hold icon h11 in the default display mode is displayed. The first hold icon h11 in the default display mode is the third hold icon h13 that is displayed in the VS display mode shown in FIGS. 129 (U 1-2-3) to (U 1-2-5). Equivalent to. The first hold icon h11 corresponding to the third hold icon h13 that was displayed in the VS display mode may be displayed in the VS display mode as it is, or any one of the blue to iridescent icons. It may be displayed in a form.

Note that the hold (fourth hold) after the third hold icon h13 that was displayed in the VS display mode is the target hold for the prefetching notice and is stocked as shown in FIG. 130 (1-2-2). The notice icon YI being displayed may be used during the fourth pending symbol variation display. In addition, the second hold icon h12 may be displayed in the VS display mode, and the mini game may be played until the second hold symbol variation display is displayed.

Eventually, in Fig. 130 (1-2-27), the variable display of symbols ends, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol in the central region is a combination of the missing decorative symbols ("decoration 4"). -"Decoration 4"-"decoration 7") is stopped and displayed, and the second decorative design on the upper left also shows the same combination of missing decorative designs.
Next, an example of an effect in which the stocked notice icon YI is promoted will be described.

In FIG. 130 (e 1-1), the mini-game A icon AI of the aspect d is displayed. The variable icon h0 is an icon of a Yoshimune (bow) character, but the first hold icon h11 is an icon in a default display mode. In this modification as well, the hold of the first hold icon h11 becomes the prefetching notice target hold. In addition, the mini-game A icon AI of aspect d starts moving toward the stock area SS.

In FIG. 130 (e2), the notice icon YI, which is different from the mini game A icon AI of the mode d, is stocked in the stock area SS. The notice icon YI stocked here is No. 1 shown in FIG. It is the notice icon of the aspect a of the "box" of 1. Further, the variable display of the symbols ends, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol in the central region is a combination of the decorative symbols with a loss (“decoration 4”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 7”). The display is stopped, and the second decorative design on the upper left also displays the same combination of the lost decorative designs. Further, the Yoshimune (bow) character of the variable icon h0 has disappeared.

In FIG. 130 (e3), the hold that has been the first hold until now is exhausted, and the variable display of symbols is started. The symbol variation display started here is a symbol variation display in which the notice icon YI displayed in stock in the stock area SS is used. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 130 (E3), the first decorative symbol remains stopped and displayed, but in the second decorative symbol on the upper left, the variable display is started. Then, the moving animation of the hold icon is started, and in FIG. 130 (e4), the first hold icon h11 of the character of Yoshimune (yumi), which has been displayed on the first stage hs1 so far, is displayed as the variable icon h0. ing. The character of Yoshimune (bow) who has become the variable icon h0 has changed from the mode c to the mode a of the standby (default).

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 130 (e5), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started. When the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, a mini game for promoting the notice icon YI displayed in stock is started. The mini game here is a little different from the mini game A described above, and the notice icon promotion exclusive icon YSI in which the target icon hangs on the parachute appears. In FIG. 130 (e6), the notice icon promotion exclusive icon YSI whose target icon hangs on the parachute is descending from the upper right of the screen, and the variable icon h0's Yoshimune (bow) character shown in the same figure (e7) is , The character changes to b with a bow and is aiming for the target icon, and eventually a character of Yoshimune (bow) fires an arrow. In FIG. 130(e8), the arrow fired from the character of Yoshimune (bow) hits the target icon, and the promotion of the notice icon YI displayed in stock is confirmed. In FIG. 130(e9), the letters "Lv.UP" for notifying the promotion confirmation are displayed next to the notice icon promotion dedicated icon YSI. It should be noted that the arrow fired from the Yoshimune (bow) character of the variable icon h0 may always hit the target icon of the notice icon promotion exclusive icon YSI, or may not hit it. ..

In FIG. 130(e10), the notice icon YI which is displayed in stock is covered with the effect image EF7, and when the effect image EF7 disappears, the notice icon YI changes to the No. 1 shown in FIG. 117(a) so far. No. 1 shown in FIG. 117(a). It has been promoted to the "red box" notice icon 2 (Fig. 130 (e11)).

Eventually, the notice icon promotion dedicated icon YSI disappears as shown in FIG. 130 (e12), and the promoted notice icon YI is used in the subsequent figure (e13). That is, the notice icon YI of “red box” of the mode a in which the box is closed is changed to the mode d in which the box is open when used, and the notice YH is displayed from inside the box. A pop-up animation is displayed. The notice display YH appearing here is No. 1 shown in FIG. 117(b). 7 is a red notice display of "red change", which is a notice for notifying that the display mode of the hold icon, the variable icon, etc. will be changed in two steps.

In FIG. 130 (e 13), the used notice icon YI disappears, and the variable icon change animation using the red notice "YH" is displayed. In FIG. 130 (e 14), the red “red change” notice display YH has changed to a light ball YHb.

FIG. 131 is a diagram illustrating a continuation of the example of the promotion of the stocked notice icon YI and a modification of the example of the production.

In FIG. 130 (e15) which continues from FIG. 130 (e14), the light ball YHb in which the red “red change” notice display YH has changed is aimed at the variable icon h0 which is the icon of the Yoshimune (bow) character. When it flies and hits the variation icon h0, the variation icon h0 is covered with the effect image EF8, and the effect image EF8 disappears, the variation icon h0 changes to the No. 1 shown in FIG. 4 has changed to the “green” variation icon (FIG. 130 (e16)).

In this example, the mini game for promoting the stock-displayed notice icon YI has been performed, but a mini-game for further obtaining the notice icon may also be performed. Alternatively, in the variable display in which the notice icon YI is used, the mini game for further acquiring the notice icon may not be performed, and only the mini game for promoting the notice icon YI displayed in stock may be performed.

Further, in this example, a dedicated icon such as the notice icon promotion dedicated icon YSI appears, but the hold icon may change to the notice icon promotion icon, or the change icon may change to the notice icon promotion icon. It may be. Furthermore, an icon for obtaining a notice icon, such as the mini-game icon AI, may change to an icon for promoting a notice icon. Further, the appearance of the notice icon promotion exclusive icon YSI serves as a notice that the notice icon may be promoted, and the mini game itself that promotes the notice icon YI also notifies that the notice icon may be promoted. It corresponds to the production. In this case, the variation icon h0 is used to execute the effect of giving a notice that the notice icon may be promoted. Good, or be sure to give a notice.

Next, a modified example of the effect example in which the stocked notice icon YI is promoted will be described.

In FIG. 131 (e 1-2-1), the icon AI for the mini game A of aspect d is displayed. The variable icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 are both Yoshimune (bow) character icons. The hold of the first hold icon h11 becomes the look-ahead notice hold. In addition, the mini-game A icon AI of aspect d starts moving toward the stock area SS.

In FIG. 131 (e 1-2-2), the variable display of symbols continues, and the notice icon YI of the mode a of “box”, which is different from the icon AI for mini game A of the mode d, is stocked in the stock area SS. Has been done.

In Fig. 131 (e 1-2-3), there is a ball in the special-figure 1 starting port 230, and the number of reservations of special-figure 1 is increased by one, and there are two in total. In the second reservation number display of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 131 (e1-2-3), the reservation number of special figure 1 is displayed as "2".

In FIG. 131 (e 1-2-4), the second hold icon h12 is displayed on the second stage hs2. The display mode of the second hold icon h12 representing the increased second hold is the display mode of the Yoshimune (bow) character. When the mini-game for acquiring the notice icon is played on the currently displayed pattern variation display, the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the second hold icon h12 may not be used, or the opposite. May be used for. That is, during the symbol variation display with the increase in the hold, use of the increased hold icon may or may not be prohibited from being used in the mini game for acquiring the notice icon.

In Fig. 131 (e 1-2-5), the variable display of the symbols is terminated without using the notice icon YI displayed in stock, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is lost in the central area. The combination of the decorative patterns ("decoration 4"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 7") is stopped and displayed, and the second upper left decorative pattern also stops and displays the same combination of the lost decorative patterns. Further, the Yoshimune (bow) character of the variable icon h0 has disappeared.

In FIG. 131 (e 1-2-6), the hold, which has been the first hold until now, is exhausted, and the variable display of symbols is started. The symbol variation display started here is a symbol variation display in which the notice icon YI displayed in stock in the stock area SS is used. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 131 (e 1-2-6), the first decorative symbol remains stopped and displayed, but in the second upper decorative symbol on the upper left, the variable display is started. Then, the moving animation of the hold icon is started, and in FIG. 131 (e 1-2-7), the first hold icon h11 in the default display mode that has been displayed on the first stage hs1 so far is the default display mode. The variable icon h0 is displayed as it is.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 131 (e 1-2-8), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started. When the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, the mini game for promoting the notice icon YI displayed in stock is also started in this modification. In FIG. 131 (e1-2-9), the notice icon promotion exclusive icon YSI whose target icon hangs on the parachute is descending from the upper right of the screen, and this modification shown in the same figure (e1-2-10) In the example, the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the first hold icon h11 changes to the state b holding a bow and aims at the target icon. In FIG. 131 (e1-2-11), an arrow is fired from the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the hold icon, and in the same figure (e1-2-12), the fired arrow heads toward the target icon. Flying In FIG. 131 (e 1-2-13), the arrow fired from the character of Yoshimune (bow) hits the target icon, and the promotion of the notice icon YI displayed in stock is confirmed. In FIG. 131 (e 1-2-14 ), the letter “Lv.UP” for notifying the promotion confirmation is displayed next to the notice icon promotion exclusive icon YSI, and FIG. 131 (e 1-2-15) Then, when the notice icon YI displayed in stock is covered with the effect image EF7 and the effect image EF7 disappears, the notice icon YI has been promoted from the "box" so far to the "red box" notice icon. (FIG. 131 (e 1-2-16)).

In FIG. 131 (e 1-2-17), the reach effect is started, and the “decoration 6” fluctuates in each of the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. Eventually, the notice icon YI promoted to “red box” is used in the reach state. That is, as shown in FIG. 131 (e 1-2-18), the box of the notice icon YI opens, and from the inside, the No. shown in FIG. 117 (b) is displayed. The notice display YH of "VS Swordsman Reach" of 19 comes out. The notice display YH of "VS swordsman reach" is a face icon of a swordsman character, and is a display for notifying that a super reach effect of the VS swordsman reach will be performed by the displayed variation. In FIG. 131 (e 1-2-19), the used notice icon YI disappears, but the notice display YH of “VS Swordsman Reach” is still displayed.

In Fig. 131 (e 1-2-20), the notice display YH of "VS Swordsman Reach" has disappeared, but at the same time that the notice display YH disappears, the super reach production of VS Swordsman Reach is started as the notice. .. When the notice display YH of "VS Swordsman Reach" is displayed, the super reach effect of VS Swordsman Reach may or may not be started. An image of an enemy swordsman is displayed in large size on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 131 (e 1-221), and the first decoration shown in the following figure (e 1-2-22). On the pattern display device 208L, an animation of a duel scene between the main character Yoshimune and the enemy swordsman is displayed. It should be noted that when the super reach effect is started, all the reservation frame UIs are hidden (disappeared) except for the top plate of the pedestal hs0. Also, the hold icon is hidden (disappears). However, the variable icon h0 does not disappear and remains displayed on the remaining top plate. Further, the second decorative design and the second hold number display are also continuously displayed. The entire hold frame UI may be erased, or conversely, the entire hold frame UI may be continuously displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 may be erased or the hold icon may be continuously displayed.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 131 (e 1-2-23), "decoration 5" as the middle symbol is displayed in large size together with the scene where Yoshimune is defeated. In the following FIG. 131 (E 1-2-24), the same effect as the wipe effect described using FIG. 76 (A 14-2-4) to FIG. 76 (A 14-2-5) is performed. As shown in (E 1-2-24), the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L once becomes the wipe display of the same color with no pattern. By this wipe display, the variable icon h0 disappears, but the second decorative symbol and the second hold number display are displayed. The model title is displayed in the left corner. The variable icon h0 may be displayed.

In 143 (e 1-2-25), the background is returned to the normal background by wiping out, and the first hold icon h11, which is the display mode of the character of Yoshimune (bow), is also returned to the default display mode. .. However, the first hold icon h11 may be in the display mode of the Yoshimune (bow) character until it is consumed, or the display mode may be changed at another timing.

In 143 (e 1-226), the display is stopped with a combination of decorative patterns of “decoration 6”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 6”.

In this modified example, a mini game for further acquiring the notice icon may also be performed. Alternatively, in the variable display in which the notice icon YI is used, the mini game for further acquiring the notice icon may not be performed, and only the mini game for promoting the notice icon YI displayed in stock may be performed.

Also in this modified example, the hold icon may be changed to the notice icon promotion icon, or the change icon may be changed to the notice icon promotion icon. Furthermore, an icon for obtaining a notice icon, such as the mini-game icon AI, may change to an icon for promoting a notice icon. Further, the appearance of the notice icon promotion exclusive icon YSI serves as a notice that the notice icon may be promoted, and the mini game itself that promotes the notice icon YI also notifies that the notice icon may be promoted. It corresponds to the production. Then, in this modified example, the hold icon is used to execute the effect of notifying that the notice icon may be promoted. You may choose to give a notice.

FIG. 132 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example of an effect in which the notice display YH of the button appears from the notice icon YI.

In FIG. 132 (a1), the symbol variation display that is the variation of the prefetch target is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 132 (a1), both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol have started variable display, and the pedestal hs0 in the variable icon display area CIS has a default display mode. The variable icon h0 of is displayed. It should be noted that there is no single hold icon, and “0” is displayed for both the second hold number displays of special figure 1 and special figure 2. Also, two notice icons YI are displayed in stock.

In FIG. 132 (a2), the previously stocked first notice icon YI (the notice icon YI stocked at the first stock position) is used, and the first notice icon YI opens the box. The display is changed to the display mode d, and the No. shown in FIG. The notice display YH of “button” 21 is popping out. This "button" notice display YH is a button image that imitates the chance button 136, and is a display that changes the displayed symbols to give a notice that the button effect will be performed. Even if it is done, the button effect may not be actually performed.

In FIG. 132 (a3), the first notice icon YI, which is the display mode in which the box is opened, is deleted, but the notice display YH of the “button” remains displayed. In the subsequent FIG. 132 (a4), the notice display YH of the “button” changes to a light ball YHb, and as shown in the same drawing (a5), the light ball YHb is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. It flies to the right end portion of the right base icon bIr. In FIG. 132 (a6), the button image icon 136aI of the default display mode (first display mode) is displayed at the right end portion thereof. Further, a character "preparing" indicating that the button operation is not yet accepted is displayed on the button image icon 136aI. Therefore, the display of the button image icon 136aI and the character "preparing" is also a display indicating that the button effect is stocked, and the button effect is performed in the currently displayed symbol variation display. It is also a display for announcing.

In FIG. 132 (a7), the reach effect is started, and the “decoration 6” fluctuates in each of the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. In FIG. 132 (a8), the "decoration 6" that was swinging and fluctuating in the left symbol display area 208a is moved to the bottom of the second decorative symbol before the super reach effect is moved, and is swung in the right symbol display area 208c. The fluctuating “decoration 6” moves to below the second hold number display. Next, the button image icon 136aI and the character "preparing" that have been displayed in the lower right corner until now are moved to the lower left corner before shifting to the super reach effect. In FIG. 132 (a9), the button image icon 136aI and the variable icon h0 overlap each other during the movement. That is, the button image icon 136aI has passed behind the variable icon h0. As a result, the variable icon h0 overlaps part of the button image icon 136aI from the front side. Note that the button image icon 136aI may pass through the labor side of the variable icon h0 so that a part of the button image icon 136aI overlaps the variable icon h0 from the front side. Alternatively, the button image icon 136aI and the character "in preparation" may be moved so as not to overlap the variable icon h0. Alternatively, the button image icon 136aI and the character “in preparation” may not be moved, and the button image icon 136aI may be moved to the moving position instantaneously without performing the animation. That is, the display position may be instantaneously switched. In this case, the state shown in FIG. 132 (a9) disappears. In FIG. 132 (a10), the movement of the button image icon 136aI in the default display mode and the character “in preparation” to the lower left corner is completed.

Eventually, super reach production was started, and VS swordsman reach was started here. An image of an enemy swordsman is greatly displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 132 (a11). An animation of a duel scene between Yoshimune and the enemy swordsman is displayed.

In the middle of the duel scene animation, as shown in FIG. 132 (a13), the second notice icon YI (the notice icon YI stocked at the second stock position) that was stocked later and remains until now is displayed. No. 1 shown in FIG. 117(b) is used. Twenty "UP" notice display YH is popping out. This "UP" notice display YH is a displayed variable display, and is a display for notifying that the effect will be promoted. When the "UP" notice display YH is displayed, the effect is always promoted. You may or may not be promoted. When the notice display YH of “UP” is displayed, the notice display YH is immediately used, and the promotion animation of the button image icon 136aI is started as shown in FIG. 132 (a14). That is, when this promotion animation is started, the button image icon 136aI in the default display mode (first display mode), which was displayed in the lower left corner, is displayed together with the characters "preparing" and the flame effect image EF6'. It is covered by and is difficult to see. In FIG. 132 (a15), the promotion animation of the button image icon 136aI ends, the flame effect image EF6′ disappears, and the button image icon 136aI is promoted to the fifth display mode (red) button image icon 136aI. There is.

The animation of the duel scene continues while the cut-in image CI3 and the like are displayed (FIG. 132 (a16)). In FIG. 132 (a17), the promotion animation of the button image icon 136aI has started again. The second promotion of the button image icon 136aI is promoted without any advance notice. However, promotion may be announced by other notice, may be given notice, or may not be given notice. In FIG. 132 (a17), the button image icon 136aI in the fifth display mode (red) is covered with the effect image EF6′ of flame again together with the letters “preparing”, and it is difficult to see. In FIG. 132 (a18), the promotion animation of the button image icon 136aI ends, the flame effect image EF6′ disappears, and the button image icon 136aI is promoted to the lever image icon 139aI. In the pachinko machine 100 as well, although the operation lever is not shown, the operation lever is provided at a position where the player can operate. Further, instead of the operation lever, a transparent portion 191 that can be rotated in the front-rear direction or a second chance button 137 may be used.

In FIG. 132 (a19), the cut-in image CI3 disappears, the animation of the duel scene is approaching the end, and the time for the button effect start is approaching. In FIG. 132 (a20), the animation in which the lever image icon 139aI is gradually enlarged is started. The lever image icon 139aI becomes the lever image 139a by this animation. When this animation is started, the character "in preparation" disappears, and after the figure (a21), the lever image 139a is once enlarged to the maximum in the figure (a22). After that, in FIG. 132 (a23), the lever image 139a becomes slightly smaller, and the remaining time display meter MT indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period is additionally displayed. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 132 (a23), the operation valid period has not started, and even if the lever is operated, the corresponding display is not performed. Eventually, the button effect is started and the operation valid period is started (FIG. 132 (a24)). The button performance here is a kind of final judge performance. The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 132 (a25) is shown in a display mode when a certain amount of time has elapsed since the start of the operation valid period.

The timing of FIG. 132 (a26) is within the operation valid period, and the player operates the operation lever 139 at this timing. Then, similarly to the example shown in FIG. 17, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 132 (a27), the animation display of the duel scene is switched to the display of the effect image, and the display shown in FIG. The first large-scale behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior accessory 224Gd operate, and each overlaps on the front surface side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The effect image and the left pattern and the right pattern etc. of the first decorative pattern are overlapped by the first large board behavioral product 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral product 224Gd, respectively, and the first large board behavioral product 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral part. It is difficult to visually recognize the object 224Gd as compared with the case where the object 224Gd is not overlapped. In addition, the second decorative symbol and the second number-of-holds display are also at least partially overlapped by the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga and the second large board behavior accessory 224Gb, respectively, and are difficult to visually recognize. Furthermore, the 1000-box box accessory 224H shown in FIG. 14 operates and moves downward, and overlaps with the front surface side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the first large board behavioral accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral accessory 224Gd. In addition, the light guide plate IL is also emitting light. The character effect produced by the thousand-box box character 224H shown in FIG. 14 is a jackpot finalizing effect.

Note that the effect using various types of accessories in FIG. 132 (a27) may be executed on condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or the operation valid period is not operated without the chance button 136 being operated. It may also be executed when the time has elapsed.

After that, the various accessories return to the initial position, the light emission of the light guide plate IL is finished, and the display of the effect image is switched to the display of the final judgment result on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 132 (a28), "decoration 6" as a medium symbol is displayed in large size together with the scene in which Yoshimune has won. After this, the big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed.

FIG. 133 is a diagram showing, step by step, an example of an effect in which the number of executions of the button effect is stocked.

In FIG. 133 (Ob1), the super reach effect of VS swordsman reach is started, and the image of the enemy swordsman is greatly displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 133 (Ob1). Also, two notice icons YI are displayed in stock. An animation of a duel scene between the main character Yoshimune and the enemy swordsman is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 133 (b2). In addition, the first notice icon YI previously stocked (the notice icon YI stocked at the first stock position) is used, and the first notice icon YI is a display mode in which the box is opened. It changes to d and the notice display YH of the "button" is popping out from the box. The "button" notice display YH in this example of performance is a display for giving notice that the "button" notice display YH itself will be stocked.

In FIG. 133 (b3), the first notice icon YI, which is the display mode in which the box is opened, is deleted, but the notice display YH of the “button” remains displayed. In the subsequent FIG. 133 (b4), the advance notice display YH of the “button” changes to a light ball YHb, and as shown in the figure (a5), the light ball YHb is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. It flies to the right end portion of the right base icon bIr. In FIG. 132 (a6), the button image icon 136aI of the default display mode (first display mode) is displayed at the right end portion thereof. Further, the character "x1" representing the number of stocks is displayed on the button image icon 136aI. One button effect is executed for one stock. Here, the button image icon 136aI is stocked, but in short, it means that the number of executions of the button effect is stocked.

In FIG. 133 (b7), the second notice icon YI (the notice icon YI stocked in the second stock position) that was later stocked is used, and the notice display of the “button” is again displayed from the box. YH is popping out. In FIG. 133 (b8), the second notice icon YI, which is the display mode in which the box is opened, is deleted, and the notice display YH of the “button” is changed to a light ball YHb, and the light ball is changed. YHb flies toward the button image icon 136aI displayed in the lower right corner and hits the button image icon 136aI. In FIG. 133 (b9), the stock number on the button image icon 136aI is “×3”. This means that when the light ball YHb hits the button image icon 136aI in FIG. 133 (b8), two button image icons 136aI are stocked. As described above, the notice display YH of the “button” is a notice that the notice display YH of the “button” itself is stocked, and the number of the notice display YH of the “button” is displayed. It is not announced in advance whether the button image icon 136aI will be stocked, and thus, a plurality of button image icons 136aI may be stocked for a single "button" advance notice display YH. For example, a maximum of 10 button image icons 136aI may be stocked for one advance notice YH of the “button”. However, it may be configured such that only one button image icon 136aI is stocked for one notice display YH of the “button”. Further, the number of stocks of the button image icon 136aI may be determined according to the display mode of the “button” advance notice display YH. For example, in the notice display YH of the “button” in the first display mode, the stock number of the button image icon 136aI is 1, but in the notice display YH of the “button” in the fifth display mode, the stock number of the button image icon 136aI. May be 5. The maximum stock number of the button image icon 136aI is, for example, 10. In other words, the maximum number of executions of the button effect is 10 times.

In FIG. 133 (b10), the effect image EF9 is added to the button image icon 136aI, and it is announced that the button effect will be started. In FIG. 133 (b11), a large button image 136a is displayed. The stock number on the button image icon 136aI has been reduced from “×3” to “×2” at this stage. After that, in FIG. 133 (b12), the button image 136a is slightly smaller, and the remaining time display meter MT indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period is additionally displayed. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 133 (b12), the operation valid period has not started, and even if the button is operated, the corresponding display is not performed. Eventually, the button effect is started and the operation effective period is started (FIG. 133 (b13)). The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 133 (b14) is shown in a display mode when a little time has passed since the operation valid period started.

The timing of FIG. 133 (b15) is within the operation valid period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. Then, as in the example shown in FIG. 16, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 133 (b16), the animation display of the duel scene is switched to the non-display screen, and at the same time as shown in FIG. The first large-scale behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior accessory 224Gd operate and overlap on the front surface side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, the light guide plate IL is also emitting light.

Note that the effect using various types of accessories in FIG. 133 (b16) may be executed on condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or the operation valid period is not operated without the chance button 136 being operated. It may also be executed when the time has elapsed.

In FIG. 133 (b17), each of the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd returns to the initial position, and the light emission of the light guide plate IL ends, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the super reach is achieved. Promotion of the production is being carried out. In other words, in VS Swordsman Reach, it is announced that pandas will participate in order to help the main character, Yoshimune. Thus, in FIG. 133 (b18), the animation of the duel scene continues with the panda participating in the battle, and in FIG. 133 (b19), the effect image EF9 is added again to the button image icon 136aI and the second button is pressed. It is announced that the production will start. In FIG. 133 (b20), the second button effect is started, the button image 136a is displayed, and the remaining time display meter MT is also displayed, and a little time has passed since the operation valid period started. ing. Further, the number of stocks on the button image icon 136aI is reduced from “×2” to “×1”.

The timing of FIG. 133 (b21) is within the operation valid period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. Then, as shown in FIG. 133 (b22), on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the gold cut-in image GCT described as “Go!! It is foretold that the expectation of a big hit is quite high.

The gold cut-in image GCT in FIG. 133 (b22) may be displayed on condition that the chance button 136 has been operated, or the operation valid period has elapsed without operating the chance button 136. If it does, it may be executed.

In FIG. 133 (b23), the gold cut-in image GCT disappears and the animation of the duel scene returns, and in the following FIG. 133 (b24), the animation of the duel scene is about to end. In FIG. 133 (b25), the final judge effect is started, and a large default button image 136a is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L as part of this final judge effect. Then, in FIG. 133 (b26), it is announced that the effect image EF9 is added to the button image icon 136aI three times and the third button effect is started. In FIG. 133 (b27), the promotion effect of the button image 136a is performed, the effect image EF10 is added to the larger default button image 136a, and in the same figure (b28), the button of the fifth display mode (red). It has been promoted to image 136. By being promoted to the button image 136 of the fifth display mode (red), the expectation of the big hit is further increased. Note that at the stage of FIG. 133 (b27), the display of the button image icon 136aI and the stock number has disappeared.

FIG. 134 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example of the effect in which the number of executions of the button effect is stocked, and another example of the effect.

In FIG. 134 (b28) subsequent to FIG. 133 (b28), the button image 136a in the fifth display mode (red) is slightly smaller, and the remaining time display meter MT indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period is additionally displayed. There is. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 134 (b29), the operation valid period has not started, and even if the button is operated, the display corresponding to this is not performed. Eventually, the button effect is started and the operation valid period is started (FIG. 134 (b30)). The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 134 (b31) is shown in a display mode when a little time has passed since the operation valid period started.

The timing of FIG. 134 (b32) is within the operation valid period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. Then, similarly to the example shown in FIG. 17, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 132 (a27), the animation display of the duel scene is switched to the display of the effect image, and the display shown in FIG. The first large-scale behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior accessory 224Gd operate, and each overlaps on the front surface side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The effect image and the left pattern and the right pattern etc. of the first decorative pattern are overlapped by the first large board behavioral product 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral product 224Gd, respectively, and the first large board behavioral product 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral part. It is difficult to visually recognize the object 224Gd as compared with the case where the object 224Gd is not overlapped. In addition, the second decorative symbol and the second number-of-holds display are also at least partially overlapped by the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga and the second large board behavior accessory 224Gb, respectively, and are difficult to visually recognize. Furthermore, the 1000-box box accessory 224H shown in FIG. 14 operates and moves downward, and overlaps with the front surface side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the first large board behavioral accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral accessory 224Gd. In addition, the light guide plate IL is also emitting light. The character effect produced by the thousand-box box character 224H shown in FIG. 14 is a jackpot finalizing effect.

Note that the effect using various types of accessories in FIG. 134 (b33) may be executed on the condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or the operation valid period is not operated without the chance button 136 being operated. It may also be executed when the time has elapsed.

After that, the various accessories return to the initial position, the light emission of the light guide plate IL is finished, and the display of the effect image is switched to the display of the final judgment result on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. On the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 134 (b34), "decoration 6" as a medium symbol is displayed in large size together with the scene in which Yoshimune has won. After this, the big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed.

In this example, when one button image icon 136aI stocked at the lower right of the screen is consumed (used), as shown in FIG. 133 (b12), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed. The operation promotion notification image including is displayed. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 134 (b30), the button of the button image 136a displayed as the operation promotion notification image may be promoted, but one button image icon 136aI stocked at the lower right of the screen is consumed. When (used), the operation promotion notification image including the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT may be displayed without fail, or the button image icon 136aI stocked at the lower right of the screen may be displayed. The button of the button image 136a displayed as the operation promotion notification image when it is completely consumed (used) may be configured to be promoted without fail. Further, in this example, when one button image icon 136aI is consumed (used), one operation promotion notification image is displayed, but when one button image icon 136aI is consumed (used), the operation promotion notification image is displayed. Two or more images may be displayed or one image may be displayed, or two or more images may be displayed. Here, the emission color of the chance button lamp 138 that causes the chance button 136 to emit light may be upgraded in accordance with the promotion of the button image 136a of the operation promotion notification image. Alternatively, the button image 136 of the operation promotion notification image may not be promoted, and only the emission color of the chance button lamp 138 may be promoted. The emission color of the chance button lamp 138 may change from the default color to red when one stocked button image icon 136aI is consumed, and from red to gold when two of the stocked button image icons 136aI are consumed. In the case of the chance button 136, the chance button lamp 138 is used, but in the case of operating means different from the chance button 136 (for example, the operating lever 139 etc.), the emission color of the light emitting means that causes these operating means to emit light. Will be promoted.

In this example, the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed as the operation promotion notification image, but only the button image 136a may be displayed as the operation promotion notification image, and the remaining time is displayed as the operation promotion notification image. Only the display meter MT may be displayed, and character representations such as “press button”, “PUSH”, “continuous hit”, and “long press” may be displayed as the operation prompting notification image (even if the character representation indicates an operation method. ) And a button image 136a may be displayed, only the character notation may be displayed as the operation promotion notification image, or the character notation and the remaining time display meter MT may be displayed as the operation promotion notification image. The character notation, the button image 136a, and the remaining time display meter MT may be displayed as the operation promotion notification image. Further, as the operation promotion notification display, an image simulating the shape of the operating means (for example, button display 136a), an image showing the elapse of the operation valid period of the operating means and/or the remaining time of the operation valid period (for example, remaining time). Time display meter MT), character display related to operation (for example, “press button” or “PUSH”, “continuous hit”, “long press”) and image display other than the above (for example, one or a plurality of “shapes of operating means”) Character image display different from the image imitating the above (By displaying the character image as the operation promotion notification display, the displayed variable display may be more likely to be a big hit eventually than when it is not displayed.)" and the like. One or more of the image displays may be displayed.

FIG. 134 (c1) to FIG. 134 (c7) are diagrams showing, step by step, the first example in which the mini game is started in response to the button operation.

In FIG. 134 (c1), the first decorative pattern in the central area is stopped and displayed, but the movement animation of the hold icon ends, and the variation icon h0 is the icon of the mode a (standby mode) of the villager type. Is displayed. Also, as the first hold icon h11, the icon of the mode a (standby mode) of the type of villager is displayed. Further, although the second hold icon h12 is also displayed, this second hold icon h12 is displayed in the default display mode. Further, in the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS, as the opponent icon for the mini game B, the icon of the mode a (standby mode) of the panto type shown in FIG. 118(c) is displayed. The panda character with the opponent icon TI also executes the standby animation (default animation). Further, in the appearance area AS, the No. shown in FIG. The notice icon YI of “box” 1 is displayed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 134 (c2), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started in the central region. When the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, the rock-paper-scissors competition of the mini game B is then started. In this example, the rock-paper-scissors confrontation of the mini game B is performed by operating the chance button 136. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 134 (c3), between the icon of the character of the villager, which is the variable icon h0, and the icon of the character of Panto, which is the opponent icon, which is scheduled to perform a rock-paper-scissors battle, An operation promotion notification image including the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT is displayed. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 134 (c3), the operation valid period has not started, and even if the button is operated, the corresponding display is not performed. Eventually, the button effect is started and the operation valid period is started (FIG. 134 (c4)). The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 134 (c5) is shown in a display mode when a little time has passed after the operation valid period started.

The timing of FIG. 134 (c6) is within the operation valid period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. Then, according to the operation of the chance button 136, the rock-paper-scissors showdown is started, and the rock-paper-scissors show-up animation is performed. In FIG. 134 (c7), the villager character of the variable icon h0 has won. Then, it continues to FIG. 120 (a 9-1).

It should be noted that the start of the rock-paper-scissors confrontation may be executed on the condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or may be executed even when the operation valid period has elapsed without operating the chance button 136. That is, the mini game may be started only when the chance button 136 is operated within the operation valid period, or the mini game is started even if the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation valid period. May be configured such that it is easier to win the mini game, that is, it is easier to obtain the notice icon YI when the player operates the device within a valid operation period than when the player does not operate it.

FIG. 134 (o d1) to FIG. 134 (o d7) are diagrams showing stepwise a second example in which a mini game is started in response to a button operation.

FIG. 134(o d1) to FIG. 134(o d2) are in the same state as FIG. 134(o c1) to FIG. 134(o c2) except that the notice icon YI is stocked.

In FIG. 134 (d3), the stocked notice icon YI is used, and the notice display YH of “button” appears from the inside. In FIG. 134 (d4), the used notice icon YI disappears, but the “button” notice display YH is still displayed, and in FIG. 134 (d5), the “button” notice display YH: It moves toward between the icon of the character of the villager, which is the variable icon h0, and the icon of the character, Pantah, which is the opponent icon, which is scheduled to have a rock-paper-scissors battle. In FIG. 134 (d6), the advance notice display YH of the “button” is located between the icon of the villager character, which is the variable icon h0, and the icon of the panta character, which is the opponent icon.

In FIG. 134 (d7), the remaining time display meter MT showing the remaining time of the operation valid period is additionally displayed on the advance notice display YH of the “button”. It should be noted that at the timing shown in FIG. 134 (d7), the operation valid period has not started, and even if the button is operated, the corresponding display is not performed. Eventually, the operation valid period is started, and the subsequent steps are the same as those in FIG. 134 (c6) and the like.

FIG. 135 is a diagram showing an example of effects in which the notice display YH emitted from the notice icon YI can be seen before the emission.

In FIG. 135 (or a1), the variable display of the symbols ends, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol in the central area is a combination of missing decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 1”- The "decoration 7") is stopped and displayed, and the second upper left decorative design is also stopped and displayed with the same combination of lost decorative designs. The first hold icon h11 shown in FIG. 135 (or a1) is No. 1 in FIG. The icon has changed to the icon a of the type of villager described in 17. On the other hand, the second hold icon h12 indicating the target hold of the prefetching notice is the default display mode.

In FIG. 135 (or a2), the hold, which has been the first hold until now, is exhausted, and the variable display of symbols is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 135 (or a2), the first decorative symbol in the central area is still stopped and displayed, but in the second decorative symbol on the upper left, the variable display is started and the first upper right symbol is displayed. In the 2-holding number display, the holding number in Toku-zu 1 is decreased by 1 and becomes “1”. Further, in the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS, which has not been displayed until now, the appearance animation of the opponent icon for the mini game B is started and the effect image EF1 is displayed. In addition, in FIG. 135 (or a2), the movement animation of the hold icon is also started. That is, the first hold icon h11 of the villager character that has been displayed on the first stage hs1 so far starts moving toward the pedestal hs0 in the variable icon display area CIS, and is displayed on the second stage hs2 so far. The second hold icon h12 in the default display mode has started moving toward the first stage hs1.

Also in FIG. 135 (or a3-1), the first decorative pattern in the central region is still stopped and displayed, but the movement animation of the hold icon ends, and the variation icon h0 is used as the mode a (standby of the villager type). Aspect) icon is displayed. The villager character with the variable icon h0 is executing the standby animation (default animation). In addition, the appearance animation of the opponent icon also ends, the effect image EF1 disappears in the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS, and the opponent icon TI has a mode a ( The (standby mode) icon is displayed, and the panda character of this opponent icon TI is also executing the standby animation (default animation). Further, in the appearance area AS, the No. shown in FIG. The notice icon YI of "change" of 6 is displayed. In addition, No. shown in FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 121 and the like, the “change” 6 is the notice display YH released from the notice icon YI, but here, it is treated as the notice icon YI. Strictly speaking, in the case of the notice display YH, there is no frame display surrounding the changed character, but in the case of the notice icon YI, there is the frame display. Since the "change" notice icon YI is displayed with the default color "change", the player can start from the notice icon won by winning the rock-paper-scissors confrontation when the appearance area AS is displayed. The notice display YH to be released is known.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 135 (or a4), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started in the central area. When the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, the rock-paper-scissors competition of the mini game B is then started. In FIG. 135 (or a5), a rock-paper-scissors competition animation is performed by the villager character of the variable icon h0 and the panda character of the opponent icon TI, and the villager character of the variable icon h0 has won.

In FIG. 135 (or a7), the stock animation of the notice icon YI displayed in the appearance area AS is started by the victory of the villager character of the change icon h0. That is, the "change" notice icon YI displayed in the appearance area AS exits from the appearance area AS, is temporarily displayed in a large size, and moves to the stock area SS as shown in FIG. 135 (or a8). , Displayed in stock. The notice icon YI thus stock-displayed is also displayed with the character "Change" of the default color.

On the pedestal hs0 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 135 (or a9), the display mode of the villager character and the replacement animation of the default display mode are started. Also, the opponent icon TI gradually disappears from the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS. Further, the empty appearance area AS gradually fades out to the right end of the screen. In FIG. 135 (or a10), the variation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the variation icon display area CIS, and nothing is displayed on the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS. Absent.

In FIG. 135 (or a11), the variable display of the symbols ends, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol in the central area is a combination of missing decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 4”- The "decoration 7") is stopped and displayed, and the second decorative design on the upper left also shows the same combination of the missing decorative designs.

In FIG. 135 (or a12), the read-ahead notice target hold, which has been the first hold so far, has been exhausted, and the symbol variation display that is the read-ahead subject change is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 135 (or a12), both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol have started variable display, and the pedestal hs0 in the variable icon display area CIS has a default display mode. The variable icon h0 of is displayed. In addition, the notice icon YI of "change" has been displayed in stock so far.

In FIG. 135 (or a14), the variable icon change animation using the "change" notice icon YI that has been displayed in stock until then is started. In this variation icon change animation, as shown in FIG. 135 (or a14), the effect image EF11 for notifying that the notice icon YI is about to be used is added to the "change" notice icon YI. The "change" notice icon YI corresponds to the "change" notice display YH when the effect image EF11 is added. In FIG. 135 (or a15), the “change” notice icon YI (“change” notice display YH) to which the effect image EF11 is added flies toward the change icon h0 and hits the change icon h0. .. In FIG. 135 (or a16), the variation icon change animation ends, and the variation icon h0, which has been the default display mode before the animation starts, is displayed in No. 119 of FIG. 119(a). The display mode is changed to the white blinking display mode described in 2.

In this example, it may be considered that the “change” notice icon YI itself collides with the change icon h0.

The example shown in FIG. 135 (or a3-2) is an example in which the notice icon YI of the same type is displayed in the appearance area AS. Here, three "change" notice icons YI are displayed.

The example shown in FIG. 135 (or a3-3) is an example in which different types of notice icons YI are displayed in the appearance area AS. Here, the notice icon YI of "red change", the notice icon YI of "super hot", and the notice icon YI of "SP" are displayed. The types are not limited to all different types, and may be different types. For example, the notice icon YI of "change", the notice icon YI of "change", and the notice icon YI of "SP" may be displayed.

The example shown in FIG. 135 (or b) is an example in which a plurality of notice icons YI of the same type (here, notice icons YI of “change”) are stocked in the stock area SS.

The example shown in Fig. 135 (or b) is an example in which a plurality of different types of notice icons YI( are stocked in the stock area SS. Here, the notice icon YI of "red change" and "super hot". The notice icon YI of “SP” and the notice icon YI of “SP” are displayed. Note that the types are not limited to different types, and may be different types, for example, the same as the “change” notice icon YI. The “change” notice icon YI and the “SP” notice icon YI may be displayed, and the “box” notice icon YI and the “red box” notice icon YI shown in FIG. The "button" notice icon YI may be stocked, or the "box" notice icon YI, the "box" notice icon YI, and the "gold box" notice icon YI may be stocked. , May be stocked.

In each of the examples shown in FIG. 135 (or d), FIG. 135 (or e), and FIG. 135 (or f), the box-shaped notice icon YI shown in FIG. Is an example in which a plurality is displayed. The example shown in FIG. 135( or d) is an example in which three notice icons YI of “box” shown in FIG. 117(a) are displayed in the appearance area AS. That is, the same type of box-shaped icon is displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 135(e), the notice icon YI of “box”, the notice icon YI of “box”, and the notice icon YI of “red box” are displayed in the appearance area AS. Is. That is, the box-shaped icons of the same type and the box-shaped icons of different types are displayed in combination. In the example shown in FIG. 135 (or f), the notice icon YI of “box”, the notice icon YI of “red box”, and the notice icon YI of “gold box” are displayed in the appearance area AS. Is. That is, different types of box-shaped icons are displayed.

Here, the example shown in FIG. 135 (or a3-2), (or a3-3), (or d), FIG. 135 (or e), or FIG. 135 (or f) appears if the mini game succeeds. This is an example in which all the notice icons YI displayed in the area AS can be acquired. It should be noted that if the mini game succeeds, any one or two of the notice icons YI displayed in the appearance area AS may be configured to be obtainable. In addition, a roulette notice that sequentially displays the noticeable icons YI that can be acquired in the appearance area AS is given, and the roulette is displayed before the mini game is started/while the mini game is being executed/after the mini game is successful. It may be configured such that the notice icon that is stopped and can be acquired (or is acquired) is confirmed.

Next, an example of production in which one stocked notice icon is used multiple times will be described.

FIG. 136 is a diagram showing, in a stepwise manner, an example of effect in which one stocked notice icon is used multiple times.

In FIG. 136 (A1-1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is changing at high speed, and the first hold icon h11 in the default display mode is displayed. The first hold represented by the first hold icon h11 is the target hold for the prefetch notice. Also, the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS displays the variable icon h0 in the default display mode, and nothing is displayed on the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS.

In FIG. 136(A2), the appearance animation of the icon change notice display shown in FIG. 119(b) is started for the right base icon bIr, and the smoke-like effect image EF12 is displayed. In FIG. 136(a3), the appearance animation of the icon change notice display ends, and the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS is displayed with the No. 1 shown in FIG. 119(b). An icon change notice display IYH of 16 “bancho” is displayed. The icon change notice display gives notice that the notice icon YI will be acquired or that the display mode of the icon will change. The “bancho” icon change notice display IYH here is a notice for notifying that the notice icon YI will be acquired. In FIG. 136 (A 4 ), the icon change notice display IYH's guard character is “box”. It is notified that the notice icon YI has been acquired, and the notice icon YI of “box” is displayed in the stock area SS in FIG. That is, in this example, the notice icon YI is acquired without playing the mini game. Eventually, as shown in FIG. 136 (A6), after the variable display of the symbols is finished and the combination of the decorative symbols that have been lost is stopped and displayed, in the same FIG. Has been started.

When the symbol variation display that is the prefetch target variation is started, the notice icon YI stocked in the previous symbol variation display is used as shown in FIG. 136 (a8-1), and the box is closed. The notice icon YI of a certain mode a is changed to a mode d that is a display mode in which the box is opened, and an animation in which the notice display YH pops out of the box is displayed. The notice display YH appearing here is No. 1 shown in FIG. 117(b). It is a notice display of "change" of the default color of 6, and is a notice for notifying that the display mode of the hold icon, the variable icon, etc. is changed by one step.

In the example of performance until now, when the notice icon YI was used once and changed to the mode d which is the display mode in which the box was opened, it was erased as it is, but in this example of effect, it is shown in FIG. As shown, the notice icon YI changes from the display mode in which the box is open to the mode a in which the box is closed and is not erased. The fact that the box of the notice icon YI has returned to the closed state means that the box may be opened again in the symbol variation display in which the box is opened, that is, in the symbol variation display that is the currently prefetched variation. It means that you have foretold. Even when the box of the notice icon YI returns to the closed state, the box may not be reopened, or may be reopened without fail. In addition, even if it does not open continuously (even if it does not open immediately), it may open while the symbol variation display that is the prefetch target variation continues. Alternatively, it may be reopened during a specific period (for example, a specific period spanning consecutive symbol variable displays) regardless of the symbol variable display that is the prefetch target variation. Furthermore, although it has been described here that the reopening is performed, the reopening may be closed and the reopening may be performed more than twice.

In FIG. 136(A10), the notice display YH of “change” released from the notice icon YI is used, and the display form of the variable icon, which has been the default display form (first display form) so far, blinks white. The display mode (second display mode) has changed.

In addition, in FIG. 136 (a11), the notice icon YI that has once returned to the closed display mode a is changed to the opened display mode d again, and the second icon in the box is displayed. The notice display YH is released. The notice display YH released here is No. shown in FIG. 117(b). This is a notice display of "REACH" in 17, and this notice display of "REACH" is a displayed variable display, and is a display for notifying that normal reach or more or reach reach production is performed. In this way, there is a case in which a type of notice display different from the type of the first (previous) notice display YH appears. However, the same type of notice display YH may appear continuously. Further, it may be configured so that only the notice display of a type different from the type that appeared last time or once appears, or only the notice display of the same type as the type of the first notice display YH appears. May be. It should be noted that the "reach" notice display may notify that the normal reach will be performed. In that case, when the "reach" notice display is performed, the normal reach occurs in the symbol variation display in which the notice display is displayed. It will be decided to do.

In FIG. 136 (A12), the notice icon YI changes to the mode a, which is the display mode in which the box is closed again, and is not erased. Further, the notice display YH disappears after a certain fixed display period has elapsed after the appearance (FIG. 136 (A13)), but if the notice display YH is "reach", when the reach effect is performed, The display may be continued until the reach effect is started.

Soon, as shown in FIG. 136 (A 14 ), the reach effect is started, and “decoration 6” fluctuates in each of the left symbol display area 208 a and the right symbol display area 208 c. In this example, the reach effect is always performed when the “reach” notice display YH appears, but the reach effect is not always performed just because the “reach” notice display YH appears. Alternatively, even if the notice display YH of “reach” appears, the reach effect may not be performed and the variable display of symbols may be terminated. On the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 136 (A15), the display of the normal reach effect is started. During this normal reach effect, the notice icon YI is changed to the opened display mode d again, and the notice display YH which is the third from the box is released (FIG. 136 (A16)). The notice display YH released here is No. shown in FIG. 117(b). It is a notice display of "chance" in the default color of 2. When the notice display of the "chance" of the default color is displayed during the reach, it becomes a display that gives a notice of the increase in the reliability of the big hit by the variation. Here, too, a type of notice display different from the type of the second (previous) notice display YH appears. This is because the reach effect has already been started, so the notice display YH of "reach" cannot be made to appear again. If there is no such situation, even if the notice display YH of the same type appears. Good. Note that the notice display YH of "reach" may be displayed again during the execution of the reach effect. For example, if the notice display YH of "reach" is displayed again during the normal reach, it may be announced that the notice display YH of "reach" is displayed. It may or may not evolve to reach, and may or may not evolve to super reach. In addition, when the "Leach" notice display YH is displayed during execution of Super Reach A, which has a lower reliability for jackpots than Super Reach B, it is announced that Super Reach A will develop into Super Reach B. However, in that case, it may develop into the super reach B without fail, and it may or may not develop into the super reach B. Further, in the reach effect, the notice display that appears may be limited. In this example, an upper limit is set for the number of notice displays YH appearing from the same notice icon YI (for example, up to 5), and the notice display YH appears within the range. .. As described above, although the upper limit is set, the larger the number of notice displays YH coming out from the same notice icon YI, or the kind of notice display YH coming out from the same notice icon YI is. The larger the number, the higher the reliability of the jackpot may be, the conversely may be lower, or the reliability of the jackpot may be independent of the number or type. In this example, the upper limit number of the notice display YH that appears from the same notice icon YI is configured to be larger than the maximum stock number of the notice icon YI, but the same number may be used. On the contrary, the maximum number of stocks of the notice icon YI may be configured to be larger than the upper limit number of the notice display YH that appears from the same notice icon YI.

As shown in FIG. 136 (a17), in this example, the notice icon YI that has emitted the third notice display YH disappears without returning to the closed display mode a. The notice icon YI may be configured so as to always disappear when opened once during the reach. Alternatively, the notification display YH may be configured to disappear when it reaches the upper limit number. Further, even if the notice display YH is released up to the upper limit number, the notice display YH may continue to be displayed without disappearing. This is the same even if the notice display YH is not emitted up to the upper limit number. Further, the display mode may be returned to the closed display mode a and may be continuously displayed without being opened again, or the open display mode b may be continuously displayed.

In FIG. 136 (A 18 ), the normal reach effect ends, and “decoration 5”, which is not “decoration 6”, swings and fluctuates in the middle symbol display area 208b. That is, the combination of the decorative symbols and the lost symbols is fluctuating and fluctuating.

In FIG. 136 (A19), the combination of "decoration 6"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 6" is stopped and displayed, and in FIG. 136 (A20), it is fixedly displayed. The variable icon h0 changed to the blue display mode continues to be displayed until the fixed display is started, and disappears when the fixed display is started. The change icon h0 may disappear before the confirmation display.

In the example described here, the notice display YH of "reach" is displayed to announce that the reach effect will be performed, and the reach effect is actually started, but rather than the symbol variation display in which the reach effect is not started, In the symbol variation display in which the reach effect is started, the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed, which results in a "reach variation" rather than a symbol variation display in which the "reach" notice display YH is not displayed. In the symbol variable display in which the notice display YH of “” is displayed, the jackpot pattern mode is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed. Further, first, the notice display of "change" is released in FIG. 136 (A8-1), and the notice display of "reach" is released in the second time (A11). This is the second time. , "Change" notice display may be released, or the same type of "red change" notice display as that of "Change" notice display (No. 7 notice display shown in FIG. 117(b)) may be released. May be.

Next, an example will be described in which a plurality of the same type of notice display YH is released from the same notice icon YI that is stocked.

The same is true up to FIG. 136(A7), and when the symbol variation display as the prefetch target variation is started, the stocked notice icon YI is used as shown in FIG. 136(A8-2-1). Then, the display changes to the display mode d in which the box is opened, and the notice display YH is released from the box. The notice display YH released here is No. shown in FIG. 117(b). It is a notice display of "Oval" of 27, and if the notice number of this Oval can be collected by a predetermined number (3 here), it will be a super reach effect or the 1000-box box product described in Fig. 132 (a27) etc. Although there is a display for announcing that the production will be performed, there are cases where a predetermined number cannot be collected. In addition, even if a predetermined number of sheets are collected, there may be a case where neither the super reach effect nor the production of the thousand-box box is performed. However, if one appears, a predetermined number may be surely collected, and if a predetermined number is collected, at least one of the super reach effect and the effect of a thousand box box effect may be necessarily performed. When the notice display YH of "Oval" appears, it is stock-displayed in the region (Oval stock region KS) next to the second decorative symbol display (Fig. 136 (A8-2-2)). This small-sized stock area KS is an area different from the stock area SS (see FIG. 136 (5)) in which the notice icon YI is stocked, and these two areas do not partially overlap. However, these two areas may at least partially overlap with each other or may be completely the same area. Further, the stocked notice icon YI and the stocked "oval" notice display YH do not overlap, but at least a part of them may overlap, or all of them may overlap.

As shown in FIG. 136 (A8-2-2), the notice icon YI that has emitted the “small size” notice display YH returns to the closed display mode b, and the same figure (A8-2-3) is displayed. In ), the variable display of symbols is continued. In addition, the notice display YH of "small size" may be configured such that only one sheet can be stocked in one symbol variable display.

In FIG. 136 (A8-2-4), the notice icon YI that once returned to the closed display mode a is changed to the opened display mode d again, and two icons are displayed from the box. Noticeable notice display YH is released. The notice display YH released here is not the notice display YH of the "small size", but the No. shown in FIG. 117(b). 7 is a notice display of "red change", and the notice display of "red change" is a display for notifying that the display mode of the hold icon, the variable icon, or the like is changed in two stages. In FIG. 136 (A8-2-5), the advance notice icon YI changes to the mode a, which is the display mode in which the box is closed again, and is not erased. Further, the notice display YH of “red change” is used, and the display mode of the variable icon, which has been the default display mode (first display mode) until now, is changed to the blue display mode (third display mode). There is.

In FIG. 136 (A8-2-6), the notice icon YI is changed to the opened display form d again, and the notice display YH that is the third from the box is released. Here, two "oval" notice displays YH are released all at once. As described above, a plurality of advance notice displays YH may be released in one release. However, only one may be released in one release. In FIG. 136 (A8-2-7), the notice display of these two “Oval” is displayed in stock in the Oval stock area KS, and the Oval stock area shown in FIG. 136 (A8-2-7). In the KS, three "oval" notice displays YH, which are the predetermined number, are stocked. In this example, the notice display YH of “small size” is emitted from one notice icon YI a plurality of times (twice in this example), but the notice display YH of “small form” is issued only once from one notice icon YI. It may be configured not to be released. Further, it may be configured such that only the "oval" notice display YH is not emitted from one notice icon YI.

FIG. 137 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example in which a plurality of the same type of notice display YH is released from the same stocked notice icon YI, and other effect examples.

In FIG. 137 (A 8-2-8) following FIG. 136 (A 8-2-7), the notice display YH of three “Oval” which is a predetermined number is stocked in the Oval stock area KS. , These three "oval" notice displays YH are used. That is, it is used immediately when the notice display YH of three "oval" which is the predetermined number is accumulated. In this case, No. 1 shown in FIG. In the form of 28 "three oval sheets" notice display YH, it is relatively large and redisplayed in the center of the screen. No. 28, "Oval 3" notice display YH is a notice that indicates that Super Reach A, Super Reach B, VS Swordsman Reach, or Super Reach more than everyone's collective reach will be performed. However, even if the notice display YH of "3 oval sheets" is displayed, the super reach effect may not be performed, or if the notice display YH of "3 oval sheets" is displayed, the super reach effect is always displayed. May be done.

It should be noted that it is not used immediately when the predetermined number of three "oval" notice displays YH are accumulated, but after the state where the three "orange" notice displays YH are stocked is continued. And may be used. Further, the "small size" notice display YH can be stocked across the variable display of symbols, and it is possible to stock up to the variable display of the pattern to be prefetched. If there is not, the notice display YH of "the small stock that has been stocked until then" is erased from the small stock area KS when the variable display of the pattern to be read ahead ends. Alternatively, it may be used separately without storing three pieces. It should be noted that the stock of the "orange" notice display YH may be configured not to straddle the symbol variation display. In that case, when the symbol variation display in which the "orange" notice display YH is stocked ends, " It is configured such that the notice display YH of "small size" is deleted.

In addition, No. shown in FIG. Each of the 30 "character stock" notice displays ("Den", "Grandpa", "Princess") is similar to the "Oval" notice display described here. The area for stocking the advance notice display of the character may be provided as an area different from the oval stock area KS, or may be provided in common with the oval stock area KS.

No. 1 shown in FIG. No. 27 "Oval" or No. Each of the 30 "character stock" icons ("Den", "Grandpa", "Hime") is displayed in the stock area (Oval stock area KS or character stock area (not shown)) after being displayed as the notice YH. By doing so, it functions as a notice icon. In addition, the notice icon YI may be released from the notice icon YI and the notice icon YI may be stocked. That is, the advance notice icon YI may be stocked as it is without the advance notice display YH.

In FIG. 137 (A8-2-9), the notice display YH of “3 small sheets” disappears and the reach effect is started. That is, the "decoration 7" fluctuates in each of the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. Then, in FIG. 137 (A8-2-10a), the super reach effect of the VS swordsman reach has started as previously announced, and the first decorative pattern display device 208L shows the duel scene between the main character Yoshimune and the enemy swordsman. Animation is displayed. Even if the super reach production is started, the stock display of the notice icon YI continues in the stock area SS, but it may disappear when the super reach production is started.

Also in FIG. 137 (A8-2-11) during the super reach effect, the notice icon YI is changed to the opened display mode d again, and the notice display YH is released from the box. The notice display YH released here is No. shown in FIG. 117(b). It is a notice display of "Gekiatsu" in 4. The notice display of "Gekiatsu" displayed after the reach production is started is equivalent to a type of normal notice that considerably increases the reliability of the big hit in the currently displayed symbol variation display.

In FIG. 137 (A8-2-12), the notice icon YI disappears without returning to the closed display mode a, but the notice display YH of “Gekiatsu” is displayed. However, in this example, after passing through FIG. 137 (A8-2-13), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in the same diagram (A8-2-14), along with the scene where Yoshimune is defeated, the middle symbol The “decoration 6” is displayed in a large size, and then the combination of the decorative patterns with the missing “decoration 7”-“decoration 6”-“decoration 7” is confirmed and displayed.

FIG. 137 (A8-2-10b1) to FIG. 137 (A8-2-10b11) are diagrams showing an example in which the notice icon YI is used across the wipe effect during the super reach effect.

FIG. 137 (A8-2-9) is the same, and FIG. 137 (A8-2-10b1) is also in the same state as FIG. 137 (A8-2-10a). On the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 137 (A8-2-10b2), "decoration 6" as a medium symbol is displayed in large size together with the scene where Yoshimune is defeated, but in the stock area SS. , The notice icon YI in the closed state is still displayed in stock.

In FIG. 137 (A8-2-10b3), the wipe effect is started, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in the same diagram (A8-2-10b4), the display screen is once wiped with the same color without a pattern. Will be displayed. In this wipe display, the change icon h0 disappears, and the notice icon YI that has been displayed in stock also disappears, but the second decorative symbol and the second hold number display are displayed. The model title is displayed in the left corner. In FIG. 137 (A8-2-10b5), wiping out has started and the display at the back is gradually beginning to be seen. Here, the fluctuating first decorative pattern (“decoration 7”-“decoration 6”-“decoration 7”) is beginning to be seen. In the subsequent FIG. 137 (A8-2-10b6), the lower half of the notice icon YI displayed in the stock area SS is beginning to be seen. The player has begun to see the notice icon YI, so that the notice icon YI further emits the notice display YH after the wipeout is completed (after the wipe effect is finished), or as shown in FIG. I expect the advance notice icon YI itself to be promoted. Note that the notice icon YI may remain disappeared and may not be displayed again at the wipeout stage. The notice icon YI that is displayed in stock may be displayed even while the wipe effect is being executed. The notice icon YI displayed in stock during the execution of the wipe effect may be used and the notice display YH may be released. However, whether or not the notice icon YI is displayed in stock during the execution of the wipe effect. Regardless, the notice icon may not be used. Further, although the notice icon YI described here is the notice icon YI that has been used once or more, the same is true for an unused notice icon YI (for example, the notice icon YI in FIG. 120 (11), etc.). Yes (the same applies below).

In FIG. 137 (A8-2-10b7), the wipeout is performed and the background is returned to the normal background, but the variable icon h0 remains in the third display mode (blue). Further, in the first decorative pattern, the combination of "decoration 7"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 7" fluctuates. Further, in the stock area SS, a notice icon YI in a closed form is displayed. Although the advance notice icon YI itself has not been promoted, for example, the type of “box” may be promoted to the type of “red box”.

In FIG. 137 (A8-2-10b8), the notice icon YI is changed to the opened display mode d again, and the notice display YH is released from the box. The notice display YH released here is No. shown in FIG. 117(b). It is a notice display of "iron plate" of 5. The notice display of the "iron plate" is a symbol variation display of the look-ahead target, that is, a symbol variation display that is currently being performed, and is a display that announces that the big hit is confirmed. Here, there may be a case where the advance notice display of “change” is released and the change icon YI is promoted by one stage, which leads to a revival effect described later. Alternatively, even if the change icon is the default display mode, the advance notice display of “red change” may be released, which may lead to a revival effect described later. Further, the release of the notice display at the same time as the shaking change may be confirmed as a big hit.

In FIG. 137 (A8-2-10b9), the notice icon YI disappears without returning to the closed display mode a, but the notice display YH of “iron plate” is displayed. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 137 (A8-2-10b10), a revival effect is started, and in the same figure (A8-2-10b11), "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-" The combination of the jackpot decorative patterns of "decoration 7" is displayed in a swinging manner. After that, this combination is confirmed and displayed.

The advance notice icon YI may be carried over to the next change. Even if the notice icon is displayed across the wipe effect as in this example, the notice icon may not be used and may be hidden at the end of the symbol variation display. Furthermore, the notice icon YI may be carried over to the big hit production or the game state after the big hit is finished, or such carryover may be prohibited. As described above, the same applies to the unused notice icon YI (for example, the notice icon YI in FIG. 120(a11)).

FIG. 137 (A1-2-1) to FIG. 137(A1-2-6) are diagrams showing another example in which the notice icon YI is used across the wipe effect during the super reach effect.

In FIG. 137 (A1-2-1), similarly to FIG. 136 (A1-1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is changing at high speed, and the first hold icon h11 in the default display mode is displayed. It is displayed. The first hold represented by the first hold icon h11 is the target hold for the prefetch notice. Also, the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS displays the variable icon h0 in the default display mode, and nothing is displayed on the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS.

After this, the same effects as those shown in FIGS. 136(A2) to (A7) and FIG. 136(A8-2-1) to (A8-2-11) are performed, and FIG. In (a1-2-2), the state is the same as that shown in FIG. 137 (a8-2-10b1). Then, the wipe effect is started through the same state as the state shown in FIG. 137 (A 8-2-10b2) (FIG. 137 (A 1-2-3)). The wipe effect here is the same as the wipe effect shown in FIG. 137 (A8-2-10b3) to FIG. 137 (A8-2-10b6).

In FIG. 137 (A1-2-4), the wipe effect has ended and the background has returned to the normal background, but the variable icon h0 remains in the third display mode (blue). Further, in the first decorative pattern, the combination of “decoration 7”-“decoration 6”-“decoration 7” fluctuates. Further, in the stock area SS, a notice icon YI in a closed form is displayed. The notice icon YI may remain disappeared at the wipe-out stage and may be re-displayed when the next change is started, or may be re-displayed during the big hit game. The notice icon YI displayed during the big hit game may be prohibited from being used, or may be used in the same manner as during the symbol variation display. In the first place, the display of the notice icon YI may be restricted (prohibited) so that it is not displayed during the big hit game.

In FIG. 137 (A1-2-5), the notice icon YI is changed to the opened display mode d, and the notice display YH is released from the box. The notice display YH released here is a notice display of "red change". The notice display of "red change" here is No. shown in FIG. 117(b). Unlike the notice display of "red change" in 7, the display is a notice for changing the display mode to the same display mode as itself.

In FIG. 137 (1-2-6), there is no change in the display mode of the variable icon h0, and the display mode of the hold icon h11 is the same as the display mode of the notice display of “red change” (in the fifth display mode). It has changed to a certain red display mode). In other words, here we have been promoted to four levels. In this example, the combination of lost decorative patterns of "decoration 7"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 7" is fixedly displayed as it is without performing the revival effect.

According to this example, the notice icon YI is used as a further look-ahead notice instead of the current design change display which was the look-ahead change design. As a result of the look-ahead, the design variation display that is behind the current design variation display has a higher expectation of a big hit (for example, if the variation of the variation time is long, it may be a variation of the big hit. May be) like this example. In this example, the display mode (here, the fifth display mode) is higher than the variation icon (see FIG. 137 (1-2-6)) in the third display mode (the display mode of “blue”) that has been lost. The display mode of the hold icon h11 is changed to. However, the display mode of the hold icon may be changed to a display mode (third display mode) equivalent to the display mode of the variable icon to be lost, or more than the display mode of the variable icon to be lost. The display mode of the hold icon may be changed to the lower display mode (for example, the second display mode). Further, the variation icon of the loss variation may be as in this example when the variation icon is in the third display mode or more, and may be as in this example when the variation icon is in the third display mode or less. In addition, the case may be as in this example regardless of the display mode of the variation icon of the loss variation. Further, the pre-reading notice is not limited to the change of the display mode of the hold icon, and other pre-reading notice may be given (for example, chance, pre-reading background change (red stage change), etc.).

It should be noted that although the notice display of "red change" is emitted here, the notice display of "change" may be emitted in some cases. Further, a notice display for notifying that the change icon h0 is changed to a display mode above (for example, one or more steps above) the display mode (for example, one step above green in this example) is emitted. Good.

FIG. 138 is a diagram showing, step by step, an example in which a plurality of notice icons YI are stocked.

In FIG. 138 (A1-3-1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is changing at high speed, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are displayed. Both of these hold icons h11 and h12 are default display modes. Further, the variable icon h0 in the default display mode is also displayed. Nothing is displayed on the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS.

After that, in FIG. 138 (A1-3-2) showing the state in which the symbol fluctuation is displayed in the state where the hold is exhausted and the special figure is no longer held, two notice icons YI are stocked in the stock area SS. There is. In FIG. 138 (A1-3-3), the first notice icon YI previously stocked is used, and the first notice icon YI is changed to the mode d which is the display mode in which the box is opened. , The notice display YH of "red change" has been emitted from the box. In FIG. 138 (A1-3-4), the notice icon YI has returned to the mode a in which the box is closed, and the notice display YH of “red change” is used, and the change icon h0 is displayed in the following manner. The display mode is changed to the third display mode (“blue” display mode).

Subsequently, in FIG. 138 (A1-3-5), the second notice icon YI that has been stocked later is used, and the second notice icon YI is in the mode d in which the box is in the display mode. It changed and the notice display YH of "reach" was emitted from the box. In FIG. 138 (A1-3-6), the second notice icon YI disappears, and the notice display YH of “reach” is displayed. In FIG. 138 (A1-3-7), “reach” is displayed. The notice display YH disappears, the reach effect is started, and the “decoration 6” fluctuates in each of the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. On the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 138 (A1-3-8), the display of the normal reach effect is started. During the normal reach effect, the remaining notice icon YI changes to the opened display mode again, and the second notice icon YH from the box is released (FIG. 138 (A1-3-9)). ). The notice display YH released here is a notice display of "chance" of the default color. In FIG. 138 (A1-3-10), the first notice icon YI also disappears, and the notice display YH of “chance” is displayed.

In FIG. 138 (A1-3-11), the normal reach effect ends, and “decoration 5”, which is not “decoration 6”, swings in the middle symbol display area 208b. That is, the combination of the decorative symbols and the lost symbols fluctuates, and then is fixedly displayed.

In the example described above, the notice icon YI is used in the stock order, but the notice icon YI may be used regardless of the stock order. In addition, the number of times the notice icon YI was used was twice for the notice icon YI that was previously stocked, whereas it was only once for the notice icon YI that was stocked later. As described above, the number of times of use may differ depending on the notice icon YI, but may be the same. When the number of times the notice icon YI is used is the same, the number of uses may be the same during the period from the stocking of one notice icon to the use of all the plurality of notice icons. For example, if the previously announced notice icon is used twice, the later-stocked notice icon is also used twice, and if the previously-stocked notice icon is used three times, it is later stocked. The notice icon given is also used three times. In this way, the number of times of using other icons may be adjusted. Moreover, the number of times of use may be predetermined. In this case, no matter how many pieces are stocked, any notice icon is always used a predetermined number of times. Further, the previously stocked notice icon YI may be configured to use the notice icon YI more times than the previously stocked notice icon YI, or conversely may be configured to be less frequently used. ..

Also, the maximum number of times of use may be predetermined or may change. When the maximum number of times of use changes, it may change depending on the game state (normal state, power support state (time saving state), probability variation state), or the maximum number of times of use increases in the state of a certain look-ahead zone. Good. Further, in a certain game state (for example, a normal state, but may be a power support state (time saving state) or a probability change state), the notice icon may not be stocked.

FIG. 138(A1-4-1) to FIG. 138(A1-4-11) are diagrams showing another example in which a plurality of advance notice icons YI are stocked in stages.

FIG. 138(A1-4-1) to FIG. 138(A1-4-4) are in the same state as FIG. 138(A1-3-1) to FIG. In FIG. 138 (A1-4-5), the first notice icon YI previously stocked is continuously used. As a result, the notice display YH of "reach" is released. In FIG. 138 (A1-4-6), the first notice icon YI continuously used disappears, and the notice display YH of “reach” is displayed. ), the notice display YH of “reach” disappears and the reach effect is started. On the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 138 (A1-4-8), the display of the normal reach effect is started, and during this normal reach effect, it has not been used until now, The second notice icon YI stocked from is used, and the notice display YH of the default color “chance” is released (FIG. 138 (A1-4-9)). In FIG. 138 (A1-4-10), the remaining notice icon YI also disappears and the notice display YH of “chance” is displayed.

In FIG. 138 (A1-4-11), the normal reach effect ends, and the combination of the decorative symbols and the lost symbols fluctuates, and then the final display is confirmed.

As in this example, the notice icon YI may disappear in the stock order. That is, when the previously stocked notice icon YI is used up, the next stocked notice icon YI may be started to be used.

FIG. 139 is a diagram showing an example in which the notice icon YI emitted from the notice icon YI is used a plurality of times in a state in which the notice display YH is known before the release.

139 (a1) to 139 (a3) are the same states as FIGS. 136 (a1-1) to 136 (a3), and in FIG. 139 (a4), the effect icon display area DIS is displayed. On the right base icon bIr, a “bancho” icon change notice display IYH is displayed. The “bancho” icon change notice display IYH here is also a display for giving notice that the notice icon YI will be acquired. However, like the effect example described with reference to FIG. 135, the No. shown in FIG. The notice icon YI of "change" of 6 is displayed. That is, the icon change notice display IYH of “bancho” is No. 1 shown in FIG. It is displayed that the notice icon YI of 6 "change" has been acquired, and the player can see the display (by reading the characters) and the notice display YH released from the notice icon can be changed. Recognize that it is a notice display of.

In FIG. 139 (a5), the “change” notice icon YI has moved to the stock area SS, and is displayed in the stock area SS in FIG. 139 (a6). Eventually, as shown in FIG. 139 (a7), after the variable display of the symbols is finished and the combination of the missing decorative symbols is stopped and displayed, in FIG. Has been started.

When the symbol variation display, which is the variation of the prefetch target, is started, the conversation notice as the normal notice described with reference to FIG. 120 is started. A detailed description is given to the above description, and briefly described here, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 139 (a9), the conversation image CI1 of the lord is displayed in the central area. The display of the conversation image CI1 of the lord does not overlap the notice icon YI displayed in stock, and the notice icon YI is displayed in the foreground. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 139 (a10), the conversation notice is updated, and the old conversation image CI2 is displayed in which the operation promotion notice image including the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT is displayed. Is displayed. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 139 (a10), the operation valid period has not started, and even if the chance button 136 is operated, display corresponding to this is not performed. Further, the old conversation image CI2 is displayed at a position shifted from the notice icon YI displayed in stock, and the two do not overlap.

Eventually, the operation valid period is started, and the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 139 (a11) is shown in a display mode when a certain amount of time has elapsed after the operation valid period was started.

The timing of FIG. 139 (a12) is within the operation valid period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. In FIG. 139 (a13), in response to the chance button 136 being operated within the operation valid period, the old conversation image CI2 notifies the operation promotion notification image that the reach effect will start. Reach it!" The notice character display such as "Let's reach!" may be displayed on condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or the operation valid period has elapsed without operating the chance button 136. It may be displayed even in the case of doing.

Further, the variable icon change animation is started in a state where the old conversation image CI2 that has been changed to the character display of "reach!" is displayed. That is, as shown in FIG. 139 (a14), the effect image EF11 for notifying that the notice icon YI is about to be used is added to the "change" notice icon YI. In FIG. 139 (a15), a ball of light flies from the stock area SS toward the variation icon h0 and hits the variation icon h0. The variable icon h0 that the ball of light hits has changed to the second display mode (white flashing display mode).

The display of “change” displayed in the stock area SS of FIG. 139 (a15) corresponds to the notice display YH, and in FIG. 139 (a16), the notice display YH of “change” is shown in FIG. Is changed to the mode b shown in FIG. That is, it has been changed to a mode showing that it has been used. During the period b, the notice display YH cannot be used as the notice icon YI.

In FIG. 139 (a17), the notice display YH of the mode b is changed to the notice icon YI, and the notice icon YI can be used again. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 139 (a18), the conversation image CI1 of the lord and the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather are erased to end the conversation notice, and the first decorative symbol is easily visible.

In FIG. 139 (a19), the reach effect is started, and the “decoration 6” fluctuates in each of the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. On the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 139 (a20), the display of the normal reach effect is started. During this normal reach effect, the variable icon change animation is started, the effect image EF11 is added again to the advance notice icon YI (FIG. 139 (a21)), and in FIG. 139 (a22), light is emitted from the stock area SS. The ball flies toward the variable icon h0 and hits the variable icon h0. The fluctuation icon h0 hit by the ball of light has now changed to the third display mode (blue display mode).

The display of "change" displayed in the stock area SS of FIG. 139 (a22) corresponds to the notice display YH, and in FIG. 139 (a23), the notice display YH of "change" is shown in FIG. 117(b). Although it has changed again to the mode b shown in (a), it is returned to the notice icon YI in the figure (a24), and it can be used again. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 139 (a24), the super reach development effect is displayed, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in the same diagram (a25), the VS swordsman reach is displayed. Super reach production has started, and the image of the enemy swordsman is displayed in a large size. An animation of a duel scene between the main character Yoshimune and the enemy swordsman is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 139 (a26). Even when the super reach effect is started, the change icon h0 is displayed and the notice icon YI is displayed in stock in the stock area SS. As shown in FIG. 139 (a27), in the middle of the duel scene animation, the variation icon change animation is started, the effect image EF11 is added to the notice icon YI again, and in FIG. 139 (a28), the stock area is displayed. A light ball flies from the SS toward the variable icon h0 and hits the variable icon h0.
FIG. 140 is a diagram showing an example of effect and the like continued from FIG. 139.

In FIG. 140 (a29) continuing from FIG. 139 (a28), in the fluctuation icon changing animation, the fluctuation icon h0 hit by the ball of light changes to the fourth display mode (green display mode). .. Further, although the notice display YH of "change" is changed to the mode b again, in FIG. 140 (a30), it is returned to the notice icon YI and can be used.

On the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 140 (a31), "decoration 5" as a medium symbol is displayed in large size along with the scene where Yoshimune is defeated, but the notice icon YI is displayed in the stock area SS. Is still in stock.

Then, the wipe effect is started again here (FIG. 140 (a32)), and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 140 (a33), the display screen once becomes the wipe display of the same color with no pattern. In this wipe display, the change icon h0 disappears and the notice display YH that has been displayed in stock also disappears. In FIG. 140 (a34), the wipeout has started, and the display at the back is gradually beginning to be seen. Here, the fluctuating first decorative pattern (“decoration 6”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 6”) is beginning to be seen. In the subsequent FIG. 140 (a35), the lower half of the notice icon YI displayed in the stock area SS is beginning to be seen.

In FIG. 140 (a36), although the wipeout is performed and the background is returned to the normal background, the change icon h0 remains in the fourth display mode (green). Further, in the first decorative pattern, the combination of "decoration 6"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 6" fluctuates. Further, a notice icon YI is displayed in the stock area SS.

In FIG. 140 (a37), the notice icon YI has disappeared. Note that the notice icon YI may disappear before the wipe effect, may remain in the wipe-out stage and may not be displayed again, or may disappear at the same time as the wipe effect ends. May be present, may not disappear until the super reach effect is finished, or may not disappear until the finalized display. The notice icon YI that is displayed in stock may be displayed even while the wipe effect is being executed. The notice icon YI displayed in stock during the execution of the wipe effect may be used and the notice display YH may be released. However, whether or not the notice icon YI is displayed in stock during the execution of the wipe effect. Regardless, the notice icon may not be used.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 140 (a38), the first decorative symbol is definitely displayed in the combination of "decoration 6"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 6".
Next, an example in which a plurality of notice icons YI are stocked will be described.

It is the same up to FIG. 139 (a6), and thereafter, by the time before the symbol variation display ends, the No. shown in FIG. 117 (b). No. 21 "button" notice icon YI and No. 21. After the notice icon YI of "REACH" of 17 is continuously stocked, as shown in FIG. 139 (b1), the variable display of the symbols is finished, and the combination of the decorative symbols with a loss is stopped and displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 139 (b2), the symbol variation display which is the prefetch target variation is started. In this example, a plurality of notice icons that can recognize what the notice display YH emitted from the notice icon is, just by looking at the display or reading the character, are changed to the next variation (prediction target variation pattern). (Variable display).

In the symbol variation display that is the prefetch target variation, the same conversation announcement as the conversation announcement that has been described many times up to now, such as in FIG. 139 (a9) to (a17), is started (FIG. 140 (ab3)). ). Here, the explanation of the conversation notice is minimized, and the notice icon YI that is stocked is explained. In FIG. 140 (a b4 ), the “change” notice icon YI, the “button” notice icon YI, and the “reach” notice icon YI among the three notice icons YI are the “button” notice icon YI. , The notice image YI of "reach" is added with an effect image EF11 notifying that the notice icon YI will be used. In FIG. 140 (b5), the effect image EF11 disappears from each, and the notice display YH of the “button” of the aspect b and the notice display YH of the “reach” of the aspect b are obtained. Here, in the stock area SS, the circle marks of the aspects b partially overlap each other, but they may be displayed so as not to overlap each other. In addition, the stocked order may be overlapped in the later order, or conversely, the stocked order may be overlapped in the earlier order. In FIG. 140 (b5), since the notice display of “button” is used, the button effect is executed in the conversation notice. That is, the operation promotion notification image including the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT is displayed. In FIG. 140 (b6), both the "button" notice display YH and the "reach" notice display YH have returned to the notice icon YI and can be used again.

Then, the chance button 136 is operated within the operation valid period (FIG. 140 (b7). Then, since the notice display of "reach" is used from the operation promotion notification image, the reach effect is started. It has changed to the display of "Reach it!"

When the conversation notice ends, in FIG. 140 (b10), the first stop of the left symbol in the first decorative symbol is performed. When the first stop is performed, the effect image EF11 is added to the “reach” notice icon YI. The effect image EF11 may be added to the "reach" notice icon YI before the first stop is performed, or may be added at the same time as the first stop is performed, or the first stop is performed. May be added before the second stop is performed (that is, before the reach state is generated). In FIG. 140 (b11), the effect image EF11 disappears, and the notice display YH of “reach” of aspect b is displayed. In FIG. 140 (b12), the second stop of the right symbol is performed in the first decorative symbol, and the reach state is reached. ing.

In the reach state, the variation icon change animation is started this time, and the effect image EF11 is added to the “change” notice icon YI as shown in FIG. 140 (b13). Then, in FIG. 140 (b14), the ball of light flies toward the fluctuation icon h0 and hits the fluctuation icon h0. The display mode has changed to a white flashing display mode. Further, although the notice display YH of "change" has changed to the mode b again, the notice icon YI has returned to the notice icon YI in FIG. 140 (a16) and can be used.

On the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 140 (b17), the display of the normal reach effect is started. During this normal reach effect, the variation icon change animation is started again, and the effect image EF11 is added again to the “change” notice icon YI (FIG. 139 (b18)).
FIG. 141 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example in which a plurality of notice icons YI are stocked.

In FIG. 141 (Ib19) continued from FIG. 140 (Ib18), the ball of light flies toward the fluctuation icon h0 and hits the fluctuation icon h0. In FIG. 141 (Ib20), the fluctuation of the light ball hits. The icon h0 has changed to the third display mode (blue display mode). Further, although the notice display YH of “change” has changed to the mode b again, in FIG. 141 (b21), the notice icon YI has been returned to the notice icon YI and it can be used. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 141 (b21), the super reach development effect is displayed, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in the same diagram (b22), the VS swordsman reach is displayed. Super reach production has started, and the image of the enemy swordsman is displayed large. An animation of a duel scene between the main character Yoshimune and the enemy swordsman is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 141 (b23). Even if the super reach effect is started, the change icon h0 is displayed and the three notice icons YI are still displayed in stock in the stock area SS. As shown in FIG. 141 (b21), the effect image EF11 is added to the notice icon YI of the “button” in the middle of the duel scene animation, and in the subsequent FIG. 141 (b25), the first decorative symbol display. On the device 208L, an operation promotion notification image including a button image 136a simulating the chance button 136 and a remaining time display meter MT indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period is displayed. It should be noted that at the timing shown in FIG. 141 (b25), the operation valid period has not started, and even if the button is operated, the corresponding display is not performed. Further, although the notice display YH of the "button" has changed to the mode b again, after that, the notice icon YI returns to the notice icon YI so that it can be used. Eventually, the button effect starts and the operation valid period starts (FIG. 141 (b26)). The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 141 (b21) is shown in a display mode when a little time has passed after the operation valid period starts.

The timing shown in FIG. 141 (b28) is within the operation valid period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. The button operation here is an operation for deciding whether or not the lord's cut-in image CI3 shown in FIG. 17(32) appears. In this example, the lord's cut-in image CI3 does not appear, and the sword of the duel scene is displayed. The animation only progresses (Fig. 141 (b21) to (b31) in Fig. 141. In addition, the variation icon change animation is started according to the button operation, and the effect image EF11 is added to the "change" notice icon YI. Therefore, the display mode of the variable icon may change.

In FIG. 141 (b32), the effect image EF11 is added again to the “button” notice icon YI, and in the subsequent FIG. 141 (b33), the chance button 136 is modeled on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. An operation promotion notification image composed of a button image 136a and a remaining time display meter MT indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period is displayed. Eventually, the button effect is started and the operation valid period is started, and the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 141 (b34) shows the display mode when a little time has passed after the operation valid period was started. It is shown. Further, although the notice display YH of the "button" has changed to the mode b again (Fig. 141 (b33)), after that, the notice icon YI is returned to and ready for use.

The timing of FIG. 141 (b35) is within the operation valid period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. The button effect here is the final judge effect, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 141 (b36), the scene in which Yoshimune is defeated and the "decorative symbol 5" as the middle symbol is displayed large. ing. After that, the first decorative symbol display device 208L is subjected to the wipe effect performed after FIG. 140 (a32), and the notice icon YI is erased as shown in FIG. 140 (a37). The combination of the missing decorative patterns "-"decoration 5"-"decoration 6" is confirmed and displayed.

The display of the final judge screen shown in FIG. 141 (b36) may be executed on condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or the operation valid period has elapsed without operating the chance button 136. It may also be executed in some cases.

FIG. 142 is a diagram showing, step by step, an example of the roulette effect for the notice icon stock.

The state shown in FIG. 142 (C1) is a state in which there is no suspension of the special figure, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L does not perform the variable display of the decorative symbol. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 142 (c), the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS is provided with the roulette RLT for the notice icon stock. This roulette RLT is divided into a left area and a right area, and the name (icon name) of any one of the notice icons YI shown in FIG. 117(b) is stopped in the left area. .. On the other hand, a cross mark, a question mark, or a surprise mark stops in the right area. In addition, there are multiple area colors (for example, white, blue, green, red, and gold) for both left and right areas, and you can use them by combining icon names and marks. To be done. In the roulette display RLT shown in FIG. 142 (C1), the icon name of "change" is displayed on the green background in the left area, and the cross mark is displayed on the white background in the right area. Icon YI cannot be acquired. That is, when the cross mark is displayed, the notice icon cannot be acquired.

After that, there is a ball in the special figure 1 starting port 230, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 142 (C2), the first decorative symbol in the central region is still stopped, but the upper left first symbol In the two decorative patterns, the variable display has been started. Further, on the pedestal hs0 in the variable icon display area CIS, the animation for increasing the variation icon is started, and the variation icon h0 in the default display mode is displayed on the pedestal hs0 shown in FIG. 142 (C3).

When the symbol variation display is started, the roulette display (variation display) is also started in the roulette RLT for the notice icon stock (FIG. 142 (C4)). Here, the roulette display is started before the start of the variable display of the first decorative pattern, but the start of the roulette display may be the same as the start of the variable display of the first decorative pattern, or the first decoration. It may be after the start of variable display of the symbols.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 142 (C5), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started in the central region. After the variable display of the first decorative pattern is started, the variable display of the left area of the roulette RLT is stopped, and the icon name of "reach" is displayed on the green background (Fig. 142 (C5)). On the other hand, the variable display in the right area continues. Eventually, as shown in FIG. 142 (C 7-1), the variable display in the right area is also stopped and the question mark is displayed on the green background. With this combination, the notice icon "reach?" can be acquired, and the notice icon YI of "reach?" is stocked in the stock area SS shown in FIG. 142 (C8). The notice icon YI of "reach?" is a weak notice icon to the extent that reach production may be performed, and the reach production is often not performed than when the notice icon YI of "reach" is used. ..

It should be noted that when the notice icon YI of "reach?" is acquired, the display of the roulette RLT may be turned off, but in this example, the display is continued. In this example, the display of the roulette RLT straddles the variable display in the left area and the variable display in the right area, but the display of the roulette RLT shows the variable display in the left area and/or the right area. You may straddle the variable display in the state in which it is performed. Also, during the stop display of the symbols, the display of the RLT (the state where the variable display of the left area and/or the right area is being performed or the state where the variable display of the left area and/or the right area is stopped) is not displayed. It may be configured as follows.

In FIG. 142 (C9-1), the first stop of the first decorative symbol is performed, and "decoration 6" is temporarily stopped on the left symbol. In this symbol variation display, the notice icon YI of "reach?" is not used, and the reach effect is not performed, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 142 (C10), "decoration 6"-" The combination of the decorative pattern of the loss of "decoration 4"-"decoration 1" is fluctuating, and in the same figure (C11), the combination is confirmed and displayed. Here, since there is no subsequent hold, when the confirmation display is performed, the notice icon YI of "reach?" disappears. However, if there is a subsequent hold, it may be carried over to the next change, or it may be carried over without fail. Alternatively, even if there is a subsequent hold, it may not be carried over.

Note that the number of times the roulette is changed is one here for one symbol variation display, but it may be changed multiple times. In addition, the symbol variation display of the look-ahead target variation and the symbol variation display before that may be provided with a difference in the number of times the roulette is varied in one symbol variation display, for example, the symbol variation display of the look-ahead variation However, the number of fluctuations of the roulette may be increased or, on the contrary, decreased, as compared with the previous symbol fluctuation display. For example, in the symbol variation display before the symbol variation display of the prefetch target variation, the roulette display may be performed once as the prefetching notice, and in the symbol variation display of the prefetching subject variation, the roulette display may be performed three times as the normal notice. However, the number of times may not be fixed, and may be zero.

Further, the notice icon YI may be stocked by a production different from the roulette display described here (for example, a mini game such as rock-paper-scissors competition), or the notice icon YI may be displayed while the roulette display is being performed. It is not necessary to perform a production such as a mini game that can obtain the. Further, in the variable display in which the roulette display is performed or is performed, the effect such as the mini game in which the notice icon YI can be acquired may not be performed.
Next, the reach agitation effect will be described.

The same is true up to FIG. 142 (C8). In FIG. 142 (C9-2-1), the effect image EF11 for notifying that the notice icon YI is about to be used is added to the notice icon YI of “reach?”. Has been added. In the following FIG. 142 (C9-2-2), the reach twisting effect is started, and the twisting fluctuation is performed in the first decorative pattern. That is, here, the left symbol and the right symbol in the first decorative symbol are switched to the low speed fluctuation, the left symbol rotates upward, the right symbol rotates downward, and an effect of temporarily stopping at the vertical center position is executed. (FIG. 142 (C9-2-3). However, as shown in FIG. 142 (C9-2-4), the provisional stop is not performed, and the reach flairing production ends in failure. The effect image EF11 is Although it disappears when the reach aspiration effect is started, it may be continuously displayed on the notice icon YI of "reach?" during the reach aspiration effect. The "reach?" notice icon YI shown has a circle indicating that it has been used, but this circle disappears immediately and the notice icon YI becomes reusable. In the first decorative pattern in 9-2-5a), all three decorative patterns change slowly, and in the same figure (C 9-2-6a), "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 8". The combination of the decorative patterns of the “No” is fluctuating and is fixedly displayed by the combination (FIG. 142 (9-2-6a)), but the notice icon YI of “REACH?” is displayed before the decorative pattern is definitely displayed. To be hidden.

In this example, the notice image YI is added with the effect image EF11 for notifying that the notice icon YI will be used, but the mode of the notice icon YI itself changes before the use is started or when the use is disclosed. You may. For example, the notice icon YI itself may become large, or the notice icon YI itself may change its color. In addition, during use, the original form may be restored, or the form may remain unchanged.
Next, another example of the reach fueling effect will be described.

FIG. 142 (C9-2-4b) is the same state as FIG. 142 (C9-2-4a), which is a state after the reach tilting production has failed. In this example, all the three decorative symbols do not change to low speed as they are, but instead switch to high speed fluctuation (Fig. 142 (C9-2-5b)), which is indicated by the notice icon YI of "reach?" 142 (C9-2-6b) in which the circled mark disappears, the effect image EF11 is again added to the notice icon YI of "reach?" In the subsequent Fig. 142 (C9-2-7b), Inflammation fluctuation is restarted in the first decorative symbol, where each of the left symbol and the right symbol in the first decorative symbol starts moving toward the middle symbol that continues to change at high speed, without passing through the middle symbol. , In front of the middle symbol, the left symbol and the right symbol are each displayed in an enlarged manner (Fig. 142 (C9-2-9b)), after which temporary stop is performed and the reach state is established (Fig. 142 (C9- 2-10b)), and finally reach reach production has been successful. Incidentally, FIG. 142 (C9-2-2) to the same figure (C9-2-4a) or the same figure (C9-). 2-4b) and the reach-inspiring effect shown in FIG. 9 (C 9-2-5b) to (C 9-2-9b) or the later-described (C 9-2-9b') in FIG. May be a series of reach-inspiring productions.

Next, an example will be described in which in the reach agitation effect, the agitation fluctuation fails even though the agitation fluctuation is restarted.

As shown in the previous FIG. 142 (C 9-2-8b), each of the left symbol and the right symbol starts moving toward the middle symbol which continues to change at high speed, and FIG. 142 (C 9-2-9b'). In 1), both the left symbol and the right symbol have passed through the middle symbols to each other, and the enlarged display in front of the middle symbols as shown in (Fig. 143 (C9-2-9b)) is not performed. No temporary stop is performed, and all three decorative symbols change slowly (Fig. 142 (C9-2-9b'2)), and in the same figure (C9-2-9b'3), "decoration 7 The combination of the missing decorative patterns of "-"decoration 7"-"decoration 8" fluctuates and is fixedly displayed by the combination.

In addition, the effect image EF11 is added to the notice icon YI of "reach?" every time a new fluctuation is started. The notification icon YI of "reach?" may be added only once.

FIG. 143 is a diagram showing another effect using the roulette RLT for the notice icon stock and an example of effect accompanied by button operation.

FIG. 143 (C9-2-4c) is an example continuing from FIG. 142 (C9-2-3), and shows a successful example of reach fanching effect. Here, the left symbol and the right symbol are aligned in the vertical center, and before the temporary stop, each of the left symbol and the right symbol is displayed in an enlarged manner (Fig. 143 (C9-2-4c)), and then the temporary stop is performed. , Reach state is established (FIG. 143 (C9-2-5c)).

Also, FIG. 143 (C7-2-1) is an example continued from FIG. 142 (C7), and in this FIG. 143 (C7-2-1), the right area of the roulette RLT has a red background. The exclamation mark is displayed. The result is a combination of the "reach" icon name on a green background and a surprised mark on a red background. With this combination, the notice icon YI of "reach" having a higher degree of reliability than the notice icon YI of "reach?" can be obtained. In addition, a combination of the icon name of "reach" on the red background and the question mark on the green background may be set so that only the notice icon YI of "reach?" May be obtained. In addition, if you reach the "Reach" icon name on the red background and the surprise mark YI on the red background and get the "Leach" notice icon YI, you will be surprised at the "Reach" icon name on the green background and the red background. The symbol variable display using the “reach” notice icon may be configured to be a big hit more easily than when the mark is displayed and the “reach” notice icon YI is acquired. Also, if you reach the "REACH" notice icon YI by displaying the "REACH" icon name on the red background and the question mark on the green background, the "REACH" icon name on the green background and the question on the red background The symbol variable display using the “reach” notice icon may be configured to be a big hit more easily than when the mark is displayed and the “reach” notice icon YI is acquired. That is, the background color in which the icon name is displayed is more related to the jackpot reliability than the background color in which the mark (symbol) is displayed. Therefore, if you reach the "Reach" notice icon YI with the "Reach" icon name on the red background and the surprise mark on the green background, you will be surprised at the "Reach" icon name on the green background and the green background. The symbol variation display using the “reach” notice icon is more likely to be a big hit than when the mark is displayed and the “reach” notice icon YI is acquired. In addition, when the "reach" icon name is displayed on the red background and the exclamation mark is displayed on the green background and the "reach" notice icon YI is acquired, and when the "reach" icon name is on the red background and the exclamation mark is on the green background. In the case where the notice icon YI of "reach" is displayed and is acquired, the symbol variation display using the notice icon of "reach" is likely to be a big hit. However, the background color in which the icon name is displayed and the background color in which the mark (symbol) is displayed may have the same relationship with the reliability of the big hit. Alternatively, the background color in which the mark (symbol) is displayed may be more related to the jackpot reliability than the background color in which the icon name is displayed.

Note that the color names in the above description can be represented by display modes. That is, "red" is the fifth display mode and "green" is the fourth display mode (the same applies in the following description).

Also, FIG. 143 (C7-3-1) is also an example continuing from FIG. 142 (C7), and in this FIG. 143 (C7-3-1), the left area of the roulette RLT has a red background. The "reach" icon name is displayed, and in the right area, a red background with a surprise mark is displayed. With this combination, the notice icon YI of "reach" may be acquired for the first time. That is, if the background color is neither the left area nor the right area on the red background, the notice icon YI of "reach" cannot be acquired, and if one of them is the green background, the "reach?" It becomes the notice icon YI. Also, in this case, the red background may be configured such that the red background stops first and the red background stops more easily than the green background stops first, or the probability is the same. May be

In addition, FIG. 143 (C7-4-1) is also another example continuing from FIG. 142 (C7), and in this FIG. 143 (C7-4-1), the left area of the roulette RLT is The box icon shown in 117(a) is displayed, and the stock number is displayed in the right area. In this example, one "box" icon shown in FIG. 117(a) can be acquired. The stock number is 0 to 3. Further, either a “box” or a cross mark may be displayed in the left area, and colors (white, red, gold, rainbow) may be displayed in the right area. In this case, for example, if it is a cross mark and a rainbow, the box-shaped notice icon YI cannot be acquired, and if it is "box" and red, the "red box" notice icon YI can be acquired. it can.

Also, FIG. 143 (C 7-5-1) is another example continuing from FIG. 142 (C 5), and in this FIG. 143 (C 7-5-1), the left area of the roulette RLT is (Sixth display mode) The icon name of "reach" is displayed on the background, and the surprise mark is displayed on the gold background in the right area. With this combination, as shown in FIG. 143 (C 7-5-2), it is possible to acquire the gold “reach” notice icon YI. The gold "reach" notice icon has higher reliability than the normal "reach" notice icon. Alternatively, the reliability of the big hit may be high.

Even if both the left area and the right area have a gold background in this way, only the same notification icon that can be acquired when both the left area and the right area have a red background can be acquired. Even if it is not possible, the gold background may be more likely to hit the red background than the red background with respect to the change of the prefetch target.

Further, the display of the roulette RLT and the stocked notice icon YI may be inconsistent. For example, the display of the roulette RLT is "reach" and "?", but the notice icon YI is the notice icon of "reach", or the display of the roulette RLT is "reach" and "!". The notice icon YI may be a "SP" notice icon indicating super reach, or the notice icon YI may be a green icon even though the background of the roulette RLT is a gold background. Such a contradiction may be that final jackpot symbols may be more easily finalized and displayed, or conversely, the lost symbols may be more easily finalized and displayed, than when no contradiction occurs. In addition, when the background of the roulette RLT is a gold background and the advance notice icon YI is a green icon, the jackpot may be confirmed.

Also, the roulette wheel may be changed again. For example, even if the display of the roulette RLT is stopped at "reach" and "x", the combination of "reach" and "!" may be finally obtained by changing the right area again. Further, even if the display of the roulette RLT stops at "reach" and "?", the combination of "SP" and "?" may be finally obtained by changing the left area again. Furthermore, even if the display of the roulette RLT stops at the "box" icon and "x1" shown in FIG. 117(a), both areas are changed again and finally the "red box" icon and "x1" are displayed. ×2” may be combined. Furthermore, even when only one of the left area and the right area is changing and the other is stopped, the other stopped may be changed again.

Although the roulette effect has been described above, in the example here, all the icon names are “reach”, but the same applies to the names of various notice icons YI shown in FIG. 117(b). However, depending on the icon name, only the question mark, or the question mark or cross mark is displayed on the green background color, or only the exclamation mark or only the exclamation mark or cross mark is displayed on the red and gold background colors. Good. Further, as shown in FIG. 5 or No. 23 or No. The icon name of the notice icon that leads to the big hit confirmation such as 24 may not be combined with the question mark. That is, only the combination of “patrol lamp” and “cross mark” or the combination of “patrol lamp” and “surprise mark” may be displayed. In addition, the icon name of the notice icon that leads to a relatively high reliability of the jackpot (for example, No. 3 "red chance", No. 4 "super hot" or No. 5 "iron plate" icon In the case of (first name), it may be combined with only "surprise mark". Further, the icon name of the notice icon that leads to the jackpot confirmation may be iridescent (seventh display mode) in both the background color of the icon name and the background color of the mark (symbol).

Further, the mark (symbol) may be announced by the background color of the icon name (for example, the icon name of “iron plate” of No. 5) of the notification icon leading to the determination of the big hit. For example, if the background color of the "iron plate" that stopped earlier was green, it would be a warning that the cross mark might be stopped, and if it was rainbow color, the stop of the surprise mark was confirmed. Good.

Furthermore, the icon name (left area in this example) may always stop first, or conversely, the mark (right area in this example) may always stop first. Further, when it is not known which will stop first, if the mark stops first, the cross mark may not stop.

Further, when the notice icon is stocked in the roulette effect, the notice icon may be used without fail.
Next, an example of effects accompanied by button operation will be described.

In FIG. 143 (a1), the symbol variation display of the prefetch target is displayed in the state where the special map is not held, and only one notice icon YI of “box” is stocked in the stock area SS. .. In FIG. 143 (a2), the operation promotion notification image is displayed on the left side of the stocked notice icon YI. The operation promotion notification image here is also an image for prompting the user to operate the chance button 136 within the operation valid period, and a button image 136a imitating the chance button 136 and a remaining time display indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period. It is composed of a meter MT and. The timing shown in FIG. 121 (A31-2-2) is before the start of the operation valid period, and the remaining time display meter MT may not be displayed before the start of the operation valid period. It may be displayed at the same time as the start of.

The operation valid period is started at the timing of FIG. 143 (d3), and the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 143 (d4) shows the display mode when a little time has passed from the start of the operation valid period. Indicated by.

The timing of FIG. 143 (a5) is within the operation valid period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. In response to the chance button 136 being operated within the valid operation period, in FIG. 143 (d6), after the notice icon YI is covered with the effect image EF13, as shown in FIG. The effect image EF13 disappears, and the notice icon YI, which was the mode a in which the box is closed, is changed to the mode d in which the box is displayed, and a notice "YH" is displayed in the box. The animation that pops out (animated box opening animation) is displayed.

Note that the change of the notice icon YI to the mode d, which is the display mode in which the box is opened, may be executed on the condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or may be operated without operating the chance button 136. It may also be executed when the valid period has elapsed.

In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 143 (a8), the notice icon YI changes from the display mode in which the box is open to the display mode in which the box is closed and is not erased. In FIG. 143 (a9), the notice display YH of “red change” emitted from the notice icon YI is used, and the display mode of the variable icon that has been the default display mode (first display mode) is blue. The display mode (3rd display mode) has been changed.

In FIG. 143 (d a10), the operation promotion notification image is displayed again on the left side of the stocked notice icon YI, after which the operation valid period is started, and the remaining time display meter shown in FIG. MT is shown in a display mode when a little time has passed since the operation valid period started.

The timing of FIG. 143 (d12) is within the operation valid period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. In response to the chance button 136 being operated within the operation valid period, in FIG. 143 (a13), the notice icon YI is changed to a mode d in which the box is opened, and the notice display YH of "reach" is displayed from the inside. Has been released. Then, in FIG. 143 (d14), the notice icon YI disappears without returning to the closed mode a.

In this example, the operation promotion notification image is displayed each time, but the operation promotion notification image may not be displayed and so-called back button effect may be performed.

FIG. 144 is a diagram showing an example in which the display mode of the advance notice icon YI of the “button” changes according to the button operation, and other examples.

In FIG. 144 (Eb1), the super reach effect of VS swordsman reach is executed, and the animation of the duel scene between the main character Yoshimune and the enemy swordsman is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In addition, in FIG. 144 (Db1), No. 1 illustrated in FIG. 21 "button" notice icon YI is stocked. In FIG. 144 (Db2), the effect image EF11 is added to the advance notice icon YI of the “button”, and in FIG. 144 (Db3), the effect is large in the central area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The button image 136a is displayed, and then the button image 136a becomes slightly smaller, and the remaining time display meter MT is added (FIG. 144 (d4)). In addition, in this example, the character “repeatedly hit” that requires continuous operation of the chance button 136 and the confrontation meter MTV indicating the superiority or inferiority of Yoshimune and Kengo are also displayed. The confrontation meter MTV has a blue meter on the Yoshimune side (left side) and a red meter on the swordsman side (right side). When the display of the confrontation meter MTV is started, the blue meter is half and the red meter is half. It should be noted that at the timing shown in FIG. 144 (d4), the operation valid period is not started, and even if the button is operated, the corresponding display is not performed. Eventually, the button effect is started and the operation valid period is started (FIG. 144 (Eb5)). The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 144 (d6) is shown in a display mode when a little time has passed since the operation valid period started. Although the confrontation meter MTV is overlapped by a part of the fluctuation icon h0, the confrontation meter MTV may be displayed so as to overlap the fluctuation icon h0, and the confrontation meter MTV is displayed at a position where the fluctuation icon h0 does not overlap. The meter MTV may be displayed.

The timing of FIG. 144 (d7) is within the operation valid period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. Then, as shown in FIG. 144 (d8), the effect image EF11 is added to the notice icon YI of the "button", and the display mode of the notice icon YI is changed. However, the effect image EF11 here does not notify that the notice icon YI will be used.

Since the continuous hitting operation is required, the player operates the chance button 136 also at the timing of FIG. 144 (d9). Then, also in FIG. 144 (d10), the effect image EF11 is added to the notice icon YI of the “button”, and the display mode of the notice icon YI is changed. This effect image EF11 disappears immediately (FIG. 144 (Db11)), and the player operates the chance button 136 also at the timing of FIG. 144 (Db12). Then, also in FIG. 144 (d13), the effect image EF11 is added to the notice icon YI of the “button”, and the display mode of the notice icon YI is changed. If the interval between button operations by the player is shortened, the effect image EF11 is added to and deleted from the notice icon YI at high speed, and the effect image EF11 appears to be constantly lit.

The blue meter of the confrontation meter MTV increases according to the number of times the chance button 136 is operated. However, in this confrontation meter MTV, when the operation effective period is started, the red meter of the swordsman automatically increases with the passage of time. If the chance button 136 is repeatedly hit so as not to lose the increasing speed of the red meter, the increase of the blue meter will outweigh the increase of the red meter, and the blue meter will increase. When all are blue meters as shown in FIG. 144 (dbl3), Yoshimune's cut-in image CI3 appears as shown in FIG. 144 (dbl3). On the other hand, when all of them are red meters, a cut-in image of a swordsman (not shown) appears here.

Note that the timing at which the effect image EF11 is added to the "button" notice icon YI may be set not only when the chance button 136 is operated once but also when the blue meter is incremented by one in the confrontation meter MTV.
Next, an example in which the stock number of the notice icon YI is displayed will be described.

FIG. 144 (a1) shows the same state as that shown in FIG. 120 (a9-1), in which the icon of the villager character of the variable icon h0 wins the icon of the panda character of the opponent icon TI. In FIG. 144 (Oa2), the stock animation of the notice icon YI displayed in the appearance area AS is started by the victory of the villager character of the change icon h0. That is, the No. shown in FIG. 117(a) that was displayed in the appearance area AS. The notice icon YI of “box” 1 is out of the appearance area AS and is once displayed in a large size. At this stage, the display of the stock number (here, “stock×1”) is started between the second decorative symbol and the second retained number display of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. That is, when the advance notice icon YI reaches the stock area SS, the display of the number of stocks is started, and it is unclear how many advance notice icons could be acquired only by looking at the appearance area AS. Can display the stock number before the notice icon YI is displayed in the stock area SS to know the acquired number. In FIG. 144 (a3), the notice icon YI is displayed in the stock area SS. In FIG. 144 (a3), the notice icon YI is displayed in the stock area SS.

After that, in FIG. 144 (Oa4) showing the state in which the symbol variation is being displayed in the state where the hold is exhausted and the special figure is not held, one notice icon YI is stocked in the stock area SS, and the stock number is Is also displayed as "stock x 1".

In FIG. 144 (Oa5), the reach effect is started, and the “decoration 6” fluctuates in each of the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. Eventually, the notice icon YI displayed in stock in the reach state is used. That is, as shown in FIG. 144 (a6), the notice icon YI has changed to the mode d in which the box is opened, and the notice display YH of “change” has been released from the box. Since the notice icon YI is used in this way, the stock number display temporarily changes to “stock×0” (FIG. 144 (a6)), and then the stock number display itself disappears (FIG. 144). (Oa7)). Then, it continues to FIG. 121 (A33). If the same notice icon YI is repeatedly used, the display of the stock number does not change, and in this case, “stock×1” continues to be displayed. Even if the same notice icon YI is repeatedly used, if it is used once, the stock number display may be once changed to “stock×0” and immediately returned to “stock×1”. .. Note that when the stock number of the advance notice icon becomes 0, “stock×0” may not be displayed and the stock number display itself may be erased as shown in FIG. 144 (a7).

Further, a plurality of stock areas SS may be provided. In the example shown below, two stock areas SS are provided, a first stock area SSR on the right side and a second stock area SSL on the left side.

FIG. 144 (Ob1) is also in the same state as that shown in FIG. 120 (A9-1), in which the villager character icon of the variable icon h0 wins over the panda character icon of the opponent icon TI. Therefore, in FIG. 144 (Oa2), the stock animation of the notice icon YI is started, and the notice icon YI of “box” exits the appearance area AS and is once displayed in a large size. Then, one advance notice icon YI of “box” is stocked in each of the first stock area SSR on the right side and the second stock area SSL on the left side (FIG. 144 (a3). An animation in which the “box” notice icon YI splits may be displayed, but may be displayed momentarily in each of the first stock area SSR on the right side and the second stock area SSL on the left side. The number of the notice icons YI acquired is only one.

After that, the hold is exhausted, and in FIG. 144 (Ob4) showing the state of symbol variation display in the state where the special figure is no longer held, the left first stock area SSL and the right second stock area SSR are also shown. Also, the "box" notice icons YI are stocked one by one.

In FIG. 144 (Ob5), the reach effect is started, and the “decoration 6” fluctuates in each of the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. Eventually, the notice icon YI displayed in stock in the reach state is used. At this time, only one of the two notice icons YI may be used. In addition, an effect of telling which of the notice icons YI is used (which box opens) or an effect of giving a notice may be performed. Here, both notice icons YI are used at the same time. That is, as shown in FIG. 144 (Ob6), both of the notice icons YI are changed at the same time to the mode d in which the boxes are opened, and the “change” notice display YH is released from each box. Then, as shown in FIG. 144 (Oa7), the two notice icons YI disappear at the same time.

FIG. 145 is a diagram showing an example of the effect that continues from FIG. 144 and an example of displaying the same notice icon in a plurality of modes.

In FIG. 145 (Ob7) subsequent to FIG. 144 (Ob7), the “change” notice displays YH emitted to the left and right respectively are changed to light balls YHb. Therefore, one ball YHb of light is displayed on the left and one on the right. In FIG. 145 (Ob9), both the left light ball YHb and the right light ball YHb fly toward the change icon h0 and become one with the change icon h0. An animation that changes is displayed. The change icon h0 shown in FIG. 145 (Ob10) has changed from the first display mode to the third display mode. This is changed by two stages because it is based on two notice icons YI. It should be noted that only one step may be changed. Then, it continues to FIG. 121 (A37).

The reliability of the big hit may differ depending on how the notice icon YI is stocked. That is, normally, stock is sequentially carried out from a fixed position in the stock area SS. For example, the stocks are stocked in the order of the first stock position, the second stock position, and the third stock position. However, contrary to this order, the stock may be stocked in the order of the third stock position, the second stock position, and the first stock position. In such an irregular case, in the normal case, In comparison, the reliability of the big hit may be higher or, on the contrary, may be lower. Also, while it is normally stocked in both the first stock area SSR on the right side and the second stock area SSL on the left side, irregularly, only one stock area (for example, the second stock area SSL on the left side is stocked. It may be stocked only in ). Even in such an irregular case, the reliability of the big hit may be higher than that in the normal case, or on the contrary, may be lower. Furthermore, the reliability of the big hit may differ depending on which of the first stock area SSR on the right side and the second stock area SSL on the left side is stocked. For example, if the first stock area SSR on the right side is normal or prioritized, and if it is stocked on the second stock area SSL on the left side, the reliability of the jackpot may be higher. Or vice versa.

Even if the acquired notice icon YI is a “white” notice icon, when displaying the notice icon YI in white in the respective areas SSL and SSR, the case where both notice icons YI in white are displayed. The white notice icon YI and the red notice icon YI may be displayed in some cases. In the latter case, the notice display YH released from the obtained notice icon YI may be expected. For example, when both of the white notice icons YI are displayed, the No. 1 shown in FIG. 117(b) is displayed. Although the notice display of the "change" of the default color of 6 is released, when the white notice icon YI and the red notice icon YI are displayed, No. 6 shown in FIG. 117(b) is displayed. There may be cases where the red “red change” notice display 7 is emitted.

145(Oc1) to FIG. 145(Od) are diagrams showing an example in which the same notice icon is displayed in a plurality of modes.

On the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 145 (Oc1), a background screen (not shown) is displayed, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 129 (1-2-1) is displayed. As with, the background screen of the sea is displayed. In FIG. 145 (Oc1), the “base length” icon change notice display IYH is displayed on the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS, and the “guard length” icon change notice display IYH is shown in FIG. As in the “bancho” icon change notice display IYH shown in a4) in FIG. It is displayed that the notice icon YI of "change" of 6 has been acquired.

In FIG. 145 (Oc2), the notice icon YI of “change” has moved to the stock area SS, and is displayed in the stock area SS in FIG. 145 (Oc3). Further, in this example, a band icon OBI is displayed on the left side of the background screen, and the name of the acquired notice icon YI (here, “change”) is also displayed on the band icon OBI. Therefore, in this example, the display relating to the acquired notice icon YI is displayed at two places. Since the band icon OBI is an icon displayed on the background screen, any display (for example, the display of the first decorative symbol or the display of the second decorative symbol, or the second hold icon h12 to the second unillustrated here) 4 hold icon h14) and the like).

Eventually, as shown in FIG. 145 (Oc4), after the variable display of the symbols is finished and the combination of the decorative symbols that have been lost is stopped and displayed, in the same diagram (Oc5), the variable display of the preread target is displayed. Has been started. When the symbol variation display, which is the variation of the prefetch target, is started, the notice icon YI is used. In FIG. 145 (Oc6-1), the variable icon change animation using the notice icon YI is started. That is, as shown in FIG. 145 (Oc6-1), the effect image EF11 is added to the “change” notice icon YI. In FIG. 145 (Oc7), the stocked “change” notice icon YI is displayed. Disappear. Subsequently, in FIG. 145 (Oc8), a ball of light flies from the stock area SS toward the variable icon h0 and hits the variable icon h0. The variation icon h0 hit by the ball of light changes to the second display mode (white flashing display mode) as shown in FIG. 145 (Oc9). On the other hand, no effect is performed with the belt icon OBI, and no change has occurred in the display of the name of the acquired notice icon YI displayed on the belt icon OBI. However, some kind of animation such as a variable icon change animation may be executed even in the band icon OBI, and some change (for example, blinking display, display color change, etc.) may occur in the display of the name of the acquired notice icon YI.

Although the notice icon YI in the stock area SS has disappeared promptly with use, the band icon OBI is at least displayed until the change icon h0 actually changes, as shown in FIG. 145 (Oc10). In addition, the change icon h0 disappears after the change.

The example shown in FIG. 145 (Oc6-2-1) and thereafter is an example in which the "change" notice icon YI is reused. In the same figure (Oc6-2-1) continuing from FIG. 145 (Oc6-1), the notice icon YI which has been used until now is the notice display of the "change" of the mode b shown in FIG. 117(b). Although it has changed to YH, in the same figure (Oc6-2-2), it returns to the notice icon YI and is usable. In FIG. 145 (Oc6-2-3), the reach effect is started, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in the same figure (Oc6-2-3), the display of the normal reach effect is displayed. When the normal reach effect is started, the background screen of the sea is switched to the background screen of the normal reach effect, and accordingly, the band icon OBI displaying the name of the notice icon YI acquired disappears. On the other hand, the notice icon YI displayed in the stock area SS continues to be displayed even during the normal reach production.

In FIG. 145 (Oc6-2-5), the normal reach effect ends, the background image of the sea is displayed again on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the band icon displaying the name of the notice icon YI is displayed. The OBI display has also been restored. In this way, the display of the band icon OBI on which the name of the notice icon YI is displayed is displayed across the reach effect. After that, during swing fluctuation of the decorative pattern, in other words, before the finalized display shown in FIG. 145 (Oc6-2-7) to FIG. 145 (Oc6-2-8) is performed, the display of the band icon OBI disappears. .. The notice icon YI displayed in the stock area SS also disappears. In this example, there is no subsequent hold, and it can be seen that the display relating to the notice icon YI (display of the band icon OBI, display of the notice icon YI of the stock area SS) has disappeared, but there is a subsequent hold. Also, before the confirmation display, the display relating to the notice icon YI (display of the band icon OBI, display of the notice icon YI of the stock area SS) may disappear, or conversely, if there is a subsequent hold, the notice is given. The display regarding the icon YI may be continuously displayed until the confirmation display.

FIG. 145 (d) is a diagram showing a case where a plurality of notice icons YI are stocked. In this example, in addition to displaying the notice icon YI in the stock area SS, display using the band icon OBI is also performed. That is, one notice icon YI is displayed with one belt icon OBI.

In the examples so far, the band icon OBI is displayed as the background display, but in the example shown in FIG. 146(e), the band icon OBI narrows the display area of the first decorative symbol. The display of the second decorative symbol is performed on the upper part of the belt icon OBI.

In the example shown in FIG. 146 (of), three notice icons YI, which are the maximum number of stocks, are stocked, and three band icons OBI are displayed. Therefore, the display area of the first decorative symbol is 1 It is narrowed to about /4, and the first decorative symbol is overlapped by the notice icon YI displayed in stock. However, the first decorative symbol may be prioritized and the first decorative symbol may overlap the notice icon YI. The second hold number display does not overlap the band icon OBI. Further, both the change icon h0 and the hold icon h11 are visible. In this example, the first decorative pattern, the background display, the display of the hold frame UI, the variable icon h0, and the hold icon are narrowed, but the display of the second decorative pattern, the second hold number display, and the stock are displayed. The display of the notice icon YI is not narrowed. As an example of the display narrowed by the display of the band icon OBI, the first decorative symbol, the background display, the display of the hold frame UI, the variable icon h0, the hold icon, various notice displays (for example, the above-mentioned conversation notice (the conversation of the lord It is possible to enumerate the image CI1, the old conversation image CI2, the mini game, the icon change notice, the timer notice effect, the meter display (the white meter MW described above, the meter display MD described later, etc.), etc. That is, the band icon OBI. The display narrowed by the display may be all of those listed above, while some of the above may not be applicable, and the display not narrowed by the display of the band icon OBI. As an example, the display of the second decorative pattern, the second hold number display, the stocked notice icon YI, the bar display VB for volume adjustment, the display of the mode name set to ON in the production customization (for example, the above-mentioned upper right corner of the screen). Frame RW and the mode name displayed in the frame RW), various error displays (displays related to various errors and warnings described with reference to FIGS. 114 to 116), menu icon MI, volume adjustment icon VI, And the brightness adjustment icon BI, the display of "current level of Daitomo mode (here, level 1) and experience value (EXP) (here, 0)" of FIG. That is, as the displays that are not narrowed by the display of the band icon OBI, all of the above-listed ones may be used, while some of the above-listed ones may not be applied.

FIG. 146 is a diagram showing an example of an effect by a configuration in which the display means is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

Up to now, the description centering on the first decorative symbol display device 208L has been described, but the contents displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L are displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. It may be displayed (same in the following description). Further, the arrangement of the display means is not limited to the horizontal arrangement, and the same arrangement may be applied in the vertical arrangement. In other words, it is not the case that the technology described in this specification cannot be applied simply because the hardware configuration is different, and from a technical idea, even if the display units are arranged side by side, they can be arranged vertically. Even if there is, it is applicable. Hereinafter, as an example of the vertical arrangement of the display means, an example in which the display means is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L will be described. Here, the display means arranged below is referred to as a fourth display means 208M' for description.

In FIG. 146 (Ka1), the fourth display means 208M' arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L is shown. The fourth display unit 208M′ shown in FIG. 146 (Ka1) is in the initial position. This fourth display means 208M' is surrounded by a frame fm around the display screen, and the upper edge of the frame fm in the fourth display means 208M' at the initial position is the lower end portion of the first decorative pattern display device 208L. It overlaps from the front side. The fourth display means 208M′ is arranged on the front side (player side) of the first decorative symbol display device 208L and overlaps the central portion of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L from the front side at the operating position ( It can be moved from the initial position to the position (refer to the position of the fourth display means 208M′ in FIG. 146 (a2′)). That is, the fourth display means 208M' is also a movable means capable of moving up and down. In addition to the lifting operation, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be movable in the left-right direction. As a modified example of the fourth display means 208M′, the fourth display means 208M′ may be fixedly arranged at the initial position.

On the fourth display means 208M′ shown in FIG. 146 (Ka1), a holding frame UI′ having a configuration similar to the holding frame UI that has been displayed in the effect display area 208d of the first decorative pattern display device 208L so far is displayed. Has been done. This hold frame UI' also has a hold icon display area HIS&', a variable icon display area CIS', and an effect icon display area DIS'. The pedestal hs0′ is arranged in the variable icon display area CIS′. The hold icon display area HIS′ is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area CIS′, and four stages (first stage hs1′ to fourth stage hs4′) are arranged on the left base icon bIl′. The effect icon display area DIS' is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area CIS', and the right base icon bIr' is arranged in the effect icon display area DIS'.

Further, in the fourth display means 208M′ shown in FIG. 146 (ka1), the hold icon of Toku-zu 1 is displayed on each of the first stage hs1′ and the second stage hs2′. That is, the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are displayed. The display modes of the hold icons h11 and h12 of these special diagrams 1 are all No. 1 in FIG. 119(a). This is the default display mode described in 1. In addition, the 2nd reservation number display (here "2" and "0") of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed on the upper right of the 1st decorative design display device 208L. Further, the variation icon h0 is displayed on the pedestal hs0 in the variation icon display area CIS′. The display mode of the change icon h0 is also No. 1 in FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1.

Further, a background screen is displayed on the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 146 (k a1). This background screen is a sea background screen. On the other hand, the background screen of the fourth display means 208M' is solid white, and this solid white color means that the background screen is omitted in the figure.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 146 (Ka1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is changing at high speed. The state of FIG. 146 (a1) corresponds to, for example, FIG. 120 (a1).

In FIG. 146 (Ka2), there is a ball in the starting point 230 of Toku-zu 1 and the number of holdings of Toku-zu 1 is increased by one, and there are three in total. In the second hold number display of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 146 (k2a), the hold number of the special figure 1 is displayed as "3". The fourth display means 208M′ shown in FIG. 146(k2a) displays the first hold, which has been the default display mode so far, in accordance with the increase in the hold of this special map or irrespective of the increase in the hold of this special map. Both the icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are No. 1 in FIG. The icon has changed to the icon a of the type of villager described in 17. Further, the third hold icon h13 is displayed on the third stage hs3′. Although the third hold icon h13 is additionally displayed in the default display mode by the increasing animation, the third hold represented by the third hold icon h13 is the target hold for the prefetching notice. The state of FIG. 146 (a2) corresponds to, for example, FIG. 120 (a3-1).

In the right base icon bIr′ of the effect icon display area DIS′ in the fourth display unit 208M′ shown in FIG. 146 (a3), as the opponent icon TI, the mode a of the panto type shown in FIG. 118(c) ( A standby mode icon is displayed. Further, in the upper left corner, the appearance area AS is displayed surrounded by a frame, and inside the No. shown in FIG. 117(a). The notice icon YI of “box” 1 is displayed. The state of FIG. 146 (a3) corresponds to, for example, FIG. 120 (a6).

In the fourth display means 208M′ shown in FIG. 146 (ka4), the rock-paper-scissors battle of the mini game B is performed, and the villager character of the variable icon h0 has won the panda character of the opponent icon TI and appears. The stock animation of the notice icon YI displayed in the area AS has started. That is, the notice icon YI of “box” displayed in the appearance area AS is once displayed in a large size after exiting from the appearance area AS. The state of FIG. 146 (a4) corresponds to, for example, FIG. 120 (a10).

The fourth display means 208M' is also provided with a stock area SS in which the notice icon YI is stocked, and the fourth display means 208M' shown in FIG. Icon YI is displayed. The state of FIG. 146 (a5) corresponds to, for example, FIG. 120 (a11).

FIG. 146 (k6a) shows that the variation of symbols is being displayed in the state where the suspension of the reservation progresses and the suspension of the special figure is released. The symbol variation display performed here is a symbol variation display which is a pre-reading subject variation. Note that neither the panda character of the opponent icon TI nor the appearance area AS have disappeared. The variable icon h0 is in the default display mode. The state of FIG. 146 (a6) corresponds to, for example, FIG. 120 (a24).

In FIG. 146 (a7), the notice icon YI of the mode a in which the box is closed is changed to the mode d in which the box is opened, and the notice display YH of “reach” is released from inside the box. In the figure (Ka8), the used notice icon YI disappears, and the notice display YH of "reach" is displayed. The notice display YH disappears after a certain fixed display period has elapsed after the appearance, and the notice display YH of “reach” disappears in FIG. 146 (Ka 9). After that, the reach effect may or may not be performed. When the reach effect is performed, the notice display YH of “reach” may be continuously displayed until the reach effect is started.

Next, modified examples will be described. The same is true up to FIG. 146 (Ka4), and in FIG. 146 (Ka5'), the notice icon YI is displayed in the stock area SS of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In the stock animation of the notice icon YI here, the notice icon YI displayed in the appearance area AS of the fourth display unit 208M′ moves from the fourth display unit 208M′ to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The animation is played. At this time, the notice icon YI has a period in which it is displayed across the fourth display unit 208M′ and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. However, it does not straddle the fourth display means 208M' and the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and it is an animation that jumps from the fourth display means 208M' to the first decorative symbol display device 208L at once (moves momentarily). Good.

The fourth display means 208M′ shown in FIG. 146 (a2′) has moved from the initial position shown by the dotted line to the operating position, and covers the central area of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L from the front side. There is. The fourth display means 208M′ may move from the initial position before the start of the mini game, at the same time as the start of the mini game, during the mini game, or in the mini game. You may move after the mini-game only if you win the game. Further, before the result of the mini game comes out, it may move as a notice of the result of the mini game. In this case, moving may be easier to win the mini game, or may be more difficult to win, rather than not moving. The fourth display means M′ may be configured to be in a stationary state at the operating position across one or more symbol variable displays during execution of the mini game. Here, when a mini game is performed across a plurality of symbol variable displays, from the operation position to the initial position (or the end position of each symbol variable display after the result of the mini game in the symbol variable display comes out (or The fourth display means M′ may be configured to move to a position different from the operating position and the initial position). Further, the fourth display means M′ is configured so as not to move from the operating position during the symbol stop display (that is, to be stationary at the operating position). However, the fourth display means M′ may be moved from the operating position during the symbol stop display. Further, the fourth display means M′ is at least a part of the period during which the symbol variable display is fixedly displayed, or the entire period, even while moving between the initial position and the maximum movement position. In, it is configured to maintain a stationary state. Note that the movement may be continued or may be stopped in the state of temporary stop in the simulated continuous production or in the state of swing fluctuation before confirmation display. Further, the stop operation may be performed as described above only when the variable display of the decorative symbol is being displayed on the fourth display means M′. Further, the fourth display means M′ may be configured to stop at the initial position, the maximum movement position, or a predetermined stop position in accordance with the timing at which the symbol variable display is confirmed and displayed.

FIG. 146 (cover b1) shows an example in which the initial position of the fourth display means 208M′ is above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In this example, the hold frame UI is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the mini game is also played on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 146 (Kab1), the "bancho" icon change notice display IYH is displayed. Further, the background image is displayed on the fourth display unit 208M′ shown in FIG. 146 (Cb1) without being illustrated. On the fourth display means 208M' shown in FIG. 146 (Cab2), the name of the stocked notice icon YM (here, "change") is displayed as a band icon OBI'. That is, when the notice icon YM is stocked, its name is also displayed on the fourth display means 208M'. The display method is not limited to the band icon OBI′, and may be the full screen.

In the example shown in FIG. 146 (cover b3′), a band icon OBI″ is displayed from the fourth display unit 208M′ to the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the band icon OBI″ indicates the stock notice. The name (here, “change”) of the icon YM is shown. The name of the notice icon YM in the band icon OBI″ is displayed across the fourth display unit 208M′ and the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

Note that, also in the example shown in FIG. 146 (cover b3′), the band icon OBI is displayed while narrowing the display area of the first decorative symbol described with reference to FIG. 145 (e) and FIG. 145 (f). The method is applicable. That is, the portion of the band icon OBI″ displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L narrows the display area of the first decorative symbol. In addition, when the fourth display means 208M′ moves and the area overlapping the first decorative symbol display device 208L is enlarged, the first decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is also displayed. The display area may be similarly narrowed in accordance with the movement of the fourth display means 208M'.

The fourth display means 208M′ described above can be replaced with the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N, or other display means (for example, the light guide plate IL, It can also be replaced with a POV display 224I, etc. described later).
Next, an example of effect using another effect means will be described.

The state shown in FIG. 146 (Kc1) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 120 (A7), and in the subsequent FIG. 139 (Kc2), the mini game exclusive accessory is provided on the left and right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. 225 has appeared. The rock-paper-scissors confrontation of the mini game B is performed not only by the display of the villager character of the variable icon h0 and the panda character of the opponent icon TI, but also by the mini game exclusive accessory 225. In the mini-game exclusive accessory 225, the left side becomes the villager character of the variable icon h0, and the right side becomes the panda character of the opponent icon TI. The directing action of the mini game exclusive accessory 225 may be started after the rock-paper-scissors show-up animation is started, may be started at the same time as the rock-paper-scissors show-up animation is started, or before the rock-paper-scissors show-up animation is started. May be. In addition, when a mini game is won, an effect that excites the victory may be performed by the mini game exclusive accessory 225, or other movable effect means (for example, the fourth display means 208M′ or shown in FIG. 14). It may be performed by a movable effect by a thousand box box accessory 224H or the like, or by a light emission effect by a light emitting means.

Further, other display means (for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the fourth display means 208M, the light guide plate IL, the POV display 224I described later, etc.) is also associated with the mini game. Direction may be performed.

FIGS. 146 (d1) to (d5) are diagrams showing examples of effects using the POV display 224I.

In this example, on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the POV (Persistence Of Vision) display 224I as the production movable body described with reference to FIG. 15 is provided. The POV display 224I is also referred to as a versa writer, is movable in the vertical direction, and is configured to be able to overlap the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

The states shown in FIGS. 146 (d1) to (d3) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 120 (a7) to 120 (d9-1), and in FIG. The state is the same as the state shown in 120 (A 9-1 ), that is, the state where the rock-paper-scissors battle of the mini game B is performed and the character of the villager of the variable icon h0 has won the panda character of the opponent icon TI. In FIG. 146 (Kd4), a POV display 224I appears on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and on the POV display 224I, the pattern of the notice icon YI won by winning the mini game and “GET” are displayed. Is displayed. Here, even when the POV display 224I is rotating at a constant speed, the display area on the back side of the POV display 224I (the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L) is visible, and the display area is visible. The effect display may be performed with. Further, the display area is more visible when the POV display 224I is in an accelerating state from a stationary state to a constant speed state or in a decelerating state from returning from the constant speed state to the stationary state than in the constant speed state. It is easy, and the effect display may be performed in the display area even during acceleration or deceleration. Alternatively, the effect display may be performed in the display area only in the accelerating state or the decelerating state. In the accelerating state and the decelerating state, at least the display area (may be the entire display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L) is darkened to make the display of the POV display 224I stand out. Good. Alternatively, the effect display may be displayed in the display area in the state of acceleration, and at least the display area may be darkened when the constant speed state is reached.

In FIG. 146 (Cd5), the POV display 224I has returned from the position on the front surface side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L to the initial position, and the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is easily visible. ..

FIG. 147 is a diagram showing an example of an effect using the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

The state shown in FIG. 147 (e1) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 120 (a1). However, the second decorative symbol and the second hold number display are displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208N. The second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 147 (F1) are in the initial positions of each other, and are in the open state (spaced state), and the first decorative symbol display device. The 208L display screen is visible.

The state shown in FIG. 147 (e2) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 120 (a3-1), and the state shown in FIG. 147 (e3) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 120 (a4). is there.

In the state shown in FIG. 147 (e4), the hold, which has been the first hold until now, is exhausted, and the variable display of symbols is started. Although the first decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 147 (Ke4) is still stopped, the second decorative symbol displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N The variable display is started, and in the second hold number display which is also displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the hold number in the special figure 1 is decreased by 1 to “2”.

In FIG. 147 (e5), the appearance animation of the opponent icon for the mini game B has started, and the effect image EF1′ is displayed separately on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. However, it is not displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

In FIG. 147 (e6), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, which have been in the initial position until then, are starting to approach each other and are displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N overlap at both ends of the first decorative symbol.

In FIG. 147 (e7), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are in contact with each other and are in a completely closed state, and the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is invisible. .. Since the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are in contact with each other, the effect images EF1′ that have been separated until now are displayed as one.

In FIG. 147 (e8), the effect image EF1′ disappears, the villager character of the variable icon h0 is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the panda of the opponent icon TI is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Character is displayed. Further, in the upper left corner of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the appearance area AS is displayed surrounded by a frame, and inside the No. shown in FIG. 117(a). The notice icon YI of “box” 1 is displayed. On the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a display of the number of rock-paper-scissors competitions of the mini game B (here, “first time”) is shown on the panda character of the opponent icon TI. It should be noted that the display of the number of times shown here indicates the current number of times of the confrontation, but it may be a number of times display (for example, “three more times”) that gives a notice of how many times the rock-paper-scissors confrontation will be held thereafter. According to this example, the hold icon is hidden.

The state shown in FIG. 147 (Ke9) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 120 (A3-7), and the rock-paper-scissors confrontation of the mini game B is started.

The state shown in FIG. 147 (e10) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 120 (a9-1), in which the villager character of the variable icon h0 has won the panda character of the opponent icon TI. ..

The state shown in FIG. 147 (e11) corresponds to the state shown in FIG. 120 (a10), the stock animation of the notice icon YI is started, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display are displayed. The notice icon YI is once displayed in a large size so as to straddle the device 208N. Part of the villager character of the variable icon h0 and part of the panda character of the opponent icon TI are overlapped by a part of the notice icon YI that is displayed in a large size.

The state shown in FIG. 147 (e12) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 120 (a11), and the notice icon YI is the first stock in the stock area SS provided in the third decorative symbol display device 208N. It is displayed at the position (stock display). In this example, the appearance area AS and the stock area SS are displayed on different symbol display devices, but they may be displayed on the same symbol display means.

In the state shown in FIG. 147 (e13), the character of the villager with the variable icon h0 disappears and the panda character with the opponent icon TI disappears due to the end of the rock-paper-scissors battle of the mini game B in the currently displayed variable display of symbols. Is waiting for a rock-paper-scissors showdown at the next change, and is executing a waiting animation. Although the variable icon h0 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L cannot be seen here, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N open and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed. When the display screen becomes visible, the variable icon h0 in the default display mode is displayed on the pedestal hs0 in the variable icon display area CIS′.

The state shown in FIG. 147 (e14) is a state in which the variable display of symbols is completed, and the panda character with the opponent icon TI still continues the standby animation. Eventually, when the next change is started, the villager character of the change icon h0 is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. In addition, as the character of the variation icon h0, No. shown in FIG. No. 18 grandfather character or No. It may be the character of 19 Yoshimune. And the second rock-paper-scissors confrontation will be held.

It should be noted that neither the second decorative symbol display device 208M nor the third decorative symbol display device 208N is configured so as not to move from the operating position during the symbol stop display (that is, to be stationary at the operating position). However, both the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be moved from the operating position during the symbol stop display. Further, both the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are moving at least between the initial position and the maximum moving position, at least during the period in which the symbol variable display is fixedly displayed. It is configured to remain stationary for some or all of the periods. Note that the movement may be continued or may be stopped in the state of temporary stop in the simulated continuous production or in the state of swing fluctuation before confirmation display. Further, only when the second decorative symbol display device 208M is performing variable display of the decorative symbol, or only when the third decorative symbol display device 208N is performing variable display of the decorative symbol, You may make it stop operation like this. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are stopped at the initial position, the maximum moving position, or a predetermined stop position in accordance with the timing of the fixed display of the symbol variable display. It may be configured as follows.

The state shown in FIG. 147 (e15) corresponds to the No. shown in FIG. 117(a) in the appearance area AS. Although the "red box" notice icon YI of 2 is displayed, the villager character of the variable icon h0 is defeated by the panda character of the opponent icon TI in the second rock-paper-scissors confrontation. In the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 147 (F15), “second time” is displayed as a display of the number of rock-paper-scissors competitions of the mini game B on the panda character of the opponent icon TI. ..

In FIG. 147 (e16), it is informed that the rock-paper-scissors confrontation has ended by straddling the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In FIG. 147 (e17), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N that have been closed until now start to open, and the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is visible. In FIG. 147 (k e18), both the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N have returned to the initial position, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. The combination of lost decorative patterns of "4"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 7" is confirmed and displayed.

The second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N described above can be replaced with the fourth display means 208M′ shown in FIG. 146, or other display means (for example, a light guide plate IL, which will be described later). POV display 224I, etc.).

Further, in the above description, the notice display of the “change” of the default color shown in FIG. 117(b) is a notice display that raises the level of the display mode by one stage, and the first display mode (default display mode). If it is displayed, it is announced that the display mode will change to the second display mode (white flashing display mode), and the display mode has actually changed to the second display mode (white flashing display mode). Only in the case where the display mode is the display mode (default display mode), it is possible to change the display mode to the third display mode (blue display mode) by setting the advance notice display by two steps. In addition, when the display mode is the second display mode (white flashing display mode) or more, it means that the display is an advance notice that is raised by one step, and only one step is actually changed.

Note that the notice icon may be stocked by a notice different from the mini game during the execution of a mini game, but during the execution of the mini game, a notice different from the mini game may be issued. The notice icon may be configured not to be stocked.

It should be noted that it is also possible to notify in advance that another mini-game may occur (for example, by a mini-game preparing display or a telop display that says "mini-game is highly accurate").

Before the mini game is started or while the mini game is running, another notice that the notice icon is likely to be obtained is displayed on another notice (for example, by a telop display that says "High notice of notice icon acquisition"). ). Here, the situation in which the notice icon is likely to be acquired indicates that the notice icon is more likely to be acquired than when the notice is not notified by another notice.

In addition, when the notice icons are stocked in a certain combination (for example, when a maximum of three notice icons can be stocked, a combination in which “box”, “red box”, “gold box” are stocked or “gold box”) May be configured so that the big hit is settled in the symbol variable display in which all the notice icons are exhausted. In this case, the notice icon may be used as an icon relating to the prefetch notice or may be used as an icon relating to the normal notice.

It should be noted that there may be a case where the advance notice of the change is given in the mini game that obtains the advance notice icon. For example, although the carpet shown in FIG. 126 (v 13) is in a stationary state, when an animation that the carpet escapes from an arrow is displayed, the animation is displayed, and the pattern being displayed at that time is displayed. It corresponds to a notice (normal notice) about a big hit in a variable display. Further, if the display of this animation is a display with a low appearance rate, it may be a notice of a big hit confirmation.

In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 126 (13), when the carpet is displayed as if it escapes from the arrow, and the variation causes the super reach effect, but the variation causes a loss The mini game A may end. In this case, the Yoshimune (bow) icon that was the first hold icon h11 may be changed to the hold icon in the default display mode, or may remain the Yoshimune (bow) icon. When the icon of Yoshimune (bow) remains as it is, it becomes a hold icon corresponding to white blinking (second display mode level). Further, the change timing to the default display mode may be during the above-mentioned super reach (for example, during the wipe effect). Further, it may be displayed as the default change icon h0 at the start of the next change. Furthermore, the Yoshimune (bow) icon, which was the variable icon h0 when the animation that the carpet escaped from the arrow was displayed, may disappear during the super reach (for example, during the wipe production), or It may disappear once during the reach (for example, during the wipe effect) and may be displayed again in the default display mode.

It should be noted that b notice (a <b) stock of advance notice icons is a big hit in the pattern variation display in which all advance notice icons are exhausted compared to a stock (a is an integer of 0 or more) It may be configured to be easy.

FIG. 148 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example of the effect using the display of the icon change notice shown in FIG. 119(b).

In FIG. 148 (A1-1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is changing rapidly for the special figure 1, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed. Both of these two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the default display mode (first display mode). Further, on the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS, the variable icon h0 in the default display mode (first display mode) is displayed.

In FIG. 148(A2-1), No. 1 shown in FIG. The icon IHI of "Red bomber" of 5 appears at the right end of the screen, and the icon change animation is started. That is, the icon IHI of "red bomber" displayed here corresponds to the display of the icon change notice. In the icon change animation, while the "red bomber" icon IHI flies from right to left, a bullet is fired at the hold icon. The "red bomber" icon IHI may be temporarily stopped before the target hold icon. In addition, this pause may be a pause of a fake that impersonates the target icon. In addition, the icon IHI of "red bomber" is performing the animation which passes through the stock area SS mentioned above. Here, when the notice icon is stocked, the "red bomber" icon IHI may be overlapped by the stocked notice icon, and conversely, the notice is stocked by the "red bomber" icon IHI. The icons may overlap.

In FIG. 148 (A3-1), the red bullet icon BTI is fired from the red bomber icon RBI. That is, the "red bomber" icon IHI is composed of a red bomber icon RBI and a red bullet icon BTI. The target here is the first hold icon h11. In FIG. 148 (A4-1), the bullet icon BTI overlaps the first hold icon h11 from the front side. In FIG. 148(A5), the bullet icon BTI hits the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11 is covered by the effect image EF14. Then, in FIG. 148(A6), the effect image EF14 disappears, and the first hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the red display mode (fifth display mode) which is the same display mode as the “red bomber”. It is in the process of changing, and the change is completed in FIG. In this example, the icon change animation is the animation up to immediately before FIG. 148 (A2-1) to (A7) in FIG. In this example, the change in the display mode of the icon is completed after the icon "HIB" of "red bomber" disappears from the screen, but the icon IHI of "RED BOMBER" disappears from the screen before the icon IHI of "red bomber" disappears. The change in the display mode may be completed, or the change in the display mode of the icon may be completed at the same time that the icon IHI of “red bomber” disappears from the screen.

The red bullet icon RBI may always fire the red bullet icon BTI, or the bullet icon BTI of another color may fire. In this case, the change mode of the icon may be determined by the color of the bomber, or the change mode of the icon may be determined by the color of the bullet. Alternatively, when the gold bullet icon BTI is fired from the red bomber icon RBI, the change mode of the icon may be determined by the color of the upper side (here gold) or the lower side (here). Then, the change mode of the icon may be determined by the color (red).

In FIG. 148 (A1′), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is changing at a high speed for the special figure 1, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed. Of these two hold icons h11 and h12, the first hold icon h11 is displayed in a green display mode (fourth display mode), and the second hold icon h12 is displayed in a default display mode (first display mode). It is displayed. Further, on the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS, the variable icon h0 in the default display mode (first display mode) is displayed.

In FIG. 148 (A2′), No. 1 illustrated in FIG. An icon IHI of "Bomber" of 4 appears (is displayed) on the right end of the screen, and the icon change animation is started. In the icon change animation here, as in the previous example, the bullet icon BTI hits the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11 is covered by the effect image EF14 (FIG. 148 (A5′)). In this example, since the icon IHI of "Bomber" is used as the icon change notice display, the display mode is increased by one step with respect to the green display mode (fourth display mode). In FIG. 148(A7), the first hold icon h11 that was in the green display mode (fourth display mode) is changed to the red display mode (fifth display mode). In the icon change animation by the "Bomber" icon IHI, if it is the hold icon in the default display mode (first display mode), skip the white blinking and promote it to blue only for the first attack. However, in the second and subsequent attacks, only one step can be raised, so in order to promote to the hold icon in the red display mode (fifth display mode), a total of three attacks (default color → blue → (Green → red) is required. It should be noted that the first attack may be configured to raise only one step (that is, default color→white blinking).

FIG. 148(A3-2-1) is a modified example continuing from FIG. 148(A2-1), and the icon change animation using the icon IHI of “red bomber” has started. In this icon change animation, the target is the variable icon h0 displayed in the default display mode. In FIG. 148 (A3-2-3), the bullet icon BTI hits the variation icon h0, and the variation icon h0 is covered by the effect image EF14. In FIG. 148 (A3-2-4), the variation icon h0 is red. Has changed to the display mode (5th display mode).

Although the example here is the one using the icon IHI of “red bomber”, the variation icon h0 is also used in the icon change animation using the icon IHI of “bomber” shown in FIG. 148(A2′). May be targeted. In this case, if the target is the variable icon h0 displayed in the default display mode, the variable icon h0 changes to the blue display mode, but the target is the variable icon h0 displayed in the green display mode. If there is, the change icon h0 changes to a red display mode.

FIG. 148(A4-2-1) is a modified example continuing from FIG. 148(A2-1), and the icon change animation using the “red bomber” icon IHI has started. In this icon change animation, as shown in FIGS. 148 (A4-2-1) to (A4-2-3), the red bomber icon RBI is fired after the red bullet icon BTI is fired. Until the change of the display mode of the (here, the first hold icon h11) is completed, the display is paused before the target hold icon. Then, as shown in FIG. 148 (A4-2-4) to FIG. 148 (A4-2-6), the red bomber icon RBI is directed toward the left end of the screen when the change in the icon display mode is completed. Fly away.

FIG. 148(A2-2-1) is a modification example continuing from FIG. 148(A1-1). However, in this modification, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is a white flashing display mode (second display mode). The white blinking display mode may be a display mode that suggests that the display mode may change after the display is started. That is, the second display mode (white flashing display mode) is more likely to change the display mode after the display starts than the first display mode, and is more likely to change the display mode after the display starts than the third display mode. May be When the icon change notice display shown in FIG. 119(b) is displayed while the icon of the second display mode (white blinking display mode) is displayed (for example, the icon IHI of “red bomber” is displayed). When it appears), attention is focused on the icon in the second display mode (white flashing display mode).

In FIG. 148 (A2-2-2), the bullet icon BTI is fired toward the first hold icon h11, and the bullet icon BTI hits the first hold icon h11. In the same figure (A2-2-4), The first hold icon h11 has changed to a red display mode (fifth display mode).

Note that the icon in the second display mode (white flashing display mode) does not change, but another icon (in this case, the second hold icon h12 that is the icon next to the first hold icon h11, or The variable icon h0) may change, or another icon may change along with the icon in the second display mode (white flashing display mode). Further, even when the icon in the second display mode is displayed, there may be a case where the change in the display mode of the icon does not occur (in the case of a gaze effect). On the contrary, when the icon of the second display mode is displayed, the display mode of the icon may be changed without fail. When the icon of the second display mode is displayed, the icon next to the icon of the second display mode (for example, the second hold icon if the icon of the second display mode is the first hold icon. It may be an icon.) may be announced in advance. Here, based on the first hold icon h11 in the second display mode (white flashing display mode), only the adjacent icon (the second hold icon h12 or the variable icon h0) may change, or Although it has been described that the hold icon h11 and the icon next thereto may be changed, the display mode may not be a versatile display mode such as the second display mode, but may be another mode (for example, a tank mode). In the case of a tank, it may be announced that the icon of the tank's main gun may change. Also, instead of the mode of the tank, No. 1 shown in FIG. The display mode of the type of “timer” of No. 10 may be used. No. 8 “button A” type display mode or No. The display mode may be the type of “button B” of 9.
FIG. 149 is a diagram showing a modified example of the effect example shown in FIG. 148.

FIG. 149 (A3-3-1) is a modified example continuing from FIG. 148 (A2-1), and is an example in which the icon change animation is not started even if the icon “Red bomber” IHI appears. That is, in this example, the icon-invariant animation using the icon IHI of "red bomber" is started. In the icon-invariant animation here, the bullet icon BTI is not fired, and the red bomber icon RBI simply flies over the holding frame UI (FIG. 149 (A3-3-1)-FIG. (A3-3-3)). Therefore, the mode of all the hold icons displayed is not changed. Further, the form of the variable icon h0 has not changed, either. In the icon unchanged animation, the "red bomber" icon IHI may be hidden on the way.

Even when the red bomber icon RBI passes through as in this example, all the hold icons (default display mode hold) are compared to when the red bomber icon RBI does not appear. (Including the icon) may be a pre-reading notice with a high degree of reliability of the big hit. Similarly, the variation icon h0 may be a normal notice with high jackpot reliability. Alternatively, if the displayed icons include the hold icons in the pre-reading advance notice display mode such as the white flashing display mode, those hold icons are compared with the case where the red bomber icon RBI does not appear. If the display mode of the variable icon is the normal notification display mode, the variable icon may have a red bomber icon RBI that does not appear. , Ordinary notice with high reliability of big hit may be used.

FIG. 149 (A3-4-1) is also a modified example continuing from FIG. 148 (A2-1), and the icon unchanged animation is also executed here. In this icon unchanged animation, the red bomber icon RBI fires the red bullet icon BTI, but the bullet icon BTI does not hit any of the icons h0, h11, h12. That is, the red bullet icon BTI fired from the red bomber icon RBI flies over the hold icon as shown in FIGS. 149 (A3-4-2) to (A3-4-4). Then, although it disappears outside the screen or overlaps with the hold icon or the variable icon, it may be slid out as it is. Further, the fired bullet icon BTI may overlap the icon different from the target icon, but may fly off the screen without generating the effect image EF14. Furthermore, the shot bullet icon BTI is a locus that overlaps the hold icon if the hold icon is displayed, but since the hold icon is not displayed (the dotted line in FIG. 149 (A3-4-3)). In some cases, the player may fly off the screen through a trajectory that does not overlap (do not hit) the hold icon. .. In this FIG. 149 (A3-4-4), the mode of all the hold icons displayed has not changed.

Note that in FIG. 149 (A3-4-3), the red bomber icon RBI has jumped out of the screen earlier than the bullet icon BTI, but the opposite may be true, or the same. May be

In addition, examples illustrated in FIGS. 149(A3-3-1) to (A3-3-3) and examples illustrated in FIGS. 149(A3-4-1) to (A3-4-4) are Although the icon IHI of "red bomber" is used, the icon invariant animation using the icon IHI of "bomber" shown in FIG. 148(A2') may be executed. Further, as shown in FIG. There may be a case where an icon change animation or an icon non-change animation using the “gold bomber” icon of No. 6 is executed.

In addition, a bullet icon BTI is fired at the target of the variable icon h0, but the variable icon h0 may not be hit, and an icon-invariant animation that does not hit any of the holding icons h11 and h12 may be executed.

Also, even if the icon change notice display of the "Bomber" icon IHI or the like is displayed, the animation using the icon change notice display is not performed, and the displayed icon change notice is displayed in a still state. After that, it may disappear. Furthermore, even if the icon change animation is not performed by the "red bomber" icon IHI, or even if the icon unchanged animation is not performed by the "red bomber" icon IHI, the "red bomber" The icon IHI of "red bomber" is displayed more easily than when the icon IHI of "" is not displayed. It may be configured, and the easiness of change in the "red" display mode may be the same as when the "red bomber" icon IHI is not displayed.

Further, even if the hold change due to the display of the icon change notice fails, the hold (the hold of the first hold icon h11 in this example) targeted for the hold change is not the hold change target (this hold). In the example, the second hold icon h12 may be held more easily than a big hit. Further, even if the hold icon has the same display mode (for example, the hold icon in the white flashing display mode (second display mode)), it fails to change from white blinking to blue and remains white blinking. The icon may be a pre-reading notice having a higher reliability of the big hit than the white-blinking hold icon that was not the target of the hold change. Similarly, the variation icon h0 may be a normal notice with high jackpot reliability.

FIG. 149 (A3-5-1) is also a modified example continuing from FIG. 148 (A2-1), but here, it looks like an icon-invariant animation, and finally the icon change that the bullet icon BTI hits. This is an example of animation. That is, the same scene (FIG. 149 (A3-5-2)) as the previous icon unchanged animation scene (FIG. 149 (A3-4-2)) is displayed, but the bullet icon BTI returns and the first icon is displayed. It hits the hold icon h11 (in FIG. 149 (A3-5-3), the first hold icon h11 is covered with the effect image EF14. After that, it is the same as in FIG. 148 (A7). In the change animation, the same scene as the icon invariant animation is played halfway, and the trajectory of the bullet icon BTI also partially coincides with the trajectory of the bullet icon BTI in the icon invariant animation. You may come back through to hit the target icon, or the bullet icon BTI may disappear from the screen and then come back and hit the target icon, as shown in FIG. 149 (A3-5-4). After that, it continues to FIG. 148 (A7).

FIG. 149 (A3-6-1) is also a modified example continuing from FIG. 148 (A2-1), but here, the button image is added to the icon change notice display, and the combined effect with the button effect is provided.

First, the red bomber icon RBI appears, and the icon change animation or icon unchanged animation is started. Then, the red bomber icon RBI pauses before the target hold icon (FIG. 149 (A3-6-1)). Then, the button image 136a is added to the red bomber icon RBI (FIG. 149 (A3-6-2)). Although the remaining time display meter MT showing the remaining time of the operation valid period is not added here, it may be added. The operation valid period may start from the time when the button image 136a is added, or may start after a while.

The timing of FIG. 149 (A3-6-3) is within the operation valid period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. In FIG. 149 (A3-6-4), in response to the chance button 136 being operated within the valid operation period, the red bullet icon BTI is fired from the red bomber icon RBI. The bullet icon BTI may be fired on the condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or may be executed when the operation valid period has elapsed without operating the chance button 136. .. Further, the bullet icon BTI may be fired only when the chance button 136 is operated within the operation valid period. Furthermore, the bullet icon BTI is fired regardless of whether the chance button 136 is operated, but when the chance button 136 is not operated, compared to when the chance button 136 is operated, It may be difficult to hit the target icon, or if the chance button 136 is not operated, the target icon may never be hit. Further, when the bullet icon BTI does not hit the target icon, another icon change animation or icon non-change animation may be performed.

149 (A3-7-1) is also a modified example continuing from FIG. 148 (A2-1), but here, the first hold icon h11 is a button image mode. That is, No. 1 shown in FIG. It is the icon of “Button A” of No. 8. This "button A" icon is an icon that gives advance notice that an icon change notice will be given by button operation. Subsequently, in FIG. 149 (A3-7-2), the button image 136a is added to the red bomber icon RBI, as in FIG. 149 (A3-6-2). Although the remaining time display meter MT is not added here as well, it may be added.

The timing of FIG. 149 (A3-7-3) is within the operation valid period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. In response to the chance button 136 being operated within the valid operation period, in FIG. 149 (A3-7-4), the red bullet icon BTI is fired from the red bomber icon RBI. The bullet icon BTI flies toward the first hold icon h11 which is the icon of the "button A" (FIG. 149 (A3-7-5)). In FIG. 149 (A3-7-6), the bullet icon BTI hits the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11 is covered with the effect image EF14. In FIG. 149 (A3-7-7), the first hold icon h11, which is the icon of the “button A”, is changed to the red display mode (fifth display mode).

FIG. 149(A3′-2-1) is a modification example continuing from FIG. 148(A2′). That is, the first hold icon h11 has a green display mode (fourth display mode), and the second hold icon h12 has a default display mode (first display mode). In this modification, as shown in FIG. 149 (A3′-2-1), the white bomber icon WBI fires a plurality of white bullet icons BTI. The plurality of bullet icons BTI may be fired at the same time, or may be fired one by one. Here, two white bullet icon BTIs are fired at the same time. The two bullet icons BTI partially overlap each other. The target icon here may be a single icon or a plurality of icons. That is, one holding icon may be attacked by one bullet icon BTI, and one holding icon may be attacked by a plurality of bullet icons BTI. In this example, the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are target icons. A bullet icon BTI aiming at the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the front, and a bullet icon BTI aiming at the first hold icon h11 is displayed at the back side. Note that this relationship may be reversed. Further, a plurality of bullet icons BTI may not be overlapped.

In FIG. 149 (A3′-2-3), the bullet icons BTI and BTI hit the first holding icon h11 and the second holding icon h12 one by one, and the first holding icon h11 and the second holding icon h12 are also hit. Is also covered with the effect image EF14. In FIG. 149 (A3-7-7), the first hold icon h11 that was in the green display mode (fourth display mode) changes to the red display mode (fifth display mode), and the default display mode ( The second hold icon h12 that was the first display mode) is changed to the blue display mode (third display mode).
FIG. 150 is a diagram showing a modified example such as the effect example shown in FIG. 148.

The example productions shown in FIGS. 150(A3-2-1) to (A3-2-4) are the example productions shown in FIG. 149(A3′-2-1) to FIG. 149(A3′-2-4). It is a modified example of. Here, the icon IHI of "red bomber" has appeared. Further, the first hold icon has a white blinking display mode (second display mode). In FIG. 150 (A3-2-1), the red bomber icon RBI fires two red bullet icons BTI. Of the two fired bullet icons BTI, one hits the first hold icon h11 and the other hits neither icon (FIG. 150 (A3-2-3)). That is, the hold icon for which the prefetching notice is given hits, and the hold icon (the second holding icon h12) for which the lookahead notice is not hit is not hit. In FIG. 150 (A3-2-3), only the first holding icon h11 on the hit side is covered by the effect image EF14, and in the subsequent FIG. 150 (A3-2-4), the effect image EF14 disappears and Only the 1-hold icon h11 has changed to the red display mode (fifth display mode).

Note that the bullet icon BTI may hit the hold icon for which the prefetching notice has not been given. Further, the bullet icon BTI may hit only the hold icon for which the prefetching notice has not been given. Alternatively, the bullet icon BTI may always hit the hold icon for which the prefetching notice has not been given. Alternatively, on the contrary, the bullet icon BTI may always hit the hold icon for which the prefetching notice is given.

Here, the red bullet icon BTI hits the holding icon (holding icon in the first display mode) for which the pre-reading notice has not been given, and the pre-reading notice in the white blinking display mode (second display mode) has been given. If the bullet icon BTI does not hit the reserved icon, the hold icon for which the pre-reading notice has not been given has a higher expectation of a big hit than the hold icon for which the pre-reading notice has been given so far. It has changed to a hold icon. In this way, for icons having different display modes, which of the icons changes to a red display mode, all of the icons change to a red display mode, or a plurality of red bullet icons BTI are displayed. Various patterns are conceivable, such as whether one icon does not change while being fired, and it may function effectively as a stirrer production.

The bullet icon BTI may be configured so that the bullet icon BTI is more likely to hit, that is, the pending icon is changed more easily than the pending icon for which the pre-reading notice is not given. Further, the variable icon may be configured to hit the bullet icon BTI more easily than the hold icon, that is, to change the hold icon more easily.

Further, the firing of a plurality of bullet icons BTI can be applied to the icon of “gold bomber” shown in FIG. 119(b).

FIG. 150 (A3-8-1) is also a modified example continuing from FIG. 148 (A2-1), but here, the red bomber icon RBI pauses immediately above the change icon h0. Then, while being paused, the red bomber icon RBI does not fire the bullet icon BTI, and the variable display of symbols ends (FIG. 150 (A3-8-2). Then, the next variable display of symbols is displayed. Even if started, the red bomber icon RBI remains paused right above the variation icon h0, that is, the red bomber icon RBI here is displayed across successive symbol variation displays. When the next change is started, the red bomber icon RBI fires a red bullet icon BTI toward the first hold icon h0 as shown in FIG. 150 (A3-8-4). In this way, when the symbol variation display is straddled, the icon change may always be successful, or even when the symbol variation display is straddled, it may fail. , When crossing the pattern variable display, the hold icon may change icon and the change icon may not change icon, or vice versa, the change icon may change icon and the hold icon may not change icon. May be.

FIGS. 150(A3-9-1) to (A3-9-5) are modifications of FIGS. 149(A3-8-1) to 149(A3-8-4). This example is an example in which the icon IHI of "red bomber" flies away without performing the effect of firing the bullet icon BTI even in the case of the symbol variation display after straddling the continuous symbol variation display.

In addition, in the symbol variation display after straddling the continuous symbol variation display, whether to hit or not (whether the icon changes or not), the effect of firing the bullet icon BTI is always performed. May be.

FIG. 150 (A3-10-1) is also a modification example continued from FIG. 148 (A2-1). In this example, the pending change of the prefetch target is the second pending represented by the second pending icon h12 shown in FIG. 150 (A3-10-1). The red bomber icon RBI, which is in front of the hold icon and paused right above the fluctuation icon h0, fires a red bullet icon BTI targeting the second hold icon h12, but does not hit (Fig. 150 (A3-10-2)), the symbol variation display ends (FIG. 150 (A3-10-3)). Then, even when the next symbol variation display is started, the red bomber icon RBI is temporarily stopped immediately above the variation icon h0 (FIG. 150 (A3-10-4),) of the prefetch target variation. A red bullet icon BTI is fired at the target of the first hold icon h11 to be put on hold, but it does not hit here either (FIG. 150 (A3-10-5)), and the pattern variation display ends (FIG. 150 ( A3-10-6)). This time, the hold that was the change in the pre-reading target is consumed, and the change display of symbols is started. That is, the symbol variation display started here is the variation of the pre-reading target, and the red bomber icon RBI performs somersault to make the variation icon h0 the target icon, before the variation icon h0. Returning to the position of, the red bullet icon BTI is fired at the change icon h0 as a target (FIG. 150 (A3-10-8)), and fly away toward the left end of the screen. The bullet icon BTI fired here hits the variation icon h0, and the first hold icon h11 is covered with the effect image EF14 (FIG. 150 (A3-10-10)). Although not shown, the change icon h0 changes to a red display mode (fifth display mode) when the effect image EF14 disappears.

Note that FIG. 150 (A3-10-9′) is a modification example continuing from the same diagram (A3-10-8), but there is a case where the final change does not hit the target. As a result, all three failed. It should be noted that, in this example, the icon unchanged animation by the red bomber icon is performed multiple times for the same icon, but the icon unchanged animation by the red bomber icon is performed multiple times for different icons. May be. Also, the icon change animation may be performed multiple times for the same icon or multiple times for different icons.

Although FIG. 150 (A2-3-1) is an example continued from the symbol variation display 160 (A1-1), a plurality of icon change notice displays may appear. That is, in FIG. 150 (A2-3-1), three types of bomber icons IHI, which are all types such as “bomber”, “red bomber”, and “gold bomber”, have appeared. It should be noted that the types of display of the icon change notice that appear may all be different as in this example, or may be all the same. In addition, systems such as a bomber may or may not be aligned (for example, "red balloon", "gold bomber", "red flying boat").

In this way, when the icons IHI of a plurality of bombers have appeared, the icon change effect may be performed on all aircraft, but as shown in FIG. 150 (A2-3-2), one bomber is used. Icon (here, the icon of "red bomber") IHI may perform the icon change effect, or the icons IHI of a plurality of bombers forming a part may perform the icon change effect. Good.

In FIG. 150 (A2-3-3), the variable icon, which is the default display mode, is changed to the red display mode, which means that the icon change effect has been successful. However, it may fail. Further, when the icon change effect is performed by the icons IHI of a plurality of bombers, a plurality of icons may change, or only one icon may change.

In addition, the icon may be a “bomber” or the No. shown in FIG. 119(b). In the case of the icon of "Flying boat" of 7, it is possible to change two icons with one aircraft.
FIG. 151 is a diagram showing a modified example such as the effect example shown in FIG. 148.

In FIG. 151 (A1-2-1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is changing at high speed for the special figure 1, and the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is displayed. The hold icon h11 is displayed in the default display mode (first display mode). Further, on the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS, the variable icon h0 in the default display mode (first display mode) is displayed.

In FIG. 151 (A1-2-2), there is a ball in the special-figure 1 starting port 230, and the number of reservations in special-figure 1 is increased by one, and there are two in total. In the second hold number display of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 151 (A1-2-2), the hold number of the special figure 1 is displayed as "2".

In FIG. 151 (A1-2-3), the second hold icon h12 is displayed on the second stage hs2. The second hold icon h12 is No. 2 shown in FIG. It is an icon in the display mode of 12 "roulette". This "roulette" display mode icon is displayed by switching the display mode of N selections selected from 2 to 5 selections (blue, green, red, gold, rainbow) in order and stopping at the roulette wheel. This hold icon itself changes to the display mode. In this example, there are three choices of blue, green, and red, and the display is switched and displayed in the order of “blue→green→red→blue→”. That is, in the second holding icon h12 in the display form of "roulette" shown in FIG. 151 (A1-2-3), the icon in the display form of "blue" is displayed, and in FIG. 151 (A1-2-4). In the second hold icon h12 in the "roulette" display mode, the icon in the "green" display mode is displayed, and the second hold in the "roulette" display mode shown in Fig. (A1-2-5). In the icon h12, an icon in the display mode of "red" is displayed. In the following drawings, it is indicated by an arrow mark indicating that the fluctuation is occurring. In FIG. 151 (A1-2-7), the variable display of symbols ends, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol in the central region is a combination of missing decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration”). "1"-"decoration 7") is stopped and displayed, and the second upper left decorative pattern also shows the combination of lost decorative patterns ("decoration 4"-"decoration 1"-"decoration 7").

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 151 (A1-2-8), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started in the central region. The first hold icon h11 is an icon in the display form of "roulette". Further, the icon IHI of "red bomber" is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the icon change animation is started. That is, the red bullet icon BTI is fired from the red bomber icon RBI, targeting the first hold icon h11.

In FIG. 151 (A1-2-10), the bullet icon BTI hits the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11 is covered by the effect image EF14. Then, in FIG. 148 (A1-2-11), the effect image EF14 disappears, and in the first hold icon h11, the icon in the “red” display mode is visible. In FIG. 148(A1-2-11) followed by FIG. 148(A1-2-12), the first hold icon h11 is changed to the display mode of “red”. Also, the "red bomber" icon IHI is about to disappear in the left corner of the screen. In addition, when the icon change animation is not performed by the "red bomber" icon IHI, or when the icon unchanged animation is not performed by the "red bomber" icon IHI, that is, when the "red bomber" is selected. Even when the animation used is not performed, the first hold icon h11 is configured to change to the “red” display mode more easily than when the “red bomber” icon IHI is not displayed. Alternatively, the easiness of changing the display mode of “red” may be the same as that when the icon IHI of “red bomber” is not displayed.

The examples illustrated in FIGS. 151(A1-3-1) to (A1-3-7) are examples in which the telop effect described with reference to FIG. 94 is executed.

In FIG. 151 (A1-3-1), the variable display of symbols is stopped and displayed. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in (A1-3-2) of FIG. 151, the first decorative symbol is displayed in the central area. Fluctuation display has started. In the subsequent FIG. 151 (A1-3-3), the telop effect is started. That is, the telop display trp is displayed above the first decorative symbol. In this telop display trp, the possibility that the display mode of the hold icon is likely to change is displayed in characters, which corresponds to an example of the icon change notice display. In the telop display trp here, a character display such as "holding change highly accurate" continues to be flowed from right to left on the screen.

After the telop effect is started, as shown in FIG. 151 (A1-3-4), the icon IHI of "red bomber" is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the icon change animation is displayed. Has been started. That is, while the telop effect continues, as shown in FIG. 151 (A1-3-4), the red bullet icon BTI is fired from the red bomber icon RBI, targeting the first hold icon h11. When the icon (here, the icon IHI for "red bomber") is displayed as the icon change notice while the telop display trp such as "Hold change high accuracy" is displayed, "Hold change high accuracy" is displayed. The display mode of the hold icon may be changed more easily than in the state in which the telop display trp such as "medium" is not displayed.

In FIG. 151 (A1-3-7), the bullet icon BTI hits the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11 is covered by the effect image EF14. Eventually, when the effect image EF14 disappears, the first hold icon h11 changes to the display mode of “red”.
Next, an example in which the silhouette notice of the hold icon is executed will be described.

In FIG. 151 (A1-4-1), the variable display of the symbols ends, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol in the central region is a combination of the decorative symbols that are missing (“decoration 4”-“decoration”). "1"-"decoration 7") is stopped and displayed, and the second upper left decorative pattern also shows the combination of lost decorative patterns ("decoration 4"-"decoration 1"-"decoration 7").

In FIG. 151 (A1-4-2), the hold that has been the first hold until now is exhausted, and the variable display of symbols is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 151 (A1-4-3), the first decorative symbol in the central area is still stopped and displayed, but in the second upper left decorative symbol, variable display is started, In the second hold number display on the upper right, the hold number in Toku-zu 1 is decreased by 1 to “2”. Further, the effect image EF15 is generated so as to cover the hold icon display area HIS and the variable icon display area CIS, and neither the hold icon nor the change icon is visible.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 151 (A1-4-3), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started in the central region. When the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, the effect image EF15 disappears, and the silhouette notice is started in the hold icon display area HIS and the variable icon display area CIS. That is, the hut sil appears in the hold icon display area HIS and the variable icon display area CIS. The inside of the hut sil is displayed in silhouette. In FIG. 151 (A1-4-3), the variation icon h0, the first hold icon h11, and the second hold icon h12 are displayed in silhouette display. In the silhouette display, the colors of the icons and the like are not the usual colors but the colors representing shadows. The silhouette notice started here is a notice indicating that the display mode of the hold icon is likely to change, or there is a hold icon that may change to a display mode with a high expectation of a big hit. It may be a notice that suggests that there is.

After the silhouette notice is started, as shown in FIG. 151 (A1-4-4), the “Red bomber” icon IHI appears on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the icon change animation is started. It That is, as shown in FIG. 151 (A1-4-4), the red bomber icon RBI approaches the hut sil while the silhouette notice is being issued. Eventually, the red bomber icon RBI passes while hazeing through the hut sil and fires a red bullet icon BTI while passing. The fired bullet icon BTI enters the hut and is displayed as a silhouette.

In FIG. 151 (A1-4-7), a state in which the bullet icon BTI is likely to hit the first hold icon h11 is displayed in silhouette. Also, in FIG. 151 (A1-4-8), the bullet icon BTI hits the first hold icon h11 and the first hold icon h11 is covered by the effect image EF14 in a silhouette display. Then, in FIG. 151 (A1-4-9), the first hold icon h11 is displayed in a silhouette display so that it can be seen that the display mode has changed to “red”. It should be noted that the silhouette may be displayed so that the display mode is not known until the silhouette notice is finished.

FIG. 152 is a diagram illustrating a continuation of the example in which the silhouette notice of the hold icon is being executed and other effect examples.

In FIG. 152 (A1-4-10), the variable display of symbols ends, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol in the central region is a combination of missing decorative symbols (“decoration 6”-“decoration”). 4”-“decoration 1”) is stopped and displayed, and the upper left second decorative design is also stopped and displayed with the same combination of lost decorative designs.

In FIG. 152 (A1-4-11), the stop display is in progress (during confirmation display), the change icon h0 disappears, and in FIG. 152 (A1-4-12), the stop display is in progress (during confirmation display). In the same figure (A1-4-13), the hold that has been the first hold until now, that is, the hold of the first hold icon that has changed to the display mode of "red" is exhausted, and the variable display of symbols is started. .. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 152 (A1-4-13), the first decorative symbol in the central region is still stopped and displayed, but in the second decorative symbol on the upper left, the variable display is started, In the second hold number display on the upper right, the hold number in Toku-zu 1 is decremented by 1 and becomes “1”. Further, in the hut sil, it can be seen that the movement animation of the hold icon is displayed in a silhouette display, and the first hold icon that has changed to the display mode of “red” is displayed at the position of the variable icon h0.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 152 (A1-4-14), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started in the central region, and after the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, The silhouette notice ends, and on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 152 (A1-4-15), the variable icon h0 changed to the red display mode is displayed.

In addition, the production of the silhouette notice may itself be promoted by the production by the icon change animation using the icon IHI of "red bomber". For example, the hut sil may be promoted to become a house and the hold icon may be easily changed, or the color of the hut sil may be changed to red and the hold icon may be easily displayed in red. .. Then, the display mode of the hold icon may change after the silhouette notice ends (after the hut sil is hidden) or at the same time.

FIGS. 152(B1-1) to (B8) are diagrams showing an example in which the icon change notice display is promoted after the icon change notice display is displayed.

In FIG. 152(B1-1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is changing at high speed for the special figure 1, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed. Both of these two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the default display mode (first display mode). Further, on the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS, the variable icon h0 in the default display mode (first display mode) is displayed.

In FIG. 152 (B2), the icon IHI of the default color "Bomber", which is an icon change notice display, appears (is displayed) at the right end of the screen, and the icon change animation is started. In the icon change animation here, the icon "HIBOR" IHI pauses on the change icon h0 as shown in FIG. 152 (B3-1), and as shown in FIG. After the flashing of the change was displayed on the "Bomber" icon IHI, it was promoted to the "Red Bomber" icon IHI. In addition, in the case of promotion within the same bomber system (the icon IHI of "Bomber" is promoted to the icon IHI of "Bomber" or the icon IHI of "Red bomber" is There is a case where it is promoted to the "Bomber" icon IHI) or when it changes to a different system (the "Bomber" icon IHI is promoted to the "Flying boat" icon IHI or the "Bomber" icon IHI may be promoted to the “Red Flying Boat” icon IHI).

In FIG. 152(B6), the red bullet icon BTI is fired from the red bomber icon RBI. In FIG. 152(B7), the fired bullet icon BTI hits the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11 is covered by the effect image EF14. Then, in FIG. 152(B8), the effect image EF14 disappears, and the first hold icon h11 changes to the display mode of “red”.

FIG. 152 (B3-2-1) to FIG. 152 (B3-2-5) are diagrams showing an example in which the display of the icon change notice itself is promoted by the button effect.

FIG. 152(B3-2-1) is an example continued from FIG. 152(B2), and the state shown in FIG. 152(B3-2-1) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 152(B3-1). is there. In FIG. 152 (B3-2-2), the button image 136a is added on the icon IHI of “bomber”, which is the display of the icon change notice. Although the remaining time display meter MT showing the remaining time of the operation valid period is not added here, it may be added. The operation valid period may start from the time when the button image 136a is added, or may start after a while.

The timing of FIG. 152 (B3-2-3) is within the operation valid period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. In response to the operation of the chance button 136 within the valid operation period, in FIG. 149 (B3-2-4), the icon IHI of "Bomber" is flashed to indicate the change, and then "Red". It has been promoted to the icon "HIB" of "Bomber" (Fig. 149 (B3-2-5)). .. After that, as shown in FIG. 152(B6), the display mode of the hold icon may not change.

The promotion of the icon "HIB" of the "bomber" may be executed on the condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or even when the operation valid period has elapsed without operating the chance button 136. May be done. Further, although the button image 136a is added on the icon "HIB" of the bomber, the button image 136a may not be added and may be executed as a so-called back button effect.

FIGS. 152(B3-3-1) to (B3-3-5) are diagrams showing an example in which the display itself of the icon change notice is promoted by the notice display YH released from the notice icon YI.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 152 (B3-3-1), the notice icon YI is stocked in the stock area SS. In FIG. 152 (B3-3-2), the notice icon YI is used, the box changes to the opened state d, and from the box, the No. shown in FIG. 117(b) is displayed. The "UP" notice display YH of 20 is released, and in the figure (B3-3-3), the used notice icon YI disappears and the "UP" notice display YH is displayed. The notice display YH of “UP” is changed to a light ball YHb, and the light ball YHb is temporarily stopped on the fluctuation icon h0 as shown in FIG. 152 (B3-3-4). It flies toward the "Bomber" icon IHI and hits the "Bomber" icon IHI. Then, in FIG. 152 (B3-3-5), the icon IHI for “bomber” is promoted to the icon IHI for “red bomber”. Although FIG. 149 (B3-3-6) is followed by FIG. 152 (B6), the display mode of the hold icon may not change.

FIG. 153 is a diagram showing an example in which the icon change notice display itself is promoted while failing to be promoted in the middle of a plurality of fluctuations.

FIG. 153 (B3-4-1) is an example that continues from FIG. 152 (B2). In this example, the second hold icon h12 shown in FIG. 153 (B3-4-1) is used to hold the prefetch target change. It is the second hold to represent.

The state shown in FIG. 153(B3-4-1) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 152(B3-1), and the icon IHI of the default color "Bomber", which is a notification of the icon change notice, is a variable icon. It is paused just above h0. Further, the state shown in FIG. 152(B3-4-2) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 152(B4), and the icon IHI of the “bombing machine” is flashed to incite the change. In this example, in FIG. 153 (B3-4-3) in which promotion has failed and the flashing display has disappeared, the icon IHI of "Bomber" remains as it is. Eventually, in FIG. 151 (B3-4-3), the variable display of the symbols ends, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol in the central region is a combination of the decorative symbols that are missing (“decoration 4”- "Ornament 1"-"Ornament 7") is stopped and displayed, and the second ornamental pattern at the upper left is also stopped and displayed as a combination of missing ornamental symbols ("Ornament 4"-"Ornament 1"-"Ornament 7"). There is.

Then, even when the next symbol variation display is started, the icon IHI of the "bomber" remains suspended immediately above the variation icon h0 (FIG. 153 (B3-4-5)). In the subsequent FIG. 153 (B3-4-6), the flashing display that fuels the change is displayed again on the icon “HIB”, and this time the promotion was successful, and the flashing display disappeared. ), has been promoted to the icon IHI of "Red bomber". The red bomber icon RBI that has been successfully promoted fires a red bullet icon BTI toward the first hold icon h0, but as shown in FIG. 153 (B3-4-8), it does not hit here, In FIG. 153 (B3-4-9), the variable display of symbols is finished, and the combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 6”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 1”) is stopped and displayed.

This time, the hold, which was the change in the prefetching target, is consumed, and the pattern change display is started (FIG. 153 (B3-4-10)). That is, the symbol variation display started here is the variation of the pre-reading target, and the red bomber icon RBI performs somersault to make the variation icon h0 the target icon, before the variation icon h0. Returning to the position of, the red bullet icon BTI is fired at the change icon h0 as a target (FIG. 153 (B3-4-11)). After that, as shown in FIG. 148 (A3-2-2), the display mode of the variable icon may not change.

In this example, the promotion has succeeded the second time, but the production may end without the promotion being successful. Further, the icon IHI of “red bomber” may be further changed to the icon IHI of “gold bomber”. Further, in this example, the bullet icon BTI is fired after promotion, but the bullet icon BTI may be fired even before promotion. For example, the bullet icon BTI may be fired at the timing of FIG. 153 (B3-4-3).

FIGS. 153(B1-2-1) to (B1-2-10) are diagrams showing an example in which the display itself of the icon change notice is promoted via the timer notice effect.

FIG. 153 (B1-2-1) shows that the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is changing at a high speed for the special figure 1, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed. There is. Both of these two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the default display mode (first display mode). Further, on the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS, the variable icon h0 in the default display mode (first display mode) is displayed.

In FIG. 153 (B1-2-2), the timer notice effect is started, and the timer notice display TYH is displayed at the right end of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The timer notice display TYH shown in FIG. 153 (B1-2-2) shows the remaining time (5 seconds in this case) up to the time which is the reference for the promotion effect start. In 3), the countdown has started. The timer notice effect started here corresponds to a notice of promotion effect. After the timer notice effect is started, as shown in FIG. 153 (B1-2-4), the icon IHI of the default color “Bomber”, which is a notice of the icon change notice, is displayed, and is directly above the change icon h0. It flies up to and pauses (FIG. 153 (B1-2-5)), and enters the standby state. The timer notice display TYH shown in FIG. 153 (B1-2-6) has no remaining time (0 seconds), and in the subsequent figure (B1-2-7), the timer notice display TYH is a character of “attention”. Has been switched to. At the same time as the remaining time of the timer notice display TYH disappears (becomes 0 seconds), the promotion effect is started. Note that the promotion effect may be started (when there is a time lag) after the remaining time of the timer notice display TYH is exhausted.

In FIG. 153 (B1-2-8), the character “Attention” is displayed on the timer notice display TYH, and a flashing display that fuels the change is displayed on the icon IHI of the “bomber” that has been in the standby state until now. Is displayed. Eventually, the flashing display disappears, and in FIG. 153 (B1-2-9) in which the flashing display disappears, the icon has been promoted to the “red bomber” icon IHI. It is easier to promote the icon change notice display itself via the timer notice effect than when not passing the timer notice effect. It should be noted that the display itself of the icon change notice may be promoted without fail when the timer notice effect is passed. In FIG. 153 (B1-2-10), the timer notice effect is finished and the timer notice display TYH is hidden. It should be noted that this timer notice display TYH may be used to give notice of the type in which the icon change notice display is promoted. For example, the character display of "red" may be performed instead of the character display of "attention".

It should be noted that when the remaining time of the timer notice display TYH is exhausted (0 seconds), the display of the icon change notice (for example, the icon IHI of “Bomber”) may appear. That is, the timer notice display TYH corresponds to a notice that the icon change notice may be displayed. Furthermore, the background color of the timer notice display TYH or the like may be used to give notice of the display color of the icon change notice that appears. For example, if it is a white background, the icon IHI of "Bomber" is announced, if it is a red background, the icon IHI of "Red Bomber" is announced, and if it is a gold background, it is "Gold". The appearance of the icon "HIB" of "Bomber" may be announced. However, such a notice may not be given.

In addition, although this example is an example in which the timer advance notice effect and the promotion effect are combined, both are independent, and after the timer advance notice effect is started, the icon "HIGH BOMBER" IHI appears and the timer advance notice display TYH Even if the remaining time is exhausted, the promotion effect may not be started, and another notice or effect corresponding to the timer notice display TYH may be started. In this case, the promotion effect of the icon "HIB" of the "bomber" is not related to the timer notice effect. Further, there may be a case where the timing when the remaining time of the timer notice display TYH is exhausted and the timing at which the icon "HIB" of the "bomber" is changed to be held coincidentally.

Next, an example in which the display itself of the icon change notice is promoted via the meter effect will be described.

In FIG. 153 (B1-3-1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is changing at a high speed with respect to the special figure 1, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed. There is. Both of these two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the default display mode (first display mode). Further, on the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS, the variable icon h0 in the default display mode (first display mode) is displayed. Further, a meter display MD similar to the meter display shown in FIG. 91 or the like is displayed on the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS. In the meter display MD shown in FIG. 153 (B1-3-1), when the tank is full with 6 scales, 5 scales are already stored. When the meter display MD is full, the icon IHI of "Bomber", which is an icon change notice display, is promoted. It should be noted that this meter display MD may be a display that is constantly displayed, except for a specific state in which a super reach effect is being executed, or a display that is displayed when the display start condition is satisfied. May be

Eventually, in FIG. 153 (B1-3-2), the variable display of the symbols ends, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol in the central area is a combination of the missing decorative symbols (“decoration 4”- "Ornament 1"-"Ornament 7") is stopped and displayed, and the second ornamental pattern at the upper left is also stopped and displayed as a combination of missing ornamental symbols ("Ornament 4"-"Ornament 1-Ornament 7"). There is.

Then, even when the next symbol variation display is started, the meter display MD accumulated up to 5 scales is displayed on the right base icon bIr (FIG. 153 (B1-3-3)). When the next symbol variation display is started, as shown in FIG. 153 (B1-3-4), the “red bomber” icon IHI appears at the right end of the screen. That is, the icon "HIB" of "red bomber" displayed here is No. 1 shown in FIG. 117(b). The "up" notice display YH of 20 is mounted, and in the same figure (B1-3-5), when passing over the meter display MD, the "up" notice display YH is dropped, The notice display YH of "up" is taken into the meter display MD. As a result, as shown in FIG. 153 (B1-3-6), the meter display MD is full, and in the subsequent figure (B1-3-7), the meter display MD is changed to the character display of “promotion”. It's changing.

FIG. 154 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example in which the display of the icon change notice display itself is promoted via the meter effect, and other effect examples.

In FIG. 154 (B1-3-8) subsequent to FIG. 153 (B1-3-7), the default color “Bomber” icon IHI is changed in response to the meter display MD becoming full. In FIG. 154 (B1-3-9) in which the flashing flashing display is performed and the flashing display disappears, the icon has been promoted to the “red bomber” icon IHI. The changed icon change notice display color matches the background color of the character display "promotion" on the meter display MD, and the icon change notice display is changed at the stage of FIG. 153 (B1-3-7). The changing display mode is announced in advance. Subsequently, the meter display MD shown in FIG. 154 (B1-3-10) has returned to the empty state. When the meter display MD is full, the display mode of the icon change notice display may be changed (promoted) without exception, or may not be changed (promoted) (failure).

FIG. 153 (B1-4-1) to FIG. 153 (B1-4-4) describe an example in which the icon change notice display appears when the meter display in the meter effect is full.

The meter display MD is displayed on the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 153 (B1-4-1). The meter display MD is in a state where the scale is full at 6 scales and 5 scales are already stored. Further, in FIG. 153 (B1-4-1) during the variable display of symbols, the advance notice display YH of “UP” is displayed. In the subsequent FIG. 153 (B1-4-2), the advance notice YH of “up” is taken into the meter display MD, the meter display MD becomes full, and in the subsequent same diagram (B1-4-3), the meter is displayed. The display MD has changed to the display of "bombing" with a red background. Here, as the display of the icon change notice, it is announced that the icon of the bomber with the background color will appear. If you change the display to "Bombing" on the gold background, the "Gold bomber" icon may appear, and if you change to the "Bombing" display on the white background, the "Bomber" icon changes. It may be displayed. Further, it is not necessary to give a notice of the appearance of the icon change notice that appears, and even in this case, when the meter display MD is full, the "bomber" icon, the "red bomber" icon, Alternatively, the "gold bomber" icon may be displayed.

Then, in FIG. 154 (B1-4-4), the icon IHI of "red bomber" appears at the right end of the screen.

It should be noted that when the appearance notice of the icon change notice display is given by the meter display MD, the icon change notice display may or may not always appear.

FIG. 154 (C1) to FIG. 154 (C13) are diagrams illustrating an example in which the icon change notice display is displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays.

In FIG. 154 (C1), the variable display of symbols is stopped and displayed, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is stopped and displayed with the combination of decorative symbols that are lost. During the stop display, nothing is displayed on the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS.

In FIG. 154 (C2), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is exhausted, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the first decorative symbol is started. Nothing is displayed on the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS even at the time when the variable display of symbols is started, but when the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, it is displayed in FIG. 154 (C3). As shown in the figure, a smoke image is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS, and the smoke image disappears in the figure (C4), and the effect icon display area DIS displays No. 1 shown in FIG. 119(b). Thirteen red “Ikayoshi” icons IHI are displayed. This "Akayoshimune" icon corresponds to the icon change notice display, and will be described below with the same symbols as those used for the "Red bomber" icon and the like. When the icon IHI of "Akayoshimune" is successfully changed, the icon display mode is changed to the same display mode as itself, that is, the red display mode (fifth display mode). Therefore, if the display mode of the hold icon is changed, it corresponds to the advance notice of advance notice, and if the display mode of the variable icon is changed, it corresponds to the normal notice of advance notice.

In FIG. 154 (C5), the change effect of the variable icon h0 using the icon IHI of “Akayoshimune” is started. That is, the icon IHI of "Akayoshimune" which has been the default mode (a) shown in FIG. 119(b) has been changed to the mode (b). That is, the icon IHI of "Akayoshi Mune", which was standing upright, faces the variable icon h0, holds the sword, and vibrates from the sword. Also in FIG. 154(C6), the wave is oscillated from the sword of “Akayoshimune”, but the display mode of the variation icon h0 remains the default, and in FIG. 154(C7), the icon IHI of “Akayoshimune” is Returning to the mode a, the change animation has ended. That is, the change effect here has failed. In FIG. 154 (C8), the variable display of symbols is stopped and displayed, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is stopped and displayed with the combination of decorative symbols that are lost. The icon IHI of "Akayoshimune" is displayed on the right base icon bIr as the mode a.

In FIG. 154 (C9), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is exhausted, and the symbol variation display is started again. Even if the symbol variable display is started, the icon IHI of "Akayoshimune" is displayed on the right base icon bIr as the mode a, and is displayed across the continuous symbol variable display. In FIG. 154 (C10), a change animation is started as a change effect of the change icon h0 using the icon IHI of “Akayoshimune”. In FIG. 154 (C11), the variable icon h0, which has been the default display mode until then, has changed to the red display mode, and the normal notice is started. In FIG. 154 (C12-1), the icon IHI of “Akayoshimune” has changed from aspect b to aspect c, appealing that the change effect was successful. If the change effect is successful, the icon IHI of "Akayoshimune", which was the display of the icon change notice, disappears from the right base icon bIr.

The icon IHI of “Akayoshimune” described above is the same as the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono shown in FIG. 77, FIG. 84, etc., and is an example of effect shown in FIG. 77, FIG. 84, etc. And are mutually applicable.

When the icon IHI of "Akayoshimune" is displayed, the display form of the icon may change to a red display form without fail, or it may fail like this example, but In some cases, it may be changed to a red display mode, or it may fail in the end.

FIG. 154 (C12-2) shows the state after the change icon h0 cannot be changed to the red display mode and finally the change effect has failed, and the icon IHI of “Akayoshimune” is displayed. However, the change from the aspect b to the aspect d notifies that the change effect has failed.

Next, an example using the display of the icon change notice not shown in FIG. 119(b) will be described.

In FIG. 154 (D1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is changing at a high speed for the special figure 1, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed. Both of these two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the default display mode (first display mode). Further, on the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS, the variable icon h0 in the default display mode (first display mode) is displayed.

In FIG. 154 (D2), the icon of “red thundercloud” starts to be displayed small on the hold icons h11 and h12. This "red thundercloud" icon corresponds to the icon change notice display, and will be described below with the same reference numerals as those used for the "red bomber" icon and the like. The icon of "red thundercloud" is the same as the icon of "red bomber" and the icon of "Akayoshimune" when the icon is changed successfully. It is an icon for changing to a fifth display mode).

The "red thundercloud" icon grows into a large thundercloud by the growth animation after the display is started. There may be a case where a large thundercloud does not grow, and in this case, it may be displayed as a gusset, or a large thundercloud may surely grow.

The "red thundercloud" icon IHI shown in FIG. 154 (D3) has grown to cover the area from the variable icon display area CIS to the hold icon display area HIS from above, and this "red thundercloud" icon IHI The fluctuation icon h0 and the hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed below.

In FIG. 154 (D4), thunder has fallen from the “red thundercloud” icon IHI toward the first hold icon h11, and in the following (D5), the first hold icon h11 where the thunder has fallen is the effect image. In the figure (D6) in which the effect image EF16 is covered by the EF16 and disappears, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 does not change, and the default display mode remains, and the change effect fails. The “red thundercloud” icon IHI drops lightning simultaneously or sequentially toward one or more icons of the hold icon or the variable icon, and when the change effect is successful, the display mode of the icon that has thundered is , The display mode changes to red. In FIG. 154 (D6), the symbol variable display is stopped and displayed, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is stopped and displayed with the combination of the lost decorative symbols, but the "Red thundercloud" icon IHI is displayed. Has been done.

In FIG. 154 (D7), the suspension of the first suspension icon h11 is exhausted, and the variable display of symbols is started. Even when the symbol variation display is started, the "red thundercloud" icon IHI is displayed, and this "red thundercloud" icon IHI is also displayed across the continuous symbol variation display.

FIG. 155 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example using the display of the icon change notice not shown in FIG. 119(b) and another example of the effect.

In FIG. 155 (D8) subsequent to FIG. 154 (D7), the symbol variable display is stopped and displayed, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L stops and displays the combination of lost decorative symbols. Here, the special figure is no longer held and the next change is waiting for a prize. However, the "Red Thundercloud" icon IHI is still displayed.

When the first time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed in the state where the symbol variation display is not started after the stop symbol of the special symbol is confirmed and displayed in the state where the hold is 0, the symbol demonstration is started. (FIG. 155 (D9)). In this symbol demo, the combination of the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed continues to be displayed. Although not shown, the background screen continues to be displayed without being changed from the symbol variable display of FIG. 154 (D7). However, you may switch to the background screen of the symbol demo. Further, when the symbol demonstration is started, the display of the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI is started. The display start timing of these icons MI, VI, BI may be before the start of the symbol demo, at the same time as the start of the symbol demo, or after the start of the symbol demo. A detailed description of these icons MI, VI, BI has been given with reference to FIG.

Further, as shown in FIG. 155 (D9), even during the symbol demonstration, the icon IHI of “red thundercloud” is still displayed.

The display of the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI is started in a state where the stop symbol of the special symbol is confirmed and the variable display of the symbol is not started after the hold is 0. Furthermore, when the second time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses in that state, the pattern demo is switched to the animation demo. When the animation demo starts, the background screen changes and the animation demo screen is displayed (FIG. 155 (D10)). When switching to the demo screen of this animation, the icon IHI of "Red thundercloud" disappears. On the other hand, in this example, even when the screen is switched to the animation demo screen, the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI are still displayed at the same positions as before the switching. However, when switching to the animation demonstration screen, the display positions of these icons MI, VI, BI may be changed or may be hidden.

The animation demonstration screen may be switched to when the first time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed. In this case, at the same time as switching to the animation demo screen, the icon IHI of “red thundercloud” may be hidden, or the second time period may be displayed after switching.

Eventually, there is a ball in the special figure 1 starting opening 230, the number of special figure 1 is increased by one, and the variable display of symbols is started. On the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the animation demonstration screen is switched to the display screen shown in FIG. 155 (D11). As a result, the icon IHI of the “red thundercloud” that has grown greatly is displayed again. However, the icon IHI of "red thundercloud" may not be displayed when the symbol demo or the animation demo is sandwiched.

In FIG. 155 (D8), the symbol fluctuation display started in FIG. 155 (D11) is stopped and displayed, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is stopped and displayed, which shows a combination of lost decorative symbols. During the execution of the symbol variation display started in (D11), there is another ball entering the special figure 1 starting opening 230, the number of reservations in special figure 1 becomes 1, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. ing. Therefore, the next variation is started immediately, and after the symbol variation display here, the suspension of special figure 1 starts to accumulate, and the symbol variation display is continuously executed. During this time, as shown in FIG. 155 (D13), the icon IHI of “red thundercloud” continues to be displayed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 155 (D14), the first stop is performed in the first decorative symbol, and the left symbol fluctuates. When the symbol variable display of the “red thundercloud” icon IHI is performed a predetermined number of times, the erasing animation is started. The count of the number of times here does not change even if the above-mentioned symbol demo or the above-mentioned animation demo is sandwiched. However, the number of times may be reset by sandwiching the symbol demo or the animation demo. The start timing of the deletion animation may be at the same time as the start of the next symbol variable display in which the symbol variable display is performed a predetermined number of times, after the start, or the first stop is performed. The timing may be different. In the deletion animation, the icon IHI of “red thundercloud” gradually becomes smaller, and finally disappears (FIG. 155 (D16)). In this example, after all, the change effect by the icon IHI of "Red thundercloud" is completed without success.

In this example, although not shown, lightning is dropped on any icon for each change. However, lightning may be dropped only when the icon is changed. Also, as the types of thundercloud icons, a default thundercloud icon and a gold thundercloud icon are also provided. However, the colors of clouds may be the same, and the types may be divided according to the color of lightning. That is, the icon with a red thunder may change to red if the change effect is successful. In this case, it may be possible to focus on the thundercloud icon without knowing the type of display of the icon change notice until the thunder strikes. Further, it may be configured so that it is not possible to know which display mode will be changed only when the default color lightning strikes. For example, even if a default color thunder strikes the default color icon, it may change to red. On the other hand, in other colors (display mode), the color changes to the same color (display mode) as the color of lightning (display mode), so it also functions as a notice of the changing display mode.

FIG. 155 (Ea1) to FIG. 155 (Ea9) are diagrams showing an example of effect in which the icon of the display mode of “timer” and the display of the icon change notice are combined.

In FIG. 155 (Ea1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) of the special map 1 is changing at high speed, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 of the special map 1 are displayed. 1st reservation icon h11 of special figure 1 is No. shown in FIG. 119 (a). 10 is an icon in a display mode of “Timer” of 10. The icon in the display mode of "timer" is an icon that changes to the display mode of the fourth display mode or more when the timer becomes 0. However, it may not change even if the timer becomes 0, or may change without fail when the timer becomes 0. The mode of the first hold icon h11 in the display mode of "timer" shown in 167 (Ea1) is the mode a before the start of the countdown. On the other hand, the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the default display mode (first display mode). Further, on the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS, the variable icon h0 in the default display mode (first display mode) is displayed.

In FIG. 155 (Ea2-1), No. 1 shown in FIG. An icon in a special mode in which the character "Timer" is added to the icon of "Bomber" in the default color of No. 4 appears at the right end of the screen. Hereinafter, this icon is referred to as the "timer-operated bomber" icon IHI. The icon IHI for "timer-only bomber" corresponds to the display of the icon change notice. The "timer-operated bomber" icon IHI may appear when the hold icon or the variable icon is displayed in the "timer" display mode icon, and is displayed in the "timer" display mode icon. Even if it is done, it may not appear. However, when the icon of the display form of "timer" is displayed, it may be displayed without fail. In FIG. 155 (Ea2-1), the icon change animation using the icon "IHI" of the appeared "timer-operated bomber" is started. Even if the icon change animation is started, the timer of the first hold icon h11 does not start the countdown, and the mode a is displayed as it is.

In FIG. 155 (Ea3), the bullet icon BTI of the default color is fired from the icon TBI of the bomber with the character "Timer". The target here is the first hold icon h11 in the display form of "timer". The bomber icon TBI with the word "Timer" does not target any icon other than the icon in the display form of "timer", but may do so. In this case, when the bullet icon BTI hits, the display mode of "timer" may be changed.

In FIG. 155 (Ea5), the bullet icon BTI hits the first hold icon h11 of “timer”, and the first hold icon h11 is covered by the effect image EF14. Then, in FIG. 155 (Ea6), the effect image EF14 disappears, and the first hold icon h11 changes from the mode a before the countdown is started to the mode b during the countdown. That is, the countdown is started only after the bullet icon BTI hits. In this example, the icon change animation is the animation up to immediately before FIG. 155 (Ea2-1) to (Ea6). It should be noted that the bullet icon BTI can be regarded as equivalent to the display of the icon change notice, and in that case, the display is started by being fired from the bomber icon TBI with the character of Timer attached, After that, the animation just before hitting and completing the change to the mode b corresponds to the icon change animation.

In FIG. 155 (Ea7), the mode of the first hold icon h11 of “timer” becomes a mode in which the timer becomes 0, and at the same time as the timer becomes 0, as shown in (Ea8) in FIG. The icon h11 is covered with the smoke image. In FIG. 155 (Ea8), the smoke image disappears, and the first hold icon that was the display form of "timer" is changed to the green display form (fourth display form). The "timer" hold icon may start to operate even if the timer is not attacked by the "timer-operated bomber" icon IHI. In this case, it may be a look-ahead notice with a higher jackpot reliability than when the operation was started by the "timer-only bomber" icon IHI, or conversely, with a look-ahead notice with a low jackpot reliability. There may be, and the reliability of the jackpot may be the same. Also, the "timer" hold icon may start the timer without being attacked by the "timer-operated bomber" icon IHI, or conversely, the "timer-operated bomber" icon. The timer may not fire unless it is attacked by the IHI.

In FIG. 155 (Ea2-2-1), in the state where the icon of the display form of "timer" is displayed, not the icon IHI of "dedicated bomber for timer operation" but the general-purpose icon of "red bomber" IHI has appeared. In FIG. 155 (Ea2-2-2), the bullet icon BTI has been fired from the icon IHI of “red bomber”, and the fired bullet icon BTI becomes the first hold icon h11 in the “timer” display mode. Hit. Then, the countdown is started with the first hold icon h11 of "timer". In FIG. 155 (Ea2-2-3), the mode of the first hold icon h11 of “timer” becomes a mode in which the timer becomes 0, and at the same time as the timer becomes 0, the same figure (Ea2-2-4). As shown in, the first hold icon h11 is covered with the smoke image. In this example, when the timer becomes 0, it is determined that the display mode of the first hold icon changes to the same red display mode (fifth display mode) as the display mode of the "red bomber" icon IHI. .. In FIG. 155 (Ea2-2-5), the smoke image disappears, and the first hold icon that was the display form of “timer” has changed to the red display form (fifth display form).

FIG. 156 is a diagram showing an example of an effect in which a certain type of hold icon and an icon change notice display are combined.

FIGS. 156(Eb1) to (Eb8) are diagrams showing an example in which a hold icon of a type of “bomb” not shown in FIG. 119(a) and an icon change notice display are combined.

In FIG. 156 (Ea1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) of the special map 1 is changing at high speed, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 of the special map 1 are displayed. The first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the default display mode (first display mode). On the other hand, the second hold icon h12 is an icon of the type “bomb” not shown in FIG. 119(a). This "bomb" type icon is an icon whose display mode changes when the bomb explodes. In this respect, it is similar to the "timer" icon, but the "timer" icon does not count down. Since the display mode of the icon changes when it becomes 0, it is easy to understand the timing of the change of the display mode, while it is difficult to understand when the "bomb" explodes, and as a result, the timing of the change of the display mode. Both are different in that it is difficult to understand. The icon of the "bomb" type has a fuse, and it is necessary to ignite this fuse to fire the "bomb".

In FIG. 156 (Eb2), the icon IHI of “red bomber”, which is an icon change notice display, appears at the right end of the screen, and the icon change animation is started. In FIG. 156 (Eb3), the red bomber icon RBI equipped with the ignition icon CYI is gradually approaching the “bomb” first hold icon h11. In the same figure (Eb4), the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The ignition icon CYI is dropped toward the fuse of the bomb icon which is the icon h11. Note that the "red bomber" icon IHI may be an icon with a flamethrower fixedly arranged, and in this case, such icons as the bullet icon BTI and the ignition icon CYI are separated from the aircraft. Disappear. The first bomb holding icon h11 may or may not successfully ignite the fuse even if the ignition icon CYI is dropped. The squib of the bomb icon that is the first hold icon h11 shown in FIG. 156 (Eb5) is ignited, and in FIG. 156 (Eb6), the squib is burning and becoming shorter. Eventually, as shown in FIG. 156 (Eb7-1), the first hold icon h11 of “bomb” explodes, and as shown in the same figure (Eb8), the first hold icon h11 of “red bomber” is displayed. The display mode has changed to the same red display mode as the display mode of the icon IHI.

FIG. 156(Eb7-2-1) is a modified example continuing from FIG. 156(Eb6). In FIG. 156(Eb7-2-1), although the squib is burning and shortening, FIG. 156(Eb7-2-1). Then, the fire of the squib was extinguished halfway. Therefore, the “bomb” first hold icon h11 does not explode, and the display mode does not change. The icon of the "bomb" that the fire of the squib has disappeared halfway continues to be displayed as it is. The mode of "bomb" in which the fire of the squib is extinguished halfway corresponds to the second display mode (display mode of "flashing white"). In FIG. 156 (Eb7-2-2), the variable display of symbols ends, and in FIG. 156 (Eb7-2-3), the icon of the “bomb” in which the fuse has disappeared halfway is displayed as the variable icon h0. Has been done. Even if the squib disappears in the middle, the squib that disappeared in the middle may be ignited again due to a change after the next change. In FIG. 156 (Eb7-2-3) followed by FIG. 156 (Eb7-2-3), a combination of lost decorative symbols is stopped and displayed.

It should be noted that the "bomb" icon (holding icon or variable icon) may not be attacked by the display of the icon change notice such as the "red bomber" icon IHI, or the fuse may be ignited naturally. Good. In this case, a pre-reading notice with a high jackpot reliability may be used, or conversely, a pre-reading notice with a low jackpot reliability may be used, compared with the case of being ignited by displaying the icon change notice. The reliability may be the same. Also, the "bomb" icon may always ignite the fuse if it is not attacked by the icon change notice display, or on the contrary, unless the attack is indicated by the icon change notice display, the fuse is ignited. You don't have to.

It should be noted that the icon (holding icon and/or change icon) indicates the No. shown in FIG. 2 to No. It may be announced that the icon will change to the 19 icon, the “bomb” icon described above, the VS display mode hold icon, and the “patrol lamp” icon described below.

156 (Ec1) to (Ec8) in FIG. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an example in which the “target” icon of 11 and an icon change notice display of a type not shown in FIG. 119( b) are combined.

In FIG. 156 (Ec1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is changing at a high speed for the special figure 1, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed. 1st reservation icon h11 of special figure 1 is No. shown in FIG. 119 (a). 11 is an icon in the display mode of “11”. In the icon of this "target" display mode, when the arrow is not inserted into the target icon, it remains the mode a shown in FIG. 119(a), and the reliability of the big hit in the pattern variation display corresponding to the target icon. Although the degree is about the level of the second display mode (white flashing display mode), when the arrow is stuck in the target icon, it changes to the mode b shown in FIG. 119(a), and the symbol variable display corresponding to the target icon is displayed. The reliability of the big hit in (6) rises to the level of the sixth display mode (gold color display mode). On the other hand, the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the default display mode (first display mode). Further, on the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS, the variable icon h0 in the default display mode (first display mode) is displayed.

In FIG. 156 (Ec2), the icon YMP of Yoshimune carrying a parachute appears on the upper right of the display screen. The Yoshimune's icon YMP carrying this parachute is a kind of display of the icon change notice, but the icon change notice of a type not shown in FIG. 119(b) is displayed. In FIG. 119(b), the icon change animation has started, and Yoshimune in the icon YMP of Yoshimune carrying a parachute is holding a bow and arrow and aiming at the target icon that is the first hold icon h11. At Ec3), the arrow icon YYI is fired. The fired arrow icon YYI hits the target icon that is the first hold icon h11, and in FIG. 156 (Ec5-1), the first hold icon h11 is covered by the effect image EF14. In the subsequent FIG. 156 (Ec6), the effect image EF14 disappears, and the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes to the mode b shown in FIG. 119(a). In this example, the reliability of the big hit in the symbol variable display corresponding to the first hold icon h11 has risen to the level of the sixth display mode (gold display mode). In FIG. 156 (Ec7-1), the icon YMP of Yoshimune carrying a parachute passes over the first holding icon h11, and eventually the icon TMP disappears from the display screen (FIG. 156 (Ec8)). ..

FIG. 156 (Ec5-2-1) is a modified example continuing from the same figure (Ec4), and in the same figure (Ec5-2-1), the fired arrow icon YYI is the first hold icon h11. In the same figure (Ec5-2-2) which has not hit the target icon, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is displayed as it is. And then, just as when hitting, the icon YMP of Yoshimune carrying a parachute passes over the first holding icon h11 (Fig. 156 (Ec5-2-3)), and eventually the icon. The TMP disappears from the display screen (FIG. 156 (Ec5-2-4)). In this way, within one symbol variation display, if it fails once, it is not possible to try again and it ends as it is. However, the icon YMP of Yoshimune who carries a parachute again may appear in the next change, and a change effect aiming at the target icon may be executed, or a change effect may be executed by another effect. It should be noted that, even if one failure occurs in one time, the pattern change table may be able to be retried up to a predetermined number of times (for example, two times, three times including rechallenge...), or even one failure. It may be configured so that the player can always try again up to a predetermined number of times.

FIG. 157 is a diagram showing another example of the effect using a bomber-type icon as the icon change notice display.

157(Ed1) to FIG. 157(Ed5) are examples in which an icon of a type not shown in FIG. 119(a) and an icon change notice display of a type not also shown in FIG. 119(b) are combined. FIG.

In FIG. 157 (Ed1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) for the special map 1 is changing at high speed, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 of the special map 1 are displayed. The first holding icon h11 of the special figure 1 is an icon of the type of “patrol lamp” not shown in FIG. 119(a). When the icon of the "patrol lamp" is activated, the reliability of the jackpot in the pattern variation display corresponding to the icon of the patrol lamp is the level of the seventh display mode (rainbow display mode), that is, the jackpot is confirmed. Rise to the level of. On the other hand, the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the default display mode (first display mode). Further, on the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS, the variable icon h0 in the default display mode (first display mode) is displayed.

In addition, in FIG. 157 (Ed1), No. 1 illustrated in FIG. The icon of the dedicated mode in which the patrol lamp is attached and the character pat is attached to the icon of the "bomber" of the default color of No. 4 appears at the right end of the screen. Hereinafter, this icon is referred to as the "patrol lamp dedicated bomber" icon IHI. The icon IHI of the "patrol lamp dedicated bomber" corresponds to the display of the icon change notice. The "patrol lamp-operated bomber" icon IHI may appear when the hold icon or the variable icon is displayed in the "patrol lamp" display mode icon, and is displayed in the "patrol lamp" display mode icon. Even if it is done, it may not appear. However, when the icon of the display mode of “patrol lamp” is displayed, it may be displayed without fail. In FIG. 157 (Ed1), the icon change animation using the icon “IHI” of the “patrol lamp dedicated bomber” that has appeared has started.

In FIG. 157 (Ed2), the bullet icon BTI of the default color from the icon PBI of the bomber to which the patrol lamp is attached and the character pat is attached targets the first holding icon h11 in the display mode of “patrol lamp”, Has been fired. In FIG. 157 (Ed3), the bullet icon BTI hits the first holding icon h11 of “patrol lamp”, and the first holding icon h11 is covered by the effect image EF14. Then, in FIG. 157 (Ea4), the effect image EF14 disappears, the icon of the patrol lamp of the first hold icon h11 is activated, and it is informed that the first hold is a jackpot confirmation hold. It should be noted that the icon IHI of the "patrol lamp dedicated bomber" has jumped to the left side of the screen and is not displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 157 (Ea5).

157(Fa1) to FIG. 157(Fa5) are diagrams showing an example in which the appearance notice of the icon change notice display is given using a movable accessory or the like.

In FIG. 157 (Fa1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) of the special map 1 is changing at high speed, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 of the special map 1 are displayed. Both of these two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the default display mode (first display mode). Further, on the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS, the variable icon h0 in the default display mode (first display mode) is displayed.

In FIG. 157 (Fa2-1), among the large-board behavior auditors arranged at the four corners of the first decorative pattern display device 208L described with reference to FIG. 14 and the like, the fourth large-board behavior arranged at the lower right. The accessory 224Gd starts to advance from the initial position toward the position where it overlaps the first decorative symbol display device 208L from the front side, and in accordance with the advance of the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd, the first decorative symbol display device 208L. A red effect image EF17 is displayed around the portion of the fourth large-scale behavior accessory 224Gd that overlaps. The operation of the fourth large board behavioral object 224Gd is an operation of announcing that the display of the icon change notice appears from the vicinity of the fourth large board behavioral object 224Gd, and the effect image EF17 of the effect image EF17 in the first decorative pattern display device 208L is displayed. The display gives a notice as to what color of the icon change notice display will appear. That is, the appearance of the icon change notice display itself is announced by the effect and the effect image EF17, the appearance position is indicated by the effect, and the display mode of the display that appears is notified by the effect image EF17.

It should be noted that the change in the display mode of the icon may be more likely to occur when the accessory is operated than when the accessory is not operated, but the likelihood of occurrence may not be changed. Further, the icon display mode may be configured to change easily in accordance with the number of the operated accessory, but the likelihood does not need to change.

In FIG. 157 (Fa3), the fourth large-board behavior accessory 224Gd moves to the maximum advance position, and in FIG. 157 (Fa4), the fourth large-board behavior accessory 224Gd that has moved to the maximum advance position returns toward the initial position. Have begun. Note that, as shown in FIGS. 157 (Fa2) to (Fa4), the display position of the effect image EF17 also changes in accordance with the movement operation of the fourth large-board behavior accessory 224Gd. When the fourth large-scale behavior accessory 224Gd that has moved to the maximum advance position starts retreating toward the initial position, the display of the "red bomber" icon IHI as the display of the icon change notice begins to appear behind it. In this way, when the icon IHI of “red bomber” appears, and after FIG. 157 (Fa5), the same effect as that after FIG. 148 (A3-1) is executed, but the display state of the variable icon does not change. There may be

FIGS. 157(Fa2-2-1) to (Fa2-2-5) are diagrams showing an example in which the POV display 224I is used to give notice of the appearance of the icon change notice.

In FIG. 157 (Fa2-2-1) during the variable display of the symbols, the POV display 224I that has been hidden in the initial position until now appears on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and before the rotation operation. It is the state of.

In FIG. 157 (Fa2-2-2), on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the POV display 224I starts rotating operation, and when it reaches a constant speed rotation, the POV display 224I has a “red bomber” icon. The IHI is displayed, and the appearance of the "red bomber" icon IHI is announced.

In FIG. 157 (Fa2-2-3), the POV display 224I continues to rotate at a constant speed, and the icon IHI of "red bomber" is still displayed, but "Red bomber" is displayed on the back side. The icon IHI of has appeared. When the "red bomber" icon IHI appears, the POV display 224I stops rotating (Fig. 157 (Fa2-2-4)) and returns to the initial position (Fig. 157 (Fa2-2-5)). In this way, the icon IHI of "red bomber" appears, and after Fig. 157 (Fa2-2-5), the same effect as that after Fig. 148 (A3-1) is executed, but the display mode of the variable icon is changed. May not change.

Even when the POV display 224I is rotating at a constant speed, the display area on the back side of the POV display 224I (the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L) is visible, and in that display area. A performance display may be displayed. Further, the display area is more visible when the POV display 224I is in an accelerating state from a stationary state to a constant speed state or in a decelerating state from returning from the constant speed state to the stationary state than in the constant speed state. It is easy, and the effect display may be performed in the display area even during acceleration or deceleration. Alternatively, the effect display may be performed in the display area only in the accelerating state or the decelerating state. In the accelerating state and the decelerating state, at least the display area (may be the entire display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L) is darkened to make the display of the POV display 224I stand out. Good. Alternatively, the effect display may be displayed in the display area in the state of acceleration, and at least the display area may be darkened when the constant speed state is reached. The notes described here are also applicable to the following examples of the POV display 224I.

Moreover, the end timing of the constant speed rotation of the POV display 224I and the appearance timing of the icon IHI of the "red bomber" may be earlier than the end timing of the constant speed rotation, or earlier than the appearance timing of the icon. Or both may have the same timing.

Further, although the appearance notice using the POV display 224I has been described here, the light guide plate IL and other display means (the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the fourth display shown in FIG. 146). The means 208M′, etc.) may execute the above-mentioned notice of appearance or another notice.
FIG. 158 is a diagram showing an example of various notices relating to the display of the icon change notice.

FIG. 158 (Fb1) to FIG. 158 (Fb9) are diagrams illustrating an example in which the success rate of the change in the display mode of the icon is announced by using the accessory effect.

The state shown in FIG. 158 (Fb1) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 148 (A1-1), and the variable display of the decorative pattern is performed. The state shown in FIG. 158 (Fb2) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 148 (A1-2), the icon IHI of “red bomber” appears, and the effect of changing the display mode of the icon is started.

In FIG. 158 (Fb3), the character effect is started before the red bomber icon RBI fires the bullet icon BTI. The accessory production here is, with reference to FIG. 14 and the like, among the large-panel behavioral accessories located at the four corners of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the third large-board behavioral accessory located at the lower left. 224Gc and the fourth large-scale behavior accessory 224Gd arranged at the lower right start advancing from their respective initial positions toward the position overlapping the first decorative symbol display device 208L from the front side. This character effect is continued until just before the icon display mode is changed, but the function is as a notice until before the bullet icon BTI is fired. In this accessory production, the success rate of the change in the display mode of the icon is foretold according to how many large-panel behavior auditors 224Ga to 224Gd among the four large-board behavior auditors operate. That is, if all four work, there is a 100% chance of success, if three work, there is a 75% chance of success, if only two work, there is a 50% chance of success, and only one work. If not, it predicts that it will only succeed with a 25% chance.

It should be noted that, out of the four large-board behavior auditors 224Ga to 224Gd, the success probability is highest when the first large-board behavior auditor 224Ga operates, and the next success probability is high when the second large-board behavior auditor 224Gb operates. The third success probability 224Gd may have a third highest probability of success, and the fourth success behavior 224Ge may have a lowest probability of success. Alternatively, the probability of success can be announced in advance depending on the position from the initial position. For example, the success probability may increase as the position approaches the maximum advance position.

Further, when the accessory is operated, the icon display mode may be changed more easily than when the accessory is not operated, but the ease of occurrence may not be changed. Further, the icon display mode may be configured to change easily in accordance with the number of the operated accessory, but the likelihood does not need to change.

As shown in FIG. 158 (Fb8), the accessory production ends when the change in the display mode of the icon is completed.

FIG. 158 (Fc1) to FIG. 158 (Fc6) are diagrams showing an example of notifying advancement of the icon change notice display itself.

In FIG. 158 (Fc1), the icon IHI of the default color "Bomber" appears, and the effect of changing the display mode of the icon is started. Here, the notice production is started before the icon "HIB" of the "bomber" is temporarily stopped. Here, similarly to the effects shown in FIGS. 157 (Fa2-1) to (Fa4), the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd arranged at the lower right is the first decorative symbol display device 208L from the initial position. Starting to advance toward the overlapping position from the front side, and in accordance with the advance of the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd, the portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L which is overlapped with the fourth large board behavior object 224Gd The effect image EF17 is displayed in the periphery. Here, the display mode of the effect image EF17 gives advance notice of the display mode in which the icon IHI of the default color "bomber" is promoted. Here, the red effect image EF17 is displayed, and in FIG. 158 (Fc5), it has been promoted to the “red bomber” icon IHI. 158 (Fc6) is followed by FIG. 152 (B6), the display mode of the hold icon may not change.

In this example, the operation of the fourth large-board behavior auditors object 224Gd is a kind of agitation effect regardless of the advance notice, but the promotion is more likely to occur when the auditors object operates than when it does not. It may have been done. However, the likelihood of occurrence does not have to change. Further, the promotion may be easily performed according to the number of the operated accessory. That is, it may be configured such that the greater the number of the operated accessory is, the easier the promotion is. However, here too, the likelihood of occurrence does not have to change.

FIG. 158 (Fd1) to FIG. 158 (Fd6) are diagrams showing an example of the effect of changing the display mode of the icon using the POV display 224I.

In FIG. 158 (Fa1) during the variable display of the symbols, the POV display 224I that has been hidden at the initial position until now appears on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, which is the state before the rotation operation. .. It should be noted that the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 of special figure 1 are displayed, and these two hold icons h11, h12 are both displayed in the default display mode (first display mode).

In FIG. 158 (Fd2), on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the POV display 224I starts rotating operation, and when it reaches a constant speed rotation, the POV display 224I displays “Red bomber icon RBI and default. The first hold icon h11 in the display mode is displayed.The rotation range of the POV display 224I completely overlaps the display position of the first hold icon h11 and the display position of the second hold icon h12. Partially overlap.

On the POV display 224I shown in FIG. 158 (Fd3), a state in which the red bullet icon BTI is fired from the red bomber icon RBI is displayed, targeting the first hold icon h11. The POV display 224I shown in Fd4) shows that the bullet icon BTI hits the first hold icon h11 and the first hold icon h11 is covered by the effect image EF14.

Then, the POV display 224I shown in FIG. 158 (Fd5-1) displays the red bomber icon RBI and the first hold icon h11 changed to the red display mode.

In this example, while the POV display 224I is rotating at a constant speed, the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L on the back side thereof may be visible or invisible. May be While the POV display 224I is rotating at a constant speed, the "red bomber" icon IHI and/or the effect image EF14 are displayed on the display screen portion behind the POV display 224I rotating at a constant speed. It may or may not be displayed.

In FIG. 158 (Fd6), the POV display 224I has stopped rotating, and on the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first hold icon h11 in a red display mode and the second default display mode h11. The hold icon h12 is displayed, and the "red bomber" icon IHI is not displayed. However, the icon IHI of "red bomber" may be displayed.

The display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change while the POV display 224I is performing a constant speed rotation operation, or may change at the same time when the POV display 224I stops the constant speed rotation operation. Alternatively, the POV display 224I may change after the constant speed rotation operation is stopped.

Further, although the example using the POV display 224I has been described here, the light guide plate IL and other display means (second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, fourth display means 208M shown in FIG. 146). ', etc.) to display the above. That is, a part of the scene displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L can be enlarged and displayed on the POV display 224I. For example, the display on the POV display 224I shown in FIG. 158 (Fd2) is as shown in FIG. -1) corresponds to the enlarged display of the scene between the same figure (A3-1), and the display of the POV display 224I shown in FIG. 158 (Fd3) corresponds to the enlarged display of the scene shown in FIG. 148 (A3-1). May be. In this case, the enlarged display is not limited to the POV display 224I, but includes the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the fourth display means 208M′ shown in FIG. 146, the light guide plate IL, and the like. Alternatively, it may be used together with the POV display 224I. Further, such an enlarged display can be performed by the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

In addition, in the examples shown in FIGS. 157 and 158, although the notice is about the display of the icon change notice, the notice can be applied to the appearance notice of the notice icon. For example, the probability that the notice icon will appear may be expressed depending on how many large-board behavior auditors out of the four large-board behavior auditors 224Ga to 224Gd operate. Higher).

FIG. 159 is a diagram showing an example of a combination of the first decorative symbol display device 208L and another display means.

The example shown in FIGS. 159(Fd5-2-1) to (Fd5-2-2) is a modification of the previous FIGS. 158(Fd5-1) to 158(Fd6). The display of the POV display 224I shown in FIG. 159 (Fd5-2-1) is an icon change notice display (“red bomber icon IHI”) and a display showing the changed icon display mode. It does not show how the icon has changed. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 159 (Fd5-2-1), it is slightly visible that the second hold icon h12 is covered by the effect image EF14.

In FIG. 159 (Fd5-2-2), the POV display 224I has stopped rotating, and the first decorative icon h11 in the default display mode and a red display are displayed on the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The second hold icon h12 of the aspect is displayed. In this example, the POV display 224I indicates that the target icon is unknown, but displays whether or not the change effect of the display form of the icon is successful. Then, when the POV display 224I displays the success of the effect of changing the icon display mode, the display mode of the target icon actually changes in the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

In addition, the display of the change of the display mode of the hold icon on the POV display 224I and the display of the change of the display mode of the hold icon on the first decorative symbol display device 208L may be performed at the same time, and conversely, the first decorative pattern. The POV display 224I may be performed after the display device 208L is performed first.

Further, in this example, although the target icon is unknown by the POV display 224I, it can also be used as a notice of whether or not the effect of changing the display mode of the icon is successful.

Hereinafter, in FIG. 159, an example of an effect in the device configuration in which the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the fourth display unit 208M′ shown in FIG. 146 are combined will be described, but as described in FIG. However, the technology described in this specification cannot be applied only because of the difference in the configuration, and the technical idea can be applied regardless of whether the display units are arranged side by side or vertically. Is.

159 (Fe1) to (Fe6) in FIG. 159, the display on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is completed only in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the display on the fourth display means 208M' is the fourth display means. It is a figure which shows the example which is completed only in 208M'.

The state of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 159 (Fe1) is the same as the state of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 146 (k1a), except for the difference whether the background screen is displayed or not. The same is true. Also, the state of the fourth display means 208M' shown in FIG. 159 (Fe1) is the same as the state of the fourth display means 208M' shown in FIG.

In the fourth display means 208M′ shown in FIG. 159 (Fe2-1), the tip portion of the icon IHI of “red bomber” as the icon change notice display appears at the right end of the screen. On the fourth display means 208M′ shown, the icon change animation using the “red bomber” icon IHI is started. In the fourth display means 208M′ shown in FIG. 159 (Fe4), the red bullet icon BTI is fired from the red bomber icon RBI, and in the fourth display means 208M′ shown in (Fe5) thereof, the bullet is displayed. The icon BTI hits the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11 is covered by the effect image EF14. Then, in the fourth display means 208M′ shown in FIG. 159 (Fe6), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed to the red display mode. On the other hand, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. 159 (Fe1) to (Fe6), variable display of decorative symbols is continuously performed.

159 (Fe2-2-1) to FIG. 159 (Fe2-2-6) are diagrams showing an example in which a part of the display on the first decorative symbol display device 208L enters the fourth display means 208M'.

159 (Fe2-2-1) is a continuation from FIG. 159 (Fe2-1), and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in (Fe2-2-1) of FIG. "Red bomber" icon IHI has appeared at the right end of the screen, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in the same figure (Fe2-2-2), an icon using the "red bomber" icon IHI The change animation has started and a red bullet icon BTI has been fired from the red bomber icon RBI. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 159 (Fe2-2-3), the bullet icon BTI is the lower end region where the bullet icon BTI overlaps the upper edge portion of the frame fm in the fourth display means 208M′ at the initial position. It is difficult to see for a moment because it is displayed in. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 159 (Fe2-2-4), the bullet icon BTI has moved to the display screen of the fourth display means 208M′ at the initial position, and the fourth display means 208M. The tip portion of the bullet icon BTI is displayed in ". It should be noted that the rear end portion of the bullet icon BTI is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, although it is not visible because it is overlapped with the upper edge portion of the frame fm in the fourth display means 208M′ at the initial position. .. However, it may not be displayed. In the fourth display unit 208M′ shown in FIG. 159 (Fe2-2-5), the default display mode (first display) in which the tip portion of the bullet icon BTI is displayed on the pedestal hs0′ of the variable icon display area CIS′ (Aspect), the variable icon h0 partially overlaps. In this situation, the red bomber icon RBI is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the bullet icon BTI is displayed on the fourth display means 208M'. In the fourth display means 208M′ shown in FIG. 159 (Fe2-2-6), the display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed to the red display mode. On the other hand, the icon IHI of "red bomber" is not displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 159 (Fe2-2-6).

The variable icon h0 whose display mode has changed is enlarged beyond the size of the display screen of the fourth display means 208M' and displayed across both the fourth display means 208M' and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It may be done. Moreover, the icon IHI of "red bomber" may be displayed across both the fourth display means 208M' and the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

FIG. 160 is a diagram showing an example of effect using the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

The state shown in FIG. 160 (Ff1) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 148 (A1-1). However, the second decorative symbol and the second hold number display are displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208N. The second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 160 (Ff1) are in the initial positions of each other and are in the open state (spaced state), and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The display screen of is visible.

The state shown in FIG. 160 (Ff2) corresponds to the state shown in FIG. 148 (A2-1), and here, the icon of the “red bomber” is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N as a notification of the icon change notice. IHI has begun to appear, and the entire icon IHI of “red bomber” is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 160 (Ff4), the red bomber icon RBI is moving to the left, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in the same figure (Ff4) is red. Instead of the bomber icon RBI moving leftward, the third decorative symbol display device 208N itself has started moving leftward ((Ff5) to Ff6 in the same figure). That is, the third decorative symbol display device 208N is moved in accordance with the original movement display of the red bomber icon RBI. Eventually, the third decorative symbol display device 208N reaches the maximum movement position and cannot move further leftward. Then, this time, as shown in FIG. 160 (Ff7), the red bomber icon RBI has moved into the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L, The tip portion of the red bomber icon RBI is displayed, and the rear portion of the red bomber icon RBI is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. That is, the red bomber icon RBI is displayed across the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L on the back side, the entire red bomber icon RBI may be displayed.

In FIG. 160 (Ff8), the third decorative symbol display device 208N that has reached the maximum movement position has started moving toward the initial position, and about 2/3 of the red bomber icon RBI is the first decoration. The red bullet icon BTI is being fired from the red bomber icon RBI because it has been displayed on the symbol display device 208L and has reached the position before the target first hold icon h11. In FIG. 160 (Ff9), the bullet icon BTI overlaps the first hold icon h11 from the front side. Further, the entire red bomber icon RBI is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

In FIG. 160 (Ff10), the bullet icon BTI hits the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11 is covered by the effect image EF14. The red bomber icon RBI is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. In FIG. 160 (Ff11), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed to the red display mode. Further, the red bomber icon RBI is about to fly further left from the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and in FIG. 160 (Ff12), the red bomber icon RBI is the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Has disappeared from.

In the example described above, one image may be displayed across a plurality of display units, but the same image is not displayed on a plurality of display units. For example, although the same image is not partially displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the second decorative symbol display device 208M, it may be displayed.

Even when the icon unchanged animation is performed, a red bomber icon RBI is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M from the third decorative symbol display device 208N through the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Animation may be performed, but when the icon unchanged animation is performed, the red bomber icon RBI may be configured to be displayed only on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, It may be displayed only on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

In FIG. 160 (Fg), the third decorative symbol display device 208N displays a plurality of icon change notices as a “bomber” icon IHI, a “red bomber” icon IHI, and a “gold bomber” icon IHI. Is displayed. These bombers may start moving animations all at once as in the example shown in FIG. 150 (A2-3-1), but they are only displayed in stock and the moving animations are displayed one by one. It may be executed.

It should be noted that the hold icon or the change icon itself may also serve as the icon change notice display. In this case, the change icon itself gives a notice of change, or another icon different from the change icon (hold icon or change icon) is displayed. (Icon) will be announced in advance.

In addition, the display of the icon change notice, the notice display that notifies that any one of the pending symbol variation displays is performed in the symbol variation display, or that it is currently performed in the symbol variation display (icon A change notice preparation display) may be performed. As the icon change notice preparing display, for example, only the tip part of the "Bomber" icon IHI can be seen at the right end of the screen, or the "Bomber" icon IHI appears and waits in a dedicated stock area (standby area). You can see the display. Alternatively, the telop display trp shown in FIG. 151 (A1-3-3) may be used for advance notice. In addition, a plurality of icon change notice preparing displays may be displayed. Further, when there are a plurality of types of icon change notice display, the icon change notice preparing display may be displayed for each display mode of the icon change notice display. Further, there may be a dedicated area for displaying the stock of the icon change notice preparation display. Further, at least a part (including the entire area) of the icon change notice preparing display may be displayed in a region overlapping with the icon change notice preparing display, or may be displayed in a non-overlapping region. ..

Also, as a notice of the change and/or a look-ahead notice before the notice of the change of the icon (the notice of the change of the icon due to another notice display such as the icon of "Bomber" or the notice of the change of the icon due to the changing icon itself) is displayed , “Icon whose display mode changes after the icon change notice (holding icon and/or variable icon)” changes to a display mode (for example, enlarged display mode) different from the display mode changed by the icon change notification By doing so, it may be announced that the icon will change according to the icon change notice, or the display form of the icon will change due to another display such as a cursor display on the "icon whose display form changes after the icon change notice". By displaying a display indicating that the icon is changed, it may be announced that the icon is changed by the icon change notification.

In addition, after an icon change notice (icon change notice due to other notice display such as "Bomber" icon or icon change notice due to changing icon itself) is displayed, it is notified that the change is a big hit. Execution of advance notice (preliminary display by various display devices such as liquid crystal display device, light emission (color and light emission pattern) by various lamps (frame lamp 122, panel lamp), advance notice sound by speaker, advance notice operation of operating means and various devices, etc.) In some cases, various notices described in this specification may be given. For example, the display mode of the variation icon h0 may change while the jackpot confirmation sound of the variation is output from the speaker 120. Alternatively, the icon change animation may be displayed while the jackpot confirmation sound is being output. However, the various types of advance notice may not be given during execution of the advance notice for notifying that the variation is a big hit. Further, there may be various types of advance notices that are given only during execution of advance notices that notify that the fluctuation is a big hit.

While various notices may not be given during execution of the island simultaneous production, they may be given in some cases. Further, there may be various notices that are given only while the island simultaneous production is being executed.

Further, depending on the effect background or effect mode, there may be various notices to be given and various notices not to be given, and conversely, there may be various notices always performed regardless of the effect background. For example, on the background screen of the sea, an icon change notice (icon change notice due to other notice display such as "Bomber" icon or icon change notice due to changing icon itself) is displayed, but the background screen of the castle town Then, the display of the icon change notice may not be displayed. Further, the effect background may be selectable by the player, and in this case, it is also possible to select whether or not to display the icon change notice display.

As described above, the effect examples using the various icons and displays described with reference to FIGS. 117 to 119, or icons and displays other than those icons and displays have been described, but at the end, the seven effect examples will be described. To do.

FIG. 161 is a diagram schematically showing seven example effects in which various icons and displays are used. In this FIG. 161, the manner in which the production is advanced is shown stepwise from left to right in the figure. Further, also in FIG. 161, only the first decorative symbol display device 208L is shown among the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N. The first decorative symbol display device 208L may be the decorative symbol display device 208.

161(1) and FIG. 161(2) roughly show an example of the effect of the mini game B described with reference to FIG. 118.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 161(1), the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are displayed. The display modes of the hold icons h11 and h12 of these special diagrams 1 are all No. 1 in FIG. 119(a). This is the default display mode described in 1. At the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second reserved number display (here, "2" and "0") of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed. Further, the variation icon h0 is displayed on the pedestal hs0 in the variation icon display area CIS. The display mode of the change icon h0 is also No. 1 in FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 161(1), the mini game window MGW dedicated to the mini game is displayed on the right base icon bIr arranged in the effect icon display area DIS, and the mini game is displayed. A mini game B (rock-paper-scissors confrontation) is being held in Windu MGW. On the left side of the mini game Windu MGW, an icon of Yoshimune's character is displayed. The icon of the Yoshimune character is No. 1 which is a kind of the hold icon or the variable icon shown in FIG. It is the same as the icon of “Janken” in 19 and the icon of the character of Yoshimune of aspect a is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown on the left side of FIG. 161(1). On the other hand, on the right side of the mini game Windu MGW, an icon of a swordsman character as an opponent shown in FIG. 118(c) is displayed. The icon of the swordsman character of aspect a is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown on the left side of FIG. 161(1). The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in the center of FIG. 161(1) has No. 1 shown in FIG. 161(a). The icon of the character of Yoshimune same as the icon of the mode c of 19 and the icon of the character of swordsman of the mode d shown in FIG. 118(c) are displayed. That is, in this rock-paper-scissors confrontation, Yoshimune gave a choki and a swordsman gave a par, and the word "Yoshimune victory" is also displayed in the mini game Windu MGW. The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown on the right side of FIG. 161(1) has No. 1 shown in FIG. 119(a). The icon of the character of Yoshimune that is the same as the icon of the mode f of 19 is displayed together with the character of "Victory of Yoshimune", and the icon of the character of Yoshimune is also displayed with a balloon with "Hold change". The display mode of the first hold icon h11 that was the display mode of No. of FIG. It has changed to the third display mode (blue display mode) described in 3.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 161(2), the mini game window MGW is not displayed on the right base icon bIr arranged in the effect icon display area DIS, and the mini game B (rock-paper-scissors battle). Is performed on the left base icon bI1 arranged in the hold icon display area HIS. That is, the mini game B is played using the hold icon. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown on each of the left side and the center of FIG. 161(2), the first hold icon h11 is the icon of the swordsman character as the opponent shown in FIG. 118(c), and the second The hold icon h12 indicates the No. shown in FIG. It is the icon of 19 "Janken".

In the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown on the left side of FIG. 161(2), the first hold icon h11 is displayed as the swordsman character icon of aspect a, and the second hold icon h12 is the Yoshimune character of aspect a. It is displayed with the icon. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in the center of FIG. 161(2), the first hold icon h11 is displayed as the icon of the character of the swordsman of aspect d, and the second hold icon h12 is the character of Yoshimune of aspect c. It is displayed with the icon. In other words, in this rock-paper-scissors confrontation, the swordsman put out a par, and Yoshimune made a choki, which means Yoshimune won. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown on the right side of FIG. 161(2), the second hold icon h12 is displayed as the Yoshimune character icon of aspect f, and the Yoshimune character icon indicates “hold change”. A written balloon is also displayed. The first hold icon h11 next to it is the icon of a swordsman character until now, but the No. 1 icon in FIG. It has changed to the third display mode (blue display mode) described in 3. In the example shown in FIG. 161(2), the mini game B using the hold icon is played, and the display mode of the hold icon used for the mini game B is changed. That is, the hold icon displayed as the opponent icon becomes the prefetch target hold icon.

As explained above, there may be a case where the mini game is played with the hold icon as shown in FIG. 161(2) and a case where the mini game is played in another area as shown in FIG. 161(1). Further, the example here is an example of a mini game in which the display mode of the hold icon is changed, but it is also a mini game in which various notice icons shown in FIG. 117 can be acquired. Good.

161(3) and FIG. 161(4), No. 1 in FIG. A change example display BCH of 16 "bancho" roughly shows an example of an effect for giving a notice that the display mode of the hold icon changes.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. 161 (3) and (4), the hold icon (first hold icon h11) of the special figure 1 is displayed on the first stage hs1, and the change icon h0 is the change icon. It is displayed on the pedestal hs0 in the display area CIS. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown on the left side of FIG. 161(3) and FIG. 161(4), both the first hold icon h11 and the variable icon h0 are the same as No. 119 of FIG. 119(a). It is displayed in the default display mode described in 1. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown on the left side of FIG. 161(3) and FIG. 161(4), No16 of FIG. 119(b) is provided on the right base icon bIr arranged in the effect icon display area DIS. The change notice display BCH of the "bancho" of the mode a described in is displayed. Here, a balloon with "Hold change" is added to the change notice display BCH of the "bancho", and it is announced that the display mode of the hold icon will change.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in the center of FIG. 161(3), the change notice display BCH of "bancho" disappears from above the right base icon bIr, and the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is the third display mode. It has changed to (blue display mode). The timing at which the "bancho" change notice display BCH disappears and the timing at which the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes may be the same, or the "bancho" change notice display BCH disappears. It may be earlier, or conversely, the timing at which the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes may be earlier.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in the center of FIG. 161(4), the change notice display BCH of “bancho” does not disappear from the right base icon bIr, and the balloon added to the change notice display BCH of “bancho”. Has changed to a balloon that says "again", and it is announced that the display mode of the hold icon will change again. In addition, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed to the third display mode (blue display mode). Note that the timing at which the balloon attached to the change notice display BCH of “bancho” changes (timing of the re-notification) and the timing at which the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes may be the same. The timing for starting the advance notice may be earlier, or conversely, the timing for changing the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may be earlier. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown on the right side of FIG. 161(4), the change notice display BCH of “bancho” disappears from the right base icon bIr, and the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is the fourth display mode. It has changed to (green display mode). In this example, the display mode of the hold icon is changed twice in one symbol variable display, but the display mode of the hold icon is changed once in the symbol variable display. The display mode of the hold icon may change again. In addition, the display mode of the hold icon may change three times or more in one symbol variable display. Further, the “bancho” icon used as the change notice display BCH in FIG. 161(4) is not reused for re-notice, but is used again, but until the notice target icon or display disappears (non- The change notice display may be used multiple times until the display. For example, if the icon to be noticed is a hold icon, until the hold icon becomes a change icon, or until the change icon disappears, in other words, the pattern change display of the prefetch target change is started or the symbol The change notice display may be used and the display mode may be repeatedly changed until the variable display ends. The icon or display subject to the notice may be the notice icon or the notice display, and the display mode of the notice icon or the notice display may be repeatedly changed until the notice icon or the notice display disappears. Further, even if the change notice display BCH is displayed, there may be a case in which none of the display modes of the hold icon and the variable icon changes. In addition, even if the change notice display BCH of the “number” shown in the center of the symbol variation display 173(4) is displayed, the display mode of the hold icon or the variation icon may not change again. That is, the change notice display BCH of “bancho” does not have to be used again to change the icon to be noticed.

161(5) and FIG. 161(6) show No. 119 of FIG. 119(b). By the change notice display of the bomber system of 4 and 5, the example of the effect for giving a notice of the change of the display mode of the hold icon is roughly shown.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. 161(5) and (6), the hold icon (first hold icon h11) of the special figure 1 is displayed on the first stage hs1, and the default display mode is changed. The icon h0 is displayed on the pedestal hs0 in the variable icon display area CIS. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown on the left side of FIG. 161(5), the first hold icon h11 is No. 1 of FIG. 119(a). It is displayed in the fourth display mode (green display mode) described in No. 4. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown on the left side of FIG. 161(5) has No. 119 of FIG. 119(b). The default color "Bomber" icon IHI described in 4 has appeared, and the icon change animation using the "Bomber" icon IHI has started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in the center of FIG. 161(5), the bullet icon BTI is fired toward the first hold icon h11 in the fourth display mode (green display mode), and the fired bullet is fired. The icon BTI hits the first hold icon h11, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown on the right side of FIG. 161(5), the first hold icon h11 changes to the fifth display mode (red display mode). There is. Since the change of the icon display mode by the default color "Bomber" icon IHI can be increased by only one stage, it cannot be changed to the fifth display mode icon unless it is the fourth display mode icon.

On the other hand, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown on the left side of FIG. 161(6), the first hold icon h11 is the No. 1 of FIG. 119(a). It is displayed in the first display mode (default display mode) described in 1. Further, the No. 1 in FIG. 119(b) is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The red "red bomber" icon IHI described in 5 has appeared, and the icon change animation using the "red bomber" icon IHI has started. Further, a tutorial display is displayed on the right base icon bIr arranged in the effect icon display area DIS. This tutorial display is a tutorial display about a change effect of the display mode of the icon using the change notice display, and may be displayed until the change effect is started, and may be hidden thereafter, or the bullet icon BTI is displayed. It may be displayed until it is fired, and then may be hidden, or may be kept displayed until the change of the display mode of the icon is completed or the change failure is confirmed. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in the center of FIG. 161(6), the bullet icon BTI is fired toward the first hold icon h11 in the first display mode (default display mode), and the fired bullet is fired. The icon BTI hits the first hold icon h11, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown on the right side of FIG. 161(6), the first hold icon h11 changes to the fifth display mode (red display mode). There is. In the change of the icon display mode by the red (fifth display mode) "red bomber" icon IHI, regardless of the level of the icon display mode before the change, the icon should be changed to the fifth display mode. You can

In FIG. 161(7), a plate full tank error occurs in the state shown in FIG. 120(12), and an error message (warning message) such as “Please remove the ball” is displayed on the first decorative pattern display device 208L. Is displayed (hereinafter referred to as “error display EWM”). The error display EWM overlaps at least a part of the notice icon YI from the front side and hides at least a part of the notice icon YI. Note that the error display EWM may overlap the entire notice icon YI from the front side. Further, the error display EWM may overlap at least a part from the front side only after the advance notice icon YI is used (for example, the display of the mode d shown in FIG. 117A), or the advance notice icon may be displayed. Only before YI is used (for example, the display of the mode a shown in FIG. 117(a)), at least a part may overlap from the front side. Further, the error display EWM may overlap at least a part of the notice icon YI from the front side over the entire display period of the error display EWM, and a part of the period (for example, the error display EWM) may be displayed. The overlap may occur only during a certain period after the start).

On the contrary, the notice icon YI may overlap at least a part of the error display EWM from the front side (for example, when the error display EWM has a low degree of importance or has a low relationship with fraud). Alternatively, this may be limited to after the advance notice icon YI is used or before the advance notice icon YI is used. Also, although the example shown in FIG. 161 (7) relates to the notice icon, the relation to the notice display is the same as that described here.

161(8), in the state shown in FIG. 148(A2-1), a plate full tank error occurs, and the error display EWM such as "please remove the ball" is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Has been done. The error display EWM does not overlap the effect of changing the icon display mode. That is, the error display EWM is displayed at a position deviated from the display position of the icon (red bomber icon RBI, bullet icon BTI, etc.) used for effecting the change in the icon display mode. More specifically, the error display EWM is displayed at a position that does not overlap with the change notice display. Further, the error display EWM does not overlap with a mini game (for example, an icon or display of a character appearing in the mini game).

However, the error display EWM is at least a part of the change effect of the display mode of the icon (for example, at least a part of the change notice display) or at least a part of the mini game (for example, the icon or display of the character appearing in the mini game. May be overlapped from the front side, and may be overlapped over the entire display period of the error display EWM. Part of the period (for example, start of the error display EWM) There may be a case where they overlap only during a certain period later).

Further, although FIG. 161 (7) and FIG. 161 (8) are examples of the error display EWM such as “please pull out the ball”, the display and warning about various errors described with reference to FIGS. 114 to 116 are given. The same applies to the display regarding.

In the gaming table (pachinko machine 100) described with reference to FIGS. 117 to 161, only one notice icon is displayed in the case of loss (in the case of gambling), and in the case of a big hit, the game is heaped up, It is configured to display a plurality of notice icons.

As described above, the description using FIGS. 117 to 161 can be combined with the simultaneous effect and the volume adjustment display (for example, the above-described volume display bar display VB) described with reference to FIG. 113 and the like. Further, as described with reference to FIG. 155, it can be combined with the scene of customization by the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI.

Further, in the description using FIGS. 117 to 161, the example is applied to a pachinko machine (ball game machine), but the game table of the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a medal or a game. It can also be applied to a spinning drum game machine (slot machine) that uses a ball (pachinko ball). That is, the pachinko machine 100 described above is a pachinko machine (1 type+1 type), but other pachinko machines (for example, 1, 2, 3, 3 types, 1+2 types, etc.) may be used. Parrot or ball) More specifically, when a medal (game medium) is inserted and the reel is rotated by operating the start lever, the winning combination is internally determined by internal lottery, and the reel is stopped by operating the stop button. In addition, when a predetermined combination of symbols is displayed on the symbol display window according to an internal decision, a winning combination is achieved, and when a winning combination is achieved, a prescribed number of medals are paid out, etc. It may be a spinning machine (slot machine) in which a player is given a privilege. Alternatively, a predetermined number of game balls are enclosed as enclosed balls, the enclosed balls are launched into the game area to play a game, and a predetermined game value is given to the player based on the fact that the enclosed balls are won in a predetermined entry area. It may be an enclosed ball type gaming table that can be circulated by launching the enclosed ball that has been awarded to the predetermined entry area or the enclosed ball that has not won a prize to the game area again.

As described above, the present invention can be applied to various types of game machines, for example, an enclosed pachinko machine described with reference to FIG. 268. Further, the present invention can be applied to the slot machine described with reference to FIG. 269.
In the above description,

"Display means [for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N all, or any one of these three decorative symbol display devices 208L-N One or two, fourth display means 208M', light guide plate IL, POV display 224I, etc.],
The display means is a means in which the first icon may be displayed,

The first icon is an icon relating to symbol variable display [for example, hold icons h11 to h14, variable icon h0],
The display means is a means in which the second icon may be displayed,

The display means is means for displaying a notice icon [for example, various notice icons YI shown in FIG. 117(a), various notice icons YI shown in FIG. 117(b)],

The second icon is an icon of a different type from the notice icon [for example, the icon for mini game A shown in FIG. 118(a), the icon for mini game B shown in FIG. 118(c)]. The icon is not an icon that shows the number of holds depending on the number displayed,
The display means is a means in which a performance display may be displayed,

The effect display is an icon of any one of the displayed first icons [for example, one or a plurality (all or a part of icons)] and an effect display in which the second icon is used. [For example, display of mini game A or B],

When the notice icon is displayed after the effect display is displayed [for example, FIG. 120 (A11), FIG. 123 (A3-2-9), the same diagram (A3-2-8c1), Fig. (A 3-2-8c7), Fig. 125 (I 11), Fig. 127 (U 34), Fig. 128 (U 15-2-17), Fig. 130 (U 1-2-24), Fig. 135 (or a8) etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to entertain the player by paying attention to the process of whether or not the notice icon is acquired, triggered by the display of the effect display using the two icons.

The first icon may be an icon that may be displayed in correspondence with the number of reservations. For example, it may be a variable icon displayed corresponding to the number of holds=0, a first holding icon displayed corresponding to the number of holds=1, and displayed corresponding to the number of holds=2 2nd second hold icon, 3rd 3rd hold icon displayed corresponding to the number of hold=3, 4th 4th hold icon displayed corresponding to the number of hold=4 It may be. Further, the notice icon may be an icon of a different type from the variable icon and the hold icon.

Here, the number of holdings is the number of the start of the variable display of symbols being held, and the first icon can be, for example, a changing icon in addition to the holding icon. The variation icon is an icon relating to a symbol variation display that is being executed, and is an icon that indicates that the digest has been held. That is, after the symbol variable display corresponding to the hold represented by the hold icon representing the undigested hold is started, the hold icon is displayed as the variable icon corresponding to the started symbol change display.

It should be noted that depending on the number of the displayed first icons, the hold number may be displayed, and depending on the number of the notice icons displayed, the hold number may not be displayed.

The effect display may be an effect display using any one of the displayed first icons and the second icon.
The notice icon may be displayed when the effect display is performed.

One of the icons may be one first icon or a plurality of first icons (for example, all or some of the displayed first icons).

The second icon may be a production icon (for example, a character icon), a hold icon, or a variable icon. More specifically, the icon for the effect may be an icon for notifying the start of the notice effect, may be an icon dedicated to the mini game, or may be an icon that doubles as a hold icon. However, it may be an icon that doubles as a variable icon.

An example of the effect display is an effect of a mini game using any one of the displayed first icons and the second icon. That is, the notice icon may be displayed as a result of the effect of the mini game using any one of the icons and the second icon.

The phrase "the notice icon may be displayed" means that the notice icon may not be displayed in some cases. Further, "the notice icon may not be displayed" may include that the notice icon may not be displayed and another display other than the notice icon may be displayed. It may not be included. This concept also applies to the following description.

Further, the advance notice icon may be displayed (stock) by changing the display position after the display is started, or may be continuously displayed (stock) without changing the display position. It may be. For example, the display means is provided with an appearance area in which the notice icon starts to be displayed and a stock area in which the notice icon is stocked, and the appearance area and the stock area are different areas (part of which overlaps each other). Good, but not all overlap). The stock area is a display area in which the notice icon is continuously displayed. The notice icon moves from the appearance area to the stock area, is used in the stock area, disappears in the stock area, and the display mode may change. Alternatively, it may go out of the stock area and disappear, or the display mode may change.

The effect display may be an effect (for example, a mini game) in which any one of the icons and the second icon is used at the same time, or any one of the icon and the second icon. An effect (for example, a mini game) in which one icon is used first and the other icon is used after that may be used.

Further, the notice icon may be always displayed or may be displayed by the display of the effect in which only one of the displayed first icons is used. .. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed or may be displayed by the display of the effect using only the second icon.
Also

“A plurality of types of advance notice icons are prepared as the advance notice icon [for example, various advance notice icons YI shown in FIG. 117(a), various advance notice icons YI shown in FIG. 117(b)],
The display means is a means that may display a notice display,

As the notice display, a plurality of types of notice displays are prepared [for example, various notice displays YH shown in FIG. 117(b)],

One of the plurality of types of advance notice displays is the first advance notice [for example, No6. "Change notice"],

One of the plurality of types of notice displays is the second notice [for example, No. 17 Notice display of "reach"]

A certain notice icon [for example, No. If the "box" notice icon YI] is used, the first notice display may be displayed [for example, FIG. 121 (A33), FIG. 126 (I14-4-3)]. ,

When the certain notice icon is used, the second notice display may be displayed [for example, FIG. 125 (yes 15), FIG. 126 (yes 14-2-3)],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, which notice display is displayed until the certain notice icon is used (whether the first notice display is displayed or the second notice display is displayed). Since it is not known, it may be possible to draw attention until the certain notice icon is used. That is, the relationship between the notice icon and the notice display is not predetermined in advance, and the player cannot recognize which notice display is displayed only by looking at the type of the notice icon. You may continue to look at the notice icon with interest until the display is displayed.

Here, in the first place, it may be unclear that the notice display is displayed until the certain notice display is displayed. That is, the advance notice display may be displayed and the advance notice display may not be displayed, and it may be unclear which case it is. The fact that the notice display itself is unknown is, as a result, also unknown which type of notice display among the plurality of types of notice displays is displayed.

Further, as the notice icon, only one type of notice icon may be prepared. In this case, when the notice icon is used, a notice display of a plurality of types of notice displays may be displayed, and the notice display is displayed until the notice display is displayed. The fact itself may be unknown.

The display unit may be a unit capable of displaying, when the certain notice icon is used, the notice display of a type corresponding to the type of the certain notice icon used. That is, it is possible to have a mode in which, when the notice icon is displayed, it is possible to know which of the plurality of types of notice displays is displayed after the notice icon is used. In short, the relation between the notice icon and the notice display may be predetermined one-on-one.

Further, "when a certain notice icon is used" means, for example, a case where the certain notice icon is used in the presentation, and more specifically, the display mode of the certain notice icon is It may be a case where it changes, or a case where the certain notice icon disappears (when it is hidden) (the same applies to the following).

Further, the advance notice display may be displayed (stock) with the display position changed after the display is started, or may continue to be displayed (stock) without changing the display position. May be.

It should be noted that when a certain notice icon of the plurality of types of notice icons is used, one type of notice display of the plurality of types of notice displays (hereinafter, referred to as “certain notice display”) is displayed. In some cases, it may be unclear which type of advance notice display among a plurality of types of advance notice displays is displayed until the certain advance notice display is displayed.

Further, there may be a case where it is not announced that the first notice display will be displayed just by displaying the certain notice icon, or the second notice display may be displayed. It may not be announced in advance. Alternatively, on the contrary, there may be a case where it is announced that the first notice display is displayed only by displaying the certain notice icon, or the second notice display is displayed. It may be announced in advance.
Also

“When the first notice display is displayed, the display mode of any one of the displayed first icons may change [for example, in the case of FIG. 121 (A36)]. ,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

That is, the first notice display may be a display that changes the display mode of any one of the displayed first icons. For example, the display mode of any one of the first icons is changed to the notification mode. In this case, the first notice display functions as a notice of the notice by the first icon.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to focus on the first icon even after the effect display is finished.

Here, "one of the displayed first icons" may be the first icon used for the effect display, or may be used for the effect display. It may not be the first icon. Further, any one of the icons may be a plurality of icons or one icon (for example, all or some of the displayed first icons).

Further, the first icon used for the effect display may be a display mode in which the effect display is being performed, or a display mode changed from the display mode in which the effect display is performed. .. For example, if the display mode of the first icon used for the effect display is different from the display mode before the effect display is used, the effect display is performed. After that, the display mode may be returned to the previous display mode, the display mode may be the same display mode without returning to the previous display mode, or the display mode in which the effect display is performed may be different. The display mode may change. Further, when the display mode of the first icon used for the effect display is the same as the display mode before the effect display is used, the effect display is performed. After that, the display mode may change, or the display mode may remain the same without changing. In any of the cases described above, when the first notice display is displayed, the display mode of the first icon used for the effect display may change.

When the first notice display is displayed, the display mode of any one of the displayed first icons may be changed without fail, or the displayed first icon may be changed. The display mode of any of the icons may not change. Further, the display mode of any one of the first icons being displayed is better when the first notice display is displayed than when the first notice display is not displayed. It may be easy to change.

Further, the effect display includes a plurality of kinds of effect displays, and any one of the icons is displayed more than the type of effect display that changes the display mode of any one of the displayed first icons. The effect display of the type that does not change the display mode may have a higher application frequency, on the contrary, a lower application frequency, or both appearance frequencies may be the same. Furthermore, one kind of effect display of the plurality of kinds of effect display is the first effect display, and the case where the first effect display is displayed more than the case where the first effect display is not displayed. The display mode of any one of the displayed first icons may be changed more easily.
Also

[The second notice display is a display for giving a notice [for example, a notice that a reach will be performed] regarding the symbol variation display in which the second notice display is displayed,

The symbol variation display in which the second notice display is displayed is easier to finally confirm and display the jackpot symbol mode than the symbol variation display in which the second notice display is not displayed,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

That is, even if the second notice display is displayed, it does not always mean that the jackpot pattern mode is finally confirmed and displayed, and even in the symbol variation display in which the second notice display is displayed, the final There may be a case in which the symbol aspect of the loss is fixedly displayed. On the contrary, if the second notice display (for example, a premiere notice) is displayed, the symbol variation display in which the second notice display is displayed is finally surely confirmed and displayed as the jackpot pattern mode. May be.

The display unit is a unit that may display a third notice display, and the third notice display is a display for giving a prefetch notice (for example, a chance eye prefetch notice). It may be easier to finally confirm and display the jackpot pattern when the third notice display is displayed than when the third notice display is not displayed. That is, even if the third notice display is displayed, it does not always mean that the jackpot pattern mode is finally confirmed and displayed, and even in the symbol variation display in which the third notice display is displayed, the final There may be a case in which the symbol aspect of the loss is fixedly displayed. On the contrary, if the third notice display is displayed, the symbol variation display in which the third notice display is displayed may finally always definitely display the jackpot pattern mode.
Also

“The first icon has a plurality of display modes [for example, No. 1 shown in FIG. 1-No. 19 types of display modes], an icon which is started to be displayed in one type of display modes,

One type of display mode among the plurality of types of display modes is a first display mode [eg, "default" display mode],

One type of display mode among the plurality of types of display modes is a second display mode [for example, a display mode of "murajin" (janken), a display mode of Yoshimune (bow)],
The second display mode is a display mode different from the first display mode,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

The first display mode may be a default display mode. Further, the second display mode may be a display mode used for the effect display. For example, it may be a display mode that may be used for the effect display or a dedicated display mode used for the effect display.
Also

"The effect display is the first icon of the second display mode being displayed [for example, a hold icon or a variable icon of a display mode of "murajin" (janken), a hold mode of a display mode of Yoshimune (bow). Icon or variable icon] and the second icon [e.g., panda opponent icon TI, mini-game A icon AI] is used to display effects [e.g., starting from FIG. 125 (8-1). Janken fighting animation, the display of Yoshimune treasure acquisition shown in FIGS. 126 to 127]

The effect display is an effect display in which the first icon of the first display mode is not used,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
Also

"By displaying the first icon of the second display mode, it is announced that the effect display will be displayed,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

It should be noted that just because it is announced that the effect display will be displayed does not mean that the notification icon is displayed during and/or after the effect display is displayed. That is, merely displaying the first icon in the second display mode does not give a notice until the notice icon is displayed during and/or after the production display is displayed.

Moreover, when the first icon is displayed in the second display mode, the effect display is displayed, and when the first icon is displayed in the first display mode, the effect display is displayed. However, it is also possible to have a configuration in which the advance notice icon is not notified only by displaying the first icon in the first display mode.

Here, when the first icon is displayed in the second display mode, the effect display may be always displayed, or conversely, the effect display may not be displayed.

It may be unclear whether or not the notice icon will be displayed thereafter, depending only on the display of the first icon in the second display mode.

The second icon may be displayed only when the first icon is displayed in the second display mode.

Here, the first icon and the second icon displayed in the second display mode may be simultaneously displayed, or the first icon displayed in the second display mode. May be displayed first, or the second icon may be displayed first.

The second icon may be displayed even if the first icon displayed in the second display mode is not displayed. Further, if the first icon displayed in the second display mode is not displayed, the second icon may not be displayed. Alternatively, even if the first icon displayed in the second display mode is not displayed, the second icon may be displayed.

The second icon may be always displayed only when the first icon displayed in the second display mode is displayed. Furthermore, when the first icon displayed in the second display mode is displayed, the second icon may also be displayed without fail.

Further, the second icon may or may not be displayed in a state where the first icon is not displayed. That is, the second icon does not have to appear as a single body, or conversely may appear as a single body.
Also

“The display of the second icon may be started after the first icon is displayed in the second display mode [for example, the opponent icon started from FIG. 120 (A5)] Appearance animation of the icon for mini game A started from FIG. 126 (5)],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

The “second icon” here is neither the hold icon nor the icon that also serves as the hold icon, the variable icon, or the icon that also serves as the variable icon. That is, the “second icon” may be a display mode used for the effect display (hereinafter referred to as “display mode for effect display”).

The display of the second icon may not be started after the first icon is displayed in the second display mode. Even in the case where "display of the second icon is not started" here, the display of the second icon is started before the first icon is displayed in the second display mode. Or the first icon may be displayed at the same time as being displayed in the second display mode.

The second icon may be displayed without fail when the display mode of the first icon changes (for example, when the display mode changes to the second display mode). Alternatively, the first icon in the second display mode may be displayed after the second icon is displayed.

When the second icon is the variable icon or the hold icon (including the case of also serving as the variable icon or the hold icon), the second icon is displayed after the first icon of the second display mode is displayed. The second icon may change from the third display mode (for example, the default display mode) to the fourth display mode (for example, the display mode for effect display), or it may be changed. Good. Further, before the first icon of the second display mode is displayed, the second icon is changed from the third display mode (for example, default display mode) to the fourth display mode (for example, performance display). The display mode) may change or may always change. Alternatively, at the same time that the first icon of the second display mode is displayed, the second icon is changed from the third display mode (for example, default display mode) to the fourth display mode (for example, performance display). The display mode) may change or may always change.

The timing at which the second icon is displayed is one pattern (for example, the first icon in the second display mode is displayed only after the first icon in the second display mode is displayed. There may be only before, or only at the same time when the first icon of the second display mode is displayed), or a plurality of patterns (for example, the first icon of the second display mode is displayed). A certain fixed combination of 2 or 3 after, before the first icon of the second display mode is displayed, and at the same time when the first icon of the second display mode is displayed) It may be.

The second icon may be displayed before the first icon of the second display mode is displayed, or the first icon of the second display mode may be displayed. After that, the second icon may be displayed, or the second icon may be displayed at the same time when the first icon in the second display mode is displayed.
Also

“There may be a case where a plurality of the first icons in the second display mode are displayed [for example, FIG. 120 (A3-1), FIG. 126 (U3)],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

There may be a case where only one of the first icons in the second display mode is displayed. In addition, a plurality of the first icons in the first display mode may be displayed, or only one may be displayed. Further, only one second icon may be displayed, or a plurality of second icons may be displayed.
Also, as the effect display, the first effect display may be displayed,
As the effect display, a second effect display may be displayed,

After the first effect display is displayed, the notice icon is displayed [for example, FIG. 120 (11)],

The notice icon is not displayed after the second effect display is displayed [for example, FIG. 121 (8-2-3)],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
That is, the second effect display is a so-called false effect display.
Also

"A plurality of notice icons may be displayed [for example, Fig. 125 (I 11), Fig. 128 (U 15-2-17)],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

For example, a plurality of notice icons may be displayed after the effect display is displayed once or a plurality of times. That is, there may be cases where a plurality of notice icons are stocked. For example, there may be a case where a plurality of notice icons are displayed when the effect display is performed only once, or 0 or 1 notice icon is displayed each time the effect display is performed. A plurality of notice icons may be displayed by the effect display being performed a plurality of times. Further, the notice icon may be displayed (stock) by an effect other than the effect display.
Also

"In some cases, it may be easier to finally confirm and display the jackpot pattern mode by displaying the second number of notice icons than by displaying the first number of notice icons.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Even when the second number of the notice icons are displayed, there may be a case where the symbol pattern of the final loss is finally confirmed and displayed. Alternatively, when the second number of the notice icons are displayed, the jackpot pattern mode may be finally definitely displayed.

Even if the advance notice icon is displayed in the second advance notice mode rather than the advance notice icon is displayed in the first advance notice mode, the jackpot symbol mode may be more easily finalized and displayed. Good.
Also

“Providing operation means operable by the player [for example, chance button 136, operation lever 139, transparent portion 191, second chance button 137, etc.]

When the operation means is operated during the display of the effect display, a notice icon may be displayed [for example, the flow of FIG. 120 (a9-1) and subsequent steps following FIG. 134 (c7)],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

The notice icon may be displayed even if the operation unit is not operated, or conversely, the notice icon may be displayed only when the operation unit is operated.

During the display of the effect display, there may be a case where the operation means can be operated and a case where the operation means cannot be operated. When the operation means can be operated, the advance notice icon may be displayed more easily, or the opposite case. In addition, the notice icon may not be displayed easily. Further, the probability that the notice icon is displayed may be the same when it is possible and when it is not.

During the display of the effect display, a display (hereinafter, referred to as “operation display”) related to the operation unit may be displayed or may not be displayed. The operation display referred to here may be a display including an image simulating the operation means, may be a display of only the image, or a display prompting the operation of the operation means (operation promotion display). May be included in the display, may be only the operation promotion display, or may be a display including a display indicating the operation effective period of the operation means (operation effective period display), or the operation Only the valid period may be displayed. Further, a plurality of types of display modes are prepared as the display modes of the operation display, and the plurality of types of display modes include mode changes of the operation means itself (for example, color changes, protrusion amount changes, , A change in shape, a change in position, a change in posture, etc.) may be included.
In addition, “production moving means [for example, FIG. 146 (c1)] is provided,

It is configured such that the effect moving means may perform the effect operation after the effect display is started [for example, the mini game exclusive accessory 225 shown in FIG. 146 (c2)].

When the effect operation is performed, a notice icon may be displayed [for example, FIG. 146 (c2)],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

The effect movable means may be configured to perform an effect operation after the effect display is displayed. That is, it may be configured such that the production movable means may perform a production operation after the display of the production display is finished. Alternatively, the production movable means may be configured to perform a production operation while the production display is being displayed.

When the effect operation is performed, the notice icon may be displayed more easily than when the effect operation is not performed, but the notice icon may not be displayed even when the effect operation is performed. Good. Alternatively, the notice icon may be displayed without fail when the effect operation is performed.

When the effect operation is performed, a pre-reading notice may be started, or a normal notice (a notice regarding the symbol variation display being executed when the effect action is performed) may be started. It may be. Further, when the effect operation is performed, the pre-reading notice may be started more easily than when the effect operation is not performed. However, when the pre-reading notice is not started even when the effect operation is performed, There may be Alternatively, when the effect operation is performed, the look-ahead notice may be displayed without fail. Further, when the effect operation is performed, the normal announcement may be easier to start than when the effect operation is not performed, but when the effect operation is performed, the normal announcement is not started. There may be Alternatively, when the effect operation is performed, the normal notice may be displayed without fail.

However, during the display of the effect display, the effect moving means may never perform the effect operation, or the effect moving means may perform the effect operation irrespective of the display of the effect display. It may be done.
Also

“The notice icon is one of a plurality of notice modes [for example, “box”, “red box”, “gold box” and “rainbow box” shown in FIG. 117(a)]. It is an icon to be displayed,

The notice icon displayed in the second notice mode [for example, "red box"] is more likely to be displayed than the notice icon displayed in the first notice mode [for example, "box"]. In the symbol variation display which is executed when the notice icon is used, the jackpot symbol mode may be finally fixed and displayed [for example, the reliability shown in FIG. 117(a)],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

When the notice icon is used before the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "prediction subject variation") that is the subject of the notice by the notice icon is started, the notice by the notice icon is a prefetch notice. In some cases, the notice may be a normal notice, but it may be unclear whether the notice was a look-ahead notice or a normal notice only by looking at the notice by the notice icon.

The notice icon may be used in the production by the end of the change of the notice subject. Also in this case, the notice by the notice icon may be used as the prefetch notice or the normal notice.

The advance notice icon may be displayed more easily in the first advance notice mode than in the second advance notice mode. In some cases, a certain display (display different from the notice display) may be easily displayed.
Also

“The display means is means for displaying a variable icon [for example, a variable icon h0],
The fluctuation icon is an icon related to the symbol fluctuation display being executed,
The second icon is an icon different from the variable icon,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
In addition, “the first icon is the variable icon,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

The first icon may be an icon dedicated to the variable icon, or may be an icon that also serves as the variable icon.
Also

"The display means is a means that may display a hold icon [for example, the first hold icon h11 to the fourth hold icon h14 of Toku-zu 1],

The hold icon is an icon that represents the number of hold by the number displayed,
The second icon is an icon different from the hold icon,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
Also, "the first icon is the hold icon,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
In addition, "the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
In the above description,

"Display means [for example, all of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, or any one of these three decorative symbol display devices 208L-N One or two, fourth display means 208M', light guide plate IL, POV display 224I, etc.],
The display means is a means that may display a hold icon,

The hold icon is an icon displayed in correspondence with the number of holds [for example, the first hold icon h11 to the fourth hold icon h14 in Toku-zu 1],
The display means is a means in which a notice icon may be displayed,

The notice icon is an icon of a different type from the hold icon [for example, various notice icons YI shown in FIG. 117(a), various notice icons YI shown in FIG. 117(b)].

The display unit is a unit that may display a notice display [for example, notice display YH],

As the notice display, a plurality of types of notice displays are prepared [for example, various notice displays YH shown in FIG. 117(b)],

When the advance notice icon is used, one type of advance notice display among the plurality of types of advance notice displays may be displayed [for example, FIG. 121 (a 32), FIG. 130 (e 13), FIG. 131 (e 1-2-18), FIG. 136 (a8-1), FIG. 136 (a8-2-1), FIG. 138 (a1-3-3), FIG. 139 (a15), the same figure. (A28) etc.],

When the notice icon is used, the notice icon may be hidden [for example, FIG. 121 (A35), FIG. 131 (E15), FIG. 131 (E1-2-20), etc.],

Even if the notice icon is used, the notice icon may not be hidden, and the notice icon may be used again in the presentation, and a certain notice display of the plurality of types of notice displays may be displayed [eg, 136 (A11), FIG. 136 (A16), FIG. 136 (A8-2-4), FIG. 136 (A8-2-6), FIG. 138 (A1-3-9), and FIG. (A28) etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

According to this gaming table, even after the notice icon is used, the display state of the notice icon can be paid attention to, which may entertain the player.

The “when the notice icon is used” means, for example, a case where the notice icon is used in the presentation, and more specifically, when the display mode of the notice icon is changed. It may be the case where the notice icon disappears (is hidden) (the same applies below).

If the notice icon is used once, the notice icon may be hidden, and even if the notice icon is used once, the notice icon is not hidden and the notice icon is rendered again. It may be used and a certain notice display may be displayed.
Also

“A plurality of types of advance notice icons are prepared as the advance notice icon [for example, various advance notice icons YI shown in FIG. 117(a), various advance notice icons YI shown in FIG. 117(b)],

One of the plurality of types of advance notice displays is the first advance notice [for example, No6. "Change notice"],

One of the plurality of types of notice displays is the second notice [for example, No. 17 Notice display of "reach"]

A certain notice icon [for example, No. When the "box 1 notice icon YI" is used, the first notice display may be displayed [for example, FIG. 136 (a8-1), FIG. 138 (a1-3-3). ), FIG. 139 (a15), the same figure (a28), etc.],

When the certain notice icon is used, the second notice display may be displayed [for example, FIG. 136 (a11) or the like],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, before the advance notice icon is used, the fact that the advance notice display is displayed may not be given a advance notice.

Further, it may be configured such that, before the advance notice icon is used, no advance notice is given as to which type of advance notice display among the plurality of types of advance notice displays is displayed.

Further, there may be a case where it is not announced that the first notice display will be displayed just by displaying the certain notice icon, or the second notice display may be displayed. It may not be announced in advance. Alternatively, on the contrary, there may be a case where it is announced that the first notice display is displayed only by displaying the certain notice icon, or the second notice display is displayed. It may be announced in advance.
Also

“When a certain type of advance notice icon of the plurality of types of advance notice icons is used, a type of advance notice display associated with the certain type of advance notice icon is configured to be displayed [eg, , Various notice icons YI shown in FIG. 117(b) are associated with the various notice displays shown in FIG. 117(b) in a one-to-one relationship],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

The plurality of types of notice display and the plurality of types of notice icons may be associated with each other.

The plurality of types of advance notice display and the plurality of types of advance notice icons are associated with each other on a type-by-type basis, may be associated one-to-one, or may be associated one-to-many. May be provided, or they may be associated with each other in a many-to-many manner.
Also

"Even if the certain type of notice icon is used once, it is not hidden, and the certain type of notice icon is used a plurality of times until the certain type of notice icon is hidden. The type of notice display associated with the type of notice icon is displayed multiple times [for example, FIG. 139 (a15) and (a28), etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
Also

[The second notice display is a display for giving a notice [for example, a notice that a reach will be performed] regarding the symbol variation display in which the second notice display is displayed,

The symbol variation display in which the second notice display is displayed is easier to finally confirm and display the jackpot symbol mode than the symbol variation display in which the second notice display is not displayed,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
Also

"Type of the notice display displayed when the notice icon is first used [for example, No. 1 shown in FIG. 117(b)]. The type of the notice display displayed when the notice icon YH of 27 “small size” is used N times (N is a natural number of 2 or more) [for example, the third time] is used. [For example, FIG. 136 (a8-2-2) and the same figure (a8-2-6)],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

However, they may be different, and different types of notice displays may be displayed without fail. Alternatively, on the contrary, it may be the same.
Also

“Providing operation means provided at a position where the player can operate [eg, chance button 136, operation lever 139, transparent portion 191, second chance button 137, etc.]
The display means is a means in which an operation display may be displayed,

The operation display is a display including at least an image simulating the operation means [for example, an operation promotion notification image including a button image 136a and a remaining time display meter MT].

When the notice icon is used [eg, FIG. 140 (b4)], the operation display may be displayed [eg, FIG. 140 (b5)],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
Also

“Providing operation means provided at a position where the player can operate [eg, chance button 136, operation lever 139, transparent portion 191, second chance button 137, etc.]
The display means is a means in which an operation display may be displayed,

The operation display is a display [for example, a display of an operation promotion notification image] including at least an image simulating the operation means [for example, a button image 136a],

The advance notice icon may be used after the operation display is displayed [for example, FIG. 121 (A 31-2-2), FIG. 143 (D a2)] [For example, FIG. -6), FIG. 143 (a7)],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

The operation display may be a display of only an image imitating the operation means, or may be a display including a display for prompting the operation of the operation means (hereinafter, referred to as “operation promotion display”). The display may include a display indicating the operation valid period of the operation means (hereinafter, referred to as “operation valid period display”), the image and the operation promotion display only, or the image. Alternatively, only the operation valid period may be displayed. Further, a plurality of types of display modes are prepared as the display modes of the operation display, and the plurality of types of display modes include mode changes of the operation means itself (for example, color changes, protrusion amount changes, , A change in shape, a change in position, a change in posture, etc.) may be included.
Also

“Providing operation means provided at a position where the player can operate [eg, chance button 136, operation lever 139, transparent portion 191, second chance button 137, etc.]

When the operation means is operated [for example, FIG. 121 (A 31-2-5), FIG. 143 (D a5)], the advance notice icon may be used [For example, FIG. 121 (A 31-2-6). ), FIG. 143 (a7)],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
Also

“Providing operation means provided at a position operable by the player [for example, chance button 136, operation lever 139, transparent portion 191, second chance button 137, etc.],

When the operation means is operated, a notice icon may be displayed [for example, the flow of FIG. 120 (a9-1) and subsequent steps following FIG. 134 (c7)],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
Also

[Equipped with a production movable means [for example, a family crest accessory 224E and a thousand box accessory 224H shown in FIG. 14 and the like,

When the notice icon is used, as the notice display, a display for giving a notice that the effect moving means performs the effect operation [eg, No. shown in FIG. 117(b)]. No. 24, “Thousand Box Operation”. 25, "Crest monument operation"] may be displayed.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

The display for announcing that the effect moving means performs the effect operation is referred to as an effect operation notice display.
Also

"A plurality of notice icons may be displayed [for example, Fig. 125 (I 11), Fig. 128 (U 15-2-17)],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
Also

"In some cases, it may be easier to finally confirm and display the jackpot pattern mode by displaying the second number of notice icons than by displaying the first number of notice icons.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
Also

“The notice icon is one of a plurality of notice modes [for example, “box”, “red box”, “gold box” and “rainbow box” shown in FIG. 117(a)]. It is an icon to be displayed,

The notice icon displayed in the second notice mode [for example, "red box"] is more likely to be displayed than the notice icon displayed in the first notice mode [for example, "box"]. In the symbol variation display which is executed when the notice icon is used, the jackpot symbol mode may be finally fixed and displayed [for example, the reliability shown in FIG. 117(a)],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
In addition, "the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
In the above description,

"Display means [for example, all of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, or any one of these three decorative symbol display devices 208L-N One or two, fourth display means 208M', light guide plate IL, POV display 224I, etc.],
The display means is a means that may display a hold icon,

The holding icon is an icon displayed corresponding to the number of holdings [for example, the first holding icon h11 to the fourth holding icon h14 of Toku-zu 1],

The hold icon is displayed in the first icon display mode [eg, No. 1 shown in FIG. 119(a)]. No. 1 "default" icon display mode, or No. No. 2 shown in FIG. 151 (A1-2-3) or the No. 2 shown in FIG. 119(a). 10 “Timer” display mode], which is an icon that may be displayed.

The hold icon is a second icon display mode [for example, No. 1 shown in FIG. 119(a)]. 5 "red" icon display mode],

The symbol variable display corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the second icon display mode is finally more than the symbol variable display corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the first icon display mode. It is easy to confirm and display the jackpot pattern mode [for example, the reliability shown in FIG. 119(a)],

The display means is a means for displaying a change notice display [for example, display of various icon change notices shown in FIG. 119(b)],
The first change animation using the change notice display may be performed,

The first change animation is an animation [for example, an icon change animation] that changes the mode of any one of the hold icons being displayed,

The change notice display is the first change notice mode [for example, No. shown in FIG. 119(b). 4 "Bomber" icon mode].

The change notice display is a second change notice mode [for example, No. 1 shown in FIG. 119(b)]. 5 "Red bomber icon mode"],

The change notice display of the first change notice mode (hereinafter, referred to as “first change notice display”) [eg, No. 1 shown in FIG. 119(b)]. The first change animation may be performed after the "Bomber icon IHI of 4" is displayed,

When the first change animation using the first change notice display is performed, the mode of any of the displayed hold icons is changed to the second icon display mode. In some cases, for example, the display mode may be changed to a blue display mode other than the red display mode like the first hold icon h11 shown in FIG. 149(A3′-2-4). ), it may be changed to a red display mode],

The change notice display of the second change notice mode (hereinafter, referred to as “second change notice display”) [eg, No. 1 shown in FIG. 119(b)]. The first change animation may be performed after the “Red bomber icon IHI of 5” is displayed,

When the first change animation using the second change notice display is performed, the mode of any of the displayed hold icons is changed to the second icon display mode. [For example, FIG. 148 (A6), FIG. 148 (A4-2-3), FIG. 148 (A2-2-4), FIG. 149 (A3-5-4), FIG. 149 (A3-7-7), and FIG. (A3-2-4), FIG. 152 (B8), FIG. 155 (Ea2-2-5), FIG. 158 (Fd6), FIG. 159 (Fe6), and FIG. 160 (Ff11). Be sure to change],
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

A fourth change animation using the change notice display may be performed, and the fourth change animation may be an animation that changes the type and/or mode of the notice icon. In addition, a fifth change animation using the change notice display may be performed, and the fifth change animation may be an animation that changes the type and/or mode of the notice display.

When the first change animation using the first change notice display is performed, the mode of any of the displayed hold icons is an icon other than the second icon display mode. The display mode (for example, one of the third to fifth icon display modes described later, or the sixth icon display mode) may be changed.

The m-th change animation using the n-th change notice display is the m-th change animation by the n-th change notice display, and the n-th change notice display in which the n-th change notice display appears. It is a change animation of m (both n and m are natural numbers of 1 or more, and the same applies below).

As the change notice display, a plurality of types of change notice displays are prepared, and one kind of the change notice displays of the plurality of types of change notice displays is the first change notice display. One type of the change notice display among the change notice displays is the second change notice display. The first change notice display may be displayed in the first change notice manner, or may be displayed in the second change notice manner. Alternatively, the second change notice display may be displayed in the first change notice mode or may be displayed in the second change notice mode. Furthermore, the first change animation may be executed more easily when the first change notice display is displayed than when the second change notice display is displayed.

Note that, here, the first change animation changes the mode of any of the hold icons among the displayed hold icons, but the change notice display indicates the mode of any of the hold icons. May be interpreted as changing.

Any one of the hold icons may be a plurality of hold icons or may be one hold icon, for example, all or some of the displayed hold icons, Good (the same applies below).

The mode before the change of any of the holding icons may be the first icon display mode, the third icon display mode, or the like. That is, the mode when the display of the change notice display is started in any of the hold icons is not limited to the default mode.
Also,
"A game table equipped with display means,
The display means is a means that may display a hold icon,
The hold icon is an icon displayed corresponding to the number of holds,

The hold icon is an icon that may be displayed in the first icon display mode,

The hold icon is an icon that may be displayed in a second icon display mode,

The symbol variable display corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the second icon display mode is finally more than the symbol variable display corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the first icon display mode. It is easy to confirm and display the jackpot pattern mode,
The display means is a means that may display a change notice display,
The first change animation using the change notice display may be performed,

The first change animation is an animation that changes the mode of any of the held icons among the displayed held icons,
The change notice display is a display that may be displayed in the first change notice manner,
The change notice display is a display that may be displayed in the second change notice mode,

The change preview display displayed in the second change preview mode is used rather than the first change animation displayed in the first change preview mode. The first change animation is easier to change the mode of any of the held icons among the displayed held icons to the second icon display mode,
A game table characterized by that. "
May be

According to this gaming table, it is possible to infer what kind of mode (here, the second icon display mode) the mode of the hold icon may be changed by the mode of the change notice display, Sometimes it can entertain the player. For example, the mode of the change notice display is related to the mode after the change of the hold icon, and if the mode of the change notice display is a red mode (here, the second change notice mode), the hold It can be inferred that the mode after the change of the icon is also a red mode (here, the second icon display mode).

In the first change animation in which the change advance notice display displayed in the second change advance notice mode is used, one of the hold icon modes among the displayed hold icons is There may be a case where it is changed to a mode other than the first icon display mode and the second icon display mode (for example, the sixth icon display mode, etc.), and rather than changing to the sixth icon display mode. May be easily changed to the second icon display mode.

In the first change animation using the change notice display displayed in the second change notice mode, one of the hold icon modes among the displayed hold icons is set to the first change animation mode. There may be a case where it is changed to a mode other than the icon display mode and the second icon display mode (for example, the seventh icon display mode). This seventh icon display mode may be a mode of confirming the big hit (premier mode). That is, in the first change animation in which the change notice display displayed in the first change notice mode is used, the mode of any one of the holding icons is a pre-reading notice mode but a big hit confirmation. Although it is easy to change to a mode (for example, the second icon display mode) that is not so long, in the first change animation using the change notification display displayed in the second change notification mode, the big hit is confirmed. May be changed to the mode (premier mode). It should be noted that the jackpot confirmation mode (premier mode) may be always changed. Further, although the seventh icon display mode is not originally a mode for confirming a big hit, it may be treated as a form for confirming a big hit. In this case, the look-ahead notice is inconsistent with the normal time, and the contradiction becomes a premier and a big hit.

The second icon display mode may be different from the first icon display mode. The first icon display mode may be a default mode. The default mode is the mode most frequently displayed. The second icon display mode may be a look-ahead notice mode. Further, the first change animation is easier to be executed when the change notice display is displayed in the second change notice mode than when it is displayed in the first change notice mode. Good.
Also

“The hold icon is a third icon display mode [for example, No. 1 shown in FIG. The display mode of the "blue" icon of 3]],

The symbol variable display corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the second icon display mode is finally more than the symbol variable display corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the third icon display mode. It is easy to confirm and display the jackpot pattern mode [eg, reliability shown in FIG. 119(a)],

By displaying the first change notice display, if the first change animation using the first change notice display is performed, the mode of any of the hold icons among the hold icons is changed. It may be changed to the third icon display mode [for example, changed to a blue display mode (third display mode) like the first hold icon h11 shown in FIG. 149(A3′-2-4). Sometimes],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
The third icon display mode may also be a look-ahead notice mode.

The symbol variable display corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the third icon display mode is finally more than the symbol variable display corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the first icon display mode. The jackpot pattern mode may be easily confirmed and displayed.

The first change animation in which the first change advance notice display is used is one of the hold icons being displayed, and the third icon rather than the second icon display mode. The display mode may be easily changed. The probability of changing to the second icon display mode may be 0%.

Also

“Even when the first change animation using the second change notice display is performed, the mode of all the held icons displayed is not changed to the third icon display mode [eg, FIG. (A6), FIG. 148 (A4-2-3), FIG. 148 (A2-2-4), FIG. 149 (A3-5-4), FIG. 149 (A3-7-7), and FIG. 150 (A3-2-). 4), FIG. 152(B8), FIG. 155(Ea2-2-5), FIG. 156(Eb8), FIG. 158(Fd6), FIG. 159(Fe6), and FIG. 160(Ff11). No hold icon has changed to
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
Also

"There is a case where a first unchanging animation [for example, an icon unchanging animation] using the change notice display is performed,

Even if the first change notice display is displayed, if the first non-change animation using the first change notice display is performed, the modes of all the hold icons displayed do not change. [For example],

Even if the second change notice display is displayed, if the first non-changing animation using the second change notice display is performed, the modes of all the hold icons displayed are not changed [ For example, as shown in FIG. 149(A3-3-3) and FIG. 149(A3-4-4), the display modes of all the hold icons do not change],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
Also

“The first invariant animation is a scene in which the aspect of any one of the displayed hold icons has failed to be changed by the second change notice display [for example, FIG. 149 (A3 3-2) to the scene of (A3-3-3) in the figure, and the scene of FIG. 149 (A3-4-2) to (A3-4-4) in the figure] are included in the animation.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
Also

"There may be a third change animation that uses the change notice display,

The third change animation is the same animation as the first non-change animation [e.g., FIG. 149(A3-4-1) to FIG. 149(A3-4-2)] halfway. 149 (A3-5-1) to the same figure (A3-5-2)],

The third change animation is a scene that finally succeeds in changing the mode of any of the displayed hold icons by the second change notice display [eg, FIG. 149]. (A3-5-3) to the scene of (A3-5-4) in the figure] is included in the animation.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
Also

“The first change animation is a scene in which the mode of any of the displayed hold icons is successfully changed by the second change notice display [for example, FIG. 148 (A4- 1) to the scene (A5) of the figure] are included in the animation.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
here,

"There may be a first non-changing animation that uses the change notice display,
The change notice display is a display composed of a plurality of change notice icons,

One of the plurality of change notice icons is a first change notice icon,

One of the plurality of change notice icons is a second change notice icon,

The first non-changing animation includes a scene (hereinafter, referred to as “first scene”) in which changing the mode of any one of the displayed hold icons has failed. Is an animation

The first scene is a scene that has failed using the second change notice icon,

The first change animation includes a scene (hereinafter, referred to as a "second scene") in which the aspect of any one of the displayed hold icons has been successfully changed. Animation,

The second scene is a successful scene using the second change notice icon.
A game table characterized by that. "
May be

In the first change animation, either one of the first scene using the first change notice icon and the second scene using the first change notice icon is displayed. It is an animation that may be displayed, the first immutable animation is also an animation that may be displayed in any one of the first scene and the second scene, The successful scene may be displayed more easily when the second scene is displayed than when the first scene is displayed. Alternatively, the ease of displaying the successful scene may not be different between the two cases.

In addition, the first change animation is an animation in which a second scene using the first change notice icon may be displayed, and the first change animation is the first change notice. The first non-change animation is an animation in which the first scene using the icon is never displayed, and the first non-change animation is the animation in which the first scene may be displayed. The change animation is an animation in which the second scene is not displayed. When the second scene is displayed, the successful scene is always displayed, and when the first scene is displayed. The failed scene may be displayed without fail.

Further, the first change animation is one of a first scene in which the first change notice icon is used and a second scene in which the first change notice icon is used. Is an animation in which the scene may be displayed, the first invariant animation is an animation in which the first scene may be displayed, and the first invariant animation is the second When the second scene is displayed, the successful scene is always displayed, and even when the first scene is displayed, the failed scene is always displayed. It may be in a mode not necessarily displayed.

There may be only one scene using the first change notice icon for the hold icon displayed at a certain position.
Also,

"A third change animation using the change notice display may be performed,

The third change animation is the same animation as the first non-change animation until the middle,

The third change animation is a scene (hereinafter, referred to as a “third scene”) that finally succeeds in changing the mode of any one of the displayed hold icons. The included animation,

The third scene is a scene that finally succeeded using the second change notice icon,
A game table characterized by that. "
May be

The third change animation is an animation that makes the change of the mode of the hold icon unsuccessful and succeeds. The third change animation has a lower appearance frequency than the first change animation. However, on the contrary, it may be higher or the same.

Corresponding to the hold icon changed to the second icon display mode by the first change animation, rather than the symbol variable display corresponding to the hold icon changed to the second icon display mode by the third change animation There may be cases where the symbol variation display is more likely to be finalized and the final big hit symbol aspect is displayed (the reliability of the big hit (the degree of expectation) is higher), or conversely, the big jackpot symbol aspect is finally finalized. It may be difficult to be displayed (the reliability (expectation) of the big hit is low), or both may have the same reliability (expectation) of the big hit.
Also

"The first change using the second change notice display rather than the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon whose mode has been changed by the first change animation using the first change notice display In some cases, the symbol variable display corresponding to the hold icon whose mode is changed by animation may be easier to finally confirm and display the jackpot pattern mode [for example, if the before-change is the same default display mode of the hold icon, Although the first change animation using the first change notice display changes to the third display mode (the second hold icon h12 shown in FIG. 149 (A3′2-4)), the second change notice display Since the first change animation used changes to the fifth display mode (the first hold icon h11 shown in FIG. 149(A7)), the reliability shown in FIG. 119(a)],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
Also

“The first change notice display may change to the second change notice display [for example, FIG. 152(B4) to FIG. 152(B5), FIG. 152(B3-2-1) to FIG. (B3-2-5), FIG. 152 (B3-3-3) to the same figure (B3-3-5), FIG. 153 (B1-2-5) to the same figure (B1-2-9), and FIG. 153. (B1-3-6) to FIG. 154 (B1-3-9)],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

The mode of the change notice display started to be displayed in the first change notice mode may change to the second change notice mode, or the change changed to the first change notice mode. There may be a case where the mode of the notice display further changes to the second change notice mode. Further, in the first change animation, there may be a case where the second change notice mode is changed, and before the first change animation is started, the second change notice mode is changed. May change to the second change notice mode, or may change to the second change notice mode after the first change animation ends.

It should be noted that the change notice display mode displayed in the first change notice mode does not change and remains displayed in the first change notice mode, as compared with the frequency when the change notice display mode changes to the second change notice mode. In this case, the frequency may be configured to be higher, but the relationship of this frequency may be reversed, or both frequencies may be the same.

The mode of the change notification display displayed in the first change notification mode may be configured not to change to another mode.

Even if the change notice display mode displayed in the second change notice mode does not change to the first change notice mode, or conversely, it may change. Good.

Even if the change notice display mode displayed in the second change notice mode (for example, red mode) is changed to the third change notice mode (for example, gold mode or rainbow mode) Good. Also, the change notice display mode displayed in the second change notice mode does not change and remains displayed in the second change notice mode, as compared with the frequency when the change notice display mode changes to the third change notice mode. In this case, the frequency may be configured to be higher, but the relationship of this frequency may be reversed, or both frequencies may be the same.

Compared to the case where the change notice display is displayed in the second change notice mode from the beginning, the change notice display changes from the first change notice mode to the second change notice mode. The first change animation for changing any of the displayed hold icons to the second icon display mode may be easily executed. Alternatively, on the contrary, the change notice display is displayed from the beginning in the second change notice mode more than when the change notice display changes from the first change notice mode to the second change notice mode. In this case, the first change animation for changing any of the displayed hold icons to the second icon display mode may be more easily executed. Furthermore, in both cases, there is no difference in the execution probability of the first change animation that changes any of the hold icons to the second icon display mode, and the execution probabilities may be the same.

The first change notice than the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon whose form has been changed by the first change animation using the change notice display displayed in the second change notice form from the beginning The pattern variation display corresponding to the hold icon whose mode has been changed by the first change animation in which the mode change notice display that has changed from the mode to the second change notice mode is finally used is the big hit symbol mode. There is a case where it is easy to be confirmed and displayed (the reliability of the big jackpot (expectation) is high), or, conversely, it is difficult to finally display the jackpot pattern mode (the reliability of the big jackpot (expectation) is low). ), the reliability (expectation) of the big hit may be the same in both cases.
Also, "the display means is a means in which a variable icon may be displayed,

The variable icon is an icon [for example, a variable icon h0] related to a symbol variable display being executed,
A second change animation using the change notice display may be performed,

The second change animation is an animation [for example, an icon change animation] that changes the aspect of the variable icon,

If the second change animation using the first change notice display is performed by displaying the first change notice display, the mode of the displayed change icon is the second icon. The display may be changed,

By displaying the second change notice display, if the second change animation using the second change notice display is performed, the mode of the displayed change icon is the second icon. The display mode is changed to [for example, FIG. 148 (A3-2-4)],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
Here, the variable icon may be an icon representing a digested hold.

The variable icon can be regarded as an icon displayed in correspondence with the number of holds=0, and can be said to be a kind of hold icon in a broad sense, but it is limited here in distinction from the hold icon. However, the mode of the variable icon is common to the mode of the hold icon and is referred to as the nth icon display mode.

In addition, the "hold icon" described so far can be replaced with a "fluctuation icon", and the "first change animation" can be replaced with a "second change animation". The "icon" can be replaced with the "changing icon", and the "first change animation" can be replaced with the "second change animation". These things are the same in the following.

Further, the second change animation is more likely to be executed when the change notice display is displayed in the second change notice mode than when the change notice display is displayed in the first change notice mode. May be According to this configuration, if the second change animation is executed, a big hit can be expected in the currently displayed symbol variation display, and if the first change animation is executed, after this, You can have a big hit expectation in the symbol fluctuation display to be started, and the player is interested in which change animation of the first change animation and the second change animation is executed, The interest of the game may improve.
Also

“There may be a second non-changing animation [for example, an icon non-changing animation] using the change notice display.

Even if the first change notice display is displayed, if the second invariant animation using the first change notice display is performed, the mode of the displayed change icon does not change,

Even if the second change notice display is displayed, if the second invariant animation using the second change notice display is performed, the mode of the displayed change icon does not change [eg, FIG. 149(A3-3-3)],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

The second non-changing animation here is an animation in which the aspect of the variable icon does not change, and if the variation of the aspect of the variable icon is regarded as successful, when the second change animation is displayed, It corresponds to success, and when the second immutable animation is displayed, it corresponds to failure.
Also

“Providing operation means provided at a position where the player can operate [eg, chance button 136, operation lever 139, transparent portion 191, second chance button 137, etc.]

The first change notice mode is a mode [for example, a mode shown in FIG. 152 (B3-2-2)] including a display [for example, a display of the button image 136a] related to the operation means,

When the mode of the change notice display changes from the first change notice mode to the second change notice mode when the operation means is operated during the display of the first change notice display [For example, FIG. 152 (B3-2-5)],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Depending on the first change animation, one of the hold icons may change to the eighth icon display mode, or may not change. Further, the variable icon may or may not change to the eighth icon display mode by the second change animation. The eighth icon display mode referred to here is a mode including a display related to the operation means.

The operation means is a means for setting an operation valid period, and a display (hereinafter, referred to as “operation display”) regarding the operation means is displayed at least during the operation valid period, and within the operation valid period. When the operation means is operated, the mode of the change notice display changes from the first change notice mode to the second change notice mode according to the operation, and within the operation effective period. When the operation is not performed, the first change notice mode may be changed to the second change notice mode after the operation valid period has elapsed. Further, when the mode of the hold icon or the variable icon changes from the eighth icon display mode to the second icon display mode in response to the operation, and the operation is not performed within the operation valid period. In addition, after the operation valid period has elapsed, the eighth icon display mode may be changed to the second icon display mode.

However, when the operation is not performed within the operation valid period, the change notice display, the mode of the hold icon or the change icon changes to the second change notice mode or the second icon display mode. You don't have to. Alternatively, it may change to the second change notice mode or the second icon display form at a timing different from the timing when the operation valid period has elapsed, and the change notice display may be the first change notice display. The display may be restarted in the change notice mode, or the hold icon or the variable icon may be restarted in the eighth icon display mode. Further, the change notice display may be continuously displayed in the first change notice mode until the operation is performed, and the hold icon or the change icon is the eighth icon until the operation is performed. The display may continue to be displayed.

It should be noted that the operation display may be a display including an image simulating the operation means, or may be a display of only the image, or a display prompting operation of the operation means (operation promotion display). It may be a display including the display, only the operation promotion display, or a display including a display showing the operation effective period of the operation means (operation effective period display), or the operation effective display. It may be only the period display. Furthermore, a plurality of types of display modes are prepared as the display mode of the operation display, and the plurality of types of display modes change the mode of the operation means itself (for example, change of color, change of protrusion amount, , A change in shape, a change in position, a change in posture, etc.) may be included.

Further, if the operation means is operated during the display of the change notice display displayed in the first change notice mode, the mode of the change notice display is changed from the first change notice mode. The second change notice mode may be changed without exception. Alternatively, there may be a case where there is a change from the first change notice mode to the second change notice mode and a case where there is no change (for example, the first change notice mode remains unchanged).
Also

“The change notice display is a display that may be displayed across consecutive symbol variation displays [for example, FIG. 150 (A3-8-1) to FIG. 150 (A3-8-3), FIG. A3-9-1) to the same figure (A3-9-3)],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

The term "straddle" as used herein means to interpose a period (variation stop period) during which symbols are stopped and displayed. Further, the change notice display may be a display that is continuously displayed during the display of the symbol variation display, or a display that disappears once in the middle. Also, even during the stop display of the symbols, the display may be continuously displayed, may be a display that disappears temporarily, or a display that continues to disappear during the display of the stop display. May be

"Display that may be displayed across consecutive symbol variable displays" is "display that is always displayed", but "display that may be erased and then redisplayed" is also included. For example, it may be erased once during the super reach effect and redisplayed when the super reach effect is finished.
Also

[The change notice display [for example, the icon IHI of "Red thundercloud"] is a display that is displayed at least in the state where the number of holdings is 0 and the decorative design that is stopped and displayed is displayed [for example, 155 (D9)],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

The change notice display may be a display that is displayed only in a state where the number of holdings is 0 and the decorative design that is stopped and displayed is displayed, or a display that is also displayed in other states. May be.
Also

[The change notice display [for example, the icon IHI of "red thundercloud"] is a display that may be displayed during the predetermined number of symbol variation displays,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

The change notice display may be a display that disappears (a display that becomes non-display) when the symbol variation display of a predetermined number of times ends.
Also

“The change notice display [eg, the icon IHI of “red thundercloud”] temporarily disappears even during the predetermined number of symbol variation displays [eg, shown in FIG. 155 (D10). When the animation demo screen is displayed]
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

For example, the change notice display may or may not disappear temporarily during a part or all of the super reach effect.

The change notice display may be, for example, a display of a navigation character (a character performing an explanation display or the like).

Further, the change notice display may be a display that is constantly displayed for a certain period. The certain period may be a period until the hold subject to the advance notice is exhausted, or a period until the symbol variable display corresponding to the hold subject to the advance notice is finished, or a predetermined number of times. It may be a period until the symbol variable display is finished (hereinafter the same).

The change notice display may be hidden while the symbol is stopped in a state where there is no hold or during the demo display. That is, a certain period does not include a period during which symbols are stopped in a state where there is no hold or a demo display period. However, the change notice display may be displayed even when the symbol is stopped in the state where there is no hold.

The change notice display may be a display that may disappear once during a certain period.
Also

"Even if the change notice display is displayed, if the first change animation is not displayed [for example, if the first invariant animation, the second invariant animation, or the second invariant animation is displayed, There is a case where the change notice display is hidden and remains stationary.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Even if the change notice display is displayed, the second change animation may not be displayed.

The change notice display may be displayed and the first invariable animation may be performed, and the first invariant animation may be the same animation as the first incomplete animation. Further, the change notice display may be displayed and the second invariant animation may be performed, and the second invariant animation may be the same animation as the second incomplete animation. As described above, the case where the first invariant animation is displayed corresponds to a failure, but it is partway through (for example, at least the first part, the first half part, or the scene of whether the mode of the hold icon changes or not). Since the same animation (excluding part), the player can first distinguish whether the display of the first change animation or the display of the first non-change animation has started. It may not be possible and the interest in the game may improve.

Even if the change notice display is displayed, the first change animation and the first non-change animation may not be displayed.
Also

“Before the display of the first change animation is started, there may be a case where it is informed that the mode of any one of the displayed hold icons is easily changed [eg, 151 (A1-3-3) informing by telop display trp],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

The notification that the mode of any of the holding icons is in a state in which the mode is likely to change (hereinafter, referred to as “pre-change notification”) is provided when the change notice display is displayed in the second change notice mode. You may be notified. For example, the second change notification mode may be a mode including the display of the change advance notification. That is, the change notice display may be a display that also serves as the advance change notification. Alternatively, the advance change notification may be performed separately from the advance change notification display. The first change animation may be executed more easily when the change notice display is performed than when the advance change notification is not performed. That is, the form of any one of the displayed hold icons may be easily changed. On the contrary, it may be difficult to execute, or may be the same in easiness of execution.

Further, the advance change notification may be started or notified before the first change animation is displayed after the change advance notice is displayed. Alternatively, the advance change notification may be started or notified before the change advance notice display is displayed.
Also

“The first change animation is an animation that may change the mode of any one or more of the displayed hold icons [for example, FIG. 149 (A3′-2-1) to Figure (A3'-2-4)],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

The first change animation is an animation including a scene in which it is possible to change the mode of any of the plurality of hold icons displayed, and the first unchangeable animation. May be an animation including a scene in which changing the mode of any one or more of the displayed hold icons has failed.

There may be a case where the first change animation and the first non-change animation are executed at the same time and the mode of any one or a plurality of the hold icons displayed is changed. In this case, a scene in which one or more hold icons are changed and a scene in which one or more hold icons are not changed may be displayed.

Also, the first change animation may be an animation that necessarily changes the mode of any one or more of the displayed hold icons. The first non-changing animation may be an animation that does not necessarily change the mode of any one or more of the displayed hold icons.
Also

“When the second change notice display is displayed, the first change animation is always executed [for example, in No. with an icon change ratio of 100% shown in FIG. 119(b)]. 8 "Red Flying Boat"],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

There may be a case where the first non-changing animation using the change notice display is performed. The first non-changing animation here is an animation that does not change the mode of any of the hold icons among the displayed hold icons, and if the change of the mode of the hold icon is regarded as successful, then The display of the first change animation corresponds to success, and the display of the first non-change animation corresponds to failure.

Further, the first change animation is an animation including a scene in which the aspect of any one of the displayed hold icons is successfully changed, and the first unchanged animation is included. The animation may be an animation including a scene in which the aspect of any one of the displayed hold icons has failed to be changed.
Also

"The hold icon is an icon that may be displayed in a fourth icon display mode,

The fourth icon display mode is a mode suggesting that the mode of the hold icon of the fourth icon display mode may change [for example, the display mode of “bomb” shown in FIG. 156 (Eb1) and the like]. ],

When the mode of the hold icon displayed in the fourth icon display mode changes to the second icon display mode in the first change animation in which the second change notice display is used. [For example, FIG. 156 (Eb8)],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
Also

"The hold icon is an icon that may be displayed in a fifth icon display mode,

The fifth icon display mode is a display mode indicating that the mode change in the hold icon of the fourth icon display mode has failed [for example, the fire of the fuse shown in FIG. 156 (Eb7-2-1) is on the way. The display mode of the "bomb" that has disappeared]

When the mode of the hold icon displayed in the fourth icon display mode changes to the fifth icon display mode in the first change animation in which the second change notice display is used. [For example, the same figure (Eb7-2-1) continuing from FIG. 156 (Eb6)],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

The mode of the hold icon displayed in the fourth icon display mode, in the first change animation using the change notification display displayed in the second change notification mode, The first icon display mode may be changed.

Further, the fourth icon display mode is a display showing the length of the remaining time until the mode of the hold icon changes (for example, a digital clock display, an analog clock display, a bar display, etc. Or a display in which the size, length, color, etc. change). ← Dynamite is a display that changes the length of the squib

Furthermore, in the hold icon displayed in the fourth icon display mode, the first change animation using the change notification display displayed in the second change notification mode is started. With this as a trigger, a display indicating that the remaining time elapses (for example, a countdown display or a change display of the shape, size, length, color or the like depending on the elapsed time) may be performed.
In addition, "the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

It should be noted that what is described as a variable display of the decorative pattern above may be a variable display of the design (more specifically, a special drawing), and what is described as a stop display of the decorative pattern means that the design (more Specifically, it may be a special display) stop display.

Further, in the above, "may be" may be replaced with "must be", "must be", or "must be", etc. It may be replaced with "always do ○○".

Next, an example of effects applicable to the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 described above will be described.

In the example of the effect described below, the display means (for example, any one or two or all of the first decorative symbol display device 208L to the third decorative symbol display device 208M decorative symbol display device), the notice icon, A notice display, a mini game A icon, a mini game B icon, a hold icon, a change icon, an icon change notice display, a chance up meter, a timer notice, and the like are displayed. First, these will be described in order.

First, effects using various icons and displays described with reference to FIG. 162 will be described using a specific example.

FIG. 162 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example of the effect using the chance up meter.

In FIG. 162, it is a normal state (non-probable change state and non-electric power support state (non-time saving state)), and even in the subsequent production examples, unless otherwise specified, the production example is in the normal state. 162 shows only the first decorative symbol display device 208L among the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N, the first decorative symbol display device 208L is the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. May be present (same for subsequent figures).

In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 162(A1) to (A15), the opportunity up meter preparing display is displayed before the opportunity up meter is displayed, and an effect is given to give notice that the opportunity up meter is displayed. It is shown that it is being broken.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 162(A1), the first decorative symbol is changing rapidly in the central region. In the upper left, the second decorative pattern is variably displayed. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 162(A1), a holding frame UI is displayed in the effect display area 208d. This hold frame UI has a hold icon display area HIS, a variable icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS. The variable icon display area CIS is provided in the center, and the pedestal hs0 is arranged in the variable icon display area CIS. The hold icon display area HIS is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area CIS, and four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged on the left base icon bIl. The effect icon display area DIS is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area CIS, and the right base icon bIr is arranged in the effect icon display area DIS. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 162(A1), the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed on the first stage hs1. That is, the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The display mode of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is No. 1 of FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1. On the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second reserved number display (here, "1" and "0") of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed. Further, the variation icon h0 is displayed on the pedestal hs0 in the variation icon display area CIS. The display mode of the change icon h0 is also No. 1 in FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1. The background screen of the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 162(A1) is solid white, but this solid white color means that the background screen is not shown. In the following figures, the background screen may be shown, but the case of solid white indicates that the background screen is omitted as in the case of FIG. 162(A1).

In FIG. 162(A2), the flame effect EF101 is displayed so as to cover the entire hold icon display area HIS. As a result, the advance notice of the chance up meter (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “CUM”) may be displayed. In addition, the CUM preparation display may be displayed without displaying the flame effect EF101. Further, when the flame effect EF101 is displayed, the CPU preparing display may be displayed. Further, in this example of effect, the flame effect EF101 covers the entire hold icon display area HIS, but it may cover only a part of the hold icon display area HIS, or the entire variable icon display area CIS. Alternatively, a part or a whole of the effect icon display area DIS may be covered. Further, although the back side of the flame effect EF101 is displayed in an invisible opaque manner, it may be displayed in a semi-transparent manner so that the image displayed on the back side is visible.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 162(A3), the flame effect EF101 is erased and the CUM preparing display MTY is displayed. The starting point SP is displayed at one end of the meter and the final point GP is displayed at the other end of the meter on the CUM preparation display MTY. In addition, a state in which the character SBH of Sabohani is waiting at the start point SP is shown, and a balloon with the letters "STANDBY" is also displayed. That is, it is announced that the chance up meter will be displayed. The CUM preparation display MTY is displayed at the same position as the display position of the chance up meter. It should be noted that, in this effect example, it is shown that the chance up points displayed in the chance up meter effect using the chance up meter are not notified. At this time, the CUM preparation display MTY covers the entire hold icon display area HIS and hides it, while the variable icon display area CIS and the effect icon display area DIS are visually displayed without changing the display mode. It is possible. Note that the display mode of at least one of the variable icon display area CIS and the effect icon display area DIS may change. Further, in this effect example, the CUM preparation display MTY is started to be displayed during the symbol variation display before the reach, but the CUM preparation display MTY is started to be displayed while the reach effect display after the reach is displayed. It may be done.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 162 (A4), "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, and the reach state is formed, and the fluctuation display is shown. ing. Here, the decorative pattern for which the swing fluctuation display is performed may overlap a part of the CUM preparing display, or the decorative pattern may be displayed at a position not overlapping the CUM preparing display.

In FIG. 162 (A5), “decoration 7” that was swinging and fluctuating in the left symbol display area 208a is moved below the second decorative symbol before shifting to the super reach effect, and swinging is fluctuating in the right symbol display area 208c. The “decoration 7” that was being displayed moves to the bottom of the second hold number display. In addition, in this example of performance, the CUM preparing display MTY is also displayed during the transition to the super reach effect. It should be noted that the CUM preparation-in-progress display MTY may be hidden when the effect that shifts to the super reach effect is started. In addition, when the effect that shifts to the super reach effect is started, the CUM preparation in-progress display MTY may or may not be displayed. Also, in FIG. 162(A5), the downward movement of the holding frame UI is started, and a state is shown in which the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS is left and the frame is framed out below the display screen. .. FIG. 162(A6) shows a state in which the holding frame UI is completely framed out downward with the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS left.

In FIG. 162(A7), the state where the super reach effect of VS swordsman reach is started is shown. At this time, the CUM preparation display MTY is also continuously displayed. Here, when the CUM preparation display MTY is not displayed, the chance up meter effect is not performed. Even when the CUM preparation display MTY is not displayed, the chance up meter effect may be performed. An image of an enemy swordsman is displayed in large size on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in (A7), and the main character appears on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in (A8). An animation of the duel scene with the enemy swordsman is displayed. It should be noted that when the super reach effect is started, all the reservation frame UIs are hidden (disappeared) except for the top plate of the pedestal hs0. Also, the hold icon is hidden (disappears). However, the variable icon h0 does not disappear and remains displayed on the remaining top plate. Further, the second decorative design and the second hold number display are also continuously displayed. The entire hold frame UI may be erased, or conversely, the entire hold frame UI may be continuously displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 may be erased or the hold icon may be continuously displayed.

FIG. 162 (A9) shows a state in which the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT. That is, the chance up meter CMT is a display that is displayed at the beginning of super reach (at the time of introduction). The chance up meter CMT is, for example, a meter showing the progress status of the reach effect, and the character SBH of Sabohani moves between the start point SP and the final point GP, and the progress status of the current reach effect is roughly indicated by the position. Information. The chance up meter CMT may be referred to as a super reach timeline. In addition, the chance up meter CMT may be referred to as an explanation effect using an effect using the chance up meter CMT. Here, the traveling speed of the character SBH of Sabohani is not constant but may vary depending on the progress situation of the effect, but may be constant. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 162(A9), the first check point CP1, the second check point CP2, and the third check point CP3 are arranged. The first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 indicate that a specific notice may occur, so that the player can be expected. That is, when the Sabohani character SBH reaches each of the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 on the way, a specific advance notice may occur. In other words, it can be said that the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 are the display of chance up points indicating the places where the chance up occurs, and the chance up meter CMT indicates the chance up during the reach (super reach). It can also be said that it is a meter display that suggests the location of the occurrence. Further, at the final point GP, the placard is displayed in rotation, which suggests that when the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the final point GP, either the result of the big hit or the loss is derived. In this example of performance, the display of the chance up meter CMT is started when the animation display of the duel scene is started, but the display of the state that has evolved into the super reach shown in FIG. 162 (A7) is started. The display may be started at the same timing, the display may be started when the reach state is reached, the display may be started before the reach state occurs, or the variation of the decorative design The display may be started when the display is started. The check points CP1 to CP3 may be displayed before the opportunity up meter CMT is displayed, at the same time as the opportunity up meter CMT is displayed, or at the same time. It may be after the upmeter CMT is displayed. The timing at which the placard is displayed may be before the opportunity up meter CMT is displayed, at the same time as the opportunity up meter CMT is displayed, or at the opportunity up meter CMT. May be displayed after is displayed.

FIG. 162(A10) shows a state in which the character SBH of Sabohani that functions as a cursor starts moving. At this time, a balloon written “START!!” is displayed near the character SBH of Sabohani to notify the start of the movement of the character SBH of Sabohani. The balloon "START!!" may be displayed only when the chance up meter CMT is displayed after the CUM preparing display MTY is displayed, and whether or not the CUM preparing display MTY is displayed. Regardless of whether or not the chance up meter CMT is displayed, it may be displayed or may not be displayed. Further, by displaying a balloon of "START!!", it may be announced that the chance up notice is likely to occur at the check points CP1 to CP3.

FIG. 162(A11) is the same effect example as the effect example shown in FIG. 29(2). After that, the effect shown in FIGS. 29(3) to 29(25) is performed, and then the effect shown in FIG. 162(A12) is performed.

In FIGS. 162(A12) to (A13), the same effects as those shown in FIGS. 29(26) to (27) are performed.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 162 (A14), it is shown that swing fluctuation is performed in a state where three “decoration 7” are arranged. At this time, a background dedicated to the big hit, which is displayed when the background becomes a big hit, is displayed. Note that the default (normal) background, the background in the prefetch mode, the background that suggests the development of super reach, etc. may be displayed, and the background displayed at the time of reach is displayed. Good.

After that, as shown in FIG. 162 (A15), the combination of the large-decoration decorative patterns of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” (the big-hit pattern mode) is confirmed and displayed. Here, after the super reach is completed, the chance up meter CMT is always hidden, but it may be displayed. In this case, when the chance up meter CMT is displayed when the combination of the decorative symbols of the big hits (the big hit pattern mode) is stopped and displayed, it may be decided to be promoted to the probability variation big hit. ..

In this effect example, the CUM preparation display is switched to the chance up meter CMT at the timing shown in FIG. 162(A9), but the invention is not limited to this, and for example, FIG. 162(A3) to which the symbol variation is being displayed. It may be switched at the timing of (A4) in the figure, or may be switched at the timing of (A5) to (A6) of FIG. 162, which is a period during which the normal reach is switched to the super reach, or after the super reach is started. It may switch in FIG. 162 (A7) to FIG. 162 (A13) during execution of super reach, or may switch after super reach is completed. In this case, the occurrence of the advance notice of the chance that has occurred during the super reach is notified later.

In this example of effect, since the effect by the chance up meter CMT is performed during the super reach effect, the reach effect display is displayed by displaying the CUM preparing display for notifying that the effect by the chance up meter CMT is started. It can be said that is displayed.

In this production example, chance check notices are generated at all check points, which is a big hit. However, when chance check notices are not generated at any one or more check points (chance at all check points Even if there is no advance notice or if there is a chance up notice at some check points), it may be a big hit. For example, in FIG. 30(18b), an example in which a big hit occurs even if the lever image 136Va is not displayed and the chance up notice is not generated is shown. Further, even if a large number of chance-up notices are generated at checkpoints, it may be easier to finally confirm and display the big hit symbol aspect than when no chance-up notices are generated at all and/or some checkpoints. Good. Further, the number of occurrences of advance notice of chance and the likelihood of a big hit may not be related.

In the present embodiment, the case where the CUM preparing display MTY is displayed and the chance up meter CMT is displayed is more final than the case where the CUM preparing display MTY is not displayed and the chance up meter CMT is displayed. It is easy to confirm and display the jackpot pattern mode

The effect example shown in FIGS. 162(B1) to (B8) is another effect example following FIG. 29(22), and in the lever effect shown in FIG. 29(18) to FIG. The effect lever 136V is operated by, but a state in which the effect is failed is shown. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 6" is displayed on the middle symbol, and the combination of the loss of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" is notified and it is notified. Further, in the chance up meter CMT, the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the final point GP, but the placard shows the character “x” indicating that it is missing, and the character SBH of Sabohani has a disappointed expression. ing.

After that, as shown in FIG. 162 (B2), all the decorative symbols of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are once displayed lighter than the normal darkness. Also, in the figure, a scene in which the lord has fallen is displayed. In FIG. 162 (B3), all the decorative symbols of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are displayed in the normal darkness again, and in FIG. 162 (B4), the wipe effect is performed and the effect scene of super reach (effect). The display is switched to the normal background (the background before the start of the super reach effect shown in FIG. 162 (A1) and the like). In the wipe effect, as shown in FIG. 162 (B5), the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 once becomes a wipe display of the same color with no pattern. In this wipe display, the variable icon h0 and the chance up meter CMT disappear, and the second decorative symbol and the second hold number display are displayed. The model title is displayed in the lower left corner. The change icon h0 and the chance up meter CMT may also be displayed. In FIG. 162(B6), a state in which the background is returned to the normal background after the wipeout is shown. In FIG. 162 (B7), the wipe effect is finished, and the decorative pattern display device 208 swayingly displays “decoration 7”-“decoration 6”-“decoration 7”, and then FIG. 162 ( As shown in B8), the display is confirmed and displayed in the lost symbol mode. Further, the hold frame UI is also displayed, and the variable icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 are also displayed. Also, the chance up meter CMT is erased. Note that the opportunity up meter CMT and/or the CUM preparation display MTY may be displayed at the time of wipeout (FIG. 162 (B6) to FIG. 162 (B7)). It may be configured such that the revival effect is more easily performed than when it is not displayed. Alternatively, when it is displayed, the revival effect may be performed without fail, and when it is not displayed, the revival effect may or may not be performed. Further, when the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed, it may be suggested that there is a possibility of shifting to the super reach after the next change.

In this production example, chance check notices are generated at all check points and are missed. However, if chance check notices do not occur at any one or more check points (chance at all check points Even if the advance notice does not occur or the chance up notice occurs at some check points), it may be lost. Further, even if a large number of chance-up notices are generated at the checkpoints, it may be more difficult to finally confirm and display the big hit symbol aspect than when the chance-up notices are not generated at all and/or some of the checkpoints. Good.

In this example of performance, when the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed, the chance up meter CMT is always displayed. However, the chance up meter CMT may or may not be displayed. Good.

Further, for example, when the power failure and power recovery occur while the CUM preparing display MTY is displayed as the prefetching notice, it may be erased at the next change or may be displayed again at the start of the next change. Further, the display of the CUM preparation display MTY at the time of the start of the next change may be displayed at the time of returning the display screen after the power failure and restoration, or may be displayed again after the display screen is restored (for example, Redisplay by animation/no animation) may be performed.

FIG. 163 is a diagram showing, step by step, an example of the effect using the chance up meter.

The example of the effects shown in FIGS. 163(A1) to 163(A8) shows that a background change notice is being given. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 163(A1), the background of the sea is displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 163(A1), the state immediately after the symbol variable display is started during the stop display with the combination of the decorative symbols with the defect of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7" is shown. At this time, the second decorative pattern has begun to change.
FIG. 163 (A2) shows a state in which the variable display of the decorative pattern is started.

In FIG. 163(A3), a background change notice, which is a type of notice (variation notice), is started. The target of the background change notice here is the variable display of the symbols being executed. In the background change notice, a sliding door image appears from the left and right, and the entire sliding screen becomes a sliding door image due to the animation of closing the sliding door (see FIG. 163 (A4)). Therefore, the hold frame UI, the hold icon h11, and the change icon h0 are overlapped from the front side by the image of the sliding doors and are invisible. Note that instead of the image of the sliding doors, an image that overlaps from the front side may appear in part of the hold frame UI, the hold icon h11, and the variation icon h0. Alternatively, the hold frame UI, the hold icon h11, and the change icon h0 may be effects in which no images overlap. The background change notice may be executed when a stage change effect, a pre-reading notice, or a change to a super-reach suggestive background is made in addition to the change notice.

In the background change notice, the big hit expectation degree may be represented by the display mode (for example, color, shape, pattern, etc.) of the appearance image (here, the image of the sliding door). It may also function as a notice of the background itself, such as the case where the color of the fusuma is green, which changes to the background of the mountains. Further, it may be possible to give advance notice that a look-ahead zone will occur, depending on the display mode of the fusuma. Here, the prefetch zone refers to an effect mode in which a dedicated prefetch background is displayed when there is a prefetch target hold in the hold. Further, a plurality of types of background change notices may be prepared.

In FIG. 163(A5), although the sliding doors are opened and the holding frame UI and the variable icon h0 are beginning to be seen, the CUM preparation display MTY appears in place of the holding icon display area HIS. At this time, the background is changed from the sea background to the super reach background. That is, the change to the background of super-reach will give advance notice that the change will shift to super-reach. It should be noted that, as a pre-reading notice, it may be possible to give notice that the pre-reading target will change to super reach. When multiple types of super reach are prepared, it may be suggested that the super reach is always developed corresponding to the displayed background. It should be noted that there may be a case where the super reach is not developed, and it may be suggested that the super reach is always developed corresponding to the background displayed on condition that the reach has been reached. Also, there may be a case where the process is transferred to another type of super reach.

In FIG. 163(A6), the fusuma is completely opened and the fusuma image disappears. Due to the background change notice, the background of the first decorative pattern display device 208L is changed to the background of super reach. The CUM preparation display MTY is completely displayed, and the display of the chance up meter CMT is foretold. The CUM preparation display MTY may start to be displayed after the fusuma image is completely opened. The chance up meter CMT may not be displayed even if the background of the super reach is displayed, or it may be always displayed.

In FIG. 163(A7), “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on each of the left symbol and the right symbol, and the state of reaching is shown.

In FIG. 163 (A8), the "decoration 7" that was swinging and changing in the left symbol display area 208a is moved below the second decorative symbol, and the "decoration 7" that was swinging and changing in the right symbol display area 208c is the second. 2 It is shown that the user is moving below the display of the number of holdings. Further, the CUM preparation in-progress display MTY is also continuously displayed during the transition to the super reach production. Also, FIG. 163(A8) shows a state in which the holding frame UI is completely framed out downward with the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS left. This production example shows an example in which the reach transition production is special. The process may be switched to the super reach after the same process as when the normal background is displayed. At this time, animation in which the display area CIS of the variable icon moves is performed. After that, the effect shown in FIG. 162(A8) to FIG. 162(A15) is performed.

163(B1)-(B3), as a result of performing the production of FIG. 162(A8)-(A11) through FIG. 163(A1)-(A8), Tonosama lost to a swordsman, “Decoration 6” is displayed on the middle pattern, and an example of an effect that causes a loss is shown.

FIG. 163 (B1) shows that the lord lost to the swordsman and "decoration 6" is displayed on the middle pattern. That is, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, "decoration 6" is displayed on the middle symbol, and it is notified that a combination of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" is lost. Further, in the chance up meter CMT, the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the final point GP, but the placard shows the character “x” indicating that it is missing, and the character SBH of Sabohani has a disappointed expression. ing. After that, after the effects of FIG. 162(B2) to FIG. 162(B5) are performed, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 163(B2) wipes out, and the background is the background at the start of symbol fluctuation. It is shown returning to the background of an ocean. In FIG. 163 (B3), the wipe effect is finished, and the decorative symbol display device 208 swayingly displays the combination of the decorations, “decoration 7”-“decoration 6”-“decoration 7”, and then the pattern of the loss. It is confirmed and displayed in a form. Also, after the wipeout, the chance up meter CMT is erased. If the background is a special background (for example, a background of super reach, etc.) at the time of wipeout, the big hit may be determined.

FIG. 163(C1) to FIG. 163(C7) show that the CUM preparation display MTY is performed as a pre-reading notice of the effect by the chance up meter CMT. Here, since the effects shown in FIGS. 163(C1) to (C3) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 162(A1) to (A3), description thereof will be omitted.

In FIG. 163 (C4), as a result of the decorative design being stopped and displayed in the order of the left design, the right design, and the middle design, it is stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative designs that are missing in “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7”, and fluctuation fluctuations occur. It is shown to be taking place. At this time, the CUM preparation in-progress display MTY is erased, but it may remain displayed.

After that, in FIG. 163 (C5), a state is displayed in which the combination of the defective decorative patterns of “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7” is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon is erased. Also at this time, the CUM preparing display MTY is not displayed, but the CUM preparing display MTY may be displayed while the decorative symbol is fixedly displayed.

Then, after the variable display of the symbols corresponding to the hold icon h11 is started, the flame effect EF101 is displayed again as shown in FIG. 163(C6), and is displayed so as to cover the entire hold icon display area HIS. .. Here, when the flame effect EF101 is re-displayed, the flame effect EF101 may be displayed in the same mode as that displayed in the previous symbol variable display, or in a different display mode (animation). It may be displayed again, or the flame effect EF101 may be displayed without animation. After that, when the flame effect EF101 is erased, the CUM preparing display MTY is displayed again as shown in FIG. 163 (C7).

That is, in this effect example, the display of the flame effect EF101 and the display of the CUM preparation display MTY in FIGS. 163(C1) to (C3) function as a look-ahead notice of the effect by the chance up meter in the next change, and FIG. It can be said that the display of the flame effect EF101 and the display of the CUM preparation display MTY in 163 (C6) to (C7) function as a notice of the effect by the chance up meter in the symbol variation display being executed.

In this example of performance, the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed every time the symbol variation display is started to give advance notice (continuous notice) of the effect by the chance up meter, but for example, the effect by the chance up meter is Count down the number of symbol fluctuation display until it is performed (for example, display "2 more fluctuations", "1 more fluctuation", etc.), and the chance up meter is displayed when the symbol fluctuation display is the target of the prefetch notice. It may be displayed. That is, such a countdown display may provide the same function as the CUM preparation display MTY. Further, the look-ahead notice may be given by setting the display mode of the hold icon to a display mode that suggests that the effect is produced by the chance up meter. This may also give the same function as the CUM preparation display MTY. Then, in the case of the symbol variation display that is the target of the prefetch notice, when the variation icon is displayed in a display mode that suggests that the production by the chance up meter is performed, when the production by the chance up meter is started The variable icon may be deleted. In the case where the symbol variation display that is the target of the read-ahead notice is displayed and the variation icon is displayed in a display mode that suggests that the production by the chance up meter is performed, when the production by the chance up meter is started The variable icon does not have to be deleted. In addition, after the chance up meter is displayed or at the timing when the chance up meter is displayed, the display mode of a part or all of the change icon is changed (for example, a display mode that suggests that the effect is produced by the chance up meter. From the default display mode).

Further, in the case where the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed every time the symbol variation display starts to give the advance notice notice (continuous notice) of the effect by the chance up meter, it is more than the symbol change display subject to the notice advance notice. When the production by the chance up meter is started in the previous symbol variation display, the CUM preparing display MTY may not be displayed while the chance up meter is being displayed, or the CUM preparing display MTY may be displayed. The CUM preparation display MTY may or may not be displayed. Further, when the CUM preparing display MTY is hidden while the chance up meter is being displayed, the CUM preparing display MTY may be hidden before the chance up meter is displayed. The CUM preparation display MTY may be hidden at the timing when the chance up meter is displayed. When the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed even while the chance up meter is being displayed, the CUM preparation display MTY may be displayed at a position overlapping the chance up meter or may be displayed at a position not overlapping. .. Also, in the type of super-reach that is performed in the symbol variation display that is the subject of prefetch notice, and in the symbol variation display that is the symbol variation display that is before the symbol variation display that is the subject of prefetch notice and the chance up meter is displayed. The type of super reach performed may be the same, may be different, or may be the same or different.

FIGS. 163(D1) to 163(D7) show that the CUM preparation display MTY is performed as a pre-reading notice of the effect by the chance up meter CMT. Here, since the effects shown in FIGS. 163(C1) to (C3) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 162(A1) to (A3), description thereof will be omitted.

163(D4) to FIG. 163(D5) are different from FIGS. 163(C4) to (C5), and the CUM preparation display MTY is continuously displayed even during the fluctuation fluctuation of the decorative pattern and the confirmation display. Is shown. An animation may be displayed on the CUM preparation display MTY. In this case, the animation may be continuously performed even while the symbol is stopped, or a different animation may be performed while the symbol is stopped. .. Further, the animation may not be performed and the still display may be performed.

After that, after the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon h11 is started, as shown in FIGS. 163 (D6) to (D7), the CUM preparing display MTY is continuously displayed.

FIG. 164 is a diagram showing, step by step, an example of the display start mode of the opportunity up meter preparation display MTY.

FIG. 164(A1) to FIG. 164(A7) show another example in which the CUM preparation in-progress display MTY is performed as a pre-reading notice of the effect by the chance up meter CMT. Here, since the effect shown in FIG. 164(A1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 162(A1), description thereof will be omitted.

In FIG. 164(A2), a game ball is won in the first special figure starting port 230, one start of the symbol variable display is suspended, and the number of suspensions is 2. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 164(A3), the second hold icon h12 is displayed, but the second hold icon h12 is displayed in a blue display mode, that is, the prefetching advance notice by the hold display is performed. Is shown. In this example of performance, the hold icon is displayed by the blue hold, but the hold icon is displayed in another display mode (for example, the display mode of the hold icon shown in FIG. 119(a)). Alternatively, the hold icon in the default display mode may be displayed.

After that, when the left design, the right design, and the middle design are stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 164 (A4), it is confirmed that the combination of the missing decorative designs of “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7” is confirmed and displayed. It is shown.

Subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 164 (A5), the variable display of the decorative symbol is started based on the earliest hold of the special figure 1. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 164(A6), the flame effect EF101 is displayed so as to cover the entire hold icon display area HIS. This gives a notice that the CUM preparation display MTY may be displayed. Thereafter, in FIG. 164(A7), the flame effect EF101 is erased, and the CUM preparing display MTY is displayed.

In this way, in this effect example, the CUM preparation-in-progress display MTY is not displayed in the symbol variation display being executed when the hold, which is the target of the prefetching notice, occurs, and the CUM is displayed in the symbol variation display started next. It is shown that the in-preparation display MTY is displayed. In this example of performance, the CUM preparation display MTY functions as a pre-reading notice, but when the hold that is the subject of the pre-reading notice is the first hold, the CUM preparing display is displayed in the next symbol fluctuation display. MTY functions as a notice of the chance up meter CMT in the change. Note that the CUM preparation display MTY functions as a look-ahead notice and may not function as the notice. Further, the CUM preparation display MTY may function as the notice and may not function as the prefetch notice. Further, the CUM preparing display MTY may function as a pre-reading notice or may function as the notice.
There are cases.

FIG. 164(B1) to FIG. 164(B11) show another example in which the CUM in-progress display MTY is performed as a pre-reading notice of the effect by the chance up meter CMT.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 164(B1), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed in the central area. In the upper left, the second decorative pattern is variably displayed. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 164(B1), a holding frame UI is displayed in the effect display area 208d. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 164(B1), since the hold is 0, no hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area HIS. On the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second reserved number display (here, "0" and "0") of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed. Further, the variation icon h0 is displayed on the pedestal hs0 in the variation icon display area CIS. The display mode of the change icon h0 is also No. 1 in FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1.

In FIG. 164 (B2), a game ball is won in the first special figure starting port 230, one start of the symbol variable display is suspended, and the number of suspensions is 1. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 164(B3), the first hold icon h11 is displayed, but the first hold icon h11 is displayed in a blue display mode, that is, the read-ahead notice by the hold display is given. Is shown. The flame effect EF101 shown in FIG. 164(B4) may be displayed without displaying the hold icon. Further, the flame effect EF101 shown in FIG. 164(B4) may be displayed during the execution of the hold icon increasing animation. 164(B4) when the flame effect EF101 shown in FIG. 164(B4) is displayed without displaying the hold icon, and after the hold icon is displayed and/or while the increase animation of the hold icon is being executed. There may be a case where the flame effect EF101 shown in is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 164(B4), the flame effect EF101 is displayed so as to cover the entire hold icon display area HIS. This gives a notice that the CUM preparation display MTY may be displayed. Then, in FIG. 164 (B5), the flame effect EF101 is erased and the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed.

In FIG. 164 (B6), as a result of the decorative design being stopped and displayed in the order of the left design, the right design, and the middle design, the display is stopped and displayed with a combination of the decorative designs with the loss of “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7”, and fluctuation fluctuations occur. It is shown to be taking place. At this time, the display of the CUM preparation display MTY is maintained.

After that, in FIG. 164 (B7), a state is displayed in which the combination of the defective decorative patterns of “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7” is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the fluctuation icon is erased, but the CUM preparation in-progress display MTY is still displayed.

Then, when the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold icon h11 is started, as shown in FIGS. 164(B8) to (B11), the hold digestion animation is started and hidden in the CUM preparation display MTY. It is shown that the moving icon moving animation in which the previously held first holding icon h11 moves toward the center of the upper surface of the pedestal hs0 in the moving icon display area CIS is being performed. In this example, the same moving icon moving animation is performed regardless of whether the CUM preparing display MTY is displayed. However, when the CUM preparing display MTY is displayed, Alternatively, a different moving icon moving animation may be performed, for example, as shown in FIG. 164 (B9′), an animation in which the moving icon h0 comes out from the center of the pedestal hs0 may be performed. Good. Note that one of the plurality of variable icon moving animations may be selected and executed regardless of whether the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed.

In this way, the CUM preparing display may be displayed as a pre-reading notice of the effect by the chance up meter in the symbol variation display being executed when the symbol variation display which is the target of the pre-reading is suspended.

FIG. 164 (C1) to FIG. 164 (C4) are diagrams showing a state in which a display start animation of the CUM preparing display MTY is being performed. Here, the effect shown in FIG. 164 (C1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 162 (A1), and therefore description thereof will be omitted.

In FIG. 164(C2), the display start animation of the CUM preparing display MTY is started, and the CUM preparing display MTY is shown rising from the lower part of the display screen. At this time, the hold icon display area HIS rises in a manner of being raised to the CUM preparation display MTY. Then, as shown in FIG. 164 (C3), the hold icon display area HIS is arranged above the CUM preparing display MTY so as not to affect the visibility of the CUM preparing display MTY. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 164 (C3), there is only one hold in the special figure 1 and only the first hold icon h11 is displayed, but the second hold icons h12 to h12- The 4-hold icon h14 is indicated by a broken line.

After that, when the animation for starting the display of the CUM preparing display MTY is completed, as shown in FIG. 164 (C4), a balloon with the letters "STANDBY" is displayed in the vicinity of the character SBH of Sabohani, and the chance up meter CMT is displayed. Is announced in advance. At this time, the balloon is displayed so as to partially overlap the hold icons (the second hold icon h12 and the third hold icon h13 in the example shown in FIG. 164 (C4)). It should be noted that at least one of the four hold icons may be displayed so that the entire hold icon overlaps the balloon, or the entire four hold icons may be displayed so as to overlap the balloon. Good. In addition, in this example of effect, the balloons are arranged so as to overlap a part of the hold icon display area HIS, but they may overlap the whole hold icon display area HIS.

Note that the CUM preparing display MTY may be displayed in a mode as shown in FIG. 164(C3′) instead of the CUM preparing display MTY shown in FIG. 164(C3). Specifically, the frame of the CUM-in-progress display MTY may be extended upward, and the hold icon display area HIS may be displayed on the upper surface of the frame. The CUM preparing display MTY may have a display mode different from the CUM preparing display MTY displayed during super reach.

FIG. 164(D1) to FIG. 164(D2) are, for example, an example of effects following FIG. 162(A1), and show another display example of the flame effect that gives advance notice of the CUM preparation display MTY. There is.

FIG. 164(D1) shows a state in which a large flame effect EF102 different from the flame effect EF101 shown in FIG. 162(A2) is displayed. The large flame effect EF102 is an effect display that is displayed so as to cover the entire holding frame UI in a visually difficult manner. It is foretold that the CUM preparation display is also displayed by the effect EF102 of this great flame. Note that when the large flame effect EF102 is displayed, the jackpot pattern mode may be more easily confirmed and displayed than when the large flame effect EF101 shown in FIG. 162(A2) is displayed. You may make it easy to give a chance up notice.

After that, as shown in FIG. 164 (D2), when the large flame effect EF102 is erased, the CUM preparing display MTY is displayed. At this time, the holding frame UI is framed out downward leaving the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS. Further, at this time, the display mode of the variable icon h0 does not change and is set as the default display mode. However, the display mode of the variable icon h0 may change before and after the display of the large flame effect EF102. Further, the display mode of the variable icon h0 may be changed before and after the display of the large flame effect EF102. After that, for example, after the effect shown in FIG. 162(A4) to FIG. 162(A11) is performed, the effect shown in FIG. 29(3) to FIG. 29(25) is performed, and thereafter, the effect shown in FIG. 162(A12). -The effect shown in the figure (A15) or the figure 162 (b1)-the figure (B8) is performed.

FIG. 165 is a diagram showing, step by step, an example of a display start mode of the chance up meter preparation display MTY.

FIG. 165(A1) to FIG. 165(A3) are, for example, an example of effects following FIG. 162(A1), and show an example of effects in which the CUM preparation display is displayed in silhouette while the flame effect EF101 is displayed. ..

The effect example shown in FIG. 165(A1) is the same as the effect example shown in FIG. 162(A2). After that, in FIG. 165(A2), while the flame effect EF101 is being displayed, the CUM preparing silhouette display MTYa that imitates the CUM preparing display MTY is displayed on the back side of the flame effect EF101. .. At this time, the CUM-in-progress silhouette display MTYa is entirely displayed in black, and it is as if the silhouette display is being performed. The display of the CUM preparing silhouette display MTYa also functions as a notice that the effect is produced by the chance up meter CMT. It should be noted that it is suggested that a plurality of display modes of the CUM preparation silhouette display MTYa are prepared and the display mode is changed (promoted) to increase the occurrence rate of the chance up notice in the performance by the chance up meter CMT. Alternatively, it may be suggested that the reliability of the big hit increases.

After that, a reach state is formed, and FIG. 165 (A3) shows a state of transition to super reach. During this time, the CUM preparing silhouette display MTYa is continuously displayed. The CUM preparing silhouette display MTYa may be deleted while the flame effect EF101 is displayed. In this case, for example, when the CUM preparing silhouette display MTYa is hidden, a deletion animation is performed. However, it may be hidden without the deletion animation being performed. After this, for example, after the effect shown in FIG. 162(A11) is performed, the effect shown in FIG. 29(2) to FIG. 25(25) is performed, and thereafter, the effect shown in FIG. 162(A12) to FIG. 162(A15). ) Or the effect shown in FIG. 162(B1) to FIG. 162(B8).

FIG. 165(B1) to FIG. 165(B6) are, for example, one example of the effect following FIG. 162(A1), and show another example of the effect of displaying the CUM preparation display MTY.

FIG. 165 (B1) shows that the wipe effect has started. This wipe effect is a display in which the display screen is gradually switched from the lower left corner to the upper right corner of the display screen in a display mode as if the calendar were turning. In FIG. 165(B1), the wipe effect is started in a state where the background of the sea is displayed, but the background has not changed before and after the wipe effect. However, in FIG. 165(B1), the CUM preparing display MTY is displayed at the position where the hold icon display area HIS was displayed, and thereby, it is foretold that the production by the chance up meter is started. At the timing shown in FIG. 165(B1), a part of the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed in a visually recognizable manner. The background may be changed before and after the wipe effect.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 165(B2), the display area after switching (turned back side) is enlarged, and most of the CUM preparation display MTY is visible. In the display area after switching, a notice regarding the chance up meter CMT may be given, or a look-ahead notice or a change notice relevant to the chance up meter CMT may be given.

FIG. 165(B3) shows a state in which the display area after switching is further enlarged. When the background is turned up in the wipe effect, a notice about the chance up meter CMT other than the CUM preparation display MTY or a notice not related to the chance up meter CMT may be partially visible, or when the background is turned up, the CUM is displayed. The in-preparation display MTY and other notices may be visible. After that, as shown in FIGS. 165(B4) to (B6), the display area after switching is enlarged so that the background is turned, and the display area after switching is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 165(B6). Are all visible. After that, for example, the effect shown in FIG. 162(A4) to FIG. 162(A11) is performed, then the effect shown in FIG. 29(3) to FIG. 29(25) is performed, and thereafter, the effect shown in FIG. 162(A12). )-Figure (A15) or Figure 162 (B1)-Figure (B8). In the state of FIG. 165(B1), the CUM preparing display MTY may be displayed before the start of the wipe effect, in which case the CUM preparing display MTY is continuously displayed in the same display mode after the wipe effect. May be. Further, the rank-up CUM preparation display MTY, which will be described later, may be displayed after the wipe effect. Further, there may be a case where the CUM preparing display MTY is continuously displayed in the same display mode after the wipe effect, and a case where the upgraded CUM preparing display MTY is displayed.

FIG. 165(C1) to FIG. 165(C4) are an example of the effect following FIG. 162(A1), and show another example of the effect of starting the display of the CUM preparing display MTY.

FIG. 165(C1) shows a state where the background screen switching effect is started. As shown in FIG. 165(C1), the background image switching effect is such that after the background image before switching is reduced and displayed, the right side of the background image before switching is in the depth direction as shown in FIG. 165(C2). While moving, the right side is displayed in the depth direction, and the background image after switching appears on the right side of the display screen. The background image after this switching is displayed with the left side facing the depth direction. In the background image after switching, it is shown that the CUM preparing display MTY is displayed at the display position of the hold icon display area HIS in the background image before switching. The background image before switching and the background image after switching may be displayed side by side, and the background image after switching may not be displayed, and the background image before switching may be displayed again. That is, the CUM preparation display MTY may not be displayed. In this effect example, the CUM preparing display MTY is displayed in this background screen switching effect. However, after the CUM preparing display MTY is displayed (for example, the display mode of the hold icon is changed), the display is changed. The background image may be displayed. Further, the background image after the switching may be the background image of the notice, for example, the background image displaying the notice of intense heat may be displayed.

After that, in FIG. 165 (C3), the background image before switching is erased, and the background image after switching including the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed in a front-facing manner. At this time, the background image after switching is reduced and displayed. After that, the background image after switching is enlarged and displayed on the entire display screen as shown in FIG. 165 (C4), and thereafter, for example, the effect shown in FIG. 162 (A4) to (A11) is performed. 29(3) to FIG. 25(25), the effects shown in FIG. 162(A12) to FIG. 162(A15) or FIG. 162(B1) to FIG. Is done.

FIG. 165(D1) is an example of the effect following FIG. 162(A2), in which the flame effect EF101 is displayed, but the CUM preparing display MTY is not displayed, and the notice of gasse is displayed. The situation is shown. When the flame effect EF101 is displayed, the CUM preparation in-progress display MTY may be displayed without fail. It should be noted that the symbol variation display in which the notice display of the gambling has been performed may be the loss confirmation. Further, in the symbol variation display in which the notice display of Gase is displayed, it may be a big hit. In addition, even if the flame effect EF101 is displayed after the next change after the notice of gasse is made in the case where there is one or more holdings at the time when the symbol variation display for which the notice of gasse is made is started. Good. In this case, the pattern in which the notice display of Gase is displayed until the pattern variation display subject to the look-ahead notice is started (CUM preparation display MTY is not displayed until the end) and the symbol variation display subject to the look-ahead notice In, there may be a pattern in which the CUM preparation display MTY is finally displayed.

FIG. 165(E1) to FIG. 165(E9) are an example of effects following FIG. 162(A1), for example, and show a state in which a timer notice effect is being performed.

FIG. 165(E1) to FIG. 165(E2) show that the timer notice display TMY rises from below the hold icon display area HIS and the timer notice display TMY lifts the hold icon display area HIS. At this time, the characters "STANDBY" are displayed on the timer notice display TMY, indicating that the start of the timer notice is suspended. When the timer announcement display by the timer announcement display TMY in this example of the presentation is performed, it is announced that the hold icon or the variable icon changes. Compared with the effect example shown in FIG. 164 (C2), it may be possible to know whether or not the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed depending on whether or not the character SBH of Savohani appears. It may be difficult to specify whether the CUM preparation display MTY or the timer advance notice display TMY is displayed. If the flame effect EF101 is displayed and the flame effect EF101 is erased before the CUM preparing display MTY and the timer notice display TMY are displayed, the CUM preparing display MTY and the timer notice display TMY are displayed. Either may be displayed. Note that the timer notice in this example of performance is a notice of a change in the hold icon (variable icon), but the timer notice as shown in FIGS. 20 to 27, 38, and 40 to 48 was made. It goes without saying that any notice production executed as a result can be performed. Also, the display mode of the timer advance notice display is not limited to that shown in FIG. 165, and it is applicable to any of the above-mentioned timer advance notice display display modes. Further, in this effect example, both the timer notice display TMY and the CUM preparation display MTY may be performed below the hold icon display area HIS. In this case, the area where the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed. And the area in which the timer notice display TMY is displayed may be displayed in an overlapping manner, or may be displayed so as not to overlap.

In FIG. 165 (E3), the display on the timer notice display TMY is changed to “10:00”, and then the countdown is started. That is, it is suggested that the display mode of the hold icon (variable icon) may change after 10 seconds have elapsed from the start of the countdown in the timer notice display. The timing of starting the countdown in the timer advance notice display is not limited to the above-described one. For example, after the display of "STANDBY" is changed to the seconds notation, the start of the countdown may be waited for a while. In addition, the number of seconds may be indicated from the stage when the display of the timer notice display TMY is started, and in this case, the countdown may be started after the display animation of the timer notice display TMY is completed, or the timer notice display. The countdown may be started from the stage when the display of TMY is started.

FIG. 165 (E4) shows that 0.01 seconds have elapsed since the countdown was started. After that, when 10 seconds have elapsed from the start of the countdown, the timer display becomes "00:00" as shown in FIG. 165 (E5).

Then, as shown in FIG. 165(E6), in the timer notice display TMY, the display of “00:00” is switched to the display of “change!”, and at least a part of the first hold icon h11 is overlapped. As described above, the effect EF 103 is displayed and the change animation of the hold icon is started. This suggests that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes. Here, the change animation of the hold icon may be started after switching to the character display of "change !!", or "change !!" is displayed after the change animation of the hold icon is started. Alternatively, the change animation of the hold icon may be started at the timing of switching to the character display of "change!!".

After that, when the change animation of the hold icon ends and the effect EF103 is erased, as shown in FIG. 165 (E7), the first hold icon h11 in the default display mode is changed to the blue hold display mode. .. That is, it is shown that the rank of the hold icon is increased by two levels. In addition, the rank of the hold icon may be increased by one step before or after the change animation of the hold icon, or may be increased by three or more steps. In addition, the rank may be lowered.

Thereafter, the timer notice display TMY is subjected to a frame-out animation in which the frame-out is displayed below the display screen as shown in FIGS. 165(E8) to (E9). Due to this frame-out animation, the hold icon display area HIS also descends and returns to the default display position.

In this example of performance, both the timer notice display TMY and the CUM preparing display may be displayed. For example, the timer notice display TMY is moved further upward and displayed below the timer notice display TMY. The CUM in-progress display MTY may be displayed on the screen. Further, the hold icon display area HIS may be moved and displayed again within the same symbol change after the end of the timer notice effect, and the CUM preparing display MTY may be displayed. Further, the hold icon display area HIS may be moved and displayed and the CUM preparing display MTY may be displayed after the symbol variation started next after the end of the timer notice effect.

165(F1) to FIG. 165(F2) are, for example, an example of effects following FIG. 162(A2), and show another display mode of the CUM preparation display MTY.

The effect example shown in FIG. 165 (F1) corresponds to the effect example shown in FIG. 162 (A3). That is, in this effect example, the chance up meter CMT displays the position of the check point (the second check point CP2 in this effect example) where the chance up notice may occur in the meter portion of the CUM preparing display MTY. It is shown that the notification is given before the notification. In this case, the advance notice of a chance may be always issued at the checkpoint previously notified by the CUM preparation display MTY. In addition, when the checkpoint is informed in advance by the CUM preparation display MTY, it is possible to make the chance advance notice more likely to occur than when the checkpoint is not informed. Further, in the CUM preparation display MTY, some or all of the check points displayed in the chance up meter CMT may be displayed without fail. In this case, the checkpoint may be displayed according to the probability of occurrence of the chance up notice, or the checkpoint may be displayed regardless of the probability of occurrence. After that, the effect shown in FIG. 162(A4) to FIG. 162(A7) is performed, and then the effect shown in FIG. 165(F2) is performed. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 165(F2) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 162(A8) except that the checkpoint is displayed on the CUM preparation display MTY, and therefore the description thereof will be omitted. A check point is displayed when the display of the CUM preparing display MTY is started, and is displayed at a predetermined timing (for example, when a reach is generated or a super reach is reached) after the display of the CUM preparing display MTY is started. The number of check points may be increased.

FIG. 166 is a diagram showing a modified example of the display mode of the opportunity up meter preparing display MTY.

FIG. 166(A1) to FIG. 166(A3) are, for example, an example of effects following FIG. 162(A3), in which at least a part of the check points are displayed during the display of the CUM preparation display MTY, and the check is performed. The point shows that the chance up notice is always executed.

The effect example shown in FIG. 166(A1) is an effect example corresponding to FIG. 165(F1). In FIG. 166(A1), the second checkpoint CP2 displayed on the CUM preparation display MTY is marked in red, and the word “UP” indicates that the jackpot reliability has increased due to the appearance of the notice. Is displayed in the information, which is a display mode for notifying that a chance-up notice has occurred, as shown in FIG. 29(6) and described above. That is, in this example of performance, by performing this display, it is informed that the advance notice of the chance is surely given. It should be noted that the chance up notice may not actually be given, and in this case, the game may proceed as if the chance up notice had been given.

The effect example shown in FIG. 166(A2) corresponds to the effect example shown in FIG. 165(F2). As shown in FIG. 22(A2), the second check point CP2 remains marked and displayed in red even after shifting to the super reach.

After that, as shown in FIG. 166(A3), when the CUM preparation display MTY is switched to the chance up meter CMT, other check points (first check point CP1, third check point CP3) not displayed are displayed. Then, the production by the chance up meter is started. In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 166(A3′), the display of the second check point CP2 may be cleared to the default display mode. After FIG. 166(A3) or FIG. 166(A3′), for example, the effects shown in FIG. 29(3) to FIG. 29(25) are performed, and then FIG. 162(A12) to FIG. 162(A15) or the same. The effects shown in FIGS. (B1) to (B8) are performed. In addition, when a part or all of the check points are displayed by the CUM preparation display MTY, the chance up notice may not be given by the displayed check points. In this case, the chances are displayed at the displayed check points. The advance notice may or may not be given, or the chance up notice may or may not be given. In addition, when a part or all of the checkpoints are displayed by the CUM preparation display MTY, the chance up notice is not actually given, but the game may proceed as if the chance up notice was given. In this case, the checkpoint that is considered to have been given a chance up may or may not notify that the chance advance notice has occurred, and may or may not notify. Good.

FIG. 166(B1) is a modification of the effect example shown in FIG. 166(A1). In FIG. 166 (B1), the second checkpoint CP2 is displayed in a red-marked state on the CUM preparation display MTY, but "UP" indicating that the notice has appeared is not displayed. It is shown. In this case, for example, "UP" may be displayed after the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the second check point CP2 and a chance up notice is generated.

FIG. 166(C1) is a modification of the effect example shown in FIG. 166(A1). In FIG. 166 (C1), the second checkpoint CP2 is displayed in the CUM preparation display MTY, but it is not marked in red, and the characters “UP” are not displayed, and the “UP” It is shown that the "question mark" is displayed instead of the characters. This suggests that a chance-up notice may occur at some check points in the effect produced by the chance-up meter CMT. For example, the appearance rate of the chance-up notice may be changed in the order of “question mark”<“!”<“UP”.

FIG. 166(D1) is a modification of the effect example shown in FIG. 166(A1). In FIG. 166 (D1), all of the check points displayed on the chance up meter CMT are displayed on the CUM preparation display MTY, and characters such as “question mark”, “!”, and “UP” are displayed for each check point. An additional note may be provided to indicate the degree of expectation of occurrence of a chance-up notice for each checkpoint.

FIG. 166(E1) is a modification of the effect example shown in FIG. 162(A3). FIG. 166(E1) shows that the balloon in the CUM preparing display MTY is changing from “STANDBY” to “high chance of increasing chance”. When this display is made, it is suggested that the chance up notice is likely to occur at each check point in the effect produced by the chance up meter CMT. In the balloon, "STANDBY" may be displayed once and then changed to "Chance of high chance up", or "STANDBY" and "High probability of chance up" may be alternately displayed. You may. Moreover, the display of "high chance of increasing chance" may be displayed without displaying "STANDBY".

FIG. 166(F1) is a modification of the effect example shown in FIG. 162(A3). FIG. 166 (F1) shows that the balloon in the CUM preparation display MTY is changing from “STANDBY” to “One chance up confirmation”. When this display is performed, it is suggested that the chance up notice is always issued once in the effect by the chance up meter CMT. As described above, in this example of performance, it is difficult to specify at which checkpoint the chance-up notice occurs. However, the chance-up notice must always occur n times (in this example, once). Has foretold. It should be noted that the number of chance-up notices to be necessarily generated may be once or twice or more. In addition, in the balloon, "STANDBY" may be displayed once and then changed to "one chance up confirmation", or "STANDBY" and "one chance up confirmation" may be alternately displayed. You may. Further, the display of “one chance up confirmation” may be displayed without displaying “STANDBY”.

FIG. 166 (G1) is a modification of the effect example shown in FIG. 162 (A3). In FIG. 166 (G1), a placard with “V” displayed at the final point GP in the CUM preparation display MTY is arranged to inform that the big hit is confirmed. Further, in addition to “V”, for example, a placard displaying “development” may be arranged, and in this case, it may be notified that the super-reach will be established. .. Also, by arranging the placard with the "question mark" displayed, when the character of Savohani reaches the final point, there will be some effect (for example, the development of super-reach or the development of super-reach will not be supported. It may be suggested that the effect of the pattern) is performed. Further, even when the placard informs that some effect will be performed, there may be a case where no effect is performed and a case where no effect is performed.

FIG. 166(H1) is a modification of the effect example shown in FIG. 162(A3). In FIG. 166 (H1), a placard with "intense heat" displayed at the final point GP in the CUM preparing display MTY is arranged, and (a) an advance notice regarding the symbol variation display with the CUM preparing display MTY displayed. There may be a case where it is performed, or (b) a pre-reading notice and/or a notice of notice relating to the symbol variation display in which the chance up meter CMT is displayed may be given. In addition, it may be performed only in the case of the above (a) or may be performed only in the case of the above (b).

FIG. 166(I1) is a modification of the effect example shown in FIG. 162(A3). In FIG. 166 (I1), a placard with “V” displayed at the final point GP in the CUM preparation display MTY is arranged, and a display that the character SBH of Sabohani has reached the final point GP is displayed. So, I have announced that the big hit is confirmed. In this case, when the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT, the character SBH of Sabohani may be displayed at the start point SP and may be moved and displayed, or may be displayed at the final point GP. It may be left as is. Further, even when "V" is displayed on the placard, it may be a big hit or may not be a big hit. Further, (a) when the advance notice regarding the symbol variation display in which the CUM preparing display MTY is displayed is performed, or (b) the look-ahead notice and/or the advance notice regarding the symbol variation display in which the chance up meter CMT is displayed. It may be performed. In addition, it may be performed only in the case of the above (a) or may be performed only in the case of the above (b).

FIG. 166(J1) is a modified example of the effect example shown in FIG. 166(I1), and shows that the character SBH of Sabohani is also displayed at the start point SP. That is, it is shown that the character SBH of Sabohani is placed at both the start point SP and the end point GP, thereby notifying that the big hit is confirmed. In this case, when the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT, the sabotani character SBH at the start point SP may be moved or displayed, or may not be moved and displayed. The character SBH of Sabohani at the start point SP may be deleted, and only the character SBH of Sabohani displayed at the final point GP may remain displayed.

FIG. 166(K1) to FIG. 166(K2) are, for example, an example of the effect following FIG. 162(A2), and show that another notice display is being displayed even while the CUM preparation display MTY is being displayed. ing. FIG. 166(K1) corresponds to the effect example shown in FIG. 162(A3). After that, as shown in FIG. 166 (K2), it is shown that the conversation advance notice is started during the display of the CUM preparing display MTY. When the conversation announcement is started, the lord's conversation image CI1 in which the character display of "chance" is displayed together with the lord's character is displayed. It goes without saying that a notice other than the conversation notice may be given while the CUM preparation display TMY is being displayed. In this example of performance, the CUM preparing display TMY is started before other notices, but other notices that are always started before the CUM preparing display TMY (for example, a hold icon or a variable icon). There may be a notice that the display mode of the icon changes such as a notice or a notice that is started at the start of the change), and another notice display that is always started at the same time as the CUM preparation display TMY. Further, even if another notice of the same type is given, there may be a case where the display is started at the same timing as the case where the display is started prior to the CUM preparation display TMY and a case where the display is started later. Note that while the CUM preparation display TMY is being displayed, other notices may not be given, or only a particular notice of a plurality of types of notices can be executed. It may not be executed. For example, during the display of the CUM preparation display TMY, the effect of changing the display mode of the non-displayed hold icon may or may not be performed. Specifically, while the CUM preparation display TMY is being displayed, the "box" notice icon YI shown in FIG. 121 or 122 appears as a "change" notice display, and then the hold icon or the variable icon is displayed. The notice effect that changes the mode may or may not be performed. Further, during the display of the CUM preparation display TMY, an icon change notice based on the icon "HIB" of the "bomber" shown in FIGS. 148 to 161 may be executed. In this case, for example, the icon IHI of the "BOMBER" or The effects displayed on the bullet icon BTI, the bombed hold icon, and the variable icon may be displayed so as to overlap the CUM preparation display TMY, or may be displayed so as to overlap.

FIG. 166 (L1) to FIG. 166 (L2) are, for example, an example of the effect following FIG. 162 (A3), and an example in which only a part of the CUM preparing display MTY is displayed as the CUM preparing display. Showing. In FIG. 166 (L1), only the character SBH of Savohani and the balloon of “STANDBY” in the CUM preparation display MTY are displayed, and the other configurations are hidden. Thereby, the display of the chance up meter CMT may be announced in advance. Note that the configuration to be displayed is not limited to the one described above, and any of the elements constituting the CUM preparing display MTY may be displayed. FIG. 166 (L2) shows a state in which the process then shifts to the super reach. As shown in FIG. 166 (L2), after a part of the CUM preparation display is displayed, the display mode may be maintained until the chance up meter CMT is displayed. The display mode may be changed in such a manner that the constituent elements of the CUM preparation display are added according to the progress of.

The example effects shown in FIGS. 166(M1) to (M7) correspond to the example effects shown in FIGS. 29(3) to 29(8). That is, FIG. 29(3) shows that the character SBH of the sabotani progresses on the meter after the production by the chance up meter CMT is started, but in FIG. 166 (M1), the chance up inside is shown. Although the effect is produced by the meter CMT, the chance up meter CMT is not displayed, and the CUM preparation display MTY is still displayed. After that, in FIG. 166 (M2) corresponding to FIG. 29 (4), the state that the boy character BOY appears from the left side of the display screen and moves toward the right side is shown. That is, it is shown that a chance up notice is given due to the appearance of the boy character BOY. However, since the chance up meter CMT is not displayed and the CUM preparation display MTY is still displayed, it is difficult to recognize the progress of the production in the chance up meta CMT. In addition, in FIG. 29(5), a balloon with the letters “Chance Up Boy Passed” is displayed to notify the occurrence of a chance up notice, whereas in FIG. 166 (M3), CUM preparation is in progress. Since the display MTY is still displayed, such notification is not made. Thereafter, also in FIG. 166 (M4) corresponding to FIG. 29(6), the CUM preparation in-progress display MTY is still displayed. On the other hand, in FIG. 29(6), the first check point CP1 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and the letters “UP” indicating that the reliability of the jackpot is improved due to the appearance of the notice. Displayed at the top, the history of the occurrence of the notice is shown. After that, in FIG. 166 (M5), the CUM preparation display MTY is still displayed. On the other hand, in FIG. 29(7) corresponding to FIG. 166(M5), the sabotani character SBH has started moving. Then, as shown in FIG. 166 (M6), the balloon of the character SBH of Sabohani is erased, suggesting that the CUM preparation display MTY is switched to the chance up meter CMT. FIG. 166(M7) corresponds to the effect example shown in FIG. 29(8). In this effect example, as described above, the effect is internally produced by the chance up meter CMT, and the first check point CP1 is marked in red as a history of the opportunity up notice at the first check point CP1. At the same time, the letters "UP" are also displayed. It is to be noted that the position of the character SBH of Sabohani has reached near the second check point CP2, and it is informed that the chance up notice corresponding to the second check point CP2 may occur.

As described above, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 166 (M1) to (M7), the effect by the chance up meter CMT is progressing at the same time as the start of the super reach, but the super reach is displayed as a display. It is shown that the CUM preparation display MTY is being switched to the chance up meter CMT during the process. At this time, regarding the chance up notice (appearance of the boy) corresponding to the first check point CP1 that occurred during the display of the CUM preparation display MTY, after the chance up meter CMT is displayed as the chance up notice has occurred. It is displayed as a history. The history may not be displayed. Further, the timing of switching from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT may be the timing at which the super reach is started, or may be the timing in the middle of the super reach. When it is the timing of starting the super-reach, the jackpot pattern mode may be more easily confirmed and displayed than when it is the timing in the middle of the super-reach, and vice versa. Further, the timing at which the CUM preparation display MTY is switched to the chance up meter CMT may be the timing at which the super-reach always starts or may be at the timing during the super-reach.

FIG. 167 is a diagram showing a modified example of the display mode of the chance up meter preparing display.

FIGS. 167(A1) to (A9) show modified examples of the display mode of the CUM preparing display. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 167(A1) to (A2) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 162(A1) to (A2), description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 167(A3) shows a state in which the flame effect EF101 is erased and a CUM preparing display MTYb of a mode different from the CUM preparing display MTY shown in FIG. 162(A3) is displayed. The CUM preparation display MTYb shown in FIG. 167(A3) is displayed at a position where its display position overlaps with the display position of the chance up meter CMT. It should be noted that it may be displayed at the same position as the display position of the chance up meter CMT. The CUM-in-progress display MTYb is displayed in a mode in which the letters "meter in preparation" are added in a rectangular frame. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 167(A4) to (A8) are performed. The production shown in FIGS. 167(A4) to (A8) is different from that of FIG. 162(A4), except that the display mode of the CUM preparing display MTYb is different from that of the CUM preparing display MTY shown in FIG. 162. Since the effect shown in (A8) of the same figure is the same, description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 167(A9) shows a state in which the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTYb to the chance up meter CMT. At this time, for example, a CUM preparation display MTYb may be erased and a chance up meter CMT may be displayed by a chance up meter switching animation. The chance up meter switching animation may be, for example, a mode in which after displaying the effect and hiding the CUM preparation display MTYb, the chance up meter CMT appears when the effect is erased. It should be noted that the CUM preparation display MTYb may be switched to the chance up meter CMT without displaying the chance up meter switching animation. After that, for example, the effect shown in FIG. 162(A10) to FIG. 162(A15) or the effect shown in FIG. 162(B1) to FIG. 162(B8) will be performed. In the example of the effect, when the effect by the chance up meter CMT is started, the balloon with the character "START!!" may be displayed or the balloon may not be displayed.

FIG. 167(B1) to FIG. 167(B5) show another mode in which the CUM preparing display MTYb shown in FIG. 167(A3) appears. FIG. 167(B1) is, for example, an effect following FIG. 168(A1).

FIG. 167(B1) to FIG. 167(B2) show that the CUM preparing display MTYb rises from below the holding icon display area HIS and the holding icon display area HIS is lifted by the CUM preparing display MTYb. There is.

In FIG. 167 (B3), a state in which “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol and the reach state is shown.

In FIG. 167 (B4), “decoration 7” that was swinging and fluctuating in the left symbol display area 208a before the super reach effect is moved to a position below the second decorative symbol, and swinging is fluctuating in the right symbol display area 208c. The "decoration 7" that was being displayed moves to the bottom of the second hold number display. Further, in this example of effect, the CUM preparation in-progress display MTYb is also continuously displayed during the transition to the super reach effect. Also, in FIG. 167 (B4), the erasing animation is started and the holding frame UI moves downward. At this time, the hold icon display area HIS moves downward so as to be hidden behind the back side of the CUM preparation display MTYb, and then becomes difficult to visually recognize as shown in FIG. 167 (B5). Further, the variable icon display area CIS is framed out below the display screen, leaving the pedestal hs0. That is, FIG. 167 (B5) shows a state in which the holding frame UI is completely framed out downward with the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS left. In this example of the effect, the deletion animation is performed at the timing when the hold icon is hidden, but the hold icon may be displayed without performing the deletion animation.

FIG. 168 is a diagram showing a modification of the display mode of the opportunity up meter preparation display.

FIG. 168(A1) to FIG. 168(A11) show modified examples of the display position of the CUM preparing display MTY. Since the effect shown in FIG. 168(A1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 162(A1), description thereof will be omitted.

In FIG. 168(A2), the explosion effect EF104 is displayed in the central part on the left side of the display screen, and the state in which the CUM preparation display appearance animation is started is shown. That is, in this effect example, the CUM preparation display MTY is not started to be displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, but is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen. The explosion effect EF104 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the decorative pattern. Further, the CUM preparing display MTY may appear without the CUM preparing display appearance animation being performed. That is, the CUM preparation display MTY may be displayed without displaying the explosion effect EF104.

Then, as shown in FIG. 168(A3), when the explosion effect EF104 is deleted, the CUM preparation display MTY appears. Unlike the display position in FIG. 162(A3), the display position of the CUM preparation display MTY is substantially the center of the left end portion of the display screen. In this effect example, the display position of the CUM preparation display MTY is different from the display position of the chance up meter CMT.

In FIG. 168(A4), a state in which "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol and the reach state is shown. At this time, the CUM-preparing display MTY is displayed so as to overlap the front side of the decorative design, and the decorative design is more difficult to visually recognize than the state in which the decorative design is not overlapped by the CUM-preparing display MTY. ing. It should be noted that the CUM preparing display MTY may be arranged on the rear side of the decorative design and may be displayed so as to overlap the decorative design. Further, it may not be displayed at a position overlapping the decorative design.

In FIG. 168(A5), “decoration 7” that was swinging and fluctuating in the left symbol display area 208a is moved to below the second decorative symbol before shifting to the super reach effect, and swinging is fluctuating in the right symbol display area 208c. The "decoration 7" that was being displayed moves to the bottom of the second hold number display. In addition, in this example of performance, the CUM preparing display MTY is also displayed during the transition to the super reach effect. At this time, the CUM preparing display MTY is displayed so as to overlap the front side of the decorative pattern. At the timing shown in FIG. 168(A4), even if the CUM preparing display MTY is displayed overlapping the front side of the decorative pattern, the CUM preparing display MTY is made at the timing shown in FIG. 168(A5). May be overlapped and displayed behind the decorative pattern. Further, it may not be displayed at a position overlapping the decorative design. Also, in FIG. 168(A5), the downward movement of the holding frame UI is started, and a state is shown in which the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS is left and scrolled out downward of the display screen. .. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 168(A6) to (A8) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 168(A6) to (A8) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 162(A6) to (A8), except that the display position of the CUM preparation display MTY is different. Therefore, the description is omitted.

FIG. 168(A9) shows a state in which a moving animation in which the CUM preparing display MTY moves downward is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 168(A10), when the CUM preparation display MTY moves to the lower left corner of the display screen, the moving animation is completed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 168 (A11), the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT. In this example of performance, the display of the CUM preparation display MTY is switched to the chance up meter CMT after the moving animation is completed, and then the character SBH of Sabohani starts moving (the former), but the CUM preparation display MTY. The character SBH of the sabotani may start moving (the latter) at the same time as switching from the chance up meter CMT to the chance up meter CMT. The timing at which the Sabohani character SBH starts moving may be the former or the latter, and may be performed only by the former or only by the latter. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 162(A10) to FIG. 162(A15) or FIG. 162(B1) to FIG. 162(B8) are performed.

168(B1) to FIG. 168(B5) show, for example, another effect example following FIG. 168(A2).

Unlike FIG. 168(A3), FIG. 168(B1) shows that the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed in a size smaller than the size of the chance up meter CMT. The size may be displayed larger than the chance up meter CMT. Further, the display size of the CUM preparation display MTY may be the same as or different from the display size of the chance up meter CMT. Further, the display size of the CUM preparation display MTY and the display size of the chance up meter CMT may be the same or may be different from each other.

FIG. 168(B2) shows a state where the CUM preparation in-progress display MTY of the reduced size is displayed and the state of shifting to the super reach is performed. After that, the moving animation in which the CUM preparing display MTY moves at the timing shown in FIG. 168 (B3) is started. At this time, the balloon with "STANDBY" is erased. The balloon may be erased before the moving animation starts, may be erased after the moving animation starts, or may be erased at the timing when the moving animation starts. Further, as will be described later, the balloon may be deleted after the CUM preparing display MTY is enlarged and displayed, or the balloon may be deleted before being enlarged and displayed.

FIG. 168(B4) shows a state where the moving animation is completed and the CUM preparation display MTY has moved to the display position of the chance up meter CMT. At this time, the CUM preparation display MTY is enlarged and displayed, and the display size becomes the same as the display size of the chance up meter CMT. The display position may be switched without performing the moving animation, and in this case, the display size of the CUM preparing display MTY is reduced before and after the display position is switched to the same display size as the chance up meter CMT. You may do it. Further, the CUM preparing display MTY may be enlarged and displayed after the moving animation is completed, the moving animation may be started after the enlarged display, or the CUM preparing display MTY is moved by the moving animation. The display may be enlarged gradually while the display is being performed. When the moving animation is completed and the CUM preparation display MTY moves to the display position of the chance up meter CMT, as shown in FIG. 168(B5), the CUM preparation display MTY is switched to the chance up meter CMT, and then the chance up. The production by the meter CMT is started.

168(C1) to FIG. 168(C4) show, for example, another effect example following FIG. 168(A2).

Unlike FIG. 168(A3), FIG. 168(C1) shows an example in which only part of the CUM preparing display MTY is displayed as the CUM preparing display. In FIG. 168(C1), only the character SBH of Savohani and the balloon of “STANDBY” in the CUM preparation display MTY are displayed, and the other configurations are hidden. Thereby, the display of the chance up meter CMT may be announced in advance. Note that the configuration to be displayed is not limited to the one described above, and any of the elements constituting the CUM preparing display MTY may be displayed.

FIG. 168(C2) shows a state in which the state then shifts to the super reach. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 168 (C3), a switching animation that is an animation for switching from the CUM preparation display to the chance up meter CMT is started. When the switching animation is started, the explosion effect EF105 is displayed so as to overlap the CUM preparation display, and the appearance that the CUM preparation display disappears is displayed.

After that, when the explosion effect EF105 is erased, the CUM preparation display is also erased, and the chance up meter CMT is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen as shown in FIG. 168 (C4). The CUM preparing display may be switched to the chance up meter CMT without switching animation, or the switching animation may be performed and the CUM preparing display is switched to the chance up meter CMT. In some cases, the CUM preparation display may be switched to the chance up meter CMT without switching animation.

FIG. 169 is a diagram showing a modification of the display mode of the chance up meter preparation display.

169(A1) to FIG. 169(A11) show modified examples of the display mode and display position of the CUM preparation display. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 169(A1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 162(A1), and therefore description thereof will be omitted.

In FIG. 169(A2), the explosion effect EF106 is displayed in the central part on the left side of the display screen, and a state in which the CUM preparation display appearance animation is started is shown. That is, in this effect example, the CUM preparation display MTY is not started to be displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, but is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen. Furthermore, in this effect example, the display mode of the CUM preparation display MTYc is different, as described later. The explosion effect EF106 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the decorative pattern. Further, the CUM preparation-in-progress display MTYc may appear without the CUM preparation-in-progress display animation being performed. That is, the CUM preparation display MTYc may be displayed without displaying the explosion effect EF106.

FIG. 169(A3) shows a state in which the CUM preparation display MTYc is displayed. The display mode of the CUM preparation display MTYc is a display mode different from that of FIG. 168(A3), and is a mode in which the characters for meter preparation are displayed in a rectangular frame.

In FIG. 169(A4), a state in which "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol and is in the reach state is shown. At this time, the CUM-in-progress display MTYc is displayed so as to overlap the front side of the decorative pattern, and the decorative pattern is more difficult to visually recognize than the state in which the CUM-in-progress display MTYc does not overlap the decorative pattern. ing. The CUM preparation display MTYc may be arranged on the rear side of the decorative pattern and may be displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern. Further, it may not be displayed at a position overlapping the decorative design. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 169(A5) to (A8) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 169(A5) to (A8) are different from the effects shown in FIGS. 168(A5) to (A8) except that the display mode of the CUM preparation display MTYc is different. Since it is the same, the description is omitted.

Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 169(A9), a switching animation that is an animation for switching from the CUM preparation display MTYc to the chance up meter CMT is started. When the switching animation is started, the explosion effect EF106 is displayed so as to overlap the CUM preparing display MTYc, and the appearance that the CUM preparing display MTYc disappears is displayed. The display mode of this switching animation is the same as that of the CUM preparing display appearing animation shown in FIG. 169(A2) and described above, but may be a different display mode. In addition, the display mode of the switching animation and the display mode of the CUM preparation display appearance may be the same display mode or different display modes. Also, the switching animation may not be performed.

Subsequently, when the switching animation is completed, as shown in FIG. 169(A10), the appearance animation in which the flame effect EF101 is displayed and the chance up meter CMT appears is started. The chance up meter CMT may be displayed without performing the appearing animation. Further, the appearance animation may or may not be performed.

After that, when the appearing animation is completed and the flame effect EF101 is erased, as shown in FIG. 169(A11), the chance up meter CMT is displayed, and thereafter, the effect by the chance up meter CMT is started.

169(B1) to FIG. 169(B8) show an example in which the timer notice display functions as a CUM preparation display.

FIG. 169(B1) shows a state in which the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 169 (B1), the number of holdings of special figure 1 is 1, and the first holding icon h11 is displayed, while the number of holdings of special figure 1 is displayed in the second holding number display. “1” indicating that it is 1 is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 is also displayed in the variable icon display area CIS. Further, in FIG. 169(B1), the timer notice effect is started, and for example, the timer notice display TM1 is framed in from the left end of the display screen and displayed on the left side of the center of the display screen. The timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is "60:00". On the timer notice display TM1, thereafter, the countdown of the timer display is started.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 169(B2), the "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, and the reach state is formed, and the swing fluctuation display is shown. ing. At this time, the timer notice display TM1 is displayed in an overlapping manner on the front side of the decorative design, and the decorative design is more difficult to visually recognize than the state in which the decorative design is not overlapped by the timer notice display TM1. .. The timer notice display TM1 may be arranged on the rear side of the decorative pattern and may be displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern. Further, it may not be displayed at a position overlapping the decorative design. Further, while the timer notice display TM1 is being displayed, another type of timer notice display disclosed in this specification may be displayed. In this case, the display mode of the timer advance notice display may be the same as or different from the timer advance notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 169(B2). The display position of the timer notice display TM1 may be always displayed at the same position, or the display position may be different. Further, the type of the notice given as a result of the countdown of the timer display being "00:00" may be different depending on the display position of the timer notice display TM1 (for example, the timer notice display TM1 is displayed on the left side of the display screen). In this case, when the timer notice display TM1 functions as a CUM preparation display and the timer notice display TM1 is displayed on the right side of the display screen, even if the pseudo-link is executed as a result of the countdown of the timer display. Good). Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 169 (B2), the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is “15:00”.

In FIG. 169 (B3), “decoration 7” that was swinging and fluctuating in the left symbol display area 208a before the super reach effect is moved to a position below the second decorative symbol, and swinging is fluctuating in the right symbol display area 208c. The "decoration 7" that was being displayed moves to the bottom of the second hold number display. Further, in this effect example, the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is continuously displayed during the transition to the super reach effect. It should be noted that when the effect that shifts to the super reach effect is started, the timer notice display TM1 may be hidden, or may be displayed or may not be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 169(B3), the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is "10:57". Further, in FIG. 169(B3), the movement of the holding frame UI to the lower side is started, and a state is shown in which the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS is left and the frame is displayed below the display screen. .. FIG. 169(B4) shows a state in which the holding frame UI is completely framed out downward with the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS left. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 169 (B4), the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is “09:21”.

In FIG. 169(B5), the state where the super reach effect of VS swordsman reach is started is shown. At this time as well, the timer notice display TM1 is still displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 169 (B5), the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is "05:53". An image of an enemy swordsman is greatly displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 13B5, and the main character is on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 6B6. An animation of the duel scene with the enemy swordsman is displayed. It should be noted that when the super reach effect is started, all the reservation frame UIs are hidden (disappeared) except for the top plate of the pedestal hs0. Also, the hold icon is hidden (disappears). However, the variable icon h0 does not disappear and remains displayed on the remaining top plate. Further, the second decorative design and the second hold number display are also continuously displayed. The entire hold frame UI may be erased, or conversely, the entire hold frame UI may be continuously displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 may be erased or the hold icon may be continuously displayed.

FIG. 169(B7) shows a state in which the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is "00:00" during execution of the super reach effect. Then, as shown in FIG. 169 (B8), a switching animation that is an animation for switching from the timer advance notice display TM1 to the chance up meter CMT is started. When the switching animation is started, the explosion effect EF106 is displayed so as to overlap the timer notice display TM1, and a state in which the CUM preparing display disappears is displayed. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 169(A10) to (A11) are performed. In this example of performance, the timer notice display TM1 is displayed, and when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is "00:00", the chance up meter CMT is always displayed. There may be a case where it is displayed or a case where it is not displayed (a warning notice display of a gasse by a timer notice display). Further, when the timer notice display TM1 is displayed and the timer notice display in the timer notice display TM1 becomes “00:00”, the chance up meter CMT may be displayed and another notice may be given. Good.

FIG. 170 is a diagram showing a state where the chance up meter effect is being performed during the super reach effect. Here, the effects performed in the periods shown in FIGS. 170(A1) to (A5) are the same as the effects performed in FIGS. 162(A1) to (A8), and FIGS. 170(A6) to (A6). The effect performed in the period shown in FIG. (A14) is the same as the effect performed in FIG. 29(2) to FIG.

After that, when the player presses the effect button 136 (chance button 136) at the timing shown in FIG. 170(A15), as shown in FIG. 170(A16), the lord's cut-in image (weak cut-in image CI3b) is displayed. ) Is displayed. Here, the cut-in image CI3b in this rendering example is a weak cut-in image, a red cut-in image (not shown) (a cut-in image in a display mode different from that of the weak cut-in image and the gold cut-in image), and a gold cut-in image CI3. There are three types, and the reliability of the big hit increases in the order of the weak cut-in image, the red cut-in image, and the gold cut-in image. It should be noted that a cut-in image suggesting that the jackpot is confirmed may be displayed. This weak cut-in image CI3b is a cut-in image of a display mode different from the cut-in image (gold cut-in image CI3) of the lord shown in FIG. 29(13), and is longer in the vertical direction than the gold cut-in image CI3. Is a short cut-in image with a short frame surrounded by a green frame and a sword wielding with a shout of "Ikuze!" The weak cut-in image CI3b indicates that the reliability is lower than the gold cut-in image CI3 but the reliability of the big hit is high, but may indicate that the reliability does not change. .. That is, in this effect example, the gold cut-in image CI3 that may occur at the second check point CP2 is not displayed, and the chance up notice is not issued. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 170(A17), the red check mark is not added at the second check point CP2, and it is indicated that the chance up notice is not generated above the second check point CP2. The display of “×” is displayed, and the history that the advance notice of opportunity has not occurred is shown. When the chance up notice is not issued, it is not necessary to keep a history that the chance up notice is not issued (for example, as shown in FIG. 30(7a), the character SBH of Sabohani has the first check point). It does not have to pass through CP1 as it is, and the marking at the first checkpoint CP1 or the display of the characters “UP” may not be performed. As shown in FIG. 30(7a′), the display at the first checkpoint CP1 is erased. The history may or may not be kept when the chance up notice is not generated, which is the case in any of the embodiments described in this specification. The weak cut-in image CI3b shown in FIG. 170(A16) may be displayed on condition that the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated within the operation valid period. The weak cut-in image CI3b shown in FIG. 170(A16) may be displayed when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated within the operation valid period. It may be displayed even when the operation valid period has elapsed without operating the button 136 (chance button 136), or the operation valid period without operating the effect button 136 (chance button 136). May be displayed when the time has passed, or may not be displayed when the operation valid period has passed without operating the effect button 136 (chance button 136). When the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, the weak cut-in image CI3b may be displayed when the operation valid period elapses.

After that, when the character SBH of the sabotani reaches the third check point CP3 at the timing shown in FIG. 170(A18), the lever image 136Va as a chance up notice is displayed on the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 170(A19). Instead, the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed to notify that the notice by the button effect has started. After that, when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) starts at the timing shown in FIG. 170 (A20), the player can accept the operation of the effect button 136 (chance button 136). After that, as shown in FIG. 170 (A21), in the chance up meter CMT, the character SBH of the sabotani has started to move and is positioned before the final point GP. Further, the remaining time display meter MT shows that the operation valid period has started and the gauge has decreased. The player may operate the effect button 136 (chance button 136) or the sabotani character SBH may be stopped at the third check point CP3 until the operation valid period elapses. In this example of performance, since the lever image 136Va as the advance notice of the chance up is not displayed, the red check mark is not attached at the third check point CP3 in the chance up meter CMT, and above the third check point CP3. , "X" indicating that the chance up notice has not been issued is displayed, and the history that the chance up notice has not been issued is shown.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 170 (A22), the player operates the effect button 136 (chance button 136), but the operation of the various effect movable bodies as shown in FIG. 29 (23) is not performed. As shown in 170 (A23), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, "decoration 6" is displayed in the middle symbol, and the combination of the loss of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" is lost. Is notified. Further, in the chance up meter CMT, the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the final point GP, but the placard shows the character “x” indicating that it is missing, and the character SBH of Sabohani has a disappointed expression. ing.

After that, as shown in FIG. 170 (A24), all the decorative symbols of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are once displayed lighter than the normal darkness. Also, in the figure, a scene in which the lord has fallen is displayed. In FIG. 170 (A25), all the decorative symbols of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are displayed again in the normal darkness. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 162(B4) to (B8) are performed. In this example of performance, the button up image 136a is displayed and the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated without the chance up notice being issued at the third check point CP3, but the result of the loss is derived. In this example of effect, the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, and various effect movable bodies as shown in FIG. 29 (23) are operated, and the result of the big hit is derived. There may be cases. In addition, when the chance up notice is not generated at the third check point CP3, it may be suggested that the loss is confirmed. In addition, when the effect in this effect example is performed, there may be a case of finally losing and a case of a big hit, and in that case, the case of finally displaying the lose display mode, The effect of this effect example may be configured to occur more easily than when the big hit display mode is finally displayed.

In this example of performance, only one of the three check points CP1 to CP3 is given a chance up notice, and then the loss is derived, but at any of the three check points CP1 to CP3. The chance up notice may be given and then the loss may be derived, or the loss may be derived without giving the chance up notice at any of the check points. Further, when the CUM preparation in-progress display MTY is displayed, at least one chance advance notice may be given at all times, or even if the CUM preparation in progress display MTY is displayed, one chance advance notice is displayed. May occur, a chance-up notice may occur once or more, or a chance-up notice may be issued at all check points. It goes without saying that this is applicable to any of the chance up notice effects disclosed in this specification.

FIG. 171 is a diagram showing a state where another pattern of the chance up meter effect is performed during the super reach effect. Here, since the effects shown in FIGS. 171(A1) to (A2) are the same as the effects performed in FIGS. 170(A1) to (A2), description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 171(A3), the flame effect EF101 is erased and the CUM preparing display MTY is displayed. In this effect example, unlike the effect example shown in FIG. 170(A3), the background color of the balloon displayed near the character SBH of Sabohani is red, and the background color of the balloon is displayed in white. It is more likely that a chance-up notice will be generated, and that the jackpot pattern mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed. If the background color of the balloon is red, chance-up notices may occur at all of the displayed check points (for example, three check points CP1 to CP3 in this effect example), or three chance check notices may be generated. The chance up notice may occur only at one or two of the checkpoints. Further, even if the background color of the balloon is red, the chance up notice may not be issued even once. Further, when the background color of the balloon is red, the chance up notice may be generated n times (n=1 or more) without fail in the production by the chance up meter CMT. Further, the background color of the balloon may be displayed in a color other than red or white. For example, when it is displayed in rainbow color, the big hit may be settled. Further, in this effect example, the background color of the balloon is changed, but the shape of the balloon may be changed. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 171(A4) to (A14) are performed. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 171(A4) to (A14) are the same as those in FIGS. 170(A4) to 170(A14), except that the background color of the balloon is different, and thus the description thereof will be omitted. ..

Thereafter, when the player presses the effect button 136 (chance button 136) at the timing shown in FIG. 171 (A15), as shown in FIG. 171 (A16), the money shown in FIG. The cut-in image CI3 is displayed. At this timing, the weak cut-in image CI3b, the red cut-in image (not shown), or the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed only when the production button 136 (chance button 136) is operated. When the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed only when the cut-in image CI3 is displayed, or when it is determined that the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed even if the gold cut-in image CI3 is not displayed. Is displayed to indicate that a chance up notice has occurred (for example, a balloon with the letters “Chance up gold cut-in” in FIG. 171), and a weak cut-in image CI3b and a red cut-in image are displayed. If it is determined or displayed, the notification indicating that the chance up has occurred is not displayed, but the red cut-in image may be notified similarly to the gold cut-in image CI3. In this case, the notification indicating that the red cut-in image has been displayed and the notification indicating that the gold cut-in image has been displayed differ only in character notation, and other display modes (for example, balloons) may be different. .. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 171(A16) to (A26) are performed. Note that the effect performed in the period of FIG. 171(A16) to FIG. 17(A26) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 29(13) to FIG. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 162(A13) to (A15) are performed. In this effect example, even if the effect lever 136V is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 171 (A23), the various effect movable bodies shown in FIG. 171 (A24) may not operate and the deviation may be derived. Even if it is configured in such a case, when the big hit display mode is finally displayed, the effect of this effect example is more likely to occur than when the lost display mode is finally displayed. Good.

FIG. 172 is a diagram illustrating an example of a change effect of the display mode of the chance up meter preparation display.

172(A1) to (A3) are modified examples of FIG. 171(A3), and the CUM preparing display MTYb shown in FIGS. 167(A1) to (A9) is displayed in another display mode. It shows the situation.

FIG. 172(A1) is an effect following FIG. 167(A2). FIG. 172(A1) shows a state in which the flame effect EF101 is erased and the CUM preparation display MTYb is displayed. The CUM preparing display MTYb shown in FIG. 172(A1) is the same as the CUM preparing display MTYb shown in FIG. 167(A3), but the background color is red and the background color of the CUM preparing display MTYb is The chance up notice is more likely to occur than in the case of white, and the jackpot pattern mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed. If the background color of the CUM preparation display MTYb is red, chance-up notices may occur at all of the displayed check points (for example, three check points CP1 to CP3 in this production example). However, the chance-up notice may occur only at one or two of the three checkpoints. Further, even if the background color of the CUM preparation display MTYb is red, the chance up notice may not be issued even once. Further, when the background color of the CUM preparation display MTYb is red, the chance up notice may be issued n times (n=1 or more) in the effect by the chance up meter CMT. The background color of the CUM preparation display MTYb may be displayed in a color other than red or white. For example, when the background color is displayed in rainbow, the big hit may be determined. Further, in this effect example, an example in which the background color of the CUM preparing display MTYb is changed is shown, but the shape of the CUM preparing display MTYb may be changed. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 172(A2) to (A3) are performed. Note that the effects performed in the periods of FIG. 172 (A1) to (A3) are the effects shown in FIGS. 167 (A3) to (A9), except that the background color of the CUM preparation display MTYb is different. Since it is the same as, the description will be omitted.

172(B1) to 172(B4) are modified examples of FIG. 171(A3) and show how the background color of the balloon changes during the display of the CUM preparation display MTY. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 172 (B1) is the same as that in FIG. 162 (A3), so description thereof will be omitted.

In FIG. 172(B2), after the display of the CUM preparing display MTY is started, the effect EF107 in which the character SBH of Sabohani is wrapped in red flame is displayed, and it is notified that the CUM preparing display MTY is ranked up. Has been done. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the effect of rank-up of the CUM preparing display MTY is performed by the character SBH of Savohani which is a component of the CUM preparing display MTY.

Then, as shown in FIG. 172(B3), the background color of the balloon displayed near the character SBH of Sabohani changes from white to red, and it is notified that the CUM preparation display MTY has been ranked up. In this example of effect, the color of the flame effect EF107 is displayed in red according to the background color of the balloon after rank up, but it may be displayed in a color other than red. Further, the display color of the flame effect EF107 may notify the rank of the CUM preparing display MTY after the rank up. For example, when the display color of the flame effect EF107 is rainbow, the rank is changed. The background color of the balloon of the CUM preparation display MTY after the up may be changed to a rainbow color to notify that the big hit is confirmed. That is, when the flame effect EF107 is displayed in rainbow color, it may be notified that the big hit is determined at that time. Further, even if the effect EF 107 gives a notice of rank up of the CUM preparation display MTY, the CUM preparation display MTY may not be ranked up.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 172 (B4), which is a modification of FIG. 171 (A4), “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on each of the left symbol and the right symbol to form a reach state. , The fluctuation display is shown. The color of the balloon in the CUM preparation display MTY continues to be displayed in red.

172(C1) to (C6) of FIG. 172 show another effect pattern in which the background color of the balloon changes during the display of the CUM preparation display MTY.

FIG. 172(C1) is an effect following FIG. 162(A3), and shows that the notice icon YI is stocked. The advance notice icon YI appears, for example, in any of the effect examples shown in FIGS. 120 to 147.

After that, as shown in FIG. 172(C2), the notice icon YI of the mode a in which the box is closed is used, and the mode is changed to the mode d in which the box is open and the box is ranked up. The animation that pops up the notice display of "UP" for notice is displayed. The display of "UP" that appears here is a display that gives advance notice of rank up of the CUM preparation display MTY. It should be noted that before the notice icon YI is used, that is, before the box is opened, an effect of giving advance notice of the box opening (for example, an animation effect in which the box vibrates rattling) may be performed. In addition, when such an effect is performed, the box may or may not be actually opened.

In FIG. 172(C3), the used notice icon YI disappears, and the notice display of “UP” is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In FIG. 172 (C4), the promotion animation using the notice display of the "UP" is started. In FIG. 172 (C4), the notice display of "UP" is changed to the light ball EF108 in the right symbol display area 208c, and then the balloon displayed near the character SBH of the Sabohani in the CUM preparing display MTY is aimed at. It is shown to fly away and hit a balloon. In this example of performance, the CUM preparation display MTY may be ranked up without the promotion animation being performed, or the promotion animation may be performed and the CUM preparation display MTY may be ranked up, or the promotion animation may be performed. There may be a case where the CUM preparation display MTY is upgraded without being displayed. As described above, in this effect example, the state in which the advance notice display is performed by an element other than the constituent elements of the CUM preparing display MTY and the CUM preparing display MTY is ranked up is shown.

Then, as shown in FIG. 172 (C5), the background color of the balloon displayed near the character SBH of Sabohani changes from white to red, and it is notified that the CUM preparation display MTY is ranked up. In addition, after the rank of the CUM preparation display MTY is increased, the background color of the balloon is not limited to change from white to red, and may be changed to another color. In addition, the CUM preparation-in-progress display MTY may not be ranked up even though the promotion animation is performed.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 172 (C6), “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, and the reach state is formed, and the fluctuation display is performed. It is shown. The color of the balloon in the CUM preparation display MTY continues to be displayed in red.

172(D1) to (D3) of FIG. 172 show another effect pattern in which the background color of the balloon changes while the CUM preparing display MTY is displayed. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 172 (D1) is the same as that in FIG. 162 (A3), so description thereof will be omitted.

In FIG. 172 (D2), after the CUM preparing display MTY is started to be displayed, the effect EF109 in which the entire CUM preparing display MTY is surrounded by a large flame is displayed, and the CUM preparing display MTY is ranked up. Has been announced. That is, in this example of performance, it is shown that the advance notice display is performed by an element other than the constituent elements of the CUM preparing display MTY, and the rank of the CUM preparing display MTY is increased.

Then, as shown in FIG. 172 (D3), the background color of the balloon displayed near the character SBH of Sabohani changes from white to red, and it is notified that the CUM preparation display MTY has been ranked up. In addition, after the rank of the CUM preparation display MTY is increased, the background color of the balloon is not limited to change from white to red, and may be changed to another color. In addition, even if the effect EF109 notifies the rank increase of the CUM preparing display MTY, the CUM preparing display MTY may not be ranked up. In addition, as shown in FIG. 172 (D2′), the color of the flame effect EF109 may be the same as the background color of the balloon of the CUM preparing display MTY after the change (in this example, red). Thus, the rank of the CUM-in-progress display MTY after the rank up may be announced in advance. Further, as shown in FIG. 172 (D3′), the color of the balloon of the CUM preparation display MTY after rank up may change to rainbow, and in this case, it is notified that the big hit is confirmed. It Note that, as shown in FIG. 171(A3), the color of the balloon of the CUM preparing display MTY may be displayed in a rainbow color from the beginning.

FIG. 172 (E1) to FIG. 172 (E6) show effect patterns in which the background color of the balloon changes as a result of the timer notice during the display of the CUM preparation display MTY. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 172 (E1) is the same as that in FIG. 162 (A3), so description thereof will be omitted.

In FIG. 172 (E2), the timer advance notice effect is started, and for example, the timer advance notice display TM1 is framed in from the right end of the display screen and displayed on the right side of the center of the display screen. The timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is "03:00", and a certain notice is given 3 seconds after the countdown of the timer display is started (in this example, the rank of the CUM preparation display MTY is increased). It has been suggested that On the timer notice display TM1, thereafter, the countdown of the timer display is started. That is, in this example of performance, it is shown that the advance notice display is performed by an element other than the constituent elements of the CUM preparing display MTY, and the rank of the CUM preparing display MTY is increased.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 172(E3) to (E4), the countdown in the timer advance notice display TM1 is continuously performed until it becomes “00:00”.

When the display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes “00:00” and the countdown is completed, as shown in FIG. 172 (E5), the timer notice display TM1 replaces the timer display and calls attention to the notice. Character is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 172 (E6), the background color of the balloon displayed near the character SBH of Sabohani changes from white to red, and it is notified that the CUM preparation display MTY has been ranked up. In addition, after the rank of the CUM preparation display MTY is increased, the background color of the balloon is not limited to change from white to red, and may be changed to another color.

FIG. 173 is a diagram for explaining another pattern of the change effect of the display mode of the chance up meter preparation display.

173(A1) to (A7) in FIG. 173(A1) to (A7) indicate that the display of the CUM preparing display MTY is a look-ahead notice of the effect by the chance up meter CMT, and the CUM preparing display MTY is displayed over a plurality of symbol variations. In this case, an effect pattern that ranks up is shown. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 173(A1) to (A6) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 163(C1) to 163(C6), and thus description thereof will be omitted.

After that, when the flame effect EF101 is erased, the CUM preparing display MTY is displayed again as shown in FIG. 173(A7). The background color of the balloon displayed in the vicinity of the Sabohani character SBH is changing from white to red, and the CUM preparation display MTY is ranked up. In addition, after the rank of the CUM preparation display MTY is increased, the background color of the balloon is not limited to change from white to red, and may be changed to another color. The background color of the balloon in this example of performance is prepared in three types, for example, white (default color), red (high expectation), and iridescent (big hit confirmation), both before and after redisplay. A pattern that does not change in white, a pattern that does not change in red before and after redisplay, a pattern that does not change in rainbow color before and after redisplay, and a white display before redisplay After that, a pattern that changes to red, a pattern that changes to white before redisplay, and a pattern that changes to rainbow after redisplay, a pattern that changes to red before redisplay and changes to rainbow after redisplay, and white at the first stage The display pattern is changed to a red color after the first re-display and a rainbow color after the second re-display. In addition, a display mode balloon that is the degree of expectation between the white background color balloon and the red background color balloon, or a display that is the expectation degree between the red background color balloon and the rainbow background color balloon. A form of speech balloon may be prepared. In addition, there may be a display mode of a balloon indicating that the background color of the balloon may change (for example, a white blinking display balloon). This is applicable in any of the embodiments described herein.

173(B1) to (B8) in FIG. 173(B1) to (B8) indicate that the display of the CUM preparation display MTY is a look-ahead notice of the effect by the chance up meter CMT, and the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed over a plurality of symbol variations. In the case, another production pattern that ranks up is shown. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 173(B1) to (B6) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 163(D1) to (D6), so description thereof will be omitted.

In FIG. 173(B7), after the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon h11 is started, the effect EF107 in which the character SBH of Sabohani is wrapped in red flame is displayed, and the CUM preparation display MTY is ranked up. Is displayed. The timing at which the effect EF107 in which the character SBH of Sabohani is wrapped in flame is started and the rank-up effect of the CUM preparing display MTY is started is not limited to that described above, and may be started at an appropriate timing. It is possible, for example, during the temporary stop display of the decorative design, during the final display of the decorative design, or during another reach effect. Further, the timing at which the CUM preparing display MTY ranks up may be any timing described above.

When the rank-up effect of the CUM preparation display MTY is completed as described above, the background color of the balloon displayed near the character SBH of Sabohani changes from white to red, as shown in FIG. 173 (B8). , CUM preparation display MTY is informed that the rank has been improved. In this example of effect, the color of the flame effect EF107 is displayed in red according to the background color of the balloon after rank up, but it may be displayed in a color other than red. Further, the display color of the flame effect EF107 may notify the rank of the CUM preparing display MTY after the rank up. For example, when the display color of the flame effect EF107 is rainbow, the rank is changed. The background color of the balloon of the CUM preparation display MTY after the up may be changed to a rainbow color to notify that the big hit is confirmed. That is, when the flame effect EF107 is displayed in rainbow color, it may be notified that the big hit is determined at that time. In addition, even if the effect of the effect EF107 is to increase the rank of the CUM preparation display MTY, the CUM preparation display MTY may not be ranked up.

FIG. 173(C1) to FIG. 173(C4) show another display mode of the upgraded CUM preparation display MTY.

FIG. 173(C1) is, for example, an effect following FIG. 162(A2), and shows a state in which the CUM preparation display MTY is started to be displayed. In this effect example, the display mode of the CUM preparing display MTY is different from the display mode of the CUM preparing display MTY shown in FIG. 171(A3), and the color of the meter portion forming the CUM preparing display MTY is red. Therefore, it is easier to give a chance up notice than when the color of the meter portion is white, and the jackpot pattern mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed. When the color of the meter portion is red, chance-up notices may occur at all of the displayed check points (for example, three check points CP1 to CP3 in this effect example), or three chance check notices may be generated. The chance up notice may occur only at one or two of the checkpoints. Further, even if the color of the meter portion is red, the chance up notice may not be issued once. Further, when the color of the meter portion is red, the chance up notice may be issued n times (n=1 or more) in the effect by the chance up meter CMT. Further, the color of the meter portion may be displayed in a color other than red or white. For example, when it is displayed in rainbow color, the big hit may be settled. Further, in this effect example, an example in which the color of the meter portion is changed has been shown, but the shape of the meter portion may be changed. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 173(C2) to (C4) are performed. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 173(C2) to (C4) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 171(A4) to (A6) except that the display mode of the CUM preparation display MTY is different. Therefore, the description is omitted. It should be noted that in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 173(C4), when the CUM preparation display MTY is switched to the chance up meter CMT, the meter portion becomes white, which is the default display mode. Note that the color of the meter portion may be red even after the display is switched to the chance up meter CMT.

FIG. 173(D1) to FIG. 173(D4) show another display mode of the upgraded CUM preparation display MTY.

FIG. 173 (D1) is, for example, an effect following FIG. 162 (A2), and shows a state where the CUM preparation display MTY is started to be displayed. In this effect example, the display mode of the CUM preparing display MTY is different from the display mode of the CUM preparing display MTY shown in FIG. 171(A3), and the color of the character SBH of the sabotani forming the CUM preparing display MTY. Is red, the chance up notice is more likely to occur than in the case where the color of the character SBH of Savohani is the default color, and the jackpot pattern mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed. In addition, when the color of the character SBH of Sabohani is red, a chance up notice may be issued at all of the displayed check points (for example, three check points CP1 to CP3 in this example of performance). The chance up notice may occur only at one or two of the three checkpoints. In addition, even if the color of the character SBH of Sabohani is red, the chance up notice may not occur even once. In addition, when the color of the character SBH of Sabohani is red, the chance up notice may be issued n times (n=1 or more) in the effect by the chance up meter CMT. Further, the color of the character SBH of Sabohani may be displayed in a color other than red or the default color. For example, when it is displayed in rainbow color, the big hit may be determined. Further, in this effect example, an example in which the color of the character SBH of Sabohani is changed is shown, but the shape of the character SBH of Sabohani may be changed. Also, a character different from the character SBH of Savohani may be displayed. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 173(D2) to (D4) are performed. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 173(D2) to (D4) are the same as those in FIGS. 171(A4) to (A6) except that the display mode of the CUM preparation display MTY is different. Therefore, the description is omitted. In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 173 (D4), when the CUM preparation display MTY is switched to the chance up meter CMT, the color of the character SBH of Sabohani becomes the default color, which is the default display mode. It should be noted that the color of the character SBH of Savohani may be red even after being switched and displayed on the chance up meter CMT.

FIG. 174 is a diagram for explaining another pattern of the change effect of the display mode of the chance up meter preparation display.

174(A1) to 174(A4) show another display mode of the CUM preparing display MTY.

FIG. 174(A1) is, for example, an effect following FIG. 162(A2), and shows a state where the CUM preparation display MTY is started to be displayed. In this effect example, the display mode of the CUM preparing display MTY is different from the display mode of the CUM preparing display MTY shown in FIG. 162 (A3), and the character SBH of Sabohani forming the CUM preparing display MTY is a princess. It has been changed to the character HME, and when the big hit symbol display mode is confirmed and displayed than when the lost symbol display mode is confirmed and displayed, the princess character HME is displayed more than when the Sabohani character SBH is displayed. It is easy to display. When the princess character HME is displayed, a chance-up notice may be generated at all of the displayed check points (for example, three check points CP1 to CP3 in this effect example), or 3 The chance-up notice may occur only at one or two of the checkpoints. In addition, even if the princess character HME is displayed, the chance up notice may not occur once. Further, when the princess character HME is displayed, the chance up notice may be issued n times (n=1 or more) in the production by the chance up meter CMT. Further, when the princess character HME is displayed, the big hit may be confirmed. Further, in this example of the presentation, an example in which the princess character HME is displayed instead of the sabotani character SBH is shown, but a character different from the princess character HME may be displayed. Further, the player may be allowed to select the character displayed in the CUM preparing display MTY in advance. For example, when the player has previously set the princess character HME to appear, the CUM preparing is in progress. The princess character HME may be displayed in the display MTY, or the sabotani character SBH may be displayed as the default character when the character to appear is not selected. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 174(A2) to (A4) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 174(A2) to (A4) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 171(A4) to (A6) except that the display mode of the CUM preparation display MTY is different. Therefore, the description is omitted. In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 174 (A4), when the CUM preparation display MTY is switched to the chance up meter CMT, the princess character HME is switched to the sabotani character SBH. In addition, the princess character HME may be continuously displayed even after the display is switched to the chance up meter CMT.

FIG. 174 (B1) to FIG. 174 (B7) show another pattern of rank up effect of the CUM preparation display MTY.

FIG. 174(B1) is, for example, an effect following FIG. 162(A2), and shows a state where the CUM preparation display MTY is started to be displayed.

After that, in FIG. 174 (B2), a small-sized button image 136as and a small-sized remaining time display meter MTs start to be displayed in the vicinity of the balloon displayed in the vicinity of the character SBH of the sabotani composing the CUM preparation display MTY. Then, it is shown that the operation of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is urged. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 174 (B2), the operation valid period has not started yet.

Then, the operation valid period of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is started at the timing shown in FIG. 174 (B3), and in FIG. 174 (B4), the remaining time according to the elapsed time from the start of the operation valid period. It is shown that the gauge of the display meter MTs is decreasing. Note that a plurality of button images may be displayed including this small size button image 136as. In this case, the button displayed by one operation of the effect button 136 (chance button 136). The operation corresponding to all of the images may be accepted, or only the operation corresponding to any one of the button images may be accepted. In addition, if the button effect related to the execution of the prefetching notice and the button effect related to the execution of the notice of the symbol variation display being executed (hereinafter, may be referred to as “variation notice”) are being performed at the same time, By operating the button 136 (chance button 136), the operation of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) corresponding to the button effect associated with the change notice may be prioritized, or the effect corresponding to the button effect associated with the look-ahead notice. The operation of the button 136 (chance button 136) may be prioritized, and one operation of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) corresponds to the effect button 136 (chance button) corresponding to the button effect related to the change notice. Both the operation of (136) and the operation of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) corresponding to the button effect related to the prefetching notice may be enabled. Further, when a plurality of button effects related to the prefetching notice are simultaneously performed, when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, one of the effect buttons 136 (chance that corresponds to the button effect related to the prefetching notice) is operated. Only the operation of the button 136) may be enabled, or all the operations of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) corresponding to the button effects related to the plurality of prefetching notices being executed may be enabled. Further, when a plurality of button effects related to the change announcement are simultaneously performed, when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, one of the effect buttons 136 corresponding to the button effect related to the change notice. Only the operation of the (chance button 136) may be valid, or all the operations of the effect buttons 136 (chance button 136) corresponding to the button effects related to the plurality of fluctuation notices being executed may be valid.

After that, when the player presses the effect button 136 (chance button 136) at the timing shown in FIG. 174 (B5), the effect EF110 in which the balloon explodes is displayed as shown in FIG. 174 (B6). An animation has been performed, and it has been notified that the CUM preparation display MTY will be ranked up. That is, in this effect example, a state in which the rank-up effect of the CUM preparing display MTY is performed by a button effect different from the constituent elements of the CUM preparing display MTY is shown. Note that the switching animation may not be performed.

After that, when the explosion effect EF110 is erased, as shown in FIG. 174 (B7), the background color of the balloon displayed in the vicinity of the character SBH of the sabotani of the CUM preparing display MTY changes from white to red. The CUM preparation display MTY is ranked higher. In addition, after the rank of the CUM preparation display MTY is increased, the background color of the balloon is not limited to change from white to red, and may be changed to another color. In this example, the CUM preparation display MTY is ranked higher by operating the effect button 136 (chance button 136) during the operation valid period, but the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated. The CUM preparation in-progress display MTY may be ranked up even if the operation valid period has elapsed without the operation valid period, or if the operation valid period has passed without operating the effect button 136 (chance button 136). The middle display MTY does not have to be ranked up. Further, when the operation effective period has elapsed without operating the effect button 136 (chance button 136), the CUM preparation display MTY may or may not be ranked up. Further, when the button effect is displayed as shown in FIG. 174 (B2), the CUM preparation display MTY may be upgraded.

FIG. 174 (C1) to FIG. 174 (C6) show another pattern of the effect by the chance up meter CMT.

FIG. 174(C1) is, for example, an effect following FIG. 171(A5), and shows a state in which the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT. In this production example, the chance up meter CMT is different from the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 171(A5) in that four check points are arranged, and the first check point CP1 and the second check point CP2 are different from each other. The fourth checkpoint CP4 is arranged between the two. That is, it is informed that there is a possibility that a chance-up notice may occur when the cursor SBH character SBH reaches the fourth checkpoint CP4. When the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed in a rank-up display mode, the chance up that the number of check points is increased is larger than that of the chance up meter CMT in the default display mode shown in FIG. 171(A5). The meter CMT may be easily displayed. Further, when the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed in a rank-up display mode, the chance up that the number of check points is reduced is smaller than that of the chance up meter CMT in the default display mode shown in FIG. 171(A5). The meter CMT may be easily displayed. In addition, the number of check points in the chance up meter CMT is the same when the CUM preparing display MTY is displayed in a rank-up display mode and when the CUM preparing display MTY is displayed in a default display mode. May be. Also, when the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed in a rank-up display mode, the chance up that the number of check points is increased is larger than that of the chance up meter CMT in the default display mode shown in FIG. 171(A5). The meter CMT may be displayed without fail. Further, when the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed in a rank-up display mode, the chance up that the number of check points is reduced is smaller than that of the chance up meter CMT in the default display mode shown in FIG. 171(A5). The meter CMT may be displayed without fail.

FIG. 174(C2) shows a situation in which the chance up notice is issued at the first check point CP1 and the character SBH of Sabohani is moving on the meter.

Then, as shown in FIG. 174 (C3), when the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the fourth check point CP4, an animation in which the blade edge of the sword held by the lord is shining brightly is started. In other words, this effect is a chance-up notice at the fourth check point CP4, and this chance-up notice is more likely to occur when the big-hit symbol form is fixedly displayed than when the lost symbol form is fixedly displayed. Is becoming

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 174 (C4), a balloon with the characters "Chance up, sharp sword" attached is displayed in the vicinity of the character SBH of Savohani, and a chance up notice is given. I am informing you. The timing at which the anime with a shining sword starts and the timing with which the balloon of the character SBH at Sabohani starts to display may be the same, or the balloon of the character SBH at Savohani may be displayed after the animation with a shining sword starts. Alternatively, the animation in which the sword tip shines may be started after the display of the balloon of the character SBH of Sabohani is started. The character SBH of Sabohani stops at the fourth checkpoint CP4 during the animation of the shining sword, but may not stop.

After that, as shown in FIG. 174 (C5), the fourth check point CP4 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red and “UP” indicating that the reliability of the big hit has increased due to the appearance of the notice. The letters are displayed above it to show the history of the advance notice. It should be noted that the display of “UP” is overlapped by the character SBH of Sabohani, and it is more difficult to visually recognize it than in the case where it is not overlapped. Further, the content of the notice that has occurred may be displayed.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 174 (C6) shows that the character SBH of Sabohani has started to move. At this time, since the overlap of part of the display of “UP” has been eliminated, part of the display is visible.

In this production example, the display mode of the character SBH of Sabohani and the chance up meter CMT is set to the default display mode that is not ranked up, but the character SBH of the character Sabohani and the meter portion of the chance up meter CMT are displayed. There may be a case where at least one of them is displayed in a rank-up display mode. In this case, the character SBH of the sabotani or the meter portion may be ranked up at the stage when the chance up meter CMT starts to be displayed, or only the character SBH of the sabotani is ranked up at the stage when the chance up meter CMT is started to display. Therefore, the meter portion may be ranked up while the effect is being produced by the chance up meter CMT. Further, only the meter portion may be ranked up at the stage when the chance up meter CMT starts to be displayed, and the character SBH of Sabohani may be ranked up during the production by the chance up meter CMT. Further, the chance up meter CMT may be displayed in the rank up display mode only at the time when the display is started, and the rank up is prevented from being performed during the performance by the chance up meter CMT. Good.

FIG. 175 is a diagram showing how the chance up meter ranks up during the performance by the chance up meter. Here, since the effects shown in FIGS. 175(A1) to (A5) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 170(A1) to 170(A5), description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 175(A6) shows a state in which the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT. In this example of performance, the meter portion of the chance up meter CMT is displayed in red, which is a color that has been upgraded from white, which is the default color, at the timing when the display changes from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT. That is, it is shown that the chance up meter CMT is ranked up. This suggests that a chance-up notice is likely to occur at each checkpoint, and that the final jackpot pattern is likely to be confirmed and displayed. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 175(A7) to (A26) are performed. Note that the display of the meter portion of the chance up meter CMT in FIGS. 175(A6) and 175(A7) has the same display mode. The effects shown in FIGS. 175(A7) to (A26) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 171(A7) to (A26) except that the color of the meter portion of the chance up meter CMT is different. , Description is omitted. It should be noted that, when the big hit symbol mode is confirmed and displayed, the display mode of a part or all of the chance up meter CMT is the default display mode (for example, default color, sabotani), when the lost symbol mode is confirmed and displayed. (For example, red, princess character HME, etc.) may be more easily displayed.

FIG. 176 is a diagram for explaining a display mode of the chance up meter whose rank has been upgraded.

FIG. 176(A1) is, for example, an effect following FIG. 175(A5), and shows a state in which the CUM preparation display MTY is switched to the chance up meter CMT. In this effect example, when the chance up meter CMT is started to be displayed, the color of the Sabohani character SBH itself is red, and a chance up notice is generated more than when the color of the Sabohani character SBH is the default color. In addition, it is easy to confirm and display the jackpot pattern mode. That is, it is shown that the chance up meter CMT is ranked up. In addition, when the color of the character SBH of Sabohani is red, a chance up notice may be issued at all of the displayed check points (for example, three check points CP1 to CP3 in this example of performance). The chance up notice may occur only at one or two of the three checkpoints. In addition, even if the color of the character SBH of Sabohani is red, the chance up notice may not occur even once. In addition, when the color of the character SBH of Sabohani is red, the chance up notice may be issued n times (n=1 or more) in the effect by the chance up meter CMT. Further, the color of the character SBH of Sabohani may be displayed in a color other than red or the default color. For example, when it is displayed in rainbow color, the big hit may be determined. Further, in this effect example, an example in which the color of the character SBH of Sabohani is changed is shown, but the shape of the character SBH of Sabohani may be changed. Also, a character different from the character SBH of Savohani may be displayed.

FIG. 176(B1) is an effect subsequent to FIG. 175(A5), and shows another display mode of the chance up meter CMT that has been upgraded. In FIG. 176 (B1), the background color of the placard arranged at the final point GP has changed from the default color (for example, white) to red, which also increases the chance up meter CMT. Can be notified. At this time, for example, only the background color of a specific surface of the placard (for example, the surface displaying “V” or “development”) is changed to red, and the surface displaying “x” is set to the default color. The background color may be changed to red for the surface on which "x" is displayed. In addition, in this example of performance, the display mode of the final point GP is changed, but the display mode of the start point SP may be changed to notify that the chance up meter CMT is ranked up.

FIG. 176(C1) is an effect subsequent to FIG. 175(A5), and shows another display mode of the chance up meter CMT that has been upgraded. FIG. 176(C1) shows that the second checkpoint CP2 is displayed in a display mode different from the default display mode (rectangular and white display mode). That is, a state is shown in which a display indicating that the chance up meter CMT is ranked up is performed by changing the display mode of part or all of the chance up meter CMT. In this example of performance, the display form of the second check point CP2 is a round and red display form, and, for example, it is informed that a chance up notice corresponding to the second check point CP2 will always occur. Note that the display mode of other check points may be changed to a mode in which the rank is improved. Further, in this example of performance, the shape and color of the checkpoint are changed, but only the shape may be changed or only the color may be changed.

176 (D1) to (D2) in the figure show effects corresponding to the effects shown in (A10) to (A11) in FIG. 162, and the effect by the chance up meter CMT starts, and in this effect example. , The background color of the balloon of “START!!” for notifying the start of the movement of the character SBH of Sabohani is shown as red, which increases the chance up meter CMT. The situation is suggested. The balloon of "START!!" is then erased as shown in FIG. 176 (D2). In this production example, the time period in which the balloon of "START!!" is displayed is short, so that it may be easy for the player to pay attention to the display of "START!!". In this production example, after the balloon of "START!!" is displayed, the balloon is erased after a predetermined time has passed. However, when the balloon has a rank-up display mode, it is not erased. The display may be maintained as it is. Further, in this example of effect, the background color of the balloon is changed, but the color of the character of the balloon may be changed. Further, the content of the characters displayed in the balloon may change, or the character notation may be used as is.

176(E1) to FIG. 176(E6) show, for example, another effect example following FIG. 175(A5), and corresponds to the effect shown in FIG. 170(A6) to FIG. 170(A11). ..

FIG. 176(E1) shows a state in which the CUM preparation display MTY is switched to the chance up meter CMT. In this example of the effect, the character SBH of Sabohani forming the chance up meter CMT is changed to the character HME of the princess, thereby notifying that the chance up meter CMT is ranked up. In the vicinity of the princess character HME, a balloon displaying the characters "START!!" is displayed in the default display mode. Here, the character displayed in the CUM preparing display MTY displayed before the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 176 (E1) may be the character SBH of Sabohani or the character of Princess. It may be HME or another character. In this effect example, the character SBH of Savohani is displayed in the CUM preparation display MTY, and it is shown that the character SBH is changed to the princess character HME when the chance up meter CMT is switched. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 176(E2) to (E6) are performed. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 176(E2) to (E6) are the same as those in FIGS. 170(A7) to (A11) except that the characters displayed on the chance up meter CMT are different. Therefore, the description is omitted.

176(F1) to FIG. 176(F7) show, for example, another effect example following FIG. 175(A5), in which the chance up meter CMT ranks up during execution of the effect by the chance up meter CMT. Is shown.

FIG. 176 (F1) shows a state in which the CUM preparation display MTY is switched to the chance up meter CMT. In this example of performance, it is shown that the notice icon YI is stocked. The advance notice icon YI appears, for example, in any of the effect examples shown in FIGS. 120 to 147.

FIG. 176 (F2) is an effect corresponding to FIG. 175 (A10). That is, in the period of FIGS. 176(F1) to (F2), for example, the effect described above with reference to FIGS. 175(A6) to (A10) is provided except that the notice icon YI is displayed. Has been done. After that, in FIG. 176 (F3), after the chance up notice is generated at the first check point CP1, the production progresses and the state of the character SBH of Sabohani is heading toward the second check point CP2.

After that, as shown in FIG. 176 (F4), the notice icon YI of the mode a in which the box is closed is used, the mode is changed to the mode d in which the box is open, and the rank is increased from the box. The animation that pops up the notice display of "UP" for notice is displayed. The display of "UP" that appears here is a display that gives advance notice of the rank up of the chance up meter CMT. It should be noted that before the notice icon YI is used, that is, before the box is opened, an effect of giving advance notice of the box opening (for example, an animation effect in which the box vibrates rattling) may be performed. In addition, when such an effect is performed, the box may or may not be actually opened.

In FIG. 176 (F5), the used notice icon YI disappears and the notice display of “UP” is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In FIG. 176 (F5), the promotion animation using the notice display of the "UP" is started. In FIG. 176 (F6), the notice display of “UP” changes to a ball of light in the right symbol display area 208c, then flies toward the chance up meter CMT and hits the chance up meter CMT. It is shown. At this time, the explosion effect EF111 is displayed so as to cover at least a part of the chance up meter CMT. In this example of performance, the chance up meter CMT may be ranked up without the promotion animation being performed, or when the promotion animation is being performed and the chance up meter is ranking up, or the promotion animation is not being performed. There may be a case where the chance up meter CMT is upgraded. As described above, in this effect example, the advance notice display is performed by the elements other than the constituent elements of the chance up meter CMT, and the rank up of the chance up meter CMT is performed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 176 (F7), the color of the meter portion of the chance up meter CMT changes from white to red, and it is notified that the chance up meter CMT has ranked up. After the chance up meter CMT is upgraded, the meter portion may change from white to red and may change to another color. In addition, the chance up meter CMT may not be ranked up even though the promotion animation is performed.

FIG. 176 (G1) to FIG. 176 (G7) show another example of effects following FIG. 175 (A5), for example, and show that the chance up meter CMT ranks up due to a timer notice.

FIG. 176 (G1) shows a state in which the CUM preparation display MTY is switched to the chance up meter CMT. The chance up meter CMT has a default display mode.

FIG. 176 (G2) is an effect corresponding to FIG. 175 (A10). That is, in the period of FIGS. 176 (G1) to (G2), for example, the above-described effect shown in FIGS. 175 (A6) to (A10) is performed. After that, in FIG. 176 (G3), after the chance up notice is generated at the first check point CP1, the production progresses and the state of the character SBH of Sabohani is shown toward the second check point CP2. In addition, in this example of the effect, the timer notice effect is started, and, for example, the timer notice display TM1 is framed in from the right end of the display screen and displayed on the center right side of the display screen. The timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is "03:00", and a certain advance notice (rank up of the chance up meter CMT in this example of performance) is given 3 seconds after the countdown of the timer display is started. It has been suggested that it be done. On the timer notice display TM1, thereafter, the countdown of the timer display is started. That is, in this example of performance, it is shown that an advance notice is displayed by an element other than the constituent elements of the chance up meter CMT, and the chance up meter CMT is ranked up. The countdown of the timer display may be started after the timer notice display TM1 is displayed, or may be started during the animation in which the timer notice display TM1 appears.

After that, as shown in FIG. 176 (G4) to FIG. 176 (G5), the countdown in the timer advance notice display TM1 is continuously performed until it becomes “00:00”.

When the display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes “00:00” and the countdown is completed, as shown in FIG. 176 (G6), the timer notice display TM1 replaces the timer display and calls attention to the notice. Character is displayed. In this effect, after the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00" and the character "attention" is displayed, the chance up meter CMT is ranked up. When the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 becomes “00:00” without displaying characters, the rank of the chance up meter CMT may be upgraded. In addition, there are cases where the chance up meter CMT is ranked up after the word "attention" is displayed and cases where the chance up meter CMT is ranked up without the word "attention" being displayed. Good.

Then, as shown in FIG. 176 (G7), the color of the meter portion of the chance up meter CMT changes from white, which is the default color, to red, and it is notified that the chance up meter CMT has ranked up. After the rank of the chance up meter CMT is upgraded, the color of the meter portion is not limited to change from white to red and may be changed to another color.

FIG. 177 is a diagram for explaining another pattern of rank up of the chance up meter.

177(A1) to FIG. 177(A7) show another example of effects following FIG. 175(A5), for example, in which the chance up meter CMT ranks up during execution of the effect by the opportunity up meter CMT. Is shown.

FIG. 177(A1) shows a state in which the CUM preparation display MTY is switched to the chance up meter CMT. At this time, the chance up meter CMT is in the default display mode.

FIG. 177(A2) is an effect corresponding to FIG. 175(A10). That is, in the period of FIG. 177(A1)-(A2), for example, the above-described effect shown in FIG. 175(A6)-(A10) is performed. After that, in FIG. 177(A3), after the chance up notice is generated at the first check point CP1, the production progresses, and the state that the character SBH of Sabohani is heading to the second check point CP2 is shown.

Then, FIG. 177 (A4) shows that the character SBH of Sabohani stops on the meter and the rank-up animation is started. When the rank-up animation is started, as shown in FIG. 177(A5), the smoke effect EF112 is displayed so as to cover the entire character SBH of Sabohani.

Then, as shown in FIG. 177 (A6), the color of the character SBH of the sabotani constituting the chance up meter CMT changes from the default color to red, and the chance up notice is likely to occur, and the big hit symbol is also generated. It is suggested that the mode is likely to be confirmed and displayed. In addition, when the color of the character SBH of Sabohani is red, a chance up notice may be issued at all of the displayed check points (for example, three check points CP1 to CP3 in this example of performance). The chance up notice may occur only at one or two of the three checkpoints. In addition, even if the color of the character SBH of Sabohani is red, the chance up notice may not occur even once. In addition, when the color of the character SBH of Sabohani is red, the chance up notice may be issued n times (n=1 or more) in the effect by the chance up meter CMT. Further, the color of the character SBH of Sabohani may be displayed in a color other than red or the default color. For example, when it is displayed in rainbow color, the big hit may be determined. Further, in this effect example, an example in which the color of the character SBH of Sabohani is changed is shown, but the shape of the character SBH of Sabohani may be changed. Also, a character different from the character SBH of Savohani may be displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 177(A7), the character SBH of Sabohani resumes the progress on the meter and heads for the second checkpoint CP2. In this example of performance, the display mode of the character SBH of Sabohani may not change even though the rank-up animation is performed.

177(B1) to (B8) show another example of effects following FIG. 171(A5), for example, in which the chance up meter CMT ranks up during execution of the effect by the chance up meter CMT. Is shown. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 177(B1) to (B2) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 177(A1) to (A2), and thus description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 177(B3) shows a state in which a balloon with the characters “next point: chance up performance high probability” is displayed in the vicinity of the character SBH of Savohani traveling on the meter of the chance up meter CMT. There is. This balloon display informs that the chance up notice is likely to occur at the second checkpoint CP2 at which the Sabohani character SBH will arrive next. Note that, for example, in the case of displaying a balloon with the characters "Next point chance up effect occurrence!!", as shown in FIG. 177(B3'), instead of the balloon shown in FIG. 177(B3). It may be possible to notify that the chance advance notice is always generated at the second check point CP2. Also, as shown in FIG. 177 (B3″), there may be a case where a balloon attached with the characters “Next point Opportunity improvement effect occurrence” is displayed. In this case, the second check point It can be suggested that in CP2, a chance up notice may occur, but it may not occur. When the balloon shown in FIG. 177(B3″) is displayed, for example, the chance increase notice is less likely to occur at the second check point CP2 than in the case where the balloon shown in FIG. 177(B3) is displayed. Good. Further, by displaying only “high probability medium” in the balloon, it may be suggested that the chance up notice is likely to occur at any check point regardless of the specific check point. It should be noted that only the balloon with the character "Next point chance up production high probability" in FIG. 177 (B3) may be displayed, and "Next point chance up production occurs!!" in FIG. 177 (B3'). Only the balloon with the character "" may be displayed. In addition, a balloon attached with the character "next point chance up effect high probability" in FIG. 177(B3) and/or a character "next point chance up effect occurrence !!" in FIG. 177(B3') is attached. The displayed balloon may be displayed, or the balloon with the characters in FIG. 177 (B3″) may be displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 177 (B4), the display form of the second check point CP2 changes from the default display form to the chance-up display form (circular and red display form). That is, a state is shown in which a display indicating that the chance up meter CMT is ranked up is performed by changing the display mode of part or all of the chance up meter CMT. It should be noted that a chance-up notice may always occur at a checkpoint whose display mode has changed and ranks up. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 177(B5) to (B8) are performed. 171(A12) to FIG. 171 except that the display mode of the second checkpoint CP2 of the chance up meter CMT is different. Since the effect is the same as that shown in (A17) and described above, description thereof will be omitted.

177(C1) to FIG. 177(C6) show, for example, another effect example that follows FIG. 170(A24), and shows how a revival effect is being performed.

FIG. 177(C1) shows a state in which, as a result of the super-reach, the lord was defeated by the swordsman, and all the decorative patterns of the left design, the middle design, and the right design were displayed again in the normal darkness. There is.

Then, in FIG. 177(C2), a state in which the character SBH of Sabohani at the final point GP notices something is shown. That is, it is foretold that the revival effect will be generated by the character SBH of Savohani.

Then, as shown in FIG. 177 (C3), the resurrection cut-in PCI with the character “Have a good luck!!” is displayed together with the princess character, and then is displayed in a large size as shown in FIG. 177 (C4). The lord's character YMN appears with a sword. At this time, the lord's character YMN is displayed so as to overlap a part of the front surface side of the chance up meter CMT, and part of the character YMN is difficult to visually recognize. A part of the lord's character YMN may be overlapped by the chance up meter CMT, and a part of the lord's character YMN may be difficult to visually recognize. Further, the lord's character YMN may be displayed at a position not overlapping the chance up meter CMT, or the lord's character YMN and the chance up meter CMT may or may not be overlapped. Further, when the lord's character YMN appears, the lord's character YMN and the chance up meter CMN may always overlap. In this example of the effect, the revival cut-in PCI is displayed after being informed that the revival effect will be generated by the character SBH of Sabohani, but without being notified that the revival effect is generated by the character SBH of Savohani. The resurrection cut-in PCI may be displayed, or when the resurrection effect occurs after notifying that the sabotani character SBH will cause the resurrection effect, and when the sabotani character SBH causes the resurrection effect to occur. There may be a case where a revival effect occurs without it.

After that, as shown in FIG. 177 (C5), the lord's character YMN cuts the sword from the upper left corner to the lower right corner of the display screen, and cuts off "decoration 6" as the middle symbol that is stopped and displayed. Is done.

Then, as shown in FIG. 177 (C6), the middle pattern is changed from "decoration 6" to "decoration 7", and a combination of the decorative patterns of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is derived, and the jackpot is determined. Is notified. At this time, the placard at the final point GP of the chance up meter CMT is changed from the display of "x" to the display of "V", and it is informed that the big hit has been made also in this display.

In this effect example, for example, when the chance up meter CMT is not erased and the display is maintained when a combination of lost decorative symbols is derived, a revival effect is performed. In this case, the revival effect may not be performed.

FIG. 178 is a diagram showing a state in which the upgraded opportunity up meter preparation display MTY is continuously displayed in the upgraded manner even if the opportunity up meter CMT is switched.

178(A1) to (A5) is an effect following FIG. 175(A3), and switches to the chance up meter CMT in a state where the color of the meter portion forming the CUM preparing display MTY is red. In this case, the chance up meter CMT continues to be red. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 178(A1) to (A3) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 173(C1) to (C3), description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 178(A4) shows that the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT. In this example of performance, even if the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT, the gauge portion of the chance up meter CMT remains red. That is, when the CUM preparation display MTY has an increased chance, the chance up state is maintained even if the display is switched to the chance up meter CMT. After that, the effect shown in FIG. 178 (A5) is performed. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 178(A5) is the same as that in FIG. 175(A7), and therefore description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 178(B1) to FIG. 178(B5) are effects following FIG. 175(A3), and the chance up meter CMT is in a state where the color of the character SBH of the sabotani forming the CUM preparation display MTY is red. It shows that the character SBH of the sabotani of the chance up meter CMT continues to be red when it is switched to. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 178(B1) to (B3) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 173(D1) to (D3), description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 178(B4) shows that the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT. In this example of the effect, even if the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT, the sabotani character SBH of the chance up meter CMT remains red. After that, as shown in FIG. 178(B5), the character SBH of the sabotani starts moving from the start point SP in the state of the red display mode.

178(C1) to (C5) are the effects following FIG. 175(A3), in a state where the princess character HME is displayed in place of the Sabohani character SBH that constitutes the CUM preparing display MTY. When the chance up meter CMT is switched to, the character forming the chance up meter CMT is also the princess character HME. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 178(C1) to (C3) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 174(A1) to 174(A3), description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 178 (C4) shows a state in which the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT. In this example of the effect, even if the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT, the displayed character is still the princess character HME. After that, as shown in FIG. 178 (C5), the character forming the chance up meter CMT starts moving from the starting point SP while the princess character HME remains the same.

Needless to say, the effect example shown in FIG. 178 is applicable to any of the effect examples of the CUM preparation display MTY and the chance up meter CMT shown in this specification.

Further, in the present embodiment, the chance up meter CMT is configured to be easily ranked up when the CUM preparation display MTY is ranked up as compared with when the rank is not ranked up. Further, when the CUM preparation display MTY does not rank up, the chance up meter CMT is more likely to be displayed in the default display mode than in the case where rank up. In addition, in the case where the big hit symbol mode is finally confirmed and displayed, the CUM preparing display MTY and/or the chance up meter CMT is easier to rank up than when the lost symbol mode is finally confirmed and displayed. May be configured as. For example, (1) a pattern in which the CUM preparing display MTY is the default display mode and the chance up meter CMT is the default display mode, and (2) the CUM preparing display MTY is the default display mode, the chance up meter CMT is a display mode in which the rank is upgraded, (3) CUM preparation display MTY is a display mode in which the rank is upgraded, and chance up meter CMT is a default display mode, and (4) CUM preparation display MTY is In the case where a pattern is prepared in which the display mode is ranked up and the chance up meter CMT is ranked up, the pattern is displayed in the pattern (2) rather than the pattern (1). In this case, the jackpot pattern is more likely to be confirmed and displayed, and when the pattern (4) is displayed, the jackpot symbol may be more easily confirmed and displayed in the case of the pattern (3). Further, the case of displaying in the pattern of (3) may be easier to be confirmed and displayed in the big hit symbol mode than the case of displaying in the pattern of (2), or in the case of displaying in the pattern of (3). Rather than the case of being displayed in the pattern of (2), it may be easier to be confirmed and displayed in the jackpot pattern mode. Further, the display in the pattern of (1) is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the lost symbol mode than the display in the pattern of (2), and is (3) more than that in the pattern of (4). When the pattern is displayed in ), it may be easier to be confirmed and displayed in the lost symbol mode. Further, the case of displaying in the pattern of (3) may be easier to be confirmed and displayed in the lost pattern mode than the case of displaying in the pattern of (2), or in the case of displaying in the pattern of (3). Rather than when the pattern is displayed in the pattern (2), it may be easier to be confirmed and displayed in the lost symbol mode.

179. FIG. 179 is a diagram showing an example of an effect for giving advance notice that the chance up meter preparing display is displayed.

179(A1) to FIG. 179(A8) show a state in which the display of the CUM preparing display MTY is foretold by a conversation announcement. Note that FIG. 179(A1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 162(A1), and thus description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 179(A2) shows that the conversation announcement has started. When the conversation announcement is started, the lord's conversation image CI1 in which the character display of "chance" is displayed together with the lord's character is displayed. The display of the conversation image CI1 of the lord is the first stage of the conversation notice. Moreover, the conversation image CI1 of this lord is overlapped with the first decorative design, and the first decorative design is more difficult to visually recognize than in the case where the first decorative design is not overlapped.

Then, in FIG. 179(A3), the conversation notice is updated. Specifically, the pal's conversation image CI1 is reduced and displayed below the display position of the second decorative pattern, and the grand conversation image CI2 on which the operation promotion notification image is displayed together with the grand character is displayed. The operation promotion notification image is an image that prompts the player to press the effect button 136 (chance button 136) within the operation valid period, and includes a button image 136a simulating the effect button 136 (chance button 136) and the operation valid period. It is configured by a remaining time display meter MT that indicates the remaining time. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 179(A3), the operation valid period has not started, and even if the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, display corresponding to this is not performed. Although the first decorative symbol is hidden by the old conversation image CI2, the player may recognize that the special symbol is changing due to the fourth symbol display device 284, the second decorative symbol, or the like. Sometimes you can. Note that the display position of the decorative pattern may be moved to a position that does not overlap the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather or the conversation image CI1 of the lord so that the decorative pattern is not hidden. In addition, as shown in FIG. 179(A3), the palace's conversation image CI1 is at least partially overlapped by the grandpa's conversation image CI2, and the lord's conversation is more than that in the non-overlapping state. The display mode of the image CI1 is difficult to visually recognize. In this example of performance, the CUM preparation display MTY is more likely to be displayed when the conversation notice is given than when the conversation notice is not given. Further, when the conversation notice is updated, the lord's conversation image CI1 may not be displayed in a reduced size (for example, the display having the same size as that of FIG. 179(A2) is displayed), and the lord's conversation image CI1 is displayed. It may be erased. In addition, the conversation image displayed later may have a size (large or small) different from that of the conversation image displayed first, and the conversation notice A, which has a high degree of expectation for a big hit when displayed, is the conversation image. It may have a size (large or small) different from that of the conversation notice B, which has a lower expectation for a big hit than the notice A. The operation valid period of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is started thereafter.

The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 179(A4) is shown in a display mode when the operation valid period starts and a predetermined time has elapsed, and then, at a timing shown in FIG. 179(A5). When the person presses the effect button 136 (chance button 136), as shown in FIG. 179 (A6), the characters "standby!!" are displayed in the old conversation image CI2 instead of the operation promotion notification image. May be done. Thereby, it is announced that the CUM preparation display MTY will be displayed. The notice character display such as “standby!!” may be displayed on condition that the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, or the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is displayed. When the operation valid period has elapsed without being operated, the characters "standby!!" due to the old conversation image CI2 may not be displayed. In this case, the CUM preparation display MTY is also not displayed. Alternatively, the CUM preparation display MTY may be displayed. Further, even if the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is not operated and the operation valid period elapses, the characters "standby!!" are displayed, and the CUM preparation display MTY is also displayed. Good. Further, when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, there may be a case where a character display other than “standby!!” or a notice is given. Only when the word "standby!!" is displayed on the grandpa's conversation image CI2, even if the operation valid period elapses without operating the effect button 136 (chance button 136), "standby!!" When a character is displayed and a character other than "standby!!" is displayed or announced by the old conversation image CI2, it is displayed only when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated within the operation valid period. Good. Further, the character display and the advance notice of the old conversation image CI2 are displayed only when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated regardless of the character display and the advance notice in the old conversation image CI2. Alternatively, even if the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is not operated and the operation valid period elapses, the character display and the advance notice of the old conversation image CI2 may be displayed. Good. This is applicable to any of the conversation announcements mentioned herein.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 179(A7), the conversation image CI1 of the lord and the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather are erased, the conversation notice is ended, the first decorative pattern is easily visible, and the flame effect EF101 is displayed. It is displayed so as to cover the entire hold icon display area HIS. Then, as shown in FIG. 179(A8), the CUM preparation in-progress display MTY is displayed. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 179(A7) to (A8) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 162(A2) to (A3), detailed description thereof will be omitted.

179(B1) to FIG. 179(B5) show a state in which the display of the CUM preparing display MTY is foretold by the effect display by the notice icon YI.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 179(B1), the first decorative symbol is changing rapidly in the central region. In the upper left, the second decorative pattern is variably displayed. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 179(B1), a holding frame UI is displayed in the effect display area 208d. This hold frame UI has a hold icon display area HIS, a variable icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS. The variable icon display area CIS is provided in the center, and the pedestal hs0 is arranged in the variable icon display area CIS. The hold icon display area HIS is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area CIS, and four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged on the left base icon bIl. The effect icon display area DIS is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area CIS, and the right base icon bIr is arranged in the effect icon display area DIS. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 179(B1), the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed on the first stage hs1. That is, the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The display mode of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is No. 1 of FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1. On the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second reserved number display (here, "1" and "0") of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed. Further, the variation icon h0 is displayed on the pedestal hs0 in the variation icon display area CIS. The display mode of the change icon h0 is also No. 1 in FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1. Further, in this effect example, the notice icon YI appears and is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen, for example, as described above with reference to FIGS. 120 to 147.

After that, as shown in FIG. 179(B2), the notice icon YI of the mode a in which the box is closed is used, and the state changes to the mode d in which the box is open, and the box of the sabotani is displayed. An animation in which the notice display SH pops out is displayed. The notice display SH of the sabotani that appears here is a notice that the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed. It should be noted that before the notice icon YI is used, that is, before the box is opened, an effect of giving advance notice of the box opening (for example, an animation effect in which the box vibrates rattling) may be performed. In addition, when such an effect is performed, the box may or may not be actually opened.

In FIG. 179(B3), the used notice icon YI disappears, and the notice display SH of Sabohani is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c.

Then, as shown in FIG. 179(B4), the notice display SH of the sabotani is used, the notice display SH of the sabotani is erased, and the flame effect EF101 is displayed so as to cover the entire reserved icon display area HIS. It Then, as shown in FIG. 179 (B5), the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 179(B4) to (B5) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 162(A2) to (A3), detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 179(C1) to FIG. 179(C4) show a state in which the display of the CUM preparing display MTY is foretold by the notice effect by the navigation character.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 179(C1), the first decorative symbol is changing rapidly in the central region. In the upper left, the second decorative pattern is variably displayed. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 179(C1), a holding frame UI is displayed in the effect display area 208d. This hold frame UI has a hold icon display area HIS, a variable icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS. The variable icon display area CIS is provided in the center, and the pedestal hs0 is arranged in the variable icon display area CIS. The hold icon display area HIS is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area CIS, and four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged on the left base icon bIl. The effect icon display area DIS is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area CIS, and the right base icon bIr is arranged in the effect icon display area DIS. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 179(C1), the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed on the first stage hs1. That is, the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The display mode of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is No. 1 of FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1. On the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second reserved number display (here, "1" and "0") of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed. Further, the variation icon h0 is displayed on the pedestal hs0 in the variation icon display area CIS. The display mode of the change icon h0 is also No. 1 in FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1. In addition, in this effect example, the navigation character YM by the lord's character is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. The navigation character YM provides various effects and advance notice in accordance with the progress of the game.

FIG. 179(C2) shows a state in which the navigation character YM gives a navigation character advance notice. Specifically, when the navi character advance notice is started, a balloon with the characters “standby!!” displayed near the navi character YM is displayed, and the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed in advance.

Then, as shown in FIG. 179(C3), the navigation character YM is erased, and the flame effect EF101 is displayed so as to cover the entire hold icon display area HIS. The navigation character YM does not have to be deleted. After that, as shown in FIG. 179 (C4), the CUM preparing display MTY is displayed. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 179(C3) to (C4) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 162(A2) to (A3), detailed description thereof will be omitted.

179(D1) to (D7) show that the result of successful mini-game is displayed to give advance notice of the display of CUM preparation display MTY.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 179(D1), the first decorative symbol is changing rapidly in the central area. In the upper left, the second decorative pattern is variably displayed. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 179 (D1), a holding frame UI is displayed in the effect display area 208d. This hold frame UI has a hold icon display area HIS, a variable icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS. The variable icon display area CIS is provided in the center, and the pedestal hs0 is arranged in the variable icon display area CIS. The hold icon display area HIS is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area CIS, and four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged on the left base icon bIl. The effect icon display area DIS is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area CIS, and the right base icon bIr is arranged in the effect icon display area DIS. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 179(D1), the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed on the first stage hs1. That is, the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The display mode of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is No. 1 of FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1. On the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second reserved number display (here, "1" and "0") of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed. Further, the variation icon h0 is displayed on the pedestal hs0 in the variation icon display area CIS. The display mode of the change icon h0 is also No. 1 in FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1. Further, in this effect example, it is shown that the mini game is started in the effect icon display area DIS. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 179(D1), a rectangular mini-game display area MGD is formed in the effect icon display area DIS, and in this mini-game display area MGD, the title of the mini-game "Janken" is displayed. The characters "Confrontation" and the characters of the Lord and the swordsman are confronting each other. That is, in the mini-game display area MGD, a situation where the mini-game of the rock-paper-scissors confrontation is started is shown.

After that, in FIG. 179 (D2), the characters "Jakenken" are displayed to notify that the result of the mini game will be derived.

In FIG. 179 (D3), the character “Pon” is displayed, and the state in which the lord's character and the swordsman character are each taking a rock-paper-scissors pose is shown. Specifically, the Tonosama's character is giving out "Koki", and the swordsman's character is giving out "Par". Therefore, the result of the lord's character defeating the swordsman character is derived. Then, as shown in FIG. 179 (D4), in the mini-game display area MGD, the character "Yoshimune Victory" indicating that the lord's character has won is displayed, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 179 (D5). As the character of the swordsman is erased, a balloon with the character "Standby!" is displayed in the vicinity of the character of Tonosama, which indicates that the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 179 (D6), the flame effect EF101 is displayed so as to cover the entire hold icon display area HIS. Although the mini game display area MGD is displayed at this time, the mini game display area MGD may be erased before the display of the flame effect EF101, or may be deleted at the timing when the flame effect EF101 is displayed. It may be deleted, or may be deleted after the display of the flame effect EF101. Further, the mini game display area MGD may be displayed until the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 179 (D7), the CUM preparation in-progress display MTY is displayed. Since the effect shown in FIG. 179 (D7) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 162 (A3), detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 179(E1) to FIG. 179(E3) show how the result of the failure of the mini game is displayed. Here, FIG. 179(E1) is an effect following FIG. 179(D2).

In FIG. 179(E1), the character "Pon" is displayed, and a state in which the lord's character and the swordsman character are each taking a rock-paper-scissors pose is shown. In this example of production, the character of Tonosama is playing "Shoki" and the character of the swordsman is playing "Goo". Therefore, the result of defeating the lord's character by the swordsman character is derived. Then, as shown in FIG. 179(E2), in the mini-game display area MGD, the character "Yoshimune defeat" indicating that the character of Tonosama has been defeated is displayed, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 179(E3). The mini game display area MGD is erased, and the CUM preparation display MTY is not displayed. Although the flame effect EF101 is displayed here, animation may be performed in which the CUM preparing display MTY is not displayed. In addition, there may be a case where the flame effect EF101 is displayed and then the CUM preparing display MTY is displayed despite the defeat of the lord's character.

In the present embodiment, these notice effects that give notice of the appearance of the CUM preparing display MTY are performed, so that the jackpot symbol aspect is finally confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the appearance of the CUM preparing display MTY is not made. Suggests that it is easy to be.

FIG. 180 is a diagram showing another example of the effect of giving advance notice that the chance up meter preparing display is displayed.

180(A1) to FIG. 180(A6) show a state in which an example of the pending change animation is being performed. Here, FIG. 180(A1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 162(A1), and therefore description thereof will be omitted.

In FIG. 180(A2), No. 1 shown in FIG. The "Bomber" icon IHI of 4 appears at the right end of the screen, and the hold change animation starts. That is, the icon IHI of "Bomber" displayed here corresponds to the display of the pending change notice. In the hold change animation, while the "bomber" icon IHI flies from right to left, a bullet is fired (bombed) at the hold icon. The "bomber" icon IHI may be temporarily stopped before the target hold icon. In addition, this pause may be a pause of a fake that impersonates the target icon. Further, in this example of performance, the character "SP" is attached to the icon "HIB" of the bomber, and when the display form of the hold icon is changed, the display form of the hold icon after the change is pre-read notice of super reach. It is suggested that the display mode will show. In addition, when the hold change animation by the "Bomber" icon IHI is performed, the display of the hold icon may change without fail by the bombing of the hold icon, or the bombing of the hold icon fails. Therefore, the display mode of the hold icon may not change.

In FIG. 180(A3), a white bullet icon is fired from the white bomber icon. That is, the "bomber" icon IHI is composed of a white bomber icon and a white bullet icon. The target here is the first hold icon h11. In FIG. 180(A4), the bullet icon overlaps the first hold icon h11 from the front side. In FIG. 180(A5), the bullet icon hits the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11 is covered by the effect image EF112. Then, in FIG. 180(A6), the effect image EF112 disappears, and the first hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the display mode of “SP” that gives advance notice that super-reach will be performed. As a result, by pre-reading that super-reach will be performed, it also indirectly pre-reads that the chance up meter CMT and/or CUM preparation display MTY will be displayed. The chance up meter CMT may not be displayed even when the super reach is performed in the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold icon h11 displayed in the display mode of "SP". In this example of performance, by changing the display mode of the hold icon, advance notice of the occurrence of the super reach is given, and as a result, the advance indication of the chance up meter CMT or CUM preparation display MTY is indirectly given. However, the pre-reading notice of the super reach may be given by the hold icon or another type of pre-reading notice, and the indirect pre-reading notice regarding the display of the chance up meter CMT or the CUM preparation display MTY may be given. By the change icon or other type of change notice, it gives a notice of super reach in the symbol change display being executed, and indirectly gives a notice about the chance up meter CMT or CUM preparation display MTY. Good.

FIG. 180(B1) illustrates a state in which the CUM preparation in-progress display MTY is displayed in the conversation notification. FIG. 180(B1) is, for example, an effect following FIG. 179(A2).

FIG. 180(B1) shows that the conversation notice is updated. Specifically, the lord's conversation image CI1 is reduced and displayed below the display position of the second decorative pattern. In this example of performance, not the grandfather's conversation image CI2 but the characters "STANDBY" together with the character Sabohani. The conversation image CIsh of Savohani in which is displayed is displayed. The first decorative symbol is hidden by the conversation image CIsh of Sabohani, but the player may recognize that the special symbol is changing due to the fourth symbol display device 284 and the second decorative symbol. Sometimes you can. Note that the display position of the decorative pattern may be moved to a position that does not overlap the conversation image CIsh of Savohani or the conversation image CI1 of the lord so that the decorative pattern is not hidden. Further, as shown in FIG. 180(B1), at least part of the conversation image CI1 of the lord is overlapped by the conversation image CIsh of Sabohani, and the conversation of the lord is more than in the case where the conversation image CI1 is not overlapped. The display mode of the image CI1 is difficult to visually recognize. In this effect example, the CUM preparing display MTY is displayed by displaying the Sabohan conversation image CI1 including the Sabohan character forming the CUM preparing display MTY. Further, when the conversation notice is updated, the lord's conversation image CI1 may not be displayed in a reduced size (for example, the display having the same size as that of FIG. 179(A2) is displayed), and the lord's conversation image CI1 is displayed. It may be erased. In addition, the conversation image displayed later may have a size (large or small) different from that of the conversation image displayed first, and the conversation notice A, which has a high degree of expectation for a big hit when displayed, is the conversation image. It may have a size (large or small) different from that of the conversation notice B, which has a lower expectation for a big hit than the notice A. In addition, in this example of performance, when the conversation image CIsh of Sabohani is displayed, the CUM preparing display MTY may be displayed without fail, or the CUM preparing display MTY may not be displayed. Good.

FIGS. 180(C1) to 180(C3) show a situation in which the CUM preparation in-progress display MTY is foretold in the conversation announcement, but the CUM preparation in-progress display MTY is not displayed, and a preliminary announcement is made. Note that FIG. 180(C1) is, for example, an effect following FIG. 179(A2).

FIG. 180(C1) shows that the conversation notice is being updated. Specifically, the conversation image CI1 of the lord is reduced and displayed below the display position of the second decorative pattern, and the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather is displayed. In this example, instead of displaying the effect button 136 (chance button 136)a and the remaining time meter, the grandstand conversation image CI2 is displayed with the characters "standby" with a question mark. Therefore, it is suggested that the CUM preparation display MTY may be displayed.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 180(C2), the conversation image CI1 of the lord and the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather are erased, the conversation notice is ended, the first decorative pattern is easily visible, and the flame effect EF101 is displayed. It is displayed so as to cover the entire hold icon display area HIS. However, in this effect example, thereafter, as shown in FIG. 180(C3), the flame effect EF101 is erased, but the CUM preparation-in-progress display MTY is not displayed. In other words, the CUM preparation in-progress display MTY is not displayed, and a situation in which a conversation announcement of Gase is being performed is shown. Note that the CUM preparation display MTY may be displayed in some cases. In addition, this effect example can also be applied to the pre-reading notice, and holds the pre-reading notice target of GASE (as a result, the CUM preparing display MTY is not displayed or the chance up meter CMT is not displayed) or the CUM preparing It may be executed for each change up to the change of the prefetching notice object pending displaying the display MTY.

180(D1) to FIG. 180(D2), for example, following FIG. 179(A6), the timer advance notice display TM1 indicates that a timer advance notice preparation display for notifying that the timer advance notice is given is displayed. Showing.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 180 (D1), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed in the central region. In the upper left, the second decorative pattern is variably displayed. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 180 (D1), a holding frame UI is displayed in the effect display area 208d. This hold frame UI has a hold icon display area HIS, a variable icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS. The variable icon display area CIS is provided in the center, and the pedestal hs0 is arranged in the variable icon display area CIS. The hold icon display area HIS is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area CIS, and four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged on the left base icon bIl. The effect icon display area DIS is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area CIS, and the right base icon bIr is arranged in the effect icon display area DIS. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 180(D1), the hold icon of special figure 1 is displayed on the first stage hs1. That is, the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The display mode of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is No. 1 of FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1. On the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second reserved number display (here, "1" and "0") of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed. Further, the variation icon h0 is displayed on the pedestal hs0 in the variation icon display area CIS. The display mode of the change icon h0 is also No. 1 in FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1. Further, in this effect example, a state is shown in which an animation (frame-in animation) in which the timer notice display TM1 is framed in from the right end of the display screen is being performed.

After that, when the frame-in animation is completed, as shown in FIG. 180(D2), the timer notice is not displayed on the timer notice display TM1 and the character "STANDBY" is displayed, indicating that the timer notice is started. The display is done. It should be noted that it may be possible to give a notice that the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed instead of the notice display of the start of the timer notice. After that, in the timer notice display TM1, the display of "STANDBY" is switched to the time display, and the timer notice is started. It should be noted that the CUM preparation-in-progress display MTY may be displayed or the CUM preparation-in-progress display MTY may be displayed when a notice of "standby" is given by another notice display such as a conversation notice display. In some cases, a preparation-in-progress display may be displayed to the effect that other presentations are being prepared, such as a timer-preliminary presentation preparation-in-progress display. This also applies to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 180(E1) to (E3) and FIGS. 180(F1) to (F3).

FIGS. 180(E1) to 180(E3) show a state in which the CUM preparation display MTY is not displayed and the timer advance notice is started after the flame effect EF101 is displayed.

FIG. 180(E1) corresponds to the effect shown in FIG. 162(A2), and shows that the flame effect EF101 is displayed so as to cover the entire hold icon display area HIS.

After that, when the flame effect 101 is erased, as shown in FIGS. 180(E2) to (E3), the timer notice display TMY rises from the lower side of the hold icon display area HIS and the timer notice display TMY. Shows that the hold icon display area HIS is lifted. At this time, the characters "STANDBY" are displayed on the timer notice display TMY, indicating that the start of the timer notice is suspended. Note that the effect examples shown in FIGS. 180(E2) to (E3) are the same as those in FIGS. 165(E1) to (E2), and thus the description thereof will be omitted. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 165 (E3) and thereafter are performed. In this effect example, the flame effect EF101 for notifying the display of the CUM preparing display MTY is used to notify the start of the timer notifying.

FIG. 180 (F1) to FIG. 180 (F3) show a state in which a chance button preparing display for notifying that a chance button effect is performed is displayed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 180 (F1), the first decorative symbol is changing rapidly in the central area. In the upper left, the second decorative pattern is variably displayed. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 180 (F1), a holding frame UI is displayed in the effect display area 208d. This hold frame UI has a hold icon display area HIS, a variable icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS. The variable icon display area CIS is provided in the center, and the pedestal hs0 is arranged in the variable icon display area CIS. The hold icon display area HIS is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area CIS, and four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged on the left base icon bIl. The effect icon display area DIS is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area CIS, and the right base icon bIr is arranged in the effect icon display area DIS. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 180 (F1), the hold icon of special figure 1 is displayed on the first stage hs1. That is, the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The display mode of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is No. 1 of FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1. On the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second reserved number display (here, "1" and "0") of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed. Further, the variation icon h0 is displayed on the pedestal hs0 in the variation icon display area CIS. The display mode of the change icon h0 is also No. 1 in FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1. Further, in this effect example, a state in which the light effect EF113 is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS and the button image display animation is started is shown.

Then, as shown in FIG. 180(F2), a button image 136a appears on the back side of the light effect EF113, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 180(F3), the light effect EF113 is erased and rendered. The character "preparing" is displayed above the button 136 (chance button 136)a to give advance notice that the chance button effect will start (chance button effect notification). Since the operation valid period has not started, nothing happens when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated. It should be noted that after the chance button effect notice is displayed, the chance button effect is started, and as a result of operating the effect button 136 (chance button 136) in this opportunity button effect, the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed. Good. Further, after the light effect EF113 is displayed, there may be a case where a display announcing that the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed is displayed.

FIG. 181 is a diagram showing an example of an effect in which a chance-up notice is given at a checkpoint not shown in the chance-up meter.

181(A1) to FIG. 181(A7) continue from FIG. 162(A11), for example, in the effect produced by the chance up meter CMT, at a checkpoint not shown on the meter, a chance up notice (a sharp sword It shows how a notice is displayed. Note that the effects performed in the periods of FIG. 181(A1) to FIG. 181(A2) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 170(A6) to FIG. 170(A10), and thus description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 181(A3) shows that the character SBH of Sabohani is heading from the first check point CP1 to the second check point CP2, and is at a substantially intermediate point between the first check point CP1 and the second check point CP2. There is. At this time, the blade edge of the sword held by the lord's character is shining brightly, showing a sharpness. That is, it is shown that a chance up notice (a chance up notice for a sharp sword) is being given.

Then, as shown in FIG. 181 (A4), the effect EF114 is displayed at the place where the character SBH of the sabotani is located in the meter portion of the chance up meter CMT, and the animation at which the fourth checkpoint CP4 occurs is started. Is shown. The fourth check point CP4 may be displayed without displaying the effect EF114. For example, the fourth check point CP4 may be displayed by a fade-in animation in which the fourth check point CP4 fades in. You may Alternatively, the entire check-up meter CMT may be switched and displayed without displaying some check points, and the fourth check point CP4 may be displayed on the check-up meter CMT after switching. In addition, the advance check (announcement) may be performed by, for example, displaying the fourth check point CP4 before the advance notice of the sharp sword chance up starts.

In FIG. 181(A5), a balloon with the letters “Chance up, sharp sword” added is displayed near the character SBH of Savohani to notify that a chance up notice has been given. The timing at which the display of the sword's blade shines may be the same as the timing at which the display of the balloon of the Sabohani character SBH starts, or the timing of the display of the sword's blade shining may start after the display of the Sabohani character SBH. A balloon may be displayed, or a display in which the blade edge of the sword shines may be displayed after the display of the balloon of the Sabohani character SBH is started. Note that the character SBH of Sabohani stops at the fourth check point CP4 while the advance notice by the display of the sword's blade shining is being given, but it may not be stopped.

After that, as shown in FIG. 181 (A6), the fourth check point CP4 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red and “UP” indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has been improved due to the appearance of the notice. A letter is displayed above it to show the history of the advance notice. After that, as shown in FIG. 181(A7), the character SBH of Sabohani starts to move and moves toward the second check point CP2. In this example of performance, the chance up notice is given at the check points not shown on the chance up meter CMT, but the chance up notice is given only at the check points shown on the chance up meter CMT. It may have been done.

FIG. 181(B1) to FIG. 181(B7) show another production pattern in which a chance up notice (announcement display of a sharp sword) is performed at a checkpoint not shown on the meter in the production by the chance up meter CMT. Is shown. Note that FIG. 181 (B1

) To (B3) in the figure are the same as the effects shown in (A1) to (A3) in FIG. 181 and therefore the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 181(B4) shows a state in which a speech bubble with the words “Chance up, sharp sword” is displayed in the vicinity of the character SBH of Savohani, informing that the chance up notice has been given. ing. In this example of performance, although the notification that the chance up notice is given is given, the check points corresponding to the chance up notice are not displayed. In the chance up meter CMT, when a chance up notice is given at a point other than the point where the check point is indicated in advance, the balloon for informing the occurrence of the chance up may not be displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 181(B5), the balloon is erased, and then, as shown in FIG. 181(B6), the character SBH of Sabohani starts to advance toward the second checkpoint CP2. In this example of performance, the check points are not displayed, but the character "UP" is displayed at the position of the meter corresponding to the timing at which the chance-up notice was made, thus increasing the reliability of the big hit. Suggests that. Here, the display of "UP" is overlapped by the character SBH of Sabohani, and is more difficult to visually recognize than in the case where it is not overlapped. Note that the character “UP” may not be displayed. For example, in the chance up meter CMT, only when the chance up notice is generated at the timing corresponding to the check point previously displayed on the meter portion, the correspondence is provided. The character "UP" may be displayed at the position.

FIG. 181(B7) shows that the character SBH of Sabohani has reached the second checkpoint CP2. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 29(9) and thereafter are performed.

FIG. 182 is a diagram showing, step by step, another example of the effect using the chance up meter.

FIG. 182(A1) is another example of effects following FIG. 162(A8). In the effect example shown in FIG. 182(A1), the display mode of the chance up meter is different from that in the effect example shown in FIG. 162(A9). Specifically, the gauge portion of the chance up meter CMTa is configured in the shape of a green bar, and instead of the character SBH of Sabohan, the position of the marker MRKa roughly informs the current progress of the reach production. At this time, the color of the advanced portion of the marker MRKa in the gauge portion changes from green to white. Further, the moving speed of the marker MRKa is not constant but may change depending on the progress status of the effect, but may be constant. Further, in this effect example, unlike the chance up meter shown in FIG. 31(2f), a blank white circle display mark is displayed at each of the first check point CP1a to the third check point CP3a. Note that, as shown in FIG. 31(2f), characters and symbols such as question marks may be added to the mark and displayed. In this case, for example, by displaying characters such as "question mark", "!", and "UP", a notice related to a chance up notice, or a character such as a high probability state, the chance up notice is generated. You may make it suggest the ease. In addition, notices such as "!", "question mark", and "heat" are displayed in the mark to indicate that the chances of advance notice are likely to occur, or the chances of advance notice are likely to occur. It may be possible to give a notice of how easy it is to hit a big jackpot with a suggestion of that. The start point and the end point are indicated by the start end and the end of the gauge portion of the chance up meter CMTa.

FIG. 182(A2) shows that the marker MRKa has started moving from the start point.

Then, FIG. 182(A3) shows that the marker MRKa has reached the first checkpoint CP1a. At this time, the marker MRKa is stopped and displayed at the first checkpoint CP1a. Then, as shown in FIG. 182(A4), the character Boy of Boy appears from the left side of the display screen and moves toward the right side. Further, the mark of the first check point CP1a is erased. The mark of the first check point CP1a may be erased at the timing when the marker MRKa reaches the first check point CP1a, or the mark may be erased before the marker MRKa reaches the first check point CP1a. However, the mark may be erased after the marker MRKa reaches the first checkpoint CP1a. Further, the mark may be erased before the boy character BOY appears, the mark may be erased at the timing when the boy character BOY appears, or the mark may be erased after the boy character BOY appears. May be done.

When the boy character BOY appears, as shown in FIG. 182(A5), a balloon with the characters "Chance Up Boy Pass!!" is displayed near the marker MRKa, and the chance up notice is given. Is informed. As shown in FIGS. 182(A5) to (A6), the marker MRKa waits at the first check point CP1a at least while the boy character BOY appears and the balloon is displayed.

Thereafter, FIGS. 182(A7) to 182(A8) show that the marker MRKa has started to move. At this time, instead of displaying the mark at the first check point CP1a, the character “UP” indicating that the reliability of the big hit has been increased due to the appearance of the notice is displayed over the gauge portion. The boy character BOY is framed out from the right side of the display screen at the timing shown in FIG. 182(A8).

After that, when the marker MRKa reaches the second check point CP2a at the timing shown in FIG. 182(A9), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed in FIG. 182(A10), and the button effect is started. .. At this time, the marker MRKa is stopped and displayed at the second checkpoint CP2a. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 182 (A10), the operation valid period of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) has not started, and no effect is performed even if the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated. I don't know. Then, the operation valid period of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is started, and the player can accept the operation of the effect button 136 (chance button 136).

The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 182 (A11) shows that the operation valid period has started and the gauge has decreased, and thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 182 (A12), the player It is shown that the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is being pressed. Then, as shown in FIG. 182(A13), the weak cut-in image CI3b is displayed. That is, in this effect example, the gold cut-in image CI3 that may occur at the second check point CP2a is not displayed, and the chance up notice is not issued.

Then, as shown in FIG. 182(A13), the mark of the second check point CP2a is erased, but the character "UP" is not displayed in the gauge portion. Here, a display for notifying that the chance-up notice has not occurred may or may not be displayed. The mark of the second check point CP2a may be erased at the timing when the marker MRKa reaches the second check point CP2a, or the mark may be erased before the marker MRKa reaches the second check point CP2a. However, the mark may be erased after the marker MRKa reaches the second check point CP2a. The mark may be erased before the button image 136a is displayed, the mark may be erased at the timing when the button image 136a is displayed, or the mark may be erased after the button image 136a is displayed. May be. Further, the mark may be deleted at the timing when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, or the mark may be deleted after the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated. The mark may be deleted before the weak cut-in image CI3b is displayed, the mark may be deleted at the timing when the weak cut-in image CI3b is displayed, or the weak cut-in image CI3b is displayed. The mark may be erased after being deleted.

After that, as shown in FIG. 182(A14), when the marker MRKa starts moving from the second check point CP2a, and as shown in FIG. 182(A15), the marker MRKa reaches the third check point CP3a. In 182 (A16), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed instead of the lever image 136Va as the advance notice of the opportunity, and the advance notice by the button effect is started. After that, when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) starts, the player can accept the operation of the effect button 136 (chance button 136). After that, as shown in FIG. 182 (A17), in the chance up meter CMTa, the marker MRKa has started to move and is located before the final point. Further, the remaining time display meter MT shows that the operation valid period has started and the gauge has decreased. The marker MRKa may be stopped at the third check point CP3a until the player operates the effect button 136 (chance button 136) or the operation valid period elapses. In this example of performance, the lever image 136Va as a chance up notice is not displayed, so at the third check point CP3a on the chance up meter CMTa, the mark is erased and the character "UP" is not displayed on the gauge portion. ..

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 182 (A18), the player operates the effect button 136 (chance button 136), but the operation of the various effect movable bodies as shown in FIG. 29 (23) is not performed, and As shown at 182 (A19), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, "decoration 6" is displayed in the middle pattern, and the combination of the loss of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" is lost. Is notified. The chance up meter CMTa shows that the marker MRKa has reached the final point GP. The mark of the third check point CP3a may be erased at the timing when the marker MRKa reaches the third check point CP3a, or the mark may be erased before the marker MRKa reaches the third check point CP3a. However, the mark may be erased after the marker MRKa reaches the third check point CP3a. The mark may be erased before the button image 136a is displayed, the mark may be erased at the timing when the button image 136a is displayed, or the mark may be erased after the button image 136a is displayed. May be. Further, the mark may be deleted at the timing when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, or the mark may be deleted after the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated. Further, the mark may be erased before the middle symbol is displayed, the mark may be erased at the timing when the middle symbol is displayed, or the mark may be erased after the middle symbol is displayed. Good.

After that, as shown in FIG. 182 (A20), all the decorative symbols of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are once displayed lighter than the normal darkness. Also, in the figure, a scene in which the lord has fallen is displayed. In FIG. 182 (A21), all the decorative symbols of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are displayed again in the normal darkness. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 162(B4) to (B8) are performed. In this example of performance, the button up image 136a is displayed and the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated without a chance up notice being issued at the third check point CP3a, but the result of the loss is derived. In this example of effect, the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, and various effect movable bodies as shown in FIG. 29 (23) are operated, and the result of the big hit is derived. There may be cases. In addition, when the chance up notice is not generated at the third check point CP3a, it may be suggested that the loss is confirmed.

FIG. 182(B1) to FIG. 182(B6) show another effect pattern continued from FIG. 182(A1). The effect shown in FIG. 182(B1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 182(A2), and the effect shown in FIG. 182(B2) is performed after the effect shown in FIG. 182(B1) is performed. The effect shown in FIG. 182(A2) to FIG. 182(A9) is performed as the effect performed before being displayed.

FIG. 182(B2) shows that the marker MRKa has reached the second checkpoint CP2a and the button effect has started. Further, in this effect example, the "geki" part of the display of the characters "gekiatsutsu!!" is displayed in the part corresponding to the second checkpoint CP2a of the gauge part of the chance up meter CMTa. It is shown. That is, in this production example, in addition to the display of “UP” indicating that the chance up notice has been made, the change notice (the display of the character “Gekiatsu!!!!”) is displayed in the gauge portion of the chance up meter CMTa. ) Is displayed in some cases. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 182(A9) to (A13) are performed. In the meantime, the character "Gekiatsu!!!!" is continuously displayed in the gauge portion of the chance up meter CMTa, and as the gauge changes from green to white as the marker MRKa progresses, "Gekiatsu!!!!" The word "!" gradually appears. After that, as shown in FIG. 182 (B3), the characters “Gekiatsu!!!!” come to appear completely. By looking at this, the player may be able to further improve the sense of expectation for a big hit. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 171(A19) to (A23) are performed. Needless to say, at this time, the chance up meter CMTa shown in FIG. 182 (B3) is displayed instead of the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 171 (A19). In addition, in the case where the chance-up notice is generated in FIG. 171 (B2), a part or all of the characters “Gekiatsu! It may have been done.

When the player operates the effect lever 136V in the lever effect, as shown in FIG. 182(B4), the first large board action product 224Ga to the fourth large board action product 224Gd and the thousand-box work item 224H operate. The light guide plate IL emits light, and the effect image is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. That is, it is notified that the jackpot will be a big hit. At this time, the chance up meter CMTa is not displayed, but may be displayed.

After that, the light emission of the light guide plate IL ends, and the first large-scale behavior component 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior component 224Gd and the thousand-box component 224H return to their initial positions, and the effect image fades out on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. To do. At this time, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the animation display of the duel scene whose display has been interrupted is restarted while fading in. Although the chance up meter CMT also fades in along with the animation display fade-in of the duel scene, the chance up meter CMT may be re-displayed after the fade-in of the duel scene animation display is completed. .. Note that this operation is performed, for example, in the manner described above with reference to FIGS. 17(38) to (44).

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 182 (B5), a state in which the fade-in of the animation display of the duel scene is completed and restarted is shown. Specifically, the animation display of the duel scene shows that the enemy swordsman is in agony, and he is about to lose. In the chance up meter CMTa, the marker MRKa has reached the final point. Further, in this example of performance, since the advance notice that the lever image 136Va is displayed at the third check point CP3a has occurred, the character "UP" is displayed overlaid on the gauge portion. In this effect example, it is shown that the entire content displayed in the gauge portion of the marker MRKa is visible for the first time at the timing shown in FIG. 182 (B5). As shown in FIG. 182(B5), the display in the gauge portion of the marker MRKa may be erased at the timing when the animation display of the duel scene is restarted, or the chance up meter CMTa itself may be erased. This also applies when the result of loss is derived.

Then, in FIG. 182 (B6), the hero of the protagonist wins the enemy swordsman, "decoration 7" is displayed in the middle pattern, and it is informed that it will be a big hit. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 162(A13) to (A15) are performed.

FIG. 183 is a diagram showing another pattern of the effect using the chance up meter.

FIG. 183(A1) to FIG. 183(A6) show different effect patterns of the effects shown in FIG. 182(B1) to FIG. 182(B6).

FIG. 183(A1) shows that the marker MRKa has started moving from the start point. In this effect example, unlike the effect example shown in FIG. 182(B1), the progressed portion of the marker MRKa in the gauge portion is changed from green to white, but to a rainbow color. This iridescent display is a preliminary announcement display for confirming the big hit, and when the gauge portion changes to iridescent, it is notified that the big hit is confirmed. In this production example, the advanced portion of the marker MRKa in the gauge has changed from green to iridescent, but it may change to another color, and the reliability of the jackpot changes depending on the changing color. You may do so. For example, the advanced portion of the marker MRKa may be prevented from changing from green to green so that the jackpot pattern mode can be displayed more easily than when changing to white, or from green to red or gold. May be. Further, a pattern may appear in the advanced portion of the marker MRKa. Further, in this example of performance, the big hit announcement is given in the display mode of the advanced portion of the marker MRKa. However, for example, the advance notice of the chance up is announced, such as suggesting the ease or frequency of occurrence of the chance up announcement. May be performed. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 183(A2) to (A6) are performed. In addition, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 183(A2) to (A6), the color of the advanced portion of the marker MRKa is different, and the character “Gekiatsu!!!!!” is displayed at the second checkpoint CP2a. 182 (B2) to (B6) are the same as the effect examples shown in FIGS. 182(B2) to (B6), and the description thereof will be omitted.

183(B1) to FIG. 183(B16) show another example of the effects shown in FIG. 162(A1) to FIG. 162(A15), and the timing at which a chance-up notice is generated in the chance-up meter CMTc. It is shown that the number of occurrences is informed although not explicitly stated.

The example of the effect shown in FIG. 183(B1) is, for example, an effect following the one in FIG. 162(A2), and corresponds to the effect shown in FIG. 162(A3). In this effect example, the display mode of the CUM preparing display MTYa is different from the CUM preparing display MTY shown in FIG. 162(A3), and the CUM preparing display MTYa shown in FIG. 183(B1) is shown in FIG. 162(A3). The CUM preparation display MTY shown in FIG. 2 is extended above, the gauge is also arranged above, and an information display area capable of displaying character information is formed below. It should be noted that in this information display area, the number of times the chance-up notice is generated or the big hit may be given. After that, the same effect as that shown in FIGS. 162(A3) to (A7) is performed.

FIG. 183(B2) is an effect corresponding to FIG. 162(A8). The effect shown in FIG. 183(B2) is the same as that of FIG. 162(A8) except that the display mode of the CUM preparation display MTYa is different, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 183(B3) shows a state in which the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTYa to the chance up meter CMTc. In this example of performance, no checkpoint is displayed on the gauge portion of the chance up meter CMTc, and it is difficult to recognize the timing at which the chance up notice is issued or the number of times that the chance up is likely to occur. Also, the chance up meter CMTc extends upward as in the CUM preparation display MTYa, the gauge is also arranged above, and an information display area is formed below the gauge.

After that, as shown in FIG. 183 (B4), the characters "3 more places" are displayed in the information display area of the chance up meter CMTc, and the occurrence timing of the chance up notice is not clear, but three chance ups are made. It has been announced that a notice may be given. Further, FIG. 183 (B4) shows a state in which the character SBH of the sabotani who functions as a cursor has started moving. At this time, a balloon written “START!!” is displayed near the character SBH of Sabohani to notify the start of the movement of the character SBH of Sabohani. This balloon is then erased as shown in FIG. 183(B5).

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 183(B6), a character Boy of Boy appears from the left side of the display screen and moves toward the right side. That is, it is shown that a chance up notice is given due to the appearance of the boy character BOY.

Then, in FIG. 183 (B7), a balloon with the characters “Chance Up Boy Passed!!” is displayed near the character SBH of Savohani to inform that the chance up notice has been given. That is, the player may understand that this timing is the first checkpoint. Further, in the information display area of the chance up meter CMTc, the display is changed to the characters "two more places", and it is notified that the chance up notice may occur twice more. It should be noted that the display of the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice in the information display area may be changed before the appearance of the boy character BOY, or the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice in the information display area at the timing when the boy character BOY appears. May be changed, or the display of the number of occurrences of the chance up notice in the information display area may be changed after the boy character BOY appears. Further, the display of the number of occurrences of the chance up notice in the information display area may be changed before the balloon display of the character SBH of Savohani is displayed, or the information display is performed at the timing when the balloon display of the character SBH of the sabotani is displayed. The display of the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice in the area may be changed, or the display of the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice in the information display area may be changed after the balloon display of the character SBH of Savohani is displayed.

After that, in FIG. 183 (B8), the first checkpoint CP1 marked in red is displayed at a position corresponding to the timing at which the chance-up notice is generated, and the reliability of the jackpot is improved due to the appearance of the notice. The word “UP” indicating that is displayed above it, and the history of occurrence of the chance up notice is shown. It should be noted that the display of "UP" is partially overlapped by the character SBH of Savohani, and it is more difficult to visually recognize it than in the case where the characters are not overlapped. Further, the content of the notice that has occurred may be displayed.

FIG. 183 (B9) is an effect corresponding to FIG. 171 (A19). In this example of performance, although not particularly shown, the second cut-up notice gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed as described above, and the position corresponding to the timing when the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed. The second checkpoint CP2 marked in red and the letters "UP" are displayed on the display, and the number of occurrences of the chance up notice in the information display area of the chance up meter CMTc is also changed to "1 more place". ing.

After that, in FIG. 183 (B10), the lever image 136Va is displayed, and a balloon with the letters “Chance Up Lever” is displayed in the vicinity of the character SBH of Savohani, and a chance up notice by lever production is started. I'm informing you. At this time, in the information display area of the chance up meter CMTc, the display of the number of occurrences of the chance up notice is changed to "0 more places", and it is notified that there is no possibility of the further chance up notice. There is. The chance up notice may be issued after the message "0 places left" is displayed. Further, the display of the number of occurrences of chance up notice in the information display area may be changed before the lever image 136Va is displayed, or the number of occurrences of chance up notice in the information display area may be changed at the timing when the lever image 136Va is displayed. May be changed, or the display of the number of occurrences of the chance up notice in the information display area may be changed after the lever image 136Va is displayed.

Then, in FIG. 183 (B11), the remaining time display meter MT is displayed in addition to the lever image 136Va, and the lever effect is started. At this time, the third checkpoint CP3 marked in red is displayed at a position corresponding to the timing at which the chance-up notice is generated, and "UP" indicating that the jackpot reliability has increased due to the appearance of the notice. Is displayed above it, and the history of the occurrence of the chance up notice is shown. At this time, the display of the number of occurrences of the chance up notice “0 places left” displayed in the information display area of the chance up meter CMTc is erased. The display may be continued without deleting the display of "0 places left". Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 183 (B11), the operation valid period of the effect lever 136V has not started yet. After that, the operation valid period of the effect lever 136V starts, and the player can accept the operation of the effect lever 136V.

The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 183(B12) shows that the operation valid period has started and the gauge has decreased, and thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 183(B13), the player When the production lever 136V is operated, as shown in FIG. 183 (B14), the first large-board behavior auditors 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior auditors 224Gd and the thousand box cabinet auditors 224H are activated, and the light guide plate IL emits light. The effect image is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. That is, it is notified that the jackpot will be a big hit. At this time, the chance up meter CMTc is not displayed, but may be displayed.

After that, the light emission of the light guide plate IL ends, and the first large-scale behavior component 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior component 224Gd and the thousand-box component 224H return to their initial positions, and the effect image fades out on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. To do. At this time, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the animation display of the duel scene whose display has been interrupted is restarted while fading in. This operation is performed, for example, in the manner described above with reference to FIGS. 17(38) to (44).

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 183 (B15), a state is shown in which the fade-in of the duel scene animation display has been completed and restarted. Specifically, the animation display of the duel scene shows that the enemy swordsman is in agony, and he is about to lose. Further, in the chance up meter CMTc, the character SBH of the sabotani reaches the final point GP, and the placard shows a character of "V" which means a big hit. In addition, in the information display area, "Congratulations!!" is displayed, celebrating that the big hit is derived. It is not necessary to display "Congratulations!!". In addition, when the result of loss is derived, for example, a character such as "sorry" may be displayed to display a game for comforting the player, or no display may be displayed in the information display area. May be. In addition, for example, when the revival effect as shown in FIGS. 177(C1) to (C6) is performed, a display such as “!!” is displayed in the information display area, and the revival effect may be performed. You may suggest that there is.

Then, in FIG. 183 (B16), the main character's lord wins over the enemy swordsman, "decoration 7" is displayed on the middle pattern, and it is notified that it is a big hit. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 162(A13) to (A15) are performed.

FIG. 184 is a diagram showing a modified example of the effect using the chance up meter shown in FIG. 183.

FIG. 184(A1) to FIG. 183(A3) are effects for displaying the number of occurrences of the chance up notice in the information display area of the CUM preparation display MTYa shown in FIG. 183(B1) to FIG. 183(B2). An example is shown. Specifically, in the CUM preparation display MTYa shown in FIG. 184(A1), the letters "3 more places" are displayed in the information display area provided below the gauge portion, and the chance up meter CMTc is used. It has been notified that the chance up notice may occur three times in the presentation. It should be noted that the number of notifications in the information display area and the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice may always be the same, or they may or may not be the same. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 184(A2) to (A3) are performed. Note that the effects performed during the period shown in FIGS. 184(A1) to (A3) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 162(A3) to (A8) except that the display mode of the chance up meter CMTc is different. Therefore, the description is omitted.

According to this performance example, for example, when the timing at which the chance-up notice is generated is fixed for each super-reach, it may be possible to infer the type of super-reach to be developed. Further, for example, when the number of times the chance up notice is generated is configured to be displayed differently depending on the reliability of the big hit, it is possible to estimate the reliability of the big hit with respect to the symbol variation that causes the super reach. Sometimes you can.

The effect shown in FIG. 184(B1) corresponds to the effect shown in FIG. 183(B4). In FIG. 184(B1), in addition to displaying the number of occurrences of the chance up notice in the information display area of the chance up meter CMTc, check points CP1 to CP3 are displayed to notify the occurrence timing of the chance up notice. There is. In this way, a part or all of the timing at which the chance-up notice is generated may be notified by the chance-up meter CMTc, and the number of times the chance-up notice is generated may be notified. Instead of the display shown in FIG. 183(B4), the display shown in FIG. 184(B1) may be displayed.

FIG. 184(C1) to FIG. 184(C4) do not display the number of occurrences of the chance up notice in the information display area of the chance up meter CMTc but warn that the chance up notice may occur. It shows the situation. In this case, the number of occurrences of the chance up notice may be displayed.

FIG. 184(C1) shows a state in which the character SBH of the sabotani who functions as a cursor starts moving. At this time, a balloon written “START!!” is displayed near the character SBH of Sabohani to notify the start of the movement of the character SBH of Sabohani. This balloon is then erased as shown in FIG. 184 (C2). It should be noted that this example of production is different from the production shown in FIGS. 183(B4) to (B5), and the number of occurrences of the chance up notice is not displayed in the information display area of the chance up meter CMTc.

In FIG. 184 (C3), a question mark is displayed along with “Soon, BOY is about to appear” in the information display area of the chance up meter CMTc, and the boy character COY is displayed at the timing corresponding to the first checkpoint CP1. It is informed that there is a possibility that a chance up notice will occur due to the appearance of. That is, in this example of performance, a situation is shown in which the timing is not clear, but there is a possibility that a chance-up notice may occur. It should be noted that the content of the advance notice of chance up may not be notified, and only the possibility of advance notice of chance up may be informed.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 184(C4), the character Boy of Boy appears from the left side of the display screen and moves toward the right side. That is, it is shown that a chance up notice is given due to the appearance of the boy character BOY. Even if "BOY is about to appear" is displayed in the information display area of the chance up meter CMTc, the boy character BOY may not be displayed and a chance advance notice may not be issued. Good. Further, at the timing when the boy character BOY is displayed, it may be notified that there is a possibility that another type of chance up notice other than the chance up notice due to the appearance of the boy character BOY may occur. In this case, for example, the big hit may be confirmed, or the advance notice of the chance may not be issued and the advance notice of the gambling may be given.

In FIG. 184(C5), a balloon with the characters “Chance Up BOY Passed!!” is displayed near the character SBH of Savohani to notify that the chance up notice has been given. At this time, the characters "BOY is about to appear" in the information display area of the chance up meter CMTc are deleted. The display in the information display area may be deleted before the Boy character BOY is displayed, may be deleted at the timing when the Boy character BOY is displayed, or the Boy character BOY may be displayed. It may be erased after being deleted. Further, the display in the information display area may be erased before the balloon of the character SBH of Sabohani is displayed, may be erased at the timing when the balloon is displayed, or may be erased after the balloon is displayed. May be done. After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 183(B8), the first check point CP1 or “UP” may be displayed to display the history that the chance-up notice has occurred. It should be noted that part or all of the timing at which the chance up notice is generated is notified by the chance up meter CMTc, and before the chance up notice corresponding to the timing notified by the chance up meter CMTc is given, this effect example As described above, in the information display area of the chance up meter CMTc, a display may be displayed to give advance notice that a chance up notice such as "BOY is about to appear" will occur. That is, when the checkpoint is displayed, "Soon, Boy appears" may be displayed before the timing at which the boy character Boy is displayed.

FIG. 184(D1) to FIG. 184(D5) are other effect patterns of the effect following FIG. 183(B8), and notify that the number of times the chance up notice is generated increases in the effect by the opportunity up meter CMTc. It shows how the production is being performed. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 184 (D1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 183 (B8), so description thereof will be omitted.

After that, in FIG. 184 (D2), a state is shown in which the effect of producing smoke (smoke effect EF115) is displayed in front of the sabotani character SBH proceeding toward the final point GP.

After that, when the smoke effect EF115 is erased, as shown in FIG. 184(D3), the Chibihime character CHM appears, and as shown in FIG. 184(D4), “Chibihime character CHM is displayed near the character CHM. A balloon attached with the character "1UP!" is displayed, and it is informed that the number of times the chance-up notice is generated may increase by one. It should be noted that the character SBH of Sabohani is stopped and displayed while the production of increasing the number of times of advance notice of chances by the character CHM of Princess Chibi is being stopped, but the number of occurrences of advance notice of chances by character CHM of Princess Chibi is generated. May be in progress while the effect of increasing is being performed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 184 (D5), when the character CHM of Princess Chibi is erased, the number of occurrences of the chance up notice displayed in the information display area of the chance up meter CMTc is displayed as "2 more places." From “3 more places”, and it is informed that there is a possibility that the chance up notice will occur three more times. In addition, the display of the number of occurrences of the chance up notice may be updated before the balloon "1UP!" of the character CHM of Chibihime is displayed, or the number of occurrences of the chance up notice may be updated at the timing when the balloon is displayed. The display may be updated, or the display of the number of occurrences of the chance up notice may be updated after the balloon is displayed. Further, the display of the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice may be updated before the character CHM of Princess Chibi is deleted, or the display of the number of occurrences of the notice of chance-up notification may be updated at the timing when the character CHM of Princess Chibi is deleted. Alternatively, the display of the number of occurrences of the chance up notice may be updated after the Chibihime character CHM is deleted. Further, since the character SBH of Sabohani is displayed in a stopped state while the effect of increasing the number of occurrences of the chance up notice by the character CHM of Princess Chibi is being performed, the character SBH of Sabohani is compared to the progress of the actual super reach. Since the position is on the front side and it is delayed, after that, the effect that the character SBH of Sabohani accelerates and is in a hurry, and the warp of the character SBH of Sabohani is responded to the progress of the actual super reach. The edge of the display position of the character SBH of Sabohani may be adjusted such that the display position is changed to the position where the character SBH of Sabohani is adjusted, or the edge of the display position of the character SBH of Sabohani may not be adjusted.

In this example of the effect, the character CHM of Princess Chibi that performs only the effect related to the chance up meter CMTc is made to appear and the effect of increasing the number of occurrences of the chance up notice is performed. An element (for example, the character SBH of Sabohani) may be used, for example, to perform an effect of increasing the number of occurrences of the chance up notice in the same manner as the rank up effect described above. Further, an effect of increasing the number of occurrences of the chance up notice may be performed by another element that does not form the chance up meter CMTc. For example, the number of occurrences of the chance up notice may be increased by the above timer notice. Alternatively, the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice may be increased by the effect of the notice icon YI, or the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice may be increased depending on the result of the mini game. The number of occurrences of the chance up notice may be increased by the effect using the navigation character YM shown in C1). Further, the number of times of increasing the chance up notice is not limited to once, but may be two or more times. It may be performed. This is also applicable when the chance points are displayed.

FIG. 185 is a diagram showing another effect pattern of effect using the chance up meter shown in FIG. 183.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 185(A1), the first decorative symbol is changing rapidly in the central region. In the upper left, the second decorative pattern is variably displayed. Also, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 185(A1), a holding frame UI is displayed in the effect display area 208d. This hold frame UI has a hold icon display area HIS, a variable icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS. The variable icon display area CIS is provided in the center, and the pedestal hs0 is arranged in the variable icon display area CIS. The hold icon display area HIS is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area CIS, and four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged on the left base icon bIl. Note that in FIG. 185(A1), the CUM preparing display MTYa shown in FIG. 183(B1) is displayed so as to overlap the front side of the hold icon display area HIS, which is difficult to visually recognize. The effect icon display area DIS is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area CIS, and the right base icon bIr is arranged in the effect icon display area DIS. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 185(A1), there is only one reservation in Toku-zu 1 and “1” and “0” are displayed in the second reservation number display. Further, the variation icon h0 is displayed on the pedestal hs0 in the variation icon display area CIS. The display mode of the change icon h0 is No. 1 in FIG. It is the default display mode described in 1. Further, in this effect example, the notice icon YI appears and is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen, for example, as described above with reference to FIGS. 120 to 147. Further, in this effect example, the character "meter x 1" is displayed in the information display area of the CUM preparation display MTYa, which gives a notice that the effect using the chance up meter CMTc will be performed once.

After that, as shown in FIG. 185(A2), the notice icon YI of the mode a in which the box is in the closed display mode is used, and the mode is changed to the mode d in which the box is in the open mode. The animation that pops up the notice display of "UP" for notice is displayed. The notice display of "UP" that appears here is a notice for notifying the increase in the number of developments of the effect using the chance up meter CMTc. It should be noted that before the notice icon YI is used, that is, before the box is opened, an effect of giving advance notice of the box opening (for example, an animation effect in which the box vibrates rattling) may be performed. In addition, when such an effect is performed, the box may or may not be actually opened.

In FIG. 185(A3), the used notice icon YI disappears and the notice display of "UP" is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In FIG. 185(A4), the promotion animation using the notice display of the "UP" is started. In FIG. 185(A4), the notice display of “UP” changes to the light ball EF116 in the right symbol display area 208c, and then flies toward the information display area of the CUM preparing display MTYa, and the information display area The state of hitting the "1" portion indicating the number of times in "meter x 1" is shown. At this time, the entire CUM-in-progress display MTYa may be difficult to visually recognize. At this time, the part of "1" in "meter x 1" is in a visually difficult state. In this example of performance, the number of developments of the production using the chance up meter CMTc may be increased without the promotion animation being performed, or the number of developments of production using the chance up meter CMTc being performed the promotion animation. May be increased, or the number of developments of the effect using the chance up meter CMTc may be increased without the promotion animation being performed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 185(A5), the display of “meter×1” in the information display area becomes “meter×2”, and the effect using the chance up meter CMTc develops once and can be performed twice. It is announced that there is a possibility. After that, the same effect as that shown in FIGS. 162(A3) to (A7) is performed.

The effect shown in FIG. 185(A6) corresponds to the effect shown in FIG. 183(B2), and since the effect contents are the same except that the display in the information display area of the chance up meter CMTc is different, the description will be made. Omit it.

FIG. 185(A7) shows a state in which the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTYa to the chance up meter CMTc. In this effect example, even if the CUM preparation display MTYa is switched to the chance up meter CMTc, the number of developments of the effect using the chance up meter CMTc is continuously displayed in the information display area of the chance up meter CMTc. Also, in FIG. 185(A7), at the timing when the display changes from the CUM preparation display MTYa to the chance up meter CMTc, the display of “meter×2” in the information display area becomes “meter×1”, and the chance up meter CMTc is changed. It is shown that the first effect used is started to be executed. The display of “meter×2” in the information display area may be switched to “meter×1” before the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTYa to the chance up meter CMTc, or the chance is increased from the CUM preparation display MTYa. The display of “meter×2” in the information display area may be switched to “meter×1” after the display is switched to the meter CMTc. In addition, in this effect example, similar to the effect shown in FIG. 162 (A9), the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 are displayed, and the number of times the opportunity up notice is displayed and the display timing are shown. ing.

FIG. 185(A8) shows a state in which the character SBH of Sabohani that functions as a cursor starts moving. At this time, a balloon written “START!!” is displayed near the character SBH of Sabohani to notify the start of the movement of the character SBH of Sabohani. Note that the “START!!” balloon may not be displayed. Further, there may be a case where “START!!” is displayed and a case where it is not displayed.

Then, in FIG. 185 (A9), the display of the placard at the final point GP is displayed as a "question mark", and when the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the final point GP, the production using the chance up meter CMTc can be developed. Suggests that there is a nature. After that, for example, the same effect as the effect shown in FIGS. 29(3) to 29(16) is performed.

Then, in FIG. 185(A10), the same effect as in FIG. 29(17) is performed. The display of the placard at the final point GP on the chance up meter CMTc is still the display of "question mark".

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 185 (A11), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed instead of the lever image 136Va, and the lever effect as the advance notice of the chance is not started. The situation is shown. Therefore, the balloon of the character SBH of Sabohani is not displayed, and as shown in FIGS. 185(A10) to (A12), the character SBH of Sabohani passes through the third checkpoint CP3 as it is and the third checkpoint. Neither the marking nor the letters “UP” are displayed on the CP3. At the timing shown in FIG. 185 (A11), the operation valid period of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is not yet started. The operation valid period of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is started thereafter, and the player can accept the operation of the effect button 136 (chance button 136).

Thereafter, the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 185 (A12) shows that the operation valid period is decreasing. On the other hand, in the chance up meter CMTc, the character SBH of Sabohani is located in front of the final point GP.

Then, when the player operates the effect button 136 (chance button 136) at the timing shown in FIG. 185 (A13) within the operation valid period, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 185 (A14) A message saying that the character of Tonosama and the swordsman of the enemy, "Is it removed?" is displayed, along with a display that the victory or defeat is not decided. Further, the chance up meter CMTc displays the word "development" on the placard at the final point GP to notify that the reach production will be developed. Along with this, it is suggested that the production by the chance up meter CMTc develops and the second production is started.

After that, after the cut-in image CI4 by the lord's character shown in FIG. 185(A15) is displayed, as shown in FIG. 185(A16), the effect that the panda character appears as an assistant in the swordsman reach. Is started. Further, the chance up meter CMTc shows that the character SBH of Sabohani rides on a flying carpet and moves toward the starting point SP. At this time, the production by the chance up meter CMTc is developed, and the display of "meter x 1" in the information display area is changed to "meter x 0" assuming that the second production is performed. The display in the information display area may change before the cut-in image CI4 is displayed, the display in the information display area may change at the timing when the cut-in image CI4 is displayed, or the cut-in image CI4 may change. The display in the information display area may change after the image CI4 is displayed. Also, the display in the information display area may change before the effect that the panda character appears as an assistant starts, or the information display area may be changed at the timing when the effect that the panda character appears as an assistant starts. The display may change, or the display in the information display area may change after the effect that the panda character appears as an assistant is started. Further, the display of “meter×1” may be deleted without changing the display to “meter×0”.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 185(A16) to (A18), while the character SBH of Sabohani is heading to the start point SP, a display for changing the chance up meter CMTc is displayed while overlapping with the character SBH of Sabohani. To do. Therefore, by the movement of the character SBH of Sabohani, for example, as shown in FIG. 185(A17), a part of the changed chance up meter CMT appears and the sixth check point CP6 appears, and FIG. 185(A18). As shown in, the fifth checkpoint CP5 appears.

FIG. 185(A18) shows that the character SBH of Sabohani is again located at the start point SP. At this time, in the chance up meter CMTc, the display state before the change of the fifth check point CP5 and the sixth check point CP6 (the state in which the red marking is not attached and the character "UP" is not displayed) Has become. Then, on the chance up meter CMTc, the movement of the character SBH of the sabotani is started.

After that, in FIG. 185 (A19), it is shown that the SP swordsman reach has been developed. The SP swordsman reach is a reach that develops and transitions to a swordsman reach, and is a reach production that is more likely to be a big hit than when the swordsman reach does not develop into an SP swordsman reach. In SP swordsman reach, as shown in Figure 185 (A19), the hero's lord and the enemy's swordsman confront each other, which is the same as the pre-development swordsman reach, but pandas are followed as an assistant to the hero's lord. It differs from the point in that the full moon appears in the background. Further, in FIG. 185 (A19), a chance up advance notice showing that the co-panda cheering party KPD48 composed of three co-panda characters is supporting at the timing when the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the fifth check point CP5. Is being conducted, and it has been announced that the reliability of the SP swordsman reach for jackpots has dramatically increased. The Kopanda supporter KPD48 may or may not always appear in the SP swordsman reach. After that, for example, the effect is performed in the same manner as shown in FIG. 30 (31b) to FIG. 30 (34b), and after that, for example, when the effect lever 136V is operated, FIG. The effect is performed in the manner described above with reference to FIG. 28, and it is notified that the jackpot will be a big hit. In addition, you may be notified that it will lose.

In this example of performance, an effect of increasing the number of developments of the effect using the chance up meter CMTc is performed by an element other than the constituent elements of the CUM preparation display MTYa and the chance up meter CMTc. The display MTYa and the component of the chance up meter CMTc (for example, the character SBH of Savohani) may be used to perform the effect of increasing the number of developments of the effect using the chance up meter CMTc. Alternatively, the number of times the chance up meter is displayed may be stocked purely and displayed. Further, in this effect example, an example in which the number of chance up meters CMTc displayed corresponds to the number of times the super reach is developed, but the chance up meter CMTc is displayed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, or the super reach is displayed. The present invention can also be applied to the case where there are a plurality of scenes in which the chance up meter CMTc is started to be displayed, such as when the display is changed to. In addition, when multiple productions by the chance up meter are stocked, there may be cases where they are all used or only partially used, and when multiple productions by the chance up meter are stocked. In addition, it may be configured so that all of them are used.

FIG. 186 is a diagram showing, step by step, an example of a pre-reading notice using the opportunity up meter preparing display.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 186(A1), the first decorative symbol is changing rapidly in the central region. In the upper left, the second decorative pattern is variably displayed. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 186(A1), a holding frame UI is displayed in the effect display area 208d. This hold frame UI has a hold icon display area HIS, a variable icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS. The variable icon display area CIS is provided in the center, and the pedestal hs0 is arranged in the variable icon display area CIS. The hold icon display area HIS is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area CIS, and four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged on the left base icon bIl. The effect icon display area DIS is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area CIS, and the right base icon bIr is arranged in the effect icon display area DIS. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 186(A1), the hold icon of Toku-zu 1 is displayed on the first stage hs1 and the second stage hs2. That is, the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are displayed. The display mode of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is No. 1 of FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1. At the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second reserved number display (here, "2" and "0") of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed. Further, the variation icon h0 is displayed on the pedestal hs0 in the variation icon display area CIS. The display mode of the change icon h0 is also No. 1 in FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 186(A2) to (A5) are performed. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 186(A2) to (A5) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 163(C2) to (C5), except that the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is different. The description is omitted. As shown in FIGS. 163 (D4) to (D5), the CUM preparing display MTY may be displayed during the temporary stop display and the stop display of the symbol, or during the temporary stop display and the stop of the symbol. There may be both a case where the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed and a case where it is not displayed during the display. This also applies to the cases shown in FIGS. 186(A10) to (A11). This is also applicable to any of the embodiments described in this specification.

In FIG. 186 (A6), the suspension of the special figure 1 (first suspension) is exhausted and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol variation display on the first special figure display device 212 is started. In addition, a moving animation of the holding icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the first holding icon h11 (the holding icon that is the target of the current pattern change) arranged on the first stage hs1 is the variable icon display area CIS. Is displayed on the pedestal hs0 as a variable icon h0, and the second hold icon h12 arranged on the second stage hs2 is moved to the first stage hs1 and displayed as a first hold icon h11. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of decorative symbols is also started. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 186(A7) to (A8) are performed. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 186(A7) to (A8) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 163(C6) to (C7), except that the number of reservations in Toku-zu 1 is different. The description is omitted.

After that, in FIG. 186(A9), a light effect EF117 is displayed at a position corresponding to the second check point CP2, and a state in which a checkpoint appearance animation is performed is shown.

Then, as shown in FIG. 186(A10), the light effect EF117 disappears and the second checkpoint CP2 appears. As described above, in this effect example, a state is displayed in which the check points for notifying the timing of the advance notice of the chance up are displayed while the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed. In this example of performance, only some check points (second check points CP2) of the check points displayed on the chance up meter CMT are displayed on the CUM preparation display MTY. All the check points (the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3) among the check points displayed on the CMT may be displayed on the CUM preparing display MTY. Further, in this example of the effect, the effect in which the checkpoint appears is performed by using the component (gauge portion) of the CUM preparing display MTY. The check points may be made to appear by an effect using the notice item YI, the mini game, the timer notice, etc.).

After that, the first decorative design is stopped and displayed in the order of the left design, the right design, and the middle design, and as shown in FIG. 186(A11), it is determined by the combination of the missing decorative designs of "decoration 6-decoration 4-decoration 1". Is displayed. At this time, the variable icon is erased. In addition, in this effect example, the CUM preparation-in-progress display MTY is hidden while the decorative design is confirmed and displayed, but the CUM preparation-in-progress display MTY is displayed while the decoration design is confirmed and displayed. May be.

After that, the suspension of the special figure 1 (first suspension) is exhausted, the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, the symbol variation display on the first special figure display device 212 is started, and the procedure shown in FIG. 186(A2). After the flame effect EF101 is displayed with, the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed again as shown in FIG. 186 (A12). At this time, the CUM preparation in-progress display MTY is displayed in the display mode in the previous symbol variable display, that is, the mode in which the second check point CP2 is displayed. After that, for example, after the same effect as the effect shown in FIG. 162 (A4) to (A7) is performed, the effect shown in FIG. 186 (A13) is performed. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 186 (A13) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 162 (A8) except that the display mode of the CUM preparing display MTY is different, and therefore description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 186(A14) shows that the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT. At this time, the first check point CP1 and the third check point CP3 that have been hidden in the CUM preparation display MTY appear. In addition, you may make it the production|generation which appears newly also about the checkpoint (2nd checkpoint CP2) which has already appeared in CUM preparation display MTY. It should be noted that a checkpoint that has been hidden in the CUM preparing display MTY may appear before the display is switched from the CUM preparing display MTY to the chance up meter CMT, or the chance increases from the CUM preparing display MTY. A check point that has been hidden in the CUM preparation display MTY may appear at the timing when the display is switched to the meter CMT, or the CUM is displayed after the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT. A checkpoint, which has been hidden, may appear in the preparing display MTY. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 186(A15) to (A16) are performed. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 186(A15) to (A16) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 162(A10) to (A11), description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, in this example of performance, a continuous notice that the CUM preparing display MTY is displayed over a plurality of symbol variation displays is performed, and the CUM preparing display MTY is being executed while the continuous notice is being executed by the CUM preparing display MTY. In the above, the effect of appearing the check point is performed, but the CUM preparation in-progress display MTY is not performed for continuous notice, and the effect in which the CUM preparation in-progress display MTY is displayed only in the symbol variation display being executed is performed. Good. In this case, during the execution of the pseudo continuous effect, the effect that the checkpoint appears on the CUM preparation display MTY may be performed as described above. Further, in addition to the effect that the check points appear in the CUM preparation display MTY, the effect that the appeared check points are erased may be performed. In addition, in the production in which the checkpoint appears, a chance up notice corresponding to the appeared checkpoint may be given without exception, or when a chance production notice is not given corresponding to the appeared checkpoint. There may be. Also, all check points may appear. This is the effect example shown in FIG. 165 (F1) and the effect examples shown in FIGS. 166 (A1) to (A3), (B1), (C1), and (D1). Is also applicable.

FIG. 187 is a diagram for explaining another display pattern of the chance up meter.

FIG. 187(A1) to FIG. 187(A15) are another example of effects following FIG. 162(A7), in which the marker MRKb is displayed as a cursor on the chance up meter CMT in addition to the character SBH of Sabohani. Is shown.

FIG. 187(A1) is, for example, an effect following FIG. 162(A7), and shows a state of shifting to the super reach effect. Further, a CUM preparation in-progress display MTY is displayed in the lower left portion of the display screen.

After that, in FIG. 187 (A2), a state in which the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT is shown. In this effect example, in addition to the character SBH of Sabohani as the cursor, a marker MRKb formed of an inverted triangle is displayed at the feet of the character SBH of Sabohani. That is, it is shown that the progress of super reach is displayed by two cursors. Although the character SBH of Sabohani is partially overlapped with the marker MRKb, it may be displayed at a position (for example, below the gauge) where the marker MRKb does not overlap with the character SBH of Sabohani. In this effect example, the marker MRKb moves in synchronization with the character SBH of Sabohani. After that, in the periods shown in FIGS. 187(A2) to (A15), for example, the same effects as those shown in FIGS. 29(2) to (26) are performed. Note that the effects performed in the periods shown in FIGS. 187(A2) to (A15) are shown in FIGS. 29(2) to 29(26) except that the marker MRKb is displayed on the chance up meter CMT. Since it is the same as, the description will be omitted.

In this example of the effect, the marker MRKb and the character SBH of the sabotani move in synchronization with each other. However, for example, an animation in which the character SBH of the sabotani waits at a check point during execution of the button effect or the lever effect (for example, There may be a period in which the marker MRKb is allowed to proceed while an animation or the like indicating that the player is stepping on and does not proceed, and the marker MRKb and the Sabohani character SBH do not move in synchronization. Alternatively, one of the marker MRKb and the character SBH of the sabotani may be displayed at a position corresponding to the progress of the super reach effect, and the other may be displayed at a position not corresponding to the progress of the super reach effect. Further, the marker MRKb may be displayed at a position corresponding to the progress of the super reach effect, and the character SBH of Sabohani may warp to the checkpoint to notify the occurrence of the chance up notice corresponding to the warped checkpoint. .. In addition, when the chance up notice is not generated at a certain checkpoint, the character SBH of Sabohani is then warped to the checkpoint at the position corresponding to the chance up notice that did not occur, and the checkpoint is dealt with. It may be possible to indicate that the reliability of the jackpot has been improved by the fact that the advance notice of the chance increase has occurred. In addition, in this example of effect, an example of a case of a big hit has been described, but the marker MRKb can be similarly displayed in the case of a loss. In this case, for example, the revival effect may start without reaching the marker MRKb and/or the character SBH final point GP of the sabotani. In addition, in this example of performance, the character SBH of Sabohani is displayed as the CUM preparing display MTY, and the marker MRK is not displayed, but the marker MRK is displayed while the CUM preparing display MTY is displayed and the character of Sabohani is displayed. The SBH may not be displayed, and the character SBH of the sabotani and the marker MRK may be displayed during the display of the CUM preparation display MTY. Further, (1) a pattern in which only the character SBH of the sabotani is displayed on the CUM preparing display MTY, (2) a pattern in which only the marker MRK is displayed in the CUM preparing display MTY, and (3) a sabotani is displayed on the CUM preparing display MTY. When there is a pattern in which both the character SBH and the marker MRK are displayed, there may be a case of (1), a case of (2), and a case of (3). Good. Further, the case (1) may be applicable and the case (3) may be applied. Further, the case (1) may be applicable and the case (2) may be applicable.

187(B1) to FIG. 187(B11) show another effect pattern following FIG. 167(A7).

187(B1) to (B2) are, for example, the effects following FIG. 162(A7), and show a state of shifting to the super reach effect. Further, a CUM preparation in-progress display MTY is displayed in the lower left portion of the display screen.

After that, in FIG. 187 (B3), the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT. In this effect example, the gauge configuration in the chance up meter CMT is different from that shown in FIG. 162 (A9). Specifically, only one check point (second check point CP2) is displayed on the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 187 (B3), and the display mode of the final point GPa is also different. That is, in this production example, the final point GPa does not correspond to the timing at which the result of the symbol variation display is derived, and an example in which the production by the chance up meter CMT starts and ends during the super reach production is shown. There is. In other words, it can be said that this example of performance shows an example in which an effect is produced by the chance up meter CMT that notifies the timing at which the chance up notice is given only during a certain period of the super reach effect.

FIG. 187(B4) shows a state in which the character SBH of Sabohani that functions as a cursor starts moving. At this time, a balloon written “START!!” is displayed near the character SBH of Sabohani to notify the start of the movement of the character SBH of Sabohani. At this time, the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed to notify that the notice by the button effect has started. That is, in this effect example, a state in which the effect is produced by the chance up meter CMT in the period from the start to the end of the button effect is shown. In this example of performance, the period from the start point SP to the second check point CP2 corresponds to the operation valid period during which the operation of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is accepted. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 187 (B4), the operation valid period has not started yet, and the operation valid period starts thereafter.

After that, the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 187 (B5) shows that the operation valid period has decreased. On the other hand, the chance up meter CMT shows that the character SBH of the sabotani is moving to a position corresponding to the time from the start of the operation valid period.

Thereafter, when the player presses the effect button 136 (chance button 136) at the timing shown in FIG. 187 (B6), as shown in FIG. 187 (B7), the money shown in FIG. The cut-in image CI3 is displayed. At this time, the character SBH of Sabohani accelerates to the second check point CP2 regardless of the display position. In addition, you may warp to 2nd checkpoint CP2. Although the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed even after the valid operation period has elapsed, it may not be displayed. Further, in this example of production, the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed when the production button 136 (chance button 136) is operated during the operation valid period. However, for example, the character SBH of Sabohani progresses on the gauge. However, if the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated at the timing of reaching the check point (for example, the second check point CP2), the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed, and the timing of reaching the check point is deviated. When the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated at a different timing, the gold cut-in image CI3 may not be displayed, or the weak cut-in image CI3b may be displayed instead of the gold cut-in image CI3. It may be done.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 187 (B8), a balloon with the letters “Chance Up Gold Cut-In” is displayed near the character SBH of Sabohani, and the cut-in surrounded by a gold frame is displayed. It informs that a notice has been given by displaying an image. Note that the character SBH of Sabohani stops at the second checkpoint CP2 even while the character image CI3 of the lord is displayed, but may not stop. Further, in this effect example, the timing when the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the second check point CP2 and the timing when the button effect is started may be the same, or the character SBH of Sabohani becomes the second check point CP2. The button effect may be started after reaching, or the character SBH of Savohani may reach the second check point CP2 after the button effect is started. Further, in this example of performance, the point at which the chance up notice is generated by the second check point CP2 is shown, but the final point GPa may be shown as the point at which the chance up notice is generated. In that case, the final point GPa may not be reached, and when the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the final point GPa, a chance up notice is generated, and when the character SBH of Sabohani does not reach the final point GPa. Alternatively, the chance up notice may not be generated. Further, the final point GPa may be surely reached, and in this case, when the character SBH of the Sabohani reaches the final point GPa, a chance-up notice may be issued or even when the final point GPa is reached. It may be possible that the chance up notice is not issued.

After that, as shown in FIG. 187 (B9), the second check point CP2 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red and “UP” indicating that the reliability of the big hit has increased due to the appearance of the notice. A letter is displayed above it to show the history of the advance notice. It should be noted that the display of “UP” is overlapped by the character SBH of Sabohani, and it is more difficult to visually recognize it than in the case where it is not overlapped.

After that, the character SBH of Sabohani starts moving, and FIG. 187 (B10) shows that the character SBH has reached the final point GPa. Then, as shown in FIG. 187 (B11), the chance up meter CMT is erased and the super reach effect is continuously performed.

In this example of production, the production is performed by the chance up meter CMT during a part of the super reach, but during a period other than the super reach (for example, a part of the normal reach or the reach state is not set). It may be performed during a part of the period in the variable display of symbols.

FIG. 188 is a diagram illustrating an example of the effect of the chance up meter executed in another super reach.

FIGS. 188(A1) to (A16) are, for example, another example of effects following FIG. 16(24), and an effect of princess reach different from the swordsman reach as an example of the above-described super reach is performed. It shows the situation.

FIG. 188(A1) is, for example, an effect following FIG. 16(24), and shows a state of shifting to super reach.

FIG. 188(A2) shows that the production of Hime Reach, which is an example of Super Reach, has started. Specifically, the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays the title "May be there..." which is the song sung by the princess character, and the first decorative symbol is the lower right corner of the display screen. It is shown moving to the department.

After that, in FIG. 248 (A3), a princess character appears and is dancing, and a strip-shaped lyrics display area is located slightly below the center of the display screen so as to overlap the front side of the princess character. LYC is arranged so as to extend to the left and right. In the lyrics display area LYC, the lyrics of the song sung by the princess character are displayed horizontally, and a triangular marker MRKc is displayed below the lyrics, and the marker MRKc is displayed as the song progresses. It is configured to move to the right and notifies the timing of singing. In the lyrics display area LYC shown in FIG. 248(A3), “but but true kindness” is displayed, and the character “excellent” is displayed in bold and larger size than other characters. There is. That is, this example suggests that a chance up notice may occur at the timing when the princess character sings the "Yu" portion. In other words, it can be said that the character "excellent" has the function of the checkpoint in the chance up meter CMT described above. In this example of performance, the lyrics suggest the timing of the advance notification of the chance up, but for example, in the dialogue in the conversation announcement, the display mode of a specific character is made different from other characters and a voice adapted to the dialogue is output. However, it may be suggested that the chance up notice may occur at the timing when the voice corresponding to the specific character in the dialogue is output.

FIG. 188(A4) shows a state in which the marker MRKc moves in accordance with the song of the princess character. Then, in FIG. 188(A5), the upper and lower frames of the lyrics display area LYC change from white, which is the default display mode, to red at the timing when the princess character sings the "Yu" portion, and a chance up notice is given. Is shown.

Then, in FIG. 188(A6), a balloon with the characters "Chance up lyrics frame is red" is displayed near the character "Yu" to inform that the chance up notice has been given. The balloon may be displayed at the timing when the display mode of the lyrics display area LYC changes, the balloon may be displayed after the display mode of the lyrics display area LYC changes, or the display of the lyrics display area LYC may be displayed. A balloon may be displayed before the mode changes. The lyrics frame may be ranked in the order of white>red>gold>rainbow, or may be ranked higher by skipping one or more ranks, such as white to gold. In this case, the expectation of the big hit increases in the order of iridescent>gold>red>white, and in the case of iridescent, the big hit may be confirmed. Further, the changing aspect may be informed (for example, “excellent” is displayed in red) by a character informing the timing such as “excellent”. In addition, in this example of performance, the number of points at which a chance-up notice is issued is one. However, there may be a plurality of points at which a chance-up notice is issued. Also, the point at which the chance up notice is generated may change depending on the color of the lyrics frame even with the same reach. Further, the points at which the chance up notice is issued may be the same regardless of the color of the lyrics frame.

After that, in FIG. 188 (A7), the marker MRKc continues to move in accordance with the song of the princess character, and shows the timing when the phrase “But true kindness” ends. In this example of performance, the history of occurrence of the chance up notice is displayed only while the phrase displayed when the chance up notice is displayed is displayed. The history that the chance up notice is generated may be displayed even after the phrase displayed in is changed to another phrase. For example, the phrase for which the chance up notice is generated is referred to as the lyrics display area LYC. It may be displayed in another display area to indicate the type of the chance-up notice that has occurred, the number of times the chance-up notice has occurred, or the type of the chance-up notice that has occurred. It may be displayed explicitly or implicitly.

Subsequently, in FIG. 188(A8), the display of the lyrics in the lyrics display area LYC is switched, and the phrase “may be there” is displayed, and these characters have the same display mode.

In FIG. 188(A9), the marker MRKc is moving in accordance with the song of the princess character, and shows the timing when the phrase “may be there” is finished.

Then, in FIG. 188 (A10), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed, and a state in which the final judgment presentation by the button presentation is started is shown. When the button effect is started, the lyrics display area LYC is once erased. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 188 (A10), the operation valid period has not started yet, and the operation valid period starts thereafter. The lyrics display area LYC may be displayed as it is.

After that, the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 188 (A11) shows that the operation valid period is decreasing.

Then, when the player presses the effect button 136 (chance button 136) at the timing shown in FIG. 188 (A12), in FIG. 188 (A13), the lyrics display area LYC is displayed again and the lyrics display area LYC is displayed. In the area LYC, the phrase “unknown” is displayed, showing that the final judge effect has been successful. After that, the marker MRKc moves in accordance with the song of the princess character, and when the phrase “unknown” ends singing at the timing shown in FIG. 188 (A14), the marker MRKc is also positioned to the right of the phrase “unknown”. Like In the case of a loss, when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is pressed, for example, the screen goes dark, the song cannot be sung to the end, and an effect display in which the final judge effect fails is displayed. It will be.

FIG. 188 (A15) shows a state in which the lyrics display area LYC is erased and the song is cut out. After that, as shown in FIG. 188 (A16), "decoration 7" is displayed on the middle pattern to notify that it is a big hit.

FIG. 188(B1) to FIG. 188(B11) show, for example, another effect example following FIG. 162(A8), and it is previously known that the chance up notice is generated during the execution of the effect by the chance up meter CMT. It shows how to notify.

FIG. 188(B1) is, for example, an effect following FIG. 162(A8), and shows that the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 188(B1), the first checkpoint CP1, the second checkpoint CP2, and the third checkpoint CP3 are arranged. These first check point CP1 to third check point CP3 indicate that a chance-up notice may occur, and is intended to give the player a sense of expectation. That is, when the Sabohani character SBH reaches each of the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 on the way, a specific advance notice may occur. Further, at the final point GP, the placard is displayed in rotation, which suggests that when the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the final point GP, either the result of the big hit or the loss is derived. Further, in this example of production, the treasure chest TRG is displayed above the second check point CP2 in the gauge portion. This treasure box TRG indicates that the character SBH of Sabohani may be opened when the character SBH approaches, and there is a possibility that the occurrence of the chance up notice may be announced. In addition, in the period in FIG. 188 (B1) to FIG. 18 (B2), for example, the same effect as the effect shown in FIG. 29 (2) to (7) is performed.

FIG. 188(B3) shows a state in which the character SBH of Sabohani has started moving and then approached the treasure chest TRG. Then, as shown in FIG. 188 (B4), the treasure box TRG is opened, and the character "UP" appears in the treasure box TRG. As a result, at the second check point CP2, it is announced that the chance up notice will be generated by displaying the gold cut-in image CI3. In this example of production, the character SBH of Sabohani opens the treasure box before reaching the second check point CP2 to give an advance notice of the chance up, but when the second check point CP2 is reached. The treasure chest TRG may be configured to open. That is, the appearance of the chance up notice may be notified by the appearance of the treasure box TRG at the second check point CP2 itself.

After that, in FIG. 188 (B5), the treasure box TRG is erased together with the character “UP”, and the character SBH of Savohani continues to move toward the second checkpoint CP2. Then, the effect shown in FIG. 188 (B6) to FIG. 188 (B11) is performed. Note that the effects performed during the period of FIG. 188 (B6) to FIG. 18 (B11) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 29 (9) to (16), so description thereof will be omitted.

In this example of performance, when the treasure box TRG is opened and the character “UP” appears, it is possible to give advance notice that a chance up notice will be generated at the timing when the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the corresponding checkpoint. However, for example, it may be possible to give a notice that the mode will be more reliable with the occurrence of the chance increase notice. Further, an icon indicating the content of the chance up notice that may occur at the timing when the character SBH of Sabohani arrives at the checkpoint where the treasure box TRG is arranged may appear from the treasure box TRG, for example, A treasure box TRG is placed at 1 check point CP1, and when the treasure box TRG is opened, an icon of the face of the boy character BOY appears, and a chance up advance notice that the boy character BOY appears is given. You may give a notice.

FIG. 189 is a diagram illustrating a modified example of the effect by the chance up meter.

189(A1) to FIG. 189(A6) show how a plurality of chance up notices are generated at one check point.

FIG. 189(A1) is, for example, an effect following FIG. 29(1). Since the effects shown in FIGS. 189(A1) to (A2) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 29(2) to 29(3), description thereof will be omitted.

In FIG. 189(A3), when the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the first checkpoint CP1, the character Boy of Boyi appears from the left side of the display screen and moves toward the right side. That is, it is shown that a chance up notice is given due to the appearance of the boy character BOY. In addition, in this example of performance, the character KPD of the copanda appears from the right end of the display screen, and a chance up notice is given by the appearance of the character KPD of the copanda. Here, the Kopanda character KPD overlaps with the swordsman character in the super reach production. Note that the Kopanda character KPD may overlap with the swordsman character. Here, the Kopanda character KPD may appear after the Boy character BOY appears, the Boy character BOY may appear after the Kopanda character KPD appears, or the Boy character BOY. The co-panda character KPD may appear at the same time.

Then, in FIG. 189 (A4), a balloon with the characters "Chance Up Boy Pass!!" is displayed near the character SBH of Sabohani, and the word "Chance Up Copanda Appears!!" is further above it. The balloon attached is also displayed, and it is informed that two chance-up notices have occurred at the first checkpoint CP1. In addition, the balloon of "Chance Up Boy Passed!!" and the balloon of "Chance Up Copanda Appeared!!" may be displayed at the same time, or after the balloon of "Chance Up Boy Passed!!" A speech bubble of "Chance up Copanda appears!!" may be displayed, or a speech bubble of "Chance up Boy pass!!" may be displayed after the speech bubble of "Chance up Copanda appears!!". The balloon of the sabotani character SBH may be displayed after the boy character BOY and the co-panda character KPD have appeared, or while the boy character BOY and the co-panda character KPD are appearing (for example, during the appearance animation display). It may be displayed, or may be displayed before the appearance of the Boy character BOY and the Copanda character KPD. Further, the character SBH of Sabohani stops at the first check point CP1 while the advance notice by the display of the boy character BOY of the boy and the character KPD of the copanda is given, but may not be stopped. In addition, for example, a plurality of chance up notices may be notified by a single balloon, such as “Chance Up Boy Passes! And Copanda Appears!!”.

FIG. 189(A5) shows a state in which the boy character BOY and the co-panda character KPD are erased by the frame-out animation, and the balloons of the sabotani character SBH are also erased. Note that the balloon BOY and the co-panda character KPD may be erased after the balloon is erased, or the balloon BOY character and the co-panda character KPD may be erased after the balloon is erased. The balloon may be erased while the boy character BOY and the copanda character KPD are being erased (while the frame-out animation is displayed). The character Sabohani has started to move on the gauge of the chance up meter CMT. After that, the effect shown in FIG. 189 (A6) is performed. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 189(A6) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 29(8), and therefore description thereof will be omitted. Thereafter, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 29(9) and thereafter are performed. In this example of performance, even if a plurality of chance-up notices are generated, only one "UP" character indicating that the chance-up notice has been generated is displayed, but the number corresponding to the number of chance-up notices that have occurred. “UP” (in this example of performance, two “UP” displays) may be displayed.

189(B1) to FIG. 189(B7), if there is a checkpoint for which no chance up notice has occurred in the production by the chance up meter during super reach, then a chance up notice is given at that checkpoint. The example of the production which is made to be shown is shown. Note that, during the period of FIG. 189(B1) to FIG. 189(B2), for example, the same effect as the effect shown in FIG. 170(A6) to FIG. 170(A17) is performed.

After that, when the movement of the sabotani character SBH stops at the timing shown in FIG. 189(B3), the pause icon PSE overlaps part of the chance up meter CMT on the front side, as shown in FIG. 189(B4). Is displayed in. That is, in this effect example, the pause icon PSE overlaps the chance up meter CMT, so that the effect by the chance up meter CMT is temporarily stopped. Note that the suspension may be displayed by some or all of the components of the chance up meter CMT.

Then, as shown in FIG. 189 (B5), the cut-in showing that the representation of the super reach is interrupted and the princess character is saying "I will rewrite the reach" is displayed. The display of this cut-in is, for example, a notice for improving the reliability of the big hit by assuming that the reach effect performed in the symbol variable display has been effected with other contents. The display of this cut-in is a notice not directly related to the chance up meter CMT, but may be a notice of a chance increase directly related to the chance up meter CMT. Further, in this example of performance, the chance up meter CMT is displayed together with the pause icon PSE even during the period in which the princess cut-in display is displayed, but the pause icon PSE and chance up meter CMT are displayed. It may be hidden. Alternatively, the pause icon PSE may be displayed to display the princess' cut-in before the production by the chance up meter CMT is paused. In this case, for example, the princess' cut-in is displayed. During the period, the chance up meter CMT is hidden, and when the display of the princess's cut-in ends and the production of super reach is resumed, the chance up meter CMT is displayed with a pause icon PSE. You may make it perform the effect which the effect by CMT stops temporarily. Further, while the effect of super reach is temporarily stopped while the pause icon PSE is displayed, the effect may not be stopped by the chance up meter CMT and the character SBH of Savohani may be allowed to proceed. The effect of super reach may not be temporarily stopped, but the effect of the chance up meter CMT may be temporarily stopped. In addition, when the cut-in is displayed by the princess character, there may be a case where the pause icon PSE is displayed and the effect is temporarily stopped, and there is a case where the pause is not performed. In this case, the jackpot pattern mode may be settled more easily than in the case where it is not stopped temporarily. In addition, the progress of the super reach effect is progressing beyond the position of the character SBH of the sabotani shown in the chance up meter CMT, and by displaying the pause icon PSE and temporarily stopping the super reach effect, An effect may be performed such that the progress and the position of the character SBH of Sabohani are aligned with each other.

FIG. 189(B6) shows a state in which the display of the cut-in by the princess character is finished and the suspended reach production is restarted. However, the pause icon PSE is displayed, and the effect produced by the chance up meter CMT remains paused.

Then, as shown in FIG. 189 (B7), the pause icon PSE is erased, and the effect by the chance up meter CMT is restarted. At this time, the reach effect has been rewritten, and the display of the second checkpoint CP2, which has been displayed to the effect that the chance up notice has not occurred, is displayed in a mode marked in red and the chance up notice is also displayed. The character "UP" indicating that the occurrence has occurred is also displayed. That is, although the chance-up notice corresponding to the second check point CP2 has not been actually given, it is shown as being given, and the reliability of the big hit is improved. It should be noted that in this effect example, the pause icon PSE overlaps the chance up meter CMT, but, for example, when the chance up meter is provided with the above-described information display area. May display the word "temporary stop" in the information display area, or only the character "temporary stop" may be displayed on the chance up meter CMT, and the chance up meter such as the bar display or the character SBH of Sabohani. The images that make up the CMT may be hidden.

189(C1) to FIG. 189(C6) show another display mode of the chance up meter.

FIG. 189(C1) shows, for example, another effect pattern that follows FIG. 29(1). Specifically, when shifting to the super reach (swordsman reach), the chance up meter CMTx formed in a strip shape at the lower end of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed extending left and right. The chance up meter CMTx changes its display in such a manner that the gauge displayed in blue decreases from left to right from the start point SPx to the final point GPx according to the progress of the production of the super reach. In addition, in the area on the left side of the start point SPx, the character "start" is displayed, and in the area on the right side of the final point GPx, the character "end" is displayed, and the start point SPx and the final point SPx of the chance up meter CMTx are displayed. The point GPx is specified. Further, a check point CPx is arranged at a predetermined position of the chance up meter CMTx, which indicates that there is a possibility that a chance up advance notice will be given at the timing when a marker MRKx described later reaches the check point CPx. The checkpoint CPx is a display mode in which a question mark is put in a white circle, which suggests that there is a possibility that some kind of chance advance notice may be given, and it may give the player a sense of expectation. Sometimes you can. It should be noted that the question mark does not have to be attached inside the white circle, and the question mark may or may not be attached. Moreover, a mark, a character, or a symbol different from the question mark may be attached to the white circle.

In FIG. 189 (C2), the production by the chance up meter CMTx is started, and the marker MRKx moves from the start point SPx toward the final point GPx according to the progress of the production of the super reach, and the gauge decreases correspondingly. It shows how they are doing.

After that, when the marker MRKx reaches the check point CPx at the timing shown in FIG. 189 (C3), as shown in FIG. 189 (C4), the balloon marked with “extreme heat” inside the elliptical frame is like the lord's. It is displayed together with the face display YSMN, and gives a highly reliable chance up notice (big notice) of a big hit. It should be noted that the chance-up notice may not be given when the marker MRKx reaches the check point CPx, or another type of chance-up notice may be given. The marker MRKx may stand by at the position of the check point CPx while the chance-up notice is given, or may proceed toward the final point GPx without waiting.

FIG. 189 (C5) shows a state in which the display YSMN of the lord's face is erased, the chance up notice is completed, and the chance up meter CMTx is proceeding according to the progress of the super reach production.

After that, as shown in FIG. 189 (C6), when the marker MRKx reaches the final point GPx, the main character's lord wins the enemy swordsman, "decoration 7" is displayed on the middle pattern, and it is announced that it will be a big hit. To be done. In addition, when the marker MRKx reaches the final point GPx, it may be displayed that the hero's lord will be defeated by the enemy swordsman.

189(D1) to FIG. 189(D6) show other effect patterns of the effects shown in FIG. 189(C1) to FIG. 189(C6). In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 189 (D1), the display at the check point CPx is a display mode in which the character “heat” is added in a white circle, and the timing when the marker MRKx reaches the check point CPx. 189 (D4) gives a notice that the intense heat notice will be given. It should be noted that the occurrence of another type of chance up notice may be announced. Further, in the case of the display mode in which the character “heat” is attached in the white circle, the chance-up notice may or may not always occur. Also, as shown in FIG. 189 (D1′), a balloon may be displayed in the vicinity of the check point CPx in which the characters “A notice of “heat” is generated at this timing” are displayed. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 189(D1) to (D6) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 189(C1) to (C6), except that the display mode of the check points CPx is different. The description is omitted. In addition, before the marker MRKx reaches the check point CPx, the character "question mark" may be changed to the character "heat".

FIG. 190 is a view for explaining another effect pattern of effect by the chance up meter.

FIG. 190(A1) to FIG. 190(A4) show how, in the production by the chance up meter CMT, a notice different from the chance up notice is given using the components of the chance up meter CMT.

FIG. 190(A1) is an effect following FIG. 29(2), for example. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 190(A1) to (A2) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 29(3) to 29(4), the description thereof will be omitted.

In FIG. 190(A3), since Boy's character BOY has appeared at the first checkpoint CP1, a balloon with the words "Chance Up Boy Passed" is displayed near the character SBH of Savohani, and the chance up notice is given. It informs that it was done. At this time, the background color of the balloon is red, which suggests that the jackpot pattern mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the pattern variation display being executed than when the background color of the balloon is the default color (white). ing. That is, it is shown that the background color of the balloon is red, and the advance notice is given. Then, the effect shown in FIG. 190 (A4) is performed. It should be noted that the background color of the balloon is configured to be more easily displayed in red than the default color (white) when the big hit symbol display mode is confirmed and displayed than when the lost symbol display mode is confirmed and displayed. Good.

After that, when the chance-up notice ends, as shown in FIG. 190(A4), the first check point CP1 is marked in red, and the chance-up notice is generated, which indicates that the jackpot reliability has increased. The character "UP" is displayed, and the character SBH of Sabohani starts moving.

FIG. 190 (B1) to FIG. 190 (B18) show an example of effect in which an effect is produced by the chance up meter CMT during symbol fluctuation other than super reach. FIG. 190(B1) is, for example, an effect example following FIG. 162(A2), and since the effect shown in FIG. 190(B1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 162(3), description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 190(B2) shows a state in which the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT. The chance up meter CMT in this example of performance, for example, indicates the progress of variable display of the decorative pattern, and the character SBH of Sabohani moves between the start point SP and the final point GP, and the current decoration depending on the position. The progress of variable display of symbols is roughly notified. At the final point GP in this example of performance, the placard is rotated and displayed including the display of "x" and the question mark, so that the player has a sense of expectation as to whether the game will be lost or the performance will be developed. ing. Here, the traveling speed of the character SBH of Sabohani is not constant but may vary depending on the progress situation of the effect, but may be constant. Note that in the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 190(B2), the first check point CP1, the second check point CP2, and the third check point CP3 are arranged. The first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 indicate that a specific notice may occur, so that the player can be expected. That is, when the Sabohani character SBH reaches each of the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 on the way, a specific advance notice may occur.

FIG. 190(B3) to FIG. 190(B4) show a state in which the character SBH of the sabotani that functions as a cursor starts moving. At this time, a balloon written “START!!” is displayed near the character SBH of Sabohani to notify the start of the movement of the character SBH of Sabohani.

FIG. 190(B5) shows that the conversation announcement has started. When the conversation announcement is started, the lord's conversation image CI1 in which the character display of "chance" is displayed together with the lord's character is displayed. The display of the conversation image CI1 of the lord is the first stage of the conversation notice. Moreover, the conversation image CI1 of this lord is overlapped with the first decorative design, and the first decorative design is more difficult to visually recognize than in the case where the first decorative design is not overlapped.

Thereafter, in FIG. 190(B6), the conversation notice is updated. Specifically, the pal's conversation image CI1 is reduced and displayed below the display position of the second decorative pattern, and the grand conversation image CI2 on which the operation promotion notification image is displayed together with the grand character is displayed. The operation promotion notification image is an image that prompts the player to press the effect button 136 (chance button 136) within the operation valid period, and includes a button image 136a simulating the effect button 136 (chance button 136) and the operation valid period. It is configured by a remaining time display meter MT that indicates the remaining time. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 190 (B6), the operation valid period has not started, and even if the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, display corresponding to this is not performed. Although the first decorative symbol is hidden by the old conversation image CI2, the player may recognize that the special symbol is changing due to the fourth symbol display device 284, the second decorative symbol, or the like. Sometimes you can. Note that the display position of the decorative pattern may be moved to a position that does not overlap the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather or the conversation image CI1 of the lord so that the decorative pattern is not hidden. Further, as shown in FIG. 190(B6), the palace's conversation image CI1 is at least partially overlapped by the grandpa's conversation image CI2, and the lord's conversation is more than that in the non-overlapping state. It is difficult to visually recognize the display mode of the image CI1. Further, when the conversation notice is updated, the lord's conversation image CI1 may not be displayed in a reduced size, and the lord's conversation image CI1 may be deleted. In addition, the conversation image displayed later may have a size (large or small) different from that of the conversation image displayed first, and the conversation notice A, which has a high degree of expectation for a big hit when displayed, is the conversation image. It may have a size (large or small) different from that of the conversation notice B, which has a lower expectation for a big hit than the notice A. The operation valid period of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is started thereafter.

The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 190 (B7) is shown in a display mode when the operation valid period starts and a predetermined time has elapsed, and then the player creates an effect button 136 (chance button 136). When is pressed, as shown in FIG. 190(B8), in the grand conversation image CI2, the operation promotion notification image is replaced with a frame in which the operation promotion notification image is displayed, and the frame is gold-colored. A notice will be displayed that the characters "It's super hot!" will be displayed. Then, in the vicinity of Sabohani's character SBH, a balloon with the characters "Chance up gold frame advance notice occurred!!" is displayed, and it is informed that the chance up advance notice has been given by the grandpa's conversation image CI2. The balloon may be displayed at the timing when the display mode of the grandpa conversation image CI2 changes, or the balloon may be displayed after the display mode of the grandpa conversation image CI2 changes. Further, in FIG. 190(B8), No. 1 shown in FIG. The icon "IHI" of "6. Gold bomber" appears at the right end of the screen, and the hold change animation starts. That is, the "gold bomber" icon IHI displayed here corresponds to the display of the pending change notice. In the hold change animation in this example of performance, while the "gold bomber" icon IHI flies from right to left, a bullet is fired (bombed) at the variable icon h0. The “gold bomber” icon IHI may be temporarily stopped before the target variable icon h0. In addition, this pause may be a pause of a fake that impersonates the target icon. Further, in this production example, when the display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed by performing the hold change animation by the icon “HIBON BOMBER” IHI, the display mode of the changed hold icon is a gold display mode. It has been suggested that In addition, when a hold change animation is performed by the icon IHI of the “gold bomber”, the variable icon h0 may be successfully bombed and the display mode of the hold icon may be changed without fail, or the variable icon h0 may be bombed. May fail and the display mode of the variable icon h0 may not change. In this example, after the display mode of the old conversation image CI2 has changed, the "gold bomber" icon IHI may appear to start the hold change animation, or after the hold change animation starts. The display mode of the old conversation image CI2 may change. That is, the period during which the chance-up notice regarding the first check point CP1 is given may overlap with the period during which the chance-up notice regarding the second check point CP2 is given. Further, the pending change animation may be started after the balloon of the character SBH of Savohani is displayed, or the balloon may be displayed after the pending change animation is started.

After that, in FIG. 190(B9), the character SBH of Sabohani starts moving, and the first checkpoint CP1 is marked in red, which indicates that the reliability of the jackpot has been improved due to the appearance of the advance notice. The character “” is displayed above it, and the history of the occurrence of the opportunity advance notice is shown. Also, FIG. 190(B9) shows a state in which a gold bullet icon is fired from the gold bomber icon. That is, the "gold bomber" icon IHI is composed of a gold bomber icon and a gold bullet icon. The target here is the variation icon h0. Then, as shown in FIG. 190 (B10), the bullet icon hits the variable icon h0, and the variable icon h0 changes from the default display mode to the gold display mode. At this time, the character SBH of Sabohani is moving on the gauge of the chance up meter CMT, and the second check point CP2 arrives at the timing when the display mode of the variable icon h0 changes. The character SBH of Sabohani may reach the second check point CP2 before the display mode of the variable icon h0 changes, or the character SBH of the Savohani character may reach the second checkpoint CP2 after the display mode of the variable icon h0 changes. You may reach CP2. The character SBH of Sabohani is stopped at the second checkpoint CP2 and is on standby.

Then, in FIG. 190 (B11), a balloon with the word "Chance Up Gold Hold" is displayed near the character SBH of Savohani, and a chance up notice that the variable icon h0 is displayed in gold has occurred. Has been announced. The balloon may be displayed at the timing when the display mode of the variable icon h0 changes, or the balloon may be displayed after the display mode of the variable icon h0 changes.

After that, in FIG. 190 (B12), the character SBH of Sabohani starts moving, and the second checkpoint CP2 is marked in red, which indicates that the reliability of the jackpot has been increased by the appearance of the notice, and thus “UP”. The character “” is displayed above it, and the history of the occurrence of the opportunity advance notice is shown.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 190 (B13), the "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, and the reach state is formed, and it is shown that the fluctuation display is performed. ing. Here, the decorative pattern for which the swing fluctuation display is performed may overlap a part of the chance up meter CMT, or the decorative pattern may be displayed at a position that does not overlap the chance up meter CMT.

In FIG. 190 (B14), before the transition to the super reach effect, the "decoration 7" that was swinging and fluctuating in the left symbol display area 208a is moved below the second ornamental symbol, and is swinging and fluctuating in the right symbol display area 208c. It is shown that the “decoration 7” that was being performed has moved to the bottom of the second hold number display. At this time, the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the third checkpoint CP3, and at this timing, the background image including the character CLA of the spirit is displayed. A background image including the spiritual character CLA may be displayed at the timing when the sabotani character SBH reaches the third checkpoint CP3, or the spiritual character CHA may be displayed after the sabotani character SBH reaches the third checkpoint CP3. The background image including the character CLA may be displayed, or the character SBH of Sabohani may reach the third check point CP3 after the background image including the character CLA of the spirit is displayed.

Then, in FIG. 190 (B15), a balloon with the characters "Chance Up Claire Background" is displayed near the character SBH of Savohani, and a chance up notice that a background image including the spiritual character CLA is displayed is generated. It has been reported that you have done it. The balloon may be displayed at the timing when the background image including the spiritual character CLA is displayed, or the balloon may be displayed after the background image including the spiritual character CLA is displayed.

After that, in FIG. 190 (B16), the character SBH of Sabohani starts moving, and the third checkpoint CP3 is marked in red, which indicates that the reliability of the jackpot has been improved by the appearance of the notice, and "UP". The character “” is displayed above it, and the history of the occurrence of the opportunity advance notice is shown. Also, in FIG. 190 (B16), the background image including the spiritual character CLA is switched to the default background image. The background image including the spirit character CLA may be continuously displayed until the background image of the super reach is displayed. Further, in FIG. 190(B16), the downward movement of the holding frame UI is started, and a state is shown in which the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS is left and the frame is displayed below the display screen. ..

FIG. 190(B17) shows a state where the holding frame UI is completely framed out downward with the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS left. In addition, FIG. 190 (B17) shows that the character SBH of Sabohani has reached the final point GP. In addition, at the final point GP, the placard is displayed in a form displayed as "SP", and it is notified that the placard will be moved to the super reach.

FIG. 190 (B18) shows that the VS reach master's reach super-reach effect has started. Then, the chance up meter CMT is erased as having achieved the purpose. It should be noted that after the transition to the super reach, the production with a new chance up meter may be started. The chance up meter CMT may be deleted before the super reach effect is started, may be deleted after the super reach effect is started, or may be deleted at the timing when the super reach effect is started. May be. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 29(2) and thereafter are performed. In this case, the CUM preparation display MTY does not necessarily have to be displayed.

FIG. 191 is a diagram for describing an example of an effect produced by the chance up meter in the probability changing state.

FIG. 191(A1) to FIG. 191(A19) show how an effect using a chance up meter is performed as a pre-reading notice in the probability variation state.

FIG. 191(A1) shows a state in which after the big hit game is over, the symbol variation display of the first special diagram 2 is being performed. The control state shown in FIGS. 191(A1) to (A19) is a special figure high probability general figure high probability state (probably changed state with power support). Therefore, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L in the probability changing state with the electric support, the hold icon of the special figure 2 is displayed at the lower center of the display screen. In FIG. 191(A1), since the number of reservations in special map 2 is four, the four reservation icons (first reservation icon h21 to fourth reservation icon h24) of special map 2 are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction. , The hold icon on the left side becomes a hold icon with an older prize. In addition, you may make it also display the hold icon of special figure 1. In addition, in this production example, a background image of the universe in which the rocket heads toward the planet is displayed as the background image in the probability variation state with electric support. In addition, in this effect example, it is applied to a so-called ST machine in which a probability variation state with electric support of 50 rotations is given after the completion of all the jackpot games, but for example, the next jackpot occurs when a jackpot with a probability variation pattern. The specification may be a positive change state with electric support until. Further, it may be a so-called V-ST machine in which a certain variation state with electric support of a predetermined rotation (for example, 50 rotations) is given when passing through a specific area provided in the variable winning port in the big hit game. In addition, the game state in this example of performance may not be the probability changing state with electric support, but may be a special map low probability general figure high probability state (electric support status) or a special map low probability general figure low probability state. Good. Further, the second hold number display is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the hold number of special figure 1 is 3, and the hold number of special figure 2 is 4. .. Then, the second decorative design is displayed in the lower left corner, and the second decorative design is also variably displayed according to the first decorative design. In addition, in the upper left corner of the display screen, a right-hit display for instructing the player to hit a game ball toward the right side of the game area 124 is displayed, and below that, there is a low probability of a normal figure special figure special probability. In the state, the number of consecutive hits, which is the number of big hits that occur until the ordinary figure low probability special figure low probability state again occurs, is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 191(A1), three consecutive games are displayed. “BONUS×3” indicating a square is displayed. In addition, below the display of the number of consecutive holidays, the number of remaining symbol fluctuations in which the probability variation state with electric support is maintained is displayed, and at the timing shown in FIG. Is displayed.

In addition, in this example of performance, a song title display portion MN is provided in the upper right corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the song title of the song currently being output (here, the default “may be there”). )) is displayed, and the music piece of the music title is output from the speaker 120. That is, the music output here is the music output in the probability changing state. Further, icons of up/down keys 137u, d of the operation key unit 137 are displayed on the left side of the song name display portion MN, and it is informed that the songs can be selected by operating the up/down keys 137u, 137d.

In FIG. 191(A2), the symbol stop of the special figure 2 is performed, and the combination of the defective decorative symbols of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. .. Note that the number of remaining reservations in the special figure 2 is 4, and both are in the default display mode.

FIG. 191(A3) shows that the suspension of the special figure 2 has been exhausted and the first decorative symbol display device 208L has started the variable display of the decorative symbols. Even in the state of FIG. 191 (A3), the selected song is still “may be there”. It should be noted that a pre-reading notice or a change notice may be given by a song change notice, and an effect of forcibly changing the song selected by the player to another song may be given by the song change notice.

In FIG. 191(A4), a background change notice, which is a type of prefetch notice, is started. The background change notice in this example of performance is a notice that the continuous notice is started. The target of the background change notice (pre-reading target hold) here is the hold corresponding to the fourth hold icon hs24 shown in FIG. 191(A2). In the background change announcement, fusuma images (FSML, FSMR) appear from the left and right, and the entire display screen becomes a fusuma image due to the animation in which the fusuma is closed (see FIG. 191 (A5)). Therefore, the hold icons h21, h22, h23, the first decorative symbol, and the music title display portion MN are overlapped from the front side by the image of the sliding doors and are invisible. At this time, the music output from the speaker 120 fades out, and then the sound is muted. Note that the output of only the music may be stopped and the sound effect may be output.

Note that the background change notice may be started at the timing when the prefetch target suspension occurs. In this example, it is started during the next change of the winning change, but it is not limited to the next change, and it may be started before the change of the prefetch target suspension ends. For example, the same background as the background change notice may be displayed at the start of the change of the prefetch target suspension.

In the background change notice, the appearance image (here, the image of the fusuma) may represent the expectation of a big hit for the prefetch target suspension. For example, if the color of the fusuma is green, it changes to a mountain background. It may also function as a notice. Further, a plurality of types of background change notices may be prepared.

FIG. 191(A6) shows a state in which an animation of opening a sliding door is performed. Thereafter, in FIG. 191(A7), the sliding doors are completely opened, and the sliding door images (FSML, FSMR) disappear. In this example of performance, the continuous notice is started by the notice of the background change. On the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a title of "Is it possible to perform large board" showing the content of the effect of the continuous announcement is displayed, and a chance up meter CMTy is displayed above this title. The chance up meter CMTy in this example of performance has a start point SPy, a final point GPy, and a first check point CP1y and a second check point CP2y disposed between them, and each is set as a white circle display mode, and a band is formed between the points. Are tied with a gauge. Further, at the final point GPy, a symbol consisting of a question mark "!" is attached in a white circle, and a look-ahead notice is given regarding a symbol variation corresponding to the final point GPy. That is, it is announced that the final judgment production, which is the final production for notifying whether or not it is a big hit, will be performed after the symbol variation display is executed four times, including the symbol variation display being executed. The start point SPy corresponds to the symbol variation display being executed, the first check point CP1y corresponds to the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold, and the second check point CP2y, It corresponds to the variable display of symbols corresponding to the second hold, and the final point GPy corresponds to the variable display of symbols corresponding to the third hold, which is the target of the prefetch notice. Note that another look-ahead notice may be given to a point in which no display is performed among the points. Further, the display mode of each point does not change until the end of the effect of the continuous announcement, but the display mode may change for each symbol variation display, for example. Further, at the first check point CP1y and the second check point CP2y, it may be possible to give a notice that the chance up notice is given when the check point is reached. Further, the display in the white circle of the final point GPy is not limited to the one described above, and for example, the display mode may be changed according to the reliability of the big hit, for example, when “heat” is displayed. Is more likely to be a big hit than the symbol consisting of "!" and a question mark is displayed, and when "Hit" is displayed, the big hit symbol mode is fixedly displayed in the symbol variation display of the prefetching notice. You may In addition, the ease of development into super reach and the change may be announced according to the display mode in the white circles at each point, or the type of super reach may be announced. Further, not only the final point GPy but also the other points may be displayed in a white circle. For example, even if some kind of a previous warning is displayed at the final point GPy, the previous check point (white circle or You may make a big hit by changing the symbol corresponding to a checkpoint that is displaying some sort of notice).

Then, as shown in FIG. 191 (A8), the lord's character YMy that functions as a cursor is displayed at the start point SPy.

After that, in FIG. 191 (A9), the character of the lord is carrying a thousand boxes, and an effect display is displayed in which the peasant who is begging is just giving an award. After that, there is no progress in the effect display, and as shown in FIG. 191 (A10), the display is stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative patterns with the loss of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7".

FIG. 191(A11) shows that the suspension of the special figure 2 is exhausted and the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. In the second hold display, the hold of Toku-zu 1 shows 3 and the hold of Toku-zu 2 shows 2. In addition, the display of the number of remaining symbol variations is updated to "48 more times". At this time, the lord's character YMy on the chance up meter CMTy is moving from the starting point SPy to the first check point CP1y. In addition, the character of Tonosama, who is in charge of the thousand boxes, is shown holding his face blushing and throwing the thousand boxes to the farmer, which fuels his expectation for a big hit. After that, there is no progress in the effect display, and as shown in FIG. 191 (A12), the display is stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative patterns with the loss of "decoration 6-decoration 4-decoration 1".

FIG. 191 (A13) shows that the suspension of the special figure 2 is exhausted and the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. In the second hold display, the hold of Toku-zu 1 shows 3 and the hold of Toku-zu 2 shows 1. Further, the display of the number of remaining symbol fluctuations is updated to "47 more times". At this time, the lord's character YMy on the chance up meter CMTy is moving from the first check point CP1y to the second check point CP2y. In addition, the character of Tonosama, who is in charge of the thousand boxes, is shown throwing the thousand boxes toward the farmer, further fueling his expectation for the big hit. After that, there is no progress in the effect display, and as shown in FIG. 191(A14), the display is stopped and displayed with a combination of the missing decorative patterns of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 7".

FIG. 191 (A15) shows that the suspension of the special figure 2 is exhausted and the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. In the second hold display, the hold of Toku-zu 1 shows 3 and the hold of Toku-zu 2 shows 0. Further, the display of the number of remaining symbol fluctuations is updated to "46 more". At this time, the lord's character YMy on the chance up meter CMTy is moving from the second check point CP2y to the final point GPy, and it is notified that the final judge effect is being produced.

FIG. 191(A16) shows that, as a result of the final judge's presentation, the thousand boxes thrown by the lord have reached the farmer, and the small boxes are scattered from the thousand boxes. That is, it is informed that the result of the big hit will be derived assuming that the giving to the farmer was successful. After that, as shown in FIG. 191 (A17), a combination of the decorative patterns of the jackpot of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is derived, and a state in which swing fluctuation is performed is shown. After that, as shown in FIG. 191 (A18), the combination of the decoration symbols of the "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" (the jackpot pattern mode) is confirmed and displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 191 (A19), a big hit start effect is performed. In this jackpot start effect, the "Super Yoshimune Bonus" indicating that the jackpot game due to the probability jackpot is started is displayed because the symbols of the probability jackpot (special jackpot) are arranged.

In this example of effect, for example, the effect may be always performed from the 50th rotation to the 53rd rotation during ST by the variation pattern table.

In addition, in this example of performance, the continuous notice is given by the effect of the chance up meter, but the effect of such an opportunity up meter can be applied to the slot machine. For example, AT (assist time) is a slot machine that can be controlled to stop the reels in the correct order (pushing order) so that a payout of a high payout can be obtained, and is an advantageous game state in which the correct pressing order is notified. In the state, the character is advanced in the chance up meter according to the number of remaining AT games on the display, the final point is made to correspond to the number of remaining AT games being 0, and whether the AT state is continued by the display at the final point. Alternatively, it may be informed that there is a possibility that a final judge effect may be performed whether the remaining number of games in the AT state is added. In this case, depending on the display mode at the final point, the ease of continuing the AT state, the ease of adding the number of remaining games in the AT state, the number of games to be added, etc. should be suggested. May be. In addition, at each of the start point, the end point, and one or more check points arranged between them, the winning combination is displayed or the winning combination is displayed in the corresponding white circle at the timing of the lever ON or the first stop or the second stop. The history may be displayed in a white circle.

FIG. 191(B1) to FIG. 191(B8) are effects following FIG. 191(A15), and show how the result of continuous notice and the result of loss are derived.

FIG. 191(B1) is an effect following FIG. 191(A15). In this example of effect, a game ball is won in the second special figure starting port 232 between the time when the effect shown in FIG. 191 (A15) is performed and the time when the effect shown in FIG. 191 (B1) is performed. , Toku-zu 2 has been increased by one. In FIG. 191(B1), as a result of the judge's production, the lord fails to throw the thousand boxes and does not reach the farmer. Has been done. That is, it is notified that the result of the loss is derived because the application to the farmer has failed. After that, as shown in FIG. 191 (B2), a combination of lost decorative patterns of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7” is derived, and a state in which shake fluctuation is performed is shown. After that, as shown in FIG. 191(B3), the combination of the decorative patterns with the loss of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" is confirmed and displayed. In addition, after a combination of lost decorative symbols is derived, a revival effect may be performed and a combination of decorative symbols for the big hit may be derived.

Then, as shown in FIG. 191 (B4), after the suspension of the special figure 2 is digested and the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, in FIG. 191 (B5), the background is changed to the background in the probability variation state with electric support. The background change effect is started. When the background change effect is started, fusuma images (FSML, FSMR) appear from the left and right, and the entire display screen becomes a fusuma image due to the animation of closing the fusuma (see FIG. 191 (B6)). Therefore, the first decorative pattern and the chance up meter CMTy are overlapped from the front side by the image of the sliding doors and become invisible. At this time, the musical piece for continuous notice production output from the speaker 120 fades out, and then becomes a mute state. Note that the output of only the music may be stopped and the sound effect may be output.

In FIG. 191(B7), the sliding doors are opened, and the variable display of the first decorative pattern starts to be seen. In FIG. 191(B8), the sliding doors are completely opened and the sliding door image disappears. At this time, the hold icon is not displayed because the special figure 2 is on hold, but if the special figure 2 is on hold, the hold icon is visible while the fusuma animation is open. start. The hold icon may be displayed after the sliding doors are completely opened. Further, as shown in FIG. 191(B8), the background image after the sliding doors are opened is the background image of the castle town. The background image of the universe may be used.

FIG. 192 is a diagram illustrating an example in which a display of an effect by the chance up meter is performed on a display device other than the decorative symbol display device.

FIG. 192(A1) to FIG. 192(A5) are diagrams showing an example in which the POV display 224I is used to give advance notice of the appearance of the CUM preparation display MTY.

In FIG. 192 (A1) during the variable display of the symbols, the POV display 224I that has been hidden in the initial position so far has appeared on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the state before rotating (still). State).

In FIG. 192(A2), on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the POV display 224I starts rotating operation, and when it reaches the constant speed rotation, the POV display 224I displays an icon SH of "Sabohani", and CUM preparation. The appearance of the medium display MTY is announced in advance. During acceleration of the POV display 224I, since none of the light emitting elements of the POV display 224I emit light, the variable display of the first decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the holding frame UI are visually recognized. It is possible.

In FIG. 192(A3), the POV display 224I continues to rotate at a constant speed, and the icon “Sabohani” SH is still displayed. It is displayed to cover the whole.

When the flame icon EF101 is displayed, the POV display 224I starts decelerating the rotation, and then, as shown in FIG. 192(A4), the POV display 224I is in a stationary state, and then in FIG. 192(A5). Return to the initial position as shown. At this time, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the flame effect EF101 is erased and the CUM preparing display MTY is displayed. In this way, the appearance of the CUM preparing display MTY is announced, but the CUM preparing display MTY may not appear. The display may be switched from the flame effect EF101 to the CUM preparing display MTY after the deceleration operation of the POV display 224I is started, or after the display is switched from the flame effect EF101 to the CUM preparing display MTY. The deceleration operation of the POV display 224I may be started, or the display may be switched from the flame effect EF101 to the CUM preparation display MTY at the timing when the deceleration operation of the POV display 224I is started.

Even when the POV display 224I is rotating at a constant speed, the display area on the back side of the POV display 224I (the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L) is visible, and in that display area. A performance display may be displayed. Further, in the acceleration state until the POV display 224I reaches from the stationary state to the constant speed state or in the deceleration state until the POV display 224I returns to the stationary state, the display area is easier to see than the constant speed state, and the acceleration state is higher. The effect display may be performed in the display area even in the deceleration state. Alternatively, the effect display may be performed in the display area only in the acceleration state or the deceleration state. Further, in the acceleration state or the deceleration state, at least the display area (which may be the entire display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L) may be darkened to make the display of the POV display 224I stand out. Alternatively, the effect display may be performed in the display area in the accelerated state, and at least the display area may be darkened when the constant speed state is reached. The notes described here are also applicable to an example of presentation using the POV display 224I disclosed in this specification.

Moreover, the end timing of the constant speed rotation of the POV display 224I and the appearance timing of the icon "Sabohani" may be earlier than the end timing of the constant speed rotation or earlier than the appearance timing of the icon. Or both may be the same timing.

Further, although the appearance notice using the POV display 224I has been described here, the light guide plate IL and other display means (second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, fourth display device shown in FIG. 146). 208M', etc.), the above-mentioned notice of appearance may be executed, or another notice may be executed.

FIGS. 192(B1) to 192(B2) show examples of effects in which effects are produced by the chance up meter due to the configuration in which the display means is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

Up to now, the description centering on the first decorative symbol display device 208L has been described, but the contents displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L are displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. It may be displayed (the same applies to the description in other embodiments herein). Further, the arrangement of the display means is not limited to the horizontal arrangement, but can be applied vertically. In other words, it is not the case that the technology described in this specification cannot be applied simply because the hardware configuration is different, and from a technical idea, even if the display units are arranged side by side, they can be arranged vertically. Needless to say, the present invention can be applied even if the number of display means is different. Hereinafter, as an example of the vertical arrangement of the display means, an example in which the display means is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L will be described. Here, the display means arranged below is referred to as a fourth display means 208M' for description.

FIG. 192(B1) shows the fourth display means 208M′ arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The fourth display means 208M′ shown in FIG. 192(B1) is in the initial position. The fourth display means 208M' is surrounded by a frame around the display screen, and the upper edge of the frame of the fourth display means 208M' at the initial position is located at the lower end of the first decorative symbol display device 208L in the front side. Overlap from. The fourth display means 208M′ is arranged on the front side (player side) of the first decorative symbol display device 208L and overlaps the central portion of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L from the front side at the operating position ( For example, it can be moved from the initial position toward the position of the fourth display unit 208M' shown in FIG. 146 (a2'). That is, the fourth display means 208M' is also a movable means capable of moving up and down. In addition to the lifting operation, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be movable in the left-right direction. As a modified example of the fourth display means 208M′, the fourth display means 208M′ may be fixedly arranged at the initial position.

On the fourth display means 208M′ shown in FIG. 192(B1), a holding frame having a configuration similar to the holding frame UI that has been displayed in the effect display area 208d of the first decorative symbol display device 208L up to now is displayed. This hold frame also has a hold icon display area, a variable icon display area, and an effect icon display area. A pedestal on which the variable icon is placed is arranged in the variable icon display area. The hold icon display area is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area, and four stages (first stage to fourth stage) are arranged on the left base icon. The effect icon display area is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area, and the right base icon is arranged in the effect icon display area. In addition, the 2nd reservation number display (here "2" and "0") of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed on the upper right of the 1st decorative design display device 208L. This basic configuration is the same in FIGS. 192(C1) to (C2) described later.

Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 192(B1), after reaching the "decoration 7", the state is changed to the super reach effect (swordsman reach). On the other hand, the above-mentioned CUM preparation display MTY is displayed on the fourth display means 208M′, and the start of the effect by the chance up meter CMT is foretold. At this time, although the holding frame including the variable icon is not displayed, the variable icon may be displayed. Moreover, you may make it display a reservation frame. Further, during the period in which the CUM preparation display MTY or the chance up meter CMT is displayed on the fourth display device 208M′, the variable icon may be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Alternatively, the holding frame may be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

In the fourth display unit 208M′ shown in FIG. 192(B2), the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT. After that, the effect by the chance up meter CMT is performed on the fourth display means 208M'.

192(C1) to (C2) in FIG. 192 show examples in which the effects shown in (A8) to (A11) in FIG. 168 are realized using the fourth display unit 208M′.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 192(C1), the CUM preparing display MTY is displayed at the substantially center of the left end portion of the display screen. In this effect example, the display position of the CUM preparation display MTY is different from the display position of the chance up meter CMT. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, after reaching the "decoration 7", a transition to the super reach effect (swordsman reach) is shown. On the other hand, in the fourth display means 208M', "VS swordsman reach" for displaying the type of super reach effect is displayed.

After that, a moving animation in which the CUM preparing display MTY moves downward toward the fourth display means 208M′ is performed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and then the CUM preparing display MTY is displayed on the fourth display means 208M′. When displayed, the moving animation is complete. In this case, the CUM preparation display MTY may be moved between the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the fourth display means 208M'. Specifically, the CUM-in-progress display MTY may be displayed so as to straddle these display means, or may be displayed so as to warp between the display means without straddling these display means, The display units may be configured to be straddled or not straddled.

After that, as shown in FIG. 192 (C2), the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT. In this example of performance, the display of the CUM preparation display MTY is switched to the chance up meter CMT after the moving animation is completed, and then the character SBH of Sabohani starts moving (the former), but the CUM preparation display MTY. The character SBH of the sabotani may start moving (the latter) at the same time as switching from the chance up meter CMT to the chance up meter CMT. The timing at which the Sabohani character SBH starts moving may be the former or the latter, and may be performed only by the former or only by the latter.

FIG. 193 is a diagram showing an example of effect using the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

FIG. 193(A1) to FIG. 193(A7) show a situation in which a chance up notice is given due to the appearance of a boy character BOY occurring at the first check point CP1.

FIG. 193(A1) shows a state in which an animation of a duel scene between the main character Tonosama and the enemy swordsman is displayed, which has developed into super reach (swordsman reach). At this time, the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays the animation of the duel scene and also displays the chance up meter CMT in the lower left corner of the display screen. In the chance up meter CMT, the effect has started and the character SBH of Sabohani has started to move. Further, a pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS that constitutes the holding frame UI is displayed in the lower center of the display screen, and the variably icon in the default display mode is placed on the pedestal hs0. In addition, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second decorative symbol is variably displayed on the upper part, and the second number of holdings is displayed below it (here, the special symbol 1 is "1" and the special symbol 2 is "Representing "0") is displayed.

In FIG. 193(A2), the character Boy of Boy as a character of a chance up notice appears on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and proceeds toward the right end portion of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The situation is shown.

Then, the second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 193(A3) is shown to start moving rightward as the boy character BOY moves rightward on the display screen. There is. That is, it is shown that the second decorative symbol display device 208M is moving in accordance with the original movement display of the boy character BOY. At this time, in the display on the first decorative symbol display device 280L, for the portion overlapping the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the display of the overlapping portion is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. That is, of the character and chance up meter CMT displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the portion overlapping the second decorative symbol display device 208M is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. become.

Then, as shown in FIG. 193 (A4), the second decorative symbol display device 208M moves to a position where the right end portion of the second decorative symbol display device 208M is substantially the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the second When the maximum movement position of the decorative pattern display device 208M is reached, "Chance up BOY passing!!" is added near the character SBH of Savohani forming the chance up meter CMT displayed on the second decorative pattern display device 208M. A balloon is displayed. The balloon may be displayed before the second decorative symbol display device 208M reaches the maximum movement position, or the balloon may be displayed after the second decorative symbol display device 208M reaches the maximum movement position. However, a balloon may be displayed at the timing when the second decorative symbol display device 208M reaches the maximum movement position.

Then, as shown in FIG. 193(A5), the character of Boy moves rightward so as to straddle the first decorative symbol display device 208L from the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and at the same time, the second decorative symbol display device. 208M starts moving toward the initial position. With the movement of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, of the display on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, for the portion that does not overlap with the first decorative symbol display device 208L, from the second decorative symbol display device 208M to the first The display position is moved to the decorative pattern display device 208L. In addition, after the character Boy of Boy has completely moved from the second decorative symbol display device 208M to the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M may start moving toward the initial position. , The second decorative symbol display device 208M may start moving toward the initial position before the boy character BOY completely moves from the second decorative symbol display device 208M to the first decorative symbol display device 208L, The second decorative symbol display device 208M may start moving toward the initial position at the timing when the boy character BOY has completely moved from the second decorative symbol display device 208M to the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

FIG. 193(A6) shows that the second decorative symbol display device 208M has returned to the initial position. At this time, the lord's character and the chance up meter CMT displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M are completely displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The boy character BOY continues to move to the right in the display screen and is displayed across the right end portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. After that, the frame is framed out from the right end of the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

In FIG. 193(A7), the first check point CP1 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and the word “UP” indicating that the reliability of the big hit has increased due to the appearance of the notice is above it. It is displayed and shows the history of occurrence of the notice.

193(B1) to FIG. 193(B4) are examples of effects corresponding to FIGS. 193(A3) to (A6), and an example in which the display of the chance up meter CMT is hidden by the second decorative symbol display device 208M. It is shown. Note that FIG. 193 (B1) is an effect that follows FIG. 193 (A2).

The second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 193(B1) is shown to start moving rightward as the boy character BOY moves rightward on the display screen. At this time, in the display on the first decorative symbol display device 280L, for the portion overlapping the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the display of the overlapping portion is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, but the chance up meter CMT As for the second decorative symbol display device 208M is not displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M even if the second decorative symbol display device 208M overlaps on the front side, and therefore the chance up meter CMT displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is the second. It will be hidden by the decorative pattern display device 208L. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 193(B2) to (B4) are performed. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 193(B2) to (B4) are shown in FIGS. 193(A4) to (A6), except that the chance up meter CMT is not displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Since it is the same as the effect shown, the description is omitted.

In the description so far, for example, when the error shown in FIGS. 111 to 116, simultaneous production, or volume/luminance adjustment is performed during the production display, it is shown in FIGS. Displayed as described above.
In the above description,

"Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, fourth display means 208M' Etc.],

One of the plurality of types of display is a period display [for example, the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 29(2)],

One of the plurality of types of display is a first effect display [for example, gold cut-in CI3 shown in FIG. 29(13)],

One of the plurality of types of display is a first notice display [for example, CUM preparation display MTY shown in FIG. 162(3)],

The period display is a display that may be started during the display of the reach effect display [for example, as shown in FIG. 162 (A9), the chance up meter CMT is started to be displayed during the super reach effect]. etc],

The period display is a display for notifying the first timing [for example, the timing when the character SBH of Sabohan reaches the second checkpoint CP2, etc.] during the display of the reach effect display,

The first timing is a timing at which the display of the first effect display may be started during the display of the reach effect display,

The first notice display may be displayed before the period display is displayed [for example, as illustrated in FIG. 162(3) to FIG. Before the meter CMT is displayed, etc.],
The first notice display is a notice for notifying that the period display is displayed,
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide the game table having the characteristic display means.

Further, according to this gaming machine, since the notice display is displayed before the notification that a certain period is started by the period display, the period display is displayed, so that the certain period is started in advance. In some cases, it may be possible to understand that the display start of the period display is not overlooked.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

Further, the period display may be started only while the reach effect display is being displayed, or may be started even when the reach effect display is not being displayed. Further, the period display may be always started during the display of the reach effect display, or may not be started during the display of the reach effect display.

Further, the period display may notify only the first timing during the display of the reach effect display, or may notify other than the first timing during the display of the reach effect display. Good. Further, the period display may necessarily notify the first timing during the display of the reach effect display, or may not notify the first timing during the display of the reach effect display.

In addition, only the first notice display may be displayed before the period display is displayed, or a display other than the first notice display may be displayed before the period display is displayed. It may be. In addition, the first notice display may be displayed before the period display is displayed, or the first notice display may not be displayed before the period display is displayed.

Further, the first notice display may be displayed only before the period display is displayed, or the first notice display may be displayed other than before the period display is displayed. May be.

Further, the first notice display may give a notice only that the period display is displayed, or may give a notice other than that the period display is displayed. In addition, the first notice display may be a notice that the period display is displayed, or may not give a notice that the period display is displayed.

Instead of the advance notice display, the advance notice can be given by the operation of the effect movable body, the voice output by the speaker, or the light emission by the light emitting means.
Further, the notice display may be started during the big hit game.

Further, the notice display may be displayed during the display of the period display, and for example, the notice display may function as a notice display for notifying that the first effect display is displayed.

Further, the notice display may be displayed after the period display is displayed, for example, the period display is performed after the notice display is performed, and then the notice display is displayed. May be.

Further, the notice display may be displayed after the period display is hidden, and may be displayed as a function of notifying that the period display was displayed, for example.
It should be noted that "a gaming machine equipped with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
One of the plurality of types of display is a period display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a first effect display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a first notice display,
The period display is a display for notifying the first timing in a certain period,

The first timing is a timing at which the display of the first effect display may be started,
The first notice display may be displayed before the period display is displayed,
The first notice display is a notice for notifying that the period display is displayed,
A game table characterized by that. It may be.

In addition, "the period display is a display for notifying the first timing during the display of the reach effect display" means that "the period display is a timing at which a chance up notice (or a chance up effect) is given. It is a display of a meter (chance up timing meter) for informing.

In addition, as a case where it is possible to specify that the timing at which a certain chance-up effect is performed is notified by the chance-up meter preparing display (that is, the chance-up meter preparing display is displayed regardless of the display mode of the chance-up meter preparing display). When the chance up meter informs you of some chance up point just by displaying it (for example, when the chance up meter is always displayed when the opportunity up preparation display is performed, or when the chance up meter is displayed at least once. For example, when notifying the chance up point)),

(1) The first notice display may be a notice display that can specify that the first timing is notified by the period display.
(2) The first notice display may be a notice display for notifying the first timing.

(3) The first notice display may be a notice display that can specify that one or more timings of a plurality of certain effects including the first timing are notified by the period display. .. Further, there may be a timing that cannot be specified among the timings notified in the period display.

(4) The first notice display may be a notice display that can specify that “the timing at which all certain effects are performed” is notified in the period display.

(5) The first notice display may be "a notice display that notifies one or more timings among a plurality of timings including the first timing. Also, in the period display. There may be a timing at which the notification is not issued among the notified timings.

(6) The first notice display may be a notice display that notifies the "timing at which all certain effects are performed" that is notified in the period display.

In addition, when it is not possible to specify that the timing at which a certain chance-up effect is performed is notified by the chance-up meter preparing display (for example, if the chance-up preparing display is unclear or the chance-up meter is displayed, Even if you do not notify the opportunity up point),

(1) The first notice display may be a notice display that cannot specify that the first timing is notified by the period display.

(2) The first notice display may be a notice display in which the first timing is not notified.

(3) The first notice display may be a notice display in which it is not possible to specify in the period display that "the timing at which all certain effects are performed" is notified.

(4) The first notice display may be a notice display that does not notify the "timing at which all certain effects are performed" that is notified in the period display.

Further, the period display may notify the timing at which one or more certain effects are performed without fail.

Further, the period display may notify the timing at which one or more certain effects are performed, or may not notify the timing at which a certain effect is performed even once.
Further, when the display of the period display is displayed, the cursor display may already move.
The cursor display may move after the period display is displayed.

In addition, “the period display is a display including a cursor display [for example, the character SBH of Sabohani forming the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 162(A9)],

The period display is a certain period during the display of the reach effect display [for example, a period from the first timing in super reach shown in FIG. 162 (A9) to (A12) until the middle symbol is derived. Etc.],

From the second position [eg, the starting point SP in the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 162(A9)] to the first position [eg, in the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 162(A9)]. 2 check points CP2 and the like] to a third position [for example, the final point GP and the like in the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 162 (A9)] to notify the start and end of the certain period. Is configured to

When the cursor display reaches the first position, it is notified that it is the first timing,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
According to this game table, the timing of the first position may be easy to understand.

Here, the period display may include only the cursor display, or may include a display other than the cursor display. Further, the period display may or may not always include the cursor display.

Further, the period display may notify only a certain period during the display of the reach effect display, or may notify a period other than the certain period during the display of the reach effect display. .. Further, the period display may necessarily notify a certain period during the display of the reach effect display, or may not notify a certain period during the display of the reach effect display. ..

Further, the cursor display may be configured to move only from the start to the end of a certain period by moving from the second position to the third position via the first position. By moving the display from the second position to the third position through the first position, the display may be configured to notify other than the start to the end of a certain period. In addition, the cursor display may be configured to move from the second position to the third position and then to the third position so that the notification from the start to the end of a certain period is surely given. By moving the display from the second position to the third position to the third position, the display may not be notified from the start to the end of a certain period.

Further, the cursor display may be configured to notify from the start to the end of a certain period only by moving from the second position to the third position via the first position. The display may be configured to be notified from the start to the end of a certain period by something other than moving from the second position to the third position via the first position.

Further, when the cursor display reaches the first position, only the first timing may be notified, or when the cursor display reaches the first position, the first timing is reached. Other than this may be notified. Further, when the cursor display reaches the first position, it may be informed that it is the first timing, or when the cursor display reaches the first position, it is the first timing. There may be a case where the notification is not made.

In addition, only when the cursor display reaches the first position, it may be notified that it is the first timing, or even when the cursor display reaches the first position, The timing may be notified.

The positional relationship between the first position, the second position, and the third position may be first position>second position>third position, or other positional relationship. The cursor display may be configured to move in the order of second position>first position>third position. To be more precise, "the position where the cursor display reaches first when the display moves" is the front, and "the position where the cursor display reaches the rear" is the rear.

In addition, “the period display is a chance up display [for example, the display of the second checkpoint CP2 marked in red shown in FIG. 29(15) or the appearance of a chance up notice has increased the jackpot reliability. "Displaying the characters "UP", etc.]

The chance up display is a display notifying that the display of the first effect display has started at the first timing [eg, as shown in FIG. 29(15), the second check The point CP2 is marked in red or the display of the character "UP" is displayed, so that a chance up notice is displayed by displaying the gold cut-in CI3 at the timing when the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the second check point CP2. Informing that it has started, etc.],

When the display of the first effect display is started at the first timing, the chance-up display is displayed at the display position corresponding to the first position [for example, shown in FIG. 29 (15). Like this, the second checkpoint CP2 is marked in red and the letters “UP” are displayed when the chance up notice is displayed by displaying the gold cut-in CI3],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be easy to understand that the first effect display is displayed.

Here, as the period display, only a chance up display may be displayed, or a display other than the chance up display may be displayed. Further, the period display may be one in which the chance up display is always displayed, or may be one in which the chance up display may not be displayed.

Further, when the display of the first effect display is started at the first timing, only the chance up display may be displayed at the display position corresponding to the first position, or the first opportunity display may be displayed at the first timing. When the display of the effect display is started, a display other than the chance up display may be displayed at the display position corresponding to the first position. Further, when the display of the first effect display is started at the first timing, the chance up display may be always displayed at the display position corresponding to the first position, or the first opportunity display may be displayed at the first timing. When the display of the effect display is started, the chance up display may not be displayed at the display position corresponding to the first position.

Further, when the display of the first effect display is started at the first timing, the chance-up display may be displayed only at the display position corresponding to the first position, or at the first timing. When the display of the effect display is started, the chance up display may be displayed at a display position other than the display position corresponding to the first position.

Further, only when the display of the first effect display is started at the first timing, the chance up display may be displayed at the display position corresponding to the first position, or at the first timing. Even when the display of the effect display is started, the chance up display may be displayed at the display position corresponding to the first position.

When the chance up display is displayed, the chance up display may be continuously displayed until the cursor display reaches at least the third position. In this case, the chance-up display may be performed before the cursor display reaches the third position.

In addition, “The first notice display is a display that may be displayed in a moving manner [for example, as shown in FIG. 168(A8) to FIG. Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, since the first notice display may be a moving display, it may be possible to guide the line of sight to the first notice display and pay attention to the first notice display.

Here, the first notice display may display only the movement display, or may display other than the movement display. Further, the first notice display may be the one that does not always display the movement, or the one that may not display the movement.

In addition, “the display of the period display is started after the first notice display starts the movement display [for example, as shown in FIG. 168 (A8) to FIG. After the MTY is moved and displayed, the CUM preparation display MTY is switched to the chance up meter CMT, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to grasp the timing at which the display of the period display is started.

Here, only the display of the period display may be started after the first notice display starts the moving display, or the display other than the display of the period display after the first notice display starts the moving display. It may be started. Also, the display of the period display may be always started after the first notice display starts moving display, or the display of the period display may not start after the first notice display starts moving display. It may be.
The period display may be moved and displayed.

Further, it may be notified that a certain period has started after the moving display of the first notice display is finished.

Further, the timing at which the moving display of the first notice display is started can be appropriately set.

Further, “the display position of the first notice display is changed by the movement display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 168(A8) to (A10), the movement display of the CUM preparation display MTY causes the CUM to be changed. The display position of the in-preparation display MTY has been changed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, it may be possible to change the display of the first notice display by changing the display position of the first notice display.

Here, only the display position of the first notice display may be changed by the moving display, or the display position of the first notice display may be changed by the moving display. Further, the display position of the first notice display may be always changed by the moving display, or the display position of the first notice display may not be changed by the moving display.

Further, the display position of the first notice display may be changed only by the movement display, or the display position of the first notice display may be changed by a display other than the movement display.

In addition, "the first notice display is a display that may be displayed in a first display mode [eg, a default display mode of the CUM preparing display MTY shown in FIG. 162 (A3)],

The first notice display is the second display mode [for example, the display mode in which the background color of the balloon forming the CUM preparation display MTY shown in FIG. 171(A3) is red, or the CUM shown in FIG. 178(A1). In the display mode in which the meter portion configuring the preparing display MTY is red, the display mode in which the character SBH of the sabotani forming the CUM preparing display MTY shown in FIG. 178(B1) is red, and in FIG. 178(C1) CUM preparation display shown MTY which is a display mode in which the cursor is the princess character HME]
The first display mode and the second display mode are different display modes,

When the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode, the jackpot symbol aspect is finally larger than when the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode. Easy to confirm
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, there is a case where it is possible to expect the variable display in which the period display is displayed by looking at the display mode of the first notice display.

Here, the first notice display may be displayed only in the first display mode, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the first display mode. May be. Further, the first notice display may be always displayed in the first display mode, or may not be displayed in the first display mode.

Further, the first notice display may be displayed only in the second display mode, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the second display mode. Good. Further, the first notice display may be always displayed in the second display mode, or may not be displayed in the second display mode.

Further, the first display mode and the second display mode may be partially different display modes or all different display modes.

Further, when the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode, only the jackpot symbol mode is finally determined, as compared with the case where the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode. It may be easy to be displayed, and the case where the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode is finally more than the case where the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode. A symbol aspect other than the jackpot symbol aspect may be easily confirmed and displayed. In addition, when the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode, the jackpot pattern mode is always finalized more definitely than when the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode. It may be easy to be displayed, and the case where the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode is finally more than the case where the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode. There may be a case where it is difficult to confirm and display the jackpot pattern mode.

In addition, when the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode, the jackpot pattern mode may be finally definitely displayed, or the jackpot pattern mode may not be finally confirmed and displayed. Good. Further, when the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode, the jackpot symbol mode may not be finally definitely displayed, or the jackpot symbol mode is finally confirmed and displayed. There may be
Further, the first notice display may be displayed only in one display mode.

Further, it may be configured such that the jackpot pattern mode is finally confirmed and displayed in the order of the third display mode <second display mode <first display mode.
The first notice display may be configured to be displayed in three or more display modes.

Further, the ease with which the jackpot symbol mode is confirmed and displayed may not change depending on the display mode of the first notice display.

In addition, “the case where the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode is more than the case where the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode. It is easy to start displaying the first effect display at a timing,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to give an expectation as to whether or not the first effect display is displayed, depending on the display mode of the first notice display.

Here, the case where the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode is the first timing at the first timing, as compared with the case where the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode. Only the presentation display may be easily started, or when the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode, the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode. Instead, the display other than the display of the first effect display may be easily started at the first timing. Further, the case where the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode is the first effect at the first timing, as compared with the case where the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode. The display of the display may be easy to start without fail, and the case where the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode is better than the case where the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode. In some cases, it may be difficult to start displaying the first effect display at the first timing.

In addition, when the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode, the display of the first effect display may be necessarily started at the first timing, or the first effect display may be started at the first timing. The display may not be started in some cases.

Further, when the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode, the display of the first effect display may not necessarily be started at the first timing, or the first notice display may be started at the first timing. The display of the effect display may be started in some cases.

In addition, “the first notice display displayed in the first display mode may change to the second display mode [for example, as shown in FIGS. 172(B1) to (B3). In the CUM preparation display MTY displayed in the default display mode, the background color of the balloon changes to red and ranks up, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to give an expectation that the first notice display is changed to the second display mode even when the first notification mode is displayed in the first display mode.

Here, the first notice display displayed in the first display mode may change only to the second display mode, or the first notice display displayed in the first display mode. However, it may be changed to a display mode other than the second display mode. Also, the first notice display displayed in the first display mode may be changed to the second display mode without fail, and the first notice display displayed in the first display mode may change to the second display mode. There may be a case where the display mode of does not change.

Further, only the first notice display displayed in the first display mode may change to the second display mode, and the first display mode other than the first display mode may be displayed. The notice display of may also change to the second display mode.

It should be noted that the display mode of the first notice display may be changed by the operation of the operation means operable by the player. For example, the display mode can be changed by displaying and operating the operation prompting display including the button image. The display mode may be changed, or the display mode may be changed by operating in the back button operation acceptance state in which the operation promotion display is not displayed.

Further, as a result of the other notice display, the display form of the first notice display may change, or the display form of the first notice display may be suddenly displayed without any particular presentation of the notice display. May change.

Further, it may be announced that the display mode of the first notice display changes depending on the period display.
Further, the display mode of the changed first notice display may be given a notice.

In addition, "the period display is a display that may be displayed in a third display mode [for example, the default display mode of the chance up meter shown in FIG. 162 (A11)],

The period display is in the fourth display mode [for example, the display mode in which the meter portion forming the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 175(A6) is red, or the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 176(A1) is formed. 176 (C1) and the display mode in which the character SBH of Sabohani is red, the display mode in which the background color of the placard at the final point GP constituting the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 176 (B1) is red, and FIG. The display mode in which the second checkpoint CP2 forming the chance up meter CMT shown is round and red, the display mode in which the background color of the balloon of "START!!" shown in FIG. 176(D1) is red, and the figure 176 (E1), the display mode in which the princess character HME as a cursor forming the chance up meter CMT is displayed], etc., is displayed.
The third display mode and the fourth display mode are different display modes,

In the case where the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode, the period display is in the fourth state, as compared with the case where the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 178(A1) to (A4), when the CUM preparation display MTY is ranked up, the chance up meter CMT is also likely to be ranked up],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to give a sense of expectation to the display mode of the first notice display.

Here, the period display may be displayed only in the third display mode, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the third display mode. .. Further, the period display may be always displayed in the third display mode, or may not be displayed in the third display mode.

Further, the period display may be displayed only in the fourth display mode, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the fourth display mode. Further, the period display may be always displayed in the fourth display mode, or may not be displayed in the fourth display mode.

The third display mode and the fourth display mode may be partially different display modes or all different display modes.

Further, when the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode, the period display is in the fourth display mode than when the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode. It may be easier to display only, or the case where the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode is longer than the case where the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode. However, a display mode other than the fourth display mode may be easily displayed. Further, when the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode, the period display is in the fourth display mode than when the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode. It may be displayed without fail, and the period display is more displayed when the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode than when the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode. There may be a case where it is difficult to be displayed in the fourth display mode.

When the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode, the period display may be always displayed in the fourth display mode, or the period display may not be displayed in the fourth display mode. It may be.

Further, when the notice of substitution is displayed in the first display mode, the period display may not necessarily be displayed in the fourth display mode, or the period display is displayed in the fourth display mode. There may be.

In addition, “when the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode, the period display is longer than when the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode. Easy to be displayed in the third display mode,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, when the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode, the period display is in the third display mode than when the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode. It may be easier to be displayed only in, and the case where the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode is longer than the case where the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode. The display may be easily displayed in a display mode other than the third display mode. Further, when the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode, the period display is in the third display mode more than when the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode. It may be displayed without fail, and the period display is more displayed when the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode than when the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode. It may be difficult to be displayed in the third display mode.

When the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode, the period display may be always displayed in the third display mode, or the period display may not be displayed in the third display mode. It may be.

Also, when the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode, the period display may not necessarily be displayed in the third display mode, and the period display is displayed in the third display mode. There may be cases.

Further, depending on the display mode of the first notice display, it may be made unclear whether the display mode of the period display is displayed in the third display mode or the fourth display mode. When there is only one display mode of the notice, it is not known whether the display mode of the period display is the third display mode or the fourth display mode.

In addition, “when the period display is displayed in the fourth display mode, the jackpot symbol mode is finally confirmed and displayed as compared to when the period display is displayed in the third display mode. Cheap,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, the display variety of the period display may be different, so that the player who does not see the period display may be able to pay attention to the period display as a notice.

Here, the case where the period display is displayed in the fourth display mode is easier to finally confirm only the big hit symbol mode than the case where the period display is displayed in the third display mode. Good, in the case where the period display is displayed in the fourth display mode, than in the case where the period display is displayed in the third display mode, finally the symbol modes other than the jackpot symbol mode are also fixedly displayed. May be easy. Further, in the case where the period display is displayed in the fourth display mode, the final jackpot symbol mode may be definitely easier to be confirmed and displayed than in the case where the period display is displayed in the third display mode. However, when the period display is displayed in the fourth display mode, it may be more difficult to finally confirm and display the jackpot symbol mode than when the period display is displayed in the third display mode. Good.

When the period display is displayed in the fourth display mode, the big hit symbol may be finally definitely displayed, or the big hit symbol may not be finally finally fixedly displayed.

Further, when the period display is displayed in the third display mode, the big hit symbol may not always be finally fixedly displayed, and the big hit symbol may be finally fixedly displayed.

In addition, "the period display is a display that may be displayed in a third display mode [for example, the default display mode of the chance up meter shown in FIG. 162 (A11)],

The period display is in the fourth display mode [for example, the display mode in which the meter portion forming the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 175(A6) is red, or the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 176(A1) is formed. 176 (C1) and the display mode in which the character SBH of Sabohani is red, the display mode in which the background color of the placard at the final point GP constituting the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 176 (B1) is red, and FIG. The display mode in which the second checkpoint CP2 forming the chance up meter CMT shown is round and red, the display mode in which the background color of the balloon of "START!!" shown in FIG. 176(D1) is red, and the figure 176 (E1), the display mode in which the princess character HME as a cursor forming the chance up meter CMT is displayed], etc., is displayed.
The third display mode and the fourth display mode are different display modes,

When the period display is displayed in the fourth display mode, it is easier to finally confirm and display the jackpot symbol mode than when the period display is displayed in the third display mode.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, the display mode of the period display may be different, so that it may be possible to give attention to the period display as a notice even to a player who does not see the period display.

Here, the period display may be displayed only in the third display mode, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the third display mode. .. Further, the period display may be always displayed in the third display mode, or may not be displayed in the third display mode.

Further, the period display may be displayed only in the fourth display mode, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the fourth display mode. Further, the period display may be always displayed in the fourth display mode, or may not be displayed in the fourth display mode.

The third display mode and the fourth display mode may be partially different display modes or all different display modes.

In addition, when the period display is displayed in the fourth display mode, only the jackpot symbol mode may be finally finalized and displayed more easily than when the period display is displayed in the third display mode. However, in the case where the period display is displayed in the fourth display mode, it is easier to finally finally confirm the symbol modes other than the jackpot symbol mode than when the period display is displayed in the third display mode. May be. Further, in the case where the period display is displayed in the fourth display mode, the final jackpot symbol mode may be definitely easier to be confirmed and displayed than in the case where the period display is displayed in the third display mode. However, when the period display is displayed in the fourth display mode, it may be more difficult to finally confirm and display the jackpot symbol mode than when the period display is displayed in the third display mode. Good.

When the period display is displayed in the fourth display mode, the big hit symbol may be finally definitely displayed, or the big hit symbol may not be finally finally fixedly displayed.

Further, when the period display is displayed in the third display mode, the big hit symbol may not always be finally fixedly displayed, and the big hit symbol may be finally fixedly displayed.

In addition, “One of the plurality of types of displays is a second notice display [for example, the display of the flame effect EF101 shown in FIG. 162(A2) or FIG. 163(A3) to FIG. The sliding door effect shown, the explosion effect EF104 shown in FIG. 168(A2), the conversation notice shown in FIGS. 179(A2) to (A6), and FIGS. 179(B1) to (B3). 179. (C1) to (C2) of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 179(D1) to (D5) of FIG. 179].

The second notice display may be displayed before the first notice display is displayed,

The second notice display is a display for giving notice that the first notice display is displayed,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to gradually focus the line of sight on the period display and gradually increase the expectation.

Here, there may be a case where only the second notice display is displayed before the first notice display is displayed, or other than the second notice display before the first notice display is displayed. The display may also be displayed. Also, the second notice display may always be displayed before the first notice display is displayed, or the second notice display may not be displayed before the first notice display is displayed. Good.

Further, the second notice display may give a notice only that the first notice display is displayed, or may give a notice other than that the first notice display is displayed. May be. Also, the second notice display may be a notice that the first notice display is displayed, or may not notice that the first notice display is displayed. ..

The first notice display may be displayed whenever the second notice display is displayed, or the first notice display may not be displayed even if the second notice display is displayed. ..

In addition, "when the first notice display is displayed after the second notice display is displayed and when the first notice display is displayed without displaying the second notice display Than the final big jackpot pattern mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, it may be possible to give a sense of expectation that the second notice display will be displayed.

Here, the case where the first notice display is displayed after the second notice display is displayed is more final than the case where the first notice display is displayed without the second notice display. It is possible that only the jackpot pattern mode can be easily confirmed and displayed, or if the first notice display is displayed after the second notice display is displayed, the second notice display is not displayed. In the end, it may be easier to finalize and display a symbol aspect other than the jackpot symbol aspect than when the one notice display is displayed. Further, the case where the first notice display is displayed after the second notice display is displayed is more final than the case where the first notice display is displayed without displaying the second notice display. The jackpot pattern mode may be easily confirmed and displayed, or if the first notice display is displayed after the second notice display is displayed, the first notice display is not displayed. In some cases, it may be more difficult to finally confirm and display the jackpot pattern than in the case where the notice display is displayed.

In addition, when the first notice display is displayed after the second notice display is displayed, the jackpot pattern mode may be finally definitely displayed, or the jackpot pattern mode is not finally confirmed and displayed. There may be cases.

Further, when the first notice display is displayed without the second notice display being displayed, the jackpot pattern mode may not always be finally confirmed and finally the jackpot pattern mode is finally confirmed and displayed. There may be cases where

Further, the easiness of finalizing the jackpot pattern mode may or may not be changed even if the second notice display is performed.

In addition, “when the period display is displayed after the first notice display is displayed, finally when the period display is displayed without the first notice display being displayed, It is easy to confirm and display the jackpot pattern mode,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to give a sense of expectation that the first notice display is displayed.

Here, the case where the period display is displayed after the first notice display is displayed is finally only the jackpot pattern mode, as compared with the case where the period display is displayed without the first notice display. May be displayed more easily, or when the period display is displayed after the first notice display is displayed than when the period display is displayed without the first notice display. Eventually, the symbol aspect other than the jackpot symbol aspect may be easily confirmed and displayed. In addition, when the period display is displayed after the first notice display is displayed, the jackpot pattern mode is always guaranteed to be finally larger than when the period display is displayed without the first notice display. The confirmation display may be easier, or the case where the period display is displayed after the first notice display is displayed is more final than the case where the period display is displayed without the first notice display. In some cases, the jackpot pattern mode may not be fixedly displayed.

When the period display is displayed after the first notice display is displayed, the jackpot pattern mode may be finally definitely displayed, or the jackpot pattern mode may not be finally displayed. May be.

Also, when the first notice display is not displayed and the period display is displayed, the jackpot pattern mode may not always be finally confirmed and displayed, and the jackpot pattern mode may be finally confirmed and displayed. It may be.

In addition, at least part of the display mode of the first notice display and the display mode of the period display are the same display mode [for example, the CUM preparation display MTY shown in FIG. 162 (A3) and the display mode MTY shown in FIG. 162 (A9). ), the display mode is at least the same as that of the chance up meter CMT in that the character SBH of Sabohani is arranged],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, the player may be able to recall the relationship between the first notice display and the period display.

Here, the display mode of the first notice display and the display mode of the period display may be a part of the same display mode, or all of them may be the same display mode.

In addition, "The display mode of the first notice display and the display mode of the period display are different display modes [for example, the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 162 (A9) is a check point (first The display mode is at least different from the CUM preparation display MTY shown in FIG. 162 (A3) in that the check points CP1 to CP3 are displayed],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be easy to recognize the first notice display and the period display separately.

Here, the display mode of the first notice display and the display mode of the period display may be partly different display modes, or all may be different display modes.

In addition, by notifying that the period display is displayed by displaying the first notification display, it is notified that the reach effect display is displayed [for example, FIG. 162 (A3 )-As shown in (A9) of the same figure, by displaying the CUM preparation display MTY, it is foretold that an effect will be produced by the chance up meter CMT, thereby announcing that the reach effect display will be displayed. Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, it may be possible to give an expectation for a big hit by displaying the first notice display.

Here, by notifying that the period indication is displayed by displaying the first notice display, it is possible to give only notice that the reach effect display is displayed or the first notice display. By displaying in advance that the period display is displayed by displaying, may be announced other than the reach effect display. In addition, by displaying the first notice display in advance to display the period display, the reach display may be displayed in advance, or the first notice display may be displayed. It may be possible that the display of the period display is foretold, and thus the reach effect display is not displayed.

Further, it is possible to give a notice that the period display is displayed by displaying the first notice display, thereby giving a notice that only the reach effect display is displayed, or the first notice display is displayed. By displaying that the period display is displayed, the display other than the reach effect display may be displayed.

Further, it may be announced that the reach effect display is displayed only by notifying that the period display is displayed by displaying the first notice display, or the first notice display may be displayed. It may be announced that the reach effect display is displayed, in addition to the notification that the period display is displayed.

Further, by displaying the first notice display, it is possible to give a notice that only the period display is displayed, and thus it may be announced that the reach effect display is displayed. It may be announced that the reach effect display is displayed by notifying that the display other than the period display is also displayed.

In addition, it may be announced that the reach effect display is displayed by notifying that the period display is displayed by displaying only the first notification display, or other than the first notification display. The advance notice display may be displayed to notify that the period display is displayed, or the reach effect display may be notified to be displayed.

It should be noted that "when it is foretold that the period display will be displayed" may be "when it is foretold that the period display will be displayed from now on" or "when the period display is It is an effect that accompanies the reach effect display, and directly gives a notice of the reach effect display, and indirectly gives a notice of the period display being displayed." In a case where the period display is directly foretold, and the reach effect display is indirectly foretold."

In addition, "the first notice display and the period display may start to be displayed in the same symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 162(A3) to (A9), CUM preparation display Display of MTY and chance up meter CMT is started during execution of the same symbol variation display, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be easy to recognize the time when the period display is displayed.

Here, the first notice display and the period display may start to be displayed only in the same symbol variation display, and the first notice display and the period display may be displayed in different symbol variation displays. There may be cases. Further, the first notice display and the period display may be always started in the same symbol variation display, and the first notice display and the period display may not be displayed in the same symbol variation display. It may be.

The first notice display may be displayed before one or more decorative symbols are temporarily stopped, may be displayed before the decorative symbols are in the intelligent state, or the reach effect display is started. It may be displayed before the display, or may be displayed before the period display is displayed.

Further, the first notice display may be always displayed in the same symbol variation display as the period display.

Further, the first notice display may be displayed in a symbol variation display different from the symbol variation display in which the period display is displayed, for example, displayed in the symbol variation display before the symbol variation display in which the period display is displayed. Alternatively, the variable display may be displayed after the variable display in which the period display is displayed.

In addition, “the first notice display may be a display that may be started in a symbol variation display executed before the symbol variation display in which the display of the period display is started [for example, FIG. 186 ( As shown in (A3) to (A14) of the same figure, the CUM preparation in-progress display MTY is displayed before the symbol variation display in which the effect is produced by the chance up meter CMT, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, the first notice display may function as a look-ahead notice, and it may be possible to give an expectation to the symbol variation display to be executed later.

Here, the first notice display may be displayed only in the symbol variation display executed before the symbol variation display in which the period display is started, or may be displayed in the period display. The display may be started also in the symbol variable display other than the symbol variable display executed before the symbol variable display in which the display is started. Further, the first notice display may be always started in the symbol variation display executed before the symbol variation display in which the period display is started, or the period display is started. The display may not be started in the symbol variation display executed before the displayed symbol variation display.

The first notice display may be always displayed in the symbol variation display before the symbol variation display in which the period display is displayed.

Further, the first notice display may be displayed in the same symbol variation display as the symbol variation display in which the period display is displayed.

Further, the first notice display may be displayed during the symbol stop display, or may be always displayed during the symbol stop display.

Further, “The first notice display is a display that is displayed even during the period of the symbol stop display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 163 (D3) to (D6), the CUM preparation display MTY is a symbol. It is also displayed during stop display, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to give a sense of expectation even during the period of the symbol stop display.

Here, the first notice display may be displayed only during the period of the symbol stop display, or may be displayed during a period other than the period of the symbol stop display. Further, the first notice display may be always displayed during the period of the symbol stop display, or may not be displayed during the period of the symbol stop display.

Further, “The first notice display is a display that is hidden during the period of the symbol stop display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 163 (C3) to (D7), the CUM preparation display MTY is It is hidden while the symbols are stopped, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, the first notice display is hidden during the period of the symbol stop display, so that the game may be sharpened in some cases.

Here, the first notice display may be hidden only during the symbol stop display period, or may be hidden during a period other than the symbol stop display period. .. Further, the first notice display may be always hidden during the symbol stop display period, or may not be hidden during the symbol stop display period.

The first notice display may be displayed again when the symbol variable display is started.

Further, “The first notice display is a continuous notice [for example, as shown in FIG. 186(A1) to FIG. 186(A16), before the symbol variation display in which the effect is produced by the chance up meter CMT. CUM preparation display MTY is displayed in each of the plurality of symbol variation displays that are performed],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, the first notice display is continuously displayed, which may increase the sense of expectation.

Further, "the first notice display is a display that may be started during the display of the reach effect display,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to improve the expectation for the reach effect display.

Here, the first notice display may be started only during the display of the reach effect display, or may be started during the display of the display other than the reach effect display. It may be one. Further, the first notice display may be displayed without fail during the display of the reach effect display, or may not be started during the display of the reach effect display.

Note that the first notice display may be displayed during the display of the reach effect display and before a certain period starts, or may be displayed before the reach effect display is started. It may be done.

In addition, "the first notice display is a display that may be displayed before the display of the reach effect display is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 162(A3) to (A4). , The CUM preparation display MTY has been started to be displayed before reaching, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, the first notice display is displayed before the display of the reach effect display is started, so that the expectation for the reach effect display in which the period display is displayed is provided. You can

Here, the first notice display may be displayed only before the display of the reach effect display is started, or other than before the display of the reach effect display is started. The display may be started in some cases. Further, the first notice display may be always displayed before the display of the reach effect display is started, or may not be displayed before the display of the reach effect display is started. It may be one.

The first notice display may be started during the display of the reach effect display, may be started before the reach effect display is started, and may be displayed during the display of the reach effect display. You may do it.

Further, the reach effect display is made up of a combination of normal reach and super reach, and the first notice display may be displayed during execution of normal reach performed before super reach is started, or reach display may be performed. The display may be started during the symbol variation display before the effect display is started, and may be displayed until the period when the normal reach in the reach effect display is being executed.
In addition, “the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "whether the big hit symbol mode is finally fixedly displayed or the lost symbol mode is finally fixedly displayed is a big hit determination that is performed at the start of fluctuation of the symbol [for example, shown in FIG. 53(b). The special jackpot lottery process], the result of the jackpot determination does not change depending on the display mode of the variable icon, and the jackpot determination is a start opening [eg, on a game board]. , The first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232] is acquired when the game ball has entered [for example, acquired in the winning award receiving process in the winning a prize winning process (step S508) shown in FIG. 51]. It is configured to be determined according to the result of the jackpot lottery using random numbers [for example, special figure 1 random number value, special figure 1 random number value, special figure 2 random number value, special figure 2 random number value], The probability of being judged as a big hit in the big hit lottery (hereinafter, referred to as "big hit probability") is predetermined [for example, in the high probability table for win/loss determination shown in FIG. 10(a) and FIG. 10(b)). The gaming table is defined in the low probability table for determining whether or not to win or lose], and the jackpot probability does not change depending on the display mode of the variation icon. ]
Was also explained.
The following is a supplementary description including the ones described so far.
(Appendix 1)
A gaming table equipped with image display means,
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
One type of display of the plurality of types of display is the first display,
The first display is a display for notifying the time until a certain effect is performed,
One type of display of the plurality of types of display is a second display,

The second display is a display that may give a notice that the time until the certain effect starts changes,
The second display may be displayed during the display of the first display,
A game table characterized by that.

Here, the "certain effect" may be an effect by display and effect movable means (including an image display means such as a sub liquid crystal, a versa writer, and a light guide plate).
(Appendix 2)
The gaming machine according to Appendix 1,

When the second display is displayed, the display mode of the first display is configured to change after the second display is displayed,
A game table characterized by that.

Here, even if the second display is not displayed, the display mode of the first display may change. Further, the display mode of the first display may change only when the second display is displayed.
(Appendix 3)
The gaming machine according to appendix 1 or 2,
The image display means is a means composed of a plurality of image display means,

One image display means of the plurality of image display means is a first image display means,

One image display means of the plurality of image display means is a second image display means,

The second image display means is configured to be in front of the first image display means,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix 4)
The gaming machine described in Appendix 3,
In the second image display means, the second display may be displayed,

By the second image display means is displayed the second display, the first image display means may be overlapped,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix 5)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 1 to 4,

Even when the second display is displayed, the time informed by the first display is advanced,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix 6)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 1 to 5,
After the timer reaches 0, a display different from the second display is displayed,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix 7)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 1 to 6,
It is easier to hit big when the second display is displayed than when it is not displayed,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix 8)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 1 to 7,
One of the multiple types of display is the third display,

The certain effect is the third display displayed by the image display means,
The display of the surrogate sign is a production display,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix 9)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 1 to 7,
Equipped with staging movable means,
The effect movable means is a means capable of executing a plurality of types of operations,
One type of motion among the plurality of types of motion is a staging motion,
The certain performance is a performance operation by the performance moving means,
A game table characterized by that.

Here, an operation other than the effect operation may be executed, and the operation other than the effect operation includes, for example, an operation at power-on, an initial position returning operation, or a retracting operation. Further, the effect moving means is not limited to one provided on the game board, and may be one provided on a frame (front door), for example.
(Appendix 10)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 1 to 9,
When the certain effect occurs, it is easier to hit big than when it does not occur,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix 11)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 1 to 10,

In some cases, a hot effect display may be displayed from the time the first display is displayed until the time the second display is displayed.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix 12)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 1 to 11,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix 13)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 1 to 11,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix 14)
A gaming table equipped with image display means,
The image display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
One type of display of the plurality of types of display is a first effect display,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a second effect display,
The period display is a display displayed during a certain period during reach,

The period display is a display for notifying a timing (hereinafter, referred to as “first timing”) at which the first effect display may be displayed,
Before the first timing, the period display may be erased,
A game table characterized by that.

Here, the period in which the period display is displayed is not limited to during the reach, but may be during the change or during the big hit. Further, even during the reach, it may be displayed in the first reach but not displayed in the second reach.
(Appendix 15)
The gaming table described in Appendix 14,
One type of display of the plurality of types of display is a third effect display,

The timing for displaying the third effect display may not be notified by the period display,
During the display of the third effect display, the period display is hidden.
A game table characterized by that.

Here, in addition to the effect display, for example, an error notification such as a ball pulling error, a notification indicating a firing position, a notification other than an error such as a notification for preventing the player from forgetting to remove the prepaid card, a light emission by an LED, a performance operation by an accessory May be performed. In addition, the timing at which the third display is displayed may be notified by a period display. Further, the timing at which the third display is displayed may not be notified by the period display.
(Appendix 16)
The gaming machine described in Appendix 15,

The third effect display is an effect display that may be displayed in a symbol variation (hereinafter, referred to as “big hit symbol variation”) in which the result of the hit determination is a big hit.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix 17)
The gaming machine described in appendix 16,

The third effect display is an effect display that may be displayed in a symbol variation (hereinafter, referred to as “missing symbol variation”) in which the result of the hit determination is out of alignment,

It is configured such that the big hit symbol variation has a higher frequency of displaying the third effect display than the lost symbol variation.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix 18)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 15 to 17,
Equipped with staging movable means,
The effect moving means is a means for performing an effect operation,

The game machine characterized in that the output movable means may perform the production operation during the display of the third production display.
(Appendix 19)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 14 to 18,
After the period display is hidden, the period display is in an easily visible state,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix 20)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 14 to 19,
The period display is hidden until a certain period during the reach ends,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix 21)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 14 to 19,
The period display is a display that is always displayed during a certain period during the reach,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix 22)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 14 to 21,

The period display is a display for notifying the timing of displaying the second effect display (hereinafter, referred to as “second timing”).
A game table characterized by that.

Here, the timing displayed by the period display may be three times or more. In addition, the position for notifying the chance increase may be fixed corresponding to the reach, such that the chance increase is notified three times when a certain reach occurs and the chance increase is notified twice when another reach occurs. It is also possible to change the location for notifying the chance increase such that the notification is given three times when it is and the notification is given only once when it is. In that case, the case of "notifying a lot of timings" may be more likely to be a big hit, or may be more likely to be missed. Also, the likelihood of a big hit does not have to change depending on the number of timing notifications. Further, the larger the number of opportunities increased, the larger the jackpot may be made, or the smaller the number of opportunities increased, the larger the jackpot may be made.
(Appendix 23)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 14 to 22,
The image display means is a means composed of a plurality of image display means,

One image display means of the plurality of image display means is a first image display means,

One image display means of the plurality of image display means is a second image display means,

The first image display means is an image display means that may display the period display,
The second image display means is an image display means that may perform a performance operation,

The second image display means may overlap at least part of the period display,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix 24)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 14 to 23,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix 25)
A gaming table equipped with image display means,
The image display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
One type of display of the plurality of types of display is a first effect display,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a second effect display,
One type of display of the plurality of types of display is a third display,
The period display is a display displayed during a certain period during reach,

The period display is a display for notifying a timing (hereinafter, referred to as “first timing”) at which the first effect display may be displayed,

Before the first timing, at least a part of the first effect display may be overlapped by the third display,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix 26)
A gaming table equipped with display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying the first display,

Depending on the passage of time, at least a part of the display mode of the first display changes at a first speed,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a second display,

Depending on the passage of time, at least a part of the display mode of the second display changes at the second speed,
The first speed and the second speed are different,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix 27)
The gaming table described in appendix 26,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
One of the plurality of types of display is a time display,

The time display is a display in which at least a part of the display mode of the time display changes according to the passage of time within a certain period,
One display of the time display is the first display,
One display of the time display is the second display,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix 28)
The gaming table according to appendix 26 or 27,
The second display may be displayed during the display of the first display,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix 29)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 26 to 28,
The first display is a display that changes the display mode until the first time has elapsed,
The second display is a display in which the display mode changes until the second time passes,
When the first time has elapsed, a third display is displayed,
When the second time has elapsed, a fourth display is displayed,
A game table characterized by that.

Here, the third display and the fourth display may be the same or different. Further, the third display may have higher reliability than the fourth display, and the fourth display may have higher reliability than the third display.
(Appendix 30)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 26 to 29,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a first type of display,
As the first type of display, there are the first display and the second display,
A game table characterized by that.
Here, the first display and the second display may be different types of display.
(Appendix 31)
The gaming machine according to Appendix 30,
The first type of display is a timer notice display,
One type of display of the plurality of types of display is a first effect display,

The timer notice display is a display for notifying a time until the first effect display is displayed,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix 32)
The gaming machine according to Appendix 30,
Equipped with operating means,
The first type of display is an operation valid period display,

The operation valid period display is a display showing a period during which the operation of the operation means is valid.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix 33)
The gaming machine according to Appendix 30,
The first type of display is a period display,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a second effect display,

The period display is a display that may notify a timing (hereinafter, referred to as “first timing”) at which the second effect display may be displayed in the first period,

From the start to the end of the first period, the first timing is notified,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix 34)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 26 to 33,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix 35)
A gaming table equipped with display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
One of the plurality of types of display is a countdown display,

The countdown display is an effect in which notification of a time until a certain effect is performed (hereinafter, referred to as “time notification”) may be executed.

When the time notification is executed by the countdown display, the display mode of the countdown display may be displayed in the first display mode,

When the time notification is being performed by the count gown display, the countdown display may change from the first display mode to the second display mode,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix 36)
The gaming table described in appendix 35,

The first display mode is a display mode in which the countdown display is displayed in a first display size,

The second display mode is a display mode in which the countdown display is displayed in a second display size,
The second display size is larger than the first display size,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix 37)
The gaming table according to appendix 35 or 36,

When the display of the countdown display is started, the countdown display is displayed in the first display mode,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix 38)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 35 to 37,

When the countdown display is displayed, it surely changes from the first display mode to the second display mode,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix 39)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 35 to 37,

The jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed in the case of changing to the second display mode, rather than being displayed as it is in the first display mode.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix 40)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 35 to 39,
The start and end of the countdown display are performed within the period of one symbol variable display,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix 41)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 35 to 40,

When the countdown display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, the countdown display moves,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix 42)
The gaming table described in appendix 41,

While the countdown display is moving, the time notification is continued by the countdown display,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix 43)
The gaming table described in appendix 41,

While the countdown display is moving, the time notification by the countdown display is interrupted,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix 44)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 35 to 43,

When the time until the certain effect is performed becomes 0, a notification indicating that the time until the certain effect is performed by the countdown display is 0 is given,

The countdown display is configured to be erased after a notification indicating that the time until the certain effect is performed is 0 is made by the countdown display.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix 45)
The gaming table described in appendix 44,

When the time until the certain effect is performed becomes 0, the specific display is displayed and then hidden.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix 46)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 35 to 45,
In some cases, it may not change to the second display mode,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix 47)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 35 to 46,
The display means is composed of a plurality of display means,
One display means of the plurality of display means is a first display means,
One display means of the plurality of display means is a second display means,

The countdown display of the first display mode may be displayed by the first display means,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix 48)
The gaming table described in Appendix 47,

The countdown display of the second display means may be displayed by the second display means,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix 49)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 35 to 48,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix 50)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 35 to 48,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix 51)
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
One of the plurality of types of display is the first display,
The first display is a period display,

The first display is a display that may be displayed in a certain period of the period during which the reach effect display is performed,
One of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
The second display is a notice display,
The first display is a display for notifying the first timing,

The first timing is a timing at which the second display may be displayed,

The first display may be deleted before the first timing after the first display is displayed,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix 52)
The gaming table described in appendix 51,
One of the plurality of types of display is a third display,
The third display is a performance display,
The third display is a display different from the second display,
The third display may be displayed before the first timing,

The first display is a display that does not notify the timing when the third display is started,
In the display of the third display, the first display is erased,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix 53)
The gaming table described in appendix 52,
The third display is a notice display,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix 54)
The gaming machine described in appendix 53,

When the third display is displayed, it is easier to finally confirm and display the big hit symbol than when the third display is not displayed,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix 55)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 52 to 54,
Equipped with effect moving means that can execute multiple types of motion
One of the plurality of types of actions is the first action,
The first motion is a performance motion,
The first operation may be performed during the display of the third display,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix 56)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 51 to 55,

The first display is redisplayed after the first display has been erased,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix 57)
The gaming table according to supplementary notes 51 to 55,

After the first display is erased, the first display is not displayed until the certain period of time has passed,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix 58)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 51 to 55,

After the first display is erased, the first display is re-displayed by the time the certain period elapses.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix 59)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 51 to 58,
The certain period is a period during which the super reach is being executed,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix 60)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 51 to 59,
One of the plurality of types of display is a fourth display,
The fourth display is a performance display,
The fourth display is a display different from the second display,
The first display is a display that may also notify the second timing,

The second timing is a timing at which the display of the fourth display may start,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix 61)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 51 to 60,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix 62)
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
One of the plurality of types of display is the first display,
The first display is a display including a countdown display,
The countdown display is a display that may include timing notification,

The timing notification is a notification performed by updating the display of the countdown display at a timing when a certain effect is performed,

During the display of the countdown display, the display mode of the first display may change from the first display mode to the second display mode,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix 63)
The gaming table according to appendix 62,
The first display mode and the second display mode are different display modes,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix 64)
The gaming table according to Appendix 63,

The first display mode is a display mode in which the first display is displayed in a first display size,

The second display mode is a display mode in which the first display is displayed in a second display size,

In the first display size and the second display size, the second display size is larger.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix 65)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 62 to 64,

When the display of the countdown display is started, the first display is displayed in the first display mode,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix 66)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 62 to 65,

During the display of the countdown display, the first display always changes from the first display mode to the second display mode,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix 67)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 62 to 65,

When the first display is changed from the first display mode to the second display mode than when the first display is not changed from the first display mode to the second display mode It is easier to finalize and display the jackpot pattern finally,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix 68)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 62 to 67,
The display of the first display is started and ended while one symbol variable display is being executed,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix 69)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 62 to 68,
The first display is a display whose display position may change,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix 70)
The gaming machine according to Appendix 69,

When the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, the display position of the first display changes,
A game table characterized by that.

Here, the first display of the first display mode is displayed at a first position, the first display of the second display mode is displayed at a second position, It may be a gaming table.
(Appendix 71)
The gaming table according to appendix 69 or 70,
The first display is a display that may be moved and displayed,
By the moving display, the display position of the first display changes,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix 72)
The gaming table according to appendix 71,
While the moving display is being displayed, the update display of the countdown display is continued.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix 73)
The gaming table according to appendix 71,
During the display of the movement display, the update display of the countdown display is interrupted,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix 74)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 62 to 73,
The countdown display is a time countdown display,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix 75)
The gaming table according to Appendix 74,

The timing notification is a notification for notifying that it is a timing at which the certain effect is performed by displaying a display indicating 0 in the countdown display.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix 76)
The gaming table according to appendix 74 or 75,

After the display showing 0 is displayed in the countdown display, the countdown display is erased.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix 77)
The gaming table described in appendix 76,
One of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
The second display is a display not included in the certain effect,

When a display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, the countdown display is erased after the second display is displayed,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix 78)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 62 to 77,
The display means is a means composed of a plurality of display means,
One of the plurality of display means is a first display means,
One of the plurality of display means is a second display means,

When the first display of the first display mode is displayed, the first display is displayed on the first display means,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix 79)
The gaming table described in Appendix 78,

The first display of the second display mode may be displayed on the second display means,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix 80)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 62 to 79,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix 81)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 62 to 79,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix A1)
A gaming table equipped with display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of meter displays,
One of the plurality of types of meter display is a first meter display,
One of the plurality of types of meter display is a fourth meter display,
The first meter display is a display having a plurality of states,

One of the states of the plurality of types in the first meter display is a first state,

One of the states of the plurality of types in the first meter display is a third state,

The first meter display is a display that may change from the first state to the third state,
The fourth meter display is a display having a plurality of types of states,

One of the states of the plurality of types in the fourth meter display is a fourth state,

One of the plurality of types of states in the fourth meter display is a sixth state,

The fourth meter display is a display that may change from the fourth state to the sixth state,

When the first meter display changes from the first state to the third state, than when the first meter display does not change from the first state to the third state. , The expectation of a big hit is high,

When the fourth meter display changes from the fourth state to the sixth state, than when the fourth meter display does not change from the fourth state to the sixth state. , Expectation of big hit is high,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix A2)
In the gaming table described in Appendix A1,

The degree of expectation that the fourth meter display changes from the fourth state to the sixth state is higher than the degree of expectation that the first meter display changes from the first state to the third state. high,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix A3)
The gaming table described in Appendix A1 or A2,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a decorative pattern,

The above-mentioned first meter display is a display that may be displayed while the decorative design is stopped, wherein the gaming table is characterized.
(Appendix A4)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices A1 to A3,
The fourth meter display is a display started in the fourth state,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix A5)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A1 to A4,

One of the plurality of states in the first meter display is a second state,

The first meter display is a display that may change from the first state to the second state,

The first meter display is a display that may change from the second state to the third state,

The first meter display is a display that may be displayed in the first state,

The first meter display is a display that may be displayed in the second state,

The first meter display has a higher expectation of a big hit when the display is started in the second state than when the display is started in the first state,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix A6)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices A1 to A5,
Of the plurality of types of display, one display is the first icon,

The first meter display is a display that changes from the first state to the third state by displaying the first icon a first number of times,

The fourth meter display, by displaying the first icon a second number of times, is a display that changes from the fourth state to the sixth state,
The second number is a number less than the first number,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix A7)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices A1 to A6,
One of the plurality of displays is a jackpot display,

The third state in the first meter display is a display state indicating that the jackpot display is displayed in the variation of the decorative design in which the third state is displayed,

The sixth state in the fourth meter display is a display state indicating that the big hit display is displayed in the variation of the decorative design in which the sixth state is displayed,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix A8)
The gaming table described in Appendix A7,

The second state of the first meter display is a display state indicating that the jackpot display may be displayed in the variation of the decorative design in which the second state is displayed,

The fifth state of the fourth meter display is a display state indicating that the jackpot display may be displayed in the variation of the decorative design in which the fifth state is displayed,

When the fifth state is displayed rather than the second state, the jackpot display is easier to display,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix A9)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A1 to A8,
One of the plurality of types of effects is a pseudo-relational effect,

The pseudo-announcement is a display that may be started when the first meter display changes to the third state,

The pseudo-announcement is a display that may be started when the fourth meter display changes to the sixth state,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix A10)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices A1 to A9,
One display of the plurality of types of display is an operation promotion display of the operation means,

The operation promotion display is a display that may be started when the first meter display changes to the third state,

The operation prompting display is a display that may be started when the fourth meter display changes to the sixth state,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix A11)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A1 to A10,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effects,
One of the multiple types of effects is a certain effect,

The certain effect is an effect in which the jackpot display is easily displayed in the variation of the decorative pattern in which the certain effect is displayed,

The certain effect is an effect that may be started when the first meter display changes to the third state,

The certain effect is an effect that may be started when the fourth meter display changes to the sixth state.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix A12)
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
One of the plurality of types of display is a period display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a first effect display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a notice display,

The period display is a display for notifying the start of a certain period in the period in which the reach effect display is performed,

The period display is a display for informing the first timing during the display of the reach effect display,

The first timing is a timing at which the first effect display may be started during the display of the reach effect display,

The notice display is a display for giving notice that the first timing is notified by the period display,

The advance notice display may be displayed before the start of the certain period is notified by the period display,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix A13)
The gaming table described in Appendix A12,
The period display is a display including a cursor display,

By moving the cursor display from the second position (start position) to the third position (end position) via the first position, the start to end of the first period is notified. Is configured,
The second position is a position before the first position,
The first position is a position before the third position,

When the cursor display reaches the first position, it is notified that it is the first timing,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix A14)
The gaming table described in Appendix A13,

The period display is a display in which a chance up display (first chance up display) may be displayed,

The chance up display is a display for notifying that the first effect display has started at the first timing,

When the display of the first effect display is started at the first timing, the chance-up display is displayed at a display position corresponding to the first position,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix A15)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices A12 to A14,
The period display is a display that may be a moving display,
A game table that is long.
(Appendix A16)
The gaming table described in Appendix A15,
The movement display is performed before the start of a certain period is notified by the period display,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix A17)
The gaming table described in Appendix A15 or A16,
When the moving display is performed, the display position of the period display changes,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix A18)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A12 to A17,
The notice display may be displayed in a plurality of display modes,
One display mode of the plurality of display modes is a first display mode,
One display mode of the plurality of display modes is a second display mode,

When the notice display is displayed in the second display mode, finally (in the pattern variation display in which the period display is displayed) when the display is displayed in the first display mode. It is easy to confirm and display the symbol aspect,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix A19)
The gaming table described in Appendix A18,

When the notice display is displayed in the second display mode, the first effect display is performed when the first timing is reached, as compared with the case where it is displayed in the first display mode. Is easy to start,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix A20)
The gaming table described in Appendix A18 or A19,

The notice display displayed in the first display mode may change to the second display mode,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix A21)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A12 to A20,
The period display may be displayed in a plurality of display modes,

One display mode of the plurality of display modes is a third display mode (for example, a defometer),

One display mode of the plurality of display modes is a fourth display mode (for example, a red meter),

When the period display is displayed in the fourth display mode, it is easier to finally confirm and display the jackpot symbol mode than when it is displayed in the third display mode,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix A22)
The gaming table described in Appendix A21,

Depending on the display mode of the notice display, it is unknown whether the display mode of the period display is displayed in the third display mode or the fourth display mode,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix A23)
The gaming table according to Appendix A21 or A22,

When the notice display is displayed in the second display mode, the period display is more likely to be displayed in the fourth display mode than when the notice display is displayed in the first display mode. ,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix A24)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A21 to A23,

When the notice display is displayed in the first display mode, the period display is more likely to be displayed in the third display mode than when the notice display is displayed in the second display mode. ,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix A25)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A12 to A24,
One of the plurality of types of display is a second notice display,
The notice display is the first notice display,

The second notice display may give notice that the first notice display is displayed,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix A26)
The gaming table described in Appendix A25,

The symbol variation display in which the period display is displayed is more likely to be a big hit than in the case where the first notice display is foretold by the second notice display,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix A27)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A12 to A26,

When the notice display is displayed before the period display is displayed, the final jackpot pattern mode is easier to be finalized and displayed than when the notice display is not displayed before the period display is displayed. ,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix A28)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes A12 to A27,
The notice display is a display performed by at least a part of the period display,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix A29)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes A12 to A27,
The notice display is a display different from the period display,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix A30)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A12 to A29,

By notifying that the reach effect display is displayed by the notification display, it is notified that the period display is displayed,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix A31)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A12 to A30,
The notice display may be displayed in the same symbol variation display as the period display,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix A32)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices A12 to A31,

The notice display may be displayed in the symbol variation display before the symbol variation display in which the period display is performed,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix A33)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A12 to A32.
The notice display is also displayed during the period when the symbol stop display is being performed,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix A34)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A12 to A32.
The notice display is hidden during the period when the symbol stop display is being performed,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix A35)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices A12 to A34,

The notice display is a display that may be displayed during the display of the reach effect display,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix A36)

The notice display is a display that may be displayed before the reach effect display is started,
A game table characterized by that.

It should be noted that what is described as a variable display of the decorative pattern above may be a variable display of the design (more specifically, a special drawing), and what is described as a stop display of the decorative pattern means that the design (more Specifically, it may be a special display) stop display.

Further, in the above, "may be" may be replaced with "must be", "must be", or "must be", etc. It may be replaced with "always do ○○".

Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 194 to 248, another example of a game table (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine 100 or a spinning drum game machine such as a slot machine) applicable to the present invention will be described in detail. To do. Here, as the technical idea, it is possible to apply the technical idea shown in FIGS. 194 to 248 to the technical idea shown in FIGS. 1 to 48, 49 to 116, and 117 to 193. On the contrary, the technical idea shown in FIGS. 1 to 48, 49 to 116, and 117 to 193 can be applied to the technical idea shown in FIGS. 194 to 248. At that time, components having the same reference numeral may be treated as the same component and may be replaced with each other.

FIG. 194 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 seen from the front. An outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged on the game board 200, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined and formed.

As will be described later in detail, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a rendering device 206 having a rendering movable body 224 imitating a human arm are arranged in the approximate center of the game area 124. In the lower right of the game area 124, a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218. The second special symbol holding lamp 220 and the high-accuracy middle lamp 222 are provided. In addition, hereinafter, a normal symbol may be referred to as a "general symbol", and a special symbol may be referred to as a "special symbol".

The decorative pattern display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative patterns and effects, and is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display) in the present embodiment. Note that the decorative pattern display device 208 need not be a liquid crystal display device as long as it is configured to be able to display various effects and various game information. For example, a dot matrix display device, a 7-segment display device, an organic EL ( Other display devices including an Electro Luminescence display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

The decorative symbol display device 208 is configured to have a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d. The left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c display different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays images used for effect. The positions and sizes of the display areas 208a to 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208.

The general figure display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general figure, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in the present embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special figure, and are configured by 7-segment LEDs in this embodiment.

The universal figure holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of pending universal figure variation games (details will be described later). In the present embodiment, the universal figure variation games are retained up to a predetermined number (for example, four). It is possible to do. The first special figure reservation lamp 218 and the second special figure reservation lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure variation games (details described later) that are being held, and in the present embodiment, the special figure variation games are performed. It is possible to hold up to a predetermined number (for example, four). The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high-probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur, or is a high-probability state, and the gaming state is changed from a low-probability state in which a big hit is hard to occur to a high probability state. Lights when changing to the probability state, and turns off when changing from the high probability state to the low probability state.

In addition, a predetermined ball entrance, for example, a general winning opening 226, a first special figure starting opening 230, a second special drawing starting opening 232, and a first variable winning opening 234 are provided below the game area 124. , The second variable winning opening 235 is provided, and the universal figure starting opening 228 is provided in the right area of the game area 124.

In this embodiment, a plurality of general winning openings 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects the entry into the general winning openings 226 (in the general winning openings 226). When a prize is won), the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball discharged to the upper plate 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and with these configurations, the prize ball is paid out to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. In the present embodiment, the balls to be paid out to the player may be referred to as "prize balls" and the balls to be lent to the player may be referred to as "ball rentals" in consideration of the prize. And call it "ball (gaming ball)".

The universal figure starting port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through-chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124, and in the present embodiment, the right side of the game board 200. One is installed in each. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the universal starting port 228 is not discharged to the game island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the universal figure starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts the universal figure variation game by the universal figure display device 210.

In the present embodiment, only one first special figure starting port 230 is provided in the center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, a payout device 152 described later is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 3) of balls are used as prize balls and the upper plate 126 is used. Along with discharging to, the special figure variation game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball that has entered the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

The second special figure starting port 232 is called an electric tulip (electric chu), and in the present embodiment, only one is provided at the lower right of the game board 200. This second special figure starting port 232 is provided with a blade member 232a that can be opened and closed to the left and right, and it is impossible for the ball to enter while the blade member 232a is closed, and the general figure variation game is won, and the general figure display device When 210 hits and stops the symbol, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, four) balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball entering the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

The first variable winning port 234 and the second variable winning port 235 are called big winning ports or attackers, and in the present embodiment, one is arranged at the lower center of the game board 200 and one at the lower right. The first variable winning port 234 and the second variable winning port 235 have the same structure and are provided with openable and closable door members 234a and 235a. It is impossible to enter a ball while the door members 234a and 235a are closed. When the special map display device wins the special map fluctuation game and the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed, the door members 234a and 235a have predetermined time intervals (for example, an opening time of 29 seconds and a closing time of 1.5 seconds), a predetermined time. It is opened and closed by the number of times (for example, 15 times).

In the present embodiment, when the special figure 1 variable game is won, when the door member 234a of the first variable winning port 234 is opened and closed at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times, and the special figure 2 variable game is won. Opens and closes the door member 235a of the second variable winning port 235 at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. Further, when a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first variable winning opening 234 or the second variable winning opening 235, the payout device 152 is driven to win a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls. The balls are discharged to the upper plate 126. The balls that enter the first variable winning port 234 and the second variable winning port 235 are guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

Further, a plurality of disk-shaped hitting ball direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged near these winning openings and starting openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won any winning port or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

In this pachinko machine 100, the player supplies the balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the launch position of the launch rail, and drives the launch motor at a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the ball launch handle 134 of the player to launch the launch. The rod 146 and the launching mallet 148 allow the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 to pass through and launch into the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 drops downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting ball direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and wins the winning holes (general winning holes 226, first variable winning holes 234, 2 variable winning openings 235) or starting openings (first special drawing starting opening 230, second special drawing starting opening 232), or without winning at any winning opening or starting opening, or normal opening opening Only through 228 will the outlet 240 be reached.
<Direction device 206>

Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. On the front side of the effect device 206, the warp device 242 and the stage 244 are arranged in the area where the game ball can roll, and the effect movable body 224 is arranged in the area where the game ball cannot roll. .. Further, a decorative pattern display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter may be referred to as a door) are arranged on the back side of the rendering device 206. That is, in the rendering device 206, the decorative pattern display device 208 and the shielding means are located behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the rendering movable body 224.

The warp device 242 discharges the game ball, which has entered the warp entrance 242a provided on the upper left side of the rendering device 206, to the stage 244 below the front surface of the rendering device 206 from the warp outlet 242b. The stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b or a ball ridden by a nail or the like of the game board 200, and the passed ball is in the center of the stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to make it easier to enter.

In the present embodiment, the production movable body 224 is composed of an upper arm portion 224a and a forearm portion 224b that imitate the upper arm and the forearm of the human right arm. An unillustrated forearm motor for rotating the forearm 224b is provided at the position. The production movable body 224 moves in an arc in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-shaped left door 246a and a right door 246b, and is arranged between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b respectively move to the left and right according to the operation of the belt driven by the motor via the pulley. The shielding means shields the decorative symbol display device 208 so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208, when the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, their respective inner ends overlap. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, the inner ends of the left door 246a and the right door 246b are slightly overlapped with the outer ends of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can see all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. Is. Further, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, for example, only a part of the decorative pattern to the extent that the player can identify which decorative pattern the displayed decorative pattern is. Can be shielded. The left door 246a and the right door 246b may allow a part of the rear decorative pattern display device 208 to be visible through the holes in the lattice, or the shoji portion of the holes in the lattice may be covered with a semitransparent lens body, and the rear The display by the decorative pattern display device 208 may be vaguely made visible to the player, or the shoji part of the holes of the lattice is completely closed (shielded), and the rear decorative pattern display device 208 is completely invisible. Good.

Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 195. The figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit. The control part of the pachinko machine 100 is roughly classified into a main control part 300 for controlling the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control part 300. According to a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and a second sub-control unit 500 controlling various devices based on the command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400. Mainly includes a payout control unit 600 that controls the payout of game balls, a launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of the game balls, and a power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. There is.

First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and temporary data storage. A RAM 308 for storing, an I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time, the number of times, and the like, and a WDT 314 for monitoring abnormality in program processing are mounted. Other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this point is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

Further, the basic circuit 302 includes a random number value generation circuit 318 (in this circuit, a random number value generation circuit 318 that is used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received. It is assumed that two counters are built in) and a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, each starting opening, winning opening, variable winning opening A (first variable winning opening 234 and/or second variable winning opening 235). Receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including a sensor for detecting a game ball passing through, a magnetic sensor (wide range magnetic sensor), a separately described front frame door opening sensor 109, an inner frame opening sensor, a lower plate full tank sensor, A sensor circuit 322 for outputting the amplification result or the comparison result with the reference voltage to the random value generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302, and a predetermined symbol display device, for example, the special figure 1 display device 212 or the special figure 2 display device 214. A drive circuit 324 for performing display control, a drive circuit 326 for performing display control of a predetermined symbol display device, for example, the universal figure display device 210, and various status display sections 328 (for example, the universal figure holding lamp 216, 1 holding lamp 218, special figure 2 holding lamp 220, high-accuracy middle lamp 222, etc.), a drive circuit 330 for performing display control, and a predetermined movable member such as a blade member 232a of the special figure 2 starting port 232 or an attacker. A drive circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 for opening and closing the door member 234a of A and the like is connected.

When the sphere detection sensor 320 detects that a sphere has won in the special opening 1 starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the sphere has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318. Upon receiving this signal, the random value generation circuit 318 latches the value of the counter corresponding to the special-figure 1 starting port 230 at that timing, and stores the latched value in the internal counter value storage corresponding to the special-figure 1 starting port 230. Stored in the register for use. Similarly, when the random number generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that a ball has won in the special figure 2 starting port 232, similarly, the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232 is latched. The latched value is stored in the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232.

Furthermore, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 connects the information output circuit 336 to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like. The game information of 100 (for example, a game state) is output.

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source that is being supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. When it is less than a predetermined value (9V in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on, and the CPU 304 starts from the start signal output circuit 340. When the signal is input, the game control is started (the main control unit main processing described later is started).

In addition, the main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. Communication with the sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is possible. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to send signals such as commands to the first sub control unit 400. However, a signal such as a command cannot be transmitted from the first sub control unit 400 to the main control unit 300. In addition, the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 is a bidirectional communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to transmit a signal such as a command to the payout control unit 600. Is also configured to be able to send signals such as commands to the main control unit 300.

Further, the main control unit 300, through the information output circuit 336 and the external terminal board 349, to the information input circuit 350 provided in an external device (for example, a hall computer or a data display (not shown)), the game of the pachinko machine 100. It outputs an external terminal board signal (details will be described later) indicating information and the like. The “external terminal board” denoted by reference numeral 349 may be referred to as “external centralized terminal board” in the slot machine and is not limited to the name of “external terminal board”.

Further, the payout control unit 600 also outputs an external terminal board signal to the information input circuit 350 via the external terminal board 349.

Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that mainly controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404 and A RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, the number of times, and the like are mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock.

Further, the basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, a chance button lamp 138), and a shielding device 246. A drive circuit 432 for performing drive control, a shielding device sensor 430 that detects the current position of the shielding device 246, a chance button detection sensor 426 that detects pressing of the chance button 136, and detection of the shielding device sensor 430 and chance button. A sensor circuit 428 that outputs a detection signal from the unit 724 to the basic circuit 402, a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data, and image data stored in the ROM 406 based on a signal from the CPU 404. It is connected to a VDP 434 (video display processor) that generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 436 and displays the image on the decorative pattern display device 208. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in different ROMs.

Next, the second sub-control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted by the first sub control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 512 for measuring time and the number of times. It is equipped with. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock, and controls programs and data for controlling the entire second sub control unit 500 and an image display. A ROM 506 that stores data and the like is provided.

Further, in the basic circuit 502, a drive circuit 516 for controlling the drive of the production movable body 224, a drive circuit 517 for performing the drive control of the drive section 708 of the chance button, and the current position of the production movable body 224. A movable body sensor 424 for detecting, a sensor circuit 518 for outputting a detection signal from the movable body sensor 424 to the basic circuit 502, a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, and a game table. A game underframe lamp driving circuit 540 for controlling the frame lamp 542, and a serial communication control for performing lighting control by serial communication between the game board lamp driving circuit 530 and the game underframe lamp driving circuit 540. The circuit 520 is connected.

Next, the payout control unit 600, the firing control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and also based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604, a prize ball or a ball rental. It is determined whether or not the payout is completed, and communication with the card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 is performed via the interface unit 606. Further, the payout control unit 600 receives the detection result of the front frame door opening sensor 109 that detects the opening of the front frame door 106, and outputs the received result to the main control unit 300. Further, the payout control unit 600 receives a detection result of an inner frame opening sensor (not shown) that detects the opening of the inner frame (main body 104), and outputs the received result to the main control unit 300.

The firing control unit 630 is a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 for instructing to permit or stop firing, and a firing intensity output circuit provided in the ball firing handle 134 outputs the operation of the ball firing handle 134 by the player. Control of a firing motor (not shown) that drives the firing rod 146 and the firing mallet 148 based on a control signal that indicates the firing intensity according to the amount, and a ball feeding device that supplies a ball from the upper plate 126 to the firing device 110. Control (not shown) is performed.

The power supply control unit 660 converts the alternating current power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 and the payout device 152. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 is a storage circuit (for example, 10 days) for supplying power to a predetermined component (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the power supply from the outside is cut off. , Condenser). In the present embodiment, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a predetermined voltage to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the payout control unit 600 causes the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the firing control unit. Although the predetermined voltage is supplied to 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device through another power supply path.
<Type of design>

Next, using FIGS. 196(a) to (d), the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the normal symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of special drawings and general drawings to be performed will be described. The same figure (a) shows one example of the stop design aspect of special figure 1, the same figure (b) shows one example of the stop design aspect of special figure 2.

The special game 1 variation game is started on condition that the first starting hole sensor detects that the ball has entered the first special drawing starting hole 230, and the ball has entered the second special drawing starting port 232. The special figure 2 variation game is started on condition that the second starting opening sensor is detected. When the special figure 1 variation game is started, the first special symbol display device 212 performs "variation display of special figure 1" in which all seven segments are lit up and one central segment is lit up repeatedly. Also, when the special figure 2 variation game is started, the second special symbol display device 214 repeats "lighting up of 7 segments" and "variation display of special figure 2" which repeats lighting of one segment in the center. To do. These "variable display of special figure 1" and "variable display of special figure 2" correspond to an example of variable display of the symbols referred to in the present invention.

Then, when the variation time (before the variation time in the present invention) determined before the variation of the special figure 1 starts, the first special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1, When the fluctuation time determined before the fluctuation start of 2 (this also corresponds to the fluctuation time in the present invention) elapses, the second special symbol display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of special figure 2. Therefore, from the start of the "variable display of special figure 1" until the stop symbol aspect of special figure 1 is stopped or displayed or the "variable display of special figure 2" is started and the stop symbol aspect of special figure 2 is changed. Until the stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol variation stop display according to the present invention, hereinafter, the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed after starting the "variable display of the special figure 1 or 2". The series of display up to is called a symbol fluctuation stop display. As will be described later, the symbol fluctuation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

In FIG. 196(a), five types from "special drawing A" to "special drawing E" are shown as stop symbol modes of special drawing 1 in the symbol variation stop display, and in FIG. 196(b), As the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2 in the symbol variation stop display, four types from "special figure a" to "special figure d" are shown. In addition, the white part in the drawing indicates the location of the segment that is turned off, and the black part indicates the location of the segment that is turned on.

Among the stop symbol modes of special figure 1, "special figure A" is a 15 round (15R) special jackpot symbol, and "special figure B" is a 15R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as will be described later, determination of whether or not to be a big hit in the special figure variation game is performed by lottery of hardware random numbers, and determination of whether or not to be a special jackpot is performed by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the jackpot and the special jackpot is the difference in whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (special jackpot) or low (jackpot) in the next special figure variation game. Hereinafter, a state in which the probability of winning the jackpot is high is called a special figure high probability state, and a state in which the probability is low is called a special figure low probability state.

In addition, after the 15R special jackpot game and the 15R jackpot game, both shift to the time saving state. Although the time saving will be described in detail later, the state of transitioning to the time saving state is referred to as a universal figure high probability state, and the state of not transitioning to the time saving state is referred to as a universal figure low probability state. The 15R special jackpot symbol "Special drawing A" is the special symbol high probability general figure high probability state, and the 15R jackpot symbol "Special map B" is the special symbol low probability general figure high probability state. These "special drawing A" and "special drawing B" are symbols in which the amount of profit given to the player is relatively large.

Explaining the stop symbol aspect of another special figure 1, "special figure C" is a 2R jackpot design called a sudden change, and is a special figure high probability general figure high probability state. That is, the "special drawing C" is 2R as compared with the "special drawing A" which is 15R. “Special drawing D” is a small hit symbol, and is in a low special probability state with a low special probability probability figure. The small hit here corresponds to the same as the big hit without 2R time reduction. “Special figure E” is a deviating symbol, and is a symbol in which the profit amount to be given to the player is a relatively small profit amount.

Further, explaining the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 2, "special figure a" is a 16R special jackpot design, "special figure b" is an 8R special jackpot design, "special figure c" is an 8R jackpot design , "Special drawing d" are outlying patterns.

FIG. 196(c) shows an example of a decorative design. The decorative pattern of the present embodiment includes 10 types of “decoration 1” to “decoration 10”. The first special opening start sensor 230 or the second special drawing starting opening 232 has won a ball, that is, the first special opening starting sensor 230 has detected that the ball has entered, or On the condition that the second starting port sensor detects that the ball has entered the second special figure starting port 232, the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display of the decorative symbol display device 208 are displayed. Displayed in the order of "decoration 1" → "decoration 2" → "decoration 3" → ... "decoration 9" → "decoration 10" → "decoration 1" → ... in each symbol display area of the area 208c "Variable display of decorative pattern" is performed.

And when notifying 15R big hit of "special drawing B" and 8R big hit of "special drawing c", a symbol combination in which three identical decorative symbols are arranged in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, "decoration 1-decoration" "1-decoration 1" and "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2") are stopped and displayed. In addition, when notifying the 15R special jackpot of "special drawing A", the 16R special jackpot of "special drawing a", and the 8R special jackpot of "special drawing b", a symbol combination in which the same odd number of three decorative symbols are arranged (For example, "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" or "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7") is stopped and displayed.

In addition, in case of notifying the small hit of "special drawing D", when "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed, 2R big hit called "special drawing C" which is called sudden change is reported. "Stop 1-decoration 3-decoration 5" is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when notifying the deviation of "special drawing E" or "special drawing d", symbol combinations other than the symbol combination shown in FIG. 7C are stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

FIG. 196(d) shows an example of a stop display symbol of a general figure. There are two types of stop display modes of the universal figure of the present embodiment, “general figure A” which is a winning symbol and “universal figure B” which is a deviating symbol. Based on the fact that the above-mentioned gate sensor detects that the sphere has passed through the universal figure starting port 228, the normal symbol display device 210 repeats the full lighting of the seven segments and the lighting of the central one segment. Performs "variable display of general maps". Then, "Public figure A" is stopped and displayed when notifying that the general figure fluctuation game is won, and "Public figure B" is stopped and displayed when notifying that the general figure fluctuation game is out. Also in this figure (d), the white part in the figure shows the position of the segment where the light is turned off, and the black part shows the position of the segment where the light is turned on.
<Example of display during game>

197 to 199 are diagrams showing, in time series, an example of display on the decorative symbol display device 208 during one game.

197(a), (b), the decorative symbol display device 208 of the present embodiment, the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, the right symbol display area 208c below the display area, A special figure 1 hold icon display area 900 and a variable icon display area 800 for suggesting the number of holds in FIG. 1 are provided. In this embodiment, one special icon 1 hold icon display area (hold icon display area) 900 can display four hold icons, which is the maximum hold number of the special figure 1 variable game, and the display area 900 can be displayed. It is roughly divided into four areas: a first area 900a, a second area 900b, a third area 900c, and a fourth area 900d. 1st area|region 900a-4th area|region 900d respectively respond|correspond to the 1st-4th reservation order of the special figure 1 variation game. That is, a hold icon corresponding to the earliest (most memorized in the past) hold can be displayed in the first area 900a, and similarly 2 to 4 pieces in the second to fourth areas 900b to 900d. Each hold icon corresponding to eye hold can be displayed.

Further, in the present embodiment, as an example, a special figure 2 hold icon display area 902 that indicates the number of special figures 2 to be held is provided in the display area on the right side of the right symbol display area 208c. The special figure 2 hold icon display area 902, like the special figure 1 hold icon display area 900, can display four hold icons, which is the maximum hold number of the special figure 2 variable game. The special figure 2 holding icon display area 902 is not displayed when the number of holdings of the special figure 2 is 0, and is displayed when the number of holdings of the special figure 2 is increased. In the following description of the present embodiment, an example of a change in the state of each component due to an increase or decrease in the number of holdings of the special figure 1 (for example, an example of a display change of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 900) will be mainly described. The same can be displayed when there is an increase/decrease in the number of reservations in special figure 2. Further, for convenience of explanation, the special figure 1 hold icon display area 900 may be simply referred to as a hold icon display area 900.

Further, in the present embodiment, as an example, in the display area above the special figure 2 hold icon display area 902, the special figure 1 for special figure 1 for suggesting that the special figure 1 variation game is in progress (during variation of special figure 1) Four symbol display area 208e, and a special figure 2 fourth symbol display area 208f for special figure 2 to suggest that it is during special figure 2 fluctuation game (during fluctuation of special figure 2), and general figure fluctuation game (of ordinary figure) It has a fourth symbol display area 208g for a universal figure for suggesting that it is (during change). The special symbol 1 fourth symbol display area 208e turns off (or blinks) the image of ◯ during the special game 1 variation game, and lights up the image of ◯ when the special diagram 1 variation game is stopped. Similarly, the fourth symbol display area 208f for special figure 2 is an image of Δ, the fourth symbol display area 208g for a general figure is an image of ◇, is turned off (or blinks) during each variation game, and the variation game If is stopped, it will be lit up.

Further, below the decorative symbol display device 208, a special figure 1 display device 212, a special figure 2 display device 214, and a general figure display device 210 are provided. Above these display devices, a special figure 1 holding lamp 218, a special figure 2 holding lamp 220, and a general figure holding lamp 216 are provided, respectively.

These configurations are the same in all the following embodiments (examples) unless otherwise specified.

At the timing shown in FIG. 197(a), the symbol variation display of the first special symbol display device 212 ends, and the stop symbol is displayed. Further, the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 lights up two LEDs to notify that the special figure 1 holding is two. The numbers of the LEDs of the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 and the general figure holding lamp 216 are both 0, and it is notified that both the special figure 2 and the general figure are 0.

The special symbol 1 for the fourth symbol display region 208e (and the special symbol 2 for the fourth symbol display region 208f, the general symbol for the fourth symbol display region 208g) displays the image by lighting and notifies that the variable game has stopped. There is. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7", which is a combination of deviating decorative symbols, is stopped and displayed. Further, in the hold icon display area 900 (first area 900a and second area 900b), the hold icons PI1 and PI2 of Toku-zu 1 are shown, respectively.

At the timing shown in FIG. 9A, a circular (spherical) hold icon PI1 is displayed in the first area 900a of the hold icon display area 900. Further, a circular hold icon PI2 is displayed in the second area 900b.

Then, the timing shown in the same figure (b), the suspension of special figure 1 is exhausted, the suspension of special figure 1 variation game is reduced from 2 to 1, and the symbol variation display is displayed on the first special figure display device 212. Is started, the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 turns off one LED of the two LEDs, turns on one LED, and the fourth symbol display area 208e for special figure 1 is in the special figure 1 variation game. Indicates that the image of ○ is turned off (or blinks).

In the timing shown in FIG. 7C, in the hold icon display area 900, the hold icon PI1 in the first area 900a corresponding to the consumed hold is moved to the change icon display area 800, and a moving animation between hold icons ( Alternatively, a state in which a hold icon erasing animation) and a hold icon moving animation in which the hold icon PI2 in the second area 900b moves to the first area 900a are being executed are shown. Specifically, an animation is executed in which the hold icons PI1 and PI2 move to the right.

The timing shown in (d) of the same figure shows a state in which the movement animation between the hold/variable icons and the movement animation of the hold icon are continuously executed.

The timing shown in (e) of the figure shows a state in which the movement animation between the hold/variable icons and the movement animation of the hold icon are completed. That is, the variable icon CI is displayed in the variable icon display area 800, the hold icon PI1 is displayed in the first area 900a of the hold icon display area 900, and the hold icon PI2 in the second area 900b is deleted.

The timing shown in the same figure (f), in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol of special figure 1 is started. Is shown. As shown in (b) to (f) of the same figure, when the holding is exhausted in the present embodiment, first, the variable display of symbols is started on the first special figure display device 212, and the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 is turned on. After turning off, the fourth symbol display area 208e for special figure 1 turns off (or blinks) the image of ◯. Then, the hold icon PI executes each animation of movement, change, and deletion, and thereafter, the variable display of the decorative symbols is started in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. However, the present invention is not limited to this example, and these state changes may be executed first when they are sequentially executed, or may be executed in any order (the order may be changed). Moreover, at least one copy may be performed simultaneously.

The timing shown in (g) of the figure shows a state in which the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136 has started, and the first operation means image BG1 (in this example, the opportunity button is pressed) corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136. The imitated image) is displayed.

Further, the first elapsed time notification image TG1 for notifying the elapsed time of the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136 is displayed in the first color (this color) at substantially the same timing as the display of the first operation means image BG1. In the example, it is displayed in blue below the first operation means image BG1. This timing is at the start of the acceptance period for the operation of the chance button 136, and all (from the left end portion to the right end portion) of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is filled with the first color. Also, an image of the character (lord) is also displayed.

The timing shown in (h) of the figure shows a state in which a time (for example, a time shorter than 6 seconds which is a reception period) has elapsed from the start of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136, and the first elapsed time notification image is displayed. The TG1 displays an image in which the scale of the meter gradually decreases in accordance with the elapsed time of the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136 (executes the reduced display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1).

The timing shown in (i) of the figure is in a state before a further time has elapsed from the start timing of the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136 (for example, before 6 seconds which is the acceptance period has elapsed) ((h) in the figure). After the timing of )), the state in which the chance button 136 is operated is illustrated. At this timing, the image 730 corresponding to the notice effect (in this example, after deleting the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 based on the operation of the chance button 136) The character display "Chance!" and the character image (customer) are displayed in the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208. The notice effect may be displayed when a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation acceptance period without the operation of the chance button 136. Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the notice effect is displayed is described as an example, but another effect display may be used.

The timings shown in (j) and (k) of FIG. 11 are in a state in which the production according to the result of winning/disapproval determination, the change time, and the notice production which has been won is started in response to the operation of the chance button 136. Yes, FIGS. 11(j) and 11(k) show an example of reach display in variable display of decorative symbols.

The timing shown in FIG. 1 (l) is the effect start state of the super reach, the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is changed to white (white background), and the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. For example, a small display is made in the lower right part of the display area (decorated display of the decorative pattern). Further, the hold icon display area 900, the variable icon display area 800, the hold icon PI, and the variable icon CI are hidden (erased). In addition, the pending icon display area 900, the variable icon display area 800, the pending icon PI, the variable icon CI erasing timing, the white background timing, and the decorative symbol reduced display timing, whichever comes first when sequentially executed. May be executed in any order (the order may be changed). Moreover, at least one copy may be performed simultaneously. Further, the hold icon display area 900, the variable icon display area 800, the hold icon PI, and the variable icon CI may be displayed or a part thereof may be hidden during the super reach effect.

At the timings shown in FIGS. (m), (n), and 198 (o) to 198 (q), for example, a swordsman reach production in which a swordsman character is confronted with a sword is started to be executed as a super reach production. It is in the state of being. Here, as an example, after a swordsman character and the characters “VS swordsman” are displayed (FIG. 197(m)), a confrontation scene between the character (lord) and the swordsman character is displayed (FIGS. 197(n) to 198(FIG. 197)). q)).

At the timing shown in FIG. 198(q), the scene in which the character (Den) has won the swordsman character is displayed, and in FIG. 198(r), a symbol combination of a big hit (probably strange big hit) is displayed in a reduced display of the decorative pattern (for example, The fluctuation display of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7") is displayed.

At the timing shown in FIG. 6(s), the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is changed to white, and at the timing shown in FIG. 9(t), the symbol display regions 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 are hit big ( After the symbol combination (for example, "decorative 7-decorative 7-decorative 7-decorative 7") of "probability variation big hit" is displayed in a swinging manner, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. Further, at the timing shown in (v) of the same figure, the stop display of the decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c is erased, and the character of "probable variation jackpot" for notifying the start of the jackpot is displayed.

The timing shown in FIG. 198(t)′ to FIG. 198(v)′ continues from FIG. 198(s) when the jackpot reach effect (reach effect of decoration 6) is started in FIG. 197(k). It's timing. At this timing, after the jackpot pattern combination (for example, "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6") is shaken and fluctuated and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 ((t)' in the figure), The stop display of the decorative design is performed ((u)' in the same figure), the stop display of the decorative design in the design display areas 208a to 208c is erased, and the character of "big hit" for notifying the start of the big hit is displayed (same). Figure (v)').
FIG. 199 shows a display example when there is a deviation in the swordsman reach production.

The timing shown in FIG. 199(a) is the timing following FIG. 198(p), and the scene in which the character (lord) loses to the swordsman character is displayed. Further, in FIG. 199(b), a fluctuation variation display of a symbol combination (for example, "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7") that is out of alignment in the reduced display of the decorative symbol is displayed, and the timing shown in FIG. The entire display area of the symbol display device 208 is changed to white.

At the timing shown in FIG. 7(d), the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 are shake-variably displayed with the shifted symbol combination (for example, "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7"), and the hold icon is displayed. The state where the hold icon PI1 is re-displayed in the area 900 and the variable icon CI is re-displayed in the variable icon display area 800 is shown. Further, in the same figure (e), the stop display of the decorative symbol is performed in the symbol display regions 208a to 208c, and the image of ◯ is lit and displayed in the fourth symbol display region 208e for special figure 1.

(F) and (g) in the same figure, in the variable icon display area 800, when the special figure variation game ends and the variation icon CI is erased, the variation icon deletion animation is executed. The execution state is shown, and the timing shown in (h) of the figure shows the state in which the deletion animation of the variable icon is completed.

In the above example, the variation icon CI is erased after the variation of the special symbol is stopped, but the variation icon CI is deleted at another timing (for example, after the stop display of the decorative symbol or during the variation of the decorative symbol, etc.). ). The variable icon CI may be erased in one frame instead of the animation for erasing the variable icon.
<Structure definite machine with number of times>

With reference to FIG. 200 to FIG. 202, a structure-equipped variable transformer with a number of times (pachinko machine 100) according to another example of the present embodiment will be described. Each example (modification) of this embodiment and each example (modification) of another embodiment can be applied in combination with each other.

The structure probability variation machine with the number of times whether or not it is possible to enter a specific area (probability variation operation area, probability variation area, V area) by the operation of the structure (opening/closing operation of the first attacker 802 and the second attacker (not shown)). It is a pachinko machine 100 to which is distributed.

FIG. 200 is a front view showing a game board 200 according to another example of the present embodiment. In this example, the game board 200 is provided with an attacker unit 810 in place of the first variable winning opening (first attacker) 234 and the second variable winning opening (second attacker) 235 of the gaming board 200 shown in FIG. 194. Is. The other same components are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the game board 200, a decorative pattern display device 208 is arranged near the center thereof, a first special figure starting port 230 and an out port 240 are arranged below it, and a universal figure starting port is located on the lower right side of the decorative pattern display device 208. 228 and the second special figure starting port 232 are arranged, and the attacker unit 810 is arranged on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208 (below the second special figure starting port 232).

In the attacker unit 810, whether or not the attacker unit 810 can enter the specific area (probability variation operation area 808) is distributed by the operation of the structure (opening/closing operation of the second attacker 804).

The attacker unit 810 is provided on the upper front side and has an door member 802a that opens and closes so that it can be visually recognized by the player (first attacker) 802, and below the first attacker 802 is invisible to the player. An attacker (second attacker 804) having a shutter-type door member is provided.

In this attacker unit 810, a big hit is started when a predetermined combination of symbols is displayed on the special figure display device (special figure 1 display device 212, special figure 2 display device 214). Then, in a predetermined “second attacker 804 is opened, and a V shutter provided inside the second attacker 804 (not shown) is opened”, the game ball is in the second attacker 804. When a player enters a V passage switch (probability variation operating area 808, probability variation area, V area or V winning area) that cannot be visually recognized by the player, the game state after the jackpot is confirmed (special figure high accuracy normal figure high Sure) state is given. Even when the V shutter is closed, when the game ball passes the V passage switch when the probability variation operating region is in the valid state, the probability variation state is given. As described above, the structure probability variation machine (also referred to as V (winning) probability variation machine) divides whether or not the game ball can enter the probability variation operation area 808 by the opening pattern of the second attacker 804.

In other words, in the pachinko machine (V winning probability variation machine) 100 of the present embodiment, a jackpot game including a round in which the opening pattern of the second attacker 804 that easily wins the probability variation operation area (V winning area) 808 is started by a special drawing is started. It is determined whether to start the jackpot game including the round of performing the opening pattern of the second attacker 804 that is difficult to win, and the opening pattern of the first attacker 802 and the second attacker 804 is determined for each symbol. Has been done. Then, the second attacker 804 is opened in a predetermined round (for example, 4R) during the big hit, and the shutter (not shown) in the back is opened so that the game ball enters the probability variation operating area 808. Then, after the end of the big hit game, the operation of the probability changing function starts (moves to the probability changing state).

Next, with reference to FIG. 201, the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214 in the pachinko machine 100 (structure probability variation machine with number of times shown in FIG. 200, V winning probability variation machine) of the present embodiment, The types of special symbols and general symbols that the decorative symbol display device 208 and the ordinary symbol display device 210 stop display will be described. The same figure (a) shows one example of the stop design aspect of special figure 1, the same figure (b) shows one example of the stop design aspect of special figure 2.

In FIG. 201(a), three types from “special drawing A” to “special drawing C” are shown as stop symbol modes of special drawing 1 in the symbol fluctuation stop display, and in FIG. 201(b), Two types of "special figure a" and "special figure b" are shown as the stop symbol modes of special figure 2 in the symbol fluctuation stop display. In addition, the white part in the drawing indicates the location of the segment that is turned off, and the black part indicates the location of the segment that is turned on.

Among the stop symbol modes of special figure 1, "special figure A" is a 12 round (12R) big hit symbol (substantially 8R probability variation big hit symbol), and "special figure B" is 12R big hit symbol (substantial 8R normal big hit symbol) Yes, "special drawing C" is a deviating pattern. Both “Special map A” and “Special map B” are in the special map high probability general figure high probability state, but “Special map A” is a game ball in the probability variation operating region (V region) 808 of the attacker unit 810. While it is a big hit of the opening pattern of the second attacker 804 that is easy to enter (for example, 100 ms open→3400 ms closed→28000 ms open), “Special figure B” is a game ball in the probability variation operating area (V area) 808. Is a big hit of the opening pattern (for example, 100 ms opening) of the second attacker 804 that is hard to enter. Here, the shutter (V shutter) provided in the second attacker 804 in the present embodiment operates in a constant opening pattern (for example, 50 ms opening→2950 ms closing→28500 ms opening) regardless of the design. The opening pattern of the shutter (V shutter) provided in the second attacker may be determined for each symbol. In addition, in the “special map A”, the prescribed number of rounds is 12R, but in the case of 9R to 12R, the opening time of the special winning opening (the second attacker 804) is 1R to 8R (for example, 1R to 5R). The 8R opening pattern is significantly shorter than the 29000 ms opening) (for example, 100 ms), and it can be said that it does not substantially open. Therefore, it is also called a “substantial 8R probability variation big hit pattern”. Similarly, the special round B has a prescribed number of rounds of 12R, but 9R to 12R have opening times of the special winning opening of 1R to 3R and 5 to 8R (for example, 1 to 3R and 5 to 8R). The opening pattern is significantly shorter than the opening of 29000 ms (for example, 100 ms), and it can be said that it does not substantially open. Therefore, it is also called a “substantial 8R normal jackpot pattern”. In addition, in the present embodiment, the opening patterns 9 to 12R of the special drawing A and the special drawing B are the same, but the opening pattern of the special drawing B is substantially the opening pattern for normal 12R (for example, 9R to 12R is 1). -3R, 5-8R and the same opening pattern, such as the opening pattern that allows the game ball to easily enter the attacker. It may be an opening pattern different from 1R, 5-8R) or vice versa. The opening pattern of special figure A may be an opening pattern for substantially changing the 12R probability.

Further, explaining the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 2, "special figure a" is a 16R special jackpot design (substantially 16R probability variation big hit symbol), "special figure b", is a deviating symbol. The “special map a” is a special map high probability general figure high probability state, and is a big hit of the shutter opening pattern in which the game ball easily enters the probability variation operation area (V area) 808. Further, in the case of "special figure a", after the big hit game is finished, it shifts to an electric support (probability variation) state, and therefore, it is also called "substantially 16R probability variation big hit symbol".

It should be noted that any of "special drawing A", "special drawing B", and "special drawing a", regardless of whether or not a game ball has entered the probability variation operation area 808, after the jackpot game is finished, the electric support state (normal High accuracy state).

FIG. 201(c) shows an example of a decorative design. As for the decorative pattern of the present embodiment, different decorative patterns are displayed depending on the game state (normal state (non-electric support state) or electric support (probable variation/time saving) state). As shown in (c)(1) of the same figure, there are 10 types of "decoration 1" to "decoration 10" in the normal state. Further, as shown in (c) and (2) of the same figure, in the electric support state, there are seven types of "decoration 1" to "decoration 7" having different symbols from the normal state.

Then, as shown in (c) and (3) of the same figure, in the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1, in the case of notifying the substantial 8R probability variation big hit of the "special figure A" or the substantial 8R normal big hit of the "special figure B" In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the symbol combinations of the same decorative symbols (for example, "Decorative 1- "Decoration 1-decoration 1" and "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2") are stopped and displayed. Further, in the case of notifying the substantial 8R probability variation big hit of "special drawing A", for example, a pattern combination ("decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" of three decorative symbols "decoration 7" in FIG. -Decorate 7").

Further, in the stop symbol mode of special drawing 2, when notifying the actual 16R probability variation big hit of "special drawing a" in the electric power support state, "decoration 7" of the decorative design of FIG. 2(c)(2) is 3 The symbol combinations (for example, "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7") arranged side by side are stopped and displayed. Further, in the case of notifying the substantial 16R probability variation big hit of the "special drawing a" in the normal state, a symbol combination ("decoration 7-" of three ornamental "decorations 7" of the same figure (c) (1) is arranged. Decoration 7-decoration 7") is stopped and displayed.

In addition, when notifying the big hit of "special drawing A" or "special drawing B" in the electric power support state, it is the same as the decorative pattern of FIG. A symbol combination in which three decorative symbols are lined up (for example, "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" or "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2") is stopped and displayed. Further, in this case, the same decorative pattern is used except for a pattern combination (for example, "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7") in which "decoration 7" of the decorative pattern of FIG. It is also possible to stop and display three symbol combinations (for example, "decoration 1-decoration 3-decoration 5") which are not aligned.

On the other hand, when notifying the deviation of "special drawing C" or "special drawing b", symbol combinations other than the symbol combination shown in FIG. 7C are stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. In addition, the jackpot of "special map A" or "special map B" is notified in the electric power support by a pattern combination (for example, "decoration 1-decoration 3-decoration 5") in which the same decorative patterns are not aligned. In this case, if the special character C or the special character “b” is out of the range, the symbol combination of the special symbols for notifying the big hit of the “special character A” or the “special character B” is not displayed, but may be displayed. Good. Moreover, when notifying the deviation of the “special map C” or the “special map b” in the electric support, only a specific symbol combination (for example, “decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 6”) may be displayed, Any one of a plurality of types of symbol combinations may be displayed.

FIG. 201(d) shows an example of a stop display symbol of a general figure. There are two types of stop display modes of the universal figure of the present embodiment, “general figure A” which is a winning symbol and “universal figure B” which is a deviating symbol. Based on the fact that the above-mentioned gate sensor detects that the sphere has passed through the universal figure starting port 228, the normal symbol display device 210 repeats the full lighting of the seven segments and the lighting of the central one segment. Performs "variable display of general maps". Then, "Public figure A" is stopped and displayed when notifying that the general figure fluctuation game is won, and "Public figure B" is stopped and displayed when notifying that the general figure fluctuation game is out. Also in this figure (d), the white part in the figure shows the position of the segment where the light is turned off, and the black part shows the position of the segment where the light is turned on.

FIG. 201(e) shows an example of the notification of the fourth symbol. In the present embodiment, the special symbol 1 variation game (during variation of the special diagram 1) to indicate that the special symbol 1 for the fourth symbol display means, and the special diagram 2 variable game (variation of the special symbol 2) It is provided with a fourth symbol display means for special figure 1 for suggesting that it is the middle). The fourth symbol display means for special figure 1 and the fourth symbol display means for special figure 1 are LEDs respectively, and the indication is made by turning on and off the LEDs. In this example, the notification pattern of the fourth symbol for special figure 1 and the fourth symbol for special figure 2 is the same, and the LED is repeatedly lit and extinguished during the variable game, and in the case of a big hit, it is lit and displayed. If it is out of the range, it goes out.
<Example of performance display>

FIG. 202 is a diagram showing, in time series, an example of the effect display in the pachinko machine (structural accuracy variation machine with number of times) 100 shown in FIGS. 200 and 201.

The timing shown in FIG. 202(1), in the normal state (non-electric power support state) during the first rotation (first time) of the variation game of Toku-zu 1 wins "Toku-zu A" (actual 8R probability variation big hit symbol) The jackpot production has been started.

At this timing, the big hit start effect is executed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Here, as an example, the display of the characters "battle bonus" indicates that the effect is being executed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the special symbol 1 fourth game display means (special figure 1 LED 812) for suggesting that the special figure 1 variation game (during variation of special figure 1), and the special figure 2 It has a fourth symbol display means for special figure 2 (LED 814 for special figure 2) for suggesting that it is during a variation game (during variation of special figure 2), and. The LED 812 for special figure 1 is repeatedly turned on and off during the special figure 1 variation game, and is turned on when the special figure 1 variation game is stopped and a big hit is won, and is turned off when the special figure 1 variation game is missed. Similarly, the LED 814 for special figure 2 is repeatedly turned on and off during the special figure 2 variation game, is turned on when the special figure 2 variation game is stopped and a big hit is won, and is turned off when it is out (FIG. 201). (See (e)). At this timing, the LED 812 for Toku-zu 1 is turned on to notify that the Toku-zu 1 variation game has stopped and that the jackpot has been won. The LED 814 for Toku-zu 2 is off.

Further, below the decorative symbol display device 208, a special figure 1 display device 212, a special figure 2 display device 214, and a general figure display device 210 are provided. Above these display devices, a special figure 1 holding lamp 218, a special figure 2 holding lamp 220, and a general figure holding lamp 216 are provided, respectively. At this timing, the special map 1 display device 212 stops displaying “special map A”.

At the timing shown in FIG. 2B, an image simulating the game board 200 is displayed on the right side of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208, and a hitting suggestion display is performed in the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208. There is. The hitting suggestion display is a display for notifying the player that the period to right-handed or the period to left-handed has started. Here, the right-handed suggestion display (for example, the display of the character "Right-handed!" in the first way-indication suggestion display area 710 provided near the center of the display area and the arrow indicating the right-handed hit on the game board 200). Display) to notify that the period for right-handing has started. The hitting suggestion display may be an effect display included in the big hit start effect, or may be an effect different from the big hit start effect. In addition, a method of suggesting how to hit by other production means such as a lamp (LED) provided on the game board 200 or the frame (front frame door 106) and a speaker 120 (for example, lighting of a lamp in the game area 124 on the right side of the game board 200). Alternatively, the speaker 120 may output a sound “right hit!” (right hit notification sound, etc.) during the hit suggestion display.

The timing shown in (3) of the same figure has shown the state where the 1R 1st of the big hit game started. Here, the right hitting suggestion display (first right hitting suggestion display) in the first hitting suggestion display area 710 of the decorative pattern display device 208 is erased (not displayed), and the battle effect is executed in the display area. .. In this example, the characters "battle effect" are displayed in the display area to indicate that the effect is being executed. In addition, the number of acquired balls (here, “0pt”) is displayed in the upper right of the display area, and a small right hit suggestion display (here, “right hit” is displayed in the second hit suggestion display area 712 on the upper left of the display area). Character and the arrow pointing to the right) are displayed to inform that the right-handing period is continuing.

The timing shown in (4) of the same figure has shown the state where the 3R of the big hit game started. At this timing, as an example, the effect that the game ball is in a state where it is easy to enter the probability variation operation area 808 by winning the “special map A” (transition to the probability variation state after the end of the big hit game) (V prize winning suggestion production) has started. Here, the display of the characters "battle victory effect" indicates that the effect is being executed. The acquired number of balls is displayed as a cumulative value (“252 pt” in this example), and the right-handing suggestion display (second right-handing suggestion display) is continued in the second way-taking suggestion display area 712.

The timing shown in (5) of the same figure shows the state where the 4th round of the big hit game has started. At this timing, the V winning suggestion effect (here, the characters "Aim for the V attacker!!" and the arrow pointing to the lower right indicating the position of the attacker unit 810) is continuously performed. Further, the right-handed suggestion display is continued in the second way-provided suggestion display area 712. It should be noted that a V-winning suggestion effect (for example, blinking of a lamp around the attacker or "V from the speaker 120" by another effect means such as a lamp (LED) provided on the game board 200 or the frame (the front frame door 106) or the speaker 120. A voice such as "Aim for attacker!!" (eg, right-handed notification sound) may be output.

The timing shown in (6) of the same figure shows the state where the game ball has entered the probability variation operation area 808 (the state of V winning) in the 4th round of the big hit game. At this timing, an effect for notifying that the V prize has been won (here, the character "V" is displayed) is suggested, and it is suggested that the state will be changed after the jackpot game is over. Further, the right-handed suggestion display is continued in the second way-provided suggestion display area 712.

The timing shown in (7) of the same figure shows the state where the 6th round of the big hit game has started. At this timing, the round effect after the V winning (the effect until the remaining number of rounds (regular 12R, substantially 8R) is completed) is executed. Here, as an example, the display of the character "Round effect after winning the battle" indicates that the effect is being executed. Further, the right-handed suggestion display is continued in the second way-provided suggestion display area 712.

The timing shown in (8) of the same figure has shown the state where the 8th round of the big hit game has ended. At this timing, the round effect after the V winning is continuously executed. Further, the right-handed suggestion display is continued in the second way-provided suggestion display area 712.

FIG. 9(9) shows an effect executed on the 9th to 12th rounds of the big hit game. During this period, the round effect after the V winning is continuously executed. Further, the right-handed suggestion display is continued in the second way-provided suggestion display area 712. "Special figure A" is a jackpot pattern with a specified round number of 12R, but the opening time of the attacker unit 810 is set to be extremely short for 9R to 12R, and the jackpot game is actually finished at 8R, so the number of balls won Also does not increase after 8R. In the second hitting suggestion display area 712, the right hitting suggestion display continues.

At the timing shown in FIG. 10 (10 ), an effect (in this example, the display of the characters “Yoshimune RUSH rush !!”) for notifying the end of the big hit game is executed, and in the second hitting suggestion display area 712, the right Continuation indication is continued.

In addition, in FIG. 202, during the period of the 5th R (between (6) and (7) of FIG. 202), the same effect as that of the 4th R is informed that the V winning is informed.

In addition, in the case where the V winning is not made at the 4th R of FIG. 6 (6), an effect of notifying that the V winning is not made is made at the 5th R (between FIG. 202 (6) and FIG. 7) (for example, , The entire display area is displayed in gray, etc.).

In addition, when the "special figure B" (actual 8R normal big hit) is won, the battle failure effect is executed at the timing shown in (4) in the figure, and the V winning suggestion effect is produced at the timing shown in (5) in the figure. Is not executed. Further, in that case, after (5) in the same figure, a normal round effect (an effect different from the round effect after the battle victory, an effect until the remaining number of rounds (regular 12R, substantially 8R) is finished) It may be executed.
<Main control unit main loop processing>

Next, a process executed by the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment will be described. First, the main control unit main loop processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 203. FIG. 203 is a flowchart of the main control unit main loop processing.

In step S101 of the main control unit main loop processing that starts execution of the main control section main loop processing, the main control unit 300 sets the interrupt prohibition, and then in step S103, clears the value of the WDT 314 counter. , WDT 314 restarts the time measurement. In step S105, basic random number initial value updating processing is performed. In the basic random number initial value updating process, a process of updating the initial value generating random number counter for generating the initial value of the special figure determining random number counter and the general figure determining random number counter is performed. For updating the random number counter for initial value generation, for example, assuming that the range of numerical values that can be taken as the basic random number value is 0 to 20, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. To the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is 21, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area.

After setting the interrupt permission in step S107, a subcommand transmission process is performed in step S109). In this sub-command transmission process, it is confirmed whether or not there is a command to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and if there is a command to be transmitted, the process of transmitting the command is performed (details will be described later). To). In step S111, after performing other determination random number update processing, the process proceeds to step S113. In the other determination random number update processing, processing such as updating of the special figure variation time determination random number and the general figure variation time determination random number is performed.

In step S113, it is determined whether or not the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is equal to or higher than a predetermined value (for example, 9V), and if the voltage value is equal to or higher than the predetermined value (step S113). : Yes), the process returns to step S101 to continue the main control unit main loop processing, and when the value is less than the predetermined value (step S113: No), the process proceeds to step S115. In step S115, the power interruption process is performed. In this power interruption process, the power supply status information is set to "suspend" after setting the interrupt prohibition. In addition, a checksum is calculated by adding all 1-byte data stored in a predetermined area (for example, all areas) of the RAM 308 to a register having a 1-byte configuration having an initial value of 0, and a predetermined storage of the RAM 308 is calculated. Store in the area. After that, after setting the access to the RAM 308 is prohibited, the HALT state is set.
<Subcommand transmission process>

Next, with reference to FIGS. 204 and 205, the sub command transmission process (step S109) executed in the main control unit main loop process will be described. 204 and 205(a) are flowcharts of the subcommand transmission process. Also, FIG. 205(b) is a timing chart of subcommand transmission.

The command (subcommand) transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400 is stored in a predetermined buffer. In the sub-command transmission processing of the present embodiment, after a certain command indicated by the pointer of the buffer is transmitted three times (the same command three times), the pointer moves to the next and the next command is transmitted. For this reason, the buffer in which the subcommand is stored indicates the subcommand setting pointer indicating the storage area of the command to be transmitted (set) next and the storage area for the command that has already been transmitted (same command has been transmitted three times). It has a subcommand send pointer. Then, when the subcommand setting pointer matches the subcommand transmission pointer, the command indicated by the subcommand setting pointer has already been transmitted.

In step S201, a subcommand setting pointer is acquired, and the process proceeds to step S203. In step S203, the subcommand setting pointer is compared with the subcommand transmission pointer, and the process proceeds to step S205.

In step S205, it is determined whether there is a subcommand to be transmitted. That is, when the subcommand setting pointer and the subcommand transmission pointer match, there is no subcommand to be transmitted next, but when the subcommand setting pointer and the subcommand transmission pointer do not match (for example, the subcommand setting pointer In the case of the larger address), the subcommand to be transmitted next is set in the buffer. In this step, if there is no subcommand to be transmitted, the process proceeds to step S245, and if there is a subcommand to be transmitted, the process proceeds to step S207.

In step S207, to move to the subcommand to be transmitted next, the subcommand transmission pointer is acquired, 1 is added and updated, and the process proceeds to step S209. In step S209, 1 is subtracted from the subcommand continuous transmission counter to update. A numerical value of 0 to 3 is set in the subcommand continuous transmission counter, and "3" is set when the subcommand is transmitted first. That is, when the subcommand is transmitted first (the first transmission), the subcommand continuous transmission counter becomes "2" by this step. In the case of the second transmission of the subcommand, the subcommand continuous transmission counter becomes "1" by this step, and in the case of the second transmission of the subcommand, the subcommand continuous transmission counter becomes "1" by this step. It becomes 0".

In step S211, it is determined whether or not it corresponds to the third transmission of the same subcommand (whether the subcommand continuous transmission counter is “0”), and it corresponds to the third transmission of the same subcommand (“0”). (In the case of "), the process proceeds to step S213, and otherwise, the process proceeds to step S219.

In step S213, the initial value "3" is set in the subcommand continuous transmission counter, and the process proceeds to step S215. In step S215, the subcommand transmission data in the buffer corresponding to the current subcommand transmission pointer (subcommand transmission pointer acquired in step S207) is cleared, and the process proceeds to step S217. In step S217, the subcommand transmission pointer is updated (1 is added in step S207 to move to the updated pointer).

In step S219, the number of wait loops before strobe output (period) and the number of command transmissions are set. Here, the number of wait loops before strobe output (period) is set to the period (1) shown in FIG. 205(b) (for example, the time required to set data in the port (60 μs as an example)). The number of command transmissions is "2", which is the number of times the strobe signal turns off and then turns on at this timing (the number of times the strobe signals of (1) and (2) shown in FIG. 205(b) turn on and off). Is set.

In step S221 following step S219, interrupt prohibition processing is performed, and the flow advances to step S2223. In step S223, the subcommand continuous transmission counter is acquired, and the process proceeds to step S225 shown in FIG.

In step S225 of FIG. 205(a), it is determined whether or not the number of times of continuous transmission of the subcommand is the first time (the subcommand continuous counter is "3"), and if it is the first time, the process proceeds to step S227. If not, the process proceeds to step S231.

In step S227, subcommand data is output, and the process proceeds to step S229. In step S229, is the set loop count (the wait loop count before strobe output set in step S219 (period) or the data hold wait loop count (period) set in step S237) set to 0 (FIG. 205). The period (1) shown in (b) (the period from t1 to t2), the period (2) shown in FIG. 205(b) (the period from t2 to t3), the period (4) (the period from t4 to t5). ) And (6) (whether the periods t6 to t7 have elapsed), and if 0, the process proceeds to step S231. If not, the process returns to step S227. In steps S227 and S229, periods (1) and (3) (periods t3 to t4), period (5) (periods t5 to t6) shown in FIG. During each of the periods (2), (4), and (6) shown in b), the subcommand data is continuously output.

In step S231, the command transmission count set in step S219 is decremented by 1 and updated, and the process proceeds to step S233. In step S233, it is determined whether or not the command transmission count is 0. If not 0, the process proceeds to step S235, and if 0, the process proceeds to step S239.

In step S235, the strobe signal is set to ON, and the process proceeds to step S237. In step S237, the number of data holding wait loops (period) is set. The number of data holding wait loops (period) is the periods (2), (4), and (6) shown in FIG. 205(b). After step S237, the process proceeds to step S227.

For example, in steps S227 and S229, during the period of the number of wait loops before strobe output (the period (1) shown in FIG. 205(b)), the sub command data is continuously output (the number of command transmissions is “2”). When the loop count becomes 0 (when the period (1) shown in FIG. 205(b) elapses), the command transmission count becomes “1” in step S231, and 1 in the data holding wait loop in step S237. The number of times (the period (2) shown in FIG. 205(b)) is set, and the subcommand data is output in step S227. In this example, the subcommand data continues to be output during the period of the number of wait loops before strobe output (the period (1) shown in FIG. 205(b)), but the first sub-control unit 400 can receive it. , The sub-command data output during the first number of data holding wait loops (period (2) shown in FIG. 205(b)) after the strobe signal is turned on.

In step S239, the strobe signal is set off, and the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, the subcommand continuous transmission counter updated by subtracting 1 in step S209 is set, and the process proceeds to step S243. Step S241 is a step to proceed when the number of command transmissions is 0 in the determination of step S233, that is, after the first number of times of the data holding wait loop (the period (2) shown in FIG. 205(b)) elapses. Yes, in this step, the value obtained by updating the subcommand continuous transmission counter by -1 is set. That is, the "first time" of continuous transmission of subcommands is the number of wait loops before strobe output (period) and the first number of wait loops for holding data (time periods (1) and (2) shown in FIG. 205(b)). ). In addition, the "second time" of continuous transmission of subcommands is the period during which the strobe signal is turned off after the first number (period) of the data holding wait loop and the second number of times of the data holding wait loop (Fig. 205(b)). (Periods (3) and (4)). The "third time" of continuous transmission of subcommands is the period during which the strobe signal is turned off after the second number (period) of the data holding wait loop and the third number of times of the data holding wait loop (Fig. 205(b)). (Period of (5) and (6)). Further, the command transmission number set in step S219 is “2”, which is the number of times the strobe signal is turned off and on in each of the first to third sub-command continuous transmission numbers.

After step S241, the process proceeds to step S243. In step S243, it is determined by the subcommand transmission counter set in step S241 whether or not the number of continuous transmissions of the subcommand is the third time (that is, the third time of the data holding wait loop is completed), and the continuous transmission of the subcommands is performed. If the number of times is the third time, the process proceeds to step S245, and if the number of continuous transmissions of the subcommand is not the third time, the process proceeds to step S247.

In step S245, the subcommand data set in the port is cleared, and the flow advances to step S247. In step S247, the subcommand data is output, and the process proceeds to step S249. In step S249, interrupt permission processing is performed, and the processing ends. Note that the subcommand data output in step S247 is the subcommand data set for the port in step S247, which proceeds to the case of “No” in the determination in step S243 (first to third times of the data holding wait loop). , If the determination in step S243 is “Yes”, the process proceeds from step S245. In step S247, a signal (clear signal) indicating that no data is set in the port is output because the subcommand data was cleared in step S245. (After t7 in FIG. 205(b)).

In this example, the strobe signal after the first time of the data holding wait loop is off (the period (3) shown in FIG. 205(b)), and the strobe signal after the second time of the data holding wait loop. Is off (the period (5) shown in FIG. 205(b)), the subcommand transmission process is terminated and the next step (other determination random number updating process (step) of the main control unit main loop process shown in FIG. It is a period (for example, 90 μs) until the sub command transmission process (step S109) is executed again in the main control unit main loop process after returning to S111). Since the time (60 μs as an example) for setting the data to the port is required before the first time of the data holding wait loop, the processing of steps S225 to S229 is executed when the number of times of continuous transmission of the subcommand is the first time. In this way, the time to set the data in the port is secured.On the other hand, when the number of times of continuous transmission of the subcommand is the second and third times, when the subcommand transmission processing is completed, the main control unit main processing loops. Since the process is returned, the process (step S227 and step S229) when the number of continuous transmissions of the subcommand is the first is unnecessary.

In this example, the same subcommand is transmitted three times, but it may be configured to be transmitted only once. In that case, the processes of S209 to S217, S223 to S225, and S241 to S243 are unnecessary. Also, the same subcommand may be configured to be transmitted multiple times other than 3.
<Main controller timer interrupt processing>

Next, with reference to FIG. 206, the main controller timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main controller 300 will be described. FIG. 206 is a flowchart of the main controller timer interrupt process.

The main control unit 300 includes a timer circuit 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once in this embodiment, about once every 2 ms), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process is started at a predetermined cycle. In step S301, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt process, the value of each register of the CPU 304 is temporarily saved in the stack area.

In steps S303 and S305, basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing are performed. In the basic random number initial value updating process and the basic random number updating process, the value of the random number counter for initial value generation performed in step S105 is updated, and the special control determination random number counter used in the main control unit 300 is next. , The random number counter for determining the special figure fluctuation time and the random number counter for determining the general figure fluctuation period are updated. For example, if the range of numerical values that can be taken as a certain random value is 0 to 100, the value is acquired from the random number counter storage area provided in the RAM 308 for generating the random value, and 1 is added to the acquired value before the original Stored in the random number counter storage area of. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. In addition, as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, when it is determined that the random number counter makes one round, the value of the random number counter for initial value generation corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value obtained from a random number counter that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and the result obtained by adding 1 to the obtained value is a previously set initial value stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. When the value is equal to (for example, 7), the value is obtained as an initial value from the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to the random number counter, set in the random number counter, and the random number counter makes one round next time. In order to determine that, the initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area. In the present embodiment, a counter for obtaining the random number value of Toku-zu 1 and a counter for obtaining the random number value of Toku-zu 2 may be separately provided.

In step S307, it is determined whether or not the interrupt function is being limited (whether or not the first sub-control unit 400 is activated), and if the interrupt function is being limited (the first sub-control unit 400 is not activated). If (step S307: Yes), the process proceeds to step S341. If the interrupt function is not being limited (when the first sub control unit 400 is activated) (step S307: No), the process proceeds to step S309. move on. Here, that the interrupt function is being limited means that the activation waiting counter of the first sub-control unit 400 set when the power of the main control unit 300 is turned on is not 0, that is, in step S307, the first When it is determined that the activation waiting counter of the sub control unit 400 is 0, it is determined that the first sub control unit 400 has been activated, and the process proceeds to step S309. When the bidirectional communication with the first sub-control unit 400 is possible, a command for confirming whether the first sub-control unit 400 is activated is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. If the confirmation command is returned from 400, it may be determined that the first sub-control unit 400 has started. In step S309, it is determined whether or not a specific error (in this embodiment, a magnetic detection error) is occurring. If a specific error is occurring (step S309: Yes), the process proceeds to step S339. If the specific error is not occurring (step S309: No), the process proceeds to step S311.

In step S311, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the universal symbol display symbol update timer for timing the time for varying/stopping the symbol on the universal symbol display device 210, the time for varying/stopping the symbol on the first special symbol display device 212. Special symbol 1 display symbol update timer for, the special symbol 2 display symbol update timer, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening period for measuring the time to change/stop display the symbol on the second special symbol display device 214 , And updates various timers including a timer for measuring a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like.

In step S313, processing such as updating the input port status is performed. In this input port status update processing, etc., the special figure starting port (the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232), the universal figure starting port 228, the out port 240 are input through the input port of the I/O 310. The presence/absence of signals relating to switches such as the first variable winning port (first attacker) 234, the second variable winning port (second attacker) 235, and the winning port (general winning port 226) is monitored and provided in the RAM 308. Store in the signal state storage area.

Explaining the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor as an example, information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interrupt process (about 4 ms before) two times before is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. Is read from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and provided, and this information is stored in the RAM 308 in the two-preceding detection signal storage area partitioned and provided for each ball detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) is performed. ), the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor is read from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area. Remember. Further, the detection signals of the respective sphere detection sensors detected this time are stored in the above-mentioned current detection signal storage area. In addition, when it is determined that the winning in the starting opening and the winning opening is abnormal, the information stored in the signal state storage area is erased because the winning is invalid.

Further, in step S315, a winning opening winning process is performed. In this winning a prize winning process, the above-mentioned two-preceding detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the information of the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the current detection signal recording area is compared, It is determined whether or not the information on the presence/absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information.

While one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor, this main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly activated at a very short interval of about 2 ms is activated several times. Therefore, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in the above-described step S313, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the two-preceding detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts passing through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before two times, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, if the detection signal is continuously detected for a predetermined time (for example, 100 μs) after the signal is input, it is determined that a prize has been won. If the detection signal is stored twice consecutively after the absence of the detection signal, it may be determined that a prize has been won.

The ROM 306 of the main controller 300 stores winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous-previous detection signal, previous detection signal, and current detection signal). In this step S315, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, there is no previous detection signal, there is a previous detection signal, there is a present detection signal). (The information indicating that), the general winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, the first special figure starting port 230, and the second special figure starting port 232, or the universal figure starting port 228. It is determined that there has been a passage. That is, it is determined that the winning openings 226, 234 and the starting openings 230, 232, 228 have been won.

For example, when the information on the presence/absence of detection signals for the past three times in the general winning opening sensor that detects a ball entering the general winning opening 226 matches the above-described winning determination pattern information, there is a winning in the general winning opening 226. However, if the information about the presence or absence of the detection signal for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winning is performed. The process is branched to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with the winning in the mouth 226.

The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal two times before, no detection signal last time, and no detection signal this time). After it is determined that there has been a single winning, it is not determined that there is a winning until the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the winning determination clear pattern information, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

In addition, in the winning a prize winning process of step S315, a winning a prize counter updating process is also performed. In this winning a prize counter updating process, if there is a winning in the winning a prize 226, the first variable winning a prize 234, the second variable winning a prize 235, the special figure 1 starting mouth 230, and the special figure 2 starting 232, it is stored in the RAM 308. The value of the prize ball number storage area provided for each winning opening or each starting opening is read, and 1 is added to set the original prize ball number storage area.

In addition, in the winning opening winning process of step S315, a winning acceptance process is also performed. In this prize winning process, it is determined whether or not the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the universal figure starting port 228, the first variable winning port 234, and the second variable winning port 235 are won. It is determined using the determination result of whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information. If there is a winning in the first special figure starting port 230 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value from the winning counter value storage register of the counter circuit 318 is changed to the special figure 1 random number value. And a value from the random number counter for generating the special figure 1 random number value as the special figure 1 random number value and stored in the corresponding random number value storage area.

In addition, when there is a winning in the second special figure starting port 232 and the corresponding holding number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value from the winning counter value storage register of the counter circuit 318 is selected as the special figure 2 win. The value is acquired as a random number value and the value is acquired from the random number counter for generating the special figure 2 random value as the special figure 2 random value and stored in the corresponding random value storage area. If there is a prize in the universal figure starting port 228 and if the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, a value is acquired from the random number counter for generating the universal figure winning random number value as the universal figure winning random number value. Store in the corresponding random value storage area. When the first variable winning port 234 is won, information indicating that a ball has entered the first variable winning port 234 is stored in the winning storage area for the first variable winning port 234. The same applies to the second variable winning port 235. In addition, when the random number of the special figure is acquired, the special figure pre-reading process (whether the winning or failing judgment, the symbol, and the pre-reading lottery of the variable time) are also performed. The special figure prefetching process will be described later.

In step S317, a prize-related error check process is performed. In the prize-related error check process, a process for confirming and monitoring a prize-related abnormality and setting an abnormality according to the result of the process is performed. Some switches may not detect an abnormality. In step S319, an out switch input update process is performed. In this out switch input update processing, the number of gaming balls that have passed through the sensor provided in the out port 240 (the number of ejected balls) is detected and updated. The input result of this out switch is mainly used for presentation.

In step S321, probability variation area related setting processing is performed. The probability variation area related setting processing will be described later.

In step S323, serial command management processing is performed. In the serial command management process, a process of receiving a command from the payout control unit 600, a process of transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600, and the like are performed. The command transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the payout control unit 600 is a communication confirmation command (communication state with the payout control unit 600, which is transmitted after the activation waiting time of the first sub control unit 400 after the power is turned on. Confirmation, a command for notifying the activation method (initial activation, return activation) of the main control unit 300) and a prize ball number command for instructing the payout of the designated prize balls.

In addition, as the command that the main control unit 300 receives from the payout control unit 600, a communication confirmation return command (a response command indicating that the command from the main control unit 300 has been received by the payout control unit 600) or a test firing test signal is used. Command (award ball signal output request), a command including information on the occurrence status of a payout system error (including no error), and a prize ball payout operation status command (whether a prizeball payout is in operation/not in operation). There is a command to display or a display to indicate that the payout is in progress (LED is turned on/off) to the first sub-control unit 400).

Next, in step S325, a special figure state update process for special figures 1 and 2 is performed. The special figure status update process executes one of a plurality of processes according to the process state of the special figure. The special figure status update processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S327, general-university-state update processing is performed. The universal figure state updating process is one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the state of the universal figure. For example, in the public figure state updating process in the middle of the general figure fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned general figure display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Lighting off control is performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs the variable display of the universal figure (general figure variation game).

Further, in the public figure state update processing at the timing when the public figure fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the public figure display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), when the hit flag is on, the hit symbol is displayed. The 7-segment LED that constitutes the normal symbol display device 210 is controlled so that the mode is turned on and off, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to be the display mode of the off symbol. ON/OFF control of 7-segment LED is performed.

Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the general-picture state update process. Here, the above-mentioned lighting/extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting indicating that the normal stop display is being performed is performed in the setting area. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs the fixed display of one of the winning symbol and the deviating symbol. After that, during a predetermined stop display period (for example, for 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the universal figure stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display. By this setting, the symbol that is confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is informed of the result of the universal figure variation game.

Further, if the result of the universal figure fluctuation game is a hit, the universal figure hit flag is turned on as described later. When the universal figure hit flag is on, the universal figure state update processing at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the universal figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0) is stored in the RAM 308. While the normal figure operation is set in the setting area, the tongue member 2321 is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the tongue member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). And outputs information indicating the open period to the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

Further, in the normal state updating process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the tongue member is closed for a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 msec). A signal for holding the tongue member 2321 in the closed state is output to the solenoid 332 for opening/closing the 2321, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

Further, in the universal figure state updating process which starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the regular area inactive state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Furthermore, if the result of the universal figure fluctuation game is out, the universal figure out flag is turned on as described later. If the unillustrated flag is on, even in the unillustrated state updating process at the timing when the above-described predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the unusual figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the normal figure non-operation is set. In the universal figure state updating process when the ordinary figure is not in operation, the process proceeds to the next step S329 without doing anything.

Further, in step S327, a universal figure related lottery process is also performed. In this public figure-related lottery process, opening/closing control of the general figure fluctuation game and the second special figure starting port 232 is not performed (the state of the general figure is not operating), and the pending general figure fluctuation game When the number is 1 or more, it is determined whether the result of the universal figure variation game is won or unselected by a random number lottery based on the universal figure winning random number value stored in the above random number storage area. The winning judgment is made, and when the winning is determined, the hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In the case of no win, the hit flag is set to off. Also, regardless of the result of the hit judgment, the value of the random number counter for generating the universal figure timer random number value described above is acquired as the universal figure timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are obtained based on the acquired universal figure timer random number value. One of the times is selected to change the display of the public figure on the public figure display device 210, and this variable display time is stored in the general figure change time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as the general figure change display time. It should be noted that the number of pending universal figure fluctuation games is stored in the universal figure holding number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending universal figure fluctuation games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in this general-use figure hold number storage area. Moreover, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

In step S329, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S313 are read to monitor the presence or absence of a predetermined error, and when the predetermined error is detected, the first sub-control unit 400 is notified. Device information indicating the presence or absence of an error is set in the transmission information to be transmitted. Also, by driving various solenoids 332 to control the opening and closing of the second special figure starting port 232 and the variable winning port 234, 235, or through the display circuit 324, 326, 330, the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol. Display data to be output to the symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, various status display parts 328, etc. is set to the output port of the I/O 310. Details of the device monitoring process will be described later.

In step S331, external output signal management processing is performed. In this external output signal management processing, processing for preparing to transmit an external terminal board signal is performed. Details of the external output signal management processing will be described later. In step S333, subcommand management processing is performed. In this subcommand management process, a command (subcommand) requested to be transmitted in various processes is set in the transmission buffer, and preparations are made for transmission to the first sub-control unit 400. In the subcommand management process, if the subcommand transmission request flag is set in each process of the timer interrupt process, the subcommand corresponding to the command type corresponding to each process (for example, in the device monitoring process When the transmission request flag of the sub command is turned on, an error command is issued, and the transmission request of the sub command (special figure 1 or 2 prefetch information command) is turned on in the special symbol random number acquisition process in the winning a prize winning process. If it does not, the corresponding pre-read command of special figure) is set in the buffer and the subcommand setting pointer is set.

The output schedule information (subcommand) transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of, for example, 16 bits, and the bit 15 is strobe information (when ON, indicates that data is set), Bits 11 to 14 are command types (in this embodiment, a basic command, a symbol variation start command, a symbol variation stop command, a winning effect start command, an end effect start command, a big hit start command, a big hit round number designation command, a power recovery command, Bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type) such as a RAM clear command that can specify the type of command.

Specifically, the strobe information is turned on/off in the above-described subcommand transmission process. If the command type is a symbol variation start command, the command data includes information indicating the value of the 15R jackpot flag, the value of the special symbol probability variation flag, the timer number selected in the special symbol related lottery process, etc. In the case of the fluctuation stop command, the value of the 15R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, etc. are included, and in the case of the winning effect command and the end effect start command, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag is included. In the case of the big hit round number designation command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the big hit round number, and the like are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, the command data includes device information, whether or not there is a winning at the first special figure starting port 230, whether or not there is a winning at the second special figure starting port 232, and the variable winning ports 234 and 235. Including the presence or absence of winning. In the present embodiment, when the first variable winning port 234 and the second variable winning port 235 are won, the transmission request flag of the special winning port winning command is turned on in the winning port winning process, and the sub command management is performed. In the process, the special winning opening winning command is set in the buffer.

In addition, when the special figure processing state is updated to the fluctuation waiting state in the special figure state update process, the transmission request flag of the subcommand (game state command) is turned on, and the command data is stored in the RAM 308. Status (probability change state, time saving state and extended extension state of ordinary electric auditors (state in which the opening time of the electric Chu is extended)) value, special map status (special map probability change flag, special map time saving state) Value, set fluctuation pattern table, special figure fluctuation time shortening fluctuation frequency (time saving frequency, in this case the number of times the probability variation state with power support is continued (for example, 150 times) and the number of times the power support state is continued (for example, 100 times)), and information indicating the special drawing processing state is set.

When the transmission request flag of the subcommand (special figure variation start command) is set to ON in the special figure per lottery process, the variation pattern table stored in the RAM 308 as command data in the subcommand management process, Per figure type (for example, 15R special jackpot pattern (special figure A) in FIG. 196, 12R big jackpot pattern (special figure A) in FIG. 201, etc.), special figure type (special figure 1 or special figure 2), special figure 1 related The information indicating the timer number selected in the lottery process and the special figure 2 related lottery process, the number of the first special figure variation games or the second special figure variation games that are held, etc. is set.

When the transmission request flag of the subcommand (special figure fluctuation stop command) is set to ON in the process of changing symbols, information indicating the special figure per type, the special figure type, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is stored in the command data. Set.

When the transmission request flag of the sub command (winning prize winning command) is set to ON in the winning opening winning process, the winning opening stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, or the winning opening whose switch (sensor) is turned on, or Set the information indicating the gate.

Further, when the transmission request flag of the subcommand (hit start command) is turned on in the special figure display confirmation wait processing, information indicating the special figure hit type stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data. ..

When the transmission request flag of the sub-command (hit end command) is turned on in the special electricity combination operation end process, information indicating the special figure hit type stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data.

When the transmission request flag of the subcommand (special winning hole opening command) is turned on in the special electric prize opening process, the number of big hit rounds (the number of special electric prize operation) stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the special figure winning type, etc. Is set.

When the transmission request flag of the sub-command (special winning prize closing command) is turned on in the special electric power combination operation processing, information indicating the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the type of special drawing hit, etc. is set in the command data. ..

In addition, when the transmission request of the subcommand (special figure 1 prefetch information command or special figure 2 preread information command) is turned on in the special figure random number acquisition process in the winning a prize winning process, the special figure to be prefetched is selected. Correspondingly, the pre-reading reserved number of balls, the pre-reading hit determination result, the pre-reading hit type, the pre-reading timer number, etc. of the special figures 1 and 2 stored in the RAM 308 are set in the command data.

In the subcommand management processing, rotation start setting transmission processing, rotation stop setting transmission processing, winning effect setting transmission processing, big winning opening opening setting transmitting processing, big winning opening closing setting transmitting processing, end effect setting transmitting processing, etc. It may be performed. For example, in the rotation start setting transmission process described above, the value of the 15R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the special figure 1 related lottery process, and the special figure 2 related lottery process stored in the RAM 308 in the command data are selected. It sets the information indicating the timer number, the number of the first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game that is held, and the like. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating the value of the 15R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data. In the above-mentioned winning effect setting transmission processing, the command data stored in the RAM 308, such as the effect control information to be output to the decorative pattern display device 208, the various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, and the special figure probability variation flag are included. The value, the information indicating the number of the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation game which are withheld, etc. are set. Further, in the above-described end effect setting transmission processing, the command data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information to be output to the decorative symbol display device 208, the various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, the special figure probability variation. Information indicating the value of the flag, the number of the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation game which is withheld, etc. is set. In the above-described special winning opening opening setting transmission processing, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the pending first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game Set information indicating the number. In the above-described special winning opening closing setting transmission process, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the pending first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game Set information indicating the number. Further, the general command special figure pending increase process may be performed in the subcommand management process. In this general command special figure pending increase processing, special figure identification information (information indicating special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308 for command data, advance notice information (advance notice information, false) (Advance notice information or no advance notice information) is set.

In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information makes it possible to determine the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. The effect control content can be determined based on the information of the command data.

In step S335, a display display setting process is performed. In this indicator display setting process, the display (LED lighting pattern) such as "holding ball number, symbol combination", state (in electric support or non-electric support), right-handed state, etc. Performs processing such as setting the output data. In step S337, output management processing is performed. In this output management process, a process of outputting the control signal set in each process to the solenoid or the LED, a process of transmitting the prepared command to the first sub-control unit 400 or the payout control unit 600, and the like are performed.

In step S339, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S301 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, etc., and then the processing returns to the main control unit main loop processing. ..

Further, in step S341, wait processing for waiting for sub-control activation is performed. In this sub-control activation wait wait process, the activation wait counter of the sub-control is decremented by 1 and the activation wait counter becomes 0 in order to wait until the first sub-control unit 400 is activated and becomes ready for communication. If so, prepare to send a predetermined command. As the predetermined command, any one or more of the power-on command and the command relating to the payout control unit 600 (for example, a command indicating that all errors are released, a magnetic field (radio wave) detection error occurs. Command that indicates the status, a command that indicates that a magnetic (magnet) detection error is occurring, a command that indicates that a lower tray full tank error is occurring, and that a dispensing ball shortage error is occurring Error, main control communication error command (command indicating that communication with the payout controller 600 is in an abnormal state), command indicating that a CR unit unconnection error is occurring, firing position command (depending on the state There is a command for notifying the launch position).
<Special map prefetching process>

In the special figure prefetching process (step S224) of the main controller timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 8, the main control unit 300 prefetches the increased start information in each of the special diagrams 1 and 2, and determines whether or not the starting information is correct. Before the stop symbol is pre-determined, the pre-judgment result (special figure pre-reading result) is stored in the pre-reading result storage unit in the RAM 308 (see FIGS. 207(a) to 207(c) and 208(a) to 208(c)). Remember. 207(a) to (c) are an example of the prefetch result storage unit of the pachinko machine 100 having the game board 200 shown in FIG. 194 and the stop symbol mode shown in FIG. 196, and FIGS. c) is an example of the look-ahead result storage section of the pachinko machine 100 (structure probability variation machine with number of times) having the game board 200 shown in FIG. 200 and the stop symbol mode shown in FIG. 201.

Here, as shown in FIG. 207 and FIG. 208, in the RAM 308, the pre-reading result storage section for special figure 1 for storing the pre-reading result of special figure 1 and the pre-reading result storage section for special figure 1 are stored. A special figure 1 prefetch number storage area for storing the number of prefetch results in FIG. 1 as the special figure 1 prefetch number is provided. In this example, the prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 can store up to four prefetch results. In the special figure 1 pre-reading result storage unit, the data of the special figure 1 pre-reading result of the highest rank (first) is deleted and the remaining special figure 1 pre-reading result is deleted every time the number of special figure 1 pre-reading is decreased by one. Are processed so that the rank of the data of 1 is advanced by one. In addition, each time the number of special figure 1 prefetches is increased by one, new data of the special figure 1 prefetch results is written in the next rank to the data of the special figure 1 prefetch results having the lowest rank (last).

Further, in the RAM 308, the special figure 2 pre-reading result storage section for storing the pre-reading result of the special figure 2 and the number of special figure 2 pre-reading results stored in the special figure 2 pre-reading result storage section are shown. A special figure 2 prefetch number storage area for storing the prefetch number is provided. The special figure 2 pre-reading result storage section can store up to four pre-reading results in this example. In the special figure 2 pre-reading result storage unit, the data of the special figure 2 pre-reading result having the highest rank is erased every time the number of special figure 2 pre-reading decreases by 1, and the remaining order of the special figure 2 pre-reading result data is deleted. Are processed so that they are incremented by one. Further, each time the number of special figure 2 prefetches is increased by one, new data of the special figure 2 prefetch results is written in the next rank to the data of the special figure 2 preread results having the lowest rank.

As shown in FIG. 8, in the special figure prefetching process, the main control unit 300 first determines whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 is increased (step S301 in FIG. 8). Whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 is increasing is stored in, for example, the special figure 2 reserved number stored in the special figure 2 reserved number storage area and the special figure 2 prefetch number storage area. The special figure 2 is compared with the number of prefetches. The main control unit 300 determines that the start information of the special figure 2 is increasing when the special figure 2 reservation number is larger than the special figure 2 prefetch number, and the special figure 2 reservation number is the special figure 2 preread number. If they are the same, it is determined that the start information of special figure 2 has not increased. When it is determined that the starting information of Toku-zu 2 is increasing, the process proceeds to step S303 in FIG. 8, and when it is determined that the starting information of Toku-zu 2 is not increasing, the process proceeds to step S307 in FIG.

In step S303 of FIG. 8, the increased special figure 2 starting information (a set of special figure 2 winning random number values and special figure 2 random number values) is added to the special figure state update process (FIG. 206) of the main controller timer interrupt process (FIG. 206). Prior to the success/failure determination processing in the special figure 2 related lottery processing performed in step S325), prefetching is performed from the special figure 2 random number storage area. Then, by using the pre-reading special figure 2 start information, for example, the hit determination table and the special figure determination table used at the time of hit determination, the stop symbol of the special figure 2 variable game related to the start information is drawn in the special figure 2 related lottery. Preliminary determination is made prior to the success/failure determination processing. It should be noted that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used when determining whether or not it is true or false.

In step S305 of FIG. 8 subsequent to step S303 of FIG. 8, the stop symbol information as the special figure 2 prefetch result obtained by the preliminary determination is stored in the first free area of the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. Remember. Then, it transfers to step S307 of FIG.

In step S307 of FIG. 8, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the start information of special figure 1 has increased. Whether or not the start information of the special figure 1 has increased is determined by, for example, as in the case of the special figure 2, the special figure 1 reserved number stored in the special figure 1 reserved number storage area and the special figure 1 prefetch number storage. This is performed by comparing with the number of pre-readings of special figure 1 stored in the area. If it is determined that the start information of the special figure 1 is increased, the process proceeds to step S309 of FIG. 8, and if it is determined that the start information of the special figure 1 is not increased, the special figure prefetching process is ended, Return to main processing of main controller.

In step S309 of FIG. 8, it is determined based on various flags in the RAM 308 whether or not the non-electricity support is being performed. If it is determined that the non-electric power support is being performed, the process proceeds to step S311 in FIG. 8. If it is determined that the non-electric power support is not being performed (the power support is being performed (universal figure high probability state)), the step S315 of FIG. 8 is performed. Proceed to. In this example, it is determined whether or not the non-electricity support is being performed, but it may be determined whether or not the execution condition of the special figure 1 pre-reading notice is satisfied. For example, the execution conditions of the special figure 1 pre-reading advance notice include conditions such as not being in a big hit game other than being in non-electric support.

In step S311 of FIG. 8, the increased special map 1 start information (a set of the special map 1 winning random value and the special map 1 random number value) is used to update the special map state of the main controller timer interrupt process shown in FIG. Prior to the winning/judgment determination process in the special figure 1 related lottery process performed in step S325), prefetching is performed from the special figure 1 random number storage area. Then, by using the pre-reading special figure 1 start information, and the hit determination table and the special figure determination table used at the time of hit determination, for example, the stop symbol of the special figure 1 variable game related to the start information is set to the special figure 1 related lottery. Preliminary determination is made prior to the determination processing in the processing. Note that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used in the determination of success or failure.

In step S313 of FIG. 8 subsequent to step S311 of FIG. 8, the stop symbol information as the special figure 1 prefetch result obtained by the preliminary determination is stored in the first empty area of the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. Remember. After that, the special figure prefetching process is terminated and the main control unit main process is resumed.

In step S315 of FIG. 8, for the special figure 1 in the RAM 308 instead of the stop symbol information, the "undetermined" information indicating that the increased special figure 1 starting information is not prefetched is prefetched. It is stored in the first free area of the prefetch result storage unit. After that, the special figure prefetching process is terminated and the process returns to the main control unit main interrupt process.

In the present embodiment, only the increased start information is pre-read and pre-determined, but all the start information may be pre-read and pre-determined. Further, in the above-described subcommand transmission processing, only the prefetch result of the increased start information may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, or all the prefetch result storage units for special figure 1 and special figure 2 may be transmitted. The prefetch result may be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400.

Further, the pre-reading is always executed for the increased start information of the special figure 2, and the pre-reading is always executed for the increased start information of the special figure 1 except during the electric support. Alternatively, whether or not to pre-read the start information of the special figure 2 may be determined by a lottery. Alternatively, the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the pre-reading result from the main control unit 300 may determine by lottery whether or not to execute the pre-reading notification for each hold, for example. In addition, regardless of the game state (for example, whether or not in non-electric support), when the start information increases, the prefetch is always executed and the prefetch result is stored in the prefetch result storage unit and the prefetch is performed. The result may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 may be configured to determine whether to execute the lottery and the effect using the pre-reading result. Further, even if the area for storing the starting information and the pre-reading result is not provided for each special figure, the starting information and the pre-reading result of each special figure may be stored in one starting information and pre-reading result storage section. good.
<Prefetch result information>

207, in the pachinko machine 100 having the game board 200 shown in FIG. 194 and the stop symbol mode shown in FIG. 196, the prefetch result information and the like in the prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308 by executing the special figure prefetch process shown in FIG. Exemplifies a state in which is stored. FIG. 11A shows an example of a state in which the special figure 1 prefetch result information is stored in the special figure 1 preread result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 4A, the prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 has, for example, the same number of storage areas (four in this embodiment) as the holdable number of the special figure 1 variable game. .. Each storage area is associated with the holding order (holding 1 to holding 4) of the special figure 1 random value storage area. The stop symbol information of special figure 1 is stored in each of the storage areas. In the example shown in FIG. 7A, the storage area "holding 1" stores "special drawing E" (off) as stop symbol information, and the storage area "holding 2" stores "special drawing E" as stop symbol information. "(Off)" is stored, "Special drawing D" (small hit) is stored in the storage area "Hold 3" as stop symbol information, and "Special drawing A" is stored in the storage area "Hold 4" as stop symbol information. (15R special jackpot) is stored.

FIG. 2B shows an example of a state in which the special figure 2 prefetch result information is stored in the special figure 2 preread result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 2B, the special-reading 2 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number of storage areas (four in this embodiment) as the holdable number of the special-drawing 2 variable game. .. Each storage area is associated with the holding order (holding 1 to holding 4) of the special figure 2 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, the stop symbol information of special figure 2 is stored. In the example shown in the figure (b), "special drawing d" (out) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "hold 1", and the stop symbols are stored in the storage areas "hold 2" to "hold 4". No information is stored. In addition, in the same figure (b), the state where the stop symbol information is not stored in the storage area is described as "none".

FIG. 11C shows an example of the special figure 1 pre-reading result storage unit in the electrical support. As shown in FIG. 7C, in the storage area “holding 1”, “undetermined” information is stored instead of the stop symbol information. Neither stop symbol information nor “undetermined” information is stored in the storage areas “holding 2” to “holding 4”.

208 is a game board 200 shown in FIG. 200 and a pachinko machine 100 having a stopped symbol mode shown in FIG. 201 (structure probability changing machine with a number of times), prefetching in the RAM 308 by executing the special figure prefetching process shown in FIG. The state in which the prefetch result information and the like are stored in the result storage unit is illustrated. FIG. 208A shows an example of a state in which the special figure 1 prefetch result information is stored in the special figure 1 preread result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 208(a), the special-reading 1 pre-reading result storage unit has, for example, the same number of storage areas (four in this embodiment) as the holdable number of the special-drawing 1 variable game. .. Each storage area is associated with the holding order (holding 1 to holding 4) of the special figure 1 random value storage area. The stop symbol information of special figure 1 is stored in each of the storage areas. In the example shown in FIG. 208(a), the storage area "holding 1" stores "special drawing C" (off) as stop symbol information, and the storage area "holding 2" stores stop symbol information "special drawing C". "(Delay) is stored, "Special figure A" (substantially 8R probability variation big hit) is stored in the storage area "Hold 3" as stop symbol information, and "Special symbol" is stored in the storage area "Hold 4" as stop symbol information. “C” (disappearance) is stored.

FIG. 208( b) shows an example of a state in which the special figure 2 prefetch result information is stored in the special figure 2 preread result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 208(b), the pre-reading result storage unit for special figure 2 has, for example, the same number of storage areas (four in this embodiment) as the holdable number of the special figure 2 variable game. .. Each storage area is associated with the holding order (holding 1 to holding 4) of the special figure 2 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, the stop symbol information of special figure 2 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 208 (b), the storage area "holding 1" stores "special drawing b" (disappearance) as stop design information, and the storage areas "holding 2" to "holding 4" have a stop design. No information is stored. In FIG. 208(b), the state in which the stop symbol information is not stored in the storage area is described as “none”.

FIG. 208(c) shows an example of the special figure 1 pre-reading result storage unit in the electrical support. As shown in FIG. 208(c), in the storage area "holding 1", "undetermined" information is stored instead of the stopped symbol information. Neither stop symbol information nor “undetermined” information is stored in the storage areas “holding 2” to “holding 4”.

In the above description, only the stop symbol is pre-determined, and only the stop symbol information is stored in the pre-reading result storage section. It may be stored in a unit and transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 as prefetch result information.
<Probability region related setting processing>

Next, the probability variation area related setting processing (step S321) in the main control unit timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 209 to 210. 210 and 210 are flowcharts of the probability variation area related setting processing. The probability variation area refers to a probability variation operation area 808 (V area or V winning area) provided in the second attacker 804 of the game board 200 shown in FIG. 200 invisible to the player.

In step S601, the special winning opening discharge excess abnormality flag and the solenoid abnormality flag are cleared. The special winning opening discharge excess abnormality flag indicates that the number of game balls discharged from the game area 124 (the number of discharged balls) has entered the special winning opening (for example, the second attacker 804 of the game board 200 shown in FIG. 200). This flag is set (turned on) when the number of balls is greater than the number of balls (number of balls entered). The number of entered balls is detected and counted by the ball detection sensor 320 (count switch SW) provided in the second attacker 804 here. Further, the number of discharges is determined by the ball detection sensor 320 (out switch SO1) provided in the V passage switch (probability variation operation region (probability variation region) 808) provided invisible to the player in the second attacker 804, and The ball detection sensor 320 (out switch SO2) provided at the out port 240 detects and counts. It is a normal state when the value of the number of incoming balls (count switch SW) and the value of the number of discharged balls (the total of the out switch SO1 and the out switch SO2) are equal (when the difference between the two is 0).

In this example, a case where one count switch is provided is described as an example, but a plurality of count switches (count switch SW1, count switch SW2...) May be provided. Further, in this example, a case in which there are two out switches SO1 and SO2 will be described as an example, but one out switch SO may be provided.

The solenoid abnormality flag is a flag that is set (turned on) when the first variable winning port 234 and the second variable winning port 235 or the solenoid of the attacker unit 810 performs an abnormal operation.

In step S603, the probability variation area related passage number (the number obtained by subtracting the number of discharged balls from the number of entered balls) is acquired, and the process proceeds to step S605. In step S605, the edge of the switch to be determined (for example, either the count switch SW2 or the out switch SO when the second variable winning opening 235 (big winning opening 2) is valid) is switched on or off. ) Is detected, the process proceeds to step S607 if it is detected, and the process proceeds to step S611 if it is not detected.

In step S607, it is determined whether or not the switch whose edge has been detected is the count switch (count switch SW2) of the special winning opening 2 in this example. If it is the count switch SW2, the process proceeds to step S609, and otherwise. In this case, the process proceeds to step S615.

In step S609, 1 is added to the number of entered balls (number of INs) to update, and the process proceeds to step S611. In step S611, the update result is saved, and the process proceeds to step S613. In step S613, it is determined whether or not there is an undetermined switch among the determination target switches whose edges have been detected. If there is an undetermined switch, the process proceeds to step S605, and if there is no undetermined switch, It proceeds to step S621.

In step S615, since the switch in which the edge is detected is the out switch, 1 is subtracted from the number of entered balls to update it, and the process proceeds to step S617. In step S617, it is determined whether or not the probability variation area-related passage number is negative. If not negative, the procedure proceeds to step S611, and if negative, the procedure proceeds to step S619. In step S619, the special winning opening discharge excess abnormality flag is set to ON, and the process proceeds to step S621.

In step S621, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening winning excess abnormality monitoring timer is 0 (is not an error). If it is 0 (is not an error), the process proceeds to step S623. If not, the process proceeds to step S625. move on.

In step S623, the special winning opening winning excess abnormality monitoring timer is set, and the process proceeds to step S633 shown in FIG.

In step S625, the number of probability variation area-related passes updated so far is set, and the flow advances to step S627. In step S627, it is determined whether or not the probability variation area related passage number is positive. If not positive, the process proceeds to step S633. If positive, the winning excess excess abnormality is detected, and thus the process proceeds to step S629. In step S629, the special winning opening winning excess error flag is set to ON, and the process proceeds to step S633 shown in FIG.

Referring to FIG. 210, in step S633, the valid period state of the probability variation region is acquired, and the flow proceeds to step S635. In step S635, it is determined whether or not the state of the probability variation region is set valid, and if it is set valid, the process proceeds to step S637, and if not, the process ends.

In step S637, the test signal output timer (information output timer) of the special electric accessory (special electricity combination 2) related to the second variable winning opening (second attacker) 235 is acquired. The test signal output timer (information output timer) of the special electric wire combination 2 outputs a test signal for a model test of the gaming machine for a predetermined period after the second variable winning a prize mouth (second attacker) 235 is closed (special electric power). It is an information output timer (here, for example, 2 seconds) for outputting the test signal by adding it to the signal indicating that the hand 2 is in operation.

In step S639, it is determined whether or not the signal output timer of the special electric host 2 is 0 (whether the special electric host 2 is still valid). If it is 0 (if it is still valid), the process proceeds to step S641. If not, the process proceeds to step S643.

In step S641, the number of releases of the probability variation region and the release timer are cleared, the state of the probability variation region is set to invalid, and the process ends.

In step S643, it is determined whether or not the edge of the probability variation area switch is detected. If detected, the process proceeds to step S645, and if not detected, the process ends.

In step S645, post-hit setting data (time saving, number of probability changes, etc.) is set according to the hit type information. In this step, the status is set in accordance with the hitting type information (hit symbol (for example, special drawing A, special drawing B, etc.)) shown in FIG. 196 or FIG. For example, the status is status 0 (no setting), status 1 (100 times per hour), status 2 (50 times per hour), status 3 (100 times probability change), status 4 (50 times probability change), etc. When passing, the status 4 corresponding to the probability variation 50 times is set according to the winning symbol.

In step S647, a subcommand transmission request is set, and the flow advances to step S649. In step S649, a short open passage flag is set according to the hit type information, and the process ends. The short-open passage flag is a flag for notifying a clerk of the passage of a game ball, for example, when the game ball has a pattern in which it is difficult to win a prize and a prize is won.

In addition, in the game board 200 shown in FIG. 194, for example, a count switch SW for detecting the number of balls entered into the first variable winning port 234 and a second variable winning port 235, and an out switch SO for detecting the number of ejected balls are provided. One is provided for each and there is no probability variation region. As described above, in the case of a model having no probability variation area, the processing relating to the probability variation area (the probability variation area related setting processing (FIGS. 209 and 210) and the probability variation area control processing (FIG. 212) are unnecessary. A separate process for detecting the winning hole outlet excess error and the special winning hole winning excess error is necessary.As an example of the process for detecting the special winning hole outlet excess error and the special winning hole winning excess error, a series of steps shown in FIG. In the process, the process may be terminated after step S623 and may be terminated after step S629 (the process after step S623 shown in FIG. 210 is not executed). As described above, the “probability variation area-related passage number” may be the number obtained by subtracting the number of discharges (value of the count switch SW) from the number of discharges (value of the out switch SO), as described above. In, the process (step) regarding the solenoid is also unnecessary.
<Special map status update processing>

Next, the special figure state update process (step S325) in the main controller timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 206 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 211 is a flowchart of the special figure state update processing.

In step S701, the special figure processing state address is acquired and saved, and the flow advances to step S703. In step S703, it is determined whether or not the special figure processing state is the "variation waiting state". If it is the "variation waiting state", the process proceeds to step S705, and if not, the process proceeds to step S707.

In step S705, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening excess flag is on. If it is on, the process ends. If not, the process proceeds to step S707. As described above, in this embodiment, when the special figure processing state is the “variation waiting state”, that is, only after the symbol stops after the big hit, the special winning opening winning excess flag is determined. When the special winning opening winning excess abnormality flag is turned on in step S705, the subsequent processing is interrupted.

In step S707, the special figure processing state before the execution of the process corresponding to the special figure processing state is stored in the buffer, and the process proceeds to step S709.

In the next step S709, a process according to the value indicated by the special figure processing state stored in the RAM 308 is executed. Specifically, here, based on the value of the special figure processing state, the special figure-related lottery process shown in FIG. 213(a), the symbol changing process shown in FIG. 216, and the special figure shown in FIG. 217, which will be described later. Display confirmation weight processing, hit start display weight processing shown in FIG. 218, special electric power combination operation processing shown in FIG. 220, special electric power remaining ball detection processing shown in FIG. 223, special electric power operation end processing shown in FIG. 224, and collision shown in FIG. 225 One of the end display wait processing is executed.

In the next step S711, the probability variation region control process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S713. The probability variation region control processing will be described later. In step S713, the special figure high probability status (probability variation state) and the special figure variation time reduction status when the symbol is stopped (state of special figure variation game (in the present embodiment, normal gaming state, probability variation gaming state, time saving game state and The special figure status is set in accordance with the status) indicating one of the latent probability variation game states).

In step S715, the prize winning status is set to ON. In this step, the easy winning a prize status is set according to the opening extension status, the universal figure fluctuation time reduction status, and the universal figure high probability status. In addition, in step S717, the special figure processing state before and after the processing corresponding to the special figure processing state is compared, and in the next step S719, the state change of the special figure processing state (value indicated by the special figure processing state is shown. If there is no change in the special figure processing state (if the value indicated by the special figure processing state has not changed) (step S719: No), the special figure state update process is executed. When the special figure processing state is changed (when the value indicated by the special figure processing state is changed) (step S719: Yes), the process proceeds to step S721.

In step S721, the initial value of the special figure-related timer is set, and the flow advances to step S723. Step S721 is, for example, a timer that is updated every 20 ms (4 msד5”) (for example, a variable time timer for a symbol, a special figure display confirmation timer, a hit start display timer, a special electric wire combination operation delay timer, a special electric wire combination operation interval timer). , Big hit end display timer, etc.), the initial value “5” is reset every time the status of the special figure changes because the opening time of the attacker is indefinite. If all timers are updated every 4 ms, step S721 is unnecessary.

In step S723, it is determined whether or not the special figure processing state has been updated to the "variation waiting state", and when it is applicable (step S723: Yes), the process proceeds to step S725, and when it is not applicable (step S723: No), and proceeds to step S727. The special figure processing state is managed according to numerical values such as "7" for "hit start display weight state", "3" for "remaining ball detection state", "0" for "variation waiting state", etc. Therefore, it is determined in this step whether or not the numerical value has been changed. The special figure processing state may not be managed corresponding to the numerical value. In step S725, a variation pattern table is set according to the game state and the number of variations, and the process proceeds to step S729.

In step S727, it is determined whether or not the special figure processing state is set to the "hit start display weight state". If the result is true (step S727: Yes), the process proceeds to step S729, and if not, ( Step S727: No), and the special figure state updating process is terminated.

In step S729, a sub-command transmission request is set (in the present embodiment, after setting a game state command transmission request including a special state and a general state game state, a firing position including information on whether to right-handed state) After setting the command transmission request), the special figure status update processing is terminated. Note that the order of transmission requests of subcommands is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission requests may be reversed, or transmission requests of a plurality of commands may be collectively performed at once in one process, The same applies to subcommand transmission requests in other processing flows.
<Probability region control processing>

Subsequently, the probability variation region control process will be described with reference to FIG. 212. 212 is a flowchart of the probability variation region control process executed in the special figure state updating process shown in FIG. 211.

In step S801, the state (valid or invalid) of the probability variation region is acquired, and the process proceeds to step S803. In step S803, it is determined whether or not the state of the probability variation region is invalid. If it is invalid, the process proceeds to step S825, and if it is not invalid (if valid), the process proceeds to step S805.

In step S805, the probability variation area solenoid open/close timer is acquired, and the flow advances to step S807. In step S807, it is determined whether or not the probability variation area solenoid opening/closing timer is operating. If the probability variation area solenoid opening/closing timer is operating, the processing is ended, and if the probability variation area solenoid opening/closing timer is not operating, step S809. Proceed to. As an example, when the opening/closing pattern of the special winning opening is opened at an opening time of 500 ms, then closed at a closing time of 2000 ms and opened at an opening time of 27000 ms, the values of the probability variation region solenoid opening/closing timer are 500 ms, 2000 ms, and 27000 ms. The timing of switching from opening to closing and the timing of switching from closing to opening are the non-operating timings of the probability variation region solenoid opening/closing timer.

In step S809, the probability variation solenoid signal is set to OFF, and the process proceeds to step S811. In step S811, the number of positive change operations is acquired, and the process proceeds to step S813. In the above example, the number of positive change operations is 3 (opening for 500 ms, closing for 2000 ms, opening for 27,000 ms). In step S813, it is determined whether or not the number of operations of the probability variation region is a specific number (for example, 3 times). If the number is the specific number, the process proceeds to step S825, and if not, the process proceeds to step S815.

In step S815, the probability variation area opening/closing timer is acquired according to the number of times of operation of the probability variation area. For example, when the number of operations of the probability variation region in the above example is “2”, the acquired probability variation region opening/closing timer is 2000 ms, which is the closed state.

In the next step S817, it is determined whether or not the acquired timer is an opening timer (a timer including opening information, for example, 27000 ms). If the timer is an opening timer, the process proceeds to step S819. ), the process proceeds to step S821. In step S819, the probability variation solenoid signal is set to ON, and the process proceeds to step S821.

In step S821, the acquired probability variation area opening/closing timer is set, and the flow advances to step S823. In step S823, 1 is added to the number of probable variation region operations to update, and the process ends. In step S825, the probability variation area solenoid signal is set to OFF, and the processing ends.
<Special drawing related lottery processing>

Subsequently, the special figure-related lottery process will be described with reference to FIG. 213(a) is a flowchart of the special figure related lottery process executed in the special figure state update process of FIG.

This special figure related lottery processing is called and executed when the information set in the special figure processing state indicates the "variation waiting state" in step S709 of the special figure state update processing of FIG. Is.

In step S901 of the special figure related lottery process, the special figure 2 reserved sphere number stored in the RAM 308 is acquired, and in the next step S903, it is determined whether or not the acquired special figure 2 reserved sphere number is 0. In the case of (when there is no suspension of special figure 2 variable game) (step S903: Yes), the process proceeds to step S905, and when it is other than 0 (when there is suspension of special figure 2 variable game) (step S903: No), the process proceeds to step S909 to execute the process related to Toku-zu 2.

In step S905, the special figure 1 reserved sphere number stored in the RAM 308 is acquired, and in the next step S907, it is determined whether or not the acquired special figure 1 reserved sphere number is 0. If there is no suspension of the variation game (step S907: Yes), the special figure related lottery process is terminated, and if it is other than 0 (if there is a suspension of the variation game of the special figure 1) (step S907: No). , To proceed to step S909 in order to execute the process related to Toku-zu 1.

In step S909, the value of the special figure 2 holding sphere number stored in the RAM 308 is decremented by 1 when the process related to the special figure 2 is executed, and the RAM 308 is stored when the process related to the special figure 1 is executed. The value of the stored special figure 1 number of reserved balls is subtracted by one. In step S911, special figure random number transfer processing is executed. In this special figure random number transfer process, when the process related to special figure 2 is executed, the random number values stored in the random number storage areas corresponding to the pending figures 2 to 4 of special figure 2 are changed from the pending figures 1 to 1 of special figure 2. When shifting to the random number storage area corresponding to No. 3 and clearing the random number storage area corresponding to hold 4 of special figure 2 and executing the process related to special figure 1, it corresponds to hold 2 to 4 of special figure 1. The random number values stored in the random number storage area are shifted to the random number storage areas corresponding to the reservations 1 to 3 in the special figure 1, and the random number storage area corresponding to the reservation 4 in the special figure 1 is cleared. As described above, the gaming machine (pachinko machine) in this embodiment is a special figure 2 priority variation machine. Further, each of the special maps 2 and 1 can store up to four reservations.

In step S913, special drawing per lottery processing is performed. As will be described later in detail, in the special drawing-based lottery process, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variable game (or the special figure 1 variable game) is hit. In step S915, a display symbol lottery process is performed. In this display symbol lottery process, the special symbol 2 symbol determination table (or the special symbol 1 symbol determination table) is referred to, and the second special symbol is based on the random symbol value and the result of the special symbol lottery process in step S913. The special figure display symbol data to be stopped and displayed on the display device 214 (or the first special figure display device 212) is selected by lottery.

215(a) is a diagram showing an example of a special figure 1 symbol determining table, and FIG. 215(b) is a diagram showing an example of a special figure 2 symbol determining table. When determining the display symbol data of special figure 1 in the display symbol lottery process of step S915, refer to the special symbol 1 symbol determination table shown in FIG. 215(a), and perform the special symbol per lottery process of step S913. The display symbol data of the special figure 1 is selected based on the hit result of FIG. 1 and the numerical range of the random number value. In the present embodiment, when the hit/fail result of Toku-zu 1 is a big hit, either one of Toku-zu A and Toku-zu B is selected. C is selected.

When determining the display symbol data of special figure 2 in the display symbol lottery process of step S915, the special symbol 2 symbol determination table shown in FIG. 215(b) is referred to, and the special symbol per lottery process of step S913 is performed. The display symbol data of the special drawing 2 is selected by lot based on the hit/miss result of the special drawing 2 and the numerical range of the random number value. In the present embodiment, when the hit/no hit result of Toku-zu 2 is a big hit, Toku-zu a is selected, and when the hit/no-go result of Toku-zu 2 is missing, Toku-b is selected. After the symbol to be displayed is determined, the symbol data displayed on the special symbol display device is set. The symbol data set here is acquired again in the display device display setting process (step S335) in the main controller timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 206, and the control to display the special symbol display device is performed. After the symbol data is set, the determined symbol (symbol type information) is determined, and if the symbol is lost, this process ends.

When the determined symbol (symbol type information) is a symbol of a big hit or a small hit, the process of setting the data set to the end of the hit (the data setting process after the end of the hit) is performed. The post-hit data setting process is a process of setting the gaming state set after the hit according to the symbol determined by the lottery.

Returning to FIG. 213(a), in step S917, special figure variation time lottery processing is performed. In this special figure variation time lottery process, the variation time table (not shown) is referred to, and the success/failure result of special diagram 2 (or special diagram 1) by the special figure per lottery process in step S913 and the numerical range of the random number value are used. After selecting the timer for the special map change time, the special map related lottery process is terminated.
<Special drawing lottery processing>

Next, with reference to FIG. 213(b), the lottery process per special figure (step S913) will be described. FIG. 213(b) is a flowchart of the special figure-based lottery processing (step S913) in the special figure-related lottery processing of FIG.

In step S1001 of the per-special-drawing lottery process, the per-special-drawing lottery is performed with reference to the win/no determination table. In the present embodiment, an example in which the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 use the same win/fail judgment table to perform the special drawing lottery, will be described. May be prepared.

FIG. 214(a) is a diagram showing an example of a high probability table for win/loss determination, and FIG. 214(b) is a diagram showing an example of a low probability table for win/loss determination. In the special drawing per lot drawing process of step S1001, when the winning/damaging determination of the special drawing 1 is performed, if the special drawing high probability state is reached, the high probability table for winning/losing judgment shown in FIG. In the case of the low probability state in the figure, the low probability table for success/failure determination shown in FIG. Then, based on the numerical range indicated by the referred win/loss determination table and the acquired random number value, the win/loss determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is selected. In the present embodiment, in the case of the special figure 1 variation game, a big hit, a small hit, or a loss is selected as the hit/miss determination result.

Similarly, in the case of the special drawing per win/defeat determination in the special drawing per lottery processing in step S1001, when the special drawing high probability state is obtained, the high probability table for win/loss determination shown in FIG. However, in the case of a special figure low probability state, the low probability table for success/failure determination shown in FIG. Then, based on the numerical range indicated by the referred win/loss determination table and the acquired random number value, the win/loss determination result of the special figure 2 variable game is selected. In the present embodiment, in the case of the special figure 2 variation game, a big hit or a loss is selected as the hit/miss determination result.

Returning to FIG. 213(b), in step S1003, it is determined whether or not the win/no-judgment result (lottery result) of the special figure per lottery in step S1001 is other than the “big hit” (step S1003). : Yes), the process proceeds to step S1005, and if “big hit” (step S1003: No), the process proceeds to step S1007. In step S1005, a special figure small hit lottery process is performed using the small hit determination table.

FIG. 214C is a diagram showing an example of the small hit determination table. In the special figure small hitting lottery processing in step S1005, the special hitting determination table shown in FIG. 214(c) is referenced, and based on the numerical range and the acquired random number value shown in the referred small hitting determination table, the special drawing Select the result of the small hit lottery. In the present embodiment, when the win/no-judgment result (lottery result) of the special drawing per special drawing is the special drawing 1, the small hit is selected with the probability of 2000/65536 as the win/no judgment result, and the loss is generated with the probability of 63536/65536. However, if the winning/disapproval determination result (lottery result) of the special drawing per special drawing is the special drawing 2, the small hit is not selected.

Returning to FIG. 213(b), in step S1007, the RAM 308 is determined based on the judgment result (lottery result) of the special figure per lottery in step S1001 and the judgment result (lottery result) of the special figure small lottery in step S1005. Information of any one of "big hit", "small hit" and "miss" is set in the hit/miss determination type stored in. In the next step S1009, information indicating "during special figure change" is set in the special figure processing state. As a result, in step S709 of the next special figure state update processing (FIG. 211), the symbol changing processing shown in FIG. 216 is called and executed.

In step S1011, the value of the special figure determination random number stored in the RAM 308 is cleared, in the next step S1013, a subcommand (special figure variation start command) transmission request is set, and in the next step S1015, the special figure After setting the basic signal information (for testing) indicating that the fluctuation is 2 (or the special figure 1), the special figure per lottery process is ended.

In addition, in the above special figure related lottery process, if there is no small hit, the processes of step S1003 and step S1005 are unnecessary.

Next, the win/fail judgment table and the symbol determination table for special drawings used in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 214 and 215. The tables shown in FIGS. 214 and 215 are stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, for example. FIGS. 214(a) and (b) are used in the success/failure determination process of special figure 1 or special figure 2 in special figure 1 or special figure 2 related lottery processing (steps S229, S231) of the main controller timer interrupt processing. An example of the hit/miss determination table is shown. FIG. 214(a) shows a high probability table for win/loss determination used in the special figure high probability state, and FIG. 214(b) shows a low probability table for win/loss determination used in the special figure low probability state.

The table for determination of wins/losses shown in FIGS. 214(a) and 214(b) includes “special figure probability” in the first column from the left, “winning/absence determination result” in the second column, and “random number range” in the third column. It consists of items. The "high probability" in the "special figure probability" in the first column shown in FIG. 214(a) indicates that the game state at the time of winning/decision determination is the special figure high probability state. The “winning/absence determination result” in the second column is divided into “big hit” and “outside hit”. The “random number range” in the third column indicates a numerical value range (0 to 65535) of random numbers to be compared with the acquired special figure winning random number value. Numerical values 10001 to 11638 are assigned to "high probability" and "big hit". Numerical values 0 to 10000 and numerical values 11639 to 65535 are assigned to the “high probability” and the “off”.

The "low probability" in the "special figure probability" in the first column shown in FIG. 214(b) indicates that the game state at the time of winning/decision determination is the special figure low probability state. The “winning/absence determination result” in the second row is divided into “big hit” and “outside”. The “random number range” in the third column indicates a numerical value range (0 to 65535) of random numbers to be compared with the acquired special figure winning random number value. Numerical values 10001 to 10162 are assigned to “low probability” and “big hit”. Numerical values 0 to 10000 and numerical values 10163 to 65535 are assigned to “low probability” and “out of bounds”.

The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300, in order to determine whether the result of the variation game of Toku-zu 1 or Toku-zu is to be won (big hit) or to be unwinned (out), the obtained special map win The success/failure determination is performed on the random number using the success/failure determination table. For example, the basic circuit 302 reads the high probability table for determination of win/loss shown in FIG. 214(a) from the ROM 306 when the gaming state at the time of winning/loss determination is a special figure high probability state, and the gaming state at the time of winning/loss determination is special. In the case of the low probability state in the figure, the low probability table for win/loss determination shown in FIG. 214(b) is read from the ROM 306 and referred to respectively.

FIG. 214C is a diagram showing an example of the small hit determination table. In the special figure small hitting lottery processing (step S1005) of the special drawing per lottery processing shown in FIG. 213(b), the small hitting determination table shown in FIG. 214(c) is referred to and shown. Based on the numerical value range and the acquired random number value, the winning/deciding result of the special figure small hit lottery is selected. In the present embodiment, when the win/no-judgment result (lottery result) of the special drawing per special drawing is the special drawing 1, the small hit is selected with the probability of 2000/65536 as the win/no judgment result, and the loss is generated with the probability of 63536/65536. However, if the winning/disapproval determination result (lottery result) of the special drawing per special drawing is the special drawing 2, the small hit is not selected.

FIG. 215 shows a symbol determination table of a special figure used for determining the symbol stopped and displayed after the symbol variation ends. FIG. 215(a) shows a special figure 1 symbol determination table. FIG. 215(b) shows a special figure 2 symbol determination table. In FIG. 215(a), the special figure 1 symbol determination table is configured from the left column by the items of "winning/absence determination result", "stop symbol", and "random number range". The “right/wrong judgment result” in the left column is divided into “big hit” and “out”. “Big hit” indicates a case where it is determined as “big hit” as a result of the hit determination using the hit determination table shown in FIG. 214(a) or FIG. 214(b), and “outfall” is shown in FIG. 214(a) or This shows a case where the result of the hit/miss judgment using the hit/miss judgment table shown in FIG.

The item "stop symbol" in the middle row of the table shown in FIG. 215(a) represents the stop symbol in the special figure 1 variable game. Two stop symbol modes of "special drawing A" and "special drawing B" correspond to the hit determination result of "big hit". Further, the stop symbol mode of "special drawing C" corresponds to "off".

The item "random number range" in the right column of the table shown in FIG. 215(a) indicates the numerical value range (0 to 99) of the random number to be compared with the acquired random number value of Toku-zu 1. With respect to the hit/miss determination result of “big hit”, numerical values 0 to 59 are assigned to the stop symbol “special drawing A”, and numerical values 60 to 99 are assigned to “special drawing B”. Numerical values 0 to 99 in the entire range of random numbers are assigned to the stop symbol "Special drawing C" with a hit/miss determination result of "off."

In this way, the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300, in the special figure 1 display device 212, "special figure A" or "special figure" when the hit/miss judgment result based on the ball entering the special figure 1 starting opening 230 is a big hit. Which stop symbol mode “B” is to be stopped and displayed is determined by referring to the special symbol 1 symbol determination table for the obtained special symbol 1 random number value. In addition, the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300, when the winning/disapproval determination result based on the winning of the special figure 1 starting port 230 is out of order, the special symbol 1 display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of "special figure C". Decide to let.

In FIG. 215(b), the special figure 2 symbol determination table is configured from the left column from the items of "reward judgment result", "stop symbol", and "random number range". The “right/wrong judgment result” in the left column is divided into “big hit” and “out”. "Big hit" indicates a case where the result is "big hit" as a result of the hit/miss judgment using the hit/miss judgment table shown in FIG. 214(a) or 214(b), and "outfall" is shown in FIG. ) Or the result of the hit/miss judgment using the hit/miss judgment table shown in FIG.

The item "stop symbol" in the middle row of the table shown in FIG. 215(b) represents the stop symbol in the special figure 2 variable game. The stop symbol mode of “special drawing a” corresponds to the “big hit” result. Further, the stop symbol mode of "special drawing b" corresponds to "off".

The item "random number range" in the right column of the table shown in FIG. 215(b) indicates the numerical value range (0 to 99) of the random numbers to be compared with the acquired special figure 2 random number value. With respect to the hit/miss determination result of "big hit", the numbers 0 to 99 are assigned to the stop symbol "special drawing a". Numerical values 0 to 99 in the entire range of random numbers are also assigned to the stop symbol “special figure b” with the hit determination result “out”.

In this way, the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300, when the hit determination result based on the ball entering the special figure 2 starting port 232 is a big hit, the special symbol 2 display device 214 stop symbol aspect of "special figure a" Decide to stop the display. In addition, the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300, when the winning/decision determination result based on the winning of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is out of order, the special symbol 2 display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of "special figure b". Decide to let.

For example, in the case of the related lottery process (FIG. 213(a)) of special figure 2, the main control unit 300 starts from the earliest (oldest stored) holding position in the special figure 2 random value storage area. The special figure 2 starting information is acquired, and based on the special figure 2 winning random number value in the acquired special figure 2 starting information, the value of the special figure probability variation flag in the RAM 308, and the like shown in FIG. 214 stored in the ROM 306. A determination table is used to determine whether or not to make a big hit, and whether or not to make a big hit. Then, the main control unit 300 uses the special figure 2 symbol determination table shown in FIG. 215(b) stored in the ROM 306 to determine the symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed after the variable figure of the special symbol 2 is displayed, The special figure fluctuation pattern lottery table (see FIGS. 215 and 216) and the timer table (see FIG. 217) stored in the ROM 306 are used to determine the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation game.

After extracting the earliest special figure 2 starting information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, the main control unit 300 deletes the earliest special figure 2 starting information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, and Figure 2 The special figure 2 reservation number in the reservation number storage area is decremented by one. At this time, the special figure 2 starting information extracted from the special figure 2 random value storage area is stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above-mentioned determination is performed based on the special figure 2 starting information stored in this temporary area. You may do it.

Further, after the related lottery process (FIG. 213(a)) of the special diagram 2, the related lottery process (FIG. 213(a)) of the special diagram 1 is similarly performed.

In the above description, the special figure 2 variation game with a high advantage is started prior to the special figure 1 variation game with a low degree of advantage, and the hold of the special figure 2 is digested prior to the hold of the special figure 1. The special figure 2 priority variation is taken as an example, but the special figure 1 variation game with a low advantage is started with priority over the special advantage 2 variation game with a high advantage, and the special figure 1 is held pending It may be the special figure 1 priority variation that is preferentially digested over the hold. Also, without prioritizing either the special figure 2 variation game or the special figure 1 variation game, the special opening variation game relating to the suspension of each of the special illustration 1 and the special illustration 2 is started in the order in which the start opening is won. It may be forward change. In the starting mouth winning order variation, the maximum number of reservations is 8 regardless of Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2, so in each of Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2, it is compared with the priority fluctuation in which the maximum number of reservations is 4. Then, it may be possible to raise the practical upper limit of the number of holdings.
<Process during symbol change>

Next, with reference to FIG. 216, the symbol changing process executed in the special figure state updating process shown in FIG. 211 will be described. FIG. 216 is a flowchart of the symbol changing process executed in the special figure state updating process. This symbol changing processing is called and executed when the information set in the special drawing processing state indicates “during special drawing changing” in step 709 of the special drawing state update processing shown in FIG. 211. Processing.

In step S1101 of the symbol fluctuation process, the special figure operation type (special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the RAM 308 is acquired, and the address of the RAM to be updated is calculated according to this special figure operation type. ..

In step S1103, the special figure variation time timer set in step S917 of the special figure related lottery process shown in FIG. 213(a) is acquired by referring to the address destination calculated in step S1101. It is determined whether or not the timer is 0. As a result of the determination, if the timer for the special figure change time is 0 (when the set special figure change time has elapsed) (step S1103: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1109, and if it is not 0 (the set special figure change time) Has not elapsed) (step S1103: No), the process proceeds to step S1105. In step S1105, it is determined whether or not it is the update timing of the special figure display symbol. If it is not the update timing (step S1105: Yes), the symbol changing process is ended, and if it is the update timing (step S1105: No). ), and proceeds to step S1107. In step S1107, after the special figure display symbol data is updated, the symbol changing process is ended.

By this update processing of special figure display symbol data, in the case of special figure 1, using the first special figure display device 212, all the seven segments are all lit and one central segment is lit repeatedly. "Fluctuation display of special figure 1" is performed, and in the case of special figure 2, using the second special symbol display device 214, lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one segment in the center are repeated. The variable display of special figure 2" is performed.

In step S1109, the special figure display symbol data selected in step S915 of the special figure-related lottery process shown in FIG. 213(a) is acquired and set, and in the next step S1111, the special figure processing state is set to "special figure display weight". Information indicating "state" is set. As a result, in step S709 of the next special figure state update processing (FIG. 211), the special figure display confirmation weight processing shown in FIG. 217 is called and executed.

In step S1113, the display pattern update data is cleared, and in the next step S1115, basic signal information (for test) indicating that the fluctuation of special figure 2 (or special figure 1) is stopped is set, and the next step In S1117, the symbol determination frequency information signal stored in the RAM 308 is set to ON to output the symbol determination frequency information signal from the external terminal board 349.

In step S1119, a subcommand (special figure variation stop command) transmission request is set. In this step, when the transmission request flag of the subcommand (special figure fluctuation stop command) is set to ON, for example, information indicating the special figure per type, the special figure type, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is stored in the command data. Set. In the next step S1121, the symbol type information stored in the RAM 308 (in the case of the pachinko machine 100 having the game board 200 shown in FIG. 194, the symbol of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. 196(a), or FIG. 196(b). ) Any of the symbols of special figure 2 shown in FIG. 200, in the case of the pachinko machine 100 having the game board 200 shown in FIG. 200, the pattern of special figure 1 shown in FIG. 201(a) or the special figure shown in FIG. 201(b). 2) is acquired), and based on this symbol type information, after setting the special symbol display confirmation timer indicating the time for which the stop display of the special symbol is maintained, the symbol changing process is ended.
<Special figure display confirmation weight processing>

Next, referring to FIG. 217, the special figure display confirmation weight process executed in the special figure state updating process shown in FIG. 211 will be described. FIG. 217 is a flowchart of the special figure display confirmation weight process executed in the special figure state updating process. This special figure display confirmation weight processing is called when the information set in the special figure processing state indicates the "special figure display wait state" in step S709 of the special figure state update processing shown in FIG. This is the process to be executed.

In step S1201 of the special figure display confirmation weight process, it is determined whether or not the special figure display confirmation timer set in step S1121 of the symbol changing process is larger than 0. If it is larger than 0 (the special figure display confirmation time If it has not elapsed (step S1201: Yes), the special figure display confirmation weight processing is ended, and if not (when the special figure display confirmation time has elapsed) (step S1201: No), step S1203. Proceed to.

In step S1203, the symbol fixed number information signal set in step S1117 of the symbol variation process shown in FIG. 216 is cleared (set to OFF), and in the next step S1205, the special symbol variation time reduction status when the symbol is stopped ( The state of the special figure variation game (in this embodiment, a status indicating any of the normal game state, the probability variation game state and the time saving game state) is stored in the RAM 308 as a saving special figure variation time reduction status described later. ..

In step S1207, the win/no-judgment type set in step S1007 of the special figure related lottery process shown in FIG. 213(a) is acquired, and in the next step S1209, it is determined whether or not the win/no-judgment type acquired is “big hit”. judge. As a result of this determination, if the win/win determination type is “big hit” (step S1209: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1219. If the win/win determination type is other than “big hit” (step S1209: No), goes to step S1211. The process proceeds to update the time saving frequency of the special figure stored in the RAM 308 (reduces the time saving frequency by one).

In step S1213, the win/no-judgment type set in step S1007 of the special figure-related lottery process shown in FIG. 213(a) is acquired, and in the next step S1215, whether or not the acquired win/no-judgment type is “small hit”. To judge. As a result of this determination, if the win/loss determination type is "small hit" (step S1215: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1219, and if the win/loss determination type is other than "small hit" (step S1215: No), step In step S1217, information indicating the "variation waiting state" is set in the special figure processing state. Accordingly, in step S709 of the next special figure state update process (FIG. 211), the special figure related lottery process shown in FIG. 213(a) is called and executed.

In step S1219, basic signal information (for a test) indicating the special drawing validity type and symbol type is set, and in the next step S1221, RAM clearing in the designated range is executed. Here, the winning/disapproving type, the number of times the special electric prize is activated, the number of winnings at the special winning opening (the first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235), the operation pattern of the special electric winning combination, the operating state of the special electric winning combination, and the total number of winnings per winning In addition to clearing information about a flag relating to a prize winning abnormality of the special winning opening, the type of a winning end display timer, etc., at the time of a big hit, the easy winning a prize status and the special drawing general status are further cleared.

In step S1223, the information indicating the "hit start display weight state" is set in the special figure processing state. As a result, in step S709 of the next special figure state update process (FIG. 211), the hit start display weight process shown in FIG. 218 is called and executed. In step S1225, the total number of winning prizes is set to 0, and in the next step S1227, a transmission request of a sub command (hit start command) is set. In this step, when the transmission request flag of the subcommand (hit start command) is set to ON, for example, information indicating the special figure hit type stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data.

In step S1229, the symbol type information is set, in step S1231, the hit start display timer corresponding to the symbol type information set in step S1229 is set, and in step S1233, the symbol type information set in step S1229 is set. After setting the other information signal setting types, the special figure display confirmation weight processing is ended.
<Hit start display weight processing>

Next, with reference to FIG. 218, the hit start display weight process executed in the special figure state updating process shown in FIG. 211 will be described. FIG. 218 is a flowchart of the hit start display weight process executed in the special figure state updating process. The hit start display weight process is called and executed when the information set in the special figure process state indicates the "hit start display weight state" in step S709 of the special figure state update process (FIG. 211). It is a process that is performed.

In step S1301 of the hit start display weight process, it is determined whether or not the hit start display timer set in step S1231 of the special figure display confirmation weight process is greater than 0. If it has not elapsed (step S1301: Yes), the hit start display weight process is ended. If not (if the special figure display confirmation time has elapsed) (step S1301: No), the process proceeds to step S1303. move on.

In step S1303, after the special electric wheel combination opening process described later is executed, the hit start display weight process is ended.
<Special train release processing>

Next, with reference to FIG. 219, the special electric wheel combination releasing process (step S1303) in the hit start display weight process shown in FIG. 218 will be described. FIG. 219 is a flowchart of the special electric role releasing process (step S1303) in the hit start display weight process.

In step S1401 of the special electric role releasing process, information indicating the "special electric role operating state" is set in the special figure processing state. Thereby, in step S709 of the next special figure state update process (FIG. 211), the special electric combination operating process shown in FIG. 220 is called and executed.

In step S1403, the value of the winning number of the special winning opening in RAM 308 (hereinafter, may be referred to as “main control unit winning counter”) and the operating state of the special electricity combination are cleared, and in the next step S1405, the probability variation area solenoid Clear the edge detection count. In the next step S1407, a transmission request for the subcommand (special electric-role release command) is set. As a result, the first sub control unit 400 can recognize that the round has started. In addition, when the transmission request flag of the subcommand (special winning opening opening command) is turned on in this step, for example, the number of big hit rounds (number of special electricity combination operations) stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the special figure hit type Set the information indicating such as.

In the main control unit winning counter, which is cleared in step S1403, only the value of the main control unit winning counter corresponding to the variable winning port to be opened of the first variable winning port 234 and the second variable winning port 235 is cleared. The value of the main control unit winning counter corresponding to the variable winning opening which is not opened remains maintained. The values of any of the main control unit winning counters may be cleared. In step S1409, the symbol type information set in step S1229 of the special symbol display confirming weight processing shown in FIG. 217 is acquired, and in the next step S1411, the special electricity combination operation pattern data table is set based on the acquired symbol type information. To do.

The special electricity combination operation pattern data table will be described with reference to FIG. 222. For example, as shown in FIG. 222(a-1) to FIG. 222(a-3), the special electric combination operation pattern data tables are prepared by the number of types of special drawings of big hit and small hit. Note that FIG. 222 exemplarily shows only a part of them. The special electricity combination operation pattern data table stores special electricity combination operation data indicating an opening/closing pattern of the first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 for each round. As shown in FIG. 222(b-1) to FIG. 222(b-3), the special electric winning combination operation data is information indicating the open/closed state of the first variable winning port 234 or the second variable winning port 235 (opening timer pattern, One or a plurality of pieces of timer pattern data are stored, each of which includes a closing timer pattern) and time information for maintaining an open state or a closed state (special electric opening/closing timer). As a result, various variations can be given to the opening/closing operation of the first variable winning port 234 and the second variable winning port 235 during one round.

For example, in the big hit game in the case of a big hit in the special figure A, as shown in FIG. 222(a-1), in the 1R to 15Rth, refer to the special electric hand operating data 1 shown in FIG. 222(b-1). Then, after the opening timer pattern 2 opens the first variable winning port 234 (second variable winning port 235) for 29500 ms, the closing timer pattern 3 controls the first variable winning port 234 to close and end the operation. To be done. In addition, in this embodiment, the first variable winning port 234 and the second variable winning port 235 are configured to be alternately opened for each round.

Further, in the big hit game in the case of a big hit in the special map C, as shown in FIG. 222(a-2), in the 1R to 4R, 6R to 8R, and 10R to 15R While the data 1 is referred to and the above-described operation is performed, at the 5R and 9R, the special electric prize combination operation data 4 shown in FIG. 222(b-3) is referred to, and the first variable winning port 234 is opened/closed. The operation is controlled. That is, in the 5th and 9th rounds, after the opening timer pattern 1 first opens the first variable winning port 234 for 180 ms, the closing timer pattern 1 keeps the first variable winning port 234 closed for 2820 ms. After executing 4 times, the opening timer pattern 3 opens the first variable winning port 234 for 17500 ms, and then the closing timer pattern 3 controls the first variable winning port 234 to close and end the operation. It

Further, in the big hit game in the case of a big hit in the special figure E, as shown in FIG. 222(a-3), in the 1R to 4R eyes, the operation as described above is performed with reference to the special electric combination operation data 1 described above. On the other hand, in 5R to 15R, the opening/closing operation of the first variable winning port 234 or the second variable winning port 235 is controlled by referring to the special electric winning combination operation data 2 shown in FIG. 222(b-2). .. That is, in the fifth to fifteenth Rs, first, the first variable winning port 234 (second variable winning port 235) is opened for 180 ms by the opening timer pattern 1, and then the first variable winning port 234 (second The closed state of the 2 variable winning a prize port 235) is maintained for 2820 ms, and thereafter, the closing timer pattern 3 causes the first variable winning a prize port 234 (the second variable winning a prize port 235) to be maintained in the closed state as it is, and the operation ends. Controlled by. Before the closing pattern timer 3 is set, another closing pattern timer (for example, the closing pattern timer 1 or the like) may be set.

In step S1413, the operation number (round number) of the special electric vehicle combination is acquired, and in the next step S1415, the acquired operation number (round number) of the special electric vehicle combination is updated. Subsequently, in step S1417, the special electricity combination operation data corresponding to the updated number of operations (round times) of the electricity generation combination is read and the operation pattern of the electricity generation combination is set. Then, in step S1419, special electric power combination control processing (details will be described later) is performed, in the next step S1421, the test signal output timer (test signal output timer) is cleared, and the flow proceeds to step S1423. The test signal output timer may become 0 during the round, but when the test signal output timer becomes 0, the test signal may be turned off and the signal may not be output as it is. For example, if the same attacker opens twice in the test signal output timer, the output signal is turned off even though the attacker is open. In order to prevent such an event, the test signal output timer is set to 0 in step S1421. The test signal output timer performs a process of turning off the test signal when 0 (1→0) in the timer update process (step S311) of the main controller timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 206. ing. That is, by clearing the test signal output timer in step S1421, the test signal is not turned off in the timer updating process (step S311).

In step S1423, the special prize winning detection timer is cleared, and then the process proceeds to step S1425. In step S1425, the number of special electric power combination operations (number of rounds) is acquired, and the flow advances to step S1427. In step S1427, it is determined whether or not it is a round in which the probability variation area is opened, and if so, the process proceeds to step S1429, and if not (when it is not the round in which the probability variation area is released), the process ends.

In step S1429, it is determined whether or not the probability variation region solenoid is in the open state, the process proceeds to step S1431 if it is in the open state, and the process ends if it is not. In step S1429, if the probability variation region solenoid is already in the open state at the time when the round is started (at the time when the special electric vehicle opening process is started), it is determined to be abnormal.

In step S1431, the probability variation area solenoid abnormality flag is set, and the special electric role release processing is ended. In addition, in the flow of the special electric power combination opening process, when there is one attacker, step S1421 and step S1423 are unnecessary.
<Special train action processing>

Next, referring to FIG. 220, the special electric power combination operating process executed in the special figure state updating process shown in FIG. 211 will be described. FIG. 220 is a flowchart of the special electricity combination operation processing executed in the special figure state update processing. This special electric wheel combination operation process is called and executed when the information set in the special figure process state indicates the "special electric wire operation state" in step S709 of the special figure state update process shown in FIG. Processing.

In step S1501 of the special electric power combination operation processing, the maximum number of wins of the attacker to be released this time stored in the RAM 308 is acquired, and in step S1503, the number of wins of the attacker to be released this time stored in the RAM 308 is acquired. In step S1505, the acquired maximum number of winnings is compared with the number of winnings, and it is determined whether or not the number of winnings is smaller than the maximum number of winnings. If it is smaller (number of winnings <maximum number of winnings) (step S1505). : Yes), the process proceeds to step S1507, and if not (number of winnings>=maximum winning number) (step S1505: No), the process proceeds to step S1513.

In step S1507, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening is open, that is, the special electric combination operation pattern being executed (open timer pattern or closing timer pattern) set in step S1417 of the special electric combination opening process shown in FIG. 219. It is determined whether or not the special electricity combination opening/closing timer corresponding to is other than 0 (when the special electricity combination opening/closing timer has not elapsed) (step S1507: Yes), the special electricity combination operating process ends. If not (if the special electricity combination opening/closing timer has elapsed) (step S1507: NO), the process proceeds to step S1509. In step S1509, special electric power combination control processing (details will be described later) is performed, and in the next step S1511, the special electric power combination opening/closing timer pattern is acquired, and the closing timer pattern of the acquired special electric power combination opening/closing timer patterns is referred to. It is determined whether or not it is in operation (whether or not the closing timer pattern is set in the information indicating the end of operation (closing timer pattern 3)).

As a result of the determination, when the special electric wire combination is in operation (when the closing timer pattern is not set to the information indicating the operation end (closing timer pattern 3)) (step S1511: Yes), the special electric wire combination operation processing is ended, When the special electric power combination is not in operation (when the closing timer pattern is set to the information indicating the end of the operation (closing timer pattern 3)) (step S1511: No), the process proceeds to step S1513. In step S1513, information indicating the "remaining ball detection state" is set in the special figure processing state. Accordingly, in step S709 of the next special figure state update process (FIG. 211), the special electric role remaining ball detection process shown in FIG. 223 is called and executed.

In step S1515, the special electricity combination operation interval timer stored in the RAM 308 is set. The special electricity role operation interval timer is the interval from the last time the attacker closed in a round (the special winning opening solenoid stops driving) until the round ends (until the special electricity role related to the attacker ends the operation). It is a timer for determining (for example, 100 ms, 20 ms, etc.) or a predetermined one timer regardless of the attacker. The timer may be different depending on the attacker opening pattern, may be different depending on the attacker to be opened, or may be different depending on the big hit symbol.

In step S1517 subsequent to step S1515, a request for transmitting a sub command (a special winning opening closing command) is set. In this step, when the transmission request flag of the sub-command (the special winning opening closing command) is turned on, for example, information indicating the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the type of special figure win, etc. is set in the command data. ..

In the next step S1519, an information output timer (for example, 2 seconds) of the special electric power combination information signal (test signal) is set, and the flow advances to step S1521.

In step S1521, the special electric winning combination winning detection timer stored in the RAM 308 is set. Here, the special electric winning combination winning detection timer means that after the special winning opening (first variable winning opening 234 and second variable winning opening 235) is closed, the big winning opening (first variable winning opening 234 and second variable winning opening 235). ) Is a timer for effectively detecting the remaining game balls. In step S1523, after setting the drive signal (big winning opening solenoid signal) for driving the solenoid (332) of the special winning opening (first variable winning opening 234 and second variable winning opening 235) to OFF, The operation process ends.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the first variable winning port 234 and the second variable winning port 235 are in the easy-to-go state, the maximum winning number of game balls has passed the passing area. In addition, it functions as an example of a variable winning means that changes into a difficult-to-enter state.
<Special power combination control processing>

Next, with reference to FIG. 221, the special electric vehicle combination control processing (step S1419 of FIG. 219, step S1509 of FIG. 220) executed in the special electric vehicle combination opening processing (FIG. 219) and the special electric vehicle operation processing (FIG. 220) will be described. To do. FIG. 221 is a flowchart of the special electric power combination control processing executed in the special electric power combination opening processing and the special electric power combination operation processing.

In step S1601, the special electric power combination control data stored in the ROM 306 is acquired. Specifically, among the operation patterns of the special electric combination to be executed, which are set by reading the special electric combination operation data in step S1417 of the special electric combination releasing process (FIG. 219), the operation pattern to be executed this time is selected. Get control data. For example, if the operation pattern of the special electric wire combination shown in the special electric wire combination operation data 1 is set and the round is started, the “release timer pattern 2” shown in “(1)” of FIG. 222(b-1) is displayed. Will be obtained. Further, after the operation pattern indicated by the control data indicated by “(1)” in FIG. 222(b-1) is completed, the “closing timer indicated by “(2)” in FIG. 222(b-1) is displayed. The control data of "Pattern 3" will be acquired.

Subsequently, in step S1603, opening/closing information indicating whether to open or close the variable winning port (first variable winning port 234, second variable winning port 235) based on the acquired control data of the operation pattern of the special electric wire combination. To get For example, if it is the "opening timer pattern", data (opening information) for opening the first variable winning port 234 or the second variable winning port 235 is acquired, and if it is the "closing timer pattern", the first variable winning pattern is obtained. Data (closing information) for closing the winning opening 234 or the second variable winning opening 235 is acquired. In the present embodiment, the first variable winning opening 234 is openable in odd rounds, and the second variable winning opening 235 is open in even rounds.

Then, in step S1605, the opening/closing timer of the special electric power combination is acquired based on the control data of the operation pattern of the special electric power combination acquired in step S1601 and the opening/closing information acquired in step S1603. For example, when the "open timer pattern 2" is acquired and the open/close information is "open information", the open timer of 29500 ms is acquired. Further, when the “closing timer pattern 1” is acquired and the opening/closing information is “closing information”, the closing timer of 2820 ms is acquired.

In step S1607, information indicating acceptability is set in the special electric prize winning/non-approval state stored in the RAM 308. When the information indicating that the special electric prize winning/non-winning state is acceptable is set, the game ball is a ball detection sensor (a count switch SW1 of the first variable winning port 234 or a second variable winning port 235) provided in the variable winning port. It is possible to accept that the game ball has passed through the count switch SW2), and when the information indicating that the reception is not possible is set, a ball detection sensor (count switch SW1 or count switch SW2) provided in the variable winning opening for the game ball. Passing through will be invalid. Here, only the count switch corresponding to the open variable winning opening of the first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 is set to be acceptable. In step S1609, a special electric power combination information signal (test signal) is set, and in step S1611, the number of special electric power combination operations (round number) is acquired, and the flow advances to step S1613. In step S1613, it is determined whether or not it is the round in which the probability variation region is to be opened. If the round is to be opened, the process proceeds to step S1615, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1617. In step S1615, the state of the probability variation region is set to valid, and the process proceeds to step S1617.

In step S1617, preparation for updating the special winning opening solenoid signal is performed. Specifically, only the bits of the special winning opening solenoids corresponding to the first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 are cleared, and the drive data is set to the bit of the big winning opening solenoid to be driven. In this process, preparation for driving the special winning opening solenoid is performed, and the drive signal is output in the output management process (step S337) in the main controller timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 206 described above. In step S1619, after setting the special electric role opening timer or the special electric role closing timer of the special electric role opening/closing timer, the special electric role controlling process is ended. That is, in this process, the open timer or the close timer acquired in step S1605 is set.
<Detective ball remaining ball detection processing>

Next, with reference to FIG. 223, the special electric ball remaining ball detection process executed in the special figure state updating process shown in FIG. 211 will be described. FIG. 223 is a flowchart of the special electricity role remaining ball detection processing executed in the special figure state update processing. This special electric vehicle remaining ball detection process is called and executed when the information set in the special map processing state indicates the "remaining ball detection state" in step S709 of the special map state update process (FIG. 211). It is a process that is performed.

In step S1701 of the special electric role remaining ball detection process, it is determined whether the special electric role operating interval timer set in step S1515 of the special electric role operating process shown in FIG. 220 is operating. If the interval time has not elapsed (step S1701: Yes), the special electricity role remaining ball detection processing is ended, and if not (if the special electricity role operation interval time has elapsed) (step S1701: No). , And proceeds to step S1703.

In step S1703, the special electric wire combination operation delay timer stored in the RAM 308 is set, and in step S1705, information indicating the "special electric wire combination operation end state" is set in the special figure processing state. As a result, in the next step S709 of the special figure state update process (FIG. 211), the special electric power combination operation end process shown in FIG. 224 is called and executed. That is, it becomes the state of the interval between rounds.

In the present embodiment, the period set by the special electric-combination operation delay timer is the period between rounds. The period set by the special electric winning combination operation delay timer means that when one attacker (variable winning a prize opening 234) is provided, the special electric auditors product (special electric winning combination) related to the variable winning a prize opening 234 changes from the operating state to the non-operating state. It is a period from when the special electric train is switched from the non-activated state to the activated state in the next round.

In addition, for example, when there are a first variable winning port 234 and a second variable winning port 235, and both of them open and close alternately in each round, the special electric auditors product (special electricity role 1) related to the first variable winning port 234 is This is the period from the operating state to the non-operating state until the special electric auditors product (special electric vehicle 2) related to the second variable winning a prize port 235 changes from the non-operating state to the operating state in the next round.

In step S1707, after the special electric power combination information signal (test signal) is cleared, the special electric power remaining ball detection processing ends. Note that a subcommand transmission request (for example, an inter-round interval start command) may be set after the special power combination information signal is cleared.
<Special train combination end processing>

Next, with reference to FIG. 224, the special electric wheel combination operation ending process executed in the special figure state updating process shown in FIG. 211 will be described. FIG. 224 is a flowchart of a special electric power combination operation ending process executed in the special figure state updating process. This special electric wheel combination operation end process is called and executed when the information set in the special figure process state indicates the "special electric wire operation end state" in step S709 of the special figure state update process (FIG. 211). It is a process that is performed.

In step S1801 of the special electric role combination end processing, it is determined whether or not the special electric role operation delay timer set in step S1703 of the special electric role remaining ball detection processing shown in FIG. 223 is in operation. Step S1801: Yes), the special electric wire combination operation end processing is ended. If not (when the special electric wire combination operation delay timer is 0) (step S1801: No), the process proceeds to step S1803. In step S1803, the number of special electric power combination operations (number of rounds) is acquired, and the flow advances to step S1805. In step S1805, it is determined whether or not the probability variation region is a round to be opened. If it is the round to be opened, the process proceeds to step S1807, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1811. In step S1807, it is determined whether or not the opening of the probability variation region solenoid has been detected once. If it has not been detected once, the process proceeds to step S1809, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1811. In step S1809, the probability variation area solenoid abnormality flag is set, and the flow advances to step S1811.

In step S1811, the symbol type information is acquired, and it is determined whether or not the special drawing hit type is a small hit. If it is a small hit (step S1811: Yes), the small hit is dealt with in step S1813. After acquiring the hit end display timer, the process proceeds to step S1823. On the other hand, if the special drawing hit type is not a small hit (step S1811: No), the process proceeds to step S1815, and the special winning opening maximum opening number stored in the RAM 308 is a predetermined number (for example, "8" for 8R, In the case of 16R, "16" etc. is set. In step S1817, the maximum winning opening maximum opening number is compared with the special electric winning combination opening number, and it is determined whether the special electric winning combination opening number is less than the maximum winning opening maximum opening number, that is, whether the hit has not ended. .. If the hit has not ended (step S1817: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1819 to execute the above-mentioned special electric power combination release process (FIG. 219), and ends the special electric power combination operation end process. That is, the processing for starting the next round is performed. On the other hand, when the hit has ended (step S1817: No), the process proceeds to step S1821.

In step S1821, the hit end display timer corresponding to the symbol type information is acquired, and in step S1823, the hit end display timer acquired in step S1813 or step S1821 is set. In step S1825, information indicating "hit end display wait state" is set in the special figure processing state. As a result, in step S709 of the next special figure state update processing, the hit end display weight processing shown in FIG. 225 is called and executed. In step S1827, a subcommand (hit end command) transmission request is set. In this step, when the transmission request flag of the subcommand (hit end command) is turned on, for example, information indicating the special figure hit type stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data.

For example, in the case of a pachinko machine having the first variable winning port 234 and the second variable winning port 235 (for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 194), in the case of a 15-round (15R) big hit, the attacker at 14R (for example, the first When the time (for example, 20 ms) set by the special electricity role operation interval timer elapses after the variable winning port 234) is finally closed (the solenoid for the first variable winning port 234 stops driving), the attacker is affected. The special electric accessory (for example, special electric accessory 1) is not activated and 14R ends. After the end of 14R, when the time (for example, 1 s) set by the special electric prize operation delay timer elapses, the special electric accessory (for example, special electric prize) for the attacker of 15R (for example, the second variable winning port 235) 2) becomes the operating state, the attacker opens (opening/closing operation starts), and 15R starts. Then, at 15R, when the time set by the special electric prize combination operation interval timer elapses after the attacker (for example, the second variable winning a prize port 235) is finally closed, the special electric accessory (for example, special electric prize 2) related to the attacker is generated. When 15R is not activated and 15R ends, and then the time set by the special-electric-combination-operation delay timer elapses, after the time of the hit end display timer set in step S1823 elapses, the next process (see FIG. 225) is performed. The specified electric power combination operation end process) is executed.

In the case of a 16 round (16R) big hit, for example, after the attacker (for example, the first variable winning port 234) is finally closed (the solenoid for the first variable winning port 234 stops driving) at 15R. When the time (for example, 20 ms) set by the special electricity combination operation interval timer elapses, the special electric accessory (for example, special electricity combination 1) related to the attacker becomes inoperative and 15R ends. Then, after the end of 15R, when the time (for example, 1 s etc.) set by the special electricity combination operation delay timer elapses, the special electric accessory (for example, special electricity combination portion) related to the attacker of 16R (for example, the second variable winning a prize mouth 235) 2) becomes the operating state, the attacker opens (opening/closing operation starts), and 16R starts. Then, in 16R, when the time set by the special electric power combination operation interval timer has elapsed since the attacker (for example, the second variable winning opening 235) was last closed, the special electric auditors object (for example, special electric power combination 2) related to the attacker When 16R is not activated, and the time set by the special electric-combination operation delay timer elapses after that, after the time of the hit end display timer set in step S1823 elapses, the next process (see FIG. 225) is performed. The specified electric power combination operation end process) is executed.

If there is no small hit, the above-described processing of steps S1811 and S1813 is not executed.
<Batch end display weight processing>

Next, with reference to FIG. 225, the hit end display weight process executed in the special figure state update process shown in FIG. 211 will be described. FIG. 225 is a flowchart of the hit end display weight process executed in the special figure state update process. The hit end display weight process is called and executed when the information set in the special figure process state indicates the "hit end display weight state" in step S709 of the special figure state update process (FIG. 211). It is a process that is performed.

In step S1901 of the hit end display weight process, it is determined whether or not the hit end display timer set in step S1823 of the special electric power combination operation end process shown in FIG. 224 is in operation, and if it is in operation (step S1901 : Yes), the hit end display weight process is ended, and if not (step S1901: No), the process proceeds to step S1903. In step S1903, the symbol type information stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is saved in the stack area, in step S1905 the basic signal information (for testing) is cleared, and in step S1907, the special figure processing state is changed to "variation". Information indicating "waiting state" is set. As a result, in step S709 of the next special figure state update processing, the special figure related lottery processing shown in FIG. 213(a) is called and executed.

In steps S1909 to S1913, the display symbol data, the symbol type information, and the total winning number per winning are respectively cleared. In step S1915, the saved symbol type information is reset, and in step S1917, it is determined whether or not the small hit has ended. If the small hit has ended (step S1917: Yes), the hit end display weight process is executed. When it ends and ends other than the small hit (when it ends in the big hit) (step S1917: No), the process proceeds to step S1919.

In step S1919, the setting data (probability change, shortening time, hidden probability change) after the end of winning is acquired, and in step S1921, the data (probability change status (special figure probability state status, general figure probability state status) according to the setting data after hit completion. , Time saving (Number of fluctuations for shortening special figure fluctuation time, number of fluctuations for fluctuation time correction, number of fluctuations for easy winning state), time saving status (status for shortening special figure fluctuation time, status for shortening general figure fluctuation time, open extension status), fluctuation time lottery After setting the state (information for determining the fluctuation time lottery table, etc.) and clearing the setting data after the end of the hit, the end-of-hit display weight process is ended. The transmission request flag may be turned on.In this case, the sub-command may be a hit end command (in the present embodiment, the transmission request flag is turned on in the special electricity combination operation end processing), or It may be a subcommand indicating that the end effect has ended.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 functions as an example of game control means capable of executing a big hit game.
<Device monitoring process>

Next, the device monitoring process (step S329) executed in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 206 will be described with reference to FIG. 226. FIG. 226 is a flowchart of device monitoring processing.

First, in step S2001, a special winning opening winning excess flag is set and set as error information, and the process proceeds to step S2003. In step S2003, the probability variation area solenoid abnormality flag is acquired and set in the error information.

In step S2005, it is determined whether or not a shock is detected while the state of the probability variation region is valid. If a shock is detected, the process proceeds to step S2007, and if not, the process proceeds to step S2009. In step S2007, the impact abnormality flag is set, and the process proceeds to step S2010. In step S2009, the impact abnormality flag is cleared, and the process proceeds to step S2010. In this way, even if a shock is detected during pattern change, it is not output as an error (clears the shock abnormality flag), but outputs an error when a shock is detected only when the probability variation area is valid (sets the shock abnormality flag) To do.

In step S2010, the impact abnormality flag is acquired and the impact abnormality error information is set to "current error information". In the next step S2011, the magnetic detection abnormality flag is acquired and the magnetic detection error information is set to "current error information". In the next step S2012, the magnetic field detection abnormality flag is acquired and the magnetic field detection error information is set to "current error information". In the next step S2013, other error flags are acquired and other error information is set. The error information is set this time, and the process proceeds to step S2014.

In step S2014, it is determined whether or not the error command transmission timer is 0 (at the transmission cycle timing). If it is 0 (at the transmission cycle timing), the process proceeds to step S2015, otherwise (transmission). If the cycle timing has not come), the process proceeds to step S2017.

In step S2015, the "error information" is initialized, and the process proceeds to step S2016. Here, the "current error information" set in steps S2010 to S2013 is accumulated (accumulated) in the "error information" during a period of one transmission cycle (for example, 100 ms (25 interrupts)). (Step S2018 described later), and in this step, all “current error information” accumulated in “error information” are initialized (cleared).

In step S2016, an initial value is set in the error command transmission timer. As an example, when the transmission cycle is 100 ms and the main controller timer interrupt process is executed every 4 ms, “25 (=100/4)” is set as the initial value. In step S2017, the error information for the security signal is set to "current error information", and the process proceeds to step S2018.

In step S2018, the "current error information" is set to "error information". In step S2018, error information corresponding to the error information detected in steps S2010 to S2013 is accumulated (accumulated) for one cycle of the transmission cycle (for example, 100 ms (25 interrupts)). Specifically, the “current error information” set in steps S2010 to S2013 includes “0” when no error is detected (when the error is canceled) and “1” when an error is detected. Are set (updated) at any time, and in step S2018, the logical sum of these “current error information” and “error information” is set (updated) as “error information”.

In step S2019, it is determined whether or not the magnetic detection abnormality flag is ON (is set). If it is ON, the process proceeds to step S2021, and if it is not ON, the process proceeds to step S20203. In step S2021, a subcommand transmission request is set, and the process ends.

In step S2023, it is determined whether or not it is the transmission timing of the error command. If it is the transmission timing, the process proceeds to step S2025, and if it is not the transmission timing, the process ends. As described above, in the present embodiment, the magnetic detection error is output without determining the transmission timing of the error command, but the magnetic detection error is output at each transmission timing of the error command except the magnetic detection error.

In step S2025, it is determined whether or not the previously stored “error information” and the “error information” set in step S2018 this time match. If they match, the process ends, and if they do not match, step S2027. Proceed to. In step S2027, the current “error information” is stored in the previous “error information” buffer, and the flow advances to step S2029. In step S2029, a subcommand transmission request is set, and the process ends.

In the process flow described above, the logical sum of “current error information” and “error information” is set (updated) as “error information” in step S2018, so an error is detected in any of steps S2010 to S2013. If each error is canceled after that, the "current error information" of each error is updated from "1" to "0" at any time, but once "1" is set in the "error information". After that, even if the error is released, "1" remains. In this case, if a subcommand (error command) is transmitted regardless of the error command transmission timing (in the case of a magnetic detection error, etc.), the error cancellation subcommand is transmitted, but the subcommand is sent at each transmission cycle timing. When transmitting (error command) (such as impact abnormality error), the error cancellation subcommand is not transmitted.

Therefore, in step S2014, when it is the timing of the transmission cycle (when the determination result is “Yes”), the “error information” is initialized in step S2015, and the error is canceled at the timing of the transmission cycle. In case of failure, the subcommand for canceling the error is transmitted.
<External output signal management processing>

Next, the external output signal management process (step S331) in the main controller timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 206 will be described with reference to FIG. 227. FIG. 227 is a flowchart showing the flow of the external output signal management processing.

In the external output signal management processing, external terminal board signals 1 to 12 (see FIG. 228; details will be described later) are set and output processing is performed. The external terminal board signal transmitted from the pachinko machine 100 is transmitted to an external device (for example, a hall computer) via a data display device (not shown), and is collected and managed by the external device.

In step S2101, security information signal output setting processing is performed. In this security information signal output setting process, the external terminal board signal 10 (security information signal) is output when the power is turned on or when a fraudulent activity (for example, a magnetic detection error, a radio wave (magnetic field) detection error, a deca-ball error) is detected. Make settings for output.

For example, when the radio wave (magnetic field) detection error is occurring (that is, when the radio wave (magnetic field) detection error is detected and the error flag is set in the device monitoring process of step S2012 of FIG. 226), the state shown in FIG. This step is executed in the external output signal management processing of step S331 each time the main control unit timer interrupt processing shown is executed, and the external terminal board signal 10 ( The security information signal) is continuously output for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds).

On the other hand, when the magnetic detection error is occurring (that is, when the magnetic detection error is detected and the error flag is set in the device monitoring process in step S2011 of FIG. 226), the magnetic field detection error immediately after the detection is performed. In the main controller timer interrupt process (FIG. 206), this step is executed in the external output signal management process of step S331, and the external terminal board signal 10 (security information signal) indicating that the magnetic detection error is detected is output. In the next main controller timer interrupt process, the determination in step S309 is Yes, and the processes in steps S311 to S337 are skipped. That is, when the magnetic detection error is occurring, the external terminal board signal 10 (security information signal) indicating that the magnetic detection error is detected continues to be output until, for example, the power is cut off.

In the next step S2103, a symbol determination frequency information signal output setting process is performed. In this symbol determination frequency information signal output setting process, when the variation of the special figure is stopped, the setting for outputting the external terminal board signal 3 (symbol determination frequency information signal) is performed.

In the next step S2105, out-ball information signal output setting processing is performed. In this out-ball information signal output setting process, when the total number of passages to the out port 240 is 10 or more, the setting for outputting the external terminal board signal 11 (out-ball information signal) is performed. In the next step S2107, a firing position setting process is performed. In this launch position setting process, it is determined whether or not electric support is being performed, or whether or not the player is in the right-handed state, and in either case, it is in the right-handed state (otherwise, left-handed state). The information to be set is set, and processing for transmitting the information to the test firing test signal or the command to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is performed.

In the next step S2109, test firing test signal setting processing is performed. In this test-firing test setting process, the signals to be output to the equipment for the test engine (the big hit signal, the accessory continuous operation signal, etc.) are set.

In the next step S2111, a big hit information signal output setting process is performed. In this big hit information signal output setting processing, big hit information signals (external terminal board signal 4 (big hit 1 information signal), external terminal board signal 5 (big hit 2 information signal), external terminal board signal 6 (big hit 3 information signal)) Clear (initialize) and set jackpot information signal. In the setting of this big hit information signal, in the case of a big hit by a big hit pattern, the setting for outputting the external terminal board signal 4 (big hit 1 information signal) is made, and during the big hit by the big hit pattern, or in the case of time saving , Make settings to output the external terminal board signal 5 (big hit 2 information signal), and output the external terminal board signal 6 (big hit 3 information signal) when the special electric accessory is operating due to the small hit design Settings to do.

In this step, other information signals are set. The other information signal is, for example, the prize ball information signal (external terminal board signal 1) output by the payout controller 600, the door opening information signal (external terminal board signal 2), or the other information signal (external terminal board signal 12). ) Is set. Then, in step S2113, an external output signal setting process is performed, and the external terminal board signal set in the processing up to this point is output to the outside through the information output circuit 336 and the external terminal board 349 (see FIG. 195). , The external output signal management processing ends.
<External terminal board signal>

Next, with reference to FIG. 228, the external terminal board signal output from the pachinko machine 100 to the outside via the external terminal board will be described. FIG. 228 is a diagram showing signal numbers, signal names, and output conditions of external terminal board signals.

The external terminal board 349 (see FIG. 195) has a plurality (12 in this example) of input ports (inputs) capable of inputting external terminal board signals output from the main controller 300 and the payout controller 600 of the pachinko machine 100. And a plurality of (12 in this example) output ports (output terminals) capable of outputting external terminal board signals to an external device (for example, a hall computer) of the pachinko machine 100.

In this example, the external terminal board 349 is a board that relays a signal to an external device, but a control that controls the transmission (output) of the signal to the external apparatus by receiving (input) the external terminal board signal. It may be a means. The input port (input terminal) and the output port (output terminal) of the external terminal board 349 may be input/output ports (input/output terminals).

The pachinko machine 100 can output twelve types of external terminal board signals assigned with numbers 1 to 12 via the external terminal board 349. For example, the external terminal board signal 1 is a signal output by the payout control unit 600, and is input to the input port (input terminal) of the external terminal board 349 when the payout of 10 gaming balls is detected during a prize ball. , Is output from the output port (output terminal) of the external terminal board 349 to the external device. The external terminal board signal 2 is a signal output by the payout controller 600, and is input to the input port (input terminal) of the external terminal board 349 when opening of the inner frame or the front frame door 106 is detected. , Is output from the output port (output terminal) of the external terminal board 349 to the external device.

On the other hand, the external terminal board signals 3 to 11 are signals output by the main control unit 300, and are input to the input port (input terminal) of the external terminal board 349 when the output conditions shown in FIG. Output from the output port (output terminal) of the external terminal board 349 to the external device. For example, the external terminal board signal 3 is output when the variation of the special figure is stopped, and the external terminal board signal 4 is output when the big hit by the big hit symbol is in progress. The external terminal number 10 is a security information signal, and is output when the power is turned on or when a fraudulent activity is detected (for example, when the main control unit 300 receives a magnetic detection signal from the wide range magnetic sensor 700). Other external terminal board signals are as shown in the figure.

The external terminal board signal 12 is a signal output by the main control unit 300 when necessary, and when conditions other than the above (other conditions) are satisfied, information other than the above is input to the external terminal board 349. It is input to the port (input terminal) and output to the outside from the output port (output terminal) of the external terminal board 349. Further, the external terminal board signal 12 may be the same signal as any of the external terminal numbers 3 to 11 (same output condition).

<Example of timing chart and effect display of signals related to magnetic field (radio wave) error>

Next, an example of a timing chart and effect display of signals related to an error in this embodiment will be described.

First, FIG. 229 relates to the first error (magnetic field (radio wave) detection error) related to the main control unit 300, etc., and relates to the transmission cycle T, the first error (magnetic field detection error) flag, the security information signal, and the first sub signal. 6 is an example of a timing chart of notification of a first error (magnetic field detection error) in the control unit 400. As described above, the security information signal is a signal that is input to the input port (input terminal) of the external terminal board 349 and is output from the output port (external terminal number 10) of the external terminal board 349 to the external device. This is a signal that is output when the power is turned on or when a fraudulent activity is detected (for example, when the main control unit 300 receives a magnetic detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor).

In this example, a case where the device command transmission timer (transmission cycle T) is set and the cycle is started in the first time of the first device monitoring processing after power-on shown in FIG. 226 is shown. The timing for starting the cycle may be another timing, for example, it may be started from the first timer updating process after the power is turned on, or the next timer interrupt after the sub-control activation wait wait process is completed. It may be started at the start of the process. Further, the cycle may start in the middle of the sub-control activation wait wait process (step S341) of the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 206. For example, in the sub-control activation wait wait process, the first sub-control unit In order to wait for 400 to start up and become ready for communication, the start waiting counter of the sub-control is decremented by one, and when this start waiting counter reaches 0, preparation is made to send a predetermined command. Here, as an example, one may be subtracted from the activation waiting counter of the sub-control in the first main-control-unit timer interrupt process after the power is turned on. Further, it may be started from the first subcommand management process after the power is turned on. Note that one cycle of the transmission cycle T is 100 ms (25 interrupts), for example.

In the figure, timings a, c, e, and g are the timings of ending/starting the transmission cycle T of the subcommand in the main control unit 300, respectively. First, when the main control unit 300 detects a magnetic field detection error (first error) at a timing midway in the first transmission cycle T shown in the figure, the magnetic field detection error flag and the security information signal are turned on at the timing b. When the magnetic field detection error flag is turned on, a transmission request (flag) of an error detection subcommand is set in the device monitoring process (step S329) of the main controller timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 206 (the device shown in FIG. 226). In step S2029) of the monitoring process, the subcommand of the magnetic field detection error is set in the transmission buffer in the subcommand management process (step S333) of the main controller timer interrupt process, and the subcommand is transmitted to the first subcontrol unit 400. It should be noted that there is a time lag from the detection of each error detection switch (various sensors 320) to the determination of an error in the main control unit 300.

As described above, the magnetic field detection error flag and the security information signal are turned on within the transmission cycle T in which the magnetic field detection error is detected (in the same interrupt process).

Then, at the timing d of the next transmission cycle T (interrupt processing) after the passage of the timing a, the error notification by the first sub-control unit 400 is started. The error notification by the first sub-control unit 400 is executed at any time in the main process of the first sub-control unit 400 that is performed after the interrupt process in which the magnetic field detection error flag is set is completed. The time lag until the main control unit 300 transmits an error command to the first sub control unit 400 and the display/output on the decorative symbol display device 208 or the speaker 120 after the first sub control unit 400 transmits the command. There is a time lag up to.

Timing f is the timing when the magnetic field detection error is turned off. Note that there is a time lag until the main control unit 300 determines that the error is released. Timing h is the timing when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the error cancel command.

When the magnetic field detection error is turned off at the timing f, a subcommand for error cancellation (error cancellation command) is set in the transmission buffer in the subcommand management processing (step S333) of the main controller timer interrupt processing, and the first sub It is transmitted to the control unit 400. In this way, the first sub-control unit 400 receives the error cancellation command in the transmission cycle T (interrupt processing) subsequent to the transmission cycle T (interrupt processing) in which the magnetic field detection error is turned off.

Timing i is the timing when the security information signal is turned off. The security information signal is turned off after a lapse of a certain period (for example, 30 seconds, 7500 interrupts) after the magnetic field detection error flag is turned off at the timing f. The security information signal may be turned off after a certain period of time has elapsed from the start of output (timing b). Further, the security information signal may be turned off within the same interrupt in which the magnetic field detection error flag is turned off.

Timing j is the timing at which the magnetic field detection error notification by the first sub-control unit 400 ends. The error notification of the magnetic field detection ends after a lapse of a fixed period (for example, 33 seconds) from the cancellation of the magnetic field detection error (timing f). Note that the magnetic field detection is not limited to this, except for the time lag until the error cancellation command of the magnetic field detection error is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400 and the processing time lag in the first sub control unit 400. When the error is canceled (timing f), the error notification may be ended immediately. Moreover, the end timing of the error notification may be different depending on the decorative pattern display device 208, the speaker 120, the frame lamp 122, and the like, or all of them may be the same.

FIG. 230 is a diagram showing, in time series, an example of effect display for notifying a magnetic field detection error in the decorative symbol display device 208 corresponding to the timing chart shown in FIG. 229.

The timing shown in (1) of the figure is a state in which the variation game of the special figure (for example, special figure 1) is stopped. The symbol variation display of the first special symbol display device 212 is finished, and a stop symbol which is out of order is displayed. Further, the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 lights up three LEDs to notify that the special figure 1 holds 3 pieces. The numbers of the LEDs of the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 and the general figure holding lamp 216 are both 0, and it is notified that both the special figure 2 and the general figure are 0. In addition, the fourth symbol display means 2081 and 2082, which indicate that the special figure variation game is in progress (during the variation of the special figure), are both turned off the LED. Further, in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7", which is a combination of deviating decorative symbols, is stopped and displayed, and is displayed at the lower right of the display region of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the reduced decorative symbol display area 208h, the same decorative symbols as those in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7") are stopped and displayed. Further, the hold icon display area 900 displays the hold icons PI1, PI2, and PI3 shown in FIG.

As for the timing shown in (2) of the same figure, one hold of special figure 1 is exhausted, and the special figure change game using the special figure display device (for example, special figure 1 display device 212) by the main control unit 300 is started. It is in the state of being. In the lower right of the decorative symbol display device 208, one of the fourth symbol display means 2081 and 2082 that suggests that the special symbol variation game is in progress (during the variation of the special symbol) (in this example, the variation of the special symbol symbol 1). 4th symbol display means 2081 for special figure 1 which indicates that the game is being played (during fluctuation of special figure 1) has started blinking the LED). Further, although the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbols is started in the reduced display area 208h.

The timings shown in (3) to (4) of the figure are states in which the variable display of the decorative symbols is started in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, on the front of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the effect display corresponding to the game state (here, the display of the character (lord) and "Echigoya Land?") has started to be displayed.

The timing shown in (5) of the figure is the timing (timing b in FIG. 229) when the magnetic field detection error is detected in the main control unit 300 and the magnetic field detection error flag and the security information signal are turned on. Even at this timing, the special figure 1 variation game in the special figure 1 display device 212, the variable display of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the effect display corresponding to the game state (here, the character (lord) and "Echigoya land" Is displayed continuously.

The timing shown in (6) of the figure is a state in which error notification is started by the first sub-control unit 400 during the next transmission cycle T (interrupt processing) when a magnetic field detection error is detected ((timing d in FIG. 229). At this timing, an error display E1 (display of the character "radio wave detected" here) is displayed on the foreground of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208 to notify the magnetic detection error. Even at this timing, the special figure 1 variation game in the special figure 1 display device 212, the variable display of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the effect display corresponding to the game state (here, the character (lord) and "Echigoya land" Is displayed continuously.

At the timing shown in (7) of the figure, the error notification (error display E1) is continuously being performed by the first sub-control unit 400. Even at this timing, the special figure 1 variation game on the special figure 1 display device 212, the variable display of the decorative symbol on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the effect display corresponding to the game state (here, the guide display by the character (lord)) Is continuously running.

At the timing shown in (8) of the figure, the error notification (error display E1) is continuously performed by the first sub-control unit 400, but at the timing when the magnetic field detection error is turned off (timing f in FIG. 229). is there. Even at this timing, the special figure 1 variation game on the special figure 1 display device 212, the variable display of the decorative symbol on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the effect display corresponding to the game state (here, the guide display by the character (lord)) Is continuously running.

The timing shown in FIG. 9 (9) is, for example, in a state where the holding is further exhausted and the next variation game is being performed, immediately before the magnetic field detection error notification by the first sub control unit 400 is finished (timing j in FIG. 229). Just before) timing. At this timing, the error notification (error display E1) is continuously performed by the first sub-control unit 400, the special figure 1 variation game on the special figure 1 display device 212, the variation display of the decorative symbol on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the game. The effect display corresponding to the state (here, the display of the character (princess)) is being executed.

The timing shown in (10) of the figure is the timing (after the timing j in FIG. 229) when the error notification (error display E1) by the first sub-control unit 400 is completed. This timing is after a fixed period (for example, 33 seconds) has elapsed from the cancellation of the magnetic field detection error (timing f in FIG. 229), and the error display E1 is not displayed. Even at this timing, the special figure 1 variable game in the special figure 1 display device 212, the variable display of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the effect display corresponding to the game state (here, the display of the character (princess)) Is continuing.

FIG. 231 is another example of the timing chart shown in FIG. 229, FIG. 231(a) is an example of the timing chart when the error is canceled in the middle of the transmission cycle T, and FIG. 231(b) shows magnetic detection. 7 is an example of a timing chart in the case where an error and an error relating to the main control unit 300 and the like other than the error occur in duplicate.

First, referring to FIG. 231(a), when the main control unit 300 detects a magnetic field detection error at a timing midway in a certain transmission cycle T, at the timing b of the next transmission cycle T, the magnetic field detection error flag and the security information signal. Turns on. In this example, the magnetic field detection error is turned off at the timing f within the same transmission cycle T when the magnetic field detection error flag and the security information signal are turned on.

In this way, when the magnetic field detection error flag is turned on and off within the same (one) transmission cycle T, the magnetic detection error flag is turned on at the timing c when the next transmission cycle T is reached. Based on the above, command transmission preparation (command transmission preparation for error notification of magnetic detection error) is performed, and error notification by the first sub-control unit 400 is started at timing d within the transmission cycle T. Then, at the timing g when the next transmission cycle T is reached, command transmission preparation (command transmission preparation for releasing the error of the magnetic detection error) is performed based on the fact that the magnetic detection error flag is turned off. At timing h, the error notification by the first sub control unit 400 ends.

In the same transmission cycle T, when the magnetic field detection error flag changes from ON to OFF to ON, when the next transmission cycle T is reached, the command transmission preparation (magnetic Prepares command transmission for error notification of detection error, but prepares command transmission based on magnetic field detection error flag being turned off even when the next transmission cycle T is reached (preparation of command transmission for error cancellation of magnetic detection error) ) Is not performed and it is assumed that the magnetic field detection error flag remains on.

Further, in the same transmission cycle T, when the magnetic field detection error flag changes from ON→OFF→ON→OFF, the same processing as in the case of FIG.

If the magnetic field detection error flag changes from ON to OFF to ON within the same transmission cycle T, the command is issued based on the ON/OFF status of the magnetic field detection error flag as in the case of FIG. You may prepare for sending.

231(b), referring to FIG. 231(b), a magnetic detection error (first error) and an error relating to the other main control unit 300 and the like (third error, for example, a special winning opening excess winning error, a special winning opening) In the following, an example of a timing chart of the first error flag, the first error notification, the third error flag, the third error notification, and the security information signal in the case of occurrence of a redundant discharge error) ..

At timing b in the middle of a certain transmission cycle T, when the error flag (magnetic field detection error flag) of the first error and the security information signal are turned on based on the detection of the first error (magnetic detection error), the next transmission is performed. At timing d of cycle T, the first sub-control unit 400 starts error notification of the first error.

When the error flag of the first error is turned off at the timing f, the error notification of the first error ends at the timing i after a lapse of a certain period (for example, 33 seconds) from the cancellation of the first error (timing f). To do.

On the other hand, when the error flag of the third error is turned on based on the detection of the third error at the timing k in the middle of a certain transmission cycle T, the first sub-control unit is performed at the timing m of the next transmission cycle T. The error notification of the third error by 400 is started.

When the error flag of the third error is turned off at the timing n, the error notification of the third error is issued at the timing r after a lapse of a fixed period (for example, 33 seconds) from the cancellation of the third error (timing n). finish.

In this example, the security information signal is turned on at timing b (timing at which the first error flag is turned on), and remains on until it is turned off at timing q. Since there is only one security information signal, it is not possible to output each error in correspondence with each other (first error and third error). As described above, when an error (first error and third error) related to the main control unit 300 and the like is detected in duplicate, the security information signal is turned on at the timing when the error is first detected and finally released. The error is turned off at a timing when a fixed period (for example, 30 seconds, 7500 interrupts) has passed from the timing of releasing the error (the timing when the error flag is turned off). That is, in the example shown in FIG. 7B, the security information signal has a fixed period (for example, 30 seconds, 7500%) from the timing n when the error flag of the error (third error) that is finally released is turned off. Is turned off at the timing q when (included) has elapsed. The security information signal may be turned on at the same time when the error flag of the first error is turned on (timing b), and the security information signal may be turned off when 30 seconds have passed after the turning on.

FIG. 232 is an example of a timing chart when a magnetic detection error and an error related to other payouts (for example, a lower tray full tank error, a glass frame opening error, a payout excess error, etc.) occur in duplicate.

Referring to FIG. 232, the main control unit in the case where a magnetic detection error (first error) and an error related to other payout (third error, for example, glass frame opening error) occur in duplicate. Transmission cycle T1 of subcommand in 300, first error flag, first error notification, security information signal, front frame door opening sensor 109 (door SW), transmission cycle T2 of payout command in payout control unit 600, third 3 is an example of a timing chart of the error flag (glass opening error flag), the third error notification (door opening error notification), and the door opening information signal.

Timings a, c, g, l, v, and o are end/start timings of the subcommand transmission cycle T1 in the main controller 300, and timings A, B, k, C, n, D, and E are timings. These are the end/start timings of the payout command transmission cycle T2 in the payout control unit 600, respectively.

At timing b in the middle of a certain transmission cycle T1, when the error flag (magnetic field detection error flag) of the first error and the security information signal are turned on based on the detection of the first error (magnetic detection error), the next transmission is performed. At timing d of cycle T1, the first sub-control unit 400 starts error notification of the first error.

When the error flag of the first error is turned off at the timing f, the error notification of the first error ends at the timing i after a lapse of a certain period (for example, 33 seconds) from the cancellation of the first error (timing f). To do.

On the other hand, if the front frame door opening sensor 109 detects the opening of the front frame door 106 or the inner frame opening sensor detects the opening of the inner frame at a timing s in the middle of a certain transmission cycle T2 (door SW open). At the timing u of the next transmission cycle T2, the door opening information signal (external terminal board signal 2) is output (turned on). As described above, the door opening information signal is a signal output by the payout controller 600 when the opening of the inner frame or the front frame door 106 is detected, and is input to the input port (input terminal) of the external terminal board 349. , Is output from the output port (output terminal) of the external terminal board 349 to the external device.

When the door opening information signal is turned on, the third error flag (door opening error flag) is turned on at the timing k of the next transmission cycle T2. Then, at the timing m of the transmission cycle T1 of the next subcommand in which the third error flag is turned on, the third error notification (door opening error notification) is started. In this way, the third error flag is output at the timing (timing k) of the payout command transmission cycle T2, but the third error notification is that of the next subcommand in which the third error flag is turned on. It is turned on at the timing (timing m) of the transmission cycle T1.

When the front frame door opening sensor 109 detects the closing of the front frame door 106 at timing v (door SW closed), the output of the door opening information signal ends (OFF) at timing w, and the door opening information signal turns off. When the error flag for the third error is turned off at the timing n of the next payout command transmission cycle T2, the error notification of the third error ends at the timing r within the transmission cycle T2.

Further, in this example, the security information signal is turned on at the timing b (timing at which the first error flag is turned on), and kept on until it is turned off at the timing q. When the door opening error flag is turned on, a door opening information signal is output. Therefore, the security information signal turns off at the timing q after 30 seconds have passed from the timing f at which the first error flag was turned off (error cancellation).

Note that since there is only one security information signal, it is not possible to output it in correspondence with each error (the first error and the third error). That is, even if an error (first error) related to the main control unit 300 and the like and an error (third error) related to payout are detected redundantly as in this example, the security information signal is first detected as an error. Is turned on at the timing when is detected, and turned off at a timing when a certain period (for example, 30 seconds, 7500 interrupts) has passed from the timing of the cancellation of the error that is finally canceled (the timing when the error flag is turned off). It may be. That is, in the example shown in the figure, the security information signal has a certain period (for example, 30 seconds, 7500 interrupts) from the timing n when the error flag of the error (third error) that is finally released is turned off. It turns off at the timing q that has elapsed. The security information signal may be turned on at the same time when the error flag of the first error is turned on (timing b), and the security information signal may be turned off when 30 seconds have passed after the turning on.

Further, in the above example, the door opening information signal is output immediately (regardless of the transmission cycle T1, T2) when the front frame door opening sensor 109 detects the opening of the front frame door 106, and immediately when the closing is detected. Although the example in which the output ends (regardless of the transmission cycles T1 and T2) has been described, the door opening information signal (the information signal of the error related to the payout) may be output every transmission cycle T2 of the payout command. ..

FIG. 233 is a diagram showing, in time series, an example of the effect display for notifying the magnetic field detection error and the door opening error in the decorative symbol display device 208 corresponding to the timing chart shown in FIG.

The timings shown in (1) to (8) of the same figure are the same as the timings shown in (1) to (8) of FIG.

The timing shown in FIG. 9 (9) is the timing when the front frame door opening sensor 109 detects the opening of the front frame door 106 or the inner frame opening sensor detects the opening of the inner frame and the door SW is opened. (Timing s in FIG. 232) and (10) in FIG. 232 is the timing of the transmission cycle T1 of the next subcommand in which the third error flag is turned on based on the opening of the door SW (timing m in FIG. 232). ), the third error notification (door opening error notification) has started. At this timing, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the first error notification (error display E1 of magnetic field detection error) is continuously executed, and at the same time, the third error notification (error display E2 of door opening error, Here, the word "the door is open") has started execution. In this way, when a plurality of error notifications (error displays E1 and E2) are performed at the same time, the previously displayed error notification (here, the error display E1 regarding the magnetic detection error) moves to the upper side and the lower side thereof. The error notification (here, the error display E2 related to the door opening error) is displayed. At least a part of the plurality of error notifications (error displays E1 and E2) may be displayed in a superimposed manner. In that case, the error display notified later covers at least a part of the previous error display. It may be done or vice versa. Further, in order to prevent the display position of the error display from being moved even when the number of errors to be notified increases, the display position may be displayed differently for each error in advance, or may be displayed randomly. It may be one.

The timing shown in (11) of the figure is the timing when the third error flag is turned off (timing n in FIG. 232). At this timing, the first error flag is also off, but the first error notification (error display E1) and the third error notification (error display E2) continue.

The timing shown in (12) of the same figure is the timing (timing r in FIG. 232) at which the third error notification (error display E2) is finished based on the turning off of the third error flag. At this timing, the first error flag is also off, but the first error notification (error display E1) continues.

The timing shown in (13) of the figure is based on that the first error flag is turned off (timing f in FIG. 232), and after a predetermined period (for example, 33 seconds) has elapsed from the timing f of error cancellation, This is the timing when the first error notification (error display E1) ends.

<Example of timing chart and effect display of signals related to magnetic (magnet) error>

Next, a case where a second error (magnetic (magnet) detection error) related to the main controller 300 and the like occurs will be described. FIG. 234(a) relates to a second error (magnetic (magnet) detection error) relating to the main control unit 300 and the like, and includes power supply, power-on state (PW_WATCH), transmission cycle T, second error (magnetic detection error). ) A flag, a security information signal, and an example of a timing chart of notification of a second error (magnetic detection error) in the first sub-control unit 400, and FIG. 7B is a performance display corresponding to FIG. It is a figure which shows an example in time series.

Referring to FIG. 7A, timings a, c, and ζ are the end/start timings of the subcommand transmission cycle T in the main control unit 300, respectively.

When the magnetic detection signal changes from off to on in the power-on state (PW_WATCH signal is on) and the state continues for a predetermined period (for example, 10 ms), the main control unit 300 causes the magnetic (magnet) detection error (second). Error) is detected. As a result, the magnetic detection error flag (second error flag) and the security information signal are turned on at the timing α of a certain transmission cycle T.

Then, based on the fact that the magnetic detection error flag and the security information signal are turned on, an error command of the magnetic detection error is immediately sent to the first sub-control unit 400 (for example, the timing β in the same transmission cycle T). The notification of the magnetic detection error (second error) is transmitted and the execution is started. As described above, in the case of the second error (for example, the magnetic detection error) related to the main control unit 300 and the like, the notification of the second error is immediately started when the error occurs.

The magnetic detection error is an error that is restored (released) when the power is turned on again, the power is cut off at the timing immediately before the timing γ, and the main control unit 300 is in the power cutoff state (PW_WATCH signal is off). At the detected timing γ, the magnetic detection error flag and the security information signal are turned off. Then, when the magnetic detection error flag and the security information signal are turned off, an error cancellation command for the magnetic detection error is immediately transmitted (timing δ) to the first sub control unit 400, and the notification of the magnetic detection error ends.

While the magnetic detection error is occurring, in the main controller timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 206, the determination in step S309 is Yes, and the processes in steps S311 to S337 are skipped. That is, when a magnetic detection error occurs, notification of the magnetic detection error is started immediately, and since the timer update process (step S311) is not executed, the security information signal has a predetermined period ( 30 seconds, 7500 interrupt) is not counted, and output continues until the power is cut off.

When the main control unit 300 detects the power-on state (PW_WATCH signal is on) at the timing ε, the transmission cycle T restarts from the timing ζ at which the first (first) device management process is started after the power is turned on again. The start timing of the transmission cycle T after the power is turned on may be started from the first main control section timer interrupt process after the power is turned on again. It may be started from the next interrupt after the interrupt restriction of the main controller timer interrupt process is completed.

An example of the effect display for notifying a magnetic detection error in the decorative symbol display device 208 corresponding to FIG. 11A will be described with reference to FIG.

The timing shown in (1) of the figure is the same as the timing shown in (4) of FIG.

The timing shown in (2) of the figure is that the main control unit 300 determines that the magnetic detection signal changes from off to on in the power-on state (PW_WATCH signal is on) and the state continues for a predetermined period (for example, 10 ms). Timing when the magnetic (magnet) detection error (second error) is detected and the magnetic detection error flag (second error flag) and the security information signal are turned on based on this (timing α in FIG. 9A) Is.

When the magnetic detection error flag is turned on, the main control unit 300, the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the normal symbol holding lamp 216, the first special symbol holding lamp 218. And all the second special symbol holding lamp 220 is turned off (the same in the following embodiments).

At the timing shown in (3) of the figure, the magnetic detection error (second error) immediately starts to be notified (timing β in (a) of the figure) because the magnetic detection error flag is turned on. It is in a state of being. The notification of the magnetic detection error is executed on the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Here, as an example, the entire surface of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208 is displayed in gray, and the characters "a magnet has been detected" are displayed.

The timing shown in (4) of the same figure is the timing after the power is cut off (timing δ in (a) of the same figure), and the timing shown in (5) of the figure is the timing after the power is turned on again ((a) in the same figure). The timing ε) in FIG. 6A is a timing between the timing ε and the timing ζ in FIG. 7A, and FIGS. 7A to 9C are the timings in FIG. The timing is after the timing ζ. The timing shown in (7) of the figure is a state in which the magnetic detection error is canceled. With the release of the magnetic detection error, the main control unit 300 is turned off from the timing when the magnetic detection error is detected, the normal symbol display device 210, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, ordinary The symbol holding lamp 216, the first special symbol holding lamp 218 and the second special symbol holding lamp 220 are all returned to the state before the detection of the magnetic detection error. Further, the fourth symbol display means 2081 (or the fourth symbol display means 2082) starts blinking (same in the following embodiments).

A case will be described with reference to FIG. 235 in which the first error (magnetic field (radio wave) detection error) and the second error (magnetic (magnet) detection error) related to the main control unit 300 and the like occur in duplicate.

FIG. 235(a) relates to the first error (magnetic field (radio wave) detection error) and the second error (magnetic (magnet) detection error) relating to the main control unit 300, the transmission cycle T, and the first error. An example of a timing chart of a (magnetic field detection error) flag, a first error (magnetic field detection error) notification, a second error (magnetic detection error) flag, a second error (magnetic detection error) notification, and a security information signal. FIG. 18B is a diagram showing an example of the effect display corresponding to FIG.

Referring to FIG. 3A, timings a and c are the end/start timings of the subcommand transmission cycle T in the main controller 300, respectively.

When the magnetic field detection error flag is turned on at the timing b in the middle of a certain transmission cycle T, the security information signal is turned on at the same time. When the magnetic field detection error flag is turned on at the timing α (for example, within the same transmission cycle T) after the magnetic field detection error flag is turned on, the error command of the magnetic field detection error is immediately issued (at the timing β). 1 The error notification of the magnetic detection error is transmitted to the sub control unit 400 and the execution of the error notification is started. In other words, the magnetic detection error starts notification immediately (for example, within the same transmission cycle T) without waiting for the next transmission cycle T after the magnetic detection error flag is turned on, but the magnetic field detection error is the magnetic field detection error. A magnetic field detection error error command is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in a transmission cycle T (transmission cycle T after timing c) that is next to the transmission cycle T in which the magnetic field detection error is turned on, and thereafter an error notification of the magnetic field detection error is executed. To start.

With reference to FIG. 2B, an example of a magnetic field detection error in the decorative symbol display device 208 corresponding to FIG.

The timing shown in (1) of the figure is the same as the timing shown in (4) of FIG.

The timing shown in (2) of the same figure is the timing when the magnetic field detection error flag is turned on (timing b of the same figure (a)), and the timing shown in (3) of the figure is that the magnetic detection error flag is turned on. This is the timing (timing α in FIG. 7A) when

At the timing shown in FIG. 4D, the magnetic field detection error flag is turned on, and immediately an error command of the magnetic field detection error is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the magnetic field detection error (second (Error) is a state in which notification is started (timing β in FIG. 9A). The notification of the magnetic detection error is executed on the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Here, as an example, the entire surface of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208 is displayed in gray, and the characters "a magnet has been detected" are displayed.

In this way, when the magnetic field detection error (first error relating to the main control unit 300 etc.) and the magnetic detection error (second error relating to the main control unit 300) are detected in duplicate, FIG. Although both the magnetic field detection error flag and the magnetic detection error flag are turned on at the timings 3) and (4), the only error reported is the error notification of the magnetic detection error (error display E2).

Referring to FIG. 236, another example of the case where the first error (magnetic field (radio wave) detection error) and the second error (magnetic (magnet) detection error) related to the main control unit 300 and the like occur in duplicate. Will be described.

FIG. 236(a) relates to the first error (magnetic field (radio wave) detection error) and the second error (magnetic (magnet) detection error) related to the main control unit 300 and the like, and the transmission cycle T and the first error. (Magnetic field detection error) flag, first error (magnetic field detection error) notification, second error (magnetic detection error) flag, second error (magnetic detection error) notification, and other timing charts of security information signals This is an example, and FIG. 11B is a diagram showing another example of the effect display corresponding to FIG.

Referring to FIG. 3A, timings a and c are the end/start timings of the subcommand transmission cycle T in the main controller 300, respectively.

In this example, when the magnetic field detection error flag is turned on at a timing b in the middle of a certain transmission cycle T, the security information signal is turned on at the same time. Then, at the timing d of the transmission cycle T next to the transmission cycle T in which the magnetic field detection error flag is turned on, a subcommand for notifying a magnetic field detection error is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400. The error notification of the magnetic field detection error (error display E1) starts.

Then, the magnetic detection error flag is turned on at timing α after the error notification of the magnetic field detection error (error display E1) is started, and the error notification of the magnetic detection error (error display E2) is started at the subsequent timing β. ..

With reference to FIG. 2B, an example of a magnetic field detection error in the decorative symbol display device 208 corresponding to FIG.

The timing shown in (1) of the figure is the same as the timing shown in (4) of FIG.

The timing shown in (2) of the same figure is the timing when the magnetic field detection error flag is turned on (timing b in (a) of the same figure), and the magnetic field detection error flag is turned on at the timing shown in (3) of the same figure. It is a state ((timing d in FIG. 9A)) in which error notification of the magnetic field detection error (error display E1) is started based on the fact that

The timing shown in (4) of the figure is the timing when the magnetic detection error flag is turned on (timing α of (a) of the figure) after the error notification (error display E1) of the magnetic field detection error is started. is there. The magnetic detection error flag is turned on, and at the timing shown in (5) of the figure, the magnetic detection error error notification (error display E2) is started based on the fact that the magnetic detection error flag is turned on ((( It is the timing β) in FIG.

In this way, when the magnetic detection error flag is turned on after the error notification of the magnetic field detection error (error display E1) is started, the error notification of the magnetic field detection error (error display E1) is covered ( Error notification (error display E2) of the magnetic detection error is performed so that the error notification of the magnetic field detection error (error display E1) is hidden.

As shown in (5′) of the figure, when the magnetic detection error flag is turned on after the error notification of the magnetic field detection error (error display E1) is started, the error notification of the magnetic field detection error ( The error notification (error display E2) of the magnetic detection error is performed (while the error notification of the magnetic field detection error (error display E1) is also displayed) over the error display E1). In this case, as shown in FIG. 5 (5 ′), at least a part of the error notification (error display E 2) of the magnetic detection error is made to be difficult for the player to visually recognize by the error notification of the magnetic field detection error (error display E 1 ). Alternatively, both may be made visible to the player.

<Example of timing chart and effect display of signals, etc. related to the special winning opening prize error>

Next, a case where an error relating to the main control unit 300 or the like (a big winning opening winning error) occurs will be described. In the following description, the special winning opening winning error is a large winning opening winning excess error. The prize winning excess error occurs when the number of balls entered is greater than the number of balls discharged after the remaining ball detection time has elapsed (when the special train combination operation interval timer is 0), and the number of balls received = number of balls discharged. It is an error that recovers when the power is turned on or when the power is turned on again. 237 to 239 are examples of the pachinko machine 100 having the game board 200 as shown in FIG. 194, and FIGS. 243 to 247 are the pachinko machines having the game board 200 shown in FIG. It is an example of the probability variation machine 100.

FIG. 237 is a variation/stop state of the special figure, a state where the accessory continuous operation device and the condition device are operated/not operated, when a special winning opening winning excess error occurs, for example, in the 15th round of the big hit game, Driving (opening)/stopping (closing) state of the special winning opening solenoid, operating/non-operating status of the special electric auditors (special electric role), ball detection sensor 320 (count switch SW) provided in the variable winning opening 234. Is an example of a timing chart of the valid/invalid state, the special winning opening winning excess error flag, the security information signal, and the special winning opening winning excess error notification in the first sub-control unit 400.

In this example, a case where only one big winning opening (attacker, variable winning opening 234) is provided on the game board 200 will be described.

At the timing A, the symbol variation due to the special figure display device (either the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214, the same applies hereinafter) is stopped, and, for example, a 15R probability variation big hit symbol (for example, “ When the special figure A”) is stopped and displayed, the condition device and the accessory continuous operation device are changed from the non-operation state to the operation state at timing B after the period set by the special figure display confirmation timer has elapsed. Here, the accessory continuous operation device is a special device that can continuously operate the special electric auditors product (in this example, the variable winning a prize port 234), and the condition device is the operation of the accessory product. It is a device that is a condition necessary for the operation of the continuous operation device, and a combination of specific symbols is displayed, or a game ball (the entrance is opened when the accessory continuous operation device is operating, or an enlarged big prize) (Excluding those that have won the mouth) will operate when a specific area within the special winning opening is passed. In the present embodiment, since the timings of starting and ending the operations of the accessory continuous operation device and the condition device are the same, they are shown in the same timing chart.

That is, the big hit game is started at the timing B. Then, the big hit start effect is performed, and at the timing C at which the big hit start effect is completed, the big hit game first round is started, and the special electric auditors product is changed from the non-operation state to the operation state. Since the variable winning port 234 is opened from the start of the first round, the special winning port solenoid is also driven (opened) from this timing, and the variable winning port 234 is opened. Further, the count switch SW is changed from the invalid state to the valid state at this timing when the special electric auditors product is changed from the non-activated state to the activated state. As a result, when the game ball that has entered the variable winning port 234 passes through the count switch SW, it can be effectively detected, and it can be treated as the one that has effectively won the variable winning port 234. The count switch SW may be changed from the invalid state to the valid state at the timing when the variable winning port 234 is first opened after the round starts.

After that, the above-mentioned maximum winning number of game balls to the variable winning a prize port 234, or set special electricity combination operation data (for example, "special electricity set in the first round in the case of a big hit with "special map A") When the opening timer set by the combination operation data 1") has elapsed, at the timing D, the special winning opening solenoid stops driving (closes) and the variable winning opening 234 is closed. At this time, the special electric prize combination operation interval timer is set, and a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) is set in the special electric prize combination winning detection timer related to the variable winning port 234. The special electric auditors' product continues to operate even after the variable winning port 234 is closed, until the round ends, that is, until the period set by the special electric device operation interval timer elapses. .. Then, at the timing E when the period set by the special electric auditors operation interval timer has elapsed, the special electric auditors product changes from the operating state to the non-operating state, and the first round ends.

When the first round ends (when the special electric auditors product changes from the operating state to the non-operating state), the special electric auditors product operates from the non-operating state again at the timing F after the lapse of the period set by the special electric vehicle operating delay timer. The state becomes the state, the second round is started, the special winning opening solenoid is also driven at this timing, and the variable winning opening 234 is opened. Further, the count switch SW is changed from the invalid state to the valid state at the timing when the special electric auditors product is activated. After that, the above-described operation is repeatedly performed until the 14th round, which is one round before the final round, ends.

In this example, it is assumed that the main control unit 300 detects a special winning opening winning excess error during the 14th round. In this embodiment, even in this case, the special winning opening winning excess flag is not turned on while the variable winning opening 234 is open. In the 14th round, it is set in the 14th round in the case where the above-mentioned maximum winning number of game balls is won into the variable winning port 234, or the special electricity combination operation data that has been set (for example, in the case of a big hit with "special map A"). When the opening timer set by "special electric combination operation data 1") elapses, the special winning opening solenoid stops driving (closes) at timing G, and the variable winning opening 234 is closed. At this time, the special electric prize combination operation interval timer is set, and a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) is set in the special electric prize combination winning detection timer related to the variable winning port 234. Then, at the timing H when the period set by the special electric auditors operation interval timer has elapsed, the special electric auditors product changes from the operating state to the non-operating state, and the 15th round ends. Then, at this timing H, the special winning opening winning excess error flag is turned on. At the same timing H, the security information signal is turned on, and at timing I, the main control unit 300 transmits an error notification subcommand to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 generates a special winning opening winning excess error. Notification starts.

As described above, in the present embodiment, even when the special winning opening winning excess error is detected during the big hit game (while the variable winning opening is open), the big winning opening winning excess error flag is not immediately turned on, At the end of the round, more specifically, at the timing when the period set by the special electric auditors operation interval timer elapses and the special electric auditors product changes from the operating state to the non-operating state (timing H in the figure), The prize winning excess error flag is set to ON.

When the 14th round is completed, the 15th round is started at the timing J after a lapse of a predetermined period, the special electric auditors product is changed from the non-operating state to the operating state again, and the special winning opening solenoid is also driven at this timing to perform the variable winning. The mouth 234 is opened. Further, the count switch SW is changed from the invalid state to the valid state at the timing when the special electric auditors product is activated.

After that, when the winning of the above-mentioned maximum winning number of game balls into the variable winning port 234 or the opening timer set by the set special electric prize operation data elapses, the driving of the special winning port solenoid is stopped at timing K. As a result, the variable winning a prize port 234 is closed. At this time, the special electric prize combination operation interval timer described above is set, and a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) is set in the special electric prize combination winning detection timer related to the variable winning port 234. Then, the special electric auditors product is in the operating state even after the variable winning port 234 is closed, until the round is completed, that is, until the period set by the special electric vehicle operating interval timer elapses.

At a timing L when the period set by the special electric auditors operation interval timer has elapsed, the 15th round in which the special electric auditors product is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state and the count switch SW is also changed from the valid state to the invalid state is completed. After that, when the period set by the special electric device operation delay timer elapses, the big hit end effect is started, and this big hit end effect is performed until the period set by the hit end display timer elapses.

At the timing M when the big hit end effect ends, the accessory continuous operation device and the condition device change from the operating state to the non-operating state, and the big hit game ends.

When the big hit game ends, generally, from the timing Q (timing after 1 interruption from the timing M of the big hit game end), the symbol variation of the reserved special figure (special figure 1 or special figure 2) is started. It However, in this example, the special winning opening winning excess error is not resolved at this timing (because the special winning opening winning excess error flag is in the ON state), and the first winning prize winning excess by the first sub-control unit 400 is exceeded. The error notification continues, and the symbol variation of the special figure (special figure 1 or special figure 2) that is being held becomes a standby state.

Then, at the timing N, the special winning opening winning excess error flag is turned off, and when the big winning opening winning excess error is resolved, at the timing O after 1 interruption, the special figure (special figure 1 or The symbol fluctuation of FIG. 2) is started. Then, at timing P, an error release command for the special winning opening winning excess error is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400, and after a certain period (for example, 33 seconds) has elapsed from the error release (timing N), The error notification of the special winning opening winning excess error by the first sub-control unit 400 ends.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the special winning opening winning excess error occurs during the big hit game, the big winning opening winning excess error is displayed (error display E3) at the end of the round in which the error occurs. .. And, even if the jackpot game of a predetermined number of rounds has ended, if the special winning opening winning excess error has occurred (the big winning opening winning excess error flag is ON, the big winning opening winning excess If the error has not been resolved), the error display E3 is continued, and even if there is a pending special figure (special figure 1 or special figure 2), the symbol variation is not started, and the standby state is set. .. Then, the special winning opening winning excess error flag is turned off, and when the big winning opening winning excess error is resolved, there is a change in the symbol of the reserved special symbol (special map 1 or special map 2) at the next interrupt. Be started. The error display E3 is continuously displayed until a fixed period (for example, 33 seconds) elapses from the error cancellation (timing N).

FIG. 238 is a diagram showing, in time series, an example of an effect display for notifying a special winning opening winning excess error in the decorative symbol display device 208 corresponding to the timing chart shown in FIG. 237.

At the timing shown in FIG. 1A, the symbol fluctuation due to the special figure display device (either the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214, the same applies hereinafter) is stopped, and, for example, 15R probability variation big hit. The symbol is stopped and displayed, and in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, in this example, the character “probable variation big hit” is displayed and the big hit game is started (timing B in FIG. 237). Further, the timing shown in (2) of the figure is a state in which the big hit start effect (in this example, the display of the character "Right hit!" for notifying the player that he/she is right hit) is being performed. ..

The timing shown in (3) of the figure is a state in which the big hit start effect is finished and the first round of the big hit game is started (timing C in FIG. 237), and the special electric auditors' product is in the inoperative state from the inoperative state. Become. Since the variable winning port 234 is opened from the start of the first round, the special winning port solenoid is also driven (opened) from this timing, and the variable winning port 234 is opened. Further, the count switch SW is changed from the invalid state to the valid state at this timing when the special electric auditors product is changed from the non-activated state to the activated state. In the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first round effect of the big hit game is executed.

The timing shown in (4) of the figure is a state in which the 14th round, which is one round before the final round, has started, and the 14th round effect is being executed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

The timing shown in (5) of the same figure is a state (timing H of FIG. 237) in which the 14th round has ended (the special electric auditors' product has changed from the operating state to the non-operating state). Further, in this example, the main control unit 300 detects the special winning opening winning excess error in the period from (4) to (5) in FIG. However, as described above, in the present embodiment, even if the main control unit 300 detects the special winning opening winning excess error while the variable winning opening is open, the special winning opening excess error flag is immediately turned on. Instead, at the end of the round, that is, at the timing ((timing H in FIG. 237) shown in FIG. 5 (5), the special winning opening winning excess error flag is turned on.

At the timing shown in FIG. 6 (6), an error notification subcommand is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 notifies of a special winning opening winning excess error (in this example, , Is a state in which the error display E3 by the character "big winning mouth winning excess error" has been started (timing I in FIG. 237.) The error display E3 is a round effect in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is displayed overlaid (on the front).

At the timing shown in FIG. 7 (7), the 15th round is started, the special electric auditors product is changed from the non-operating state to the operating state again, and the special winning opening solenoid is also driven at this timing to open the variable winning opening 234. The timing at which the count switch SW changes from the invalid state to the valid state (timing J in FIG. 237). The special winning opening winning excess error has not been eliminated, and the round effect in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the error display E3 of the special winning opening winning excess error continue to overlap with this.

FIG. 8 (8) is a timing (timing K in FIG. 237) when the driving of the special winning opening solenoid is stopped and the variable winning opening 234 is closed, and FIG. The period set by is passed, the special electric auditors product is changed from the operating state to the non-operating state, the count switch SW is also changed from the valid state to the invalid state, and the 15th round is finished (timing L in FIG. 237). Even during these periods, the special winning opening winning excess error is not resolved, and the round presentation in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the error display E3 of the special winning opening winning excess error continue to overlap with this. There is.

The timing shown in (10) of the figure is a state in which the 15th round is finished, the period set by the special electricity combination operation delay timer has elapsed, and the big hit end effect is started. In this example, the jackpot end presentation is a display (in this example, “probability variation rush”) indicating that the state has transitioned to the probability variation state in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a notification of a caution for forgetting to take the prepaid card (this. The example includes a display of characters such as "Please be careful not to forget to remove the prepaid card." Also at this timing, the special winning opening winning excess error has not been resolved, and the error display E3 of the big winning opening winning excess error continues in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 over the big hit end effect. .. The big hit end effect is continuously performed until the period set by the hit end display timer elapses. It should be noted that in the jackpot ending effect shown in FIG. 10(10), the right-handing notification (the word "right-handing" and the right arrow) for notifying that the player is in the right-handed state may not be displayed (also in the following examples. The same).

The timing shown in (11) of the same figure is the timing at which the period set by the hit end display timer has elapsed and the big hit end effect has ended. In this example, the special winning opening winning excess error is not resolved at this timing (because the special winning opening winning excess error flag is in the ON state), and the first winning prize winning excess error of the first sub-control unit 400 is detected. The notification (error display E3) is continued, and the symbol variation of the special figure (Special figure 1 or special figure 2) that is being held is in the standby state (the main control unit 300 is performing the symbol variation control). Absent). For this reason, after the end of the jackpot finish production, a demo screen (design demo, maker logo, etc.) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

The timing shown in (12) of the same figure is a state (timing M of FIG. 237) in which the accessory continuous operation device and the condition device have changed from the operating state to the non-operating state and the jackpot game has ended. Even at this timing, the special winning opening winning excess error has not been resolved, and the first winning subordinate control unit 400 continues to report the big winning opening winning excess error and the pending special map (special figure 1 or special drawing Since the symbol variation in FIG. 2) is in a standby state, a logo (maker logo) screen (or a demo screen or the like) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

The timing shown in (13) of the figure is the timing (timing N in FIG. 237) at which the special winning opening winning excess error flag is turned off and the big winning opening winning excess error is resolved. Further, the timing shown in (14) of the figure is a timing after one interruption of the timing at which the special winning opening award excess error flag is turned off (timing O in FIG. 237), and the reserved special figure (for example, , The special figure 1) is the state where the symbol variation has started. At this timing, since the error release command of the special winning opening winning excess error is not transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400, the logo screen and the special winning opening winning excess error error display E3 are continuously displayed. Is continuing. In this example, the logo screen is displayed in the state where the symbol variation is started, but the symbol variation may be configured to be started in the state where the stop display of the decorative symbol is displayed. ..

The timing shown in FIG. 15 (15) is the display area (design display area) of the decorative design display device 208 (instead of the logo display) with the start of the design variation of the pending special design (for example, special design 1). 208a to 208c), the stop display of the decorative design is displayed. In this example, the symbol demonstration is the same as the stop display of the decorative symbol of the previous big hit symbol combination (for example, "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7"). In the present embodiment, when displaying a symbol demo as shown in FIG. 15 (15), instead of the symbol demo, a stop display of a decorative symbol (for example, a symbol combination of the previous big hit (for example, “decoration 7- Decoration 7-decoration 7")) may be performed, as is the case in the examples below.

In addition, the state of the stop display of the decorative symbol is a state in which the first error (for example, a special winning a prize winning excess error) has occurred and a state in which the error has not occurred (during demonstration and/or symbol stopped) And may be the same or different. For example, the state of the stop display of the decorative pattern in which the first error is occurring may be a still image, and the state of the stop display of the decorative pattern in which the first error is not occurring may be an animation. Further, when the decorative pattern display is composed of "images such as characters" and "numbers or characters", the state of the stop display of the decorative pattern during the first error is "images such as characters" and "numbers". Alternatively, the state of the stop display of the decorative pattern in the state where the first error is not generated may be configured from the “image of the character or the like”. Here, the “image of a character or the like” or the “image of numbers or characters” may be a moving image or a still image. Further, the state of the stop display of the decorative symbol may be different between the demonstration and the symbol stopped. For example, part or all of the decorative design may be animated during the demonstration, and the decorative design may be displayed as a still image while the design is stopped, and vice versa. Here, the mode of the stop display of the decorative symbol during the first error is the same as that during the symbol is stopped, but may be the same as during the demonstration.

Further, during the first error (for example, a special winning opening winning excess error), the decorative design may be the same display as the stop display (the decorative design is stopped).

Further, during the first error (for example, a special winning opening winning excess error), the decorative design may be a display different from the stop display, for example, a display in which the decorative design in the design demonstration is animated. It may be the same as the above, or a decorative pattern display pattern dedicated to the first error (for example, a special winning opening winning excess error).

At the timing shown in FIG. 16 (16), an error release command for a special winning opening excess error is sent from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400, and a certain period (for example, 33 seconds) from the error release (timing N). ), the error notification of the special winning opening winning excess error by the first sub-control unit 400 is finished (timing P in FIG. 237). In the display area (design display areas 208a to 208c) of the decorative design display device 208, a stop display of the decorative design is displayed. Then, after this timing, the variable display of the decorative symbols is started in the display area (the symbol display areas 208a to 208c) of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, from the timing shown in FIG. 15 (15) or FIG. 16 (16), the variable display of the decorative symbol may be started in the display area (the symbol display areas 208a to 208c) of the decorative symbol display device 208. ..

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the special winning opening winning excess error occurs during the big hit game, the big winning opening winning excess error is displayed (error display E3) at the end of the round in which the error occurs. .. And, even if the jackpot game of a predetermined number of rounds has ended, if the special winning opening winning excess error has occurred (the big winning opening winning excess error flag is ON, the big winning opening winning excess If the error is not resolved), the error display E3 is continued, and even if there is a pending special figure (special figure 1 or special figure 2), the symbol variation is waited for. Then, when the big hit end effect ends while waiting for the next symbol change, a logo screen, a demo screen, etc. are displayed and the display is stopped as it is. When the special winning opening prize excess error flag is turned off and the special winning opening prize excess error is resolved, the symbol variation of the reserved special symbol (Special symbol 1 or Special symbol 2) is started at the next interrupt. It The error display E3 is continuously displayed until a fixed period (for example, 33 seconds) elapses from the error cancellation (timing N).

In addition, if the design combination of the decorative symbols for the normal jackpot is prepared, the probability variation promotion effect may be performed during the jackpot round even while the jackpot winning excess error flag is on.

FIG. 239 is a diagram showing a modification of the effect display of FIG. 238. 239(9a) to (16a) are modified examples corresponding to FIGS. 238(9) to (16), respectively.

At the timing shown in FIG. 239 (9a), the fifteenth round has ended (timing L in FIG. 237), and the notification of the special winning opening winning excess error (error display E3) is being performed in addition to the round effect. .. Further, FIG. 10 (10a) shows a state in which the big hit ending effect is started, and the big winning opening winning excess error notification (error display E3) is performed in addition to the big hit ending effect. As shown in (10a) of the same figure, in the jackpot end effect, without warning notification of forgetting to take the prepaid card (for example, display of characters such as "please be careful not to forget to take the prepaid card.") Is also good. It should be noted that the warning of not forgetting to take the prepaid card is notified in the big hit end production of the first big hit, and the warning of not leaving the prepaid card is not made in the big jackpot end effect of the second and subsequent big hits. Good. In addition, even if you do not notify the attention of forgetting to take the prepaid card in the jackpot end production, after the jackpot is over, you may be notified of the warning of forgetting to take the prepaid card after the first symbol variation display is started. Good. Note that the notification of attention is not limited to forgetting to remove the prepaid card, and may be notification of other attention (for example, how to hit (right hit, left hit), etc.).

The timing shown in (11a) of the same figure is a state in which the big hit end effect is finished. As shown in (11) of the same figure, even after the big hit end production, the special winning opening winning excess error has not been resolved, and the notification of the special winning opening winning excess error (error display E3) continues, In the case where the symbol variation of the special figure (special figure 1 or special figure 2) being held is in a standby state, a look-ahead notice (in this example, a suggestion of an in-hold condominium in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208) , The display of the character (Den) and the display of the character “Ohwah behavior!”) may be performed. Here, the “holding in-house” in the present embodiment means a case where there is a big hit in the look-ahead result for the special-drawing variable game that is currently held as a result of the special-drawing pre-reading process.

The pre-reading notice may be the same or different between the state in which the first error (for example, the special winning opening winning excess error) and the state in which the error does not occur. Good.

Further, when the pre-reading notice is displayed up to the change to be the pre-reading target, the pre-reading notice may be given as a still image without performing the pre-reading notice animation. The look-ahead notice in this case may be a notice selected by the look-ahead effect drawing in the high-probability state, or may be a notice selected in the look-ahead effect drawing in the low-probability state. Here, the high-probability state and the low-probability state correspond to the special probability status, but the first error (for example, the special winning opening prize excess error) is canceled even if the special probability status is the high probability status. The look-ahead effect lottery in the low-probability state may be performed until the variation of the symbol starts.

The timing shown in (12a) of the same figure is a state (timing M of FIG. 237) at which the big hit game has ended. Even at this timing, the special winning opening winning excess error has not been resolved, and the notification of the special winning opening winning excess error (error display E3) by the first sub-control unit 400 continues and is suspended. Since the symbol fluctuation of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2) is in a standby state, the pre-reading notice suggesting the in-hold holiday resort is continuously displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

The timing shown in FIG. 15 (a) is a big prize in the display area (symbol display areas 208a to 208c) of the decorative symbol display device 208 with the start of the symbol variation of the reserved special figure (for example, special chart 1). A symbol demonstration (in this example, a stop display of the decorative symbol of the previous jackpot symbol combination (for example, "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7") is performed behind the notification of the oral winning excess error (error display E3). It is in a state of being forgotten. In this case, as shown in FIG. 15A, the hold icon PI may be displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

The timing shown in FIG. 16 (a) is a state in which the error notification of the special winning opening winning excess error by the first sub-control unit 400 is completed (timing P in FIG. 237) with the error release of the special winning opening winning excess error. Yes, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the display area (the symbol display areas 208a to 208c) of the decorative symbol display device 208.

Also in this example, the error display E3 of the special winning opening winning excess error continues to be displayed during the period shown in FIG. 9(a) to (15a) (the period where the special winning opening winning excess error is not released). There is.

239(12b) to (b3-1α) in FIG. 239(12) are modifications after FIG. 238(12). The timing shown in FIG. 239 (12b) is the same as the timing shown in FIG. 238 (12), and is a state (timing M in FIG. 237) at which the big hit game is over.

FIG. 239(b1) shows a state following (12b) in FIG. Even at this timing, the special winning opening winning excess error has not been resolved, and the notification of the special winning opening winning excess error (error display E3) by the first sub-control unit 400 continues and is suspended. Since the symbol variation of special figure 1 or special figure 2) is in a standby state, the logo screen is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the display is stopped as it is. Then, as shown in FIG. 239(b1), in addition to the logo screen, in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, an effect indicating a simultaneous effect (in this example, a telop image (animation) that says “Him Live is being held” ( It may be a cut-in image), or a countdown display (animation) such as “○seconds until simultaneous production” may be displayed.

239(b1') is a state following (12b) in FIG. Even at this timing, the special winning opening winning excess error has not been resolved, and the notification of the special winning opening winning excess error (error display E3) by the first sub-control unit 400 continues and is suspended. Since the symbol variation of special figure 1 or special figure 2) is in a standby state, a logo screen is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Then, as shown in FIG. 239 (b1′), in addition to the logo screen, in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, an effect (in this example, a wipe image (animation) of a character (princess) and a simultaneous effect) is displayed. , A countdown display (animation, etc.) that is "○ seconds until simultaneous production" may be displayed.

FIG. 239(b2-1) is a state following FIG. 12(b), and FIG. 239(b2-2) is a state following FIG. 239(b2-1). As shown in FIGS. 239(b2-1) and (b2-2), in addition to the notification of the special winning opening winning excess error (error display E3) and the logo screen, in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the user setting A screen (volume setting screen in this example) may be displayed. Here, a state is shown in which the volume (user setting value) that was “2” in FIG. 239 (b2-1) is changed to “3” in FIG. 239 (b2-2). As shown in both figures, the volume setting (user setting value) can be changed by the user, but the actual setting value remains "5". Note that the actual set value may be changed along with the change of the user set value. Further, in this example, the volume setting screen is shown as an example, but the brightness setting screen may be used. In this example, the volume setting screen is configured so that the volume can be adjusted lower by operating the left key, and can be adjusted higher by operating the right key, and the other keys (up key, down key) can be adjusted. , Chance button, Enter button), the volume cannot be adjusted, but on the volume adjustment screen, the left key or down key can be used to lower the volume, and the right or up key can be operated. The volume may be adjusted so that it can be adjusted.

FIG. 239(b3-1) is a state following that of FIG. 239(12b). As shown in FIG. 239 (b3-1), in addition to the notification of the special winning opening winning excess error (error display E3) and the logo screen (design demo screen) (that is, in the demo state), the display area of the design display device 208 Setting icons such as volume setting and brightness setting and menu display may be displayed in

239 (b3-2), (b3-3) is a state following FIG. 239 (b3-1), and a notification of a special winning opening winning excess error (error display E3) and a symbol demo screen are displayed and predetermined. After the lapse of time, the pattern demo screen is changed to the anime demo screen (the pattern demo state is changed to the animation demo state) (Fig. 239 (b3-2)), and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the animation demo screen is displayed. May be changed to the symbol demo screen (the animation demo state is changed to the symbol demo state) (FIG. 239 (b3-3)). Also in this case, if the special winning opening winning excess error has not been canceled, the notification of the special winning opening winning excess error (error display E3) continues.

In addition, FIG. 239 (b3-3′) is a state following FIG. 239 (b3-2), and a notification of a special winning opening winning excess error (error display E3) and an animation demo screen are displayed (FIG. 239 (b3)). -2)), after the lapse of a predetermined time, a symbol demo (stop display of decorative symbols) may be performed instead of the animation demo screen (Fig. 239 (b3-3')). Also in this case, if the special winning opening winning excess error has not been canceled, the notification of the special winning opening winning excess error (error display E3) continues. In this example, the setting change icons such as the volume setting and the brightness setting and the menu display (indicating that the actual device customized menu can be displayed) are displayed, but during the power support, the volume setting and the brightness setting are displayed. It is also possible not to display the setting change icon and the menu display such as.

239(b3-1α) is a state following FIG. 239(b3-1), and in the state of FIG. 239(b3-1), when the operation means is operated based on the menu display, FIG. The actual machine customization menu may be displayed as shown in 1α), or the actual machine customization menu may not be displayed. Further, when the operating means is operated based on the setting change icon such as the volume setting and the brightness setting, the volume setting screen and the brightness setting screen may be displayed as shown in FIG. 239(b2-1). However, the volume setting screen and the brightness setting screen may not be displayed. Further, both the volume setting screen and the brightness setting screen may be displayed by operating the operating means once, or only when the corresponding operating means is operated (for example, the volume setting screen). May be configured to display the right key or the left key, the light amount setting screen is the up key or the down key), the volume setting screen or the brightness setting screen.

FIG. 240 is a diagram showing a modified example of the effect display during the notification of the special winning opening winning excess error (error display E3) shown in FIGS. 238 and 239. FIG. 240 (b3-2α) is a state following FIG. 239 (b3-2), and when the notification of the special winning opening winning excess error (error display E3) and the animation demo screen are displayed, the effect movable body 224. May operate. In this case, the effect movable body 224 may move the entire movable range in multiple stages as shown in FIG. Further, the effect movable body 224 may move a part of the movable range in multiple stages, or may move the whole or a part of the movable range continuously (smoothly). Further, in this example, the animation demo screen is displayed, but the effect movable body 224 may be operated when the symbol demo screen is displayed.

FIG. 240(b3-1β) is a state following FIG. 239(b3-1), in which the chance button 136 is pressed when the notification of the special winning opening winning excess error (error display E3) and the symbol demonstration screen are displayed. When operated, a production by a back button operation (here, an animation in which a character (Hani) appears from one of the display areas of the decorative pattern display device 208) may be executed.

240 (b4-1), (b4-2) is a state following FIG. 239 (12b), when the notification of the special winning opening winning excess error (error display E3) and the symbol demonstration screen are displayed, A general drawing effect (for example, an effect that expects a long opening of the electric chu (in this example, the display of the Amida lottery image (FIG. 240 (b4-1)) and the judgment result (FIG. 240 (b4-2))) It is possible to go. That is, only the special game variable game that waits in the state where the big winning mouth winning excess error is not released is the special game prize game and the accompanying universal game variable game (decorative pattern display) The decorative pattern variation display by the device 208 or the lamp (LED) may be executed without waiting.

It should be noted that the production of the public figure (for example, the above-mentioned Amida lottery image) is an effect that is performed only in the low accuracy state of the universal figure, and is not displayed in the high accuracy state of the universal figure, but it is also displayed in the high accuracy state of the universal figure. Good.

It should be noted that the variable game of the universal figure may be performed regardless of whether or not the first error (for example, the special winning opening winning excess error) has occurred, but the first error (eg, the big winning opening winning excess error) You may choose not to do it inside.

FIG. 240(b4-1′) is a modified example of FIG. 240(b4-1), and in the presentation (in this example, the display of the Amida lottery image) that expects the long opening of the electric Chu, the advance notice or the prefetch A notice (eg, "heat" in this example) may be displayed. It should be noted that in this state, a look-ahead notice regarding the increased hold may be given.

FIG. 240 (12c) is a modified example of FIG. 238 (12). After the big hit game end effect, the logo screen is not displayed, and a special winning opening winning excess error notification (error display E3) and a big hit game end effect are displayed. The display may be continued. Further, at this timing (timing M in FIG. 237), the display of the right-handed notification may be completed.

240 (10d) to 240 (12d) are modified examples of FIGS. 238 (10) to (12) corresponding to after the big hit game end effect (timing M in FIG. 237), and the timing after the big hit game end effect. At (timing M in FIG. 237), an effect that allows the user to select the probability variation mode to be started thereafter may be executed. For example, as shown in FIG. 240 (10d), in the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208, an image showing the buttocks mode and the princess mode, and an operation means image BG (which prompts the operation of the operation button (for example, chance button 136)). In this example, an image simulating the chance button 136) and an elapsed time notification image (meter display) TG for notifying the elapsed time (valid period) of the acceptance period of the operation button are displayed, and when the customer mode is selected. It is also possible to display an image notifying that the user has entered the control mode ((d1) in the figure) and continue the display ((12d) in the figure). During this period, the notification of the special winning opening winning excess error (error display E3) continues. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 12 (d), it is also possible to give a notification of the caution for forgetting to take the prepaid card (in this example, the display of the character "please be careful not to take the prepaid card."), The notification of the attention may not be given.

240(15e) to 240(16e) are modified examples corresponding to FIGS. 238(15) to 238(16). After the special winning opening winning excess error is released (after the big winning opening winning excess error flag is turned off), decoration is started with the start of the pattern change of the reserved special map (for example, special map 1). In the display area of the symbol display device 208 (symbol display areas 208a to 208c), behind the notification of a special winning opening winning excess error (error display E3), a symbol demo (in this example, a symbol combination of the previous big hit (for example, " Decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7") is displayed (stop display of decorative pattern) (Fig. 240 (15e)), and when variable display of the decorative pattern of the variation is started in the pattern display areas 208a to 208c, Big winning award winning error notification (error display E3) and right-handed notification over the variable display of the decorative pattern (in this example, the character "right-handed →" may be displayed large (Fig. 240 (e1))). The right-handed notification may be displayed, for example, at the time of the first big hit, etc. Then, an error cancellation command of the special winning opening winning excess error is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400. After a lapse of a certain period (for example, 33 seconds) from the error cancellation (timing N), the error notification of the special winning opening winning excess error by the first sub-control unit 400 ends, but the variable display of the decorative symbol and the right-handed notification are It is continuously displayed (Fig. 240 (16e)) Note that the right-handed notification may be displayed even when the error of the special winning opening winning excess error is released, but the right-handed notification is not displayed after the error is released. You may

FIG. 241 is a diagram showing a modification example of the effect display during the notification of the special winning opening winning excess error (error display E3) corresponding to FIGS. 238(10) to 238(14). 241(10f) and FIG. 241(11f) are the same as FIG. 238(10) and FIG. 238(11), respectively, and therefore description thereof will be omitted.

241(12f) to 241(14f) are timings corresponding to FIGS. 238(12) to 238(14). First, as shown in FIG. 241 (12f), at the timing when the big hit game ends (timing M in FIG. 237), a notification of a special winning opening winning excess error (error display E3) and a symbol demonstration (previous big hit symbol combination) (For example, the stop display of the decorative pattern "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7") may be performed.

In addition, FIG. 241 (f1-1), (f1-2) is a state following FIG. 241 (12f), and is a special figure that is suspended after the timing (timing M in FIG. 237) at which the jackpot game ends. The symbol variation of (for example, special figure 1) may be started. In this case, the symbol demonstration continues, but when the number of holdings increases, the holding icon PI (increase animation of the holding icon) may be displayed. In this case, the increase animation of the hold icon may be the same or different between the state in which the first error (for example, the special winning opening winning excess error) and the state in which the error does not occur. May be.

Further, when the first error (for example, a special winning opening winning excess error) has occurred, the hold icon increase animation may not be performed.

In addition, when the number of holdings in the special map 1 and the special drawing 2 increases at the same time, the increase animation of the holding icon may be performed in parallel at the same time, and the display of the icon corresponding to the hold that has been consumed first is started. The display of the hold icon that will be consumed later may be started. In the case of a model that preferentially consumes the hold of special figure 2 (or special figure 1) (hereinafter referred to as a priority digester), if there is a hold corresponding to the special figure that is not preferentially consumed, It may be configured to display only a hold icon of a hold (a hold corresponding to special figure 2 in the case of a special figure 2 priority extinguishing machine) corresponding to a special figure to be preferentially consumed in the support. The hold that is not preferentially consumed may be displayed. Also, in the case of the special figure 2 (or special figure 1) preferential digester, if there is a hold corresponding to a special figure that is not digested preferentially, priority is given to normal (special figure low accuracy normal figure low accuracy) during normal operation. The pending icon corresponding to the special map to be digested (for the special map 2 priority digester, the pending corresponding to the special map 2) and the special icon that is not preferentially digested (for the special map 2 priority digester, Both (holding corresponding to special figure 1) may be displayed, but it may be configured not to display the pending icon of the holding corresponding to the special figure that is preferentially consumed. In addition, regardless of the special map type, if it is a model that consumes the hold in the winning order (hereinafter referred to as the winning order digester), the hold icons corresponding to all the hold regardless of the special map type are displayed. Good. Further, it may be configured such that the hold icons corresponding to all the hold are not displayed during the power support (probable change and/or time saving).

The timing shown in FIG. 241 (13f) is the timing (timing N in FIG. 237) at which the special winning opening winning excess error flag is turned off and the big winning opening winning excess error is resolved. Further, the timing shown in (14) of the same figure is a timing after one interruption of the timing when the special winning opening winning excess error flag is turned off (timing O in FIG. 237). At this timing, since the error cancellation command of the special winning opening winning excess error is not transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400, the decorative symbol stop display and the special winning opening winning excess error error display continue. E3 continues to display.

241(f2) is a state following (12f) in FIG. As shown in the figure, when the symbol variation of the suspended special map (for example, special diagram 1) is started and the suspension is increased, the pre-reading notice suspension icon PI may be displayed.

241(f3-1) and (f3-2) are states following (12f) in the same figure. As shown in the figure, when the symbol variation of the suspended special map (for example, special diagram 1) is started and the suspension is increased, the standby animation of the suspension icon (in this example, by the character (Hani)) A standby animation of the hold icon) may be displayed. In this case, the hold icon PI may be a normal hold icon or a hold icon that gives a prefetching notice. Further, the standby animation of the hold icon may be the same or different between the state in which the first error (for example, the special winning opening winning excess error) and the state in which the error does not occur. It may be. In addition, when the first error (for example, a special winning opening winning excess error) has occurred, the standby animation of the hold icon may not be performed (for example, it may be displayed as a still image). ).

241(f4) is a state following (12f) in FIG. As shown in the figure, when the design variation of the reserved special figure (for example, special figure 1) is started and the reservation is increased, the pattern may be displayed by the light guide plate as a pre-reading notice. It should be noted that the display light emission of the pattern by the light guide plate as shown in this example may be performed during the demonstration (design demo, animation demonstration) or during the big hit end production. For example, the light guide plate may emit light to display a pattern→not display even when a special winning opening excess error occurs. In addition to the light guide plate, various production lamps may emit light in a pre-reading light emission pattern (demonstration light emission pattern). When a special winning opening winning excess error occurs, the error light emitting pattern emits light. You may do so. The brightness of the LED that irradiates the light guide plate with light may be adjusted by the brightness setting by the user.

241 (f5-1) and (f5-2) are states following (12f) in the figure. As shown in the figure, when the symbol variation of the suspended special figure (for example, special figure 1) is started and the suspension is increased, the effect movable body 224 is operated as a prefetching notice. Good. In this case, an operation (raising operation) of moving a part of the movable range of the effect movable body 224 in multiple stages may be performed, and an operation of moving the entire movable range in multiple stages. It may be one. Further, the movement may be smooth instead of the multi-step operation.

241 (f6-1) and (f6-2) are states following (12f) in the same figure. As shown in the figure, when the symbol variation of the reserved special figure (for example, special figure 1) is started, the tune may be changed. In this case, the music title may be displayed by operating the operation means (operation buttons, keys), and the music title may be deleted after a predetermined time has passed, or the music title may not be deleted (for example, unless the operation means is operated). You may Also, various effect settings (song, effect mode, etc.) may be performed. Also, the background may be changed depending on the setting of the effect mode. It should be noted that, during the notification of the special winning opening winning excess error, the music selected by the operation of the operation means may not be output from the speaker 120. Here, the notification of the special winning opening winning excess error by the speaker 120 may be configured to be continued for up to 30 seconds after the error is released, but a certain period (for example, 30 After a lapse of a second, the notification by the speaker 120 is ended, and not only the music selected by the operation of the operation means (note that the music is not limited to the music selected by the operation of the operation means, a background display and various effects (for example, a big hit round etc.) ) Corresponding to ()) may be output, or may be configured to remain silent until the error is cleared. Here, the display by the display unit and the display by the light emitting unit such as a lamp are configured to be continued until the error is canceled, but the display by the speaker 120 may be the same. Further, the music may be output at a volume lower than that in the error state. In addition, the error notification by the speaker 120 described above is not limited to the special winning opening winning excess error, but may be applicable to other errors for which the speaker 120 notifies.

FIG. 241 (12f') is a modification of the timing shown in FIG. 241 (12f). As shown in the figure, at the timing when the big hit game ends (timing M in FIG. 237), when the symbol demonstration is performed, the operation means image BG regarding the effect may be always displayed. At this timing (timing M in FIG. 237) or the like, when the operation button (for example, the chance button 136) cannot be operated, the operation means image BG is displayed in gray or the like, and the operation button acceptance period is displayed. The elapsed time notification image (meter display) TG for notifying the elapsed time may be hidden to indicate that the operation button cannot be operated.

FIG. 242 is a diagram showing another example of the effect during the notification of the special winning opening winning error (error display E3). First, FIG. 242 (f7-1), (f7-2) is a state following FIG. 241 (12f), in the case where the notification of the special winning opening winning excess error (error display E3) and the symbol demonstration are displayed. Alternatively, the back button effect may be executed. In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 242 (f7-1), the operation means image BG and the elapsed time notification image (meter display) TG are displayed. By operating the button (operation means, chance button 136), the back button effect (animation in which the character (Hani) appears in this example) may be executed as shown in FIG. 242 (f7-2). ..

In addition, FIG. 242 (f8) is a state following FIG. 241 (12f), and when the notification of the special winning opening winning excess error (error display E3) and the symbol demo are displayed, the special figure being held is held. If, for example, the symbol variation of (Special figure 1) is started and the number of holdings is increased, a look-ahead notice is given by the display (animation). Is also good.

In addition, FIG. 242 (f9) is a state following FIG. 241 (12f), and when the notification of the special winning opening winning excess error (error display E3) and the symbol demo are displayed, the special figure being held is held. In the case where the symbol variation of (for example, special figure 1) is started and the number of holdings is increased, the pre-reading notice may be combined. For example, as shown in the figure, the pre-reading notice by the display (animation) (in this example, the animation in which the character “intense heat is approaching” moves) and the pre-reading notice by the hold icon may be given.

Further, FIGS. 242 (11g) to (12g) correspond to FIGS. 238 (11) to 196 (12). The timing shown in FIG. 242 (11g) is a state in which the big hit game has ended (timing M in FIG. 237), and in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special winning opening is exceeded in excess of the demo screen (logo screen). This is a state in which an error notification (error display E3) is being performed. Further, in this example, in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208, another display device (for example, a liquid crystal display device (sub liquid crystal display device) D) is provided. The liquid crystal display device D includes a frame portion D1 (shown by hatching) that defines the outer shape thereof and a display area D2 inside the frame portion D1, and performs various effects (display) in the display area D2. The liquid crystal display device D may be a movable decoration unit configured to be movable, or may be configured to be immovable.

FIG. 242(g-1) is a modified example of the same figure (11g), and one or a related image is displayed using two display areas of the decorative pattern display device 208 and another liquid crystal display device D. You may In this case, the notification of the special winning opening winning excess error (error display E3) may be performed by the decorative symbol display device 208, the liquid crystal display device D, or both.

Further, FIG. 242 (12g) is a state following the same figure (g-1) (timing when the big hit game ends (timing M in FIG. 237)), and the decorative symbol display device 208 and another liquid crystal display device D. Different images may be displayed in each of the two display areas. Here, an example is shown in which a decorative symbol display device 208 displays a symbol demo and another liquid crystal display device D displays a hold icon. In this case, the notification of the special winning opening winning excess error (error display E3) may be performed by the decorative symbol display device 208, the liquid crystal display device D, or both.

The display in each display area of the decorative pattern display device 208 and the other liquid crystal display device D of FIG. 242(g-1) (the image in which the sliding doors are closed here) is changed from the same figure (11g) to the same figure (12g). This is a display during the transition. In this way, when the display behind it is changed while the notification of the special winning opening winning error (error display E3) is being executed (here, from the logo image shown in FIG. When the display is changed to the stop display of the decorative pattern shown in ), a transition display (for example, an image in which the sliding doors are closed in FIG. 242(g-1)) may be displayed between the two. The display for transition (for example, the display in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 in FIG. 242(g-1)) is also applicable to the case where the liquid crystal display device D is not provided.

FIG. 243 shows, for example, a special winning opening excess error in a pachinko machine 100 having two big winning openings (first attacker 802 and second attacker 804) as shown in FIG. Fluctuating/stopping state of the figure, operating/non-operating state of the accessory continuous operation device and condition device, special winning opening 2 Solenoid drive (open)/stop (closed) state, special electric accessory (special electricity role 2 ) Is activated/not activated, the special signal role 2 operating signal (for testing) is activated/not activated, the special electricity role 2 winning detection timer is set/not set, and provided on the second attacker 804. Sphere detection sensor 320 (count switch SW2) valid/invalid state, probability variation region solenoid drive (open)/stop (closed) state, probability variation region valid/invalid state, special winning opening 1 solenoid drive ( Open/stop (closed) state, special electric auditors' product (special electric component 1) activated/non-activated, special electric component 1 operating signal (for test) activated/non-activated, special electric component 1 prize The detection timer is set/not set, the ball detection sensor 320 (count switch SW1) provided in the first attacker 802 is enabled/disabled, the special winning opening winning excess error flag, the security information signal, and the first sub 7 is an example of a timing chart of notification of a special winning opening excess error in the control unit 400. In this example, in a certain round during the big hit game (between timing (2) and timing (4)), a special winning opening winning excess error is detected.

As shown in the figure, for example, at a certain timing (1), the accessory continuous operation device and the condition device are changed from the non-operation state to the operation state, and the big hit game is started.

Then, at the timing (2) during the big hit game, the special electric combination 2 is changed from the non-operating state to the operating state. In addition, in this embodiment, the special electric power combination 1 and the special electric power combination 2 do not operate simultaneously. Then, at this timing, the special winning opening 2 solenoid is also driven (opened) to open the second attacker 804. Further, the count switch SW2 is changed from the invalid state to the valid state at the timing when the special electric host 2 is activated. As a result, when the game ball that has entered the second attacker 804 passes through the count switch SW2, this is effectively detected, and it is possible to treat it as one that has been effectively won in the second attacker 804.

Further, at this timing (2), the special electric wheel combination 2 operating signal (for testing) is also activated, and the probability variation region solenoid is driven (opened) to change the probability variation region from the invalid state to the valid state.

At the timing (3) after the second attacker 804 is opened, the special electric prize combination 1 winning detection timer is changed from the set state to the non-set state, and the count switch SW1 is changed from the valid state to the invalid state. As described above, in the present embodiment, the count switch SW1 is in the valid state until the period (timing (3)) set by the special electric prize combination 1 winning detection timer elapses after the second attacker 804 is opened. Therefore, when the second attacker 804 is in the open state, the game ball that entered the first attacker 802 in the previous round may pass through the count switch SW1 and be detected as a prize. is there. The count switch SW2 may be changed from the invalid state to the valid state at the timing when the second attacker 804 is first opened after the round starts.

After that, when the winning of the above-mentioned maximum winning number of game balls to the second attacker 804 or the opening timer set by the set special electricity combination operation data has elapsed, the special winning opening 2 solenoid of the timing (4) The driving is stopped (closed) and the second attacker 804 is closed. At this time, a special electric role combination interval timer (a timer that sets a period for detecting the remaining ball, for example, 100 ms) is set, and a special electric prize winning detection timer (special electric part 2 winning detection timer) related to the second attacker 804. ) Is set to a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds). In the present embodiment, in the state in which the special electric winning combination 2 winning detection timer is set, the count switch SW2 is maintained in the valid state even after the special electric winning combination 2 is deactivated. Note that the special electric host 2 is in the operating state even after the second attacker 804 is closed until the round is completed, that is, until the period (for example, 100 ms) set by the special electric device operating interval timer elapses. Has become.

Timing (5) is a timing at which the special electric wire combination 2 changes from the operating state to the non-operating state after the period set by the special electric wire combination operation interval timer has elapsed, and the round ends. At this timing, the special electric component combination operation delay timer is set, the special electric component combination 2 operating signal (for testing) also changes from the operating state to the non-operating state, the probability variation region solenoid stops driving (closes), and the probability variation region is disabled from the valid state. It becomes a state. In this example, the probability variation region solenoid has an open state (for example, opening for 100 ms) → a closed state (for example, closing for 1400 ms) → an open state (for example, between timing (2) and timing (3), for example. , 28000 ms), and the probability variation region continues to be valid during this period.

Further, in this example, the special winning opening winning excess error is detected between the timing (2) and the timing (3), and the special winning opening winning excess error flag is turned on at the timing (5), and at the same time, the security information is displayed. The signal turns on.

Timing (6) is the timing at which the first sub-control unit 400 starts the error notification of the special winning opening winning excess error.

Timing (7) is the timing at which the next round is started after the period of the special electric power combination operation delay timer set in timing (5) has elapsed, and the special electric power combination 1 has changed from the non-activated state to the activated state. At this timing, the special winning opening 1 solenoid is also driven, the first attacker 802 is opened, the special electric signal 1 operating signal (for testing) is changed from the non-operating state to the operating state, and the count switch SW1 is changed to the special electric portion 1 The state changes from the invalid state to the valid state when is activated.

At a timing (8) after the first attacker 802 is opened, the special electric prize combination 2 winning detection timer is changed from the set state to the non-set state, and the count switch SW2 is changed from the valid state to the invalid state. As described above, in this embodiment, the count switch SW1 is in the valid state until the period (timing (8)) set by the special electric prize combination 2 winning detection timer elapses after the first attacker 802 is opened. Therefore, when the first attacker 802 is in the open state, the game ball that entered the second attacker 804 in the previous round may pass through the count switch SW2 and be detected as a prize. is there.

It should be noted that, if the same special electric wire combination operation data (“special electric wire combination operation data 1”) is used by the first attacker 802 and the second attacker 804, the opening time of the first attacker 802 and the opening time of the second attacker 804 are the same. And will be the same time. Further, different opening times may be set for the first attacker 802 and the second attacker 804 so as to set different special electricity operation data, or the first attacker 802 and the second attacker 804 may be set differently. Of the 804, the special electric power combination operation data used only in either one may be prepared.

After that, when the award of the above-mentioned maximum winning number of game balls to the first attacker 802 or the opening timer set by the set special electricity combination operation data has elapsed, the special winning opening 1 solenoid of the timing (9) The drive is stopped (closed) and the first attacker 802 is closed. At this time, a special electricity role operating interval timer (for example, 100 ms) is set, and a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) is set for the special electricity prize winning detection timer (special electricity role 1 winning detection timer) related to the first attacker 802. It In the present embodiment, in the state in which the special electric prize combination 1 winning detection timer is set, the count switch SW1 is maintained in the valid state even after the special electric prize combination 1 is deactivated. It should be noted that the special electric host 1 is in an operating state even after the first attacker 802 is closed until the round ends, that is, until the period (for example, 100 ms) set by the special electric device operating interval timer elapses. Has become.

Timing (10) is the timing when the period set by the special electricity combination operation interval timer elapses, the special electricity combination 1 changes from the activated state to the inoperative state, and the round ends. At this timing, the special electricity combination operation delay timer is set, and the special electricity combination 1 operating signal (for testing) also changes from the activated state to the inactivated state.

Timing (11) is the timing at which the next round is started after the period of the special electric power combination operation delay timer set at timing (10) has elapsed, and the special electric power combination 2 is changed from the non-activated state to the activated state. At this timing, the special winning opening 2 solenoid is also driven so that the second variable winning opening 234 is opened, and the count switch SW2 is changed from the invalid state to the valid state at the timing when the special electric prize combination 2 is activated.

At a timing (12) after the second attacker 804 is opened, the special electric prize combination 1 winning detection timer is changed from the set state to the non-set state, and the count switch SW1 is changed from the valid state to the invalid state.

After that, when the award of the above-mentioned maximum winning number of game balls to the second attacker 804 or the opening timer set by the set special electricity combination operation data elapses, at the timing (13), the special winning opening 2 solenoid The driving is stopped (closed) and the second attacker 804 is closed. At this time, the special electric prize combination operation interval timer (for example, 100 ms) is set, and a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) is set for the special electric prize combination winning detection timer (special electric prize 2 winning detection timer) related to the second attacker 804. It

Timing (14) is the timing when the period set by the special electricity combination operation interval timer elapses, the electricity generation device 2 goes from the operating state to the non-operating state, and the round ends. At this timing, the special electricity combination operation delay timer is set, and the special electricity combination 2 operating signal (for testing) also changes from the activated state to the inactivated state.

Timing (15) is the timing at which the next round is started after the period of the special electric power combination operation delay timer set at timing (14) has elapsed, and the special electric power combination 1 has changed from the non-activated state to the activated state. At this timing, the special winning opening 1 solenoid is also driven, the first attacker 802 is opened, the special electric signal 1 operating signal (for testing) is changed from the non-operating state to the operating state, and the count switch SW1 is changed to the special electric portion 1 The state changes from the invalid state to the valid state when is activated.

Timing (16) is a big winning opening due to the winning of the above-mentioned maximum number of game balls to the second attacker 804 in the final round, or the passage of the open timer set by the set special electricity combination operation data. This is the timing when the driving of the two solenoids is stopped (closed) and the second attacker 804 is closed. At this time, the special electric prize combination operation interval timer (for example, 100 ms) is set, and a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) is set for the special electric prize combination winning detection timer (special electric prize 2 winning detection timer) related to the second attacker 804. It

Timing (17) is a timing at which the special round combination 2 is changed from the activated state to the non-activated state after the period set by the special electricity combination operation interval timer has passed, and the final round is finished. At this timing, the special electricity combination operation delay timer is set, and the special electricity combination 2 operating signal (for testing) also changes from the activated state to the inactivated state.

Timing (18) is a timing at which the big hit game ends, when the accessory continuous operation device and the condition device have changed from the operating state to the non-operating state.

Timing (19) is a timing at which the symbol variation of the next special symbol starts with the end of the big hit game, as shown by the broken line according to the conventional pachinko machine, but in this embodiment, at this timing Since the special winning opening winning excess error flag remains on, the symbol variation of the special figure remains stopped at the timing (19).

244 to FIG. 246 are diagrams showing, in time series, an example of the effect display on the decorative symbol display device 208 when the special winning opening winning excess error occurs in the effect display example shown in FIG. 202. The pachinko machine 100 shown in FIGS. 244 to 246 has, as an example, a first attacker 802, a second attacker 804, and a probability variation region (probability variation operation region 808) as shown in FIG. A symbol (for example, "Special figure A") is stopped in a stop symbol mode as shown in FIG.

The timings shown in FIGS. 244(5a) to 244(7a) correspond to the timings shown in FIGS. 202(5) to 202(7). In addition, in this example, it is assumed that a special winning opening winning excess error occurs in the fourth round of the big hit game.

The timing shown in (5a) of the same figure shows the state where the 4R of the big hit game has started. At this timing, the V winning suggestion effect (here, the characters "Aim for the V attacker!!" and the arrow pointing to the lower right indicating the position of the attacker unit 810) is continuously performed.

The timing shown in (6a) of the same figure, in the 4R of the big hit game, shows the state where the game ball has entered the probability variation operating region 808 (the state where V has been won). At this timing, an effect for notifying that the V prize has been won (here, the character "V" is displayed) is suggested, and it is suggested that the state will be changed after the jackpot game is over.

The timing shown in (a0) of the figure shows a state in which the 4th round of the big hit game has ended, and the effect of notifying that the V winning has been continued is continuously performed.

At the timing shown in the figure (a1), after the 4th round of the big hit game, the error display E3 for notifying a special winning opening winning excess error is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. At this timing, an error display E3 for notifying a special winning opening winning excess error is displayed in addition to the effect for notifying that the V winning has been won.

The timing shown in the same figure (a2) shows the state where the 5R of the big hit game has started, and the error display E3 for notifying a big winning opening winning excess error is overlaid on the effect of notifying that the V winning has been won. it's shown.

The timing shown in the figure (7a) shows the state where the 6th round of the big hit game has started, and the error display E3 for notifying the big winning mouth winning excess error is continuously displayed in addition to the round effect after the V winning. ing.

The timing shown in FIG. 10 (10a) shows a state in which the big hit game ends, and a big hit end display (in this example, the display of "Yoshimune RUSH plunge!!") as an effect to notify the end of the big hit game. In addition, the error display E3 for informing of the special winning opening winning excess error is continuously displayed. The timing shown in (a3) of the figure is a state following the timing shown in (10) of the figure, and shows a state in which the special winning opening winning excess error has not been released. In this way, when the special winning opening winning excess error is not cancelled, the big winning end display and the error display E3 are displayed and stopped, and the symbol variation of the next special symbol is not started.

FIG. 245 is a diagram showing, in time series, an example of the effect display when a special winning opening winning excess error occurs in the fourth round, for example, after the second consecutive channel in the effect display example shown in FIG. 202.

The same figure (1b) has shown the state where the hit production is started, in this example, the letter of “super Yoshimune bonus” is displayed in the display area of decorative design display 208.

The timing shown in (2b) of the figure is a state in which execution of the round effect is started. This round effect is, for example, an effect in which a character introduction effect display is executed during the effect. In this example, a round effect is performed near the center of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the number of big hits (the number of consecutive holidays) is displayed above the display area (here, “BONUS×1” is displayed) and the winning ball. A number display and a round display (here, "1R" display) are performed.

The timing shown in (b1) of the figure is a state in which the round effect is being executed when the third round is finished. At this timing, a display indicating that the attacker unit 810 will be released from the next round (4R) (in this example, the characters "Aim at the V attacker in the next round" and the arrow pointing to the lower right) is displayed. ..

The timing shown in (5b) of the figure is a state in which the round effect started in the fourth round is being executed. At this timing, a display for notifying that the attacker unit 810 is open (in this example, the characters "Aim for the V attacker!!" and the arrow pointing to the lower right) is displayed.

The timing shown in (b2) of the figure shows the state in which the fourth round has ended, and an effect of notifying that the V winning has been won (here, the display of the character "V" in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208). )It is carried out.

At the timing shown in (b3) of the figure, after the end of the fourth round, an error display E3 for notifying a special winning opening winning excess error is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. At this timing, an error display E3 for notifying a special winning opening winning excess error is displayed in addition to the effect for notifying that the V winning has been won.

The timing shown in (b4) of the figure shows the state in which the fifth round has started, and the error display E3 for notifying the special winning opening winning excess error is continuously displayed in addition to the effect for notifying that the V winning has been won. ing.

The timing shown in (7b) of the same figure shows the state in which the sixth round has started, and the song selection effect is displayed to display the so-called button and song title to inform the player that it is possible to select a song. ing. Even in this state, the error display E3 for notifying the special winning opening winning excess error is continuously displayed in addition to the music selection effect.

When the player operates the operation button (key) as shown in (b5) of the figure in the state where the music selection effect shown in (7b) of the figure is being performed, it is displayed as shown in (b6) of the figure. (Selectable) song changes. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 7B, the selectable song titles are displayed as “Kiseki no Universe” in the upper row and “Kimi no Kakera” in the lower row. As shown in (b6), "Kimi no Kakera" moves to the upper row and "May be there" is displayed in the lower row as the selectable song titles. When the operation is performed, the selected song may be played from the timing of operation, or the selected song from the next round may be played. May be configured such that when the round in which a song can be selected ends, the song selected at the end of the round starts in the next round. Only, the song played from the next round may be determined.

It should be noted that during the notification of the special winning opening winning excess error, the song (song) selected by the operation of the operating device may not be output from the speaker 120. Here, the notification of the special winning opening winning excess error by the speaker 120 may be configured to be continued for up to 30 seconds after the error is released, but a certain period (for example, 30 After a lapse of a second, the notification by the speaker 120 is ended, and not only the music selected by the operation of the operation means (note that the music is not limited to the music selected by the operation of the operation means, a background display and various effects (for example, a big hit round etc.) ) Corresponding to ()) may be output, or may be configured to remain silent until the error is cleared. Here, the display by the display unit and the display by the light emitting unit such as a lamp are configured to be continued until the error is canceled, but the display by the speaker 120 may be the same. Further, the music may be output at a volume lower than that in the error state. Not only at the time of notifying the special winning opening winning error, but also during the change of the symbol or during the big hit, the music selection effect as shown in FIG. 7B to FIG. 6B may be executed. ..

The timing shown in (b7) of the figure shows the state in which the seventh round has started, and in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, character introduction effects (switch display for character introduction (for example, a book is opened). (The image of the state and the display of the character of “character introduction”) have started.Also in this state, the error display E3 for notifying the special winning opening winning excess error is continuously displayed in addition to the character introduction effect. ..

The timing shown in (b8) of the figure shows the state in which the 16th round, which is the final round, has ended, and in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the character introduction effect (in this example, the introduction of the character "Yoshimune") is introduced. Production) has started. Even in this state, the error display E3 for notifying the special winning opening winning excess error is continuously displayed in addition to the character introduction effect. It should be noted that the character introduction effect may not be executed during the special winning opening excess error. The effect during the round is not limited to the character introduction effect, and may be an animation or a moving image corresponding to the music being played.

As described above, when the winning hole winning excess error is not canceled, the error display E3 for notifying the large winning hole winning excess error is displayed over a plurality of rounds.

The timing shown in (10b) of the figure shows a state where the big hit game is finished, a big hit end display (here, "Yoshimune RUSH continuation!!") is displayed, and the big winning a prize winning is overlapped with this. The error display E3 for notifying the excess error is continuously displayed. The song selected during the big hit may be played as it is after the big hit ends.

In this way, the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment detects a special winning opening winning excess error for each round, and when the error occurs and the error is not released, the main control unit 300 determines the big hit ( Even if the (big hit game) ends, it is configured not to start the symbol variation control. In the example shown in FIG. 245, when the special winning opening winning excess error is detected even in the final round of 16 rounds (when the large winning opening winning excess error is not canceled even in 16 rounds), the same (b8) of FIG. The display is stopped in the state, and the main control unit 300 does not start the symbol variation control (the main control unit 300 does not start the control of the symbol variation of the special figure (Special figure 1 or Special figure 2) that is held).

Here, the "big hit game finished state" will be further described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 243. At a timing (17), it is determined that the special winning opening winning excess error has occurred, and the number of entered balls and the number of discharged coins match. If not (the number of balls> the number of discharges), it is determined that there is a big winning opening winning excess error (the error continues), the special electric role 2 falls from the operating state to the non-operating state, the big hit game The state in which is completed corresponds to FIG. 245 (b8). That is, in this state, the fluctuation of the special figure is stopped, and the main control unit 300 does not perform the symbol fluctuation control.

As described above, in the processing flow described with reference to FIGS. 203 to 228 of the present embodiment, “the state where the big hit game is finished” can be said to be the state where the big hit game is finished on the main control unit 300 side.

Even when the special electric host 2 falls from the operating state to the non-operating state at the timing (17) in the timing chart of FIG. 243, it is possible that the jackpot game in the main control unit 300 is not finished. .. For example, if the determination in step S1701 of the remaining sphere detection processing shown in FIG. 223 is “No”, the special electric host 2 falls from the operating state to the non-operating state at timing (17) in the timing chart of FIG. 243. However, before step S1703, it is determined whether or not there is a special winning opening winning excess error, and if a big winning opening winning excess error has occurred, the process is terminated, If a prize winning excess error has occurred, the special electric hand combination operation is not ended, but the remaining ball detection state is maintained. Further, after step S1705, it is determined whether or not there is a special winning opening prize excess error, and if a special winning opening prize excess error has occurred, even if the processing is terminated, If a prize winning excess error has occurred, the process ends. On the other hand, since the special winning opening winning excess error is also determined in step S705 of the special drawing state updating processing shown in FIG. 211, even when it is determined that the special winning opening winning excess error is detected in the special drawing status updating processing, The control unit 300 can be configured not to perform the symbol variation control at the end of the big hit game. That is, before the step S1907 of the hit end display weight processing of FIG. 225, it is determined whether or not there is a special winning opening winning excess error, and if the big winning opening winning excess error has occurred, the processing ends. By doing so, the special figure processing state is not set to the “variation waiting state”, so that the main control unit 300 can be in a state where the big hit game is not finished. On the other hand, for example, by determining a special winning opening winning excess error after step S1907 of the winning end display weight processing, the special figure processing state is set to the "variation waiting state", so that the big winning is finished. be able to.

Further, "the big hit ends" in the present embodiment may be when the external terminal board signal output during the big hit is turned off, or when the accessory continuous operation device is turned off. .. Further, in the present embodiment, "the big hit ends" means that when the big hit end is a time shortening or a probable change, it means that the ordinary figure low probability state (during big hit) becomes the ordinary figure high probability state. Of course, the special map low probability state (during a big hit) may be the special map high probability state. Also, in the case of a model that left-handed after the big hit, when the notification means for notifying the right-handing ends the notification of the right-handing (for example, when the right-handing lamp is turned off from the lighting state) Good.

FIG. 246 is a diagram showing a modification of FIG. 245. FIG. 246(b7-2) shows the timing following FIG. 245(b7). For example, in the seventh round, a special winning opening winning excess error is superimposed on the character introduction effect (switch display for character introduction). In the case where the error display E3 for notifying is displayed, if the special winning opening winning excess error is canceled, the error display E3 for notifying the special winning opening excess error is not displayed. In this case, the character introduction effect (switch display for character introduction) is continuously displayed, and thereafter, normal effect display is executed. That is, as shown in FIG. 10B, when the big hit ends, a big hit end display (here, the character "Yoshimune RUSH continues!") is displayed, and the next variable display of decorative symbols is executed. ..

Also, FIG. 246(b7-3) shows the timing following FIG. 245(b7). For example, in the seventh round, the special winning opening prize is overlaid on the character introduction effect (switch display for character introduction). The QR code (registered trademark) may be displayed when the error display E3 for notifying the excess error is displayed. In this example, as shown in FIG. 246(b7-3), a notification suggesting the display of the QR code (registered trademark) (in this example, "A chance button is operated at the bottom of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, When the player operates the chance button 136, the QR code (registered trademark) is displayed at the lower right of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208. To do. Also in this case, when the special winning opening winning excess error has occurred (is not canceled), the error display E3 for notifying the special winning opening winning excess error is continued. In this case, another operation (for example, setting operation for volume adjustment, brightness adjustment, song change, selection effect image change, or the like) may be allowed, or the setting operation may not be allowed.

FIG. 247 is a patrol machine 100 having two special winning openings (first attacker 802 and second attacker 804), when the special winning opening excess error occurs, the state of fluctuation/stop of the special figure, Conditional device continuous operating device and condition device operating/not operating condition, special winning opening 2 solenoid driving (opening)/stopping (closing) condition, special electric auditors product (special electricity role 2) operating/not operating condition , Activated/non-activated state of the in-use signal (for testing) of the special electric role 2, special state electric prize 2 winning detection timer setting/non-setting state, a ball detection sensor 320 (count switch provided on the second attacker 804) SW2) valid/invalid state, probability variation area solenoid drive (open)/stop (closed) status, probability variation area valid/invalid state, special winning opening 1 solenoid drive (open)/stop (closed) State, special electric auditors (special electricity role 1) activated/non-activated state, special electricity role 1 operating signal (for test) activated/not activated state, special electricity role 1 winning detection timer set/not set State, enabled/disabled state of the ball detection sensor 320 (count switch SW1) provided in the first attacker 802, special winning opening winning excess flag, security information signal and big winning opening in the first sub-control unit 400 7 is another example of a timing chart for reporting an excess error. In this example, in a certain round during the big hit game (between timing (2) and timing (4)), a special winning opening winning excess error is detected.

As shown in the figure, for example, at a certain timing (1), the accessory continuous operation device and the condition device are changed from the non-operation state to the operation state, and the big hit game is started.

Then, at the timing (2) during the big hit game, the special electric combination 2 is changed from the non-operating state to the operating state. In addition, in this embodiment, the special electric power combination 1 and the special electric power combination 2 do not operate simultaneously. Then, at this timing, the special winning opening 2 solenoid is also driven (opened) to open the second attacker 804. Further, the count switch SW2 is changed from the invalid state to the valid state at the timing when the special electric host 2 is activated. As a result, when the game ball that has entered the second attacker 804 passes through the count switch SW2, this is effectively detected, and it is possible to treat it as one that has been effectively won in the second attacker 804.

Further, at this timing (2), the special electric wheel combination 2 operating signal (for testing) is also activated, and the probability variation region solenoid is driven (opened) to change the probability variation region from the invalid state to the valid state.

At the timing (3) after the second attacker 804 is opened, the special electric prize combination 1 winning detection timer is changed from the set state to the non-set state, and the count switch SW1 is changed from the valid state to the invalid state. As described above, in the present embodiment, the count switch SW1 is in the valid state until the period (timing (3)) set by the special electric prize combination 1 winning detection timer elapses after the second attacker 804 is opened. Therefore, when the second attacker 804 is in the open state, the game ball that entered the first attacker 802 in the previous round may pass through the count switch SW1 and be detected as a prize. is there. The count switch SW2 may be changed from the invalid state to the valid state at the timing when the second attacker 804 is first opened after the round starts.

After that, when the winning of the above-mentioned maximum winning number of game balls to the second attacker 804 or the opening timer set by the set special electricity combination operation data has elapsed, the special winning opening 2 solenoid of the timing (4) The driving is stopped (closed) and the second attacker 804 is closed. At this time, the special electricity role operating interval timer (for example, 20 ms) is set, and a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) is set for the special electricity prize winning detection timer (special electricity role 2 winning detection timer) related to the second attacker 804. It In the present embodiment, in the state in which the special electric winning combination 2 winning detection timer is set, the count switch SW2 is maintained in the valid state even after the special electric winning combination 2 is deactivated. Note that the special electric host 2 is in the operating state even after the second attacker 804 is closed until the round is completed, that is, until the period (for example, 100 ms) set by the special electric device operating interval timer elapses. Has become.

Timing (5) is a timing at which the special electric wire combination 2 changes from the operating state to the non-operating state after the period set by the special electric wire combination operation interval timer has elapsed, and the round ends. At this timing, the special electric wheel operation delay timer is set, and the probability variation region solenoid stops driving (closes). In this example, the probability variation region solenoid is in the open state→closed state→open state between the timing (2) and the timing (3), for example, and the probability variation region continues to be in the valid state. ..

Further, in this example, the special winning opening winning excess error is detected between the timing (2) and the timing (3), and the special winning opening winning excess error flag is turned on at the timing (5), and at the same time, the security information is displayed. The signal turns on.

Timing (6) is the timing at which the first sub-control unit 400 starts the error notification of the special winning opening winning excess error.

Timing (7) is the timing at which the next round is started after the period of the special electric power combination operation delay timer set in timing (5) has elapsed, and the special electric power combination 1 has changed from the non-activated state to the activated state. At this timing, the special winning opening 1 solenoid is also driven, and the first attacker 802 is opened, and the count switch SW1 is changed from the invalid state to the valid state at the timing when the special electric hand 1 is activated. In addition, in this example, at this timing (7), the special electric power combination 1 operating signal (for testing) also changes from the non-operating state to the operating state.

The timing (a) is a timing at which the special electric wire combination 2 operating signal (for testing) changes from the operating state to the non-operational state after the special electric power combination 2 becomes the non-operating state at the timing (5). In this example, since the special electric wire combination operation interval timer set at timing (4) is as short as 20 ms (the special electric wire combination operation interval timer in the timing chart shown in FIG. 243 is 100 ms, for example), in order to prevent missing of the signal, For a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) after the 2 variable winning a prize port (second attacker) 235 is closed, the test signal is added to the special electric officer 2 operating signal and output (probability variation region shown in FIGS. 209 and 210). (See step S637 of the related setting process).

As a result, after the timing (5) at which the special electric wire combination 2 is not activated, the special electric wire combination 2 operating signal (for testing) becomes inactive at the timing (a), and the probability variation region is changed from the valid state in accordance with this. It becomes invalid.

At a timing (8) after the first attacker 802 is opened, the special electric prize combination 2 winning detection timer is changed from the set state to the non-set state, and the count switch SW2 is changed from the valid state to the invalid state. As described above, in this embodiment, the count switch SW1 is in the valid state until the period (timing (8)) set by the special electric prize combination 2 winning detection timer elapses after the first attacker 802 is opened. Therefore, when the first attacker 802 is in the open state, the game ball that entered the second attacker 804 in the previous round may pass through the count switch SW2 and be detected as a prize. is there.

It should be noted that, if the same special electric wire combination operation data (“special electric wire combination operation data 1”) is used by the first attacker 802 and the second attacker 804, the opening time of the first attacker 802 and the opening time of the second attacker 804 are the same. And will be the same time. Further, different opening times may be set for the first attacker 802 and the second attacker 804 so as to set different special electricity operation data, or the first attacker 802 and the second attacker 804 may be set differently. Of the 804, the special electric power combination operation data used only in either one may be prepared.

After that, when the award of the above-mentioned maximum winning number of game balls to the first attacker 802 or the opening timer set by the set special electricity combination operation data has elapsed, the special winning opening 1 solenoid of the timing (9) The drive is stopped (closed) and the first attacker 802 is closed. At this time, the special electricity role operating interval timer (for example, 20 ms) is set, and a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) is set for the special electricity role winning detection timer (special electricity role 1 winning detection timer) related to the first attacker 802. It In the present embodiment, in the state in which the special electric prize combination 1 winning detection timer is set, the count switch SW1 is maintained in the valid state even after the special electric prize combination 1 is deactivated. It should be noted that, even after the first attacker 802 is closed, the special electric vehicle 1 is in an operating state until the round ends, that is, until a period (for example, 20 ms) set by the special electric vehicle operating interval timer elapses. Has become.

Timing (10) is the timing when the period set by the special electricity combination operation interval timer elapses, the special electricity combination 1 changes from the activated state to the inoperative state, and the round ends. At this timing, the special electric wheel combination operation delay timer is set.

Timing (11) is the timing at which the next round is started after the period of the special electric power combination operation delay timer set at timing (10) has elapsed, and the special electric power combination 2 is changed from the non-activated state to the activated state. At this timing, the special winning opening 2 solenoid is also driven, the second variable winning opening 234 is opened, the special electric prize 2 working signal (for testing) is changed from the non-operating state to the operating state, and the count switch SW2 is in the invalid state. From the valid state.

The timing (b) is a timing at which the special electric wire combination 1 operating signal (for testing) changes from the operating state to the non-operational state after the special electric power combination 1 becomes the non-operational state at the timing (10). In this example, the special electricity role operating interval timer set at the timing (9) is short, for example, 20 ms (the special electricity role operating interval timer in the timing chart shown in FIG. 243 is, for example, 100 ms). For a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) after the 1-variable winning opening (first attacker) 234 is closed, the test signal is added to the special electricity combination 1 operating signal and output (probability variation region shown in FIGS. 209 and 210). (See step S637 of the related setting process).

As a result, after the timing (10) at which the special electric wire combination 1 is inactive, the special electric wire combination 1 in-operation signal (for testing) becomes inactive at the timing (b).

At a timing (12) after the second attacker 804 is opened, the special electric prize combination 1 winning detection timer is changed from the set state to the non-set state, and the count switch SW1 is changed from the valid state to the invalid state.

After that, when the award of the above-mentioned maximum winning number of game balls to the second attacker 804 or the opening timer set by the set special electricity combination operation data elapses, at the timing (13), the special winning opening 2 solenoid The driving is stopped (closed) and the second attacker 804 is closed. At this time, the special electricity role operating interval timer (for example, 20 ms) is set, and a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) is set to the special electricity role winning detection timer (special electricity role 2 winning detection timer) related to the second attacker 804. It

Timing (14) is the timing when the period set by the special electricity combination operation interval timer elapses, the electricity generation device 2 goes from the operating state to the non-operating state, and the round ends. At this timing, the special electric wheel operation delay timer is set.

Timing (15) is the timing at which the next round is started after the period of the special electric power combination operation delay timer set at timing (14) has elapsed, and the special electric power combination 1 has changed from the non-activated state to the activated state. At this timing, the special winning opening 1 solenoid is also driven, and the first attacker 802 is opened, and the count switch SW1 is changed from the invalid state to the valid state at the timing when the special electric hand 1 is activated. Further, the special electric gear 1 in-operation signal (for testing) also changes from the non-operation state to the operation state at this timing.

FIG. 248 is a variation/stop state of the special figure when the special winning opening excess error occurs in the pachinko machine 100 having the two special winning openings (the first attacker 802 and the second attacker 804). Object continuous operation device and condition device operation / non-operation state, special winning opening 2 solenoid drive (open) / stop (closed) state, special electric auditors (special electricity role 2) operation / non-operation state, Tokudenkaku 2 active signal (for testing) activated/not-activated, Tokudenkaku 2 winning detection timer setting/not set, second attacker 804 ball detection sensor 320 (count switch SW2) ) Valid/invalid state, probability variation area solenoid drive (open)/stop (closed) status, probability variation area valid/invalid state, special winning opening 1 solenoid drive (open)/stop (closed) status , Special electric auditors (special electricity role 1) activated/non-activated state, special electricity role 1 operating signal (for test) activated/not activated state, special electricity role 1 winning detection timer set/unset state , A valid/invalid state of the ball detection sensor 320 (count switch SW1) provided in the first attacker 802, a special winning opening winning excess error flag, a security information signal, and a big winning opening winning excess in the first sub-control unit 400. It is another example of a timing chart of error notification.Here, a case where the same attacker (for example, the second attacker 804) is released for a short time will be described.In this example, a certain round during a big hit game is played. During (between timing (2) and timing (4)), a special winning opening winning excess error is detected.

As shown in the figure, for example, at a certain timing (1), the accessory continuous operation device and the condition device are changed from the non-operation state to the operation state, and the big hit game is started.

Then, at the timing (2) during the big hit game, the special electric combination 2 is changed from the non-operating state to the operating state. In addition, in this embodiment, the special electric power combination 1 and the special electric power combination 2 do not operate simultaneously. Then, at this timing, the special winning opening 2 solenoid is also driven (opened) to open the second attacker 804. Further, the count switch SW2 is changed from the invalid state to the valid state at the timing when the special electric host 2 is activated. As a result, when the game ball that has entered the second attacker 804 passes through the count switch SW2, this is effectively detected, and it is possible to treat it as one that has been effectively won in the second attacker 804.

Further, at this timing (2), the special electric wheel combination 2 operating signal (for testing) is also activated, and the probability variation region solenoid is driven (opened) to change the probability variation region from the invalid state to the valid state.

At the timing (3) after the second attacker 804 is opened, the special electric prize combination 1 winning detection timer is changed from the set state to the non-set state, and the count switch SW1 is changed from the valid state to the invalid state. As described above, in the present embodiment, the count switch SW1 is in the valid state until the period (timing (3)) set by the special electric prize combination 1 winning detection timer elapses after the second attacker 804 is opened. Therefore, when the second attacker 804 is in the open state, the game ball that entered the first attacker 802 in the previous round may pass through the count switch SW1 and be detected as a prize. is there. The count switch SW2 may be changed from the invalid state to the valid state at the timing when the second attacker 804 is first opened after the round starts.

After that, when the winning of the above-mentioned maximum winning number of game balls to the second attacker 804 or the opening timer set by the set special electricity combination operation data has elapsed, the special winning opening 2 solenoid of the timing (4) The driving is stopped (closed) and the second attacker 804 is closed. At this time, the special electricity role operating interval timer (timer for setting a period for detecting the remaining ball, for example, 20 ms) is set, and the special electricity role winning detection timer (special electricity role 2 winning detection timer related to the second attacker 804). ) Is set to a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds). In the present embodiment, in the state in which the special electric winning combination 2 winning detection timer is set, the count switch SW2 is maintained in the valid state even after the special electric winning combination 2 is deactivated. Note that the special electric host 2 is in an operating state even after the second attacker 804 is closed until the round ends, that is, until the period (for example, 20 ms) set by the special electric device operating interval timer elapses. Has become.

Timing (5) is a timing at which the special electric wire combination 2 changes from the operating state to the non-operating state after the period set by the special electric wire combination operation interval timer has elapsed, and the round ends. At this timing, the special electric device operation delay timer is set, and the positive variation region solenoid stops driving. In this example, the probability variation region solenoid is in the open state→closed state→open state between the timing (2) and the timing (3), for example, and the probability variation region continues to be in the valid state. ..

Further, in this example, the special winning opening winning excess error is detected between the timing (2) and the timing (3), and the special winning opening winning excess error flag is turned on at the timing (5), and at the same time, the security information is displayed. The signal turns on.

Timing (6) is the timing at which the first sub-control unit 400 starts the error notification of the special winning opening winning excess error.

Timing (7) is the timing at which the next round is started after the period of the special electric power combination operation delay timer set in timing (5) has elapsed, and the special electric power combination 1 has changed from the non-activated state to the activated state. At this timing, the special winning opening 1 solenoid is also driven, the first attacker 802 is opened, the special electric signal 1 operating signal (for testing) is changed from the non-operating state to the operating state, and the count switch SW1 is changed to the special electric portion 1 The state changes from the invalid state to the valid state when is activated.

After that, when the award of the above-mentioned maximum winning number of game balls to the first attacker 802 or the opening timer set by the set special electricity combination operation data has elapsed, the special winning opening 1 solenoid of the timing (9) The drive is stopped (closed) and the first attacker 802 is closed. At this time, the special electricity role operating interval timer (for example, 20 ms) is set, and a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) is set for the special electricity role winning detection timer (special electricity role 1 winning detection timer) related to the first attacker 802. It In the present embodiment, in the state in which the special electric prize combination 1 winning detection timer is set, the count switch SW1 is maintained in the valid state even after the special electric prize combination 1 is deactivated. It should be noted that, even after the first attacker 802 is closed, the special electric vehicle 1 is in an operating state until the round ends, that is, until a period (for example, 20 ms) set by the special electric vehicle operating interval timer elapses. Has become.

Timing (10) is the timing when the period set by the special electricity combination operation interval timer elapses, the special electricity combination 1 changes from the activated state to the inoperative state, and the round ends. At this timing, the special electric wheel operation delay timer is set.

Timing (11) is the timing at which the next round is started after the period of the special electric power combination operation delay timer set at timing (10) has elapsed, and the special electric power combination 2 is changed from the non-activated state to the activated state. At this timing, the special winning opening 2 solenoid is also driven to open the second variable winning opening 234.

In this example, the opening time of the special winning opening 1 solenoid (the period from timing (7) to timing (9)) is short, and the same attacker (second attacker 804) has round intervals (timing (5) to timing (11)). Is short).

In such a case, as described in the timing chart of FIG. 247, if the test signal is added to the special electric power combination 2 operating signal and then output, a problem may occur. In other words, when the special electricity role operating interval timer set at the timing (4) is short, for example, 20 ms, a predetermined period after the second variable winning a prize port (second attacker) 235 is closed in order to prevent the signal from being missed. Although it is desirable to add the test signal to the special signal combination 2 operating signal and output the signal, if the same attacker (second attacker 804) has a short round interval (timing (5) to timing (11)). During the opening of the second attacker 804, which is opened later, the special electric power combination 2 operating signal may become inactive. Specifically, as described with reference to FIG. 247, a test signal is added to the special signal auditor 2 in-operation signal (see FIG. 243) that is originally inactive at the timing (5) in which the special electric vehicle accessory 2 is originally inactive. For example, assuming that the additional electric power is added for 2 seconds, the special electric power working signal (for test) changes from the operating state to the non-operating state at the timing (a) in FIG. 248. That is, although the second attacker 804, which is released from the timing (11), is open, the special electric power working signal (for test) is in a non-operating state. In order to prevent this, in step S1421 of FIG. 219, the test signal output timer is set to 0 to extend the output period of the special electric train 2 operating signal (for testing), and the special electric train 2 is opened during the opening of the second attacker 804. The working signal is kept inactive.

Further, in this example, at the timing (11), the special electric prize combination 2 winning detection timer ends after the set time has elapsed. This is because the round in which the second attacker 804 is opened starts at the timing (11) (the special electric vehicle 2 changes from the non-operating state to the operating state), so 0 is forcibly set and ended. Yes (see step S1423 in FIG. 219).

The timing (b) is a timing at which the special electric wire combination 1 operating signal (for testing) changes from the operating state to the non-operational state after the special electric power combination 1 becomes the non-operational state at the timing (10). In this example, since the special electricity role operating interval timer set at the timing (9) is short, for example, 20 ms, in order to prevent the signal from being missed, the predetermined variable winning port (first attacker) 234 is closed after being closed. For a period (for example, 2 seconds), the test signal is added to the special electric power combination 1 in-operation signal and output (see step S637 of the probability variation area related setting processing shown in FIGS. 209 and 210).

As a result, after the timing (10) at which the special electric wire combination 1 is inactive, the special electric wire combination 1 operating signal (for testing) becomes inactive at the timing (b). At a timing (12) after the second attacker 804 is opened, the special electric prize combination 1 winning detection timer is changed from the set state to the non-set state, and the count switch SW1 is changed from the valid state to the invalid state.

After that, when the award of the above-mentioned maximum winning number of game balls to the second attacker 804 or the opening timer set by the set special electricity combination operation data elapses, at the timing (13), the special winning opening 2 solenoid The driving is stopped (closed) and the second attacker 804 is closed. At this time, the special electricity role operating interval timer (for example, 20 ms) is set, and a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) is set for the special electricity prize winning detection timer (special electricity role 2 winning detection timer) related to the second attacker 804. It

Timing (14) is the timing when the period set by the special electricity combination operation interval timer elapses, the electricity generation device 2 goes from the operating state to the non-operating state, and the round ends. At this timing, the special electric wheel combination operation delay timer is set.

Timing (15) is the timing at which the next round is started after the period of the special electric power combination operation delay timer set at timing (14) has elapsed, and the special electric power combination 1 has changed from the non-activated state to the activated state. At this timing, the special winning opening 1 solenoid is also driven, the first attacker 802 is opened, the special electric signal 1 operating signal (for testing) is changed from the non-operating state to the operating state, and the count switch SW1 is changed to the special electric portion 1 The state changes from the invalid state to the valid state when is activated.

Timing (20) is a timing at which the special electric role 2 signal output timer set at timing (13) becomes 0 and the special electric role 2 operating signal (for test) changes from the operating state to the non-operating state. Further, at this timing, the probability variation region also changes from the valid state to the invalid state. In this example, during the period from timing (13) to timing (20), the probability variation region is in the valid state even though the special winning opening 2 solenoid is in the closed state (the second attacker 804 is in the closed state). It is a period of being. In addition, the probability variation region in this case is in the valid state for three rounds in the period from the timing (2) to the timing (20).

At the timing (21), the special electric prize combination 2 winning detection timer ends after the set time elapses, and the count switch SW2 changes from the valid state to the invalid state. At timing (22), the driving of the special winning opening 1 solenoid is stopped (closed), and the first attacker 802 is closed. At this time, the special electricity role operating interval timer (for example, 20 ms) is set, and a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) is set for the special electricity role winning detection timer (special electricity role 1 winning detection timer) related to the first attacker 802. It

The timing (23) is a timing at which the special electric wire combination 1 changes from the operating state to the non-operating state after the period set by the special electric pole operation interval timer has elapsed, and the round ends. At this timing, the special electric wheel combination operation delay timer is set.

In the embodiment shown in FIGS. 238 to 248, even when the main control unit 300 detects that a second error (for example, a special winning opening discharge excess error) has occurred, after the jackpot game is over. Starts the variation control of the special figure (variable game of special figure 1 or special figure 2). In addition, in the case where the main control unit 300 detects that a second error (for example, a special winning opening discharge excess error) has occurred, and after the jackpot game is over, the variation control of the special figure (special figure 1 or There may be a case where the variation game of special figure 2) is not started.

Further, the pachinko machine 100 includes a count switch SW and an out switch SO at the first variable winning port 234 and the second variable winning port 235, respectively, and the first variable winning port 234 and the second variable winning port 235 are alternately opened. A closing operation is performed, and only the count switch (either one) corresponding to the variable winning port to be opened of the first variable winning port 234 and the second variable winning port 235 is set to be receivable. May be

Further, the following modified examples are also applicable to this embodiment. For example, when a pattern is displayed by the light guide plate as shown in FIG. 241 (f4), the pattern may be plural. For example, different patterns may be displayed at the position of the irradiation unit (for example, LED) that emits light toward the light guide plate. Specifically, for example, the pattern A is displayed by irradiation from the LED arranged on the upper side, and the pattern B is displayed by light emission from the LED arranged on the left side.

Further, the decorative pattern display device 208 and/or the liquid crystal display device D may perform operations such as rotation, vibration and movement. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 may operate during each error described in the above embodiment, in which case, for example, like the effect movable body 224 of FIG. 240 (b3-2α), for example, When notifying a big winning opening winning excess error, the decorative symbol display device 208 may be operated as an effect moving means. Further, a plurality of liquid crystal display devices D (for example, two, three,...) May be provided. Here, when a plurality of liquid crystal display devices D are provided, only one liquid crystal display device of the plurality of liquid crystal display devices D is configured to be operable, and another one of the plurality of liquid crystal display devices D or The plurality of liquid crystal display devices may be configured to be inoperable (fixed), or one or a plurality of liquid crystal display devices D among the plurality of liquid crystal display devices D may be configured to be operable and a plurality of liquid crystal display devices may be used. Some other liquid crystal display devices of the display device D may be inoperable (fixed). The decorative pattern display device 208 and/or the liquid crystal display device D may be inoperable.

Further, the production moving means (for example, the production moving body 224) of the present embodiment may continue the operation of the production moving means even if an error occurs during the operation of the production moving means, but the operation is interrupted. You may make it return to an initial position. Further, depending on the type of error, there may be an error in which the effect moving means returns to the initial position when the error occurs, and an error in which the effect moving means does not return to the initial position when the error occurs. An example of an error that returns to the initial position is an error that stops the game control such as a magnetic (magnet) detection error, and an example of an error that does not return to the initial position is a pan full error, but is not limited thereto. Here, "stop the game control" means, for example, that the main control unit 300 is not executing a process related to winning or winning, as a specific example, a main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 206. The output management process (step S337) is skipped from the timer update process (step S311).

Other examples of the error returning to the initial position are magnetic field (radio wave) detection error, big winning opening ejection excess error, big winning opening winning excess error, big ball goto error, switch (sensor) non-connection error, switch (sensor) ) Level error, winning rate (general winning opening, starting opening 2 (Den Chu), special winning opening (attacker)) error error, impact error error, solenoid error error, tray full error (lower tray full tank error, lower tray full) Ton error, upper plate full ton error), payout shortage error, payout number switch error, illegal payout error, payout excess error, CR unit communication error, main control communication error (communication confirmation command from main control unit 300 is within a predetermined time (book) (1000ms in the example), error when not received), CR unit not connected error, glass frame open error, inner frame open error, door open error, external clock error error, shock sensor error, shock warning, hit warning, etc. It may be either.

Other examples of the error that does not return to the initial position are magnetic (magnet) detection error, magnetic field (radio wave) detection error, special winning opening discharge excess error, big winning opening prize excess error, deca ball goto error, switch (sensor) ) Unconnected error, switch (sensor) level error, winning rate (general winning opening, starting opening 2 (electric Chu), special winning opening (attacker)) error, impact error, solenoid error, insufficient payout error , Payout quantity switch error, illegal payout error, payout excess error, CR unit communication error, main control communication error (communication confirmation command from main control unit 300 is a predetermined time (1000 ms in this example), error when reception is not possible ), CR unit non-connection error, glass frame opening error, inner frame opening error, door opening error, external clock error, impact sensor error, impact warning, hitting warning, and the like.

Further, as a modified example of the effect moving means (for example, the effect movable body 224) provided on the game board 200, the effect movable means provided on the frame side (the front frame door 106) may be used. It may be configured to give a notice or give notice of the change. The effect movable means may be a part of the operation means unit. In that case, the production movable means may be a portion for performing an operation (for example, a button or a lever), and the operation of the production movable means at the time of the above-described error notification (for example, the production movable body in FIG. 240 (b3-2α)). As a modified example of the operation (224), the buttons and levers may vibrate, project, dent, or rotate. These operations may be performed in various presentations such as pre-reading announcement, advance notice of the change, simultaneous production (RTC production), and demonstration production.

Further, in the above embodiment, the number of holds is displayed by the hold icon, but the number is not limited to this, and the hold may be displayed by turning on the light emitting means such as an LED. In that case, it may be configured such that a pre-reading notice is given according to the color of the light emitting means, or the special figure types (special figures 1 and 2) are displayed separately.

In addition, during the error described in the above embodiment, a general winning opening, a starting opening, and an effect corresponding to a ball entering an attacker (for example, outputting a winning sound, lighting a lamp, or displaying on a liquid crystal) may be performed. During the error, a part or all of the effects corresponding to the general winning opening, the starting opening, and the entry into the attacker may not be performed. Here, the "general winning opening, the starting opening, the effect according to the entrance into the attacker", in the case of a big hit, the payout number display (for example, the point (pt) display of FIG. 238 (4)), decoration Performance by the symbol display device 208 and other display devices, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214 and the general symbol display device 210 and other 7 segment display devices, ordinary symbol hold lamp 216, first Special design hold lamp 218 and the second special design hold lamp 220 and other lamps (LEDs) such as the color and light emission pattern, and over-win prize notification (sounds and lamps, decorative pattern display device 208 and other display devices) And so on. It should be noted that in the case of the over-winning prize notification effect, no sound may be output, or an error sound or a light emission pattern may be output. Also, "general winning opening, starting opening, production according to the entrance to the attacker" means, after the big hit, notification according to the winning of the starting opening or general winning opening ((sound, lamp, decorative symbol display The display by the device 208 and other display devices), etc. It should be noted that all of the above effects may be installed, or some of them may be installed.

As described above, the gaming table (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the embodiment of the present invention is an attacker (for example, the first attacker 802, the second attacker 804, the first variable winning port 234, the second variable). A gaming table including a winning opening 235) and main control means (for example, main controller 300), wherein the attacker is a ball sensor (for example, ball detection sensor 320, count switch SW1, count switch SW2). Is an attacker provided with, the ball sensor is a sensor that can output a ball signal according to the ball of the game ball, the attacker is a discharge sensor (for example, ball detection sensor 320, out switch SO, SO1, SO2...) are provided, the discharge sensor is a sensor capable of outputting a discharge signal in accordance with the discharge of the game ball, and the main control means has a plurality of types of errors. Is a means capable of executing control for determining, one type of error among the plurality of types of errors is a first error (for example, a special winning mouth winning excess error), the first error and Is an error indicating that the number of game balls entering the attacker (hereinafter, referred to as “the number of balls entered”) is larger than the number of game balls discharged from the attacker (hereinafter, “the number discharged”). That is, the main control means, the variation control of the symbol (hereinafter, "symbol variation control (for example, the symbol variation process shown in FIG. 216, or the special symbol related lottery process shown in FIG. 213(a) and FIG. 216). The symbol variation control process and the special symbol display confirmation weight process shown in FIG. 217))) can be executed, and the symbol variation control is a symbol display device (for example, the first special symbol display device 212). , The second special symbol display device 214), is a control to display the variable display of the symbol, the main control means is a means for starting the symbol variation control when the big hit ends, the main The control means is a means that does not start the symbol variation control during the occurrence of the first error, and is a gaming table.
According to the present invention, it is possible to realize a gaming table having a main control means.

That is, it may be possible for the store clerk or the player to easily notice that the first error (for example, a special winning opening winning excess error) has occurred.

Also, during the occurrence of the first error (for example, the special winning opening winning excess error), the symbol variation control is not started, and the player cannot play the game. Therefore, the first error (eg, the big winning opening winning excess) In some cases, the clerk can surely cancel the error) and improve the maintainability.

It should be noted that the description of the "special winning opening winning excess error" in the above-described embodiment can be read as "the special winning opening winning/unmatching error".

Further, display means (for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, a liquid crystal display device D) is provided, and the display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays, and one of the plurality of types of displays is provided. The display is a jackpot end display (for example, the display of FIG. 238(10), the display of FIG. 239(10a) to FIG. 239(12a), etc.), and one of the plurality of types of display is It is a variable display of decorative symbols (hereinafter, referred to as “symbol variable display (for example, display indicated by a downward arrow in FIG. 240(16a))”), and the symbol variable display is displayed after the jackpot end display is displayed. In some cases, even if the big hit ends during the occurrence of the first error, it is configured not to start the symbol variation display but continuously display the big hit end display. It may be.

With such a configuration, even if the big hit ends, the big hit end display (screen) is displayed as it is, so that it is easy to notice that the first error (for example, the special winning opening winning excess error) has occurred. You may be able to.

Here, the start timing of the variable display of decorative symbols (symbol variable display) in the present embodiment is the timing at which the first sub control unit 400 receives the symbol variation start command from the main control unit 300, or the decorative symbol display device 208. Of the decorative symbols in at least one of the symbol display regions 208a to 208c (when the decorative symbol starts to move), or the decorative symbols in all of the symbol display regions 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 start to vary. It means the timing when it is started (it starts to move on the display). The end timing of the variable display of decorative symbols (symbol variable display) is the timing at which the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol variation stop command from the main control unit 300, or the symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208. The timing at which the decorative pattern stops changing in at least one of the display patterns 208c to 208c (display is stopped), or the decorative pattern stops changing in all of the pattern display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative pattern display device 208 (on the display, Stopped) is the timing.

Note that when the big hit end display is being performed, the setting of the volume and the amount of light (luminance) may be changed, or the setting may not be changed.

Also, when the big hit end display is being performed, the effect mode may be selected, or the effect mode may not be selected.

Further, when the big hit end display is performed, the simultaneous effect and the RTC effect may be executed by wiping or the like, or the simultaneous effect and the RTC effect may not be executed. In addition, when the simultaneous production is started during the occurrence of the first error (for example, a special winning opening winning excess error), the simultaneous production may be displayed on the entire surface or by a wipe, but the simultaneous production sound is output from the speaker 120. It is also possible not to do so (except for models that do not output BGM or sound effects in simultaneous production).

Further, when the big hit end display is being performed, the effect relating to the universal figure may or may not be executed.

In addition, when the user mode can be set, when the big hit end display is displayed, an effect regarding grant of a privilege may be performed. Here, the user mode is a mode that can be arbitrarily set by the player, and information on the game performed from the start to the end of the setting of the user mode (number of fluctuations, number of jackpots, preset If you complete a mission (for example, the mission achievement conditions include the number of villas, the number of big hits, the number of changes, a specific super-reach or a specific warning, playing in a specific time zone), Granting of benefits (as an example of effects relating to the granting of benefits, an experience value for increasing the user level, effects that can be selected (customized) by the player (for example, a character that performs navigation or notice of a game, various effect displays) (Hold icon, background display, hold frame that displays the hold icon) and music and game characteristics that are output during pattern changes and big hits (for example, big hit confirmation effect notification (single notification or premiere effect) or specific effect (For example, a mode that facilitates the occurrence of a motion of the operation unit or the motion of the production movable unit, the variation and/or a notice performance that is likely to be a big hit if it occurs as a pre-reading notice))). However, the privilege may be given in response to the increase in the user level.

In addition, it is configured such that a pre-reading notice (for example, a pre-reading notice by the characters such as "Ohwah behavior!" in FIG. 239 (11a)) may be given during the occurrence of the first error. It may be.

With such a configuration, the jackpot end display is continuously displayed despite the pre-reading notice, so the first error (for example, the special winning opening winning excess error) is canceled. Otherwise, it may be possible for the player to easily notice that he cannot proceed to the next game.

In addition, when the first error (for example, big winning award winning excess error) has occurred, you may stop at the screen where the pre-reading notice is displayed, and other screens (for example, prepaid card You may stop at the screen that displays the warning notice of forgetting to take, the logo (maker logo) screen, etc.). Note that the alert notification (hereinafter referred to as “attention alert”) is not limited to “forgetting the prepaid card”.

Here, the alerting alert is an alert alerting the player to an item that is not directly related to the profit of the game. The profit of the game includes a prize ball given as a profit to the player and information about the prize ball. Since the content of the alert notification is not directly related to the profit of the game, even if the player ignores the alert notification or does not follow the alert notification, the game profit is not affected. However, the alert notification includes, for example, physical, mental, or monetary information that may affect the interests of the player other than the interests of the game.

It should be noted that what is given to the player as a profit is not limited to the above-mentioned prize ball (so-called pachinko ball), and may be, for example, a medal or the like. Further, it is not always necessary to provide the player with an actual product such as a prize ball or medal. For example, first, an electronic profit is provided to the player, and the electronic profit is used by the player for the game, or It may be possible to convert to prize balls. Of course, the real thing may not be given to the player, and the player may be able to exchange the electronic profit for the prize. Further, as the profit related to the game, the profit may be used to define that the game can be played again on the game table. Conversely, the profit not related to the game may be defined as that the game cannot be played again on the gaming table even if the profit is used.

As an example of alert notification, "age restriction", "tactics", "game time", "production", "secondary usage restriction", "investment deterrence", "forgetting prevention", "prevention of damage", " For example, "prevent forgetting to take a picture (prevent forgetting to save)".

The alert notification with the name "age restriction" is "Notification of games under 18 years old and entrance to the game hall is regulated by law." and the notification timing is "Demo". .. In other words, the notification timing is based on the premise that the special figure variation game is inactive and the attacker is inactive. As a disadvantage of the player that occurs when he/she does not follow the warning notification of "age restriction", there is a financial disadvantage that the player cannot exchange the prize even if the game profit is obtained. In the alert notification with the name "Strategy", the content of the alert is "Please be careful about malicious strategy sales.", and the alert timing is "Demo." As a disadvantage of the player that occurs when the user does not follow the alerting information of the “conquest method”, there is a financial disadvantage that pays money for useless information.

The alert information with the name "game time" is "Notice when you play for a long time, please insert a break.", and the notification timing is "During demonstration/2 hours have elapsed since the game started." It is. Disadvantages to the player that occur when the player does not follow the "game time" alert notification include physical disadvantages such as deterioration of the physical function of the player due to long-time play and fatigue.

For the alert notification with the name "Production", the content of the notification is "Please do not look directly at the light source for a long time. Please be careful not to get your fingers caught in the production device. Enjoy the game with an appropriate volume and light intensity , And the notification timing is “during demo/volume, light intensity adjustment/volume, light intensity adjustment screen/volume, light intensity setting change icon displayed, etc.”. Disadvantages to the player that occur when the user does not follow the reminding notification of "directing" are the physical demerits such as hearing loss due to playing at high volume, photosensitivity attacks due to lighting and blinking of high-brightness lamps, etc. is there.

The alert notification with the name "Secondary usage restriction" has the content of "The upload of photos and videos on this game machine to the Internet is prohibited.", and the notification timing is "During demonstration/during performance execution". It is. As a disadvantage of the player if he/she does not follow the warning notification of "secondary use restriction", there are monetary and social disadvantages such as fines for imprisonment and imprisonment.

The alert notification with the name "Investment deterrence" is "Please be careful about excessive investment. Pachinko / pachislot is a moderately enjoyable play." The notification timing is "during demonstration / from the last big hit" Elapsed predetermined rotational speed". A player's disadvantage that occurs when he/she does not follow the warning message of "investment deterrence" is a financial disadvantage due to investment failure.

The alert message with the name "Forgetting prevention" is "Please be careful not to forget to remove the prepaid card" or "Please be careful not to forget the theft of the prepaid card." End/end of power support state”. As a disadvantage of the player when the user does not follow the warning message of “preventing forgetting”, there is a financial disadvantage due to the loss of the remaining amount in the forgotten prepaid card. It should be noted that the warning notification of "preventing forgetting" may be issued at a timing other than the above timing. For example, at the end of a big hit (so-called “first hit”) that occurs in the normal gaming state, a “forgetting prevention” warning notification is notified, and at the end of a big hit in a condominium that is triggered by the big hit, “forgetting prevention” It is not necessary to notify the alert notification. In addition, even if a big hit occurs, if the profit that the player can get by the big hit is smaller than other big hits, or if the big hit cannot be made It does not have to be done. In the first place, if the player forgets to take the prepaid card, if the profit is given with the balance remaining in the prepaid card, the player will be conscious of the profit, and there is a prepaid card with the remaining balance. Since it occurs by forgetting, it is desirable to be notified of the "preventing forgetting" warning immediately after the profit is given to the player, and the extent to which the player forgets the existence of the prepaid card It is desirable to be notified after the benefits of In addition, the timing for the “preventing forgetting” alert notification to be most successful is the timing at which the player quits the game, so at the end of the condominium (for example, when a normal big jackpot without time saving is drawn or ST machine) It is desirable that the "prevention of forgetting" warning notification is issued at the timing when the advantageous state for the player ends, such as at the end of ST. Also, "prevent forgetting to forget" at the end of the big hit game based on the first big hit after entering the special figure high probability state (probability change) (for example, during the big hit end production or at the start of fluctuation of the first rotation after the big hit) A wake-up notification may be sent. Also, in the special figure high probability state (probability change), the subsequent gaming state shifts to the special figure low probability state (15R big hit, sudden short-time big hit, sudden normal big hit) You may notify the alert notification. In addition, at the end of the big hit game based on winning the big hit (15R big hit, sudden short-time big hit, sudden normal big hit) that the game state afterwards in the special figure low probability state is maintained in the special figure low probability state Prevention” It is not necessary to notify the alert notification. In addition, at the end of the big hit game based on winning the big hit (15R big hit, sudden short-time big hit, sudden normal big hit) that the game state afterwards in the special figure low probability state is maintained in the special figure low probability state Prevention” It is not necessary to notify the alert notification. In addition, it is not necessary to notify the "forgetting prevention" warning at the end of the small hit game based on winning the small hit.

As for the alert notification with the name "damage prevention", the content of the notification is "Do not operate the operating means with strong force because there is a risk of damage.", and the notification timing is "during demo/during performance execution" is there. As a disadvantage of the player that occurs when the warning notification of "damage prevention" is not followed, there is a physical disadvantage of being injured by the damage of the operating means.

The alert message with the name "prevent forgetting to take a picture (prevent forgetting to save it)" is "The user mode is being set. Please be careful not to forget to take a 2D barcode at the end of the game." The timing is "during demo/setting user mode (always)". As a disadvantage of the player that occurs when the user does not follow the alert notification of "prevent forgetting to shoot", there is a game disadvantage that the contents of the set user mode are erased. However, it is not a gaming disadvantage related to money. In addition, the notification timing of the above-mentioned alert notification may not necessarily be executed at the above timing.

Further, it may be executed at a timing other than the above notification timing. Further, the above-mentioned alert notification is an example, and it is needless to say that alert notification other than the above may be executed.

Further, the alerting notification (notifying at least not related to the profit of the game) is not limited to the illustrated example, and when the player does not follow the notified contents, there is a disadvantage different from the game profit to the player. Anything can be generated.

Further, a display means (for example, a decorative pattern display device 208) is provided, the display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays, and one type of display of the plurality of types of displays is a decorative pattern. Is a variable display (hereinafter, referred to as “symbol variable display”), and one type of display of the plurality of types of display is a stop display of the decorative symbol (hereinafter, “symbol stop display (for example, FIG. 241) (12f) is a symbol stop display)”), and is configured to start the symbol variable display after the symbol stop display is displayed when there is a hold when the big hit ends. While displaying the symbol stop display after the jackpot is over, if the first error occurs, the display of the symbol variation display is not started even if there is the hold, and the symbol is displayed. The display of the stop display may be configured to continue.

Further, when there is no holding, the variable display of the symbols may not be started after the jackpot end display is displayed. Further, when there is no hold, a symbol demo may be displayed.

According to such a configuration, the symbol stop display is kept displayed even if there is a hold, so that it is easy to notice that the first error (for example, a special winning opening winning excess error) has occurred. May be possible.

Note that “holding” in the present embodiment means holding off the start of various determination processes (lottery process, etc.) based on the start information.

Moreover, when there is a hold when the big hit ends, a hold icon corresponding to the number of the hold may be displayed.

With such a configuration, the jackpot end display is continuously displayed despite the pre-reading notice, so the first error (for example, the special winning opening winning excess error) is canceled. Otherwise, it may be possible for the player to easily notice that he cannot proceed to the next game.

The “holding icon” in this embodiment corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300.

In addition, after the big hit ends, depending on the game state (probability change/time saving/normal) and the type of the special figure, the hold may not be displayed. For example, depending on the game state (probability change/time saving/normal), the hold of special figure 2 may be displayed, but the hold of special figure 1 may not be displayed (or vice versa).

Further, after the jackpot is over, the hold may be displayed regardless of the game state (probability change/time saving/normal) and the type of special figure.

Further, during the display of the symbol stop display during the occurrence of the first error, a read-ahead hold icon (for example, a read-ahead hold icon shown in FIG. 241 (f2)) may be displayed as the hold icon. May be

With such a configuration, even when the first error (for example, a special winning opening winning excess error) is occurring, the pre-reading pending icon may be displayed, so until the salesclerk releases the first error. It may be possible to have a period of.

Further, since the prefetching hold icon is displayed, it may be possible to prompt cancellation of the first error (for example, a special winning opening winning excess error).

The pre-reading advance notice display may be performed during the display of the symbol stop display during the occurrence of the first error (for example, a special winning opening winning excess error). In this case, the pre-reading notice display may be a pre-reading notice display corresponding to the increased hold. In addition, a pre-reading notice display for pre-reading notice at the time of winning may be displayed.
Further, one of the plurality of types of display is an error display,

The display means is a means for displaying a first error display (for example, the error display E1 shown in FIG. 238(6)) as the error display, and the first error display is the first error display. The display may be displayed during the occurrence of the error.

Further, the main control means may be means for determining the first error when the number of incoming balls is larger than the number of discharged balls after a certain round in the jackpot is completed.

Further, the main control unit may be a unit configured to perform control to start the symbol variation control when it is determined that the first error has been resolved.

Further, the discharge sensor is a unit composed of a plurality of sensors, and one sensor of the plurality of sensors is a first discharge sensor (for example, an out switch SO1), and One of the sensors is a second discharge sensor (for example, an out switch SO2), and the discharge number is the number of game balls detected by the first discharge sensor and the second discharge sensor. It may be a number obtained by adding the number of detected game balls.

The number of discharge sensors may be one, two, or three or more.
Further, the ball entrance sensor may be a unit composed of one sensor.

The number of ball entrance sensors may be one, two, or three or more.

Further, one of the plurality of types of errors is a second error (for example, a special winning opening discharge excess error), and the second error is the number of discharges is the number of balls entered. It is an error indicating that it is more than the number, the main control means, even when it is determined that the second error, may start the symbol variation control after the jackpot It may be a means.

For example, the main control means may start the symbol variation control when there is a hold after the big hit ends even when it is determined that the second error occurs.
Further, the gaming table may be a pachinko machine.

Further, even if the first error occurs in the big hit, the big hit may be configured to continue.

For example, even if the first error occurs in a certain round of the big hit, it may proceed to the next round effect (in the case of the final round, the big hit end effect). Further, the main control means may be means for continuing the big hit control until the big hit ends when the first error occurs in a certain round of the big hit.

Further, the main control means may be means that does not start the symbol variation control when there is no hold when the big hit ends.

In the above embodiment, even if the first error (for example, a special winning opening winning excess error) occurs, the game state does not have to change (game control is not performed, or special figure changing operation is interrupted). You don't have to).

Further, the cancellation of the first error (for example, the special winning opening winning excess error) may be automatically canceled after a certain period of time has elapsed since the detection of the first error.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, an effect that is started when a certain number of items are held may be performed. This effect is, for example, a display mode of a hold icon when eight holds are accumulated in a winning-order-equipped model equipped with a starting opening unit (eight chucker) including a sorting device that alternately sorts special maps 1 and 2 The effect of changing the number, the effect of notifying that eight holds have been accumulated in the speaker 120 or the decorative pattern display device 208, and the effect of notifying that the effect of having eight holds accumulated from the next change is performed. and so on.

Further, in the above embodiment, when the music output during the big hit is also output as it is even in the symbol variation after the big hit ends, it continues as it is even during the first error (for example, a special winning opening winning excess error). You may output the said music. Here, during the first error (for example, a special winning opening winning excess error), the volume of the music during the big hit may be output as it is for control purposes, but the volume may be reduced and output as it is. You may. In addition, it may be configured to start from the beginning of the music after the first error (for example, the special winning opening winning excess error) is released.

In addition, as described above, the gaming table (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the embodiment of the present invention has the first control means (for example, the main control unit 300) and the second control means (for example, the first control means 300). 1 sub-control unit 400), and the first control means is a means capable of executing control for transmitting a plurality of types of commands to the second control means, One kind of command among the kinds of commands is an error-related command, the first control means is means for judging a plurality of kinds of errors, and one kind of the plurality of kinds of errors Is a first error (for example, an error in which the operation of the main control unit 300 does not stop such as a magnetic field (radio wave) detection error, a vibration error, a switch non-connection error), and the first control means is A process for setting a first error flag when it is determined to be a first error, wherein the first control unit prepares to transmit the error-related command to the second control unit (hereinafter , "Transmission preparation processing (for example, referred to as device monitoring processing of main controller timer interrupt processing of FIG. 206 (step S329)") may be performed every first cycle. The first control means executes the transmission preparation process of the first error command as the error related command when the first cycle is reached in a state where the first error flag is set. It is a means for playing a game table.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize a gaming table having a characteristic control means.

That is, since the first error command (for example, the error command for the magnetic field (radio wave) detection error) can be transmitted periodically, the transmission load of the first control means can be reduced in some cases.

Further, one type of error of the plurality of types of errors is a second error (for example, a magnetic (magnet) detection error, etc., an error in which the main control operation is stopped), and the first control means is When the second error flag is set, when the second error flag is set, the second control unit is a unit that sets a second error flag when the second error flag is set. It may be a means for executing the transmission preparation process of the second error command.

Further, the first control unit may be a unit configured to execute the transmission preparation process of the second error command without waiting for the arrival of the first cycle.

With such a configuration, it is possible to set whether to wait for the error command transmission cycle or not to wait for the error command transmission cycle depending on the type of error. In some cases, it is possible to reduce the transmission load of the first control means while also responding to the occurrence.

Further, the first control means is a means capable of executing control for outputting a signal to be output to the outside of the gaming table (hereinafter, referred to as an “external signal (for example, security information signal)”), and the first control means. The one control unit may be a unit that executes control to output the external signal when the first error flag is set.

The first control means may output the security information signal but not the other signal (other external terminal board signal) when the first error flag is set. Further, the period of the first cycle (subcommand transmission cycle in the main control unit 300) may be shorter or longer than the period (for example, 30 seconds) in which the security information signal is output, and the same. May be.

Further, the first control unit may be a unit configured to execute the control for outputting the external signal without waiting for the arrival of the first cycle.

According to such a configuration, the external signal is transmitted without waiting for the first cycle (the sub-command transmission cycle in the main control unit 300), so that the store side notices that the gaming table is abnormal. Sometimes it can be easier.

Further, the first control means is a means in which an interrupt process (for example, a main controller timer interrupt process) may be executed in a second cycle, and the interrupt process is the progress of the game. It is a process including a process relating to, and may be configured to become the first period by repeating the second period N times.

Further, a display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) is provided, the display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays, and one type of the plurality of types of displays is an error display. (For example, error display E1), the second control means receives the first error command, and the second control means displays the first error display as the error display on the display means (for example, FIG. It is also possible to use a means for displaying an error display E1) with the characters "Radio waves detected" shown in ().

With such a configuration, it may be possible to make it easier to notice that an error has occurred.
There may be an error displaying the error display and an error not displaying the error display.

Further, the first control means executes control to transmit an error cancellation command as the error related command when the first cycle is reached in a state where it is determined that the first error has been canceled. It may be a means to do.
Further, the gaming table may be a pachinko machine.
<Example of production>

Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 249 to FIG. 270, another example of a game table (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine 100 or a spinning drum game machine such as a slot machine) that can be applied to the present invention will be described in detail. To do. Here, as the technical idea, the technical idea shown in FIGS. 249 to 270 is replaced with the technical idea shown in FIGS. 1 to 48, 49 to 116, 117 to 193, and 194 to 248. The technical idea shown in FIGS. 1 to 48, 49 to 116, 117 to 193, and 194 to 248 is shown in FIGS. 249 to 270. It can also be applied to technical ideas. At that time, components having the same reference numeral may be treated as the same component and may be replaced with each other.

First, items common to the effects of the present embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 249 to 270 will be described with reference to FIGS. 249 to 251.

First, FIG. 249 is an explanation of the notations on the drawing common to the effect display of the present embodiment, and FIG. 249 is an example of the configuration of the effect device 206 applicable to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 15 is a diagram illustrating a point different from the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14. Further, FIG. 7B is a diagram showing the correspondence between the state of symbol variable display and the notation on the drawing.

As shown in the figure (a), in the present embodiment, an example of the effect by the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 will be described, but the fourth symbol display device 284 provided on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208 is The notation shown on the right side of FIG. That is, the square notation indicates the fourth symbol display device 2841 of the special figure 1, the circular notation indicates the fourth symbol display device 2842 of the special figure 2, and the white notation indicates the fourth symbol display device 284 (2841). , 2842) is changing, and the notation in gray indicates that the fourth symbol display device 284 (2841, 2842) has stopped losing, and the notation in black indicates the fourth symbol. It indicates that the display device 284 (2841, 2842) is in a big hit stop state. Other than this, it is the same as FIG. 14(a), (b). In the case of a pachinko machine 100 equipped with a small hit, the notation of the small hit on the fourth symbol display device 284 (2841, 2842) is the same as when it is lost and stopped, but it may be the same as when the big hit is stopped. .. Moreover, the notation different from the loss stop and the jackpot stop may be used.

Further, as shown in FIG. 7B, the variable display of the decorative pattern is represented by a downward white arrow, but in the case of a slender arrow, the decorative pattern is fluctuating at high speed in a transparent manner. , If displayed with a short (thick) arrow, it indicates that the decorative pattern is changing slowly. In the case of slow fluctuation, the speed may be such that the decorative pattern can be recognized. Also, when the decorative pattern is written so that it can be recognized and an arrow is attached below it, it indicates that the decorative pattern is changing at a low speed. In addition, when the notation indicating “sway” is attached to the upper left and lower right of the decorative design, it indicates that the decorative design is displayed in swinging fluctuation display (temporary stop display). It should be noted that the image of the decorative pattern in FIG. 7B shows an example of notation of the low speed fluctuation and the fluctuation of the fluctuation, and is different from the image of the decorative pattern described in the following example.

FIG. 250 shows a display mode (color) of effect display in the effect device 206 and a correspondence relationship between the notations used in the present specification and the drawings, and FIG. 250(a) shows a display color in the decorative pattern display device 208. FIG. 3B shows the correspondence relationship with the emission color of the light emitting means such as a full-color LED.

As shown in FIG. 7A, regarding the display color of the decorative design display device 208, the case where the decorative design display device 208 displays “blinking white” is described as a “decimal point” pattern in this specification, In the drawing, hatching is shown with few (coarse) dots. Similarly, in the present specification, the case of being displayed in "blue" on the decorative design display device 208 is referred to as a "slanted line" pattern, and is shown by hatching in the drawing, and is "green" on the decorative design display device 208. In the present specification, the case of being displayed is referred to as a “diamond” pattern, and is shown by a diamond-shaped hatching in the drawing, and the case of being displayed in “red” on the decorative pattern display device 208 is referred to as a “lattice” in the present specification. It is described as a pattern, and it is shown by hatching of a lattice on the drawing, and the case of being displayed in “gold” on the decorative pattern display device 208 is referred to as a “vertical line” pattern in this specification, and a vertical line is hatched on the drawing. In this specification, the case of being displayed in "rainbow color" on the decorative pattern display device 208 is referred to as a "multipoint" pattern, and is indicated by the hatching of many (fine) dots in the drawing? , Or “horizontal line” pattern, and is shown by horizontal line hatching in the drawing.

Further, the case where the "default (color)" is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 is shown by a notation other than these (for example, no pattern and white).

Further, as shown in (b) of the figure, the case where the emission color of the light emitting means such as the full-color LED built in the family crest part 224E or the like is displayed as "white lighting" in the light emitting means is referred to as "this specification". It is described as a pattern of "small number of dots" and is indicated by hatching of few (coarse) dots (points) on the drawing. Similarly, in the present specification, the case where the light emitting means is displayed in "blue" is referred to as a "hatched" pattern, which is indicated by hatching in the drawing, and the case where the light emitting means is displayed in "green" is the same. In the description, it is described as a “diamond” pattern, and it is indicated by a diamond-shaped hatching in the drawing, and when it is displayed in “red” in the light emitting means, it is described as a “lattice” pattern in the present specification, and in the drawing, it is a lattice pattern. In the present specification, the case where the light emitting means is displayed in a "golden color" is referred to as a "vertical line" pattern. )” is referred to as a “multipoint” pattern in the present specification, and is indicated by hatching of many (fine) dots on the drawing, or a “horizontal line” pattern, and a horizontal line on the drawing. Is indicated by hatching. In addition, the case where the light emitting means is turned off is referred to as a "white coating" pattern in the specification, and is shown in the drawing by other notation (for example, no pattern and white).

Further, FIG. 251 shows, for example, a case where a special winning opening excess error occurs in the pachinko machine 100 having two special winning openings (first attacker 802 and second attacker 804) as shown in FIG. , The state of fluctuation/stop of special figure, the state of active/inactive state of the accessory continuous operation device and the condition device, the state of driving (opening)/stopping (closing) the special winning opening 2 solenoid, the special electric accessory (special electricity Role 2) activated/non-activated state, special electricity role 2 operating signal (for testing) activated/non-activated state, special electricity role 2 winning detection timer setting/unset state, second attacker 804 Valid/invalid state of the provided sphere detection sensor 320 (count switch SW2), drive (open)/stop (closed) state of the probability variation region solenoid, valid/invalid state of the probability variation region, large winning opening 1 solenoid Driven (open)/stopped (closed) state, special electric auditors' product (special electric component 1) activated/non-activated, special electric component 1 operating signal (for test) activated/non-activated, special electric component 1 winning/winning detection timer setting/non-setting, enabled/disabled state of the ball detection sensor 320 (count switch SW1) provided in the first attacker 802, special winning opening winning excess error flag, security information signal, and 6 is an example of a timing chart of notification of a special winning opening winning error in the first sub-control unit 400. In this example, in a certain round during the big hit game (between timing (b) and timing (g)), a special winning opening winning excess error is detected.

As shown in the figure, for example, at a certain timing (a), the accessory continuous operation device and the condition device are changed from the non-operation state to the operation state, and the big hit game is started.

Then, at the timing (b) during the big hit game, the special electric host 2 is switched from the non-operating state to the operating state, and a certain round is started. In addition, in this embodiment, the special electric power combination 1 and the special electric power combination 2 do not operate simultaneously. Then, at this timing, the special winning opening 2 solenoid is also driven (opened) to open the second attacker (V attacker) 804 (the V attacker opening round starts). Further, the count switch SW2 is changed from the invalid state to the valid state at the timing when the special electric host 2 is activated. As a result, when the game ball that has entered the second attacker 804 passes through the count switch SW2, this is effectively detected, and it is possible to treat it as one that has been effectively won in the second attacker 804.

Further, at this timing (b), the special electric wheel combination 2 in-operation signal (for testing) is also activated, and the probability variation region solenoid is driven (opened) to change the probability variation region from the invalid state to the valid state.

At timing (c) after the second attacker 804 is opened, the driving of the special winning opening 2 solenoid is stopped (closed) and the second attacker 804 is closed (in the V attacker opening round). The attacker will close). At this time, a special electric role combination interval timer (a timer for setting a period for detecting a remaining ball (remaining ball detection period t), for example, 100 ms) is set, and a special electric prize winning detection timer according to the second attacker 804. A predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) is set in (special electric prize combination 2 winning detection timer). In the present embodiment, in the state in which the special electric winning combination 2 winning detection timer is set, the count switch SW2 is maintained in the valid state even after the special electric winning combination 2 is deactivated. Note that the special electric host 2 is in the operating state even after the second attacker 804 is closed until the round is completed, that is, until the period (for example, 100 ms) set by the special electric device operating interval timer elapses. Has become.

Timing (d) is the timing when the remaining ball detection period (t) has elapsed. When the remaining ball detection period t ends, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the number of incoming balls and the number of discharged balls are the same or different in the special figure state updating process (step S325) in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 206. To do.

The timing (e) is the timing when the delay period of T seconds set as the special winning opening winning excess abnormality monitoring timer has elapsed from the timing (timing (d)) when the remaining ball detection period (t) has elapsed. At this timing, the prize winning excess error flag is turned on and the security information signal is turned on. In addition, an error command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400 (for example, the error flag is turned on, and a subcommand transmission request is made, and then an error command in the main loop process is performed first). The subcommand transmission process is performed, and the subcommand transmission process in the main loop process that is first performed after the error command transmission timer described above is set to 0 and the subcommand transmission request is performed. Etc.), the error notification of the special winning opening winning excess error by the first sub-control unit 400 is started. Timing (f) is a timing at which the prize winning excess error flag is turned on and the security information signal is output. Although the error notification is started at the timing (f), the main control unit 300 actually sends the error command of the winning prize winning excess error to the first sub control unit 400, and the first sub control unit 400 transmits the error command. Since the control unit 400 receives the error command and performs each process for notifying the error, the first sub-control unit 400 transmits the error command of the winning prize winning excess error from the turning on of the winning prize winning excess error flag. There is a time lag before the error notification starts.

Further, at this timing, the period set by the special electricity combination operation interval timer elapses, the special electricity combination 2 is changed from the activated state to the inactivated state, and the round is finished. At this timing, the special electric component combination operation delay timer is set, the special electric component combination 2 operating signal (for testing) also changes from the operating state to the non-operating state, the probability variation region solenoid stops driving (closes), and the probability variation region is disabled from the valid state. It becomes a state. In this example, if the probability variation area solenoid succeeds (wins) in the round effect (battle effect) after the V winning, it is opened between the timing (b) and the timing (f) as shown by the solid line. The state (for example, opening for 100 ms) → the closed state (for example, closing for 1400 ms) → the open state (for example, opening for 28000 ms), during which the valid state of the probability variation region continues. On the other hand, when the probability variation area solenoid fails (defeats) in the round effect (battle effect) after the V winning, the open state (for example, between timing (b) and timing (f) as shown by the broken line (for example, The state is from open for 100 ms to closed (for example, closed for 29400 ms), and the valid state of the probability variation region continues for 100 ms from timing (b).

Timing (g) is a timing at which the next round is started after the period of the special electric power combination operation delay timer set at timing (e) has elapsed and the special electric power combination 1 is changed from the non-operation state to the operation state. At this timing, the special winning opening 1 solenoid is also driven, the first attacker 802 is opened, the special electric signal 1 operating signal (for testing) is changed from the non-operating state to the operating state, and the count switch SW1 is changed to the special electric portion 1 The state changes from the invalid state to the valid state when is activated.

FIG. 252 is an example of a flowchart showing the flow of the special electric ball remaining ball detection processing for setting the error flag of the special winning opening winning excess error (the special winning opening winning excess abnormality flag).

In the examples shown in FIGS. 194 to 248, in the probability variation area related setting processing shown in FIG. 209, the probability variation area related passage number (the number of balls subtracted from the number of discharges) is determined, determined, and the special winning opening award excess flag is detected. Had been set.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIGS. 249 to 270, the special electricity role remaining ball detection process shown in FIG. 252 (in the example shown in FIGS. 194 to 248, the process corresponding to the special electricity role remaining detection process shown in FIG. 223) is performed. Then, the probability variation area related passage count (the number obtained by subtracting the number of discharges from the number of entered balls) is acquired, judged, and the special winning opening prize excess abnormality flag is set. The special electric ball remaining ball detection process is a process that is called and executed when the information set in the special figure processing state indicates the "remaining ball detection state" in step S709 of the special figure state update process. is there.

That is, in step S3001 of the special electric role remaining ball detection process, it is determined whether the special electric role operation interval timer set in step S1515 of the special electric role operation process (FIG. 220) is operating. If the winning combination operation interval time has not elapsed), the special electric power combination remaining ball detection processing is ended, and if not (if the special electric prize combination operating interval time has elapsed), the process proceeds to step S3002.

In step S302, the probability variation region-related pass count stored in the RAM 308 is acquired, and in step S3003, whether the discharge number (OUT number) is smaller than the number of incoming balls (IN number) from the acquired probability variation region-related pass number. If the OUT number is smaller than the IN number (in the prize winning state), the process proceeds to step S3004, and if the IN number is equal to or less than the OUT number (not in the prize winning state). In the case of), the process proceeds to step S3006.

In step S3004, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening award winning excess abnormality monitoring timer (time period T in FIG. 251) set in step S623 of the probability variation area related setting processing is greater than 0. When the remaining sphere detection process is completed and the case is not applicable, the process proceeds to step S3005. In step S3005, the special winning combination remaining ball detection processing is ended after the special winning opening winning excess abnormality flag is set to ON.

In step S3006, the special electric wire combination operation delay timer stored in the RAM 308 is set, and in step S30, information indicating the "special electric wire combination operation end state" is set in the special figure processing state. As a result, in the next step S709 of the special figure state update processing, the special electric wheel combination operation end processing shown in FIG. 224 is called and executed.

In step S3008, the special electric power combination signal information (test signal) is cleared, and in step S3009, the specific region valid period state stored in the RAM 308 is cleared. In step S3010, the specific area operating state area 1 valid signal is cleared, and in step S3011, specific area solenoid related data (such as the operating state of the solenoid 806c of the shutter 806 and the opening/closing timer for the door member 806a of the shutter 806) is cleared. To do.

In step S3012, the data related to the winning over the special winning a prize (the winning overexamination timer for the large winning a prize oral excess flag, etc.) is cleared, and in a step S3014, whether or not the game ball has passed through the specific area 808. If it has not passed, the special electric power combination remaining detection process is ended, and if it has passed, the process proceeds to step S1615.

In step S3015, the special electric train combination operation delay timer according to the symbol type information and the saved special map variation time reduction status is set, and in step S3016, the transmission request of the subcommand (specific area start command) is set, and then the special electric train combination member is set. The remaining sphere detection process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 253 to FIG. 267, an example of an effect in the effect device 206 in the pachinko machine (structural accuracy variation machine with number of times) 100 shown in FIGS. 200 and 201 will be described.
<Basic production example>

First, FIGS. 253 to 256 are diagrams showing, in time series, the basic effects of the effect examples shown in FIGS. 253 to 267, and are special features in the special figure low probability general figure low probability state (non-electric support state). In the first rotation (first time) of the variable game of FIG. 1, it is an example of an effect in a state where a big hit symbol is won.

The timing shown in FIG. 253(1) is, in the first rotation (first time) of the variation game of the special figure 1 in the special figure low probability general figure low probability state (non-electric support state), the big hit symbol (for example, in FIG. 201). It is a state in which the 12R big hit pattern (substantially 8R probability variation big hit pattern) of the "special drawing A" shown is won.

On the decorative pattern display device 208 at this timing, the combination of decorative patterns “decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6” is stopped and displayed. Although the background here is not displayed, for example, a default background image (coast background image) as shown in FIG. 14A is displayed. Also in the following description, when the background is not displayed, the default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. It should be noted that various background images different from the default background image (for example, background images according to modes) may be displayed. Further, the second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the hold number of special figure 1 is "1" and the hold number of special figure 2 is "0". it's shown. Further, a second decorative design is displayed in the upper left corner. The second decorative pattern is also stopped and displayed in a combination of decorative patterns of "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6" in accordance with the stop display of the first decorative pattern.

As shown in (1) of the same figure, in this figure and the subsequent drawings, the state (phenomenon) below the decorative symbol display device 208 at the same time as the effect device 206 other than the decorative symbol display device 208, It may be written together. Hereinafter, the state (phenomenon) of the rendering means 206 other than the decorative pattern display device 208 will be referred to as "state of other rendering device 206". The state of the other effect device 206 is, for example, a sound output unit (speaker 120 in this example) and a light emitting unit (in this example, an LED built in the effect movable member 224, an LED for decoration (frame lamp, board, etc.). Lamp)) and their volume and brightness settings.

Moreover, the state of the other rendering device 206 is mainly described when any state (phenomenon) of the other rendering device 206 changes, and if there is no description, the state (phenomenon) immediately before that state continues. Indicates that

For example, at the timing of (1) in the figure, the volume is set to the user set value "3" and the actual set value "3". The brightness is set to the user setting value “3” and the actual setting value “3”. Further, the BGM, the sound effect (SE), and the error sound output from the sound output means (speaker 120) are all set to non-output or silence (output thereof). In this example, when the state of the sound output unit (speaker 120) is described as "-" in the drawing, it means that the sound output unit (speaker 120) is set to non-output or silence (output thereof). It indicates that only “non-output” may be described or “silent”, and that “silence” may be described or “non-output” in the specification. Further, the light emitting means emits light (lighting, blinking, etc.) in the light emitting mode of the “big hit blessing lamp pattern”.

At the timing shown in (2) of the same figure, the effect display of the big hit start effect is executed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Here, as an example, the display of the characters "battle bonus" indicates that the effect is being executed.

Further, regarding the state of the other rendering device 206 at this timing, the volume is set to the user set value “3” and the actual set value “3”, and the brightness is set to the user set value “3” and the actual set value “3”. ing. Further, “battle bonus start BGM” is output from the speaker 120 as BGM, “battle bonus start SE” is output as the sound effect (SE), and the error sound is not output (silence). For example, “Battle Bonus Start BGM” is continuously output during the execution period of the jackpot start effect, and “Battle Bonus Start SE” outputs a word of speech such as “Battle Bonus!”. Then it becomes silent. The "Battle Bonus Start BGM" may be ended in the middle of the execution period of the big hit start effect, and the "Battle Bonus Start SE" may be a sound of the line saying "Battle Bonus!" The output may be repeated during the execution period (the same applies in the following embodiments).

Further, the light emitting means emits light (lighting, blinking, etc.) in the light emitting mode of the "battle bonus start lamp pattern". In the following description, if the state of the other effect device 206 (in particular, the setting of the volume and the brightness) does not change from the state immediately before, the description may be omitted.

In addition, at this timing, the hitting suggestion display is performed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The hitting suggestion display is a display for informing the player that the period to right-handed or the period to left-handed has started, and here, in the second hitting suggestion display area 712 on the upper left of the display area, A small right-handing suggestion display (mini right-handing display that indicates right-handing (for example, the display of the letters "Right-handed!" and the arrow that indicates right-handing) is displayed), and the period to hit has started. I am informing you. The hitting suggestion display may be an effect display included in the big hit start effect, or may be an effect different from the big hit start effect.

The timing shown in FIG. 3 (3) is a state in which the hitting suggestion display is continuously performed, and an image simulating the game board 200 is displayed on the right side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the decorative symbol display is performed. A hit suggestion display is performed in the display area of the device 208. In this example, as the right-handing suggestion display, the display of the character "Right-handed!" in the first hit-direction suggestion display area 710 provided near the center of the display area and the arrow indicating right-handing on the game board 200. A message is displayed to inform that it is during the right-handing period. Although the mini right hit display is not displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 3C, it may be displayed.

In addition, in the state of the other effect device 206 at this timing, BGM is not output (silent) from the speaker 120, and the sound effect (SE) is “right-handed instruction SE (for example, “right-handed!”). (Speech voice)” is output and the error sound is not output (silence). Further, the light emitting means emits light (lighting, blinking, etc.) in the light emitting mode of the "right-handing instruction lamp pattern".

At the timing shown in (4) of the same figure, the open attacker (for example, the first attacker 802 shown in FIG. 200) is in the open state and the first hit of the big hit game starts, and the round effect (for example, the battle effect). ) Is being executed (execution is started).

In addition, the attacker unit 810 (see FIG. 200) of the present production example is a big hit when a predetermined combination of symbols is displayed on the special figure display device (special figure 1 display device 212, special figure 2 display device 214). Be started. Then, in a predetermined “second attacker 804 is opened, and a V shutter provided inside the second attacker 804 (not shown) is opened”, a game ball is played in a round (4R as an example). When the player enters the V passage switch (probability variation operation area 808, probability variation area, V area or V winning area) invisible to the player in the second attacker 804, it is confirmed as a game state after the jackpot (special characteristics). High accuracy status is given. Even when the V shutter is closed, when the game ball passes the V passage switch when the probability variation operating region is in the valid state, the probability variation state is given. As described above, the structure probability variation machine (also referred to as V (winning) probability variation machine) divides whether or not the game ball can enter the probability variation operation area 808 by the opening pattern of the second attacker 804.

That is, in the pachinko machine (V winning probability variation machine) 100 of the present embodiment, a round in which the opening pattern of the second attacker 804 that easily wins the probability variation operation area (V winning area) 808 by the special drawing is performed (for example, a figure to be described later). It is determined whether to start a big hit game including 4R from 254 (24) or a big hit game including a round of opening the second attacker 804 that makes it difficult to win a prize, and first for each symbol. The open patterns of the attacker 802 and the second attacker 804 are determined. Then, the second attacker 804 is opened in a predetermined round (for example, 4R) during the big hit, and the shutter (not shown) in the back is opened so that the game ball enters the probability variation operating area 808. Then, after the end of the big hit game, the operation of the probability changing function starts (moves to the probability changing state).

In this example, as a round effect, the characters “Yoshimune Victory to Yoshimune RUSH Inrush” are displayed in the display area, the number of acquired balls (here, “0pt”) is displayed in the upper right of the display area, and the upper left corner of the display area is displayed. In the second hitting direction suggestion display area 712, the mini right hitting display is performed to inform that the right hitting period is continuing. Further, the current round "1R" is displayed on the upper right of the display area. Further, "decoration 6" is displayed in the lower left corner of the display area, which shows a symbol combination of decorative symbols when a big hit occurs.

Further, regarding the state of the other effect device 206 at this timing, “round effect BGM” is output from the speaker 120, and as the sound effect (SE), “explanatory SE (for example, “Yoshimune RUSH rushes into Yoshimune victory”) is spoken. Voice)” is output and the error sound is not output (silence). Further, the light emitting means emits light (lighting, blinking, etc.) in the light emitting mode of the "round effect lamp pattern".

The timing shown in (5) of the same figure shows the state where the round effect of the 1st round of the big hit game is continuously executed. For example, as a round effect (battle effect), an animation display of a battle scene of the character “Den (Yoshimune)” and the character “Grandpa” is executed.

The timing shown in FIG. 6 (6) is a state in which the maximum number of winnings has been won in the open attacker (for example, the first attacker 802 shown in FIG. 200) during the execution of the first round of the big hit game. The attacker (for example, the first attacker 802) changes from the open state to the closed state at the timing shown in FIG.

The timing shown in (8) of the same figure shows the state of the interval between rounds of the 1R and 2R of the big hit game when the 1R of the big hit game is over. In this example, the notation of the previous round (1R in FIG. 8 (8)) is performed during the inter-round interval, and when the next round (2R in this example) is started, the notation of the round is switched to the next round. However, round notation may not be performed during the inter-round interval. Further, the notation of the next round (2R in this example) may be given during the interval between rounds.

The timing shown in (9) of the same figure shows a state where the attacker (for example, the first attacker 802) is in the open state and 2R has started. Also, at this timing, the button effect has started executing. The button effect is, for example, in the decorative symbol display device 208, an operation means image BG (in this example, an image that imitates the chance button 136) that prompts the operation of the operation button (for example, the chance button 136) in the display area as the button effect display, and An elapsed time notification image (meter display) TG for notifying the elapsed time of the operation button acceptance period (operation valid period) and characters such as "Press button!" are displayed.

Further, regarding the state of the other effect device 206 at this timing, "round effect BGM" is output from the speaker 120, and the sound effect (SE) is "speech of button operation promotion SE (for example, "press button!"). )” is output and the error sound is not output (silence). Further, the light emitting means emits light (lighting, blinking, etc.) in the light emitting mode of the "round effect lamp pattern".

The timing shown in (10) of the same figure shows a state in which the operation button acceptance period (operation valid period) has started.

Here, the relationship between the button effect and the operation button acceptance period (operation valid period) will be described. In the present embodiment, when the button effect is started, the operation button acceptance period (operation valid period) starts. In this example, the elapsed time notification image (meter display) TG is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 9 (9), but it is before (just before) the start of the effective period, and at the timing shown in FIG. The validity period begins.

The valid period may start simultaneously with the display of the button effect display (elapsed time notification image (meter display) TG), or the effective period starts after the button effect display (elapsed time notification image (meter display) TG). You may.

In addition, in this example, the button effect starts at the 2R of the big hit game, and the effective period ends within the 2R (a period shorter than the maximum opening time of the attacker). However, the end timing of the effective period may be any time, and the effective period may be set over a plurality of rounds of the big hit game. The relationship between the button effect and the operation button acceptance period (operation valid period) is the same in the following effect examples.

The timing shown in (11) of the figure shows the state during the acceptance period (operation valid period) of the operation button, and the timing shown in (12) of the figure is that the operation button (chance button 136) is operated during the valid period. The state is shown.

The timing shown in (13) of the figure is a state in which the success (in this case, victory) is notified (the battle victory effect is being executed) in the round effect (for example, the battle effect). As a battle victory effect, in the decorative symbol display device 208, for example, an effect image or the like is displayed instead of the animation display of the battle scene.

As for the state of the other effect device 206, "round effect BGM" is output from the speaker 120, "battle winning part action SE" is output as the sound effect (SE), and no error sound is output (silence). ). Further, the light emitting means emits light (lighting, blinking, etc.) in the light emitting mode of the "battle winning winning action lamp pattern".

At the timing shown in FIG. 14(a), the light guide plate IL shown in FIG. 14(a) emits light, and a pattern simulating a predetermined effect image is displayed on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. It is shown. Here, while the light guide plate IL is emitting light, the brightness of the backlight of the decorative pattern display device 208 and various lamps may be reduced to make the pattern appearing on the light guide plate IL more visible. .. The effect image shown in (13) of FIG. 13 may be continuously displayed instead of the light emission of the light guide plate IL.

In addition, the first large board behavioral product 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral product 224Gd operate and overlap on the front surface side of the decorative symbol display device 208, respectively. As a result, the light guide plate IL and the mini right-handed display are overlapped by the first large-board behavior member 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior member 224Gd, and are overlapped by the first large-board behavior member 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior member 224Gd, respectively. It is said that it is more difficult to visually recognize as compared with the case where they are not overlapped. It should be noted that only a part or all of the first large-board behavior auditors 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior auditors 224Gd may operate, and for example, the first large-board behavior auditors 224Ga to the second large-board behavior auditors 224Ga to 224Ga. The reliability may be different depending on the number of the 4 large-board behavior auditors 224Gd operating. The effect in which the first large board behavioral object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral object 224Gd operate may be displayed on condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or the chance button 136 is operated. It may be displayed even when the operation valid period elapses without any action. Further, there may be a case where only one of the light emission of the light guide plate IL and the operation of the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd is performed. In addition, when both the light emission of the light guide plate IL and the operations of the first large-scale behavior member 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior member 224Gd are performed, the first large-scale behavior member 224Ga- The operation of the four large-board behavior auditors 224Gd may be started, or the light guide plate IL may emit light after the operations of the first large-board behavior auditors 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior auditors 224Gd are started, The light emission of the light guide plate IL and the operations of the first large-sized board action product 224Ga to the fourth large-sized board action product 224Gd may be started at the same time.

After that, the Senryo box accessory 224H operates and moves downward, and overlaps with the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd. Note that the display of the effect image, the operations of the first large-board behavior auditors 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior auditors 224Gd, the operation of the thousand box cabinet auditors 224H, and the order of starting the light emission of the light guide plate IL are not limited to those described above. Instead, it can be set appropriately. In addition, all of the display of the effect image, the operation of the first large board action product 224Ga to the fourth large board action product 224Gd, the operation of the thousand-box action product 224H, and the light emission of the light guide plate IL may be performed. There may be cases where the division is not conducted. At least a part of the mini right-handed display is displayed in the upper left part of the display area while being overlapped by the first large-scale behavior accessory 224Ga, for example.

The timing shown in FIG. 15 (15) is, for example, a position where the mini right-handed display that has been overlapped by the first large-scale behavior accessory 224Ga is not hidden by any of the production movable bodies 224 (in this example, the decorative symbol display device). It has been moved to the center of the display area 208) and is visible to the player. It should be noted that the mini right-handed display, which was overlapped by the first large-scale behavior accessory 224Ga, is not moved to a position not hidden by any of the production movable bodies 224, and is displayed at the upper left of the display area. The state of being left may continue. In addition, the mini right hitting display that has been overlapped by the first large-scale behavior auditor 224Ga may be moved so as to be overlapped with one or more of the effect movable bodies 224.

The timing shown in (16) of the same figure has shown the state which the initial position return operation which returns the production|movement movable body 224 to each initial position started, for example. In this example, first, the Senryo box accessory 224H starts to rise toward the initial position. Further, in this example, the mini right-handed display is also moved to the initial position (upper left of the display area), and is overlapped again by the first large-board behavior auditor 224Ga for which the initial position returning operation has not been started, and the player is shown. It becomes difficult to see.

At the timing shown in FIG. 17 (17), the light emission of the light guide plate IL is gradually turned off (or the effect image is faded out), and subsequently, the first large board action product 224Ga to the fourth large board action product 224Gd are respectively. It shows the state where the movement toward the initial position is started (the initial position return operation is started), and the timing shown in (18) in the figure is an animation display of the battle scene whose display is interrupted in the decorative pattern display device 208. Shows that it restarts while fading in. It should be noted that the operation of returning to the initial position by each effect movable body that is performed in (16) to (18) of the same figure is included in a series of effect operations by each of the effect movable bodies that are started from (14) of the same figure. May be. Further, the initial position returning operation by each effect movable body performed in (16) to (18) of the same figure may be an operation performed by the same operation data as an initial position returning operation described later.

In this case, in the animation display of the restarted battle scene, a character of "win" indicating that the battle effect has been won and a round display indicating that the 3R of the jackpot game has started are displayed.

At the timing shown in (19) of the figure, the animation display of the restarted battle scene (the character "win" indicating that the battle effect has been won and the round display indicating that the 3R of the jackpot game has started) is normal. The state displayed is shown. As described above, in this example, the 3R of the big hit game is performed at a certain timing during the operation of the production movable body 224 (for example, during the initial position returning operation of the first large-board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior accessory 224Gd). The eyes have already begun. Here, as an example, one game ball has won after the start of the 3rd round.

Further, at this timing, a notification (V winning notification VG) that the next round (4th R) is a round in which the opening pattern of the second attacker 804 that easily wins the probability variation operation area (V winning area) 808 is performed is given. It is running. The V winning notification VG of this example is an icon for displaying the characters "Vget" in this example, and is displayed overlapping with "decoration 6" indicating the symbol combination of the decorative symbols when a big hit occurs. The V winning notification VG is displayed, for example, after the operation of the effect movable body 224 (the initial position returning operation of the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd) is completed, but is displayed during the operation. May be.

As for the state of the other effect device 206, “round effect BGM” is output from the speaker 120, and “battle victory SE (for example, voice of “Yatase” dialogue)” is output as a sound effect (SE). The error sound is not output (silence). Further, the light emitting means emits light (lighting, blinking, etc.) in the light emitting mode of the "battle winning winning action lamp pattern".

The timing shown in (20) of the figure shows a state in which a predetermined period has elapsed from the timing shown in (19) of the figure, and the timing shown in (21) of the figure shows a state in which the 3rd round of the big hit game is finished. The timing (22) indicates the state of the inter-round intervals of the third and fourth rounds.

The timing shown in FIG. 254(23) is the timing following FIG. 253(22), and notifies that the V attacker has been opened at the interval between rounds 3R and 4R of the big hit game (release of V attacker). The state (in which the notification effect (V winning suggestion effect) is being executed) is shown. For example, in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the characters "Aim V attacker in the next round!" are displayed.

In addition, in the state of the other effect device 206, “round effect BGM” is output from the speaker 120, and “the next round V opening notification SE (for example, “aim V attacker in the next round”) is output as a sound effect (SE). Is output), and the error sound is not output (silence). Further, the light emitting means emits light (lighting, blinking, etc.) in a light emission mode of "challenge success lamp pattern".

When performing the V-attacker release notification effect at the 3R and 4R round intervals, the interval may be longer, the same, or shorter than the intervals between the other rounds. Is also good.

The timing shown in (24) of the same figure has shown the state where the 4th R of the big hit game started. At this timing, a state in which the V-attacker open notification effect (V winning suggestion effect) is continuously executed is shown. The V-attacker release notification effect is displayed here by the characters "Aim at the V-attacker!!" and the arrow pointing to the lower right indicating the position of the attacker unit 810 in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

In addition, in the state of the other effect device 206, “round effect BGM” is output from the speaker 120, and “V opening notification SE (for example, a voice of the line “Aim at V attacker”)” is output as a sound effect (SE). Is output and the error sound is not output (silence). Further, the light emitting means emits light (lighting, blinking, etc.) in a light emitting manner of "light emitting pattern when V attacker is open".

The timing shown in FIG. 25 (25) indicates a state (V winning state) in which the game ball has entered the probability variation operating region 808 in the fourth big hit game. At this timing, the effect of notifying that the V prize has been won (V prize notification effect) is executed. Here, the V-winning notification effect suggests that the character "V" is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 and that the state of probability changes after the jackpot game is over.

As for the state of the other effect device 206, "round effect BGM" is output from the speaker 120, "V winning notification SE" is output as the sound effect (SE), and the error sound is not output (silence). Has become. Further, the light emitting means emits light (lighting, blinking, etc.) in the light emitting mode of the "V winning light emitting pattern".

The timing shown in (26) of the figure shows the state where the 5R of the big hit game has started, and the timing shown in (27) of the figure shows the state where the 6R of the big hit game has started. At this timing, As the round effect after the V winning (the effect until the remaining number of rounds is finished), for example, a round effect after a battle victory is executed. As an example of the post-battle victory round effect, the characters "Post-battle victory round effect" are displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as an example.

As for the state of the other effect device 206, "round effect BGM" is output from the speaker 120, and the sound effect (SE) and the error sound are not output (silence). Further, the light emitting means emits light (lighting, blinking, etc.) in a light emitting mode of "round play lamp pattern".

The timing shown in (28) of the figure shows the state where the 8R of the big hit game has started, and the timing shown in (29) of the figure shows the state where the 8R of the big hit game has ended. In the 8th round, the round effect after the V winning (the round effect after the battle victory) is continuously executed.

The timing shown in (29A) of the same figure shows the state where the round effect after the V winning (the round effect after the battle victory) is continuously executed in the ninth to twelfth times of the big hit game.

The big hit game this time is, as an example, a big hit game started as a 12R big hit pattern (substantially 8R probability variation big hit pattern) of "special drawing A" shown in FIG. 201, so 9R to 12R open the attacker unit 810. Since the time is set to be extremely short and the big hit game is actually finished at 8R, the number of acquired balls does not increase after 8R.

At the timing shown in FIG. 29A, when 9R to 12R are set to have a significantly short open time of the attacker unit 810, the round production after the battle victory is being executed at the 9R to 12R. Is shown.

Note that the 12 round (12R) jackpot symbol (substantially 8R probability variation jackpot symbol) may not be set. In other words, it may be configured to end in a prescribed number of rounds (8R) (8R jackpot design is set), or the 9R to 12R can be opened so that at least one game ball can be won. It may be a round that opens at intervals.

The timing shown in (30) of the figure shows the state where the big hit game 12R is finished, that is, the state where the big hit game is finished, and the timing shown in (31) of the figure is the end of the big hit game and the big hit end effect. The state of the interval is shown, and the timing shown in (32) of the same figure shows the state where the big hit end effect is being performed. This big hit game, as an example, is a big hit game started as a 12R big hit design (actual 8R probability variation big hit design), so after the big hit game, the game state is a special figure high probability general figure high probability state ( Probably changed state with electric support). Therefore, the jackpot end effect is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 in this example, a jackpot end effect display (in this example, "Yoshimune RUSH rush!!") indicating the end of the jackpot game, and the electric power support. It is informed that the state will change to the probability change state.

Further, in the state of the other rendering device 206, “Battle Bonus End BGM” is output from the speaker 120, and the sound effect (SE) is “Battle Bonus End SE (for example, the voice of the line “Yoshimune RUSH Inrush”)”. It is output and the error sound is not output (silence). Further, the light emitting means emits light (lights, blinks, etc.) in the light emitting mode of the "battle bonus end lamp pattern".

The timing shown in (33) of the figure is a state in which an effect (an attention calling effect) that calls attention to forgetting to remove the prepaid card is being performed.

In this example, the alerting effect is displayed in the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208 to alert the user about forgetting to take the prepaid card inserted in the card unit 608 (see FIG. 4) (an alerting display). .. In addition, this warning display may be displayed only when the big hit game in the first big hit that became a big hit in the game state not being electric support is over, or regardless of the situation where the big hit is a big hit It may be displayed without fail when the game is over.

In addition, as for the state of the other rendering device 206, the speaker 120 outputs a "warning alert SE (for example, a voice of the line "please be careful not to forget to remove the prepaid card") as a sound effect (SE). BGM and error sound are not output (silence). Further, the light emitting means emits light (lighting, blinking, etc.) in a light emitting manner of "big hit end lamp pattern". Note that the error sound may be output even if the caution display is displayed during the occurrence of various errors in which the error sound is output. Further, when various errors that output an error sound occur during the display of the attention display, the output of the attention notification SE may be interrupted and the error sound may be output.

Here, the jackpot end effect in this specification will be described again. The big hit end effect is an effect that is performed in a period in which the above-described hit end weight timer is set after the end of the inter-round interval of the final round (for example, an effect performed in (32) to (33) in the same figure). Alternatively, the effect may be performed from (32) to (34) in FIG. For example, at the timing shown in FIG. 34, the main control unit 300 sends a big hit end command to the first sub control unit 400 during the period of the hit end wait timer or after the set hit end wait timer expires. In some cases, the first sub-control unit 400 that receives the notification switches the effect display.

It should be noted that the maker logo may be displayed before the alerting effect, and both the maker logo and the alerting notification may be performed.

The timing shown in FIG. 34 (34) shows a state before the jackpot game is over, a transition to the probability changing state with electric support is performed, and the first symbol variation display is started. In the probability variation state with electric support, the background image is the background image for the probability variation state with electric support, and the decorative design is also a display mode different from the normal game state (special figure low probability general figure low probability state) .. Further, a hold icon display area 282 of special figure 2 is formed in the lower center of the display screen, and the number of hold of special figure 2 is notified by the number of displayed icons. Here, the default display mode of the hold icon of Toku-zu 2 is a rectangular unpatterned and white display mode, and the display mode (for example, shape) is different from the hold icon of Toku-zu 1 and the player Can be identified by just looking at it. The default display mode of the hold icon of special figure 1 and the default display mode of the hold icon of special figure 2 may be the same. In addition, in FIGS. 34 (35) to (35), in order to make it easy to understand that the four hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, the hold that is not actually displayed is displayed. The icon is indicated by a broken line. Further, in FIGS. 34 (34) to 35 (35 ), the hold icon display area 282 of FIG. 2 is divided by a broken line to facilitate the description, but the broken line is actually displayed. Not done. Further, in the probability change state with power support, the holding icon of Toku-zu 1 is not displayed, but it may be displayed. Further, at this timing, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the mini right hit display is performed in the upper left corner of the display screen, and the character “BONUS×◯” indicating the number of consecutive holidays is displayed below it. At this timing, since the first big hit game is over, “BONUS×1” indicating that is displayed.

In addition, in this example, the fourth symbol display device 2841 of the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol display device 2842 of the special figure 2 are in the state of stoppage of the display, and the second hold number display in the lower right corner of the display area. (The hold of special figure 1 is "4" and the hold of special figure 2 is "0") is displayed.

At this time, as another state of the rendering device 206, the speaker 120 may output "BGM at the end of the big hit", or the light emitting means emits light (lights, blinks) in the light emitting mode of the "big hit end lamp pattern". Etc.)

In addition, when the special map 1 and the special map 2 are not held at the time of a big hit, a background display for the probability change state, a mini right hit display, and a display showing the number of consecutive games are displayed as shown in (34) of the same figure. The state where three decorative symbols are stopped and displayed (when there is no power failure or power recovery during a big hit, it is stopped and displayed in a state in which three symbols for the probability variation state corresponding to the decorative symbols for the normal state are arranged. On the other hand, when there is a power failure/recovery during a big hit, a combination of predetermined decorative patterns for the probability change state is displayed in a stopped state.). Further, the hold icon is not displayed because the hold of special maps 1 and 2 is 0, but the hold of the special maps 1 and 2 is displayed as "0" by the second hold number display displayed in the lower right corner of the display area. Is displayed.

At the timing shown in FIG. 35 (35), one hold of the special figure 1 is exhausted, the variable display of symbols on the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and the variable display of decorative symbols is started on the decorative symbol display device 208. The figure shows a state in which the right-handing notification effect for instructing the player to perform right-handing is being executed. As a right-handing notification effect, here, in the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208, a right-handing notification for instructing the player to right-hand (for example, the display of the character "Please right-hand" on the translucent band image is displayed. ) Is done. The right-hand hit notification overlaps the decorative design, and the decorative design is more difficult to visually recognize than in the case where the decorative design does not overlap. The right-handed notification is displayed only in the electric sapo state that has transitioned after the first big hit game, but may also be displayed in the electric sapo state that has transitioned after the big hit game other than the first big hit game has finished. For example, it may be displayed every time the big hit game ends and the electric power support state is entered. Further, after shifting to the electric support state, the right-handed notification may be displayed even when it is detected that the player is left-handed. For example, it is detected that the player has won the first special figure starting port 230. In this case, it may be determined that the left-handed stroke has been performed and the right-handed stroke notification may be displayed. Further, the second hold number display (the hold of special figure 1 is "3" and the hold of special figure 2 is "0") is displayed in the lower right corner of the display area.

As for the state of the other effect device 206, “probably changing BGM” is output from the speaker 120, and the sound effect (SE) and the error sound are not output (silence). Further, the light emitting means emits light (lighting, blinking, etc.) in the light emitting mode of the "probably changing lamp pattern".

In the timing shown in FIG. 36, a predetermined time has passed from FIG. 35, and the design variation display of special figure 1 is held four and the design variation display of special figure 2 is held four. It is a state in which the symbols are stopped and displayed. That is, in the special figure 1 holding lamp 218, all four lamps are turned on to indicate that the special figure 1 is held four times, and in the special figure 2 holding lamp 220, four special figures 2 are held. All of the four lamps are turned on to indicate that, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays four hold icons h21 to h24 of the special figure 2. In this example, the hold icon h21 is displayed in red (a “grid” pattern), and the hold icons h22 to h24 are displayed in default (white).

Also, in the second number-of-holds display, "4" indicating that the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is four and "4" indicating that the number of holdings of the special figure 2 is four are displayed. There is.

At the timing shown in FIG. 37 (37), one hold of special figure 2 is exhausted, and the variable display of symbols on the second special symbol display device 212 is being executed. On the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of decorative symbols is displayed. Indicates a running state.

At the timing shown in FIG. 38 (38), "decoration 7" is displayed in a swinging variation display (temporary stop display) on the left symbol of the decorative symbol display device 208, and "decoration 7" is displayed in a swinging variation display (temporary stop display) on the right symbol. It shows the state of being performed.

The timing shown in (39) of the figure is a state in which the super reach effect is being executed. In the display area of the decorative design display device 208, for example, an effect using the entire surface is executed, and in the upper left corner of the display area, the left design and the right design of the second decorative design smaller than the first decorative design are both. Is also stopped and displayed as "decoration 7".

The timing shown in FIG. 40 (40) shows a state in which the first decorative design is confirmed and displayed by the combination of the decorative design of the "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" (the big hit pattern mode). At the timing shown in (41), the jackpot start effect is being executed. In this jackpot start effect, a "super Yoshimune bonus" effect is executed, which indicates that the jackpot game due to the probability variation big hit is started because the symbols of the probability variation big hit (special jackpot) are prepared. As the effect of the “super Yoshimune bonus”, the effect using the entire surface of the display area is executed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

As for the state of the other rendering device 206, “SP Yoshimune Bonus Start BGM” is output from the speaker 120, and “SP Yoshimune Bonus Start SE (for example, “Super Yoshimune Bonus” and the like) is output as the sound effect (SE). Voice)” is output and the error sound is not output (silence). Further, the light emitting means emits light (lights, blinks, etc.) in the light emission mode of the "SP Yoshimune bonus start lamp pattern".

The timing shown in FIG. 255(42) is the timing following the timing shown in FIG. 254(41). In the jackpot game effect in this example, the first round (1R) and the second round (2R) are music selection effects (music selection effects) period during which music can be selected. When the 1R is started, the music selection effect is automatically started, and the decoration pattern display device 208 displays the music selection screen.

Here, as for the music selection effect, the music selection effect may be started when the first round is started, or the music selection effect may be started when the hit start display timer is started. Further, the timing when the big hit production starts and the transition to the music selection production may or may not coincide with the timing of the variable display and the stop display of the special figure. That is, the jackpot start display may be displayed while the variable display of the special map is continued, and then the special map may be stopped and displayed after the music selection effect is started, or the jackpot start may be started after the special map is stopped and displayed. The display may be displayed, and after that, the music selection effect may be started. Also, the music selection effect may be started before the start of 1R.

Further, the music selection may be started by the player's will. In this case, the music selection screen may be called by operating the chance button 136 or the like. Even during the music selection period, when the selection of the music ends, the music selection screen disappears and the round effect is started. The decorative symbol display device 208 has a display indicating that it is the first round (“1R”), a display of the number of balls (prize balls) displayed (990 pt), and two consecutive villas have been achieved with this big hit. The display of “BONUS×2” indicating that the job is done is also displayed. Further, on the right side of the display area, "decoration 7" indicating a symbol combination of decorative symbols when a big hit is displayed.

In the music selection (selection) effect, a music selection screen is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208, and the music selection effect ends when the chance button 136 is operated or 2R ends. In this example, the music selection list GR is displayed on the music selection screen, and new music is added to the music release list GR one by one as the number of condominiums increases, and the number of selectable music increases. Further, for example, the newly added music is set to the initial position of the cursor csd. The initial position of the cursor csd may be matched with the previously selected music piece, or may be matched with the music piece existing in the music release list GR from the beginning (the music piece added before that).

Further, in the music selection screen, icons of an operation key unit (cross key) 137 and a chance button (decision button) 136 for suggesting a music selection (change) and a decision operation are displayed. As an example, by operating the up key 137u and the down key 137d of the operation key unit (cross key) 137, the cursor csd can be moved to select a song (change the selection), and the chance button (decision button) 136 By operation, it is possible to make a decision (decision to make a selection) on the selected music piece.

It should be noted that all of a plurality of songs that can be selected from the beginning may be added to the song release list GR, and all songs may be selectable unconditionally or by operating the back button. In addition, the number of songs added to the song release list GR may be two or more each time the number of consecutive games increases.

In this example, since we have achieved 2 consecutive villas in this big hit, a new song "Mega!Giga!Summer!" is newly added to the music release list GR, and it becomes selectable. There is. The "New!" mark is attached to the display of "Mega! Giga! Summer!". In this example, the newly added "Mega!Giga!Summer!" is displayed in the second row of the music release list GR, and "May be there" already opened is the music release list. It is displayed in the first row of GR. Further, here, the initial position of the cursor csd is aligned with the newly opened display of "Mega! Giga! Summer!", and this music piece is selected. Further, in the music selection screen, the display in which three question marks are lined up is an unreleased display, and the music title is unknown. That is, in the music release list GR, it is unknown what music will be released in the future.

As for the state of the other effect device 206, the speaker 120 outputs the song "Mega! Giga! Summer!" (chorus portion) as "Song Select BGM", and the sound effect (SE) and the error sound are non-existent. It is output (silence). Further, the light emitting means emits light (lighting, blinking, etc.) in the light emitting mode of the "music selection effect lamp pattern".

The timing shown in (43) of the figure shows a state in which the down key 137d is operated, and the timing shown in (44) of the figure is operated by the down key 137d to indicate "Mega! Giga" in the music release list GR. The cursor csd is aligned with the display in which three question marks are lined up under the display of "Summer!". The display in which three question marks are lined up is a display indicating that the music has not been released, and the music title is unknown. That is, in the music release list GR, it is unknown what music will be released in the future.

As for the state of the other rendering device 206, the music (chorus portion) of “Mega!Giga!Summer!” is output from the speaker 120 as “music selection BGM”, and the sound effect (SE) and the error sound are not output ( Silence). Further, the light emitting means emits light (lighting, blinking, etc.) in the light emitting mode of the "music selection effect lamp pattern".

The beginning of the outputted music may be the same as or different from the beginning of the music started to be outputted in (60) in the figure.

At the timing shown in (45) of the figure, since the cursor csd is aligned with the display in which three question marks are lined up, scrolling downward is automatically started without operating the down key 137d. It shows the state.

As for the state of the other rendering device 206, the music (chorus portion) of “Mega!Giga!Summer!” is output from the speaker 120 as “music selection BGM”, and the sound effect (SE) and the error sound are not output ( Silence). Further, the light emitting means emits light (lights, blinks, etc.) in the light emitting mode of the "music selection effect lamp pattern".

It should be noted that during the period in which the cursor csd is aligned with the display of three question marks (the period during which the scroll is automatically directed downward), the speaker 120 displays “Mega!Giga!Summer!” as “Music Select BGM”. Is output (the chorus part). The BGM may be silent during the automatic downward scrolling period (during automatic scrolling), or the next song may be output during the movement of the cursor csd or from the start of movement ( Below, the same applies during automatic scrolling).

Also, during music selection, a part of each music (the chorus part in this example) is output so as to loop, but it is not necessary to loop, for example, after outputting for a certain period of time, the next music is output. May be automatically transferred to, or the music may not be output until the next is selected. Further, all of the music pieces may be output from the beginning, or all of the music pieces from the middle (for example, the chorus portion) to the back may be output.

The timing shown in (46) of the figure shows a state in which scrolling downward is continued automatically, and the music of “Mega!Giga!Summer!” (Sabi's song) is selected from the speaker 120 as “Music Select BGM”. Part) is repeatedly output.

The timing shown in (47) of the figure shows that the cursor csd scrolls to the end of the display in which three question marks are lined up, returns to the song "may be there" at the beginning, and the automatic scroll ends. ing.

At this timing, the speaker 120 outputs the song "may be there" (chorus portion) as "Song Select BGM", and the sound effect (SE) and the error sound are not output (silence). There is. Further, the light emitting means emits light (lighting, blinking, etc.) in the light emitting mode of the "music selection effect lamp pattern".

In this example, the music "may be there" is started to be output at the timing when the cursor csd is "may be there", but the cursor csd may be "may be there". Until the specified time (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses after the display of “No” is displayed, the previous song (in this example, the song “Mega!Giga!Summer!”) is being output. Good.

The timing shown in (48) of the figure shows a state in which the down key 137d is operated after the automatic scrolling is completed, and the timing shown in (49) of the figure shows that the cursor csd indicates “Mega!Giga!Summer!”. The state is adjusted to the display of.

At this timing, the song (chorus part) of "Mega!Giga!Summer!" is output from the speaker 120 as "music select BGM", and the sound effect (SE) and the error sound are not output (silence). There is. Further, the light emitting means emits light (lighting, blinking, etc.) in the light emitting mode of the "music selection effect lamp pattern".

The timing shown in (50) of the figure shows a state in which the up key 137u is operated, and the timing shown in (51) of the figure shows a state in which the cursor csd is aligned with the display "may be there". Is shown.

At this timing, the speaker 120 outputs the song "may be there" (chorus portion) as "Song Select BGM", and the sound effect (SE) and the error sound are not output (silence). There is. Further, the light emitting means emits light (lighting, blinking, etc.) in the light emitting mode of the "music selection effect lamp pattern".

The timings shown in (52) to (53) of the figure show a state in which the cursor csd has been aligned with the display of “may be there” and a predetermined time has elapsed, and the timing shown in (54) of the figure. The timing shown shows the state in which the big hit game of the first R has ended with the cursor csd being aligned with the display “may be there”. In the periods shown in (52) to (54) in the figure, the speaker 120 outputs the song "may be there" (the chorus portion) as "music select BGM", and the sound effect (SE). And the error sound is not output (silence). Further, the light emitting means emits light (lighting, blinking, etc.) in the light emitting mode of the "music selection effect lamp pattern".

The timing shown in (56) of the same figure shows the state in which the big hit game of the second R has started with the cursor csd being aligned with the display of "may be there", and the timing shown in (57) of the same figure. The timing shown continues to indicate that the cursor csd is aligned with the display "may be there", and that a predetermined period has elapsed in the 2R jackpot game. Also in the periods shown in (56) to (57) of the same figure, the music "may be there" (the portion of the hook) is output from the speaker 120 as "music select BGM", and the sound effect (SE) is produced. And the error sound is not output (silence). Further, the light emitting means emits light (lighting, blinking, etc.) in the light emitting mode of the "music selection effect lamp pattern".

The timing shown in (58) of the same figure shows a state in which the chance button 136 is operated with the cursor csd being aligned with the display of “may be there”, and the timing shown in (59) of FIG. , The chance selection button 136 is operated, and the music selection of “may be there” is determined. At this timing, as shown in (59) of the same figure, in the music release list GR of the decorative symbol display device 208, the determined display of "may be there" blinks white (a pattern of "small number", It is displayed (music determination display) in the upper right part of (59) in FIG.

Further, the speaker 120 outputs "music selection BGM" and the error sound without outputting (silence), and outputs "music determination SE" as a sound effect (SE). Further, the light emitting means emits light (lighting, blinking, etc.) in the light emitting mode of the "music selection effect lamp pattern".

At the timing shown in (60) of the figure, the state in which the round effect has started due to the determination of the song is shown. In the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208, the music selection screen is switched to the round effect screen (round effect display). In this example, a round effect display of the second round is displayed, and this display is a round effect display corresponding to the determined music "may be there". In the figure (60), "Round effect (may be there)" is described to indicate that it is a round effect display corresponding to the determined music "may be there". The same applies to the following performance examples). Further, the title "may be there" of the selected music is displayed at the lower left of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, on the right side of the display area, the display of “decoration 7” showing the symbol combination of the decorative symbols when the big hit is continued.

Further, from the speaker 120, the music "may be there" is output from the beginning as the "round effect BGM", and the sound effect (SE) and the error sound are not output (silence). Further, the light emitting means emits light (lighting, blinking, etc.) in a light emitting mode of "music effect "may be there" lamp pattern".

The timing shown in (61) of the same figure has shown the state where the 2R of the big hit game has ended. As shown in the figure, the title "may be there" of the selected song displayed at the lower left of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208 is hidden (erased) after a certain time has elapsed from the start of display. Becomes Alternatively, the title of the song may be hidden (erased) at the interval between the 2R and 3R of the jackpot game, or when the 3R of the jackpot game starts, or another song is determined (determination of selection). Until it is displayed, it may be continuously displayed.

Even at this timing, the music "May be there" is output from the beginning as the "round effect BGM" from the speaker 120, and the sound effect (SE) and the error sound are not output (silence). Has become. Further, the light emitting means emits light (lighting, blinking, etc.) in a light emitting mode of "music effect "may be there" lamp pattern". Note that the BGM being output by the music selection may be configured to be continuously output as it is after the music is selected (determined).

Note that, for example, as shown in FIG. 254 (40), the first decorative design is confirmed and displayed by a combination of the decorative designs of the "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" (the jackpot pattern mode), and the jackpot due to the probability variation jackpot. When it is decided that the game is started, only one song may be displayed in the song release list GR of the song selection screen shown in FIG. 255 (42). Further, when the first decorative design is confirmed and displayed by a combination of the large-decoration decorative designs such as “decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6” (big-hit pattern mode), even after the battle victory presentation, the music selection production is performed. It is good, and it is not necessary to shift to the music selection production.

Note that instead of automatically scrolling downward, scrolling may be performed by the player's own operation. Further, instead of displaying three question marks side by side, the titles of songs scheduled to be released in the future may be displayed lightly. Alternatively, on the contrary, it is not necessary to notify that there is a song that has not been released. That is, in the music release list GR, the display itself in which three question marks are arranged side by side may not be displayed, and only the released music title may be displayed. Further, in the music release list GR, only the frame corresponding to the released music may be displayed.

The timing shown in FIG. 256 (62) is a state following the timing shown in FIG. 255 (61), and shows the state of the second and third intervals of the big hit game. At this timing, the decorative symbol display device 208 continues to display the round effect display corresponding to the determined song "may be there", and the speaker 120 outputs "round effect BGM" as "may be there". The song "I don't know" is output, and the sound effects (SE) and error sounds are not output (silence). Further, the light emitting means emits light (lighting, blinking, etc.) in a light emitting mode of "music effect "may be there" lamp pattern".

The timing shown in (63) of the same figure shows the state where the 3rd round of the big hit game has started, and (64) of the same figure, after the 3rd round has been started, the next round (4th round) has a probability variation operating region (V). The state (V winning notification VG) indicating that it is a round in which the opening pattern of the second attacker 804 that easily wins the winning area (808) is executed is shown. The V winning notification of this example is, for example, in the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208, together with the round effect display corresponding to the determined music "may be there", "Aim V attacker in next round" Characters and an arrow pointing to the lower right indicating the position of the attacker unit 810 are displayed.

The timing shown in (65) of the same figure has shown the state where the 3rd round of the big hit game has ended. At this timing, the round effect display and the V winning notification VG corresponding to the determined music "may be there" are continuously performed.

In addition, from the speaker 120, a song "may be there" is output as the "round effect BGM", and a "next round V open notification SE (in this example, "next round" is output as a sound effect (SE). , "Aim at V attacker" is output, and the error sound is not output (silence). Further, the light emitting means emits light (lighting, blinking, etc.) in a light emitting mode of "music effect "may be there" lamp pattern".

The timing shown in (66) of the same figure shows the state of the interval between rounds of the 3rd and 4th rounds of the big hit game, and the effect device 206 continues the same effect as in (65) of the same figure.

The timing shown in (67) of the figure shows a state in which the V-attacker opening notification effect (V-winning suggestion effect) is being executed at the timing when the 4th round of the big hit game has started, informing that the V-attacker has opened. ing. In this example, as the opening notification effect of the V attacker, in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a round effect display corresponding to the determined music "may be there" is displayed along with "Aim at V attacker!!" And the arrow pointing to the lower right indicating the position of the attacker unit 810.

As for the state of the other rendering device 206, the music “May be there” is output as “round production BGM” from the speaker 120, and the sound effect (SE) and the error sound are not output (silence). Is becoming Further, the light emitting means emits light (lighting, blinking, etc.) in a light emitting manner of "light emitting pattern when V attacker is open".

The timing shown in (68) of the same figure shows the state where the game ball has entered the probability variation operating region 808 (the state where V has been won) in the 4th round of the big hit game. At this timing, the effect of notifying that the V prize has been won (V prize notification effect) is executed. As the V winning notification effect, in this example, in the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208, the character "V" is displayed together with the round effect display corresponding to the determined music "may be there". It suggests that it will be in a sudden change state after the jackpot game is over.

In addition, regarding the state of the other effect device 206, the music “may be there” is output from the speaker 120 as “round effect BGM”, and “V winning notification SE” is output as the sound effect (SE). The error sound is not output (silence). During the V winning notification production, the music of the "round production BGM" is continuously output, but the music is muted or the volume is output lower than usual. Note that the output of the “round effect BGM” may be interrupted during the V winning notification production and restarted after the V winning notification production is finished.

Further, the light emitting means emits light (lighting, blinking, etc.) in the light emitting mode of the "V winning light emitting pattern".

The timing shown in (69) of the figure shows a state after a predetermined period has elapsed from the timing shown in (68) of the figure, and the timing shown in (70) of the figure shows a state in which the V winning notification effect is finished. Showing. That is, at the timing shown in (70) of the figure, in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the display notifying the V winning is hidden, and the round effect corresponding to the determined music "may be there". The display continues.

As for the state of the other rendering device 206, the music “May be there” is output as “round production BGM” from the speaker 120, and the sound effect (SE) and the error sound are not output (silence). Is becoming Further, the light emitting means emits light (lighting, blinking, etc.) in the light emitting mode of the "music effect "may be there" lamp pattern".

As shown in FIG. 245(b1) and FIG. 245(b4) to FIG. 7(b), it is performed after the end of the V winning notification effect (FIG. 245(b4)) and before the start of the V winning notification effect. The production (music production shown in FIG. 245(7b)) different from the existing production (round production shown in FIG. 245(b1)) may be performed (case 1). The same effect (round effect) may be performed before and after the winning notification effect (case 2), and case 1 and case 2 may be present.

The timing shown in (71) of the figure shows the state where the 4R of the big hit game has ended, and the timing shown in (72) shows the state of the 4R and 5R intervals of the big hit game. 73) shows the state where the 5R of the big hit game has started, (74) shows the state where the 13R of the big hit game has started, and (75) shows the 16R of the big hit game has started The state (76) shows the state where the final round 16R of the big hit game is finished, and the same figure (77) shows the state 16R of the big hit game and the interval state of the big hit game end effect. Showing. In the period of (71) to (77) in the same figure, the effect similar to that in (70) in the figure continues in the effect device 206.

The timing shown in (78) of the figure shows the state where the big hit game end effect is being executed. As a big hit game end effect, for example, a big hit end display (here, "Yoshimune RUSH continuation!!") is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

As for the state of the other rendering device 206, “SP Yoshimune Bonus End BGM” is output from the speaker 120, and “SP Yoshimune Bonus End SE (for example, speech of “Yoshimune RUSH continued”) is output as a sound effect (SE). Is output, and the error sound is not output (silence). The light emitting means emits light (lights, blinks, etc.) in the light emission mode of the “SP Yoshimune bonus end lamp pattern”.

The timing shown in (79) of the figure shows a state in which the stop display of the decorative symbol is displayed (the display is restarted) on the decorative symbol display device 208. That is, in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol is fixedly displayed in the combination of the large-decorative decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” (the big-hit pattern mode), and the hold icon of the special symbol 2 is displayed. Four h21 to h24 are displayed. In this example, all of the hold icons h21 to h24 are displayed by default (painted white). Further, in the second hold number display, "4" indicating that the number of hold of special figure 1 is four and "4" indicating that the number of hold of special figure 2 is four are displayed. There is.

In addition, at this timing, the design variation display of the special figure 1 is held four, and the design variation display of the special figure 2 is held four, and the decorative design is stopped and displayed. In the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, , All the four lamps are turned on to indicate that the special figure 1 has four holds, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 has four lights to show that the special figure 2 has four holds. All the lamps are on. The fourth symbol display device 2842 of special figure 2 of big hit stop is in a big hit stop state. The fourth symbol display device 2841 of the special figure 1 is in a state of losing stop without changing.

At the timing shown in (80) in the figure, one of the special symbols 2 has been reserved, and the variable display of the symbols on the second special symbol display device 212 is being executed. On the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable symbols of the decorative symbols are displayed. Indicates a running state.

257(a1) to FIG. 257(a16) and FIG. 257(b1) to (b5) are modified examples of the above-described effect examples (basic effect examples) shown in FIGS. 253 to 256, respectively. It is a figure shown in a series.

First, FIGS. 257(a1) to 257(a16) show effects in the case of failure (defeat in this case) in the round effect (for example, battle effect) as a result of the operation of the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 253(12). Here is an example:

At the timing shown in FIG. 257(a1), in the round effect (for example, the battle effect), the fact that the player has failed (defeated in this case) is notified (the battle failure effect is being executed). That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the character "Loss" indicating that the battle effect has been lost.

As for the state of the other effect device 206, “round effect BGM” is output from the speaker 120, and “battle defeat SE (for example, a voice of the word “regret”) is output as a sound effect (SE). The error sound is not output (silence). Further, the light emitting means emits light (lights, blinks, etc.) in a light emission mode of "challenge failure lamp pattern".

The timing shown in the same figure (a2) is the state where the 2R of the big hit game has ended, and the timing shown in the same figure (a3) is the state of the interval of the 2R and the 3R of the big hit game, The timing shown in a4) is the state where the 3R of the big hit game has started, the timing shown in the same figure (a5) is the state where the 3R of the big hit game has ended, and the timing shown in the same figure (a6) is , The state of the interval of the 3R and 4R of the big hit game, the timing shown in the same figure (a5) is the state where the 3R of the big hit game is finished, the timing shown in the same figure (a5) is the big hit game In the timing shown in (a5) of the same figure, the 3Rth of the big hit game is finished, and the timing shown in (a5) of the same, the 3Rth of the big hit game is finished This is a state, and the timing shown in FIG. 5(a5) is a state in which the 3R of the big hit game is finished. In the period of (a2) to (a6) of the same figure, the same effect as that of (a1) of the figure is executed in the effect device 206. It should be noted that, for example, at the timing of starting the 3rd round of the big hit game as shown in (a4) of the drawing, a revival effect may be performed to notify that the big prize allows the V winning.

The timing shown in the figure (a7) is a state in which the 4th round of the big hit game has started, and the round effect after the battle effect defeat is being executed. For the round effect after the battle effect is defeated, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a round effect display (animation or the like) after the battle effect is defeated. Further, the “round effect BGM” is output from the speaker 120, and the sound effect (SE) and the error sound are not output (silent). Further, the light emitting means emits light (lighting, blinking, etc.) in the light emitting mode of the "round effect lamp pattern".

The timing shown in the same figure (a8) is the state where the 8R of the big hit game has ended, and the timing shown in the same figure (a9) is the state of the interval of the 8R and the 9R of the big hit game. The timing shown in a10) is the state of the 9R to 12R of the big hit game (see FIG. 254 (29A)), and the timing shown in (a11) is the state of the 12R of the big hit game being finished. The timing shown in the figure (a12) is the state of the 12R of the big hit game and the interval of the big hit end effect.(a8) to (a12) of the figure, the effect device 206 is the same as (a7) of the figure. A similar effect (round effect after defeat in battle) is being executed.

The timing shown in (a13) of the same figure shows the state where the big hit end effect is being executed. The big hit game this time is, for example, a big hit game (a big hit that the V shutter opens in a pattern that makes it difficult to enter the probability variation area) started as "special map B" (substantially 8R normal big hit), and after the big hit game Substantially shifts to a shorter working time. However, if a game ball is irregularly placed in the probability variation area, the probability transition state is entered. That is, after the jackpot game is over, if the game ball does not enter the probability variation area in a specific round (4R in this example), the gaming state becomes the universal figure high probability state (time saving state). Therefore, the big hit end effect display, in this example, in the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208, a big hit end effect display (in this example, "Yoshimune CHALLENGE plunge!!" is displayed) is performed, and the time saving state is performed. Is notified of the shift to.

As for the state of the other rendering device 206, “Battle Bonus End BGM” is output from the speaker 120, and the sound effect (SE) is “Battle Bonus End SE (for example, voice of the line “Yoshimune Challenge Rush”)”. It is output and the error sound is not output (silence). Further, the light emitting means emits light (lights, blinks, etc.) in the light emitting mode of the "battle bonus end lamp pattern".

The timing shown in (a14) of the figure is a state in which an effect (an attention calling effect) that calls attention to forgetting to remove the prepaid card is being performed. The alerting effect is the same as that in FIG. 254 (33), and thus its description is omitted.

The timing shown in (a15) of the figure shows the state before the big hit game ends and shifts to the time saving state, and before the first symbol variation display is started. In the time saving state, the background image is a background image for the time saving state, and the decorative pattern is also a display mode different from the normal game state (special figure low probability general figure low probability state). Further, a hold icon display area 282 of special figure 2 is formed in the lower center of the display screen, and the number of hold of special figure 2 is notified by the number of displayed icons. Here, the default display mode of the hold icon of Toku-zu 2 is a rectangular unpatterned and white display mode, and the display mode (for example, shape) is different from the hold icon of Toku-zu 1 and the player Can be identified by just looking at it. The default display mode of the hold icon of special figure 1 and the default display mode of the hold icon of special figure 2 may be the same. It should be noted that in order to facilitate understanding that the four hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of FIG. 2 in (a15) to (a16) of the same figure, the hold that is not actually displayed is displayed. The icon is indicated by a broken line. In addition, in FIGS. (a15) to (a16), the hold icon display area 282 of Toku-zu 2 is divided by a broken line to facilitate the description, but the broken line is actually displayed. Not done. In addition, in the time saving mode, the hold icon of Toku-zu 1 is not displayed, but it may be displayed. Further, at this timing, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the mini right hit display is performed in the upper left corner of the display screen, and the character “BONUS×◯” indicating the number of consecutive holidays is displayed below it. At this timing, since the first big hit game is over, “BONUS×1” indicating that is displayed. In addition, the second hold number display (the hold of special figure 1 is "4", the hold of special figure 2 is "0") is displayed in the lower right corner of the display area, and the number of saved time (the remaining number of times is In this example, "99 times remaining" is displayed.

At the timing shown in FIG. 16 (16a), one hold of the special figure 1 is exhausted, the variable display of symbols on the first special symbol display device 212 starts, and the variable display of decorative symbols starts on the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows the state of being. Further, the second hold number display (the hold of special figure 1 is "3" and the hold of special figure 2 is "0") is displayed in the lower right corner of the display area.

Further, in the state of the other effect device 206, “Short-time medium BGM” is output from the speaker 120, and the sound effect (SE) and the error sound are not output (silent). Further, the light emitting means emits light (lighting, blinking, etc.) in the light emitting mode of the "time and medium lamp pattern".

In addition, after the end of the time saving state (after the number of time saving has become 0), the state returns to the normal state (for example, FIG. 258 (c8)). Further, the result display (for example, FIG. 258 (c6)) may be performed before returning to the normal state (for example, FIG. 258 (c8)).

257(b1) to FIG. 257(b5) are modified examples of the effect of the interval period shown in FIG. 254(31).

The timing shown in FIG. 257(b1) is during execution of the round effect after the battle victory shown in FIG. 254(31), and shows the state of the interval of the big hit game end and the big hit end effect. In this example, the interval between the jackpot game end and the jackpot end effect is set to a period longer than the interval between the rounds, and during that period, for example, a selected effect (for example, a mode selection (selection) for selecting an effect mode during probability change) Production) is being performed. In the mode selection effect, in the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208, display of a plurality of effect modes (in this example, “space mode”, “Echigoya Oppake mode”, “one-shot notification mode”) and operation buttons (for example, The operation means image BG for prompting the operation of the chance button 136) is displayed. The mode selection effect may be performed within one round or may be performed over a plurality of rounds.

The timing shown in (b2) of the same figure shows the state where the chance button 136 is operated, and the timing shown in (b3) of the same figure is that the cursor csd is moved by the operation of the chance button 136, and the "space mode" changes to "Echigoya". It shows that the selection has been changed to "Oppo mode".

The timing shown in (b4) of the figure shows a state in which the cursor csd is moved by the operation of the chance button 136 and the selection is changed to "space mode". The timing shown in (b5) of the figure shows that the interval period is It shows the finished state. At this timing, the selection of the "space mode" is decided, and the display is displayed in white blinking (a pattern of "small number"). In this mode selection effect, selection can be changed (the cursor csd is moved) with the chance button 136, but the effect mode in which the cursor csd is located at the end of the interval period is selected. For example, in (b5) of the figure, the selection of the "space mode" in which the cursor csd is located is determined at the end of the interval period. After the state of (b5) in the figure, the state shifts to the state of (254) in FIG.
Note that, as shown in FIG. 257(b4) and FIG. 257(b5), the operation means image BG is

An elapsed time notification image TG (for example, the character “3” indicating the remaining 3 seconds) may be displayed as the operation valid period display for notifying the elapsed time of the operation button acceptance period (operation valid period). This operation valid period display may be the time before the end of the interval or the time before the end of the selection.

In this example, the case of the mode selection effect has been described as an example of the selection effect, but other selection effects (for example, music selection effect) can be similarly applied.

258(a1) to FIG. 258(a8), FIG. 258(b), and FIG. 258(c1) to (c13) respectively show the above-described effect examples (basic effect examples) shown in FIGS. 253 to 256. It is a figure which shows another modification in a time series.

The timing shown in FIG. 258(a1) shows the same timing as in FIG. 254(34), but is different only in that a selection effect (for example, a music selection effect) is executed. The rest of the configuration is similar to that of FIG. 254 (34), so description will be omitted.

In this example, in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the icons of the song name display portion MN, the song name display portion MN, and the operation key unit 137 are displayed as song selection effects. The song title display portion MN is provided, for example, in the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the song title of the song (here, the default "may be there") is displayed. Further, icons of up/down keys 137u, d of the operation key unit 137 are displayed on the left side of the song name display portion MN, and it is informed that the songs can be selected by operating the up/down keys 137u, 137d. In this way, the music selection effect is executed by displaying the icons of the music title display portion MN and the operation key unit 137.

The timing shown in FIG. 258(a2) is the same as that in FIG. 254(34), so only the points different from FIG. 254(34) will be described. At this timing, the speaker 120 outputs the music "may be there" having the music title displayed in the music title display portion MN, and the sound effect (SE) and the error sound are not output (silence). There is. Further, the light emitting means emits light (lighting, blinking, etc.) in the light emitting mode of the "probably changing lamp pattern". In this example, the right-handing notification for instructing the right-handing is not performed.

The timing shown in FIG. 258(a3) shows the state where the lower key 137d of the operation key unit 137 is operated, and the timing shown in FIG. 258(a4) shows that the song title on the song title display section MN is "Mega!Giga!Summer! It has been changed to ". The speaker 120 outputs the song “Mega!Giga!Summer!” having the song title displayed in the song title display portion MN, and the sound effect (SE) and the error sound are not output (silent). Further, the light emitting means emits light (lighting, blinking, etc.) in the light emitting mode of the "probably changing lamp pattern".

The timing shown in FIG. 258(a5) shows a state in which the lower key 137d of the operation key unit 137 is operated, and the timing shown in FIG. 258(a6) shows that the song title of the song title display section MN may be "There is again." The status is changed to "No". When there are a plurality of selectable songs, the song name changes by one each time the down key 137d is operated. In this example, there are two selectable songs, and by operating the down key 137d at the timing shown in FIG. 258(a5), the original song name "may be there" as shown in FIG. 258(a6). I'm back. When the song title of the song title display portion MN changes, the song output from the speaker 120 also changes according to the song title displayed on the song title display portion MN. That is, at the timing shown in (a6) of the same figure, the music output from the speaker 120 has returned to "may be there" again.

Since the timing shown in FIG. 258(a7) is the same as the timing shown in FIG. 254(38), only the points different from FIG. 254(38) will be described. At this timing, the speaker 120 may continue to output the song "may be there" having the song title displayed in the song title display portion MN.

The timing shown in FIG. 258 (a8) is the timing following that of FIG. 258 (a7), and shows the state in which the icon of the music title display section MN and the operation key unit 137 are hidden (erased). In this way, in this modification, the music selection effect can be executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern ((a2) in the same figure). In this case, the music selection effect ends when the reach effect is started ((a8) in the figure), and the music selection cannot be performed. It should be noted that the music selection effect may be executed even during the execution of the reach effect so that the music selection can be performed, or the music selection effect can be performed before the start of the reach effect (for example, in the state of the temporary stop display of the left symbol). It may be configured that the music selection is terminated after the end. After the timing shown in FIG. 258(a8), the state shifts to the state of FIG. 254(39).

In addition, when the music selection effect is performed during the big hit, some or all of the states during the non-big hit (probable change state, time saving state, normal state, electric support state, non-electric support state, symbol fluctuation, symbol stoppage) , The hold is 0 and any one or more of the symbols are stopped or all the states), the music selection effect may be configured to be executable. Also, the music selection effect may be performed only during the big hit. In addition, a part or all of the state during non-jackpot (probable change state, time saving state, normal state, electric support state, non-electric support state, symbol changing, symbol stopped, hold 0 and symbol stopped any one of The music selection effect may be configured to be executable in the above state or all states.

In addition, in the case where the music selection effect is performed in some or all of the probability changing state, the time saving state, the normal state, the electric support state and the non-electric support state, the music is changed and changed while the symbol is changing and the symbol is stopped. Although the selection and/or the selection may be configured to be executable, the composition and/or the selection of the music may be configured to be executable only while the design is changing, and the composition and/or the selection of the composition may be configured only while the design is stopped. It may be configured to be executable or may be configured to be capable of changing and/or selecting music only while holding 0 and symbols are stopped.

FIG. 258(b) is a diagram showing another modified example. Since this timing is the same as that of FIG. 254(34), only the points different from FIG. 254(34) will be described. At this timing, none of the BGM, the sound effect (SE), and the error sound are output (silent) from the speaker 120, and the light emitting means may be turned off. After this timing, the process moves to FIG. 254 (35).

FIG. 258(c1) to FIG. 258(c13) are diagrams showing other modified examples after FIG. 254(34). This modification is, for example, a so-called V-ST machine effect example in which a certain variation (for example, 50 rotations) of a positive variation state with electric support is imparted when passing through a specific area provided in the variable winning port in a big hit game. ..

The timing shown in FIG. 258(c1) is the same as that in FIG. 254(34), and therefore only the points different from FIG. 254(34) will be described. This timing is a probability change state, and above the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the number of remaining symbol fluctuations (“99 remaining” in this example) in which the probability variation state with electric support is maintained is displayed. ..

The timings shown in FIGS. 258(c2) to (c4) are the same as those in FIGS. 254(35) to 254(37) except that the number of remaining symbol fluctuations in which the probability variation state with electric support is maintained is displayed. Is. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 258 (c5), the number of remaining symbol variations in which the probability variation state with electric support is maintained is 0 (displayed as "remaining 0 times" here) and the probability variation state ends, and the decorative symbol display The 1st decorative design of the apparatus 208 has shown the state which is shaking fluctuation display (temporary stop display) by the combination of the lost designs of "decoration 5-decoration 2-decoration 7".

At the timing shown in FIG. 258 (c6), the result is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. As the result display, the number of consecutive holidays is displayed (in this example, “BONUS×1” is displayed), the acquired points are displayed (in this example, “990pt acquisition” is displayed), and the like. Further, in the upper right part of the display area, a second decorative symbol having the same symbol combination as the first decorative symbol in FIG. 5C5 is displayed in a swinging change display (temporary stop display). In the lower right part of the display area, a second hold number display (here, the hold of special figure 1 is "4" and the hold of special figure 2 is "3") is displayed.

At the timing shown in FIG. 258 (c7), in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) by the symbol combination of the lost symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 2-decoration 7". It shows the state. At this timing, the result display continues in the display area. As described above, in the present modification, the result display is performed in the period from the temporary stop display of the decorative design (for example, the second decorative design) to the final stop. Note that a small result display may be performed during the period from the temporary stop display of the first decorative symbol to the final display.

The timing shown in FIG. 258 (c8) shows the state where the display has returned to the normal state (indeterminate change state and non-electric power saving state (non-time saving state)). In the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208, the combination of the decorative patterns that are missing from the first decorative pattern (“decoration 5”-“decoration 2”-“decoration 7”) is stopped and displayed. Further, at this timing, the hold that was the first hold (holding the oldest winning prize) has been exhausted so far, and the variable display of the second decorative symbol is started in the upper left part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. .. Four hold icons h11, h12, h13, h14 are displayed in the hold icon display area below the center of the display area. In the second hold number display on the upper right, the hold number in Toku-zu 2 is decremented by "2". Is displayed.

The timing shown in FIG. 258 (c9) shows the state where the left-handed notification effect is being executed. In addition, at this timing, the first decorative design does not start the variable display, but the second decorative design displayed in the upper left of the display area of the decorative design display device 208 continues the variable display. As a left-handing notification effect, here, in the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208, a left-handing notification for instructing the player to left-hand (for example, the characters "←return to left-handing" on a semi-transparent strip image) Is displayed). In this way, after the variable display of the next decorative design (the second decorative design in this example) is started, the left-handed notification is started. In addition, the left-handed notification overlaps the first decorative pattern, and the first decorative pattern is more difficult to visually recognize than in the case where the first decorative pattern does not overlap. On the other hand, the second decorative pattern is not overlapped with the left-handed notification.

The timing shown in FIG. 258 (c10) shows a state in which the first decorative symbol starts variable display in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the display area, the left-handed notification effect is continuously executed.

The timing shown in FIG. 258 (c11) shows a state in which the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. For example, the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the pattern combination of the defective symbols "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7". Further, in the display area, the left-handed notification effect is continuously executed.

At the timing shown in FIG. 258 (c12), in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the left-handed notification effect ends, and the second decorative symbol also has the same symbol combination as the first decorative symbol (for example, "decoration 4-decoration 1 -The combination of the symbols of the decorative pattern of "decoration 7") is stopped and displayed.

The timing shown in the figure (c13) shows that one hold of the special figure 2 has been exhausted, and the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol have started variably displaying in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. There is.

Thus, in this modification, the left-handed notification effect is started after the variable display of the decorative pattern (for example, the second decorative pattern) is started ((c9) in the same figure), and the decorative pattern (for example, the second decorative pattern). The left-handed notification effect continues until a stop display of (pattern) is displayed. Note that the left-handing notification effect may be configured to end after a certain period of time has elapsed from the start of variable display of the symbols, in which case before the left-handed notification notification has ended the symbol variable display. The left-handing notification effect may be ended, or may be continued until the symbol variation display after the symbol variation display where the left-handing notification is started. In addition, the left-handing notification effect may be ended when the predetermined number of symbol variations have ended. Further, the left-handed notification effect may be configured to start when the big hit end effect ends, regardless of whether or not the first variation display of symbols starts after the big hit ends.

259(a1) to (a5), FIG. 259(b1) to (b7), FIG. 259(c1) to (c7), and FIG. 259(d1) to (d4), respectively. FIG. 25 is a diagram showing another modified example of the above-described effect example (basic effect example) shown in FIGS. 253 to 256 in time series.

First, FIGS. 259(a1) to (a5) are modified examples after FIG. 254(38).

The timing shown in FIG. 259(a1) is the same as that of FIG. 254(38), except that the decorative pattern in the reach state is different from that of FIG. 254(38) (“decoration 2” in this example).

The timing shown in FIG. 259(a2) shows a state in which the first decorative design is confirmed and displayed in the combination of the decorative design of the big hit of "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" (big hit pattern mode). At the timing shown in (a3), the big hit start effect is being executed. In this big hit start effect, an effect of "Yoshimune bonus" indicating that the big hit game is started due to the fact that the symbols of the probability variation big hit or the normal big hit have been prepared is executed. As the effect of the “Yoshimune Bonus”, in the decorative symbol display device 208, an effect using the entire display area is executed.

As for the state of the other rendering device 206, "Yoshimune bonus start BGM" is output from the speaker 120, and "Yoshimune bonus start SE (for example, voice of dialogue such as "Yoshimune bonus")" is output as a sound effect (SE). Is output and the error sound is not output (silence). Further, the light emitting means emits light (lights, blinks, etc.) in a light emission mode of "Yoshimune bonus start lamp pattern".

The timing shown in the same figure (a4) has shown the state where the 1R 1st of the big hit game started. In the big hit game effect in this example, a round effect display is executed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The decorative symbol display device 208 has a display indicating that it is the first round (“1R”), a display of the number of balls (prize balls) displayed (990 pt), and two consecutive villas have been achieved with this big hit. A display of "BONUS x 2" indicating what has been done (the number of big hits) is also displayed.

As for the state of the other effect device 206, the “bonus second round effect BGM” is output from the speaker 120, and the sound effect (SE) and the error sound are not output (silence). Further, the light emitting means emits light (lighting, blinking, etc.) in the light emitting mode of the "second bonus round lamp pattern".

In the example of FIG. 254 (38) to FIG. 255 (42), the music selection effect has started when the first hit of the big hit game starts, but in this modified example, the music select even if the first hit of the big hit game starts. The production does not start. In this way, there may be a big hit where the music selection effect is performed and a big hit where the music selection effect is not performed. For example, the music selection effect may be performed when the number of rounds is a big hit, and the music selection effect may not be performed when the number of rounds is a big hit. Further, the music selection effect may not be performed when the number of rounds is a big hit, and the music selection effect may be performed when the number of rounds is a big hit. In addition, in the case of a big hit with a decorative pattern that is confirmed to be a V prize, a music selection effect is performed, and in the case of a big hit with a decorative pattern that is determined to be a V prize, a music selection is performed in the case of a big hit. The effect may not be performed. In addition, in the case of a big hit with a decorative pattern that is confirmed to be V winning, the music selection effect is not performed, and in the case of a big hit when it is a big hit with a decorative pattern that is confirmed to be V winning You may make it select production.

The timing shown in FIG. 259(a5) shows the state of the interval between the 5th and 6th jackpot games. Round production continues at this timing. After this, for example, the process proceeds to FIG. 254 (32).

Also, FIGS. 259(b1) to (b7) are other modified examples after FIG. 256(67). This modified example is an example of an effect in which a time saving state is achieved when no V prize is won. The timing shown in FIG. 259(b1) is the same as that in FIG. 256(67).

The timing shown in FIG. 259 (b2) shows a state in which no V prize has been won even after the maximum open time of the attacker has elapsed, and the same timing (b3) shows a state in which 4R of the big hit game has ended.

The same figure (b4) has shown the state where 16R of the big hit game ends, the figure (b5) has shown the 16R of big hit game and the state of the interval of the big hit game end production. In this example, the round effect continues in the decorative symbol display device 208 during the period of (b3) to (b5) of the same figure.

The timing shown in the figure (b6) has shown the state where the big hit game end effect is being performed. As a big hit game end effect, for example, in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a big hit end effect display (in this example, “Yoshimune CHALLENGE rush!!” is displayed) is performed, and the time saving state is entered. To be notified.

For example, when the 12R big hit symbol (substantially 8R probability variation big hit symbol) of the "special drawing A" shown in FIG. 201 is won, the game ball is a V passing switch (probability variation operation area 808, probability variation area, V) in the second attacker 804. If the player does not enter the area or the V winning area), the sure change (special figure high accuracy normal figure high accuracy) state is not given as the game state after the big hit. In other words, in the normal state, it does not enter the V winning area, but if the game ball enters the V winning area under unintended circumstances, it will change as the gaming state after the jackpot ends (special figure high accuracy normal figure high accuracy) state. May be added. In this modified example, in such a circumstance, when the player does not win the V prize even though the maximum opening time of the attacker has passed, the game player shifts to the time saving state.

The timing shown in the following FIG. 259 (b7) shows the situation before the big hit game ends and shifts to the time saving state, and the first symbol variation display is started, which is similar to FIG. 257 (a15). Therefore, the description is omitted.

In addition, FIG. 259(c1) to FIG. 259(c7) are other modifications after FIG. 256(74).

The timing shown in FIG. 259(c1) is the same as FIG. 256(74), except that the 13Rth jackpot game is started and the button effect is additionally executed. In the button effect of this example, by operating the operation button (chance button 136), it is possible to shift to, for example, a mode selection (selection) effect of selecting the effect mode that is in the process of probability change.

Specifically, as a button effect, for example, below the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208, an operation means image BG that prompts the user to operate an operation button (for example, a chance button 136) and an operation explanation (here, “button operation is performed. (Transition to mode select) is displayed. That is, whether or not to select the mode can be selected (change of selection) by operating the chance button 136.

The timing shown in (c2) of the same figure shows the state in which the chance button 136 has been operated, and the timing shown in (c3) of the same figure is, for example, in the 13R of the big hit game, mode selection for selecting the production mode during probability change ( (Select) Shows the state in which the effect is being executed. In the mode selection effect, in the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208, display of a plurality of effect modes (in this example, “space mode”, “Echigoya Oppake mode”, “one-shot notification mode”) and operation buttons (for example, The operation means image BG for prompting the operation of the chance button 136) is displayed.

The timing shown in (c4) of the figure shows a state where the 16th R of the big hit game has started and the mode selection effect is being executed continuously. That is, the mode selection effect of this example is performed over a plurality of rounds. It may be performed only within one round.

The timing shown in (c5) of the figure is a state in which, for example, "3" indicating the remaining 3 seconds is displayed as the operation valid period display (operation valid period image) TG on the operation means image BG. The timing shown in FIG. 6(c6) is a state in which the operation valid period has ended when the "space mode" is selected (change of selection) (for example, as the operation valid period display TG, "0" indicating 0 seconds remaining). Is indicated).

The timing shown in the figure (c7) shows the state of the 16R of the big hit game and the interval of the big hit end effect. In this example, the selection of the "space mode" is still determined at this timing, and the state in which the display is blinking white (the pattern of "small number") continues. Then, after this, the process proceeds to FIG. 256 (78). In this case, the chance button 136 is operated to change the selection (move the cursor csd), and the operation valid period ends, so that the cursor is moved to the position of the cursor csd without separately performing an operation for determining the selection. A certain effect mode is determined (determination of selection). The selection may be determined by an operation for determining the selection (for example, the second operation of the chance button 146).

In this example, the case of the mode selection effect has been described as an example of the selection effect, but other selection effects (for example, music selection effect) can be similarly applied. Further, in the other effect examples described using the music selection effect as an example of the selection effect, it is possible to change to another selection effect such as a mode selection effect and apply the same.

Also, FIG. 259(d1) to FIG. 259(d4) are other modified examples after FIG. 256(74).

The timing shown in FIG. 259(d1) is similar to the timing shown in FIG. 259(c1), FIG. 259(d2) shows the state where the 14Rth big hit game has started, and FIG. 259(d3) shows the big hit. It shows a state in which a certain period has elapsed from the start of the 14th game ((d2) in the figure). During the period of (d1) to (d3) of the same figure, the button effect for shifting to the mode selection (selection) effect for selecting the effect mode in the probability change is being executed. The figure (d4) shows a state after a further period has elapsed from the figure (d3) and the button effect has ended.

In this way, in this example, the button effect is executed in a round with a big hit game (the 13th R in this example), and if the chance button 136 is operated before the end of the 14R of the big hit game, a mode in which the probability mode is changing is selected. The process shifts to the selection effect, but if the chance button 136 is not operated before the end of 14R, the button effect ends and the effect mode selection effect is not executed. After (d4) in the same figure, the flow shifts to FIG. 256 (76).

FIG. 260 is a diagram showing another modified example of the above-described effect example (basic effect example) shown in FIGS. 253 to 256 in time series, and in the period of FIG. 255 (51) to FIG. 255 (52). It is another modification of the production.

The timing shown in FIG. 260(a1) is similar to the timing shown in FIG. 255(51), and the timing shown in FIG. 260(a2) shows the state where the right key 137r of the operation key unit 137 is operated.

The timing shown in FIG. 260(a3) shows a state in which the volume control display is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 by operating the right key 137r. The volume control display is displayed overlapping at least a part of the music selection screen of the music selection effect (in this example, at least a part of the music release list GR), whereby at least a part of the music selection screen is played. It is difficult for people to see. When the right key 137r or the left key 137l is operated while the volume adjustment display is displayed, the volume can be adjusted, as shown by the filling in FIG. After this, the flow shifts to FIG. 255 (52).

As described above, in this example, the volume adjustment display and the volume adjustment are possible even during the selection effect such as the music selection effect.

In the example shown in FIG. 260, the up and down keys 137u and 137d of the operation key unit 137 are used to select a song (change the selection), and the left and right keys 137l and 137r are used to adjust the volume. Brightness cannot be adjusted. The up/down keys 137u, 137d may be used to adjust the volume, and the left/right keys 137l, 137r may be used to select a song (change the selection).

On the other hand, while the demo screen is being displayed, brightness adjustment and volume adjustment may be performed. In this case, the up and down keys 137u and 137d adjust the brightness, and the left and right keys 137l and 137r adjust the volume. The up/down keys 137u and 137d may be used to adjust the brightness, and the left/right keys 137l and 137r may be used to adjust the brightness.

Further, either the volume adjustment or the brightness adjustment may be performed during execution of the music selection effect. In this case, the cross keys to be used may be duplicated. If they do, the function that allows constant adjustment (there are many occasions where adjustment is possible) is restricted, and constant adjustment is not possible (adjustable opportunity). Is assigned) to the function.

For example, if the volume adjustment display is displayed (volume adjustment is enabled) when the left and right keys 137l and 137r are operated in a normal state (during non-execution of the music selection effect) as in this modification, the volume is Adjustment is a function that can be adjusted at all times (there are many occasions when adjustment is possible).

In this case, if the left/right keys 137l, 137r are operated during the execution of the music selection effect, the volume adjustment that can be constantly adjusted is restricted, and the left/right key 137l is given priority over the luminance adjustment that cannot be constantly adjusted. Allocate 137r.

Alternatively, when the cross keys to be used are duplicated, the key assigned to the function that can always be adjusted (volume adjustment in this example) is changed, the volume is adjusted with the up/down keys 137u and 137d, and the left/right keys 137l and 137r are used. The brightness may be adjusted by. Not only the assignment described here, but also when assigning the up/down keys 137u, 137d and the left/right keys 137l, 137r of the operation key unit 137 to each of the operation of the selection effect such as the music selection effect, the volume adjustment and the brightness adjustment, The combination of can be exchanged for each. The technical idea of assigning (changing) the key can be applied to all the embodiments of the present specification.
<Example of performance when notifying an error>

Next, with reference to FIG. 261 to FIG. 267, an example of an effect when notifying an error will be described.

261(a1) to FIG. 261(a15) are diagrams showing another modified example of the above-described effect example (basic effect example) shown in FIGS. 253 to 256 in time series, and during execution of the effect. It is an example of an effect when notifying an error.

The timing shown in FIG. 261(a1) is similar to the timing shown in FIG. 253(5), but in this example, the error flag of the error A is turned on at this timing.

Here, “error A” is various errors shown in FIGS. 114 to 116 (for example, a special winning opening discharge excess error, a big winning opening prize excess error, a winning rate abnormality error, a magnetic (magnet) detection error, It is a magnetic field (radio wave) error, solenoid error error, plate full error, etc.).

At the timing shown in FIG. 261(a2), error notification is performed to notify that the error A has occurred based on the fact that the error flag of the error A is turned on in FIG. 261(a1). The error notification is performed by performing an error display EA (display of the character “error A” here) indicating that the error A has occurred in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The error display EA is displayed so as to overlap various effect displays (in this case, the round effect display of the round effect (battle effect)).

Further, in the state of the other effect device 206 at this timing, BGM and the sound effect (SE) are not output (silence) from the speaker 120, and the error sound is “error A notification sound”. Further, the light emitting means emits light (lights, blinks, etc.) in a light emission mode of "error notification lamp pattern". Thereby, the occurrence of the error A is notified.

At this timing, it shows a state in which the 1R round effect of the big hit game is still being executed. For example, as a round effect (battle effect), an animation display of a battle scene of the character “Den (Yoshimune)” and the character “Grandpa” is executed (see FIG. 253 (5)). The error display EA is displayed overlapping the round effect (display).

The timings shown in (a3) and (a4) of the figure show a state in which the button effect starts to be executed in the 2R of the big hit game and the chance button 136 is operated during the operation valid period (FIG. 253). (See (9) and (10)). In this example, even when the error A is occurring, the operation of the chance button 136 is effectively accepted.

The timing shown in FIG. 261 (a5) is a state in which the success (in this case, victory) is notified in the round effect (for example, the battle effect) (the battle victory effect is being executed), and the battle wins. As the effect, for example, an effect image or the like is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 instead of the animation display of the battle scene (see FIG. 253 (13)).

In addition, the error display EA overlaps the effect image and continues to be displayed.

The timing shown in FIG. 261 (a6) indicates that the production movable body 224 is starting to operate even while the error A is occurring, based on the fact that the operation of the chance button 136 has been effectively accepted. More specifically, the light guide plate IL emits light, and a pattern simulating a predetermined effect image is displayed on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. In addition, the first large board behavioral product 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral product 224Gd operate and overlap on the front surface side of the decorative symbol display device 208, respectively. After that, the Senryo box accessory 224H operates and moves downward, and overlaps with the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd. Note that the display of the effect image, the operations of the first large-board behavior auditors 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior auditors 224Gd, the operation of the thousand box cabinet auditors 224H, and the order of starting the light emission of the light guide plate IL are not limited to those described above. Instead, it can be set appropriately. In addition, all of the display of the effect image, the operation of the first large board action product 224Ga to the fourth large board action product 224Gd, the operation of the thousand-box action product 224H, and the light emission of the light guide plate IL may be performed. There may be cases where the division is not conducted. At least a part of the mini right-handed display is displayed in the upper left part of the display area while being overlapped by the first large-scale behavior accessory 224Ga, for example. In addition, at this timing, for example, the mini right hitting display that has been overlapped by the first large board behavioral object 224Ga is not hidden by any of the effect movable bodies 224 (in this example, the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208). (Lower part of the center of the figure) and is visible to the player (FIG. 253 (see FIG. 15)).

Due to the operation of the production movable body 224, the error display EA is overlapped with the production movable body 224 at this timing, so that the player cannot see (difficult to see).

The timing shown in FIG. 261(a7) shows the state in which the initial position returning operation for returning the effect movable bodies 224 to the initial positions has started. For example, the Thousand Box Actor 224H starts rising toward the initial position. Further, in this example, the mini right-handed display is also moved to the initial position (upper left of the display area), and is overlapped again by the first large-board behavior auditor 224Ga for which the initial position returning operation has not been started, and the player is shown. The state becomes difficult to see (see FIG. 253(16)).

At the timing shown in (a8) of the figure, the light emission of the light guide plate IL is gradually extinguished (or the effect image is faded out), and subsequently, the first large board action product 224Ga to the fourth large board action product 224Gd respectively. It shows a state where the movement toward the initial position is started (the initial position returning operation is started) (see FIG. 253(17) to FIG. 18(18)), and the timing shown in FIG. 261(a9) is the decorative symbol display. On the device 208, a state where the animation display of the battle scene whose display has been interrupted is restarted while fading in (see FIG. 253(18)). During the period shown in FIG. 261 (a8) to FIG. 261 (a9), the error display EA is also displayed so as to overlap the effect display of these effects.

At the timing shown in FIG. 261 (a10), the animation display of the restarted battle scene (the word "win" indicating that the battle effect has been won and the round display indicating that the 3R of the jackpot game has started) is normal. The state is displayed (round effect is executed), and the V winning notification VG is being executed (see FIG. 253 (19)).

At the timing shown in FIG. 261 (a10), only the error sound (error A notification sound) is output from the speaker 120, and the BGM and the sound effect SE are not output (silent) (FIG. 26 (a2)). Is continuing).
However, it may be any of the following (1) to (3).

(1) When a specific time has elapsed from the occurrence of an error, a round effect sound (for example, “round effect BGM”) may be output in the round effect shown in FIG.

(2) The round effect sound (for example, “round effect BGM”) may not be output until the error is canceled, and the error sound (“error A notification sound”) may be continuously output as it is.

(3) The output of the round effect sound (for example, "round effect BGM") may be output as it is even while the error occurs. In that case, the volume of the round effect sound may be the same as that before the error occurrence or may be different from that before the error occurrence (the volume may be low or the volume may be high).
The error A may be any of the following (A) to (U).

(A) An error in which the error sound is output as it is until the error is released (for example, various errors that output an error sound when an error occurs. A door opening error or a ball removal error may be included).

(Yes) An error in which an error sound stops after a specific time has passed since the error was released (for example, a door opening error. Various errors in which an error sound is output when an error occurs, or a ball removal error may be used.)

(C) There is an error in which both the round effect sound and the error sound are output during the error (for example, a ball-out error. Various errors in which an error sound is output when an error occurs or a door opening error may be generated). May be.

Further, all of the errors (A) to (U) may be any of the above (1) to (3).

In this example, the relationship between the error sound and the “round effect sound (for example, round effect BGM)” has been described, but the “round effect sound” in this case can be replaced with another effect sound. In this case, any sound may be used as long as it is an effect sound, for example, a sound effect (SE), an operation sound of the effect movable body 224 (a sound output based on the operation), or the like.

The timing shown in (a11) of the same figure shows a state in which a specific period (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed from the occurrence of the error A ((a1) of the same figure) (see (253) in FIG. 253). At this timing, the error A has not been eliminated, and the error display EA is continuously displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 so as to overlap the effect display of the battle effect. Further, the light emitting means continues to emit light (lighting, blinking, etc.) in the light emission mode of the "error notification lamp pattern".

On the other hand, after the timing shown in (a2) of the figure, the error sound output from the speaker 120 ends at this timing and becomes non-output (silence).

As described above, in this example, even when the error A is occurring (a state where the error A is not eliminated), when a specific time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after the error occurs ((a2) in the figure), the output of the error sound Ends and goes into a non-output (silence) state. It should be noted that while the error A is occurring, the output of the error sound may not be terminated until the error A is resolved. Moreover, even if the error A is occurring, the output of the error sound may be terminated and the round effect BGM may be restarted when a specific time has elapsed since the error occurred.

Even when the error A is occurring, that is, even when the sound data of the error sound is set in the error sound channel of the sound source IC 416, the sound source IC 416 is rounded with the volume being 0 in the other channels. The sound data of the effect sound is set as it is, and after the error is released, the round effect sound is output in a state advanced by the output time of the error sound, but during the error, the round effect sound is output. The sound data of the sound may be deleted, and after the error is released, the round effect sound may be output from the continuation before the error occurs, or after the error is released, the round effect sound may be output from the beginning. May be. In this way, the output of the round effect sound is interrupted (or erased) due to the occurrence of an error (output of an error sound), and when the error is resolved, the round effect sound is output from the interrupted continuation or from the beginning. To be done.

The timing shown in (a12) of the same figure shows a state in which the fourth hit of the big hit game has started and the V-attacker opening notification effect (V winning suggestion effect) is being executed (see FIG. 253 (24)). The error display EA overlaps the effect display of the V winning suggestion effect and continues to be displayed.

The timing shown in (a13) of the figure is a state in which the V winning notification production is being executed by the V winning in the 4th round of the big hit game (see FIG. 253 (25)). The error display EA overlaps the effect display of the V winning notification effect and continues to be displayed.

The timing shown in FIG. 261 (a14) shows a state in which the error A has been resolved and the error flag of the error A has been turned off after the lapse of a predetermined period from FIG. 261 (a13). At this timing, the error display EA overlaps the effect display of the V winning notification effect and continues to be displayed.

The timing shown in (a15) of the figure shows a state in which the display of the error display EA is completed (becomes non-display) due to the elimination of the error A. The decorative symbol display device 208 continues to execute the effect display of the V winning notification effect.

As for the state of the other effect device 206, "round effect BGM" is output from the speaker 120, "V winning notification SE" is output as the sound effect (SE), and the error sound is not output (silence). Has become. Further, the light emitting means emits light (lighting, blinking, etc.) in the light emitting mode of the "V winning light emitting pattern". After this, the processing shifts to FIG. 253 (26).

261 (b1) to FIG. 261 (b7) are diagrams showing another modified example of the above-described effect example (basic effect example) shown in FIGS. 253 to 256 in time series, and during execution of the effect. It is an example of an effect when notifying an error.

The timing shown in FIG. 254(24) corresponds to the timing shown in FIG. 254(24), and the timing shown in FIG. 25(b2) corresponds to the timing shown in FIG. 254(25).

FIG. 261(b3) shows the timing following FIG. 26(b2) and shows a state in which the attacker is closed. Further, the timing shown in (b4) of the figure is a state in which the special winning opening winning excess error flag is turned on in the main control unit 300. As shown in FIG. 251, the special winning opening winning excess error flag indicates that the special winning opening 2 solenoid is closed, the remaining ball detection period (t), and the T seconds set as the special winning opening winning excess monitoring timer. This flag is turned on at the timing (e) when the delay period has elapsed.

The timing shown in (b5) of the figure is a state in which the notification of the special winning opening winning excess error is started. The notification of the special winning opening winning excess error is displayed (error display EA) in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 to indicate that the “big winning opening winning excess error” has occurred. The error display EA is displayed overlapping the effect display of the V winning notification effect.

Further, the speaker 120 does not output (silence) the BGM and the sound effect (SE), and outputs the “winning prize excess error notification sound” as an error sound. Further, the light emitting means emits light (lighting, blinking, etc.) in the light emitting mode of the "error notification lamp pattern".

Also, the big hit game is stopped at the 4th round, and does not shift to the next round until the error is resolved.

At the timing shown in (b6) of the figure, the special winning opening winning excess error is resolved, and the main control unit 300 turns off the special winning opening winning excess error flag. At this timing, the error display EA overlaps the effect display of the V winning notification effect and continues to be displayed.

At the timing shown in (b7) of the figure, in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the error display EA is not displayed next to (erased), and the V winning notification effect continues to be displayed. After this, the process shifts to the fifth jackpot game R shown in FIG. 254 (26).

262(a1) to FIG. 262(a11) are diagrams showing another modified example of the above-described effect example (basic effect example) shown in FIGS. 253 to 256 in time series, and during execution of the effect. It is an example of an effect when notifying an error.

The timing shown in FIG. 262(a1) is similar to the timing shown in FIG. 255(49), but in this example, the error flag of the error A is turned on at this timing. Here, as the "error A", various errors shown in FIGS. 114 to 116 can be applied.

At the timing shown in FIG. 262(a2), error notification is performed to notify that the error A has occurred, based on that the error flag of the error A is turned on. The error notification is performed by performing an error display EA (display of the character “error A” here) indicating that the error A has occurred in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The error display EA is displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the music selection effect (display).

Further, the speaker 120 does not output (silence) the BGM and the sound effect (SE), and outputs an “error A notification sound” as an error sound. Further, the light emitting means emits light (lighting, blinking, etc.) in the light emitting mode of the "error notification lamp pattern".

The timing shown in (a3) of the figure shows a state in which the upper key 137u of the operation key unit 137 is operated, and the timing shown in (51) of the figure shows that the cursor csd indicates "may be there". (Fig. 255 (50) to (51) in Fig. 255).

The timing shown in FIG. 262(a5) indicates a state in which the cursor csd is aligned with the display “may be there” (state in FIG. 262(a4)) and the chance button 136 is operated. The timing shown in (a6) of the same figure shows a state in which the selection of the music "may be there" is determined by operating the chance button 136. At this timing, as shown in (59) of the same figure, in the music release list GR of the decorative pattern display device 208, the determined "may be there" display blinks white (a pattern of "small number"). Is displayed (music determination display) (see FIG. 255 (58) and FIG. 59 (59)). At the timing shown in FIG. 262(a6), the error display EA overlaps at least a part of the music selection image (music release list GR).

The timing shown in (a7) of the same figure shows the state where the round effect has started due to the music being determined. In the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208, the music selection screen is switched to the round effect screen (round effect display). In this example, the round effect display of the second round is displayed, and this display is the round effect display corresponding to the determined music "may be there" (see FIG. 255 (60)). In this case, the error display EA is continuously displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 and overlaps at least a part of the round effect display. In addition, although the round effect display is performed, the BGM (song) corresponding to the round effect (display) is not output from the speaker 120, and the error sound “error A notification sound” is output (FIG. The error sound is continuously output from a2)). That is, at this timing, while the error A is occurring, the effect selected by the selection operation (the song "may be there") is not being executed by the effecting means (speaker 120) (output from the speaker 120). Not) state.

Further, the light emitting means also emits light (lighting, blinking, etc.) in the light emitting mode of the "error notification lamp pattern" continuously from FIG.

The timing shown in FIG. 262(a8) shows a state in which a specific period (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed from the occurrence of the error A ((a1) in the same figure) (see FIG. 255(60)). At this timing, the error A has not been eliminated, and the error display EA is continuously displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 so as to overlap the round effect display. Further, the light emitting means continues to emit light (lighting, blinking, etc.) in the light emission mode of the "error notification lamp pattern".

On the other hand, after the timing shown in FIG. 262(a2), the error sound output from the speaker 120 ends at this timing and becomes non-output (silence).

As described above, in this example, even when the error A is occurring (a state where the error A is not eliminated), when a specific time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after the error occurs ((a2) in the figure), the output of the error sound Ends and goes into a non-output (silence) state. It should be noted that when the output of the error sound ends and a non-output (silence) state is set, a BGM corresponding to the round effect (in this case, a song “may be there”) is output from the speaker 120. May be

The timing shown in (a9) of the same figure shows a state in which the V winning notification VG is being executed after the third round is started (see FIG. 255 (64)). The error display EA is continuously displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the round effect display.

The timing shown in FIG. 262(a10) shows a state in which the error A has been resolved and the error flag of the error A has been turned off after the lapse of a predetermined period from FIG. 262(a9). At this timing, the error display EA overlaps the round effect display and continues to be displayed.

The timing shown in (a11) of the figure shows a state in which the display of the error display EA is completed (becomes non-display) due to the elimination of the error A. The decorative pattern display device 208 continues to execute the round effect display. After this, the flow shifts to FIG. 255 (65).

262(b1) to (b8) of the same figure are diagrams showing another modified example of the above-described effect example (basic effect example) shown in FIGS. 253 to 256 in time series, and FIG. 254(35). It is an example of the effect when the effect movable body 224 (in this example, the family crest actor 224E) performs an operation (normal operation) during a certain variation game between (36) in FIG.

As for the timing shown in the same figure (b1), one hold of the special figure 1 is exhausted, the pattern variation display on the first special figure display device 212 is started, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the decorative symbol (first decorative symbol). After the start of the variable display of ), the mini right hit display for instructing the player to right hit is displayed. In addition, four reservation icons h21 to h24 of special figure 2 are displayed below the display area, and a second number of reservations is displayed in the lower right corner ("4" for special figure 1 and "4 for special figure 2". Is displayed). Further, icons of the music title display portion MN and the operation key unit 137 are displayed, and the music selection effect is being executed.

As for the state of the other rendering device 206, “probably changing BGM (song of “may be there”) being selected” is output from the speaker 120, and sound effect (SE) and error sound are not output. (Silence). Further, the light emitting means emits light (lighting, blinking, etc.) in the light emitting mode of the "probably changing lamp pattern".

The timing shown in (b2) of the figure shows a state in which an effect in which the family crest monument 224E rotates while moving upward is being executed. In addition, at this timing, for example, a predetermined effect display 850 that is changing (for example, a cut-in image display such as “reach approach!?”) is displayed in front of the variable display of the decorative pattern, and a different effect display from the variable display of the decorative pattern. Etc.) are running.

The timing shown in (b3) of the same figure shows a state in which the initial position returning operation of returning the initial position to the initial position is performed while the crest monument 224E that has been moving and rotating is stopped.

The timing shown in (b4) of the figure shows a state in which the initial position returning operation of the family crest monument 224E is completed. At this timing, the effect display is continuously displayed in front of the variable display of the decorative pattern.

At the timing shown in (b5) of the figure, the effect display 850 is not displayed, and the variable display of the decorative symbols overlapped with the effect display 850 is easily visible to the player.

The timing shown in the figure (b6), “decoration 6” is displayed in swinging fluctuation display (temporary stop display) on the left symbol of the decorative symbol display device 208, and “decoration 6” is displayed in swinging fluctuation display (temporary stop display) on the right symbol. It shows the state of being performed.

The timing shown in the same figure (b7) shows the state where the variable game of the special figure 1 is stopped and the first decorative design is confirmed and displayed by the combination of the defective decorative designs of "decoration 6-decoration 5-decoration 6". ing.

In addition, at the timing shown in (b8) of FIG. 2, one of the holdings of FIG. 2 is exhausted, the variable display of symbols on the second special symbol display device 214 starts, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the decorative symbol (first ornament). It is a state that the variable display of (pattern) has started. In addition, three hold icons h21 to h23 of special figure 2 are displayed below the display area, and the second hold number is displayed in the lower right corner ("4" for special figure 1 and "3 for special figure 2"). Is displayed). After that, the process proceeds to FIG. 254 (36).

FIG. 263(a1) to FIG. 263(a10) are diagrams showing another modified example of the above-described effect example (basic effect example) shown in FIGS. 253 to 256 in time series, and FIG. 254(35). It is another example of the effect when the effect movable body 224 (in this example, the family crest actor 224E) operates during a certain variation game between (36). In the above-described production examples of FIGS. 262 (b1) to (b6), an example (example of normal operation) in which the production movable body 224 (family crest actor 224E) operates while changing is described, but in this example. A case will be described in which the effect movable body 224 (family crest actor 224E) becomes abnormal during operation.

At the timing shown in FIG. 263(a1), the family crest monument 224E that was moving and rotating in FIG. 262(b3) was stopped, and the initial position returning operation to return to the initial position was started, but there was an error that the initial position did not return. It shows the status that is occurring.

The timing shown in FIG. 263(a2) is a state after a predetermined time has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. 263(a1), and although the family crest actor 224E has stopped its operation, the decorative pattern display device 208 has no effect. The progress display progresses and the effect display 850 that overlaps the variable display of the decorative pattern is hidden, and the variable display of the decorative pattern is easily visible to the player. In this example, the family crest monument 224E has stopped operating while returning to the initial position below the decorative symbol display device 208, and at least a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 (for example, in FIG. The hold icons h21 to h24 are at least partially overlapped. It should be noted that the position is not limited to the position shown in the figure as long as it is in the middle of the operation of returning the family crest monument 224E to the initial position.

The timing shown in the figure (a3), "decoration 6" is displayed in a swinging fluctuation display (temporary stop display) on the left symbol of the decorative symbol display device 208, and "decoration 6" is displayed in a swinging fluctuation display (temporary stop display) on the right symbol. However, the family crest monument 224E is in a state in which the operation is stopped.

At the timing shown in FIG. 4(a4), the variation game of the special figure 1 is stopped, and the first decorative pattern is confirmed and displayed by the combination of the missing decorative patterns of "decoration 6-decoration 5-decoration 6", The family coat emblem 224E is in a state in which the operation is stopped.

As for the timing shown in the figure (a5), one hold of FIG. 2 is exhausted, the variable display of symbols on the second special symbol display device 214 is started, and the decorative symbol (first decorative symbol) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The variable display of is started. In addition, three holding icons h21 to h23 of the special figure 2 are displayed below the display area (at least a part of the holding icons h21 to h23 overlaps with the family crest 224E at this timing), and the second holding number is displayed in the lower right corner. (The hold of special figure 1 is "4", and the hold of special figure 2 is "3") is displayed.

Further, at this timing (when the fluctuation starts), the initial position returning operation of the family crest monument 224E is started (restarted). Specifically, the main control unit 300 transmits a fluctuation start command to the first sub control unit 400. Upon receiving the variation start command, the first sub-control unit 400 executes the initial position returning operation of the family crest monument 224E. This timing is a state in which the variation start command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400 (or a state in which the variation start command is received by the first sub control unit 400).

The initial position returning operation may be performed at the end of the fluctuation. Further, the initial position returning operation may be performed when the production movable body 224 whose operation is stopped is operated in another production, or in the production executed at another timing. Alternatively, the initial position returning operation may be performed after a lapse of a fixed time after the sensor that monitors the operation of the effect production movable body 224 detects OFF (stop of the operation). Alternatively, within a certain period after the sensor that detects whether or not the effect movable body 224 is at the initial position (origin position) (the sensor that is turned on when it is at the initial position and turned off otherwise) is turned off. The initial position returning operation may be performed.

The timing shown in (a6) of the figure shows a state in which the operation for returning the family crest part 224E to the initial position is restarted by the initial position returning operation. As described above, the first sub control unit 400 starts execution of the initial position returning operation of the family crest monument 224E at this timing based on the reception of the fluctuation start command from the main control unit 300.

At the timing shown in (a7) of the figure, the initial position returning operation of the family crest monument 224E is being executed. On the decorative design display device 208, the variable display of the decorative design (first decorative design) has started.

The timing shown in (a8) of the figure shows a state in which, for example, the upper key 137u of the operation key unit 137 is operated while the initial position returning operation of the family crest monument 224E is being executed. As shown in (a7) of the figure, in this example, the music selection effect is executed, and the operation of the up/down keys 137u, 137d at this timing is an operation for selecting (changing) the music.

The timing shown in (a9) of the figure shows a state in which the music is changed (changed from “may be there” to “mega!giga!sama!”) by operating the up key 137u. That is, the song name of the changed song “Mega!Giga!Summer!” is displayed on the song name display portion MN of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the speaker 120 displays “Mega!Giga!Summer” as “BGM during probability change”. Is output from the beginning. Further, the sound effect (SE) and the error sound are not output (silence). Further, the light emitting means emits light (lighting, blinking, etc.) in the light emitting mode of the “probably changing lamp pattern”.

In this way, in this example, the music selection (change) operation is valid even while the initial position returning operation of the family crest monument 224E is being executed.

At the timing shown in FIG. 10 (a10), the variation game of the special figure 1 is stopped, and the first decorative symbol is fixedly displayed by the combination of the missing decorative symbols of "decoration 6-decoration 5-decoration 6". At this timing, the initial position returning operation of the family crest monument 224E is completed.

263(b1) to FIG. 263(b10) are diagrams showing another modified example of the above-described effect example (basic effect example) shown in FIGS. 253 to 256 in time series, and FIG. 254(35). In the variation game between (36) in the same figure, in another example of production when the effect movable body 224 (in this example, the family crest actor 224E) operates, the effect movable body 224 (family crest actor) Another example in which the object 224E) becomes abnormal during operation will be described.

The timing shown in FIG. 263(b1) is similar to the timing shown in FIG. 263(a1), and the state in which the family crest actor 224E has started the initial position returning operation, but has an abnormality that does not return to the initial position has occurred. Showing.

The timings shown in (b2) and (b3) of the figure are the same as the timings shown in (a4) and (a5) of FIG.

The timing shown in (b4) of the figure is the same as the timing shown in (a6) of the figure, but here, the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the fluctuation start command executes the initial position returning operation. It shows a state in which the accessory 224E is not operating (continuing to stop). It should be noted that, if the family crest monument 224E does not operate even after the first sub-control unit 400 executes the initial position returning operation as described above, a retry operation may be performed. The retry operation may be performed once or a predetermined number of times in advance, or the retry operation may be continuously performed until the family crest monument 224E starts operating.

At the timing shown in (b5) of the figure, since the family crest cast 224 did not operate even though the first sub-control unit 400 performed the initial position returning operation of the family crest cast 224E, the family crest cast 224E (effect) This is a state in which an operation abnormality error of the movable body 224) is notified.

Specifically, in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, an error display EA (for example, the display of the characters "family crest auditors abnormal error") for notifying an abnormal operation error is performed. Further, in this example, the speaker 120 outputs the song “Mega!Giga!Summer!” as the “probably changing BGM”, and the sound effect (SE) and the error sound are not output (silent). Further, the light emitting means emits light (lighting, blinking, etc.) in the light emitting mode of the “probably changing lamp pattern”.

In this way, even if the initial position returning operation is executed, if the family crest monument 224E (effect movable body 224) has not returned to the initial position, an operation abnormality error may be notified (error notification). Further, in this example, the case where only the error display EA of the decorative pattern display device 208 is performed as the error notification has been described, but an error sound or a sound effect (SE) for notifying an abnormal operation error is output from the speaker 120, or light emission The abnormal operation error may be notified by the light emission mode of the means.

In addition, this error notification may be such that error notification is performed immediately after the family crest monument 224E does not operate even though the initial position returning operation has been executed, as described in FIG. After the retry operation is performed a predetermined number of times (or a predetermined time), error notification may be performed when the family crest monument 224E does not operate.

Here, the periods shown in the same figure (b1) to (b5) in this example are periods during which an abnormal operation error is occurring in which the family crest monument 224E does not execute the initial position operation, but the music selection effect is executed. It is in the middle. In this case, as shown in (a8) of the figure, when the upper key 137u of the operation key unit 137 is operated, for example, music selection (change of selection) becomes possible.

That is, in this example, even if an operation abnormality error of the effect movable body 224 occurs during execution of the selection effect (music selection effect), the selection operation of the selection effect (change operation of selection of music) is effectively accepted. The performance (music) is selected. Further, the operation abnormality error of this example can be applied to the “error A” described with reference to FIGS. 261 to 262.

In the timing shown in FIG. 263 (b6), in a state where the operation abnormality error continues (in a state where it is not eliminated), “decoration 7” is displayed in a swinging change display (temporary stop display) on the left symbol of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the right symbol. “Decoration 7” is displayed in a swinging change display (temporary stop display) and the reach effect is being executed.

Further, the timing shown in (b7) of the figure is a state where the SP reach is developed and the execution of the SP reach effect is started while the operation abnormality error continues (in a state where it is not eliminated).

The timing shown in the figure (b8) is, for example, as a part of the SP reach effect, for example, the first large board behavior product 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior product 224Gd operate, and on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, respectively. It is in an overlapping state. In addition, the error display EA is also overlapped by the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd.

In this example, the family crest actor 224E cannot perform the initial position returning operation and has an abnormal operation error, but the first large board behavioral object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral object 224Gd can perform predetermined operations. Has become. In addition, when the 1st large board behavior auditors 224Ga-the 4th large board behavior auditors 224Gd operate|moved because the family crest auditors thing 224E has stopped the operation|movement, one of the auditors (effect movable body 244) There is a risk of interference. In such a case, at least any one of the first large-scale behavior auditors 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior auditors 224Gd (which may interfere with some of the auditors or those which are not likely to interfere). It is advisable to regulate all operations (including all) and avoid interference. Further, even if there is a risk of interference, a predetermined operation may be executed for those that can operate, and as a result, the interference may be tolerated.

The timing shown in (b9) of the figure shows a state in which the operations of the first large-board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior accessory 224Gd are completed. At this timing, the family crest monument 224E has stopped operating.

At the timing shown in (b10) of the figure, the family crest monument 224E continues to stop operating (the operation abnormality error has not been eliminated), but an error notification for notifying the operation abnormality error (in this case, the error display EA) is displayed. ) Indicates a completed state. In this way, the error notification (error display EA) for notifying the operation abnormality error ends after a specific time has elapsed since the occurrence of the error ((b1) in the figure) (whether or not the error has been resolved). It may be. The error notification may be continued until the error is resolved. Further, in this example, the error notification is performed only by the error display EA, but the error notification that ends at this timing (ends after the elapse of the specific time) includes an error sound and an error notification by the light emitting means. Good. Further, as the error notification that continues until the error is resolved, an error sound or an error notification by the light emitting means may be included.

In FIGS. 262 and 263, the case in which the family crest part 224E is used as the production movable body 224 in which an operation abnormality (abnormality in which the initial position returning operation cannot be performed) occurs is described as an example, but it is possible to perform other productions. The body, that is, the first large-scale behavior part 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior part 224Gd, the thousand-box box part 224H, and the movable second decoration pattern display device 208M and the third decoration shown in FIG. 14B. The same applies to the abnormal operation of the symbol display device 208N and the light guide plate IL when the light guide plate IL is configured to be movable, and the effect movable body 224 described in the above example. In addition, the abnormal operation of the movable body performing these effects is not limited to the abnormality of the initial position returning operation, but an abnormality of other operations (for example, an error of not performing a scheduled operation during the effect, a power-on time, etc.). May not be performed properly (full stroke operation, sensor check operation, etc.) The production movable body 224 may be provided in the door body (front frame door 106). Further, the description of the movable body that performs the effect and the abnormal operation thereof described here can be similarly applied to the following examples.

FIG. 264 is a diagram showing another modified example of the above-described effect example (basic effect example) shown in FIGS. 253 to 256 in time series, in which power interruption/recovery is performed in order to eliminate an error that has occurred. It is an example of production when performing.

The timing shown in FIG. 264(a1) is the same as that in FIG. 262(a7), and error A occurs during the round effect shown in FIG. 255(60), and this error notification is being performed. .. Specifically, in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, an error display EA is performed so as to overlap the round effect display, and an error sound “error A notification sound” is output from the speaker 120 (corresponding to the round effect. BGM (musical piece) is not output or silent, and the light emitting means emits light (lights, blinks, etc.) in the light emitting mode of the "error notification lamp pattern" to notify the error.

Error A in this case is an error that is resolved by power interruption and power recovery. The error resolved by the power interruption/recovery can be applied to any of the errors described in FIGS. 114 to 116. For example, the special winning opening discharge excess error, the big winning opening excess winning error, the winning rate An abnormal error etc.

The timing shown in FIG. 264(a2) is a state in which a predetermined period has elapsed from FIG. 264(a1), and the timing shown in FIG. 264(a3) is a state in which the power is cut off/restored. Immediately after the power interruption/recovery, the decorative pattern display device 208 is in a non-display state, and the speaker 120 does not output any of BGM, sound effect (SE), and error sound. A power-on sound may be output. Further, the light emitting means is also turned off. At this timing, the error A has been resolved. The fourth symbol display devices 2841 and 2842 are displayed in the same lighting mode as before the power failure even after the power failure/power recovery, but after the power failure/power recovery is different from the mode before the power failure (for example, both are lost). Mode).

The timing shown in (a4) of the figure is when the effect movable body 224 (in this example, the family crest actor 224E, the first large-board behavior auditor 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior auditor 224Gd, and the thousand-box box auditor 224H) is powered on. This is the state in which the operation has started. Here, the "power-on operation" includes a full stroke operation and a sensor check operation. The full stroke operation is an operation of moving the production movable body 224 over the entire operable range, and the sensor check operation is within the detection range of the sensor that detects the operation without operating the full stroke. This is an operation to move. In addition, the full stroke operation may double as the sensor check operation. Further, when the production movable body 224 is stopped at a position other than the initial position, the initial position returning operation may be included in the power-on operation, and the initial position returning operation may be the full stroke operation or the sensor check operation. You may also serve as. Further, the initial position returning operation and the power-on operation are also included in the effect operation by the effect movable body 224.

Here, as an example, the production movable body 244 (the family crest actor 224E, the first large-panel behavioral component 224Ga to the fourth large-panel behavioral component 224Gd, and the thousand box component 224H) is subjected to a sensor check operation as a power-on operation. The case of performing a full stroke operation will be described.

That is, at this timing, the family crest actor 224E, the first large-board behavior auditors 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior auditors 224Gd, and the Senryo box auditors hall 224H simultaneously perform the sensor check operation. In this example, all of the actors that perform the sensor check operation are operated at the same time because they do not interfere with each other even if they are operated at the same time. ..

The timing shown in (a5) of the figure is a state in which the sensor check operation is completed and the display (recovery display) indicating that the decorative symbol display device 208 is returning from the power interruption is being performed. In this example, the character "preparing" is displayed as the returning display. At this timing, the main control unit 300 is operating (controlling), but the sub-control units (first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500) change this state (what kind of state it is). ) Since it cannot be recognized, the returning display is displayed.

The timing shown in (a6) of the figure is a state in which the first large-board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior accessory 224Gd have started the full stroke operation, and the timing shown in (a7) of the figure is the first large-board behavior officer. The object 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior officer 224Gd are in a state where the full stroke operation is completed, and the timing shown in (a8) of FIG.

The timing shown in (a9) of the figure is a state in which the main control unit 300 has returned to the interval between the 2R and 3R of the big hit game as the control of the main control unit 300 during execution of the full stroke operation of the thousand-box box accessory 224H. The timing shown in a10) is a state in which the third jackpot game is started as the control of the main control unit 300 during the execution of the full stroke operation of the thousand box accessory 224. Note that during the period shown in (a6) to (a10) of the same figure, the returning display is continued on the decorative symbol display device 208.

At the timing shown in (a11) of the figure, the full stroke operation of the thousand-box box accessory 224H is continuing, and the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 issue commands related to games or effects from the main control unit 300. By the reception, the round effect to be executed at the 3rd round of the big hit game is in a state where the execution is started.

As the round effect, for example, in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the 3rd round effect display is executed. This round effect display is a round effect display corresponding to the default music (in this example, "may be there"). In addition, the title "may be there" of the default music is displayed in the lower left of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Also, a mini right hit display, “3R” for displaying the number of rounds, and a big hit count display (for example, “BONUS×1”) are displayed.

On the other hand, a display of the number of balls (number of prize balls) before power interruption/recovery (here, it is overlapped with the 1000-box box accessory 224H), and a decorative pattern showing a pattern combination of decorative patterns when a big hit occurs. The information displayed is the RAM 308 after the RAM clear start address set in the RAM clear process (step S109 in FIG. 49A) after the power interruption/power recovery (recovery activation process or initial activation process). Since the storage area of has been cleared (initialized), the initial value is displayed. Specifically, the number of balls (prize number) is displayed as "0pt" (see (a12) in the same figure), and the display of the decorative symbol indicating the symbol combination of the decorative symbol when the big hit is the same, for example. As shown in the figure (a11), "?" is displayed.

Further, from the speaker 120, as the "round effect BGM", the music "may be there" is output from the beginning, and the sound effect (SE) and the error sound are not output (silence). Further, the light emitting means emits light (lighting, blinking, etc.) in a light emitting mode of "music effect "may be there" lamp pattern".

In this example, in the round effect BGM, the default music (here, "may be there") is started from the beginning regardless of the selection status of the music before the power failure/power recovery. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the music selected by the player may be started from the beginning or in the middle, or a round effect that is not an option may be started.

In addition, in this example, recovery is performed for each round (recovery in the next round after the power failure/power recovery occurred), but a specific round (for example, , 6R, etc.).

The timing shown in (a12) of the figure is a state in which the full stroke operation of the thousand-box box accessory 224H is continuing and the round effect is in progress. On the decorative symbol display device 208, the V winning notification VG has started displaying.

The timing shown in (a13) of the figure is a state in which the full stroke operation of the thousand-box box accessory 224H is completed, and the timing shown in (a14) of the figure is a state in which a predetermined period has elapsed from the timing shown in (a13) of the figure. Is.

The timing shown in (a15) of the figure is a state in which the family crest accessory 224E is performing a full stroke operation, and the timing shown in (a16) of the figure is a state in which the full stroke operation of the thousand-box box accessory 224H is completed. Yes, the power-on operation in this example is complete.

The timing shown in the same figure (a17) is the state of the interval of the 3R and 4R of the big hit game, and the timing shown in the same figure (a18) starts at the 4R of the big hit game, for example, FIG. 256 (67). Similar to the above, it is in a state where the V-attacker open notification effect (V winning suggestion effect) is being executed. Although not shown in the figure, the music “May be there” is output from the speaker 120 as the “round effect BGM”, and the sound effect (SE) and the error sound are not output (silence). Further, the light emitting means emits light (lighting, blinking, etc.) in a light emitting manner of "light emitting pattern when V attacker is open".

The timing shown in (a19) of the same figure is a state in which the effect (V winning notification effect) for notifying that the V prize has been won is being executed in the 4th round of the big hit game as in the case of, for example, FIG. 256 (68). Although not shown, the speaker 120 outputs the music “May be there” as the “round effect BGM”, the “V winning notification SE” as the sound effect (SE), and the error sound. Is not output (silence). During the V winning notification production, the music of the "round production BGM" is continuously output, but the music is muted or the volume is output lower than usual. Note that the output of the “round effect BGM” may be interrupted during the V winning notification production and restarted after the V winning notification production is finished. Further, the light emitting means emits light (lighting, blinking, etc.) in the light emitting mode of the "V winning light emitting pattern".

The timing shown in the figure (a20) shows the state of the 16R of the big hit game and the 16R of the big hit game and the interval of the big hit game end effect.

The timing shown in (a21) of the same figure shows the state where the big hit game end effect is being executed, as in the case of FIG. 256 (78), for example. As a big hit game end effect, for example, a big hit end display (here, "Yoshimune RUSH continuation!!") is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although not shown, “SP Yoshimune Bonus End BGM” is output from the speaker 120, and “SP Yoshimune Bonus End SE (for example, speech of “Yoshimune RUSH continuation”) is output as a sound effect (SE). The error sound is non-output (silent), and the light emitting means emits light (lights, blinks, etc.) in the light emission mode of the "SP Yoshimune bonus end lamp pattern".

The timing shown in FIG. 264 (a22) indicates a state in which the decorative symbol stop display is displayed (the display is restarted) on the decorative symbol display device 208. That is, in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol is fixedly displayed by the combination of the missing decorative symbols of "decoration 1-decoration 3-decoration 5", and the hold icons h21 to h24 of special figure 2 are displayed. Four are displayed. In this example, all of the hold icons h21 to h24 are displayed by default (painted white). Further, in the second hold number display, "4" indicating that the number of hold of special figure 1 is four and "4" indicating that the number of hold of special figure 2 is four are displayed. There is. After this, the process moves to FIG. 256 (80).

In this example, the full-stroke operation was executed in the order of the first large-board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior accessory 224Gd-thousand box accessory 224H-family crest accessory 224E. It is not limited to this order. If the full stroke operations can be performed simultaneously without interference, they may be performed simultaneously. Although omitted here, the initial position returning operation may be performed before the sensor check operation.

265(a1) to 265(a4), 265(b), 265(c), 265(d1) to 265(d9), and 265(e1) to 265(e6), respectively. It is a figure which shows another modification of the above-mentioned production example (basic production example) shown in Drawings 253-256 in a time series.

FIGS. 265(a1) to 265(a4) show the case where the power-on display is performed after the power is cut off/restored (FIG. 264(a3)) and after the display during recovery (FIG. 264(a5)). Here is an example.

The timing shown in FIG. 265(a1) is a state in which the power-on display is performed after the power interruption/power recovery (FIG. 264(a3)).

When the pachinko machine 100 is powered on, a start signal is input to the first sub control unit 400, and the initialization process by the first sub control unit 400 is started. In addition, the main control unit 300 starts the main control unit main loop process and the main control unit timer interrupt process after performing the initial startup process and the like in the main control unit power-on process, and the interrupt function is limited. (For example, the state up to FIG. 264(a3)). Then, the first sub-control unit 400 starts the liquid crystal loading process and performs the power-on display (liquid crystal loading display) shown in FIG. 265(a1). In this example, the power-on display is the character display "Now Loading".

In addition, in this example, during the power-on display, the effect movable body 224 (the family crest actor 224E, the first large-board behavior auditor 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior auditor 224Gd, the Senryo-box auditor 224H) is turned on when the power is turned on. Although the operation is not performed, the operation may be performed when the power is turned on.

The power-on display is not limited to that shown in the figure. For example, when the liquid crystal loading process start time is 0% and the liquid crystal loading process completion time is 100%, the power-on display (liquid crystal loading display) can be used to express the progress of the liquid crystal loading process as a percentage (%). Is. The progress degree of the liquid crystal loading process and the percentage display of the power-on display may correspond to each other, for example, continuous display increasing from 0% to 100% in 1% increments, 0%, 10%... , 90%, 100%, etc., and a stepwise display that increases by 10% may be displayed. Further, the progress of the liquid crystal loading process and the display of the power-on display do not necessarily have to match.

Further, as a power-on display, it is possible to perform an explanation display (tutorial display) regarding various settings of the game table. For example, as an explanation display, setting of a DIP switch for switching the volume setting mode (power saving mode) In addition to illustrating the method, a display indicating the timing of switching may be displayed, or a display unrelated to the liquid crystal loading process may be displayed. In addition to the explanation display, the current time, the setting status of the second output setting switch 194 of the pachinko machine 100 (display of the initial value of the user volume value for volume adjustment and brightness adjustment), the setting status of the power saving mode, etc. May be displayed.

The timing shown in the figure (a2) is a state after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of power-on display, and is a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214. The normal symbol holding lamp 216, the first special symbol holding lamp 218, and the second special symbol holding lamp 220 are turned on (possible).

In the same drawing (a3), the liquid crystal loading process of the first sub-control unit 400 is completed, the power-on display is ended and the display of returning is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 (in this example, the character "preparing" is displayed). Shows the state of starting.

The timing shown in (a4) of the figure is a state in which the family crest actor 224E, the first large-panel behavioral component 224Ga to the fourth large-panel behavioral component 224Gd, and the Senryo box component 224H are performing sensor check operations all at once. The display during recovery continues even at this timing. After this, the process proceeds to FIG. 264(a5).

As shown in FIGS. 265(b) and 265(c), in the returning display shown in FIG. 264(a5), a display regarding right-handing may be performed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 265(b), a mini right hit display may be displayed in the returning display, or as shown in FIG. 265(c), a right hit notification effect is displayed in the returning display. A similar right-handed notification (for example, display of the character "Please right-handed" on a semi-transparent strip image) may be performed. Also, the mini right hit display shown in FIG. 265(b) and the right hit notification shown in FIG. 265(c) may be performed simultaneously.

In addition, the display regarding right-handedness (right-handedness display, right-handedness notification) is not displayed even when the power is turned on or when the main controller 300 performs the initial start-up processing even if the display is returning. It may be displayed only when the return activation process is performed.

In addition, while displaying the returning display, only the right-handed display is always displayed, and the right-handed warning display is displayed when it is determined that the hitting that is not suitable for the game state is not made. However, it may be configured not to be displayed even when it is determined that the hitting method suitable for the game state is not performed.

265 (d1) to (d9) of FIG. 265 are other example effects when the music selection effect shown in FIG. 255 is executed.

The timing shown in FIG. 265(d1) is the same as the timing shown in FIG. 255(42).

The timing shown in FIG. 265 (d2) is a state in which an effect (V winning notification effect) for notifying that a V prize has been given is being executed during the execution of the music selection effect in the 1R of the big hit game.

As for the timing shown in FIG. 6(d3), after a predetermined period has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. 3(d2), the V winning notification effect is finished, the music selection effect is executed again, and the music “is there” on the decorative symbol display device 208. It may be "may be" (change of selection).

As for the state of the other rendering device 206, the music “may be there” is output from the speaker 120 as “music select BGM”, and the sound effect (SE) and the error sound are not output (silence). Has become. Further, the light emitting means emits light (lighting, blinking, etc.) in the light emitting mode of the "music selection effect lamp pattern".

The timing shown in (d4) is a state in which the error flag of error A is turned on during execution of the music selection effect, and the timing shown in (d5) is error A in the decorative pattern display device 208. Is a state in which an error notification (error display EA called “error A” in this example) for notifying occurrence of is being executed. The error display EA overlaps a part of the music selection effect (a part of the music release list GR in this example). In this example, at the timing shown in (d4) or (d5) of the figure, the cursor csd is moved in the music release list GR by, for example, the left/right keys 137l, 137r of the operation key unit 137 to select the music ( The selection can be changed, and the selection of music can be determined by operating the chance button (decision button) 136 (or when a predetermined time has elapsed after selection with the selection cursor csd).

In this way, even if an error (here, error A) occurs during execution of the selection effect (for example, music selection effect), the effect (music) is selected when the selection operation is performed. There is. That is, regardless of whether or not an error (for example, error A) has occurred (regardless of whether the error flag is on or off), the music selection effect is executed and the music selection (selection operation) can be executed.

After the timing of (d5) in the figure, in order to eliminate the error A that has occurred, the operations and effects (display, etc.) at the time of power interruption/recovery shown in FIGS. 264(a3) to 264(a10) are executed. To be done.

FIG. 265 (d6) is a state after the power is cut off and restored, the error A is resolved, and the second jackpot game 2R is started. In this example, the same music selection effect as that before the power interruption is executed, and the second (latest) music “Mega!Giga!Summer!” is selected on the decorative pattern display device 208. .. In addition, the music “Mega!Giga!Summer!” selected as the “music selection BGM” is output from the speaker 120, and the sound effect (SE) and the error sound are not output (silence). Further, the light emitting means emits light (lighting, blinking, etc.) in the light emitting mode of the "music selection effect lamp pattern".

Then, during the execution of the music selection effect, the power-on operation (for example, the full stroke operation) of the effect movable body 244 (here, the thousand box box accessory 224H) is executed.

Further, in this example, even if the power is cut off or restored, information indicating the state of the game before the power is cut off (for example, the number of bonuses, the number of balls acquired (the number of balls discharged, the number of prize balls), and the song selection effect are released The music that is being played, a decorative pattern indicating a pattern combination of decorative patterns when a big hit is held, etc. are held.

That is, even if the RAM clear process (for example, step S109 in FIG. 49A) after the power interruption/power recovery (return start process or initial start process) is executed, the above-mentioned game state is shown. The information is retained without being cleared (initialized), and as shown in FIG. 265 (d6), the information is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 after power restoration (this point will be described later). In addition, as for the information which shows the state of the game before an electric power interruption, only one part may be hold|maintained and another part may be reset.

The timing shown in (d7) of the figure is a state in which the power-on operation (for example, the full stroke operation) of the thousand-box box accessory 224H is completed, and the timing shown in (c8) of the figure is the power-on of the family crest accessory 224E. The time operation (eg, full stroke operation) is the timing during execution, and the timing shown in (d9) of the figure is a state in which the power-on operation (eg, full stroke operation) of the family crest monument 224E is completed. After this, the state shifts to the state of FIG. 255 (57).

In this way, in this example, even when the power-on operation of the effect movable body 244 (feature) is being executed, the selection effect (the music selection effect in this example) can be executed. Even if an error (for example, error A) occurs during the execution of the selection effect, if the selection operation (in this case, the music selection operation) is performed, the effect (the music in this case) Is configured to be selected.
FIG. 265(e1) to FIG. 265(e6) are other examples of effects after power interruption/power recovery.

The timing shown in FIG. 265(e1) is, for example, the timing at which the display during recovery shown in FIG. 264(a10) ends, and the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 play a game from the main control unit 300 or By receiving the command relating to the effect and the like, the round effect to be executed in the 2R of the big hit game is in the state of starting execution. In addition, the full stroke operation of the Senryo box accessory 224H is being executed.

Note that, for example, as shown in FIG. 265 (d5) described above, when the power is cut off and restored during execution of the music selection effect, the same effect (music selection effect) is obtained as shown in FIG. It may be possible to return to the state of being executed, or, as shown in FIG. 265(d5), when power cut/power recovery is performed during execution of the music selection effect, power cut is performed as shown in this example. -It may be possible to return to a state in which an effect different from that before the power recovery (here, a round effect) is executed.

As the round effect, for example, in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the 2R round effect display of the big hit game is executed. This round effect display is a round effect display corresponding to the default music (in this example, "may be there"). In addition, the title "may be there" of the default music is displayed in the lower left of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, a mini right hit display, “2R” for displaying the number of rounds, and a big hit count display (for example, “BONUS×1”) are also displayed.

On the other hand, a display of the number of balls (number of prize balls) before power interruption/recovery (here, it is overlapped with the 1000-box box accessory 224H), and a decorative pattern showing a pattern combination of decorative patterns when a big hit occurs. The information displayed in (1) indicates that the storage area of the RAM 308 is cleared (initial state) in the RAM clearing process (for example, step S109 in FIG. 49A) after the power interruption/power recovery (recovery starting process or initial starting process) is executed. Since it has been changed, the initial value is displayed. Specifically, the number of balls (prize number) is displayed as "0pt" (see (a12) in the same figure), and the display of the decorative symbol indicating the symbol combination of the decorative symbol when the big hit is the same, for example. As shown in the figure (a11), "?" is displayed.

That is, the information that can be acquired by the command transmitted from the main control unit 300 when the power is turned on and the information that is not initialized by the RAM clearing process can be displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 after power restoration (this will be described later). To).

Although not shown, the speaker 120 outputs the music "may be there" from the beginning as the "round effect BGM", and the sound effect (SE) and the error sound are not output (silence). Has become. Further, the light emitting means emits light (lighting, blinking, etc.) in a light emitting mode of "music effect "may be there" lamp pattern".

In this example, in the round effect BGM, the default music (here, "may be there") is started from the beginning regardless of the selection status of the music before the power failure/power recovery. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the music selected by the player may be started from the beginning or in the middle, or a round effect that is not an option may be started.

The timing shown in FIG. 265(e2) is a state in which the full stroke operation of the thousand-box box accessory 224H is completed, and the timing shown in FIG. 265(e3) is, for example, the output of the selected music piece is finished and the decorative symbol display is performed. The device 208 is also in a state where the music title is hidden.

At the timing shown in (e4) of the figure, the family crest accessory 224E is performing the full stroke operation, and at the timing shown in (e5) of the figure, the full stroke operation of the Senryo box accessory 224H is completed (power-on). This is the state in which the time operation is completed). Further, the V-attacker opening notification effect (V prize suggestion effect) is executed, and although not shown, the speaker 120 outputs the music "may be there" as the "round effect BGM", and the sound effect ( SE) and the error sound are not output (silence). Further, the light emitting means emits light (lighting, blinking, etc.) in a light emitting manner of "light emitting pattern when V attacker is open".

The timing shown in (d6) of the same figure is a state in which the 16R round effect, which is the final round of the big hit game, is being executed, and thereafter, it will be shown in FIG. 264 (a21) and thereafter.

266(a1) to 266(a5), 266(b), 266(c1) to 266(c8), and 266(d1) to 266(d6) are shown in FIGS. 253 to 256, respectively. It is a figure which shows the other modified example of the said production|generation example (basic production example) shown in time series.

In the example productions shown in FIGS. 266(a1) to (a4), the display during recovery is continued until the jackpot game ends, even if the jackpot game is returned to a round by power interruption/recovery. It is a configuration that does.

The timing shown in FIG. 266(a1) is a state in which the full-stroke operation of the thousand-axle box accessory 224H shown in FIG. 264(a10) is completed. In the effect example shown in FIG. 264, as shown in FIG. 264(a10) to FIG. 264(a11), when the big hit game starts in the middle of a round, the display during returning is finished and the round effect is executed. there were. On the other hand, the present example is a case where the first sub control unit 400 and the second sub control unit 500 receive a command relating to a game or an effect from the main control unit 300, so that the round is returned to a big hit game. However, as shown in FIGS. 266(a1) to 266(a4), the returning display is continued until the jackpot game is over. As shown in FIG. 266(a2), the power-on operation is executed.

Then, as shown in the figure (a4), the execution period of the big hit end effect has passed, and in the state where the variation game of the special figure has started as shown in the figure (a5), the display of the returning display is finished, Start normal display.

In this example, in the RAM clearing process (step S109 of FIG. 49(a)) after the power interruption/power recovery (return activation process or initial activation process) is executed, the decorative pattern when the jackpot is hit Since the symbol combination is also cleared, in the same figure (a5), the symbol combination of the default decorative symbols (“decoration 1-decoration 3-decoration 5” in this example) is displayed. The symbol combination of this default decorative symbol is set when the power is turned on. After this, the process moves to FIG. 256 (80).

258 (a1) to (a8) in the example of production that allows selection production (for example, music selection production) during the symbol variation described in FIG. 258 (Fig. 266 (Fig. 266) after power is cut off and power is restored. The example shown in (a1) to (a4) of the same figure is applicable.

Further, if the power is cut off during the symbol variation display which is a big hit, it may be restored at the start of the big hit after power recovery, and in that case also, the selection during the symbol variation explained in FIGS. 258 (a1) to (a8). The effect (for example, music selection effect) may be configured to be possible, or the selective effect may be configured to be disabled.

Further, when the power is cut off during the symbol fluctuation display which is a big hit, it may be restored after the big hit is over after power recovery, and in that case also, the selection during the symbol fluctuation explained in FIGS. 258 (a1) to (a8). The effect (for example, music selection effect) may be configured to be possible, or the selective effect may be configured to be disabled.

266(b) is another example of the error display EA of FIG. 265(d5). For example, in the case of a highly important error such as a magnetic (magnet) detection error or a magnetic field (radio wave) detection error, the error display EA using the entire display area of the decorative pattern display device 208 may be performed. In this case, during the display of the error, the execution of the effect may be interrupted when the selection effect (for example, the music selection effect as shown in FIG. 265 (d5)) is being executed. That is, in this case, it can be said that the effect selected by the selection operation is not executed by the effecting means while the error A (first error) is occurring, without the selection effect itself being executed.

In addition, FIG. 266(c1) to FIG. 266(c8) are examples in which an error has occurred in the effect example after the display during recovery shown in FIG. 264(a5).

The timing shown in FIG. 266(c1) is a state in which the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd have started full stroke operation, and the timing shown in FIG. 266(c2) is the first large board behavior officer. This is a state in which the error flag of the error A is turned on while the object 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior actor 224Gd are performing the full stroke operation.

The timing shown in (c3) of the figure is a state in which an error notification (error display EA called "error A" in this example) for notifying the occurrence of error A is being executed in the decorative symbol display device 208. As an example, the error display is displayed on the front surface of the display while being overlaid on the display during recovery. In addition, at this timing, the first large-board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior accessory 224Gd continue the full stroke operation.

In this way, even when the error A (for example, the error that is eliminated by the power interruption/power recovery) occurs during the display during recovery, the effect movable body (feature) 224 being executed at that time is displayed. The power-on operation (for example, full stroke operation or sensor check operation) continues its execution. The operation at power-on may be stopped without continuing.

The timing shown in (c4) of the same figure shows the state in which the full stroke operation of the first large-board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior accessory 224Gd has been completed, and the timing shown in (c5) of the figure is the thousand-box box accessory 224H. Is in a completed state during execution, and the timing shown in (c6) of the same figure is a state in which the full stroke operation of the thousand-carton box accessory 224H is completed. Further, the timing shown in (c7) of the figure is a state in which the full stroke operation of the family crest monument 224E is being executed, and the timing shown in (c8) of the figure is a state in which the full stroke operation of the family crest monument 224E is completed. Is. After this, the state shifts to the state of FIG. 264(a3).

FIG. 266(d1) to FIG. 266(d5) are other examples of performing error notification when an error occurs during symbol variation.

The timing shown in the same figure (d1) shows the state during a certain variation game. Specifically, in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbols of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol is performed. In addition, the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is 1, the first reservation icon h11 is displayed, and the second number of reservations display shows that the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is "1". Is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 is displayed.

As for the state of the other effect device 206 at this timing, "normal time BGM" is output from the speaker 120, and the sound effect (SE) and the error sound are not output (silent). Further, the light emitting means emits light (lighting, blinking, etc.) in the light emitting mode of the "normal lamp pattern".

The timing shown in (d2) of the figure is a state in which the selection effect is being executed. That is, two treasure boxes are displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the operation means image BG (in this example, the left and right keys of the operation key unit 137) that prompts the operation of the operation button (for example, the operation key unit 137). 137l and 137r icons) and an elapsed time notification image (meter display) TG for notifying the elapsed time of the acceptance period of the operation button (operation valid period) and characters such as "Which treasure box do you want?" It In this example, after the operation means image BG is displayed, the operation valid period for accepting the operation of the operation button starts (the operation valid period may start simultaneously with the display of the operation means image BG).

In this way, the operation key unit 137 may be used as the operation means (operation button) for the selection effect. In this example, the left/right keys 137l, 137r are used for selection operation, but the up/down keys 137u, 137d may be used for selection operation, or the up/down keys 137u, 137d and left/right keys 137l, 137r may be used. The selection operation may be performed using all of the above.

The timing shown in (d3) of the figure is a state in which an error (for example, error A) occurs during execution of the selection effect, and the error flag of the error A is turned on. The timing shown in (d4) of the figure is This is a state in which the error notification for notifying the occurrence of the error A is being executed. In the error notification in this case, in the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208, the error display EA (here, the character display of “error A”) indicating that the error A has occurred is overlapped with the effect display of the selected effect. Do it. Further, the speaker 120 outputs the error A notification sound and does not output the BGM and the sound effect (SE) (silence). Further, the light emitting means emits light (lighting, blinking, etc.) in the light emitting mode of the "error notification lamp pattern".

The timing shown in (d4) of the figure shows a state where the right key 137r of the operation key unit 137 is operated, and the timing shown in (d5) of the figure shows a state where the right treasure box is selected and the result is displayed. Showing. It should be noted that the error notification continues over the period of (d4) to (d5) of the same figure.

In this way, in this example, in the case where the selection effect is executed during the symbol fluctuation in the normal state, the selection effect is continued and the selection operation is performed even if an error occurs during the execution period of the selection effect. Execution is possible (selection operations after an error has occurred are effectively accepted).
<Explanation regarding error (Error A)>

The “error A (first error)” described in the example illustrated in FIGS. 249 to 270 can be applied to all or some of the errors described in FIGS. 114 to 117, as described above.

The “errors that are resolved when power interruption/power recovery is performed” described in the examples illustrated in FIGS. 249 to 270 are all or part of the errors described in FIGS. 114 to 117. Applicable. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 may include an “error that cannot be resolved when the power is cut off or restored”.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 249 to 270, an arbitrary error can be set as an error that can be resolved by power interruption/recovery regardless of the error recovery conditions described in 114 to FIG. 117. Then, in the RAM clearing process executed by the main control unit 300 in the power-on process, the error is distributed, and thus any (desired) error (only) can be eliminated by power interruption/recovery.

FIG. 267 is a diagram showing an outline of processing for allocating an error resolved by power interruption/power recovery.

For example, as shown in FIG. 9A, the storage area of the RAM 308 is divided into an error storage area that is resolved by power interruption and power recovery and an error storage area that is not. Specifically, using an address in the RAM 308 as a reference address (address 104 in this example), an error that is not resolved by power failure/power recovery is stored in an address smaller than the reference address and resolved by power failure/power recovery. The error is stored so as to continue after the reference address.

For example, in the power-on process shown in FIG. 49(a), the RAM activation process (step S109) is executed after the restoration activation process (step S107) or the initial activation process (step S108). In this case, for example, in the return start processing shown in FIG. 49(b), in step S201, processing for setting the magnetic detection abnormality flag to OFF, and initial setting for clearing a device error (error flag due to magnetic detection, winning abnormality, etc.) Then, in step S202, a process of setting an address after the storage area initialized in step S201 as an address for starting the RAM clear is performed.

That is, when the process of FIG. 49 is used, the error is not cleared in the initial setting, and the error is sorted and stored as shown in FIG. 267(a), and then the power is turned on in FIG. 49(a). Similar to the process, that is, the address of the reference address is set to the address (start address) from which the RAM clear is started, and the error stored in the subsequent addresses is cleared.

Also, as shown in (b) of the figure, a clearing flag is set such that each error is turned off when it is resolved at the time of power interruption/recovery, and turned on when it is not resolved at the time of power interruption/recovery. It is stored in the RAM 308 together with the elimination flag. Then, for example, a RAM clear process is executed to determine whether the information stored at the set address is an error and to clear it only when the error flag is set to OFF.

Further, as shown in FIG. 7C, the RAM 308 stores the information including whether or not each error is resolved at the time of power interruption/power recovery. Then, a RAM clearing process is executed in which it is sequentially determined whether or not the error is resolved when the power is cut off or restored, and the error is cleared only when the error is resolved.

As described above, the gaming table according to the present invention (for example, the pachinko machine 100) includes the rendering means (for example, the decorative pattern display device 208, the speaker 120, etc.) and the movable means (for example, the family crest accessory shown in FIG. 14). 224E, the first large-scale behavior auditors 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavioral auditors 224Gd, the thousand-axle box auditors 224H, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N), and a gaming table, The movable unit is a unit that may perform a first motion, and the first motion is a motion related to a performance (hereinafter, referred to as a “production motion”), and a first error (for example, a motion). , The error shown in FIG. 114 to FIG. 116) is occurring, the movable means may perform the effect operation, and the effect means is a means by which a selection effect (for example, a music selection effect) may be performed. Yes, the performance is configured to be selected when a selection operation is performed during the execution of the selection performance, and even if the first error occurs during the execution of the selection performance (for example, FIG. 265 (d5)), the effect is selected when the selection operation is performed, the gaming machine.
According to the present invention, it is possible to realize a game table having a feature in the rendering means.

In addition, even if the first error occurs during execution of the selection effect, the selection operation can be performed, so that the player can have a space until the first error is eliminated, and the interest of the game can be prevented from being deteriorated. Sometimes you can.

Further, since the staging operation by the movable means may be performed during the occurrence of the first error, the staging effect can be enhanced even during the occurrence of the first error, and a decrease in the interest of the game can be prevented. There are cases.

The first control unit (main control unit) may be provided, and the first control unit may be a unit that executes control relating to the first error when it is determined that the first error has occurred.

Further, an operating means (a chance button 136, an operation key unit (cross key) 137 (up/down keys 137u, 137d, left/right keys 137l, 137r)) is provided, and a selection operation is performed by operating the operating means. Good.

Here, the selection operation also serves as an operation of changing the effect (changing the selection). For example, the selected effect (the selection has been changed) is determined at the end of the period in which the selection effect is performed (when a certain period of time has passed in the selected state, the selection operation is not performed separately The effect may be configured to be determined by the effect), and the changed effect is reflected as soon as the effect is selected (change of selection) (change of selection (movement of cursor, etc.) also serves as the determination operation). It may be configured.

In addition, the selection operation is an operation that determines the effect (determines the selected effect), and may be an operation different from the operation that changes the effect (changes the selection). For example, in the period in which the selection effect is performed, the effect is changed by operating the cross key (change of selection), and the effect is determined by selecting the chance button operation (decision of selection). The selection effect may not be completed until) is performed.

Further, the selection operation may be either an operation for determining an effect (determination of selection) or an operation for changing an effect (change of selection). For example, in the period in which the selection effect is performed, the effect may be changed (change of selection) by operating the cross key, and the effect may be determined (determination of selection) by operating the chance button. In this case, even if the determination operation is not performed, the effect may be determined at the end of the period in which the selected effect is performed.

The first error is various errors shown in FIGS. 114 to 116 (for example, magnetic (magnet) error, magnetic field (radio wave) error, winning rate abnormality error, big winning opening winning excess error, big winning opening excess discharge). Applicable to errors, solenoid error, tray full error, door opening error, production movable object error (including operation error)

Further, an attacker (for example, variable winning a prize opening 234, 235) is provided, and the first error is an error relating to the attacker (for example, a special winning opening discharge excess error, a large winning opening prize excess error, a winning rate abnormality error). May be.

Further, the attacker is an attacker provided with a ball entrance sensor (for example, a first attacker 802, a second attacker 804, a first variable winning port 234, a second variable winning port 235), the ball sensor Is a sensor capable of outputting a ball entry signal in response to the entry of a game ball, and the attacker is provided with a discharge sensor (for example, ball detection sensor 320, out switches SO, SO1, SO2... ). It is an attacker, and the discharge sensor is a sensor capable of outputting a discharge signal in accordance with the discharge of the game ball, and the first error (for example, a special winning opening discharge excess error, a special winning opening prize excess error) The error may be an error indicating that the number of game balls entering the attacker does not match the number of game balls discharged from the attacker.
Note that the gaming table may be provided with only one sensor.

Further, the first error may be an over-winning error, and the over-winning error may be an error (determined to be abnormal) that occurs when the number of entered balls exceeds the number of discharged balls.

The first error may be an excess discharge error, and the excess discharge error may be an error (determined as abnormal) that occurs when the number of discharges exceeds the number of balls entered.

In addition, when the first error occurs during execution of the selected effect, the effect selected by the selection operation (for example, an effect such as a display (animation) corresponding to the selected music, FIG. 262 ( a7), the round effect (display), the sound (musical piece) output, etc. shown in (a8) of the same figure) may be executed by the effect means.

In this case, the "effect selected by the selection operation" may include a display (animation) corresponding to the music piece displayed on the display means and a pattern (lamp pattern) of the light emitting mode by the light emitting means. Good.

In addition, in the "effect selected by the selection operation", the effect which is started when a specific time elapses in the selected state (without changing the selection operation) (in which the selection is changed), An effect or the like in which an effect is executed at a low volume triggered by the selection (change of the selection) may be included.

In addition, when the first error occurs during execution of the selected effect, the effect selected by the selection operation (for example, an effect such as a display (animation) corresponding to the selected music, FIG. 262 ( a7), a round effect (display), a sound (song) output, etc. shown in (a8) of the same figure) may be always executed by the effecting means.

In addition, when the first error occurs during execution of the selected effect, the effect selected by the selection operation (for example, an effect such as a display (animation) corresponding to the selected music, FIG. 262 ( a7), the round effect (display), voice (song) output, etc. shown in (a8) of the figure may not be executed by the effect means.

According to such a configuration, even when the first error occurs during the execution of the selection effect, the effect selected by the selection operation may be executed, so that even if the first error occurs. In some cases, it is possible to enhance the effect of production and prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

Also, during the occurrence of the first error, the effect selected by the selecting operation is not executed by the effecting means (for example, when the music selected in FIG. 262(a7) is not output, or in FIG. In the case where the selection effect is not executed in b)), it may be one.

According to such a configuration, the player or the store clerk can be made aware that the first error has occurred, and it may be possible to prompt the elimination of the first error.

In addition, when the first error is eliminated, the selected effect may be executed, and when the first error is eliminated, the selected effect is always executed. The selected effect may or may not be executed when the first error is resolved.

With such a configuration, it becomes easier for the store clerk to understand that the error has been resolved, and the maintainability may be improved.

Further, the selected effect may not be executed until the first error is resolved.

In addition, the selected effect may not be executed even if the first error is resolved.

In addition, the selected effect may not be executed even if the first error is resolved.

Further, an operation means (for example, a chance button 136, an operation key unit 137 (up/down keys 137u, 137d, left/right keys 137l, 137r)) is provided, and the operation of the operation means is enabled during a period in which the operation of the operation means is valid. If there is, there is a case where the effect operation by the movable means is performed, even during the occurrence of the first error, during the period during which the operation of the operation means is valid (operation of the operation means ( For example, when the button operation shown in FIG. 261(a3) is performed, the effect operation by the movable means (for example, the operation shown in FIG. 261(a6)) may be performed.

Even when the operation means is not operated by the end of the period during which the operation of the operation means is valid, the effect operation by the movable means may be performed after the end of the period. ..

Further, the effect operation by the movable means may not be performed when the operation means is not operated before the period in which the operation of the operation means is valid ends. Further, there may be a case where the effect operation by the movable means is performed and a case where it is not performed when the operation means is not operated before the period in which the operation of the operation means is valid ends.

The movable means is a means that may perform a second operation (for example, power-on operation), and the second operation is an operation performed when power is turned on. Even if the first error occurs when the second operation is being performed, the second operation may be continued.

The power-on operation may include a sensor check operation or a full stroke operation. Further, the power-on operation may be only the sensor check operation, only the full stroke operation, or only the sensor check operation and the full stroke operation. The power-on operation may include an initial position returning operation.

When the power-on operation includes at least two operations selected from the sensor check operation, the full stroke operation, and the initial position return operation, the order in which these operations are executed can be arbitrarily selected. It can also be applied when replaced.

In addition, the movable means is a means that may perform a third operation (for example, an initial position returning operation), and the third operation means that the movable means is determined not to be in the initial position. The third operation is continued even if the first error occurs when the third operation is performed (for example, the state of FIG. 266(c3)). ) May be used.

Further, a game board (for example, a game board 200) may be provided, and the movable means may be means provided on the game board.

Further, a door body (for example, the front frame door 106) may be provided, and the movable means may be a means provided on the door body.

When the first operation is performed by the movable means, the first operation may be continued even if the door body is opened.

Further, when the movable means is performing the first operation, the first operation may be interrupted when the door is opened, and the door may return to the initial position.

Further, when the second operation is being performed by the movable means, the second operation may be continued as it is even if the door body is opened.

Further, in the case where the second operation is performed by the movable means, the second operation may be interrupted and the initial position may be returned when the door is opened.

Further, when the third operation is performed by the movable means, the third operation may be continued even if the door body is opened.

Further, when the movable means is performing the third operation, the third operation may be interrupted when the door is opened, and the door may return to the initial position.

Further, even if a second error (for example, a family crest monastery abnormal error) occurs during the execution of the selection effect, the effect is selected when the selection operation is performed. The error may be an error indicating that the movable means has an abnormality.

In addition, a second control unit (sub-control unit, first sub-control unit 400) is provided, and the second control unit executes control related to the second error when it is determined that the movable unit has an abnormality. May be

Further, during the execution of the big hit, the selection effect may be performed as the big hit effect.

In addition, the selection effect may be performed other than the big hit game (for example, during the variable display of the decorative pattern in the normal state as shown in FIGS. 266 (d1) to (d6)).

Further, the rendering means may be sound output means (for example, the speaker 120).

Further, when the first error occurs, a first error sound for informing that the first error has occurred may be output.

The selection effect is a sound selection effect (for example, a music selection effect), and the sound selected by the selection operation may be output after the selection operation is performed. ..

Further, the sound selection effect may include a selection effect of a music piece (including BGM), a selection effect of a sound effect (SE), or a selection effect of an error sound.

Further, the selected sound may not be output during the occurrence of the first error.

Further, during the occurrence of the first error, the selected sound may not be output, and only the first error sound may be output.

Further, both the selected sound and the first error sound may be output during the occurrence of the first error.

Further, when the selected sound is output at the first volume and the first error sound is output at the second volume during the occurrence of the first error, the first volume is set to the second volume. It may be a lower volume. Further, the first volume may be a volume different from the volume set by the player. Further, the first volume may be a volume different from the volume set by the player, and may be the minimum value that can be set by the player, for example.

Further, during the occurrence of the first error, the output of the error sound may be terminated and the selected sound may be output when a specific time has elapsed from the occurrence of the first error.

Further, during the occurrence of the first error, the output of the error sound may end and the silent state may occur when a specific time has elapsed from the occurrence of the first error.

Further, the selected sound may not be output until the first error is resolved.

Further, even if the first error is resolved, the selected sound may not be output, and for example, the period during which the selected sound is output may be ended.

In addition, the selected sound may not be output even if the first error is resolved.

Further, the selection effect is not limited to the sound selection effect, and can be applied to the selection effects of other effects (display, light emission, accessory (movable body) operation, etc.).

Further, when a third error (for example, a magnetic (magnet) error, a magnetic field (radio wave) detection error, a special winning opening discharge excess error, a prize excess error, etc.) occurs during execution of the selection effect, the selection operation is performed. Even if it is broken, the effect cannot be selected, and the third error may be an error different from the first error.

Even if a third error occurs during the execution of the first operation by the movable means, the first operation may continue as it is.

Further, if a third error occurs during execution of the first operation by the movable means, the first operation may be interrupted and the movable means may return to the initial position.

Even if a third error occurs during execution of the second operation by the movable means, the second operation may be continued.

Further, if a third error occurs during execution of the second operation by the movable means, the second operation may be interrupted and the movable means may return to the initial position.

Even if a third error occurs during execution of the third operation by the movable means, the third operation may be continued as it is.

Further, when the third error occurs during execution of the third operation by the movable means, the third operation may be interrupted and the movable means may return to the initial position.

Further, the selection effect may be interrupted when a third error occurs during execution of the selection effect.

The third error may be an error that is resolved when power is cut off and power is restored. Further, the selection effect may not be restarted when the power is cut off or restored, and the selection effect may or may not be restarted. For example, when the pre-power-off state is not stored by the sub-control unit or when the period of the selection effect ends, the selection effect may or may not be restarted.

Further, when the power is cut off or restored, the selected effect may not be restarted and an effect different from the selected effect may be started. For example, an effect different from the selected effect may be restarted when the effect returns for each jackpot round.

In addition, when the power is cut off or restored, a return screen may be displayed on the image display means (may be always displayed, may be displayed or may not be displayed), and returns. The selected effect may be restarted after the screen ends (may be always restarted, may be restarted, and may not be restarted).

Further, the selection effect may be restarted when the third error is resolved without performing power interruption/power recovery.

Further, the selection effect may be always restarted when the third error is resolved without power interruption/power recovery.

In addition, when the third error is resolved without power interruption/power recovery, the selection effect may or may not be restarted.

Further, the third error may be an error that is resolved within a certain period of time after the error occurs.

Further, the game table may be a pachinko machine, and the game table may be a slot machine.
As described above, the gaming table according to the present invention (for example, the pachinko machine 100) includes the rendering means (for example, the decorative pattern display device 208, the speaker 120, etc.) and the movable means (for example, the family crest accessory shown in FIG. 14). 224E, the first large-board behavior auditors 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior auditors 224Gd, the thousand box cabinet auditors 224H, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N), and a gaming table, The movable unit is a unit that may perform a first motion, and the first motion is a motion related to a performance (hereinafter, referred to as a “production motion”), and a first error (for example, a motion). , The error shown in FIG. 114 to FIG. 116) is occurring, the movable means may perform the effect operation, and the effect means may execute a selection effect (for example, music selection effect). Yes, the performance is configured to be selected when a selection operation is performed during the execution of the selection performance, and even if the first error occurs during the execution of the selection performance (for example, FIG. 265 (d5) state), the effect is configured to be selected when the selection operation is performed, and the movable means is means provided on the game board (for example, the game board 200). It is a game table characterized by.
In addition, the production means (for example, the decorative pattern display device 208, the speaker 120, etc.) and the movable means (for example, the family crest part 224E, the first large board behavior part 224Ga to the fourth large board part 224Gd, and the 1000-box box shown in FIG. A gaming board provided with an accessory 224H, a second decorative symbol display device 208M and a third decorative symbol display device 208N), wherein the movable means is a means that may perform a first operation, The first operation is an operation related to performance (hereinafter, referred to as “production operation”), and the movable means is operated while the first error (for example, the error shown in FIGS. 114 to 116) is occurring. The production operation may be performed, and the production means is a means that may execute a selection production (for example, a music selection production). When the selection operation is performed during execution of the selection production, the production is selected. If the first error occurs during execution of the selection effect (for example, the state of FIG. 265 (d5)), the effect is selected when the selection operation is performed. When a second error (for example, a magnetic (magnet) error, a magnetic field (radio wave) detection error, a special winning opening discharge excess error, a prize excess error, etc.) occurs during execution of the selection effect. The production cannot be selected even if the selection operation is performed, and the second error may be an error different from the first error.
In addition, the production means (for example, the decorative pattern display device 208, the speaker 120, etc.) and the movable means (for example, the family crest part 224E, the first large board behavior part 224Ga to the fourth large board part 224Gd, and the 1000-box box shown in FIG. A gaming board provided with an accessory 224H, a second decorative symbol display device 208M and a third decorative symbol display device 208N), wherein the movable means is a means that may perform a first operation, The first operation is an operation related to performance (hereinafter, referred to as “production operation”), and the movable means is operated while the first error (for example, the error shown in FIGS. 114 to 116) is occurring. The production operation may be performed, and the production means is a means that may execute a selection production (for example, a music selection production). When the selection operation is performed during execution of the selection production, the production is selected. If the first error occurs during execution of the selection effect (for example, the state of FIG. 265 (d5)), the effect is selected when the selection operation is performed. When a second error (for example, a magnetic (magnet) error, a magnetic field (radio wave) detection error, a special winning opening discharge excess error, a prize excess error, etc.) occurs during execution of the selection effect. , The production cannot be selected even if the selection operation is performed, the second error is an error different from the first error, and when the second error occurs during execution of the selection production, It may be a gaming machine characterized in that the selection effect is interrupted.
In addition, the production means (for example, the decorative pattern display device 208, the speaker 120, etc.) and the movable means (for example, the family crest part 224E, the first large board behavior part 224Ga to the fourth large board part 224Gd, and the 1000-box box shown in FIG. A gaming board provided with an accessory 224H, a second decorative symbol display device 208M and a third decorative symbol display device 208N), wherein the movable means is a means that may perform a first operation, The first operation is an operation related to performance (hereinafter, referred to as “production operation”), and the movable means is operated while the first error (for example, the error shown in FIGS. 114 to 116) is occurring. The production operation may be performed, and the production means is a means that may execute a selection production (for example, a music selection production). When the selection operation is performed during execution of the selection production, the production is selected. If the first error occurs during execution of the selection effect (for example, the state of FIG. 265 (d5)), the effect is selected when the selection operation is performed. The operating unit (for example, the chance button 136, the operating key unit 137 (up/down keys 137u, 137d, the left/right keys 137l, 137r)) is provided, and the operation of the operating unit is effective during the period. When the operation means is operated, the effect operation by the movable means may be performed, and even during the occurrence of the first error, in a period during which the operation of the operation means is valid, When the operation means operates (for example, the button operation shown in FIG. 261(a3)), the effect operation (for example, the operation shown in FIG. 261(a6)) by the movable means may be performed. Good.
In addition, the production means (for example, the decorative pattern display device 208, the speaker 120, etc.) and the movable means (for example, the family crest part 224E, the first large board behavior part 224Ga to the fourth large board part 224Gd, and the 1000-box box shown in FIG. A gaming board provided with an accessory 224H, a second decorative symbol display device 208M and a third decorative symbol display device 208N), wherein the movable means is a means that may perform a first operation, The first operation is an operation related to performance (hereinafter, referred to as “production operation”), and the movable means is operated while the first error (for example, the error shown in FIGS. 114 to 116) is occurring. The production operation may be performed, and the production means is a means that may execute a selection production (for example, a music selection production). When the selection operation is performed during execution of the selection production, the production is selected. If the first error occurs during execution of the selection effect (for example, the state of FIG. 265 (d5)), the effect is selected when the selection operation is performed. The movable means is a means that may perform a second operation (for example, a power-on operation), and the second operation is performed when the power is turned on. It is an operation, and the second operation may be continued even if the first error occurs when the second operation is being performed.
In addition, the production means (for example, the decorative pattern display device 208, the speaker 120, etc.) and the movable means (for example, the family crest part 224E, the first large board behavior part 224Ga to the fourth large board part 224Gd, and the 1000-box box shown in FIG. A gaming board provided with an accessory 224H, a second decorative symbol display device 208M and a third decorative symbol display device 208N), wherein the movable means is a means that may perform a first operation, The first operation is an operation related to performance (hereinafter, referred to as “production operation”), and the movable means is operated while the first error (for example, the error shown in FIGS. 114 to 116) is occurring. The production operation may be performed, and the production means is a means that may execute a selection production (for example, a music selection production). When the selection operation is performed during execution of the selection production, the production is selected. If the first error occurs during execution of the selection effect (for example, the state of FIG. 265 (d5)), the effect is selected when the selection operation is performed. The movable means is a means that may perform a third operation (for example, an initial position returning operation), and the third operation means that the movable means is not in the initial position. If the first error occurs when the third operation is performed, the third operation is continued (for example, FIG. 266 (c3) state).
In addition, the production means (for example, the decorative pattern display device 208, the speaker 120, etc.) and the movable means (for example, the family crest part 224E, the first large board behavior part 224Ga to the fourth large board part 224Gd, and the 1000-box box shown in FIG. A gaming board provided with an accessory 224H, a second decorative symbol display device 208M and a third decorative symbol display device 208N), wherein the movable means is a means that may perform a first operation, The first operation is an operation related to performance (hereinafter, referred to as “production operation”), and the movable means is operated while the first error (for example, the error shown in FIGS. 114 to 116) is occurring. The production operation may be performed, and the production means is a means that may execute a selection production (for example, a music selection production). When the selection operation is performed during execution of the selection production, the production is selected. If the first error occurs during execution of the selection effect (for example, the state of FIG. 265 (d5)), the effect is selected when the selection operation is performed. When the selection operation is performed, the effect is selected even if a third error (for example, a family crest monument abnormal error) occurs during execution of the selection effect. However, the third error may be an error indicating that the movable means has an abnormality.
Further, an attacker (for example, variable winning a prize opening 234, 235) is provided, and the first error is an error relating to the attacker (for example, a special winning opening discharge excess error, a large winning opening prize excess error, a winning rate abnormality error). May be.
Further, the attacker is an attacker provided with a ball entrance sensor (for example, a first attacker 802, a second attacker 804, a first variable winning port 234, a second variable winning port 235), the ball sensor Is a sensor capable of outputting a ball entry signal in response to the entry of a game ball, and the attacker is provided with a discharge sensor (for example, ball detection sensor 320, out switches SO, SO1, SO2... ). It is an attacker, and the discharge sensor is a sensor capable of outputting a discharge signal in accordance with the discharge of the game ball, and the first error (for example, a special winning opening discharge excess error, a special winning opening prize excess error) The error may be an error indicating that the number of game balls entering the attacker does not match the number of game balls discharged from the attacker.
Note that the gaming table may be provided with only one sensor.
In addition, when the first error occurs during execution of the selected effect, the effect selected by the selection operation (for example, an effect such as a display (animation) corresponding to the selected music, FIG. 262 ( a7), the round effect (display), the sound (musical piece) output, etc. shown in (a8) of the same figure) may be executed by the effect means.
Also, during the occurrence of the first error, the effect selected by the selecting operation is not executed by the effecting means (for example, when the music selected in FIG. 262(a7) is not output, or in FIG. In the case where the selection effect is not executed in b)), it may be one.
Further, a door body (for example, the front frame door 106) may be provided, and the movable means may be a means provided on the door body.
Further, during the execution of the big hit, the selection effect may be performed as the big hit effect.
Further, the rendering means may be sound output means (for example, the speaker 120).
Further, when the first error occurs, a first error sound for informing that the first error has occurred may be output.
The selection effect is a sound selection effect (for example, a music selection effect), and the sound selected by the selection operation may be output after the selection operation is performed. ..

Further, the game table according to the present invention (for example, the pachinko machine 100) is a game table provided with a rendering means (for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, a speaker 120, etc.), and the rendering means is a selection rendering (for example, , Music selection effect) may be performed, and is configured such that an effect is selected when a selection operation is performed during execution of the selection effect. Even if the error (for example, the error described in FIG. 114 to FIG. 116) occurs, the production is selected when the selection operation is performed, and the first error is the power interruption. -It is a game machine characterized by an error that is resolved when power is restored.
According to the present invention, it is possible to realize a game table having a feature in the rendering means.

That is, even when the first error occurs during execution of the selection effect, the selection operation can be performed, so that the player can have a space until the first error is resolved, and the interest of the game can be prevented from deteriorating. Sometimes you can.

Further, an attacker (for example, variable winning a prize opening 234, 235) is provided, and the first error is an error relating to the attacker (for example, a special winning opening discharge excess error, a large winning opening prize excess error, a winning rate abnormality error). May be.

Further, the attacker is an attacker provided with a ball entrance sensor (for example, a first attacker 802, a second attacker 804, a first variable winning port 234, a second variable winning port 235), the ball sensor Is a sensor capable of outputting a ball entry signal in response to the entry of a game ball, and the attacker is provided with a discharge sensor (for example, a ball detection sensor 320, out switches SO, SO1, SO2... ). It is an attacker, and the discharge sensor is a sensor capable of outputting a discharge signal in accordance with the discharge of the game ball, and the first error (for example, a special winning opening discharge excess error, a special winning opening prize excess error) The error may be an error indicating that the number of game balls entering the attacker does not match the number of game balls discharged from the attacker.

In addition, when the first error occurs during execution of the selected effect, the effect selected by the selection operation (for example, an effect such as a display (animation) corresponding to the selected music, FIG. 262 ( a7), the round effect (display) of FIG. 8(a8), the output of music, etc.) may be executed by the effect means.

Further, when the first error has occurred, the effect selected by the selecting operation is not executed by the effecting means (for example, when the music selected in FIG. 262(a7) is not output, 266(b) (when the selection effect is not executed).

Further, a first control unit (for example, the main control unit 300) is provided, and the first control unit is a unit capable of performing at least control for determining that the first error has occurred. One control means executes control for canceling the first error (for example, RAM clear processing of power-on processing) when power interruption/power recovery is performed during the occurrence of the first error. It may be a means for doing.

Further, the first error may be an error that is resolved when the power is cut off or restored.

In addition, the second control means is provided, the first control means is a means capable of at least executing control for transmitting a command to the second control means, and the second control means is capable of performing at least control regarding effects. Any means may be used.

Further, when the first error occurs during execution of the selection effect, the selection effect (for example, the music selection effect shown in FIG. 265(c1)) is restarted when the power is cut off or restored. It may be done.

In addition, when the first error occurs during the execution of the selection effect, the selection effect is not restarted when the power is cut off or restored (for example, when the period of the selection effect is ended. ) May exist.

In addition, when a first error occurs during execution of the selected effect, the selected effect may not be restarted when power is cut off or restored, and an effect different from the selected effect may be executed. It may be.

Also, when the first error occurs during execution of the selection effect (for example, the music selection effect shown in FIG. 265 (d5)), the selection effect is restarted when the power is cut off or restored. (For example, the state shown in FIG. 265(e1)) may be used.

Also, when the first error occurs during execution of the selection effect (for example, the music selection effect shown in FIG. 265 (d5)), if the power is cut off or restored, the selection effect is different. The effect (for example, the round effect shown in FIG. 265(e1)) may be executed.

Further, it may include a display means (for example, a decorative pattern display device 208).

Further, the display means is means for displaying a display during recovery (for example, the display shown in FIG. 264(a5)), and the display during recovery is displayed after power interruption/power recovery is performed. The display may be displayed.

Further, the selection effect may not be performed during the display of the returning display.

It should be noted that the selected effect may be performed while the returning display is being displayed, or the selected effect may be executed while the returning display is being displayed (for example, the sound selected from the speaker It may be output).

In addition, the display may be such that the selected effect is not executed during display of the returning display (for example, the selected sound is not output from the speaker and is in a silent state).

The display means is a means that may display a power-on display (for example, the display shown in FIG. 265(a1)), and the power-on display is displayed after the power is cut off or restored. It may be displayed.

Further, during the execution of the big hit, the selection effect may be performed as the big hit effect.

Further, the rendering means may be sound output means (for example, the speaker 120).

Further, when the first error occurs, a first error sound for informing that the first error has occurred may be output.

The selection effect is a sound selection effect (for example, a music selection effect), and the sound selected by the selection operation may be output after the selection operation is performed. ..

Further, when a third error (for example, a magnetic (magnet) error, a magnetic field (radio wave) detection error, a special winning opening discharge excess error, a prize excess error, etc.) occurs during execution of the selection effect, the selection operation is performed. Even if it is broken, the effect cannot be selected, and the third error may be an error different from the first error.

Further, when the third error occurs during execution of the selection effect, the selection effect may be interrupted.

Further, the gaming table may be a pachinko machine, and the gaming table may be a slot machine.

In addition, the game table (for example, pachinko machine 100) according to the embodiment of the present invention is an attacker (for example, the first attacker 802, the second attacker 804, the first variable winning port 234, the second variable winning port 235). The main control means (for example, the main control unit 300), the display means (for example, the decorative pattern display device 208, the liquid crystal display device D) provided at a position visible by the player, and the player can operate. A game machine provided with operating means (for example, the left key, the right key, the up key, the down key shown in FIG. 245(b5), the chance button 136, the decision button, the operation button, etc.) provided at the position. By the way, the attacker is an attacker provided with a ball entrance sensor (for example, a ball detection sensor 320, a count switch SW1, a count switch SW2), and the ball entrance sensor responds to the entry of a game ball. The attacker is a sensor capable of outputting a ball entry signal, and the attacker is an attacker provided with an ejection sensor (for example, a ball detection sensor 320, out switches SO, SO1, SO2...) And the ejection sensor. Is a sensor capable of outputting a discharge signal in accordance with the discharge of a game ball, the main control means is a means capable of executing control for determining a plurality of types of errors, and one of the plurality of types of errors Type of error is a coin-in/out-ball mismatch error (for example, a special winning opening winning excess error), and the above-mentioned coin-in/out ball mismatch error is an error that occurs in a jackpot (for example, after the remaining ball detection time elapses (special electric role operation interval). (When the timer is 0), the error occurs when the number of balls entered is greater than the number of balls ejected), and the inconsistency of entering and leaving balls is the number of game balls entering the attacker (hereinafter referred to as “entering ball”). "The number of balls") is larger than the number of game balls discharged from the attacker (hereinafter referred to as "the number of discharges"), and the entry/exit ball mismatch error is the entry/exit During the occurrence of the ball mismatch error, it is an error informing that the entry/exit ball mismatch error has occurred, the main control means, the fluctuation control of the symbol (hereinafter, "symbol fluctuation control (for example, in FIG. 216 The symbol variation process shown, or the special symbol related lottery process shown in FIG. 213(a), the symbol variation process shown in FIG. 216, and the special symbol display confirmation weight process shown in FIG. 217)"). Yes, the symbol variation control is a control that causes a variable display of symbols in the symbol display means (for example, the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214). The main control means is means for starting the symbol variation control when the big hit ends, and the main control means ends the big hit while the entry/exit ball mismatch error occurs. In this case, it is a means that does not start the symbol fluctuation control, and even if the entry/exit ball mismatch error occurs in the big hit, the big hit proceeds (for example, the state shown in FIGS. 238(6) to (9)). When the entrance/exit ball mismatch error occurs in a big hit, an error sound for notifying that the entry/exit ball mismatch error is generated is output, and the display means is Means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display, one type of display of the plurality of types of display is an error display, when the entrance and exit ball mismatch error occurs, the entrance and exit balls as the error display A mismatch error display (for example, an error display E3 of a special winning opening excess error) is displayed, and one type of the plurality of types of displays is a response display (for example, FIG. 239). (B2-1), the user setting value (volume) of the user setting screen (volume setting screen) shown in (b2-2) of FIG. 39, the actual machine customizing menu shown in FIG. 239 (b3-1α), and FIG. 240 (d1). An image notifying that the probability variation mode shown has entered the control mode, the song title shown in FIG. 241 (f6-1) and FIG. 242 (f6-2), the back button effect shown in FIG. 242 (f7-2), and FIG. 245 ( 7b), the song name of the song selection effect shown in FIG. 6B6, the QR code (registered trademark) shown in FIG. 246(b7-3), the background display and various effects performed according to the music determination operation) Means that a big hit effect is performed during the execution of the big hit, and in the first round of a plurality of rounds forming a certain big hit, the music selection effect (for example, FIG. 245 (7b ) Is performed, and while the music selection effect is being performed, a music determination operation is performed by the operation means (for example, the left key, right key, up key, down key shown in FIG. 245(b5)). It is configured such that the music determination operation can be performed even while the entry/exit ball mismatch error is occurring, and when the music determination operation is performed, “determined” is displayed as the response display. The performance display corresponding to the music (for example, background display and various performances)” is started, and in the state in which the music determination operation can be performed, the entry/exit ball mismatch error is occurring. In some cases, the entrance/exit ball mismatch error display is displayed, and even if the music determination operation cannot be performed, the entrance/exit ball mismatch error display is displayed when the entrance/exit ball mismatch error is occurring. The determined music is displayed and is configured to be output after the music determination operation is performed, and after the music determination operation is performed, the entry/exit ball mismatch error occurs. After a specific time has passed, the error sound is terminated and the determined music piece is output, and the gaming machine is characterized in that.

Further, when the second round of the plurality of rounds constituting the certain big hit ends, a big hit end effect is performed as the big hit effect, and one type of display of the plurality of types of display is a big hit. An end display (for example, “Yoshimune RUSH continued!!” shown in FIG. 202(10), FIG. 245(10b), FIG. 246(10b), FIG. 238(10) to (11), and FIG. Rush”, “displays such as “Large board behavior!” in FIGS. 239(11a) to (12a)”, and the jackpot end effect is an effect configured to include the jackpot end display. The end display is a display that is displayed during the period from the end of the final round of the jackpot to the end of the jackpot. When the certain jackpot is finished, the jackpot end display is hidden. When the big hit ends while the entry/exit ball mismatch error occurs, the big hit end display (for example, the display of FIG. 245(10b), FIG. 239(10a) to FIG. 12(a)) continues. It may be displayed by.

Further, one type of display of the plurality of types of display is a variable display of decorative symbols (hereinafter referred to as “design variable display (eg, display indicated by a downward arrow in FIG. 240(16a))”). When the big hit ends, if there is a hold, it is configured to display the symbol variation display, while the entrance/exit mismatch error is occurring, and when the big hit ends, the hold If there is, the symbol variation display is not displayed, the jackpot end display is displayed when the jackpot exit error is occurring and there is a hold when the jackpot ends May be

Further, the main control means may be means for determining the entry/exit ball mismatch error when the number of incoming balls is larger than the number of outgoing balls after each round in a big hit is completed.

Further, the main control means is a means configured to perform a control to start the symbol variation control when it is determined that the entry/exit ball mismatch error has not occurred after the jackpot is over, If the main control means determines that the entry/exit ball mismatch error has occurred even after the jackpot has ended, it determines that the entry/exit ball mismatch error has been resolved, and performs control to start the symbol variation control. It may be a means configured as described above.

Further, the discharge sensor is a unit composed of a plurality of sensors, and one sensor of the plurality of sensors is a first discharge sensor (for example, an out switch SO1), and One of the sensors is a second discharge sensor (for example, the out switch SO2), and the number of discharges is the number of game balls detected by the first discharge sensor and the second discharge sensor. It may be a number obtained by adding the number of detected game balls.
Further, the ball entrance sensor may be a sensor configured by one sensor.

One of the plurality of types of errors is an excess discharge error (for example, a special winning opening discharge excess error), and the discharge excess error means that the number of discharges is greater than the number of entered balls. The main control means is a means that may start the symbol variation control after the jackpot is over, even if the main control means determines that the discharge excess error has occurred. May be.

Further, the game table (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the embodiment of the present invention is a game table provided with an informing unit (for example, the decorative pattern display device 208, the speaker 120), and the informing unit is the first Error notification (for example, an error display E3 for notifying a special winning opening winning excess error shown in FIG. 245(b3), an error sound output from the speaker 120), and the first error notification Is a notification performed when a first error occurs, and is configured to start the first error notification when the first error occurs, the first error The game machine is characterized in that the first error notification ends when a specific time has elapsed since the occurrence of.

The notification means may be sound output means (for example, the speaker 120), and the first error notification may be a first error sound.

In addition, a music selection effect (for example, the music selection effect shown in FIG. 245(7b)) may be performed, and the music selection operation is configured to be performed during execution of the music selection effect. The musical composition selected may be output from the sound output unit after the operation is performed.

In addition, after the music selection operation is performed, when a specific time has elapsed after the first error occurs, the error sound is terminated and the selected music is output. It may be configured.

In addition, after the music selection operation is performed, the selected music is configured not to be output until a specific time elapses after the first error occurs. Good.

Moreover, after the music selection operation is performed, the selected music may be output even when the first error is occurring.

Further, while the first error is occurring, the selected music piece may be output at a volume lower than that before the error occurs.

Further, the music selection operation may be performed by the operation means (for example, the operation button (key), the left key, the right key, the up key, the down key shown in FIG. 245(b5)).

Further, in claim 1, "the first error notification ends when a specific time has elapsed since the first error occurred" means "the first error occurs. Then, after a specific time has elapsed, the sound output unit is in a state in which no sound is output”.

Further, the state in which the first error has occurred may continue even after the first error notification ends.

Further, the first error notification may be terminated when the first error is released.

Further, the notification means is a means that may perform a second error notification (for example, output of an error sound from the speaker 120 such as a magnetic (magnet) detection error and a magnetic field (radio wave) detection error). The error notification is a notification performed when a second error occurs, and when the second error occurs, the second error notification is configured to start, and The second error notification may be continued even when a specific time has elapsed since the second error occurred.

In addition, the second error is an error that is released when the power is turned on again, and when the second error is released, the second error notification ends. Good.

Further, an attacker (for example, a first attacker 802, a second attacker 804, a first variable winning port 234, a second variable winning port 235), and a main control means (for example, the main control unit 300), The main control means, the variation control of the symbol (hereinafter, "symbol variation control (for example, the symbol variation process shown in FIG. 216, or the special symbol related lottery process shown in FIG. 213(a) and the symbol variation shown in FIG. 216). Processing and special figure display confirmation weight processing shown in FIG. 217))), and the attacker is a ball entrance sensor (for example, a ball detection sensor 320, a count switch SW1, a count switch SW2). The attacker is provided, and the attacker is an attacker provided with a discharge sensor (for example, a ball detection sensor 320, out switches SO, SO1, SO2...) And the first error. Is a ball excess error (for example, a ball mismatch error, a special winning opening prize excess error), and the ball excess error is the number of game balls that have entered the attacker (hereinafter, "ball number"). Is larger than the number of game balls discharged from the attacker (hereinafter, referred to as “discharge number”), and the main control means ends each round in the big hit. After that, when the number of entered balls is larger than the number of discharged balls, it may be means for determining the over-entered ball error.

Further, the main control means is a means configured to perform control to start the symbol variation control when it is determined that the over-ball entry error has not occurred after the jackpot is over, If the control means determines that the over-ball entry error has occurred even after the jackpot is over, and if it is determined that the over-ball entry error has been resolved, the control for starting the symbol variation control is performed. It may be configured means.

Further, the discharge sensor is a unit composed of a plurality of sensors, and one sensor of the plurality of sensors is a first discharge sensor (for example, an out switch SO1), and One of the sensors is a second discharge sensor (for example, the out switch SO2), and the number of discharges is the number of game balls detected by the first discharge sensor and the second discharge sensor. It may be a number obtained by adding the number of detected game balls.
Further, the ball entrance sensor may be a sensor configured by one sensor.

Further, the main control means is a means capable of executing control for determining a plurality of types of errors, and one type of error among the plurality of types of errors is a discharge excess error, and the discharge excess error is Is an error indicating that the number of discharges is greater than the number of balls entered, and even when the main control means determines that the excess discharge error, after the jackpot is over, It may be a means for starting the symbol variation control.

Further, the game table may be a pachinko machine, and the game table may be a slot machine.
FIG. 268 is a front view of an enclosed pachinko machine to which the present invention can be applied.

In the enclosed pachinko machine 900 shown in FIG. 268, a predetermined number of game media (for example, game balls) are circulated inside the game table. That is, the game medium shot from the launching means 901 to the game area 902 is discharged from the game area 902 and can be supplied to the launching means 901 again. Further, a display means 903 for displaying information on the number of game media (prize balls, ball rental, total number of balls, etc.) and other information is arranged below the game area 902 on the front of the game table. The upper plate 126 and the lower plate 128 shown in 1 are not provided.

It should be noted that a mode in which the above-mentioned display means 903 is further provided on the upper plate 126 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 may be adopted, and this display means 903 is further provided with a touch panel. May be. That is, the touch panel provided on the display unit 903 can function as the operation unit. Then, the effect related to the operation of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) may be executed by one touch operation, continuous hit operation, or long press operation on the touch panel, or the long press automatic continuous hit function is in a valid state. In this case, a pseudo continuous hitting operation may be performed on the touch panel while the touch panel is continuously touched. Further, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function may not be set to an effective state. Further, in some of the effects, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be enabled. In other words, in the touch panel, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function may be activated, may not be activated, or may be configured to have a large number of effects to be activated, or may be configured to have few effects. .. In addition, when there are a plurality of effects by the continuous tapping operation on the touch panel, and when the touch panel is used, the long-press automatic continuous tapping function may not be in an effective state in many cases, or may be configured in a small number. ..

As described above, the pachinko machine 900 shown in FIG. 268 encloses a ball and circulates the enclosed ball in the pachinko machine for use. May be performed by credit.

Next, with reference to FIG. 269, a slot machine (revolving cylinder gaming machine) as a gaming table applicable to the present invention will be described. Here, FIG. 269 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 1000 applicable to the present invention as seen from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 269 includes a main body 1001 and a front door 1002 attached to the front of the main body 1001 and capable of opening and closing with respect to the main body 1001. Inside the center of the main body 1001 (not shown in FIG. 269), three reels (left reel 1010, middle reel 1011, right reel 1012) having a plurality of types of symbols arranged on the outer peripheral surface are stored, and It is configured to rotate inside. These reels 1010 to 1012 are rotationally driven by driving means such as a stepping motor.

In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 269, each symbol is printed on a belt-shaped member at an equal number of intervals, and the reels 1010 to 1012 are configured by attaching the belt-shaped member to a predetermined circular tubular frame material. .. The symbols on the reels 1010 to 1012 are displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 1013 by the player, so that a total of 9 symbols can be seen. Then, by rotating each of the reels 1010 to 1012, the combination of symbols seen by the player will change. That is, each reel 1010 to 1012 functions as a display unit that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display means, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be adopted in addition to the reel. Further, the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 269 has three reels inside the center of the slot machine 1000, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

A reel backlight (not shown) for illuminating each symbol displayed in the symbol display window 1013 is arranged on the back surface of each reel 1010 to 1012. It is desirable that the reel backlight be shielded for each symbol so that the individual symbols can be uniformly illuminated. An optical sensor (not shown) including a light projecting unit and a light receiving unit is provided near each of the reels 1010 to 1012 inside the slot machine 1000. The light projecting unit and the light receiving unit of the optical sensor are provided. A light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the two. The position in the rotation direction of the symbol on the reel is determined based on the detection result of this sensor, and the reels 1010 to 1012 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the pay line.

The pay line display lamp 1020 is a lamp that shows the pay line 1014 that is activated. The winning line to be activated is predetermined according to the number of medals bet as the game medium. There are five pay lines 1014. For example, when one bet on a medal is bet, the horizontal pay line on the middle row is valid, and when two bets are placed on a medal, an upper horizontal pay line and a lower horizontal pay line are added. When 3 coins are valid and 3 medals are bet, 5 lines to which the rightward winning line and the rightward winning line are added are valid as winning lines. The number of pay lines 1014 is not limited to five lines. For example, when one bet is bet, the middle horizontal pay line, the upper horizontal pay line, the lower horizontal pay line, and the right line. Five lines of the downward winning line and the rightward winning line may be valid as the winning line. Hereinafter, the winning line that becomes effective may be referred to as an effective line.

The notification lamp 1023 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus) has been internally won in an internal lottery described later, or that a bonus game is in progress. The game medal insertion possible lamp 1024 is a lamp for informing that the game medal can be inserted by the player. The re-play lamp 1022 informs the player that the current game is re-playable (there is no need to insert medals) when a re-play, which is one of the winning combinations in the previous game, is won. It is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 1028 is a production lamp.

The medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (called credits) stored electronically in the slot machine 1000. In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 269, each time the medal insertion button 1030 (bet button 1030) is pressed, one coin is inserted up to a maximum of three coins, and when the medal insertion button 1031 is pressed, two coins are inserted. When the button 1032 is pressed, three sheets are inserted. Hereinafter, the medal insertion button 1032 is also referred to as a MAX medal insertion button. The game medal insertion lamp 1029 lights up a number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a prescribed number of medals are inserted, a game start notification is given to inform that the game can be started. The lamp 1021 is turned on.

The medal insertion slot 1041 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals at the start of the game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically by using the medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032, and an actual medal can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 1041. Is. The stored number display 1025 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. The game information display device 126 is a display device for displaying various kinds of internal information (for example, the number of paid-out medals during a bonus game) by numerical values. The payout number display 1027 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning some winning combination. In the present embodiment, the stored number display 1025, the game information display 1026, and the payout number display 1027 are composed of 7-segment (SEG) displays.

The start lever 1035 is a lever type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 1010 to 1012. That is, when the desired number of medals is inserted into the medal insertion slot 1041 or the medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032 are operated and the start lever 1035 is operated, the reels 1010 to 1012 start to rotate. The operation on the start lever 1035 is called a game start operation. In this slot machine 1000, based on the operation of the start lever 1035, an internal lottery process for performing a lottery to determine which one of a plurality of types of winning combinations has been won is executed. It may be determined whether the player is in a relatively advantageous state or a relatively disadvantageous state.

The stop button unit 1036 is provided with stop buttons 1037 to 1039 as an example of operating means. The stop buttons 1037 to 1039 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 1010 to 1012 that have started to rotate by operating the start lever 1035, and are associated with the reels 1010 to 1012. Hereinafter, the operation on the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. Further, the reel that is the target of the first stop operation is called the first stop reel, the reel that is the target of the second stop operation is the second stop reel, and the reel that is the target of the third stop operation is the third stop reel. It should be noted that a light emitter may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 1037 to 1039, and when the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 can be operated, the light emitter can be turned on to notify the player.

The medal return button 1033 is a button for pressing the medal when the inserted medal is jammed to remove the medal. The settlement button 1034 is a button for settlement of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000 and bets that have been bet, and discharging from the medal payout outlet 1055. The door key hole 1040 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 1002 of the slot machine 1000 is inserted. The medal payout port 1055 is a payout port for paying out medals.

On the right side of the medal insertion button 1032, a chance button 1100 is provided as an example of an operating means. The chance button 1100 may be operated in relation to the operation of the reels 1010 to 1012 or may be operated in relation to the display on the liquid crystal display device 1057. Further, the chance button 1100 can take a plurality of states as in the pachinko machine 100 according to the above-described embodiment, and the state may change during the operation valid period of the chance button 1100. The chance button 1100 may be a button corresponding to the effect button 136 provided on the pachinko machine 100.

The information display button unit 1050 is provided with an information display button 1046. The information display button 1046 is, for example, an operation button for calling a user menu (for example, a menu for setting player's individual game history information), and is composed of a plurality of buttons. In the present embodiment, the information display button 1046 corresponds to the operating means. The information display button unit 1050 may be a button unit corresponding to the operation key unit 181.

Below the stop button unit 1036, a title panel 1062 for displaying a model name and attaching various certificate sheets is provided, and a title panel lamp 1064 is a lamp for lighting the title panel 1062. Below the title panel 1062, a medal payout opening 1055 and a medal receiving tray 1061 are provided.

In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 269, an operation key unit 1090 corresponding to the operation key unit 181 provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is provided between the MAX bet button 1032 and the medal slot 1034. It may be. This operation key unit 1090 also has a cross key, an OK button, and a cancel button. The sound hole 1081 is a hole for outputting the sound of the speaker provided inside the slot machine 1000 to the outside. The side lamps 1044 provided on the left and right parts of the front door 1002 are decorative lamps for raising the game. A rendering device 1060 is provided above the front door 1002, and a sound hole 1043 is provided above the rendering device 1060. The rendering device 1060 includes a shutter (shielding device) 1063 including two right shutters 1063a and a left shutter 1063b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown in the figure) disposed behind the shutter 1063. , A production image display device), and when the right shutter 1063a and the left shutter 1063b are opened horizontally outward in front of the liquid crystal display device 1057, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) is displayed on the front surface of the slot machine 1000 (game). It is a structure that appears on the person side).

It should be noted that the liquid crystal display device need not be a liquid crystal display device as long as it can display various effect images and various game information. For example, a multi-segment display (7-segment display), dot matrix display, organic EL display, plasma display. It may be a reel (drum) or a display device including a projector and a screen. In addition, the display screen has a rectangular shape, and the whole of the display screen is visible to the player. In the case of this embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but may be square. It is also possible to provide a decoration (not shown) on the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration so that the display screen looks odd. In this embodiment, the display screen is a flat surface, but it may be a curved surface. In the slot machine 1000 described above, as the operating means, bet buttons 1030 to 1032, the start lever 1035, the stop buttons 1037 to 1039, etc., as well as the operating key unit 1090 (an example of the first operating means and the third operating means) ) And effect button 1091 (an example of a second operation means). Further, in the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 345, the display panel 1070 displaying the title of the device and the like can project toward the front side. A light emitting diode (LED) is built in the display panel 1070. The display panel 1070 shown in FIG. 345 is in the initial position. When the display panel 1070 protrudes toward the front side, the display panel 1070 can be pushed in and functions as an operating unit (button) like the transmitting unit 191, and an example of the operating unit (for example, the first unit). It corresponds to one example of one operation means) and also corresponds to an example of movable means. Further, each button of the operation key unit 1090, the effect button 1091, and the display panel 1070 can vibrate. However, each button of the operation key unit 1090 may not vibrate.

The gaming table according to the present invention, as shown in FIG. 270(a), "inserts a bill into the bill insertion slot 2002, executes a lottery based on a bet 2004 and a start 2006 operation, and displays a lottery result on a lottery result display device 2008." However, at the time of winning, the bonus coin number is added to the remaining credit number, and when the cash-out 2009 is selected, the receipt issuing machine 2010 issues a receipt in which a code corresponding to the remaining credit number is issued. May be

Further, as shown in FIG. 2B, a mobile phone 3000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention, and electronic data for realizing the present invention as shown in FIG. May be applied to a portable game machine 4000 having a storage unit for storing the above, and a home video game machine 5000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data for implementing the present invention.

More specifically, the mobile phone 3000 shown in FIG. 1B has an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit for acquiring game-related data through a mobile phone line, and acquired game-related data (book). A storage unit that stores electronic data for implementing the invention) and a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

The portable game machine 4000 shown in FIG. 7C includes an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit for acquiring data regarding a game from a predetermined storage medium (DVD or the like), and data regarding the acquired game (the present invention). And a control unit for controlling the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit. The household video game machine 5000 shown in FIG. 6D has an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit that acquires game-related data from a predetermined storage medium (DVD, etc.), and acquired game-related data ( A storage unit that stores electronic data that realizes the present invention, and a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

Further, as shown in FIG. 7E, the present invention may be applied to a data server 6000 that stores electronic data that realizes the present invention. In some cases, electronic data for realizing the present invention may be downloaded from the data server 6000 to the home video game console 5000 shown in FIG.

The present invention can also be applied to execute a game in a game program that simulates the operation of an actual machine such as a pachinko machine for a home game machine. In that case, as a recording medium for recording the game program, a DVD-ROM, a CD-ROM, an FD (flexible disk), or any other recording medium can be used.

Further, although the present invention has been described by taking a pachinko machine and a slot machine as an example of a game table, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be applied to an arrangement ball game machine, a ball game machine, a smart ball, or the like.

The first sub-control unit 400 and the liquid crystal control unit 700 may be configured as separate substrates, or a VRAM 436 may be provided on the substrate (first sub-substrate 160) that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400. Alternatively, a configuration in which a VDP 434 or the like is mounted and the CPU 404 of one first sub-control unit 400 executes both effect control and liquid crystal control may be adopted.

In addition, the embodiment and various examples (modifications) described so far can be implemented by mutually combining or exchanging all or part of the respective configurations.

Further, the game table according to the present invention is not limited to a pachinko machine, and for example, a plurality of reels provided with a plurality of types of symbols, a start lever for instructing rotation of the reels, and each reel. A stop button for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, a lottery means for judging whether or not the internal winnings of a plurality of types of winning combinations are won by lottery, and a reel rotation based on the lottery result of the lottery means. Whether the reel stop control means for performing stop control regarding the stop of the reels and the symbol combination displayed by the reels stopped based on the lottery result of the lottery means are predetermined symbol combinations corresponding to the internally-winned winning combinations. A slot machine provided with a determination means for determining whether or not, and a payout control means for performing a game medium payout process for paying out a game medium corresponding to the predetermined winning mode when the symbol stop mode is the predetermined winning mode. It is also suitable for

Further, the game table according to the present invention can be applied to an enclosed game machine. Here, the "enclosed game machine" is a machine that circulates and uses the game balls enclosed in the game machine. That is, the pachinko machine may be an enclosed pachinko machine that encloses the balls and circulates the enclosed balls in the pachinko machine for use, and this enclosed pachinko machine uses the enclosed balls as a launch ball, The payout of the ball may be performed by credit.

Further, the main control unit, the first sub-control unit, and the second sub-control unit may be configured by one chip, or the main control unit and the first sub-control unit may be configured to enable bidirectional communication. Good. In addition, bidirectional communication is possible between the main control unit and the first sub control unit, while communication from the first sub control unit to the second sub control unit may be one-way communication.

Further, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention only list the most suitable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what has been done. In addition, among the plurality of configurations described in the embodiments, the content described in one configuration may be applied to another configuration to further widen the range of the game.

The gaming table according to the present invention can be applied to a gaming table typified by a spinning drum gaming machine (slot machine), a ball gaming machine (pachinko machine), and the like.

100 Pachinko machine 102 Outer frame 104 Inner frame 120 Speaker 156 Main control board 160 First sub-control board 170 Discharge control board 182 Power supply board 208 Decorative pattern display device 212 First special drawing display device 214 Second special drawing display device 230 First Special figure starting port 232 Second special figure starting port 300 Main control unit 304 CPU
306 ROM
308 RAM
600 payout control unit 708 RAM

Claims (18)

And means of directing
A gaming table provided with movable means,
The movable means is a means that may perform the first operation,
The first operation is an operation related to performance (hereinafter, referred to as "production operation"),
During the occurrence of the first error, the movable means may perform the effect operation,
The production means is a means for executing a selection production,
During execution of the selection effect, the effect is configured to be selected when a selection operation is performed,
Even if the first error during execution of the selected effect is generated, directed to the selection operation is performed are configured to be selected,
The movable means is a means provided on the game board,
A game table characterized by that. And means of directing
A gaming table provided with movable means,
The movable means is a means that may perform the first operation,
The first operation is an operation related to performance (hereinafter, referred to as "production operation"),
During the occurrence of the first error, the movable means may perform the effect operation,
The production means is a means for executing a selection production,
During execution of the selection effect, the effect is configured to be selected when a selection operation is performed,
Even if the first error occurs during execution of the selection effect, the effect is configured to be selected when the selection operation is performed,
If a second error occurs during execution of the selection effect, the effect cannot be selected even if the selection operation is performed,
The second error is an error different from the first error,
A game table characterized by that. And means of directing
A gaming table provided with movable means,
The movable means is a means that may perform the first operation,
The first operation is an operation related to performance (hereinafter, referred to as "production operation"),
During the occurrence of the first error, the movable means may perform the effect operation,
The production means is a means for executing a selection production,
During execution of the selection effect, the effect is configured to be selected when a selection operation is performed,
Even if the first error occurs during execution of the selection effect, the effect is configured to be selected when the selection operation is performed,
If a second error occurs during execution of the selection effect, the effect cannot be selected even if the selection operation is performed,
The second error is an error different from the first error,
When the second error occurs during execution of the selection effect, the selection effect is interrupted,
A game table characterized by that. And means of directing
A gaming table provided with movable means,
The movable means is a means that may perform the first operation,
The first operation is an operation related to performance (hereinafter, referred to as "production operation"),
During the occurrence of the first error, the movable means may perform the effect operation,
The production means is a means for executing a selection production,
During execution of the selection effect, the effect is configured to be selected when a selection operation is performed,
Even if the first error occurs during execution of the selection effect, the effect is configured to be selected when the selection operation is performed,
Equipped with operating means,
In a period in which the operation of the operation means is valid, when the operation of the operation means is performed, the effect operation by the movable means may be performed,
Even during the occurrence of the first error, in the period during which the operation of the operation means is valid, the effect operation by the movable means may be performed when the operation means is operated.
A game table characterized by that. And means of directing
A gaming table provided with movable means,
The movable means is a means that may perform the first operation,
The first operation is an operation related to performance (hereinafter, referred to as "production operation"),
During the occurrence of the first error, the movable means may perform the effect operation,
The production means is a means for executing a selection production,
During execution of the selection effect, the effect is configured to be selected when a selection operation is performed,
Even if the first error occurs during execution of the selection effect, the effect is configured to be selected when the selection operation is performed,
The movable means is a means that may perform a second operation,
The second operation is an operation performed when the power is turned on,
Even if the first error occurs when the second operation is performed, the second operation is continued,
A game table characterized by that. And means of directing
A gaming table provided with movable means,
The movable means is a means that may perform the first operation,
The first operation is an operation related to performance (hereinafter, referred to as "production operation"),
During the occurrence of the first error, the movable means may perform the effect operation,
The production means is a means for executing a selection production,
During execution of the selection effect, the effect is configured to be selected when a selection operation is performed,
Even if the first error occurs during execution of the selection effect, the effect is configured to be selected when the selection operation is performed,
The movable means is a means that may perform a third operation,
The third operation is an operation performed when it is determined that the movable means is not in the initial position,
Even if the first error occurs when the third operation is performed, the third operation is continued.
A game table characterized by that. And means of directing
A gaming table provided with movable means,
The movable means is a means that may perform the first operation,
The first operation is an operation related to performance (hereinafter, referred to as "production operation"),
During the occurrence of the first error, the movable means may perform the effect operation,
The production means is a means for executing a selection production,
During execution of the selection effect, the effect is configured to be selected when a selection operation is performed,
Even if the first error occurs during execution of the selection effect, the effect is configured to be selected when the selection operation is performed,
Even if a third error occurs during the execution of the selection effect, the effect is configured to be selected when the selection operation is performed,
The third error is an error indicating that the movable means is abnormal,
A game table characterized by that. The gaming table according to any one of claims 1 to 7,
Equipped with an attacker,
The first error is an error related to the attacker,
A game table characterized by that. The gaming table according to claim 8 ,
The attacker is an attacker provided with a ball entrance sensor,
The ball entrance sensor is a sensor that can output a ball entry signal in accordance with the entry of a game ball,
The attacker is an attacker provided with a discharge sensor,
The discharge sensor is a sensor capable of outputting a discharge signal according to the discharge of the game ball,
The first error is an error indicating that the number of game balls entered into the attacker does not match the number of game balls discharged from the attacker,
A game table characterized by that. The gaming table according to any one of claims 1 to 9,
When the first error occurs during execution of the selection effect, the effect selected by the selection operation may be executed by the effect means,
A game table characterized by that. The gaming table according to any one of claims 1 to 9 ,
During the occurrence of the first error , the effect selected by the selecting operation is not executed by the effecting means,
A game table characterized by that. The gaming table according to any one of claims 1 to 11,
Equipped with a door,
The movable means is a means provided on the door body,
A game table characterized by that. The gaming table according to any one of claims 1 to 12,
During the execution of the big hit, the selection effect may be performed as a big hit effect,
A game table characterized by that. The gaming table according to any one of claims 1 to 13,
The rendering means is sound output means,
A game table characterized by that. The gaming table according to any one of claims 1 to 14,
When the first error occurs, a first error sound for informing that the first error has occurred is configured to be output.
A game table characterized by that. The gaming table according to any one of claims 1 to 15,
The selection effect is a sound selection effect,
After the selection operation is performed, the sound selected by the selection operation may be output.
A game table characterized by that. A game machine according to any one of claims 1 to 16,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
A game table characterized by that. The gaming table according to any one of claims 1 to 16 ,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game table characterized by that.